Large Instructions 9/12/06 1:42 PM Page 1

This file was created for easy navigation of the Dwyer Instruments 2007 catalog using bookmarks and direct links.

For easiest navigation, use the “Bookmark” option on this pdf file.

• Click the “Bookmark” tab on the left to view all sections and models within those sections.

• For easiest navigation, open each main section using the arrow pointer (Pressure, Flow, etc.), then open
the type of product you are interested in (Gages, Manometers).

• Next, position your mouse over the product you want and click the name. You will go directly to that
page.

Keep the bookmarks open for easiest navigation within the document.

Specific product links have been created on the “Index” pages, “Table of Contents” pages and the “New
Product” pages only. With the hand tool, simply roll over any page number you want and click.

Direct web links have also been applied to websites on the front cover and the “How to Order” page. With your
web browser open, open the “Bookmark” tab, then go to either page. Simply click on the website you wish to
visit.
INDEX 8/2/06 2:38 PM Page 1

Product Section Page No. Product Section Page No.

16A-1996 2-5OOO-29OO
16A Temperature 297 2-5000 Pressure 9-10
16B Temperature 295 2V Valves 439
16C Temperature 296 200.5 Pressure 24
16L Temperature 298 200, 300 Valves 429-431
100 Flow 185-186 201 Level 263
100AV Air Velocity 221 201, 202.5, 209, 215 Pressure 24
100.5 Pressure 23 220, 230 Valves 403
101 Pressure 23 244, 246 Pressure 24
102 Level 261 250-AF Pressure 41
102.5, 109, 115 Pressure 23 265 Valves 446
104, 104-6, -8, -10 Pressure 23 2000 Pressure 5-6
123 Level 261 2000VA Valves 399-403
160 Air Velocity 223 2500 Temperature 305
165 Valves 445 2600 Temperature 306
160E, 160S, 166T Air Velocity 224 2700 Valves 443
170, 171 Pressure 23 2800 Valves 443
1000 Test Equipment 389 2900 Valves 444
1000E Pressure 67
1000W Pressure 67 3ABV-3OOOWA
1090 Data Acquis./Record. 351 3ABV Valves 424
1200 Data Acquis./Record. 350 3BV3 Valves 423
1200A, B Test Equipment 394 3PBV Valves 425
1205A-5 Test Equipment 396 32A Temperature 293
1207 Test Equipment 396 32B Temperature 292
1211 Pressure 27 32DZ Temperature 294
1212 Pressure 27 36R Valves 404
1213 Pressure 28 300, 306, 308, 310 Pressure 24
1221, 1222, 1223 Pressure 29-30 300, 350, 360 Flow 185-186
1227, 1227M Pressure 30 300F, 360F Flow 185-186
1230, 1235 Pressure 26 391 Level 263
1290, 1490 Temperature 310 3000MR/3000MRS Pressure 17
1430 Pressure 28 3000SGT Pressure 18
1620 Pressure 45 3000WA Valves 399-403
1630 Pressure 46
1638 Pressure 42, 46
1640 Pressure 47 4B-471
1800 Pressure 48 4B Temperature 303
1823 Pressure 42, 48 4C Temperature 304
1900 Pressure 49 40VF Valves 453
1910 Pressure 42, 49 400 Air Velocity 220
1950, 1950G Pressure 50 400, 400F Flow 185-186
1996 Pressure 56 421, 422, 424 Pressure 25
460 Air Velocity 243
471 Air Velocity 234

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 480
INDEX 8/2/06 2:38 PM Page 2

Product Section Page No. Product Section Page No.

472,472 Kit-43OOO 634ES-67OOO

472, 472 Kit Temperature 337 634ES Pressure 129
475 Pressure 34 636 Pressure 130
475-AV Kit Air Velocity 233 636D Pressure 132
476A-0 Pressure 32 637 Pressure 131
477 Pressure 35 637S Pressure 131
477-AV Kit Air Velocity 233 638 Pressure 127
477A Pressure 36 641 Air Velocity 237
478A Pressure 33 641B Air Velocity 239
480 Air Velocity 243 641RM Air Velocity 238
485 Humidity 365 642 Pressure 128
490 Pressure 38 645 Pressure 135
4000 Pressure 7-8 646 Pressure 147
4130, 4151 Temperature 311 647 Pressure 135
4380 Data Acquis./Record. 353 650 Temperature 308
43000 Pressure 19 651 Temperature 308
652-0 Temperature 309
655 Pressure 134
5OO-5OOO 657-1 Humidity 367
500 Flow 187 657C-1 Humidity 367
500 Level 262 659 Temperature 309
530 Flow 206 660 Air Velocity 244
550 Flow 187 668 Pressure 147
5000 Temperature 319 673 Pressure 127
674 Pressure 148
676 Pressure 148
6O3A-631B 677 Pressure 146
603A Pressure 141 679 Pressure 129
604A Pressure 142 681 Pressure 130
604D Pressure 142 682 Pressure 128
605 Pressure 140 6000 Temperature 320
607 Pressure 146 61000 Pressure 115
608 Pressure 149 62000MU Pressure 74
616 Pressure 143 63000M Pressure 73
616C Pressure 143 64000 Pressure 73
616D Pressure 143 66000 Pressure 115
616W Pressure 144 67000 Pressure 116
616WL Pressure 144
619 Pressure 124
620 Pressure 145 7R-762
621 Pressure 145 7R Valves 441
626 Pressure 125-126 75 Level 262
628 Pressure 125-126 700 Flow 185-186
629 Pressure 133 761 Pressure 107
631B Pressure 136 762 Pressure 108

481 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

INDEX 8/2/06 2:38 PM Page 3

Product Section Page No. Product Section Page No.

763-7314D A-7OO,A-7O1-AVU
763 Pressure 105 A-700, A-701 Test Equipment 390
764 Pressure 106 A-705-20 Process Ind./Meters
7000 Pressure 109-114 Test Equipment 356, 390
7000 Temperature 321 A-900, A-901 Temperature 307
7000B Pressure 110 A-1000 Miscellaneous 458-462
A-2000 Miscellaneous 463-466
7100 Pressure 110
AAG Pressure 87
7112 Pressure 110, 112
ABV Valves 421
7112B Pressure 111
AD Temperature 331
7114A Pressure 113 AFG Air Velocity 225
7116 Pressure 123 AFH Air Velocity 242
7116B Pressure 123 AFR Valves 440
7212 Pressure 112 AFS Flow 212
7214A Pressure 113 AGD Pressure 87
7214D Pressure 114 AGL Pressure 87
7312 Pressure 112 AN14 Test Equipment 389
7314A Pressure 113 AP Pressure 57
7314D Pressure 114 APS/AVS Pressure 65
ASG Test Equipment 379
AVG Temperature 313
8B-86OO AVU Air Velocity 240
8B Temperature 299
8C Temperature 300 B-19O-BV3HL-3A
8000 Temperature 322
B-190 Level 264
8500 Temperature 301
BB Pressure 53
8600 Temperature 302
BDL Data Acquis./Record. 344
BFV Valves 427
92O-9OOO BHC Valves 437
BPI Process Ind./Meters 363
920 Test Equipment 393
BT Temperature 336
9000 Temperature 323
BTG Pressure 100
Butterfly Valves 429-431
BV2 Valves 416
Accessories(A)-A-7OO
BV2M Valves 413
Accessories (A) Miscellaneous 454-457
BV2MB Valves 413
A1B, A1S Pressure 63-64
BV2B, C, F, J, L Valves 417-418
A1N Pressure 66
BV3 Valves 419-420
A1PS/A1VS Pressure 65
BV3HL Valves 414
A2 Pressure 56
BV3HL-3A Valves 414
A4 Pressure 53
A3000 Pressure 15-16
A-396A Test Equipment 372 CA1O-CAL3O
A-464, A-465 Pressure 20 CA10 Test Equipment 377
A-699 Test Equipment 389 CA20 Test Equipment 377
A-700 Pressure 154 CAL30 Test Equipment 378
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 482
INDEX 8/2/06 2:38 PM Page 4

Product Section Page No. Product Section Page No.

Capsuhelic® Gage-CT6O/7O DPL11O-Durablock® Manometer

Capsuhelic® Gage Pressure 7-8 DPL110 Level 266
Capsu-Photohelic® Gage Pressure 19 DR Flow 171
CC-10K Temperature 340 DR4 Flow 172
CD Pressure 62 DS Air Velocity 229-230
CFS Level 259 DSGT Pressure 122
CLD20 Test Equipment 395 DT Valves 451
CLS1 Level 266 DT Test Equipment 384
CLS2 Level 271 DTS Temperature 290
CLT Level 273 Duotect® Switch Pressure 54, 66
CONG Pressure 103 Durablock® Gage Air Velocity 221
CRF Level 272 Durablock® Gage Pressure 23-24
CS Pressure 62 Durablock® Manometer Pressure 25
CS Test Equipment 387
CT40/50 Test Equipment 386 EC-EVA
CT60/70 Test Equipment 386 EC Temperature 328
EC Test Equipment 382
EP1000 Valves 441
D-DPGW EPT-1 Valves 442
D Temperature 324 ES Pressure 61
DA/DS Pressure 58-60 EVA Valves 407
DA-7035N Temperature 313
DBLM Level 267 F195-FSW
DCD Valves 437 F195 Flow 177
DCG Pressure 121 F222, F451 Flow 177
DCT500 Pressure 152 F7 Level 253-254
DCT500DC Pressure 153 F7-MLK Level 258
DCT1000 Pressure 150 F7-MLK2 Level 258
DCT1000DC Pressure 151 F7-MM Level 255
DCV Valves 432-434 F7-MQ Level 256
DH Pressure 11-12 F7-MS Level 257
DHII Pressure 13 FBG Pressure 97
Digihelic® Controller Pressure 11-13 FC-1000 Test Equipment 388
DL001 Data Acquis./Record. 346 FGA Pressure 88
DL-A Data Acquis./Record. 348 FGS Pressure 88
DL6 Data Acquis./Record. 346 Flex-Tube® Manometer Pressure 26, 29-30
DL7 Data Acquis./Record. 347 Flotect® Switch Flow 199-204, 207
DL8 Data Acquis./Record. 347 Flotect® Switch Level 249-252
DM-2000 Pressure 139 FLST Air Velocity 227-228
DMF Flow 182 FM Temperature 312
DP Pressure 55 FR Miscellaneous 467-468
DPG-000 Pressure 119 FRL Miscellaneous 469-470
DPG-100 Pressure 120 FS Flow 196
DPGA Pressure 117 FS-2 Flow 205
DPGW Pressure 118 FSW Level 259

483 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

INDEX 8/2/06 2:38 PM Page 5

Product Section Page No. Product Section Page No.

G9-GVS L4-LTTJ
G9 Flow 211 L4 Level 249
GFC Flow 184 L6 Level 250
GFM Flow 183 L8 Level 251
GFT Flow 193 L10 Level 252
GG Pressure 154 LC21 Test Equipment 378
GS Level 264 LCI132 Process Ind./Meters 358
GT Temperature 335 LCI108/108J Process Ind./Meters 359
GTG Pressure 98 LCI208 Process Ind./Meters 359
GV1 Valves 405 LCI308/408 Process Ind./Meters 360
GV2/GV3 Valves 406 LCI508/608 Process Ind./Meters 361
GVS Flow 211 LCR10 Data Acquis./Record. 349
LCR20 Data Acquis./Record. 349
LCT016 Temperature 342
H2-HU LCT116 Temperature 342
H2 Pressure 66 LEVG Pressure 101
H3 Pressure 54 Lin-E-Aire® Actuator Valves 403
HF Flow 178 LLC Level 265
HFO Flow 195 Loop Alarms™ III Switch Data Acquis./Record. 351
HFT Flow 194 Loop Alarms™ III Switch Temperature 310
HGV Valves 408 LPG1 Pressure 95
Hi-Flow™ Valve Valves 399-403 LPG2 Pressure 95
HHP Test Equipment 373 LPI Process Ind./Meters 363
HM28 Pressure 37 LTT Test Equipment 388
HP Test Equipment 372 LTTJ Test Equipment 387
HSG Pressure 101
HS Humidity 369
HT Humidity 368 M-MINEG
HU Humidity 368 M Test Equipment 383
M1430 Pressure 28
M-51 Temperature 312
I-1-Iso Verter® Module Magnehelic® Gage Pressure 5-6, 140
I-1 Temperature 332 MagneSense® Transmitter Pressure 137-138
I-2 Temperature 333 Mark 1, 3, 4 Valves 448-450
I-4 Temperature 333 Mark II Air Velocity 222
IF Flow 176 Mark II Pressure 31
IP Valves 442 Mark II WSI Air Velocity 244
IRM20 Temperature 339 MC Test Equipment 376
Iso Verter® Module Data Acquis./Record. 352 MC6 Test Equipment 375
MDA Pressure 51
MDL Data Acquis./Record. 348
KS-KS-O4/O5 MDS Pressure 51
KS Temperature 341 MHS Pressure 52
KS-04/05 Temperature 341 Microtector® Gage Pressure 28
MINEG Pressure 100

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 484
INDEX 8/2/06 2:39 PM Page 6

Product Section Page No. Product Section Page No.

Minihelic® Gage-MVT PD-PV

Minihelic Gage
®
Pressure 9-10, 142 PD Data Acquis./Record. 345
Mini-Master® Flowmeter Flow 159-160 PE Air Velocity 231-232
Mini-Photohelic® Gage Pressure 14 PF Air Velocity 241
MM Flow 159-160 PFS Air Velocity 241
MM10 Test Equipment 379 PG Pressure 55
MP Pressure 14 PHO-1 Test Equipment 380
MPC Level 277 Photohelic® Gage Pressure 15-18
MPC Jr. Level 278 PHP Test Equipment 373
MPR Valves 440 PIR1 Temperature 339
MS Pressure 137-138 Plast-A-Vane® Valve Valves 429-430
MSP Data Acquis./Record. 354 PLS Level 268
MTF Flow 173-174 PLT Level 272
MTL10 Data Acquis./Record. 344 PM706 Process Ind./Meters 362
MTL5041/5045 Test Equipment 391 PP45 Process Ind./Meters 364
MTL7706/7787 Test Equipment 392 PPG Pressure 96
Muffler Accessory Valves 435 PPMG Pressure 104
MV Valves 415 PQ Pressure 57
MVR Level 282 PS Pressure 154
MVS Pressure 52 PS Level 267
MVT Air Velocity 236 PS Test Equipment 384
PV Valves 438

NV-NVII
NV Valves 426 Quick-View® Indicator-QV
NVII Valves 426 Quick-View® Indicator Valves 446
QV Valves 447

OLS-OP
OLS Level 260 Rate-Master® Flowmeter-RTD
OP Flow 179-180 Rate-Master® Flowmeter Flow 161-162, 181
RDCV Valves 432-434
RH Humidity 366
P-PCP RLD1 Test Equipment 395
P Temperature 325 RM Flow 161-162
P1 Flow 209 RMV Flow 181
P2 Flow 209 RMV II Flow 181
P3 Flow 210 RRT Temperature 311
P4 Flow 210 RSF Flow 175
P5 Flow 208 RSV Valves 435
P8 Flow 208 RTD Temperature 335
PBLT Level 276
PBLT2 Level 276
PBV Valves 422
PCP Level 279

485 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

INDEX 8/2/06 2:39 PM Page 7

Product Section Page No. Product Section Page No.

S-SSR-15 SSS-1OOO-SVP
S Temperature 332 SSS-1000 Air Velocity 226
S-2 Temperature 334 ST Temperature 336
S-4 Temperature 334 SV3 Valves 438, 453
SA1100 Pressure 68 SVE Valves 436
SAE Valves 428 SVP Valves 439
SAEG Pressure 99
Safe-T-Ohm® Tester Test Equipment 383
SAV-BT Valves 409 T-TVA
SAV-SF Valves 412 T Temperature 326
SAV-SSC Valves 411 TAC Test Equipment 380
SAV-ST Valves 410 TC10 Temperature 338
SBLT2 Level 275 TC20 Temperature 338
SC448/SCL448 Data Acquis./Record. 350 TCS Temperature 285
SC1090/SCL1090 Data Acquis./Record. 351 TDC Flow 214
SC1290, SC1490 Temperature 310 TDS Flow 213
SC4130, SC4151, SC4380 Data Acquis./Record. 352 TDS Test Equipment 382
SCC Data Acquis./Record. 355 TEFG Pressure 96
SCU Data Acquis./Record. 353 TF Flow 190
SF Flow 189 TFS Flow 212
SF2 Flow 189 TH Humidity 370
SFI-100T Flow 188 THC Humidity 370
SFI-800 Flow 191-192 THC Temperature 291
SGB Pressure 75-76 TI Temperature 291
SGC Pressure 102 TLI Level 280
SGD Pressure 71 TM2 Flow 193
SGF Pressure 80 TR-7 Test Equipment 383
SGI Pressure 77 TS Temperature 287
SGJ Pressure 86 TS2 Temperature 286
SGK Pressure 78 TSP Flow 213
SGL Pressure 69 TSS Temperature 288
SGO Pressure 83 TSX Temperature 289
SGP Pressure 84 TTM Flow 190
SGR Pressure 85 TVA Flow 169
SGS Pressure 70
SGT Pressure 72 UGA-UNOG
SGX Pressure 79 UGA Pressure 89
SI Process Ind./Meters 357 UGB Pressure 90
Slack Tube® Manometer Pressure 27 UGC Pressure 91
Spirahelic® Gage Pressure 109-114, 123 UGD Pressure 92
SPT Level 275 UGE Pressure 93
SSD Pressure 81 UGF Pressure 94
SSL Pressure 82 Ultra-Mag™ Level 269-270
SSR Test Equipment 385 Ultra-View™ Flowmeter Flow 166-167
SSR-15 Test Equipment 385 UNOG Pressure 102

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 486
INDEX 8/2/06 2:39 PM Page 8

Product Section Page No.

UPT1OOO-UV
UPT1000 Test Equipment 374
UT Level 274
UV Flow 166-167

V4-VT-2OO
V4 Flow 199-200
V6 Flow 201-202
V8 Flow 204
V10 Flow 203
V11 Flow 203
V12 Flow 207
VA Flow 168-169
VA-K Flow 170
Valve Mounting Kits Valves 450
Vaneometer™ Anemometer Air Velocity 243
VASP Flow 196
VAT Flow 176
VFA, VFB Flow 163-164
VFC, VFCII Flow 165
VFF Flow 172
VG Pressure 116
VIP Valves 452
Visi-Float Flowmeter
®
Flow 163-165,
172, 196
VPS Valves 452
VR Level 281
VT120 Air Velocity 235
VT140 Air Velocity 235
VT-200 Air Velocity 236

W-WT-1O
W Temperature 327
WD Level 280
Wind Meter Air Velocity 244
WL Data Acquis./Record. 345
WPH1 Test Equipment 381
WPH2 Test Equipment 381
WSI Air Velocity 244
WT-10 Temperature 340

XTBX
XTBX Pressure 61

487 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

2007intl ofc-obc 7/19/06 10:59 AM Page 1

DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. - 2007 Controls & Gauges Catalogue

Printed in U.S.A. 09/06 - INTL

IV 7/26/06 10:11 AM Page 1

Series DHII
Digihelic® II Differential Pressure Series UGC
Controller Utility Gage
NEMA 4 (IP66) Housing with Large, 2˝ Dial with Dual Scales- pg 91
Bright LCD - pg 13

Series 476A-0
Digital Manometer Series UGD
Single Pressure Measurement, Utility Gage
Electronic Zeroing, ±1.5% Accuracy 3.5˝ Dial with Dual Scales - pg 92
- pg 32

Series 478A
Series UGE
Digital Differential Manometer
Utility Gages
Selectable Engineering Units, Min/Max,
1.5˝ or 2˝ Dials with Back Connection
Backlight, ±1.5% Accuracy - pg 33
- pg 93

Series MHS
Miniature High Sensitivity Pressure Series UGF
Switch Utility Gages
SPDT N/O or N/C Switch, Adjustable 2.5˝ Dial with Back Connection
Set Points from 3 in. H2O to 60 PSI - pg 94
- pg 52

Series SGD
2.5˝ Stainless Steel Industrial
Series LPG1
Pressure Gages
Low Pressure Gage
1.6% Full Scale Accuracy, 316 SS
1.5% Accuracy in 2.5˝ Chrome Case
Wetted Parts - pg 71
- pg 95

Series SGT
2.5˝ Stainless Steel Industrial
Pressure Gages Series LPG2
1.6% Full Scale Accuracy, Brass Wetted Low Pressure Gage
Parts - pg 72 1.5% Accuracy, 2.5˝ Chrome Case with
Back Connection - pg 95

Series TEFG
Series AAG Molded PVDF Gages
Agricultural Ammonia Gages One Piece Mold With All PVDF Body and
Ideal for Use on Ammonia Equipment Diaphragm - pg 96
- pg 87

Series PPG
Series UGB Molded Polypropylene Gages
4˝ Plastic Utility Gage One Piece Mold with Polypropylene
Ideal for HVAC Applications - pg 90 Body and Fluoroelastomer Diaphragm
- pg 96
V 7/26/06 10:43 AM Page 1

Series FBG Series CONG

Forged Brass Gages Contractor Gage
Heavy Duty Case Perfect for Hydraulic Large Easy-to-Read Dial - pg 103
Systems - pg 97

Series GTG Series PPMG

Gas Test Gages Process Panel Mount Gages
Used to Check Gas Lines for Leaks 4.5˝ Safety Case with Removable
- pg 98 Cover - pg 104

Series SAEG Series 763

Hydraulic SAE Gage Field-Fillable Process Gage
7/16˝ SAE Process Connection with 0.5% Accuracy, Internal Over and
O-ring and Lock Nut- pg 99 Under Load Protection- pg 105

Series BTG Series 764

Bulk Tanker Gage Glycerin-Filled Process Gage
Monitor Tank Unloading Discharge 0.5% Accuracy, Internal Over and
Pressure - pg 100 Under Load Protection- pg 106

Series MINEG Series DPGA

Mining Gage Digital Pressure Gage
Three Color Scale, Quick-Connect Mining Economic Gage for Air & Compatible
Industry Connection - pg 100 Gases - pg 117

Series DPGW
Series HSG
Digital Pressure Gage
Hose Test Gages
Economic Gage for Compatible
For Checking Plumbing Water Pressure
Liquids & Gases - pg 118
- pg 101

Series 631B
Series LEVG
Wet/Wet Differential Pressure
Level Mount Gage
Transmitter
Reads in PSI & Feet of Water Column
Ranges Down to 0.5˝ w.c. with 500 psi
- pg 101
Static Pressure Rating - pg 136

Series UNOG Series MS

“Use No Oil” Gages Magnesense® Differential Pressure
For Pressure Indication on Gas Transmitter
Cylinders - pg 102 Monitors Pressure & Air Velocity
- pg 137-138
VI 7/26/06 10:55 AM Page 1

Series DM-2000 Series AVU

Differential Pressure Transmitter Air Velocity Transmitter
Same Size as Standard Magnehelic® Ideal for Building Automation Systems
Differential Pressure Gage - pg 139 - pg 240

Series 608 Series CLS2

Differential Pressure Transmitter Capacitive Level Switch
Ranges Down to 0.1˝ w.c., Intrinsically Powder, Bulk, or Liquids, Auto-Calibration
Safe, NEMA 4X - pg 149 - pg 271

Series OP Series SBLT2

Orifice Plate Flow Meter Submersible Level Transmitter
Stainless Steel for Use with Liquids and Perfect for Ground Water and Wells,
Gases - pg 179-180 Lightning Protected - pg 275

Model FS-2 Series PBLT2

Vane Flow Switch Submersible Level Transmitter
Low Cost, Field Adjustable Set Point Perfect for Sludge and Slurries,
- pg 205 Lightning Protected - pg 276

Series AFG Series MPC Jr.

Averaging Flow Grid Pump Controller
Cost Effective Air Flow Station for One or Two Pump Control with Built-in Al-
Ducts up to 60˝ - pg 225 ternation - pg 278

Series SSS-1000 Series WD

Lightweight Averaging Flow Sensor Water Detector and Sensor Tape
Ideal for Sensing Fan Flow Rates Detects Conductive Liquids
- pg 226 - pg 280

Series 32B
Series FLST 1/32 DIN Temperature/Process
Duct Mounted Airflow Controller
Measurement Station Universal Input, Dual Temperature
Rectangular, Oval or Circular Output Control, RS-485
Configurations - pg 227-228 Communication - pg 292

Series 16B
Series PE 1/16 DIN Temperature/Process
Orifice Plate Flow Meter Controller
PVC Orifice Plate for Use with Gases Dual Control Output, RS-485
- pg 231-232 Communication, Universal Inputs
- pg 295
VII 7/26/06 11:02 AM Page 1

Series 16C Series I-1

1/16 DIN Temperature Controller Immersion Temperature Probes
PID Control, Auto-Tuning, Dual Display, RTD & Thermistor, 304 SS Probe -
RS-485 Communication - pg 296 pg 332

Series 8B Series I-2

1/8 DIN Temperature/Process Immersion Sensor Assemblies
Controller Plastic Enclosure, RTD Sensor - pg 333
Vertical Mount, Dual Control Output,
RS-485 Communication - pg 299

Series I-4
Weatherproof Immersion
Series 8C Assemblies
1/8 DIN Temperature Controller NEMA 4 (IP-65), RTD Sensor - pg 333
ON/OFF or PID Control, Auto-Tuning,
RS 485 Communication - pg 300

Series S-2
Surface Temperature Assembly
Series 4B Polycarbonate Enclosure, Brass
1/4 DIN Temperature/Process Sensor - pg 334
Controller
Dual Control Output, RS 485
Communication, Auto-Tuning - pg 303
Series S-4
Weatherproof Surface Temperature
Assembly
NEMA 4 (IP-65), Steel Enclosure -
Series 4C pg 334
1/4 DIN Temperature Controller
PID Control, Auto-Tuning, Large Dual
Display, RS 485 Communication -
pg 304 Series CC-10K
Colotemp Crayon Kit
Indicator Crayons, Change Color with
Different Temperature - pg 340

Series AVG
Averaging Temperature Sensor
Series KS
Bendable Aluminum Casing, RTD or
Irreversible Temperature Labels
Thermistor - pg 313
Indicators and Strips, Displays both °F
and °C - pg 341

Series S
Surface Mount Temperature Series KS-04/05
Sensor Reversible Temperature Strips
RTD and Thermistor, 304 SS Probe, Indicators and Strips, Displays both °F
Waterproof - pg 332 and °C - pg 341
VIII 7/26/06 11:07 AM Page 1

Series WL Series GV2 & GV3

Waterproof Logger Globe Control Valves
Single Channel, Temperature, User Low Cost, 1˝ to 2-1/2˝ Sizes, 2-Way or
Configurable - pg 345 3-Way - pg 406

Series DL-A Series EVA

Logger Alarm Module Electric Actuators
Visual and Audible Alarm, Manual Easily Installs Onto a Series GV Valve -
Reset - pg 348 pg 407

Series MDL Series HGV

Mini Data Logger Hand Operated Globe Valve
Single Channel, Temperature - pg 348 Low Cost, High Pressure Rating -
pg 408

Series PBV
Series LPI Automated Ball Valves –
Loop Powered Indicators Two-Way Plastic
Square Root Function and User Defined Electric and Pneumatic Actuators -
Curves; 4-Digit LED - pg 363 pg 422

Series BPI Series 3BV3

Battery Powered Temperature Automated Ball Valves -
Indicator Three-Way SS NPT
RTD or T/C Input, 4-Digit Display, Electric and Pneumatic Actuators
Selectable °F or °C - pg 363 - pg 423

Series 3ABV
Series RH Automated Ball Valves -
Humidity/Temperature Transmitter Three-Way Brass NPT
Calibration-Free, 4-20 mA Output, 2% Electric and Pneumatic Actuators -
Accuracy, Optional Display - pg 366 pg 424

Series 3PBV
Model PH0-1 Automated Ball Valves –
pH/ORP/Temperature Meter Three-Way Plastic
0 to 14 pH, Automatic Temperature Electric and Pneumatic Actuators -
Compensation, Data Logging - pg 380 pg 425

Series NVII
Series GV1
Needle Valve
Globe Control Valves
Economical, Pressure up to 2000 psi,
Low Cost, 1˝ to 2˝ Sizes, 2-Way or 3-
Blowout-Proof Stem - pg 426
Way - pg 405
IX 7/26/06 11:14 AM Page 1

Series 2700
Series DCV/RDCV Current to Pressure Transducer
Diaphragm Valves NEMA 4X Enclosure, Compact Size,
- pg 432-434 Reliable - pg 443

Series RSV Series 2800

Remote Solenoid Valve Current to Pressure Transducer
For Use with RDCV Remote Valves - Vibration Resistant, NEMA 4X Enclosure
pg 435 - pg 443

Series 2900
Current to Pressure Transducer
Muffler Accessory
Intrinsically Safe, Explosion-Proof, NEMA
For DCV Pulse Valve Exhaust - pg 435
4X Enclosure - pg 444

Series SVE Series A-1000

Solenoid Valve Enclosure Stainless Steel Fitting Line
For the Series RSV Remote Solenoid - pg 458-462
Valves - pg 436

Series A-2000
Series BHC Nylon and Stainless Steel Fitting
Bulk Head Connector Line
Coupling Accessories - pg 437 - pg 463-466

Series DCD
Filters, Regulators and Lubricators
Repair Kit
For Pneumatic Air Applications
Diaphragm Replacements for Series
- pg 467-470
DCV/RDCV - pg 437

Series EPT-1
Electro-pneumatic Transducer HVAC Pocket Reference
Low Cost, Selectable Input, Manual - pg 472
Override - pg 442
pg1 7/21/06 3:27 PM Page 1

Pressure

Pressure
Table of Contents Series 1800 Low Differential Pressure Switches . . . . . .48
Magnehelic Gage Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
® Series 1900 Compact Low Differential Pressure
Series 2000 Magnehelic® Differential Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Pressure Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6 Series 1950/1950G Explosion-Proof Differential
Series 4000 Capsuhelic® Differential Pressure Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Pressure Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8 Series MDS Miniature Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Series 2-5000 Minihelic® II Differential Series MDA Miniature Adjustable
Pressure Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Series DH Digihelic® Differential Series MVS Miniature Vacuum Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Pressure Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12 Series MHS Miniature High Sensitivity
Series DHII Digihelic® II Differential Pressure Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Series A4 Differential Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Series MP Mini-Photohelic® Differential Pressure Series BB Bourdon Tube Differential Pressure
Switch/Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Series A3000 Photohelic® Pressure Series H3 Explosion-Proof Differential
Switch/Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-16 Pressure Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Series 3000MR/3000MRS Photohelic® Series DP Double Bellows Differential
Switch/Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Pressure Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Series 3000SGT Photohelic® Pressure Series PG Gas Pressure/Diff. Pressure Switch . . . . . . .55
Switch/Gage with Integral Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . .18 Series 1996 Gas Pressure Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Series 43000 Capsu-Photohelic® Pressure Series A2 Subminiature Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . .56
Switch/Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Series PQ Ultra Sensitive Pressure Switches . . . . . . . .57
Series A-464 Flush Mount Kit for Magnehelic® Series AP Diaphragm Operated Pressure
Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Series A-465 Flush Mount Space Series DA/DS Bourdon Tube Pressure
Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58-60
Introduction to Manometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-22 Series XTBX Diaphragm Seal for DA Series
Durablock® Solid Plastic Portable Gages . . . . . . . . . . .23 Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Durablock® Solid Plastic Stationary Gages . . . . . . . . . .24 Series ES Electronic Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Durablock® Inclined-Vertical Manometers . . . . . . . . . . .25 Series CS & CD Low Cost Diaphragm Pressure
Flex-Tube® Well-Type Manometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Slack-Tube® Manometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Series A1S & A1B Low Cost OEM Pressure
Series 1213 Gas Pressure Manometer . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63-64
Model 1430 Microtector® Portable Series A1PS/A1VS Economical Pressure
Electronic Point Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Flex-Tube® U-Tube Manometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Series APS/AVS Adjustable Pressure Switch . . . . . . . .65
Dual Range Flex-Tube® U-Inclined Manometers . . . . . .30 Series H2 Dual-Action Explosion-Proof Pressure
Mark II Molded Plastic Manometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Model 476A-0 Digital Manometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Series A1N Low Cost OEM Pressure Switch . . . . . . . .66
Model 478A Digital Differential Manometer . . . . . . . . . .33 Series 1000W Diaphragm Operated Pressure
Series 475 Mk III Handheld Digital Manometer . . . . . . .34 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Series 477 Handheld Digital Manometer . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Series 1000E Explosion-Proof Diaphragm
Series 477A Handheld Digital Manometer . . . . . . . . . .36 Operated Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Series HM28 Handheld Digital Manometer . . . . . . . . . .37 Series SA1100 Diaphragm Operated
Series 490 Wet/Wet Handheld Pressure Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Digital Manometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Series SGL 4.5˝ Stainless Steel Industrial
Air Filter Gages and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39-40 Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
250-AF Series Inclined Manometer Series SGS 4˝ Stainless Steel Industrial Pressure
Air Filter Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Differential Pressure Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-44 Series SGD 2.5˝ Stainless Steel Industrial
Series 1620 Single and Dual Pressure Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Pressure Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Series SGT 2.5˝ Stainless Steel Industrial
Series 1630 Large Diaphragm Pressure Pressure Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Series 64000 2.5˝ Stainless Steel Pressure
Model 1640 Floating Contact Null Switch . . . . . . . . . . .47 Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

1 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg2 7/21/06 3:28 PM Page 1

Pressure
Pressure
Table of Contents cont.
Series 63000M 2.5˝ Stainless Steel Pressure Gage . . .73 Series DPG-000 Digital Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Series 62000MU 2.5˝ Stainless Steel Pressure Gage . .74 Series DPG-100 Digital Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Series SGB 1.5˝ Stainless Steel Industrial Pressure Series DCG Digital Calibration Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Series DSGT Digital Indicating Transmitter . . . . . . . . .122
Series SGB 2˝ Stainless Steel Industrial Pressure Series 7116 & 7116B Spirahelic® Pressure
Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Indicating Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Series SGI 4˝ Stainless Steel Safety Gage . . . . . . . . . .77 Series 619 Pressure Indicating Transmitter . . . . . . . . .124
Series SGK 8˝ & 10˝ Stainless Steel Pressure Gage . . .78 Series 626 & 628 Industrial Pressure Transmitter 125-126
Series SGX 2.5˝ Stainless Steel Low Pressure Gage . .79 Series 673 Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Series SGF 2.5˝ Stainless Steel Low Pressure Gage . .80 Series 638 Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Series SSD 2.5˝ Stainless Steel Gage with Series 642 Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Sanitary Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Series 682 Industrial Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . .128
Series SSL 4˝ Stainless Steel Gage with Series 634ES Adjustable Range Pressure Transmitter 129
Sanitary Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Series 679 Weatherproof Pressure Transmitter . . . . . .129
Series SGO 4˝ Stainless Steel Schaeffer Gage . . . . . . .83 Series 636 Fixed Range Pressure Transmitter . . . . . .130
Series SGP 4˝ Stainless Steel Low Pressure Series 681 Sanitary Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . .130
Schaeffer Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Series 637 Adjustable Range Pressure Transmitter . .131
Series SGR 6˝ Stainless Steel Test Gage . . . . . . . . . . .85 Series 637S Sanitary Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . .131
Series SGJ 6˝ Stainless Steel Safety Test Gage . . . . . .86 Series 636D Fixed Range Differential Pressure
Series AGD & AGL 2.5˝ & 4.5˝ Pressure Gages Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
with Ammonia Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Series 629 Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter .133
Series AAG Agricultural Ammonia Gages . . . . . . . . . . .87 Series 655 Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter .134
Series FGA & FGS 2.5˝ & 4˝ Pressure Gages Series 647 Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter .135
with Freon Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Series 645 Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter .135
Series UGA 2.5˝ Utility Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Series 631B Wet/Wet Differential Pressure
Series UGB 4˝ Plastic Utility Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Series UGC Utility Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Series MS Magnesense® Differential Pressure
Series UGD Utility Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137-138
Series UGE Utility Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Series DM-2000 Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . .139
Series UGF Utility Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Series 605 Magnehelic® Differential Pressure
Series LPG1 Low Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Indicating Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Series LPG2 Low Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Series 603A Differential Pressure Transmitters . . . . . .141
Series TEFG Molded PVDF Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Series 604A Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . .142
Series PPG Molded Polypropylene Gages . . . . . . . . . .96 Series 604D Minihelic® Differential Pressure
Series FBG Forged Brass Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Indicating Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Series GTG Gas Test Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Series 616 Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . .143
Series SAEG Hydraulic SAE Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Series 616C Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . .143
Series BTG Bulk Tanker Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Series 616D Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . .143
Series MINEG Mining Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Series 616W Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . .144
Series HSG Hose Test Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Series 616WL Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . .144
Series LEVG Level Mount Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Series 620 Differential Indicating Pressure
Series UNOG “Use No Oil” Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Series SGC Spiral Tube Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . .102 Series 621 Differential Indicating Pressure
Series CONG Contractor Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Series PPMG Process Panel Mount Gages . . . . . . . .104 Series 607 Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . .146
Series 763 Field-Fillable Process Gage . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Series 677 Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . .146
Series 764 Glycerin-Filled Process Gage . . . . . . . . . .106 Series 668 Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . .147
Series 761 Process Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Series 646 Differential Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . .147
Series 762 Process Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Series 676 Duct Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Series 7000 Spirahelic® Pressure Gages . . . . . . .109-114 Series 674 Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . .148
Series 61000 Pressure Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Series 608 Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . .149
Series 66000 Pressure Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Series DCT1000 Dust Collector Timer Controller . . . .150
Series 67000 Digital Pressure Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Series DCT1000DC Dust Collector Timer Controller .151
Series VG Digital Vacuum Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Series DCT500 Low Cost Timer Controller . . . . . . . . .152
Series DPGA Digital Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Series DCT500DC Low Cost Timer Controller . . . . . .153
Series DPGW Digital Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Related Products for Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . .154
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 2
pg3 7/21/06 3:30 PM Page 1

Pressure
®
Magnehelic Gage Principle
The Dwyer feature that has created new standards in the measurement
and control of low differential air pressures

Dwyer’s exclusive Magnehelic® Gage Principle eliminates wear, backlash and hysteresis in Magnehelic®, Capsuhelic®, Minihelic® and Photo-
helic® Gages. The result is a remarkably high standard of accurate, dependable gage performance at a modest price.

WHAT IT IS
The Magnehelic® Gage Principle is Dwyer’s method of transmitting the effect of changes in air pressure from a diaphragm to an indi-
cating pointer — by means of magnetic linkage and without the use of gears or other direct mechanical linkages. This system avoids
wear and physical contact which might destroy the accuracy and sensitivity of the instrument.

HOW THE MAGNETIC LINKAGE WORKS

(1) With pointer at zero, pressures on both sides of the di-
aphragm are equal. The diaphragm is linked to the leaf spring,
which is anchored at one end. A magnet attached to the free end
of the spring is in close proximity to — but does not touch —
the helix.
The helix is of high magnetic permeability. It aligns itself with
the magnetic field, thus maintaining the minimum gap between
the magnet and the outer edge of the helix.

(2) When air pressure changes move the diaphragm, spring and
magnet, the helix turns to maintain the minimum gap, and the
pointer turns with it.
The flat spring (which determines the range of the instrument)
resists the diaphragm’s movement. Precise calibration of the
instrument is accomplished by varying the live length of spring
through adjustment of a spring clamp.

ADVANTAGES
Each gage based on the Magnehelic® Gage Principle offers these oper- CONSIDER THIS VERSATILITY
ating and installation advantages: The Magnehelic® Gage Principle adds to the unusual versatility of
• It is exceptionally responsive. Accuracy is guaranteed within 2% Dwyer’s Differential Pressure Gages. They are suitable for a wide
of full scale. (3% on Capsuhelic® gage, 5% on Minihelic® gage). range of fixed and portable applications where differential pressure is
• Inertia-free, drift-free pointer movement. less than 30 psig and total pressure is less than 500 psig in compatible
• Virtually no hysteresis. fluids. See page 5 for numerous Magnehelic® gage options and acces-
• High resistance to shock and vibration. sories and page 479 for special OEM models.
• Unharmed by pressure surges up to 15 psig (500 psig on
Capsuhelic® Gage, 50 psig on Minihelic® gage). A few typical gage applications are listed below.
• Ambient temperature range, 20 to 140°F. (Magnehelic® lower USES INCLUDE:
limit to -20°F on special order.)
• Operation in any position. (Low ranges require special calibration As an air filter gage to measure pressure drop across an air filter to in-
dicate when filters need servicing.
for other than vertical position.)
• Choice of more than 60 standard Magnehelic®, Capsuhelic® and Sensing static pressure in an air stream.
Photohelic® gage ranges, from .25" w.c. to 300 psig, in a single case To measure air velocity in determining volume of flow.
size for each series. Liquid level measurement by measuring back pressure of purge air
• Magnehelic®, Capsuhelic®, and Minihelic® gages can be surface in a dip tube.
or flush mounted. Magnehelic® gage has both side and back As an orifice meter by measuring back pressure of purge air or com-
connections. patible fluids.
• Prices are modest for these responsive precision gages.

3 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg4 7/21/06 3:36 PM Page 1

Pressure
Now-five series of gages and switch/gages serve a variety of needs... ® ®
Series
2000 Magnehelic and Capsuhelic Series
4000

Differential Pressure Gages

Metric scales available.

Both Magnehelic® and Capsuhelic® gages have easy-to-read 4" dials

that quickly indicate low air or gas pressures — positive, negative
or differential. Both include the frictionless Magnehelic® gage mag-
netic movement; resistant to shock, vibration and overpressure. No
fluid — no evaporation, freezing or toxicity problems. Capsuhelic®
gages handle compatible fluids internally.
Common applications include measurement of fan and blower pres-
Magnehelic® Gage — More than Capsuhelic ® Gage — More
than 60 models, from 0-.50" w.c.
sures, filter resistance, air velocity, furnace draft, pressure drop
80 models, from 0-.25" w.c. to 0-30
psig. Zero center from .25-0-.25" to 0-300 psig. Zero center from across orifice plates, liquid levels with bubbler systems, pressures
w.c. to 15-0-15" w.c. Low (to 15 1-0-1" w.c. to 15-0-15" w.c. Sen- in fluid amplifier or fluidic systems; to check gas-air ratio controls,
psig), medium (to 35 psig) and high sitive to low differential pressures automatic valves, and monitor blood or respiratory pressures in
total internal pressure styles to 80 yet withstands internal pressures medical equipment.
psig. Accuracy ±2% of full scale for to 500 psig. Accuracy ±3% of full
most models. scale for most models.

®
Series
2-5000 Minihelic Differential Pressure Gages
The Minihelic® II gage is our smallest, least expensive dial type dif-
ferential pressure gage using the Magnehelic® gage principle. It
features a large easy-to-read circular dial. The design allows for
panel mounting with hardware included or surface mounting with
an optional bracket. Barbed connections are standard for use with
flexible tubing, for tubing 1⁄8" male NPT pipe connections are also
available. The mineral and glass filled nylon case withstands rough
use and exposure.
The 5% accuracy of the Minihelic® gage makes it well suited for use
14 Ranges — From 0-0.5" w.c. Standard Accessories — Steel as an air filter gage on large stationary and portable engines,
to 0-30 psig. Special ranges bracket, screw studs and nuts for compressors, ventilators, air handling units and as a monitor on
and scales available for OEM panel mounting. Optional surface fluidic power supplies. The Minihelic® gage is also suitable for
volume requirements. mounting bracket available. many of the same applications as the Magnehelic® gage where the
greater accuracy, sensitivity and total pressure capability of the
latter are not required.

Photohelic and Capsu-Photohelic

They’re 3-in One: Series Series
1. Indicating gage ®
2. Lo-Limit control 3000 43000
3. Hi-Limit control

Pressure Switch/Gages
Photohelic® and Capsu-Photohelic® gages combine our most precise
pressure switch with time-proven Magnehelic® gage design (above).
Knob controls adjust set points. Applied pressure and switch set
points are fully visible. Gage readings are not affected by switch op-
eration. Phototransistor actuated DPDT relays can be interlocked
for variable deadband control. Deadband is less than 1% of scale.
Both offer more than 60 For positive, negative or differential pressures from 0-.25" WC to 0-
models. From 0-.25" w.c. to 6000 psig full scale.
0-6000 psig.
Used to control pressures in air conditioning systems, clean rooms,
fluidic and pneumatic systems, materials handling; alarm or con-
trol fume exhaust systems; monitor respiratory and blood pres-
sures.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 4
pg5 7/21/06 3:43 PM Page 1

Pressure
Series ®
2000 Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gages
Indicate Positive, Negative or Differential, Accurate within 2%
Ø4-1/8 [104.78] BOLT
CIRCLE FOR PANEL MOUNTING
120° APART
1/2
1/8 NPT HIGH [12.70]
PRESSURE
1/8 NPT HIGH
PRESSURE

1-1/4 1/8 NPT LOW

1-3/4 [31.75] PRESSURE
[44.45]

1/8 LOW
PRESSURE
11/16 7/16 Ø4-3/4
[17.46] [11.11] [120.65]
1-11/16 1/2
[42.86] [12.70]
Patent Nos. 4,030,365
5,012,678
Standard Magnehelic® Pressure Gage has a Dimensions, Standard Series 2000 Magnehelic® Pressure Gages.
large, easy-to-read 4" dial. (Slightly different on medium and high pressure models)

Select the Dwyer® Magnehelic® gage for high accuracy — guaranteed SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases. (Natural Gas option avail-
within 2% of full scale — and for the wide choice of 81 models available to suit able.)
your needs precisely. Using Dwyer's simple, frictionless Magnehelic® gage Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
movement, it quickly indicates low air or non-corrosive gas pressures — either Housing: Die cast aluminum case and bezel, with acrylic cover. Exterior finish is
coated gray to withstand 168 hour salt spray corrosion test.
positive, negative (vacuum) or differential. The design resists shock, vibra- Accuracy: ±2% of full scale (±3% on - 0, -100 Pa, -125 Pa, 10MM and ±4%
tion and over-pressures. No manometer fluid to evaporate, freeze or cause on - 00, -60 Pa, -6MM ranges), throughout range at 70°F (21.1°C).
Pressure Limits: -20˝ Hg. to 15 psig.† (-0.677 bar to 1.034 bar); MP option:
toxic or leveling problems. It's inexpensive, too. 35 psig (2.41 bar), HP option: 80 psig (5.52 bar).
The Magnehelic® gage is the industry standard to measure fan and blow- Overpressure: Relief plug opens at approximately 25 psig (1.72 bar), standard
gages only.
er pressures, filter resistance, air velocity, furnace draft, pressure drop Temperature Limits: 20 to 140°F.* (-6.67 to 60°C).
across orifice plates, liquid levels with bubbler systems and pressures in Size: 4˝ (101.6 mm) Diameter dial face.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult factory for
fluid amplifier or fluidic systems. It also checks gas-air ratio controls and au- other position orientations.
tomatic valves, and monitors blood and respiratory pressures in medical care Process Connections: 1/8˝ female NPT duplicate high and low pressure taps
- one pair side and one pair back.
equipment. Weight: 1 lb 2 oz (510 g), MP & HP 2 lb 2 oz (963 g).
Standard Accessories: Two 1/8˝ NPT plugs for duplicate pressure taps, two
Note: May be used with Hydrogen. When ordering a Buna-N diaphragm 1/8˝ pipe thread to rubber tubing adapter and three flush mounting adapters
pressures must be less than 35 psi. with screws. (Mounting and snap ring retainer substituted for 3 adapters in MP
& HP gage accessories.)
*Low temperature models available as special option.
†For applications with high cycle rate within gage total pressure rating, next higher rating is recom-
mended. See Medium and High pressure options at lower left.
MOUNTING. A single case
size is used for most models of OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Magnehelic® gages. They can Transparent Overlays
Furnished in red and green to highlight and emphasize
be flush or surface mounted
critical pressures.
with standard hardware sup- Flush ...Surface...or Pipe Mounted
plied. With the optional A-610 Adjustable Signal Flag
Pipe Mounting Kit they may be conveniently installed on horizontal or vertical 11⁄4˝ - Integral with plastic gage cover. Available for most mod-
2˝ pipe. Although calibrated for vertical position, many ranges above 1˝ may be used els except those with medium or high pressure con-
at any angle by simply re-zeroing. However, for maximum accuracy, they must be struction. Can be ordered with gage or separate.
calibrated in the same position in which they are used. These characteristics make
Magnehelic® gages ideal for both stationary and portable applications. A 49⁄16˝ hole LED Setpoint Indicator
is required for flush panel mounting. Complete mounting and connection fittings Bright red LED on right of scale shows when setpoint is
plus instructions are furnished with each instrument. reached. Field adjustable from gage face, unit operates
VENT VALVES on 12-24 VDC. Requires MP or HP style cover and
In applications where pressure is continuous and the Magne- bezel.
helic® gage is connected by metal or plastic tubing which
cannot be easily removed, we suggest using Dwyer A-310A Portable Units
vent valves to connect gage. Pressure can then be removed Combine carrying case with any Magnehelic® gage of stan-
to check or re-zero the gage. dard range, except high pressure connection. Includes 9
ft. (2.7 m) of 3⁄16˝ I.D. rubber tubing, standhang bracket and
HIGH AND MEDIUM PRESSURE MODELS terminal tube with holder.
Installation is similar to standard gages except that a 413⁄16˝ hole
is needed for flush mounting. The medium pressure construc- Air Filter Gage Accessory Package
tion is rated for internal pressures up to 35 psig and the high Adapts any standard Magnehelic® gage for use as an air
pressure up to 80 psig. Available for all models. Because of filter gage. Includes aluminum surface mounting bracket
larger case, the medium pressure and high pressure models with screws, two 5 ft. (1.5 m) lengths of 1⁄4˝ aluminum tub-
will not fit in a portable case size. Installation of the A-321 safe- ing two static pressure tips and two molded plastic vent
ty relief valve on standard Magnehelic® gages often provides valves, integral compression fittings on both tips and
valves.
adequate protection against infrequent overpressure.

5 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg6 7/21/06 3:41 PM Page 1

Pressure
Quality design and construction features
Bezel provides flange for flush mounting in O-ring seal for cover assures pressure
panel. integrity of case.

Clear plastic face is highly resistant to Blowout plug of silicone rubber protects
breakage. Provides undistorted viewing of against overpressure on 15 psig rated
pointer and scale. models. Opens at approximately 25 psig.

Precision litho-printed scale is accurate Die cast aluminum case is precision made
and easy to read. and iridite-dipped to withstand 168 hour salt
spray corrosion test. Exterior finished in
Red tipped pointer of heat treated aluminum baked dark gray hammerloid. One case size
tubing is easy to see. It is rigidly mounted on is used for all standard pressure options, and
the helix shaft. for both surface and flush mounting.

Pointer stops of molded rubber prevent Silicone rubber diaphragm with integrally
pointer over-travel without damage. molded O-ring is supported by front and rear
plates. It is locked and sealed in position with
“Wishbone” assembly provides mounting for a sealing plate and retaining ring. Diaphragm
helix, helix bearings and pointer shaft. motion is restricted to prevent damage due to
overpressures.
Jeweled bearings are shock-resistant mounted;
provide virtually friction-free motion for helix. Calibrated range spring is flat spring steel.
Motion damped with high viscosity silicone Small amplitude of motion assures
fluid. consistency and long life. It reacts to pressure
on diaphragm. Live length adjustable for
Zero adjustment screw is conveniently calibration.
located in the plastic cover, and is accessible
without removing cover. O-ring seal provides Samarium Cobalt magnet mounted at one
pressure tightness. end of range spring rotates helix without me-
chanical linkages.
Helix is precision made from an alloy of high magnetic permeability. Mounted in jeweled
bearings, it turns freely, following the magnetic field to move the pointer across the scale. MODELS
Dual Scale English/Metric Models
Model Range, Range,
Number In. W.C. Pa or kPa
2000-OD 0-0.5 0-125 Pa
SERIES 2000 MAGNEHELIC® GAGE — MODELS AND RANGES 2001D 0-1.0 0-250 Pa
The models below will fulfill most requirements. Page 479 also shows examples of special 2002D 0-2.0 0-500 Pa
2003D 0-3.0 0-750 Pa
models built for OEM customers. For special scales furnished in ounces per square inch, 2004D 0-4.0 0-1.0 kPa
inches of mercury, metric units, etc., contact the factory. 2006D 0-6.0 0-1.5 kPa
2008D 0-8.0 0-2.0 kPa
2010D 0-10 0-2.5 kPa

Range
Zero Dual Scale Air Velocity Units
Range Center Range,
Model Inches Model Inches of Model Range in W.C. Model CM of Model Range,
Number of Water Number Water Number Velocity, F.P.M. Number Water Number Pascals

2000-00N†•• .05-0-.2 2300-0†• .25-0-.25 2000-00AV†•• 0-.25/300-2000 2000-15CM 0-15 Zero Center Ranges
2000-00†•• 0-.25 2301 .5-0-.5 2000-0AV†• 0-.50/500-2800 2000-20CM 0-20
2000-0†• 0-.50 2302 1-0-1 2001AV 0-1.0/500-4000 2000-25CM 0-25 2300-60PA 30-0-30
2001 0-1.0 2304 2-0-2 2002AV 0-2.0/1000-5600 2000-50CM 0-50 2300-100PA 50-0-50
2002 0-2.0 2310 5-0-5 2010AV 0-10/2000-12500 2000-80CM 0-80 2300-120PA 60-0-60
2003 0-3.0 2320 10-0-10 For use with pitot tube. 2000-100CM 0-100 2300-250PA 125-0-125
2004 0-4.0 2330 15-0-15 2000-150CM 0-150 2300-500PA 250-0-250
2005 0-5.0 2000-200CM 0-200
0-6.0 Model Range Model Range 0-250
2006 2000-250CM
0-8.0 Number PSI Number MM of Water 0-300
2008 2000-300CM
2010 0-10 2201 0-1
0-15 2000-6MM†•• 0-6 Zero Center Ranges
2015 2202 0-2 Model Range,
0-20 2000-10MM†• 0-10
2020 2203 0-3 2300-4CM 2-0-2 Number Kilopascals
0-25 2000-25MM 0-25
2025 2204 0-4 2300-10CM 5-0-5 2000-1KPA 0-1
0-30 2000-50MM 0-50
2030 2205 0-5 2300-30CM 15-0-15 2000-1.5KPA 0-1.5
0-40 2000-80MM 0-80
2040 2210* 0-10 2000-2KPA 0-2
0-50 2000-100MM 0-100
2050 2215* 0-15 2000-3KPA 0-3
2060 0-60 2220* 0-20 Zero Center Ranges 2000-4KPA 0-4
2080 0-80 2230** 0-30 2000-5KPA 0-5
2100 0-100 Model Range,
*MP option standard 2300-20MM† 10-0-10 2000-8KPA 0-8
2150 0-150 **HP option standard Number Pascals 2000-10KPA 0-10
Accessories 2000-15KPA 0-15
A-299, Surface Mounting Bracket 2000-60PA†•• 0-60
2000-100PA†• 0-100 2000-20KPA 0-20
A-300, Flat Flush Mounting Bracket............ Options — To order, add suffix: I.E. 2001-ASF 2000-25KPA 0-25
A-310A, 3-Way Vent Valve .......................... ASF (Adjustable Signal Flag) 2000-125PA†• 0-125
2000-250PA 0-250 2000-30KPA 0-30
A-321, Safety Relief Valve........................... HP (High Pressure Option) Zero Center Ranges
A-432, Portable Kit ..................................... LT (Low Temperatures to -20°F) 2000-300PA 0-300
A-605, Air Filter Kit ..................................... MP (Med. Pressure Option) 2000-500PA 0-500 2300-1KPA .5-0-.5
A-610, Pipe Mount Kit ................................ SP (Setpoint Indicator) 2000-750PA 0-750 2300-3KPA 1.5-0-1.5
Scale Overlays — Red, Green, Mirrored or Combination, Specify Locations
†These ranges calibrated for vertical scale position. 1011R01-0298P
• Accuracy +/-3%. • • Accuracy +/-4%

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 6
p7 7/21/06 3:45 PM Page 1

Pressure ®
Series
4000 Capsuhelic Differential Pressure Gages
Measures Pressure, Vacuum or Differential, Suitable for Internal Pressures to 500 psig
3/4 [19.05] TYP 1/4 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION
1/4 FEMALE NPT HIGH
(AIR OR GAS)
PRESSURE CONNECTION
(AIR OR GAS)

35° TYP
Ø4-45/64
[119.46]
(4) #6-32 X 3/8 [9.53] DP
HOLE ON A 4-11/32 [110.33]
BOLT CIRCLE
1/4 FEMALE NPT HIGH 13/32 Ø5
PRESSURE CONNECTION [10.32] TYPE 1/2 [127.00]
(LIQUID) 2-19/32
[65.86] [12.70]
1/4 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION
(LIQUID)

Capsuhelic® Pressure Gage has a large, easy-to-read 4" (102 mm) dial. Dimensions, Series 4000 Capsuhelic® Pressure Gages.

The Capsuhelic® gage is designed to give fast, accurate SPECIFICATIONS Temperature Limits: 20 to
indication of differential pressures. The gage may be used as a read- Service: Aluminum Case: Air and 200°F (-6.67 to 93.3°C).
out device when measuring flowing fluids, pressure drop across fil- compatible gases and oil based Size: 4˝ (101.6 mm) diameter dial
ters, liquid levels in storage tanks and many other applications involv- liquids. Brass Case: Air and face.
compatible gases and water based Mounting Orientation:
ing pressure, vacuum or differential pressure. Diaphragm in vertical position.
liquids.
Using the basic design of Dwyer’s time-proven Magnehelic® gage, the Consult factory for other position
Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
Capsuhelic® gage contains a simple, frictionless movement that per- Housing: Die cast aluminum with orientations.
mits full scale readings as low as 0.5 inch water column. The pressure impregnated hard coating, Process Connections: 1/4˝
being measured is held within a capsule which is an integral part of standard. Optional forged brass female NPT high and low pressure
the gage. This containment of the pressure permits the use of the housing is required for water or taps, duplicated - one pair top for
gage on system pressures of up to 500 psig, even when differentials to water based fluids. Special material air and gas, and one pair bottom
diaphragms available, contact facto- for liquids.
be read are less than 0.1 inch w.c. Weight: 3 lb, 3 oz (1.45 kg)
ry.
The diaphragm-actuated Capsuhelic® gage requires no filling liquid aluminum case; 7 lb, 13 oz (3.54
Accuracy: ±3% of full scale at 70°F
which might limit its outdoor applications. Zero and range adjust- (21.1°C). (±2% on 4000S kg) brass case.
ments are made from outside the gage, and there is no need to disas- models, ±4% on 4200, 4210, 4215, Standard Accessories: Two 1/4˝
semble the gage in normal service. 4220, 4300, 4400, and 4500). NPT plugs for duplicate pressure
Pressure Limits: -20˝ Hg to 500 taps, four flush mounting adapters
Note: May be used with hydrogen where pressures are less than psig. (-0.677 bar to 34.4 bar). with screws and four surface
mounting screws.
35 psi.

MOUNTING OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Capsuhelic gages may be flush mounted in a panel or surface
® Adjustable Signal Flag — Integral with
mounted. Hardware is included for either. For flush mounting, a 413⁄l6˝ plastic gage cover; has external reset
diameter cutout in panel is required. Where high shock or vibration are screw. May be ordered factory installed
on gage or separately for field installation.
problems, order optional A-496 Heavy Duty flush mount bracket.
Specify ASF suffix after model number.
Optional A-610 kit provides simple means of attaching gage to 11⁄4˝-2"
horizontal or vertical pipe. Installation is same as Magnehelic® gage A-314 Bleed Fitting — For easier, safer
shown on page 5. All standard models are calibrated for vertical mount- purging of trapped air when using gage with
ing. Gages with ranges above 5 in. w.c. can be factory calibrated for hor- liquids. Also useful for draining conden-
izontal or inclined mounting on special order. sate when installed in lower ports. To
open, simply loosen hex nut. Solid brass.

Forged Brass Case — For applications

involving water or water based liquids. To
order, add suffix “B” after model number.
Example: 4205B.

Transparent Scale Overlays —

Available in bright red, green or yellow to
accent critical pressure zones. Specify
which color and portion of scale to be
covered with each.
A-471 Portable Kit — Includes plastic
case, mounting bracket, A-309 3-way
manifold valve, (2) A-230 high pressure
hoses and all necessary fittings. Assem-
Flush mounted Back view shows flush Back view for bly required. Gage not included.
in panel. mounting adapters. surface mounting.

7 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p8 7/21/06 3:48 PM Page 1

Pressure
Straightforward design assures maintenance-free performance
Range spring calibration is set by custom
Top low pressure connection (for Air or Gas) camlock. Rate adjust and rate adjust lock are Bezel provides flange for flush mounting in panel.
connects to chamber in back of diaphragm. High coaxial and are factory set and sealed.
pressure air or gas port (cut away; not shown) O-ring seal for cover assures dust tight integrity of
connects with chamber in front of diaphragm case.
through passageways in case.
Clear plastic front cover is highly resistant to
Precision made case is offered in two materials. breakage. Provides undistorted viewing of pointer
Standard is die cast aluminum coated inside for and scale.
resistance to most oils and similar fluids. Optional
Precision scale, screen printed on aluminum,
forged brass case is recommended when using
is accurate and easy to read.
water or water based liquids. One case size for all
pressure ranges — can be either surface or flush
Samarium cobalt magnet mounted at end of range
mounted.
spring rotates helix without mechanical linkages.
Silicone rubber diaphragm with integrally molded
“Wishbone” assembly provides mounting for
O-ring is sealed between the case and backplate.
helix, helix bearings and pointer shaft.
Diaphragm motion is restricted to prevent damage
due to over-pressure. Thin wall magnetic “window” is well braced and
of minimum area for maximum pressure capability.

Jeweled bearings for helix are shock resistant

Diaphragm support plate of stainless steel mini- mounted. They provide virtually friction-free rotation
mizes position or attitude sensitivity. for helix. Rotation is damped with high viscosity sil-
icone fluid.
Calibrated range spring is a flat leaf of nickel plat-
ed spring steel. Small amplitude of motion assures Helix is precision milled from an alloy of high mag-
consistency and long life. It reacts to pressure on netic permeability, mounted in jeweled bearings,
diaphragm. Live length factory adjusted for calibra- and rotates to align with magnetic field of magnet
tion. and transmit pressure indication to pointer.

Zero adjustment screw is conveniently located in

plastic cover, accessible without removing cover.
Bottom high pressure connection (for Liquids) “O” ring seal provides dust seal.
connects to chamber in front of diaphragm. Low
pressure liquid connection (not visible) connects
with chamber in back of diaphragm through
passageways in case.

Patent Nos. 4,011,759

4,030,365

SERIES 4000 CAPSUHELIC ® GAGE— MODELS AND RANGES

Scales reading directly in flow, heights, etc., are also available.
MODELS
Range
Range, Zero
Inches Center Range Range,
Model of Model Inches of Model MM of Model CM of Model Range,
Number Water Number Water Number Water Number Water Number Pascals

*4000-0 0-.50 *4302 1-0-1 *4000-25MM 0-25 4000-15CM 0-15 *4000-125PA 0-125
*4001 0-1.0 *4304 2-0-2 *4000-50MM 0-50 4000-20CM 0-20 *4000-250PA 0-250
*4002 0-2.0 4310 5-0-5 *4000-80MM 0-80 4000-25CM 0-25 *4000-500PA 0-500
*4003 0-3.0 4320 10-0-10 *4000-100MM 0-100 4000-40CM 0-40 *4000-750PA 0-750
*4004 0-4.0 4330 15-0-15 4000-50CM 0-50
*4005 0-5.0 4000-80CM 0-80
Model Range 4000-100CM Zero Center Ranges
4006 0-6.0 0-100
Number PSI 4000-150CM
4008 0-8.0 0-150 *4300-500PA 250-0-250
4010 0-10 4201 0-1 4000-200CM 0-200
4015 0-15 4202 0-2 Special Purpose 4000-250CM 0-250 Model Range,
4020 0-20 4203 0-3 Ranges 4000-300CM 0-300 Number Kilopascals
4025 0-25 4204 0-4
4030 0-30 4205 0-5 Scale No. 4401 Zero Center Ranges *4000-1KPA 0-1
4040 0-40 4210 0-10 Square Root 4000-1.5KPA 0-1.5
4050 0-50 4215 0-15 Specify Range *4300-4CM 2-0-2 4000-2KPA 0-2
4060 0-60 4220 0-20 *4300-10CM 5-0-5 4000-3KPA 0-3
4080 0-80 †4230S 0-30 Scale No. 4402 4300-30CM 15-0-15 4000-4KPA 0-4
4100 0-100 †4240S 0-40 Blank Scale 4000-5KPA 0-5
4150 0-150 †4260S 0-60 Specify Range 4000-8KPA 0-8
4200 0-200 †4280S 0-80 4000-10KPA 0-10
4300 0-300 †42100S 0-100 4000-15KPA 0-15
4400 0-400 †42200S 0-200 4000-20KPA 0-20
4500 0-500 †42300S 0-300 4000-25KPA 0-25
Range 4000-30KPA 0-30
Accessories Options
Model Feet of A-298 Flat Flush Mounting Bracket Zero Center Ranges
Number Water A-309 3-way Manifold Valve Add Options as Suffix, Example 4001-ASF
4616B 0-16 A-314 Bleed Fitting -ASF (Adjustable Signal Flag) *4300-1KPA .5-0- .5
4635B 0-35 A-370 Mounting Bracket B (Brass Case) 4300-3KPA 1.5-0-1.5
Available with brass case only A-471 Portable Kit Scale Overlays - Red, Green, Mirrored or
A-496 Flush Mount Bracket combination. Specify Locations
A-610 Pipe Mount Kit
*These ranges available for vertical scale position only. †These ranges use Spirahelic® gage movement.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 8
p9 7/21/06 3:49 PM Page 1

Pressure Series ®
2-5000 Minihelic II Differential Pressure Gages
Combining High Accuracy, Compactness, Dependability, and Low Cost

LOW
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
Ø2-29/32 Ø2-19/32 Ø9/64 [3.57]
[73.81] [65.88] x 3/4 [19.05]
1-5/64* DP TYP 2
[27.38] PLACES

HIGH
PRESSURE
19/64 CONNECTION
[7.54] 2-5/16 [58.74]
MOUNTING HOLES
1-17/32
[38.89]

2-3/16 *1-3/64 [26.59] FOR OPTIONAL

[55.56] 1/8 MALE CONNECTIONS

Patent No. 4,347,744

The Series 2-5000 Minihelic® II low differential pressure
gage provides excellent readability in a compact size. Dimensions, Series 2-5000 Minihelic® II Gage.

Combining clean design, small size and low cost with enough accu- The Minihelic® II gage is suitable for many of the same applications as
racy for all but the most demanding applications our Minihelic® II gage the Magnehelic® gage where the greater accuracy, sensitivity, and high-
offers the latest in design features for a dial type differential pressure er and lower differential pressure ranges of the Magnehelic® gage are
gage. It is our most compact gage but is easy to read and can safely op- not required.
erate at total pressures up to 30 psig. The Minihelic® II is designed for
panel mounting in a single 25⁄8" diameter hole. Standard pressure con-
nections are barbed fittings for 3⁄16" I.D. tubing; optional 1⁄8" male NPT SPECIFICATIONS
connections are also available. Over-pressure protection is built into the Service: Air and compatible gases.
Minihelic II® gage by means of a blow-out membrane molded in con- Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
junction with the diaphragm. Accidental over-ranging up to the rated Housing: Glass filled nylon; polycarbonate lens.
total pressure will not damage the gage. With removable lens and rear Accuracy: ±5% of full scale at 70°F (21.1°C).
housing, the gage may be easily serviced at minimum cost. Pressure Limits: 30 psig (2.067 bar) continuous to either pressure
connection.
With the housing molded from mineral and glass filled nylon and the
Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F (-6.67 to 48.9°C).
lens molded from polycarbonate, the gage will withstand rough use
Size: 2-1/16˝ (52.39 mm) diameter dial face.
and exposure as well as high total pressure. The 5% accuracy and low
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult factory for
cost of the Minihelic® II gage make it well-suited for a wide variety of
other position orientations.
OEM and user applications. OEM applications include cabinet air
Process Connections: Barbed, for 3/16˝ I.D. tubing (standard); 1/8˝ male
purging, medical respiratory therapy equipment, air samplers, lami-
NPT (optional).
nar flow hoods, and electronic air cooling systems. As an air filter
Weight: 6 oz (170.1g).
gage, the Minihelic® II gage finds many end use applications on large
stationary engines, compressors, ventilators, and air handling units.
CAUTION: FOR USE ONLY WITH AIR OR COMPATIBLE GASES.

PRESSURE CONNECTIONS
A The standard Minihelic® II gage is supplied
with two barbed pressure taps molded
into the rear housing of the gage. These
connections allow easy, fast connection to
the gage using 3⁄16" I.D. rubber or plastic
tubing.

B For applications in systems having higher

total operating pressures, optional male 1⁄8"
NPT pressure connections can be supplied.
Note the oblong over-pressure vent hole
on the back of the gage at the right of the
connections. This vent is sealed by a
A membrane molded in conjunction with the
B
diaphragm and will blow out at approxi-
mately 75 psi.

9 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p10 7/21/06 3:55 PM Page 1

Pressure
Simplicity of Design Ensures Reliable Operation
Housing is molded from strong mineral and Range spring calibration clamp fixes live
glass filled nylon. length of spring for proper gage calibration
and is factory set and sealed.

Pointer stops of molded rubber prevent Silicone rubber diaphragm allows accurate
pointer over-travel without damage. response to a broad range of temperatures
and at extremely low pressure. Incorporates
blow out area for overpressure protection.
Full view lens is removable and molded of
tough polycarbonate. Diaphragm support plates of lightweight
aluminum on each side of the diaphragm min-
imize position or attitude sensitivity and help
Aluminum scale litho-printed black on white, define pressure area.
enhances readability.
Flat leaf range spring reacts to pressure on
the diaphragm. Live length is adjustable for
Red tipped aluminum pointer, rigidly calibration. Small amplitude of motion mini-
mounted to helix is easy to see. mizes inaccuracies and assures long life.

Low pressure tap connects to rear chamber.

Wishbone assembly provides mounting for
helix, helix bearings, and pointer shaft. Coil spring link provides a resilient connec-
tion between the diaphragm and the range
Jewel bearings provide virtually friction-free spring.
helix motion.
Ceramic magnet mounted on a molded
bracket at the end of the range spring rotates
Helix is free to rotate in jewel bearings. It the helix without direct mechanical linkage.
aligns with magnetic field of magnet to trans-
mit pressure indications to pointer. High pressure tap connects with the front
chamber through passageway in the plastic
case and a sealing ring molded into the edge
Zero adjustment screw, located behind the of the diaphragm.
removable lens, eliminates tampering. Patent No. 4,347,744

PANEL MOUNTING MODELS

Range, Range,
Model Inches of Model Range, Model MM of
Number Water Number PSI Number Water
2-5000-0 0-0.5 2-5205 0-5 2-5000-25MM 0-25
2-5001 0-1.0 2-5210 0-10 2-5000-50MM 0-50
2-5002 0-2.0 2-5215 0-15 2-5000-100MM 0-100
2-5003 0-3.0 *2-5230 0-30 Model Range,
2-5005 0-5.0 Number Pascals
2-5010 0-10
2-5020 0-20 2-5000-125Pa 0-125
2-5040 0-40 2-5000-250Pa 0-250
2-5060 0-60 2-5000-500Pa 0-500
2-5100 0-100 Model Range,
Number kPa
2-5000-1 kPa 0-1
Accessories 2-5000-3 kPa 0-3
A-434 Portable Kit . . . . . .
A-497 Surface Mtg. Brkt. . . *THIS RANGE EMPLOYS SPIRALLY WOUND BERYLLIUM
A-609 Air Filter Kit . . . . . . COPPER BOURDON TUBE POINTER DRIVE MECHANISM.
NOTE: CONSULT FACTORY REGARDING AVAILABILITY OF
ADDITIONAL RANGES.
Mounting hardware is supplied with the Minihelic® II For optional 1⁄8" male NPT connections, add suffix -NPT to model numbers listed above.
Example: 2-5001-NPT. No extra charge.
gage for panel mounting through a single hole, 2-
5/8˝ (67 mm) in diameter. Panel thickness up to 1/2˝
(13 mm) can be accommodated with the hardware
supplied. If necessary, surface mounting of the gage
can be accomplished by means of two 4-40 screws
into the tapped mounting bracket stud holes in the
rear of the gage. Surface mounting requires clear-
ance holes in the panel for the two pressure taps.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 10
p11 7/21/06 3:52 PM Page 1

Pressure ®
Series
DH Digihelic Differential Pressure Controller
3-in-1 Instrument: Gage, Switch and Transmitter ®

3-19/32
[91.28] 1-15/16
[49.21]

3-25/32
[96.04]

4-1/2
[114.30] 1-3/4
[44.45]

1/2
[12.70]
4-1/2
[114.30]

The Series DH Digihelic® Differential Pressure SPECIFICATIONS

Controller is a 3-in-1 instrument possessing a digital display Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
gage, control relay switches, and a transmitter with current out- Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
put. Combining these three features allows the reduction of sev- Housing Material: ABS plastic, UL approved 94-V-0.
eral instruments with one product, saving inventory, installa-
Accuracy: ±0.5% at 77°F (25°C) including hysteresis and repeatability.
tion time and money. The Digihelic® controller is the ideal
instrument for pressure, velocity and flow applications, achiev- Stability: < ±1% per year.
ing a 0.5% full scale accuracy on ranges from 5 to 100 in. w.c. Pressure Limits: Ranges ≤ 2.5 in. w.c. = 2 psi
The Digihelic® controller allows the selection of pressure, veloc- 5˝: 5 psi; 10˝: 5 psi; 25˝: 5 psi; 50˝: 5 psi; 100˝: 9 psi.
ity or volumetric flow operation in several commonly used engi- Temperature Limits: 32 to 140°F (0 to 60°C).
neering units. Two SPDT control relays with adjustable dead Compensated Temperature Limits: 32 to 140°F (0 to 60°C).
bands are provided along with a scalable 4-20mA process out- Thermal Effects: 0.020%/°F (0.036/°C) from 77°F (25°C).
put. The Series DH provides extreme flexibility in power usage
Power Requirements: High Voltage Power = 100 to 240 VAC, 50
by allowing 120/220 VAC and also 24 VDC power which is often
to 400 Hz or 132 to 240 VDC.
used in control panels.
Programming is easy using the menu key to access five simpli- Low Voltage Power = 24 VDC ±20%.
fied menus which provide access to: security level; selection of Power Consumption:
pressure, velocity or flow operation; selection of engineering Low Voltage Power = 24 VDC - 130 mA max.
units; K-factor for use with flow sensors; rectangular or circular High Voltage Power = 100 to 240 VAC, 132 to 240 VDC - 7VA max.
duct for inputting area in flow applications; set point control or Output Signal: 4-20 mA DC into 900 ohms max.
set point and alarm operation; alarm operation as a high, low or Zero & Span Adjustments: Accessible via menus.
high/low alarm; automatic or manual alarm reset; alarm delay;
Response Time: 250 ms.
view peak and valley process readings; digital dampening for
smoothing erratic process applications; scaling the 4-20mA Display: 4 digit LCD 0.4˝ height.
process output to fit your application’s range; Modbus® commu- LED indicators for set point and alarm status.
nications; and field calibration. Electrical Connections: Screw terminals.
With all this packed into one product it is easy to see why the Process Connections: Compression fitting for use with 1/8˝ ID X
Digihelic® controller is the only instrument you will need for all 1/4˝ OD tubing (3.175 mm ID x 6.35 mm OD).
your pressure applications. Enclosure Rating: Face designed to meet NEMA 4X (IP66).
Mounting Orientation: Mount unit in horizontal plane.
APPLICATIONS
• Dust Collection Bag Filters Size: 1/8 DIN.
• SCFM Flow In Ducts Panel Cutout: 1.772 x 3.620 in (45 x 92 mm).
• Air Flow for Industrial Ovens Weight: 14.4 oz. (408 g).
• Filter Status Serial Communications: Modbus® RTU, RS485, 9600 Baud.
• Clean Room Pressure Agency Approvals: CE, UL.
• Fume Hood Air Flow
• Pharmaceutical or Bio-Medical Glove Box Pressures SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS
• Static Pressures in Ducts or Buildings Switch Type: 2 SPDT relays.
• Damper Control Electrical Rating: 8 Amps at 240 VAC resistive.
• Fan Control
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable via keypad on face.

Modbus® is a registered trademark of Schnieder Automation.

11 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg12 7/21/06 3:58 PM Page 1

Pressure
One Control for all your Pressure Applications
Reduces Instruments, Inventory, Installation Time and Cost Selectable Engineering Units in
Pressure, Velocity or Flow, pro-
Compact 1/8 DIN housing grammed on one unit. Alleviates
reduces panel space. time consuming conversions and
flow charts
Set Point Status LED
Indicators display set point acti- Alarm LED Indicator shows
vation. Allows user to view alarm activation status. View
process status from a distance. alarm status from a distance.
“Hot Key” saves time by allow- Reset button for clearing an
ing instant access to set point alarm when alarm is set for man-
and alarms. Set points/alarms ual operation.
can be easily adjusted with
arrow keys. Enter a menu or store a value.
From home display press to view
Menu Key Scrolls through full scale range.
menus to adjust settings. 5 sim-
ple menus allow for quick set-
up and reduced installation
120-240 VAC power supply.
time. Reduce inventory and eliminate
lead times with universal power
Adjustable clip for panel
supply.
mounting
Set point 1 output (SPDT).
Set point 2 or alarm output Direct or reverse acting control
(SPDT). Selectable direct acting relay with adjustable deadband.
control relay with adjustable Durable compression fittings
deadband or high, low or high for 1/4˝ O.D. x 1/8˝ I.D. plastic
low alarm. tubing. Secures tubing in harsh
4-20 mA process output. View applications where vibration &
process remotely or send signal temperature fluctuations occur.
to PLC. Alleviates purchase of a RS-485 serial communications
separate transmitter. View, record, and adjust control
settings remotely from a computer
with Modbus® protocol.
24 VDC power supply. Universal
power supply eliminates options, Remote reset switch for alarm.
inventory and ordering mistakes. Acknowledge alarm from remote
location. For users that need quick
MODELS alarm reset from a distance.
Available Pressure Engineering Units
Model No. in. wc ft. wc mm wc cm wc psi in. Hg mm Hg mbar Pa kPa hPa oz./in.2
DH-002 .2500 6.350 0.635 0.467 0.623 62.28 0.623 0.144
DH-004 1.000 25.40 2.540 1.868 2.491 249.1 0.249 2.491 0.578
DH-006 5.000 .4167 127.0 12.70 .1806 .3678 9.342 12.45 1245 1.245 12.45 2.890
DH-007 10.00 .8333 254.0 25.40 .3613 .7356 18.68 24.91 2491 2.491 24.91 5.780
DH-008 25.00 2.083 635.0 63.50 .9032 1.839 46.71 62.27 6227 6.227 62.27 14.45
DH-009* 50.00 4.167 1270 127.0 1.806 3.678 93.42 124.5 12.45 124.5 28.90
DH-010* 100.0 8.333 2540 254.0 3.613 7.356 186.8 249.1 24.91 249.1 57.80
Bi-Directional* Ranges also available: DH-012 Range: 0.25 - 0 - 0.25˝ w.c.
DH-014 Range: 1.0 - 0 - 1.0˝ w.c.
DH-015 Range: 2.5 - 0 - 2.5˝ w.c.
DH-016 Range: 5 - 0 - 5˝ w.c.
DH-017 Range: 10 - 0 - 10˝ w.c.
*Velocity and volumetric flow not available on bi-directional range units and models DH-009 & DH-010.
ACCESSORIES
The Mother Node™ converter is an easy solution for utilizing the Digihelic® Controller’s RS-485 serial
communication and connecting to virtually any PC.
351-9N, Mother Node™ silver RS-232 to RS-485 Converter with DB9F Connector.
351-9, Mother Node™ silver RS-232 to RS-485 Converter with DB9F Connector. Includes
120 VAC to 12 VDC adapter.
A-266, Digihelic® suface mounting bracket.
A-203, 1/8˝ I.D. x 1/4˝ O.D. PVC tubing.
Digihelic® Links, Communication Software
Modbus® is a registered trademark of Schnieder Automation.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 12
p13 7/21/06 3:59 PM Page 1

Pressure Series ®
DHII Digihelic II Differential Pressure Controller
NEMA 4 (IP66) Housing With Large, Bright LCD
1-1/2 1-31/64 4-23/32 3-7/16
[38.35] [37.62] [120] [87.12]
!

4-23/32
[120]
1-45/64
[43.18]

2-23/64
[59.94]
1-17/32 1-45/64
1-5/16 45/64
[38.61] [43.18] 4X Ø3/16 [4.76]
[33] [17.78]
CLEARANCE HOLES FOR
MOUNTING

1-1/16
[26.97] MOUNTING HOLE 3-17/64
PATTERN [83]

1-7/8
[47.5]
4-1/8
[105]

The Digihelic® Controller just got better with the New SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
Series DHII Differential Pressure Controller. The DHII Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
takes all the fabulous features of the standard Digihelic® Housing Material: Aluminum, glass.
Pressure Controller and packages them in a robust NEMA 4 Accuracy: ±0.5% at 77°F (25°C) including hysteresis and repeatability
(IP66) housing. (after 1 hour warm-up).
Stability: < ±1% per year.
Pressure Limits: Ranges 5˝: 5 psi; 10˝: 5 psi; 25˝: 5 psi; 50˝: 5 psi; 100˝: 9
The Digihelic® II Pressure Controller combines the 2 SPDT psi.
control relays, 4-20 mA process output and Modbus® communi- Temperature Limits: 32 to 140°F (0 to 60°C).
Compensated Temperature Limits: 32 to 140°F (0 to 60°C).
cations with a large, brightly backlit 4 digit LCD display that Thermal Effects: 0.020%/°F (0.036/°C) from 77°F (25°C).
can easily be seen from long distances. The electrical wiring Power Requirements:
has also been enhanced in the DHII with its detachable termi- High Voltage Power = 100 to 240 VAC, 50 to 400 Hz or 132 to 240 VDC.
nal blocks. The removable terminals allow the installer to easi- Low Voltage Power = 24 VDC ±20%.
Power Consumption:
ly wire the terminal block outside the housing and then attach Low Voltage Power = 24 VDC - 130 mA max.
to the circuit board, reducing wiring difficulties and installation High Voltage Power = 100 to 240 VAC, 132 to 240 VDC - 7VA max.
time in the process. Output Signal: 4-20 mA DC into 900 ohms max.
Zero & Span Adjustments: Accessible via menus.
Response Time: 250 ms (dampening set to 1).
The Digihelic® II Differential Pressure Control in the new Display: 4 digit backlit LCD 0.6˝ height. LED indicators for set point and
NEMA 4 (IP66) enclosure enables this product to be the perfect alarm status.
choice when mounting pressure controls outdoors in such appli- Electrical Connections: Euro type removable terminal blocks with water-
tight conduit fittings for 1/2˝ watertight conduit.
cations as rooftop air handlers. This housing also makes it the Process Connections: 1/8˝ female NPT.
ideal solution for surface mounting in clean rooms or facilities Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet NEMA 4 (IP66).
where water or a cleaning solution is utilized in maintaining Mounting Orientation: Mount unit in horizontal plane.
plant cleanliness. Size: 4.73˝ x 4.73˝ x 3.43˝ (120 mm x 120 mm x 87.1 mm).
Weight: 2 lb 10 oz (1.19 kg).
Serial Communications: Modbus® RTU, RS485, 9600 Baud.
ACCESSORIES
351-9, Mother Node™ silver RS-232 to RS-485 Converter with SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS
DB9F Connector. Includes 120 VAC to 12 VDC Switch Type: 2 SPDT relays.
adapter. Electrical Rating: 8 Amps at 240 VAC resistive.
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable via keypad on face.
A-438, Surface Mounting Brackets.
Digihelic® Links Communications Software. Modbus® is a registered trademark of Schnieder Automation.
MODELS
Available Pressure Engineering Units
Model No. in. wc ft. wc mm wc cm wc psi in. Hg mm Hg mbar Pa kPa hPa oz. in2.
DHII-002 .2500 6.350 0.635 0.467 0.623 62.28 0.623 0.114
DHII-004 1.000 25.40 2.540 1.868 2.491 249.1 0.249 2.491 0.578
DHII-006 5.000 .4167 127.0 12.70 .1806 .3678 9.342 12.45 1245 1.245 12.45 2.890
DHII-007 10.00 .8333 254.0 25.40 .3613 .7356 18.68 24.91 2491 2.491 24.91 5.780
DHII-008 25.00 2.083 635.0 63.50 .9032 1.839 46.71 62.27 6227 6.227 62.27 14.45
DHII-009* 50.00 4.167 1270 127.0 1.806 3.678 93.42 124.5 12.45 124.5 28.90
DHII-010* 100.0 8.333 2540 254.0 3.613 7.356 186.8 249.1 24.91 249.1 57.80
Bi-Directional* Ranges also available: DHII-012 Range: 0.25 - 0 - 0.25˝ w.c.
DHII-014 Range: 1.0 - 0 - 1.0˝ w.c.
DHII-015 Range: 2.5 - 0 - 2.5˝ w.c.
DHII-016 Range: 5 - 0 - 5˝ w.c.
DHII-017 Range: 10 - 0 - 10˝ w.c.
*Velocity and volumetric flow not available on bi-directional range units and models DHII-009 & DHII-010.

13 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p14 7/26/06 2:52 PM Page 1

Pressure
Series ®
MP Mini-Photohelic Differential
Pressure Switch/Gage
Compact, Low Cost Switch Gage
LOW PRESSURE
PORT

+ 1 [25.4]

HIGH PRESSURE
PORT
3-1/32 [77.00]
MOUNTING HOLES

Ø2-19/32
[65.88]

3-1/8 [79.38] Ø3-1/16 [77.79]

3-7/8 [98.43] 9/32 [7.14]

The Series MP Mini-Photohelic® differential pressure switch/gage SPECIFICATIONS

combines the time proven Minihelic® II differential pressure gage with GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
two SPDT switching setpoints. The Mini-Photohelic gage is designed®
Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
to measure and control positive, negative, or differential pressures con- Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
sisting of non-combustible and non-corrosive gases. Gage reading is Accuracy: ±5% of full scale @ 70ºF (21.1ºC). Gage face
independent of switch operation. Switching status is visible by LED mounted in vertical position.
indicators located on the front and rear of the gage. Set points are Pressure Limits: 30 psig (2.067 bar).
adjusted with push buttons on back of unit. This extremely compact
Temperature Limits: 20 to 120ºF (-6.7 to 49ºC).
Process Connections: Barbed for 3/16˝ I.D. tubing (STD);
switch/gage is ideal for fume hoods, dust collection, pneumatic convey-
1/8˝ male NPT (optional).
ing and clean room applications.
Size: 4-1/8˝ (104.78 mm) depth x 3-1/16˝ (77.79 mm)
diameter.
MODELS Weight: 23 oz (652 g).
Range, Range,
Model Inches of Model MM of SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS
Number Water Number Water
Switch Type: (2) SPDT relays.
MP-000 0-0.5 MP-25MM 0-25
MP-001 0-1.0 MP-50MM 0-50 Electrical Rating: 5A @ 120/240 VAC Resistive; 5A @ 30
MP-002 0-2.0 MP-100MM 0-100 VDC.
MP-003 0-3.0
MP-005 0-5.0 Electrical Connections: Screw type terminal block.
Model Range,
MP-010 0-10 Number Pascals Accepts 22-12 AWG wire.
MP-020 0-20
MP-040 0-40
MP-125Pa 0-125 Power Requirements: 24 VDC / 24 VAC 50/60 Hz 4
MP-250Pa 0-250
MP-060 0-60 MP-500 Pa 0-500
watts.
MP-100 0-100
Mounting Orientation: Gage face in vertical position.
Model Range, Model Range, Set Point Adjustment: Push Buttons.
Number PSI Number kPa
Standard Accessories: (2) mounting screws, (1) .050˝
MP-5PSI MP-1KPa 0-1
0-5 hex allen wrench.
MP-10PSI MP-3KPa 0-3
0-10
MP-15PSI 0-15 Agency Approvals: UL, cUL, CE.
For optional 1⁄8" male NPT connections, add suffix -NPT to model numbers listed above.
Example: MP-000-NPT. No extra charge. Allow additional lead time.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 14
p15 7/24/06 1:44 PM Page 1

Pressure ®
Series
A3000 Photohelic Pressure Switch/Gages
3-in-One Indicating Gage, Lo-Limit and Hi-Limit Control ®
®

2-1/2 [63.50] (4) 6-32 HOLES

1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH 2-1/16 [52.39] EQUALLY SPACED ON
PRESSURE CONNECTION
2 [50.80] A 5-1/8 [130.18] B.C.
1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW 1-1/4
PRESSURE CONNECTION [31.75]

Ø4-3/4 Ø4-47/64
[120.65]
3-7/8 SQ [120.25] Ø5
[98.43]
[127.00]

3/4 CONDUIT Ø4 [101.60]

CONNECTION 3-7/8 [98.43] 5/8 [15.88] FACE
Series A3000 5-1/8 [130.18] 5-1/2 [139.70]
Photohelic® 5/8 [15.88] PANEL O.D.
6-3/8 [161.93] MAX
Switch/Gage. MOUNTING
4-3/8 [111.13] (7-5/8 [193.68]) 3/16 [4.76]
HOUSING REMOVAL RING

Set points are instantly

adjusted with front knobs.

Photohelic® Switch/Gages function as versatile, highly repeatable SPECIFICATIONS

pressure switches combined with a precise pressure gage employing the GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
time-proven Magnehelic® gage design. The Photohelic® gage measures and Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
controls positive, negative or differential pressures of air and compatible Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
gases. Standard models are rated to 25 psig (1.7 bar) with options to 35 Accuracy: ±2% of full scale at 70°F (21.1°C). ±3% on -0 and ±4% on -00
(2.4) or 80 (5.5 bar) psig. Single pressure 36000S models measure to 6000 models.
psig (413 bar) with a 9000 psig (620 bar) rating. Pressure Limits: -20" Hg. to 25 psig (-0.677 to 1.72 bar). MP option; 35
Two phototransistor actuated, DPDT relays are included for low/high limit psig (2.41 bar), HP option; 80 psig (5.52 bar). 36003S – 36010S; 150 psig
control. Easy to adjust setpoint indicators are controlled by knobs located (10.34 bar). 36020S and higher;1.2 x full scale pressure.
on the gage face. Individual setpoint deadband is one pointer width — less Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F.
than 1% of full scale. Setpoints can be interlocked to provide variable dead- (-6.67 to 48.9°C) Low temperature option available.
band — ideal for control of fans, dampers, etc. Gage reading is continuous Process Connections: 1/8˝ female NPT.
and unaffected by switch operation, even during loss of electrical power. Size: 4˝ (101.6 mm) dial face, 5˝ (127 mm) O.D. x 8-1/4˝ (209.55 mm).
Choose from full scale pressure ranges from a low 0-.25" (0-6 mm) w.c. up Weight: 4 lb (1.81 kg).
to 30 psi (21 bar); single positive pressure to 6000 psig (413 bar). SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS
Switch Type: Each setpoint has 2 Form C relays (DPDT).
PHOTOHELIC SENSING — HOW IT WORKS Repeatability: ±1% of full scale.
In typical applications, these Dwyer switch/gages control between high Electrical Rating: 10A @ 28 VDC, 10A @ 120, 240 VAC.
and low pressure set points. When pressure changes, reaching either set Electrical Connections: Screw terminals. Use 167°F (75°C) copper con-
point pressure, the infrared light to the limiting phototransistor is cut off ductors only.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 240 VAC & 24 VAC Power
by the helix-driven light shutter. The resulting phototransistor signal is
optional.
electronically amplified to actuate its DPDT slave relay and switching Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult factory for
occurs. Dead band between make and break is 1% of full scale or less — just other position orientations.
enough to assure positive, chatter-free operation. Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable knobs on face.
Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, CE.
RELAY-TRANSFORMER FEATURES
A plastic housing protects all electronic components. Solid-state and inte-
grated circuit electronics are on glass-epoxy printed circuit boards and STANDARD MODEL
Two phototransistor-actuated circuits and two DPDT relays permit both high and low
self-extinguishing terminal boards (for the Series A3000 only). alarms or limit controls. Relays are de-energized when gage pointer is to the left of respective
set points; relays are energized as pointer passes to the right of set points. Loss of electrical
APPLICATIONS — PHOTOHELIC® SWITCH/GAGES power or loss of pressure provide “fail safe” protection.
In both series of pressure switch/gages, you get the convenience of a
visual indication plus high-low limit switching. For both OEM and in- OPTIONS
plant applications, the Photohelic® switch/gage is used to control pres- Single contact, right set point, for actuation on increasing or decreasing pressure.
OEM Model, less relay and transformer components and housing but including infrared
sures in air conditioning systems, clean rooms, fluidic and pneumatic diodes and phototransistor(s), light shutter and set pointer(s). For single or double con-
control systems, materials handling equipment, alarm or control fume tact.
exhaust systems, control pressure in air structures, and monitor respi- Remote-Mounted Relay, relay pack may be mounted remotely from gage. Standard
length is 5 ft. For other lengths, specify cable length required.
ratory and blood pressures. Tamper-proof knobs, low temperature option, special scales, voltages and other fea-
tures and modifications are available.
Special Housings available include Weatherproof (NEMA 4) and Explosion-proof
(NEMA 7 CD, 9 EFG; NEC Class I, DIV. 1 & 2, Groups C, D, Class II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups
E, F, G, Class III. Contact Customer Service for detailed dimension drawings.
HIGH AND LOW LATCHING CIRCUITS
Dwyer Photohelic® switch/gages can be wired for high-latching, low-latching or combination
high-low latching circuits. That is, the equipment will hold in these respective positions
once activated and until manually reset. This can be particularly useful for alarm and signal
applications where control is accomplished by another Photohelic® switch/gage or other
means. Complete wiring and operational instructions are included. Where manual reset is
required a dry circuit push button such as Dwyer Part A-601 should be used.

15 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p16 7/21/06 4:05 PM Page 1

Pressure
Check these features for dependable control
Bezel and front cover (with set Plastic enclosure protects elec-
point knobs and zero adjustment tronic components and electrical
screw) removed to expose connections.
Photohelic® gage set point mecha- Polycarbonate connection or
nism. Cover is clear polycarbonate terminal board is self-extinguishing
plastic. (A3000 only).
Gage pointer and light shutter Glass-epoxy printed circuit
are mounted on helix and balanc- boards for durability and perfor-
ing counterweight. Shutter passes mance.
through slot in optical limit switch to
expose phototransistors to integral Load relays are DPDT with latch-
infrared light source or mask them ing feature for maximum application
depending on applied pressure. versatility.

Light shield effectively protects Electronics are designed to oper-

phototransistors from strong out- ate on 50/60 Hz, 120 volt current
side light sources yet allows free with 10% over or under voltage.
pointer movement. It also gives Special units for other voltages are
interior a clean “finished” look. available.

Optical limit switches are used Switch set pointers show switch
for reliability and long service life. settings at all times.
Attached directly to set pointers, Spring loaded friction clutch
they are individually aligned to prevents operator damage of set
assure precise switching accuracy. point mechanism.
Semi-Flexible drive shaft con-
nects to set point knobs.
®

Zero adjustment screw con- Patent No. 3,862,416 ®

nects to screw in cover to adjust

zero pressure reading.

MODELS AND RANGES — SERIES A3000 PHOTOHELIC® SWITCH/GAGES

NOTE: Special models can be built to OEM customers' specifications with scales reading in special pressure units like
ounces per square inch, inches of mercury, etc. Square Root Scales reading in FPM or SCFM are also available. Custom
logos and special graduations can also be included. Contact factory for minimum quantities and pricing.

MODELS
Model Range, Model Range, Model Range, Model Range,
Number In W.C. Number PSI Number MM W.C. Number Pascals
A3000-00 0-.25 A3201 0-1 A3000-6MM 0-6 A3000-60PA 0-60
A3000-0 0-.50 A3202 0-2 A3000-10MM 0-10 A3000-125PA 0-125
A3001 0-1.0 A3203 0-3 A3000-25MM 0-25 A3000-250PA 0-250
A3002 0-2.0 A3204 0-4 A3000-50MM 0-50 A3000-500PA 0-500
A3003 0-3.0 A3205 0-5 A3000-80MM 0-80 A3000-750PA 0-750
A3004 0-4.0 A3210** 0-10 A3000-100MM 0-100
A3005 0-5.0 A3215** 0-15 Zero Center Ranges
A3006 0-6.0 Zero Center Ranges
A3220** 0-20
A3008 0-8.0 A3300-20MM 10-0-10 A3300-250PA 125-0-125
A3230*** 0-30
A3010 0-10 A3300-30MM 15-0-15 A3300-500PA 250-0-250
A3015 0-15
Model Range, Model Range,
A3020 0-20 **MP or ***HP option standard
Number CM W.C. Number Kilopascals
A3025 0-25
A3030 0-30 Photohelic® — Single Pressure A3000-15CM 0-15 A3000-1kPA 0-1
A3040 0-40 A3000 20CM 0-20 A3000-1.5kPA 0-1.5
A3050 0-50 A36003S 0-30 A3000-2kPA 0-2
A36006S 0-60 A3000-25CM 0-25
A3060 0-60 A3000-50CM 0-50 A3000-3kPA 0-3
A3080 0-80 A36010S 0-100 A3000-4kPA 0-4
A36020S 0-200 A3000-80CM 0-80
A3100 0-100 A3000-100CM 0-100 A3000-5kPA 0-5
A3150 0-150 A36030S 0 300 A3000-8kPA 0-8
A36060S 0-600 A3000-150CM 0-150
A3000-200CM 0-200 A3000-10kPA 0-10
Bi-Directional Range A36100S 0-1000 A3000-15kPA 0-15
A36300S 0-3000 A3000-250CM 0-250
A3000-300CM 0-300 A3000-20kPA 0-20
A3000-00N .05-.20 A36500S 0-5000 A3000-25kPA 0-25
Zero Center Ranges A3000-30kPA 0-30
A3300-4CM 2-0-2 Zero Center Ranges
A3300-10CM 5-0-5 A3300-1kPA .5-0- .5
Zero Center Ranges Model Range In W.C./ A3300-30CM 15-0-15 1.5-0-1.5
Air Velocity, A3300-3kPA
Number
A3300-0 .25-0-.25 F.P.M.
Options and Accessories — Add options as a suffix. Example: A3001-LT
A3301 .5-0-.5
A3302 1-0-1 A3000-00AV 0-.25/300-2000 -SRH, Single Relay Activates on Increase .......... -MP, Medium pressure ..........................
A3304 2-0-2 A3000-0AV 0-.50/500-2800 -SRL, Single Relay Activates on Decrease ........ -HP, High pressure ................................
A3310 5-0-5 A3001AV 0-1.0/500-4000 -OLS, OEM model.......................................... -LT, Low temperature (-20oF).................
A3320 10-0-10 A3002AV 0-2.0/1000-5600 -RMR, Remote mounted relay........................ A-298 Flat Flush Mounting Bracket .......
A3330 15-0-15 A3010AV 0-10/2000-12500 -TAMP, Tamper proof knobs .......................... A-601, Manual reset switch...................
Pitot tube required

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 16
p17 8/2/06 2:28 PM Page 1

Pressure Series ®
3000MR
3000MRS
Photohelic Switch/Gages
Combines Differential Pressure Gage with Low/High Set-points
1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH 2-1/61 (4) 6-32 HOLES
PRESSURE CONNECTION [52.39] EQUALLY SPACED ON A
5-1/8 [130.18] B.C.
2
1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH [50.80]
PRESSURE CONNECTION
INCHES OF WATER

.4O .60
1-1/4 Ø4-47/64 .2O .80
1.0
[31.75] [120.25] O

Ø5
[127.00]
1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION

5/8 Ø4 [101.60]
[15.88] FACE
5/8 [15.88]
PANEL MAX 5-1/2 [139.70] O.D.
2-1/2 MOUNTING RING
[63.50] 3/16
[4.76]

Using solid state technology, the Series 3000MR and SPECIFICATIONS

3000MRS Photohelic® switch/gages combine the functions of a GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
precise, highly repeatable differential pressure switch with a large Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
easy-to-read analog pressure gage employing the durable, time-proven Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
Accuracy: ±2% of full scale (3000-0 ±3% of full scale). (3000-00 +4% of
Magnehelic® gage design. Switch setting is easy to adjust with large full scale).
external knobs on the gage face. Gage reading is unaffected by switch Pressure Limit: -20˝ Hg. to 25 psig (-0.677 bar to 1.72 bar). MP option;
operation — will indicate accurately even if power is interrupted. Solid 35 psig (2.41 bar), HP option; 80 psig (5.52 bar).
state design now results in greatly reduced size and weight. Units can Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F. (-6.67 to 48.9°C).
Process Connections: 1/8 female NPT (duplicated side and back).
be flush mounted in 4-13/16˝ (122 mm) hole or surface mounted with Size: 4˝ (101.6 mm) dial face, 5˝ (127 mm) O.D. x 3-1/8˝ (79.38 mm).
hardware supplied. 3000MR models employ versatile electromechani- Weight: 1.8 Ib (816 g).
cal relays with gold over silver contacts — ideal for dry circuits. For SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS 3000MR
applications requiring high cycle rates, choose 3000MRS models with Switch Type: Each setpoint has 1 Form C relays (SPDT).
SPST (N.O.) solid state relays. All models provide both low and high Relay Contacts: (resistive load) 1 Form C rated 1.0A @ 30 VDC, 0.3A @
limit control and include 18-inch (45 cm) cable assemblies for electrical 110 VDC or 0.5A @ 125 VAC. Gold over clad silver - suitable for dry
connections. circuits.
Electrical Connections: 18˝ (46 cm) cable assembly with 8 conductors.
Optional lengths to 100´ (30.5 m).
Gage accuracy is ±2% of full scale and switch repeatability is ±1%. Power Requirements: 24 VDC, regulated ±10%.
Switch deadband is one pointer width — less than 1% of full scale. Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult factory for
Compatible with air and other non-combustible, non-corrosive gases, other position orientations.
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable knobs on face.
they can be used in systems with pressures to 25 psig (1.725 bar).
Agency Approvals: CE.
Optional construction is available for use to either 35 psig (2.42 bar)
or 80 psig (5.51 bar). SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS 3000MRS
Switch Type: Each setpoint has a solid state relay.
Included Accessories Switching Voltage: 20-280 VAC (47 - 63 Hz).
Mounting ring, snap ring (4) 6-32 x 11⁄4" RH machine screws Switching Current: 1.0 amp (AC) max., 0.01 mA (AC) min., (2) SPST N.O.
18" (45 cm) cable assembly (panel mounting) Electrical Connections: 18˝ (46 cm) cable assembly with 6 conductors,
(2) 3⁄16" tubing to 1⁄8" NPT adapters (3) 6-32 x 5⁄16" RH machine screws Optional lengths to 100´ (30.5 m).
(2) 1⁄8" NPT pipe plugs (surface mounting) Power Requirements: 24 VDC, regulated ±10%.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult factory for
other position orientations.
SERIES 3000MR, 3000MRS PHOTOHELIC® Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable knobs on face.
Agency Approvals: CE.
MODELS & RANGES
Model Range, Minor Model Range, Minor
OPTIONS — ACCESSORIES
Number Inches w.c. Divs. Number Kilopascals Divs. Tamper-proof Knobs, require spanner type key (supplied) to change set-
points. Add suffix -TAMP
3000(MR)(MRS)**-00 0-0.25 .005 3000(MR)(MRS)-1kPa 0-1.0 .02
3000(MR)(MRS)*-0 0-0.5 .01 3000(MR)(MRS)-3kPa 0-3.0 .10 Low Temperature Option for use under 20°F (-6.7°C).
3001(MR)(MRS) 0-1.0 .02 3000(MR)(MRS)-4kPa 0-4.0 .10 Add suffix -LT
3002(MR)(MRS) 0-2.0 .05 Model Range, Minor
Medium Pressure increases maximum rated pressure to 35 psig
3003(MR)(MRS) 0-3.0 .10 Number MM W.C. Divs. (2.41 bar). Add suffix -MP
3005(MR)(MRS) 0-5.0 .10 High Pressure increases maximum rated pressure to 80 psig
3010(MR)(MRS) 0-10 .20 3000(MR)(MRS)-6MM* 0-6 .20 (5.5 bar). Add suffix -HP
3015(MR)(MRS) 0-15 .50 3000(MR)(MRS)-10MM 0-10 .50
A-298 Flat Aluminum Bracket, for flush mounting 3000MR/MRS
3020(MR)(MRS) 0-20 .50 3000(MR)(MRS)-25MM 0-25 .50
3030(MR)(MRS) 0-30 1.0 3000(MR)(MRS)-50MM 0-50 1.0
3050(MR)(MRS) 0-50 1.0 3000(MR)(MRS)-100MM 0-100 2.0 A-370 Mounting Bracket, flush mount 3000MR/MRS bracket.
3100(MR)(MRS) 0-100 2.0 Bracket is then surface mounted.Steel with gray hammertone
Model Range, Minor epoxy finish
Model Range, Minor Number CM W.C. Divs
Number Pascals Divs. 3000(MR)(MRS)-20CM
A-600 R/C Snubber: Recommended for inductive loads like a
0-20 .50 solenoid or contactor
3000(MR)(MRS)-60Pa* 0-60 2.0 When ordering, select either MR or MRS suffix
3000(MR)(MRS)-125Pa 0-125 5.0 to Series 3000 number.
3000(MR)(MRS)-250Pa 0-250 5.0 Examples: 3001MR or 3001MRS
3000(MR)(MRS)-500Pa 0-500 10.0
* ±3% of full scale. **+ 4% of full scale.

17 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p18 7/21/06 4:16 PM Page 1

Pressure
®
Series
3000SGT Photohelic Pressure Switch/Gage
with Integral Transmitter
Indicating Gage, Low and High Limit Control, 4-20 mA Transmitter
2-1/2 [63.50] (4) 6-32 HOLES
2-1/16 [52.39] EQUALLY SPACED ON A
2 [50.80] 5-1/8 [130.18] B.C.
1-1/4
1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH PRESSURE CONNECTION
[31.75]
1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW PRESSURE CONNECTION

Ø4-3/4 3-7/8 Ø4-47/64 Ø5

[120.65][98.43] [120.25][127.00]
FLANGE SQ.

3/4 CONDUIT Ø4 [101.60]

3-7/8 [98.43] 5/8 [15.88]
CONNECTION FACE
5-1/8 [130.18] 5/8 [15.88]
5-1/2 [139.70] O.D.
4-3/8 [111.13] 6-3/8 [161.93] PANEL MAX
MOUNTING RING
HOUSING (7-5/8 [193.68]) 3/16 [4.76]
REMOVAL

The Series 3000SGT Photohelic® Switch/Gage/Transmitter SPECIFICATIONS

combines several critical control functions into a single, easy-to-install GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
package. This versatile instrument starts with the universally accepted Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
standard for reliable low air pressure measurement, the Dwyer® Accuracy: See model chart below.
Magnehelic® Gage. It measures positive, negative or differential pres- Pressure Limits: See model chart below.
sures within ±2% of full scale accuracy. This time-proven component Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F (-6.67 to 48.9°C).
provides highly reliable analog indication of air or compatible gas pres- Process Connections: 1/8˝ female NPT.
sure on a 4", 80° scale. Gage operation is completely independent — Size: 4˝ (101.6 mm) dial face, 5˝ (127 mm) O.D. x 8-1/4˝ (209.55 mm).
functions normally even if power is interrupted to electrical elements of Weight: 3 lb, 14.5 oz (1.77 kg).
the control.
SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS
Next, two DPDT relays are added which serve as Low/High limit con- Switch Type: Each set point has 2 Form C relays (DPDT).
trols (or pressure switches) capable of handling up to 10 amps @ 28 Repeatability: ±1% of full scale.
VDC or 120/240 VAC directly. Individual setpoint deadband is one Electrical Rating: 10A @ 24 VDC or 120 VAC, 6A @ 240 VAC.
pointer width — less than 1% of full scale; just enough to assure positive, Electrical Connections: Screw terminals.
chatter-free operation. Integral holding coils enable user to connect the Power Requirements: 120 VAC, ±10%.
two so they work like a single control with variable deadband — ideal for Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult factory
applications such as clean room and building pressurization, HVAC sys- for other position orientations.
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable knobs on face.
tems, automatic air filter or level control and much more. Actuation
points are fully adjustable over the entire pressure range with conve- TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS
nient front mounted knobs linked to bright red setpoint indicators. Accuracy: See model chart below.
Finally, the Photohelic® SGT includes a separate 4-20 mA, 2-wire trans- Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F. (-6.67 to 48.9°C).
Pressure Limits: See model chart below.
mitter operating from an external 10.0 – 35 VDC power supply. Thermal Effects: ±0.025% F.S./°F (0.045% F.S./°C).
Separate adjustments are included for zero and span inside the rear Power Requirements: 10.0 to 35 VDC (2-wire).
electronics enclosure. Optional A-700 Power Supply is a perfect com- Output Signal: 4-20 mA DC.
panion rated for AC inputs from 100-240V; DC outputs from 24 – 28V. Zero & Span Adjustments: Multi-turn potentiometers, internally
The transmitter component is an ideal driver for variable speed blow- accessible.
ers and fans, damper positioners and for continuous data logging on Response Time: 250 mSec.
computerized VAV systems or strip chart recorders. Loop Resistance: 0 - 1250 ohms.
Current Consumption: 38 mA DC, maximum.
Besides the obvious cost and space saving advantages of combining all Electrical Connections: Terminal block.
these control functions in a single unit, think of the additional savings Warm-up Time: 10 minutes.
in time and material with just one set of pneumatic lines to connect
instead of three or four.
OPTIONS-ACCESSORIES
Tamper-Proof Knobs — Require special spanner-type key (included) to
adjust set points. Add suffix -TAMP
A-700 Power Supply — AC input: 100/120/220/230-240 VAC ±10%, 47-63
Hz. DC output: 24-28 VDC regulated
A-298 Flat Aluminum Bracket, for flush mounting 3000SGT

MODELS
Model Range, Maximum Electrical Mechanical Range, Maximum Electrical Mechanical
Number In. w.c. Pressure Accuracy +/-% Accuracy +/-% Model Number Pascals Pressure Accuracy +/-% Accuracy +/-%
3000SGT-0 0-0.5 25 psi (1.7 bar) 2 3 3000SGT-250Pa 0-250 25 psi (1.7 bar) 2 2
3001SGT 0-1.0 25 psi (1.7 bar) 2 2 3000SGT-500Pa 0-500 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 0.5 2
3002SGT 0-2.0 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 0.5 2
5 psi (34.5 kPa) 0.5 2 Model Range,
3003SGT 0-3.0
3006SGT 0-6.0 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 0.5 2 Number Kilopascals
3010SGT 0-10 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 0.5 2 3000SGT-1.5kPa 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 0.5 2
2 0-1.5
3020SGT 0-20 10 psi (69 kPa) 0.5
3030SGT 0-30 10 psi (69 kPa) 0.5 2

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 18
p19 7/21/06 4:18 PM Page 1

Pressure ®
Series
43000 Capsu-Photohelic Pressure Switch/Gages
Lo-Limit and Hi-Limit Control, Aluminum or Brass Case Available
(4) 6-32 HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON A
Set points are instantly Series 43000 5-1/8 [130.18] B.C.
adjusted with front knobs. 3-1/16 [77.79] TYP
1/4 FEMALE NPT 1/4 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION CONNECTION (AIR OR GAS)
(AIR OR GAS)
Ø4-3/4 Ø5
[120.65] [127.00]
3-7/8 SQ Ø4-47/64 1/4 FEMALE
[98.43] [120.25] NPT LOW
PRESSURE 1/4 FEMALE NPT
CONNECTION HIGH PRESSURE
(LIQUID) CONNECTION
3/4 CONDUIT 3-7/8 [98.43] 5/8 [15.88] (LIQUID)
CONNECTION
5-1/8 [130.18] 5/8 [15.88] 3/4 [19.05] TYP
7-5/16 [185.74] PANEL MAX Ø [101.60] FACE
Series 43000 4-3/8 [111.13] (8-9/16 [217.49]) 3/16 [4.76]
HOUSING REMOVAL 5-1/2 [139.70] O.D.
Capsu-Photohelic® MOUNTING RING
Switch/Gage.
(4) 6-32 HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON A
5-1/8 [130.18] B.C.
Series 43000B 1/4 FEMALE NPT 1/4 FEMALE NPT
3-1/16 [77.79] TYP LOW PRESSURE HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION CONNECTION (AIR OR GAS)
(AIR OR GAS)
Ø4-3/4 Ø5
[120.65] [127.00]
3-7/8 SQ Ø4-47/64 1/4 FEMALE
[98.43] [120.25] NPT LOW
PRESSURE 1/4 FEMALE NPT
CONNECTION HIGH PRESSURE
(LIQUID) CONNECTION
Series 43000 3/4 CONDUIT 3-7/8 [98.43] 5/8 [15.88] (LIQUID)
Capsu-Photohelic® CONNECTION
5/8 [15.88]
5-1/8 [130.18] 3/4 [19.05] TYP
Switch/Gage with PANEL MAX
7-5/16 [185.74] Ø [101.60] FACE
Brass Body 4-3/8 [111.13] (8-9/16 [217.49]) 3/16 [4.76]
HOUSING REMOVAL 5-1/2 [139.70] O.D.
MOUNTING RING

Capsu-Photohelic® Switch/Gages function as versatile, highly SPECIFICATIONS

repeatable pressure switches combined with a precise pressure gage GAGE SPECIFICATIONS SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases and Switch Type: Each setpoint has 2
employing the time-proven Magnehelic® gage design. The Capsu- liquids. Brass case option required Form C relays (DPDT).
Photohelic® gage employs an encapsulated sensing element for use for water based liquids. Repeatability: ±1% of full scale.
Wetted Materials: Consult facto- Electrical Rating: 10A @ 120
with both liquids and gases at pressures to 500 psig (34 bar). Optional VAC, 6A @ 240 VAC, 60 Hz res.
ry.
cast brass case is available for water or water based liquids. Accuracy: ±3% of full scale at 10A @ 28 VDC.
Two phototransistor actuated, DPDT relays are included for low/high 70°F (21.1°C). ±2% on 43000S Electrical Connections: Screw
models; ±4% on 43215, 43220 Terminals.
limit control. Easy to adjust setpoint indicators are controlled by and 43500. Power Requirements: 120 VAC,
knobs located on the gage face. Individual setpoint deadband is one Pressure Limits: -20 Hg to 500 50/60 Hz; 240 VAC & 24 VAC
psig (-0.677 to 34.5 bar). power optional.
pointer width — less than 1% of full scale. Setpoints can be interlocked Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F. Mounting Orientation:
to provide variable deadband — ideal for control of pumps, etc. (-6.67 to 48.9°C) Low temperature Diaphragm in vertical position.
option available. Consult factory for other position
Process Connections: 1/4˝ orientations.
female NPT. Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable
ACCESSORY knobs on face.
Size: 4˝ (101.6 mm) dial face, 5˝
A-298 Flat Aluminum Bracket for Flush Mounting (127 mm) O.D. x 9-3/16˝ (233.36
mm).
Weight: 5 lb, 8 oz (2.49 kg).
Brass 11 lb, 2 oz (5.05 kg).
MODELS
Model Range, Model Range, Model Range, OPTIONS
Number in. w.c. Number in. w.c. Number psi Single Contact, right set point, for actua-
tion on increasing or decreasing pressure.
43000-0 0-.5 43060 0-60 43201 0-1 Power Supply, 24 VAC or 220 VAC pow-
43001 0-1.0 43080 0-80 43202 0-2 ered relay pack.
43002 0-2.0 43100 0-100 43203 0-3 Remote-Mounted Relay, relay pack may
43204 0-4 be mounted remotely from gage. Specify
43003 0-3.0 43150 0-150 cable length required.
43004 0-4.0 43200 0-200 43205 0-5 Tamper-proof Knobs, low temperature
43005 0-5.0 43300 0-300 43210 0-10 option, special scales, voltages and other
43006 0-6.0 43400 0-400 43215 0-15 features and modifications are available.
0-500 43220 0-20 Special Housings available include
43008 0-8.0 43500 Weatherproof (NEMA 4) and Explosion-
43010 0-10 43302 1-0-1 43230S 0-30
proof (NEMA 7 CD, 9 EFG; NEC Class I, DIV.
43015 0-15 43304 2-0-2 43240S 0-40 1 & 2, Groups C, D, Class II, Div. 1 & 2,
43020 0-20 43310 5-0-5 43260S 0-60 Groups E, F, G, Class III. Contact Customer
43025 0-25 43320 10-0-10 43280S 0-80 Service for detailed dimension drawings.
15-0-15 432100S 0-100 Brass Body, for water based liquids order
43030 0-30 43330 optional brass case by adding “B” to the end
43040 0-40 432200S 0-200 of the model number.
43050 0-50 432300S 0-300 Example: 43001B

19 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p20 7/21/06 4:21 PM Page 1

Pressure
Flush Mount Kit for Magnehelic Gages
®
Series
A-464
Ideal for Clean Rooms & Control Panels

04-33/64
[114.7]

6-1/2 5-3/8
[165.1] [136.5]
Pressure
Reference
03/16
Port [4.8]
5-3/8
1/4 [136.5]
[6.4] 6-1/2
3/4 [165.1]
[19.1]

The A-464 Mounting Kit provides a flush mounting solution for Mag- Advantages and Specifications of the A-464 Kit
nehelic® gage installations for applications such as clean rooms and me- • Provides an innovative solution for flush mounting Magnehelic®
chanical equipment rooms. The A-464 can also be used as an alternative gages.
• Space pressure reference integral to mounting plate.
means to flush mount Magnehelic® gages on control panel enclosures. • Mounting applications include: Sheetrock walls, control panel en
The space pressure reference port eliminates the need to drill separate closures and air handling equipment.
holes and run tubing long distances. Utilizing the A-464 for Magnehel- • Eliminates the need for special hole saws.
ic® gage installations reduces installation time while also producing an • Creates a professional look.
aesthetically pleasing result. • Saves installation time and money.
• Outside dimensions: 6-1/2 x 6-1/2 x 1/4 inches (16.5 x 16.5 x 0.6
cm).
• Material: White ABS plastic.

A-464 Back View A-464

Shown with A-465

Series
A-465 Flush Mount Space Pressure Sensor
Ideal for Clean Rooms

3-1/4 4-1/2
03/16 [82.5] [114.3]
[04.8]

1/4
2-3/4
[6.4]
3/4 [69.9]
[19.1]

The A-465 Space Pressure Sensor Kit provides a clean solution Advantages and Specifications of the A-465 Kit
for sensing space pressure. Typical applications include: sensing the • The professional way to sense space pressure.
pressure in clean rooms, laboratories and building lobbies. The kink re- • Mounting options include: Sheetrock walls, ceiling tiles or single
gang electrical boxes.
sistant tubing provided in the kit is connected to the tubing running to • Non block reference opening prevents plugging.
a pressure transducer, Magnehelic® Gage, VAV unit or any other types • Saves time and money.
of pressure sensing devices. The sensor can be mounted on sheetrock • Outside dimensions: 2-3/4 x 4-1/2 x 1/4 inches (6.9 x 11.4 x 0.6
walls, single gang electrical boxes or on ceiling tiles. The block free cm).
pressure reference opening along with the kink resistant tubing ensure • Attractive design blends in with building decor.
• Materials: White ABS plastic.
accurate readings at all times.

A-465

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 20
p21 7/21/06 4:22 PM Page 1

Pressure

Manometers
Pressure is defined as a force per unit area — and the most accurate Instruments employing this principle are called manometers. The sim-
way to measure low air pressure is to balance a column of liquid of plest form is the basic and well-known U-tube manometer. (Fig. 2-1).
known weight against it and measure the height of the liquid column This device indicates the difference between two pressures (differen-
so balanced. The units of measure commonly used are inches of mer- tial pressure), or between a single pressure and atmosphere (gage
cury (in. Hg.), using mercury as the fluid and inches of water (in. w.c.), pressure), when one side is open to atmosphere.
using water or oil as the fluid. If a U-tube is filled to the half way point with water and air pressure
is exerted on one of the columns, the fluid will be displaced. Thus one
leg of water column will rise and the other falls. The difference in
height “h” which is the sum of the readings above and below the half
way point, indicates the pressure in inches of water column.
The U-tube manometer is a primary standard because the difference
in height between the two columns is always a true indication of the
pressure regardless of variations in the internal diameter of the tub-
ing. This principle makes even the Dwyer® Slack Tube® roll-up
manometer as accurate as a laboratory instrument. This provides a
h h real convenience to the person who might otherwise have to board an
airplane carrying a 60" long rigid glass U-tube manometer.

Fig. 2-1. In its Fig. 2-2. When Fig. 2-3. When a

simplest form the positive pressure vacuum is applied
manometer is a is applied to one to one leg, the liq-
U-tube about half leg, the liquid is uid rises in that leg
filled with liquid. forced down in and falls in the
With both ends of that leg and up in other. The differ-
the tube open, the other. The dif- ence in height, Fig. 2-4. At left, equal pressure is imposed on the fluid in the well
the liquid is at the ference in height, “h,” which is the and in the indicating tube. Reading is zero. At the right, a posi-
same height in “h,” which is the sum of the read- tive pressure has been imposed on the liquid in the well causing
each leg. sum of the read- ings above and the level to go down very slightly. Liquid level in indicating tube
ings above and below zero, indi- has risen substantially. Reading is taken directly from scale at
below zero, indi- cates the amount liquid level in indicating tube. The scale has been compensated
cates the pressure. of vacuum. for the drop in level in the well.

FACTORS AFFECTING MANOMETER

While the basic manometer principle of hydrostatic balance is Dwyer colored gage oil is a stable petroleum base oil with care-
®

inherently 100% accurate, there are factors that can affect the fully controlled specific gravity which gives an excellent, consis-
actual pressure measurement obtained. Careful design and con- tent, high visibility meniscus. Dwyer® manometers for use with
struction plus careful usage can eliminate or greatly reduce the water are furnished with a fluorescein green concentrate which
effect of these factors. when added to water serves as a wetting agent and a dye to
CHARACTERISTICS OF INDICATING FLUID. No improve the consistency and visibility of the meniscus for easier
manometer can be read more accurately than the accuracy with more accurate readability.
which the specific gravity of the fluid is known. The fluid must READABILITY. As we have seen, inclining the indicating tube
also have good “wetting” characteristics and be capable of form- and scale of a manometer, the use of lower specific gravity indi-
ing a consistent, well shaped meniscus in the indicating tube to cating fluids and the use of fluids that give a uniform, well defined
facilitate accurate, repeatable readings. meniscus facilitate accurate reading. Scales must be clear, sharp,
The fluid used also affects the operating range of the manome- accurate and easy to read. For accuracy, it is essential that the
ter. Mercury being 13.6 times the weight of water will move
1/13.6th the distance water will move in response to a given
Fig. 2-5. Portion of the
pressure. Dwyer® .826 sp. gr. gage oil being lighter than water scale of a Dwyer® No.
will move about 1.2 times farther than water in response to a 250.5 solid plastic in-
given pressure. This, obviously, expands the scale for easier, clined manometer shown
more precise reading. full size. Parallax free
reading is made by align-
Dwyer® U-tube and well-type manometers are furnished with ing meniscus with its
inch scales for use with water or mercury or adjusted scales for reflection in the polished
use with .826 sp. gr. gage oil. Dwyer® solid plastic vertical, scale.
inclined and inclined-vertical gages use gage oil.

21 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p22 7/21/06 4:23 PM Page 1

Pressure
VARIATIONS IN MANOMETER DESIGN For an inclined manometer to be a primary device, the inclined tube
To overcome the U-tube requirement of readings at two different must be straight and uniform. Dwyer’s precision machined solid plastic
places, the well-type manometer was developed. See Fig. 2-4. The construction has been applied to a basic line of rugged manometers,
reservoir (well) may be made large enough so that the change of inclined and inclined-vertical, which are industry accepted as primary
level in the reservoir is negligible, or the scale may be compensat- instruments. See discussion below.
ed for the change in reservoir liquid level. For purposes of a more The combination of an inclined and a vertical manometer is very useful
practical instrument the Dwyer ® well-type manometer uses a pre- in air movement determination. See Fig. 3-2. For air velocity measure-
cision bored well that requires approximately a 10% scale correc- ment, an inclined scale, generally up to 1" w.c. is used (1" w.c. velocity
tion for well drop effect, thus avoiding an overly large and bulky pressure=4000 fpm). In the Dwyer® Durablock® inclined-vertical instru-
reservoir. ment, this scale is combined with a vertical section allowing readings of
To improve and expand readability, certain Dwyer ® U-tube and high pressures, usually 1" w.c. to 5 to 10" w.c., to be taken. The vertical
well-type manometers are available with a .826 sp. gr. red oil indi- section is used primarily for determining static pressure above the
cating fluid, and scales compensated to read pressure directly in range of the inclined section.
inches of water. To further increase readability and sensitivity, Many special purpose types of manometers exist. Examples are the
the well-type manometer indicating tube is inclined, as in Fig. 3-1, Dwyer® Hook Gage and Microtector® gage. These are simply U-tube
to cause a greater linear movement along the tube for a given manometers modified so the liquid level can be read with a microme-
pressure difference. The inclined manometer is frequently called ter, yet retaining the basic “Physics” of the hydrostatic U-tube prima-
a Draft Gage because it is widely used for determining the over- ry standard. Readings accurate to ±.001" w.c. in a range of differential
fire draft in boiler uptakes and flues. pressures from 0-24" w.c. are accomplished with Dwyer Model No.
1425-24 Hook Gage. The Model 1430 Microtector® gage incorporates
modern electronics to increase the accuracy of readings to ±.00025"
w.c. on a 2" w.c. scale.

Fig. 3-1. At left, equal pressure is imposed on the liquid in the well
and the indicating tube. Reading is zero. At the right, a positive
pressure has been imposed on the liquid in the indicating tube Fig. 3-2. At left with equal pressure on liquid in well and
pushing it down to a point on the scale equal to the pressure. indicating tube, reading is zero. When positive pressure is
Liquid level in the well rises proportionately. Inclining the indicat- imposed on liquid in indicating tube, liquid level is depressed in
ing tube has opened up the scale to permit more precise reading tube and rises slightly in well. Reading is direct since scale is
of the pressure. compensated for change of level in well.

PERFORMANCE AND USAGE

readings be made with the line of sight perpendicular to the fluid this compensation. In glass tube instruments this error can
column to eliminate parallax error. only be minimized by a large ratio of reservoir to indicating
Dwyer® solid plastic manometers assure parallax-free readings by tube area, by the use of precision bore tubing or by both. In
the use of silk-screened scales on polished aluminum which reflect the Dwyer® solid plastic design, the use of machining tech-
the image of the meniscus. When the meniscus and its reflection niques accurate to .0002˝ for wells and indicating bores
are aligned, the line of sight is perpendicular to the fluid column reduces this error to insignificance.
at the meniscus and an accurate reading is assured. Smoothly 2. Indicating Bore Straightness. This is a very real problem
machined bores further enhance the visibility of the meniscus. with glass tubing. Even with precision bore glass tubing, con-
LEVELING. Accurate readings with inclined and inclined-vertical centricity between I.D. and O.D. is difficult to control.
manometers require that the inclined portion of the scale be at the Additionally, there is the problem of supporting the tube by
exact angle for which it is designed. All Dwyer® solid plastic its O.D. in perfect linearity with its I.D. Magnitude of error
inclined and inclined-vertical manometers are equipped with inte- from this cause is, therefore, a function of the quality of this
gral, sensitive spirit levels to facilitate this requirement; most also particular piece of precision bore tubing and the manner of
have a screw type leveling adjustment. tube mounting. Variations in accuracy from gage to gage and
in a given gage over a period of time can be anticipated as the
FACTORS IN DESIGN AND MANUFACTURE tube is bumped or bent in use. In contrast, indicating tube
THAT AFFECT INCLINED MANOMETER ACCURACY bores up to 24˝ long in Dwyer® solid plastic manometers are
1. “Well Drop” (ratio of the area of the reservoir to the area of the straight to within .002˝ over their entire length. It should also
indicating tube). As the fluid rises or falls in the indicating tube be noted that in the Dwyer® design with a massive solid block
the level in the reservoir will fall or rise correspondingly and the of acrylic plastic, this straightness tolerance is effective for
scale must be compensated accordingly. Inaccuracies in the diam- the life of the instrument.
eter of the reservoir or the indicating tube will create errors in

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 22
p23 7/24/06 2:49 PM Page 1

Pressure ®
Durablock Solid Plastic Portable Gages
Suitable for Total Pressures Up to 100 psig, Temperatures Up to 150°F,
Accuracy ±2% of Full Scale (1% on Model 115 Only)
Model
No. Dimensions
A B
100.5 1111⁄16 215⁄16
101 81⁄2 25⁄16
102.5 12 41⁄2
109 111⁄2 511⁄16
115 91⁄2 31⁄16
170 53⁄4 27⁄16
171 53⁄4 17⁄8
C D
104 311⁄16 81⁄4
104-6 43⁄16 107⁄8
104-8 45⁄8 131⁄16
104-10 55⁄16 151⁄4

Dwyer® solid plastic portable manometers are precision instruments in Design and Service Features
inclined and vertical (well-type) styles for the measurement of static • 1˝ Thick Acrylic Plastic Body is a solid block, virtually unbreakable, stable
and free of the danger of distortion.
pressure, vacuum or differential pressure. • Drilled Bore Accurate to ±.0002˝ are permanently free of bends or crooks,
To assure the accuracy required in instruments of this type, all ma- will not require recalibration because of distortion.
chining of bores and wells is to the highest standards of precision • Selected Gage Oil with high wetability characteristics forms a consistent,
well shaped meniscus for easy readability.
backed by Dwyer’s years of experience in the fabrication of acrylic in- • Adjustable Reflective Chrome Finish Scales with thumbscrew locking for
struments. easy zeroing.
• Parallax-Free Reading for maximum accuracy and consistency is achieved
by simply aligning the meniscus with its image reflected in the polished
aluminum scale.
• Screw Type Leveling Adjustment for inclined style gages provides rapid
MODELS and accurate leveling with reference to integral sensitive ground glass bubble
INCLINED TYPE level.
Range
• Furnished Complete with accessories and plastic carrying case.
Minor Carrying Case
Model Inches of Scale Scale Weight STANDARD ACCESSORIES
No. Water Divisions Length Type Dimensions Ibs-oz.
Plastic or steel carrying case (plastic pouch for 170, 171 and 172), two magnetic
100.5 .10-0-1.0 .01 81⁄4" Plastic 131⁄2 x 10 x 23⁄8 5-1
121⁄4 x 61⁄4 x 13⁄4 3-5
mounting clips, two rapid shut-off nylon tubing connections, one 9’ length rub-
101 .05-0- .50 .01 5" Plastic
102.5 .20-0-2.0 .01 83⁄4" Plastic 131⁄2 x 10 x 23⁄8 5-10 ber tubing, terminal tube and extra bottle .826 red gage oil.
109 .20-0-3.0 .02 83⁄4" Plastic 131⁄2 x 10 x 23⁄8 6
115 .05-0- .25 .005 6" Plastic 121⁄4 x 61⁄4 x 13⁄4 3-10 No. 100.5 solid plastic portable gage with .10-0-1.0˝ w.c.
170 0-.50 .02 21⁄2" Plastic 7x9 1-7 range. Shown with carrying case and standard acces-
171 0-.25 .01 21⁄2" Plastic 7x9 1-6 sories.
VERTICAL TYPE
104 0-4 .10 41⁄2" Plastic 121⁄4 x 61⁄4 x 13⁄4 3-0
104-6 0-6 .10 73⁄4" Plastic 131⁄2 x 1O x 23⁄8 4-8
104-8 0-8 .10 9" Metal 181⁄2 x 43⁄8 x 21⁄4 4-12
104-10 0-10 .10 111⁄8" Metal 181⁄2 x 43⁄8 x 21⁄4 4-15
NOTE: Model 100.5 replaces model 100. Model 102.5 replaces model 102. No. 104 solid plastic portable vertical manometer shown
attached to inside of carrying case cover. Gage may also be
removed from case and used in standing position or at-
tached to any vertical steel surface with magnetic clips pro-
vided.

Standard Accessories
Molded Nylon Rapid Shut Off Magneclips For Split Second Mounting High Density Polyethylene Foam
Tubing Connectors On Any Steel Surface Lined Carrying Cases

Exclusive Dwyer® leak-proof, corrosion- Dwyer® mounting magnets are attached to all Most Dwyer® portable gages are furnished
proof, virtually unbreakable molded nylon Dwyer solid plastic inclined portable gages with carrying cases of high density polyethyl-
connector requires just one counter clockwise (left, above) and furnished as clips that can be ene. Models 104-8 & 104-10 have steel
turn to open, one clockwise turn to close. Ro- attached to all Dwyer solid plastic vertical cases. For protection of the gage and acces-
tating connector seats on O-ring for absolute portable gages (right, above). Just touch the sories, both plastic and steel cases are lined
closure and is O-ring sealed at top. Connector magnets to any vertical steel surface; gage will with resilient polyurethane plastic foam. Nos.
body is also O-ring sealed and is easily re- “stay put” until it is forcibly detached. 170, 171 & 172 include plastic pouch.
moved for cleaning or adding fluid.

23 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p24 7/21/06 4:29 PM Page 1

Pressure
®
Durablock Solid Plastic Stationary Gages
Suitable for Total Pressures Up to 100 psig, Temperatures Up to 150°F.
Accuracy ±2% of Full Scale (1% on Models 215, 244, 246 Only)
Model Dimensions, Inches
No.
A B C D E F G
200.5 7 13 315⁄16 113⁄8 2 41⁄2
201 7 10 35⁄16 81⁄4 2 3
202.5 9 13 55⁄8 12 2 41⁄2
209 9 13 7 111⁄4 2 41⁄2
215 7 10 31⁄16 91⁄2 2 3
244 11 161⁄2 81⁄8 155⁄8 4 81⁄2
246 131⁄2 23 11 22 4 15
300 7 10 2 3 81⁄4
306 7 16 4 4 107⁄8
308 7 16 4 4 131⁄16
310 7 16 4 4 151⁄4

No. 310 solid plastic vertical style

stationary gage.

No. 200.5 solid plastic inclined style

stationary gage.

Dwyer® solid plastic stationary gages — or draft gages — are offered in Design and Service Feature
inclined and vertical (well-type) styles for highly accurate laboratory or • 1˝ Thick Acrylic Plastic Body is a solid block, virtually unbreakable, stable and
general industrial service, for measurement of low range gas and air pres- free of the danger of distortion.
sures, positive, negative or differential. To assure the accuracy required • Drilled Bores Accurate To ±.0002˝ is stable, free of bends or crooks, will never re-
in instruments of this type, all machining of bores and wells is to the quire recalibration because of distortion.

highest standards of precision backed by Dwyer’s years of experi- • Selected Gage Oil with high wetability characteristics forms a consistent, well
shaped meniscus for most accurate reading.
ence in the fabrication of acrylic instruments.
• Adjustable Reflective Polished Aluminum Scales with thumbscrew locking for
easy zeroing.
MODELS
• Parallax-Free Reading for maximum accuracy and consistency is achieved by
INCLINED TYPE simply aligning the meniscus with its image reflected in the scale.
Range Minor
Model Inches of Scale • Over Pressure Safety Traps prevent loss of fluid due to over range pressures or
Scale Weight
No. Water Divisions Length surges in pressure. (Not required on No. 215.)
Ibs-oz.
200.5 .10-0-1.0 .01 81⁄4 3-11 • Leveling Adjustment for inclined style gages is achieved by simply loosening a
201 .05-0-.50 .01 51⁄2 2-12 locking thumb screw on the side or bottom of the gage, adjusting with reference to
202.5 .20-0-2.0 .01 83⁄4 4-7 the integral sensitive ground glass bubble level and retightening.
209 .20-0-3.0 .02 83⁄4 4-11
215 .05-0-.25 .005 6 2-14 • Heavy Gauge Steel Mounting Panels are gray hammerloid finished.
244 0-4 .02 131⁄4 9-11
246 0-6 .02 20 13-14 STANDARD ACCESSORIES
VERTICAL OR WELL-TYPE One extra bottle of .826 red gage oil, instructions and one set of type “a” con-
300 0- 4 .10 4I⁄2 2-5 nections, described below, unless other connection option is specified.
306 0- 6 .10 73⁄4 3-3
308
310
0- 8
0-10
.10
.10
9
111⁄8
3-7
3-10
Connection Options For Dwyer Solid Plastic Stationary Gages
Standard Cat. No. A-316 & A-330
NOTE: Model 200.5 replaces Model 200. Model 202.5 replaces model 202.

Over-Pressure Safety Traps Prevent Fluid Loss

Exclusive Dwyer® over pressure safety
traps assure that over range pressures
whether gradual or a sudden surge will Cat.Nos. A-316 & A-310
Cat.Nos. A-316 & A-324
not force the liquid out of the gage. Over
pressures simply float the cork, force
the O-ring over the opening and seal the
fluid in the gage. When pressure is re-
duced, cork drops down releasing the
O-ring safety trap opens and the gage
continues in operation.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 24
p25 7/21/06 4:30 PM Page 1

Pressure
®
Durablock Inclined-Vertical Manometers
Series 424 — Accuracy To ± 1⁄4 Of 1%

Dwyer® No. 424 inclined-vertical manometers are

extremely accurate instruments designed and
made especially for precision measurement of low
differential pressures in laboratory and test ap-
plications. The inclined range bore has a length of
20" to provide ample multiplication of indicating
fluid movement in this critical lower part of the
range.

Features of the Model 424

• 11⁄4" THICK ACRYLIC PLASTIC BODY
is a solid block, virtually unbreakable, Fig. 8-1. No. 424-10 Inclined-Vertical Manometer,
stable and absolutely free of the danger of 0-10" water range. The inset shows a segment of
distortion. the inclined scale in actual size. No. 424-5, 0-5"
• 3⁄16" BORES, ACCURATE TO ±.0002" water range is similar.
are permanently free of bends or
crooks, will not require recalibration
because of distortion.
• GROUND GLASS BUBBLE LEVEL
Series 420 Inclined-Vertical Manometers Accurate To ±1%
sensitive to 115-125 sec./2 mm. is 11⁄2" long x
.375" diameter and provided with two red lines for
easy visibility and alignment. Fig. 8-2. Typical of Series 420 Inclined-Vertical
Manometers is this No. 422-10 double column
• PARALLAX-FREE READING for maximum
manometer with a total range of 0 to 10" of water.
accuracy and consistency is achieved by simply Single column models are also furnished. Design
aligning the meniscus with its image reflected in features are essentially the same as for the Series
the polished aluminum scale. 424. They are accurate to ±1% and are particularly
• SELECTED GAGE OIL with high wetability suited for use with pitot tubes and in flow measure-
characteristics forms a consistent, well shaped ment or similar applications.
meniscus for perfect readability.
• O-RING SEALED FLUID LEVEL PLUNGER \
ADJUSTMENT for easy zeroing.

Ranges And Dimensions

Suitable for Total Pressure up to 100 psig, Temperatures up to 150°F
MODELS
Inclined In- Length Vertical Length
clined Dimensions Weight
Range of Range Vertical of
Model Inches Minor Inclined Inches Minor Vertical lbs.-
No. of Water Div. Scale of Water Div. Scale A B C D E F G ozs.
424-5 0-2.0 .01 20" 2.1- 5 .10 31⁄4" 101⁄2" 251⁄4" 125⁄8" 1" 101⁄2" 53⁄8" 10" 14-8
424-10 0-2.0 .01 20" 2.1-10 .10 9" 161⁄2" 251⁄4" 125⁄8" 1" 101⁄2" 53⁄8" 16" 22-12
COLUMN
SINGLE

421-5 0-1.0 .01 6 1⁄2 " 1.1- 5 .10 45⁄8" 97⁄8" 95⁄8" 47⁄8" 5
⁄8" 61⁄2" 31⁄4" 97⁄8" 4-12
421-10 0-1.0 .01 6 1⁄2 " 1.1 -10 .10 101⁄8" 151⁄2" 95⁄8" 47⁄8" 5
⁄8" 61⁄2" 31⁄4" 151⁄2" 6-10
421-23 0-2.2 .02 6 1⁄8 " 2.4-23.0 .20 101⁄4" 151⁄2" 95⁄8" 47⁄8" 5
⁄8" 61⁄2" 31⁄4" 151⁄2" 6-10
422-5 0-1.0 .01 6 1⁄2 " 1.1 -5 .10 45⁄8" 101⁄2" 111⁄2" 51⁄8" 5
⁄8" 61⁄2" 31⁄4" 101⁄2" 6-10
COLUMN
DOUBLE

422-10 0-1.0 .01 6 1⁄2 " 1.1-10 .10 101⁄8" 161⁄8" 111⁄2" 51⁄8" 5
⁄8" 61⁄2" 31⁄4" 161⁄8" 10-13
422-23 0-2.2 .02 6 1⁄8 " 2.4-23.0 .20 101⁄4" 161⁄8" 111⁄2" 51⁄8" 5
⁄8" 61⁄2" 31⁄4" 161⁄8" 10-12
*424-250MM 0-50MM .2MM 19 5⁄8 " 52-250MM 2.0MM 87⁄8" 161⁄2" 251⁄4" 125⁄8" 1" 101⁄2" 53⁄8" 16" 22-12
*Single column metric-ranges and divisions in millimeters.

STANDARD ACCESSORIES include two 3⁄4 oz. bottles of .826 Model Number Model Number
red gage oil (1.91 blue gage oil for models 421-23 and 422-23), rapid 421-5 .................................................. 422-10..............................................
421-10 ................................................ 422-23..............................................
shut-off type “a” connections, two 3 ft. lengths of clear plastic tubing 421-23 ................................................ 424-5................................................
and two 1⁄8" NPT tubing adapters — two sets for double column models. 422-5 .................................................. 424-10..............................................

25 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p26 7/24/06 2:21 PM Page 1

Pressure
®

Flex-Tube Well-Type Manometers

Dwyer® Flex-Tube® Well Type Manometers are designed to meet the
need for a direct reading single column instrument providing highly ac-
curate pressure readings; positive, negative or differential. Unlike
3-9/16
other makes, Dwyer® manometers have no hidden wells or packing
[90.49] glands. These instruments are constructed of shatterproof clear plas-
tic tubing permanently bonded to well assemblies with leakproof glued
joints. Well assemblies are precisely machined from solid acrylic plas-
Ø3/16 [4.76]
MOUNTING tic. Overpressure safety traps assure protection against loss of fluid.
HOLE Heavy pure white acrylic plastic scales have sharp black silk screened
TYP 2 figures and graduations sealed with clear mylar coating. Scales are ad-
PLACES
justed with quick-acting positive mechanism. Heavy heat treated alu-
minum back plates have durable gray hammerloid finish. These
manometers are rated to 100 psig (6.89 bar). Not recommended for
vacuum service beyond 5 in. Hg (68 in w.c.).

Series No.1230 Manometers (wall mounting type), Fig.9-1, have

1-3/8 1-1/2
mounting holes for easy installation. They may also be used as portable
[34.93] 3/4 [38.10] manometers and can be hung or attached to any vertical steel surface
TYP
2-3/4 [19.05] by magnetic mounting clips. All parts are fully visible and readily acces-
[69.85] sible for cleaning.
Series No. 1235 Manometers (panel mounting type), Fig. 9-2. All
pressure connections are made from the back, with the micrometer
zero scale adjustment in front at the base of the liquid column.
Multi-Tube Manometer, Fig. 9-3, of the same design as the No.
Fig. 9-1. No. 1230 -8 wall mount- 1235 series are available with any number of tubes mounted on a sin-
ing well-type manometer. gle panel. They are designed for semi-flush panel mounting with all
pressure connections made from the back. Reading columns are on 11⁄2˝
centers.
Special Scales. Psi and metric scales, available in aluminum panel.
Higher ranges and other special scales in Benelex panel.
Standard Accessories include one set of type “a” connections, .826
sp. gr. red gage oil for “D” style or fluorescein green dye concentrate
with wetting agent for “W/M” styles, two 3 ft. lengths of clear vinyl tub-
ing and two 1⁄8˝ NPT tubing adapters.
To Order, please indicate scale desired. Specify “W/M” with Model
Number for inches of water, using water or inches of mercury, using
mercury; and “D” for inches of water using .826 sp. gr. red gage oil. Red
gage oil is often preferred for readings in inches of water because of
the longer scale and slower evaporation rate. This lessens the need for
frequent re-zeroing and refilling. If not otherwise indicated, “W/M” style
Fig 9-3. Series 1235 manome- manometers will be shipped.
Fig. 9-2. No. 1235-8 panel ters are also available with mul-
mounting well-type manome- tiple tubes mounted on 11⁄2˝
ter, side and front view to show centers on a common panel.
rear connections.

N0. 1230 SERIES WALL MOUNTING N0. 1235 SERIES PANEL MOUNTING
MODELS MODELS
Scale in Scale in
Inches DIMENSIONS Mercury Inches DIMENSIONS Mercury
of Water Req'd of Water Req'd
Model or B to Fill Model or B to Fill
No. Mercury A W/M D C (Wt.) No. Mercury A W/M D C (Wt.)
1230-8 0- 8 23⁄4 153⁄16 163⁄4 11⁄2 12 oz. 1235-8 0- 8 23⁄4 173⁄8 181⁄2 21⁄2 12 oz.
1230-12 0-12 23⁄4 193⁄8 217⁄8 11⁄2 14 oz. 1235-20 0-20 23⁄4 295⁄16 339⁄16 21⁄2 18 oz.
1230-16 0-16 23⁄4 231⁄2 27 11⁄2 16 oz. 1235-36 0-36 23⁄4 451⁄16 5115⁄16 21⁄2 26 oz.
1230-20 0-20 23⁄4 279⁄16 321⁄8 11⁄2 18 oz.
1230-24 0-24 23⁄4 327⁄8 373⁄16 11⁄2 20 oz.
1230-36 0-36 23⁄4 431⁄8 511⁄4 11⁄2 26 oz.

Model No. Model No. Model No.

1230-8-W/M.................................. 1230-20-W/M .................................. 1235-8-W/M...............................
1230-12-W/M................................ 1230-24-W/M .................................. 1235-20-W/M.............................
1230-16-W/M................................ 1230-36-W/M .................................. 1235-36-W/M.............................

Note: Water/Mercury models for 0.826 S.P. Gage Oil models change -W/M to a “-D”.
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 26
p27 7/21/06 4:33 PM Page 1

Pressure
®

Slack Tube Manometers

The Handy Roll-Up Manometer With Laboratory Accuracy
Dwyer® Slack Tube® Manometers are unbreakable. Tubing connectors extend
as accurate as the finest laboratory horizontally allowing 360° freedom. Tubes
“U” gages — yet they are made to roll up won’t bend or pinch off.
compactly for easy carrying and to with- All models have over pressure safety traps Fig. 12-2.
stand rough usage. in the top of both columns to prevent loss of (At right).
Simply unroll the Dwyer® Slack-Tube® fluid due to over range pressures or surges Slack Tube®
Manometer
Manometer and set up to read static pres- in pressure. See Fig. 7-3. extended.
sure, vacuum, or differential pressure. Slack Tube® Manometers are suitable for
Magnetic clips hold it firmly to any steel intermittent total pressure to 50 psi and
surface or hang it on a nail. Turn connec- vacuum not exceeding 20˝ Hg. Avoid tem-
tors one revolution to open. When the pres- peratures above 130°F and continuous high
sure is imposed, add the number of inches total pressure. Not for use with red gage
one column travels up to the number of oil; use only water or mercury.
inches the other column travels down.
When reading is completed turn connec- MODELS
tors to seal columns, roll up manometer Hg Req’d
Model Range, In. (oz.)
into compact coil and tuck it away in its cir-
cular metal case or a tool box. No fluid lost. 1211-8 4-0-4 6
No loose caps or inserts to lose. 1211-12 6-0-6 7
Dwyer® Slack Tube® Manometers cover a 1211-16 8-0-8 9
wide range of pressure readings — from 1211-24 12-0-12 12-1⁄2
4-0-4 inches up to 60-0-60 inches. Use them 1211-30 15-0-15 15
in determining velocity and static pres- 1211-36 18-0-18 17-1⁄2
1211-48 24-0-24 22-1⁄2
sures, for leakage, fan and blower tests,
1211-60 30-0-30 27
calibrating control devices, checking gas
1211-72 36-0-36 32
pressure and many other applications. All
1211-120 60-0-60 57
models have flexible vinyl-plastic columns
Hg Req'd
and flexible spring steel scale calibrated in Metric Range,CM (oz.)
inches of water using water, and inches of 1211-50 25-0-25 11
mercury using mercury. Scale is center- 1211-100 50-0-50 18-1⁄2
mounted between columns to eliminate 1211-200 100-0-100 35
parallax error and has a full 2-inch sliding
zero adjustment. Standard Accessories are metal carry-
ing case, magnetic mounting clips, two
All Dwyer® Slack Tube® Manometers rapid shutoff type molded nylon rubber Fig. 12-1. (left).
feature exclusive molded nylon tubing tubing connectors and one bottle of Slack Tube®
connector assemblies with rapid shutoff fluorescein green color concentrate with Manometer rolled up
design in an acrylic plastic top (see Fig. wetting agent. Mercury is not included but for easy handling and
5-3).. One turn counter clockwise and the will be furnished at added cost when storage.
instrument is ready for use. Another turn specified.
seals the tubes completely. Molded all-nylon Optional Accessories are available in a
construction makes this assembly corro- wide choice and are listed on the Accessories
sion-proof, leakproof and practically pages, in the Misc. Section.

NO. 1212 Gas Pressure Kit For Servicing Gas Appliances

A handy, complete kit containing a 16" What the kit consists of:
Slack Tube® Manometer, necessary 1 – #1211-16 Slack Tube® Manometer,
tubing and connection fittings for reads pressure to 16˝ water.*
checking gas pressures in virtually all 1 – Carrying case, plastic, 81⁄2˝ x 7˝ x 31⁄8˝
gas appliances such as water heaters, 1 – 3⁄4 oz. bottle Fluorescein green color
furnaces, stoves and dryers. Different concentrate with wetting agent
range manometers may be specified at 2 – 1⁄8˝ pipe thread rubber tubing
corresponding prices. Compared to the adapters
cost of purchasing items separately the 1 – 1⁄8˝ to 1⁄4˝ pipe thread bushing
assembly of component parts into kit 1 – 3 ft. length 3⁄16˝ rubber tubing
form represents substantial savings. 1 – Rubber tubing adapter to fit
standard 7⁄16˝ dia. spud.
*Other ranges available.
1212 Gas Pressure Kit Fig. 12-3

27 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p28 7/21/06 4:37 PM Page 1

Pressure
Series
1213 Gas Pressure Manometer
The “Tube in a Tube” Direct Reading Manometer
1/2
[12.70]

WATER
[25.40]

OF
INCHES
*1213-15 SHOWN.
1/4 ID x 3/8 OD 1213-7 IS
x 3 FT LONG 3/4 DIA 11 INCHES LONG
VINYL TUBING [19.05] OVERALL
[6.35 ID x 9.53 OD
x 914.40] *17
[431.80]

1/8-27 NPT

Provide visual indication of pressure with the Series 1213 Gas SPECIFICATIONS Piping Connections: 1/8˝ male
Pressure Manometer. Designed for use with natural gas, the manome- Temperature Limit: 140°F NPT connector provided.
ter can also be used to monitor any compatible gases up to 15 inches (60°C) maximum. Wetted Materials: Vinyl, PVC
Pressure Limits: 15 in. w.c. and Nylon.
of water column. Tap water is used as the sensing media and a mag-
(381 mm). Weight: 5 oz (142 g).
netic clip provides temporary or permanent mounting. Economically
priced and made of durable plastic for years of trouble-free service.
MODELS
Includes three feet of vinyl tubing and 1/8˝ nylon male NPT to barb
fitting. Model Number Length (mm)
1213-7 7˝ (177.8)
1213-15 15˝ (381)

®
Model
1430 Microtector Portable Electronic Point Gage
Accurate To ±.00025"w.c., Battery Operated, Self-Contained
Fast, accurate pressure measurements at moderate cost. Microtector® gage kit *Patent No 3,726,142

Combines modern, solid state integrated circuit electronics with the includes everything
timeproven point gage manometer. Delivers repeatable accuracy in needed:
Microtector®
measuring positive, negative or differential pressures to ±.00025" Gage* — A Durablock®
water column over a 0 to 2" w.c. range. Metric model M-1430 reads solid, precision machined
from 0-50 mm w.c. acrylic plastic body, mount-
Calibrates other instruments. Provides high precision for test labora- ed on heavy, 1/2" thick
tories of manufacturers of fans, air conditioning and heating equip- steel base. 3-point base
ment, pneumatic or fluidic controls, etc. Used in college, university and mounting has two leveling
screws and level vial for
consultant laboratories — wherever precision measurements are re- quick setup.
quired. Used with pitot tube (at extra cost) for precision measurement Gage Meter —
of low air velocities. Sensitive 0-50 microamp
Measures positive, negative or differential pressures to 2.0" w.c. D.C. meter acts as
Easy to maintain and clean. Battery replacement and instrument detector. Powered by
cleaning are quick and simple-use mild soap and water. Indicating 1-1/2 volt penlight cell
(included). No external power
fluid consists of distilled water and a small amount of Dwyer A-126 needed. Meter also indicates battery and hook probe
Fluorescein green color concentrate. Max. press. 100 psig (6.89 bar). condition.
Electronic Circuitry — Solid state integrated circuit electronic components
are mounted on glass epoxy board enclosed in a molded styrene acrylonitrile
compartment for protection. A.C. Detector current eliminates hook plating.
Micrometer — Adjusts point with precision. Complies with Federal Specifica-
tion GGG-C-105C and is traceable to a master at the NIST.
Dwyer® Gage Fluid — 3/4˝ oz non-toxic concentrate of fluorescein green
color, wetting agent and distilled water. Use with distilled water.
Accessories — Two 3-foot lengths of tygon tubing, two 1/8" pipe thread
MODELS adapters, micrometer wrench and crocus cloth for cleaning point.
Model Number Range Carrying Case-Cover — Rugged sheet steel, gray finish. Carrying handle
and latches. Complete instructions included.
1430 0-2 in. w.c.
M1430 0-50 mm w.c.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 28
p29 7/21/06 4:38 PM Page 1

Pressure
®

Flex-Tube U-Tube Manometers

These inexpensive manometers measure positive, negative and differ-
ential pressures. Dwyer® Flex-Tube® U-Tube Manometers combine the
inherent accuracy of the simple “U” Tube with the durability of tough,
long-lasting plastic construction. Columns are of .375˝ O.D. flexible
and shatter proof clear butyrate tubing. They are easily accessible for
cleaning. Indicating tube is backed by white scale channel to provide
maximum color contrast. Scales are extruded high impact polystyrene
plastic, formed to hold columns in perfect alignment. Stark white
scales have graduations and numbers silkscreen-printed in black for
maximum legibility.
You can choose from numerous models and features including over-
pressure safety traps, in full scale ranges from 8˝ to 36˝ of water or
mercury. All are suitable for total pressures to 100 psi
— for determining velocity and static pressures, leakage, fan and blow-
er efficiency, filter resistance, and gas pressures. Ideal wherever a
portable, direct reading manometer is needed. Standard ranges and
markings as shown, or special ranges, colors, logos and brand names
for OEM quantity orders are available.

Minor Divisions of 1⁄10 inch water column (or 2 mm water column on

metric units) are silkscreened in jet black on stark white scale for posi-
Fig. 10-1 Fig. 10-2
tive definition. Easy to read, even at a distance, they are acrylic coated Series Series
for permanence. All models are furnished with one 3⁄4 ounce bottle of flu- 1221-8-W/M 1222-8-W/M
orescein green color concentrate with special wetting agent for W/M
models, or 3⁄4 ounce bottle of red gage oil for “D” units.

Series 1221 Manometer, Fig. 10-1. Our simplest, lowest cost basic STANDARD ACCESSORIES
U-gage. A dependable U-tube manometer that withstands hard use Series 1221— 2 plastic carrying plugs; 2 flexible plastic tubing
and provides accurate, high visibility readings. For use with water, mer- connectors for attachment of 3⁄16˝ rubber or plastic tubing without
cury or red gage oil. For mercury filled manometers, a scale clamp bar, kinking. 3⁄4 ounce bottle .826 sp. gr. red gage oil furnished for “D”
Dwyer® Part No. A-363 (available as an extra for Series 1221 — and style manometers. Fluorescein green dye concentrate furnished
standard on Series 1222) is recommended. One pair of carrying plugs with “W/M” style manometers. Mercury is available at extra cost.
and a pair of non-kink vinyl tube connectors are included with each Series 1222—2 magnetic mounting clips; tube clamp; 2 plastic car-
manometer. rying plugs and 2 flexible plastic tubing connectors for attachment of
3
⁄16˝ rubber or plastic tubing without kinking. 3⁄4 ounce bottle .826 sp. gr.
Series 1222 Manometer, Fig. 10-2. All the features of the 1221 plus red gage oil furnished for“D”style manometers. Fluorescein green dye
concentrate furnished with “W/M” style manometers. Mercury is avail-
magnetic clips for mounting to any vertical steel surface, and clamp bar able at extra cost.
to insure against U-tube slipping. (Especially recommended for
manometers used with mercury.) Both magnets are easily removed and
replaced at the user’s convenience.
MODELS
Series 1223 Manometer, Fig 11-1 Our finest U-gage — for either 1221-8-W/M 1222-8-W/M 1221-8-D 1222-8-D
portable or stationary use. Safety traps prevent loss of indicating fluid in 1221-12-W/M 1222-12-W/M 1221-12-D 1222-12-D
case of accidental over-pressure. Tubing is permanently bonded to a 1221-16-W/M 1222-16-W/M 1221-16-D 1222-16-D
molded, high impact acrylic plastic top that contains safety traps. Large 1221-20-W/M 1222-20-W/M 1221-20-D 1222-20-D
magnetic clips and clamp bar are provided. Standard type “a” connec- 1221-24-W/M 1222-24-W/M 1221-24-D 1222-24-D
1221-36-W/M 1222-36-W/M 1221-36-D 1222-36-D
tions include two rapid shut-off type molded nylon tubing connections,
1221-M200-W/M 1222-M200-W/M 1221-M200-D 1222-M200-D
two 3-foot lengths of flexible Tygon® plastic tubing, and two 1⁄8˝ pipe 1221-M300-W/M 1222-M300-W/M 1221-M300-D 1222-M300-D
thread to tube adapters. 1221-M400-W/M 1222-M400-W/M 1221-M400-D 1222-M400-D
1221-M600-W/M 1222-M600-W/M 1221-M600-D 1222-M600-D
Tygon® is a registered trademark of Saint-Gobain Abrasives, Inc. 1221-M1000-W/M 1222-M1000-W/M 1221-M1000-D 1222-M1000-D

Ranges And Dimensions

Hg REQUIRED 1221, 2 & 3 SCALE 1221 & 2 1223 O.A.
MODEL OR RANGE TO FILL LENGTH “A” O.A. LENGTH “B” LENGTH “B”
INCHES H O
2 MILLIMETERS H O 2 GRAMS OUNCES W/M D W/M D W/M D
8 (4-0-4) M200 (100-0-100) 178.5 6.3 121⁄4 14 151⁄4 17 181⁄2 197⁄8
12 (6-0-6) M300 (150-0-150) 225.5 7.9 161⁄4 187⁄8 191⁄4 213⁄4 211⁄8 245⁄8
16 (8-0-8) M400 (200-0-200) 269 9.5 203⁄8 235⁄8 231⁄4 261⁄2 261⁄8 303⁄8
20 (10-0-10) 314.5 11.1 241⁄4 281⁄2 271⁄4 311⁄2 301⁄8 343⁄8
M600 (300-0-300) 353.1 12.4 277⁄8 327⁄8 303⁄4 353⁄4 335⁄8 385⁄8
24 (12-0-12) 379.7 13.4 28 ⁄4
1
33 ⁄8
3
31 ⁄2
1
361⁄4 33 ⁄8
3
391⁄8
36 (18-0-18) 491.1 17.3 40 ⁄4
1
47 ⁄8
7
43 ⁄4
1
503⁄4 46 ⁄8
1
535⁄8
M1000 (500-500) 526.6 18.5 435⁄8 52 461⁄2 55 493⁄8 577⁄8

Not recommended for vacuum service above 5 in. Hg (68 in. w.c.)

29 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p30 7/21/06 4:39 PM Page 1

Pressure
®

Dual Range Flex-Tube

U-Inclined Manometers
Over-Pressure Safety Traps are
featured on Dwyer® Series 1223
U-tube manometers. The action is
simple but positive. Over-pressures,
whether gradual or a sudden
surge, simply raise the cork and
seal the fluid in the gage. When
pressure drops, trap opens and
gage resumes operation. Above — Fig.11-3
Use Series 1227 as a regular U-tube
manometer to read high-range
pressure on the right leg, or as an
inclined manometer (shown here) to
read low-range pressure on the
bottom leg. Simply incline manometer
until fluid levels read zero. No spirit
level required. Magnetic clips hold the
gage in position on a steel duct
surface.
Series 1227 Manometer,
Fig. 11-2. Most versatile and useful
low cost manometer we know of.
Designed for installation and
servicemen. A sturdy, clear plastic
manometer, it offers single, direct
readings in two ranges: As a U-tube,
it reads from 0 to 16" of water; as an
inclined gage, it reads from -.20 to 0
Fig. 11-1 to 2.6˝ of water. Model 1227M (Metric)
Series is 0 – 400mm water column as a
1223-8-W/M U-tube and -5 to 0 to 70mm water
column as an inclined gage. “How-
Fig.11-2 to-use” instructions are printed
Model 1227 directly on the scale.
Dual Range
STANDARD ACCESSORIES — Magnetic mounting clips; tube Indicating Tubing — Clear .400"
clamp and Type “a” connections consisting of two rapid shut off O.D., tough, shatterproof butyrate.
Pressure connection end is bent to
molded nylon tubing connectors; two 1⁄8˝ pipe thread to tube adapters;
provide over pressure protection
two 3-foot lengths of Tygon® plastic tubing, 3⁄4 ounce bottle .826 sp. when used as an inclined gage. One
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
gr. red gage oil is furnished for “D” style manometers; fluorescein — Two plastic carrying plugs 41⁄2' x 3⁄8˝ Tygon® tube included for
green dye concentrate with “W/M” style. Mercury is available at extra with retainers for use when pressure source connection.
cost. manometer is not in service. Scale — Stark white high-impact
Two magnetic clips to hold styrene, 21˝ long. Adjustable for pre-
instrument to metal surface. cise zeroing.
MODELS Flexible red vinyl plastic Markings — 1˝ major, .2˝ minor grad-
tubing connectors. Brass uations on high range; .02˝ graduations
1223-8-W/M 1223-8-D
1223-12-W/M 1223-12-D
terminal tube 1⁄4˝ diameter x 8˝ on low range (50 mm major, 10 mm
1223-16-W/M 1223-16-D long. One terminal tube minor graduations on high range, 10
1223-20-W/M 1223-20-D holder. Brass adapter, 1⁄8˝ pipe mm major, 1 mm minor graduations
1223-24-W/M 1223-24-D thread to plastic tubing. One on low range for metric model).
1223-36-W/M 1223-36-D 41⁄2-foot length of Tygon® Silkscreened in black on stark white
1223-M200-W/M 1223-M200-D plastic tubing. One 3⁄4 ounce for positive definition. Acrylic-coated
1223-M300-W/M 1223-M300-D bottle .826 sp. gr. red gage for permanence.
1223-M400-W/M 1223-M400-D fluid. Vinyl carrying case.
1223-M600-W/M 1223-M600-D
1223-M1000-W/M 1223-M1000-D

MODELS
How To Order: 1. Indicate series such as 1222. 2. Indicate range desired such AS VERTICAL U-TUBE MANOMETER AS INCLINED MANOMETER
as: 8, 12 or M200. 3. Specify “W/M” with model number for inches* of water, using water 0-16" water with 1" major Scale is 17" long, reading .20-0-2.6"
or inches* of mercury, using mercury. Specify “D” with model number for inches* of divisions, .2" minor divisions water with .02" minor divisions
water using .826 sp. gr. red gage oil. Red gage oil is often preferred for readings in
Model 1227M (metric) Model 1227M (metric) is
inches of water because of the longer scale and slower evaporation rate. This lessens
is 0-400 mm water column -5 to 0 to 70 mm water column
the need for frequent re-zeroing and refilling. (If not otherwise indicated, “W/M” style
manometers will be shipped.) 4. For Series 1223 only, state the connection option
desired if other than standard type “a”. For example, 1223-12-D-“b” manometer is
a Series 1223, range 12" w.c. (scale 6-0-6), using red gage oil with type “b” connec-
tions.
*Metric units are in millimeters

Tygon® is a registered trademark of Saint-Gobain Abrasives, Inc.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 30
p31 7/21/06 4:41 PM Page 1

Pressure

Mark II Molded Plastic Manometers

3% Accuracy For Stationary And Portable Applications At Minimum Cost
Dwyer® Mark II series molded manometers are of the inclined and
inclined-vertical types. The curved inclined-vertical tube of the
Model 25 gage provides higher ranges with more easily read increments
at low readings. The Model 25 is excellent for general purpose work.
The Model 40 inclined gage provides linear calibration and excellent
resolution throughout its range. The Model 40 is ideally suited for
air velocity and air filter gage applications. Both gage types are
capable of pressure measurements above and below atmospheric as
well as differential pressure measurements.
Construction — Mark II manometers are economically priced, compact and
available in both stationary and portable configurations. Portable stand is stan-
dard on Model 40, available as optional A-612 stand for Model 25. Construction
is simple with virtually indestructible molded white styrene-acrylonitrile housing,
indicating tube and fluid wells, molded ABS knobs and zero adjust plunger, shock
Fig. 13-1, Mark II Model No. 25 mounted glass level vial and leak proof “O” ring seals. Moderate overpressures
inclined-vertical manometer. are accommodated by an overflow tank incorporated In the Model 25. Greater
(shown with optional A-612 portable stand) protection is provided by float operated overflow traps in the Model 40. Scales are
lithograph printed on aluminum and epoxy coated.
Installation — Mark II manometers can be mounted on any vertical surface with
the two mounting screws provided. A built-in spirit level simplifies leveling before
mounting screws are tightened. Simply fill the reservoir, adjust fluid level to zero,
connect the tubing, and the gage is ready for operation.
Accessories — Included with each Mark II manometer are two tubing connectors
for 1⁄8" pipe or sheet metal ducts, two mounting screws, 3⁄4 ounce bottle of indicating
fluid, red and green pointer flags and complete instructions.
The Model 25 also includes 8 feet of flexible double column plastic tubing.
Portable operation of the Model 25 is made possible by the use of the optional A-
612 portable stand. A short piece of tubing can be slipped over the Model 25
pressure connections to contain the gage oil in transit.
The Model 40 contains two 41⁄2 foot lengths of clear plastic tubing, a plastic swing-
out stand and leveling screw for portable operation. It also features convenient
rapid shutoff pressure connections and integral overpressure safety traps.
OEM Specials — All Dwyer® Mark II molded plastic manometers can be sup-
plied in OEM quantities with your name or special graphics and scales.
Fig. 13-2, Mark II Model No. 40-1
inclined manometer

MODELS
1-7/16 3-11/16 Model Range Fluid Used
1-1/4 [35.53] [93.66] Ø7/32 [5.56] HOLE
[31.75]
5/8 Mark II 25 0-3 in w.c Red oil, .826 s.g.
[15.88] Mark II 26 0-7 in. w.c. Blue oil, 1.91 s.g.
Mark II 27* 0-7000 fpm Red oil, .826 s.g.
5-29/32 Mark II 28* 0-10,500 fpm Blue oil, 1.91 s.g.
4-25/32 [150.02] Mark II MM-80 0-80 mm w.c. Red oil, .826 s.g.
[121.44] Mark II MM-180 0-180 mm w.c. Blue oil, 1.91 s.g.
25/32 4-23/32 Mark II M-700Pa 10-0-700 Pa Red oil, .826 s.g.
[19.84] [119.86]
*Require Pitot tube at additional cost. See Air Velocity section
A-612, Portable Stand
1-1/8
[28.58] 25/32 [19.84] 7/32 X 13/32 Specifications
[5.56 X 10.32]
2-1/4 7-13/32 [188.12] MOUNTING SLOT Accuracy: ±3% full scale. Maximum Working Temperature:
[57.15] MAX Maximum Internal Working Pressure: 10 psi (70 kPa). 140°F. (60°C).

MODELS
Ø15/64 [5.95] MOUNTING HOLE Model Range Fluid Used
Mark II 40-1 .1-0-1.0 in. w.c. Red oil, .826 s.g.
5-5/16 Mark II 40-25 mm 0-26 mm w.c. Red oil, .826 s.g.
[134.95] Mark II 40-250 Pa 10-0-250 Pa Red oil, .826 s.g.
4-5/8 MAX Mark II 41-2 .2-0-2.4 in. w.c. Blue oil, 1.91 s.g.
2-31/32 [117.48]
[75.41] Mark II 41-60 mm 0-60 mm w.c. Blue oil, 1.91 s.g.
Mark II 41-600 Pa 20-0-600 Pa Blue oil, 1.91 s.g.
Mark II 40-1-AV* 0-1.1 in. w.c. & Red oil, .826 s.g.
0-4200 fpm
25/32
Mark II 40-250 Pa-AV* 0-260 Pa & Red oil, .826 s.g.
15/64 [5.95] x 13/32 [10.32] MOUNTING SLOT [19.84] 1-1/4 0-21 mps
[31.75] Mark II 41 -2-AV* 0-2.5 in. w.c. & Blue oil, 1.91 s g.
10-5/8 [269.88] 2-1/4 [57.15] 0-6300 fpm
MAX
4 [101.60]
*Require Pitot tube at additional cost. See Air Velocity section
A-606, Air Filter Kit

Specifications
Accuracy: ±3% full scale. Maximum Working Temperature: 130°F. (54°C).
Maximum Internal Working Pressure: 15 psi (100 kPa). Scale Length: Approx. 81⁄4". (21 centimeters).

31 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p32 7/27/06 8:11 AM Page 1

Pressure
Model
476A-0 Digital Manometer
Single Pressure Measurement, Electronic Zeroing, ±1.5% Accuracy

• Measures Positive and Negative Pressures.

• One-Button Auto-Zero Function

• Auto Power Off.

• Large, Easy-to-Read Display.

• Extruded Aluminum Case.

• Instant Selection from up to Eight English/Metric

Units.
Ideal for field or laboratory use, the Model 476A-0 Single Pres-
sure Digital Manometer measures low pressures from -20 to 20˝
w.c. with ±1.5% full scale accuracy. Designed especially for the
HVAC contractor, the Model 476A-0 can be used to set gas supply
pressures, verify pressure switch operation, adjust regulators,
check pneumatic systems and computer peripherals. The rugged, SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and compatible gases.
handheld unit is constructed with an extruded aluminum case for
Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
exceptional durability. Accuracy: ±1.5% F.S. at 72°F (22.2°C). Includes linearity
and repeatability.
Pressure measurements can be quickly viewed on the large 4 Pressure Hysteresis: ±0.1% of F.S.
digit LCD. The Model 476A-0 Manometer features electronic ze- Pressure Limits: 5 psig (.74 bar).
roing to null out any minor pressure differences. Auto power off Temperature Limits: 0 to 140°F (-17.8 to 60°C).
Compensated Temperature Limits: 32 to 104°F (0 to
after 20 minutes conserves battery life.
40°C).
Thermal Effect: 0.05% F.S./°F.
The 476A-0 Single Pressure Digital Manometer includes a quick Display: 4 digit LCD (.425˝H x .234˝W digits).
start reference guide and a 9V battery. Power Requirements: 9V alkaline battery. Battery included
but not connected.
Process Connections: Barbed connection for use with
3/16˝ or 1/4˝ I.D. tubing.
Weight: 10.8 oz (306 g).
Agency Approvals: CE.
Model 476A-0 Digital Manometer, -20 to 20˝ w.c.
A-402A CARRYING CASE — Tough gray nylon pouch pro-
tects any Series 476A-0 Manometer. Double zippered for quick
and easy access. With belt loop that snaps closed.
72"H x 3"W x 24"D
(191 x 76 x 57 mm)

MODELS
Model Available Pressure Units Maximum
Number Range bar psi in Hg kPa in w.c. mm Hg mbar mm w.c. Resolution Pressure
476A-0 -20.0 to 20.0 .0498 0.723 1.471 4.98 20.00 37.4 49.8 508 0.02˝ w.c. 5 psi

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 32
p33 7/21/06 4:54 PM Page 1

Pressure
Series
478A Digital Differential Manometer
Selectable Engineering Units, Min/Max, ±1.5% Accuracy

• Economically Priced.
• Multi-Functioning: Positive, Negative,
or Differential Measurement.
• Instant Selection from up to Nine
English/Metric Units
• Min/Max, Hold and Zero Functions.
• Extruded Aluminum Case.

Quickly verify filter condition, monitor cleanrooms, trou-

bleshoot HVAC systems, or perform field calibrations with
the Series 478A Digital Differential Manometer. The Series
478A is an indispensable tool for the HVAC technician, plant
engineer, or industrial hygienist. The electronics are housed SPECIFICATIONS
in a rugged extruded aluminum case to provide long life and Service: Air and compatible gases.
exceptional durability. Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
Accuracy: ±1.5% F.S. at 72°F (22.2°C). Includes linearity &
repeatability.
The manometer can be used to measure positive, negative,
Pressure Hysteresis: ±0.1% of full scale.
or differential pressures. The unit features selectable Pressure Limits: 5 psig (.34 bar).
units, auto zero, hold, and a Min/Max function. Press the Temperature Limits: 0 to 140°F (-17.8 to 60°C).
Hold key to freeze the current pressure measurement on Compensated Temperature Limits: 32 to 104°F (0 to
the display. The 478A manometer includes a zeroing but- 40°C).
ton to null out any minor pressure differences. Thermal Effect: 0.05% F.S./°F.
Display: 4 digit LCD (.425˝H x .234˝W digits).
Power Requirements: 9V alkaline battery. Battery includ-
The Series 478A Digital Differential Manometer includes a ed but not connected.
quick start reference guide and a 9V battery. Process Connections: Two barbed connections for use
with 3/16˝ of 1/4˝ I.D. tubing.
Weight: 10.8 oz (306 g).
Agency Approvals: CE.
478A-0 Digital Differential Manometer, -4-0-4˝ w.c. A-402A CARRYING CASE — Tough gray nylon pouch pro-
tects any Series 478A-0 Manometer. Double zippered for
478A-1 Digital Differential Manometer, -60-0-60˝ w.c. quick and easy access. With belt loop that snaps closed.
72"H x 3"W x 24"D
(191 x 76 x 57 mm)

MODELS
Model Range Available Pressure Units Resolution Maximum
Number in w.c. bar psi in Hg kPa in w.c. mm Hg mbar mm w.c. Pa in w.c. Pressure
478A-0 -4.00 to 4.00 .1445 .294 0.996 4.00 7.47 9.96 101.6 996 0.01 5 psig
478A-1 -60.0 to 60.0 .1495 2.168 4.41 14.95 60.0 112.1 149.5 1524 0.1 5 psig

33 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p34 7/24/06 8:31 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
475 Mk III Handheld Digital Manometer
Ranges from 1 in. w.c. to 150 psid, ±0.5% Accuracy

• New LOW Range Option 0-1.000 in. w.c.

• Measures Positive, Negative and
Differential Pressures
• Rugged, Extruded Aluminum Case
• Lightweight, Fast and Easy to Use
• Selectable English/Metric Units
• FM Approved
The Dwyer® Series 475-FM Mark III Handheld Digital Manometer is
ideal for field calibration, monitoring or trouble shooting HVAC sys-
tems, clean rooms, or a wide range of other low pressure pneumatic
systems. This handy instrument measures positive, negative or differ-
ential pressures of air and natural gases in ranges from 1 in. w.c.
(0.249 kPa) to 150 psid (10.34 bar). The Series 475-FM is approved and
is intrinsically safe for hazardous locations, Class 1, Div. 1, Group A,
B, C, D, T4. Its simple operation and easy to read digital display make
it an indispensable test instrument for the plant engineer, industrial
hygienist and HVAC technician. When used with a Dwyer® Pitot tube
(see Flow and Air Velocity), the Series 475-FM Mark III can also be
used as an air velocity gage. See the complete 475-1-FM-AV kit
described below.

The Series 475-FM Mark III is housed in a durable extruded alu-

minum case with its solid state circuitry mounted on a tough fiber-
glass epoxy circuit board. To meet the most demanding applications and
to provide stability of instrument reading, the 1 in. w.c. range is compen- SPECIFICATIONS
sated for position sensitivity through the use of a unique patented dual sen- Service: Air and compatible combustible gases.
sor system. A standard 9 volt battery provides up to 100 hours of opera- Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
tion. Dual push pads on the front panel control on-off, auto zero, and Accuracy: ±0.5% F.S., 60 to 78°F (15.6 to 25.6°C); ±1.5% F.S. from 32
pressure unit selection. No set-up or leveling. The large 0.42˝ LCD to 60°F and 78 to 104°F (0 to 15.6°C and 25.6 to 40°C).
display is easy to read, minimizing data collection errors. Units Pressure Hysteresis: ±0.1% of full scale.
include a “low battery” indicator. The pressure sensor used is a high- Pressure Limits: See chart.
ly stable silicon piezoresistive device. Standard connections are dual Temperature Limits: 0 to 140°F (-17.8 to 60°C).
sized for 1⁄8" or 3⁄16" I.D. vinyl or rubber tubing. Complete instructions Compensated Temperature Limits: 32 to 104°F (-0 to 40°C).
are conveniently printed on rear of housing.
Storage Temperature Limits: -4 to 176°F (-20 to 80°C).
Display: 0.42˝ (10.6 mm) 4 digit LCD.
Resolution: See chart.
Power Requirements: 9 volt alkaline battery. Battery not connected.
475-AV AIR VELOCITY KIT — Includes the Series 475-FM Weight: 10.8 oz (306 g).
Manometer, two A-303 static pressure tips two 9 ft. lengths 3⁄16"
I.D. rubber tubing, no. 166-6-CF Pitot tube, A-397 step drill, A- Connections: Two barbed connections for use with 1/8˝ (3.18 mm) or
532 air velocity slide chart and instruction bulletin H-11, all 3/16˝ (4.76 mm) I.D. tubing. Two compression fittings for use with 1/8˝
packed in a tough, molded plastic carrying case with die cut (3.18 mm) I.D. x 1/4˝ (6.35 mm) O.D. tubing for 475-7-FM & 475-8-FM
foam liner. To order, add AV suffix to any standard 475 model no.
Example:475-1-FM-AV only.
475-000-FM-AV Agency Approvals: FM, CE.

MODELS A-402A Carrying Case — Tough gray nylon pouch protects

any Series 475 Manometer. Double zippered for quick and easy
Model English Metric Maximum access. With belt loop that snaps closed.
Number Range Range Pressure 7-1/2"H x 3"W x 2-1/4"D (191 x 76 x 57 mm)
475-000-FM 0-1.000 in w.c. .2491 kPa 5 psig
475-00-FM 0-4.000 in w.c. 0.996 kPa 5 psig
475-0-FM 0-10.00 in w.c. 2.491 kPa 5 psig
475-1-FM 0-20.00 in w.c. 4.982 kPa 10 psig
475-2-FM 0-40.00 in w.c. 9.96 kPa 10 psig
475-3-FM 0-200.0 in w.c. 49.82 kPa 30 psig
475-4-FM 0-10.00 psi .6895 bar 30 psig
475-5-FM 0-20.00 psi 1.379 bar 60 psig
475-6-FM 0-30.00 psi 2.069 bar 60 psig
475-7-FM 0-100.0 psi 6.895 bar 150 psig
475-8-FM 0-150.0 psi 10.34 bar 200 psig

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 34
p35 7/24/06 8:33 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
477 Handheld Digital Manometer
Selectable Pressure Units, ±0.5% Accuracy, FM Approved Intrinsically
Safe for Hazardous Locations, Class 1, Div. 1, Group A, B, C, D, T4

• New Low Pressure Ranges

• USB Option Comes with Cable and Software for Easy
Data Downloading.
• Instant Selection from up to Nine English/Metric Units.
• Stores 40 Readings in Memory for Later Reference.
• Measure Positive, Negative or Differential Pressures.
• Large Easy-to-Read 0.4" LCD Display Includes
Switchable Backlight for Great Visibility — Anywhere!
• Both Audible and Visual Overpressure Alarms.
• Includes + and - Indicators plus Low Battery Warning.
New USB
• Operates up to 100 Hours on a Single 9 Volt Battery. Connection
Capability
Series 477 Handheld Digital Manometers are packed
with features you need to make pressure measurement and recording
faster, easier and more accurate than ever. First, you can instantly se-
lect from up to nine of the most widely used pressure units without hav-
ing to waste time and risk mistakes with tedious conversions. Next, a
non-volatile memory function enables storage of up to 40 readings — per- SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and compatible gases. FM models air and compatible com-
fect for HVAC technicians making Pitot tube traverses of airflow read- bustible gases.
ings across a duct. The FM approved models are intrinsically safe for Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
Accuracy: ±0.5% F.S., 60 to 78°F (15.6 to 25.6°C); ±1.5% F.S. from 32
hazardous locations, Class 1, Div. 1, Group A, B, C, D, T4.
to 60°F and 78 to 104°F (0 to 15.6°C and 25.6 to 40°C).
When working in poorly lighted areas, just switch on the handy back- Pressure Hysteresis: ±0.1% of full scale.
light feature. It automatically shuts itself off after 20 minutes to mini- Pressure Limits: See chart.
Temperature Limits: 0 to 140°F (-17.8 to 60°C).
mize battery drain. Electronic zeroing means you simply touch a single
Compensated Temperature Limits: 32 to 104°F (-0 to 40°C).
key to perfectly null out any minor pressure differences. A display Storage Temperature Limits: -4 to 176°F (-20 to 80°C).
HOLD key freezes the current pressure for those all-too-common situa- Display: 0.42˝ (10.6 mm) 4 digit LCD.
Response Time: 1 seconds.
tions where readings fluctuate. We even included an audible alarm to
Resolution: See chart.
warn you of overpressure plus a visual alarm warning in case ambient Power Requirements: 9 volt alkaline battery. Battery included but not
noise levels are too high to hear the alarm. Audible alarm also confirms connected.
Weight: 10.2 oz (289 g).
a value has been stored, eliminating the need to observe display during
Connections: Two barbed connections for use with 1/8˝ (3.18 mm) or
a duct traverse. 3/16˝ (4.76 mm) I.D. tubing. Two compression fittings for use with 1/8˝
(3.18 mm) I.D. x 1/4˝ (6.35 mm) O.D. tubing for 477-7-FM & 477-8-FM
A new option for the Series 477 is a USB interface. Combined with the only.
477’s datalogging capability, a user can now quickly and conveniently Agency Approvals: CE and FM, USB models are not FM approved.
download the stored readings to any USB compatible device. Data ma-
nipulation can be easily accomplished in a multitude of word processing A-402A Carrying Case — Tough gray nylon pouch
protects any Series 477 Manometer. Double zippered
or spreadsheet programs. USB models come with a USB cable and a for quick and easy access. With belt loop that snaps
software CD. closed.
72"H x 3"W x 24"D
(191 x 76 x 57 mm)
MODELS
Available Pressure Units Maximum
Model
Number* Range bar psi in Hg kPa in w.c. mm Hg mbar mm w.c. Pa Pressure
477-000-FM 0-1.000 in w.c. .0736 .2491 1.000 1.868 2.491 25.40 249.1 5 psig
477-00-FM 0-4.000 in w.c. .1445 .2942 0.996 4.000 7.473 9.96 101.6 996 5 psig
477-0-FM 0-10.00 in w.c. .3613 .7355 2.491 10.00 18.68 24.91 254.0 2491 5 psig
477-1-FM 0-20.00 in w.c. .0498 .7225 1.471 4.982 20.00 37.36 49.82 508.0 4982 10 psig
477-2-FM 0-40.00 in w.c. .0996 1.445 2.942 9.96 40.00 74.73 99.6 1016 9964 10 psig
477-3-FM 0-200.0 in w.c. .4982 7.225 14.71 49.82 200.0 373.6 498.2 5080 30 psig
477-4-FM 0-10.00 psi .6895 10.00 20.36 68.95 276.8 517.1 689.5 7031 30 psig
477-5-FM 0-20.00 psi 1.379 20.00 40.72 137.9 553.6 1034 1379 60 psig
477-6-FM 0-30.00 psi 2.069 30.00 61.08 206.9 830.4 1551 2069 60 psig
477-7-FM 0-100.0 psi 6.895 100.0 203.6 689.5 2768 5171 6895 150 psig
477-8-FM 0-150.0 psi 10.34 150.0 305.4 1034 4152 7757 200 psig
*Note: USB models include a software CD and cable. Change “FM” to “USB”. Example: 477-2-FM becomes 477-2-USB

35 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p36 7/24/06 8:34 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
477A Handheld Digital Manometer
Precise Air Pressure Measurement, ±0.1% F.S. Accuracy
• Measure Positive, Negative, or Differential Pressures.
• Instant Selection from up to Nine English/Metric
Units.
• Stores 40 Readings in Memory for Later Reference.
• Both Audible and Visual Overpressure Alarms.
• Operates up to 100 Hours on a Single 9 Volt
Battery.
• New Adjustable Dampening Feature for Averaging
Fluctuating Reading.
The Popular Model 477 is now available with 0.1% full scale accuracy
in the new Series 477A. The 477A contains a highly accurate differential
pressure sensor that offers a 0.1% full scale accuracy on air ranges from
20˝ w.c. to 100 psid. Series 477A Handheld Digital Manometers are
packed with features needed to make pressure measurement and
recording faster, easier and more accurate than ever. Instantly select
from up to nine of the most widely used pressure units without having
to waste time and risk mistakes with tedious conversions. A non-
volatile memory function enables storage of up to 40 readings — per-
fect for HVAC technicians making Pitot tube traverses of airflow read-
ings across a duct. The 477A is also ideal for maintenance personnel
or technicians that require a highly accurate standard to check their
instrumentation or equipment to ensure proper performance.
SPECIFICATIONS
When working in poorly lighted areas, just switch on the handy back-
Service: Air and non-combustible compatible gases.
light feature. The manometer automatically shuts itself off after 20
minutes to minimize battery drain. Electronic zeroing means you sim- Wetted Parts: Consult factory.
ply touch a single key to perfectly null out any minor pressure differ- Accuracy: ±0.10% of full scale from 60 to 78°F (15.6 to
ences. A display HOLD key freezes the current pressure for those 25.6°C); ±1% of full scale from 32-60 and 78-104°F
all-too-common situations where readings fluctuate. Included is an au- (0-15.6 and 25.6-40°C).
dible alarm to warn of overpressure plus a visual alarm warning in case Pressure Hysteresis: ±0.1% of full scale.
ambient noise levels are too high to hear the alarm. Audible alarm also Pressure Limits: See chart.
confirms a value has been stored, eliminating the need to observe dis- Temperature Limits: 32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C).
play during a duct traverse. Storage Temperature Limits: -4 to 176°F (-20 to 80°C).
Display: 0.42˝ (10.6 mm) 4 digit LCD.
Clear, concise operating instructions for all functions are printed on
Resolution: See chart.
the rear of the rugged extruded aluminum case for quick reference.
Power Requirements: 9 volt alkaline battery. Battery
One-piece front membrane fully protects all keys from dust and mois-
ture; wipes clean in seconds. Detailed written instructions, a wrist included but not connected.
strap and 9 volt alkaline battery are included. Weight: 10.2 oz. (289 g).
Connections: Two barbed connections for use with 1/8˝
(3.18 mm) or 3/16˝ (4.76 mm) I.D. tubing for 477A-1, 477A-
2, 477A-3, 477A-4 and 477A-5 only. Two compression fit-
tings for use with 1/8˝ (3.18 mm) I.D. x 1/4˝ (6.35 mm) O.D.
tubing for 477A-6 and 477A-7 only.

MODELS
Available Pressure Units Maximum
Model
Number Range bar psi in Hg kPa in w.c. mm Hg mbar mm w.c. Pa Pressure
477A-1 0-20.00 in w.c. .0498 .7225 1.471 4.982 20.00 37.36 49.82 508.0 4982 3 psig
477A-2 0-40.00 in w.c. .0996 1.445 2.942 9.96 40.00 74.73 99.6 1016 9964 3 psig
477A-3 0-200.0 in w.c. .4982 7.225 14.71 49.82 200.0 373.6 498.2 5080 15 psig
477A-4 0-10.00 psi .6895 10.00 20.36 68.95 276.8 517.1 689.5 7031 30 psig
477A-5 0-30.00 psi 2.069 30.00 61.08 206.9 830.4 1551 2069 60 psig
477A-6 0-50.00 psi 3.447 50.00 101.8 344.7 1384 2585 3447 100 psig
477A-7 0-100.0 psi 6.895 100.0 203.6 689.5 2768 5171 6895 200 psig

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 36
p37 7/24/06 8:35 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
HM28 Handheld Digital Manometer
High Accuracy (0.2%, 0.1% or 0.05%), Differential, Gage or Absolute
STANDARD FEATURES
• Microprocessor based
• Differential, Gage, or Absolute
• High Accuracy, 0.2%, 0.1%, or 0.05% with Calibration
Certificate
• Selectable Scales
• Resolution to 0.000 of Selected Unit
• Peak and Valley Indication
• Hold Function
• Programmable Display
• Memory for up to 964 Readings
• Output for Optional Printer or Computer Interface

The Series HM28 Digital Hand-Held Manometer is a precision

instrument designed to measure a wide range of pressures to a very
high accuracy. The unit incorporates a variety of features in an easy
to use format that makes it useful in a wide variety of applications.
Features include: measurement in all common pressure ranges, dis- SPECIFICATIONS
play resolution to 0.001, differential or relative measurement, two line Pressure Connection: Hose; 4/6 mm or 1/8˝ NPT.
liquid crystal display, and adjustable auto power off to conserve bat- Accuracy (includes linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability): per order
tery. code. ±0.20% full scale ±1 digit
±0.10% full scale ±1 digit
We are so proud of the accuracy of the HM28 that we provide a cer- ±0.05% full scale ±1 digit
tificate of calibration with the unit at no additional cost. Depending on Measuring Media: Instrument Air or Inert Gases. For
your application, the HM28 can be used as a secondary calibration HM28G3XXXXX, Any material compatible with 18/8 stainless steel.
standard for your other pressure instrumentation. Temperature Limits: 23 to 122°F (-5 to 50°C).
Storage Temperature: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C).
Humidity: 30 to 95% rH, non-condensing.
Display: 2 line, 16 character, dot matrix LCD, with switchable display
sizes.
INPUT RANGES Battery: 9V alkaline (included). Can operate from external power sup-
RANGE (US) RANGE (METRIC) OVERPRESSURE ply of 7 to 14 VDC.
Gauge, underpressure and differential pressure Current Consumption: <9 mA.
Memory: 964 measured values. Recording intervals adjustable from
0-10 in H2O 0-2.5 kPa 12.5 kPa (50 in H2O) manual, 1, 5, 10, 20, 30 seconds, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 30, 60 minutes.
0-28 in H2O 0-7 kPa 35.0 kPa (140 in H2O) Case Protection: IP54.
0-80 in H2O 0-20 kPa 150 kPa (600 in H2O) Case Dimensions: 6 x 3.27 x 1.34 in (152 x 83 x 34 mm).
0-120 in H2O 0-30 kPa 150 kPa (600 in H2O) Weight: 9.5 oz (270 g).
0-200 in H2O 0-50 kPa 400 kPa (1600 in H2O) Maximum Measurement Rates: Stand alone: 2-1/2 readings/sec
0-14.5 psi 0-100 kPa 400 kPa (58 psi) (0.1% and 0.05% ratings), 5 readings/sec (0.2% rating). Output to
0-29 psi 0-200 kPa 700 kPa (100 psi) RS-232: 20 measurements/sec (0.2% rating). 10 measurements/sec
0-100 psi 0-700 kPa 1700 kPa (246 psi) (0.1% and 0.05% ratings).
0-145 psi 0-1000 kPa 2700 kPa (390 psi) RS-232 Baud Rate: Adjustable, 1200, 2400, 4800, or 9600 baud.
Agency Approvals: CE.
0-245 psi 0-1700 kPa 2700 kPa (390 psi)
for Gauge, media compatible with 18/8 SS (DIN 1.4305)
0-14.5 psi 0-100 kPa 200 kPa (29 psi)
0-29 psi 0-200 kPa 400 kPa (58 psi) MODELS
0-100 psi 0-700 kPa 1400 kPa (203 psi) Part Number Features
0-145 psi 0-1000 kPa 3400 kPa (493 psi) Error limit 0.2% F.S. for gage, underpressure and differential pressure
0-245 psi 0-1700 kPa 3400 kPa (493 psi) HM28D3B10000 0-10 in H2O (2.5 kPa)
0-435 psi 0-3000 kPa 7000 kPa (1015 psi) HM28D3C10000 0-28 in H2O (7 kPa)
0-1000 psi 0-7000 kPa 14000 kPa (2030 psi) HM28D3F10000 0-120 in H2O (30 kPa)
HM28D3H10000 0-14.5 psi (100 kPa)
Error limit 0.05% F.S. for gage, underpressure and differential pressure
Accessories HM28D3C30000 0-28 in H2O (7 kPa)
HM28-0 1/8˝ NPT Adaptor 2 pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HM28D3F30000 0-120 in H2O (30 kPa)
HM28-1 Communication Software & Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HM28D3H30000 0-14.5 psi (100 kPa)
HM28-2 Universal Power Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HM28D3K30000 0-100 psi (700 kPa)
HM28D3M30000 0-245 psi (1700 kPa)
For Absolute pressure
HM28A3I10000 0-15.9 pisa (0.2% F.S. (110 kPa abs)

37 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p38 7/24/06 8:39 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
490 Wet/Wet Handheld Digital Manometer
Liquid & Gas Pressure Measurement, ±0.5% F.S. Accuracy

• Measures Virtually any Liquid Media Compatible

with 316L SS.
• Instant Selection from up to Seven English/Metric
Units.
• Stores 40 Readings in Memory for Later Reference.
• Both Audible and Visual Overpressure Alarms.
• Operates up to 100 Hours on a Single 9 Volt
Battery.
• New Adjustable Dampening Feature for Averaging
Fluctuating Readings.

Series 490 Digital Manometers are versatile, hand-held,

battery operated manometers available in several basic ranges
from 0-15.0 psi (0-100 kPa) to 0-500 psi (0-3450 kPa). Units are
highly accurate (± 0.5% FS) for positive or positive differential
pressure measurement and can tolerate most liquid media com-
patible with 316LSS. SPECIFICATIONS
You can select from up to seven common English and metric Service: Compatible gases & liquids.
pressure units (psi, in. H20, in. Hg, mm Hg, kPa, bar or mbar) Wetted Materials: Type 316L SS.
so conversions are not necessary. A memory function allows
Accuracy: ±0.5% F.S., 60 to 78°F (15.6 to 25.6°C); ±1.5% F.S.
storage of up to 40 readings for later recall and a backlight pro-
vides auxiliary lighting for hard-to-see locations. from 32 to 60°F and 78 to 104°F (0 to 15.6°C and 25.6 to 40°C).
Standard are a hold feature and both visual and audible over- Pressure Hysteresis: ±0.1% of full scale.
pressure alarms. A new feature added to the Series 490 is a Pressure Limits: See chart.
field adjustable dampening. This allows the user to choose the Temperature Limits: 32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C).
level of display averaging rate corresponding to the fluctuation Storage Temperature Limits: -4 to 176°F (-20 to 80°C).
level common in many applications. A 9V alkaline battery is
Display: 0.42˝ (10.6 mm) 4 digit LCD.
included that provides up to 100 hours of operation. Units have
dual 1/8˝ female NPT connections. Resolution: See chart.
Power Requirements: 9 volt alkaline battery. Battery included but
not connected.
Weight: 14.1 oz (400 g).
Connections: Two 1/8˝ (3.18 mm) female NPT.
OPTIONS
-3V, 3-way Valve Package Agency Approvals: CE.

A-402A Carrying Case — Tough gray nylon pouch

protects any Series 490 Wet/Wet Handheld Digital
Manometer. Double zippered for quick and easy
access. With belt loop that snaps closed.
72"H x 3"W x 24"D
(191 x 76 x 57 mm)

MODELS
Model Available Pressure Units Maximum
Number Range bar psi in Hg kPa in w.c. mm Hg mbar Pressure
490-1 0-15.00 psi 1.034 15.00 30.54 103.4 415.2 775.7 1034 30 psig
490-2 0-30.00 psi 2.069 30.00 61.08 206.9 830.4 1551 2069 60 psig
490-3 0-50.00 psi 3.447 50.00 101.8 344.7 1384 2585 3447 100 psig
490-4 0-100.0 psi 6.895 100.0 203.6 689.5 2768 5171 6895 200 psig
490-5 0-500.0 psi 34.47 500.0 1018 3447 1000 psig

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 38
p39 7/24/06 8:40 AM Page 1

Pressure

Air Filter Gages And Switches

The application of . . . One method is by weight, in which a carefully compounded mixture of
standardized dust is fed into the air stream and the amount trapped by
Air filters used in ventilating systems are called upon to remove an ex- the filter related to the amount released in the test determines the fil-
tremely wide variety of contaminant's from the air, ranging from soot ter efficiency in percentage. A second method, the dust spot method
and smoke and the common dusts to mold spores, bacteria and pollen. originated by the National Bureau of Standards, compares the opacity
Particle sizes vary from less than a micron (.000039") to insects and of the dust collected on filter paper from two air samples of equal flow
leaves. The concentration will vary hourly, daily and seasonally. rate, one of which samples filtered air. The efficiency of the filter is
thus evaluated on the basis of the darkness of the dust spots. A third
These variables combined with filtering requirements that range from method measures arrestance of DOP (Dioctyl-phthalate) smoke, a ho-
the simple needs of a household furnace to the absolute filtration re- mogenous aerosol of 0.3 micron size, to test a special class of high effi-
quired for a clean room make air cleaning a complex science. Filter se- ciency filters used to control particulate matter of high toxicity or
lection should, therefore, be made by a qualified engineer or in where extreme cleanliness is required.
cooperation with the filter manufacturer.
The “dust holding capacity” of an air filter is defined by ASHRAE
The same variables that affect filter selection also contribute to the GUIDE as, “the amount of a particular dust that an air filter can hold
problem of determining when a filter has reached the tolerable limit of and determines the operating life of the air cleaner which is fixed main-
its effective life span as a result of the accumulation of contaminant's. ly by some figure of tolerable resistance.” Thus, an air filter gage, sens-
Because of wide variation in contaminant load in the air being filtered, ing the differential in static pressure across an air filter, will permit
time is an uncertain measurement. Visual inspection of the condition the air filter to be used to its maximum dust holding capacity as de-
of the filter tells little or nothing. The most widely used method of termined by the filter manufacturer and specified in terms of maxi-
checking filter condition is to measure pressure drop across the filter mum filter resistance. It should be noted that servicing a filter when it
by means of an air filter gage. has reached its point of specified maximum resistance is the only
method which will guarantee that the filters are being used to their full
The Function of the Air Filter Gage dust holding capacity and at the same time not being used beyond the
A clarification of terminology is essential to understanding the func- point where their increased resistance could affect balance of the sys-
tion of an air filter gage. The air filter gage measures pressure drop tem, increase air leakage and, for some types of filters, begin to pass
across the filter for the purpose of determining whether or not the fil- contaminant's.
ter is operating within its designed range of effective utilization. It does
not measure filter efficiency. Type of Filters
and Recommended Resistance for Servicing
Filter efficiency as defined by the ASHRAE GUIDE, “is synonymous All filter manufacturers supply technical data which will permit full
with the term arrestance and measures the ability of the air cleaner to utilization of their filters. This data will include initial resistance in
remove particulate matter from an air stream.” Several methods of de- inches of water column for the filter at its rated air flow and a recom-
termining filter efficiency exist, because of variations in filters and ap- mended resistance at which point the filter should be replaced or ser-
plication requirements. viced. The following describes the broad classifications of air filters:
area

HOW TO INSTALL DWYER

AIR FILTER GAGES AND SWITCHES
Dwyer® Air Filter Gages and Switches are offered in a variety of types
to meet the needs of your system. All types are customarily mounted
on the outside of the air handling duct or plenum near the filter bank.
The type of static pressure tips used and their location is of primary
importance in securing reliable readings. For maximum accuracy, it is
essential that the influence of the velocity of the air be eliminated to
permit sensing the true static pressure. Note that some filter installa-
tions do not provide a straight duct approach to the filter bank which
may cause air to swirl and eddy.
Right angle static pressure tips give the most accurate sensing and are
furnished with 2000 Series Magnehelic® gage and 250-AF Series Fig. 2-1 2000 SERIES MAGNEHELIC® GAGES are diaphragm actuated
Gages. Flush static pressure fittings inserted at right angles to the pointer type gages. The gage is attached to the mounting plate which is fur-
flow are lower in cost and less likely to plug up, but are more suscepti- nished and the mounting plate screwed to the wall of the air duct. The sta-
ble to velocity and turbulence influence. tic pressure tips are installed through 7⁄16" holes in the filter wall with tips
pointing into air flow. The static tips are connected to the plastic vent valves
Tips should be located as recommended by the specifying engineer or using the 1⁄4" aluminum tubing and compression fittings which are furnished.
by the filter manufacturer. In the absence of such recommendations, lo- Zeroing is accomplished by turning the vent valves to venting position and
cate the tips at least 12" upstream and downstream from the filters in then turning the zero adjustment screw in the face of the gage with a screw-
a zone of minimum turbulence. driver. For detailed instructions, see Bulletins A-27 and A-28.

39 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p40 7/24/06 8:41 AM Page 1

Pressure
Viscous Impingement Filters have the filter element treated with Low Pressure Drop
an oil or adhesive which holds dust particles coming in contact. The ini- 1. Less than rated air volume being handled due to over design of filter
tial resistance of a typical filter will usually run from .08 to .15" water, area, improper air balancing of system, open bypasses, etc.
and servicing will be called for at .50" water. In the automatic moving 2. Incorrect filter installed.
curtain type, resistance will usually be maintained between .40 and 3. Velocity influence.
.50" water by means of a pressure actuated switch or timer with over- 4. Air leakage around filters, past frames, and possibly through
riding pressure switch operating an electric drive. damaged filter.

Dry Type Filters are available in a multiplicity of materials, in vary- IMPORTANT. An initial pressure drop 30% to 40% or more below the
ing thicknesses, in batts, woven or bonded materials, natural or syn- rated value for the filter means that approach velocities may be suffi-
thetic, and in pleated form or in tubes or bags to obtain greater filter ciently low to impair the efficiency of some types of filters.
area. Efficiencies are usually at least equivalent to the viscous im-
pingement type and may run to virtually 100%. Dust holding capacity High Pressure Drop
is high and resistance values vary so widely no rule of thumb figures 1. Incorrect filter installed.
are possible. The manufacturer should always be consulted for proper 2. System handling more than rated air volume. Suggest thorough
initial and final pressure drop figures for these filters. check of system to be certain all controls are properly set and
operating. If unable to reduce pressure drop to less than ten
Electronic Air Cleaners using the electrostatic precipitation princi- percent or fifteen percent above rated value additional filter
ple have no characteristic increase in pressure drop as they accumulate area should be provided or air volume reduced.
dust and must therefore be serviced on a pre-set schedule. The me- IMPORTANT. An initial pressure drop 10% to 15% or more above the
chanical filter normally used with such equipment should, however, be rated value for the filter, means that approach velocities may be suffi-
serviced on the basis of increased pressure drop. ciently high to impair the efficiency of some types of filters.
Significance of High or Low Initial Resistance Readings Due
to the many variables inherent in an air distribution system, the initial
Installation Check and Trouble Shooting
Before putting your air filter gage into service or in the event of initial
pressure drop in some systems may be found to be below that specified
pressure drop readings that don’t agree with the filter manufacturer’s
by the filter manufacturer. If the system has been carefully checked
specified pressure drop, make the following checks:
over and found to be in order, this need not be a source of concern, as
it simply indicates that less than rated air volume is passing through
1. Check zero adjustment of the gage. Remove both tubing leads or
the filter. Generally, this will mean increased filter life before the filter
open vent valves to atmosphere.
requires servicing. Conversely, if initial pressure drop exceeds the fil-
2. Check all tubing connections for tightness from gage to the static tip
ter manufacturer’s rating, it indicates that a greater volume of air is
or fitting connection.
being handled than the filter is rated for and filter life will be short-
3. Check static pressure tips or fittings to be sure they are not
ened.
plugged.
4. Check installation of static tips or fittings. Angle type static
Excessive variation from the filter manufacturer’s published initial re-
pressure tips must point directly into the air stream. Flange
sistance figure will probably indicate one or more of the following prob-
type static pressure fittings should be mounted on a duct wall
lems:
in such a location that the opening is at a right angle to the
moving air stream. A velocity pressure error can be created if
the air blows directly into the opening.

Fig. 3-1. 250-AF SERIES SOLID PLASTIC GAGES are manometer type Fig. 3-2. shows a typical hook-up of a Model 1823 compact, diaphragm ac-
gages which are customarily mounted directly on the wall of the filter hous- tuated differential pressure switch in parallel with a gage using tees. The
ing. The static pressure tips are installed through 7⁄16" holes in the filter wall switch is set to energize an electric circuit when the maximum allowable
with tips pointing into the air flow using the 1⁄4" aluminum tubing and com- pressure drop is reached.
pression fittings which are furnished. Zeroing is accomplished by turning the Fig. 3-3. shows schematically how a Model 1638 switch with visual set
vent valves (optional at extra cost) to “vent” position — or by pulling the con- point adjustment can be hooked up to trigger the advancement of an auto-
nections from the gage body if vent valves are not used — and sliding the matic roll filter when the segment in use becomes too dirty for efficient ser-
adjustable scale until the zero mark lies directly behind the indicating fluid vice.
meniscus.
For detailed instructions, see Bulletins E-52 (Model No. 1638), E-53 (Model
No. 1823) and E-55 ( Air filter switch service).

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 40
pg41 7/24/06 8:42 AM Page 1

Pressure

250-AF Series Inclined Manometer

Air Filter Gages
Precision Machined, Solid Acrylic Plastic Gages, Accurate To ±1% Of Full Scale
FEATURES
Highly accurate and easy to use yet almost indestructible, Dwyer® Se-
ries 250-AF Inclined Air Filter Gages are foolproof and dependable.
There are no moving parts — no mechanical linkages — nothing to wear
out, jam or deteriorate from vibration. They never need calibration.
The mirror polished inclined scale allows the operator to easily read
minute differences in differential pressure across the filter accurately
without parallax error.
The only servicing required is occasional zeroing. If cleaning is neces-
sary, it is easily done with soap and water.
MODEL NO. 250.5-AF

CONSTRUCTION
MODELS Dwyer® DURABLOCK® Series 250-AF Gages are precision machined
Scale 1" thick solid acrylic plastic, virtually unbreakable and free of distor-
Range: Length Overall
Model Water Minor (Inclined) Size tion. The fluid bore is precision drilled to ±.0002" to assure life long ac-
No. Column Divisions (Inches) (Inches) curacy. A glass spirit level is built into the body and encapsulated to
250-AF .10-0-1.0" .02" 51⁄2 81⁄2 x 41⁄8 x 1 prevent damage or tampering. The scale is mirror polished chrome
250.5-AF .10-0-1.0" .01" 8 113⁄8 x 4 x 1 plated brass to assure parallax free reading by alignment of the menis-
251-AF .05-0-.50" .01" 51⁄2 81⁄4 x 33⁄8 x 1 cus with its reflection. Safety traps are incorporated in the body to pre-
252-AF .20-0-2.0" .02" 8 111⁄8 x 61⁄2 x 1
209-AF .20-0-3.0" .02" 8 111⁄4 x 67⁄8 x 1 vent loss of fluid due to pressure surges. Red and green signal flags
260-AF 0-1.5" .02" 51⁄2 83⁄8 x 57⁄8 x 1 indicate clearly when a filter change is necessary. Gages are suitable
350-AF* 0-4" .10" 41⁄2* 3 x 81⁄4 x 1 for use in ambient temperatures of -20 to 150°F. Connection fittings
451-AF 0-1" .01" 8 11 x 21⁄2 x 5⁄8 are positively sealed by “O” rings but easily removed for zeroing or ad-
452-AF 0-2" .02" 8 11 x 4 x 5⁄8
dition of fluid. Furnished complete with instructions.
*Vertical Scale  2 PSI MAXIMUM WORKING PRESSURE
 Economy Models 451-AF and 452-AF are similar to the 250 Series
except they are not equipped with over pressure traps. Two A-324 1⁄4"
compression fittings are included with each gage but not shown. Bod-
ies are of 5⁄8" thick acrylic and scales are mirror polished, epoxy coated
aluminum. See illustration.

•ECONOMY MODEL 451-AF 250-AF................. 451-AF.....................

209-AF................
250.5-AF................ 452-AF.......................
260-AF...................
251-AF.................. A-310B.......................
350-AF...................
252-AF................... A-317..........................

STANDARD ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS

SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION
for Architects and Engineers
An air filter gage for measuring the resistance to air flow through the
filters shall be installed, one for each bank of filters. The gage shall be
of inclined tube differential type (equipped with vent valves for zero-
ing) shall be of solid acrylic plastic construction with built-in level vial
Standard accessories furnished are (and over pressure safety traps 250 Series only), shall have an ad-
two static pressure tips with integral A-310B (3 Way Vent Valve) justable mirror-polished scale, shall be furnished complete with two 5-
compression fittings, two five foot A-317 (Plastic Gage Plug)
foot lengths 1⁄4˝ tubing, two static pressure tips, mounting hardware,
lengths of 1⁄4" aluminum tubing, two
compression fittings, mounting Optional vent valves for easy zeroing additional bottle of red gage oil and instructions. Gage shall be Dwyer®
hardware and extra bottle of gage of gage are available at extra cost. Inclined Manometer Catalog No. __ , reading to __ in. divisions.
oil. Two are required per gage.

41 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg42 7/24/06 8:45 AM Page 1

Pressure
Differential Pressure Switches
For Air Filter Service UL & CSA Listed, FM Approved
Three Basic Models Made Exclusively For Very Low Differential Pressure Ranges

Model 1910 Model 1823 Model 1638

Our newest, smallest, lowest cost Our most popular compact, low This quality switch (73⁄4" dia.) pro- SPECIFICATIONS —
precision pressure switch (31⁄2" cost, pressure switch (4" dia.), vides power and precision for the ALL MODELS
dia.). It out performs many larg- for general industrial service. most demanding switching appli- Electrical Rating: 15 amp
er, more expensive units. “Z” Performance has been field cations including extremely low 120-480V AC,1/8 HP @
bracket mounting is simple and proven in many thousands of suc- ranges. Repetitive accuracy and 125V AC, 1/4 HP @ 250V
all connections are conveniently cessful installations. It features reliability are unsurpassed. Set AC.
located on one side. Set point ad- high repetitive accuracy, easy set point is visually adjustable for Wiring Connections: (3)
justment screw is protected in- point adjustment, and convenient maximum convenience. Screw type — common,
side the conduit enclosure. spud mounting. normally open, normally
closed.
MODELS MODELS MODELS Switch: Single-pole-double-
Model No. Range, in. w.c. Model No. Range, in. w.c. Model No. Range, in. w.c. throw snap type.
Maximum Pressure Surge:
1910-00 .07–.15 1823-00 .07–.22 1638-0 .05-.25
Model 1910, 10 psi;
1910-0 .15–.55 1823-0 .15–.5 1638-1 .2-1
1910-1 .4–1.6 1823-1 .3–1 1638-2 1-3 Models 1823, 1638, 25 psi.
1910-5 1.4–5.5 1823-2 .5–2 1638-5 2-6 Pressure Connections: (2)
1823-5 1.5–5 1/8" female NPT.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORY KITS FOR AIR FILTER SWITCHES

No. A-602 Air Filter Kit. Accessory package No. A-603 “T” Kit. Accessory package for No. A-604 “T” Kit. Accessory package for
for using switch without a gage includes two using pressure switch in conjunction with an using pressure switch in conjunction with
pressure tips with integral compression fit- air filter kit equipped Magnehelic® gage or Se- Mark II gages includes two plastic tubing
tings, two 5 ft. lengths of 1⁄4" aluminum tubing ries 250 AF gages. Includes two 1⁄8" NPT to 1⁄4" connector tees and two plastic tubing to 1⁄8"
and two 1⁄8" NPT to 1⁄4" tubing compression tubing compression fittings and two com- NPT adapters.
fittings pression tees.

Special models for OEM requirements GLOSSARY OF SWITCH TERMS

NORMALLY OPEN SWITCH — A switch in which the
RANGE — The span of differential pressures or
Special pressure and flow switches can be supplied flow rates within which the sensing element of a contacts are normally open. Actuation closes the con-
given switch can be set to actuate an electric tacts.
to meet a wide range of OEM requirements and spe- switch. NORMALLY CLOSED SWITCH — A switch in which
cific application needs. These include private brand SET OR ACTUATION POINT — The exact air the contacts are normally closed. Actuation opens the
labels, fixed set-points, special electrical or pneumat- pressure or flow rate which will cause the electric contacts.
ic connections, pre-installed or special length elec- switch to actuate. SINGLE POLE DOUBLE THROW (SPDT) SWITCH
trical leads, visible set-point adjustments, manual RATED PRESSURE — The maximum pressure that — A switch combining both normally open and normal-
reset or gold contact switches. the actuating components of the switch in contact ly closed switch contacts.
with the media can withstand continuously and/or NULL SWITCH — A floating contact switch with a
repeatedly without risk of permanent damage. zone of no contact. Often used to operate reversible
Please contact the factory for specific information MAXIMUM SURGE PRESSURE — Safe pres-
and supply a detailed outline or sketch of your motors.
sure for the switch housing but which may damage REPETITIVE ACCURACY — The ability of a pressure
specific requirements. the mechanism by continuous or repetitive applica- or flow switch to operate repetitively at its set point
tion. under consistent conditions.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 42
p43 7/24/06 8:48 AM Page 1

Pressure

Introduction to precision low range

Differential Pressure Switches
What are they? pressure switch range, the dead band is minimum. Conversely, when
A differential pressure switch is a device which utilizes differential air the set point is at the highest end of the pressure switch range, dead
pressure to actuate an electric switch at a pre-set actuation point. band is maximum.
This may be the difference between two positive or two negative pres- Differential pressure plot, illustrating dead band.
sures, one of each, or a positive and atmospheric or a negative and at-
mospheric pressure. The electric switch may be used to start or stop
motors or fans, open or close dampers or louvers, light a warning signal,
sound alarms, etc.
Dwyer® Differential Pressure Switches are built exclusively for low
and very low pressure differentials ranging from .01" water column
(.0004 psig) to 50 psig. A wide selection of Dwyer® precision-pressure
switch models are offered within these ranges.

How do they work?

For example: A pressure switch is set to actuate when an increasing

differential pressure reaches 31⁄2" w.c. When the differential pressure
in the system being monitored builds up to 31⁄2" w.c., the switch actu-
ates and causes a corrective action to occur. The differential pressure
then begins to drop. The switch remains actuated, and will not reset,
until the differential pressure drops to approximately 2.4" w.c. This
difference of 1.1" w.c. is the “dead band.” It is the overlap or pressure
difference between the set point at which the switch actuates when
pressure increases and the point at which the switch resets when
pressure drops.

Considerations in Selecting a Pressure Switch

Diaphragm size — Dwyer® Pressure Switches are offered in 3 se-
Cross section shows a typical Dwyer® Differential Pressure Switch. Some mod- ries based on diaphragm size. Series 1600 models have a 73⁄4" di-
els employ other methods of transmitting diaphragm motion to the electric
switch button. aphragm diameter which provides the greatest actuating force for
maximum sensitivity and repetitive accuracy. Series 1800 models
with 4" diaphragms are compact and low in cost, yet they deliver ex-
When a change occurs in the differential pressure between the two cellent performance for OEM and general service. Series 1900 mod-
sides of the diaphragm, the spring loaded diaphragm moves, trans- els have 31⁄2" diaphragms operating through Dwyer-engineered
mitting a force to a snap switch. The switch may be designed to actu- force-motion amplifier levers, assuring high sensitivity and repeata-
ate on either increasing or decreasing differential pressure. bility in these compact, low cost switches.
Diaphragm motion is resisted by a calibrated spring. This spring de- Range selection — We recommend selection of the range which has
termines the range of differential pressure within which the di- a set point (actuation point) as close as possible to the middle of the
aphragm motion will actuate the electric switch. The actuation point total adjustment range.
is set by adjusting the compression or tension of the spring. Set point — For service where the set point is known, the unit can
be set at the installation point or for OEM quantities, preset at the fac-
tory. For service where field changes in set point are anticipated, Se-
What is the Dead Band? ries 1638 pressure switches with visual set point adjustment offer
When a change in air pressure (or pressure differential) occurs, caus- extra convenience. Where pressures will be reset frequently, the Pho-
ing the diaphragm to move and actuate the switch, some of that pres- tohelic® Pressure Switch/Gage offers outstanding convenience.
sure must be removed before the switch will reset for another cycle. Where two set points are required, choose Model 1627 or the Photo-
helic® Series. Both have dual switches. Two separate pressure switch-
The dead band is the pressure that must be removed before the
es may also be used.
switch resets for another cycle after the set point has been reached
and the switch actuated. Dead band — For OEM applications, special snap switches are avail-
able with an extra wide dead band. Consult factory. Photohelic ®
A dead band is inherent in a snap switch. It results from two things: Switch/Gages have the narrowest dead band of all Dwyer® switches
The spring rate of the range spring at the chosen set point and the and the low/high setpoints can be interlocked to provide adjustable
de-actuation travel of the switch lever. Thus the dead band is differ- dead band control.
ent at each set point. When the set point is at the lowest end of the

43 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p44 7/24/06 8:49 AM Page 1

Pressure
Maximum PSI rating — All models are rated at 10 psig or more surge to 70°F as possible. See specification pages for weatherproof enclosures,
pressure except the No. 1626 and No. 1627. These have the sealing di- explosion-proof housings and environmental switches. As a general rule,
aphragm and are rated at 2 psig. They should not be used for higher differential pressure switches should be mounted with diaphragm in a ver-
total pressure. tical plane. It is essential that set point be adjusted with diaphragm in the
Temperature rating — Dwyer® switches are assembled, calibrated position in which it will be mounted.
and tested at 70°F. Recommended application temperature limits are Pressure connections — All are 1⁄8" NPT. To use rubber or plastic tub-
32° (-30° for dry air) to 130°F. With reduced electrical rating, the upper ing, order No. A-339 1⁄8" NPT to 3⁄16" tubing adapters. For 1⁄4" metal tubing,
limit can be extended to 180°F. See specifications for each model for de- order No. A-324 1⁄8" NPT to 1⁄4" tubing compression fittings. See Misc. Sec-
tails. Where higher temperatures exist, a coil of copper or aluminum tub- tion of catalog.
ing will often provide adequate heat dissipation. Electrical connections — Each switch has 3 screw type connections.
Installation — Select a location free of excessive vibration where oil or Conduit enclosures have 7⁄8" hole for a 1⁄2" conduit fitting.
water will not drip on switch and where ambient temperature is as close

How to use Precision Low Range Differential Pressure Switches

A Dwyer® explosion-proof pressure switch Switch/gage regulates pressure in air-inflated Differential pressure switch actuates roll filter
detects loss of control room purge air pressure building. The unit senses overpressure that may motor when dust reduces air flow. When dust
and signals an alarm. The flow of conditioned air over-inflate the building — or loss of pressure that build-up on this roll filter increases the filter’s resis-
must be maintained to provide adequate positive may result in collapse — and controls the blower to tance to air flow, the increased pressure drop
room pressure compared to atmosphere. This en- maintain correct pressure. The gage is easily reset to across the filter is sensed by the differential pres-
sures that control or instrumentation rooms located conserve power or provide extra pressure to resist sure switch, which starts a motor to roll a new
in hazardous environments are safe for the opera- strong winds. section of filter into place.
tion of electrical devices.

Dwyer® switch senses ice build-up on cooling When paper web breaks on printing press, air jet Transducer maintains constant level in reser-
coils and actuates defrost cycle. In this cooling reaches pressure switch, which signals controls voir by controlling motor-actuated fill valve.
application, the Dwyer differential pressure switch to stop press. When the paper strip, or web, breaks The air pressure required to purge the dip tube of
senses the increasing restriction to air flow caused accidentally, a large amount of paper is lost. To prevent liquid is equal to the reservoir depth expressed in
by icing and actuates the defrost cycle. Two static such losses, the integrity of the web is often monitored inches of water. Any change in reservoir level results
tips are installed to sense the differential pressure by a Dwyer differential pressure switch. When the web in a proportional change in output current from the
across the cooling coils. breaks, the air flow from the jet causes pressure to rise transducer which, when fed back through the con-
in the pickup tube, closing the switch which signals the trol circuit, adjusts the valve to either increase or de-
main control unit to shut down the press. crease the fill pipe flow to maintain the desired level.

Pressure switch monitors flow in high pressure Tape drive speed varied by Minitactor™ switch Dwyer® Transmitter signals precise air velocity ad-
system. In a liquid process high pressure line, the to control tape loop length. Dwyer® Minitactor™ justment to computer-controlled variable-speed fan
process may be adversely affected by flows above differential pressure switches function to maintain motor. In variable air volume (VAV) HVAC systems, a
(or below) the desired flow. The W.E. Anderson® the proper loops in tape drives for computer sys- computerized control provides precise adjustment of air
Model H3 can monitor flow in systems with operat- tems. The loop columns are subject to vacuum with volume to meet changing system needs with maximum
ing pressures to 1500 psig as a function of pres- pressure switches monitoring the upper and lower energy efficiency. A Dwyer® Series 604A differential pres-
sure drop across a calibrated orifice plate. The H3 ports in each column. When a short loop senses the sure Transmitter is used with a Pitot tube array to provide
vacuum, the switch signals the appropriate reel a 4-20 mA signal to the computer. The signal is directly
set point is adjusted so that an alarm sounds or proportional to the differential pressure developed
the process is automatically shut down if flow ex- drive to change speed slightly and supply more tape across the Pitot array as a function of air velocity. The
ceeds (or falls below) the desired rate. loop. A long loop senses atmospheric pressure, and computer reacts to any change in velocity by signaling
the switch then signals the drive to reduce the loop the motor control to increase or decrease fan speed to
length. The system is identical for both the machine maintain the required velocity. The computer, taking in-
reel and file reel columns in this illustration. puts from other ambient condition sensors, will establish
a new required air velocity and signal an appropriate ad-
justment in fan speed until the new velocity is achieved
as sensed by the Pitot tube array and transmitter.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 44
p45 7/24/06 8:54 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
1620 Single and Dual Pressure +Switches
High Reliability . . . Repetitive Accuracy within 1%

8-7/8
Ø9/32 [7.14] [225.43]
MOUNTING HOLE 8-1/4
TYP 2 PLACES [209.55]
7-3/4
1-1/2 [196.85]
[38.10]
5-7/8
1/2 CONDUIT [149.23]
CONNECTION
45° TYP
R 4-5/16 [109.54]
TYP 2 PLACES
3/4 [19.05] 22.5°
1/8 FEMALE NPT 1/8 FEMALE NPT
1-5/16 [33.34] LOW PRESSURE HIGH PRESSURE
3-1/16 CONNECTION
CONNECTION
[77.79]
4-11/16 [119.06]
Series 1620 Pressure Switch 3 [76.20]

Dimensions and construction detail. Shown is model 1627. Model 1626 is

identical except has single snap switch on right side.

Our old faithful switch design is still best where highest precision SPECIFICATIONS Electrical Rating: 15 A @ 120-480
combined with diaphragm sealed leak proof construction and mount- Service: Air and non-combustible, VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive, 1/8 HP @
ing simplicity are required. Model 1626 and 1627 differential pressure compatible gases. 125 VAC,1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 60 Hz.
switches are identical in design and construction except that Model Wetted Materials: Consult factory. Electrical Connections: 3 screw
1626 has a single electric switch and Model 1627 has dual electric Temperature Limits: -30 to 130°F type, common, normally open and
( -34.4 to 54.4°C). normally closed.
switches. Model 1627 can therefore provide dual control when Process Connections: 1/8˝ female
required. It can be set to open or close two independent electrical cir- Pressure Limits: Max. 50 in. w.c.
(12.44 kPa) continuous, 2 psig NPT.
cuits, each preset for its own actuation pressure. Both units have Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm
(13.79 kPa) surge.
diaphragm sealed motion take outs providing maximum protection Switch Type: 1626, Single-pole in vertical position. Consult factory
against leakage. double-throw (SPDT); 1627, two for other position orientations.
Single-pole double-throw (SPDT) . Set Point Adjustment: Screw
Repeatability: ±1%. Adjustment.
1626 (All Models) ..................... 1627 (All Models)......................... Weight: Model 1626, 3 Ib, 9.8 oz
Mil Option (1626) ..................... Mil Option (1627)......................... (1.64 kg); Model 1627, 3 Ib, 11.8 oz
WP Housing............................. EXPL Housing ............................. (1.69 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE.

SPECIAL MODELS AVAILABLE

Environmental (MIL) Construction. Can be furnished with a special snap
switch sealed against the environment for temperatures down to -65°F, high CAUTION: FOR USE ONLY WITH AIR OR COMPATIBLE GASES.
humidity, exposure to fungus, and/or for military applications. Dead band is MODELS
slightly greater and some lower set points may not be available. Specify
Model 1626 or 1627 – (Range No.) – “MIL” and required set point in order- Model Approx.
Number Dead Band Adj. Diff. Between
ing. (1626 shown, Operating Range Set Points
1627 similar) Inches, w.c. Min. Max. (1627 Only)
1626-1 .15 to 1.5 .10 .20 0.5
1626-5 .5 to 6.0 .15 .35 1.2
1626-10 2.0 to 11 .25 .65 2.3
1626-20 8.0 to 24 .50 1.20 5.0
HOUSINGS FOR USE WITH SERIES 1620 SWITCHES
Weatherproof Housing Explosion-proof Housing
16-ga. steel enclosure for unusually wet or oily conditions. Withstands Cast aluminum housing No. GRH with flat cover for No. 1626 and 1627
200 hour salt spray test. Gasketed cover. Weight, 20 Ibs. Switch must switches rated for Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D; Class II, Div. 1 & 2,
be installed at factory. Specify “WP” in addition to switch catalog num- Groups E, F, G; Class III and NEMA 7 CD, 9 EFG. Approximate weight 47
ber. Ibs. Specify “EXPL” in addition to switch catalog number.

1-1/4
[31.75] 2-21/64 Ø7/16 [11.11]
[59.13] MOUNTING HOLE
TYP 4 PLACES 3/4 FEMALE
1-5/16 1/8 FEMALE NPT NPT ELEC.
1/8 FEMALE NPT CONN.
[33.34] LOW PRESSURE 11 HIGH PRESS.
7 CONNECTION
[279.40] CONN.
[177.80] 1/8 FEMALE NPT BREATHER
TYP 12-1/8 2-1/8 6
HIGH PRESSURE [53.98] [152.40]
8-13/16 CONNECTION [307.98]
[223.82] 5-1/2 DRAIN
1/2 FEMALE NPT [139.70] 13-5/8
ELECTRICAL [346.08]
CONNECTION 1/8 FEMALE NPT
1/2 [12.70] LOW PRESS.
10-3/4 [273.05] 3/4
9-9/16 [242.89] CLEARANCE 3-1/2 CONN. [19.05]
FOR COVER [88.90] 12 [304.80] 1-3/4 [44.45] 3-1/2
10-1/2 [266.70] 3-5/64 [78.18] [88.90]
REMOVAL CLEARANCE FOR 8-1/4
11-5/8 [295.28] 4-57/64
[124.22] COVER REMOVAL [209.5]

45 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p46 7/24/06 8:55 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
1630 Large Diaphragm Pressure Switches
Visual Set Point Adjustment in 5 Standard Ranges, 0.05˝ to 12˝ w.c.
Repetitive Accuracy within +1% ®
®

Ø7-3/4
[196.85]
Ø9/32 [7.14] 1-1/4 3-39/64
MOUNTING HOLE [31.75] [91.68]
TYP 4 PLACES

3-3/32
4 [101.60] 3 [76.20] [78.58]
TYP Ø7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT
R 4-5/16 [109.54]
1/2 [12.70] CONNECTION
TYP 2 PLACES
TYP 1/8 FEMALE NPT
2 [50.80] HIGH PRESSURE 1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW
TYP 22.5°
CONNECTION PRESSURE CONNECTION
3/4 [19.05] SCREW TYPE ELECTRICAL
3
[76.20] TERMINAL TYPE 3 PLACES
Construction and
5-7/8
[149.23]
dimensions. Series
2-1/4 [57.15]
6-1/2 1630 pressure
CLEARANCE FOR
[165.10] switches.
COVER REMOVAL

Our highest precision conventional large diaphragm pressure switch SPECIFICATIONS

provides maximum dependability. In addition, it incorporates a visible set Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
point indicator for maximum convenience. UL and CSA listed, FM ap-
Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
proved for general service, these switches are suitable for most applica-
tions in air conditioning and industrial service. Electrical capability of 15 Temperature Limits: -30 to 110°F (-34.4 to 43.3°C).
amps handles most small electrical loads. Pressure Limits: 10 psig (68.95 kPa) continuous, 25 (172.4 kPa)
psig surge.
1638 (All Models) ....................... Mil Option (1635)............................
WP Housing............................... EXPL Housing ................................
Switch Type: Single-pole double-throw (SPDT).
Repeatability: ±1%.
SPECIAL MODELS AVAILABLE Electrical Rating: 15 A @ 120-480 VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive 1/8 HP
Environmental (MIL) Construction. Unlisted Model 1635 can be furnished with a special snap @ 125 VAC, 1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 60 Hz.
switch sealed against the environment for high humidity, exposure to fungus, and/or for military appli-
cations. Similar to Model 1638 except dead band is slightly greater and some lower set points may not
Electrical Connections: 3 screw type, common, normally open
be available. Specify Model 1635 – (Range No.) – “MIL” and required set point in ordering. and normally closed.
Process Connections: 1/8˝ female NPT.
MODELS Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult
Operating
Approximate factory for other position orientations.
Dead Band
Range, Set Point Adjustment: Screw type with enclosed scale.
Model Inches, At Min. At Max.
Number W.C. Set Point Set Point Weight: 4 Ib, 14 oz (2.21 kg).
1638-0 0.05 to 0.25 0.04 0.05 Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, FM.
1638-1 0.20 to 1.0 0.04 0.06
1638-2 1.0 to 3.0 0.06 0.08
1638-5 2.0 to 6.0 0.07 0.25
CAUTION: FOR USE ONLY WITH AIR OR COMPATIBLE GASES.
1638-10 3.0 to 12 0.11 0.30

HOUSINGS FOR USE WITH MODEL 1638 SWITCHES

Ø3/8 [9.33]
MOUNTING HOLES
Weatherproof Housing
TYP 4 PLACES
16-ga. steel enclosure for unusually wet or oily conditions. Withstands 200 hour salt
13-5/8 1/8 FEMALE spray test. Gasketed cover. Weight, 20 lbs. Switch must be installed at factory.
[346.08] NPT PRESS.
TYP CONN. Specify Model 1639-(Range No.)-WP when ordering.
12
[304.80]
TYP
11 1/8 FEMALE NPT
5-1/2 DRAIN
[279.40] LOW PRESSURE
[139.70] CONNECTION
1/8 FEMALE
NPT LOW 1/8 FEMALE NPT
PRESS. PRESSURE
10-3/4 CONN.
BREATHER [273.05] CONNECTION
3-1/2 TYP
[88.90] 1-5/16
12 [33.32]
3/4 FEMALE [304.80]
NPT ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION 7
[177.80] TYP

Explosion-proof Housing 1/2 FEMALE

NPT ELEC.
2-1/8 Cast aluminum housing with dome cover. 1/2 [12.70] CONNECTION
[53.98] 6
[152.40] Weight 47 Ibs. (21kg). Switch must be in- CLEARANCE
8-7/8 FOR COVER
stalled at factory. Specify Model 1639- [225.43] SQ REMOVAL
3-7/8
(Range No.)-EXPL when ordering. Rated 9-3/4 1-1/4 [98.43]
[247.65] [31.75]
5-1/4 3/4 3/4 Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D; Class II, Div. TYP
7-1/8
[133.35] [19.05] [19.05] 10-7/8
CLEARANCE FOR TYP
11-3/4
3-1/2
[88.90]
TYP 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G; Class III and NEMA [276.23] [180.98]
COVER REMOVAL TYP
[298.45] 7 CD, 9 EFG.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 46
p47 7/24/06 8:56 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
1640 Floating Contact Null Switch
for High and Low Actuation
Visual Set Point Adjustment . . . Adjustable Null Zone
Ø7-3/4
[196.85]
Ø9/32 [7.14] 1-1/4 3-39/64
MOUNTING HOLE [31.75] [91.68]
TYP 4 PLACES

3-3/32
4 [101.60] 3 [76.20] [78.58]
TYP Ø7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT
R 4-5/16 [109.54]
1/2 [12.70] CONNECTION
TYP 2 PLACES
TYP 1/8 FEMALE NPT
2 [50.80] HIGH PRESSURE 1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW
TYP 22.5°
CONNECTION PRESSURE CONNECTION
3/4 [19.05] SCREW TYPE ELECTRICAL
3
[76.20] TERMINAL TYPE 3 PLACES
5-7/8
[149.23] 2-1/4 [57.15]
6-1/2 CLEARANCE FOR
[165.10] COVER REMOVAL

The unique electric switch design in the 1640 is another Dwyer Adjustment of the Switch
Instruments, Inc. innovation. The Dwyer® Model 1640 Differential The “high” actuation point of the Model 1640 switch is indicated on a
Pressure Switch resembles the Series 1630 switches described on the calibrated scale secured to the transparent range screw enclosure. Re-
previous page. The Model 1640, however, is equipped with a single setting is accomplished simply by turning the adjustment screw with a
pole, double throw floating contact switch (not snap acting) so it func-
screwdriver to the desired setting on the scale.
tions as a null switch.
Drawing shows the switching action schematically. As the diaphragm The “low” actuation point is set by adjusting the span of the null by
moves in response to pressure changes, it moves the floating contact to turning the Span Adjusting Screw on top of the switch element inside
cause switching action at two preset points with no switching action be- conduit enclosure (See photo).
tween these points. The “high” circuit will be closed when rising pres- SPECIFICATIONS
sure differential reaches the preset level. The “low” circuit will be Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
closed when falling pressure differential reaches the preset level. Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
A typical example of usage is to position motorized dampers when sta- Temperature Limits: -30 to 110°F (-34.4 to 43.3°C).
tic pressure in a duct system reaches a desired maximum and reposi- Pressure Limits: 10 psig (68.95 kPa) continuous, 25 psig (172.4 kPa)
surge.
tion the dampers when the static pressure falls to a pre-established Switch Type: Single-pole double-throw (SPDT) floating contact (not snap
minimum. By using a pitot tube sensing element the Model 1640 switch action).
can serve in the same way to control air velocity and maintain a constant Electrical Rating: Non-inductive — 2.5 A @ 110 VAC; 1.5 A @ 220 VAC;
volume of air in a supply duct. 1 A @ 24 VDC; 0.5 A @ 110 VAC; Inductive — 1 A @ 110 VAC; 0.5 A @
220 VAC; 0.5 A @ 24 VDC (De-rate 70-80% for very slow pressure
changes).
CAUTION: Because of the very low electrical rating, the 1640 switch Electrical Connections: 3 screw type, common, normally open and
is almost always used with a relay which has suitable current carrying normally closed.
capability. Process Connections: 1/8˝ female NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult factory for
other position orientations.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type.
Weight: 4 Ib, 13 oz (2.18 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE.

CAUTION: FOR USE ONLY WITH AIR OR COMPATIBLE GASES.

Typical Wiring Hook-Up

MODELS
Rising pressure closes the “high” contact which causes the motor to rotate
in a counterclockwise direction. Decreasing pressure closes the “low” con- Model Adjustable Null Span
Ranges
tact and causes the motor to rotate in a clockwise direction. When the float-
Number Inches, w.c. Min. Set Max. Set
ing contact is in the null zone there is no switching action and motor is at
rest. 1640-0 .01 to 0.2 .01 .03
1640-1 0.2 to 1.0 .02 .06
MOTOR
CONTROLLER 1640-2 1.0 to 4.0 .03 .12
1640-5 2.0 to 6.0 .03 .18
3 4 5 1640-10 3.0 to 12.0 .04 .20
LO HI
MODEL 1640 2 L1
SWITCH AC
SUPPLY 1640 (All Models) ........................ WP Housing ..............................
1 X L2 EXPL Housing ............................
COM
SPECIAL MODELS AVAILABLE (Housing options same as 1630)

47 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p48 7/24/06 8:57 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
1800 Low Differential Pressure Switches ®

for General Industrial Service ®

Set Points from 0.07” to 85” w.c. Repetitive Accuracy within 2%

1-1/8
1-27/32
[28.57]
[46.83]
Ø7/8 [22.23] 1/8 FEMALE NPT
CONDUIT HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION CONNECTION
1/2 MALE NPT
3-39/64 MOUNTING SPUD
[91.68]
1/8 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE
3-1/8 3/4 CONNECTION
[79.38] 2-3/32[19.05]
Ø4 [53.18]
Model 1823 pressure switch. Series 1823 pressure switch. [101.60] 2-1/8 3-27/32
UL and CSA Listed, FM Conduit enclosure removed to [53.98] [97.63]
approved. show electric switch. CLEARANCE FOR
COVER REMOVAL
Construction and dimensions. Series 1823 pressure switches.

Essential for industrial environments, the Series 1800 com- SPECIFICATIONS

bines small size and low price with 2% repeatability for enough accura- Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
cy for all but the most demanding applications. Set point adjustment Wetted Materials: Consult Factory.
inside the mounting stud permits mounting switch on one side of a wall Temperature Limits: -30 to 180°F (-34 to 82.2°C). 1823-00, -20 to 180°F
or panel with adjustment easily accessible on the opposite side. UL and (-28.9 to 82.2°C).
CSA listed, FM approved. Pressure Limits: 10 psig (68.95 kPa) continuous, 25 psig (172.4 kPa) surge.
Switch Type: Single-pole double-throw (SPDT).
Repeatability: ±2%.
CAUTION: FOR USE ONLY WITH AIR OR COMPATIBLE GASES. Electrical Rating: 15 A @ 120-480 VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive 1/8 HP @125 VAC,
1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 60 Hz. De-rate to 10 A for operation at high cycle rates.
SERIES 1823 SWITCHES — MODELS Electrical Connections: 3 screw type, common, normally open and normally
OPERATING RANGES & DEADBANDS closed.
Approximate Process Connections: 1/8˝ female NPT.
Operating Dead Band Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult factory for
Model Range, At Min. At Max. other position orientations.
Number Inches W.C. Set Point Set Point
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type inside mounting spud.
1823-00 0.07 to 0.22 0.05 0.05 Weight: 1 lb, 5 oz (595 g).
1823-0 0.15 to 0.5 0.06 0.06 Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA, FM.
1823-1 0.3 to 1.0 0.08 0.08
1823-2 0.5 to 2.0 0.10 0.12 1-1/2 [38.10]
1/8 FEMALE NPT
1823-5 1.5 to 5.0 0.14 0.28 LOW PRESSURE
1-1/4 [31.75]
3/32 [2.38]
1823-10 2.0 to10 0.18 0.45 CONNECTION
1823-20 3 to 22 0.35 0.70
1823-40 5 to 44 0.56 1.10 6 [152.40] 4 [101.60] Ø5/16 [7.94] 1-1/2 [38.10] TYP
COM.

1823-80 9 to 85 1.30 3.0 SQ TYP MOUNTING

N.C.

1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH

N.O.

HOLES
TYP 4 PLACES PRESSURE CONNECTION
3 1-7/16
1/2 FEMALE NPT [76.20] [36.53]
CONDUIT 6-3/4 3/4 [19.05] 4-1/16
SPECIAL MODELS AVAILABLE CONNECTION [171.45] TYP CLEARANCE FOR [103.19]
7-1/2 COVER REMOVAL
Explosion Proof Cast Housing: Cast iron [190.50]
base with brass cover. Explosion-proof Weatherproof Housing:
housing, NEMA-7&9 rated; Change base 16 ga. steel enclosure with gasketed cover (NEMA 4, IP66) for wet or oily conditions. Withstands
number to 1824 and add -CN suffix. 200 hour salt spray test. Wt. 51⁄2 Ibs. (2.5 kg). Switch must be factory installed. Change 1823
Example: 1824-1-CN base number to 1824 and add -WP suffix.
Example: 1824-1-WP

1/8 FEMALE NPT

HIGH PRESSURE
MIL Environmental Construction — Unlisted Model 1820 can be fur- CONNECTION Ø5/16 [7.94]
TYP 4 PLACES
nished with a special sealed snap switch for protection against high humid-
ity, fungus and/or military applications. Similar to Model 1823 except dead 1/2 FEMALE NPT
5-7/8 4-1/4 CONDUIT
band is slightly greater and some lower setpoints may not be possible. To 6-3/8 [149.23]
[161.93] TYP [107.95] CONNECTION
order, add suffix -MIL. TYP
Example: 1820-2-MIL. 7/16 1-1/16
4-1/4 [11.11] [26.99]
No. A-389 Mounting Bracket is 16 ga. steel, zinc plated and dichromate [107.95] TYP
3-3/4 2-3/4
dipped for corrosion resistance. Provides rugged, permanent mounting and 1/8 FEMALE NPT [95.25] [70.61]
LOW PRESSURE CLEARANCE 6-15/16
speeds installation. CONNECTION [176.21]
FOR COVER
Explosion-Proof Housing: REMOVAL
Cast iron base with aluminum cover. Rated Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Group D; Class II, Div. 1 & 2,
Groups E, F, G; Class III and NEMA 7 CD, 9 EFG. Wt. 71⁄2 Ibs. (3.4kg). Switch must be factory in-
stalled. Change base number to 1824 and add -EXPL suffix.
Example: 1824-1-EXPL

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 48
p49 7/24/06 8:57 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
1900 CompactLowDifferentialPressureSwitches
Set Points from 0.07" to 20" W.C. Repetitive Accuracy within 3%
®
®

1/8 FEMALE NPT

HIGH PRESS. 60° TYP
CONNECTION

(2) Ø3/16 [4.76]

3 MOUNTING HOLES
[76.20] 1-5/16 ON A 4-3/16 [106.36] B.C.
Ø3-1/2[33.32] 1/8 FEMALE NPT
[88.90] TYP LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION

Ø7/8 [22.23] 51/64

41/64 CONDUIT [20.24]
1-19/32 1-7/8
[16.27] CONNECTION [47.63]
[40.48]
2-11/32 2-9/32
[59.53] 1-3/4 [44.45] [57.94]
CLEARANCE 2-7/16 [61.90]
FOR COVER
REMOVAL
Series 1910 pressure switch. All pres- Series 1910 switch with conduit The Dwyer-engineered force-motion amplifier increases the lever-
sure and electrical connections and set enclosure off. Shows electric switch age of diaphragm movement and results in a switch with excellent
point adjustments are on one side for and set point adjustment screw. sensitivity and repeatability.
easy installation.

Our most popular series combines advanced design and precision SPECIFICATIONS
construction to make these switches able to perform many of the tasks Service: Air and non-combustible, Electrical Connections: 3 screw
of larger, costlier units. Designed for air conditioning service, they also compatible gases. type, common, normally open and
serve many fluidics, refrigeration, oven and dryer applications. For air Wetted Materials: Consult normally closed.
Factory. Process Connections: 1/8˝ female
and non combustible compatible gases, Series 1900 switches have set NPT.
Temperature Limits: -30 to 180°F
points from 0.07 to 20˝ (1.8 to 508 mm) w.c. Set point adjustment is (-34 to 82.2°C). Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm
easy with range screw located inside conduit enclosure. Internal loca- Pressure Limits: 45˝ w.c. (11.2 in vertical position. Consult factory
tion helps prevent tampering. UL, CE, CSA listed, and FM approved. kPa) continuous, 10 psig (68.95 for other position orientations.
kPa) surge. Set Point Adjustment: Screw type
Switch Type: Single-pole double- inside conduit enclosure.
throw (SPDT). Weight: 1lb, 4.5 oz (581 g).
SPECIAL MODELS AND ACCESSORIES Repeatability: ±3%. Agency Approvals: CE , UL, CSA,
MANUAL RESET MODEL 1900 MR includes special snap switch which Electrical Rating: 15 A @ 120- FM.
latches on pressure increase above the setpoint. Switch must be manually 480 VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive 1/8 HP
reset after pressure drops below the setpoint. To order, change base model @125 VAC, 1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 60
to 1900 and add MR suffix after range number. Example: 1900-10-MR. Hz. Derate to 10 A for operation at
Available on -1, -5,-10 or -20 ranges only. Option is not UL, CSA or FM list- high cycle rates.
ed
Note: Manual Reset (MR) Option for use only in single positive pressure appli-
cations.
CAUTION: FOR USE ONLY WITH AIR OR COMPATIBLE GASES.
A-399 Duct Pressure Monitor Kit — For use with standard or manual reset ATEX (Approval Pending) Housing,
model switches. Includes mounting flange, tubing and adapters Model 1911- CN. Explosion-proof
housing, EExd II B T6 IP6S. Change
A-329 Street Ell — Brass adapter for applications requiring right angle con- base number to 1911 and add -CN
nections. Two required for differential pressures suffix.
Example: 1911-1-CN.

Weatherproof Housing
WEATHERPROOF ELECTRIC 1-1/8
16 ga. steel enclosure with gasketed 4 [101.6] SQ. CONNECTION HUB [28.58]
cover (NEMA 4, IP66) for wet or oily 7/8 1/2⬙ NPT FEMALE
conditions. Withstands 200 hour salt [22.23] (4) 5-16 [7.94] DIA.
MTG. HOLES
spray test. Wt. 5 Ibs. (2.3 kg). Switch
must be factory installed. Change 1910 SERIES 1910 SWITCHES — MODELS
2 [50.8]
3 [76.2]

base number to 1911 and add -WP

suffix. Example: 1911-1-WP. OPERATING RANGES, DEADBANDS
Approximate
3/4 Operating Dead Band
Explosion-Proof Housing [19.05] 3/4 [19.05]
Model Range,
Cast iron base with brass cover. Rated
4-3/4
5-1/2
1-1/4 [31.75] 3 [76.2]
3/32
[2.38]
At Min. At Max.
[120.65] Number Inches W.C. Set Point
Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups D; Class II,
HIGH PRESS.
[139.7] CONN. LOW PRESS.
1/8 N.P.T. CONN. 1/8 N.P.T.
3-1/8 [79.38] Set Point
2-3/4
Div. 1 & 2, Groups E,F,G; Class III and 1/8 NPT HIGH PRESSURE CONN.
TAPPED FOR
[69.85]
1-1/16 1910-00 0.07 to 0.15 0.04 0.04
NEMA 7, 9 NEMA 3. (7 lbs). Switch 4-1/4 [26.99]
must be factory installed. Change [107.95]
1/2 ELECTRICAL
CONDUIT CONN.
1910-0 0.15 to 0.55 0.10 0.10
model to 1911 and add -EXPL suffix. 5-3/4 1910-1 0.40 to 1.6 0.15 0.16
Example: 1911-1-EXPL. [146.05] 4-1/4
[107.95] 1910-5 1.40 to 5.5 0.30 0.30
5-3/4 1/8 NPT LOW [1.59]
1/16 4-5/16 [10.54]
5-13/32 [137.32] 1910-10 3.0 to 11.75 0.40 0.40
[146.05] PRESSURE CONN. 1910-20 4.0 to 20.0 0.40 0.50

49 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p50 7/24/06 8:59 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
1950 Explosion-proof Differential Pressure Switches
Compact, Low Cost, Explosion-proof and Weatherproof ®
®

SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible
1/8 FEMALE NPT 1-15/32 gases.
LOW PRESSURE [37.30] Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
CONNECTION 3/8
CAPTIVE [9.53] Temperature Limits: -40 to 140°F (-40 to
EXTERNAL 60°C); 0 to 140°F (-17.8 to 60°C) for 1950P-8,
GROUND SCREW 27/32
[21.43] 15, 25, and 50. -30 to 130°F (-34.4 to 54.4°C)
(2) Ø17/64 [6.75]
MOUNTING 27/32 for 1950-02.
HOLES EQUALLY [21.43] Pressure Limits:
SPACED VENT DRAIN Continuous: 1950’s - 45˝ w.c. (0.11 bar);
ON A 4-7/8 [123.83] B.C. PLUG 1950P’s - 35 psi (2.41 bar); 1950P-50 only - 70
RANGE 1/8 FEMALE NPT psi (4.83 bar).
ADJUSTMENT HIGH PRESSURE
Surge: 1950’s - 10 psi (0.69 bar), 1950P’s - 50
SCREW 1/2 FEMALE 3/8 CONNECTION
5-7/16 [9.53] psi (3.45 bar), 1950P-50 only - 90 psi (6.21 bar).
NPT 1-23/32
[138.13] ELECTRICAL Enclosure Rating: IP64, NEMA 3, 7 and 9.
[43.64] Switch Type: Single-pole double-throw (SPDT).
CONNECTION 3-1/2
[88.90] Electrical Rating: 15 A @, 125, 250, 480 VAC,
60 Hz. Resistive 1/8 HP @ 125 VAC, 1/4 HP @
250 VAC, 60 Hz.
Electrical Connections: 3 screw type,
Model 1950 Explosion-Proof Differential Pressure Switch combines the best features of the popular Dwyer® common, normally open and normally closed.
Series 1900 Pressure Switch with an integral explosion-proof and weatherproof housing, making it an exceptional Process Connections: 1/8˝ female NPT.
value for either application. It is CE, UL and CSA listed, FM approved for use in Class I, Div 1, Groups C and D, Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical
Class II Groups E, F, and G and Class III hazardous atmospheres (NEMA 7 & 9), Raintight (NEMA 3). Weatherproof position. Consult factory for other position
features include a drain plug and O-ring seal in cover. Electrical connections are easily made by removing front cover. orientations.
For convenience the set point adjustment screw is located on the outside of the housing. Twelve models offer set Set Point Adjustment: Screw type on top of
housing.
points from .03 to 20˝ w.c. (7.5 to 5 kPa) and from .5 to 50 psi (0.035 to 3.5 bar). The unit is very light and compact Weight: 3.25 Ib (1.5 kg); 1950-02 model, 4.4 lb
— about half the weight and bulk of other explosion-proof or weather-proof switches with separate enclosures. (2 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA, FM.

SERIES 1950 SWITCHES - MODELS, OPERATING RANGES AND DEAD BANDS

Model Range, Approximate Dead Band at Model* Range, Approximate Dead Band at
Number Inches W.C. Min. Set Point Max. Set Point Number PSID Min. Set Point Max. Set Point
1950-02-2S .03 to .10 .025 .05 1950P-2-2F 0.5 to 2 .3 .3
1950-00-2F .07 to .15 .04 .05 1950P-8-2F 1.5 to 8 1.0 1.0
1950-0-2F .15 to .50 .10 .15 1950P-15-2F 3 to 15 .9 .9
1950-1-2F .4 to 1.6 .15 .20 1950P-25-2F 4 to 25 .7 .7
1950-5-2F 1.4 to 5.5 .30 .40 1950P-50-2F 15 to 50 1.0 1.5
1950-10-2F 3 to 11 .40 .50 CAUTION: For use only with air or compatible gases. Applications with hazardous at-
1950-20-2F 4 to 20 .40 .60 mospheres and a single positive pressure may require special venting.
*P=PSID range models

Series
1950G Explosion-proof Differential Pressure Switch
Explosion-proof, Weatherproof, Compatible with Natural Gases
®

1/8 FEMALE NPT 1-15/32 SPECIFICATIONS

LOW PRESSURE [37.30] Service: Air and compatible combustible gases.
CONNECTION 3/8 Wetted Materials: Contact Factory.
EXTERNAL CAPTIVE [9.53]
SCREW Temperature Limits: 0 to 140°F (-17 to 60°C).
GROUND 27/32
[21.43] Note: Set point drift may occur with ambient
(2) Ø17/64 [6.75] temperature changes.
MOUNTING 27/32
HOLES EQUALLY [21.43] Pressure Limits: 45˝ w.c. (11.2 kPa) continuous;
SPACED VENT DRAIN
10 psig (68.95 kPa) surge.
ON A 4-7/8 [123.83] B.C. PLUG Enclosure Rating: IP64, NEMA 3, 7 and 9.
RANGE 1/8 FEMALE NPT Switch Type: 1 Form C relay (SPDT).
ADJUSTMENT HIGH PRESSURE Electrical Rating: 10A, 120/240 VAC, 28 VDC.
SCREW 1/2 FEMALE 3/8 CONNECTION Resistive 50mA, 125 VDC.
5-7/16 NPT [9.53]
[138.13] 1-23/32 Power Requirements: 24 VDC ±10%. 120 or
ELECTRICAL [43.64] 240 VAC ±10% optional.
CONNECTION 3-1/2
Patent No. 6,089,098 Electrical Connections: Internal terminal block.
[88.90]
Process Connections: 1/8˝ female NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical po-
The Model 1950G Explosion-Proof Switch combines the best features sition. Consult factory for other position
of the popular Dwyer® Series 1950 Pressure Switch with the benefit of nat- orientations.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type on top of
ural gas compatibility. Units are rain-tight for outdoor installations, and are housing.
UL listed for use in Class I, Groups A, B, C, & D; Class II, Groups E, F, & G Weight: 2 lb, 15.7 oz (1.35 kg).
and Class III atmospheres, Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX) Compliant for Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA, FM, ATEX.
11 2 G EExd IIB & Hydrogen T6 and CSA & FM approved for Class I, Div MODELS
1, Groups B, C, D; Class II, Div 1, Groups E, F, G and Class III atmospheres. Model Range, Approximate Dead Band at
The 1950G is very compact, about half the weight and bulk of equivalent con- Number1 Inches W.C. Min. Set Point Max. Set Point
ventional explosion-proof switches. 1950G-00-B-24-NA .07 to .15 .04 .06
Easy access to the SPDT relay and power supply terminals is provided by 1950G-0-B-24-NA .15 to .50 .06 .11
removing the top plate of the aluminum housing. A supply voltage of 24 1950G-1-B-24-NA .4 to 1.6 .11 .29
VDC, 120 or 240 VAC is required. A captive screw allows the cover to swing 1950G-5-B-24-NA 1.4 to 5.5 .4 .9
aside while remaining attached to the unit. Adjustment to the set point of 1950G-10-B-24-NA 3 to 11 .9 1.8
the switch can be made without disassembly of the housing. 1950G-20-B-24-NA 4 to 20 1.2 3.0
1
Note: For alternate supply voltages change 24 to 120 or 240. Example: 1950G-00-B-120.
For ATEX approved models remove“-NA”.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 50
p51 7/24/06 9:00 AM Page 1

Pressure Series
MDS Miniature Pressure Switch
Shock and Vibration Resistant, Lightweight and Compact, Gold Contacts
0.38
[9.7]
0.30 TYP
[7.6]
0.37
[9.4]

0.72
0.38 [18.3] 0.50
[9.7] [12.7]
1.00 SQ
[25.4]

The Series MDS Pressure Switch is designed with a double SPECIFICATIONS

diaphragm to protect false actuation due to shock and vibration. This Switch Type: SPST normally open.
low cost pressure switch has a minimum 20 million cycle life Switching Media: Air or compatible fluids on “high” side.
expectancy, and an extremely fast response time, making this an ideal Pressure Limits: Set point <3.0 in H2O: 8 psi; Set point >3.0 in
device for OEM orders.
H2O: 15 psi.
Current Rating: 40 mA resistive for life in excess of 20 million
cycles.
Temperature Limits: 40 to 150°F (4 to 66°C).
MODELS Electrical Connections: Gold tab-type for use with quick dis-
Model Number Set Point Model Number Set Point connections.
MDS-0 0.5 in. H2O MDS-7 8.0 in. H2O Pressure Connections: Two barbed ports for use with 1/8˝-3/16˝
MDS-1 1.0 in. H2O MDS-8 10.0 in. H2O ID tubing.
MDS-2 1.5 in. H2O MDS-10 15.0 in. H2O
MDS-3 2.0 in. H2O MDS-12 30.0 in. H2O Housing: Polycarbonate.
MDS-4 3.0 in. H2O MDS-14 50.0 in. H2O Diaphragm Material: Polyurethane.
MDS-6 6.0 in. H2O Weight: Less than 0.353 oz (10 g).

Series
MDA Miniature Adjustable Pressure Switch
Adjustable Set Points from 0.1 to 100 in. of H2O
.310
[7.9] LOW
.220 TYP PRESSURE
[5.6] PORT
.780 .720
[19.8] Ø.156 TYP [18.2]
[4]
HIGH
PRESSURE
PORT
.720 .480 .600
[18.3] .200 TYP [12.2] [15.2] 1.150
1.000 SQ [5.1]
.720 TYP [29.2]
[25.4]
[18.3]

Sense differential pressure with the Series MDA Miniature SPECIFICATIONS

Adjustable Pressure Switch. The switch features field adjustable set Switch Type: SPST normally open.
point and gold inlay contacts. Air or other compatible fluids can be Switching Media: Air or compatible fluids on “high side”.
used on the “high side”. The lightweight and compact size make the Pressure Limits: MDA-011: 2 psi; MDA-111: 4 psi; MDA-211: 8
MDA ideal for any application with space constraints. Applications psi; MDA-311: 15 psi.
include industrial, HVAC, pump and motor control, medical, automo- Current Rating: 40 mA resistive for life in excess of 20 million
tive, pools and spas.
cycles.
Temperature Limits: 40 to 150°F (4 to 66°C).
Contacts: 18K gold inlay.
Electrical Connections: Terminals - 0.187˝ x 0.20: spade
(recessed) for use with quick disconnects.
Pressure Connections: Smooth port 5/32˝ diameter for 1/8˝ ID
MODELS tubing.
Set Point in. H2O (mbar) Housing: Polycarbonate.
Model Number Minimum Maximum Diaphragm Material: Polyurethane.
MDA-011 0.1 (0.25) 0.5 (1.25) Operating Voltage: AC/DC - 30V or less with resistive load.
MDA-111 0.5 (1.25) 2.0 (4.98) Mounting: Use #4 screws through mounting lugs or #2 screws
MDA-211 2.0 (4.98) 15 (37.37) through eyelets.
MDA-311 15 (37.37) 60 (149.3) Weight: Less than 0.353 oz (10 g).
MDA-411 60 (149.3) 100 (249.10)

51 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg52 8/2/06 3:51 PM Page 1

Pressure
Series
MVS Miniature Vacuum Switch
SPDT N/O or N/C Switch, Adjustable Set Point, Ideal for OEM’s
1 SQ.
[25.40] 23/64
[9.13]
23/32 39/64
[18.26 [15.48]
TYP.]
1/4 [6.35] OR
1/8 NPT
VACUUM PORT
1-13/16 1/64 [0.40]
[46.04] MOUNTING
HOLE COM
TYP. 4 PLACES
NO NC
3/16 [4.76]
TYP. 3 PLACES 1-21/32
[42.07]

Compact, lightweight, and adjustable, the Series MVS SPECIFICATIONS Contacts: Silver with brass termi-
Miniature Vacuum Switch is specially designed for OEM applications. Service: Air or compatible fluids. nals.
This low cost switch has a minimum life expectancy of 10 million cy- Wetted Materials: Housing: poly- Electrical Connections: Terminals
cles and has an extremely fast response time. Typical applications for carbonate; Diaphragm: 0.187˝ x 0.20˝ spade for use with
the MVS are HVAC, home appliance, dairy systems, medical, office polyurethane. quick disconnects.
equipment, and pump control. Temperature Limits: 40 to 150°F Process Connections: Models
(4 to 66°C). MVS 1 to MVS 3:Smooth port
MODELS Pressure Limits: Up to Maximum 0.25˝ diameter; Models MVS 4 to
Set Point in. H2O (mbar) Range. MVS 6: 1/8˝ male NPT.
Repeatability: ±20%. Mounting: Use #2 screws through
Model Number Minimum Maximum
Switch Type: SPDT normally open eyelets.
MVS-1 3 (8) 8 (20) or normally closed. Weight: Less than 0.671 oz (19 g.)
MVS-2 9 (21) 80 (199) Electrical Rating: Range 3 to 8 in
MVS-3 81 (200) 330 (822) w.c.: 3A, 125/250 VAC; Range 9 to
MVS-4* 3 (8) 8 (20) 80 in w.c.: 10A, 125/250 VAC;
MVS-5* 9 (21) 80 (199) Range 81 to 330 in w.c.: 15A,
MVS-6* 81 (200) 330 (822) 125/250 VAC.

* Models have 1/8˝ male NPT process connections.

Series
MHS Miniature High Sensitivity Pressure Switch
SPDT N/O or N/C Switch, Adjustable Set Points from 3 in. H 0 to 60 PSI 2
1 SQ
[25.4] 29/64
[11.5]
23/32 9/16 7/16 HEX
[18.2] [14.3] 1/8 NPT [11.1]

COM
1-7/8
[47.6] 4 X Ø7/64
NO NC [2.5]

1-23/32
[43.6] 3/16
[4.7]

The Series MHS Miniature High Sensitivity Pressure Switch SPECIFICATIONS Contacts: Silver with brass termi-
offers a wide range of field adjustable pressure set point options. The Service: Air or compatible fluids. nals.
compact switch can be used with air or other compatible fluids. Ideal Wetted Materials: Housing: poly- Electrical Connections: Terminals
application is for turning pumps and compressors on and off when lev- carbonate; Diaphragm: 0.187˝ x 0.20˝ spade for use with
els change. The Series MHS models offer a variety of electrical ratings polyurethane. quick disconnects.
to suit application needs. The switch is easy to install and easy to ad- Temperature Limits: 40 to 150°F Process Connections: All models
just, with a long mechanical life of over 10 million cycles. (4 to 66°C). 1/8˝ NPT port.
Pressure Limits: Up to Maximum Mounting: Use #2 screws through
Range. eyelets.
MODELS Repeatability: ±20%. Weight: 0.71 oz (20 g).
Set Point in. H2O (mbar) Switch Type: SPDT normally open
Model Number Minimum Maximum or normally closed.
MHS-1 3 (7.5) 10 (25) Electrical Rating: MHS-1: 3A;
MHS-2 10 (25) 28 (69) MHS-2: 10A; MHS-3, -4, -5: 15A,
MHS-3 28 (69) 111 (276) 125/250 VAC.
MHS-4 111 (276) 416 (1034)
MHS-5 416 (1034) 1664 (4137)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 52
p53 7/24/06 9:02 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
A4 Differential Pressure Switch
Adjustable Set Point, High Overpressure

1-1/2
1.000 HEX [38.10]
[25.40]
1/4 NPT

1-1/4 3-3/4
[31.75] 95.25]

Rugged Series A4 Differential Pressure Switch offers field SPECIFICATIONS

adjustments and can handle system pressures up to 6000 psig. Service: Compatible gases.
Piston design allows mounting in any orientation. The switch is Wetted Materials: Body, piston, and fittings: anodized aluminum;
capable of carrying moderate shock and vibratory loads. spring: steel.
Temperature Limits: -65 to 225°F (-54 to 107°C).
Pressure Limits: 2000 psid (138 bar), 6000 psig (413 bar).
MODELS Repeatability: See table.
Model Repeatability Set Point psid (bar) Switch Type: SPDT.
Number psi (bar) Increasing Decreasing Electrical Rating: AC: 3 VA, 0.25A @ 120 VAC; DC: 5 VA, 0.25A
A4-1 ±2 (.14) 7-13 (.48-.89) 2-7 (.14-.48) @ 175 VDC.
A4-2 ±4 (.28) 13-25 (.89-1.7) 5-16 (.34-1.1) Electrical Connection: 24 AWG X 12˝ (30.5 cm) wire leads.
A4-3 ±8 (.55) 25-45 (1.7-3.1) 10-21 (.68-1.5) Process Connection: 1/4˝ female NPT.
A4-4 ±16 (1.1) 35-160 (2.4-11.0) 20-80 (1.4-5.5) Mounting Orientation: Any.
A4-5 ±32 (2.2) 120-250 (8.3-17.2) 35-120 (2.4-8.3) Set Point Adjustment: See table.
Weight: 8.5 oz (241 g).
Agency Approvals: CE.

Series
BB Bourdon Tube Differential Pressure Switches
Stainless Steel Bourdon Tubes, Adjustable Deadband, High Pressure ®

Welded stainless steel Bourdon tubes reduce chance of leakage,

(even in the event of fire), in model BB differential pressure switches.
Units are ideal for checking differential pressure (head) across high
(3) Ø13/64 [5.16] MOUNTING
pressure pumps and filters. Hermetically sealed mercury wetted con-
HOLES EQUALLY SPACED ON tacts help ensure reliable operations. Extra sensitive (fixed dead-
A 6-1/2 [165.10] B.C.
band) units are available on special order, as are weatherproof and
explosion-proof enclosures.
1-3/16
[30.18] Ø7
Ø6 [177.80] SPECIFICATIONS
[152.40] Wetted Materials: 403 SS Bourdon tube. 316 SS optional.
7-59/64
[210.22] Temperature Limits: -10 to 180°F (-23 to 82°C).
Ø7/8 [22.23] TYP
CONDUIT
Pressure Limit: Maximum pressure of the operating range.
CONNECTION
1/4 MALE NPT Enclosure Rating: General purpose. Weatherproof and explosion-proof
PRESSURE 13/16
1-13/32 CONNECTION 1-5/8 [20.64]
optional.
[35.71] TYP 2 PLACES [41.28] Switch Type: SPST mercury switch. Models shown close on increase of
3-3/4 differential pressure. Replace “-3” with “-2” in model number for open on
[95.25]
increase.
Electrical Rating: 5A @ 120 VAC, 2.5A @ 240 VAC, 2.5A @ 120 VDC, 1A
@ 240 VDC.
Electrical Connections: Screw type.
MODELS Conduit Connection: 7/8˝ (22.23 mm) hole for 1/2˝ (12.7 mm) conduit
hub.
Operating Differential Min./Max. Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT. 1/2˝ male NPT on ranges 15S and
Range Range Deadband 16S.
Model psig (bar) psid (bar) psig (bar) Mounting Orientation: Vertical. Vibration free.
BB-523-3-6S 5-100 (.3-6.9) 0-40 (0-2.8) 3/40 (.21/2.8) Set Point Adjustment: Thumbwheel screw.
BB-523-3-8S 10-200 (.7-13.8) 0-120 (0-8.3) 4/120 (.28/8.3) Weight: 4 lb (1.8 kg).
BB-523-3-9S 10-300 (.7-20.7) 0-180 (0-12.4) 6/80 (.41/5.5) Deadband: See model chart.
BB-523-3-10S 25-600 (1.7-41.4) 0-360 (0-24.8) 15/360 (1.0/24.8) Agency Approvals: CSA.
BB-523-3-11S 50-1000 (3.5-69.0) 0-600 (0-41.4) 20/600 (1.4/41.4)
BB-523-3-12S 100-1500 (6.9-103.4) 0-900 (0-62.1) 40/900 (2.8/62.1) Suggested Specification:
BB-523-3-13S 300-2500 (20.7-172.4) 0-1500(0-103.4) 50/1500 (3.5/103.4) Differential pressure switches shall be operated by welded type 403 SS Bourdon
BB-523-3-15S 500-5000 (34.5-344.7) 0-30009(0-206.8) 200/3000 (8.6/206.8)
tubes. No elastomeric or plastic O-rings, diaphragms or packing shall be used in
BB-523-3-16S 1000-8000 (69.9-551.6) 0-5000(0-344.7) 500/5000 (34.5-344.7)
pressure containment. Contacts shall be hermetically sealed and mercury wet-
Maximum pressure not to exceed maximum adjustable operating pressure range. ted. Units shall be Mercoid® Differenital Pressure Switch Model No. BB (___).

53 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p54 7/24/06 9:03 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
H3 Explosion-Proof Differential Pressure Switches
Setpoints from 10” w.c. to 200 psid – Rated 1500 psig, Weatherproof
®
®

COVER
SET SCREW COVER

3/4 NPT
CONDUIT CONNECTION

5-3/8
[136.53] 2-13/32 Ø11/64 [Ø4.37]
[61.12] MOUNTING HOLES
IN MTG BRACKET
1/8 NPT
31/32
LOW PRESSURE
[24.61]
CONNECTION
17/32 1-3/4
OPTIONAL DRAIN 1-25/32 [44.45]
[13.5]
[45.24] 1/8 NPT 3
PROCESS 3-9/16
Patent No. 4,827,095 CONNECTION [90.49] HIGH PRESSURE [762]
CENTERLINE 4 CONNECTION
[101.6]

Explosion-proof, heavy duty, industrial unit has patented and SPECIFICATIONS

unique new design which provides sensitivity to differential pressures Wetted Materials: See pressure chamber and diaphragm material in
as low as 10 inches of water (254 mm w.c.), yet handles total pressure model chart.
of 1500 psi (103 bar). Unlike common differential pressure switches Temperature Limit: -4 to 220°F (-20 to 104°C),
that use a piston-type motion transfer, the Series H3 utilizes a rotary ATEX: -20 to 90°C (-4 to 194°F).
motion transfer shaft that prevents a change in total pressure from Pressure Limit: 1500 psig (103 bar).
Enclosure Rating: See ratings chart.
causing a setpoint shift. Unit yields deadbands approximately 5% of Switch Type: SPDT or DPDT snap switch.
range, with zero setpoint shift due to variation in working pressures. Electrical Rating: 5A @ 125/250 VAC, 30 VDC.
Friction is minimized and repeatability increased by allowing range Electrical Connections: See model chart.
spring to act directly on diaphragm plate. Rolling diaphragm design Conduit Connection: 3/4˝ female NPT.
maintains constant effective area to further reduce friction. Di- Process Connection: 1/8˝ female NPT.
aphragm is allowed to “seat”, allowing application of full rated pres- Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
sure, up to 1500 psi (103 bar), on either high or low pressure port, Set Point Adjustment: Internal screw.
without damage. Special overtravel feature prevents overtightening of Weight: 4 lb, 2 oz (2 kg).
Deadband: Approximately 5% of range.
range adjust screw. Choose optional 316SS chamber for water and Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, CE, and ATEX see ratings chart.
water-based fluids or harsher applications.
Model H3A-1SL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model H3A-2SL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HAZARDOUS LOCATION/WEATHERPROOF RATINGS Model H3A-3SL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model H3S-1SL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directive 94/9/EC Model H3S-2SL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODEL UL CSA ATEX Compliant Model H3S-3SL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-610-Pipe Mounting Kit for 1-1/4 to 2˝ pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0344
H3 _ – _ _ C — — II 2 G EEx d IIB
-20°C≤ T amb ≤ 75°C T6 Model Chart - Series H3
EC-Type Certificate No. Example H3 S 2 S C MV H3S-2SC-MV Differential Pressure Control; 316 SS
KEMA 03ATEX 2584 pressure chamber and Fluoroelastomer diaphragm;
weatherproof and ATEX; SPDT snap action switch
with gold contacts; fixed deadband, automatic reset;
CI. I, Gr.B, C & D CI. I, Gr.B, C & D
H3 _ – _ _ L adjustable range 0.5-15 psid
CI. II, Gr.E, F & G CI. II, Gr.E, F & G Series desgnator, weatherproof and
NEMA 4 Construction H3
H3 _ – _ _ T NEMA 4X — explosion-proof
Pressure A Aluminum chamber with Nitrile diaphragm
Chamber &
0344 Diaphragm S 316 SS chamber with Fluoroelastomer diaphragm
II 2 G EEx d IIB Material
H3 _ – _ _ C-DR — — -20°C≤ T amb ≤ 75°C T6 (Wetted)
EC-Type Certificate No. Adjustable 1 Adjustable range 10-180 in. w.c.
KEMA 03ATEX 2584 Operating (2.48-44.78 kPa)
Range 2 Adjustable range 0.5-15 psid
(0.03-1 bar)
CI. I, Gr.B, C & D 3 Adjustable range 5-70 psid
H3 _ – _ _ L-DR (.34-4.8 bar)
CI. II, Gr.E, F & G — — 4 Adjustable range 10-200 psid
Deadband
NEMA 3 approximately (.7-13.8 bar)
5% of range Maximum pressure for all ranges is 1500 psi
(103 bar)
Internal terminal blocks for con- Circuit S SPDT snap action switch rated 5A @ 125/250
ductors up to 18 gauge are option- (Switch) VAC, 30 VDC
al. Options D DPDT snap action switch rated 5A @ 125/250
VAC, 30 VDC
Optional NEMA 3 (lP 54) housing L 18 AWG x 18 inch lead wires
includes explosion-proof drain. Electrical
T UL, CSA approved internal terminal block
Standard NEMA 4X (IP 56) version Connection
is without drain. C ATEX approved internal terminal block
Options
DRAIN Housing with drain - allows condensate to be
External Ground Connection drained from inside enclosure (meets NEMA 3
Standard — Internal ground con- instead of 4X)
nection also standard — use either MV Gold contacts on snap switch for dry circuits rated
one. 1A @ 125 VAC, 1A resistive or
Note: Shown without housing 0.5 A inductive @ 30 VDC
and cover. VIT Fluoroelastomer diaphragm option where not standard

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 54
p55 7/24/06 9:05 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
DP Double Bellows Differential Pressure Switches
Visible Setpoints, Adjustable or Fixed Deadband . . . High Pressure Ranges ®

Two opposing bellows combine maximum sensitivity and vibration

resistance with moderate cost in the Series DP differential pressure
Ø13/64 [5.16] MOUNTING
HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
switches. Both set and reset points are easily adjustable through non-
ON A 6-1/2 [165.10] B.C. interactive, externally accessible controls. Visible set-point indicators
1/8 FEMALE
NPT HIGH simplify changes. SPDT snap action or mercury switch, 316 stainless
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/8 FEMALE
NPT LOW steel or brass bellows, flanged steel housing. Rated pressures to 600
Ø7
[177.80]
Ø6
PRESSURE
CONNECTTION
psig.
[152.40]
OPTIONAL ENCLOSURES
OPERATING
Ø7/8 [22.23]
45° ADJUSTMENT Weatherproof Housing — to order add “W” suffix after DPA.
1-7/32 CONDUIT
[30.94] 2-3/4 CONNECTION
OR RESET Example: D P A W – 7033-153-61
[69.85]
4-1/4
3/4 [19.05] CLEARANCE
FOR COVER REMOVAL
Explosion-Proof Housing — to order add “E” suffix after DPA.
[107.95] Example: D P A E – 7033-153-61

MODELS
Snap Action Switch Snap Action Switch Mercury Switch*
Max. SPDT, 15A @ 120/240 VAC SPDT, 15A @ 120/240 VAC SPDT, 4A @ 120V, 2A @ 240V, AC/DC.
Range Press Min. Fixed Min.
Bellows psid psig D.B. D.B. D.B.
Material (bar) (bar) psid Model Number psid (bar) Model Number psid (bar) Model Number
Brass 0-10 (0-0.7) 50 (3.5) 1.5 (.10) DPA-7033-153-61 0.5 (.03) DPS-7233-153-61 1.0 (.07) DPA-33-153-61
Brass 0-20 (0-1.4) 100 (6.9) 2.5 (.17) DPA-7033-153-62 1.0 (.07) DPS-7233-153-62 1.5 (.10) DPA-33-153-62
Brass 0-30 (0-2.1) 300 (20.7) 6.0 (.41) DPA-7033-153-64 1.5 (.10) DPS-7233-153-64 3.0 (.21) DPA-33-153-64
316SS 0-20 (0-1.4) 100 (6.9) 3.0 (.21) DPA-7043-153-62E 1.5 (.10) DPS-7243-153-62E 2.0 (.14) DPA-43-153-62E
316SS 0-30 (0-2.1) 300 (20.7) 6.0 (.41) DPA-7043-153-64E 2.0 (.14) DPS-7243-153-64E 3.5 (.24) DPA-43-153-64E
316SS 0-80 (0-5.5) 600 (41.4) 20(1.4) DPA-7043-153-65E 6.0 (.41) DPS-7243-153-65E 16 (1.1) DPA-43-153-65E
* Mercury switch units are not CE approved.

Series
PG Gas Pressure/Differential Pressure Switches
External Adjustment, Visible Dial, Hermetically Sealed Snap or Mercury Switch
®
ADJUSTMENT
®
SCREW
(3) Ø13/64 [5.16] Ø6-1/64 SPECIFICATIONS
MOUNTING
HOLES
[152.78] Wetted Materials: Fairprene, brass, steel, and aluminum.
EQUALLY Ø7 Temperature Limits: -10 to 180°F (-23 to 82°C).
MERCOID
CONTROL
SPACED ON [177.80] Pressure Limit:
6-1/2 [165.10] B.C.
8-1/4 Single Pressure Use on High Side:
1/8 FEMALE
NPT PRESS.
[209.55] 1-27/64 Sustained Pressure: 15 psig (1.0 bar).
45° 30° CONN. [36.12] Surge Limit: 20 psig (1.4 bar).
1/4 17/32
1/2 MALE NPT X
[6.35] [13.49] Differential Pressure Use:
Ø7/8 [22.23] 1/8 FEMALE NPT 1-3/16 Sustained Pressure, Range P1: 2 psig (.14 bar).
PROCESS 3/4 [19.05] 4
CONDUIT [30.16]
CONNECTION CONN. CLEARANCE [101.6] Sustained Pressure, Range P2: 10 psig (0.7 bar).
FOR COVER
REMOVAL
Enclosure Rating: General purpose. Weatherproof and
explosion-proof optional.
Large diaphragm sensitivity and time proven dependable design are combined in model Repeatability: ±1% of full range.
PG differential pressure switches. Visible dial reduces “start up” time and helps prevent cal- Switch Type: SPST mercury switch, SPDT mercury switch,
ibration errors. External adjustment allows set point change without removal of cover. Unit is SPDT snap switch, or SPDT hermetically sealed snap switch.
listed by UL, FM and CSA. Optional DPDT.
Electrical Rating: SPDT Mercury: 4A @ 120 VAC/VDC, 2A @
MODELS 240 VAC/VDC. SPST Mercury: 6A @ 120 VAC/VDC, 3A @ 240
Model Maximum Switch VAC/VDC. SPDT Snap: 15A @ 120 VAC, 8A @ 240 VAC, 0.5A
Number Range Deadband Type @ 120 VDC, 0.25A @ 240 VDC. SPDT H.S. Silver Snap: 5A @
PG-153-P1 1-30˝ wc (.25-7.47 kPa) 1.9˝ wc (0.47 kPa) SPDT Mercury 125/250 VAC, 30 VDC resistive. SPDT H.S. Gold Snap: 1A @
SPDT Mercury
125 VAC, 30 VDC resistive.
PG-153-P2 0.5-5 psid (0.3-.345 bar) 0.4 psid (0.38 bar) Electrical Connections: Screw type.
PG-3-P1 1-30˝ wc (.25-7.47 kPa) 1.3˝ wc (0.32 kPa) SPST Mercury* Conduit Connection: 7/8˝ (22.23 mm) hole for 1/2˝ (12.7 mm)
PG-3-P2 0.5-5 psid (.03-.345 bar) 0.3 psid (0.21 kPa) SPST Mercury* conduit hub.
PG-7000-153-P1 1-30˝ wc (.25-7.47 kPa) 4˝ wc (1.0 kPa) SPDT Snap Process Connection: 1/2˝ male NPT and 1/8˝ female NPT used
PG-7000-153-P2 0.5-5 psid (.03-.345 bar) .5 psid (.035 bar) SPDT Snap for single positive pressure or high differential pressure, 1/8˝
PG-7000-153HS-P1 4˝ wc (1.0 kPa) SPDT Hermetically female NPT used for single vacuum or low differential pressure.
1-30˝ wc (.25-7.47 kPa)
Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
Sealed Silver Snap
Set Point Adjustment: External screw.
PG-7000-153HG-P1 1-30˝ wc (.25-7.47 kPa) 4˝ wc (1.0 kPa) SPDT Hermetically Weight: 4.5 lb (2 kg).
Sealed Gold Snap Deadband: See model chart.
* SPST switches shown are close on increase of pressure. For open on increase of pressure replace
Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, FM for mercury switch models.
3 in middle of model number with 2. Example: PG-2-P1. UL only on snap switch models.

55 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p56 7/26/06 3:20 PM Page 1

Pressure
Series
1996 Gas Pressure Switches ®
®

Compact, Low Cost, 4" - 20" w.c. Range

REMOVABLE CONDUIT
ENCLOSURE COVER
Model 1996-20 gas-
air pressure switch. Ø7/8 [22.23] OPENING FOR
Connections, 1/2 CONDUIT CONNECTION
dimensions and 3-1/8 WINDOW AND VISIBLE
visible on-off [79.38] ON-OFF INDICATOR
indicator are VENT CONNECTION
shown. ON OPPOSITE SIDE
1/4 NPT EXTERNAL THREAD
(ALTERNATE GAS CONNECTION)
Patent No. 3,566,060 3-1/2 1/8 (F) GAS
[88.90] PRESSURE CONNECTION

SPECIFICATIONS Electrical Connections: 3 screw

Reliable and convenient, the 1996-5 and the 1996-20 Gas Pressure
Service: Air, natural & type, common, normally open,
Switches serve as a compact, low cost switch for gas fired furnaces and
manufactured gas, LP gas. normally closed.
equipment. Pressure ranges for both models are ideal for high or low
Wetted Materials: Consult factory. Process Connections: 1/8˝ female
gas pressure interlock. Visible set point and on-off indicators add con-
Temperature Limits: 32 to 110°F NPT or 1/4˝ male NPT.
venience in servicing. Use either NO or NC contacts on SPDT switch.
(0 to 43.3°C). -30 to 110°F Vent Connection: 1/8˝ female
Bottom connection has both 1/8˝ female and 1/4˝ male threads for pipe
(-34.4 to 43.3°C) for dry gas or dry NPT.
nipple or coupling. Top connection vents diaphragm chamber to outside
air. Mounting Orientation:
or to furnace combustion chamber. Mount switch with diaphragm in a
Pressure Limits: 45˝ w.c. (11.2 Diaphragm in horizontal position.
horizontal position and gas pressure connection at bottom. Used with
kPa) continuous; 10 psig (68.95 Consult factory for other position
natural, manufactured or LP gas. Also see Model 1950G.
kPa) surge. orientations.
Switch Type: Single-pole double- Set Point Adjustment: Screw type
MODELS throw (SPDT). with visible indicator, inside conduit
Electrical Rating: 15A @ 120-480 enclosure.
Model Range VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive 1/8 H.P. @ Weight: 1 lb 2.3 oz (349 g).
1996-5 1.4˝ - 5.5˝ w.c. 125 VAC, 1/4 H.P. @ 250 VAC 60 Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA,
1996-20 4˝ - 20˝ w.c. Hz. FM.

Series
A2 Subminiature Pressure Switch
Designed for OEM Use, Field Adjustable, Submersible Models Available
1/8 NPT 1/8 NPT

53/64 35/64 53/64

[21.03] [13.89] [21.03]

1-1/8 23/64
[28.58] [9.13]
23/64 15/16 HEX 23/64 15/16 HEX
1-61/64 [23.81] 1-43/64 [23.81]
[49.61] [9.13] [42.47] [9.13]

SPECIFICATIONS Repeatability: ±5% of highest set

Designed for OEM applications, the Series A2 is economical Service: Compatible liquids and gases. point.
and is equipped with high proof pressure capabilities for demand- Wetted Materials: Kapton® Polymide Switch Type: SPST, 100VA, 42V.
ing applications. The A2 is available with either spade terminals film and brass. Electrical Connection: 1/4˝ (6.3 mm).
Temperature Limits: -40 to 250°F (-40 (6.3 mm) Spade terminals or flying leads.
or flying leads (submersible). Switches with spade terminals can to 121°C). Process Connection: 1/8˝ male NPT.
be easily adjusted in the field. Pressure Limits: 500 psi (34 bar). Weight: 0.14 Ib (0.06 kg).
Enclosure Rating: IP68 (Submersible Deadband: 1-2 psi (.14 bar).
MODELS models only). Agency Approvals: CE.
Model Number Range psi (bar) Electrical Connection NO/NC Model Number Range psi(bar) Electrical Connection NO/NC
A2-2801 5-25 (.48-1.72) Spade Terminals NO A2-3801 20-60 (1.4-4.1) Spade Terminals NO
A2-28032* 5-25 (.48-1.72) Flying Leads (Submersible) NO A2-38032* 20-60 (1.4-4.1) Flying Leads (Submersible) NO
A2-2811 5-25 (.48-1.72) Spade Terminals NC A2-3811 20-60 (1.4-4.1) Spade Terminals NC
A2-28132* 5-25 (.48-1.72) Flying Leads (Submersible) NC A2-38132* 20-60 (1.4-4.1) Flying Leads (Submersible) NC
A2-4801 50-150 (3.5-10.3) Spade Terminals NO
A2-48032* 50-150 (3.5-10.3) Flying Leads (Submersible) NO
A2-4811 50-150 (3.5-10.3) Spade Terminals NC
A2-48132* 50-150 (3.5-10.3) Flying Leads (Submersible) NC

* Submersible models are not field adjustable. Set point must be given at time of order.
Kapton is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont de Nemours & Company.
®

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 56
p57 7/24/06 9:09 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
PQ Ultra Sensitive Pressure Switches ®

Large Diaphragm, Magnetic Mercury Switch ®

SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Nylon reinforced Buna-N, steel, brass, and aluminum.
Temperature Limits: -10 to 180°F (-23 to 82°C).
Ø7/8
Ø5-13/16 (3) Ø13/64 [5.16] Pressure Limit: See model chart.
[22.23]
CONDUIT [147.65] MOUNTING
HOLES
Enclosure Rating: General purpose. Weatherproof and explosion-proof
CONNECTION Ø7 EQUALLY optional.
[177.80] SPACED ON
1/4 A 6-1/2 [165.10] B.C. Switch Type: SPST mercury switch. Models shown close on increase of
[6.33] 1/8 FEMALE pressure or decrease of vacuum. Replace “-3” with “-2” in model number
9/16 NPT PRESSURE
[14.29]
3/4 [19.05] CONN. TYP 2 PLACES
for open on increase of pressure or decrease of vacuum.
31/32 Electrical Rating: 0.3A @ 120 VAC, 0.15A @ 240 VAC, 0.9A @ 24 VAC,
[24.61] 1-27/64 CLEARANCE
[36.11] FOR COVER REMOVAL 0.15A @ 120 VDC, 0.07A @ 240 VDC, 0.45A @ 24 VDC.
3-57/64
[98.82] Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
Conduit Connection: 7/8˝ (22.23 mm) hole for 1/2˝ (12.7 mm) conduit hub.
An ultra sensitive pressure switch, Series PQ is designed for use on air or non- Process Connection: 1/8˝ female NPT.
corrosive gas applications. Large diaphragm operates special magnetic mercury Mounting Orientation: Vertical, vibration free.
switch. Operating point is adjustable over entire range. Unit is also available in Set Point Adjustment: Internal screw.
weatherproof or explosion-proof housing. Weight: General purpose: 4.5 lb (2 kg).
Deadband: See model chart.
MODELS Agency Approvals: UL & CSA.
Model Approx. Mid-Range Maximum
Operating Range Deadband Surge Pressure
Number Inches w.c. (kPa) in. w.c. (Pa) in. w.c. (kPa)
PQ-3-X1 0-0.1 (0-.025) 0.1 (25) 1.0 (.25)
PQ-3-X2 0.1-1.0 (.025-.25) 0.02 (5) 10.0 (2.5)
PQ-3-X2.6 0.1-6.0 (.025-1.5) 0.02 (5) 10.0 (2.5)
PQ-3-X3 1.0-30 (.25-7.5) 0.15 (37) 60.0 (15)
PQ-3-X4 0-0.1(vac.) (0-.025) 0.01 (2.5) 1.0 (.25)
PQ-3-X5 0.1-1.0 (vac.) (.025-.25) 0.15 (37) 10.0 (2.5)
PQ-3-X6 1.0-30 (vac) (.25-7.5) 0.15 (37) 60.0 (15)

Series
AP Diaphragm Operated Pressure Switches
Visible Setpoint Adjustment Compact, Low Cost ®
®

SPECIFICATIONS
Ø7/8 [22.23] KNOCK-OUT HOLE Wetted Materials: Nylon reinforced Buna-N and steel.
5-1/16 [128.59] PTFE and 316 SS optional.
4-11/16 [119.06]
15/16 Ø7/8 [22.23] 1-1/16 [26.99]
Temperature Limits: -30 to 150°F (-35 to 66°C).
[23.81] CONDUIT Pressure Limit: See model chart.
HOLE
Enclosure Rating: General purpose. Weatherproof and ex-
3-1/8
2-13/32 [79.38] plosion-proof optional.
[61.12] 4
[101.6] Switch Type: SPDT mercury switch or SPDT snap switch.
(2) Ø1/4 Other switch types available.
[6.35] 1-13/16 Electrical Rating: Mercury switch: 4A @ 120 VAC/DC, 2A
1-7/16 MOUNTING [46.04] 1/4 NPT
HOLE ADJUSTMENT @ 240 VAC/DC. Snap switch: 15A @ 120 VAC, 8A @
[36.51] 2-7/8 4-1/8 SCREW WITH
[73.03] [104.78] SEALING WIRE 240VAC, 0.5A @ 120 VDC, 0.25A @ 240 VDC.
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
MODELS Conduit Connection: 7/8˝ (22.23 mm) hole for 1/2˝ (12.7
Switch* Switch Dead Band
Model Ranges Type mm) conduit hub.
Maximum
Number SPDT Low High Pressure Process Connection: 1/4˝ female NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical for mercury switch models,
AP-153-33 10" vac-50" wc Mercury 5" wc 6" wc 15 psig
(1.03 bar) any position for snap switch models.
(2.5-12.4 kPa) (1.2 kPa) (1.49 kPa)
1-30 psig 0.4 psig 0.75 psig 60 psig Set Point Adjustment: External screw.
AP-153-37 Mercury
(.07-2.1 bar) (0.03 bar) (0.05 bar) (4.14 bar) Weight: General purpose: 2 lbs. (0.9 kg).
AP-153-39 10-125 psig Mercury 2 psig 6 psig 160 psig Deadband: See model chart.
(.69-8.6 bar) (0.14 bar) (0.04 bar) (11.0 bar) Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA. For FM consult factory.
AP-7021-153-33 10" vac.-50" wc Snap 8" wc 10" wc 15 psig (Mercury switch units are not CE approved.)
(2.5-12.4 kPa) (2.0 kPa) (2.49 kPa) (1.03 bar)
AP-7021-153-37 1-30 psig Snap 0.75 psig 1.5 psig 60 psig Reliable and convenient, series AP pressure switch
(.07-2.1 bar) (0.05 bar) (0.10 bar) (4.14 bar) is a compact low cost switch for instrument air or other
AP-7021-153-39 10-125 psig Snap 3 psig 7 psig 160 psig low pressure applications. Visible set point and external
(.69-8.6 bar) (0.21 bar) (0.48 bar) (11.0 bar) adjustment add convenience. Used on air, noncorrosive
*Mercury Switch units are not CE approved. gas or liquid service compatible with wetted parts. Unit
also available in weatherproof and explosion-proof hous-
ing.
57 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au
p58 7/24/06 9:10 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
DA/DS Bourdon Tube Pressure Switches
Pressure Ranges to 8000 psi (551.6 bar)
®

2-1/4
[57.15]

6-1/64
[152.8]
DIA.
1-5/8
[41.28]
MERCOID
CONTROL

1/2 [12.7]
CONDUIT HOLE
1/4 N.P.T. ADJUSTMENT SCREWS

7/8 [22.23] 5/8 [15.88]

5 REAR MOUNTING 4-3/16

7-3/4
FLANGE [106.36]
3-1/2 3-1/2 2-9/16
(3) .203 [5.16] 2-13/16
(2) STD. 13/32 DIA.
MOUNTING HOLES DIA. HOLES AT [71.44]
120° ON 6-1/2
3-7/8 [165.1] DIA. 7
BOLT CIRCLE [177.8]
10 1-3/4 DIA.

1-5/8 8
“U” OPERATING [41.28][203.2]
3/4 CONDUIT TH’D ADJUSTMENTS

“L” 1/2
CONTROL CONDUIT
ADJUSTMENTS 3/4 PIPE THD. 1/4 N.P.T. GASKETED COVER HUB
1/2 NPT CONDUIT HOLE FOR ADJUSTMENTS GASKET
5/8 [15.88] 15/16 [23.81]
DAH 1-1/4 DAW

Customers tell us that this is the best pressure switch made. The FEATURES
Mercoid D Series is one of the world’s broadest lines of pressure • Visible calibrated dial.
switches. Whatever your application might be, it is most probable it • On/off indication (except hermetically sealed snap switch models).
can be fully satisfied with a D Series pressure switch. • Adjustable or fixed deadband.
The D Series has extremely high sensitivity and great repeatability. • SPDT snap-action, hermetically sealed snap action or
The DA Models are equipped with two external adjustments, one for hermetically sealed mercury switch.
setting high pressure operating point, the other for setting low pres- • External switch setpoint adjustments.
sure operating point. Deadband, the difference between high and low • Minimum deadband is obtainable at any point in the range.
setpoints, is adjustable over the full scale. The DS Models are equipped • Pressure ranges of full vacuum to 8000 psig.
with a single external adjustment for setting operating point only. The • UL listed, CSA approved. Many models FM approved.
deadband is fixed at a factory setting and cannot be altered in the field. • General purpose, weatherproof or explosion-proof enclosures.
For switches choose between the snap action switch, hermetically
sealed snap action switch and hermetically sealed mercury switch. SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass, 403 SS, or 316 SS.
Options Temperature Limit: 180°F (82°C).
Explosion-Proof Enclosure, Series DAH – Suitable for Class I, Pressure Limit: Maximum pressure of the operating range.
Groups C and D; NEMA 7; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III NEMA Enclosure Rating: General purpose, weatherproof or explosion-proof.
Repeatability: ±1% of full operating range, ±1.5% on DS-7300 mod-
9 and 9A, Division 1. Add “H” to model number after DA or DS. els.
Example: DAH-31-153-7 Switch Type: SPST mercury switch, SPDT mercury switch, SPDT snap
FM Approved: For general purpose and explosion-proof models switch, or SPDT hermetically sealed snap switch. Other circuit types
listed above in agency approvals. Add “F” to model number after available.
DA, DS, DAH or DSH. Electrical Rating: See model charts.
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
Examples: DAF-31-153-7 or DAHF-31-153-7 Conduit Connection: General purpose: 1/2˝ hole for conduit hub.
Other Options (Consult Factory): DPDT switches or other Weatherproof: 1/2˝ conduit hub. Explosion-proof: 3/4˝ female NPT.
switch types, fixed deadband mercury switch units for low dead- Process Connection: General purpose and weatherproof: 1/4˝ male
band applications, manual reset operation, two-stage operation, NPT, 1/2˝ male NPT on ranges 15S and 16S. Explosion-proof: 1/2˝ male
acetal bushed movement for applications with high amounts of vi- NPT and 1/4˝ female NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
bration and/or pulsation, fungus proofing, siphon, diaphragm seals, Set Point Adjustment: Thumbscrew.
mounting flange and remote connection. Weight: General purpose: 4 lb (1.8 kg), weatherproof: 6 lb (2.7 kg),
explosion-proof: 8 lb (3.5 kg).
Deadband: See model chart.
Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA, FM. (Mercury switch units are not
CE approved.)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 58
p59 7/24/06 9:10 AM Page 1

Pressure MODELS
D Series Pressure Switch with Mercury Switch and General Purpose Enclosure
Adjustable Deadband
Bourdon Adjustable Minimum SPDT SPST SPST Minimum SPST Open SPST Close
Tube Operating Deadband 4A @ 120 V Open on Close on Deadband on Increase on Increase
Material Range (psig) 2A @ 240 V Increase Increase (psig) 5A @ 120 VAC 5A @ 120 VAC
(psig) AC/DC 10A @ 120 V 10A @ 120 V 2A @ 240 VDC 2A @ 240 VDC
5A @ 240 V 5A @ 240 V 2.5A @ 120 VDC 2.5A @ 120 VDC
AC/DC AC/DC 1A @ 240 VDC 1A@ 240 VDC
0-30˝ Hg Vac 2˝ Hg DA-31-153-2 DA-31-2-2 DA-31-3-2 1˝ Hg DA-531-2-2 DA-531-3-2
10˝ Hg Vac - 12 1 DA-31-153-3 DA-31-2-3 DA-31-3-3 0.5 DA-531-2-3 DA-531-3-3
25˝ Hg Vac - 50 3.5 DA-31-153-27 DA-31-2-27 DA-31-3-27 2 DA-531-2-27 DA-531-3-27
1/8 – 15 1 DA-31-153-1 DA-31-2-1 DA-31-3-1 0.5 DA-531-2-1 DA-531-3-1
1/8 – 20 1 DA-31-153-3A DA-31-2-3A DA-31-3-3A 0.5 DA-531-2-3A DA-531-3-3A
Brass 1 – 35 1.75 DA-31-153-4 DA-31-2-4 DA-31-3-4 0.75 DA-531-2-4 DA-531-3-4
2 – 60 3 DA-31-153-5 DA-31-2-5 DA-31-3-5 1 DA-531-2-5 DA-531-3-5
5 – 100 3.75 DA-31-153-6 DA-31-2-6 DA-31-3-6 2 DA-531-2-6 DA-531-3-6
5 – 150 6 DA-31-153-7 DA-31-2-7 DA-31-3-7 3 DA-531-2-7 DA-531-3-7
10 – 200 8 DA-31-153-8 DA-31-2-8 DA-31-3-8 3.5 DA-531-2-8 DA-531-3-8
10 – 300 12 DA-31-153-9 DA-31-2-9 DA-31-3-9 6 DA-531-2-9 DA-531-3-9
30˝ Hg Vac – 60 6 DA-21-153-25S DA-21-2-25S DA-21-3-25S 3 DA-521-2-25S DA-521-3-25S
30˝ Hg Vac – 75 8 DA-21-153-26S DA-21-2-26S DA-21-3-26S 4 DA-521-2-26S DA-521-3-26S
2 – 60 4 DA-21-153-5S DA-21-2-5S DA-21-3-5S 2.5 DA-521-2-5S DA-521-3-5S
5 – 100 6 DA-21-153-6S DA-21-2-6S DA-21-3-6S 3 DA-521-2-6S DA-521-3-6S
10 – 200 8 DA-21-153-8S DA-21-2-8S DA-21-3-8S 4 DA-521-2-8S DA-521-3-8S
403 10 – 300 14 DA-21-153-9S DA-21-2-9S DA-21-3-9S 7 DA-521-2-9S DA-521-3-9S
Stainless 40 – 350 14 DA-21-153-9AS DA-21-2-9AS DA-21-3-9AS 7 DA-521-2-9AS DA-521-3-9AS
Steel 25 – 600 25 DA-21-153-10S DA-21-2-10S DA-21-3-10S 15 DA-521-2-10S DA-521-3-10S
50 – 1000 60 DA-21-153-11S DA-21-2-11S DA-21-3-11S 40 DA-521-2-11S DA-521-3-11S
100 – 1500 90 DA-21-153-12S DA-21-2-12S DA-21-3-12S 50 DA-521-2-12S DA-521-3-12S
300 – 2500 150 DA-21-153-13S DA-21-2-13S DA-21-3-13S 100 DA-521-2-13S DA-521-3-13S
500 – 5000 450 DA-21-153-15S DA-21-2-15S DA-21-3-15S 200 DA-521-2-15S DA-521-3-15S
800 – 8000 750 DA-21-153-16S DA-21-2-16S DA-21-3-16S 400 DA-521-2-16S DA-521-3-16S
30˝ Hg Vac – 75 7 DA-41-153-26E DA-41-2-26E DA-41-3-26E 3.5 DA-541-2-26E DA-541-3-26E
5 – 75 3 DA-41-153-23E DA-41-2-23E DA-41-3-23E 2 DA-541-2-23E DA-541-3-23E
10 –100 7 DA-41-153-6E DA-41-2-6E DA-41-3-6E 3.5 DA-541-2-6E DA-541-3-6E
316 10 – 150 6 DA-41-153-24E DA-41-2-24E DA-41-3-24E 3 DA-541-2-24E DA-541-3-24E
Stainless 10 – 300 18 DA-41-153-9E DA-41-2-9E DA-41-3-9E 5 DA-541-2-9E DA-541-3-9E
Steel 30 – 400 30 DA-41-153-21E DA-41-2-21E DA-41-3-21E 15 DA-541-2-21E DA-541-3-21E
75 – 800 75 DA-41-153-22E DA-41-2-22E DA-41-3-22E 35 DA-541-2-22E DA-541-3-22E
100 – 1000 100 DA-41-153-11E DA-41-2-11E DA-41-3-11E 45 DA-541-2-11E DA-541-3-11E
200 - 2500 210 DA-41-153-13E DA-41-2-13E DA-41-3-13E 110 DA-541-2-13E DA-541-3-13E

D Series Pressure Switch with Snap Action Switch and General Purpose Enclosure
Adjustable Deadband Fixed Deadband Hermetically Sealed, Fixed Deadband
SPDT: 15A @ 120/240 VAC SPDT: 15A @ 120/240 AC SPDT: 5A @ 120/240 VAC, 5A res. @ 30 VDC
Bourdon Adjustable Minimum Model Fixed Model Fixed Model
Tube Operating Range Deadband Number Deadband Number Deadband Number
Material (psig) (psig) (psig) (psig)
0-30˝ Hg Vac 9˝ Hg DA-7031-153-2 3˝ Hg DS-7231-153-2 5˝ Hg DS-7331-153-2
10˝ Hg Vac - 12 4 DA-7031-153-3 1.5 DS-7231-153-3 3 DS-7331-153-3
25˝ Hg Vac - 50 8 DA-7031-153-27 2.5 DS-7231-153-27 3.75 DS-7331-153-27
1/8 – 15 4 DA-7031-153-1 1.5 DS-7231-153-1 3 DS-7331-153-1
1/8 – 20 4 DA-7031-153-3A 1.5 DS-7231-153-3A 3 DS-7331-153-3A
Brass 1 – 35 5 DA-7031-153-4 1.5 DS-7231-153-4 3 DS-7331-153-4
2 – 60 6 DA-7031-153-5 2 DS-7231-153-5 3 DS-7331-153-5
5 – 100 9 DA-7031-153-6 2.5 DS-7231-153-6 3.75 DS-7331-153-6
5 – 150 16 DA-7031-153-7 3 DS-7231-153-7 5.25 DS-7331-153-7
10 – 200 16 DA-7031-153-8 4 DS-7231-153-8 6.75 DS-7331-153-8
10 – 300 25 DA-7031-153-9 5 DS-7231-153-9 9 DS-7331-153-9
30˝ Hg Vac – 60 12 DA-7021-153-25S 3.5 DS-7221-153-25S 5.25 DS-7321-153-25S
30˝ Hg Vac – 75 15 DA-7021-153-26S 3.5 DS-7221-153-26S 5.25 DS-7321-153-26S
2 – 60 9 DA-7021-153-5S 3 DS-7221-153-5S 4.5 DS-7321-153-5S
5 – 100 13 DA-7021-153-6S 3.5 DS-7221-153-6S 5.25 DS-7321-153-6S
403 10 – 200 15 DA-7021-153-8S 4 DS-7221-153-8S 7.125 DS-7321-153-8S
Stainless 10 – 300 19 DA-7021-153-9S 6 DS-7221-153-9S 10.5 DS-7321-153-9S
Steel 40 – 350 20 DA-7021-153-9AS 6 DS-7221-153-9AS 10.5 DS-7321-153-9AS
25 – 600 45 DA-7021-153-10S 10 DS-7221-153-10S 18 DS-7321-153-10S
50 – 1000 95 DA-7021-153-11S 20 DS-7221-153-11S 33 DS-7321-153-11S
100 – 1500 130 DA-7021-153-12S 30 DS-7221-153-12S 52.5 DS-7321-153-12S
300 – 2500 260 DA-7021-153-13S 60 DS-7221-153-13S 90 DS-7321-153-13S
500 – 5000 900 DA-7021-153-15S 200 DS-7221-153-15S 300 DS-7321-153-15S
800 – 8000 1500 DA-7021-153-16S 500 DS-7221-153-16S
30˝ Hg Vac – 75 10 DA-7041-153-26E 3.5 DS-7241-153-26E 5.25 DS-7341-153-26E
5 – 75 8 DA-7041-153-23E 4 DS-7241-153-23E 6 DS-7341-153-23E
316 10 –100 10 DA-7041-153-6E 3.5 DS-7241-153-6E 5.25 DS-7341-153-6E
Stainless 10 – 150 11 DA-7041-153-24E 4 DS-7241-153-24E 6.75 DS-7341-153-24E
Steel 10 – 300 28 DA-7041-153-9E 8 DS-7241-153-9E 12 DS-7341-153-9E
30 – 400 52 DA-7041-153-21E 10 DS-7241-153-21E 18 DS-7341-153-21E
75 – 800 120 DA-7041-153-22E 25 DS-7241-153-22E 37.5 DS-7341-153-22E
100 – 1000 190 DA-7041-153-11E 35 DS-7241-153-11E 52.5 DS-7341-153-11E
200 - 2500 400 DA-7041-153-13E 75 DS-7241-153-13E 112.5 DS-7341-153-13E

59 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p60 7/24/06 9:11 AM Page 1

Pressure
MODELS
D Series Pressure Switch with Mercury Switch and Weatherproof Enclosure
Adjustable Deadband
Bourdon Adjustable Minimum SPDT SPST Open SPST Close Minimum SPST Open SPST Close
Tube Operating Dead- 4A @ 120 V on Increase on Increase Dead- on Increase on Increase
Material Range band 2A @ 240 V 10A @ 120 V 10A @ 120 V band 5A @ 120 VAC 5A @ 120 VAC
(psig) (psig) AC/DC 5A @ 240 V 5A @ 240 V (psig) 2A @ 240 VAC 2A @ 240 VAC
AC/DC AC/DC 2.5A @ 120 VDC 2.5A @ 120 VDC
1A @ 240 VDC 1A @ 240 VDC
0-30˝ Hg Vac 2˝ Hg DAW-33-153-2 DAW-33-2-2 DAW-33-3-2 1˝ Hg DAW-533-2-2 DAW-533-3-2
10˝ Hg Vac - 12 1 DAW-33-153-3 DAW-33-2-3 DAW-33-3-3 0.5 DAW-533-2-3 DAW-533-3-3
25˝ Hg Vac - 50 3.5 DAW-33-153-27 DAW-33-2-27 DAW-33-3-27 2 DAW-533-2-27 DAW-533-3-27
1/8 – 15 1 DAW-33-153-1 DAW-33-2-1 DAW-33-3-1 0.5 DAW-533-2-1 DAW-533-3-1
Brass 1/8 – 20 1 DAW-33-153-3A DAW-33-2-3A DAW-33-3-3A 0.5 DAW-533-2-3A DAW-533-3-3A
1 – 35 1.75 DAW-33-153-4 DAW-33-2-4 DAW-33-3-4 0.75 DAW-533-2-4 DAW-533-3-4
2 – 60 3 DAW-33-153-5 DAW-33-2-5 DAW-33-3-5 1 DAW-533-2-5 DAW-533-3-5
5 – 100 3.75 DAW-33-153-6 DAW-33-2-6 DAW-33-3-6 2 DAW-533-2-6 DAW-533-3-6
5 – 150 6 DAW-33-153-7 DAW-33-2-7 DAW-33-3-7 3 DAW-533-2-7 DAW-533-3-7
10 – 200 8 DAW-33-153-8 DAW-33-2-8 DAW-33-3-8 3.5 DAW-533-2-8 DAW-533-3-8
10 – 300 12 DAW-33-153-9 DAW-33-2-9 DAW-33-3-9 6 DAW-533-2-9 DAW-533-3-9
30˝ Hg Vac – 60 6 DAW-23-153-25S DAW-23-2-25S DAW-23-3-25S 3 DAW-523-2-25S DAW-523-3-25S
30˝ Hg Vac – 75 8 DAW-23-153-26S DAW-23-2-26S DAW-23-3-26S 4 DAW-523-2-26S DAW-523-3-26S
2 – 60 4 DAW-23-153-5S DAW-23-2-5S DAW-23-3-5S 2.5 DAW-523-2-5S DAW-523-3-5S
5 – 100 6 DAW-23-153-6S DAW-23-2-6S DAW-23-3-6S 3 DAW-523-2-6S DAW-523-3-6S
10 – 200 8 DAW-23-153-8S DAW-23-2-8S DAW-23-3-8S 4 DAW-523-2-8S DAW-523-3-8S
403 10 – 300 14 DAW-23-153-9S DAW-23-2-9S DAW-23-3-9S 7 DAW-523-2-9S DAW-523-3-9S
Stainless 40 – 350 14 DAW-23-153-9AS DAW-23-2-9AS DAW-23-3-9AS 7 DAW-523-2-9AS DAW-523-3-9AS
Steel 25 – 600 25 DAW-23-153-10S DAW-23-2-10S DAW-23-3-10S 15 DAW-523-2-10S DAW-523-3-10S
50 – 1000 60 DAW-23-153-11S DAW-23-2-11S DAW-23-3-11S 40 DAW-523-2-11S DAW-523-3-11S
100 – 1500 90 DAW-23-153-12S DAW-23-2-12S DAW-23-3-12S 50 DAW-523-2-12S DAW-523-3-12S
300 – 2500 150 DAW-23-153-13S DAW-23-2-13S DAW-23-3-13S 100 DAW-523-2-13S DAW-523-3-13S
500 – 5000 450 DAW-23-153-15S DAW-23-2-15S DAW-23-3-15S 200 DAW-523-2-15S DAW-523-3-15S
800 – 8000 750 DAW-23-153-16S DAW-23-2-16S DAW-23-3-16S 400 DAW-523-2-16S DAW-523-3-16S
30˝ Hg Vac – 75 7 DAW-43-153-26E DAW-43-2-26E DAW-43-3-26E 3.5 DAW-543-2-26E DAW-543-3-26E
5 – 75 3 DAW-43-153-23E DAW-43-2-23E DAW-43-3-23E 2 DAW-543-2-23E DAW-543-3-23E
10 –100 7 DAW-43-153-6E DAW-43-2-6E DAW-43-3-6E 3.5 DAW-543-2-6E DAW-543-3-6E
316
10 – 150 6 DAW-43-153-24E DAW-43-2-24E DAW-43-3-24E 3 DAW-543-2-24E DAW-543-3-24E
Stainless
10 – 300 18 DAW-43-153-9E DAW-43-2-9E DAW-43-3-9E 5 DAW-543-2-9E DAW-543-3-9E
Steel
30 – 400 30 DAW-43-153-21E DAW-43-2-21E DAW-43-3-21E 15 DAW-543-2-21E DAW-543-3-21E
75 – 800 75 DAW-43-153-22E DAW-43-2-22E DAW-43-3-22E 35 DAW-543-2-22E DAW-543-3-22E
100 – 1000 100 DAW-43-153-11E DAW-43-2-11E DAW-43-3-11E 45 DAW-543-2-11E DAW-543-3-11E
200 - 2500 210 DAW-43-153-13E DAW-43-2-13E DAW-43-3-13E 110 DAW-543-2-13E DAW-543-3-13E

D Series Pressure Switch with Snap Action Switch and Weatherproof Enclosure
Adjustable Deadband Fixed Deadband Hermetically Sealed, Fixed Deadband
SPDT: 15A @ 120/240 VAC SPDT: 15A @ 120/240 VAC SPDT: 5A @ 120/240 VAC, 5A res.@30 VDC
Bourdon Adjustable Minimum Model Number Fixed Model Number Fixed Model Number
Tube Operating Dead- Deadband Deadband
Material Range band (psig) (psig)
(psig) (psig)
0-30˝ Hg Vac 9˝ Hg DAW-7033-153-2 3˝ Hg DSW-7233-153-2 5˝ Hg DSW-7333-153-2
10˝ Hg Vac - 12 4 DAW-7033-153-3 1.5 DSW-7233-153-3 3 DSW-7333-153-3
25˝ Hg Vac - 50 8 DAW-7033-153-27 2.5 DSW-7233-153-27 3.75 DSW-7333-153-27
1/8 – 15 4 DAW-7033-153-1 1.5 DSW-7233-153-1 3 DSW-7333-153-1
Brass 1/8 – 20 4 DAW-7033-153-3A 1.5 DSW-7233-153-3A 3 DSW-7333-153-3A
1 – 35 5 DAW-7033-153-4 1.5 DSW-7233-153-4 3 DSW-7333-153-4
2 – 60 6 DAW-7033-153-5 2 DSW-7233-153-5 3 DSW-7333-153-5
5 – 100 9 DAW-7033-153-6 2.5 DSW-7233-153-6 3.75 DSW-7333-153-6
5 – 150 16 DAW-7033-153-7 3 DSW-7233-153-7 5.25 DSW-7333-153-7
10 – 200 16 DAW-7033-153-8 4 DSW-7233-153-8 6.75 DSW-7333-153-8
10 – 300 25 DAW-7033-153-9 5 DSW-7233-153-9 9 DSW-7333-153-9
30˝ Hg Vac – 60 12 DAW-7023-153-25S 3.5 DSW-7223-153-25S 5.25 DSW-7323-153-25S
30˝ Hg Vac – 75 15 DAW-7023-153-26S 3.5 DSW-7223-153-26S 5.25 DSW-7323-153-26S
2 – 60 9 DAW-7023-153-5S 3 DSW-7223-153-5S 4.5 DSW-7323-153-5S
5 – 100 13 DAW-7023-153-6S 3.5 DSW-7223-153-6S 5.25 DSW-7323-153-6S
10 – 200 15 DAW-7023-153-8S 4 DSW-7223-153-8S 7.125 DSW-7323-153-8S
403 10 – 300 19 DAW-7023-153-9S 6 DSW-7223-153-9S 10.5 DSW-7323-153-9S
Stainless 40 – 350 20 DAW-7023-153-9AS 6 DSW-7223-153-9AS 10.5 DSW-7323-153-9AS
Steel 25 – 600 45 DAW-7023-153-10S 10 DSW-7223-153-10S 18 DSW-7323-153-10S
50 – 1000 95 DAW-7023-153-11S 20 DSW-7223-153-11S 33 DSW-7323-153-11S
100 – 1500 130 DAW-7023-153-12S 30 DSW-7223-153-12S 52.5 DSW-7323-153-12S
300 – 2500 260 DAW-7023-153-13S 60 DSW-7223-153-13S 90 DSW-7323-153-13S
500 – 5000 900 DAW-7023-153-15S 200 DSW-7223-153-15S 300 DSW-7323-153-15S
800 – 8000 1500 DAW-7023-153-16S 500 DSW-7223-153-16S
30˝ Hg Vac – 75 10 DAW-7043-153-26E 3.5 DSW-7243-153-26E 5.25 DSW-7343-153-26E
5 – 75 8 DAW-7043-153-23E 4 DSW-7243-153-23E 6 DSW-7343-153-23E
10 –100 10 DAW-7043-153-6E 3.5 DSW-7243-153-6E 5.25 DSW-7343-153-6E
316
10 – 150 11 DAW-7043-153-24E 4 DSW-7243-153-24E 6.75 DSW-7343-153-24E
Stainless
10 – 300 28 DAW-7043-153-9E 8 DSW-7243-153-9E 12 DSW-7343-153-9E
Steel
30 – 400 52 DAW-7043-153-21E 10 DSW-7243-153-21E 18 DSW-7343-153-21E
75 – 800 120 DAW-7043-153-22E 25 DSW-7243-153-22E 37.5 DSW-7343-153-22E
100 – 1000 190 DAW-7043-153-11E 35 DSW-7243-153-11E 52.5 DSW-7343-153-11E
200 - 2500 400 DAW-7043-153-13E 75 DSW-7243-153-13E 112.5 DSW-7343-153-13E

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 60
p61 7/24/06 9:12 AM Page 1

Pressure Series
XTBX Diaphragm Seal for DA Series Pressure Switch
PVC and FEP Construction for Corrosive Applications
1/4 NPT

1-15/16
[49.21]

Seal shown mounted on

DA Series Pressure Ø3-1/2
Switch. [88.90] CONNECTION SIZE

The Series XTBX is a diaphragm seal constructed of PVC and FEP SPECIFICATIONS
making it perfect for corrosive applications that would damage metal Wetted Materials: PVC bottom bowl, FEP diaphragm.
wetted material pressure switches. The seal is available direct mount- Temperature Limit: 100°F (38°C).
ed on all model DA pressure switches with ranges under 100 psi (6.9 Pressure Limits: 20˝ Hg (508 mm Hg) vacuum to 100 psig (6.9 bar).
bar). Ideal for commercial pool/spa applications for pump shut down Process Connection: Female NPT, available in 1/4˝, 1/2˝, 3/4˝, 1˝, 1-1/4˝,
due to excessive vacuum. and 1-1/2˝.
OPTIONS:
MODEL NUMBER: Remote Mounted, Fluorolube® Oil Fill
XTBX4_NPQ3* Popular Models with DA Switch:
Connection Size: B=11/2˝, A= 11/4˝, 1=1˝, 2=1/2˝, 3=3/4˝, 4=1/4˝ DA-7031-153-1-XTBX44NPQ3-2-0-0
Description: DA pressure switch with range 1/8 to 15 psi, direct mounted
*Specify connection size in the underlined part of the model num- XTBX seal with 1/4˝ NPT connection, adjustable differential, SPDT snap
ber. Example: XTBX42NPQ3 switch rated 15A @ 120/240 VAC, general purpose enclosure.

DRW-7033-153U-2-XTBX42NPQ3-5-0-0
Description: DA pressure switch with range 0 to 20˝ Hg, direct mount XTBX
seal with 1/2˝ NPT connection, Fluorolube® Oil Fill fill, manual reset switch -
automatic operation on increase of vacuum, SPDT snap switch rated 15A
@ 120/240 VAC, weatherproof (NEMA 4X) enclosure.
Fluorolube® is a registered trademark of Gabriel Performance Products LLC.

Series
ES Electronic Pressure Switch ®

Adjustable Set Point, Status Light, NEMA-4 Enclosure ®

2.750
4.000 [69.9]
1.188
[101.6] [30.2]

3.313
[84] 3/4
2.750
NPT
[69.9]
5.000
[127] 2.750
ø.280 [69.9]
TYP 3
PLACES
3.250 2.313
[82.55] [58.8]

Series ES Electronic Pressure Switch is proven reliable, even in the tough- SPECIFICATIONS
est industrial applications. The switch uses a thin film pressure sensor that is
rated for 10,000,000 cycles at the rated load, allowing the ES to outlast mechan- Service: Compatible liquids or gases.
ical switches in high cycle applications. The switch is designed with narrow, Power Supply: 110 VAC; 50/60 Hz.
adjustable deadbands that can be adjusted to less than 0.5% of range with multi- Repeatability: ±0.5% of nominal range.
turn potentiometers. Features include status light for indication of process pres- Temperature Limits: -20 to 160°F (-28.9 to 71.1°C).
sure, setpoint, reset and relay output status. Optional 3-1/2 digit LED provides Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT.
local indication of process pressure. The electronics are housed in a watertight Electrical Connections: 3/4˝ male NPT.
epoxy coated aluminum enclosure for additional corrosion resistance. The Switch Type: SPDT relay.
Series ES is ideal for pressure alarms, shutdown and control on metal stamp-
ing, presses, injection molding machines and other process equipment. Electrical Ratings: 10 amps (resistive) @ 250 VAC; 10 amp (resistive) @
30 VDC.
MODELS Setpoint: Adjustable via internal multi-turn potentiometers.
Setpoint Max. Pressure Deadband Adjustment: Between 0.1% and 95% of nominal range.
Model Number Range psi (bar) psi (bar) Cycle: Ten million @ rated load.
LED
ES04021 3-60 (.21-4.1) 120 (8.3) Sensor Element: Thin film pressure sensor.
No
ES04022 5-100 (.34-6.9) 200 (13.8) Display: (on ES1 models only) 3-1/2 digit LED.
No
ES04024 15-300 (1.0-20.7) 600 (41.4) Resolution: ±1%.
No
ES04029 150-3000 (10.3-206) 4500 (310) Wetted Parts: Diaphragm: 17-4 PH stainless steel; Pressure connection:
No
ES14021 3-60 (.21-4.1) 120 (8.3) AISI/316 SS.
Yes
ES14022 5-100 (.34-6.9) 200 (13.8) Housing: NEMA 4 (IP66) watertight epoxy coated aluminum enclosure.
Yes
ES14024 15-300 (1.0-20.7) 600 (41.4) Weight: 1lb, 9 oz (709 g).
Yes
ES14029 150-3000 (10.3-206) 4500 (310) Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA.
Yes

61 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p62 7/24/06 9:13 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
CS & CD Low Cost Diaphragm Pressure Switches
Visible Set Points, Fixed or Adjustable Deadband ®

11/16 1/2 [12.7]

[17.46] CONDUIT HOLE

1-1/16
[26.99] 3
[76.2]

3-3/4
[95.25]

1-5/16
[33.34] 2-3/16
3-3/16 [55.56]
[80.96]
1/4 NPT

Series CS and CD combine advanced design and precision construc- SPECIFICATIONS

tion with small size and low price. Unit is ideal for instrument panels, Wetted Materials: Nylon reinforced Buna-N and steel.
small compressors and general industrial applications. Visible set point
Temperature Limits: -30 to 150°F (-35 to 66°C).
and easy to wire SPDT snap switch reduce installation time. Operates in
any position and is vibration resistant. Pressure Limit: 30 psig (2.1 bar) for ranges 1, 3, and 10. 50 psig
(3.5 bar) for range 30. 175 psig (12.1 bar) for range 150.
Enclosure Rating: General purpose.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch.
Electrical Rating: 15A @ 120 VAC, 8A @ 240 VAC.
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ hole for conduit hub.
Process Connection: 1/4˝ female NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Any position.
Set Point Adjustment: Internal screw.
Weight: .5 lb (0.23 kg).
Deadband: See model chart.
Agency Approvals: CE, UL.

MODELS
Model Adjustable Deadband
No. Operating Range Deadband Value
CS-1 1-30" Hg. Vac. (25.4-762 mm Hg) Fixed 1.5" Hg. (38 mm Hg)
CS-3 1-100" w.c. (.25-24.9 kPa) Fixed 7" w.c. (1.74 kPa)
CS-10 1-10 psig (.07-.69 bar) Fixed 0.4 psig (0.03 bar)
CS-30 1-30 psig (.07-2.1 bar) Fixed 1.0 psig (0.07 bar)
CS-150 10-150 psig (.69-10.3 bar) Fixed 5 psig (0.35 bar)
CD-10 1-10 psig (.07-.69 bar) Adjustable Min: 1.5 psig (.1 bar),
Max: 11.5 psig (.79 bar)
CD-30 1-30 psig (.07-2.1 bar) Adjustable Min: 2 psig (.14 bar),
Max: 12 psig (.83 bar)
CD-150 10-150 psig (.69-10.3 bar) Adjustable Min: 14 psig (.97 bar),
Max: 24 psig (1.7 bar)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 62
p63 7/24/06 9:16 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
A1S
&
Low Cost OEM Pressure Switch
A1B 316 SS or Buna-N Diaphragm, Optional Weatherproof Enclosure,
Ranges from 3-20 to 50-500 psig

Standard Snap Action Switch Hermetic Snap Action Switch

2-25/32
1-45/64
2-1/32 [43.38] 1-5/64 1-3/4
[51.59] [70.64] [27.35] [44.45]
SPDT SNAPSWITCH
(3) SCREW TYPE
ELECTRICAL Adjustment
SET POINT TERMINALS Terminal Cap
ADJUSTMENT GROUND Block 4-1/8
4-7/32 SCREW
CAP Ground [104.95]
[107.16] 1-3/4 Hex
Screw [44.35]

PROCESS/MOUNTING Process/
CONNECTION Mounting
1-1/64
7/8 [22.22] Connection
1/8 NPT FEMALE, 1-3/4 7/8
[25.80] 1/2 NPT MALE 1/8 NPT 1
[44.45] [22.17] [25.60]
1-3/4 Female,
2-9/32 [57.94]
Series A1S [44.35] 1/2 NPT Male

2-25/32
[70.64] 1-45/64
SPDT SNAP SWITCH [43.38] 1-5/64
(3) SCREW TYPE [27.35] SPDT SNAP
ELECTRICAL SWITCH
TERMINALS
3-47/64 GROUND FLEXIBLE SET POINT
[94.85] SET POINT SCREW Ø1-5/8 ADJUSTMENT
TERMINAL 3-21/32 [41.28]
ADJUSTMENT CAP SCREW
BLOCK [92.94]
1-5/8 [41.28]
GROUND
SCREW
PROCESS/MOUNTING 1-13/16 [46.04] 1-13/32
PROCESS/
MOUNTING
CONNECTION 1/8 NPT [35.72] CONNECTION
FEMALE, 1/2 NPT MALE 1/8 NPT FEMALE,
1/2 NPT MALE
Series A1B

Low Cost and Precision Made. The A1 Pressure Control pro- SPECIFICATIONS
vides the flexibility required for industrial applications. The A1 Wetted Materials:
pressure switch is ideal for panel mounting wherever a high quality
Pressure Chamber: Aluminum with PTFE
economical open case control is required. Optional weatherproof
housing meets NEMA 4X standards. Superior 15A contact allows impregnated anodized coating, brass, or 316 SS.
direct control of a motor or pump without the use of external relays Diaphragm: 316 SS on A1S, Buna-N on A1B.
- a true time and money savings. Unique features include broad tem- O-ring: Fluoroelastomer on A1S, Buna-N on A1B.
perature limits for increased application possibilities and conve- Temperature Limit: -40 to 180°F (-40 to 82°C).
nient indicating scale for quick and easy field adjustment. The Pressure Limits: 750 psig (51 bar).
rugged A1S construction incorporates the features most often re- Enclosure Rating: O, and OP enclosure none. PC, PN, SC, and
quested by customers; a 316 SS diaphragm pressure element for ex-
SN enclosures meet NEMA 4X standards.
ceptional compatibility and long service life. The A1B construction
offers a lower cost Buna-N diaphragm for those applications not re- Switch Type: Type 1: SPDT snap switch. Type 1HS: SPDT
quiring 316 SS. Pressure chambers available are: aluminum with hermetically sealed snap switch.
PTFE impregnated hard coating perfect for oil based hydraulic flu- Electrical Rating: Switch Type 1: 15A @ 120/240/480 VAC, 1/8
ids and noncorrosive air and gases, brass for water and water based HP @ 125 VAC, 1/4 HP @ 250 VAC. Switch Type 1HS: 5A @
fluids, and 316 SS for harsher applications. Optional hermetically 120/240 VAC.
sealed snap switches are available for harsh environments. Electrical Connection: Screw terminals on Type 1 switch,
terminal block on Type 1HS switch.
OP enclosure and mounting configuration offers a unit that can be
directly mounted through the panel wall keeping the process out- Process Connection: 1/8˝ female NPT and 1/2˝ male NPT. OP
side of the panel. Unit has a flush bottom and includes a gasket and style has 1/8˝ female NPT and 1/2˝ male straight thread.
mounting nut to insure a tight weatherproof seal against the panel. Mounting Orientation: Within 20° of vertical.
Set Point Adjustment: Knurled screw cap with indicating scale.
Features Weight: A1S: 9 oz (.25 kg), A1B: 6 oz (.17 kg).
• 316 SS or Buna-N diaphragm Deadband: Fixed, see deadband chart.
• Aluminum, Brass, or 316 SS pressure chamber
• High current SPDT snap switch
• Weatherproof enclosure available in Polycarbonate or 316 SS
• Hermetically sealed snap switch option

63 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg64 7/24/06 9:17 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
A1S
&
Low Cost OEM Pressure Switch
A1B 316 SS or Buna-N Diaphragm, Optional Weatherproof Enclosure,
Ranges from 3-20 to 50-500 psig
Example A1 S PC SS 1 2 A1S-PC-SS-1-2 Pressure Control; 316 SS diaphragm and Fluoroelastomer O-ring; weather-
proof enclosure, NEMA-4X, polycarbonate with conduit entry; 316 SS pressure chamber;
fixed deadband, automatic reset; SPDT snap acting switch; adjustable range 15-150 psig.
Construction A1 Series Designator
Diaphragm S 316 SS diaphragm and Fluoroelastomer O-ring
Material B Buna-N diaphragm and Buna-N O-ring
Enclosure O Open case
& OP Open case - panel mount, has 1/2˝ straight thread and flush bottom, includes gasket and
Mounting mounting nut (only available on A1B with brass chamber)

PC Weatherproof enclosure, NEMA 4X, polycarbonate with conduit entry

SC Weatherproof enclosure, NEMA 4X, 316 SS with conduit entry

Pressure AL Aluminum with PTFE impregnated anodized coating

Chamber BR Brass
Material SS 316 SS
Circuit 1 SPDT snap action switch, rated 15A @ 120/240/480 VAC, 1/8 HP @ 125 VAC, 1/4 HP @ 250
(Switch) VAC
Type 1HS SPDT Hermetically sealed snap switch rated 5A @ 120/240 VAC

Adjustable 1 3-20 psig (.21-1.4 bar)

Pressure 2 15-150 psig (1.0-10.3 bar)
Range 3 25-250 psig (1.7-17.2 bar)
4 50-500 psig (3.4-34.5 bar)

Optional Enclosures & Mounting: Series A1S - Type O enclosure and Type 1 switch
AL chamber models base price .......................................................................
BR chamber models base price.......................................................................
SS chamber models base price .......................................................................
Weatherproof Open Case-Panel Mount Series A1B - Type O enclosure and Type 1 switch
AL chamber models base price
BR chamber models base price.......................................................................
SS chamber models base price .......................................................................

Enclosures:
PC ........................................................................................................................
SC ........................................................................................................................
Switches:
1HS ........................................................................................................................

Accessories:
A-613 Mounting Bracket
Optional accessory is formed from 14 ga. steel, zinc
plated for corrosion resistance. Provides rugged
Series A1S and A1B Deadband Chart - psig (bar) permanent mounting and speeds installation. Two
17/32
[13.49]
1/4" 6-32 mounting screws are included to attach
Model Range Deadband at Deadband at switch to bracket.
Minimum Maximum 1-57/64 Ø3/16 2
[48.02] [50.80]
Range Range [4.775]
MODELS
A1S or A1B 3-20 (.21-1.4) 1 (.07) 3 (.21) Model Number Range psig (bar)
with Type 1 15-150 (1.0-10.3) 5 (.34) 15 (1.0) A1S-O-AL-1-1 3-20 (.21-1.4)
Switch A1S-O-AL-1-2 15-150 (1.0-10.3)
25-250 (1.7-17.2) 8 (.55) 25 (1.7) A1S-O-AL-1-3 25-250 (1.7-17.2)
50-500 (3.4-34.5) 15 (1.0) 50 (3.5) A1S-O-AL-1-4 50-500 (3.4-34.5)
A1S-O-AL-1HS-2 15-150 (1.0-10.3)
A1S with Type 3-20 (.21-1.4) 1.5 (.10) 4 (.28) A1S-O-BR-1-1 3-20 (.21-1.4)
1HS Switch 15-150 (1.0-10.3) 10.5 (.72) 40 (2.8) A1S-O-SS-1-1 3-20 (.21-1.4
25-250 (1.7-17.2) 9 (.62) 50 (3.5) A1S-O-SS-1-2 15-150 (1.0-10.3)
A1S-PC-SS-1-1 3-20 (.21-1.4)
50-500 (3.4-34.5) 14.5 (.99) 42 (2.9) A1S-PC-SS-1-2 15-150 (1.0-10.3)
A1B with Type 3-20 (.21-1.4) 2 (.14) 6 (.41) A1B-O-AL-1-1 3-20 (.21-1.4)
A1B-O-AL-1-2 15-150 (1.0-10.3)
1HS Switch 15-150 (1.0-10.3) 6 (.41) 25 (1.7) A1B-OP-BR-1-2 15-150 (1.0-10.3)
25-250 (1.7-17.2) 17 (1.17) 50 (3.5) A1B-O-AL-1HS-1 3-20 (.21-1.4)
A1B-PC-AL-1-1 3-20 (.21-1.4
50-500 (3.4-34.5) 12.5 (.86) 44 (3.0) A1B-SC-BR-1-2 15-150 (1.0-10.3)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 64
p65 7/24/06 9:18 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
A1PS/
A1VS
Economical Pressure Switch
Vacuum and Compound Ranges Available, Adjustable Set Point ®

2.375
[60.33]

3.625
[92.08]

1/4 NPT
Ø1.625
[41.28]

Series A1PS/A1VS Economical Pressure Switches are designed SPECIFICATIONS Electrical Ratings: 15A (resistive) @
with a 15 Amp SPDT switch for direct control of pumps and motors. Service: Compatible liquids or gases. 250 VAC, 1/2 HP @ 250 VAC.
Available in pressure, vacuum, or compound ranges, the switches offer a Wetted Materials: Diaphragm: Buna-N; Electrical Connections: Three screw
Body with Fitting: Zinc alloy, chromate fin- terminals.
field adjustable set point. Easily adjust the switch by aligning the top of ish. Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT.
the self locking adjusting nut with the desired setting indicated on the Temperature Limits: -31 to 185°F Setpoint: Field adjustable via knurled
adjacent range scale. Connection is 1/4˝ male NPT for quick installation (-35 to 85°C). screw cap.
and can be mounted in any position. Pressure Limits: 600 psig. Cycling: Not to exceed 1 Hz.
Vacuum Limits: 29.9˝ Hg (vacuum and Sensor Element: Diaphragm.
compound models only). Weight: 7.4 oz (209 g).
Switch Type: SPDT snap action. Agency Approvals: UL.
MODELS
Model Set Point Repeatability Deadband Model Set Point Repeatability Deadband
Number Range (kPa) (kPa) (approx.) (kPa) Number Range (kPa) (kPa) (approx.) (kPa)
A1PS-14 1.5-3.5 psi (10-24) ±0.15 psi (1) 0.5-1.7 psi (3-11) A1VS-14 6-28˝ Hg (-20 to -94) ±1.2˝ Hg (-4) 3-14˝ Hg (-10 to -47)
A1PS-24 3-40 psi (21-276) ±1.0 psi (7) 2-5 psi (14-34) A1VS-24 28˝ Hg to 3.5 psig ±1.2˝ Hg (-4) 3-14˝ Hg (-10 to -47)
A1PS-34 30-150 psi (207-1034) ±5.0 psi (34) 5-30 psi (34-207) (-94 to 24) ±0.15 psi (1) 0.5-1.7 psi (3-11)
A1PS-44 100-500 psi (689-3445) ±20.0 psi (138) 30-120 psi (207-827)

Series
APS/
AVS
Adjustable Pressure Switch
Vacuum and Pressure Ranges, 5A Switch, Compact Size
Ø.750
.562 MAX [19.05]
[14.27]

2.590 MAX
[65.79]

1/8 NPT
Ø1.090
[27.69]

Miniature Series APS/AVS Adjustable Switches offer reli- SPECIFICATIONS

able switching for pressure/vacuum alarm, shutdown or control. Service: Compatible liquids or gases.
The units are readily adjustable throughout their range using the Wetted Materials: Capsule: 17-7 PH SS; Fitting: 303 SS.
Temperature Limits: -65 to 225°F (-54 to 107°C), a set point change of up to
locking adjusting ring and indicating pointer. The body is con- 2% when used below -10°F (-23°C) or above 125°F (52°C).
structed of stainless steel for durability in harsh environments. Pressure/Vacuum Limits: 150% of range.
Switches include 12˝ (30 cm) wire leads sealed with epoxy for addi- Switch Type: SPDT snap action.
tional protection. Electrical Ratings: 5A @ 250 VAC, 3A @ 28 VDC.
Electrical Connections: 3-wire, 20 AWG insulated with PVC, 12˝ (30 cm) length.
Process Connection: 1/8˝ male NPT.
Setpoint: Field adjustable.
Cycling: Not to exceed 20 CPM.
Sensor Element: Capsule.
MODELS Weight: 3 oz (85 g).
Set Point Range psi (bar) Set Point Range˝Hg (cm Hg) Vac
Model Repeatability Deadband Model Repeatability Deadband
Number Increasing Decreasing psi (bar) psi (bar) Number Increasing Decreasing ˝Hg (cm Hg) ˝Hg (cm Hg)
APS-150 0.8-28.5(.06-2.0) 1.6-30.0(.11-2.1) ±0.6(.04) 0.8-1.3(.06-.09) AVS-150 1.6-27.1(4.1-68.6) 2.7-28.2(6.9-71.6) ±1.2(3.1) 1.3-2.7(3.3-6.9)
APS-250 2.0-48.0(.14-3.3) 3.0-50.0(.21-3.5) ±1.0(0.7) 1-1.7(.07-.12) AVS-250 4.0-24.8(10.2-63.0) 5.1-28.2(13.0-71.6) ±2.0(5.1) 1.5-3.2(3.8-8.1)
APS-350 3.0-96.5(.21-6.7) 4.5-100(.31-6.9) ±2.0(.14) 1.6-4(.11-.28) AVS-350 6.0-21.5(15.2-54.6) 8.4-28.2(21.3-71.6) ±4.0(10.2) 2.6-7.3(6.6-18.5)
APS-450 7.5-242(.52-16.7) 9.7-250(.67-17.2) ±5.0(.35) 2.5-9(.17-.62)
APS-550 15.0-485(1.0-33.4) 20.0-500(1.4-34.5) ±10.0(.69) 5-22(.35-1.5)

65 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p66 7/24/06 9:19 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
H2 Dual-Action Explosion-Proof ®
®

Pressure Switches
Explosion-proof and Weatherproof Housing
3-3/8
Ø2-5/8 [85.73]
[66.68]

3/4 NPT ELECTRICAL

CONNECTION
5
[127.00]
2-15/16
[74.63]

1/4 NPT PRESSURE CONNECTION

Explosion-Proof, UL & CSA Listed for Class I, Groups B, C & D and Class II, SPECIFICATIONS Tamb ≤ 40°C T5] Type 4.
Groups E, F & G. The H2 is designed for sequencing two different actions as Wetted Materials: Aluminum Switch Type: Two SPDT snap
pressure of a liquid or gas increases or decreases. The patented design consists chamber with Polyester Film switches.
of two concentric pistons operated by a single diaphragm with one pressure diaphragm and Buna-N O-ring Electrical Rating: 5A @ 125/250
chamber. Each piston actuates a separate switch independent of the other. The standard. Brass chamber or 316 VAC. 5A res., 3A ind. @ 30 VDC.
switches may be adjusted to operate together, at opposite ends of the range or SS chamber optional. FEP Gold contacts or 10A switch
at two intermediate set points. The threaded top is removed to field adjust or diaphragm optional. optional.
service switches without disturbing electrical or pressure connections. The Duo- Fluoroelastomer or EPDM O-ring Electrical Connections: 18 AWG,
tect® switch is explosion-proof and weatherproof. It can be mounted in any posi- optional. 18˝ (460 mm) long.
Temperature Limit: 275°F Conduit Connection: 3/4˝ female
tion and is not affected by vibration. (135°C). CSA approved: -20 to NPT.
90°C (-4 to 184°F). Process Connection: 1/4˝ female
MODELS Pressure Limit: 1500 psig (103 NPT.
Model Number Low Range psig (bar) High Range psig (bar) bar). Mounting Orientation: Any
Enclosure Rating: UL listed position.
H2A-1 3-40 (0.21-2.76) 5-75 (0.35-5.17) Set Point Adjustment: Internal
explosion-proof, Class I, Groups B, nut.
H2A-2 25-250 (1.72-17.2) 30-400 (2.07-27.6) C, and D. Class II Groups E, F, and
H2A-3 Weight: 2 lb (.9 kg).
100-1000 (6.89-68.9) 150-1500 (10.3-103) G. Weatherproof, NEMA 4. CSA Deadband: Approximately 10% of
optional. Class I, Groups B, C & D. range.
Class II, Groups E, F, & G -20°C ≤ Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA.
Tamb ≤ 75°C T6 [Optional -20°C ≤

Series
A1N Low Cost OEM Pressure Switch ®

5 Amp Rating, Field Adjustable Set Points, Buna-N Diaphragm C US

Ø1-17/32
[38.89]
.110 x
45/64 .020
[17.86] TAB
SIZE
3-3/16
55/64 MAX
[21.83] [80.96]

27/32 59/64
[21.43] [23.43] 1/8
NPT

Low cost and compact, the Series A1N Pressure Switch is a SPECIFICATIONS Electrical Connections: .11 x .02
UL-recognized component control for water, oil, and non-combustible Wetted Materials: Zinc chamber and quick connect tabs.
Buna-N diaphragm. Process Connection: 1/8˝ male NPT.
gas service with an electrical rating of 5 amperes at 125/250 VAC. The Temperature Limits: 0 to 180°F (-18 to Mounting Orientation: Within 20° of
Series A1N control is available in field adjustable operating ranges 82°C). Low temperature models: -20 to vertical.
from as low as 1.5 to 4.5 psig up to 41 to 100 psig (10.3-31.0 to 283-690 180°F (-29 to 82°C). Set Point Adjustment: Slotted screw.
Pressure Limit: 200 psig (13.8 bar). Weight: 6 oz (.17 kg).
kPa). A low temperature option of -20 to 180°F (-29 to 82°C) is avail- Enclosure Rating: None. Deadband: See model chart.
able. Switch Type: SPDT snap switch.
Electrical Rating: 5A @ 125/250 VAC,
MODELS 1/10 HP @ 125/250 VAC.

Range, Typical Deadband in Low Temp. Range, Typical Deadband in

Model No. Range, psig kPa psig (kPa) at min./max. Model No. Range, psig kPa psig (kPa) at min./max.
A1N-11 1.5-4.5 10-31 .35/.65 (2.4/4.5) A1N-12 2.0-4.5 13.8-31 .55/.60 (3.8/4.1)
A1N-21 4.5-15 31-103 .65/.90 (4.5/6.2) A1N-22 4.5-15 31-103 .75/1.0 (5.2/6.9)
A1N-31 15-41 103-283 1/1.7 (6.9/11.7) A1N-32 15-41 103-283 1.4/1.6 (9.7/11)
A1N-41 41-100 283-690 3.7/4.5 (25.5/31) A1N-42 41-100 283-690 4.8/6.0 (33/41)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 66
pg67 7/24/06 9:20 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
1000W Weatherproof Diaphragm Operated Pressure Switches
Visible Setpoint, Fixed Deadband, Pressure Ranges to 1400 psi
®

3-3/32 3/4 FEMALE

[78.56] 5/8
2-1/4
NPT CONDUIT
Extremely rugged construction provides excellent reliability in chemical, petro-
[57.15]
1-3/4 [15.88] CONNECTION leum and industrial plants. Bellville spring movement permits mounting of control
[44.45]
Ø17/64 [6.75] in any position and helps prevent contact chatter. New design also provides high
MOUNTING over-pressure protection. Weatherproof housing is standard.
HOLES TYP 4
3-3/4 PLACES
[95.25] SPECIFICATIONS
7-17/64
[184.53] Wetted Materials: See pressure chamber and diaphragm material in
model chart.
2-9/32 Temperature Limits: -30 to 170°F (-35 to 77°C).
[57.94]
Pressure Limit: 3000 psig (206.8 bar).
2-21/32
[67.47]
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof, NEMA 4X.
1-11/32
[34.13] 1/4 FEMALE 4-1/2 Switch Type: SPDT snap switch. DPDT optional.
NPT PRESSURE [114.30]
CONNECTION
5 Electrical Rating: 15A @ 125/250 VAC resistive.
[127.00]
Electrical Connections: Screw type.
Conduit Connection: 3/4˝ female NPT.
MODELS Process Connection: 1/4˝ female NPT.
Aluminum Press. 316 SS Mounting Orientation: Any position.
Chamber Pressure Chamber Approx.*
Polyimide Diaph.
Adjustable Operating Deadband Set Point Adjustment: Internal thumbwheel.
FEP Diaphragm Range psig (bar)
Model Number Model Number (Fixed) psig (bar) Weight: 3 lb (1.4 kg).
Deadband: See model chart.
1003W-A1-D 1003W-B3-D 5-40 (.48-2.8) 2 (.14) Agency Approvals: CE, UL.
1004W-A1-D 1004W-B3-D 10-70 (.69-4.8) 4 (.28)
1005W-A1-D 1005W-B3-D 25-200 (1.7-13.8) 8 (.55)
1006W-A1-D 1006W-B3-D 50-350 (3.5-24.1) 15 (1.0)
1007W-A1-D 1007W-B3-D 75-550 (5.2-37.9) 30 (2.1)
1008W-A1-D 1008W-B3-D 100-900 (6.9-62.1) 50 (3.5)
1009W-A1-D 1009W-B3-D 200-1400 (13.8-96.5) 75 (5.2)
*Deadband 10-15% larger when using 316SS diaphragm. Change A1 to B2 for 316 SS diaphragm
and pressure chamber e.g. 1003W-B2-D. Values shown are for mid-scale.

Series
1000E Explosion-Proof Diaphragm Operated Pressure Switches
Visible Setpoint, Fixed Deadband, Pressure Ranges to 1400 psi ®

18 [457.20] 2-23/64
LONG 18 AWG [59.93] Same rugged construction as used in Series 1000W plus explosion-proof de-
LEAD WIRES sign are combined in this new unit. UL listed for Class I, Groups A, B, C & D; Class
1/2 MALE II, Groups E, F & G. Bellville spring movement permits mounting of control in any
NPT CONDUIT
CONNECTION
4-5/32 position and helps prevent contact chatter. High over-pressure protection and vi-
[105.56]
Ø17/64 [6.75] bration resistance are also featured.
MOUNTING
HOLES
TYP 2 PLACES SPECIFICATIONS
ADJUSTING 3-1/4 Wetted Materials: See pressure chamber and diaphragm material in
WHEEL
[82.55] model chart.
Temperature Limits: -30 to 170°F (-35 to 77°C).
1-15/32 1-7/8
[37.29] Pressure Limit: 3000 psig (206.8 bar).
[47.63] 3-3/4
2-15/16 1/4 FEMALE
[95.25]
Enclosure Rating: Explosion-proof, UL listed for Class I, Groups A, B, C
[74.63] NPT PRESS.
CONNECTION 4-3/8 and D; Class II, Groups E, F, and G.
[111.13] Switch Type: SPDT snap switch. DPDT or hermetically sealed optional.
Electrical Rating: 15A @ 125/250/480 VAC res., 0.5A @ 125 VDC, 0.25A
@ 250 VDC.
MODELS Electrical Connections: 18 AWG, 18˝ (460 mm) long.
Aluminum Press. 316 SS Adjustable Approx.* Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ male NPT.
Chamber Pressure Chamber Operating Deadband Process Connection: 1/4˝ female NPT.
Polyimide Diaph. FEP Diaphragm Range (Fixed)
Model Number Model Number psig (bar) psig (bar) Mounting Orientation: Any position.
Set Point Adjustment: Internal thumbwheel.
1003E-A1-J 1003E-B3-J 5-40 (.48-2.8) 2.5 (.17) Weight: 3 lb (1.4 kg).
1004E-A1-J 1004E-B3-J 10-70 (.69-4.8) 5 (.34) Deadband: See model chart.
1005E-A1-J 1005E-B3-J 25-200 (1.7-13.8) 10 (.69) Agency Approvals: CE, UL.
1006E-A1-J 1006E-B3-J 50-350 (3.5-24.1) 18 (1.2)
1007E-A1-J 1007E-B3-J 75-550 (5.2-37.9) 36 (2.5)
1008E-A1-J 1008E-B3-J 100-900 (6.9-62.1) 60 (4.1)
1009E-A1-J 1009E-B3-J 200-1400 (13.8-96.5) 90 (6.2)
*Deadband 10-15% larger when using 316SS diaphragm. Change A1 to B2 for 316 SS diaphragm
and pressure chamber e.g. 1003E-B2-J. Values shown are for mid-scale.

67 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p68 7/24/06 9:21 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SA1100 Diaphragm Operated Pressure Switches
Visible Setpoint, Adjustable Deadband, Hermetically Sealed Snap Switch,
Weatherproof and Explosion-proof ®
®

Weatherproof and Explosion-Proof in One MODEL CHART - Series SA1100

Economical Enclosure Example SA11 13 E A 4 K 1
SA1113E-A4-K1 Pressure Control; weatherproof, NEMA
4X,explosionproof NEMA 7&9; aluminum pressure cham-
ber, Buna-N diaphragm and O-ring; 1/4 inch female NPT
Extremely rugged construction assures excellent reliability in chemi- process connection; adjustable deadband, automatic reset;
cal, petroleum and industrial plants. New design also provides burst SPDT snap acting switch; adjustable range 30-500 psig

pressure protection to 3000 psi (206 bar). The rolling diaphragm design Construction SA11 Series Designator, weatherproof NEMA 4X, explosion-
maintains a constant effective area to minimize friction. This results in proof NEMA 7, 9
a minimum deadband as low as 5% of full scale. Since many applications Adjustable 11 Adjustable range 10-150 psig (0.7-10 bar)
Pressure 12 Adjustable range 20-250 psig (1.4-17.2 bar)
require higher deadbands, the SA1100 includes a separate adjustment 13 Adjustable range 30-500 psig (2.0-34.0 bar)
Ranges
of this when necessary. A pump being used to control liquid level in a
tank would be a typical situation where this feature would be impor-
tant. Both setpoint and deadband adjustments are protected, yet clear- Circuit E Snap action switch rated 15A @ 125/250/480 VAC, 1/8 HP
ly visible behind a clear polycarbonate window and are fully isolated (Switch) @ 125 VAC, 1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 1/2 A @ 125 VDC
resistive, 1/4 A @ 250 VDC resistive
from the electrical components for additional safety. A 7/16" open-end Options HS Hermetically sealed snap action switch rated 5A @ 125/250
wrench is the only tool required to change settings. Terminal blocks are VAC, 5A resistive @ 30 VDC*
HG Hermetically sealed snap action switch with gold
provided for switch wiring connections and both internal and external contacts rated 1A @ 125 VAC, 1A resistive @ 30 VDC*
ground screws are included. Standard housing is weatherproof to Pressure A Aluminum
B Brass
NEMA standards 1 through 4X and 13; explosion-proof to NEMA 7, Chamber
S 316 SS
Material
Class I, Groups B, C & D; NEMA 9, Class II, Groups E, F & G. Option- (Wetted)
al construction adds drain to meet IP54. Diaphragm 4 Buna-N diaphragm and O-ring
Material 5 Fluorocarbon diaphragm and O-ring
APPLICATIONS (Wetted)
Chemical, petroleum, food and drug processing industries. Used in- Circuit K SPDT
door, outdoor or in explosion-proof area. (Switch) L DPDT (not available with HS or HG switch options)
Type
Process 1 1/4 inch female NPT
SPECIFICATIONS Connection 2 1/2 inch female NPT

Wetted Materials: See pressure chamber and diaphragm Options AT ATEX certified construction
material in model chart. DRAIN Housing with drain - allows condensate to be drained from
Temperature Limits: -30 to 180°F (-35 to 82°C). inside enclosure (meets NEMA 3R instead of 4X)
Pressure Limit: 1200 psig (82.6 bar). * Options that do not have ATEX.
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof and Explosion-proof. Listed MODELS
with UL and CSA for Class I, Groups B, C and D; Class II
Groups E, F, and G. UL-NEMA 4X, CSA-NEMA 4. ATEX MODEL NUMBER MODEL NUMBER
Compliant 0344 II 2 G EEx d IIC T6 Process Temperature SA1111E-A4-K1 SA1111E-S5-K2
≤75°C.
Switch Type: SPDT or DPDT snap switch. SWITCH DEADBAND CHART
Electrical Rating: See model chart. Approximate
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal. Range Adjustable Minimum Approximate
Number Operating Deadband Maximum
Conduit Connection: 3/4˝ female NPT. Range Deadband
Process Connection: 1/4˝ or 1/2˝ female NPT. Low High
Mounting Orientation: Within 20° of vertical.
Set Point Adjustment: Internal 7/16˝ hex nuts. psig bar psig bar psig bar psig bar
Weight: 3.5 lb (1.6 kg). 11 10-150 0.7-10 4.0 0.28 7.5 0.52 75 5.2
Deadband: See deadband chart. 12 20-250 1.4-17.2 5.0 0.35 12.5 0.86 150 10
Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, CE and ATEX. 13 30-500 2.0-34 12 0.83 45 3.1 300 21

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 68
p69 7/24/06 9:22 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SGL 4.5˝ Stainless Steel Industrial Pressure Gage
1% Full Scale Accuracy, 316 SS Wetted Parts, NEMA 4X
1-15/16
Ø5-11/64 29/64 [49.21]
WARNING
[Ø131.37] [11.51]
LABEL

Ø4-43/64
[Ø118.67]

3-3/4
[95.25]

1/2 NPT

7/8
[22.22] 21/32
[16.67]

The Series SGL Gages have dual English/metric scales with ±1.0% SPECIFICATIONS
full scale accuracy. For excellent chemical compatibility, the Series Service: Compatible gases & liquids.
SGL gages are designed with 304 SS housings and 316L SS wetted Wetted Materials: 316L SS.
parts. Units can withstand ambient temperatures up to 149°F (65°C) Lens: Shatterproof safety glass.
and process temperatures up to 572°F (300°C). Series SGL gages may Housing: 304 SS.
be easily liquid filled in the field without the need for a separate kit. In- Accuracy: ±1.0% full scale, ANSI B40.1 Grade 1A.
cluded is a micrometer adjustabe pointer which allows for re-zeroing Pressure Limit: 130% full scale for ranges <10,000 psi, 115%
the gage in the field. A wide selection of ranges are available from full for 10,000 psi and greater.
vacuum, compound to 20,000 psi. Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -13 to 149°F (-25 to 65°C)
APPLICATIONS Process: 572°F max. (300°C max.).
Cryogenics, Pharmaceutical, Chemical, Petrochemical, Food and Size: 4.5˝ (115 mm).
Beverage, Conventional and Nuclear Power, Pumps, Presses, Diesel Process Connections: 1/2˝ male NPT.
Engines, Turbines and Compressors. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
Weight: 1.5 lb (0.70 kg).

MODELS
Model Model
Number Ranges Number Ranges
SGL-G0124N 30˝ Hg-0 (-100-0 kPa) SGL-G1624N 0-4000 psi (0-28 MPa)
SGL-G0224N 0-15 psi (0-100 kPa) SGL-G1724N 0-5000 psi (0-34 MPa)
SGL-G0324N 0-30 psi (0-200 kPa) SGL-G1824N 0-6000 psi (0-40 MPa)
SGL-G0424N 0-60 psi (0-400 kPa) SGL-G1924N 0-10000 psi (0-70 MPa)
SGL-G0524N 0-100 psi (0-700 kPa) SGL-G2024N 0-15000 psi (0-100 MPa)
SGL-G0624N 0-150 psi (0-1000 kPa) SGL-G2124N 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi (-100-0-100 kPa)
SGL-G0724N 0-200 psi (0-1400 kPa) SGL-G2224N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-100-0-200 kPa)
SGL-G0824N 0-300 psi (0-2000 kPa) SGL-G2324N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-100-0-400 kPa)
SGL-G0924N 0-400 psi (0-2800 kPa) SGL-G2424N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-100-0-700 kPa)
SGL-G1024N 0-500 psi (0-3400 kPa) SGL-G2524N 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-100-0-1000 kPa)
SGL-G1124N 0-600 psi (0-4000 kPa) SGL-G2624N 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi (-100-0-1400 kPa)
SGL-G1224N 0-1000 psi (0-7000 kPa) SGL-G2724N 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi (-100-0-2000 kPa)
SGL-G1324N 0-1500 psi (0-10 MPa) SGL-G2924N 0-20000 psi (0-140 MPa)
SGL-G1424N 0-2000 psi (0-14 MPa)
SGL-G1524N 0-3000 psi (0-20 MPa)

69 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p70 7/24/06 9:23 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SGS 4˝ Stainless Steel Industrial Pressure Gage
1.6% Full Scale Accuracy, Brass Wetted Parts
1-3/16
Ø4-5/32 [30.16]
WARNING [Ø105.57]
LABEL
23/64
[9.13]

Ø3-49/64
[Ø95.65]

3-5/32
[80.17]
1/4 NPT

9/16 HEX
[14.29 HEX]

The Series SGS Gages have dual English/metric scales with SPECIFICATIONS
±1.6% full scale accuracy. Series SGS gages are designed with Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
304 SS housings and brass wetted parts. Units can withstand Wetted Materials: Brass for ranges ≤1000 psi; 316L SS for
ambient temperatures up to 149°F (65°C) and process temper- ranges greater than 1000 psi.
Housing: 304 SS.
atures up to 257°F (125°C). These gages may be easily liquid
Lens: Plexi-glass.
filled in the field without the need for a separate kit. A wide
Accuracy: ±1.6% full scale.
selection of ranges are available from full vacuum, compound to Pressure Limits: 125% full scale for ranges <1500 psi; 115% for
15,000 psi. ranges 1500 psi and greater.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -4 to 149°F (-20 to 65°C);
Process: 257°F max. (125°C max.).
Size: 4˝ (100 mm).
APPLICATIONS Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT.
Pneumatics, Hydraulics, Pumps, Compressors, Diesel Engines. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Weight: 1.1 lb (0.49 kg).

MODELS
Model Model
Number Ranges Ranges
Number
SGS-F0122N 30˝ Hg-0 (-100-0 kPa) SGS-F1622N 0-4000 psi (0-28 MPa)
SGS-F0222N 0-15 psi (0-100 kPa) SGS-F1722N 0-5000 psi (0-34 MPa)
SGS-F0322N 0-30 psi (0-200 kPa) SGS-F1822N 0-6000 psi (0-40 MPa)
SGS-F0422N 0-60 psi (0-400 kPa) SGS-F1922N 0-10000 psi (0-70 MPa)
SGS-F0522N 0-100 psi (0-700 kPa) SGS-F2022N 0-15000 psi (0-100 MPa)
SGS-F0622N 0-150 psi (0-1000 kPa) SGS-F2122N 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi (-100-0-100 kPa)
SGS-F0722N 0-200 psi (0-1400 kPa) SGS-F2222N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-100-0-200 kPa)
SGS-F0822N 0-300 psi (0-2000 kPa) SGS-F2322N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-100-0-400 kPa)
SGS-F0922N 0-400 psi (0-2800 kPa) SGS-F2422N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-100-0-700 kPa)
SGS-F1022N 0-500 psi (0-3400 kPa) SGS-F2522N 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-100-0-1000 kPa)
SGS-F1122N 0-600 psi (0-4000 kPa) SGS-F2622N 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi (-100-0-1400 kPa)
SGS-F1222N 0-1000 psi (0-7000 kPa) SGS-F2722N 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi (-100-0-2000 kPa)
SGS-F1322N 0-1500 psi (0-10 MPa)
SGS-F1422N 0-2000 psi (0-14 MPa)
SGS-F1522N 0-3000 psi (0-20 MPa)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 70
p71 7/24/06 9:24 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SGD 2.5˝ Stainless Steel Industrial Pressure Gages
1.6% Full Scale Accuracy, 316 SS Wetted Parts
1-3/16
2-23/32 [30.2]
WARNING LABEL [69.0] 3/8
[9.5]

2-7/16
[61.9]

9/16 HEX
[14.3] 1/4 NPT

The Series SGD Gages have dual English/metric scales with ±1.6% SPECIFICATIONS
full scale accuracy. The Series SGD gages are designed with 304 SS Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
housings and 316 SS wetted parts for excellent chemical compatibility. Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
These gages cover a wide variety of ranges from full vacuum to 15,000 Housing: 304 SS.
psi. Units can withstand ambient temperatures up to 149°F (65°C) and Lens: Plexi-glass.
Accuracy: ±1.6% full scale.
process temperatures up to 518°F (270°C). Series SGD gages may be
Pressure Limit: 130% full scale for ranges <6000 psi, 115% for
easily liquid filled in the field without the need for a seperate kit.
6000 psi and greater.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -4 to 149°F (-25 to 65°C);
Process: 518°F max. (270°C max.).
APPLICATIONS
Size: 2.5˝ (63 mm).
Food and Beverage Equipment, Pumps, Presses, Engine
Process Connections: 1/4˝ male NPT.
Compressors, Turbines, Hydro-cleaning Machines, Diesel Engines,
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Chemical & Petrochemical
Weight: 4.6 oz (0.13 kg).

MODELS
Model Model
Number Ranges Ranges
Number
SGD-D0122N 30˝ Hg-0 (-100-0 kPa) SGD-D1622N 0-4000 psi (0-28 MPa)
SGD-D0222N 0-15 psi (0-100 kPa) SGD-D1722N 0-5000 psi (0-34 MPa)
SGD-D0322N 0-30 psi (0-200 kPa) SGD-D1822N 0-6000 psi (0-40 MPa)
SGD-D0422N 0-60 psi (0-400 kPa) SGD-D1922N 0-10000 psi (0-70 MPa)
SGD-D0522N 0-100 psi (0-700 kPa) SGD-D2022N 0-15000 psi (0-100 MPa)
SGD-D0622N 0-150 psi (0-1000 kPa) SGD-D2122N 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi (-100-0-100 kPa)
SGD-D0722N 0-200 psi (0-1400 kPa) SGD-D2222N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-100-0-200 kPa)
SGD-D0822N 0-300 psi (0-2000 kPa) SGD-D2322N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-100-0-400 kPa)
SGD-D0922N 0-400 psi (0-2800 kPa) SGD-D2422N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-100-0-700 kPa)
SGD-D1022N 0-500 psi (0-3400 kPa) SGD-D2522N 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-100-0-1000 kPa)
SGD-D1122N 0-600 psi (0-4000 kPa) SGD-D2622N 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi (-100-0-1400 kPa)
SGD-D1222N 0-1000 psi (0-7000 kPa) SGD-D2722N 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi (-100-0-2000 kPa)
SGD-D1322N 0-1500 psi (0-10 MPa)
SGD-D1422N 0-2000 psi (0-14 MPa)
SGD-D1522N 0-3000 psi (0-20 MPa)

71 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p72 7/24/06 9:27 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SGT 2.5˝ Stainless Steel Industrial Pressure Gages
1.6% Full Scale Accuracy, Brass Wetted Parts
2-23/32 1-3/16
WARNING LABEL [69.0] 3/8 [30.2]
[9.5]

2-7/16
[61.9]

9/16 HEX
[14.3] 1/4 NPT

The Series SGT Gages have dual English/metric scales with 1.6% SPECIFICATIONS
full scale accuracy. The Series SGT gages are designed with 304 SS Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
housings and brass wetted parts. These gages cover a wide variety of Wetted Materials: Brass.
ranges from full vacuum to 15,000 psi. Units can withstand ambient Housing: 304 SS.
temperatures up to 140°F (60°C) and process temperatures up to 248°F Lens: Plexi-glass.
(120°C). Series SGT gages may be easily liquid filled in the field with- Accuracy: ±1.6% full scale.
out the need for a separate kit. Pressure Limit: 130% full scale for ranges <6000 psi, 115% for
6000 psi and greater.
Temperature Limits:
APPLICATIONS
Ambient: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C);
Oil, Water, Pneumatics, Hydraulics, Pumps, Presses, Compressors,
Refrigeration Systems Process: 248°F max. (120°C max.).
Size: 2.5˝ (63 mm).
Process Connections: 1/4˝ male NPT.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Weight: 4.6 oz (0.13 kg).

MODELS
Model Model
Number Ranges Ranges
Number
SGT-D0122N 30˝ Hg-0 (-100-0 kPa) SGT-D1622N 0-4000 psi (0-28 MPa)
SGT-D0222N 0-15 psi (0-100 kPa) SGT-D1722N 0-5000 psi (0-34 MPa)
SGT-D0322N 0-30 psi (0-200 kPa) SGT-D1822N 0-6000 psi (0-40 MPa)
SGT-D0422N 0-60 psi (0-400 kPa) SGT-D1922N 0-10000 psi (0-70 MPa)
SGT-D0522N 0-100 psi (0-700 kPa) SGT-D2022N 0-15000 psi (0-100 MPa)
SGT-D0622N 0-150 psi (0-1000 kPa) SGT-D2122N 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi (-100-0-100 kPa)
SGT-D0722N 0-200 psi (0-1400 kPa) SGT-D2222N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-100-0-200 kPa)
SGT-D0822N 0-300 psi (0-2000 kPa) SGT-D2322N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-100-0-400 kPa)
SGT-D0922N 0-400 psi (0-2800 kPa) SGT-D2422N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-100-0-700 kPa)
SGT-D1022N 0-500 psi (0-3400 kPa) SGT-D2522N 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-100-0-1000 kPa)
SGT-D1122N 0-600 psi (0-4000 kPa) SGT-D2622N 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi (-100-0-1400 kPa)
SGT-D1222N 0-1000 psi (0-7000 kPa) SGT-D2722N 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi (-100-0-2000 kPa)
SGT-D1322N 0-1500 psi (0-10 MPa)
SGT-D1422N 0-2000 psi (0-14 MPa)
SGT-D1522N 0-3000 psi (0-20 MPa)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 72
p73 7/24/06 9:28 AM Page 1

Pressure Series
64000 2.5˝ Stainless Steel Pressure Gage
316 SS Wetted Parts, Glycerin Filled
Ø 2.28 1.25
[60] [31.8]

2.28
[60]

0.56 SQ. 0.50

[14] [12.7]
1/4 NPT

Pressure spikes, vibration, and pulsation are overcome with the SPECIFICATIONS
Series 64000 Liquid Filled Stainless Steel Pressure Gage. The unit’s Service: Compatible liquids or gases.
glycerin fill provides superior performance for many mechanical appli- Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
cations. All internal parts are constructed of 316 SS for greater chemi- Fill: Glycerin.
cal compatibility. The 2.5˝ (63 mm) diameter gage features ±1.6%
Housing: 304 SS.
accuracy and is housed in a 304 SS case.
Lens: Plexi-glass.
Accuracy: ±1.6% full scale.
MODELS Pressure Limit: 130% x full scale.
Model Number Ranges Temperature Limit:
64030V 0 to 30˝ Hg Vac (0 to -100 kPa) Ambient: -13 to 150°F (-25 to 65°C);
64015 0 to 15 psi (0 to 100 kPa) Process: 60 to 150°F (15 to 65°C).
64030 0 to 30 psi (0 to 200 kPa)
64060 0 to 60 psi (0 to 400 kPa) Size: 2-1/2˝ (63 mm) diameter.
64100 0 to 100 psi (0 to 700 kPa) Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT.
64160 0 to 160 psi (0 to 1100 kPa) Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
64200 0 to 200 psi (0 to 1400 kPa) Weight: 9 oz (255 g).
64300 0 to 300 psi (0 to 2000 kPa)

Series
63000M 2.5˝ Stainless Steel Pressure Gage
Brass Wetted Parts, Glycerin Filled
2-23/32 1-3/16
WARNING LABEL [69.01] 3/8 [30.0]
[9.19]

2-7/16
[62.0]

9/16 HEX
[14.28] (1/4 NPT)

The Series 63000M Liquid Filled Pressure Gages provide superior perfor- SPECIFICATIONS
mance in applications where vibration, pulsation, mechanical shock and pres- Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
sure spikes are common. The Series 63000M gages have dual English/metric
Wetted Materials: Brass.
scales with ±1.6% full scale accuracy and are available in 2.5˝ dial sizes. Units
are designed with 304 SS housings and brass wetted parts. These gages can Fill: Glycerin.
withstand ambient temperatures up to 140°F (60°C) and process temperatures Housing: 304 SS.
up to 149°F (65°C). Lens: Plexi-glass.
Accuracy: ±1.6% full scale.
MODELS Pressure Limits: 130% of full scale.
Model Number Ranges Temperature Limits:
63030VM 0 to 30 in. Hg Vac (0 to -100 kPa) Ambient: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C);
63015M 0 to 15 psi (0 to 100 kPa) Process: 149°F max. (65°C max.).
63030M 0 to 30 psi (0 to 200 kPa) Size: 2-1/2˝ (63 mm).
63060M 0 to 60 psi (0 to 400 kPa) Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT.
63100M 0 to 100 psi (0 to 700 kPa)
63200M
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
0 to 200 psi (0 to 1400 kPa)
63300M 0 to 300 psi (0 to 2000 kPa) Weight: 8.6 oz (245 g).

73 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p74 7/24/06 9:28 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
62000MU 2.5˝ Stainless Steel Pressure Gage
Brass Wetted Parts, Back Connection with Mounting Bracket

1-15/64
(31.35)
WARNING LABEL 2-45/64
(68.66) 9/32
(7.14)

1/4 NPT

2-27/64
(61.52)

2-41/64
(67.07)
MOUNTING BRACKET

The Series 62000MU Gages have dual English/metric SPECIFICATIONS

scales with ±1.6% full scale accuracy, and are available in 2.5˝ Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
dial sizes. Series 62000MU gages are designed with 304 SS Wetted Materials: Brass.
housings and brass wetted parts, and includes a back u-clamp
Housing: 304 SS.
connection for panel mounting. Units can withstand ambient
temperatures up to 140°F (60°C) and process temperatures up Lens: Plexi-glass.
to 248°F (120°C). The 62000MU gages may be easily liquid Accuracy: ±1.6% full scale.
filled in the field without the need for a separate kit. Pressure Limits: 130% of full scale.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C);
Process: 248°F max. (120°C max.).
Size: 2-1/2˝ (63 mm).
Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Weight: 4.9 oz (0.14 kg).

MODELS
Model Number Ranges
62030VMU 30˝ Hg to 0 Vac (-100 to 0 kPa)
62015MU 0 to 15 psi (0 to 100 kPa)
62030MU 0 to 30 psi (0 to 200 kPa)
62060MU 0 to 60 psi (0 to 400 kPa)
62100MU 0 to 100 psi (0 to 700 kPa)
62160MU 0 to 160 psi (0 to 1100 kPa)
62200MU 0 to 200 psi (0 to 1400 kPa)
62300MU 0 to 300 psi (0 to 2000 kPa)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 74
p75 7/24/06 9:29 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SGB 1.5˝ Stainless Steel Industrial Pressure Gages
2.5% Full Scale Accuracy, 316 SS Wetted Parts

WARNING Ø1-45/64 1-1/16

LABEL [Ø43.26] [26.99]

21/64
[8.33]
Ø1-41/64
[Ø41.67]

1-23/32
[43.66]

1/8 NPT 23/64

[9.13]

The Series SGB Gages have dual English/metric scales with ±2.5% SPECIFICATIONS
full scale accuracy. The Series SGB gages are designed with 304 SS Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
housings and 316 SS wetted parts for excellent chemical compatibility. Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
These gages cover a wide variety of ranges from full vacuum to 4,000 Housing: 304 SS.
psi. Units can withstand ambient temperatures up to 140°F (60°C) and Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: ±2.5% full scale.
process temperatures up to 356°F (180°C).
Pressure Limit: 125% full scale for ranges <1500 psi, 115% for
1500 psi and greater.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C);
Process: 356°F max. (180°C max.).
APPLICATIONS
Size: 1.5˝ (40 mm)
Food and Beverage Equipment, Regulators, Pumps, Presses, Engine
Process Connections: 1/8˝ male NPT.
Compressors, Refrigeration Systems.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Weight: 3.5 oz (0.1 kg).

MODELS
Model Model
Ranges Ranges
Number Number
SGB-B0121N 0-30˝ Hg (-100-0 kPa) SGB-B0921N 0-400 psi (0-2800 kPa)
SGB-B0221N 0-15 psi (0-100 kPa) SGB-B1021N 0-500 psi (0-3400 kPa)
SGB-B0321N 0-30 psi (0-200 kPa) SGB-B1121N 0-600 psi (0-4000 kPa)
SGB-B0421N 0-60 psi (0-400 kPa) SGB-B1221N 0-1000 psi (0-7000 kPa)
SGB-B0521N 0-100 psi (0-700 kPa) SGB-B1321N 0-1500 psi (0-10 MPa)
SGB-B0621N 0-150 psi (0-1000 kPa) SGB-B1421N 0-2000 psi (0-14 MPa)
SGB-B0721N 0-200 psi (0-1400 kPa) SGB-B1521N 0-3000 psi (0-20 MPa)
SGB-B0821N 0-300 psi (0-2000 kPa) SGB-B1621N 0-4000 psi (0-28 MPa)

75 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p76 7/24/06 9:30 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SGB 2˝ Stainless Steel Industrial Pressure Gages
2.5% Full Scale Accuracy, 316 SS Wetted Parts
1-5/32
[29.37]
WARNING Ø2-9/64 7/16
LABEL [Ø54.37] [11.11]

Ø2-3/64
[Ø51.99]

1-15/16
[49.21]

1/8 NPT 23/64

[9.13]

The Series SGB Gages have dual English/metric scales with 2.5% SPECIFICATIONS
full scale accuracy. The Series SGB gages are designed with 304 SS Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
housings and 316 SS wetted parts for excellent chemical compatibility. Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
These gages cover a wide variety of ranges from full vacuum to 4,000 Housing: 304 SS.
psi. Units can withstand ambient temperatures up to 140°F (60°C) and Lens: Glass.
process temperatures up to 356°F (180°C). Accuracy: ±2.5% full scale.
Pressure Limit: 125% full scale for ranges <1500 psi, 115% for
1500 psi and greater.
Temperature Limits:
APPLICATIONS
Ambient: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C);
Food and Beverage Equipment, Regulators, Pumps, Presses, Engine
Compressors, Refrigeration Systems. Process: 356°F max. (180°C max.).
Size: 2˝ (50 mm).
Process Connections: 1/8˝ male NPT.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Weight: 3.5 oz (0.1 kg).

MODELS
Model Ranges Model Ranges
Number Number
SGB-C0121N 0-30˝ Hg (-100-0 kPa) SGB-C0921N 0-400 psi (0-2800 kPa)
SGB-C0221N 0-15 psi (0-100 kPa) SGB-C1021N 0-500 psi (0-3400 kPa)
SGB-C0321N 0-30 psi (0-200 kPa) SGB-C1121N 0-600 psi (0-4000kPa)
SGB-C0421N 0-60 psi (0-400 kPa) SGB-C1221N 0-1000 psi (0-7000 kPa)
SGB-C0521N 0-100 psi (0-700 kPa) SGB-C1321N 0-1500 psi (0-10 MPa)
SGB-C0621N 0-150 psi (0-1000 kPa) SGB-C1421N 0-2000 psi (0-14 MPa)
SGB-C0721N 0-200 psi (0-1400 kPa) SGB-C1521N 0-3000 psi (0-20 MPa)
SGB-C0821N 0-300 psi (0-2000 kPa) SGB-C1621N 0-4000 psi (0-28 MPa)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 76
p77 7/24/06 9:31 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SGI 4˝ Stainless Steel Safety Gage
0.5% Full Scale Accuracy, 316L SS Wetted Parts
2-21/64
Ø4-25/64 [59.13]
WARNING 29/64
[Ø111.52] [11.51]
LABEL

Ø3-15/16
[Ø100.01]

3-11/32
[84.93]

7/8 SQUARE 1/2 NPT

[22.33 SQUARE] 1-1/32
[26.19]

The Series SGI Gages have dual English/metric scales with ±0.5% SPECIFICATIONS
ASME Grade 2A Accuracy. The solid front design with baffle wall in- Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
terposed between the sensing element and the window face, plus a Wetted Materials: 316L SS.
pressure relieving back, provides the increased safety required for po- Housing: 304 SS.
tentially dangerous applications.
Lens: Shatterproof safety glass.
Series SGI gages are designed with 304 SS housings and 316L SS wet-
Accuracy: ±0.5% full scale, ANSI B40.1 Grade 2A.
ted parts for excellent chemical compatibility. Units can withstand am-
Pressure Limit: 130% full scale for ranges <10,000 psi, 115%
bient temperatures up to 149°F (65°C) and process temperatures up to
for 10,000 psi and greater.
518°F (270°C). Series SGI gages may be easily liquid filled in the field
without the need for a separate kit. Included is a micrometer adjustable Temperature Limits:
pointer which allows for re-zeroing the gage in the field. A wide selec- Ambient: -4 to 149°F (-20 to 65°C);
tion of ranges are available from full vacuum, compound to 20,000 psi. Process: 518°F max. (270°C max.).
Size: 4˝ (100 mm).
APPLICATIONS
Oil and Gas, Chemical, Refinery, Petrochemical, Cement, Process Connections: 1/2˝ male NPT.
Pharmaceutical, Power, Pulp and Paper, Food and Beverage. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Weight: 1.3 lb (0.6 kg).

MODELS
Model Model
Number Ranges Number Ranges
SGI-F0124N 30˝ Hg-0 (-100-0 kPa) SGI-F1624N 0-4000 psi (0-28 MPa)
SGI-F0224N 0-15 psi (0-100 kPa) SGI-F1724N 0-5000 psi (0-34 MPa)
SGI-F0324N 0-30 psi (0-200 kPa) SGI-F1824N 0-6000 psi (0-40 MPa)
SGI-F0424N 0-60 psi (0-400 kPa) SGI-F1924N 0-10000 psi (0-70 MPa)
SGI-F0524N 0-100 psi (0-700 kPa) SGI-F2024N 0-15000 psi (0-100 MPa)
SGI-F0624N 0-150 psi (0-1000 kPa) SGI-F2124N 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi (-100-0-100 kPa)
SGI-F0724N 0-200 psi (0-1400 kPa) SGI-F2224N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-100-0-200 kPa)
SGI-F0824N 0-300 psi (0-2000 kPa) SGI-F2324N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-100-0-400 kPa)
SGI-F0924N 0-400 psi (0-2800 kPa) SGI-F2424N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-100-0-700 kPa)
SGI-F1024N 0-500 psi (0-3400 kPa) SGI-F2524N 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-100-0-1000 kPa)
SGI-F1124N 0-600 psi (0-4000 kPa) SGI-F2624N 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi (-100-0-1400 kPa)
SGI-F1224N 0-1000 psi (0-7000 kPa) SGI-F2724N 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi (-100-0-2000 kPa)
SGI-F1324N 0-1500 psi (0-10 MPa) SGI-F2924N 0-20000 psi (0-140 MPa)
SGI-F1424N 0-2000 psi (0-14 MPa)
SGI-F1524N 0-3000 psi (0-20 MPa)

77 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p78 7/24/06 9:32 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SGK 8˝ & 10˝ Stainless Steel Pressure Gage
1.0% Full Scale Accuracy, 316L SS Wetted Parts
1-63/64
(50.40)
WARNING LABEL 9-29/64
(240.11) 1-15/64
(31.35)

7-7/8 8-5/64
(200.03) (205.18)

4-7/16
(112.71)
5-29/32
(150.02)

1/2 NPT

7/8 HEX
(22.23 HEX)

29/32
(23.02)

The Series SGK Gages have dual English/metric scales with ±1% SPECIFICATIONS
full scale accuracy. Series SGK gages are designed with 304 SS hous- Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
ings and 316L SS wetted parts. Units can withstand ambient temper- Wetted Materials: 316L SS.
atures up to 149°F (65°C) and process temperatures up to 518°F Housing: 304 SS.
(270°C). SGK-I models have 8˝ dial faces while the SGK-J models have Lens: Glass.
large 10˝ dial faces. A wide selection of ranges are available from full Accuracy: ±1% full scale, ANSI B40.1 Grade 1A.
vacuum, compound to 15,000 psi.
Pressure Limit: 130% full scale for ranges <10,000 psi; 115% for
10,000 psi and greater.
APPLICATIONS Temperature Limit:
Boilers, Food and Beverage, Pumps, Machine Presses, Engine
Ambient: -4 to 149°F (-20 to 65°C);
Compressors, Turbines, Conventional and Nuclear Power, Diesel
Engines. Process: 518°F max. (270°C max.).
Size: 8˝ (200 mm); 10˝ (250 mm).
Process Connection: 1/2˝ male NPT.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Weight: 8˝: 3.1 lb (1.42 kg); 10˝: 4.7 lb (2.12 kg).

MODELS
Model Model
Number* Ranges Number Ranges
SGK-I0124N 0-30˝ Hg (-100-0 kPa) SGK-I1624N 0-4000 psi (0-28 MPa)
SGK-I0224N 0-15 psi (0-100 kPa) SGK-I1724N 0-5000 psi (0-34 MPa)
SGK-I0324N 0-30 psi (0-200 kPa) SGK-I1824N 0-6000 psi (0-40 MPa)
SGK-I0424N 0-60 psi (0-400 kPa) SGK-I1924N 0-10000 psi (0-70 MPa)
SGK-I0524N 0-100 psi (0-700 kPa) SGK-I2324N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-100-0-200 kPa)
SGK-I0624N 0-150 psi (0-1000 kPa) SGK-I2424N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-100-0-400 kPa)
SGK-I0724N 0-200 psi (0-1400 kPa) SGK-I2524N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-100-0-700 kPa)
SGK-I0824N 0-300 psi (0-2000 kPa) SGK-I2624N 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-100-0-1000 kPa)
SGK-I0924N 0-400 psi (0-2800 kPa) SGK-I2724N 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi (-100-0-1400 kPa)
SGK-I1024N 0-500 psi (0-3400 kPa) 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi (-100-0-2000 kPa)
SGK-I1124N 0-600 psi (0-4000 kPa)
SGK-I1224N 0-1000 psi (0-7000 kPa)
SGK-I1324N 0-1500 psi (0-10 MPa)
SGK-I1424N 0-2000 psi (0-14 MPa)
SGK-I1524N 0-3000 psi (0-20 MPa)

* For 10˝ dial gages change above models from SGK-I to SGK-J

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 78
p79 7/24/06 9:33 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SGX 2.5˝ Stainless Steel Low Pressure Gage
1.6% Full Scale Accuracy, Brass Wetted Parts
1-45/64
WARNING LABEL Ø2-45/64 [43.26]
[Ø68.66] 13/32
[10.32]

Ø2-27/64
[Ø61.52]

1/4 NPT 13/32

[10.32]

The Series SGX Gages have dual English/metric scales with ±1.6% SPECIFICATIONS
full scale accuracy. The Series SGX gages are designed with 304 SS Service: Compatible gases & liquids.
housing and brass wetted parts. Units can withstand ambient temper- Wetted Materials: Brass.
atures up to 149°F (65°C) and process temperatures up to 212°F Housing: 304 SS.
(100°C). Ranges of vacuum, compound and pressures to 235 inches Lens: Glass.
w.c. are available. Included on the dial of the SGX’s is a convenient Accuracy: ±1.6% full scale.
zero adjustment screw which allows the user to easily re-zero the nee- Pressure Limit: Full scale value.
dle. Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -13 to 149°F (-25 to 65°C);
Process: 212°F max. (100°C max.).
Size: 2.5˝ (63 mm).
APPLICATIONS Process Connections: 1/4˝ male NPT.
Pneumatic, Draft Measurement, Filter Monitoring, Liquid Level. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Weight: 4.6 oz (0.13 kg).

MODELS
Model Model
Number Ranges Number Ranges
SGX-D7122N -10-0 in. w.c. (-250-0 mm) SGX-D8722N 0-160 in. w.c. (0-4000 mm)
SGX-D7222N -15-0 in. w.c. (-400-0 mm) SGX-D8822N 0-235 in. w.c. (0-6000 mm)
SGX-D7322N -25-0 in. w.c. (-600-0 mm) SGX-D8922N -4-0-6 in. w.c. (-100-0-150 mm)
SGX-D7422N -40-0 in. w.c. (-1000-0 mm) SGX-D9022N -6-0-10 in. w.c. (-150-0-250 mm)
SGX-D7522N -60-0 in. w.c. (-1600-0 mm) SGX-D9122N -8-0-16 in. w.c. (-200-0-400 mm)
SGX-D7622N -80-0 in. w.c. (-2000-0 mm) SGX-D9222N -16-0-24 in. w.c. (-400-0-600 mm)
SGX-D7722N -100-0 in. w.c. (-2500-0 mm) SGX-D9322N -24-0-40 in. w.c. (-600-0-1000 mm)
SGX-D7822N -160-0 in. w.c. (-4000-0 mm) SGX-D9422N -30-0-50 in. w.c. (-800-0-1200 mm)
SGX-D7922N -235-0 in. w.c. (-6000-0 mm) SGX-D9522N -40-0-60 in. w.c. (-1000-0-1500 mm)
SGX-D8022N 0-10 in. w.c. (0-250 mm) SGX-D9622N -60-0-100 in. w.c. (-1500-0-2500 mm)
SGX-D8122N 0-15 in. w.c. (0-400 mm) SGX-D9722N -80-0-160 in. w.c. (-2000-0-4000 mm)
SGX-D8222N 0-25 in. w.c. (0-600 mm)
SGX-D8322N 0-40 in. w.c. (0-1000 mm)
SGX-D8422N 0-60 in. w.c. (0-1600 mm)
SGX-D8522N 0-80 in. w.c. (0-2500 mm)

79 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p80 7/24/06 9:34 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SGF 2.5˝ Stainless Steel Low Pressure Gage
1.6% Full Scale Accuracy, 316 SS Wetted Parts
1-45/64
Ø2-45/64 13/32 [43.26]
WARNING
[Ø68.66] [10.32]
LABEL

Ø2-27/64
[Ø61.52]

1/4 NPT 13/32

[10.32]

The Series SGF Gages have dual English/metric scales with ±1.6% SPECIFICATIONS
full scale accuracy. The SGF gages are designed with 304 SS housings Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
and 316/316L SS wetted parts. Units can withstand ambient tempera- Wetted Materials: 316/316L SS.
tures up to 149°F (65°C) and process temperatures up to 212°F Housing: 304 SS.
(100°C). Ranges of vacuum, compound and pressures to 235 inches Lens: Glass.
w.c. are available. Included on the dial of the SGF’s is a convenient
Accuracy: ±1.6% full scale.
zero adjustment screw which allows the user to easily re-zero the nee-
Pressure Limit: Full scale value.
dle.
Temperature Limit:
Ambient: -13 to 149°F (-25 to 65°C);
Process: 212°F max. (100°C max.).
Size: 2.5˝ (63 mm).
APPLICATIONS Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT.
Pneumatic, Draft Measurement, Filter Monitoring, Liquid Level. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Weight: 4.6 oz (0.13 kg).

MODELS

Model Model
Number Ranges Number Ranges
SGF-D7122N -10-0 in. w.c. (-250-0 mm) SGF-D8622N 0-100 in. w.c. (0-2500 mm)
SGF-D7222N -15-0 in. w.c. (-400-0 mm) SGF-D8722N 0-160 in. w.c. (0-4000 mm)
SGF-D7322N -25-0 in. w.c. (-600-0 mm) SGF-D8822N 0-235 in. w.c. (0-6000 mm)
SGF-D7422N -40-0 in. w.c. (-1000-0 mm) SGF-D8922N -4-0-6 in. w.c. (-100-0-150 mm)
SGF-D7522N -60-0 in. w.c. (-1600-0 mm) SGF-D9022N -6-0-10 in. w.c. (-150-0-250 mm)
SGF-D7622N -80-0 in. w.c. (-2000-0 mm) SGF-D9122N -8-0-16 in. w.c. (-200-0-400 mm)
SGF-D7722N -100-0 in. w.c. (-2500-0 mm) SGF-D9222N -16-0-24 in. w.c. (-400-0-600 mm)
SGF-D7822N -160-0 in. w.c. (-4000-0 mm) SGF-D9322N -24-0-40 in. w.c. (-600-0-1000 mm)
SGF-D7922N -235-0 in. w.c. (-6000-0 mm) SGF-D9422N -30-0-50 in. w.c. (-800-0-1200 mm)
SGF-D8022N 0-10 in. w.c. (0-250 mm) SGF-D9522N -40-0-60 in. w.c. (-1000-0-1500 mm)
SGF-D8122N 0-15 in. w.c. (0-400 mm) SGF-D9622N -60-0-100 in. w.c. (-1500-0-2500 mm)
SGF-D8222N 0-25 in. w.c. (0-600 mm) SGF-D9722N -80-0-160 in. w.c. (-2000-0-4000 mm)
SGF-D8322N 0-40 in. w.c. (0-1000 mm)
SGF-D8422N 0-60 in. w.c. (0-1600 mm)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 80
p81 7/24/06 9:42 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SSD 2.5˝ Stainless Steel Gage with Sanitary Connection
1.6% Full Scale Accuracy, Glycerin Filled

1-3/16
2-23/32 (30.16)
WARNING LABEL (69.06) 3/8
(9.53)

2-29/64
(54.37)

1
(25.40)

1-7/64
(28.18)
1-63/64
(50.40)

The Series SSD Gages with flush 1.5˝ sanitary clamp connections SPECIFICATIONS
have dual English/metric scales with ±1.6% full scale accuracy. The Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
glycerin filled 2.5˝ Series SSD gages are designed with 304 SS hous- Wetted Materials: 316L SS.
ings and 316L SS wetted parts for excellent chemical compatibility.
Fill Solution: Glycerin.
Units can withstand temperatures up to 149°F (65°C). A wide selec-
Housing: 304 SS.
tion of ranges are available from full vacuum, compound to 300 psi.
Lens: Plexi-glass.
Accuracy: ±1.6% full scale.
Pressure Limit: 130% full scale.
APPLICATIONS Temperature Limit: 60 to 149°F (15 to 65°C).
Food and Beverage, Pharmaceutical, Cryogenics. Size: 2.5˝ (63 mm).
Process Connection: 1.5˝ sanitary connection. Optional 2˝ sani-
tary connection.
A-280 1.5˝ Sanitary Connection Clamp
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
A-281 2˝ Sanitary Connection Clamp
Weight: 15.6 oz (.442 kg).

MODELS
Model Model
Number Ranges Number Ranges
SSD-D0121S 0-30˝ Hg (-100-0 kPa) SSD-D2121S 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi (-100-0-100 kPa)
SSD-D0221S 0-15 psi (0-100 kPa) SSD-D2221S 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-100-0-200 kPa)
SSD-D0321S 0-30 psi (0-200 kPa) SSD-D2321S 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-100-0-400 kPa)
SSD-D0421S 0-60 psi (0-400 kPa) SSD-D2421S 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-100-0-700 kPa)
SSD-D0521S 0-100 psi (0-700 kPa) SSD-D2521S 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-100-0-1000 kPa)
SSD-D0621S 0-150 psi (0-1000 kPa) SSD-D2621S 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi (-100-0-1400 kPa)
SSD-D0721S 0-200 psi (0-1400 kPa) SSD-D2721S 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi (-100-0-2000 kPa)
SSD-D0821S 0-300 psi (0-2000 kPa)
Note: For 2˝ Sanitary Connection, change end of model number from 1S to 2S.

81 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p82 7/26/06 2:53 PM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SSL 4˝ Stainless Steel Gage with Sanitary Connection
1% Grade A Accuracy, Glycerin Filled

29/64 1-55/64
WARNING LABEL (11.51) (47.23)
4-23/64
(110.73)

3-15/16
(100.01)

4-7/64
(104.38)

1-25/64
1/8 13/16 (35.32)
(3.18) (20.64)

7/8 21/32
(22.23) (16.67)
2-17/32
(64.29)

The Series SSL Gages with flush 1.5˝ sanitary clamp connections SPECIFICATIONS
have dual English/metric scales with ±1% full scale accuracy. The glyc- Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
erin filled 4˝ Series SSL gages are designed with 304 SS housings and
Wetted Materials: 316L SS.
316L SS wetted parts for excellent chemical compatibility. Units can
Fill Solution: Glycerin.
withstand temperatures up to 149°F (65°C). A wide offering of ranges
are available from full vacuum, compound to 300 psi. Housing: 304 SS.
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: ±1% full scale. ANSI B40.1 Grade 1A.
Pressure Limit: 130% full scale.
APPLICATIONS Temperature Limit: 60 to 149°F (15 to 65°C).
Food & Beverage, Pharmaceutical, Cryogenics.
Size: 4˝ (100 mm).
Process Connection: 1.5˝ sanitary connection. Optional 2˝
A-280 1.5˝ Sanitary Connection Clamp sanitary connection.
A-281 2˝ Sanitary Connection Clamp
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Weight: 2.3 lb (1.04 kg).

MODELS
Model Model
Number Ranges Number Ranges

SSL-F0121S 30˝ Hg-0 (-100-0 kPa) SSL-F2121S 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi (-100-0-100 kPa)
SSL-F0221S 0-15 psi (0-100 kPa) SSL-F2221S 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-100-0-200 kPa)
SSL-F0321S 0-30 psi (0-200 kPa) SSL-F2321S 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-100-0-400 kPa)
SSL-F0421S 0-60 psi (0-400 kPa) SSL-F2421S 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-100-0-700 kPa)
SSL-F0521S 0-100 psi (0-700 kPa) SSL-F2521S 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-100-0-1000 kPa)
SSL-F0621S 0-150 psi (0-1000 kPa) SSL-F2621S 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi (-100-0-1400 kPa)
SSL-F0721S 0-200 psi (0-1400 kPa) SSL-F2721S 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi (-100-0-2000 kPa)
SSL-F0821S 0-300 psi (0-2000 kPa)
Note: For 2˝ Sanitary Connection, change end of model number from 1S to 2S.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 82
p83 7/24/06 9:44 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SGO 4˝ Stainless Steel Schaeffer Gage
1.6% Full Scale Accuracy, 316L SS & PTFE Wetted Parts

WARNING 1-57/64
LABEL [48.02]
31/64
[12.30]

Ø3-15/16
[Ø100.01]
21/32
[16.67]

23/32
[18.26]

1-3/8
23/32 [34.93]
[18.26]
1/2 NPT Ø3-55/64
[Ø98.03]

The Series SGO Gages have dual English/metric scales with ±1.6% SPECIFICATIONS
full scale accuracy. The Series SGO gages are designed with 304 SS Service: Compatible gases & liquids.
housing, a 316L SS chamber and PTFE coated diaphragm for excellent Wetted Materials: 316L SS chamber with PTFE protected steel
diaphragm.
chemical compatibility. Units can withstand ambient temperatures up
Housing: 304 SS.
to 149°F (65°C) and process temperatures up to 248°F (120°C). Ranges Lens: Glass.
are available from full vacuum, compound to 300 psi. Included is a mi- Accuracy: ±1.6% full scale.
crometer adjustable pointer which allows for re-zeroing the gage in the Pressure Limit: 130% full scale.
field. Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -13 to 149°F (-25 to 65°C);
Process: 248°F max. (120°C max.).
Size: 4˝ (100 mm).
Process Connections: 1/2˝ male NPT.
APPLICATIONS Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Chemical, Refinery, Fertilizer, Petrochemical, Power, Pharmaceutical, Weight: 3.0 lb (1.34 kg).
Pulp and Paper, and Cement.

MODELS
Model Model
Number Ranges Number Ranges
SGO-F0124N 0-30˝ Hg (-100-0 kPa) SGO-F2124N 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi (-100-0-100 kPa)
SGO-F0224N 0-15 psi (0-100 kPa) SGO-F2224N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-100-0-200 kPa)
SGO-F0324N 0-30 psi (0-200 kPa) SGO-F2324N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-100-0-400 kPa)
SGO-F0424N 0-60 psi (0-400 kPa) SGO-F2424N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-100-0-700 kPa)
SGO-F0524N 0-100 psi (0-700 kPa) SGO-F2524N 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-100-0-1000 kPa)
SGO-F0624N 0-150 psi (0-1000 kPa) SGO-F2624N 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi (-100-0-1400 kPa)
SGO-F0724N 0-200 psi (0-1400 kPa) SGO-F2724N 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi (-100-0-2000 kPa)
SGO-F0824N 0-300 psi (0-2000 kPa)

83 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p84 7/24/06 9:45 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SGP 4˝ Stainless Steel Low Pressure Schaeffer Gage
1.6% Full Scale Accuracy, 316 & 316L SS Wetted Parts

1-57/64
4-23/64 (48.02)
WARNING LABEL (102.79) 31/64
(12.30)

3-15/16
(100.01)
21/32
(16.67)

51/64
(20.24)

23/32 1-25/64
(18.26) (35.32)
1/2 NPT
6-15/64
(158.35)

The Series SGP Gages have dual English/metric scales with ±1.6% SPECIFICATIONS
full scale accuracy. The Series SGP gages are designed with 304 stain- Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
less steel housings, a 316L SS chamber and a 316 SS diaphragm for Wetted Materials: 316L SS chamber with 316 SS diaphragm.
excellent chemical compatibility. Units can withstand ambient temper- Housing: 304 SS.
atures up to 149°F (65°C) and process temperatures up to 248°F Lens: Glass.
(120°C). Ranges of vacuum, compound and pressures to 235 inches Accuracy: ±1.6% full scale.
w.c. are available. Included is a micrometer adjustable pointer which Pressure Limit: 130% full scale.
allows for re-zeroing the gage in the field. Temperature Limit:
Ambient: -13 to 149°F (-25 to 65°C).
Process: 248°F max. (120°C max.).
APPLICATIONS Size: 4˝ (100 mm).
Chemical, Refinery, Fertilizer, Petrochemical, Power, Pharmaceutical, Process Connection: 1/2˝ male NPT.
Pulp and Paper, and Cement. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Weight: 3.1 lb (1.4 kg).

MODELS
Model Model
Number Ranges Number Ranges
SGP-F7124N -10-0 in. w.c. (-250-0 mm) SGP-F8624N 0-100 in. w.c. (0-2500 mm)
SGP-F7224N -15-0 in. w.c. (-400-0 mm) SGP-F8724N 0-160 in. w.c. (0-4000 mm)
SGP-F7324N -25-0 in. w.c. (-600-0 mm) SGP-F8824N 0-235 in. w.c. (0-6000 mm)
SGP-F7424N -40-0 in. w.c. (-1000-0 mm) SGP-F8924N -4-0-6 in. w.c. (-100-0-150 mm)
SGP-F7524N -60-0 in. w.c. (-1600-0 mm) SGP-F9024N -6-0-10 in. w.c. (-150-0-250 mm)
SGP-F7624N -80-0 in. w.c. (-2000-0 mm) SGP-F9124N -8-0-16 in. w.c. (-200-0-400 mm)
SGP-F7724N -100-0 in. w.c. (-2500-0 mm) SGP-F9224N -16-0-24 in. w.c. (-400-0-600 mm)
SGP-F7824N -160-0 in. w.c. (-4000-0 mm) SGP-F9324N -24-0-40 in. w.c. (-600-0-1000 mm)
SGP-F7924N -235-0 in. w.c. (-6000-0 mm) SGP-F9424N -30-0-50 in. w.c. (-800-0-1200 mm)
SGP-F8024N 0-10 in. w.c. (0-250 mm) SGP-F9524N -40-0-60 in. w.c. (-1000-0-1500 mm)
SGP-F8124N 0-15 in. w.c. (0-400 mm) SGP-F9624N -60-0-100 in. w.c. (-1500-0-2500 mm)
SGP-F8224N 0-25 in. w.c. (0-600 mm) SGP-F9724N -80-0-160 in. w.c. (-2000-0-4000 mm)
SGP-F8324N 0-40 in. w.c. (0-1000 mm)
SGP-F8424N 0-60 in. w.c. (0-1600 mm)
SGP-F8524N 0-80 in. w.c. (0-2000 mm)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 84
p85 7/24/06 9:46 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SGR 6˝ Stainless Steel Test Gage
0.25% Full Scale Accuracy, Beryllium Copper & 316L SS Wetted Parts

2-9/16
[65.09]
WARNING Ø6-15/32 5/8
LABEL [Ø164.31] [15.88]

Ø5-29/32
[Ø150.02]

4-29/64
[113.11]

1-5/32
1/2 NPT [29.37]

7/8 SQUARE
[22.23 SQUARE]

The Series SGR Gages have dual English/metric scales with ±0.25% SPECIFICATIONS
ASME Grade 3A accuracy, and contain a green dial with anti-parallax Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
mirror for ease of reading measurements by the user.
Wetted Materials: 316L SS connection & beryllium copper
The Series SGR gages are designed with 304 SS housing and beryllium Bourdon tube.
copper plus 316L SS wetted parts. Units can withstand ambient and Housing: 304 SS.
process temperatures up to 149°F (65°C). Included is a micrometer ad-
justable pointer which allows for re-zeroing in the field. A wide selec- Lens: Shatter-proof safety glass.
tion of ranges are available from full vacuum to 15,000 psi. Included Accuracy: ±0.25% full scale @ 77°F (25°C). ANSI B40.1 Grade
with the SGR is a protective portable carrying case.
3A.
Pressure Limit: Full scale value.
APPLICATIONS
Calibration, Laboratory. Temperature Limits: Ambient & Process up to 149°F (65°C).
Size: 6˝ (150 mm).
Test Gage Carrying Case - Included with Process Connections: 1/2˝ male NPT.
the SGR is a convenient, protective
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
portable carrying case for the 6˝ test
gages. Weight: 2.2 lb (1.0 kg).

MODELS
Model Model
Number Ranges Number Ranges
SGR-H0124N 30˝ Hg-0 (-100-0 kPa) SGR-H1124N 0-600 psi (0-4000 kPa)
SGR-H0224N 0-15 psi (0-100 kPa) SGR-H1224N 0-1000 psi (0-7000 kPa)
SGR-H0324N 0-30 psi (0-200 kPa) SGR-H1324N 0-1500 psi (0-10 MPa)
SGR-H0424N 0-60 psi (0-400 kPa) SGR-H1424N 0-2000 psi (0-14 MPa)
SGR-H0524N 0-100 psi (0-700 kPa) SGR-H1524N 0-3000 psi (0-20 MPa)
SGR-H0624N 0-150 psi (0-1000 kPa) SGR-H1624N 0-4000 psi (0-28 MPa)
SGR-H0724N 0-200 psi (0-1400 kPa) SGR-H1724N 0-5000 psi (0-34 MPa)
SGR-H0824N 0-300 psi (0-2000 kPa) SGR-H1824N 0-6000 psi (0-40 MPa)
SGR-H0924N 0-400 psi (0-2800 kPa) SGR-H1924N 0-10000 psi (0-70 MPa)
SGR-H1024N 0-500 psi (0-3400 kPa) SGR-H2024N 0-15000 psi (0-100 MPa)

85 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p86 7/24/06 9:47 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SGJ 6˝ Stainless Steel Safety Test Gage
0.25% Full Scale Accuracy, Beryllium Copper & 316L SS Wetted Parts

2-9/16
[65.09]
WARNING Ø6-15/32 5/8
LABEL [Ø164.31] [15.88]

Ø5-29/32
[Ø150.02]

4-29/64
[113.11]

1-5/32
1/2 NPT [29.37]

7/8 SQUARE
[22.23 SQUARE]

The Series SGJ Gages have dual English/metric scales with ±0.25% SPECIFICATIONS
ASME Grade 3A accuracy, and contain a green dial with anti-parallax Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
mirror for ease of reading measurements by the user. The solid front
design with baffle wall interposed between the sensing element and Wetted Materials: 316L SS connection & beryllium copper
the window face, plus a pressure relieving back, provide the increased Bourdon tube.
safety required for potentially dangerous applications.
Housing: 304 SS.
The Series SGJ gages are designed with 304 SS housings and 316L SS Lens: Shatter-proof safety glass.
and beryllium copper wetted parts. Units can withstand ambient and
process temperatures up to 149°F (65°C). Included is a micrometer Accuracy: ±0.25% full scale @ 77°F (25°C). ANSI B40.1 Grade
adjustable pointer which allows for re-zeroing in the field. A wide 3A.
selection of ranges are available from full vacuum to 15,000 psi.
Pressure Limit: Full scale value.
Included with the SGJ is a protective portable carrying case.
Temperature Limit: Ambient & Process up to 149°F (65°C).
APPLICATIONS
Calibration, Laboratory. Size: 6˝ (150 mm).
Process Connection: 1/2˝ male NPT.
MODELS Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Model
Number Ranges Weight: 2.2 lb (1.0 kg).
SGJ-H0124N 30˝ Hg-0 (-100-0 kPa) Test Gage Carrying Case - Included
SGJ-H0224N 0-15 psi (0-100 kPa) with the SGJ is a convenient, protective
SGJ-H0324N 0-30 psi (0-200 kPa) portable carrying case for the 6˝ test
SGJ-H0424N 0-60 psi (0-400 kPa) gages.
SGJ-H0524N 0-100 psi (0-700 kPa)
SGJ-H0624N 0-150 psi (0-1000 kPa)
SGJ-H0724N 0-200 psi (0-1400 kPa)
SGJ-H0824N 0-300 psi (0-2000 kPa)
SGJ-H0924N 0-400 psi (0-2800 kPa)
SGJ-H1024N 0-500 psi (0-3400 kPa)
SGJ-H1124N 0-600 psi (0-4000 kPa)
SGJ-H1224N 0-1000 psi (0-7000 kPa)
SGJ-H1324N 0-1500 psi (0-10 MPa)
SGJ-H1424N 0-2000 psi (0-14 MPa)
SGJ-H1524N 0-3000 psi (0-20 MPa)
SGJ-H1624N 0-4000 psi (0-28 MPa)
SGJ-H1724N 0-5000 psi (0-34 MPa)
SGJ-H1824N 0-6000 psi (0-40 MPa)
SGJ-H1924N 0-10000 psi (0-70 MPa)
SGJ-H2024N 0-15000 psi (0-100 MPa)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 86
p87 7/24/06 9:48 AM Page 1

Pressure Series
AGD
&
2.5˝ & 4.5˝ Pressure Gages with Ammonia Scales
AGL Dual Pressure and Temperature Scales for Ammonia
1-3/16
2-25/32 [30.16]
WARNING [70.64] 3/8
LABEL [9.53]

2-29/64
[62.31]

1-15/16
Ø5-11/64 [49.21]
WARNING
[Ø131.37] 29.64
LABEL
[11.51]

9/16 HEX 1/4 NPT Ø4-43/64

[14.29 HEX] [Ø118.67]

3-3/4
[95.25]

1/4 NPT

7/8
[22.23] 21/32
[16.67]

The Series AGD & AGL Pressure Gages provide an economic SPECIFICATIONS
solution for measuring pressures in ammonia systems. With dual psi Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
and corresponding degrees F scale calibrated for ammonia, these Wetted Materials: 316L SS.
gages allow for quick servicing of ammonia systems. The Series AGD Housing: 304 SS.
Gage provides ±1.6% full scale accuracy in a 2.5˝ gage while the Series Lens: AGD: Plexi-glass; AGL: Shatterproof safety glass.
AGL Gage is a 4.5˝ unit with 1.0% full scale accuracy.
Accuracy: AGD: ±1.6% full scale; AGL: ±1.0% full scale.
APPLICATIONS ANSI B40.1 Grade 1A.
Systems & Equipment containing ammonia. Pressure Limit: 130% of full scale.
Temperature Limit:
MODELS
AGD: Ambient: -13 to 149°F (-25 to 65°C);
Model Ranges Process: 518°F max. (270°C max.).
Number AGL: Ambient: -13 to 149°F (-25 to 65°C);
AGD-D6822N 30˝ Hg-150 psi/°F scale Process: 572°F max. (300°C max.).
AGD-D6922N 30˝ Hg-300 psi/°F scale Size: AGD: 2.5˝ (63 mm); AGL: 4.5˝ (115 mm).
AGL-G6822N 30˝ Hg-150 psi/°F scale Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT.
30˝ Hg-300 psi/°F scale Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
AGL-G6922N
Weight: AGD: 4.6 oz (0.13 kg); AGL: 1.5 lb (0.70 kg).

Series
AAG Agricultural Ammonia Gages
Ideal for Use on Ammonia Equipment
1-1/8
[29]

2-1/2
[63.5]

3-13/32
[86]

1/4 NPT

The Series AAG Agricultural Ammonia Gages possess psi scales SPECIFICATIONS
with 3-2-3% ANSI B40.1 Grade B accuracy. The 2.5˝ AAG gages are de- Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
signed with black steel housings. Wetted parts include a steel socket and Wetted Materials: Steel tube, socket 316 SS.
Bourdon tube. Units can withstand temperatures of -40 to 160°F Housing: Black painted steel case.
(-40 to 71°C). Three ranges typically used in agricultural ammonia systems Lens: Plastic.
are available: 60, 160 and 400 psi. The process connection on the gages is Accuracy: 3-2-3% ANSI B40.1 Grade B.
a bottom 1/4˝ male NPT. Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
MODELS Temperature Limits: -40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C).
Size: 2.5˝ (63 mm).
Model Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT lower.
Ranges Weight: 5.12 oz (145 g).
Number
AAG-D0422N 0-60 psi
AAG-D0622N 0-160 psi
AAG-D0922N 0-400 psi

87 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p88 7/24/06 9:49 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
FGA
&
2.5˝ & 4˝ Pressure Gages with Freon Scales
FGS Dual Pressure and Temperature Scales for R-12 and R-22
1-3/16
[30.16]
2-25/32
WARNING LABEL [70.64] 3/8
[9.53]

2-29/64
[62.31]

9/16 HEX
[14.29 HEX] 1/8 NPT
1-1/8
(28.58)
4-5/32
23/64
(105.57)
WARNING LABEL (9.13)

3-49/64
(95.65)

3-5/32
(80.17)

(1/4 NPT)

9/16 HEX
(14.29 HEX)

The Series FGA & FGS Pressure Gages provide an economic so- SPECIFICATIONS
lution for measuring pressures in refrigerant systems containing Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
freon. With dual psi and corresponding degrees F scale calibrated for Wetted Materials: Brass.
both R-12 and R-22, these gages allow for quick servicing of systems Housing: FGA: Black powder coated steel; FGS: 304 SS.
containing freon. The Series FGA Gage provides ±2.5% accuracy in a Lens: FGA: Glass; FGS: Plexi-glass.
2.5˝ gage while the Series FGS Gage is a 4˝ unit with 1.6% full scale Accuracy: FGA: ±2.5% between 10-90% of span; FGS: ±1.6%
full scale.
accuracy.
Pressure Limit: FGA: Full scale value; FGS: 125% of full scale.
Temperature Limits:
FGA: Ambient: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C);
APPLICATIONS Process: 248°F max. (120°C max.).
Systems & Equipment containing freon. FGS: Ambient: -4 to 149°F (-20 to 65°C);
Process: 257°F max. (125°C max.).
Size: FGA: 2.5˝ (63 mm); FGS: 4˝ (100 mm).
MODELS Process Connections: FGA: 1/8˝ male NPT; FGS: 1/4˝ male
Model NPT.
Number Ranges Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Weight: FGA: 5.2 oz (0.15 kg); FGS: 1.1 lb (0.49 kg).
FGA-D6321N 30˝ Hg-150 psi/°F scales
FGA-D6421N 30˝ Hg-300 psi/°F scales
FGA-D6621N 0-300 psi/°F scales
FGA-D6721N 0-500 psi/°F scales
FGS-F6322N 30˝ Hg-150 psi/°F scales
FGS-F6422N 30˝ Hg-300 psi/°F scales
FGS-F6522N 30˝ Hg-500 psi/°F scales
FGS-F6622N 0-300 psi/°F scales
FGS-F6722N 0-500 psi/°F scales

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 88
p89 7/24/06 9:49 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
UGA 2.5˝ Utility Pressure Gage
2.5% Accuracy, Brass Wetted Parts
1-1/8
(28.58)
2-23/32
WARNING LABEL (69.06) 3/8
(9.53)

2-29/64
(62.31)

9/16 HEX 1/4 NPT

(14.29 HEX)

The Series UGA Gages have dual English/metric scales with ±2.5% SPECIFICATIONS
accuracy. The Series UGA gages are designed with brass wetted parts, Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
Wetted Materials: Brass.
and can withstand ambient temperatures up to 140°F (60°C) and
Housing: Black powder coated steel.
process temperatures up to 248°F (120°C). A wide variety of ranges Lens: Glass.
are available in this economical gage from full vacuum, compound to Accuracy: ±2.5% between 10-90% of span.
15,000 psi. Pressure Limit: Full scale value.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C);
Process: 248°F max. (120°C max.).
Size: 2.5˝ (63 mm).
APPLICATIONS Process Connections: 1/4˝ male NPT.
Pneumatic, Hydraulic, Portable Equipment, Pumps, Compressors. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Weight: 5.2 oz (0.15 kg).

MODELS
Model Model
Number Ranges Number Ranges
UGA-D0122N 0-30˝ Hg (-100-0 kPa) UGA-D1622N 0-4000 psi (0-28 MPa)
UGA-D0222N 0-15 psi (0-100 kPa) UGA-D1722N 0-5000 psi (0-34 MPa)
UGA-D0322N 0-30 psi (0-200 kPa) UGA-D1822N 0-6000 psi (0-40 MPa)
UGA-D0422N 0-60 psi (0-400 kPa) UGA-D1922N 0-10000 psi (0-70 MPa)
UGA-D0522N 0-100 psi (0-700 kPa) UGA-D2022N 0-15000 psi (0-100 MPa)
UGA-D0622N 0-150 psi (0-1 MPa) UGA-D2122N 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi (-100-0-100 kPa)
UGA-D0722N 0-200 psi (0-1.4 MPa) UGA-D2222N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-100-0-200 kPa)
UGA-D0822N 0-300 psi (0-2 MPa) UGA-D2322N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-100-0-400 kPa)
UGA-D0922N 0-400 psi (0-2.8 MPa) UGA-D2422N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-100-0-700 kPa)
UGA-D1022N 0-500 psi (0-3.4 MPa) UGA-D2522N 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-100-0-1000 kPa)
UGA-D1122N 0-600 psi (0-4 MPa)
UGA-D1222N 0-1000 psi (0-7 MPa)
UGA-D1322N 0-1500 psi (0-10 MPa)
UGA-D1422N 0-2000 psi (0-14 MPa)
UGA-D1522N 0-3000 psi (0-20 MPa)

89 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p90 7/24/06 9:50 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
UGB 4˝ Plastic Utility Gage
Ideal for HVAC Applications
1.181
WARNING Ø4.154 (30.00)
LABEL (105.51)
.354
(8.99)

Ø3.760
(95.50)

3.150
(80.01)

1/4 NPT

9/16 SQ

The economical Series UGB gages are ideal for air and chilled SPECIFICATIONS
water usage typically found in refrigeration and HVAC applications. Service: Compatible gases & liquids.
The UGB gages are enclosed in a plastic case that will not corrode or Wetted Materials: Brass.
rust and contains brass wetted parts. UGB gages have dual Housing: Plastic.
English/metric scales with a ±2.5% accuracy. A wide variety of ranges Lens: Glass.
are available from full vacuum, compound to 15,000 psi. Accuracy: 2.5% between 10 to 90% of span.
Pressure Limits: Full scale range.
FEATURES
Temperature Limits: Ambient: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C);
• Economical compact 4˝ gage.
Process: Maximum 248°F (120°C).
• Plastic non-rust case with removable screw-on cover.
Size: 4˝ (100 mm).
• Dual scale English/metric engineering units.
Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT.
• Perfect for air and water refrigeration & HVAC applications.
Weight: 9.6 oz (272 g).

MODELS
Model Model
Number Ranges Number Ranges
UGB-F0122N 30˝ Hg-0 (-100-0 kPa) UGB-F1622N 0-4000 psi (0-28 MPa)
UGB-F0222N 0-15 psi (0-100 kPa) UGB-F1722N 0-5000 psi (0-34 MPa)
UGB-F0322N 0-30 psi (0-200 kPa) UGB-F1822N 0-6000 psi (0-40 MPa)
UGB-F0422N 0-60 psi (0-400 kPa) UGB-F1922N 0-10000 psi (0-70 MPa)
UGB-F0522N 0-100 psi (0-700 kPa) UGB-F2022N 0-15000 psi (0-100 MPa)
UGB-F0622N 0-150 psi (0-1000 kPa) UGB-F2122N 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi (-100-0-100 kPa)
UGB-F0722N 0-200 psi (0-1400 kPa) UGB-F2222N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-100-0-200 kPa)
UGB-F0822N 0-300 psi (0-2000 kPa) UGB-F2322N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-100-0-400 kPa)
UGB-F0922N 0-400 psi (0-2800 kPa) UGB-F2422N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-100-0-700 kPa)
UGB-F1022N 0-500 psi (0-3400 kPa) UGB-F2522N 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-100-0-1000 kPa)
UGB-F1122N 0-600 psi (0-4000 kPa) UGB-F2622N 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi (-100-0-1400 kPa)
UGB-F1222N 0-1000 psi (0-7000 kPa) UGB-F2722N 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi (-100-0-2000 kPa)
UGB-F1322N 0-1500 psi (0-10 MPa)
UGB-F1422N 0-2000 psi (0-14 MPa)
UGB-F1522N 0-3000 psi (0-20 MPa)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 90
p91 7/24/06 9:51 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
UGC Utility Gage
2˝ Dial with Dual Scales

1-1/32
[26]

2-5/64
[53]

2-29/32
[74]

1/8 or 1/4 NPT

The Series UGC Utility Gages possess dual psi and bar (100 x kPa) SPECIFICATIONS
scales with 3-2-3% ANSI B40.1 Grade B accuracy. The 2˝ UGC gages Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
are designed with black steel housings and chrome bezels. Wetted Wetted Materials: Brass socket, phosphor bronze Bourdon tube.
parts include a brass socket and Phosphor Bronze Bourdon tube. Units Housing: Black steel case with chrome bezel.
can withstand temperatures of -50 to 160°F (-45 to 71°C). A wide offer- Lens: Plastic.
ing of ranges are available from full vacuum, compound to 2000 psi. Accuracy: 3-2-3% ANSI B40.1 Grade B.
Units may be ordered with a male bottom connection in either 1/8˝ or Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
1/4˝ NPT. Temperature Limits: -50 to 160°F (-45 to 71°C).
Size: 2˝ (50 mm).
Process Connection: 1/8˝ or 1/4˝ male NPT lower.
Weight: 4.16 oz (118 g).

MODELS
Model Number (1/4˝ NPT) Ranges Model Number (1/8˝ NPT) Ranges
UGC-C10122N 30˝ Hg - 0 (-1 bar) UGC-C10121N -30˝ Hg - 0 (-1 bar)
UGC-C10222N 0-15 psi (1 bar) UGC-C10221N 0-15 psi (1 bar)
UGC-C10322N 0-30 psi (2 bar) UGC-C10321N 0-30 psi (2 bar)
UGC-C10422N 0-60 psi (4 bar) UGC-C10421N 0-60 psi (4 bar)
UGC-C10522N 0-100 psi (7 bar) UGC-C10521N 0-100 psi (7 bar)
UGC-C10622N 0-150 psi (11 bar) UGC-C10621N 0-150 psi (11 bar)
UGC-C10722N 0-200 psi (14 bar) UGC-C10721N 0-200 psi (14 bar)
UGC-C10822N 0-300 psi (20 bar) UGC-C10821N 0-300 psi (20 bar)
UGC-C10922N 0-400 psi (28 bar) UGC-C10921N 0-400 psi (28 bar)
UGC-C11022N 0-500 psi (34 bar) UGC-C12221N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-1-0-2 bar)
UGC-C11122N 0-600 psi (40 bar) UGC-C12321N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-1-0-4 bar)
UGC-C11222N 0-1000 psi (70 bar) UGC-C12421N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-1-0-7 bar)
UGC-C11322N 0-1500 psi (100 bar) UGC-C12521N 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-1-0-11 bar)
UGC-C11422N 0-2000 psi (140 bar) UGC-C12721N 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi (-1-0-20 bar)
UGC-C12222N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-1-0-2 bar)
UGC-C12322N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-1-0-4 bar)
UGC-C12422N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-1-0-7 bar)
UGC-C12522N 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-1-0-11 bar)
UGC-C12722N 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi (-1-0-20 bar)

91 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p92 7/24/06 9:52 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
UGD Utility Gage
3.5˝ Dial with Dual Scales

1-9/64
[29]

3-17/32
[90]

4-35/64
[116]

1/4 NPT

The Series UGD Utility Gages possess dual psi and bar (100 x kPa) SPECIFICATIONS
scales with 3-2-3% ANSI B40.1 Grade B accuracy. The 3.5˝ UGD gages Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
are designed with black steel housings and chrome bezels. Wetted Wetted Materials: Brass socket, phosphor bronze Bourdon tube.
parts include a brass socket and Phosphor Bronze Bourdon tube. Units Housing: Black steel case with chrome bezel.
can withstand temperatures of -50 to 160°F (-45 to 71°C). A wide offer- Lens: Plastic.
ing of ranges are available from full vacuum, compound to 5000 psi. Accuracy: 3-2-3% ANSI B40.1 Grade B.
Units come with a male 1/4˝ NPT bottom connection. Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
Temperature Limits: -50 to 160°F (-45 to 71°C).
Size: 3.5˝ (89 mm).
Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT lower.
Weight: 8 oz (227 g).

MODELS
Model Number Ranges Model Number Ranges
UGD-E10122N 30˝ Hg - 0 (-1 bar) UGD-E11222N 0-1000 psi (70 bar)
UGD-E10222N 0-15 psi (1 bar) UGD-E11422N 0-2000 psi (140 bar)
UGD-E10322N 0-30 psi (2 bar) UGD-E11522N 0-3000 psi (200 bar)
UGD-E10422N 0-60 psi (4 bar) UGD-E11722N 0-5000 psi (345 bar)
UGD-E10522N 0-100 psi (7 bar) UGD-E12122N 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi (-1-0-1 bar)
UGD-E10622N 0-150 psi (11 bar) UGD-E12222N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-1-0-2 bar)
UGD-E10722N 0-200 psi (14 bar) UGD-E12322N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-1-0-4 bar)
UGD-E10822N 0-300 psi (20 bar) UGD-E12422N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-1-0-7 bar)
UGD-E10922N 0-400 psi (28 bar) UGD-E12522N 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-1-0-11 bar)
UGD-E11122N 0-600 psi (34 bar)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 92
p93 7/24/06 9:52 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
UGE Utility Gages
1.5˝ or 2˝ Dials with Back Connection

Size A B C D
in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)
1-1/2˝ Dial 1-41/64 (42) 15/16 (24) 5/8 (16) 1/8 NPT
2˝ Dial 2-5/64 (53) 1-1/32 (26) 53/64 (21) 1/4 NPT

The Series UGE Utility Gages possess dual psi and bar (100 x kPa) SPECIFICATIONS
scales with 3-2-3% ANSI B40.1 Grade B accuracy. The UGE gages are Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
designed with black steel housings and chrome bezels. Wetted parts Wetted Materials: Brass socket, phosphor bronze Bourdon tube.
include a brass socket and Phosphor Bronze Bourdon tube. Units can Housing: Black steel case with chrome bezel.
withstand temperatures of -50 to 160°F (-45 to 71°C). A wide offering Lens: Plastic.
of ranges are available from full vacuum, compound to 600 psi. Gages Accuracy: 3-2-3% ANSI B40.1 Grade B.
may be ordered in 1.5˝ or 2˝ dial sizes. 1.5˝ units offer a male 1/8˝ Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
NPT center back connection while the 2˝ units may be ordered with a Temperature Limits: -50 to 160°F (-45 to 71°C).
1/8˝ or 1/4˝ male NPT center back connection. The center back Size: 1.5˝ (40 mm) or 2˝ (50 mm).
mounting and compact size makes this gage the perfect choice for Process Connection: 1.5˝: 1/8˝ male NPT center back; 2˝: 1/8˝ or
pneumatic air regulators. 1/4˝ male NPT center back.
Weight: 1/5˝: 2.24 oz (63.5 g); 2˝: 4.16 oz (118 g).

MODELS
Model Number Ranges Model Number Ranges Model Number Ranges
(1.5˝) (2˝ w/ 1/8˝ NPT) (2˝ w/ 1/4˝ NPT)
UGE-B10141N 30˝ Hg - 0 (1 bar) UGE-C10141N 30˝ Hg - 0 (-1 bar) UGE-C10142N 30˝ Hg - 0 (-1 bar)
UGE-B10241N 0-15 psi (1 bar) UGE-C10241N 0-15 psi (1 bar) UGE-C10242N 0-15 psi (1 bar)
UGE-B10341N 0-30 psi (2 bar) UGE-C10341N 0-30 psi (2 bar) UGE-C10342N 0-30 psi (2 bar)
UGE-B10441N 0-60 psi (4 bar) UGE-C10441N 0-60 psi (4 bar) UGE-C10442N 0-60 psi (4 bar)
UGE-B10541N 0-100 psi (7 bar) UGE-C10541N 0-100 psi (7 bar) UGE-C10542N 0-100 psi (7 bar)
UGE-B10641N 0-150 psi (11 bar) UGE-C10641N 0-150 psi (11 bar) UGE-C10642N 0-150 psi (11 bar)
UGE-B10741N 0-200 psi (14 bar) UGE-C10741N 0-200 psi (14 bar) UGE-C10742N 0-200 psi (14 bar)
UGE-B10841N 0-300 psi (20 bar) UGE-C10841N 0-300 psi (20 bar) UGE-C10842N 0-300 psi (20 bar)
UGE-B10941N 0-400 psi (28 bar) UGE-C10941N 0-400 psi (28 bar) UGE-C10942N 0-400 psi (28 bar)
UGE-B11141N 0-600 psi (40 bar) UGE-C11141N 0-600 psi (40 bar) UGE-C11142N 0-600 psi (40 bar)
UGE-B12241N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-1-0-2 bar) UGE-C12241N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-1-0-2 bar) UGE-C12242N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-1-0-2 bar)
UGE-C12341N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-1-0-4 bar) UGE-C12342N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-1-0-4 bar)
UGE-C12441N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-1-0-7 bar) UGE-C12442N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-1-0-7 bar)
UGE-C12541N 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-1-0-11 bar) UGE-C12542N 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-1-0-11 bar)
UGE-C12741N 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi (-1-0-20 bar) UGE-C12742N 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi (-1-0-20 bar)

93 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p.94 7/24/06 9:53 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
UGF Utility Gages
2.5˝ Dial with Back Connection

1-11/64 55/64
[30] [22]

2-1/2
[63]

1/4 NPT

The Series UGF Utility Gages possess dual psi and bar (100 x kPa) SPECIFICATIONS
scales with 3-2-3% ANSI B40.1 Grade B accuracy. The 2.5˝ UGF gages Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
are designed with black steel housings and chrome bezels. Wetted Wetted Materials: Brass socket, phosphor bronze Bourdon tube.
parts include a brass socket and Phosphor Bronze Bourdon tube. Units Housing: Black steel case with chrome bezel.
can withstand temperatures of -50 to 160°F (-45 to 71°C). A wide offer- Lens: Plastic.
ing of ranges are available from full vacuum, compound to 1000 psi. Accuracy: 3-2-3% ANSI B40.1 Grade B.
Units come with a 1/4˝ male NPT center back connection. Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
Temperature Limits: -50 to 160°F (-45 to 71°C).
Size: 2.5˝ (63 mm).
Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT center back.
Weight: 5.44 oz (154 g).

MODELS
Model Number Ranges Model Number Ranges
UGF-D10142N 30˝ Hg - 0 (-1 bar) UGF-D10742N 0-200 psi (14 bar)
UGF-D10242N 0-15 psi (1 bar) UGF-D10842N 0-300 psi (20 bar)
UGF-D10342N 0-30 psi (2 bar) UGF-D10942N 0-400 psi (28 bar)
UGF-D10442N 0-60 psi (4 bar) UGF-D11142N 0-600 psi (40 bar)
UGF-D10542N 0-100 psi (7 bar) UGF-D11242N 0-1000 psi (70 bar)
UGF-D10642N 0-150 psi (11 bar)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 94
p95 7/24/06 9:54 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
LPG1 Low Pressure Gage
1.5% Accuracy in 2.5˝ Chrome Case
1-45/64
[43]

2-39/64
[66]
3-29/64
[87.6]

1/4 NPT

The Series LPG1 Low Pressure Gages possess inches of water SPECIFICATIONS
column scales with 1.5% accuracy. The 2.5˝ LPG1 gages are designed Service: Air and compatible gases.
with chrome plated steel housings and twist lock plastic lenses. Units Wetted Materials: Brass socket and internals.
are ideal for air and gases compatible with brass. Units can withstand Housing: Chrome-plated case.
ambient temperatures of -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C). A wide offering of Lens: Plastic.
ranges are available from vacuum to 10 psi. Units come with a 1/4˝
male NPT bottom connection. Accuracy: 1.5%.
Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
MODELS Temperature Limits: Process: -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C).
Model Number Ranges Size: 2.5˝ (63 mm).
LPG1-D7322N -30-0˝ w.c. Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT lower.
LPG1-D7522N -60-0˝ w.c
LPG1-D7722N
Weight: 8.64 oz (245 g).
-100-0˝ w.c.
LPG1-D7922N -200-0˝ w.c.
LPG1-D8022N 0-10˝ w.c.
LPG1-D8122N 0-15˝ w.c.
LPG1-D8222N 0-30˝ w.c.
LPG1-D8422N 0-60˝ w.c.
LPG1-D8622N 0-100˝ w.c.
LPG1-D8722N 0-160˝ w.c.
LPG1-D8822N 0-200˝ w.c.
LPG1-D9822N 0-3 psi
LPG1-D9922N 0-5 psi
LPG1-D0022N 0-10 psi

Series
LPG2 Low Pressure Gage
1.5% Accuracy, 2.5˝ Chrome Case with Back Connection
1-39/64 55/64
[43] [21.6]

2-55/64
[66]

1/4 NPT

The Series LPG2 Low Pressure Gages possess inches of water SPECIFICATIONS
column scales with 1.5% accuracy. The 2.5˝ LPG2 gages are designed Service: Air and compatible gases.
with chrome plated steel housings and twist lock plastic lenses. Units Wetted Materials: Brass socket and internals.
are ideal for air and gases compatible with brass. Units can withstand Housing: Chrome-plated case.
temperatures of -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C). A wide offering of ranges Lens: Plastic.
are available from vacuum to 10 psi. Units come with a 1/4˝ male NPT Accuracy: 1.5%.
center back connection. Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
MODELS Temperature Limits: -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C).
Size: 2.5˝ (63 mm).
Model Number Ranges Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT center back entry.
Weight: 10.24 oz (290 g).
LPG2-D7242N -15-0˝ w.c.
LPG2-D7342N -30-0˝ w.c
LPG2-D7742N -100-0˝ w.c.
LPG2-D8042N 0-10˝ w.c.
LPG2-D8142N 0-15˝ w.c.
LPG2-D8242N 0-30˝ w.c.
LPG2-D8442N 0-60˝ w.c.
LPG2-D8642N 0-100˝ w.c.
LPG2-D9942N 0-5 psi
LPG2-D0042N 0-10 psi

95 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p96 7/24/06 9:56 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
TEFG Molded PVDF Gages
One Piece Mold With All PVDF Body and Diaphragm
2-57/64 5/8 1-3/64
[73.44] [15.80] [26.47]

2-39/64
[66.36]

1/2
[12.82]

1-3/16
[30.36]

7/16
[10.99]

2-19/64 1-15/64
[58.29] [31.28]

The Series TEFG Molded PVDF Gages possess dual psi and bar SPECIFICATIONS
(100 x kPa) scales with 1.5% full scale accuracy. The 2.5˝ TEFG gages Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
are designed with a one piece PVDF mold that makes the unit ex- Wetted Materials: PVDF.
tremely durable while preventing the chance of a loss of fill. The wet-
Housing: One piece molded anti-impact PVDF.
ted parts include the PVDF connection and PVDF diaphragm. Units
can withstand temperatures of -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C). A wide of- Lens: Heavy duty glass.
fering of ranges are available from 15 to 200 psi. Units come with a Fill: Glycerin.
1/4˝ or 1/2˝ female NPT bottom connection. TEFG gages are ideal for Accuracy: 1.5% full scale.
water treatment and chemical feed systems. Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
Temperature Limit: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C).
MODELS Size: 2.5˝ (63 mm).
Model Number Ranges Process Connection: 1/4˝ or 1/2˝ female NPT lower.
1/2˝ 1/4˝
TEFG-D10224F TEFG-D10222F Weight: 14.72 oz (417 g).
0-15 psi (1 bar)
TEFG-D10324F TEFG-D10322F 0-30 psi (2 bar)
TEFG-D10424F TEFG-D10422F 0-60 psi (4 bar)
TEFG-D10524F TEFG-D10522F 0-100 psi (7 bar)
TEFG-D10624F TEFG-D10622F 0-150 psi (11 bar)
TEFG-D10724F TEFG-D10722F 0-200 psi (14 bar)

Series
PPG Molded Polypropylene Gages
One Piece Mold With Polypropylene Body and Fluoroelastomer Diaphragm
2-57/64 5/8 1-3/64
[73.44] [15.80] [26.47]

2-39/64
[66.36]

1/2
[12.82]

1-3/16
[30.36]

7/16
[10.99]

2-19/64 1-15/64
[58.29] [31.28]

The Series PPG Molded Polypropylene Gages possess dual psi SPECIFICATIONS
and bar (100 x kPa) scales with 1.5% full scale accuracy. The 2.5˝ PPG Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
gages are designed with a one piece Polypropylene mold that makes Wetted Materials: Connection: Polypropylene; Diaphragm:
the unit extremely durable while preventing the chance of a loss of fill. Fluoroelastomer.
The wetted parts include the Polypropylene connection and Fluoro- Housing: One piece molded Polypropylene.
Lens: Heavy duty glass.
elastomer diaphragm. Units can withstand temperatures of -4 to Fill: Glycerin.
140°F (-20 to 60°C). A wide offering of ranges are available from 15 Accuracy: 1.5% full scale.
to 200 psi. Units come with a 1/4˝ or 1/2˝ female NPT bottom con- Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
nection. PPG gages are perfect for water treatment and chemical feed Temperature Limits: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C).
systems. Size: 2.5˝ (63 mm).
Process Connection: 1/4˝ or 1/2˝ female NPT lower.
MODELS Weight: 12.16 oz (345 g).
Model Number Ranges
1/2˝ 1/4˝
PPG-D10224F PPG-D10222F 0-15 psi (1 bar)
PPG-D10324F PPG-D10322F 0-30 psi (2 bar)
PPG-D10424F PPG-D10422F 0-60 psi (4 bar)
PPG-D10524F PPG-D10522F 0-100 psi (7 bar)
PPG-D10624F PPG-D10622F 0-150 psi (11 bar)
PPG-D10724F PPG-D10722F 0-200 psi (14 bar)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 96
pg97 7/24/06 9:57 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
FBG Forged Brass Gages
Heavy Duty Case Perfect for Hydraulic Systems

1-7/16
[36.5]

2-37/64
[65]
3-13/32
[87]

1/4 NPT

The Series FBG Forged Brass Gages possess psi scales with 1.5% SPECIFICATIONS
full scale accuracy. The 2.5˝ FBG gages are designed with industrial Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
forged brass housings and filled with glycerin oil to dampen out vibra- Wetted Materials: Brass socket, phosphor bronze Bourdon
tion. This construction makes the FBG ideal for heavy industry appli- tube.
cations such as hydraulic equipment. Wetted parts include a brass Housing: Forged brass case.
socket and phosphor bronze Bourdon tube. Units can withstand tem- Lens: Plastic.
Fill: Glycerin.
peratures of 30 to 160°F (-1 to 71°C). A wide offering of ranges are
Accuracy: 1.5% full scale.
available from full vacuum, compound to 10,000 psi.
Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
MODELS
Temperature Limits: 30 to 160°F (-1 to 71°C).
Model Size: 2.5˝ (63 mm).
Ranges
Number Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT lower.
FBG-D0122N 30˝ Hg-0 Weight: 12.8 oz (363 g).
FBG-D0222N 0-15 psi
FBG-D0322N 0-30 psi
FBG-D0422N 0-60 psi
FBG-D0522N 0-100 psi
FBG-D0622N 0-160 psi
FBG-D0722N 0-200 psi
FBG-D0822N 0-300 psi
FBG-D0922N 0-400 psi
FBG-D1122N 0-600 psi
FBG-D1222N 0-1000 psi
FBG-D1322N 0-1500 psi
FBG-D1422N 0-2000 psi
FBG-D1522N 0-3000 psi
FBG-D1722N 0-5000 psi
FBG-D1822N 0-7500 psi
FBG-D1922N 0-10000 psi
FBG-D2222N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi
FBG-D2422N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi
FBG-D2522N 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi
FBG-D2722N 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi

97 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p98 7/24/06 9:58 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
GTG Gas Test Gages
Used to Check Gas Lines for Leaks
HORIZONTAL MOUNT VERSION
in (mm)
NPT A B C D E F G
1/2˝ 2-1/8 2-13/16 2-3/64 2-7/16 1-3/32
(54.10) (71.45) (52.07) (61.98) (27.69)
Horizontal Hex 3/4˝ 2-1/8 2-13/16 1-1/8 2-3/64 2-7/16 1-3/32 1-21/64
(54.10) (71.45) (28.80) (52.07) (61.98) (27.69) (33.92)
1˝ 2-1/8 2-13/16 1-13/32 2-3/64 2-7/16 1-3/32 1-39/64
(54.10) (71.45) (35.60) (52.07) (61.98) (27.69) (40.63)

VERTICAL MOUNT VERSION

in (mm)
NPT A B C D E F G
1/2˝ 2-1/8 1-13/16 2-3/64 2-7/16 1-3/32
Vertical Hex (54.10) (45.97) (52.07) (61.98) (27.69)
3/4˝ 2-1/8 1-13/16 1-1/8 2-3/64 2-7/16 1-3/32 1-21/64
(54.10) (45.97) (28.80) (52.07) (61.98) (27.69) (33.92)
1˝ 2-1/8 1-13/16 1-13/32 2-3/64 2-7/16 1-3/32 1-39/64
(54.10) (45.97) (35.60) (52.07) (61.98) (27.69) (40.63)

BELL MOUNT VERSION

in (mm)
NPT A B C D E F
1/2˝ 1-1/4 2-3/8 1-13/64 2-3/64 2-7/16 1-3/32
(31.75) (60.45) (30.48) (52.07) (61.98) (27.69)
Bell 3/4˝ 1-1/2 2-3/16 1-1/2 2-3/64 2-7/16 1-3/32
(38.10) (55.63) (38.10) (52.07) (61.98) (27.69)
1˝ 1-3/4 2-1/2 1-3/4 2-3/64 2-7/16 1-3/32
(44.45) (63.5) (44.45) (52.07) (61.98) (27.69)

The Series GTG Gas Test Gages possess psi scales with 3-2-3% SPECIFICATIONS Process Connection: 1/2˝,
ANSI B40.1 Grade B accuracy. The 2˝ GTG gages are designed with Service: Compatible gases. 3/4˝, or 1˝ female NPT in verti-
black steel housings. Wetted parts include a brass socket and Bourdon Wetted Materials: Brass cal or horizontal chrome plated
socket and Bourdon tube. steel hex block. 1/2˝, 3/4˝, or 1˝
tube. Units can withstand temperatures of -40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C). Housing: Black steel case. female NPT in bell shape lower
Typical installer test ranges are available such as 15, 30, 100 and 160 Lens: Plastic. connection.
psi. Three styles of connections are available: Vertical or horizontal Accuracy: 3-2-3% ANSI Weight: Hex Connection: 9.92
hex-shaped chrome plated steel connections in 1/2˝, 3/4˝, or 1˝ female B40.1 Grade B. oz (281 g); Bell Connection: 8
Pressure Limit: 110% of full oz (227 g).
NPT. Also, available in the same female NPT sizes is a bell shaped con- scale.
nection. All connection blocks feature a valve for system pressuriza- Temperature Limits: -40 to
tion. 160°F (-40 to 71°C).
Size: 2˝ (50 mm).
MODELS
Model Model
Ranges Connection Ranges Connection
Number Number
GTG-C024H 0-15 psi 1/2˝ horizontal hex GTG-C054V 0-100 psi 1/2˝ vertical hex
GTG-C025H 0-15 psi 3/4˝ horizontal hex GTG-C055V 0-100 psi 3/4˝ vertical hex
GTG-C026H 0-15 psi 1˝ horizontal hex GTG-C056V 0-100 psi 1˝ vertical hex
GTG-C034H 0-30 psi 1/2˝ horizontal hex GTG-CO64V 0-160 psi 1/2˝ vertical hex
GTG-C035H 0-30 psi 3/4˝ horizontal hex GTG-C065V 0-160 psi 3/4˝ vertical hex
GTG-C036H 0-30 psi 1˝ horizontal hex GTG-C066V 0-160 psi 1˝ vertical hex
GTG-C054H 0-100 psi 1/2˝ horizontal hex GTG-C024L 0-15 psi 1/2˝ bell
GTG-C055H 0-100 psi 3/4˝ horizontal hex GTG-C025L 0-15 psi 3/4˝ bell
GTG-C056H 0-100 psi 1˝ horizontal hex GTG-C026L 0-15 psi 1˝ bell
GTG-C064H 0-160 psi 1/2˝ horizontal hex GTG-C034L 0-30 psi 1/2˝ bell
GTG-C065H 0-160 psi 3/4˝ horizontal hex GTG-C035L 0-30 psi 3/4˝ bell
GTG-C066H 0-160 psi 1˝ horizontal hex GTG-C036L 0-30 psi 1˝ bell
GTG-C024V 0-15 psi 1/2˝ vertical hex GTG-C054L 0-100 psi 1/2˝ bell
GTG-C025V 0-15 psi 3/4˝ vertical hex GTG-C055L 0-100 psi 3/4˝ bell
GTG-C026V 0-15 psi 1˝ vertical hex GTG-C056L 0-100 psi 1˝ bell
GTG-C034V 0-30 psi 1/2˝ vertical hex GTG-C064L 0-160 psi 1/2˝ bell
GTG-C035V 0-30 psi 3/4˝ vertical hex GTG-C065L 0-160 psi 3/4˝ bell
GTG-C036V 0-30 psi 1˝ vertical hex GTG-C066L 0-160 psi 1˝ bell

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 98
p99 7/24/06 9:58 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
SAEG Hydraulic SAE Gage
7/16˝ SAE Process Connection with O-ring and Lock Nut

1-15/64
[33]

2-13/16
[71]
3-35/64
[90]

1-5/64
[27]

7/16-20 SAE

The Series SAEG Gages possess dual psi and bar (100 x kPa) scales SPECIFICATIONS
with 1.5% accuracy. The 2.5˝ SAEG gages are designed with steel Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
housings and bezels. These glycerin filled gages possess brass sockets Wetted Materials: Brass socket, phosphor bronze Bourdon
and Phosphor Bronze Bourdon tubes. Units can withstand tempera- tube.
tures of 30 to 160°F (-1 to 71°C). A wide offering of ranges are avail- Housing: 304 SS housing & bezel.
able from 30 psi to 15,000 psi. Units provide a 7/16˝-20 SAE lower Lens: Plastic.
Fill: Glycerin.
hydraulic connection that includes a rubber O-ring and lock-nut. The
Accuracy: 1.5% full scale.
SAEG gages are perfect for hydraulic and pneumatic applications.
Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
Temperature Limits: 30 to 160°F (-1 to 71°C).
Size: 2.5˝ (63 mm).
Process Connection: 7/16˝-20 SAE lower hydraulic connection
MODELS with rubber O-ring, washer and lock-nut.
Model Ranges Weight: 7.68 oz (218 g).
Number
SAEG-D10321E 0-30 psi (2 bar)
SAEG-D10421E 0-60 psi (4 bar)
SAEG-D10521E 0-100 psi (7 bar)
SAEG-D10621E 0-150 psi (11 bar)
SAEG-D10721E 0-200 psi (14 bar)
SAEG-D10921E 0-400 psi (28 bar)
SAEG-D11121E 0-600 psi (40 bar)
SAEG-D11221E 0-1000 psi (70 bar)
SAEG-D11321E 0-1500 psi (100 bar)
SAEG-D11421E 0-2000 psi (140 bar)
SAEG-D11521E 0-3000 psi (200 bar)
SAEG-D11721E 0-5000 psi (345 bar)
SAEG-D11821E 0-6000 psi (415 bar)
SAEG-D11921E 0-10000 psi (690 bar)
SAEG-D12021E 0-15000 psi (1030 bar)

99 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p100 7/24/06 9:59 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
BTG Bulk Tanker Gage
Monitor Tank Unloading Discharge Pressure
5-29/32 1-11/32 13/64
[150] [34] [5]

5-7/16 4-61/64
6-11/32
[138] [126]
[161]

63/64
[25]

1/4 NPT

The Series BTG Bulk Tanker Gages possess psi scales with 1% SPECIFICATIONS
full scale ANSI B40.1 Grade 1A accuracy. The BTG gage is perfect for Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
use on tanker trucks for monitoring discharge pressures while tank is Wetted Materials: Brass socket, phosphor bronze Bourdon tube.
being unloaded. The 4.5˝ BTG gages are designed with an epoxy coat- Housing: Epoxy coated black steel case with removable back
ed black steel housing that is rust and corrosion resistant. The BTG flange.
gages are designed with a silicone dampened counter weight attached Lens: Plastic.
to the movement which allows the units to withstand vibration. Wetted Accuracy: 1% full scale ANSI B40.1 Grade 1A.
parts include a brass socket and Phosphor Bronze Bourdon tube. Units Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
can withstand temperatures of -40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C). Units come Temperature Limits: -40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C).
with a 1/4˝ male NPT bottom connection. Size: 4.5˝ (115 mm).
Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT lower.
Model Ranges Weight: 17.6 oz (499 kg).
Number
BTG-G0322N 0-30 psi
BTG-G2222N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi

Series
MINEG Mining Gage
Three Color Scale, Quick-Connect Mining Industry Connection

2-7/64 1-31/32
[53.34] [49.78]

7/16
[11.18]

1-1/8
53/64 [28.7]
5/8 7/16
[21.08]
[16][11.18]
35/64 1/8
[13.97] [3.18]
1/4
25/32 [6.35]
[19.94]

The Series MINEG Gages have dual psi and bar scales with red, SPECIFICATIONS Pressure Limit: 110% of full
green and yellow zones on the 2˝ dials. The gages possess 1.5% full Service: Compatible gases scale.
scale accuracy and are designed with a one piece forged brass case and and liquids. Temperature Limits: 30 to
connection. These silicone filled gages possess brass sockets and Phos- Wetted Materials: Brass 160°F (-1 to 71°C).
phor Bronze Bourdon tubes. Units can withstand temperatures of 30 socket, phosphor bronze Size: 2˝ (50 mm).
to 160°F (-1 to 71°C). Units provide a mining industry standard hy- Bourdon tube. Process Connection: Mining
draulic quick-connect connection that contains a Buna O-ring and Flu- Housing: One piece forged Industry standard. Hydraulic
oroelastomer washer. This connection makes the MINEG the ideal brass case and connection. Quick-Connect with Buna O-
gage for roof support shields on long wall mining equipment and other Stainless steel bezel. ring and Fluoroelastomer wash-
hydraulic systems used in the mining industry. Lens: Plastic. er.
Fill: Silicone. Weight: 9.28 oz (263 g).
Series MINEG, 9000 psi (600 bar) Accuracy: 1.5% full scale.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 100
p101 7/24/06 10:00 AM Page 1

Pressure Series
HSG Hose Test Gages
For Checking Plumbing Water Pressure

Size A B C D E F
in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)
w/ MP OPT. 2-53/64 (72) 1-3/16 (31) 1-9/64 (29) 37/64 (14.5) 1-7/32 (31) 13/64 (5)
w/o MP OPT. 2-9/16 (65) 1-7/32 (31) 1-9/64 (29) 37/64 (14.5) 1-7/32 (31) 13/64 (5)

The Series HSG Hose Test Gages possess psi scales with 3-2-3% SPECIFICATIONS
ANSI B40.1 Grade B accuracy. The 2.5˝ HSG gages are designed with Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
black plastic housings. Wetted parts include a brass socket and Bour- Wetted Materials: Brass socket and Bourdon tube.
don tube. Units can withstand temperatures of -40 to 120°F (-40 to Housing: Black plastic case.
49°C). A 300 psi range is available with a top connect 3/4˝ female brass Lens: Plastic.
hose coupling with rubber washer. This connection makes the HSG Accuracy: 3-2-3% ANSI B40.1 Grade B.
gage perfect for checking plumbing lines for proper pressures. An op- Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
tional maximum indicating needle is available.
Temperature Limits: -40 to 120°F (-40 to 49°C).
MODELS Size: 2.5˝ (63 mm).
Model Number Ranges Process Connection: Top connect 3/4˝ female brass hose cou-
HSG-D0865N 0-300 psi pling & tail piece with rubber washer.
HSG-D0865N-MP 0-300 psi with Max.
Indicating Needle Weight: 12.8 oz (363 g).

Series
LEVG Level Mount Gage
Reads in PSI & Feet of Water Column

Size A B C D
in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)
3-1/2˝ Dial 3-17/32 (90) 1-9/64 (29) 4-35/64 (116) 1/4 NPT
4-1/2˝ Dial 4-57/64 (124) 1-5/32 (29) 6-3/64 (154) 1/4 NPT

The Series LEVG Level Gages possess dual psi and feet of water SPECIFICATIONS
column scales with 3-2-3% ANSI B40.1 Grade B accuracy. The 3.5˝ or Service: For use with water.
4.5˝ LEVG gages are designed with black steel housings with chrome Wetted Materials: Brass socket, phosphor bronze Bourdon
bezels. Wetted parts include a brass socket and phosphor bronze Bour- tube.
don tube. Units can withstand temperatures of -50 to 160°F (-45 to Housing: Black steel case with chrome bezel.
71°C). A wide offering of ranges are available from 15 psi (34 ft. of Lens: Plastic.
w.c.) to 200 psi (460 ft. of w.c) making them the perfect choice for mon- Accuracy: 3-2-3% ANSI B40.1 Grade B.
itoring water tank level. A red adjustable set-point indicator is includ- Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
ed on every dial. Temperature Limits: -50 to 160°F (-45 to 71°C).
Size: 3.5˝ (89 mm) or 4.5˝ (115 mm).
Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT lower.
Weight: 3.5˝: 8.32 oz (236 g) 4.5˝: 11.2 oz (317.5 g).
MODELS
Model Number Ranges Model Number Ranges
3.5˝ 4.5˝
LEVG-E50222N 0-15 psi (0-34 ft. H2O) LEVG-G50222N 0-15 psi (0-34 ft. H2O)
LEVG-E50322N 0-30 psi (0-70 ft. H2O) LEVG-G50322N 0-30 psi (0-70 ft. H2O)
LEVG-E50422N 0-60 psi (0-140 ft. H2O) LEVG-G50422N 0-60 psi (0-140 ft. H2O)
LEVG-E50522N 0-100 psi (0-230 ft. H2O) LEVG-G50522N 0-100 psi (0-230 ft. H2O)
LEVG-E50622N 0-160 psi (0-370 ft. H2O) LEVG-G50622N 0-160 psi (0-370 ft. H2O)
LEVG-E50722N 0-200 psi (0-460 ft. H2O) LEVG-G50722N 0-200 psi (0-460 ft. H2O)

101 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p102 7/24/06 10:03 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
UNOG “Use No Oil” Gages
For Pressure Indication on Gas Cylinders

Size A B C D E
in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)
2˝ Dial 2-5/16 (59) 1-13/64 (31) 2-5/64 (53) 1-1/8 (29) 1/4 NPT
2-1/2˝ Dial 2-13/16 (72) 1-1/8 (29) 2-21/32 (68) 1-1/8 (29) 1/4 NPT

The Series UNOG “Use No Oil” Gages possess psi scales with SPECIFICATIONS
2.5% full scale accuracy. The 2˝ or 2.5˝ UNOG gages are designed Service: Compressed, non-corrosive gases.
with polished brass housings and copper alloy wetted parts. Units can Wetted Materials: Copper alloy socket and Bourdon tube.
withstand temperatures of -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C). A wide offering Housing: Polished brass case.
of ranges are available from 30 to 4000 psi. These oil-free service Lens: Twist on plastic lens.
gages come with a 1/4˝ male NPT bottom connection and are ideal for Accuracy: 2.5% full scale.
indicating compressed gas cylinder pressures of non-corrosive gases Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
which will oxidize with oil based compounds. Typical applications in- Temperature Limits: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C).
clude gas cylinders for welding and cutting manufacturing processes. Size: 2˝ (50 mm) or 2.5˝ (63 mm).
Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT lower
Weight: 2˝: 4.48 oz (127 g) 2.5˝: 5.76 oz (163 g).
MODELS
2˝ Model 2.5˝ Model Ranges
Ranges
Number Number
UNOG-C0322N 30 psi UNOG-D0322N 30 psi
UNOG-C0422N 60 psi UNOG-D0422N 60 psi
UNOG-C0522N 100 psi UNOG-D0522N 100 psi
UNOG-C0722N 200 psi UNOG-D0722N 200 psi
UNOG-C0922N 400 psi UNOG-D0922N 400 psi
UNOG-C1622N 4000 psi UNOG-D1622N 4000 psi

Series
SGC Spiral Tube Pressure Gage
ASME Grade B Accuracy in a Compact 1˝ Dial
1/8-27 NPT
SPECIFICATIONS
Ø31/32
[Ø25] Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
Wetted Materials: Brass Bourdon tube.
Housing: 304 SS.
Accuracy: ASME Grade B (3-2-3%).
Pressure Limit: 1.1 x full scale.
Temperature Limits: -40 to 150°F (-40 to 65°C).
Size: 1˝ (25 mm).
15/16
1/2
[24.2]
Process Connections: 1/8˝ male NPT.
[12.8]
19/32 Weight: 1.0 oz (28.3 g).
[14.8]
1-1/32
[25.8]

MODELS
The compact Series SGC Pressure Gages are an economical so-
lution for monitoring high pressure applications where space is limited. Model Number Ranges PSI
These 1˝ gages are perfect for OEM applications for use on pumps, SGC-05 0-100 psig
compressors and portable cylinders. The Series SGC Gages are housed SGC-06 0-160 psig
in a rugged 304 SS case and feature ASME Grade B accuracy. SGC-07 0-200 psig
SGC-08 0-300 psig
SGC-11 0-600 psig
SGC-12 0-1000 psig
APPLICATIONS SGC-13 0-1500 psig
Pumps, Compressors, Portable Cylinders. SGC-14 0-2000 psig
SGC-15 0-3000 psig
SGC-16 0-4000 psig
SGC-17 0-5000 psig

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 102
p103 7/24/06 10:41 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
CONG Contractor Gage
Large Easy-to-Read Dial

1-11/64
[30]

4-29/32
[124]

31/32
[25]

1/4 NPT

The Series CONG Contractor Gages are ideally manufactured SPECIFICATIONS

for contractors because of their large dial and compact design. Since Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
the gages are lightweight and slim, they are easy to transport. The Wetted Materials: Brass socket & Bourdon tube.
large scale makes them simple to read. These qualities make the Housing: Stainless steel case.
CONG series perfect for every contractor. CONG gages possess psi Lens: Plastic.
scales with 1% full scale accuracy and the 4.5˝ dial is made with stain- Accuracy: 1% full scale. ANSI B40.1 Grade 1A.
Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
less steel housings and brass wetted parts. Units can withstand tem-
Temperature Limits: -40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C).
peratures of -40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C). A wide offering of ranges are
Size: 4.5˝ (115 mm).
available from full vacuum, compound to 500 psi. Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT lower.
MODELS Weight: 12.16 oz (345 g).
Model
Ranges
Number
CONG-G0122N -30˝ Hg-0
CONG-G0222N 0-15 psi
CONG-G0322N 0-30 psi
CONG-G0422N 0-60 psi
CONG-G0522N 0-100 psi
CONG-G0622N 0-160 psi
CONG-G0722N 0-200 psi
CONG-G0822N 0-300 psi
CONG-G1022N 0-500 psi
CONG-G2222N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi
CONG-G2422N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi
CONG-G2522N 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi

103 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p104 7/24/06 10:42 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
PPMG Process Panel Mount Gages
4.5˝ Safety Case with Removable Cover

6-3/16 2-9/32
[157] 33/64 [58]
[13]

4-49/64
[121]
1-3/16
[30]

3 Ø.218 HOLES
ON A Ø5.375 B.C.
UNDER BEZEL
29/32
[23]

The Series PPMG Process Panel Mount Gages possess psi SPECIFICATIONS
scales with 0.5% full scale ANSI B40.1 Grade 2A accuracy. The 4.5˝ Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
PPMG gages are designed with an aluminum front-flange safety-case. Wetted Materials: 316 SS socket and Bourdon tube.
This safety-case has a solid front with pressure relief rear opening. In- Housing: Aluminum case and ring with enamel coating.
ternal overload and under-load protection is provided to prevent dam- Lens: Polycarbonate.
Accuracy: 0.5% full scale ANSI B40.1 Grade 2A.
age to the gage from extreme over or under range sensing. A front
Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
screw is provided on the flange permitting easy panel installation as
Temperature Limits: -40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C).
well as allowing easy access to the adjustable needle pointer. Excellent Size: 4.5˝ (115 mm).
chemical compatibility is obtained with the 316 SS socket and Bourdon Process Connection: 1/4˝ or 1/2˝ male NPT lower.
tube. Units can withstand temperatures of -40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C). Mounting Orientation: Panel mounting.
A wide offering of ranges are available from full vacuum, compound to Weight: 2.34 lb (1.06 kg).
10,000 psi.

MODELS
1/4˝ Model Ranges 1/2˝ Model Ranges
Number Number
PPMG-G0132N 30˝ Hg-0 PPMG-G0134N 30˝ Hg-0
PPMG-G0232N 0-15 psi PPMG-G0234N 0-15 psi
PPMG-G0332N 0-30 psi PPMG-G0334N 0-30 psi
PPMG-G0432N 0-60 psi PPMG-G0434N 0-60 psi
PPMG-G0532N 0-100 psi PPMG-G0534N 0-100 psi
PPMG-G0632N 0-160 psi PPMG-G0634N 0-160 psi
PPMG-G0732N 0-200 psi PPMG-G0734N 0-200 psi
PPMG-G0832N 0-300 psi PPMG-G0834N 0-300 psi
PPMG-G0932N 0-400 psi PPMG-G0934N 0-400 psi
PPMG-G1132N 0-600 psi PPMG-G1134N 0-600 psi
PPMG-G1232N 0-1000 psi PPMG-G1234N 0-1000 psi
PPMG-G1332N 0-1500 psi PPMG-G1334N 0-1500 psi
PPMG-G1432N 0-2000 psi PPMG-G1434N 0-2000 psi
PPMG-G1532N 0-3000 psi PPMG-G1534N 0-3000 psi
PPMG-G1732N 0-5000 psi PPMG-G1734N 0-5000 psi
PPMG-G2232N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi PPMG-G2234N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi
PPMG-G2532N 30˝ Hg-0-160 psi PPMG-G2534N 30˝ Hg-0-160 psi
PPMG-G2632N 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi PPMG-G2634N 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 104
p105 7/26/06 2:54 PM Page 1

Pressure
Series
763 Field-Fillable Process Gage
0.5% Accuracy, Internal Over and Under Load Protection

5-29/64 3-1/32
[150] [77]
29/32
[23]
(120°)

5-5/64
[129]

2-9/16
[65]

1-3/8 (3 Ø.24 HOLES ON Ø5.39 B.C.)

[35]

(1/4 OR 1/2 NPT) 1-3/8

[35]

The Series 763 Process Gages possess psi scales with 0.5% full SPECIFICATIONS
scale ANSI B40.1 Grade 2A accuracy. The 763 gages are designed Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
with a Phenolic safety-case. This safety-case has a solid front with Wetted Materials: 316 SS socket and Bourdon tube.
blow-out back. Internal overload and under-load protection is provided Housing: Phenolic.
to prevent damage to the gage from extreme over or under range sens- Lens: Polycarbonate.
ing. Access to the adjustable needle pointer is simple via the remov- Accuracy: 0.5% full scale ANSI B40.1 Grade 2A.
able bezel. Units are shipped dry, but can be easily liquid-filled in the Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
field without the need for a separate kit. Excellent chemical compati- Temperature Limits: -40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C).
bility is obtained with the 316 SS socket and Bourdon tube. Units can Size: 4.5˝ (115 mm).
withstand temperatures of -40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C). A wide offering Process Connection: 1/4˝ or 1/2˝ male NPT lower.
of ranges are available from full vacuum, compound to 20,000 psi. Weight: 31.36 oz (0.9 kg).

MODELS
Model Number (1/4˝ NPT) Ranges Model Number (1/2˝ NPT) Ranges
763-012N 30˝ Hg - 0 763-014N 30˝ Hg - 0
763-022N 0-15 psi 763-024N 0-15 psi
763-032N 0-30 psi 763-034N 0-30 psi
763-042N 0-60 psi 763-044N 0-60 psi
763-052N 0-100 psi 763-054N 0-100 psi
763-062N 0-160 psi 763-064N 0-160 psi
763-072N 0-200 psi 763-074N 0-200 psi
763-084N 0-300 psi
763-082N 0-300 psi
763-094N 0-400 psi
763-092N 0-400 psi
763-114N 0-600 psi
763-112N 0-600 psi 763-124N 0-1000 psi
763-122N 0-1000 psi 763-134N 0-1500 psi
763-132N 0-1500 psi 763-144N 0-2000 psi
763-142N 0-2000 psi 763-154N 0-3000 psi
763-152N 0-3000 psi 763-174N 0-5000 psi
763-172N 0-5000 psi 763-184N 0-6000 psi
763-182N 0-6000 psi 763-194N 0-10000 psi
763-192N 0-10000 psi 763-204N 0-15000 psi
763-212N 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi 763-294N 0-20000 psi
763-222N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi 763-214N 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi
763-232N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi 763-224N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi
763-242N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi 763-234N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi
763-252N 30˝ Hg-0-160 psi 763-244N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi
763-262N 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi 763-254N 30˝ Hg-0-160 psi
763-272N 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi 763-264N 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi
763-274N 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi

105 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p106 7/24/06 10:44 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
764 Glycerin-Filled Process Gage
0.5% Accuracy, Internal Over and Under Load Protection

5-29/64 3-1/32
[150] [77]
29/32
[23]
(120°)

5-5/64
[129]

2-9/16
[65]

1-3/8 (3 Ø.24 HOLES ON Ø5.39 B.C.)

[35]

(1/4 OR 1/2 NPT) 1-3/8

[35]

The Series 764 Process Gages possess psi scales with 0.5% full SPECIFICATIONS
scale ANSI B40.1 Grade 2A accuracy. The 764 gages are designed Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
with a Phenolic safety-case. This safety-case has a solid front with Wetted Materials: 316 SS socket and Bourdon tube.
blow-out back. Internal overload and under-load protection is provided Housing: Phenolic.
to prevent damage to the gage from extreme over or under range sens- Lens: Polycarbonate.
ing. Access to the adjustable needle pointer is simple via the remov- Fill: Glycerin.
able bezel. Units contain glycerin fill which allows the gages to be used Accuracy: 0.5% full scale ANSI B40.1 Grade 2A.
in high vibration applications. Excellent chemical compatibility is Pressure Limit: 110% of full scale.
obtained with the 316 SS socket and Bourdon tube. Units can with- Temperature Limits: 30 to 160°F (-1 to 71°C).
stand temperatures of 30 to 160°F (-1 to 71°C). A wide offering of Size: 4.5˝ (115 mm).
ranges are available from full vacuum, compound to 20,000 psi. Process Connection: 1/4˝ or 1/2˝ male NPT lower.
Weight: 2.6 oz (1.18 kg).

MODELS
Model Number (1/4˝ NPT) Ranges Model Number (1/2˝ NPT) Ranges
764-012N 30˝ Hg - 0 764-014N 30˝ Hg - 0
764-022N 0-15 psi 764-024N 0-15 psi
764-032N 0-30 psi 764-034N 0-30 psi
764-042N 0-60 psi 764-044N 0-60 psi
764-052N 0-100 psi 764-054N 0-100 psi
764-062N 0-160 psi 764-04N 0-160 psi
764-072N 0-200 psi 764-074N 0-200 psi
764-084N 0-300 psi
764-082N 0-300 psi
764-094N 0-400 psi
764-092N 0-400 psi
764-114N 0-600 psi
764-112N 0-600 psi 764-124N 0-1000 psi
764-122N 0-1000 psi 764-134N 0-1500 psi
764-132N 0-1500 psi 764-144N 0-2000 psi
764-142N 0-2000 psi 764-154N 0-3000 psi
764-152N 0-3000 psi 764-174N 0-5000 psi
764-172N 0-5000 psi 764-14N 0-6000 psi
764-182N 0-6000 psi 764-194N 0-10000 psi
764-192N 0-10000 psi 764-24N 0-15000 psi
764-212N 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi 764-294N 0-20000 psi
764-222N 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi 764-214N 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi
764-232N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi 764-224N 30˝ Hg 0-0 psi
764-242N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi 764-234N 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi
764-252N 30˝ Hg-0-160 psi 764-244N 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi
764-262N 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi 764-254N 30˝ Hg-0-160 psi
764-272N 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi 764-264N 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi
764-274N 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 106
p107 7/24/06 10:45 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
761 Process Pressure Gage
Liquid-Fillable, ±0.5% Full Scale Accuracy
5-25/32
(146.84) 2-7/8
(73.03)
5-5/16
(134.94)
5/8
BOLT CIRCLE
(15.88)

31/64
(12.30)

5-5/64
(128.98)

2-31/64
(63.10)
-1/16
(3.19) 1/4
(6.35)
3 PLCS
EQUALLY SPACED

7/8
(22.23)

1-37/64
1/2 NPT (40.08)

Series 761 Process Pressure Gages have a dual English/metric SPECIFICATIONS

scale with ±0.5% full scale accuracy. Series 761 gages may be easily liq- Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
uid filled in the field without the need for a separate kit. The gages are Wetted Materials: 316L SS Bourdon tube & connection.
designed with 316L SS tube and socket for excellent chemical compat- Housing: Fiberglass reinforced Polypropylene.
ibility and are offered in a wide selection of ranges, from full vacuum, Lens: Shatterproof safety glass.
compound to 20,000 psi. Accuracy: ±0.5% full scale, ASME B40.1, Grade 2A.
Pressure Limit: 130% of full scale for ranges 8000 psi or less.
115% of full scale for ranges greater than 8000 psi.
APPLICATIONS
Temperature Limit:
Chemical, Refinery, Fertilizer, Petrochemical, Pharmaceutical, Power,
Ambient: -4 to 150°F (-20 to 65°C);
Oil, Cement, Sugar, Food and Beverage, Pulp and Paper, and Waste
Water. Process: 300°F max (150°C max).
Size: 4-1/2˝ (115 mm).
Process Connection: 1/2˝ male NPT.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Weight: 1.4 lb (650 g).

MODELS
Model Model
Number Range Number Range

761-1 0-15 psi (0 to 100 kPa) 761-15 0-3000 psi (0 to 20 MPa)

761-2 0-30 psi (0 to 200 kPa) 761-16 0-4000 psi (0 to 28 MPa)
761-3 0-60 psi (0 to 400 kPa) 761-17 0-5000 psi (0 to 34 MPa)
761-4 0-100 psi (0 to 700 kPa) 761-18 0-6000 psi (0 to 40 MPa)
761-5 0-160 psi (0 to 1100 kPa) 761-19 0-10000 psi (0 to 70 MPa)
761-6 0-30˝ Hg Vac (0 to -100 kPa) 761-20 0-15000 psi (0 to 100 MPa)
761-7 0-200 psi (0 to 1400 kPa) 761-21 0-20000 psi (0 to 140 MPa)
761-8 0-300 psi (0 to 2000 kPa) 761-22 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi (-100 to 100 kPa)
761-9 0-400 psi (0 to 2800 kPa) 761-23 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-100 to 200 kPa)
761-10 0-500 psi (0 to 3400 kPa) 761-24 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-100 to 400 kPa)
761-11 0-600 psi (0 to 4000 kPa) 761-25 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-100 to 700 kPa)
761-12 0-1000 psi (0 to 7000 kPa) 761-26 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-100 to 100 kPa)
761-13 0-1500 psi (0 to 10 MPa) 761-27 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi (-100 to 1400 kPa)
761-14 0-2000 psi (0 to 14 MPa) 761-28 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi (-100 to 2000 kPa)

107 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p108 7/24/06 10:47 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
762 Process Pressure Gage
Glycerin Filled, ±1% Full Scale Accuracy

5-25/32
(146.84) 2-7/8
(73.03)
5-5/16
(134.94)
5/8
BOLT CIRCLE
(15.88)

31/64
(12.30)

5-5/64
(128.98)

2-31/64
(63.10)
-1/16
(3.19) 1/4
(6.35)
3 PLCS
EQUALLY SPACED

7/8
(22.23)

1-37/64
1/2 NPT (40.08)

Series 762 Process Pressure Gages have a dual English/metric SPECIFICATIONS

scale with ±1% full scale accuracy. Series 762 gages have a glycerin- Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
filled housing, providing superior performance in applications where Wetted Materials: 316L SS Bourdon tube & connection.
vibration, pulsation, mechanical shock, and pressure spikes are com- Housing: Fiberglass reinforced Polypropylene.
mon. The gages are designed with 316L SS tube and socket for excel- Lens: Shatterproof safety glass.
lent chemical compatibility and are offered in a wide selection of ranges Fill Solution: Glycerin.
from full vacuum, compound to 20,000 psi. Accuracy: ±1% full scale. ASME B40.1 Grade 1A.
Pressure Limit: 130% of full scale for ranges 8000 psi or less.
115% of full scale for ranges greater than 8000 psi.
Temperature Limit: Ambient: -4 to 150°F (-20 to 65°C);
APPLICATIONS Process: 150°F max (65°C max).
Chemical, Refinery, Fertilizer, Petrochemical, Pharmaceutical, Power, Size: 4-1/2˝ (115 mm).
Oil, Cement, Sugar, Food and Beverage, Pulp and Paper, and Waste Process Connection: 1/2˝ male NPT.
Water. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55).
Weight: 1.6 lb (750 g).

MODELS
Model Model
Number Range Number Range

762-1 0-15 psi (0 to 100 kPa) 762-15 0-3000 psi (0 to 20 MPa)

762-2 0-30 psi (0 to 200 kPa) 762-16 0-4000 psi (0 to 28 MPa)
762-3 0-60 psi (0 to 400 kPa) 762-17 0-5000 psi (0 to 34 MPa)
762-4 0-100 psi (0 to 700 kPa) 762-18 0-6000 psi (0 to 40 MPa)
762-5 0-160 psi (0 to 1100 kPa) 762-19 0-10000 psi (0 to 70 MPa)
762-6 0-30˝ Hg Vac (0 to -100 kPa) 762-20 0-15000 psi (0 to 100 MPa)
762-7 0-200 psi (0 to 1400 kPa) 762-21 0-20000 psi (0 to 140 MPa)
762-8 0-300 psi (0 to 2000 kPa) 762-22 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi (-100 to 100 kPa)
762-9 0-400 psi (0 to 2800 kPa) 762-23 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi (-100 to 200 kPa)
762-10 0-500 psi (0 to 3400 kPa) 762-24 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi (-100 to 400 kPa)
762-11 0-600 psi (0 to 4000 kPa) 762-25 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi (-100 to 700 kPa)
762-12 0-1000 psi (0 to 7000 kPa) 762-26 30˝ Hg-0-150 psi (-100 to 1000 kPa)
762-13 0-1500 psi (0 to 10 MPa) 762-27 30˝ Hg-0-200 psi (-100 to 1400 kPa)
762-14 0-2000 psi (0 to 14 MPa) 762-28 30˝ Hg-0-300 psi (-100 to 2000 kPa)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 108
p109 7/24/06 10:48 AM Page 1

Pressure
®

Spirahelic Direct Drive Pressure Gages

Tired of replacing your pressure gages? ®

That’s why you need Spirahelic Direct Drive Pressure Gages!

Designed to exceed industry standards...
here’s how:
• Acts Like a Liquid-Filled Gage without the Fill.
• Maintenance Free.
• No Recalibration Required.
• Only 1 Moving Part – No Gears or Linkages.
• Not Affected by Pulsations, Vibrations or Shock.
• Longer Service Life.
• Accuracy Built-In for Life!
Available in 4-1/2˝ Turret Mount and 4-1/2˝, 6˝, and 8-1/2˝ Panel
Mount Housings Use Spirahelic® Gages for:
• Systems with High Cycle Rates.
Not just another pretty gage, the Series 7000 Spirahelic® Direct • Processes with Problematic Pressure
Drive Pressure Gages were originally developed in response to mil- Surges and Spikes.
itary needs for unbelievable resistance to shock and vibration while • Environments with Continuous Vibration or Shock.
delivering premium accuracy.
The Dwyer® Spirahelic® gage features a triple coil spiral/helical Precision design ensures
wound Bourdon tube which provides the ultimate in operator safe- maintenance-free performance.
ty, while continuing to incorporate the advantages of a low inertia
movement without gears or linkages. This low inertia movement is
provided by the unique Bourdon tube design. The direct drive heli- Solid front case combined
with rear blowout plug
cal coil eliminates complex mechanical movements such as gears provides highest level of Design of small diameter tubing
that are common in conventional “C” Bourdon tube gages, which operator safety. wound in spiral/helical coil acts like
wear and cause inaccuracy or early failure. Expensive and leaky liq- a liquid filled gage without the fill.
uid filled gages are no longer necessary due to the triple wound
Bourdon design which withstands shock and vibration.
The direct drive movement of the lightweight, precision balanced Direct drive movement
pointer reduces friction and mass, improving responsiveness and -no cams, gears, or linkages.
Provides longer operating Center post bearing carrier
accuracy. So well in fact that on ASME Grade 2A or 3A models the life than standard "C" supports pointer shaft and coil.
accuracy is built-in for life! Center post bearing carrier ensures Bourdon gages.
precise bearing alignment for nearly friction free operation. Low
volume Bourdon tube reduces fluid volume and stored energy, Rear blowout hole
covered with label.
reducing potential for damage if tube ruptures from overpressure Precision balanced pointer This safety enhancement
or other causes. A large area filter keeps dirt out and restricts flow with reduced friction produces directs an overpressure
higher responsiveness surge or spike
from damaging the Bourdon tube. The small diameter tubing com- than standard gage. away from operators.
bined with a solid front case and rear blowout plug provides added
safety.
Convenience is enhanced by dual bottom and back process connec-
tions on panel mount models while turret housing gages possess a High impact plastic case Case and shock protection ribs help
and lens allows gages to prevent damage to Bourdon tube in
dual 1/4˝ female NPT and 1/2˝ male NPT bottom connection. the event of severe shock.
last through the most
Impact resistant plastic case is sized to conform to ASME B40.1, demanding applications.
replacing existing gages without changes in panel cutout or mount-
ing holes. Compound ranges are available in either panel or turret Filter plug protects Bourdon tube
style housings for applications where vacuum is present in the from particulate damage and reduces
process. pressure surges.
Patent #4,838,090

109 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p110 7/24/06 2:46 PM Page 1

Pressure
Series ®
7000B Spirahelic Direct Drive Pressure Gages
41⁄2” Turret Mount Gage, ASME Grades A & 2A

(3) Ø7/32 [5.57] MOUNTING

HOLES EQUALLY SPACED ON A
3-3/8 [85.73] BOLT CIRCLE

120°

DUAL PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/2 MALE NPT
1/4 FEMALE NPT
Ø5-7/8 3-7/64
[149.23] [78.98]

Series 7000B Spirahelic® Direct Drive Pressure Gages SPECIFICATIONS

with turret mount housings feature a triple coil spiral/helical Service: Compatible gases & liquids.
wound Bourdon tube to provide dependable service. Bourdon Wetted Materials: Grade A Accuracy: Beryllium Copper
tube design eliminates gears, springs, linkages and complex Bourdon tube, nickel plated brass connection block.
movements which can wear and cause inaccuracy or early fail- Grade 2A Accuracy: Inconel® X-750 Alloy Bourdon tube,
ure. Series 7000B gages come standard with a dual-size 1/2˝ type 316L SS connection block.
male NPT and 1/4˝ female NPT process connection.
Housing: Black polycarbonate case and clear acrylic
cover.
Accuracy: Grade A
(2%-1%-2%); Grade 2A (0.5% F.S.).
MODELS Pressure Limit: 150% of full scale. Gage will maintain its
specifications for overpressures up to 150% maximum
Grade A Accuracy (2%-1%-2%)
range. Normal operation should be between 25% and
Model Number Ranges (psig) 75% of full scale.
7100B-G060 60 Temperature Limits: -65 to 180°F (-53.9 to 82.2°C).
7100B-G100 100 Size: 4-1/2˝ (114.3 mm) dial face – Design conforms to
7100B-G200 200 ASME B40.1.
7100B-G300 300 Process Connections: Dual size 1/2˝ male NPT / 1/4˝
7100B-G600 600 female NPT, bottom connections.
7100B-GC010 1000 Weight: 18.2 oz (516 g).
7100B-GC020 2000
7100B-GC030 3000
Inconel® is a registered trademark of Huntington Alloys Corporation.
7100B-GC060 6000

ACCESSORY
A-170, 316 Stainless Steel Pigtail Siphon 1/4˝ male NPT
MODELS
Grade 2A Accuracy (1/2% of F.S.)
Model Number Ranges (psig)
7112B-G030 30
7112B-G060 60
7112B-G100 100
7112B-G160 160
7112B-G200 200 MODELS
7112B-G300 300 Compound Gages - Grade 2A Accuracy (1/2% of F.S.)
7112B-G600 600
Model Number Ranges (psig)
7112B-GC010 1000
7112B-GC020 2000 7112B-G030C 30˝ Hg-0-30
7112B-GC030 3000 7112B-G045C 30˝ Hg-0-45
7112B-GC060 6000 7112B-G060C 30˝ Hg-0-60
7112B-GC100 10000 7112B-G100C 30˝ Hg-0-100

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 110
p111 7/24/06 10:51 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series ®
7112B Spirahelic Pressure Gages with Diaphragm Seals
All 316L SS with ASME Grade 2A Gage
(3) 7/32 (5.56) MOUNTING
HOLES EQUALLY SPACED ON A
3-3/8 (85.73) BOLT CIRCLE

120°

5-9/16
(141.29)

1/4 NPT OR 1/2 NPT

PROCESS CONNECTION
1-3/4 HEX
(44.45 HEX)
3-7/64
5-7/8 (78.98)
(149.23)

The Spirahelic® Direct Drive Pressure Gage is now avail- SPECIFICATIONS

able with a 316L SS diaphragm. Due to the small volume of the GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
triple wound Bourdon tube inside the Spirahelic® gage, a much
Service: Compatible gases & liquids.
smaller diaphragm seal may be selected versus a standard “C”
Bourdon tube gage. This smaller seal is extremely compact, Wetted Materials: Beryllium Copper Bourdon tube with nickel
light weight, and durable which eliminates difficult installation plated brass connection block.
issues with bulky diaphragm seals. These seals are also offered
Housing: Black polycarbonate case and clear acrylic cover.
with an optional 1/4˝ NPT flush port which makes clean outs
quick and easy. Accuracy: Grade 2A (0.5% full scale).
Pressure Limit: 150% of full scale. Normal operation should be
MODELS between 25% and 75% of full scale.
Model Number Ranges (psig) Temperature Limits: -65 to 180°F (-53.9 to 82.2°C).
7112B-G060-S150 60 Size: 4-1/2˝ (114.3 mm) dial face – Design conforms to ASME
7112B-G100-S150 100 B40.1.
7112B-G200-S150 200
Process Connections: Dual size 1/2˝ male NPT x 1/4˝ female
7112B-G300-S150 300
7112B-G600-S150 600 NPT, bottom connections.
7112B-GC010-S150 1000 Weight: 18.2 oz (516 g).

1/4˝ NPT FLUSH PORT MODELS

Model Number Ranges (psig) DIAPHRAGM SEAL SPECIFICATIONS
7112B-G060-S250 60 Wetted Materials: 316L SS.
7112B-G100-S250 100 Temperature Limits: -65 to 180°F (-53.9 to 82.2°C).
7112B-G200-S250 200
7112B-G300-S250 300 Pressure Limits: 2500 psig (172.4 bar).
7112B-G600-S250 600 Fill Fluid: Silicone.
7112B-GC010-S250 1000 Process Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT.
Weight: 3 lb (1 oz).
Note: For other process connections and wetted materials contact
the factory.

111 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p112 7/24/06 2:28 PM Page 1

Pressure
Series ®
7000 Spirahelic Direct Drive Pressure Gages
Panel Mount, 41⁄2”, 6” & 81⁄2” Dials, ASME Grades 2A

Model 7112
4-1/2” Dial,
Grade 2A
Accuracy

(3) 9/32 (7.14) MOUNTING HOLES

EQUALLY SPACED ON 23/64 2-5/32
(9.13) (54.76) 6-1/2 (165.10)
A 7 (177.80) BOLT CIRCLE
PANEL CUTOUT

120° 1-13/32
(35.71)
Model 7212 6-5/16
(160.32)
6” Dial, 2-1/32
(51.59)

Grade 2A
Accuracy 1/4 FEMALE NPT
PRESSURE CONNECTION
7-19/32 1-9/32
TYP 2 PLACES
(192.88) (32.54)
1 (25.40) SQUARE
CONNECTION BLOCK

(3) Ø9/32 [7.14] 23/64 2-5/32

MOUNTING HOLES EQUALLY SPACED [9.13] [54.76]
ON A 9-5/8 [244.48] BOLT CIRCLE

120° 1-13/32
Model 7312 [35.71]
Ø8-29/32
8-1/2” Dial, 2-1/32 [226.22]
[51.59]
Grade 2A
Accuracy
1/4 FEMALE NPT PRESSURE
Ø10-3/16 1-9/32 CONNECTION TYP 2 PLACES
[258.76] [32.54] 1 [25.40] SQUARE
CONNECTION BLOCK

MODELS SPECIFICATIONS Temperature Limits: -65 to

1 1
4 /2” Dial, Grade 2A Accuracy ( /2% of F.S.) Service: Compatible gases & 180°F (-53.9 to 82.2°C).
liquids. Sizes: 4-1/2˝ dial face (114.3
Model No. Ranges Model No. Ranges
(psig) (psig) Wetted Materials: Inconel® mm), 6˝ dial face (152.4 mm),
X-750 Alloy Bourdon tube, type 8-1/2˝ dial face (215.9 mm),
7112-G030 30 7112-G600 600
7112-GC010 1000 316L SS connection Design conforms to ASME
7112-G060 60
7112-G100 100 7112-GC020 2000 block. B40.1.
7112-G200 200 7112-GC030 3000 Housing: Black polycarbonate Process Connections: Two
7112-G300 300 7112-GC060 6000 case and clear acrylic cover. 1/4˝ female NPT field selectable
7112-GC100 10000 Accuracy: Grade 2A (0.5% back or bottom connection.
F.S.). Weight: 4-1/2˝ dial face: 16.3
Pressure Limit: 150% of full oz (462.1 g); 6˝ dial face: 19.6
6” Dial, Grade 2A Accuracy (1/2% of F.S.) scale. Gage will maintain its oz. (555.6 g); 8-1/2˝ dial face:
Model No. Ranges Model No. Ranges specifications for overpressures 27.3 oz (773.9 g).
(psig) (psig) up to 150% maximum range. Standard Accessory: One
7212-G060 60 7212-GC010 1000 Normal operation should be 1/4˝ male NPT stainless steel
7212-G100 100 7212-GC020 2000 between 25% and 75% of full plug.
7212-G200 200 7212-GC030 3000 scale.
7212-G300 300 7212-GC060 6000
7212-G600 600
Accessories
A-341: Brass Adapter, 1/4˝ male NPT to G 1/2 A (per ISO
81/2” Dial, Grade 2A Accuracy (1/2% of F.S.)
228/1) parellel thread 2-1/2˝ length
Model No. Ranges Model No. Ranges
(psig) (psig) A-341-1: Brass Adapter, 1/2˝ male NPT x 1/4˝ female NPT
7312-G060 60 7312-GC010 1000 3-3/4˝ length
7312-G100 100 7312-GC020 2000
7312-G200 200 7312-GC030 3000 NOTE: Additional ranges and accuracy requirements
7312-G300 300 7312-GC060 6000 are available. Please consult the factory for details.
7312-G600 600
Inconel® is a registered trademark of Huntington Alloys Corporation.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 112
pg113 7/24/06 10:53 AM Page 1

Pressure Series ®
7000 Spirahelic Direct Drive Pressure Gages
Panel Mount, 41⁄2”, 6” & 81⁄2” Dials, ASME Grades 3A
(3) 7/32 (5.56) MOUNTING HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON 23/64 2-5/32
(9.13) (54.76) 4.940 (125.48)
A 5-3/8 (136.53) BOLT CIRCLE
PANEL CUTOUT

120° 1-13/32
Model 7114A (35.71)
4-41/64
4-1/2” Dial, 2-1/32 (117.87)
(51.59)
Grade 3A
Accuracy 1/4 FEMALE NPT
5-7/8 1-9/32 PRESSURE CONNECTION
(32.54) TYP 2 PLACES
(149.23)
1 (25.40) SQUARE
CONNECTION BLOCK

(3) Ø9/32 [7.14] MOUNTING 23/64 2-5/32

HOLES EQUALLY SPACED ON A [9.13] [54.76]
7 [177.80] BOLT CIRCLE 7 8 9 1 2 3
5 6 4
5
4 6
3 7
2 8

9
1 9

1 120°
Model 7214A
8 2
7 3
6 4
5 5

2
3
4 6
7
8
Ø6-5/16
6” Dial, 1-13/32 [160.34]
1 9

9 1

[35.71] 1-13/32
8 2
7 3
6 4

[35.71]
5 5

Grade 3A 4
3
2
1 9
8
7
6

Accuracy 1/4 FEMALE NPT PRESSURE

Ø7-19/32 1/-9/32 CONNECTION TYP 2 PLACES
[192.88] [32.54] 1 [25.40] SQUARE CONNECTION BLOCK

(3) Ø9/32 [7.14] MOUNTING

23/64 2-5/32
HOLES EQUALLY SPACED ON A
[9.13] [54/76]
9-5/8 [244.48] BOLT CIRCLE
120° 1-13/32
Model 7314A [35.71]
Ø8-29/32
8-1/2” Dial, 2-1/32 [226.22]
[51.59]
Grade 3A
Accuracy
1/4 FEMALE NPT PRESSURE
Ø10-3/16 1-9/32 CONNECTION TYP 2 PLACES
[258.76] [32.54] 1 [25.40]
CONNECTION BLOCK

MODELS SPECIFICATIONS Temperature Limits: -65 to

1 1 Service: Compatible gases & 180°F (-53.9 to 82.2°C).
4 /2” Dial, Grade3A Accuracy ( /4% of F.S.) with Mirrored Scale
liquids. Sizes: 4-1/2˝ dial face (114.3
Model No. Ranges Model No. Ranges
(psig) (psig) Wetted Materials: Inconel® mm), 6˝ dial face (152.4 mm),
X-750 Alloy Bourdon tube, type 8-1/2˝ dial face (215.9 mm),
7114A-G060 60 7114A-GC010 1000
316L SS connection Design conforms to ASME
7114A-G100 100 7114A-GC020 2000
7114A-G200 200 7114A-GC030 3000 block. B40.1.
7114A-G300 300 7114A-GC060 6000 Housing: Black polycarbonate Process Connections: Two
7114A-G600 600 case and clear acrylic cover. 1/4˝ female NPT field selectable
Accuracy: Grade 3A (0.25% back or bottom connection.
F.S.) with mirrored scale. Weight: 4-1/2˝ dial face: 16.3
Pressure Limit: 150% of full oz (462.1 g); 6˝ dial face: 19.6
6” Dial, Grade 3A Accuracy (1/4% of F.S.) with Mirrored Scale scale. Gage will maintain its oz. (555.6 g); 8-1/2˝ dial face:
Model No. Ranges Model No. Ranges specifications for overpressures 27.3 oz (773.9 g).
(psig) (psig) up to 150% maximum range. Standard Accessory: One
7214A-G060 60 7214A-GC010 1000 Normal operation should be 1/4˝ male NPT stainless steel
7214A-G100 100 7214A-GC020 2000 between 25% and 75% of full plug.
7214A-G200 200 7214A-GC030 3000 scale.
7214A-G300 300 7214A-GC060 6000
7214A-G600 600

81/2” Dial, Grade 3A Accuracy (1/4% of F.S.) with Mirrored Scale Accessories
Model No. Ranges Model No. Ranges A-341: Brass Adapter, 1/4˝ male NPT to G 1/2 A (per ISO
(psig) (psig) 228/1) parellel thread 2-1/2˝ length
7314A-G060 60 7314A-GC010 1000 A-341-1: Brass Adapter, 1/2˝ male NPT x 1/4˝ female NPT
7314A-G100 100 7314A-GC020 2000 3-3/4˝ length
7314A-G200 200 7314A-GC030 3000
7314A-G300 300 7314A-GC060 6000
7314A-G600 600
NOTE: Additional ranges and accuracy requirements
are available. Please consult the factory for details.
Inconel® is a registered trademark of Huntington Alloys Corporation.

113 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg114 7/24/06 10:55 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series ®
7000 Digital Spirahelic Pressure Gages
Panel Mount, 6” & 81⁄2” Dials with LCD Display, ASME Grade 3A
(3) Ø9/32 [7.14] Mounting 23/64 2-5/32
Holes Equally Spaced on a [9.13] [54.76]
7 [177.80] Bolt Circle

120° 1-13/32
Model 7214D [35.71]
Ø6-5/16
[160.34]
6” Grade 3A
2-1/32
Accuracy [51.59]

1/4 FEMALE NPT

PRESSURE CONNECTION
Ø7-19/32 1-9/32
[32.54] 1 [25.40] SQUARE TYP 2 PLACES
[192.88] CONNECTION BLOCK

(3) Ø9/32 [7.14] MOUNTING

23/64 2-5/32
HOLES EQUALLY SPACED ON A
[9.13] [54/76]
9-5/8 [244.48] BOLT CIRCLE
Model 7314D 120° 1-13/32
[35.71]
8-1/2˝ Ø8-29/32
Grade 3A 2-1/32 [226.22]
[51.59]
Accuracy
1/4 FEMALE NPT PRESSURE
Ø10-3/16 1-9/32 CONNECTION TYP 2 PLACES
[258.76] [32.54] 1 [25.40]
CONNECTION BLOCK

MODELS SPECIFICATIONS
6˝˝ Dial, Grade 3A Accuracy (1/4% of F.S.) with Mirrored Scale Service: Compatible gases & liquids.
Model Number Ranges (psig) Wetted Materials: Inconel® X-750 Alloy Bourdon tube, type
7214D-G100 100 316L SS connection block.
7214D-G200 200
Housing: Black polycarbonate case and clear acrylic cover.
7214D-G300 300
7214D-G600 600 Accuracy: Grade 3A (0.25% F.S.) with mirrored scale.
Pressure Limit: 150% of full scale. Gage will maintain its specifi-
cations for overpressures up to 150% maximum range. Normal
81/2˝ Dial, Grade 3A Accuracy (1/4% of F.S.) with Mirrored Scale
Model Number Ranges (psig) operation should be between 25% and 75% of full scale.

7314D-G100 100 Temperature Limits: -65 to 180°F (-53.9 to 82.2°C).

7314D-G200 200 Sizes: 6˝ dial face (152.4 mm), 8 -1/2˝ dial face (215.9 mm),
7314D-G300 300
design conforms to ASME B40.1.
7314D-G600 600
Process Connections: Two 1/4˝ female NPT field selectable
back or bottom connection.
Accessories Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC, 16-26 VAC.
A-341: Brass Adapter, 1/4˝ male NPT to G 1/2 A (per ISO Current Consumption: 38 mA max (DC); 76 mA max (AC).
228/1) parellel thread 2-1/2˝ length.
Weight: 6˝ dial size: 20.7 oz. (586.8 g); 8-1/2˝ dial size: 26.1 oz
A-341-1: Brass Adapter, 1/2˝ male NPT x 1/4˝ female NPT
3-3/4˝ length. (739.9 g).

Inconel® is a registered trademark of Huntington Alloys Corporation.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 114
p115 7/26/06 3:28 PM Page 1

Pressure
Series
61000 Pressure Gages
Exceptional Value in a 2 1/2˝ Gage
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
Wetted Materials: Phosphor bronze diaphragm, brass and poly-
carbonate.
Housing: Steel with black baked enamel finish.
Ø2-5/8 Dial/Pointer: Aluminum.
[66.68]
Accuracy: 61000, ASME Grade A — 1% middle half of scale, 2%
2-1/8 remainder: 61015 only — 1% middle half of scale, 3% remainder.
[53.98] Pressure Limit: 110% FS.
1/4 MALE Temperature Limits: -40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C).
NPT
PRESSURE Size: 2-1/2˝.
CONNECTION
Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT bottom-std. 1/4˝ male NPT
3/8 back 61000U.
[9.53]
1-15/32 Weight: 6.5 oz (184 g).
[37.31]
U-Clamp
MODELS
Model Range Range
Number in. w.c. kPa
Series 61000 gages feature an extra sensitive bronze di- 61015 0-15 0-4
61030 0-30 0-7.5
aphragm for ASME Grade A accuracy in ranges to 100 inches 61060 0-60 0-15
w.c. The gage measures pressure of air, natural gas and other 61100 0-100 0-25

compatible gases and liquids. Options — Add options as a suffix. U-U-clamp (panel mount)

Series
66000 Pressure Gage
2” (51 mm) Dual Scale Dial, Center Back Connection, ASME Grade B Accuracy
7/8
[22.23]

Ø2-19/64 Ø1-15/16
[58.34] [49.21]

1/4 MALE NPT

PRESSURE CONNECTION

13/64 15/16
[5.16] [23.81]

General purpose Series 66000 Pressure Gages are suit- SPECIFICATIONS

able for use with air, oil, water or compatible gases. The brass Service: Clean, noncorrosive liquids or gases.
internals are housed within a rugged ABS plastic case. The alu- Wetted Materials: Brass.
minum dial and pointer are protected by an impact resistant Housing: Black ABS plastic with clear polycarbonate window.
polycarbonate window. Accuracy is ±3-2-3% per ASME Grade B. Dial/Pointer: 2˝ (51 mm) aluminum dial with black enameled point-
er.
Brass back connection is 1/4˝ male NPT.
Accuracy: ±3-2-3% per ASME Grade B.
MODELS Pressure Limit: 1.5 x full scale.
Model Range Range Temperature Limits: 14 to 176°F (-10 to 80°C).
Numbers psig kPa Size: 2˝.
66015 0-15 0-100 Process Connections: 1/4˝ male NPT, center back.
66030 0-30 0-200 Weight: 1 lb (0.5 kg).
66060 0-60 0-400 APPLICATIONS
66120 0-120 0-800 Compressors, water pumps, industrial machinery and regulators.

115 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p116 7/24/06 10:57 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
67000 Digital Pressure Gages
Low Cost, ±2% Accuracy
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean, noncorrosive liquids or gases.

1-29/32
Wetted Materials: Brass.
[48.42]
Accuracy: ±2% of reading.
1-15/64
[31.34] Pressure Limits: 700 psi.
Temperature Limits: 30 to 120°F (-1 to 49°C).
Process Connection: 1/8˝ male NPT, brass.
2-1/8
2-33/64 [53.98] Display: 3-digit LCD, 2˝ H.
[71.83]
3-11/32 Power: One 9V alkaline battery (included).
[84.93]
Weight: 5.7 oz (0.16 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE.
MODELS
MODEL RANGE RESOLUTION
NUMBER
67100 0 to 29.9" Hg (vac) 0.1" Hg
The Series 67000 Digital Pressure Gages are an ideal alterna- 0 to 99.9 psig 0.1 psig
tive to mechanical gages. Gages feature low battery indication and 67500 0 to 500 psig 1 psig
manual zero adjustment for easy recalibration.

Series
VG Digital Vacuum Gage
Displays in 7 Different Engineering Units, Alpha Numeric Display
3.00
[76]

5.38
[137]

2.50 1.25
[64] [32]

Suitable for field or laboratory use, the Series VG SPECIFICATIONS Temperature Limits: 35 to
Digital Vacuum Gage delivers high precision at a low price. It Service: Clean, non- 125°F (1.7 to 51°C).
can accurately read vacuum from 12,000 microns down to 0 and corrosive liquids or gases. Process Connection:
has a wide temperature range. The large LCD can be displayed Wetted Materials: Brass. Standard 1/4˝ flare fitting.
in user selectable units, milliTorrs, Torr, psi, milliBars, microns, Housing: ABS plastic. Power Supply: Standard 9
Inches of Hg and Pascals. The gage features a cleanable sensor, Vacuum Range: 0-12,000 volt battery (not included).
auto shut off, a built-in hanger and operates on a standard 9 volt
microns, (0-1600 Pascals) Auto Shut-off: After 10
battery.
with vacuum minutes when vacuum is
increasing/decreasing reading above 12,000
indicating when above microns.
Model VG12 Digital Vacuum Gage
12,000 microns. Weight: 6.7 oz (0.19 kg).
Accuracy: ±10% of FS.
Pressure Limits: 500 psi
max. (34 bar).

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 116
p117 7/24/06 10:59 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
DPGA Digital Pressure Gage
Economic Gage For Air & Compatible Gases

3-11/16
(93.66)

1/4 NPT
Ø2-43/64 (67.87) 1-1/2 (38.10)

The Series DPGA is the only economic digital pressure gage with SPECIFICATIONS
selectable engineering units on the market. With its 1% accuracy and Service: Air and compatible gases.
digital push-button zero, the DPGA is the perfect choice for digitally Wetted Materials: 316L SS, Silicone sensor.
monitoring the pressures of air and compatible gases. Housing Materials: ABS plastic.
Accuracy: ±1.0% F.S. (Includes linearity, hysteresis, repeatability).
Pressure Limits: 2X pressure range. Vacuum range max. pres-
sure is 30 psig.
Temperature Limits: 30 to 120°F (-1 to 49°C).
Thermal Effect: 0.05% FS/°F.
Size: 2.62˝ O.D. x 1.52˝ deep.
Process Connections: 1/4˝ male NPT.
Display: 4-digit LCD (.425˝ H x .234˝ W digits).
Power Requirements: 9 volt alkaline battery. Battery included
but not connected.
Auto Shut-off: 20 minute auto shut-off.
Weight: 5.6 oz (160 g).
Agency Approvals: CE.

MODELS
Model Pressure Ranges Resolution
Number Range psi kg/cm2 bar in Hg ft wc kPa oz/in2 in wc mbar cm wc mm Hg psi
DPGA-00 30˝ Hg to 30 (vac) -14.70 -1.033 -1.013 -29.93 -33.94 -101.4 -235.2 -407.3 -1013 -1034 -761 0.01
DPGA-01 0 to 20˝ w.c. 0.722 .0508 .0498 1.471 1.667 4.980 11.55 20.00 49.80 50.8 37.37 0.001
DPGA-02 0 to 1 psi 1.000 .0703 .0689 2.036 2.307 6.89 16.00 27.68 68.9 70.3 51.7 0.001
DPGA-03 0 to 2 psi 2.000 .1406 .1379 4.072 4.614 13.79 32.00 55.4 137.9 140.6 103.4 0.001
DPGA-04 0 to 5 psi 5.000 .3515 .3447 10.18 11.53 34.47 80.0 138.4 344.7 351.5 258.6 0.002
DPGA-05 0 to 15 psi 15.00 1.055 1.034 30.54 34.60 103.4 240.0 415.2 1034 1055 776 0.01
DPGA-06 0 to 30 psi 30.00 2.109 2.068 61.1 69.2 206.8 480.0 830 2068 2109 1551 0.01
DPGA-07 0 to 50 psi 50.00 3.515 3.447 101.8 115.3 344.7 800 1384 3447 3515 2586 0.02
DPGA-08 0 to 100 psi 100.0 7.03 6.89 203.6 230.7 689 1600 2768 0.1
DPGA-09 0 to 200 psi 200.0 14.06 13.79 407.2 461.3 1379 3200 0.1
DPGA-10 0 to 300 psi 300.0 21.09 20.68 611 692 2068 4800 0.1
DPGA-11 0 to 500 psi 500.0 35.15 34.47 1018 1153 3447 0.2

117 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p118 7/24/06 11:00 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
DPGW Digital Pressure Gage
Economic Gage For Compatible Liquids & Gases

3-11/16
(93.66)

1/4 NPT
Ø2-43/64 (67.87) 1-1/2 (38.10)

The Series DPGW is the only economic digital pressure gage for liq- SPECIFICATIONS
uids with the ability to select engineering units on the market. With its Service: Compatible liquids and gases.
1% accuracy and digital push-button zero, the DPGW is the perfect Wetted Materials: Type 316L SS.
choice for digitally monitoring the pressures of compatible liquids and Housing Materials: ABS plastic.
gases. Accuracy: ±1.0% F.S. (Includes linearity, hysteresis, repeatability).
Pressure Limits: 2X pressure range. Vacuum range max pres-
sure is 30 psig.
Temperature Limits: 30 to 120°F (-1 to 49°C).
Thermal Effect: 0.05% FS/°F.
Size: 2.62˝ O.D. x 1.52˝ deep.
Process Connections: 1/4˝ male NPT.
Display: 4-digit LCD (.425˝H x .234˝W digits).
Power Requirements: 9 volt alkaline battery. Battery included
but not connected.
Auto Shut-off: 20 minute auto shut-off.
Weight: 5.6 oz (160 g).
Agency Approvals: CE.

MODELS
Model Pressure Ranges Resolution
Number Range psi kg/cm2 bar in Hg ft wc kPa oz/in2 in wc mbar cm wc mm Hg psi
DPGW-00 30˝ Hg to 0 (vac) -14.70 -1.033 -1.013 -29.93 -33.94 -101.4 -235.2 -407.3 -1013 -1034 -761 0.01
DPGW-04 0 to 5 psi 5.000 .3515 .3447 10.18 11.53 34.47 80.0 138.4 344.7 351.5 258.6 0.002
DPGW-05 0 to 15 psi 15.00 1.055 1.034 30.54 34.60 103.4 240.0 415.2 1034 1055 776 0.01
DPGW-06 0 to 30 psi 30.00 2.109 2.068 61.1 69.2 206.8 480.0 830 2068 2109 1551 0.01
DPGW-07 0 to 50 psi 50.00 3.515 3.447 101.8 115.3 344.7 800 1384 3447 3515 2586 0.02
DPGW-08 0 to 100 psi 100.0 7.03 6.89 203.6 230.7 689 1600 2768 0.1
DPGW-09 0 to 200 psi 200.0 14.06 13.79 407.2 461.3 1379 3200 0.1
DPGW-10 0 to 300 psi 300.0 21.09 20.68 611 692 2068 4800 0.1
DPGW-11 0 to 500 psi 500.0 35.15 34.47 1018 1153 3447 0.2

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 118
p119 8/2/06 2:29 PM Page 1

Pressure
Series
DPG-000 Digital Pressure Gage
± 0.5% Full Scale Accuracy, NEMA 4X Housing
3 1-5/8
[76.20] [40.39]

3-5/8
[91.39]

1/4 NPT

Replace your outdated analog gages with the new Series SPECIFICATIONS
DPG-000 Digital Pressure Gage. The Series DPG-000 pos- Service: Liquids and compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: Type 316L SS.
sesses a ±0.5% full scale accuracy sensor. The 4 digit digital dis- Housing Materials: Polycarbonate front & back cover, anodized alu-
play will reduce the potential for errors in readings by elimi- minum extruded housing with recessed grooves, Polycarbonate Overlay,
nating parallax error commonly produced with analog gages. Buna-N O-Rings, 316L SS Sensor Construction.
Accuracy: 0.50% F.S. +/- 1 least significant digit 32 to 130°F (0 to
55°C). (Includes linearity, hysteresis, repeatability) ±2% F.S. @ 10°F. ±5%
The Series DPG-000 is battery powered and has an auto-shut F.S. @ 0°F.
off to conserve battery life. Battery life, on average, will last Pressure Limit: 2x pressure range for models ≤1000 psi; 5000 psi for
3000 psi range; 7500 psi for 5000 psi range,1000 psi for 8000 psi range.
2000 hours. A 4 button key pad allows easy access to features Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet NEMA 4/4X (IP65).
without the need to work through complex menus or difficult Temperature Limits: 0 to 130°F (-18 to 55°C).
key combinations. These features include backlight, peak and Thermal Effect: Between 70 to 130°F is 0.016%/F.
Between 32 to 70°F is 0.026%/F. Between 10 to 32°F is 0.09%/F.
valley, auto zero and conversion of the pressure units. Between 0 to 10°F is 0.50%/F.
Size: 3.00˝ OD x 1.90 Deep (max).
Series DPG-000 Digital Pressure Gage Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT.
Weight: 8.84 oz (275 g).
ACCESSORIES Display: 4 digit (.425 H x .234 W digits).
Power Requirements: Two AAA batteries.
A-183, Protective Rubber Boot
Battery Life: 2000 hours typical; Low battery indicator.
A-184, Carrying Case Auto Shut-Off:
Gage: 60 minute auto shut off. Auto shut-off may
be disengaged.
Backlight: 2 minute auto shut-off.
Agency Approvals: CE.

Protective Carrying DPG with Protective Rubber

Case Boot
MODELS
Model Range Pressure Ranges
Number psi kg/cm2 bar in Hg ft wc kPa oz/in2 in wc mbar cm wc mm Hg
DPG-000 -14.70-0 -1.033 -1.013 -29.93 -33.94 -101.4 -235.2 -407.3 -1013 -1034 -760.7
DPG-002 15.00 1.055 1.034 30.54 34.61 103.4 240 415.2 1034 1055 775.7
DPG-003 30.00 2.109 2.069 61.08 69.21 206.9 480 830.4 2069 2109 1551
DPG-004 50.00 3.515 3.448 101.8 115.4 344.8 800 1384 3448 3515 2586
DPG-005 100.0 7.03 6.895 203.6 230.7 689.5 1600 2768 6895 7031 5172
DPG-006 200.0 14.06 13.79 407.2 461.4 1379 3200 5536
DPG-007 300.0 21.09 20.69 610.8 692.1 2069 4800 8304
DPG-008 500.0 35.15 34.48 1018 1154 3448 8000
DPG-009 1000 70.3 68.98 2036 2307 6895
DPG-010 3000 210.9 206.9 6108 6921
DPG-011 5000 351.5 344.8
DPG-015 8000 562.4 551.6

Compound Range available: DPG-020 Range: 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi

119 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p120 7/24/06 11:09 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
DPG-100 Digital Pressure Gage
± 0.25% Full Scale Accuracy, NEMA 4X Housing
3 1-5/8
[76.20] [40.39]

3-5/8
[91.39]

1/4 NPT

Replace your outdated analog gages with the new Series SPECIFICATIONS
DPG-100 Digital Pressure Gage. The Series DPG-100 has Service: Compatible liquids and combustible gases (for FM listing
see Agency Approvals below).
a high ±0.25% full scale accuracy. The 4 digit digital display will Wetted Materials: Type 316L SS.
reduce the potential for errors in readings by eliminating par- Housing Materials: Black Polycarbonate front & back cover,
allax error commonly produced with analog gages. anodized aluminum extruded housing with recessed grooves,
Polycarbonate overlay, Buna-N O-rings, 316L SS sensor con-
struction.
Series DPG-100 is battery powered and has an auto-shut off to Accuracy: 0.25% F.S. +/- 1 least significant digit @ 70°F (21°C)
conserve battery life. Battery life, on average, will last 2000 (Includes linearity, hysteresis, repeatability).
hours. A 4 button key pad allows easy access to features with- Pressure Limit: 2x pressure range for models ≤1000 psi; 5000
out the need to work through complex menus or difficult key psi for 3000 psi range; 7500 psi for 5000 psi range.
Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet NEMA 4/4X (IP66).
combinations. These features include backlight, peak and val- Temperature Limits: 0 to 130°F (-18 to 55°C).
ley, tare or auto zero and conversion of the pressure units. Thermal Effect: Between 70 to 130°F is 0.016%/F.
Between 32 to 70°F is 0.026%/F. Between 10 to 32°F is
Series DPG-100 Digital Pressure Gage 0.09%/F.
Size: 3.00˝ OD x 1.90 deep (max).
ACCESSORIES Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT.
A-183, Protective Rubber Boot Weight: 8.84 oz (275 g).
Display: 4 digit (.425 H x .234 W digits).
A-184, Carrying Case
Power Requirements: Two AAA batteries.
Battery Life: 2000 hours typical; Low battery indicator.
Auto Shut-Off:
Gage: 60 minute auto shut off. Auto shut-off may
be disengaged.
Backlight: 2 minute auto shut-off.
Agency Approvals: CE, FM approved to be intrinsically safe for
Protective Carrying DPG-100 with Protective
Class I, Division I, Groups A, B, C and D, for ranges 0-15 to
Case Rubber Boot 0-3000 psi.
MODELS
Model Range Pressure Ranges
Number psi kg/cm2 bar in Hg ft wc kPa oz/in2 in wc mbar cm wc mm Hg
DPG-100* -14.70-0 -1.033 -1.013 -29.93 -33.94 -101.4 -235.2 -407.3 -1013 -1034 -760.7
DPG-102 15.00 1.055 1.034 30.54 34.61 103.4 240 415.2 1034 1055 775.7
DPG-103 30.00 2.109 2.069 61.08 69.21 206.9 480 830.4 2069 2109 1551
DPG-104 50.00 3.515 3.448 101.8 115.4 344.8 800 1384 3448 3515 2586
DPG-105 100.0 7.03 6.895 203.6 230.7 689.5 1600 2768 6895 7031 5172
DPG-106 200.0 14.06 13.79 407.2 461.4 1379 3200 5536
DPG-107 300.0 21.09 20.69 610.8 692.1 2069 4800 8304
DPG-108 500.0 35.15 34.48 1018 1154 3448 8000
DPG-109 1000 70.3 68.98 2036 2307 6895
DPG-110 3000 210.9 206.9 6108 6921
DPG-111* 5000 351.5 344.8
Compound Ranges Available: DPG-120* Range: 30˝ Hg-0-15 psi; DPG-121* Range: 30˝ Hg-0-30 psi; DPG-122* Range: 30˝ Hg-0-45 psi;
DPG-123*: Range 30˝ Hg-0-60 psi; DPG-124*: 30˝ Hg-0-100 psi.
* Models DPG-100, DPG-111, DPG-120, DPG-121, DPG-122, DPG-123 and DPG-124 are not FM approved.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 120
p121 7/24/06 11:10 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
DCG Digital Calibration Gage
±0.05% Full Scale Accuracy, 316 SS Wetted Parts
1-11/16
[43]

Ø3-11/32
[Ø85]
4-11/32
[110]

5/8
[15.5]

The Series DCG Digital Calibration Gage features a remarkable SPECIFICATIONS

0.05% full scale accuracy that includes the effects of linearity, hystere- Service: Compatible, non-combustible liquids & gases.
sis, repeatability, and temperature across the entire compensated tem- Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
perature range. This gage was specifically designed to be a portable
Housing Materials: 300 Series SS.
test gage where its unmatched accuracy is required. This is a highly
Accuracy: 0.05% full scale including linearity, hysteresis, repeata-
durable gage that is housed in a rugged and compact 3 inch stainless
bility, and thermal effects across entire compensated temperature
steel case.
range.
This highly accurate test gage offers menu configurable and password Pressure Limit: 2 x full scale range.
protected features that include engineering unit conversion, seven Temperature Limits: 0 to 150°F (-18 to 66°C).
selectable languages, field calibration capabilities, as well as an Compensated Temperature Range: 0 to 150°F (-18 to 66°C).
adjustable bar graph and update/dampening rates. Every unit includes Size: 3.00˝ OD x 1.70˝ Deep.
a NIST calibration certificate. Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4 (IP65).
Display: 4-1/2 digit (0.66˝ high).
Power Requirements: Three AAA batteries.
Battery Life: >1000 hours.
Auto Shut-off: Gage: On/off, 2 min., 5 min., 15 min., 30 min.;
Backlight: On/off, 10 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 5 min.
Weight: 8 oz (.23 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE.
MODELS

Model Number Range Model Number Range

DCG-100 30˝ Hg-0 psig DCG-111 0-300 psig

DCG-101 30˝ Hg-0-15 psig DCG-112 0-500 psig
DCG-102 30˝ Hg-0-30 psig DCG-113 0-600 psig
DCG-103 0-5 psig DCG-114 0-800 psig
DCG-104 0-10 psig DCG-115 0-1000 psig
DCG-105 0-15 psig DCG-116 0-1500 psig
DCG-106 0-30 psig DCG-117 0-2000 psig
DCG-107 0-60 psig DCG-118 0-2500 psig
DCG-108 0-100 psig DCG-119 0-3000 psig
DCG-109 0-160 psig DCG-120 0-5000 psig
DCG-110 0-200 psig DCG-121 0-7000 psig

121 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p122 7/24/06 11:11 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
DSGT Digital Indicating Transmitter
±0.25% Full Scale Accuracy, Optional Switch Outputs
Ø5-3/8 B.C.
[Ø136.4] 3-5/16
Ø5-13/16 [83.8]
[Ø147.6]

Ø5-3/16
[Ø131.8]

2-19/32
(3) Ø1/4 [Ø6.3] 3-29/32 [66]
[99]

5/8˝ [15.8] ACROSS FLATS

1-13/32
1/2 OR 1/4 NPT 37° [35.6]
1-1/2
[38.1]

The Series DSGT Digital Indicating Transmitter is a versatile SPECIFICATIONS

multi-function process gage that features an excellent 0.25% full scale Gage Specifications
accuracy. This all-in-one digital gage package is designed to reduce Service: Compatible, non-combustible liquids & gases.
installation costs, instrument cost, and save space where an application Wetted Materials: 17-4 stainless steel sensor, 316 SS socket.
requires a gage, transmitter, and switches. The Series DSGT gage
Housing Materials: Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic case.
comes standard with a loop-powered 4-20 mA transmitter output and is
Accuracy: 0.25% full scale (Includes linearity, hysteresis, repeata-
offered with one or two optional SPDT switches.
bility).
The Series DSGT gage is housed in a durable fiberglass reinforced Pressure Limit: 2 x full scale range.
thermoplastic case that is designed to meet NEMA 4 (IP65) require- Process Connection: 1/2˝ male NPT.
ments. The gage features a menu-driven display for easy customiza- Display: 5 Digit (0.88˝ high).
tion. User selectable features include 12 engineering units of measure,
password protected calibration and disable functions, as well as an Transmitter Specifications
adjustable bar graph and update/dampening rates. Power Supply: 12-36 VDC (Loop Powered).
Output Signal: 4-20 mA.
Response Time: 100 ms.
Temperature Limits: 14 to 140ºF (-10 to 60ºC).
DSGT-XXX-C0S, Transmitter with No Switch Outputs Thermal Effects: 0.04% full scale/ºF.
DSGT-XXX-C1S, Transmitter with 1 SPDT Switch Output Electrical Connections: 3 ft flying leads.
DSGT-XXX-C2S, Transmitter with 2 SPDT Switch Outputs Loop Resistance: DC; 0-1090 ohms maximum.
Set Point Adjustments: Adjustable through menu selections.
Weight: 1.45 lb (.66 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE.

MODELS Switch Specifications (optional)

Model Model Switch Type: 1 SPDT (-C1S option); 2 SPDT (-C2S option).
Number* Range Number* Range Repeatability: 0.25% full scale.
DSGT-101-C0S 30˝ Hg-0-15 psig DSGT-111-C0S 0-800 psig Electrical Rating: 1A @ 24 VDC or 0.5A @ 125 VAC.
DSGT-102-C0S 30˝ Hg-0-30 psig DSGT-112-C0S 0-1000 psig
DSGT-103-C0S 30˝ Hg-0-60 psig DSGT-113-C0S 0-1500 psig Electrical Connections: 3 ft flying leads.
DSGT-104-C0S 0-30 psig DSGT-114-C0S 0-2000 psig Power Requirements: 12-36 VDC (Separate line power).
DSGT-105-C0S 0-60 psig DSGT-115-C0S 0-3000 psig Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66).
DSGT-106-C0S 0-100 psig DSGT-116-C0S 0-5000 psig
DSGT-107-C0S 0-160 psig DSGT-117-C0S 0-8000 psig
DSGT-108-C0S 0-200 psig DSGT-118-C0S 0-10,000 psig
DSGT-109-C0S 0-300 psig DSGT-119-C0S 0-15,000 psig
DSGT-110-C0S 0-600 psig DSGT-120-C0S 0-20,000 psig
*For optional switch outputs change -C0S suffix to -C1S for 1 SPDT switch, or -C2S for 2
SPDT switches.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 122
p123 7/24/06 11:12 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
7116 Spirahelic PressureIndicating
®

Transmitter
Dial Gage Indication, ±0.5% F.S. Accuracy, Panel Mount
(3) Ø7/32 [5.56] MOUNTING
HOLES EQUALLY SPACED ON 23/64
A 5-3/8 [136.53] BOLT CIRCLE [9.13] 2-5/32
[54.76]

120° TYP
Ø4-41/64
[117.8]

1-13/32
[35.71] 2-1/32
[51.59]

1/4 FEMALE NPT

PRESSURE CONNECTION
Ø5-7/8 [149.23] TYP 2 PLACES
1-9/32 1 [25.40] SQUARE
[32.54] CONNECTION BLOCK

The Series 7116 Spirahelic® Pressure Indicating Transmitter SPECIFICATIONS Weight: 17.1 oz (581 g).
GAGE SPECIFICATIONS TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS
provides both an ASME Grade 2A accuracy analog pressure gage for Service: Compatible gases & liq- Accuracy: 0.5% F.S.
uids. Stability: +1% F.S./yr.
precise local indication and a 2-wire, 4-20 mA output signal for remote Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F
Wetted Materials: Inconel® X-750
monitoring and control. Unique triple wound Bourdon tube movement Alloy Bourdon tube, type 316L SS (-6.67 to 48.9°C).
drives pointer directly with no gears, cams or linkages which can wear connection. Thermal Effect: ±0.025% F.S./°F
Housing: Black polycarbonate case (0.045% F.S./C°).
and fail early. Stainless steel pressure connection block allows a choice and clear acrylic cover. Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC
of horizontal or vertical piping. Electrical connections, zero and span Accuracy: Grade 2A (0.5% F.S.). (2-wire).
Pressure Limit: 150% of full scale. Output Signal: 4-20 mA DC.
controls are located on rear. Gage will maintain its specifications Zero & Span Adjustments:
for overpressures up to 150% maxi- Externally accessible potentiometers.
MODELS mum range. Normal operation Loop Resistance: DC, 0-1250
Model Range should be between 25% and 75% of ohms.
Model Range Current Consumption: DC, 38 mA
Number PSIG Number PSIG full scale.
Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F max.
7116-G060 0-60 7116-GC010 0-1000 (-6.67 to 48.9°C). Electrical Connections: Screw
7116-G100 0-100 7116-GC020 0-2000 Size: 4-1/2˝ dial face (114.3 mm), Terminals.
7116-G200 0-200 7116-GC030 0-3000 Design conforms to ASME B40.1. Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
7116-G300 0-300 Process Connections: Two 1/4˝ Agency Approvals: CE.
7116-G600 0-600 female NPT field selectable back or
bottom connection.

Series
7116B Spirahelic Pressure Indicating Transmitter
®

Large, Turret Mount, Accurate to ±0.5% of Full Scale, 4-20 mA Output

(3) ø[5.57] MOUNTING
HOLES EQUALLY SPACED ON A
3-3/8 [85.73] BOLT CIRCLE TERMINAL BLOCK
ZERO ADJUST
SPAN ADJUST

120°

DUAL PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/2 MALE NPT
ø5-7/8 3-7/64 1/4 FEMALE NPT
[149.23] [78.98]

The Series 7116B Spirahelic® Pressure Indicating Transmitter SPECIFICATIONS

simultaneously provides local indication on an easily read 4-1/2˝ (114 GAGE SPECIFICATIONS TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases & liquids. Accuracy: 0.5% F.S.
mm) analog scale while also converting that pressure into a standard Wetted Materials: Inconel® X-750 Stability: +1% F.S./yr.
two wire, 4-20 mA signal. The gage employs a unique triple helix Alloy Bourdon tube, type 316L SS Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F
Bourdon tube for precision measurement of compatible gases and liq- connection. (-6.67 to 48.9°C).
uids accurately within ±0.5% of full scale. The 316 SS connection fea- Housing: Black polycarbonate case Thermal Effect: ±0.025% F.S./°F
and clear acrylic cover. (0.045% F.S./°C).
tures a convenient 1/4˝ female NPT internal and 1/2˝ male NPT exter- Accuracy: Grade 2A (0.5% F.S.). Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC
nal pressure connection also includes an integral filter plug to keep dirt Pressure Limit: 150% of full scale. (2-wire).
out. Gage will maintain its specifications for Output Signal: 4-20 mA DC.
overpressures up to 150% maximum Zero & Span Adjustments: Externally
MODELS range. Normal operation should be accessible potentiometers.
between 25% and 75% of full scale. Loop Resistance: DC, 0-1250 ohms.
Model Number Range, PSIG Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F Current Consumption: DC, 38 mA
(-6.67 to 48.9°C). max.
7116B-G060 0 - 60 Size: 4-1/2˝ (114.3 mm) dial face, Electrical Connections: Screw
7116B-G100 0 - 100 Design conforms to ASME B40.1. Terminals
Process Connections: Dual size 1/2˝ Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
7116B-G200 0 - 200 male, 1/4˝ female NPT, bottom connec- Agency Approvals: CE.
7116B-G600 0 - 600 tion.
Weight: 29.5 oz (836.3 g).
Inconel® is a registered trademark of Huntington Alloys Corporation.

123 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p124 7/24/06 11:13 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
619 Pressure Indicating Transmitter
Turret Mount Case, 31/2˝ LCD, 0.5% F.S. Accuracy
5-7/8 DIA. 3-7/64 TERMINAL BLOCK
[149.2] [78.98] ZERO SPAN ADJUST
ADJUST

Ø.219 [5.563] MOUNTING HOLES 1/2 NPT EXTERNAL

EQUALLY SPACED ON A 3.375 [85.73] B.C. WITH 1/4 NPT INTERNAL

TERMINAL BLOCK
ZERO ADJUST SPAN ADJUST

TERMINAL 1 (+) TERMINAL 2 (–)

The Series 619 Pressure Indicating Transmitter simultaneously SPECIFICATIONS

provides local indication on a large, easily read 3-1/2 digit liquid crystal Service: Compatible, gases & liquids.
display while also converting that pressure into a standard 2-wire, 4-20 Wetted Materials: Type 316L SS.
mA signal for ranges from 0-15 to 0-500 psi. Positive pressure is mea- Accuracy: ±0.5% F.S. (includes linearity, hysteresis and repeata-
sured to the accuracy of ±0.5% of full scale. The electrical signal and con- bility).
ditioning is produced by a piezoresistive pressure cell for precision mea- Stability: +1% F.S./yr.
Temperature Limits: 0 to 140°F (-17.8 to 60°C).
surement of compatible gases and liquids. A 316L SS connection block
Compensated Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F
features convenient 1/4˝ female NPT and 1/2˝ male NPT pressure con-
(-6.67 to 48.9°C).
nection.
Pressure Limit: 2 x maximum range.
Thermal Effect: ±0.025% F.S./°F (0.045% F.S./°C).
Power Requirements: 10 to 35 VDC.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA.
Display: 1.0˝ (25.4 mm) liquid crystal. 3-1/2 digits.
Zero & Span Adjustments: Accessible potentiometers on back.
Loop Resistance: 1250 ohms DC max.
Current Consumption: 38 mA DC max.
Electrical Connections: Screw-type terminal block.
MODELS
Process Connection: Dual 1/4˝ female NPT 1/2˝ male NPT, bot-
Model Number Range Maximum Pressure
619-1 0-15 psig 30 psig tom connection.
619-2 0-30 psig 60 psig Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet NEMA 1.
619-3 0-50 psig 100 psig
619-4 0-100 psig 200 psig Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
619-5 0-500 psig 1000 psig Weight: 1 lb, 8 oz (680 g).
Ranges in Bar also available.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 124
p125 7/24/06 2:41 PM Page 1

Pressure
Series
626
&
Industrial Pressure Transmitter
628 Complete Offering of Ranges, Connections and Outputs
Liquid Tight Fitting 1-9/32
Cord Diameter Range (32.54)
.200 to .350 (5.08 to 8.89)

1-3/32
(27.76)
2-15/16 (74.61)
Optional 1/4 NPT
Female Fitting
3-1/2 (88.90)
1/4 NPT
Male Fitting
Conduit Housing (-CH)
1/4 NPT

3/4
(19.05)
5-1/2 (139.70)
Ø55/64 [21.83]
1/4 NPT

7/8 [22.23]
General Purpose Housing (-GH) HEX 2-27/64 [61.52]

3-13/64 [81.36]

The Series 626 Pressure Transmitters possess a highly precise SPECIFICATIONS

0.25% piezo-resistive sensor contained in a compact, rugged, NEMA 4X Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
stainless steel general purpose housing or cast aluminum conduit hous- Wetted Materials: Type 316 SS, 316L SS.
ing. Accuracy: 626: 0.25% full scale. 628: 1% full scale (includes linear-
The Series 628 Pressure Transmitters are ideal for OEMs with 1% ity, hysteresis, and repeatability).
full scale accuracy sensors. The transmitter is also available in the gen- Temperature Limit: 0 to 200°F (-18 to 93°C).
eral purpose stainless steel housing and the cast aluminum conduit Compensated Temperature Range: 0 to 175°F (-18 to 79°C).
housing. Thermal Effect: 626: ±0.02% FS/°F. 628: ±0.04% FS/°F (includes
zero and span).
The highly corrosive resistant 316L stainless steel wetted parts allow Pressure Limits: See table.
the Series 626 and 628 transmitters to measure the pressure in a mul- Power Requirements: 13 to 30 VDC.
titude of processes from hydraulic oils to chemicals. The Series 626 Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA. Optional 0-5, 1-5, 0-10, 1-6 or 2-10.
and 628 are available in ranges of vacuum, compound to 5000 psi with
Response Time: 50 msec.
a variety of optional outputs, process connections and electrical termi-
nations to allow you to select the right transmitter for your application. Loop Resistance: 0 - 1300 ohms maximum for current. For voltage
outputs, minimum load resistance: 2000 ohms.
Current Consumption: 38 mA (maximum).
APPLICATIONS Electrical Connections: Conduit Housing (-CH): terminal block,
• Compressors 1/2˝ female NPT conduit. General Purpose Housing (-GH): cable, DIN
• Pumping Systems connector or 4 pin M-12.
• Irrigation Equipment Process Connection: 1/4˝ male or female NPT and BSPT.
• Hydraulic Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66).
• Industrial Process Monitoring Mounting Orientation: Mount in any position.
Weight: 10 oz (283 g).
Agency Approvals: CE.

PRESSURE LIMITS
Range Pressure Maximum Over Range Pressure Maximum Over
Number Range (psig) Pressure (psig) Pressure (psig) Number Range (psig) Pressure (psig) Pressure (psig)
00 30˝ Hg-0 30 150 11 0-150 300 750
01 30-0-15 30 150 12 0-200 400 1000
02 30-0-30 60 300 13 0-300 600 1500
03 30-0-45 100 300 14 0-500 1000 2500
04 30-0-60 200 500 15 0-1000 2000 5000
05 30-0-100 200 500 16 0-1500 3000 5000
06 0-5 10 50 17 0-2000 4000 5000
07 0-15 30 150 18 0-3000 6000 7500
08 0-30 60 300 19 0-5000 7500 10000
09 0-50 100 300 26 0-8000 10000 12000
10 0-100 200 500

125 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p126 7/24/06 11:16 AM Page 1

Pressure
MODEL ORDERING CHART

Accuracy 626 0.25% Full Scale Accuracy

628 1.0% Full Scale Accuracy
-00 0-30˝ Hg Vacuum
-01 30-0-15 psi
-02 30-0-30 psi
-03 30-0-45 psi
-04 30-0-60 psi
Range
-05 30-0-100 psi
-06 0-5 psi
-07 0-15 psi
-08 0-30 psi
-09 0-50 psi
-10 0-100 psi
-11 0-150 psi
-12 0-200 psi
-13 0-300 psi
-14 0-500 psi
-15 0-1000 psi
-16 0-1500 psi
-17 0-2000 psi
-18 0-3000 psi
-19 0-5000 psi
-26 0-8000 psi
Housing -CH Conduit Housing
-GH General Purpose Housing
-P1 1/4˝ male NPT
-P2 1/4˝ female NPT
Process Connection
-P3 1/4˝ male BSPT
-P4 1/4˝ female BSPT
-P5 Refrigerant Valve Depressor
-E1 Cable Gland with 3’ of Prewired Cable
-E2 Cable Gland with 6’ of Prewired Cable
Electrical -E3 Cable Gland with 9’ of Prewired Cable
Connection
-E4 DIN Connector
Available with -GH Housing Only
-E5 1/2˝ female NPT Conduit
Available with -CH Housing Only
-E6 M-12 4 Pin Connector
-S1 4-20 mA
-S2 1-5 Volt
Signal Output -S3 2-10 Volt
-S4 0-5 Volt
-S5 0-10 Volt
-S6 1-6 Volt
-AT Aluminum Tag
Options -NIST NIST Traceable Certificate
-LED Bright Red LED display.
Available with -CH housing only

626 with LED Display (CH housing only) Optional -E4 DIN Connector
Note: LED option is not NEMA 4X rated. (GH housing only)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 126
p127 7/24/06 11:17 AM Page 1

Pressure Series
673 Pressure Transmitter
±0.25% Full Span Accuracy, 4-20 mA Signal, Ranges to 1000 psi
Ø1.58
[40]
Ø.500
Ø1.40
[13] [38]

3.61
2.35 [92]
[60] 2.00
[51]
1.68
[43]
.750 HEX .750 [19]
HEX
1/4 NPT(M)
Ø1.62 1/4" NPT Ø1.62
[41]
NEW CONDUIT VERSION [41]

The low cost Series 673 Pressure Transmitter is a fixed range SPECIFICATIONS Loop Resistance: 0 to 800Ω.
transmitter designed for harsh environments and suitable for high Service: Liquid, gas, or vapor. Stability: 0.5% FS/year.
shock and vibration applications. Constructed of stainless steel, the Wetted Materials: 17-4 PH SS. Shock: 200 g.
Series 673 provides a 4 to 20 mA output signal with 0.25% accuracy. Accuracy: ±0.25% FS (RSS), Vibration: 20 g.
Use the Series 673 in industrial OEM equipment, hydraulic systems, (includes non-linearity, hysteresis Electrical Connections: 2 ft (61
and non-repeatability). cm) multiconductor cable.
HVAC equipment, industrial engines and compressor control.
Temperature Limits: Conduit Connection: 1/4˝-18
-40 to 260°F (-40 to 125°C). (22.3 mm) knockout.
Pressure Limits: 2 x maximum Enclosure: Stainless Steel and
range. Valox.
MODELS Compensated Temperature Weight: 2.3 oz (65 g).
Model Number* Range Range: 4 to 212°F (-20 to 100°C). Agency Approvals: CE.
Model Number* Range
Thermal Errors: Zero: ±3.6%
673-1 673-1C 0-1 psi 673-7 673-7C 100 psi FS/100°F(100°C); Span: ±2.7%
673-2 673-2C 0-2 psi 673-8 673-8C 200 psi FS/100°F(100°C).
673-3 673-3C 0-5 psi 673-9 673-9C 500 psi Supply Voltage: 9-30 VDC.
673-4 673-4C 0-10 psi 673-10 673-10C 1000 psi Output: 4-20 mA, 2-wire.
673-5 673-5C 0-25 psi 673-13 673-13C -14.7-30 psig
673-6 673-6C 50 psi 673-14 673-14C -14.7-100 psig Zero & Span Adjustment: Fixed.
Response Time: <60 msec.
* The model numbers followed by a “C” represent the conduit version.

Series
638 Pressure Transmitter
Stability, Stainless Steel, Intrinsically Safe, Accuracy ±0.50%, 4-20 mA Signal

1/8˝1/4NPT
N.P.

Series 638 Pressure Transmitters employ a polysilicon sensor for su- SPECIFICATIONS Loop Resistance: Vmin = 10V + (.022A
perior longterm stability and repeatability with ±0.5% accuracy. They are Service: Liquid, gas or vapor. x RL).
FM approved intrinsically safe. Stainless steel NEMA 4X enclosure is ideal Wetted Materials: 17-4PH SS. Electrical Connection: 36˝ (92 cm), 24
for corrosive media in hazardous environments. Output is 4-20 mA with 10- Body: 300 SS. AWG.
30 VDC power supply. NIST traceability with calibration certification is Accuracy: ±0.50% F.S. Process Connection: 1/8˝ male NPT
standard. Repeatability: ±0.05% F.S. Weight: 2 oz (56 g) approximate without
Hysteresis: ±0.15% F.S. cable.
Stability: Less than 1% F.S./Yr. Agency Approvals: FM.
MODELS Temperature Limits:
Model Operating Operating Operating: -20 to 180°F (-29 to 82°C).
Model Operating Operating
Number* Range, PSI Range, Bar Number* Range, PSI Range, Bar Pressure Limits: 200% for ≤ 2000 psig, Suggested Specifications
150% for 3000-5000 psig, 1202 for 7500- Pressure transmitter shall be stainless
638-4-FM 0-100 0-7 638-10-FM 0-1000 0-69 10000 psig.
638-5-FM 0-150 0-10 638-11-FM 0-2000 0-138 Compensated Temperature Range:
steel diaphragm and polysilicon strain
638-6-FM 0-200 0-14 638-12-FM 0-3000 0-207 -20 to 160°F (-29 to 71°C) gage bridge with 5 ranges from 0 to
638-7-FM 0-300 0-21 638-13-FM 0-5000 0-345 Storage: -65 to 250°F (-54 to 121°C). 500 psig (0 to 35 bar) and accuracy of
638-8-FM 0-500 0-35 638-14-FM 0-7500 0-517 Thermal Effects: Zero: 0.028% F.S./°F ±0.50% F.S. Must have NIST traceable
638-9-FM 0-750 0-50 638-15-FM 0-10000 0-689 Span: 0.028% F.S./°F performance and a calibration test cer-
*For low-cost non-FM version omit FM in model number. Power Requirements: 10-30 VDC. tificate. Unit shall be FM approved in-
Output Signal: 4-20 mA DC, max. 30 trinsically safe for Class I, II, & III,
ACCESSORIES mA DC (2-wire).
MTL5041, Intrinsically Safe Galvanic Isolator Division 1, Group A, B, C, D, F & G for
Zero and Span Adjust: ±2.8% F.S. each.
Response Time: Less than 10 ms.
Hazardous Locations. Transmitter
MTL7706, Intrinsically Safe Zener Barrier
shall be Dwyer Model No. 638____.

127 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p128 7/24/06 11:18 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
642 Pressure Transmitter
±0.1% Accuracy, SS Wetted Parts, Economical
3-3/8
[85.73] WIRE JACKET O.D.
3-47/64 Ø.157 TO Ø.295
[94.85] 26-20 AWG
2-39/64
[66.28]

1-9/64
[28.97]

3-13/32
3/8 NPT [86.51] 1-1/2 DIA.
W/ 1/8 NPT INTERNAL [38.10]

The Series 642 Pressure Transmitter uses high end ASIC technology SPECIFICATIONS Zero & Span Adjustments: Accessible
Service: Compatible, gases & liquids. potentiometers adjustable to 0.05% of full
to compensate for both linearity and thermal errors, providing an output span.
Wetted Materials: Types 316, 316L SS.
with an accuracy of 0.1% of F.S. The 642 is therefore well suited for appli- Accuracy: ±0.1% F.S. Loop Resistance: 1250 ohms DC max.
cations where precision measurement and control is an absolute must. Stability: +1% F.S./yr. Current Consumption: 38 mA DC max.
Temperature Limits: 0 to 150°F Electrical Connections: 3-position ter-
Units are constructed of 316 and 316L SS wetted parts for superior com- (-17.8 to 65°C). minal block.
patibility. Zero and span are independently adjustable. Transmitters fea- Compensated Temperature Limits: 20 Process Connection: Dual-size 3/8˝
(9.53 mm) male NPT, 1/8˝ (3.18 mm)
ture simple two wire operation plus reverse polarity protection. Liquid fill to 120°F (-6.67 to 48.9°C).
female NPT.
Pressure Limit: 2x pressure range.
provides shock and vibration resistant protection. Thermal Effect: ±0.025% F.S./°F
Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet
NEMA 4.
(0.045% F.S./°C).
Mounting Orientation: Not position
Power Requirements: 10 to 35 VDC sensitive.
MODELS (2-wire). Weight: 11 oz (312 g).
MODEL NUMBER PRESSURE RANGE Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA.
Agency Approvals: CE.
642-1 0 - 15 psig (0 - 1.03 bar)
642-2 0 - 30 psig (0 - 2.07 bar) Applications include aerospace industries, factory automation,
642-3 0 - 50 psig (0 - 3.45 bar) equipment monitoring and industrial research. The Series 642
642-4 0 - 100 psig (0 - 6.90 bar)
Pressure Transmitter is ideal for use in harsh environments.

Series
682 Industrial Pressure Transmitter
±0.13% FS Accuracy, External Adjustments, 4-20 mA Output
2.130
(5.4)

2.000
(5.1)

2.000
(5.1) .7500
(1.9)

The Series 682 Industrial Pressure Transmitter is designed to with- SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements: 9-30
stand environmental effects such as shock, vibration, temperature, and Service: Compatible liquids and VDC.
EMI/RFI. The electronics and capacitive sensor are packaged in a welded
stainless steel housing and meets NEMA 4 (IP65) protection ratings. The gases. Output: 4-20 mA, 2-wire.
transmitter features external zero and span adjustments and reverse Wetted Parts: 17-4 PH SS. Zero and Span Adjustment:
polarity protection. The Series 682 delivers high performance in tough Accuracy: ±.13% FS (includes ± 0.5 mA, non-interactive.
applications such as off road equipment, hydraulic systems, compressor non-linearity, hysteresis and non- Response Time: 5 ms.
control, industrial engines, or industrial refrigeration. repeatability). Loop Resistance: 800 ohms.
MODELS Temperature Limits: Electrical Connections: 2 ft
Model Number* Range Overpressure -40 to 260°F (-40 to 125°C) 10 to (51 cm) multiconductor cable.
90% RH, non-condensing. Process Connection:
682-0 0 to 25 psi 100 psi
682-1 0 to 50 psi 150 psi Pressure Limit: See table. 1/4˝ male NPT.
682-2 0 to 100 psi 300 psi Compensated Temp. Range: Weight: 8 oz (227 g).
682-3 0 to 250 psi 500 psi -4 to 176°F (-20 to 80°C). Agency Approvals: CE.
682-4 0 to 500 psi 1000 psi Thermal Effect: Zero shift: 1.0% Shock: 200 g operating.
682-5 0 to 1000 psi 2000 psi FS/100°F (% FS/50°C); span Vibration: 20 g 50-2000 Hz.
682-6 0 to 3000 psi 4500 psi shift: ±1.5% FS/100°F (%
682-7 0 to 5000 psi 7500 psi
FS/50°C).
682-8 0 to 10,000 psi 12,500 psi
* Units calibrated in bar also available. Consult factory.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 128
p129 7/24/06 11:19 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
634ES Adjustable Range Pressure Transmitter
0.5% Full Span Accuracy, Ranges to 5000 psi
(3) #10-32 x 1/4 [6.35] DP HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON A 2-1/2 [63.50] B.C.
2-1/2 [63.50]
TYP
1-11/16
[42.86]
1-9/16
[39.69]

5-5/16
3/4 NPT
[134.94]
03-3/8 [85.73]

1/2NPT

1/16 [1.59]
1/4NPT 25/32 [19.84]
2-7/8 [73.03]

Series 634ES Transmitters sense a single pressure for air, compatible gas or
liquid and provide 4-20 mA output signal. Positive pressure can be measured SPECIFICATIONS Zero & Span Adjustments:
Service: Compatible, gases & liquids. Protected potentiometers located in
within an accuracy of ±0.5% of span. The Series 634ES uses an isolated piezore- auxiliary housing.
sistive pressure sensor to produce a resistance change across a wheatstone Wetted Materials: Types 316, 316L
SS. Loop Resistance: 1250 ohms DC
bridge. Convenient 2-wire operation simplifies installation. Zero and span ad- max.
justments are fully protected inside a rugged die cast aluminum housing with Accuracy: ±0.5% F.S.
Stability: +1% F.S./yr. Current Consumption: 38 mA DC
durable gray polyurethane finish. Enclosure is designed to meet NEMA 4X re- max.
quirements. Temperature Limits: 0 to 140°F
(-17.8 to 60°C). Electrical Connections: Terminal
MODELS Compensated Temperature Limits: block.
20 to 120°F (-6.67 to 48.9°C). Process Connection: 1/4˝ (6.35 mm)
Model Number Range in psi (bar) Min. Range in psi (bar) Max. Range in psi (bar) Pressure Limit: 1.5x maximum female NPT x 1/2˝ (12.7 mm) male
634ES-0 15 (1.035) 7.5 (0.517) 40 (2.76) pressure range. NPT.
634ES-1 30 (2.07) 20 (1.38) 40 (2.76) Thermal Effect: ±0.025% F.S./°F Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet
634ES-2 50 (3.45) 40 (2.76) 60 (4.14) (0.045% F.S./°C). NEMA 4X (IP66).
634ES-3 100 (6.9) 60 (4.14) 120 (8.3) Power Requirements: 10 to 35 VDC Mounting Orientation: Not position
634ES-4 200 (13.8) 100 (6.9) 250 (17.2) (2-wire). sensitive.
634ES-5 300 (20.7) 250 (17.2) 350 (24.1) Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA. Weight: 1 lb, 10.6 oz (754 g).
634ES-6 500 (34.5) 350 (24.1) 600 (41.4) Agency Approvals: CE.
634ES-7 1000 (69) 600 (41.4) 1250 (86)
634ES-8 2000 (138) 1250 (86) 2500 (172)
634ES-9 4000 (276) 2500 (172) 5000 (414)

Series
679 Weatherproof Pressure Transmitter
±0.25% FS Accuracy, Compatible with Corrosive Materials, 4-20 mA Output
0.38
[10]

1/2 NPT
2.55
[65]
4.00
[102]
1.47
[37]

1/4 NPT
male 4.02 Ø 2.50
[102] [64]

The Series 679 Pressure Transmitter is compatible with a SPECIFICATIONS Temperature Limits: -40 to
wide range of gases and liquids, and is specially designed for Service: Corrosive liquids and 260°F (-40 to 125°C) 10 to 90%
weatherproof service (NEMA 4/IP56). The Model 679 can measure gases. RH, non-condensing.
Accuracy: ±.25% FS (includes Compensated Temperature
pressures with an accuracy of ±.25%. This model provides a 4-20
non-linearity, hysteresis and non- Range: -4 to 176°F (-20 to
mA output and is field adjustable. 80°C).
repeatability).
MODELS Pressure Connection: 1/4˝
Pressure Limits: See table.
Model Number Range Overpressure Output: 4-20 mA, 2-wire. male NPT.
679-0 0 to 25 psi 100 psi Supply Voltage: 9-30 VDC. Wetted Parts: Corrosive resis-
679-1 0 to 50 psi 150 psi Loop Resistance: 800 ohms. tant 17-4 PH SS.
679-2 0 to 100 psi 300 psi Zero and Span Adjustment: Enclosure: Aluminum.
679-3 0 to 250 psi 500 psi ±15%, non-interactive. Electrical Connections: Two
679-4 0 to 500 psi 1000 psi 1/2˝ conduit ports.
679-5 0 to 1000 psi 2000 psi Stability: Less than .5% FS/
year. Weight: 13.4 oz (380 g).
679-6 0 to 3000 psi 4500 psi
679-7 0 to 5000 psi 7500 psi Agency Approvals: CE.
679-8 0 to 10,000 psi 12,000 psi

129 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p130 7/24/06 11:19 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
636 Fixed Range Pressure Transmitter ®

Stainless Steel, Explosion-proof, Accuracy ±0.30%, 4-20 mA or 1-5 VDC Signal

SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements: 12 to 30 VDC

The Series 636 Pressure Transmitter is a low cost, fixed range, stainless (636), 8 to 14 VDC (636LP), reverse polar-
steel transmitter with ±0.30% accuracy. It is designed to continuously measure Service: Liquid, gas or vapor. ity protection.
pressure for years in even the toughest environmental and media conditions. Wetted Materials: 316 L SS. Output Signal: 4-20 mA DC, limited to
Select from 4 ranges to 0-300 psig (0-20 bar) with choice of 4-20 mA output Fill Fluid: DC 200 Silicone (Standard). 30 mA DC (636), 1-5 VDC (636LP).
(model 636) or 1-5 VDC output (model 636LP). Transmitters are explosion- Accuracy: ±0.30% of calibrated span. Zero & Span Adjustments: Null: 4.0mA
proof, (FM approved) and meet NACE standards for offshore applications. Stability: ±0.5% of upper range limit for ±2% span (636),1VDC ±1% span (636LP);
six months. Span: 16.0 mA ±1% span (636), 4 VDC
Temperature Limits: Electronics (Ambi- ±1% span (636LP).
ent): -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C); Loop Resistance: 900 ohms max
Process interface: -40 to 212°F (-40 to @ 30 V.
MODELS 100°C). Electrical Connection: 3/4˝ female NPT
Model Number Pressure Limits: 300% upper range 24˝ (61 cm), 22 AWG.
Operating Operating limit.
4-20 mA OUT 1-5 VDC OUT Range, PSI Range, Bar Process Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT.
Compensated Temperature Range: Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4 (IP65).
636-0 636-0-LP 0-15 0-1 -20 to 180°F (-29 to 82°C). Weight: 0.83 Ib (374 g).
636-1 636-1-LP 0-30 0-2 Thermal Effect: (includes zero and span). Agency Approvals: FM, CSA.
636-2 636-2-LP 0-100 0-7 Between -20 and 180°F (-29 and 82°C).
636-3 636-3-LP 0-20 FM and CSA approved explosion-proof
0-300 ±2.0% per 50°F (28°C). for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, & D,
Class II Groups E, F, & G Class III.

Series
681 Sanitary Pressure Transmitter
No Liquid Fill Diaphragm, Sanitary Clamp Fitting
1/2 NPT 1.743
(44)

2.272
(58)

2.516
(64)

The Series 681 Sanitary Pressure Transmitter is designed to SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements: 9-30 VDC.
meet sanitary standards for applications in food, dairy, beverage and Output Signal: 4-20 mA, 2-wire.
pharmaceutical processing, liquid level control, and sanitary pipelines. Service: Compatible liquids and
The unit is fully sealed to withstand high pressure washdown in Clean- gases. Zero and Span Adjustment:
in-Place (CIP) and Sterilize-in-Place (SIP) installations. The Series 681 Wetted Parts: 316L SS. ± 0.5 mA, non-interactive.
is designed with a unique, no liquid fill diaphragm and a sanitary Accuracy: ±.20% FS (includes Response Time: ≤10 ms.
clamp pressure fitting for easy installation with negligible clamping non-linearity, hysteresis and non- Loop Resistance: 800 ohms.
effect. A conduit fitting, shielded cable with vent tube and sealed repeatability). Electrical Connections: 1/2˝ con-
screws for zero and span adjustment combine to make the Series 681 duit fitting and strain relief with 15 ft
completely watertight. Temperature Limits:
-40 to 260 °F (-40 to 125°C) 10 to (4.5 m) cable.
MODELS 90% RH, non-condensing. Process Connection: 2˝ or 1-1/2˝
Sanitary Clamp Pressure Limits: See table. sanitary clamp fitting male NPT.
Model Number Range Overpressure Connection Compensated Temperature Clamping Effect: Zero and span
Range: shift: ±0.15% FS for ranges up to
681-02 0 to 1 psi 50 psi 2˝ 30 psi; ±0.25% FS for ranges >30
681-12 0 to 2 psi 100 psi 2˝ 20 to 180°F (-7 to 80°C).
Thermal Effect: Zero and span psi.
681-22 0 to 5 psi 150 psi 2˝ Weight: 8 oz (227 g).
681-32 0 to 10 psi 150 psi 2˝ shift: ±2.0% FS/100°F (%
FS/50°C). Agency Approvals: CE.
681-42 0 to 15 psi 150 psi 2˝
681-52 0 to 30 psi 150 psi 2˝
681-62 0 to 60 psi 180 psi 2˝
681-72 0 to 100 psi 200 psi 2˝
681-101 0 to 300 psi 1000 psi 11/2˝

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 130
p131 7/24/06 11:20 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
637 Adjustable Range Pressure Transmitter
Stainless Steel, Intrinsically Safe, Explosion-proof, Accuracy ±0.25%, 4-20 mA Signal

Series 637 Pressure Transmitters are durable and compact with SPECIFICATIONS Loop Resistance: 600 ohms @ 24 VDC;
all welded 316 SS construction and exceptional ±0.25% accuracy. Four Service: Liquid, gas or vapor.
max. ohms = (supply voltage -12) x 50.
ranges are offered up to 0-300 psig (0-20 bar). Zero and span are ad- Wetted Materials: 316 L SS.
Electrical Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT.
justable to ±10% each; range turndown is a full 5:1. Integral junction Process Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT.
Body: 316 SS.
Response Time: Time constant of 20 ms.
box simplifies field wiring. Output is 4-20 mA with 12-40 VDC power Accuracy: ±0.25% of calibrated span.
Weight: 1.67 lb (752 g).
supply. Units are explosion-proof, intrinsically safe with FM approval Stability: ±0.5% of upper range limit for
Agency Approvals: CE, FM.
and they meet NACE standards for offshore applications. six months.
Temperature Limits: Process Interface Suggested Specifications
-40 to 212°F (-40 to100°C). Pressure transmitter body shall be 316
Pressure Limits: 300% full scale.
MODELS Compensated Temperature: -20 to
SS with 4 adjustable ranges 0 to 300
Model Minimum Stock Minimum 180°F (-29 to 82°C). psig (0 to 20 bar) with 5:1 turndown
Stock
Number Range, PSI Range, PSI Range, Bar Range, Bar Thermal Effect: (includes zero and span) and accuracy of ±0.25%. Unit shall be
±.02% upper range /°F (30 to 130°F) FM approved intrinsically safe for Class
637-0 0-15 0-3 0-1 0-0.2
±.032% upper range /°F (-20 to 180°F). I, II, & III, Division 1, Group B,C, D, E,
637-1 0-30 0-6 0-2 0-0.4
Power Requirements: 12 to 40 VDC F & G for Hazardous Locations, and ex-
637-2 0-100 0-20 0-7 0-1.4 with rev. polarity protection. plosion-proof for Class I, Div. 1, Groups
637-3 0-300 0-60 0-20 0-4 Output Signal: 4-20 mA DC, max. 30 B, C, D; Dust-ignition proof for Class II,
mA DC (2-wire). Div. 1, Groups E & G and suitable for
ACCESSORIES Zero and Span Adjustment: ±10% Class III, Div. 1; Hazardous Locations,
each.
MTL5041, Intrinsically Safe Galvanic Isolator NEMA 4 Enclosure. Unit shall be
MTL7706, Intrinsically Safe Zener Barrier Dwyer® TransmitterModel No.
637____.

Series
637S Sanitary Pressure Transmitter
Meets NACE Standards, Accuracy ±0.25%

Low cost, durable sanitary pressure transmitter is designed for SPECIFICATIONS Loop Resistance: 600 ohms @ 24
use in food, dairy, beverage and pharmaceutical industries. This unit fea- VDC; max. ohms = (supply voltage
Service: Liquid, gas or vapor. -12) x 50.
tures superior ±0.25% accuracy and up to 5:1 turndown. Calibration is Wetted Materials: 316L SS. Electrical Connection: 1/2˝ female
quick and easy with field accessible zero and span adjustments. All stain- Body: 316 SS. NPT.
less steel construction resists the corrosive effects of caustic washes used Accuracy: ±0.25% of calibrated span. Process Connection: 1-1/2˝ sanitary
Temperature Limits: Process interface
in most food processing cleaning procedures. 1-1/2" sanitary clamp -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C).
clamp.
process connection is suitable for Clean-in-Place (CIP) applications, elimi- Weight: 1.67 Ib (752 g).
Pressure Limits: 300% full scale. Agency Approvals: CE.
nating the need for expensive bypass piping, valving or removal require- Compensated Temperature Range:
ments for steam cleaning. -20 to 180°F (-25 to 80°C).
Thermal Effect: (Includes zero and Suggested Specifications
span) ±1% of upper range limit per 50°F Sanitary Pressure transmitter shall be 316
MODELS (30 to 130°F); ±1.6% of upper range
Model Stock Range, Min. Range SS construction with 5:1 turndown and
limit per 50°F (10 to 180°F).
Number PSI (Bar) PSI (Bar) ±0.25% F.S. accuracy. Unit shall meet
Power Requirements: 12-40 VDC with
reverse polarity protection. NACE standards. Transmitter shall have 1-
637S-0 0-15 (0-1) 0-6 (0-0.4)
Output Signal: 4-20 mA DC, max. 30 1/2" sanitary clamp process connection and
637S-1 0-30 (0-2) 0-15 (0-1)
mA DC (2-wire). be suitable for Clean-in-Place (CIP) applica-
637S-2 0-100 (0-7) 0-20 (0-1.4)
Zero and Span Adjustments: ±10% tions. Unit shall have field accessible zero
637S-3 0-300 (0-20) 0-60 (0-4) each. and span adjustments. Unit shall be Dwyer®
Response Time: Time constant, 20 Transmitter Model No. 637S____.
ms.

131 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p132 7/24/06 11:21 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
636D Fixed Range Differential Pressure Transmitter
Explosion-proof, 0.5% Accuracy ®

3/4-14 FEMALE NPT

#22 AWG SHIELDED CABLE
CONDUIT THREAD
24 INCHES LONG Ø1-3/4
[44.45]
1-1/4 HEX
1-4/33
[28.45]
SS TAG
1-4/33 1˝ HEX TYPICAL
[105.41]

1-8/22
1/2-14 FEMALE NPT [33.2]
PROCESS CONNECTION
4-1/8 1-3/4
TYPICAL
[104.75] [44.45]

The Series 636D Differential Pressure Transmitter can SPECIFICATIONS

be used for measuring pressures of liquids, gases, & vapors. All Service: Compatible gases, liquids, or vapors.
Wetted Materials: Types 316L SS.
available ranges have an excellent 0.5% F.S. accuracy with a 4- Accuracy: BFSL: ±0.5% F.S. (includes linearity, hysteresis, &
20 mA output standard or optional 1-5 VDC output. The NEMA repeatability).
4 housing is an all 316 welded construction that is designed to Stability: ±1.0 F.S./yr.
Pressure Limits: 3 x full scale differential pressure; Burst: 2500
withstand the harshest environmental conditions. With all 316L psig.
wetted materials this transmitter is compatible with most Temperature Limits:
media. These units are CSA approved explosion-proof for use in Ambient Operating: -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C). Process Interface:
-40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C). Storage: -40 to 212°F
the specified hazardous locations and meet NACE standards for (-40 to 100°C).
off-shore applications. Compensated Temperature Range:
-20 to 160°F (-29 to 71°C).
Thermal Effect: ±2% F.S./50°F (reference to 77°F).
Power Requirements: 12-30 VDC for 4-20 mA outputs; 8-14
MODELS VDC for 1-5 VDC outputs, both with reverse polarity protection.
Model Model
Output Signal: 4-20 mA DC or 1-5 VDC.
Number Number Zero and Span Adjustment: Fixed.
4-20 mA Out Range 1-5 VDC Out Range Response Time: 20 ms.
636D-0 0-6 psid 636D-0-LP 0-6 psid Loop Resistance: 900 ohms max @ 30 VDC for current outputs.
636D-1 0-15 psid 636D-1-LP 0-15 psid
636D-2 0-30 psid 636D-2-LP 0-30 psid For voltage outputs, minimum lead resistance 50k ohms.
636D-3 0-60 psid 636D-3-LP 0-60 psid Current Consumption: 4-20 mA for current output models; 3
636D-4 0-100 psid 636D-4-LP 0-100 psid mA for voltage output models.
636D-5 0-150 psid 636D-5-LP 0-150 psid
636D-6 0-200 psid 636D-6-LP 0-200 psid Electrical Connections: 2 ft, 22 AWG cable; 3/4˝ female NPT
636D-7 0-300 psid 636D-7-LP 0-300 psid conduit.
636D-8 0-500 psid 636D-8-LP 0-500 psid Process Connections: Two 1/2˝ female NPT.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4 (IP66).
Mounting Orientation: ±0.05 psi/90° rotation from horizontal.
Weight: 1.8 lb (0.82 kg).
Agency Approvals: CSA approved explosion-proof for Class I,
Division 1, Groups B, C, and D; Class II, Groups E, F, and G;
Class III.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 132
p133 7/24/06 11:22 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
629 Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter
0.5% Accuracy, NEMA 4X Enclosure

43/64
[17.07] 1-11/32
[34.13]

3-9/32
[83.34]
LIQUID TIGHT FITTING
CORD DIAMETER RANGE:
.200 TO .350 [5.06 TO 8.89]
1/4 NPT
TYP
1-5/8
[41.28]

5-25/32 [146.84]
1/4 NPT FEMALE FITTING
6-59/64 [175.82]
OPTIONAL 1/4 NPT
MALE FITTING

Series 629 shown with optional cable gland.

The Series 629 Differential Pressure Transmitter moni- SPECIFICATIONS

tors differential pressure of air and compatible gases and liq- Service: Compatible gases & liquids.
uids with 0.5% accuracy. The design employs dual pressure sen- Wetted Materials: Types 316, 316L SS.
sors converting pressure changes into a standard 4-20 mA out- Accuracy: +/- 0.5% F.S. (includes linearity, hysteresis &
put signal for two wire circuits. Small internal volume and min- repeatability).
Temperature Limits: 0 to 200°F (-18 to 93°C).
imum moving parts result in exceptional response and reliabil-
Compensated Temperature Limits: 0 to 175°F
ity. Terminal block, zero and span adjustments are easily
(-18 to 79°C).
accessed under the top cover. The Series 629 Differential Pressure Limits: See chart.
Pressure Transmitter is designed to meet NEMA-4X (IP66) Thermal Effect: 0.02%/°F (0.036%/°C) includes zero &
construction. span.
Power Requirements: 13-30 VDC (2-wire).
APPLICATIONS Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA. Optional 0-5, 0-10 VDC.
Monitor Differential Pressures Across: Response Time: 50 msec.
• Flow Elements Loop Resistance: 0-1300 ohms maximum for current out-
• Heat exchangers put. For voltage outputs, minimum load resistance: 2000
• Filters ohms.
• Pumps Electrical Connections: Terminal block; 1/2˝ female NPT
conduit.
• Coils
Process Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet NEMA 4X (IP66).
Mounting Orientation: Not position sensitive.
Weight: 10.1 oz (286 g).
Agency Approvals: CE.

OPTIONS
-3V, 3 Way Valve Package for Chillers
MODELS -LED, 4.5 Digit LED Display
Pressure Limits
Model Range Working* Over ACCESSORIES
Number (psid) Pressure (psid) Pressure (psi) A-228, Stainless steel flex hose, 12˝ (30.48 cm)
629-02-CH-P2-E5-S1 10 20 100 long, 1/8˝ male NPT connections.
629-03-CH-P2-E5-S1 25 50 250 A-229, Stainless steel flex hose, 18˝ (45.72 cm)
629-04-CH-P2-E5-S1 50 100 250 long, 1/8˝ male NPT connections.
629-05-CH-P2-E5-S1 100 200 500 A-332, Brass adapter, 1/8˝ female NPT
to 1/4˝ male NPT.
* Pressures exceeding the working pressure limit may cause a calibration
shift of up to ±3% of full scale.

133 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p134 7/24/06 11:23 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
655 Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter
Low Range, 0-5˝ w.c., High Maximum Working Pressure

1-9/64 ø1-1/2
Wire Jacket (28.97) (38.10)
26-20 AWG
5/32 (3.97) to
19/64 (7.54) O.D.

4-9/32
(108.74) 5-17/32
(140.49)

LOW HIGH

1/4 Female NPT 1/4 Female NPT 61/64

Low Pressure High Pressure (24.21)
Connection Connection
3 ø1-29/32
(76.20) (48.42)

The Series 655 Wet/Wet Differential Pressure SPECIFICATIONS

Transmitter converts a positive or a positive differential pres- Service: Compatible gases & liquids.
sure measurement into a standard 4-20 mA output signal. Wetted Materials: Types 316, 316L SS.
Designed for use as a wet/wet differential pressure transmitter,
Accuracy: ±0.5% F.S. (Includes linearity, hysteresis &
units can be used to measure gas or liquid pressures compatible
with 316/316L SS wetted parts. With an accuracy of ±0.5% FS, repeatability).
the Series 655 Pressure Transmitter can measure low differen- Stability: ±1% F.S./yr.
tial pressures, but can withstand working pressures to a maxi- Temperature Limits: 0 to 140°F (-17.8 to 60°C).
mum of 300 psi (20.7 bar). Compensated Temperature Limits: 40 to 120°F (4.44
to 48.9°C).
Features
• Wet/Wet Low Differential Pressure Pressure Limits: 300 psi (20.7 bar) continuous; 2000 psi
(137.8 bar) burst. A zero shift of up to +/- 2% F.S. may
• Withstands High Pressure
occur when 300 psi pressure is applied.
• Excellent Wetted Materials Thermal Effect: 0.025% F.S./ºF (0.045% F.S./°C).
316/316L SS
Power Requirements: 16-35 VDC (2-wire).
• External Span and Zero Adjustments Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA.
±10% of Span
Zero & Span Adjustments: Accessible potentiometers.
• Highly Accurate ±10% of span.
±0.5% Full Scale Loop Resistance: DC; 0-1250 ohms maximum.
Current Consumption: DC; 38 mA max.
Applications Electrical Connections: 3 position plastic terminal block.
• Refrigeration & HVAC Equipment Process Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
• Chill Water Line Pump Monitoring
Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet NEMA 4X (IP66).
• Water Filter Monitoring
• Process Control Mounting Orientation: Not position sensitive.
Weight: 1 lb, 11.7 oz (785 g).
OPTIONS
A-228, Stainless steel flex hose, 12˝ (30.48 cm)
long, 1/8˝ male NPT connections

MODELS A-229, Stainless steel flex hose, 18˝ (45.72 cm)

long, 1/8˝ male NPT connections
Model Range
655-1 0-5˝ w.c. (1.24 kPa) A-332, Brass adapter, 1/8˝ female NPT
655-2 0-8˝ w.c. (1.99 kPa) to 1/4˝ male NPT
655-3 0-10˝ w.c. (2.49 kPa)
655-4 0-20˝ w.c. (4.98 kPa)
655-5 0-1 psid (6.895 kPa)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 134
p135 7/24/06 11:23 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
647 Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter
Ranges from 0 to 1˝ w.c., ±1.0% Accuracy, NEMA 4 Enclosure, 2-Wire
(4) 1/4 [6.35] LONG X 7/32 [5.56] 5 [127.00]
WIDE MOUNTING HOLES 1-1/16 [26.97] TYP 2-1/2
[63.50]
1-17/64
2-15/16 [32.15]
3-5/16 1-1/8 [74.63]
[84.15] [28.58] 2-7/8
[73.03] 1/8 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/8 FEMALE NPT 5-9/16
HIGH PRESSURE Ø7/8 [22.23]
[141.30] CONDUIT
CONNECTION
CONNECTION

Monitor differential pressure in air/liquid flow systems, HVAC SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements: 18 to
automation, pneumatic systems and process control with the Series 647 Service: Compatible gases or 30 VDC.
Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter. Units are temperature com- liquids on both pressure and Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA,
pensated and provide a 4 to 20 mA output signal which can be interfaced reference sides. 2-wire.
with chart recorders, data loggers and computerized monitoring and Wetted Materials: Brass, Zero and Span Adjustments:
control systems. vinyl, glass-filled polyester, sili- Adjustable, ±10%.
con, and florosilicone. Loop Resistance: 400Ω @ 18
Accuracy: ±1.0% FS. VDC, 600Ω @ 24 VDC, 1000Ω
Stability: ±1.5% FS @ 30 VDC.
MODELS output/year. Electrical Connection: Screw
Temperature Limits: 32 to terminals, reverse polarity pro-
Model Range Model Range 122°F (0 to 50°C). tected.
Number Number Pressure Limits: Ranges 1˝ Process Connections: Two
647-0 0 to 1˝ w.c. 647-5 0 to 1 psid w.c. to 5 psi: 20 psi, 15 psi 1/8˝ female NPT.
647-1 0 to 3˝ w.c. 647-6 0 to 5 psid range: 45 psi, 30 psi range: 60 Housing: Gasketed steel
647-2 0 to 25˝ w.c. 647-7 0 to 15 psid psi. epoxy painted, NEMA 4 (IP66).
647-3 0 to 5˝ w.c. 647-8 0 to 30 psid Thermal Effects: Zero: Weight: 14 oz (397 g).
647-4 0 to 10˝ w.c. ±0.05% FS/°F, Span: ±0.05% Agency Approvals: CE.
rdg/°F.

Series
645 Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter
±0.25% Accuracy, Quick Response, 2-Wire Design
NEW 2.150 [54.61]
Optional 3-Valve Manifold Assembly 1.063 [27.00] 2.960 [75.18]

3-VALVE MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY .940 [23.88]

MODEL
1.750
645 SHUNT [44.45] 2.278
VALVE HIGH [57.86]
2.840 PRESSURE
V3 [72.14] BLEED
V1 V2
SCREWS

HIGH PROCESS LOW PROCESS

CONNECTION CONNECTION
1/4 NPT (F) 1/4 NPT(F)
1/4-18 NPT 2.440 [61.98]
HIGH PRESSURE PORT

Series 645 Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitters are designed for SPECIFICATIONS
use with compatible gases and liquids which can be applied to both the pressure Service: Compatible gases or liquids Zero and Span Adjustments:
and reference ports. Quick response capacitance sensor delivers a 4 to 20 mA on both pressure and reference Adjustable, +1 mA, non-interactive.
output signal proportional to differential pressure with ±.25% accuracy. The Series sides. Response Time: 30 to 50 msec.
645 transmitters are ideal for process control, filter condition monitoring, refrig- Wetted Materials: 17-4 PH stainless Loop Resistance: 0 to 1000Ω.
eration equipment, pump speed control, HVAC equipment, and liquid level mea- steel, 300 Series stainless steel, Electrical Connection: Barrier strip
surement. For ease of installation and maintenance, order optional 3-valve man- Fluoroelastomer and Silicone O-rings terminal block with conduit enclosure
ifold assembly. Bleed ports allow for total elimination of air in the line and pres- and bleed screw seals. and .875˝ (22 mm) diameter conduit
sure cavities. Accuracy: ±0.25% FS (RSS). opening.
Temperature Limits: Operating: 0 to Process Connection: 1/4˝-18
175°F (-22 to 80°C), Storage: -65 to female NPT.
260°F (-54 to 126°C). Housing: Stainless steel/ Aluminum,
Pressure Limits: (High side) 1 to 5 NEMA 4X (IP66).
MODELS psi: 20 x FS, 10 to 25 psi: 10 x FS, Weight: 14.4 oz (0.4 kg).
Model Number* Range Model Number* Range 50 psi: 5 x FS, 100 psi: 2.5 x FS; Agency Approvals: CE.
645-0 0 to 1 psid 645-10 ±0.5 psid (Low side) 2.5 x FS.
Thermal Effects: (includes zero and 3-Valve Manifold Assembly
645-1 0 to 2 psid 645-11 ±1 psid span) ±0.02% FS/°F, 30 to 150°F Manifold: Brass.
645-2 0 to 5 psid 645-12 ±2.5 psid (-1 to 65°C). Valve Type: 90° On/Off.
645-3 0 to 10 psid 645-13 ±5 psid Power Requirements: 11 to 30 Process Connection: 1/4˝-18
645-4 0 to 25 psid 645-14 ±10 psid VDC. female NPT.
645-5 0 to 50 psid 645-15 ±25 psid Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA, 2-wire.
645-6 0 to 100 psid 645-16 ±50 psid
* For optional 3-Valve Manifold Assembly, specify -3V as suffix

135 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p136 7/24/06 11:28 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
631B Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter
Ranges Down to 0.5˝ w.c. with 500 psi Static Pressure Rating

4-45/64 R

(119.46)
DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. MICHIGAN CITY, IN 46360, USA. PAT. 3,852,416

13/32 5
(10.32) TYP (127.00)
3-13/32 3/16
(86.52) (4.76)

3/4 (19.05) TYP

1/4 FEMALE NPT HIGH 1/4 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION PRESSURE CONNECTION
(AIR OR GAS) (AIR OR GAS)

35° TYP

DWYER INST. INC

MICH CITY, IND
46360 U.S.A.

(4) #6-32 X 3/8 (9.53) DP

HOLE ON A 4-11/32 (110.33)
Series 631B BOLT CIRCLE
1/4 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION
(LIQUID)
1/4 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION
(LIQUID)

The Series 631B Differential Pressure Transmitter monitors dif- SPECIFICATIONS

ferential pressure of air and compatible gases and liquids with accura- Service: Compatible gases & liquids.
cy. The design employs converting pressure changes into a standard 4-
20 mA output signal for two wire circuits. Digital push-button, zero and Wetted Materials: Brass, silicone, 300 SS.
span adjustments are easily accessed on the front cover. The Series Accuracy: Transmitter Output: ±2% F.S. (includes linearity, hys-
631B Differential Pressure Transmitter is designed to meet NEMA 4X teresis and repeatability). Gage: ±3% of full scale at 70°F (21.1°C).
(IP66) construction. Robust housing offers 500 psi static pressure rat-
ing on ranges down to 0.5˝ w.c. Stability: ±1% F.S./yr.
Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F (-6.67 to 48.9°C).
MODELS Pressure Limits: -20˝ Hg to 500 psig (-0.677 bar to 34.4 bar).
Model Range
Thermal Effect: 0.025%/°F (0.045%/°C) includes zero & span.
631B-0 0-0.5˝ w.c.
Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC.
631B-1 0-1˝ w.c.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA.
631B-2 0-2˝ w.c.
Response Time: 50 msec.
631B-3 0-5˝ w.c.
Loop Resistance: 0-1250 ohms maximum.
631B-5 0-25˝ w.c.
Electrical Connections: M-12 circular 4 pin connector.
Process Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT high and low pressure
taps, duplicated - one pair top for air and gas, and one pair bot-
ACCESSORIES
tom for liquids.
A-164, 16.4˝ (5 m) cable with M-12 4-pin female connector
Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet NEMA 4X (IP66).
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult
factory for other position orientations.
Weight: 8 lb, 4 oz (3.74 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 136
p137 7/24/06 2:42 PM Page 1

Pressure
Series
MS Magnesense® Differential Pressure Transmitter
Monitors Pressure & Air Velocity

21/32
Ø3-7/16 (16/67) 21/32
(Ø87.31) (16/67)
1/2
29/32 (12.70)
(23.02)
2-41/64
(67.07)
57/64
1/2 NPT (22.62)

(3) 3/16 (4.76) HOLES

EQUALLY SPACED ON A
4.115 (104.52) BC

2-11/64
(55.17)

2-9/16
(65.09)

The Series MS Magnesense® Differential Pressure SPECIFICATIONS

Transmitter is an extremely versatile transmitter for monitor- Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
ing pressure and air velocity. This compact package is loaded Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
Accuracy: MS-X21: 0.5˝ w.c. & 0.25˝ w.c. ±1%, 0.1˝ w.c. ±2%.
with features such as: field selectable English or metric ranges,
100 Pa & 50 Pa ±1%, 25 Pa ±2%. MS-X11: 5˝ & 2˝ ±1%, 1˝ w.c.
field upgradeable LCD display, adjustable dampening of output ±2%. 1250 & 500 Pa ±1%, 250 Pa ±2% (@ standard conditions).
signal (with optional display) and the ability to select a square Stability: ±1% F.S. / year.
root output for use with Pitot tubes and other similar flow sen- Temperature Limits: 0 to 150°F (-18 to 66°C).
sors. Pressure Limits: 1 psi maximum, operation; 10 psi, burst.
Along with these features, the magnetic sensing technology pro- Power Requirements: 10 to 35 VDC (2-wire); 17 to 36 VDC or
vides exceptional long term performance and enables the isolated 21.6 to 33 VAC (3-wire).
Magnesense® transmitter to be the solution for a myriad of pres- Output Signals: 4 to 20 mA (2-wire); 0 to 10 V (3-wire).
sure and flow applications. Response Time: Field adjustable 0.5 to 15 sec. time constant.
Provides a 95% response time of 1.5 to 45 seconds.
Zero & Span Adjustments: Digital push button.
Loop Resistance: Current Output: 0-1250Ω max. Voltage
Output: min. load resistance 1 k Ω.
MODELS
Current Consumption: 40 mA max.
Model Output Selectable Ranges Display (optional): 4 digit LCD.
Number Electrical Connections:
MS-121 4-20 mA 0.1˝, 0.25˝, 0.5˝ (25, 50, 100 Pa) 4-20mA, 2-Wire: European Style Terminal Block for 16 to 26 AWG.
MS-121-LCD 4-20 mA 0.1˝, 0.25˝, 0.5˝ (25, 50, 100 Pa) 0-10V, 3-Wire: European Style Terminal Block 16 to 22 AWG.
Electrical Entry: 1/2˝ NPS Thread.
MS-321 0-10 V 0.1˝, 0.25˝, 0.5˝ (25, 50, 100 Pa)
Accessory: Cable Gland for 5 to 10 mm diameter cable.
MS-321-LCD 0-10 V 0.1˝, 0.25˝, 0.5˝ (25, 50, 100 Pa) Process Connections: 3/16˝ (5 mm) ID tubing. Maximum OD 9
MS-111 4-20 mA 1˝, 2˝, 5˝ (250, 500, 1250 Pa) mm.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66).
MS-111-LCD 4-20 mA 1˝, 2˝, 5˝ (250, 500, 1250 Pa)
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in Vertical position.
MS-311 0-10 V 1˝, 2˝, 5˝ (250, 500, 1250 Pa) Weight: 8.0 oz (230 g).
MS-311-LCD 0-10 V 1˝, 2˝, 5˝ (250, 500, 1250 Pa) Agency Approvals: CE.

Accessories
A-435, Field Upgradeable LCD

137 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p138 7/24/06 11:29 AM Page 1

Pressure
One Unit for all your Building Pressure Applications
The Industry Standard for Building Automation
• Field Upgradable LCD. No need to • Field Selectable Ranges in metric or English.
order two seperate transmitters. Simply Lowers stock and inventory requirements. You’ll
stock a transmitter and display and you always have the right transmitter for every job.
can satisfy any customer’s requests.
Simply remove cover and snap the LCD
onto the board.

• Digital Push Button Zero and

Span. Reduces calibration time
significantly over other transmitters
that utilize potentiometers. Lowers
maintenance time and costs.

• Field Selectable Air Velocity Mode for fan

and blower applications. Unit provides square
root output that accurately tracks fpm or m/s
flow rate. No need for a smart programmable
indicator or PLC to convert pressure to air flow.
• Adjustable Digital Dampening smooths
Reduces components and installation time
out unstable pressure fluctuations common in
lowering overall costs.
air flow applications.

Fan
Velocity

Duct
Pressure

Building
Pressure

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 138
p139 7/24/06 11:30 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
DM-2000 Differential Pressure Transmitter
Same Size as Standard Magnehelic® Differential Pressure Gage

HIGH PRESSURE PORT

1-1/4
(31.75)

LOW PRESSURE PORT

7/16
(11.11) 4-3/4
17/32 (120.65)
(13.50)
5/32
(3.97)
1-11/16
(42.86)
1-13/16
(46.04)

The Dwyer Series DM-2000 Differential Pressure Transmitter SPECIFICATIONS

senses the pressure of air and compatible gases and sends a standard Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
4-20 mA output signal. The DM-2000 housing is specifically designed Wetted Materials: Consult Factory.
to mount in the same diameter cutout as a standard Magnehelic® gage. Accuracy: ±1% F.S. at 70°F.
A wide range of models are available factory calibrated to specific Stability: +1% F.S./yr.
ranges. Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F (-6.67 to 48.9°C).
Pressure connections are inherent to the glass filled plastic molded Pressure Limits: 10 psig (0.69 bar).
housing making installation quick and easy. Digital push-button zero Thermal Effect: ±0.055% F.S./°F (0.099% F.S./°C).
and span simplify calibration over typical turn-potentiometers. An Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC (2 wire).
optional 3.5 digit LCD shows process and engineering units. Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA.
Zero and Span Adjustments: Digital push-button zero and span.
MODELS Loop Resistance: DC: 0-1250 ohms maximum.
Without LCD Display Current Consumption: DC: 38 mA maximum.
Model Number Ranges Electrical Connections: Screw-type terminal block.
DM-2002 0-0.25˝ w.c.
DM-2003 0-0.5˝ w.c.
Display: 3.5 digit LCD, 0.7˝ height.
DM-2012 0.25˝-0-0.25˝ w.c. Process Connections: 1/8˝ I.D. tubing.
DM-2013 0.5˝-0-0.5˝ w.c. Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
Weight: 4.8 oz (136 g).
With LCD Display
Model Number Ranges
DM-2002-LCD 0-0.25˝ w.c.
DM-2003-LCD 0-0.5˝ w.c.
DM-2012-LCD 0.25˝-0-0.25˝ w.c.
DM-2013-LCD 0.5˝-0-0.5˝ w.c.

ACCESSORIES
A-299, Surface Mounting Bracket
A-300, Flat Flush Mounting Bracket

139 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p140 7/24/06 11:31 AM Page 1

Pressure
®
Series Magnehelic Differential Pressure
605
Indicating Transmitter
(4) 6-32 HOLES
2-1/16 EQUALLY SPACED ON
23/32 1/8 FEMALE A 5-1/8 [130.18] B.C.
[18.26] NPT HIGH [52.39]
2 FOR FLUSH MOUNTING
PRESSURE [50.80]
1 CONNECTION
[25.40]

1-1/4 Ø4-47/64
30° 1-3/4 [ 120.25]
[44.45] [31.75]
(3) #6-32 x 3/16 [4.76]
DP HOLES EQUALLY SPACED Ø5
ON A Ø4-1/8 [104.78] B.C. [127.00]
1/2 [12.70]
FOR PANEL MOUNTING
1-1/8 1/8 FEMALE NPT
[28.58] 5/8 [15.88] Ø4 [101.60]
LOW PRESSURE PANEL MAX
11/16 CONNECTION 2-1/2 3/16
FACE
[17.46] [63.50] 5-1/2 [139.70]
[4.76] O.D. MOUNTING
RING

Patent No. 4,890,497

The Series 605 Magnehelic® Indicating Transmitter provides for SPECIFICATIONS

both visual monitoring and electronic control of very low differential GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
pressure. The Series 605 is ideal for control applications in building
Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
HVAC systems where local indication is desired during routine main- Accuracy: See chart.
tenance checks or necessary when trouble shooting the system. The Stability: +1% F.S./yr.
easily read dial gage is complimented by the two-wire, 4-20 mA control Pressure Limits: See chart.
signal utilizing the time-proven Dwyer® Magnehelic® gage mechanical Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F
(-6.67 to 48.9°C).
design and Series 600 transmitter technology. The 2-wire design with
Process Connections: 1/8˝ female NPT.
terminal strip on the rear simplifies connection in any 4-20 mA control Size: 4˝ (101.6 mm) dial face, 5˝ (127 mm) O.D. x 2-11/16˝ (68.3 mm).
loop powered by a 10-35 VDC supply. Weight: 1 lb, 12.6 oz (811 g).
Agency Approvals: CE.

TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: See chart (includes linearity, hysteresis, repeatability).
Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F
(-6.67 to 48.9°C).
ACCESSORIES Compensated Temperature Range: 32 to 120°F (0 to 48.9°C).
A-276, 500 Ohm Precision Resistor Thermal Effect: ±0.025% F.S./°F
(0.045% F.S./°C).
A-277, 250 Ohm Precision Resistor
Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC (2-wire).
A-298 Flat Aluminum Bracket, for flush mounting Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA.
A-370 Mounting Bracket, flush mount Series 605 Zero and Span Adjustments: Protected potentiometers.
Transmitter in bracket. Bracket is then surface Loop Resistance: DC; 0-1250 ohms maximum.
mounted.Steel with gray hammertone epoxy finish Current Consumption: DC; 38 mA maximum.
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal block.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult facto-
ry for other position orientations.

MODELS
Model Range Maximum Electrical Mechanical Model Range Maximum Electrical Mechanical
Number in w.c. Pressure Accuracy +/-% Accuracy +/-% Number in w.c. Pressure Accuracy +/-% Accuracy +/-%
605-00N .05-0-.20 25 psi (1.7 bar) 2 4 605-20 0-20.0 20 psi (1.4 bar) 0.5 2
605-11 .25-0-.25 25 psi (1.7 bar) 2 3 605-30 0-30 20 psi (1.4 bar) 0.5 2
605-0 0-.50 25 psi (1.7 bar) 2 2 605-50 0-50 20 psi (1.4 bar) 0.5 2
605-1 0-1.0 25 psi (1.7 bar) 2 2 Range in Pa
605-2 0-2.0 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 0.5 2 605-60Pa 0-60 25 psi (1.7 bar) 2 4
605-3 0-3.0 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 0.5 2 605-125Pa 0-125 25 psi (1.7 bar) 2 2
605-6 0-6.0 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 0.5 2 605-250Pa 0-250 25 psi (1.7 bar) 2 2
605-10 0-10 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 0.5 2 605-500Pa 0-500 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 0.5 2

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 140
p141 7/26/06 3:34 PM Page 1

Pressure
Series
603A Differential Pressure Transmitters
Ranges from 0.2˝ Water Column to 30 psid

1/8 FEMALE NPT

LOW PRESSURE 2-1/16 (4) 6-32 HOLES
CONNECTION [52.39] EQUALLY SPACED ON
36° 1/8 FEMALE
2 A 5-18 [130.18] B.C.
21/32 NPT HIGH 1/8 FEMALE NPT
PRESSURE HIGH PRESSURE [50.80] PANEL MOUNTING
[16.66]
1-1/2 CONNECTION CONNECTION
[38.10]
Ø4-47/64
9/16 1-3/4 1-1/4 [120.25]
[14.29] [44.45] [31.75]
1/2 [12.70] Ø5
[127.00] SPAN ZERO
1-25/64 DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.

[35.32] (3) Ø3/16 [4.77] HOLES

EQUALLY SPACED ON A
1/8 FEMALE NPT 11/16 4-1/8 [104.78] B.C. 5/8 Ø4 [101.60]
LOW PRESSURE [17.46] SURFACE MOUNTING [15.88] FACE
CONNECTION 5/8 [15.88] 5-1/2 [139.70] O.D.
PANEL MAX MOUNTING RING
2-1/2 3/16
[63.50] [4.76]

Patent No. 4, 385, 525

The Series 603A Differential Pressure Transmitters combine ultra SPECIFICATIONS

low ranges, low cost, high accuracy and rugged construction — ideal for Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
a wide range of HVAC and industrial applications. These transmitters Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
provide a standard 4-20 mA analog output signal in ranges as low as 0.2" Accuracy: (See Chart) (Includes linearity, hysteresis and repeata-
w.c.
bility).
The transmitter can be surface mounted or flush mounted in a 4-13/16"
(122 mm) diameter panel hole. Hardware is included for either option. Stability: +1% F.S./yr.
Duplicate 1/8" female NPT pressure connections on side and back ease Temperature Limits: 0 to 140°F (-17.8 to 60°C).
installation. Compensated Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F (-6.67 to
48.9°C).
Pressure Limits: See chart below.
Thermal Effect: ±0.025% F.S./°F (0.045% F.S./°C).
Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC
(2-wire).
ACCESSORIES
Output Signal: 4-20 mA.
A-298 Flat Aluminum Bracket, for flush
Zero and Span Adjustments: External potentiometers.
mounting 603A
Loop Resistance: DC; 0-1250 ohms.
A-370 Mounting Bracket, flush mount Series 600 Transmitter in
bracket. Bracket is then surface mounted. Steel with gray ham- Current Consumption: DC; 38 mA max.
mertone epoxy finish Electrical Connections: 4 screw terminal block.
Process Connections: 1/8˝ female NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position.
Consult factory for other position orientations.
Weight: 1 lb, 10 oz (737 g).
Agency Approvals: CE.

MODELS
Model Ranges in Inches W.C. Electrical Accuracy
Number As Stocked Minimum Maximum Maximum Pressure +/- %
603A-1 0-0.25 (6.34 mm) 0-0.20 (5.08 mm) 0.50 (12.7 mm) 25 psi (1.7 bar) 2
603A-2 0-0.50 (12.7 mm) 0-0.50 (12.7 mm) 0-1.50 (38.1 mm) 25 psi (1.7 bar) 2
603A-3 0-2.0 (50.8 mm) 0-1.5 (38.1 mm) 0-5.0 (127 mm) 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 0.5
603A-4 0-5.0 (127 mm) 0-4.0 (101.6 mm) 0-15 (381 mm) 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 0.5
603A-5 0-25 (634 mm) 0-10 (254 mm) 0-60 (1522 mm) 20 psi (1.4 bar) 0.5
603A-6 0-100 (2540 mm) 0-50 (1264 mm) 0-250 (6445 mm) 20 psi (1.4 bar) 0.5
603A-11 .25-0-.25 (12.7 mm) 25 psi (1.7 bar) 2
603A-12 1-0-1 (50.8 mm) 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 0.5
603A-13 5-0-5 (254 mm) 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 0.5
603A-14 10-0-10 (508 mm) 20 psi (1.4 bar) 0.5
NOTE: Optional 31⁄2 digit LCD readout for Series 603A

141 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p142 7/24/06 11:33 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
604A Differential Pressure Transmitter
±2% Full Span Accuracy, Pressure Rated to 30 psig
3-19/32
[91.28]
13/32 1-3/16 2-3/16
[10.32] [30.16] [55.56]

1-3/4 2-3/16
[44.45] [55.56]
2-5/8
[66.68]

(2) Ø13/64 [5.16]

1/4 MOUNTING HOLES
[6.35] 1-13/16 7/16
Patent No. 301, 018 [46.03] [11.11] 15/32
[11.91]

The Series 604A Differential Pressure Transmitter offers very low SPECIFICATIONS Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA.
ranges down to 0-0.1" w.c. (25 Pa) yet withstands continuous pressure to 30 Service: Air and non-combustible, Zero and Span Adjustments:
psig (2 bar). The tough filled Nylon housing features simple surface mount- compatible gases. Internally accessible
ing arrangement and barbed connections. The units are compact and light- Wetted Materials: Consult factory. Potentiometers.
weight yet provide overall accuracy of ±2%. Output signal is 4-20 mA. Zero Accuracy: ±2% of full span output Loop Resistance: DC; 0-1250
(Includes linearity, hysteresis and re- ohms maximum.
and span adjustments plus terminal block connections are easily accessible Current Consumption: DC; 38
but protected in auxiliary housing. peatability).
Stability: +1% F.S./yr. mA maximum.
MODELS Temperature Limits: 0 to 140°F (- Electrical Connections: Terminal
17.8 to 60°C). block.
Model Ranges in Inches W.C. Compensated Temperature Process Connections: Barbed,
Limits: 20 to 120°F for 3/16˝ (4.76 mm) I.D. tubing.
Number As Stocked Minimum Maximum Mounting Orientation:
(-6.67 to 48.9°C).
604A-0 0-.50 0-.40 0-1.0 Pressure Limits: 30 psig (206.8 Diaphragm in vertical position.
604A-1 0-2.0 0-.50 kPa) continuous; 50 psig Consult factory for other position
0-4.0 orientations.
(344.7 kPa) surge.
604A-2 0-10 0-2.0 0-20 Thermal Effect: ±0.025% F.S./°F Weight: 5.6 oz (159 g).
604A-3 0-50 0-15 0-120 (0.045% F.S./°C). Agency Approvals: CE.
* Optional 3, 4 wire configurations available, contact factory. Power Requirements: 10-35
VDC (2-wire*).

Series Minihelic® Differential Pressure

604D
Indicating Transmitter

The Series 604D Minihelic® Differential Pressure Indicating Transmit- SPECIFICATIONS Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F
ter combines visual monitoring with electronic control of low differential air GAGE SPECIFICATIONS (-6.67 to 48.9°C).
Service: Air and non-combustible, Compensated Temperature Range:
or compatible gas pressures. This versatile device is ideal for building HVAC compatible gases. 32 to 120°F (0 to 48.9°C).
systems where local indication is needed during maintenance checks or when Wetted Materials: Consult factory. Thermal Effect: ±0.025% F.S./°F
troubleshooting the system. The transmitter design employs the latest strain Accuracy: ±5% F.S.O. (0.045% F.S./°C).
Stability: +1% F.S./yr. Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC
gage technology and operates in 2-wire control loop circuits. Separate Zero (2 wire*).
Pressure Limits: 30 psig (206.8 kPa)
and Span controls plus a 4-screw terminal strip are protected in a gasketed continuous; 50 psig (344.7 kPa) surge. Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA.
side enclosure. Cable gland fits .10 - .25" round cable. A 10-35 VDC power sup- Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F Zero and Span Adjustments: Internally
ply is required. (-6.67 to 48.9°C). accessible potentiometers.
Process Connections: Barbed, for Loop Resistance: DC; 0-1250 ohms
3/16˝ (4.76 mm) I.D. tubing. maximum.
MODELS Size: 2-1/16˝ (52.39 mm) diameter dial Current Consumption: DC; 38 mA
face. maximum.
Model Range Model Range Electrical Connections: Terminal
Number Inches w.c. Weight: 5.6 oz (159 g).
Number Inches w.c. Agency Approvals: CE. block.
604D-0 0-0.5 604D-10 0-10 Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in
604D-1 0-1.0 604D-20 0-20 TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS vertical position. Consult factory for
604D-2 0-2.0 604D-40 0-40 Accuracy: ±2% of full span output other position orientations.
604D-3 0-3.0 604D-60 0-60 (includes linearity, hysteresis and repeata-
bility). * Optional 3, 4 wire configurations
604D-5 0-5.0 604D-100 0-100 available, contact factory.
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 142
p143 7/24/06 11:34 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
616
&
Differential Pressure Transmitter
616C Ranges from 0-1 in. w.c. to 0-100 psid, Accuracy ±0.25% or ±1% F.S.
1-13/32 5/16 15/32
[35.74] [7.95] [11.91]

3-21/64
[84.53]

2-13/32
[61.12]

1/2
Ø5/32 [3.97] [12.7]
MOUNTING HOLE
TYP 2 PLACES
1/2 7/16
[12.7] [11.11]
1-1/2 7/8
[38.1] [22.23]
2-1/4
[57.15]

Series 616 Transmitters feature exceptional ±0.25% accuracy in several SPECIFICATIONS

factory calibrated ranges. Choose the one just right for your application. Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
Span and Zero controls included for fine tuning and minor re-calibration in Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
the field. Accuracy: 616: ±0.25% F.S.; 616C ±1% F.S.
Stability: +1% F.S./yr.
Temperature Limits: 0 to 140°F (-17.8 to 60°C).
Compensated Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F (-6.67 to 48.9°C).
MODELS Pressure Limits: See Chart.
Thermal Effect: ±0.02% F.S./°F (±0.0012% F.S./°C).
Model No. Range Max. Press. Model No. Range Max. Press. Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC (2-wire).
616-00 0-1 in. w.c. 5 psig 616-8 0-10 psid 58 psig Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA.
616-0 0-2 in. w.c. 5 psig 616-9 0-20 psid 58 psig Zero and Span Adjustments: Potentiometers for zero and span.
616-1 0-3 in. w.c. 5 psig 616-10 0-30 psid 58 psig Loop Resistance: DC; 0-1250 ohms maximum.
616-2 0-6 in. w.c. 5 psig 616-11 0-50 psid 150 psig Current Consumption: DC; 38 mA maximum.
616-3 0-10 in. w.c. 5 psig 616-12 0-100 psid 150 psig Electrical Connections: Screw-type terminal block.
Process Connections: Barbed, dual size to fit 1/8˝ and 3/16˝ (3.12 mm and 4.76 mm)
616-4 0-20 in. w.c. 11 psig 616-3B 1.5-0-1.5 in. w.c. 5 psig
I.D. rubber or vinyl tubing.
616-5 0-40 in. w.c. 11 psig 616-6B 3-0-3 in. w.c. 5 psig Weight: 1.8 oz (51 g).
616-6 0-100 in. w.c. 29 psig 616-10B 5-0-5 in. w.c. 5 psig Agency Approvals: CE on 616 only.
616-7 0-200 in. w.c. 29 psig 616-20B 10-0-10 in. w.c. 11 psig
Note: For 1% models add “C” after 616. 616C not available with 1˝ or 2˝ w.c. ranges.

Series
616D Differential Pressure Transmitter
Mounts on 35 mm DIN Rail
2-3/8 13/16
[60.33] [20.64]

2-3/8
2-57/64 [60.33]
[73.42]

1-1/2 3/4
[38.10] [19.05]

The Series 616D Differential Pressure Transmitter senses the pressure SPECIFICATIONS Zero and Span Adjustments:
of air and compatible gases and sends a standard 4-20 mA output signal. The Service: Air and non-combustible, Potentiometers for zero and span.
compatible gases. Loop Resistance: DC: 0-1250 ohms max.
616D housing is specifically designed to mount on a 35 mm DIN rail in a panel. Current Consumption: DC: 38 mA max.
Wetted Materials: Consult Factory.
This mounting style allows for several units to be mounted closely together Accuracy: ±0.25% F.S. at 70°F. Electrical Connections: Screw-type
reducing required space. A wide range of models are available factory cali- Stability: +1% F.S./yr. terminal block.
brated to specific ranges as listed in the chart below. The span and zero con- Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F (-6.67 to Process Connections: 1/8˝ female NPT.
trols are for use when checking calibration. They are not intended for re-rang- 48.9°C). Accessories included are 2 barbed fittings for
ing to a significantly different span. Versatile circuit design enables operation Pressure Limits: See chart. 1/8˝ (3.12 mm) and 3/16˝ (4.77 mm) I.D.
in 2-wire current loops. Thermal Effect: ±0.02% F.S./°F (0.0012% rubber or vinyl tubing.
F.S./°C). Mounting Orientation: Vertical, on a 1.378˝
Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC (2-wire). (35 mm) DIN rail.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA. Weight: 4.8 oz (136 g).
MODELS
Model No. Range Max. Press. Model No. Range Max. Press.
616D-1 0-3 in. w.c. 5 psig 616D-10 0-30 psid 58 psig
616D-2 0-6 in. w.c. 5 psig 616D-11 0-50 psid 150 psig
616D-3 0-10 in. w.c. 5 psig 616D-12 0-100 psid 150 psig
616D-4 0-20 in. w.c. 11 psig 616D-13 0-12 ft w.c. 29 psig
616D-5 0-40 in. w.c. 11 psig 616D-14 0-20 ft w.c. 58 psig
616D-6 0-100 in. w.c. 29 psig 616D-3B 1.5-0-1.5 in. w.c. 5 psig
616D-7 0-200 in. w.c. 29 psig 616D-6B 3-0-3 in. w.c. 5 psig
616D-8 0-10 psid 58 psig 616D-10B 5-0-5 in. w.c. 5 psig
616D-9 0-20 psid 58 psig 616D-20B 10-0-10 in. w.c. 11 psig

143 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p144 7/24/06 11:36 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
616W Differential Pressure Transmitter
NEMA 4X Enclosure, 0.25% F.S. Accuracy, Ranges from 0-1 in. w.c. to 0-100 psid
Ø3/16 [4.76]
3-1/8 MOUNTING HOLES
[79.38] TYP 4 PLACES
1-1/4
[31.75]
4-1/2
[114.30] 1-5/16
4-17/32
[33.32] TYP [115.09]
5-1/8 7/16 OR 5/8
[130.18] [11.13 OR 15.88]
TYP
1/8 AND 3/16
[3.18 AND 4.76] 3-1/8
1-3/16 I.D. TUBING
3/4 [79.38]
[30.18]
3-3/4 2-1/8 [19.05] TYP
[95.25] [53.98]

Positive, negative and differential pressures can be measured within a SPECIFICATIONS Zero and Span Adjustments:
full span accuracy of ±0.25% with the Series 616W Differential Pressure Trans- Service: Air and non-combustible, com- Potentiometers for zero and span.
patible gases. Loop Resistance: DC; 0-1250 ohms
mitter. Units are enclosed in a polycarbonate case, rated NEMA 4X (IP66) and Wetted Materials: Consult factory. maximum.
operate by sensing the pressure of air and compatible gases then sending a stan- Accuracy: ±0.25% F.S., display accura- Current Consumption: DC; 38 mA
dard 4-20 mA output signal. cy ±0.5%. maximum.
Design enables operation in 2-wire current loops. A wide range of models are Stability: +1% F.S./yr. Electrical Connections: Screw-type
Temperature Limits: 0 to 140°F terminal block.
available factory calibrated to specific ranges. The span and zero controls are (-17.8 to 60°C). Process Connections: Barbed, dual
for use when checking calibration. They are not intended for re-ranging to a sig- Compensated Temperature Limits: size to fit 1/8˝ and 3/16˝ (3.12 and 4.76
nificantly different span. The LCD (as shown above) allows local indication of 20 to 120°F (-6.67 to 48.9°C). mm) I.D. rubber or vinyl tubing.
pressure. (If LCD is not needed, drop from model number). Pressure Limits: See chart. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66).
Thermal Effect: ±0.02% F.S./°F Mounting Orientation: Vertical, consult
(0.0012% F.S./°C). factory for other position orientations.
Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC Weight: Without LCD 8.8 oz. (249 g);
(2-wire). with LCD 9.6 oz (272 g).
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA. Agency Approvals: CE.
MODELS
Model No. Range Max. Press. Model No. Range Max. Press. Model No. Range Max. Press.
616W-00-LCD 0-1 in.w.c. 5 psig 616W-7-LCD 0-200 in.w.c. 29 psig 616W-10B-LCD 5-0-5 in.w.c. 5 psig
616W-0-LCD 0-2 in.w.c. 5 psig 616W-8-LCD 0-10 psid 58 psig 616W-20B-LCD 10-0-10 in.w.c. 11 psig
616W-1-LCD 0-3 in.w.c. 5 psig 616W-9-LCD 0-20 psid 58 psig 616W-0M-LCD 0-500 Pa 5 psig
616W-2-LCD 0-6 in.w.c. 5 psig 616W-10-LCD 0-30 psid 58 psig 616W-1M-LCD 0-750 Pa 34.5 kPa
616W-3-LCD 0-10 in.w.c. 5 psig 616W-11-LCD 0-50 psid 150 psig 616W-2M-LCD 0-1.5 kPa 34.5 kPa
616W-4-LCD 0-20 in.w.c. 11 psig 616W-12-LCD 0-100 psid 150 psig 616W-3M-LCD 0-2.5 kPa 34.5 kPa
616W-5-LCD 0-40 in.w.c. 11 psig 616W-3B-LCD 1.5-0-1.5 in.w.c. 5 psig 616W-4M-LCD 0-5.0 kPa 75.8 kPa
616W-6-LCD 0-100 in.w.c. 29 psig 616W-6B-LCD 3-0-3 in.w.c. 5 psig 616W-5M-LCD 0-25.0 kPa 200 kPa
NOTE: Units with “M” in the model number are metric units.

Series
616WL Differential Pressure Transmitter
Low Ranges Down to 0.25˝ w.c. (60 Pa), NEMA 4X Housing
3/16 [4.76]
SPECIFICATIONS Loop Resistance: DC; 0-900
3-1/8
[79.38]
MOUNTING HOLES
TYP 4 PLCS
Service: Air and non-combustible, ohms maximum.
compatible gases. Current Consumption: DC; 38
Wetted Materials: Consult factory. mA maximum.
4-17/32 Accuracy: ±0.50% F.S., display ac- Electrical Connections: Screw-
[115.09]
5-1/8
4-17/32
[115.09]
curacy ±0.5%. type terminal block.
[130.18] Stability: ±1% F.S./yr. Process Connections: Barbed,
Temperature Limits: 0 to 140°F dual size to fit 1/8˝ and 3/16˝ (3.12
(-17.8 to 60°C). and 4.76 mm) I.D. rubber or vinyl
63/61 FITTING TO 3-1/8
[25.00]
ACCOMODATE
CABLE DIAMETERS
49/64 [79.38] Compensated Temperature tubing.
[19.45]
47/64
OF .100 - .260 1-1/8
[28.58]
Limits: 20 to 120°F (-6.67 to Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X
[18.65]
2-21/32
1/8 AND 3/16
[3.18 AND 4.76]
2-37/64 48.9°C). (IP66).
[65.48]
[67.47]
3-45/64
I.D. TUBING Pressure Limits: See chart. Mounting Orientation: Vertical,
[94.06] Thermal Effect: ±0.02% F.S./°F consult factory for other position ori-
(0.036% F.S./°C). entations.
The Series 616WL Differential Pressure Transmitter senses very low pres-
Power Requirements: 12-30 VDC Weight: Without LCD 17 oz (482 g);
sures of air and non-combustible, compatible gases and sends a standard 4-20
mA output signal. All models, including those featuring the 3 digit LCD digital (2-wire). with LCD 18 oz (510 g).
read-out, are factory calibrated to specific ranges as listed in the chart below. Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA. Agency Approvals: CE.
Positive, negative and differential pressures can be measured within a full span Zero and Span Adjustments:Digi-
accuracy of ±0.50%. This weatherproof unit is enclosed in a polycarbonate case, tal, Push Button Adj.
designed to meet (IP66/NEMA 4X). Internal digital push button zero and span
allow for quick and simple field calibration.
MODELS
Model Number Pressure Range Maximum Pressure Model Number Pressure Range Maximum Pressure
616WL-2 0-0.25 in. w.c. 2 psig 616WL-2-LCD 0-0.25 in. w.c. 2 psig
616WL-4 0-1 in. w.c. 4 psig 616WL-4-LCD 0-1 in. w.c. 4 psig
616WL-12 0.25-0-0.25 in. w.c. 2 psig 616WL-12-LCD 0.25-0-0.25 in. w.c. 2 psig
616WL-14 1-0-1 in. w.c. 4 psig 616WL-14-LCD 1-0-1 in. w.c. 4 psig
616WL-22 0-60 Pa 13.8 kPa 616WL-22-LCD 0-60 Pa 13.8 psig
616WL-32 60-0-60 Pa 13.8 kPa 616WL-32-LCD 60-0-60 Pa 13.8 psig
616WL-25 0-250 Pa 4 psig 616WL-25-LCD 0-250 Pa 4 psig
616WL-35 250-0-250 Pa 4 psig 616WL-35-LCD 250-0-250 Pa 4 psig

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 144
p145 7/24/06 11:39 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
620 Differential Pressure Indicating Transmitter
1/16 DIN Housing, Digital Readout, 0.5% Full Scale Accuracy
PANEL MAX. THICKNESS 1/4˝ [6.350]
GASKET

SPAN
ADJUSTMENT
SPRING LOOP
INCHES W.C.
1 12 6
7
1-7/8
2

1-49/64 3 8

[47.63]
4 9

[44.85] 5 14
ZERO
10

ADJUSTMENT

1/4 4-15/32 29/64 [11.51] 1-7/8 [47.63]

[6.350] [113.5]

The Series 620 Pressure Indicating Transmitter is a 1/16 DIN instru- SPECIFICATIONS
ment for measuring, controlling and indicating positive, negative or differential
pressures of air and compatible gases. Pressure measurements are displayed Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
on an easy-to-read 31⁄2 digit display and converted to a standard 4 to 20 mA ouput Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
signal. Versatile circuit design enables use in 2-wire current loops. Accuracy: +/-0.5% F.S. (includes linearity, hysteresis & repeatability).
Stability: +1% F.S./yr.
Temperature Limits: 0 to 140°F (-17.8 to 60°C).
Compensated Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F (-6.67 to 48.9°C).
MODELS Pressure Limits: See chart.
MODEL NUMBER RANGE MAXIMUM PRESSURE Thermal Effect: 0.025% F.S./ºF (0.045% F.S./°C).
620-3 0-3 in. w.c. 5 psig Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC (2-wire).
620-6 0-6 in. w.c. 5 psig Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA.
620-10 0-10 in. w.c. 5 psig Zero & Span Adjustments: Accessible Potentiometers.
620-20 0-20 in. w.c. 11 psig Loop Resistance: DC; 0-1250 ohms max.
620-40 0-40 in. w.c. 11 psig Current Consumption: DC; 38 mA max.
620-100 0-100 in. w.c. 29 psig
620-200 0-200 in. w.c. 29 psig Electrical Connections: Terminal block.
620-1000 0-1000 in. w.c. 150 psig Process Connections: Barbed for 1/8˝ (3.18 mm) I.D. tubing.
620P-10 0-10 psid 58 psig Enclosure Rating: Face designed to meet NEMA 4 (IP66).
620P-20 0-20 psid 58 psig Mounting Orientation: Not position sensitive.
620P-30 0-30 psid 58 psig Weight: 4.7 oz (133 g).
620P-50 0-50 psid 150 psig Agency Approvals: CE.
620P-100 0-100 psid 150 psig

Series
621 Differential Pressure Indicating Transmitter
1/8 DIN Housing, 0.5% Full Scale Accuracy
1/2 3-31/32 17/32
[12.70] [100.8] [13.49] 3-49/64
[95.65]

INCHES W.C.

ZERO ADJUST 1-15/16

[49.21]
SERIES 621

01-700406-09

Panel cutout for all models 1.775 3 3.625 inches (45 3 92 mm)
Maximum panel thickness 0.25 inches (6.35 mm)

Series 621 Pressure Indicator is a 1/8 DIN measuring and control- SPECIFICATIONS
ling instrument designed for positive, negative or differential pressures Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
of air and compatible gases. Pressure readings are displayed on a large Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
3-1/2 digit LCD display while unit simultaneously produces a standard Accuracy: +/-0.5% F.S. (Includes linearity, hysteresis & repeatability).
4-20 mA output signal. Over a dozen stocked ranges are available from Stability: + 1% F.S./yr.
0-3 in. w.c. to 0-100 psid or choose metric units in ranges from 0-0.75 Temperature Limits: 0 to 140°F (-17.8 to 60°C).
kPa to 0-690 kPa. Circuit design enables use in 2-wire current loops. Compensated Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F (-6.67 to 48.9°C).
Pressure Limits: See chart.
Thermal Effect: 0.025% F.S./ºF (0.045% F.S./°C).
Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC (2-wire).
MODELS Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA.
MODEL MAX. MODEL MAX. Zero & Span Adjustments: Accessible Potentiometers.
NUMBER RANGE PRESS. NUMBER RANGE PRESS. Loop Resistance: DC; 0-1250 ohms max.
621-3 0-3 in. w.c. 5 psig 621-1000 0-1000 in. w.c. 150 psig Current Consumption: DC; 38 mA max.
621-6 0-6 in. w.c. 5 psig 621P-10 0-10 psid 58 psig Electrical Connections: Terminal block.
621-10 0-10 in. w.c. 5 psig 621P-20 0-20 psid 58 psig Process Connections: Barbed for 1/8˝ (3.18 mm) I.D. tubing.
621-20 0-20 in. w.c. 11 psig 621P-30 0-30 psid 58 psig
621-40 0-40 in. w.c. 11 psig 621P-50 0-50 psid 150 psig Enclosure Rating: Face designed to meet NEMA 4 (IP66).
621-100 0-100 in. w.c. 29 psig 621P-100 0-100 psid 150 psig Mounting Orientation: Not position sensitive.
621-200 0-200 in. w.c. 29 psig Weight: 7.8 oz (221 g).
Agency Approvals: CE.
145 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au
p146 7/24/06 11:40 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
607 Differential Pressure Transmitter
±0.25% or ± 0.5% F.S. Accuracy, Ranges from 0-0.1” w.c.
1-21/32
[42.06] 1-53/64 [46.53]
7/32 [5.556] 1-19/64 [32.94]

3-13/32 3-7/8 4-3/8

[86.52] [98.43] [111.1]

3-5/16 [84.12]

3-59/64 [99.62]
4-9/16 [115.9] 01-700365-00

Series 607 Differential Pressure Transmitter combines very SPECIFICATIONS Zero & Span Adjustments:
low ranges with exceptional stability, reliability and either Service: Air and nonconduc- Externally accessible poten-
tive, noncorrosive gases. tiometers, non-interactive,
±0.25% or ±0.5% accuracy for the most demanding applications. ±10% F.S. adjustment.
Wetted Materials: Contact
Ranges from 0-0.1 to 0-25˝ w.c. Ultra thin glass clad silicon di- Response Time: 250 msec
factory.
aphragm design resists shock and vibration, practically elimi- max.
Accuracy: ±0.5% or ±0.25%
nates drift. Certification to NIST standards is included with F.S. Loop Resistance: 0 to 1045
each unit. Tough stainless steel housing is NEMA-2 rated to pro- Stability: ±0.5% F.S.O./yr. ohms Vmin=12V+[(.22A)(R L )].
tect against moisture and dirt. Use with air and other compati- Temperature Limits: –20 to Current Consumption: 3.6
ble gases. 160˚F (–29 to 71˚C), 10 to 95% mA (min).
RH. Electrical Connection: Screw
MODELS terminals.
Model Range Model Range Pressure Limits: 10 psig (0.69
No. (in w.c.) No. (in w.c.) bar). Process Connection: Barbed
Compensated Temp. Range: stainless steel for 3/16˝ I.D.
607-0 0-.10 607-71* 0-5.0 tubing.
607-01* 0-.10 607-8 0-10 35 to 135˚F (2 to 57˚C).
Thermal Effects: ±0.015% Housing: 300 Series SS
607-1 0-.25 607-0B .10-0-.10 (NEMA 2).
607-11* 0-.25 607-1B .25-0-.25 FS/˚F (zero and span).
Power Requirements: 12-36 Weight: 1.04 lb (472 g).
607-2 0-.50 607-2B .50-0-.50
607-21* 0-.50 607-9 0-25 VDC. Agency Approvals: CE.
607-3 0-1.0 607-3B 1.0-0-1.0 Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA
607-4 0-2.0 607-4B 2.0-0-2.0 DC, 2-wire.
607-7 0-5.0 607-7B 5.0-0-5.0
* Models have a ±0.25% F.S. accuracy.

Series
677 Differential Pressure Transmitter
Ranges Down to 0.1˝ w.c., Low Cost, ±0.4% Accuracy, 4 to 20 mA Output
.312 TYP
[7.9]

.078 TYP
[1.9]
1.19
1.88 [4.8] OD [30] 5.06
BARBED FITTING [129]
TYP 2 PLACES 4.56
[116]

0.59
1.62 [15]
[41] 0.39 TYP
[9.8] 1.66
1.81 [42] 2.75
[46] [70]

Series 677 Differential Pressure Transmitters are designed to SPECIFICATIONS Span and Zero Adjustments:
measure pressures as low as 0.1˝ w.c. with ±0.4% accuracy. Use Series Service: Air and nonconductive, Externally accessible
677 for building energy management systems, environmental pollu- noncorrosive gases. potentiometers, noninteractive,
tion control, oven pressurization, lab and fume hood control, HVAC ±10% F.S. adjustment.
Wetted Materials: Brass.
and VAV applications. The transmitter features 10 psid overpressure, Response Time: 250 msec max-
Accuracy: ±0.4% full scale (RSS). imum.
reverse polarity protection and EMI/RFI protection. Internal regula- Temperature Limits: 0 to 175°F
tion permits use with unregulated DC power supplies. Loop Resistance: 0 to 800Ω
(-18 to 79°C). (calibrated using 250Ω load @ 24
MODELS Pressure Limits: 5 times full scale VDC).
or 10 psi, (whichever is greater). Electrical Connections: Three
Model Number Range Model Number Range
Thermal Effects: <±0.033% F.S. screw terminals.
677-1 0 to 0.1˝ w.c. 677-7 0 to 5˝ w.c. over 40 to 100°F range. Process Connection: 3/16˝ O.D.
677-2 0 to 0.25˝w.c. 677-8 0 to 10˝ w.c. Power Requirements: 9 to 30 barbed brass pressure fitting for
677-3 0 to 0.5˝ w.c. 677-9 0 to 15˝ w.c. VDC. 1/4˝ push-on tubing.
677-4 0 to 1˝ w.c. 677-10 0 to 25˝ w.c. Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC, Housing: Fire retardant glass-
677-5 0 to 2.5˝ w.c. 677-11 0 to 50˝ w.c. 2-wire. filled polyester.
677-6 0 to 3˝ w.c. 677-12 0 to 100˝ w.c.
Weight: 10 oz (283 g).
Agency Approvals: CE.
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 146
p147 7/24/06 11:41 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
668 Differential Pressure Transmitter
Ranges from 0 to 0.25 in. w.c., Overpressure Protection to 10 psig, ±1% Accuracy
Ø5/32 [3.97]
MOUNTING HOLE
3/16 [4.76] TYP 2 PLACES
FITTING
HIGH
3-1/2 1 2-3/4 3-5/32
[88.90] [25.40] [69.85] [80.16]
LOW
_ +
COM OUT EXC

1-41/64 6-32 SCREW 3/8

[41.67] W/TERMINAL WASHER [9.53] 1-7/8
[47.63]

SPECIFICATIONS Supply Voltage: 12-30 VDC.

Our low cost Series 668 Differential Pressure Transmitter is capa- Service: Air and non-conductive Output: 4 to 20 mA, 2-wire.
ble of measuring low pressures with a ±1% accuracy — ideally suited for gases. Zero and Span Adjust: ±1 mA,
proper building pressurization and air flow control. Transmitters can with- Accuracy: ±1% of full scale (RSS) non-interactive.
stand up to 10 psig overpressure with no damage to the unit. Variable (includes non-linearity, hysteresis, and Response Time: <60 msec.
non-repeatability). Loop Resistance: 0-800 ohms.
capacitance sensor design provides excellent sensitivity and long-term sta- Electrical Connection: Terminal
Temperature Limits:
bility. Compact, lightweight design makes installation simple and easy. Operating: 0 to 150°F (-18 to 65°C), strip.
Units also feature reverse-polarity protection. Storage: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C). Pressure Connection: 3/16 ˝ O.D. fit-
Pressure Limits: 10 psig ting for 1/4˝ I.D. tubing.
(0.7 kg/cm2). Housing: Fire retardant glass filled
Compensated Temperature polyester.
Range: 0 to 150°F (-18 to 65°C). Weight: 3 oz (85 g).
Thermal Effects: 0.033% FS/°F Agency Approvals: CE.
(0.018% FS/°C).
MODELS
Model Range Model Range MODELS - Bi-Directional Models
Number* Number* Model Model
Range Range
668-1 0 to 0.25 in. w.c. 668-5 0 to 5.0 in. w.c. Number* Number*
668-2 0 to 0.5 in. w.c. 668-6 0 to 10 in. w.c. 668-10 0 to ±0.1 in. w.c. 668-14 0 to ±2.5 in. w.c.
668-3 0 to 1 in. w.c. 668-7 0 to 25 in. w.c. 668-11 0 to ±0.25 in. w.c. 668-15 0 to ±5 in. w.c.
668-4 0 to 2.5 in. w.c. 668-8 0 to 50 in. w.c. 668-12 0 to ±0.5 in. w.c. 668-16 0 to ±10 in. w.c.
668-9 0 to 100 in. w.c. 668-13 0 to ±1 in. w.c. 668-17 0 to ±25 in. w.c.
*Also available with optional conduit cover. To order add “C” to part number, i.e. 668-18 0 to ±50 in. w.c.
668C-1. Consult factory for additional information.

Series
646 Differential Pressure Transducer
Low Cost, Ranges from ±0.5˝ w.c., Voltage Output
.600 [15.2]
Ø.150 [3.81] X THRU

OUT Ø1.950 2.200 2.500

(–)LO
UP

GND
IN [49.5] [55.9] [63.5]

.650
[16.5] .150 [3.81]

.920 1.020
[23.4] [25.9]
1.290 1.650
[32.8] [41.9] .370 [9.4]

Low cost Series 646 Pressure Transducer is designed for use with SPECIFICATIONS Thermal Effects: Zero Temp
air and inert gases and can accurately measure differential pressure down Service: Compatible gas and air. Effects: ±1.5% FS (>2.0" H2O);
to ±0.5˝ w.c. The transducer utilizes a fast response capacitive sensor and Wetted Materials: Graphite filled, ±3.0% FS (≤2.0" H2O).
nylon housing, 96% alumina Span Temp Effects: ±1.5% FS
is temperature compensated for stable output. Units provide an amplified (>2.0" H2O); ±4.0% FS (≤2.0" H2O).
voltage output signal ideal for VAV systems, filter monitoring, HVAC fan ceramic sensor, silicone seal.
Accuracy: Non-linearity: ±0.5% FS Power Requirements: 4.75 to 8
control, building pressurization and leak detection systems. VDC.
max. Hysteresis and Repeatability:
±0.05% FS max. Output Signal: 0.25 to 4.0 ±0.08
Temperature Limits: Operating: VDC @ 5.0V supply (0.5 to 4.25
MODELS 14 to 140°F (–10 to 60°C). ±0.12 VDC for ±0.5" range).
Pressure Limits: Line Pressure: 1 Response Time: 15 msec @ 63%
Model Model psi. Overload Pressure: High side: FS step response change.
Range Range Output Impedence: <100Ω; short
Number Number 5x rated pressure, Low side: 3x
rated pressure. circuit protected.
646-0 ±0.5˝ w.c 646-5 0 to 5˝ w.c. Electrical Connection: Three
Compensated Temperature
646-1 0 to 1˝ w.c. 646-6 0 to 10˝ w.c. color-coded leads, 24 AWG, 12"
Range: 50 to 104°F (10 to 40°C).
646-2 0 to 2˝ w.c. 646-7 ±5.0˝ w.c. length.
646-3 ±1.0˝ w.c. 646-8 ±10.0˝ w.c. Process Connection: 1/8" or
646-4 ±2.0˝ w.c. 3/16" I.D. tubing.
Weight: 2.5 oz (0.07 kg).

147 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p.148 7/24/06 11:42 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
676 Duct Pressure Transmitter
±1% FS Accuracy, NEMA 4 (IP56) Enclosure, Three Field Selectable Ranges
2.00 2.50
[51] [64]

3.000
[76.20]
5.000
[127.00]

3.000
[76.20]

2.250 8.000 2.686

[57.15] [203.20] [68.22]
3.250 4.000
[82.55] [101.60]
DUCT MOUNTING: Drill 7/16˝(11 mm) dia. hole

Lower installation costs with the Series 676 Duct Pressure SPECIFICATIONS
Transmitter. The Series 676 Transmitter incorporates a pressure sen- Service: Clean dry air or any inert gas.
sor and a static pressure tip into a single unit, eliminating the need for Wetted Materials: Aluminum alloy and nylon.
costly control panels and reducing installation time. Each transmitter Accuracy: ±1% FS (includes non-linearity, hysteresis and non-
repeatability).
has three (3) field selectable pressure ranges. Temperature Limits: 0 to 175°F (-18 to 80°C).
A micro-machined glass-on-silicon capacitance sensor provides a high Pressure Limits: 10 psid (0.7 kg/cm2).
level, fully conditioned and temperature compensated 4-20 mA output. Compensated Temperature Range: 25 to 150°F (-4 to 65°C).
Rugged NEMA 4 (IP56) enclosure with gasketed cover protects the Thermal Errors: ±0.0125%/°F (0.02%/°C).
electronics and sensing element from condensation, corrosion and Power Requirements: 12-40 VDC.
dust. Units also feature short circuit and reverse polarity protection. Output Signal: 4-20 mA, 2-wire.
Zero & Span Adjustment: ±15%, non-interactive.
MODELS Response Time: 60 msec.
Loop Resistance: 3000 ohms max. @ 40 VDC.
Model Number Range (inches w.c.) Stability: <1% FS/year.
Electrical Connections: Unpluggable screw terminal block.
676-11 0 to 5.0, 0 to 2.5, 0 to 1.25 Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ (22.3 mm) knockout.
Enclosure: Cold-Rolled Steel, NEMA 4 (IP56).
676-21 0 to 15.0, 0 to 7.5, 0 to 3.75 Weight: 1.0 lb (.45 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE.

Series
674 Differential Pressure Transmitter
±1% FS Accuracy, Up to Six Field Selectable Ranges, 10 psid Overpressure
4.000 2.200
[101.60] [55.88]

3.003
[76.28]
6.006
5.000 [152.55]
[127.00]
3.003
[76.78]

3.250 2.50 2.00

[82.55] [64] [51]
NEMA 4 Enclosure
2.658
Shown. [67.51]

Measure and control building/room pressure, air flow, duct pressure or fil- SPECIFICATIONS
ter drop with the Series 674 Differential Pressure Transmitter. These versa- Service: Clean dry air or any inert Supply Voltage: 12-40 VDC.
tile transmitters provide up to six field selectable direct or compound pressure gas.
ranges. Additional features include 10 psid overpressure without zero shift, Output: 4-20 mA, 2-wire.
non-interactive zero and span adjustment, temperature compensation, short Wetted Materials: Brass hose Zero and Span Adjustment: ±15%,
circuit and reverse polarity protection. barbs, silicone. non-interactive.
Accuracy: ±1% FS (includes non- Response Time: 60 msec.
MODELS linearity, hysteresis and non- Loop Resistance: 1600Ω @40VDC.
Model Range repeatability).
Enclosure Electrical Connections:
Number (inches of w.c.) Stability: Less than 1% FS/year. Unpluggable screw terminal block.
674-414 NEMA 4 (IP56) Temperature Limits: Pressure Connections: Barbed for
0 to 0.1, ±0.05
674-114 Panel mount 0 to 175°F (-18 to 80°C), 10 to 90% 1/4˝ O.D. 5/32˝ I.D. tubing.
674-424 NEMA 4 (IP56) 0 to 1.0, 0 to 0.5, 0 to 0.25, RH, non-condensing. Enclosure: Models 674-4XX: Cold-
674-124 Panel mount ±0.5,±0.25, ±0.125 Pressure Limits: 10 psid (0.69 bar). Rolled Steel, NEMA 4 (IP56); Models
674-434 NEMA 4 (IP56) 0 to 5.0, 0 to 2.5, 0 to 1.25, Compensated Temperature 674-1XX: Panel Mount.
674-134 Panel mount ±2.5, ±1.25, ±0.625 Range: 25 to 150°F (-4 to 65°C). Weight: Models 674-4XX: 1.0 lb (.45
Thermal Errors: ±0.0125%/°F kg); Models 674-1XX: 0.5 lb (.25 kg).
674-444 NEMA 4 (IP56) 0 to 30, 0 to 15, 0 to 7.5,
±15.0, ±7.5, ±3.75 (0.02%/°C). Agency Approvals: CE.
674-144 Panel mount

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 148
p149 7/24/06 11:43 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
608 Differential Pressure Transmitter
Ranges Down to 0.1˝ w.c., Intrinsically Safe, NEMA 4X
1/4
[6.35]

3-1/4
[82.55]
4-1/2
[107.95] 5-1/32
[127.79]

1/2 NPT
TYP 2 PLACES

2-11/16 5/8
[68.26] [15.88]

3 1-1/2
[76.20] [38.10]

1/4 NPT
TYP 2 PLACES

The Series 608 Differential Pressure Transmitters convert posi- SPECIFICATIONS

tive, negative (vacuum), or differential pressures of clean, dry air or Service: Clean/dry air and compatible, combustible gases.
other non-conductive, non-corrosive gases into a standard two wire, 4- (see Agency Approvals for FM ratings).
Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
20 mA output signal. The use of an ultra thin silicon diaphragm
Accuracy: ±0.5% or ±0.25% full scale.
enables precision measurement of differential pressures as low as 0.1˝ Stability: ±0.5% F.S./year.
of w.c. while withstanding high static working pressures up to 100 psig Pressure Limits: 100 psig (6.89 bar); 15 psid (1.03 bar).
(6.89 bar). The Series 608 transmitters are FM approved intrinsically Temperature Limits: -20 to 185°F (-28 to 85°C).
safe for use in the specified hazardous locations when used with an Compensated Temperature Range: 0 to 160°F (-18 to 71°C).
Thermal Effect: 0.5% Accuracy: ±0.02% F.S./°F;
approved intrinsic safety barrier. The rugged NEMA 4X, stainless
0.25% Accuracy: ±0.01% F.S./°F.
steel housing makes this transmitter ideal for use in industrial and Power Requirements: 12 to 36 VDC (2-wire).
process plant environments. Output Signal: 4-20 mA DC.
Zero and Span Adustments: Potentiometers for zero and
APPLICATIONS span.
Response Time: 250 ms.
• Lab Fume Hood Control
Loop Resistance: DC: 0-1045 ohms maximum.
• Clean Room Applications Current Consumption: 4-20 mA.
• Flow Measurements & Control Electrical Connections: Screw terminal: Two 1/2˝ female NPT
• Filter Monitoring conduit.
• Furnace Draft Measurement Process Connections: Two 1/4˝ female NPT.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66).
• Process Control
Mounting Orientation: Not position sensitive.
Weight: 2 lb (0.9 kg).
MODELS
Agency Approvals: FM approved intrinsically safe for use in
Model Range Model Range Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G;
Number (in. w.c.) Number (in. w.c.)
Class III, Div. 1 when wired with approved intrinsically safe barrier.
608-00 0-0.1 608-07 0-25.0 Entity parameters: V = 36 VDC; I = 250 mA; C =12 nF; L =0 mH.
max max I I

608-10* 0-0.1 608-17* 0-25.0

608-01 0-0.25 608-00B 0.1-0-0.1
608-11* 0-0.25 608-10B* 0.1-0-0.1
608-02 0-0.5 608-01B 0.25-0-0.25 ACCESSORIES
608-12* 0-0.5 608-11B* 0.25-0-0.25 MTL5041, Intrinsically Safe Galvanic Isolator
608-03 0-1.0 608-02B 0.5-0-0.5 MTL7706, Intrinsically Safe Zener Barrier
608-13* 0-1.0 608-12B* 0.5-0-0.5
608-04 0-2.0 608-03B 1.0-0-1.0
608-14* 0-2.0 608-13B* 1.0-0-1.0
608-05 0-5.0 608-04B 2.0-0-2.0
608-15* 0-5.0 608-14B* 2.0-0-2.0
608-06 0-10.0 608-05B 5.0-0-5.0
608-16* 0-10.0 608-15B* 5.0-0-5.0
*Models have a ±0.25% F.S. accuracy.

149 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p150 7/24/06 11:45 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
DCT1000 Dust Collector Timer Controller
Modular Design, User Friendly, Up to 22 Channels
2-3/4
[69.85]

6-1/4
[158.75]

6-7/8
[174.62]

1/16
8-1/4 [1.59]
8-3/4 1-13/16
[209.55] [46.04]
[222.25]

Simplify your on-demand cleaning requirements with the SPECIFICATIONS Off Time Accuracy: ±1% of the
Series DCT1000 Dust Collector Timer Controller. Relying on one DCT1000 Timer Controller: value or ±50 msec, whichever is
Output Channels: 6, 10, & 22 greater.
timer board for on demand and continuous cleaning applications, Weight: 1 lb 3.0 oz (538.6 g).
channels. Expandable to 255 chan-
the DCT1000 eliminates external devices such as pressure switch- nels using DCT1122 & DCT1110 Agency Approvals: UL, cUL.
es, relays and timers. channel expander boards.
Offering a universal power supply, the DCT1000 accepts 85-270 Power Requirements: 85 to 270 DCP Pressure Module:
VAC/VDC at either 50 or 60 Hz for both domestic and overseas VAC, 50 or 60 Hz. Pressure Ranges: 10˝ w.c. or 20˝
Power Consumption: 5 W. w.c.
requirements. The units modular design allows for use as a con- Temperature Limits: -40 to 140°F
Solenoid Supply: 3A maximum
tinuous cleaning control or on-demand cleaning control using the per channel. (-40 to 60°C).
optional plug-in pressure module. A 4-20 mA process output is inte- Fuse: 3A @ 250 VAC. Low voltage Pressure Limit: 10 psi (68.95 kPa).
gral to the plug-in pressure module, eliminating the need to pur- control circuitry is isolated from the Pressure Limit (differential): 10
chase an expensive process transmitter. Mounting holes are stan- line voltage for system safety. psi (68.95 kPa).
dard to other dust collector controllers used in the industry, allow- Temperature Limits: -40 to 140°F Accuracy: +/- 1.5% F.S. @ 73°F
(-40 to 60°C). (22.8°C).
ing you to use the DCT1000 for existing installations. Output Signal: 4-20 mA.
Storage Temperature Limits: -40
In addition, the DCT1000 is the same size for 6, 10 and 22 chan- to 176°F (-40 to 80°C). Alarm Contacts: 1.5A inductive
nels. One board size allows the standardization on one enclosure. On Time: 10 msec to 600 msec, load, 3A resistive load @ 30 VAC or
Latching relays and jumper wires are eliminated for large instal- 10 msec steps. 40 VDC.
lations requiring channel expanders. Each channel expander con- On Time Accuracy: +/- 10 msec. Process Connections: Two
nected is automatically detected. Off Time: 1 second to 255 sec- barbed connections for use with
onds, 1 second steps. 1/8˝ (3.18 mm) or 3/16˝ (4.76 mm)
I.D. tubing.
Weight: 5.5 oz (155.9 g).

OPTIONS
WP – Weatherproof Housing Only
WPP – Weatherproof Housing with
Pressure Ports
WPPS – Weatherproof Housing with
Pressure Ports, Three Position
Rotary Switch Installed
Model DCAC02
EXPL – Explosion-proof Housing DCT in optional NEMA DCT in optional Cable Connection:
Multiple Boards stacked in enclosure 4/4X weatherproof Explosionproof For connecting
enclosure. Enclosure. multiple boards.
ACCESSORIES
DCA, Channel expander cable available
in 1 ft., 2 ft., and 4 ft. lengths
Master Board
Series 1000, Process Indicator Stacked with
Series 1010, Process Indicator with Alarm Channel Expander.

MODELS
Model Number Description No. of Channels D.P. Range
DCT1022 Master Controller 22
DCT1010 Master Controller 10
DCT1006 Master Controller 6
DCT1122 Channel Expander 22
DCT1110 Channel Expander 10
DCP200A Pressure Module 20˝ w.c.
DCP100A Pressure Module 10˝ w.c.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 150
p151 7/24/06 11:53 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
DCT1000DC Dust Collector Timer Controller
For Low Voltage Applications
2-3/4
[69.85]
PROCESS (IN H2O)
LAST OUTPUT
TIME OFF (SEC)
TIME ON (M SEC)
SETUP STATUS HIGH LIMIT
UP RUN LOW LIMIT
ALARM HIGH ALARM

DOWN RESET LOW ALARM

CYCLE DELAY (MIN)
MANUAL
DOWN TIME CYCLES
SELECT
OVERRIDE (MIN)
AUTO ALARM RESET
(SEC) 6-1/4
[158.75]

6-7/8
[174.62]

1/16
8-1/4 [1.59]
[209.55] 8-3/4
[222.25]

Simplify your on-demand cleaning requirements with the SPECIFICATIONS DCP Pressure Module:
Series DCT1000DC Dust Collector Timer Controller. Relying on DCT1000DC Timer Controller: Pressure Ranges: 10˝ w.c. or 20˝
Output Channels: 6, 10, & 22 w.c.
one timer board for on demand and continuous cleaning applica- Temperature Limits: -40 to
channels.
tions, the DCT1000DC eliminates external devices such as pres- Power Requirements: 10 - 30 140°F (-40 to 60°C).
sure switches, relays and timers. VDC. Pressure Limit: 10 psi (68.95
The DCT1000DC accepts 10-30 VDC power. The units modular Solenoid Supply: 3A maximum kPa).
design allows for use as a continuous cleaning control or on- per channel. Pressure Limit (differential): 10
Fuse: 3A @ 250 VAC. psi (68.95 kPa).
demand cleaning control using the optional DCP plug-in pressure Temperature Limits: -40 to Accuracy: +/- 1.5% F.S. @ 73°F
module. A 4-20 mA process output is integral to the DCP pressure 140°F (-40 to 60°C). (22.8°C).
module, eliminating the need to purchase an expensive process Storage Temperature Limits: Output Signal: 4-20 mA.
transmitter. A solenoid fault light on the DCT1000DC notifies the -40 to 176°F (-40 to 80°C). Alarm Contacts: 1.5A inductive
On Time: 10 msec to 600 msec, load, 3A resistive load @ 30 VAC
operator when a solenoid valve fails to activate properly. or 40 VDC.
10 msec steps.
The DCT1000DC is the same size for 6, 10 and 22 channels. One On Time Accuracy: +/-10 msec. Process Connections: Two
board size allows the standardization on one enclosure. For larger Off Time: 1 second to 255 sec- barbed connections for use with
installations the DCT1000DC may be expanded by connecting mul- onds, 1 second steps. 1/8˝ (3.18 mm) or 3/16˝ (4.76 mm)
tiple boards in series with the DCA cable. Off Time Accuracy: ±1% of the I.D. tubing.
value or ±50 msec, whichever is Weight: 5.5 oz (155.9 g).
greater. Agency Approvals: CE.
Weight: 1 lb 3.0 oz (538.6 g).

OPTIONS
WP – Weatherproof Housing Only
WPP – Weatherproof Housing with Pressure Ports
WPPS – Weatherproof Housing with
Pressure Ports, Three Position
Rotary Switch Installed
EXPL – Explosion-proof Housing
Multiple Boards stacked in enclosure Model DCAC02
DCT in optional NEMA DCT in optional Cable Connection:
4/4X weatherproof Explosion proof
ACCESSORIES enclosure. Enclosure.
For connecting
DCA, Channel expander cable available multiple boards.
in 1 ft., 2 ft., and 4 ft. lengths
Series 1000, Process Indicator
Series 1010, Process Indicator with Alarm DCT expanded with
multiple boards.

MODELS
Model Number Description No. of Channels D.P. Range
DCT1022DC Master Controller 22
DCT1010DC Master Controller 10
DCT1006DC Master Controller 6
DCP200A Pressure Module 20˝ w.c.
DCP100A Pressure Module 10˝ w.c.

151 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p152 7/24/06 2:56 PM Page 1

Pressure
Series
DCT500 Low Cost Timer Controller
Compact, Easy to Use; 4, 6 or 10 Channels
TIME OFF 100 250 300 TIME ON CONNECT JUMPER TO LAST
75 125 CHANNEL USED
200 350 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
50 150
150 400

DWYER INSTRUMENTS
25 R31 R29
175 100 450

MICHIGAN CITY, IN
HIGH 1 SEC 200 50 500
LIMIT
mSEC

TO 5 IN. LB. REPLACE FUSE WITH TYPE 3AG FAST

60C/75C. USE 14-22 GA COPPER ONLY FOR LINE
AND LOAD CONNECTIONS. TORQUE TERMINALS
COM

ACTING 3 AMP 250V ONLY. FAILURE TO COMPLY

ENCLOSED. USE NEC CLASS 1 WIRING RATED
LOW

50/60 HZ SINGLE PHASE. THIS UNIT MUST BE

LIMIT

WITH THESE REQUIREMENTS WILL VOID

4-1/4

LINE INPUT RATING 120 VAC +10%-15%

POWER
ON

INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

D16
[107.95]

MANUFACTURES WARRANTEE.
FVN 1.0.0
4-7/8
[123.8]

05-443179-00
VER 0
WIRE STRIP GAUGE

0.250 IN. MAX

DO NOT USE SLOW BLOW FUSES
LINE VOLTAGE
102 VAC TO 132 VAC L1 L2 SOL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MAX 50-60 HZ COM OUTPUTS (300 VA MAX)

6-1/4 1/16
[158.75] 6-3/4 [1.59]
[171.45] 1/2
1-21/64 [12.70]
[33.73]

Ideal for pneumatic conveying systems, the Series DCT500 Low Cost SPECIFICATIONS
Timer Controller is designed to provide continuous or on-demand Output Channels: 4, 6, & 10 channels.
cleaning for receivers and pulse jet systems. Available in either 4, 6 or Power Requirements: 102 to 132 VAC 50 or 60 Hz.
10 channels, each unit is the same size, minimizing enclosure space and Power Consumption: 2.5 W.
reducing overall system installation cost. Solenoid Supply: 3A max. per channel.
The DCT500 is simple and easy to use. Time-On and Time-Off settings Fuse: Type 3 AG, 3A @ 250 VAC.
are selected using two potentiometers. High Limit and Low Limit con- Temperature Limits: -40 to 176°F (-40 to 80°C).
trol inputs are provided for use with on demand systems. Storage Temperature Limits: -40 to 176°F (-40 to 80°C).
For added safety, the control circuitry including the control inputs are On Time: 50 msec to 500 msec.
isolated from the line voltage. On Time Accuracy: ±10 msec.
To meet your system requirements, an optional weatherproof enclo- Off Time: 1 second to 200 seconds.
sure is available. For on demand systems, a Dwyer Series A3000 Off Time Accuracy: ±5% of setting.
Photohelic® gage or Series 1800 Pressure Switch may be used with the Weight: 9 oz (255 g).
DCT500. Agency Approvals: UL, cUL.

MODELS
Model Description No. of OPTIONS
Number Channels WP – Weatherproof Housing Only
DCT504 Timer Controller 4 L – Mounting Bracket for Field Retrofits:
DCT506 Timer Controller 6 8-1/4 (209.55) x 6-1/4 (158.75)
DCT510 Timer Controller 10

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 152
p153 7/24/06 11:55 AM Page 1

Pressure
Series
DCT500DC Low Cost Timer Controller
For Low Voltage Applications
TIME OFF 100 250 300 TIME ON CONNECT JUMPER TO LAST
75 125 CHANNEL USED
200 350 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
50 150
150 400

DWYER INSTRUMENTS
25 R31 R29
175 100 450

MICHIGAN CITY, IN
HIGH 1 SEC 200 50 500
LIMIT
mSEC

TO 5 IN. LB. REPLACE FUSE WITH TYPE 3AG FAST

60C/75C. USE 14-22 GA COPPER ONLY FOR LINE
AND LOAD CONNECTIONS. TORQUE TERMINALS
COM

ACTING 3 AMP 250V ONLY. FAILURE TO COMPLY

ENCLOSED. USE NEC CLASS 1 WIRING RATED
LOW

50/60 HZ SINGLE PHASE. THIS UNIT MUST BE

LIMIT

WITH THESE REQUIREMENTS WILL VOID

4-1/4

LINE INPUT RATING 120 VAC +10%-15%

POWER
ON

INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

D16
[107.95]

MANUFACTURES WARRANTEE.
FVN 1.0.0
4-7/8
[123.8]

05-443179-00
VER 0
WIRE STRIP GAUGE

0.250 IN. MAX

DO NOT USE SLOW BLOW FUSES
LINE VOLTAGE
102 VAC TO 132 VAC L1 L2 SOL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MAX 50-60 HZ COM OUTPUTS (300 VA MAX)

6-1/4 1/16
[158.75] 6-3/4 [1.59]
[171.45] 1/2
1-21/64 [12.70]
[33.73]

Ideal for pneumatic conveying systems, the Series DCT500DC Low SPECIFICATIONS
Cost Timer Controller is designed to provide continuous or on-demand Output Channels: 4, 6, & 10 channels.
cleaning for 10-35 volt powered receivers and pulse jet systems. Power Requirements: 10 to 35 VDC.
Available in either 4, 6 or 10 channels, each unit is the same size, min- Power Consumption: 0.6 W.
imizing enclosure space and reducing overall system installation cost. Solenoid Supply: 3A max. per channel.
The DCT500DC is simple and easy to use. Time-On and Time-Off set- Fuse: Type 3 AG, 3A @ 250 VAC.
tings are selected using two potentiometers. High Limit and Low Temperature Limits: -40 to 176°F (-40 to 80°C).
Limit control inputs are provided for use with on demand systems. Storage Temperature Limits: -40 to 176°F (-40 to 80°C).
For added safety, the control circuitry including the control inputs are On Time: 50 msec to 500 msec.
isolated from the line voltage. On Time Accuracy: ±10 msec.
To meet your system requirements, an optional weatherproof enclo- Off Time: 1 second to 200 seconds.
sure is available. For on demand systems, a Dwyer Series A3000 Off Time Accuracy: ±5% of setting.
Photohelic gage or Series 1800 Pressure Switch may be used with the
® Weight: 9 oz (255 g).
DCT500DC.

MODELS
Model Description No. of OPTIONS
Number Channels WP – Weatherproof Housing Only
DCT504DC Timer Controller 4 L – Mounting Bracket for Field Retrofits:
DCT506DC Timer Controller 6 8-1/4 (209.55) x 6-1/4 (158.75)
DCT510DC Timer Controller 10

153 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p154 7/24/06 11:56 AM Page 1

Pressure
Related Products for Pressure Control
Series GG Gage Guard SPECIFICATIONS
Protecting pressure or vacuum instru- Maximum Pressure: Liquids: 160 psi
ments from clogging, corrosion, or (11 bar) @ 70 to 185°F (21 to 85°C);
damage, the Series GG Gage Guard Gases: 100psi (6.9 bar) @ 70 to 100°F
provides a protective barrier between (21 to 38°C) and 30 psi (2.1 bar) @ 100
to 185°F (38 to 85°C).
the process fluid and the instrument.
Accuracy: ±4%.
The hermetically-sealed uni-body pro- Maximum Temperature: 185°F (85°C).
tects from the possibility of leaking. Wetted Parts: Glass-filled
Glass-filled Polypropylene housing is Polypropylene housing, Buna-N or
suitable for most inorganic chemicals Fluoroelastomer diaphragm.
and temperatures up to 185°F (85°C). Dimensions: 1/4˝ female NPT instru-
ment side; 1/2˝ male NPT system side;
1-3/8˝ (35 mm) diameter.
GG1 (Buna-N diaphragm)
GG2 (Fluoroelastomer diaphragm)

Series PS Pressure Snubber

SPECIFICATIONS
Designed to protect pressure instru- Maximum Pressure: Brass: 10,000
mentation by dampening surges and psi (689 bar), SS: 15,000 psi (1034 bar).
pulsations and assuring steady aver- Filter Disc Material: AISI 316 SS.
age pressure readings. Snubbers are Approx. Micron Rating: Air & gases:
available in a variety of pore sizes for 2-5µ; water & oils (30-225 SSU): 10µ.
use with gases, water, and oils. Dimensions: 1/4˝ NPT: 3/4˝ (19 mm)
hex size, 1.5˝ (38 mm) length.
MODELS
Model No. Service Construction
PS114 Air & Gases Brass 1/8˝ NPT
PS214 Air & Gases SS 1/8˝ NPT
PS122 Water & Oils Brass 1/4˝ NPT
PS124 Air & Gases Brass 1/4˝ NPT
PS222 Water & Oils SS 1/4˝ NPT
PS224 Air & Gases SS 1/4˝ NPT
PS225 Pulsating Gas SS 1/4˝ NPT

Model A-700 Power Supply SPECIFICATIONS

Economical and reliable power supply is AC Input: 100/120/220/230-240
suitable for powering all Dwyer pressure, VAC ±10%, 47-63 Hz.
temperature or air velocity transmitters. DC Output: 24-28 VDC regulated.
Inexpensive, open-frame design allows con- Maximum Current Output: 500
venient access to input/output solder ter- mA (derated to 450 mA @ 50 Hz.
minals. Auxiliary inputs are selectable for operation)
operation from power sources found world- Operating Temperature: 32 to
wide. Compact size eases enclosure instal- 122°F (0 to 50°C).
lations. External Fuse Required: 0.5 Amp
for 100-120 VAC, 0.25 Amp for 220-
240 VAC.
A-700 (0.5 Amp) .................................... Dimensions: 4-7/8"H x 4"W x
A-700-2 (2 Amp) ................................... 1-5/8"D
A-700-4 (4.8 Amp) ................................ Weight: 2 lb.

Digital Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 287-302

See Also: Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 357, 310, 389
Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 389
I/P Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 442

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 154
pg155 7/21/06 11:00 AM Page 1

Flow
Table of Contents Series VASP Visi-Float® Flowswitch/Power
Flow

Introduction to Flowmeters and Converter Pak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

Sight Flow Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Series FS Flowmeter w/ Flow Limit Switch . . . . . . . .196
Typical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Introduction to Vane Operated Flow Switch . . . . . . .197
Conversion Curves for Gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Typical Flow Switch Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Series MM Mini-Master® Flowmeter . . . . . . . . .159-160 Series V4 Flotect® Vane Operated
Series RM Rate-Master® Flowmeter . . . . . . . . .161-162 Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199-200
Series VFA & VFB Visi-Float® Flowmeter . . . . . .163-164 Series V6 Flotect® Mini-Size Flow Switches . . .201-202
Series VFC & VFCII Visi-Float® Flowmeter . . . . . . . .165 Model V10 & V11 Flotect® Mini-Size Flow Switch . . .203
Series UV Ultra-View™ Polysulfone Flowmeter . .166-167 Series V8 Flotect® Vane Operated Flow Switch . . . .204
Series VA Variable Area Glass Flowmeters . . . . . . . .168 Model FS-2 Vane Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Series VA PTFE/Glass Flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Model 530 Air Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Series TVA All Fluoropolymer Flowmeters . . . . . . . . .169 Series V12 Flotect® Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Series VA-K Variable Area Flowmeter Kits . . . . . . . .170 Series P5 PVC Shuttle Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Series DR Direct Reading Glass Flowmeters . . . . . .171 Series P8 High Pressure Brass Flow Switch . . . . . . .208
Series DR4 High Flow Glass Flowmeters . . . . . . . . .172 Series P1 Explosion-Proof Brass Flow Switch . . . . .209
Series VFF Visi-Float® Flowsetter Flowmeter . . . . . .172 Series P2 Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Series MTF Multitube Flow Systems . . . . . . . . .173-174 Series P3 Polypropylene Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Series RSF Rotatable Scale Flowmeter . . . . . . . . . .175 Series P4 PPS Piston Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Series IF Industrial Direct Reading Flowmeter . . . . .176 Series G9 Globe Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Series VAT Variable Area Fluoropolymer Flowmeter .176 Series GVS Globe Valve Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Models F222 & F451 Liquid/Particle Filters . . . . . . .177 Series AFS Adjustable Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Regulator Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Series TFS Thermal Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Model F195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Series TSP Liquid Flow Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Series HF In-Line Flow Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Series TDS Thermal Dispersion Flow Switch . . . . . .213
Series OP Orifice Plate Flow Meter . . . . . . . . . .179-180 Series TDC Remote Flow Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Series RMV Rate-Master® Dial
Type Flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Flow Meters, Indicators
Series RMVII Rate-Master® Dial and Switches pgs 155-214
Type Flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Series DMF Digital Mass Flow Controller . . . . . . . . .182
Series GFM Gas Mass Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Series GFC Gas Mass Flow Controllers . . . . . . . . . .184
Anderson Midwest Sight Flow Indicators . . . . .185-186
Model 500 Sight Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Model 550 Sight Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Series SFI-100T Sight Flow Indicator/Transmitter . . .188
Series SF Sight Flow Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Series SF2 Sight Flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Series TTM Electronic Totalizing Meter . . . . . . . . . . .190
Series TF Turbine Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Series SFI-800 Sight Flow
Indicator/Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191-192
Model TM2 Flow Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Series GFT Flow Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Series HFT In-Line Flow Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Series HFO In-Line Flow Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

155 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg156 7/21/06 11:00 AM Page 1

Flowmeters and Sight Flow Indicators

Flow
How flowmeters work: Laminar flow — In flowmeters where the orifice area is extremely
small, the conditions result in smooth flow, or laminar flow. Other fac-
Variable area flowmeters are basically vertical internally tapered tors which contribute to the transition to laminar flow are low velocity
tubes mounted with the large end at the top. A float or rotor with an (often associated with a lightweight float), low density or specific grav-
outer diameter slightly less than the minimum diameter of the tube is ity and high viscosity of the flowing fluid. When laminar flow condi-
placed inside the tube. The clearance space between the float and the tions prevail, a greatly expanded scale is usually required. Meters
tube forms an annular passage or orifice. As the tube is tapered, the operating in the laminar flow area are very difficult to manufacture and
area of this orifice is larger when the float is near the top than it is calibrate to the degree of accuracy usually expected of variable area
when the float is near the bottom. By connecting the tube into a fluid flowmeters.
flow line so flow direction is from bottom to top, the float will move up-
Turbulent flow — Most variable area flowmeters operate in the tur-
ward and be supported at a point where the orifice is just large enough
bulent flow range which occurs below sonic velocities and above the
to pass the fluid flowing through the system.
laminar flow range. In turbulent flow, the flowing fluid particles move
in random paths within the stream — rather than in violent shock waves
as in sonic flow or very smooth parallel paths as in laminar flow. In tur-
bulent flow, variables follow the relationships shown in the curves on
Page 158. These curves are quite accurate for small changes in pressure
and specific gravity. For large changes or where a change in viscosity is
involved, it is much better to have the flowmeter recalibrated for the
specific conditions under which it will be used.
Reynolds Numbers — Reynolds Numbers are useful in the study of
fluid behavior and are quite helpful in separating laminar and turbulent
flow. The Reynolds Number of a fluid flow system is described as a di-
mensionless index. It is equivalent to the diameter of the orifice in feet
times the average velocity of the fluid in feet per second times the den-
sity of the fluid in pounds per cubic foot divided by the absolute viscos-
Several Forces are involved — The precise position of the float ity in pounds per second foot. A system operating with a Reynolds
within the tube is determined by several forces acting on it. These Number of less than 2000 is said to be subject to laminar flow, whereas
forces are: 1. The weight of the float; 2. The velocity pressure of the Reynolds Numbers above 3000 are clearly in the turbulent flow area.
flowing fluid multiplied by the area of the float; 3. Buoyancy of the
float (weight of fluid volume displaced by the float); 4. Viscous aero-
dynamic or hydrodynamic drag of the fluid on the float. The float’s How sight flow indicators work:
weight acts downward — while velocity pressure, buoyancy and drag all A sight flow indicator basically consists of a small housing equipped
act upward on it. with a glass window which is inserted in a run of pipe to observe the
Read-out and scales — By making the tube transparent so that float flow of the fluid in the pipe. To enhance the visibility of the flow, a spin-
position can be seen and by providing a scale along side, we may “read” ner is often incorporated in the indicator. The axis of the spinner is off-
the float position in terms of numbers on the scale. These scale num- set from the center of the flow stream so that fluid impinging on the
bers can be of two types: 1. Of an arbitrary nature (by themselves they spinner vanes causes it to turn. The spinner also aids in the detection
mean nothing, but become meaningful when compared with a calibra- of low flows as well as providing visibility of flow from a distance. In ad-
tion curve) or: 2. They can be precalibrated for direct reading; to show dition, the speed of rotation gives a relative indication of flow velocity.
the actual volume flow (in cfm, cc per minute, etc.) of the fluid for Midwest Sight Flow Indicators are also available with hinged flappers
which the flowmeter is calibrated. instead of spinners to indicate bi-directional flow.
Limiting factors —Although the basic relationship outlined above is Sight flow indicators can be provided with a single window on the front
linear, certain fluid properties tend to modify this relationship. These of the indicator or double windows, one on the front and one on the back
changes are accentuated where the variable orifice formed between of the indicator. Double window units are best when observing the clar-
float and tube becomes either very large or very small. For example . . ity or color of a liquid. Midwest single window units are always
equipped with spinners to provide for observation of clear fluid flows at
Sonic velocity — Where the orifice is particularly large and is com- the lowest cost.
bined with a heavy float, velocities of a gas or other fluid through the Vertical tube-type sight flow indicators consist of a clear glass tube,
orifice area can approach sonic velocity. In this velocity range, reflect- equal to or greater than the diameter of the pipe into which it is in-
ed shock waves cause the float to become unstable, and it will typically serted, and are utilized to observe high flow rates in vertical pipe runs.
hunt from side to side and from top to bottom within the bore. At best, No spinners or other type of detection devices are incorporated in these
this condition makes it impossible to take a reading, and at worst may units. As a result, they offer no significant resistance to flow and there-
even destroy the flowmeter. The addition of flow guides (built into cer- fore provide the lowest pressure drop of any type sight flow indicator.
tain Dwyer® Rate-Master® flowmeters) can often improve the stability Midwest Sight Flow Indicators are available with special materials to
and performance of the system by channeling the flow into multiple meet various applications. Optional materials are available for the seal-
streams that equalize dynamic effects and preventing oscillation of the ing gaskets, spinners, and housings or flanges.
float. This has the net effect of moving the limit of satisfactory opera-
tion upward, and thereby expanding the range and accuracy we can
achieve with any given flowmeter tube.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 156
pg157 7/21/06 11:01 AM Page 1

Typical Applications
Flow

Rate-Master®
Flowmeters
Cable Air Supply Lines Furnace Control Panel

Multi-Column
Visi-Float®
Flowmeter
Conveyor

Test Valves
Dry Air Supply

Manhole Air
Compressor
and
Dryer
Underground Cables

Flowmeters used to check dry air flow protecting cables. Flows of air and gases used in a special furnace are con-
Telephone cables are kept under pressure with dry air for pro- trolled by eleven Rate-Master® flowmeters. This sophisticat-
tection against damage due to moisture. The flow of air to ed conveyor belt furnace is used in manufacturing electronic
each cable is monitored to detect leaks that may develop due devices. The flowmeters provide precise adjustment and
to cable damage. Special multi-column Dwyer® Visi-Float® monitoring of the flows of air and gases into the various por-
flowmeters are widely used in this application. tions of the furnace.
Visi-Float®
VFA Flowmeter

Switchbox Fuel
Engine
Differential
Pressure Switch
Motor Generator
Anderson®
Sight Flow
Indicator

LO Rate-Master® Water
HI Flowmeters Pump Heat Flow
Exchange

Purge Gas Supply

Flowmeters monitor vital purge gas flow to motors, Water cooling and fuel flow to large engines and com-
switchgear, instruments. To purge motors, generators, pressors monitored by Dwyer flowmeters. By precisely in-
switchgear, and industrial instrument cases, Dwyer® flowme- dicating true flow of cooling water to engines, compressors
ters are installed in the supply line to indicate a flow of air, and other machinery, flowmeters permit the operator to ad-
manufactured inert gas, or nitrogen to these devices. The just the proper flow to save water, increase efficiency, and
flowmeters (with valves) allow maintenance personnel to set protect the equipment. Engine fuel flow can be monitored in
the flow quickly and recheck anytime to make sure proper the same way.
flow continues.

Water Tank
(Open or Vented)
Sand
Stone Differential
HI
Pressure
Switch
Cement HI

Magnehelic® Gage

Rate-Master®
Flowmeter
Regulator
Rate-Master® Flowmeters Metering Compressed
Valve Air Supply

Flowmeters on concrete mixer show flow of special ad- Dwyer products measure liquid level. A flowmeter in con-
ditives. This on-site mixer delivers the exact amount and the junction with a constant differential pressure regulator is used
proper formulation required for the specific job. Dwyer® Rate- to keep the sensing line purged of liquid. Changes in liquid
Master® flowmeters permit setting the proper admixture level will affect static head. This will affect internal pressure in
flows to add the specified quantities of accelerators, re- the sensing line, which can be indicated by a Dwyer® Mag-
tarders, air-entraining agents, etc. nehelic® pressure gage.

157 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg158 7/21/06 11:02 AM Page 1

GAS PRESSURE PSIG BELOW ATMOSPHERE

CONVERSION CURVES FOR GASES
-14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0

Flow
10
2
9 4

GAS PRESSURE PSIG ABOVE ATMOSPHERE

6
8 8
10
OBSERVED FLOWMETER READING

7 15

20
6
30

40
5
60
4 80
100

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ACTUAL GAS FLOW CORRECTED FOR PRESSURE*
SPEClFIC GRAVITY OF GAS (REFERRED TO AIR) 2.2 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
10

0.2
9

8
OBSERVED FLOWMETER READING

7
0.1
6

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
EQUIVALENT GAS FLOW CORRECTED FOR SPECIFIC GRAVITY-STD. COND.*

If more convenient, approximate correction factors may be determined using the following formulas.
B. Specific Gravity: Q2 = Q1 X 1
A. Pressure: Q2 = Q1 X P1 X T2 where: Q1 = Observed Flowmeter Reading
= S.G.

where:
= P2 X T1
Q1= Actual or Observed Flowmeter Reading
Q2 = Standard Flow Corrected for Specific Gravity
1 = Specific Gravity of Air
Q2 = Standard Flow Corrected for Pressure and Temperature S.G.= Specific gravity of gas being used in flowmeter originally calibrated for air.
P1 = Actual Pressure (14.7 psia + Gage Pressure) NOTE: The corrections shown in the curves and in the formulas are for variations in specific
P2 = Standard Pressure (14.7 psia, which is 0 psig) gravity and internal pressure* only. Further correction may be necessary for variations in viscosity
T1 = Actual Temperature (460 R + Temp °F) and changes in type of flow from laminar to turbulent or vice versa. This is particularly true in the
T2 = Standard Temperature (530 R, which is 70°F) case of extremely low flows of the lighter gases. Nevertheless these charts and correction factors
can be quite useful when dealing with small changes in pressure* and specific gravity.
*Measured at discharge on all but TMV units. Inlet pressure on TMV models.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 158
pg159 7/21/06 11:02 AM Page 1

®
Series
MM Mini-Master Flowmeters
Used to Indicate or Manually Control Air or Water
Flow

A B C
A. Standard Model MMA
B. Standard Model MMA with field configurable valve, bottom mount
C. Standard Model MMA with field configurable valve, top mount
Patent No. 4,559,834

Model MMF-50-PV Model MMF-10 Model MMF-10-TMV with

11⁄2"scale,with metering with 11⁄2"scale, no top-mounted valve-for
valve, knob. valve. vacuum service. Use
screwdriver to adjust.
Patent No. 3,633,421

Offering advanced features at low cost, the Series MM flowmeters Where a compact flowmeter is required to measure small volume air
are ideal for a wide range of OEM and user applications in medical flows, the Model MMF is recommended. Easy to mount, they require a
equipment, air samplers, gas analyzers, pollution monitors, chemical minimum of panel space. A white back on the flow tube makes the ball
injectors, cabinet purging, etc. float easy to see. The 1-1/2˝ scale is highly visible and easy to read.
The standard Model MMA flowmeter is suitable for both gas and liquid Scale graduations are printed on aluminum alongside the flow tube (not
applications. It can be configured by the user with the parts provided on it), so the position of ball float is instantly visible.
to have non-removable top or bottom front mounted metering valves or The Model MMF’s bezel type mounting is modern, attractive and quick-
no valve at all. The transparent nylon material provides high chemical ly installed from the front of instrument panel. Two 1/4˝ O.D. mount-
resistance, low moisture absorption and is transparent to facilitate rou- ing-connection tubes are integrally molded with flowmeter body. They
tine inspection. Using the assembly key provided, the flowmeter can be can be back connected to flexible rubber or plastic tubing and held in
disassembled anytime for cleaning or reconfiguration. In OEM quanti- place with two spring retainers which are furnished. If preferred,
ties, ultrasonically welded caps or interchangeable mold cores enable connections may be made to metal or rigid plastic tubing with a dou-
production of the MMA flowmeter with a low profile or flat front sur- ble compression fitting or nylon tube union such as Dwyer Part No.
face where no valve is required. A-328.
The MMA is practically unbreakable, mounts easily, and is easy to Excellent repeatability and ±10% accuracy make the MMF flowmeter
read. Two 5⁄l6" O.D. mounting — connection tubes permit quick push-on an excellent value at its low cost.
connection of rubber or plastic tubing. A bottom clip for “stand up”
mounting is also provided.
Despite its compactness, the MMA flowmeter features a 2" scale
which combined with precision molding, enables highly repeatable
readings to be made to within ±4% accuracy.

159 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg160 7/21/06 11:03 AM Page 1

Model MMA Model MMF

SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases and liquids. Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
Wetted Materials: Body: Nylon 12. Wetted Materials: Body: Styrene Acrylonitrile.
O-rings: Buna-N (optional materials available). Float: Stainless steel, black glass, nylon.

Flow
Float: Black glass, K Monel, Stainless Steel, Tungsten Valve: Polyurethane.
Carbide. Temperature Limit: 125°F (51°C).
Temperature Limit: 130°F (54°C). Pressure Limit: 50 psi (3.4 bar). Valve Option: 10 psi (0.6
Pressure Limit: 100 psi (6.9 bar) with compression fitting. bar).
50 psi (3.4 bar) with tubing clamp. Accuracy: +10% full scale.
Accuracy: +4% full scale. Process Connection: 1/4˝ O.D. for push on rubber or plas-
Process Connection: 5/16˝ O.D. for push on rubber or tic tubing. Connect to rigid tubing with compression fittings.
plastic tubing with provided spring tubing clamp. Connect to Weight: 0.5 oz (14.17 g).
rigid tubing with double compression fitting.
Weight: 1 oz (28.35 g).

How To Order How To Order

MMA-Range No. MMF-Range No.-Valve
Example: MMA-4 Example: MMF-1-PV
Series MMA with .5-5 SCFH Air Range Series MMF with .1-1 SCFH Air Range with Valve

Model MMA MINI-MASTER® Ranges Model MMF MINI-MASTER® Ranges

Range Range Range Range Range GPH Range Range Range
SCFH Air No. LPM Air No. Water No. SCFH Air No.
.5-2.5 3 .2-1.2 20 .5-8 30
.5-5 4 .25-2.5 21 1-16 31 .1-1 1
1-10 5 .5-5 22 4-40 32 .2-2 2
2-20 6 1-10 23 5-60 33 1-10 10
5-50 7 2.5-25 24 CC/Min. Water 5-50 50
10-100 8 5-50 25 5-50 35 10-100 100
20-200 9 10-100 26 10-120 36
30-300 10 15-150 27 20-200 37
50-500 38
LPM Water Model MMF-X, Standard MMF
.1-1.1 40 Model MMF-X-PV, MMF with bottom mount valve
.25-2.5 41 Model MMF-X-TMV, MMF with top mount valve
.3-3.5 42
A-328, 1/4˝ Union

Model MMA

A-327, 5/16˝ Union

Model MMF mounts easily from Model MMF connections. Con-

front of panel. Drill two 9⁄32" or 5⁄16" nector at top, installed in panel,
dia. holes in panel on 21⁄16" centers. has retainer and flexible tubing in
Insert mounting connector spuds. place. Connector at bottom shows
MMA tubing connections secured by Spring retainers on connection tubes From rear, slide on the two spring alternative connection with metal
clamp. “Standup” mounting clip secure panel mounted MMA. Com- retainers (furnished) and push on or rigid plastic tubing, using a dou-
shown. pression union, P/N A-327 shown. rubber or plastic tubing. ble compression nylon tube union
(as Dwyer Part No. A-328).

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 160
pg161 7/21/06 11:15 AM Page 1

®
Series
RM Rate-Master Flowmeters
Polycarbonate, Gas Flow from .1-1800 SCFH, Water Flows to 10 GPM
J
Flow

F BACK WIDTH

A K
B C

G I L
FULL OPEN
H

DIMENSION IN INCHES
Model RMA Model RMB Model RMC
A 49⁄16 81⁄2 151⁄8
B 3 67⁄16 121⁄4
1
⁄8 NPT Conn. 1
⁄4 NPT Conn. 1
⁄2 NPT Conn.
C 15⁄8 315⁄16 83⁄4
10-32 Thds. 1
⁄4-20 Thds. 3
⁄8-24 Thds.
D 3
⁄8 5
⁄8 1
E 11⁄16 17⁄8 23⁄4
F 13⁄16 13⁄4 21⁄4
G 3
⁄4 1 17⁄16
H 1 17⁄16 131⁄32
I 13⁄8 113⁄16 21⁄2
(OPEN) (BV or SSV MODELS ONLY)
J 3
⁄4 11⁄4 2
Model RMC-SSV10" Model RMB-SSV 5" Model RMA-SSV 2"
K 413⁄16 83⁄4 153⁄8
scale, 153⁄8" high scale, 83⁄4" high scale, 413⁄16" high
L 1 11⁄2 21⁄4

The Rate-Master flowmeter line of direct reading precision flowme-

®
Installation is simple — The Rate-Master® Flowmeter can be neatly
ters incorporates many unique user features at moderate cost. These low panel mounted to keep flow tube centers in the same plane as the panel
cost flowmeters are ideal for general use. surface or surface mounted on the panel by means of tapped holes in the
backbone. When through-panel mounted, the bezel automatically posi-
Easy to read design — The direct reading scales eliminate troublesome tions the instrument at the correct depth in the panel cutout. Surface
conversions. The scales are brushed aluminum, coated with epoxy and mounted units can also be held in place by the piping. All mounting hard-
the graduations are on both sides of the indicating tube. Special integral ware plus installation and operating instructions are included.
flow guides stabilize the float throughout the range to keep it from hunt-
ing or wandering in the bore. The float is highly visible against a white Easy-to-Interchange bodies — Within a given Series Rate-Master®
background. flowmeter bodies can be instantly interchanged. Simply “unplug” the
Construction assures accuracy — All Rate-Master® flowmeter bodies body from backbone and replace it with another. “O” rings provide a tight
are injection molded of tough, clear, shatter-proof polycarbonate plastic seal on inlet and outlet. Piping remains undisturbed. Interchangeability
around a precision tapered pin. The result is accurate and repeatable is useful where different scale ranges are sometimes required at the same
readings. The single piece plastic body is mounted to a stainless steel back location in the laboratory or plant.
bone into which pipe thread inserts are welded to absorb piping torque.
Precision metering valves of brass or stainless steel (specify BV or SSV Cleaning is easy — To release the plastic flowmeter body from the
on order) are available as an optional extra and permit precise flow ad- stainless steel backbone, just remove four screws. Pipe thread flow con-
justments. For vacuum applications, Model RMA units are available with nections remain undisturbed. Remove the slide cover and the plug ball
top mounted valves (specify TMV). The small Series RMA models are ac- stop, clean the flow tube with soap and water and reassemble. It’s that
curate within ±4% of full scale reading; Series RMB within ±3%; large Se- simple.
ries RMC within ±2%.

161 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg162 7/26/06 1:06 PM Page 1

SPECIFICATIONS
How To Order Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
Series-Range No.-Valve-Option
Example: RMA-2-SSV Wetted Materials: Body: Polycarbonate
Series RMA with .1-1 SCFH Air Range & Stainless Steel Valve O-ring: Neoprene & Buna-N.
Metal Parts: Stainless Steel (except for optional brass valve).
Float: Stainless steel, black glass, aluminum, K monel, tung-

Flow
sten carbide depending on range.
Model RMA Temperature Limit: 130°F (54°C).
RMA-X, Standard RMA Pressure Limit: 100 psi (6.9 bar).
RMA-X-BV, RMA with Brass Valve Accuracy: RMA: 4%, RMB: 3%, RMC: 2% of full scale.
RMA-X-SSV, RMA with Stainless Steel Valve
Process Connection: RMA: 1/8˝, RMB: 1/4˝,
RMA-X-TMV, RMA with Top Mounted Valve
RMC: 1/2˝ female NPT.
Model RMB
Weight: RMA: 4 oz (113.4 g), RMB: 13 oz (368.5 g),
RMB-X, Standard RMB RMC: 39 oz (1105.6 g).
RMB-X-BV, RMB with Brass Valve
RMB-X-SSV, RMB with Stainless Steel Valve
CAUTION
Model RMC Dwyer® Rate-Master® flowmeters are designed to provide satis-
RMC-X, Standard RMC factory long term service when used with air, water, or other com-
RMC-X-BV, RMC with Brass Valve patible media. Refer to factory for information on questionable
gases or liquids. Caustic solutions, anti-freeze (ethylene glycol)
RMC-X-SSV, RMA with Stainless Steel Valve and aromatic solvents should definitely not be used.

OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

Adjustable pointer flags – Red lined pointer

flags provide quick visual reference to a required
flow level. Of clear plastic, they snap into place
inside bezel and slide to desired level.
POPULAR RANGES
Model RMA-2" Scale Model RMB-5" Scale Model RMC -10" Scale
Range Range Range Range Range Range
SCFH Air No. SCFH Air No. SCFH Air No.
.05-.5 1 .5-5 4+ 5-50 101
.1-1 2 1-10 50 10-100 102
.2-2 3 3-20 51 20-200 103 Top Mounted Metering Valves – Same precision
.5-5 4 4-50 52 40-400 104 construction for vacuum applications. RMA mod-
1-10 5 10-100 53 60-600 105 els only.
2-20 6 20-200 54 100-1000 106
5-50 7 40-400 55 120-1200 107
10-100 8 50-500 56 200-1800 108
15-150 9 60-600 57 SCFM Air
20-200 10 Gal. Water 1-10 121
CC Air/min. per hour 2-20 122 Specials — Special ranges, scales, mounting
5-50 151* 1-12 82 4-30 123 arrangements, etc., are available on special order,
10-100 150* 1-20 83 or in OEM quantities.
30-240 11 4-40 84 Gal. Water
50-500 12 10-100 85 per hour
100-1000 13 SCFH & LPM Air 2-20 134
200-2500 14 1.2-10/0.6-5 50D 8-90 135
LPM Air 3-20/1.5-9.5 51D Gal.Water
.5-5 26 4-50/2-23 52D per minute
1-10 21 10-100/5-50 53D .1-1 141
2-25 22 20-200/5-95 54D .2-2.2 142
5-50 23 GPH & LPM Water .4-4 143
5-70 24 1-12/0.06-0.76 82D .8-7 144 RMA-X-APF, Adjustable Pointer Flag for RMA Series
10-100 25 1-20/0.065-1.25 83D 1.2-10 145
CC Water/min. 10-100/0.8-6.2 85D RMB-X-BPF, Adjustable Pointer Flag for RMB Series
5-50 32 RMC-X-CPF, Adjustable Pointer Flag for RMC Series
10-110 33
20-300 34
Gal.Water/hr
1-11 42
RKA, Regulator Kit for RMA Series
2-24 43 RK-RMB, Regulator Kit for RMB Series
4-34 44
5-50 45
*Accuracy ±8%
+Accuracy ±5%

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 162
pg163 7/21/06 11:17 AM Page 1

Series
VFA
&
Visi-Float ®
Flowmeters
VFB Used to Indicate or Manually Control Air or Water Flow
Flow

MODEL VFA AND VFB

F L
M

A B C K

M N
I
FULL OPEN

The Visi–Float® flowmeter bodies are cut and precision ma- DIMENSION-IN INCHES
chined from solid, clear acrylic plastic blocks. This construction Model VFA Model VFB
not only produces a handsome finished product, but permits A 4 61⁄2
complete visual inspection. As a result, the Visi-Float® flowme- B 3 (1⁄8 female NPT) 51⁄2 (1⁄8 female NPT)
ters are especially popular for medical and laboratory equip- C 15⁄8 (10-32 Thread) 31⁄2 (10-32 thread)
D 1
⁄2 1
⁄2
ment applications.
E 13⁄16 11⁄2
F 11⁄4 11⁄4
Scales are easy to read — The front scale location and white I 21⁄16 (BV or SSV) 21⁄16 (BV or SSV)
background provides excellent visibility. The direct reading K 43⁄32 619⁄32
scales are hot stamped into the plastic and will not wear off. L 1 13⁄8
M 3
⁄4 (EC) 3
⁄4 (EC)
Mid–range calibration is established with a master flowmeter.
N 3
⁄32 (EC) 3
⁄32 (EC)
Accuracy is ±5% of full scale for VFA models, ±3% for VFB.
Scales average 2" long on the VFA models, 4" long on VFB.

Durable and attractive construction — The machined Easy installation — All Visi–Float® flowmeters have metal
acrylic bodies of the Visi–Float® flowmeters are practically un- mounting inserts on rear for panel mounting. They can also be
breakable. Fabrication is backed by over 60 years of experience supported directly by system piping.
in acrylic instrument machining. The tapered bore is precision
machined to a smooth surface that provides perfect visibility of
the indicating float. The VFA and VFB models are available
with either brass or stainless steel inlet and outlet connections
and are tapped for 1/8˝ NPT thread. VFB models 85 and 86
have either 1/4˝ back or 3/8˝ end connections. All standard
models employ Buna–N “O” rings for leak proof operation and
are available with either back or end connections for horizontal
or vertical piping. Precision metering valves in brass or stain-
less steel are available for most VFA and VFB models.

163 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg164 7/26/06 1:07 PM Page 1

Special Multi-Column Visi-Float® Flowmeters SPECIFICATIONS

Perfect for OEM applications, Visi-Float® flowmeters can be cus- Service: Compatible gases & liquids.
tom made with up to 10 columns in a single block of acrylic plas-
tic. Available with or without valves. Consult factory for more Wetted Materials:
information.
Body: Acrylic plastic.
O-ring: Buna-N (Fluoroelastomer available).

Flow
Metal Parts: Brass standard, stainless steel optional.
Float: Stainless steel, black glass, aluminum, K Monel
depending on range.
Temperature & Pressure Limits:
Without Valve: 100 psig (6.9 bar) @ 150°F (65°C);
150 psig (10 bar) @ 100°F (38°C).
With Valve: 100 psig (6.9 bar) @ 120°F (48°C).
OEM Specials — Special flowmeter designs can be supplied to meet a Accuracy: VFA = 5% of full scale; VFB= 3% of full scale.
wide range of requirements and specific applications. These include: Process Connection: 1/8˝ female NPT. VFB ranges 85 and 86
on-off plunger and push-to-test valves, special gas or fluid calibration,
special ranges, scales, name brand or other identification. Pointer flags have 1/4˝ NPT back connections or 3/8˝ NPT end connections.
can be furnished for instant visual reference. For specific information, These ranges not available with brass valves.
please supply an outline of your requirements. Scale Length: VFA 2˝ typical length; VFB 4˝ typical length.
Mounting Orientation: Mount in Vertical Position.
Weight: VFA: 4.0-4.8 oz (.11-.14 kg). VFB: 7.2-8.8 oz (.20-.25 kg).
How To Order
Series—Range No.—Valve—Option
Example: VFA-9-BV
Series VFA with 20-200 SCFH Air Range & Brass Valve

VFA SERIES VFB SERIES

Model Description Model Description

VFA-X Standard VFA VFB-X Standard VFB
VFA-X-SS VFA with Stainless Metal Wetted Parts VFB-X-SS VFB with Stainless Metal Wetted Parts
VFA-X-BV VFA with Brass Valve VFB-X-BV VFB with Brass Valve
VFA-X-SSV VFA with Stainless Steel Valve VFB-X-SSV VFB with Stainless Steel Valve
VFA-X-EC VFA with End Connections VFB-X-EC VFB with End Connections
VFA-X-EC-SS VFA with End Connections and Stainless VFB-X-EC-SS VFB with End Connections and Stainless
Steel Metal Wetted Parts Steel Metal Wetted Parts
Options & Accessories Options & Accessories
-PF, Red ABS Plastic Pointer Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -PF, Red ABS Plastic Pointer Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-VIT, Fluoroelastomer O-rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -VIT, Fluoroelastomer O-rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RKA, Pressure Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RK-VFB, Pressure Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POPULAR RANGES POPULAR RANGES

Model VFA — 2" Scale Model VFB — 4" Scale
Range Range Range Range Range Range Range
No. SCFH Air No. LPM Air No. SCFH Air No. LPM Air
1 .1-1 21 .06-0.5 50 .3-3 65 .2-4
2 .2-2 22 .15-1 91+ 1-10 66 1-10
3 .6-5 23 .6-5 51+ 2-20 67 1-20
4 1-10 24 1-10 52 4-40 68 3-30
5 2-20 25 3-25 53+ 10-100 69 4-40
6 4-30 26 6-50 54+ 10-150 CC/Min. Water
7 5-50 27 10-100 55+ 20-200 82 2-30
8 10-100 SCFM Air GPH Water
9 20-200 90 .3-3 80 +
.5-12
CC Water Gal. Water CC/Min. Air 83+ 1-20
per min. per hour 60 100-1000 84 6-40
32 6-50 41 .6-5 81 6-60
33 10-100 42 2-10 GPM Water
34 20-200 43 3-20 85* .2-2
44 8-40 86* .6-5
+
For dual range models in English and Metric add “D” to end of Range No.
* Ranges 85 and 86 consult factory. Not available with brass valve.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 164
pg165 7/21/06 11:19 AM Page 1

Series
VFC
&
Visi-Float ®
Flowmeters
Used to Indicate Air or Water Flow
VFCII
Flow

2 NOM
1-3/4 1-1/32 [50.80]
[44.45] [26.19]
1-1/2 HEX
1-1/2 [38.10]
[38.10]
1-1/8
11 [28.58]
[279.40]
WITH
BACK
CONNECTIONS

1-1/8
10-1/2 [28.58]
4-1/2 8-1/2
[266.70]
[114.30] [215.90]

1-1/2
[38.10]
3
[76.20]

1-1/2
[38.10]

VFC

VFCII with VFC with

End Connections End Connections

The accurate and durable VFC Visi-Float® flowmeter contains a SPECIFICATIONS

stainless steel guide rod and large diameter float for excellent stabili- Service: Compatible gases & liquids.
ty and visibility in high flow rates. The large 5˝ scale provides a +/-2% Wetted Materials:
full scale accuracy for precision measurement required in medical or Body: Acrylic plastic.
laboratory applications. The VFC models have PVC 1˝ female NPT
O-Ring: Buna-N (Fluoroelastomer available).
connections. VFC II units are equipped with acetal thermoplastic 1"
male NPT fittings. VFC II fittings also include hex wrench flats to pre- Metal Parts: Stainless steel.
vent stripped threads. All models have metal mounting inserts on the Float: Stainless steel.
back for panel mounting. Units may also be supported directly by sys- Temperature & Pressure Limits: 100 psig (6.9 bar) @
tem piping. 120°F (48°C).
Accuracy: 2% of full scale.
Process Connection: VFC: 1˝ female NPT back connec-
How To Order tions. End connections optional. VFCII: 1˝ male NPT back
Series—Range No.—Option connections. End Connections optional.
Example: VFC-123-EC Scale Length: 5˝ typical length.
Series VFC with 10-100 SCFM Air Range and 1˝ female NPT
End Connections Mounting Orientation: Mount in vertical position.
Weight: 24-25 oz (.68-.71 kg).
POPULAR RANGES
Model VFC — 5" Scale
Range Range Range Range
No. SCFM Air No. GPM Water
121 2.5-25 141 .5-5 Series VFC & VFCII Models ...............................................................................
122 5-50 142 1-10
123 10-100 143 2-20
Options
-EC, End Connections...............................................................................
LPM Air LPM Water
-VIT, Fluoroelastomer O-Rings...................................................................
131 60-700 151 2-20
200-1400 4-40
-FDA, 316 SS Float & Guide Rod (only available on VFCII
132 152
300-2800 153 10-75 with Fluoroelastomer O-Rings) ..................................................................
133

165 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg166 8/2/06 2:32 PM Page 1

Series
UV Ultra-View™ Polysulfone Flowmeter
Ultra-Pure ±2% F.S. Accuracy, High Temperature, High Pressure

Flow
5
18

16
4
14

Drawing at 12 12
3
right shown 10
[307.98]
with optional 15
8
2 [381.00]
Polysulfone 6
17
Fittings. 4 [431.80]
1
2-1/2
Picture at 2
[63.50]
left shown 1-7/16-18 UNEF
THREADS
with optional
Polysulfone 1" NPT(M)
IN-LINE THREADS
Fittings. THREADS
1" NPT(F)

Picture above shown with 2-15/16 1-1/2

[74.51] [38.10]
optional Polycarbonate Shield

Setting a new standard in the industry, the Series UV SPECIFICATIONS

Polysulfone Flowmeter is an ultra pure, laboratory grade Service: Compatible liquids.
flowmeter (±2% F.S. accuracy) that measures flow in GPM and Wetted Materials: Polysulfone body, Fluoroelastomer O-Rings
LPM of water and other compatible media. The Series UV is and virgin PTFE float.
designed to withstand high temperatures up to 212°F (100°C) Temperature Limits: 35 to 212°F (2 to 100°C); 35 to 130°F (2 to
54°C) for PVC fitting option.
and high pressures up to 150 psi (10.34 bar). Highly corrosion-
Pressure Limit: 150 psi (10.34 bar).
resistant, this instrument is an excellent choice for monitoring Accuracy: ±2% full scale @ 70°F +/-2°F (21.1°C) and 14.7 psia
many ultra pure applications such as food processing, reverse (In line connection rating only).
osmosis water systems, medical equipment and corrosive media. Repeatability: +/-1% full scale @ 70+/-2°F (21.1°C) and 14.7
Easy to install and to clean, the Series UV offers optional panel psia (In line connection rating only).
mount polysulfone fittings and a protective polycarbonate shield. Process Connections: 1˝ female NPT. Optional 90° Polysulfone
Elbow – 1˝ male NPT.
Accessories Scale Length: 6˝ (152.40) – 7˝ (177.80), depending on model.
Fitting Torque: Maximum 22 ft - lb.
A-801 Panel Mount Kit, Polysulfone Fittings
Weight: 1 lb (457 g) (for 20 GPM range).
A-162 In-line Fitting Replacement Kit. Two 1" female
NPT connection fittings and two O-rings.
A-163 In-line PVC Fitting Replacement Kit. Two
1˝ female NPT connection fittings and two O-rings CAUTION: Ball valves can have a “water cannon” effect on
opening, creating pressure that exceeds the warrantied rat-
Options ings and will damage the flowmeter.
UV-XXXX-SHD Protective Polycarbonate Series UV Flowmeters are for indoor use only or areas with-
Shield out direct sunlight. Polysulfone is adversely affected by
UV-XX22 PVC 1˝ female NPT Fittings ultraviolet light.
UV-XXXX-CDS Certified Data Sheet
with Traceability to NIST

MODELS
Model No. Range (GPM water) Body Fitting Material Float

UV-0112 0.25-2.5 (1-9.5 LPM) Polysulfone Polysulfone Virgin PTFE

UV-1112 0.5-5.0 (2-19 LPM) Polysulfone Polysulfone Virgin PTFE
UV-2112 1.0-10.0 (4-38 LPM) Polysulfone Polysulfone Virgin PTFE
UV-3112 2.0-20.0 (8-76 LPM) Polysulfone Polysulfone Virgin PTFE
Newest Ranges
UV-4112 3.0-30.0 (12-112 LPM) Polysulfone Polysulfone Virgin PTFE
UV-5112 4.0-40.0 (20-150 LPM) Polysulfone Polysulfone Virgin PTFE

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 166
pg167 7/21/06 11:23 AM Page 1

Series
UV Ultra-View™ Polysulfone Flowmeter
Ultra-Pure, High Temperature, High Pressure, Ranges in Air
Flow

5
18

16
4

Drawing at 14

right shown 3
12 12
[307.98]
with optional 10
15
Polysulfone 2
8
[381.00]
Fittings. 6
17
1 4 [431.80]
Picture at 2-1/2
2
[63.50]
left shown 1-7/16-18 UNEF
with optional THREADS
Polysulfone 1" NPT(M)
Fittings. IN-LINE THREADS
THREADS
1" NPT(F)

Picture above shown with 2-15/16 1-1/2

optional Polycarbonate Shield [74.51] [38.10]

The Series UV Polysulfone Flowmeter with high accuracy SPECIFICATIONS

and excellent media compatibility is now available in air flow Service: Compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: Polysulfone body, Fluoroelastomer O-
ranges. Perfect for environmental remediation systems this unit rings and virgin PTFE float.
has great durability with its high temperature and pressure rat- Temperature Limits: 35 to 212°F (2 to 100°C); 35 to
ings. The UV has no metal wetted parts. This feature allows the 130°F (2 to 54°C) for PVC fitting option.
Pressure Limit: 150 psi (10.34 bar).
UV to be used in applications where metal attacking gases are Accuracy: ±2% full scale @ 70°F +/-2°F (21.1°C) and 14.7
present. The UV is available in ranges from 13 SCFM to 100 psia (In line connection rating only) Exception: UV-B112
SCFM. accuracy +/-4%.
Repeatability: +/-1% full scale @ 70+/-2°F (21.1°C) and
14.7 psia (in line connection rating only)
Process Connections: 1˝ female NPT. Optional 90°
Accessories
Polysulfone Elbow – 1˝ male NPT.
A-801 Panel Mount Kit, Polysulfone Fittings
A-162 In-line Fitting Replacement Kit. Two 1˝ female
Scale Length: 6˝ (152.40) – 7˝ (177.80), depending on
NPT connection fittings and two O-rings. model.
A-163 In-line PVC Fitting Replacement Kit. Two Fitting Torque: Maximum 22 ft-lb.
1˝ female NPT connection fittings and two O-rings Weight: 1 lb (457 g).

Options
UV-XXXX-SHD Protective Polycarbonate CAUTION: Ball valves can have a “water cannon” effect on
Shield opening, creating pressure that exceeds the warrantied rat-
UV-XX22 PVC 1˝ female NPT Fittings ings and will damage the flowmeter.
UV-XXXX-CDS Certified Data Sheet Series UV Flowmeters are for indoor use only or areas with-
with Traceability to NIST out direct sunlight. Polysulfone is adversely affected by
ultraviolet light.

MODELS
Model No. Range SCFM Air Body Fitting Material Float

UV-A112 1-13 (30-370 LPM) Polysulfone Polysulfone Virgin PTFE

UV-B112 2.5-28 (70-780 LPM) Polysulfone Polysulfone Virgin PTFE
UV-C112 5-50 (70-1400 LPM) Polysulfone Polysulfone Virgin PTFE
UV-D112 14-100 (400-2800 LPM) Polysulfone Polysulfone Virgin PTFE

167 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg168 7/21/06 11:41 AM Page 1

Series
VA Variable Area Glass Flowmeters
65 mm and 150 mm, ±2% FS Accuracy, Interchangeable Flowtubes
Panel Mounting: Drill two 5/8˝ dia. holes at
4.5˝ apart for 65 mm models and 8.812˝

Flow
apart for 150 mm models (center-to center).
1.250 1.250
[31.8] 1/8 NPT
[31.8] 1/8 NPT
1/2˝
HEX 1/2˝
HEX
5.500 4.500
9.812 8.812 [140]
[224] [114]
[249] 7/8˝ HEX NUT
.5 [12.7]
7/8˝ HEX NUT
.5 [12.7] 1/8 NPT
1.625
1/8 NPT [41.3] 1.125
1.625 .5
[41.3] 1.125 .5 OPEN [28.6]
OPEN [28.6]

Accurately measure flow rates of air, water, and other commonly used SPECIFICATIONS
gases with the Series VA Variable Area Glass Flowmeters. Flowmeters are
designed with an easy-to-read universal mm scale and supplied with a corre-
Service: Compatible gases or liquids.
lation chart containing calibration data for air and water. Correlation data for Wetted Materials:
other gases and liquids are available. Permanently fused ceramic scale with Flowtube: Borosilicate glass.
vertical locator line reduces parallax and eye fatigue. Thick polycarbonate front Floats: Glass or stainless steel (sapphire, Carboloy and tan-
shield protects tube from breakage and also serves as a magnifying lens to talum are optional).
enhance reading resolution.
Float Stops: PTFE.
Glass flowmeters are suitable for metering carrier gases, liquid and gas mea-
surement in pilot plants, laboratories, process flow and level indicating. Units
End Fittings: Anodized Aluminum, 316 SS or Brass.
are equipped with a standard 6-turn needle valve for flow rate control. High Packings: Fluoroelastomer.
precision metering valves with non-rising stems (sold separately) are avail- O-rings: Buna-N on aluminum models and brass models,
able for high sensitivity control and resolution – particularly suited for very and Fluoroelastomer on stainless steel models.
low flow rates. Temperature Limits: 250°F (121°C).
Flowmeters are shipped completely assembled and ready for panel mount- Pressure Limits: 200 psig (13.8 bar).
ing. Use an optional acrylic tripod base to convert to self-standing bench mount-
ing.
Accuracy: ±2% FS @ 70°F (21.1°C) and 14.7 psia (1 atm
absolute).
MODELS Repeatability: ±0.25% full scale.
Model Number 65 mm Scale Maximum
Scales: Universal 65 mm or 150 mm with correlation
Maximum
Aluminum SS Brass Float Flow Rate (Air) Flow Rate (H2O) charts.
scfh (ml/min) gph (ml/min) Turn-down Ratio: 10:1; 20:1 with combinations of two
VA1043 VA1243 VA1343 Glass 0.104 (49) 0.009 (0.55)
VA1044 VA1244 - SS 0.307 (145) 0.038 (2.38) floats installed in meter.
VA1045 VA1245 VA1345 Glass 0.220 (104) 0.028 (1.8) Connections: Two 1/8˝ female NPT.
VA1046 VA1246 - SS 0.633 (299) 0.122 (7.7)
VA1047 VA1247 VA1347 Glass 0.43 (202) 0.041 (2.6)
Mounting: Vertical.
VA1048 VA1248 - SS 1.1 (522) 0.19 (12.0) Valve: 6-turn needle (standard), optional 16-turn high pre-
VA1049 VA1249 VA1349 Glass 2.09 (986) 0.325 (20.5)
- SS 4.12 (1946)
cision valve.
VA10410 VA12410 0.881 (55.6)
VA10411 VA12411 VA13411 Glass 2.65 (1249) 0.428 (27) Valve Orifice: Acetal on aluminum models and brass
VA10412 VA12412 - SS 5.34 (2520) 1.125 (71) models, PCTFE on stainless steel models.
VA10413 VA12413 VA13413 Glass 4.32 (2040) 0.63 (40)
VA10414 VA12414 - SS 8.45 (3990) 1.71 (108)
VA10417 VA12417 VA13417 Glass 13.4 (6318) 2.33 (147)
VA10418 VA12418 - SS 25.5 (12058) 5.77 (364)
VA10419 VA12419 VA13419 Glass 27.9 (13153) 4.9 (309)
VA10420 VA12420 - SS 52.3 (24680) 11.81 (745)
VA10421 VA12421 VA13421 Glass 49.1 (23169) 8.27 (522)
VA10422 VA12422 - SS 89.2 (42094) 19.97 (1260) Accessories
Model Number 150 mm Scale Maximum Maximum No. VA81, High precision valve, 316 SS, 0.42 scfh capacity
Aluminum SS Brass Float Flow Rate (Air) Flow Rate (H2O) No. VA82, High precision valve, 316 SS, 0.85 scfh capacity
scfh (ml/min) gph (ml/min) No. VA83, High precision valve, 316 SS, 2.12 scfh capacity
VA20429 VA22429 VA23429 Glass 0.792 (374) 0.087 (5.5) No. VA84, High precision valve, 316 SS, 4.87 scfh capacity
VA20430 VA22430 - SS 1.725 (814) 0.323 (20.4) No. VA85, High precision valve, 316 SS, 13.14 scfh capacity
VA20433 VA22433 VA23433 Glass 4.9 (2313) 0.848 (54) No. VA86, High precision valve, 316 SS, 45.55 scfh capacity
VA20434 VA22434 - SS 9.67 (4562) 2.067 (130)
Glass
No. VA7, Acrylic tripod for single meter
VA20435 VA22435 VA23435 8.07 (3807) 1.336 (84)
VA20436 VA22436 - SS 16.08 (7590) 3.34 (217)
VA20437 VA22437 VA23437 Glass 18.38 (8678) 3.32 (210)
VA20438 VA22438 - SS 35.5 (16737) 8.02 (506)
VA20439 VA22439 VA23439 Glass 49.9 (23564) 9.0 (568)
VA20440 VA22440 - SS 93.9 (44336) 21.7 (1370)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 168
pg169 7/21/06 11:42 AM Page 1

Series
VA PTFE/Glass Flowmeters
Variable Area, Universal 65 mm and 150 mm Scales, ±2% FS Accuracy
1.250
[31.8] 1/8 NPT
1.250
Flow

[31.8] 1/8 NPT

1/2˝
1/2˝ HEX
HEX Panel Mounting: Drill two
6.16 5.2 5/8˝ dia. holes at 5.2˝ apart
[132.1] for 65mm models and 9.812 8.812
[156.5] [249] [224]
7/8˝ HEX NUT 8.812˝ apart for 150mm
models (center-to center).
.5 [12.7] 7/8˝ HEX NUT
1.625 1/8 NPT .5 [12.7]
[41.3] 1.125 .5 1/8 NPT
1.625
OPEN [28.6] [41.3] 1.125 .5
OPEN [28.6]

Measure flow of corrosive or ultra-pure liquids or gases with the Series

VA Variable Area PTFE/Glass Flowmeters. Flowmeters are constructed of chem- MODELS
ically inert materials and housed in a rigid anodized aluminum frame with a poly- Model Number 65 mm Scale
carbonate safety shield. Units are designed with an easy-to-read universal mm Valve No Valve Flow Rate (Air) Flow Rate (H O)
Float scfh (ml/min) gph (ml/min)
2

scale and supplied with a correlation chart containing calibration data for air and
water. Correlation data for other gases and liquids are available. VA1545 VA1505 Glass 0.220 (104) 0.028 (1.8)
VA1547 VA1507 Glass 0.428 (202) 0.047(2.95)
VA15411 VA15011 Glass 2.646 (1249) 0.428 (27)
VA15413 VA15013 Glass 4.322 (2040) 0.630 (39.7)
SPECIFICATIONS Leak Integrity: 1 x 10-7 sccs of VA15417 VA15017 Glass 13.39 (6318) 2.33 (147)
Service: Compatible gases or liq- helium. VA15419 VA15019 Glass 27.9 (13153) 4.9 (309)
Scales: Universal 65 mm or 150 VA15421 VA15021 Glass 49 (23169) 8.27 (522)
uids.
mm with correlation charts. Model Number 150 mm Scale
Wetted Materials: Valve No Valve
Turn-down ratio: 10:1, 20:1 with Float Flow Rate (Air) Flow Rate (H O) 2
Flowtube: Borosilicate glass. scfh (ml/min) gph (ml/min)
combinations of two floats installed
Float: Glass (sapphire optional). in meter. VA25425 VA25025 Glass 0.104 (49) 0.01 (0.61)
Float Stops and End Fittings: Connections: Two 1/8˝ female VA25429 VA25029 Glass 0.792 (374) 0.087 (5.5)
PTFE. VA25431 VA25031 Glass 1.75 (825) 0.262 (16.5)
NPT. VA25435 VA25035 Glass 8.07 (3807) 1.34 (84.3)
O-rings and Packings: PTFE . Mounting: Vertical. VA25437 VA25037 Glass 18.39 (8678) 3.32 (209)
Temperature Limits: –15 to 150°F Valve: 6-turn needle.
(–26 to 65°C).
Valve Orifice: PTFE.
Pressure Limits: 100 psi (6.7 bar). Accessories
Accuracy: ±2% FS @ 70°F No. VA7, Acrylic tripod for single meter
(21.1°C) and 14.7 psia (1 atm
absolute).
Repeatability: ±0.25%.

Series
TVA All Fluoropolymer Flowmeters
75 mm and 125 mm, 10:1 Turndown, ±5% FS Accuracy
“E” .750 TYP.
Model A B C D E F G “G”
NPT(F)
TVA11XX 4.97[126] 0.56[14] 1.06[27] 3.35[85] 1.25[32] 6.16[156] 1/4
TVA13XX 4.97[126] 0.56[14] 1.25[32] 4.65[118] 1.50[38] 6.16[156] 3/8 “C”
TVA22XX 8.72[221] 0.88[22] 1.75[44] 4.57[116] 2.00[51] 10.4[264] 1/2 TYP.
TVA24XX 8.47[215] 1.00[25] 1.75[44] 5.95[151] 2.25[57] 10.4[264] 3/4 “F” “A”

Panel Mounting: Drill two holes: 3/4˝ dia. at 4.97˝

apart for 1/4˝ NPT models, 7/8˝ dia. at 4.97˝ apart
for 3/8˝ NPT models, 1˝ dia. at 8.72˝ apart for 1/2˝
NPT models, and 11⁄4˝ dia. at 8.47˝ apart for 3/4˝
124101-00
NPT models (center-to-center). “B”
“D”

Series TVA All Fluoropolymer Flowmeters offer solutions for mea- SPECIFICATIONS
suring flow rates of highly corrosive or ultra-pure liquids. Flowmeters are Service: Compatible gases or liquids.
designed with 0 to 10 scale graduations denoting a discrete flow rate. Wetted Materials:
Flowtube: PFA.
Float and End Fittings: PTFE.
MODELS Guide Rods: PCTFE
Model No. Low Range
Valve No Valve Flow Rate (H O)
Temperature Limit: 250°F (121°C).
Length Connections 2
gph (ml/min) Pressure Limit: 100 psig (6.9 bar).
TVA1113 TVA1103 75mm 1/4≤ female NPT 6.34(400) Accuracy: ±5% FS @ 70°F (21.1°C) and 14.7 psia (1 atm
TVA1115 TVA1105 75mm 1/4≤ female NPT 15.9 (1000)
TVA1317 TVA1307 75mm 3/8≤ female NPT 39.6 (2500) absolute).
TVA1319 TVA1309 75mm 3/8≤ female NPT 79.2 (5000) Repeatability: ±0.25%.
Model No. High Range Leak Integrity: 1 x 10–7 sccs of Helium.
Valve No Valve Flow Rate (H O)
Length Connections gpm (l/min)
2
Scales: 0 to 10 markings, 75 mm or 125 mm lengths.
TVA22110 TVA22010 125mm 1/2≤ female NPT 3.43 (13) Turn-down Ratio: 10:1.
TVA24112 TVA24012 125mm 3/4≤ female NPT 7.93 (30) Mounting: Vertical.
TVA24114 TVA24014 125mm 3/4≤ female NPT 11.9 (45)

169 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg170 7/21/06 11:43 AM Page 1

Series
VA-K Variable Area Flowmeter Kits
Interchangeable Flow Tubes and Floats, 150 mm Universal Scales
1-1/4

Flow
[31.75] 1/8 NPT

1/2" HEX

9-13/16 8-13/16
[249.22] [223.82]

7/8" HEX NUT

1/2
[12.75]
1-5/8 1-1/8 1/8 NPT
[41.28] [28.57] 1/2
OPEN [12.75]

The Series VA-K Flowmeter Kits offer an economical SPECIFICATIONS

means of acquiring diverse flow measurement capability.
The kit includes a completely assembled flowmeter (avail- Scales: Universal 150 mm scales with correlation
able with Aluminum or 316 SS end fittings) and three inter- chart.
changeable 150 mm flow tubes. All flow tubes are supplied
Accuracy: ±2% FS @ 70°F (21.1°C) and 14.7 psia
with a glass float installed. Spare 316 SS and Tantalum
floats are included to extend flow capacities. Series VA-K (1 atm absolute).
kits also include a high flow valve cartridge, tripod base, Repeatability: ±0.25% of scale reading.
tweezers, pushrod and locking tool for changing floats and
flow tubes, correlation charts and plastic carrying case. Turn-down ratio: 10:1; 20:1 with combinations of
two floats installed in meter.
Model VA-K1 Aluminum Flowmeter Kit Maximum Operating Pressure: 200 psig (13.8 bar).
Model VA-K2 316 SS Flowmeter Kit
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250°F (121°C).
Max. Flow Rate (mL/min)*
Float Material Mounting: Vertical.
Flow Tube
Glass 316 SS Tantalum
Number Connection: 1/8˝ female NPT.
Air Water Air Water Air Water
1.8 to 0.02 to 5.8 to 0.09 to
042-15 — — Flowtube: Borosilicate glass.
18.6 0.19 60.6 .945
21 to .023 to 36 to 1.1 to
112-02 — — Float: Glass, 316 SS or tantalum.
374 5.5 814 20.4
106 to 2 to 288 to 6 to
102-05 — — Float Stops: PTFE.
3807 84 7590 617
962 to 15 to 2015 to 106 to
044-40 — — End Fittings: Anodized Aluminum or 316 SS.
22536 541 62588 2001

* Flow rates are given for standard pressure and temperature 70°F Front Shield: Polycarbonate.
(21°C) @ 760 mm Hg.
Side Panels: Black, anodized aluminum.
APPLICATIONS
Kits are ideal for flow applications in air and water analysis, O-rings: Buna-N on aluminum models and
film processing, chemical processing, gas chromatography, Fluoroelastomer on stainless steel models.
pharmaceutical, alcohol and tobacco production, pulp and
paper, and semiconductor industry. Valve Orifice: Acetal on aluminum models and
PCTFE on stainless steel models.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 170
pg171 7/21/06 11:58 AM Page 1

Series
DR Direct Reading Glass Flowmeters
65 mm and 150 mm, ±5% FS Accuracy, Interchangeable Flowtubes
Panel Mounting: Drill two
PANEL
Flow

5/8≤ dia. holes at 4.5≤ apart

for 65mm models and 1 LOCKNUT (2) 1/8
8.812≤ apart for 150mm [25.40] [3.175]
1/8 NPT PANEL LOCKNUTS (2) models (center-to center).
ADAPTERS (2) 1
1/8 [25.40]
[3.175] 9-13/16
[249.2]
5-1/2 7-9/16
[139.7] 3-1/4 150MM 8-13/16
SCALE [192.09]
4-1/2 [82.55] 65MM SCALE [223.8]
[114.3] LENGTH LENGTH Ø22/32
5/8 22/32 DIA. [17.46]
[17.48]
[15.88] 5/8
[15.88] 1/8 NPT
70047600 5/8
[15.88]
5/8

70047500
1/2 [12.70] 5/8
[15.88] [15.88] 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/4 OPEN
1 [25.40] 1-1/4 1/2 [34.93] 1
1-1/4 [31.75] [31.75] [31.75]
[12.70] [25.40]
[31.75]

Use Series DR Glass Flowmeters to accurately measure flow SPECIFICATIONS

rates of air or water with the convenience of a direct reading scale. Service: Compatible gases or liquids.
Permanently fused ceramic scale has integral float guides for opti-
mum float performance. Reflective plastic background and 1.5 X Wetting Materials:
magnification lens reduces eye fatigue and allows for more accurate Flowtube: Borosilicate glass.
Float: 316 SS (black glass as indicated).
readings. Units include a safety blow-out back panel for additional
Float Stops: PTFE.
protection. Flowmeters are shipped completely assembled and End Fittings: Anodized Aluminum or 316 SS.
include standard panel mounting hardware for quick installation. O-rings: Buna-N on aluminum models and Fluoroelastomer on
stainless steel models.

Temperature Limit: 250°F (121°C).

MODELS Pressure Limit: 250 psig (17 bar).

Model Number 65 mm Scale
Without Valve With Valve Accuracy: ±5% FS @ 70°F (21.1°C) and 14.7 psia (1 atm
Aluminum SS Aluminum SS Flow Rate (Air) Flow Rate(H2O) absolute).
scfh (sccm) gph (sccm)
DR10010* DR12010* DR10410* DR12410* 0.24 (130†) —
DR10022 DR12022 DR10422 DR12422 0.65 (300†) — Repeatability: ±0.25% of scale reading.
DR10030* DR12030* DR10430* DR12430* 1.1 (500†) —
DR10042 DR12042 DR10442 DR12442 2.2 (1000†) — Scales: Direct reading 65 mm or 150 mm scales for air or water.
scfh (LPM)
DR10062 DR12062 DR10462 DR12462 4.4 (2.1) —
DR10070* DR12070* DR10470* DR12470* 11 (5) — Turn-down Ratio: 10:1.
DR10082 DR12082 DR10482 DR12482 20 (9.5) —
DR10090* DR12090* DR10490* DR12490* 55 (24) — Connection: 1/8˝ female NPT.
DR100102 DR120102 DR104102 DR124102 100 (50) —
DR100120* DR120120* DR104120* DR124120* — 0.02 (1.5)
DR100132 DR120132 DR104132 DR124132 — 0.1 (6.5) Mounting: Vertical.
DR100140* DR120140* DR104140* DR124140* — 0.13 (8)
DR100152 DR120152 DR104152 DR124152 — 0.36 (24)
DR100172 DR120172 DR104172 DR124172 — 0.9 (55)
Valve: 6-turn needle (standard on models with valve).
DR100180* DR120180* DR104180* DR124180* — 2.2 (140)
DR100192 DR120192 DR104192 DR124192 — 4.4 (280)
DR100200* DR120200* DR104200* DR124200* — 10 (600)
DR100212 DR120212 DR104212 DR124212 — 24 (1500)

Model Number 150 mm Scale

Without Valve With Valve
Aluminum SS Aluminum SS Flow Rate (Air) Flow Rate(H2O) APPLICATIONS
scfh (sccm) gph (sccm)
DR20032 DR22032 DR20432 DR22432 0.33 (160) — Glass flowmeters are suitable for metering gases or liquids for
DR20082 DR22082 DR20482 DR22482 0.54 (270) — film processing, paper manufacturing, chemical processing, semi-
DR200132 DR220132 DR204132 DR224132 2 (840) —
scfh (LPM) conductor industry, water and air pollution analysis equipment,
DR200182 DR220182 DR204182 DR224182 3.8 (1800) — metals processing, industrial fuel and energy conservation, cylin-
DR200232 DR220232 DR204232 DR224232 10 (4800) —
DR200282 DR220282 DR204282 DR224282 16 (7500) — der gas metering, and general laboratory and industrial appli-
DR200332 DR220332 DR204332 DR224332 35 (16000) —
DR200382 DR220382 DR204382 DR224382 90 (44000) —
cations.
DR200432 DR220432 DR204432 DR224432 — 0.05 (3.2)
DR200482 DR220482 DR204482 DR224482 — 0.075 (4.6) Add suffix “M” for metric scale.
DR200532 DR220532 DR204532 DR224532 — 0.34 (21) * Denotes glass float.
DR200582 DR220582 DR204582 DR224582 — 0.75 (46) † Metric models use ccm as unit of measure.
DR200632 DR220632 DR204632 DR224632 — 2.2 (135)
DR200682 DR220682 DR204682 DR224682 — 3.6 (230)
DR200732 DR220732 DR204732 DR224732 — 7.5 (480)
DR200782 DR220782 DR204782 DR224782 — 21 (1300)

171 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg172 7/21/06 11:58 AM Page 1

Series
DR4 High Flow Glass Flowmeters
Direct Reading, 127 mm Scale, ±10% FS Accuracy, Interchangeable Flowtubes
1-1/2 1/4 HEX NUT
[38.1]

Flow
Panel Mounting: 7/8
Drill two 7/8˝ dia. 10-3/8 HEX
holes at 9˝ apart. 127 MM [264] 9
SCALE [229]
LENGTH
3/8 22/32
NPT [17.46]
FEMALE

11/16 1-1/2 [38.1]

1-1/2 3/4 VALVE OPEN
[38.1] [17.5]
[19] 1-3/8 5/8 [15.88]
[35] VALVE CLOSED

Series DR4 Glass Flowmeters offer a simplified solution to the problem of SPECIFICATIONS
fluid flow indication at higher capacity levels. Flowmeters have a direct reading Service: Compatible gases or liquids.
scale for air or water and are designed to withstand even the harshest industri- Wetted Materials:
al applications. Permanently fused ceramic scale has integral float guides for Flowtube: Borosilicate glass.
optimum float performance. Reflective plastic background and 1.5 X magnifi-
cation lens reduces eye fatigue and allows for more accurate readings. Units Float: 316 SS.
include a safety blow-out back panel for additional protection. Float Stops: PTFE.
End Fittings: Brass or 316 SS.
O-rings: Buna-N on brass models and Fluoroelastomer on SS mod-
MODELS els.
Model Number 127 mm Scale Temperature Limits: 250°F (121°C).
Without Valve With Valve Pressure Limits: 200 psig (13.8 bar).
Brass SS Brass SS Flow Rate (Air) Flow Rate(H2O) Accuracy: ±10% FS @ 70°F (21.1°C) and 14.7 psia (1 atm
scfm (SLPM) GPM (LPM)
absolute).
DR4101 DR4201 DR4141 DR4241 0.2-4 (5-120) —
DR4103 DR4203 DR4143 DR4243 0.5-11 (20-320) — Repeatability: ±0.25% of scale reading.
DR4104 DR4204 DR4144 DR4244 1-16 (20-500) — Scale: Direct reading 127 mm scales for air or water.
DR4106 DR4206 DR4146 DR4246 — 0.1-2 (0.5-8) Turn-down Ratio: 10:1.
DR4108 DR4208 DR4148 DR4248 — 0.2-4 (1-16)
DR4109 DR4209 DR4149 DR4249 — 0.5-5 (1-22)
Connection: 3/8˝ female NPT.
Mounting: Vertical.
Add suffix “M” for metric scale.
Valve: 6-turn needle (standard on models with valve).

Series ®
VFF Visi-Float Flowsetter Flowmeters
Indicate or Manually Control Water Flow, Install in Any Position
1.250 1.375
[31.75] [34.92]

3.352
[85.14]
2.483
[63.07]

Set the desired flow rate with the Series VFF Visi-Float® SPECIFICATIONS
Flowsetter Flowmeter. Used to indicate or manually control water Service: Compatible liquids.
flow, the solid acrylic construction allows complete visual inspection of Wetted Materials: 302 & 304 SS, Nickel Plated Brass, Acrylic, Buna-N,
Delrin®.
the unit. Meters can be easily installed in any position and operation
Temperature & Pressure Limits: 100 psig @ 150°F (85°C); 150 psig @
and maintenance is very simple. Designed for use at pressures up to 100°F (38°C).
100 psi (690 kPa) and temperatures up to 150°F (85°C), this unit can Accuracy: ±10% of F.S.
be used to control water flow in various applications.
Process Connections: 3/8˝ female NPT.
Scale Length: 3/4˝ (19.1 mm) – 7/8˝ (22.2 mm), depending on model.
Mounting Orientation: Any position.
MODELS
Weight: 4.4 oz (124.7 g).
Model Number Range GPM Water
VFF-1 0.5 - 2.0 AVAILABLE OPTIONS
VFF-2 2.0 - 5.0 Add to end of Model Number
VFF-3 5.0 - 8.5 –VIT, Fluoroelastomer O-Rings
–SS, 303 SST Fittings

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 172
pg173 7/21/06 11:59 AM Page 1

Series
MTF Multitube Flow Systems
Customize to Fit Application, 65 mm or 150 mm Variable Area Flow Tubes
Flow

1/8 female NPT

(H) (A) (O)

1-27/32 9/16-18
1/2 (W) [46.99] [14.29]
[12.70] OPEN
1-1/8 35/64
[28.70] [13.97]

Customize flow systems to meet application requirements. DIMENSIONS

Systems can be configured with up to six different flow tubes DIM “A” DIM “W”
Scale DIM “H” DIM “O”
with various flow capacities and flow patterns. The Series MTF Length 1 tube 2 tubes 3 tubes 4 tubes 5 tubes 6 tubes
Multitube Flow Systems are ideal for multichannel metering, 5-1/2 4-1/2 1-1/4 2-1/4 3-1/4 4-1/4 5-1/4 6-1/4
65 mm
mixing, or monitoring applications. [139.70] [114.30] [31.75] [57.15] [82.55] [107.95] [133.35] [158.75]
9-13/16 8-13/16 1-1/4 2-1/4 3-1/4 4-1/4 5-1/4 6-1/4
150 mm
[249.25] [223.85] [31.75] [57.15] [82.55] [107.95] [133.35] [158.75
To customize your flow system:

1) Determine the flow pattern required for the application (see SPECIFICATIONS
below).
Scales: Universal 65 mm or 150 mm scales with correla-
2) Select a 65 mm or 150 mm frame (next page), along with the tion charts.
appropriate number of tubes required, flow pattern, and wetted
parts. Choose a 150 mm Gas Proportioner Frame (Series MTP) to Accuracy: ±2% FS @ 70°F (21.1°C) and 14.7 psia (1 atm
blend 2 or 3 gases at required concentrations. Gas proportioner
frames are typically used at 50 psi. absolute).

3) Choose the appropriate 65 mm or 150 mm correlated flow tubes Repeatability: ±0.25% of scale reading.
(next page), for air or water.
Turn-down Ratio: 10:1, 20:1 with combinations of two
4) Select a valve cartridge if desired that matches the range of the floats installed in meter.
flow tube (next page).
Maximum Operating Pressure: 200 psig (13.8 bar).

Isolated Maximum Operating Temperature: 250°F (121°C).

parallel Mounting: Vertical.
channels Connection: 1/8˝ female NPT.
Flowtube: Borosilicate glass.
Common Float: 316 SS or black glass as indicated.
exhaust with Float Stops: PTFE.
parallel inlets
End Fittings: Anodized Aluminum or 316 SS.
Front Shield: Polycarbonate.
Side Panels: Black, anodized aluminum.
Common
inlet with par- O-rings: Buna-N on aluminum models and
Fluoroelastomer on stainless steel models.
allel exhausts

173 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg174 7/21/06 12:02 PM Page 1

65 mm Frames 65 mm Direct Reading Flow Tubes

Wetted Parts Model Number Max. Flow Rate Float
Model Number Pattern Tube Capacity
Air (scfh)
MTF-1621 Isolated 2 Aluminum FT-741 .60 Carboloy
MTF-2621 Isolated 316 SS FT-743 2.2 Glass
MTF-1622 Common 2 Aluminum FT-746 6.0 Glass
MTF-2622 Common 2 316 SS FT-748 10.0 316 SS
MTF-1631 Isolated 3 Aluminum FT-750 18.0 316 SS
MTF-2631 Isolated 3 316 SS FT-752 25.0 316 SS

Flow
MTF-1632 Common 3 Aluminum FT-753 50.0 316 SS
MTF-2632 Common 3 316 SS FT-754 90.0 316 SS
MTF-1641 Isolated 4 Aluminum
MTF-2641 Isolated 4 316 SS 65 mm Correlated Flow Tubes
MTF-1642 Common 4 Aluminum
MTF-2642 Common 4 316 SS Model Number Max. Flow Rate (mL/min)* Float
MTF-1651 Isolated Air Water
5 Aluminum
MTF-2651 Isolated 5 316 SS FT-61 6 0.07 Glass
MTF-1652 FT-62 17 0.28 316 SS
Common 5 Aluminum
MTF-2652 Common FT-63 49 0.55 Glass
5 316 SS
MTF-1661 FT-64 145 2.38 316 SS
Isolated 6 Aluminum
MTF-2661 Isolated FT-67 202 2.60 Glass
6 316 SS
MTF-1662 FT-68 522 12.0 316 SS
Common 6 Aluminum
MTF-2662 Common FT-611 1249 27 Glass
6 316 SS
FT-612 2520 71 316 SS
FT-613 2040 40 Glass
*Flow rates are given for standard pressure and tempera- FT-614 3990 108 316 SS
ture 70°F (21°C) @ 760 mm Hg. FT-617 6318 147 Glass
FT-618 12058 364 316 SS
FT-621 23169 522 Glass
FT-622 42094 1261 316 SS

150 mm Frames 150 mm Direct Reading Flow Tubes

Model Number Pattern Tube Capacity Wetted Parts Max. Flow Rate
Model Number Float
Air (scfh)
MTF-1121 Isolated 2 Aluminum FT-242 1.50 316 SS
MTF-2121 Isolated 2 316 SS FT-244 2.50 Carboloy
MTF-1122 Common 2 Aluminum FT-245 5.00 Glass
MTF-2122 Common 2 316 SS FT-247 8.25 Glass
MTF-1131 Isolated 3 Aluminum FT-248 10.0 316 SS
MTF-2131 Isolated 3 316 SS FT-249 16.5 316 SS
MTF-1132 Common 3 Aluminum FT-251 23.0 Carboloy
MTF-2132 Common 3 316 SS FT-253 50.0 Glass
MTF-1141 Isolated 4 Aluminum FT-254 90.0 316 SS
MTF-2141 Isolated 4 316 SS FT-255 94.0 316 SS
MTF-1142 Common 4 Aluminum
MTF-2142 Common 4 316 SS
MTF-1151 Isolated 5 Aluminum
MTF-2151 Isolated 5 316 SS 150 mm Correlated Flow Tubes
MTF-1152 Common 5 Aluminum Max. Flow Rate (mL/min)*
Model Number Float
MTF-2152 Common 5 316 SS Air Water
MTF-1161 Isolated 6 Aluminum FT-123 19 0.19 Glass
MTF-2161 Isolated 6 316 SS FT-124 61 0.94 316 SS
MTF-1162 Common 6 Aluminum FT-125 49 0.53 Glass
MTF-2162 Common 6 316 SS FT-126 137 2.45 316 SS
FT-127 92 0.90 Glass
FT-128 264 4.70 316 SS
150 mm Gas Proportioner Frames FT-129 374 5.50 Glass
FT-130 814 20.4 316 SS
Model Number Tube Capacity Wetted Parts
FT-133 2313 54 Glass
MTP-112 2 Aluminum FT-134 4562 130 316 SS
MTP-212 2 316 SS FT-137 8678 210 Glass
MTP-113 3 Aluminum FT-138 16737 506 316 SS
MTP-213 3 316 SS FT-139 22536 541 Glass

Valve Cartridges Model Number Standard Valve 6-turn

For metering or mixing applications, complete your multitube Aluminum SS Flow Rate (Air) Flow Rate (H2O)
flow system by selecting a valve cartridge suitable for the mL/min mL/min
FV-11 FV-21 0 to 5000 0 to 125
flow range. Choose a standard 6-turn valve or high precision
FV-12 FV-22 5001 to 10,000 126 to 325
16-turn valve. FV-13 FV-23 10,001 and above 326 and above
SPECIFICATIONS Model Number High Precision Valve 16-turn
Wetted Parts 6-turn Valves: For Aluminum frames: Aluminum SS Flow Rate (Air) Flow Rate (H2O)
Aluminum body, 316 SS spindle, Acetal orifice, Buna-N O- mL/min mL/min
rings; for 316 SS frames: 316 SS body, 316 SS spindle, FVH-11 VA81 0 to 200 0 to 6
PCTFE orifice, Fluoroelastomer O-rings. FVH-12 VA82 201 to 400 7 to 12
FVH-13 VA83 401 to 1000 13 to 26
Wetted Parts 16-turn Valves: For Aluminum frames: Brass FVH-14 VA84 1001 to 2500 27 to 80
body, 316 SS spindle, PCTFE orifice, Buna-N O-rings; for FVH-15 VA85 2501 to 6200 81 to 200
316 SS frames: 316 SS body, 316 SS spindle, PCTFE orifice, FVH-16 VA86 6201 and above 201 and above
Fluoroelastomer O-rings.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 174
pg175 7/21/06 1:21 PM Page 1

Series
RSF Rotatable Scale Flowmeters
Dual, Rotatable Direct Reading Scales for Air and Water
3/8-18 NPT 3/8-18 NPT
TYP 2 PLACES
Flow

TYP 2 PLACES

10-3/8
[263.53] 10-3/8 9-15/32
[263.53] [240.51]
11-1/8
[282.58]

3/4
1-3/4
3/4 [44.45] [19.05] 2 1-1/2 1-7/8
[19.05] 2 1-7/8 [50.80] [38.10] [47.63]
[50.80] [47.63]
IN-LINE METER PANEL MOUNT METER

Series RSF Flowmeters are designed with unique rotatable SPECIFICATIONS

scales of dual, air-water direct reading graduations. Flow rate is Service: Compatible gases or liquids.
indicated in SCFM and SLPM for air and GPM and LPM for water. Wetted Materials:
Graduations are marked on a rotating, polycarbonate tubeshield Flowtube: Borosilicate glass.
which also serves to protect the borosilicate glass flowtube. Float: Brass/SS models: 316 SS; PTFE models: PTFE.
Flowmeters include a reflective plastic background and 1.5 X Tube Shield: Polycarbonate
magnification lens to reduce eye fatigue and allow for more accu- Float Stops: Brass/SS models: 316 SS; PTFE models:
rate readings. A blow-out back panel provides additional protec- PTFE.
End Fittings: Brass/SS models: Brass or 316 SS; PTFE
tion in the event of breakage. Series RSF Flowmeters are avail-
models: PTFE.
able in vertical in-line mounting or panel mounting. Units are
O-rings: Brass/SS models: Fluoroelastomer; PTFE models:
shipped completely assembled and include standard mounting
PTFE.
hardware for quick installation.
Temperature Limit: 250°F (121°C). PTFE models: 150°F
MODELS (65°C).
Brass & SS Vertical In-Line Meters Pressure Limit: 150 psig (10.34 bar) @ 200°F (93°C).
Without Valve With Valve Max. Flow Rate
Brass SS Brass SS
Air scfm (SLPM) Water GPM (LPM)
PTFE models: 100 psig (6.7 bar)
RSF011 RSF111 RSF011V RSF111V 5(140) 1.2(4) Accuracy: ±7% FS.
RSF012 RSF112 RSF012V RSF112V 10(280) 2(8)
RSF013 RSF113 RSF013V RSF113V 15(425) 3(11.5)
Repeatability: ±0.25% FS.
RSF014 RSF114 RSF014V RSF114V 20(575) 4(15) Scale: Direct Reading 127 mm scales for air and water.
RSF015 RSF115 RSF015V RSF115V 30(900) 5(20)
Brass & SS Panel Mount Meters
Turn-Down Ratio: 10:1.
Without Valve With Valve Max. Flow Rate Connections: Two 3/8˝ female NPT.
Brass SS Brass SS
Air scfm (SLPM) Water GPM (LPM)
Mounting: Vertical or panel mount.
RSF021 RSF121 RSF021V RSF121V 5(140) 1.2(4)
RSF022 RSF122 RSF022V RSF122V 10(280) 2(8) Panel Cutout: Drill two 7/8˝ diameter holes 9.0˝
RSF023 RSF123 RSF023V RSF123V 15(425) 3(11.5)
RSF024 RSF124 RSF024V RSF124V 20(575) 4(15)
(229 mm) apart (for panel mount meters only).
RSF025 RSF125 RSF025V RSF125V 30(900) 5(20) Valve: 6-turn needle (standard on models indicating “with
PTFE Vertical In-Line Meters
Without Valve With Valve Max. Flow Rate valve”).
Air scfm (SLPM) Water GPM (LPM) Agency Approvals: CE.
RSF211 RSF211V 3.5(100) 0.8(3)
RSF212 RSF212V 7(200) 1.5(5.75)
RSF213 RSF213V 10.5(300) 2.2(8.25)
RSF214 RSF214V 14(400) 2.9(11) APPLICATIONS
RSF215 RSF215V 17.5(500) 3.5(13.25)
PTFE Panel Mount Meters
Flowmeters are suitable for metering air or water for film processing,
Without Valve With Valve Max. Flow Rate
Air scfm (SLPM) Water GPM (LPM)
paper manufacturing, chemical processing, semiconductor industry, water
RSF221 RSF221V 3.5(100) 0.8(3) and air pollution analysis equipment, metals processing, industrial fuel
RSF222 RSF222V 7(200) 1.5(5.75)
RSF223 RSF223V 10.5(300) 2.2(8.25) and energy conservation, air metering, and general laboratory and indus-
RSF224 RSF224V 14(400) 2.9(11)
RSF225 RSF225V 17.5(500) 3.5(13.25) trial applications.
175 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au
pg176 7/21/06 1:42 PM Page 1

Series
IF Industrial Direct Reading Flowmeter
Air/Water Direct Reading Scale, 304 SS Protective Shield, ±3% Accuracy

Flow
Dimensions
Tube size Female NPT A B C D
Higher 1 and 2 1/2˝ 2 9.54 2.25 8.04
(B) (D) [50.8] [242] [57.2] [204]
Flow Rates 3.5 13.69 3.75 10.50
3 and 4 1˝
Available [89] [348] [95.3] [267]
5 15.59 5.25 11.55
5 and 6 2˝
[127] [396] [133] [293]

(A) (C)

Ideal for industrial applications, the Series IF Industrial Direct Reading SPECIFICATIONS Accuracy: ±3% of full scale.
Flowmeters are fully enclosed in a brushed stainless steel case. The flowme- Service: Liquids or gases. Repeatability: ±0.5% of full scale.
ters can directly measure flow rates up to 116 GPM (439 lpm) for water and Wetted Materials: Flowtube: Turndown Ratio: 10:1.
250 SCFM (7080 lpm) for air service. The detachable, clear 3/16˝ thick poly- Borosilicate glass; Float, Guide Scale: Dual scale GPM and scfm.
carbonate front shield provides protection at maximum rated temperature Rods, Float Stops, End Fittings: Process Connection: See table.
and pressure. Each unit is designed with female NPT end fittings for easy in- 316 SS; O-Rings: Fluoroelastomer. Mounting: Vertical.
line installation. Front Shield: Polycarbonate.
Temperature Limit: 200°F (93°C).
Pressure Limit: 200 psi (13.8 bar); Side Panels: 304 SS.
MODELS 125 psi for tube size 5 & 6.
Maximum Flow Rate Pressure Maximum Flow Rate Pressure
Model Water Air Tube Drop Model Water Air Tube Drop
Number GPM SCFM Size (in. H2O) Number GPM SCFM Size (in. H2O)
IF2700 0.25 1.2 1 — IF2711 11 47.5 4 13
IF2701 0.36 1.7 1 2 IF2712 14 62 4 24
IF2702 0.76 3.3 1 5 IF2713 20 90 4 39
IF2703 1 4.2 2 6 IF2714 22 90 5 16
IF2704 1.5 6.5 2 — IF2715 26 — 4 70
IF2705 2.2 8.5 2 10 IF2716 41 160 6 5
IF2706 3.8 16 3 10 IF2717 44 180 5 30
IF2707 5 21.5 3 14 IF2718 60 245 6 16
IF2708 6 25.5 4 5 IF2719 61 250 5 40
IF2709 7.4 30 4 6 IF2720 86 — 6 25
IF2710 9.6 40 4 10 IF2721 116 — 6 45

Series
VAT Variable Area Fluoropolymer
In-Line, ±5% Accuracy, Chemically Inert
Flowmeter
10

Dimensions 8

Connection A B A 5

4
B
3

1/4˝ 5-11/16 (144) 1-1/4˝ (31.8) 2

3/8˝ 5-11/16 (144) 1-1/4˝ (31.8) 0

1/2˝ 10-1/2˝ (267) 2˝ (50.8)

3/4˝ 10-1/2˝ (267) 2˝ (50.8)

MODELS
Model Number LOW RANGE Constructed entirely of Fluoropolymers, the Series VAT Flowmeters are
Valve No Valve Flow Rate ideal for high purity or corrosive liquid applications. Flowmeters feature a 0-10
Connections ml/min (gph)
VAT-311 VAT-301 1/4˝ female NPT 75 (1.19) scale for flow indication. Each unit is individually leak tested to a leak integri-
VAT-312 VAT-302 1/4˝ female NPT 250 (3.91) ty rating of 1 x 10-7 sccs Helium or better. The Series VAT are designed for in-
VAT-313 VAT-303 1/4˝ female NPT 400 (6.34) line mounting and include a removable protective shield.
VAT-314 VAT-304 1/4˝ female NPT 500 (7.92)
VAT-315 VAT-305 1/4˝ female NPT 1000 (15.85) SPECIFICATIONS (21.1°C) and 14.7 psia (1 atm
VAT-316 VAT-306 3/8˝ female NPT 2000 (31.69)
VAT-317 VAT-307 3/8˝ female NPT 2500 (39.62) Service: Compatible liquids. absolute).
VAT-318 VAT-308 3/8˝ female NPT 3000 (47.54) Wetted Materials: Process Connections: See chart.
VAT-319 VAT-309 3/8˝ female NPT 5000 (79.23) Flowtube: PFA. Leak Integrity: 1 x 10-7 sccs of
Model Number HIGH RANGE Float and End Fittings: PTFE. Helium.
Flow Rate Guide Rods: PCTFE. Scale: 0 to 10 markings.
Valve No Valve Connections L/min (gpm)
13 (3.43) Temperature Limit: 250°F Mounting: Vertical, In-Line.
VAT-6110 VAT-6010 1/2˝ female NPT
VAT-6111 VAT-6011 1/2˝ female NPT 20 (5.28) (121°C).
VAT-6112 VAT-6012 3/4˝ female NPT 30 (7.93) Pressure Limit: 100 psig (6.9 bar).
VAT-6113 VAT-6013 3/4˝ female NPT 40 (1.57) Accuracy: ±5% FS @ 70°F
VAT-6114 VAT-6014 3/4˝ female NPT 45 (11.89)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 176
pg177 7/21/06 1:43 PM Page 1

Models F222 & F451 Liquid/Particle Filters

SPECIFICATIONS
Filtration Efficiency: 93% (removal of 0.01 micron particles).
Flow

Maximum Pressure: 150 psig (10 bar).

Maximum Temperature: 130˚F (54˚C).
Max. Flow at 100 psig: 22 scfm (F222); 45 scfm (F451).
Inlet & Outlet Ports: 1/4˝ female NPT.
Mounting: In-line only (F222); 1/4-20 mounting
holes (F451).
F222
Materials of Construction:
F451
Anodized Aluminum head, Polycarbonate bowl, cadmium
plated steel tie rod, nylon internals, Buna-N seal.
Compressed air filters protect equipment and instrumenta-
Weight: 0.5 lb (0.2 kg) (F222); 1.1 lb (0.5 kg) (F451).
tion from harmful contaminant's such as dirt, water and oil. Liq-
uids are continuously coalesced and released through the manual Model F222 Liquid/Particle Filter
drain valves. Replaceable filter element removes particles and Model 1201-2 Replacement Filters for F222 (pk of 3)
Model F451 Liquid/Particle Filter
droplets as small as 0.01 micron with 93% efficiency. Units have Model 1201-3 Replacement Filters for F451 (pk of 3)
1/4˝ female NPT inlet and outlet and manual drain valve.

Regulator Kits Special Models for OEM’s

Special flowmeter designs can be supplied to
Regulator Kits are available as op- meet a wide range of OEM requirements and spe-
tional extras for both Rate-Master® cific application needs. These include: on-off
Flowmeters and Visi-Float® Flowme- plunger and push-to-test valves, special gas or
ters models. This view shows Model fluid calibration, special ranges, scales, name
VFA Visi-Float® flowmeter with inte- brand or other identification, unusual mounting
grally connected constant differential arrangements and special temperature capabili-
pressure regulator. Recommended for ties. Valves and other wetted metal parts can be
use where inlet air pressure fluctuates constructed of brass or stainless steel, or of tita-
widely and constant flow is required. nium and other exotic metals and alloys. For spe-
cific information, please supply an outline of your
The regulator maintains a constant requirements.
pressure differential of approximately
3 ± .15 psig. Supply pressure must be
at least 3 psig above the flowmeter dis-
charge to operate. The standard regu-
Arbitrary Scales
Arbitrary Scale with Calibration Certificate
lator may be used with any Dwyer
Series RM or VF flowmeter up to 200 can be supplied on request when direct reading
scfh. For higher flow rates consult the scales are not needed or available. Write, de-
factory. scribing the conditions.

Flowmeter Accessories and Options

Model F195 Disposable In-Line Filter SPECIFICATIONS
Filtration Efficiency: 99.99% (removal of 0.1 micron particles).
Housing Construction: Nylon.
Ø1.100 Remove 99.99% of unwanted
[27.94] particles from within your gas flow Filter Tube Dimensions: 0.59 ID x 1.39 length.
.750
[19.05] with the Model F195 Disposable In- Maximum Temperature: 230˚F @ 0 psig (110˚C @ 0 bar), 120˚F @125 psig (49˚C @
Line Filter. Encapsulated microfiber 9 bar).
3.220 filter elements are able to filter parti- Maximum Pressure: 125 psig (8.6 bar).
[81.79] cles as small as 0.1 micron. Filters Maximum Differential Pressure: 60 psi (4 bar) (in-to-out flow direction), 20 psi
are completely disposable — simply (1.4 bar) (out-to-in flow direction).
.750 remove the filter from your line and
[19.05] Internal Volume: 11.5 cc (11.5 ml).
Ø.100
throw it away when it becomes dirty.
Ø.250 The transparent nylon housing makes Connections: Barbed for 4( I.D. tubing.
[2.54]
[6.35] it simple to determine if the filter Line Pressure vs. Flow
needs to be changed.
Line Pressure (psig) 1.5 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 125
Model F195 Disposable In-Line Filter Gas Flow (scfm) 0.6 0.9 1.3 1.6 2.0 2.7 3.5 4.2 5.7

* 1.5 psi pressure drop.

177 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg178 7/21/06 1:44 PM Page 1

Series
HF In-Line Flow Monitors
For Air, Water or Caustic Fluids, ±2.5% Accuracy, Unrestricted Mounting
("A") SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases or liquids.

Flow
Wetted Materials: Body: Aluminum, brass or 304 SS; Seals: Buna-N or
Fluoroelastomer; Magnet: PTFE coated Alnico; Other internal parts: 304
SS.
Maximum Viscosity: 500 SSU.
Temperature Limits: HFA, HFL, HFB and HFS Models: 240°F (116° C);
("C") HFH Models: 400°F (204°C).
Pressure Limits: HFA Models: 600 psig (41 bar); HFL, HFB and HFH
Models: 3500 psig (240 bar); HFS Models: 6000 psig (413 bar).
Accuracy: ±4% FS over entire range; ±2.5% over center third of the mea-
suring range.
Repeatability: ±1% of full scale.
Shipping Weight: 1/8 to 1/2˝ female NPT Models; 2 lb (0.9 kg); 3/4 to 1˝
("B")
female NPT Models: 3.5 lb (1.59 kg); 1-1/2˝ female NPT Models: 11 lb (5
kg); 2˝ female NPT Models: 13.5 lb (6.12 kg).
Connection “A” “B” “C”
Size Reference Wrench Flats Reference
1
⁄8 NPT 11⁄4" (32mm) 13⁄8"(17mm) 413⁄16" (122mm)
1
⁄4 to 1⁄2 NPT 17⁄8" (48mm) 11⁄4" (32mm) 69⁄16" (167mm) MODELS
3
⁄4 to 1 NPT 23⁄8" (60mm) 13⁄4" (45mm) 71⁄8" (181mm) Aluminum body for air or other non-corrosive gases:
11⁄2 NPT 31⁄2 (89mm) 21⁄4" (57mm) 101⁄8" (257mm) Wetted Parts: Aluminum, PTFE coated Alnico, 304 SS and Buna-N
Model Connection Range, Air
Number Size SCFM
Low Cost, Series HF In-Line Flow Monitors have a patented de- HFA-0-12 1/8˝ female NPT 2-12
sign based on a floating sharp-edged orifice disk and variable area flow HFA-1-12 1/4˝ female NPT 2-12
measurement to yield accuracy of ±2.5% over center one-third of scale. HFA-1-22 1/4˝ female NPT 2-22
This unique design allows accurate performance with fluid viscosities
Aluminum body for oil based fluids:
up to 500 SSU. All internal wetted parts are contained inside a sealed Wetted Parts: Aluminum, PTFE coated Alnico, 304 SS and Buna-N
metal tubular casing assuring a virtually maintenance-free unit. Flow-
Model Connection Range, GPM (LPM)
ing media forces linear motion of a spring loaded, sharp edge orifice
Number Size Oil
disk and ring shaped transfer magnet which both ride on a tapered cen- HFL-2-05 1/2˝ female NPT 0.5-5 (1-19)
ter shaft. The transfer magnet drives a clearly visible magnet follower HFL-4-25 1˝ female NPT 2-25 (7.5-95)
located outside the flow tube, protected under the clear Polycarbonate
Brass body for water based fluids (non-steam):
tube. A ring on the magnet follower indicates flow rate on the direct Wetted Parts: Brass, PTFE coated Alnico, 304 SS and Buna-N
reading scale. Rubber bumpers are provided for external impact resis- Model Connection Range, Water
tance. Number Size GPM (LPM)
HFB-0-01 1/8˝ female NPT .05-1 (.19-3.8)
Designed for single-direction flow, Series HF Monitors are recommend- HFB-0-02 1/8˝ female NPT .2-2 (.75-7.5)
HFB-2-05 1/2˝ female NPT 0.5-5.0 (1-19)
ed for use with system filtration of at least 74 microns or a 200 mesh
HFB-3-15 3/4˝ female NPT 2-15 (7.5-55)
screen. Some applications may also require magnetic filtration. These
HFB-3-20 3/4˝ female NPT 2-20 (7.5-75)
flowmeters do not require inlet or outlet straight plumbing and can be
HFB-4-35 19 female NPT 5-35 (19-130)
mounted horizontally, vertically, or inverted. HFB-5-50 1-1/2˝ female NPT 5-50 (19-189)
HFB-5-100 1-1/2˝ female NPT 10-100 (38-379)
HFB-6-75 2˝ female NPT 8-75 (31-284)
HFB-6-150 2˝ female NPT 20-150 (76-568)

304 SS body for high-pressure fluids:

Wetted Parts: 304 SS, Fluoroelastomer and PTFE
APPLICATIONS
Model Connection Range, Water
HF Flow Monitors can be used to set flow rates, fluid motor and cylin- Number Size GPM (LPM)
der speeds. Check pump high pressure performance, pressure relief HFS-0-01 1/8˝ female NPT .05-1 (.19-3.8)
valve settings, fluid handling systems in agricultural, construction or HFS-2-02 1/2˝ female NPT 0.2-2.0 (0.75-7.5)
industrial machinery, power tools and equipment. Monitor; petrochem- HFS-2-10 1/2˝ female NPT 0.5-10 (1.9-38)
ical operations with brass or stainless steel models. Industrial pnue-
matic systems air flow can be monitored with the HFA models which Brass Body High Temperature 400˚F for water based fluids:
Wetted Parts: Brass, PTFE coated Alnico, 304 SS and Fluoroelastomer
are calibrated at 100 psig inlet pressure.
Model Connection Range, Water
Number Size GPM (LPM)
HFH-2-05 1/2˝ female NPT 0.5-5.0 (1-19)
HFH-2-10 1/2˝ female NPT 1-10 (3.8-38)
HFH-4-35 1˝ female NPT 5-35 (19-130)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 178
pg179 7/21/06 1:44 PM Page 1

Series
OP Orifice Plate Flow Meter
Stainless Steel for Use with Liquids and Gases
Flow

1/4˝ NPT PRESSURE FITTING

A CL
HI
PRESSURE
ORIFICE PLATE
1/8 (3.18)
THICK TYPICAL

4-1/2 OD
(114.3) ID
FLOW

A CL LOW
BODY PRESSURE
(CARRIER RING)
INCLUDES RING GASKET 1-1/4
ADHERED TO FACES (31.75)

The Series OP Orifice Plate Flow Meter is a complete ori- SPECIFICATIONS

fice plate flow metering package. It incorporates a stainless steel Service: For metering compatible liquids and gases.
orifice plate with a unique holder or carrier ring containing meter- Wetted Material: 304 SS, Buna-N gaskets.
ing taps and integral gaskets. It was designed for use wherever Accuracy: 0.6% of full scale flow. (Beta = .2-.6) ±0.7% for
there is an application for a conventional flow orifice plate. It can Beta greater than .6.
also be used in place of other primary differential producers for Temperature: -50 to 200°F (-45 to 93°C).
efficiency and cost effectiveness. Installation is accomplished sim- Pressure: Limited only by pipe and flange rating restrictions.
ply by slipping the unit between standard flanges (orifice flanges Head Loss: 1-Beta ratio2 eg: 1-0.72 = 1-0.49 = 51% of the
are not required). The Series OP is available in line sizes from d.p.
1/2˝ to 24˝ and can be used with compatible liquids and gases. Line Sizes: 1/2˝ to 24˝.
Process Connection: 1/4˝ female NPT.
FEATURES Installation: Standard flange, any rating (orifice flanges not
• Mounted with Standard Flanges required).
• Corner Type Metering Taps Pipe Requirements: General requirements 10 diameter
• Corrosion Free Material
upstream and 5 diameter downstream of orifice plate.
• Simplified Installation
Weight: Varies with line size. See chart.
• Stainless Steel Wetted Parts
• Proven Through a Wide Range of Applications for Energy
Efficiency
• Assures Long Term Reliability and Accuracy

179 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg180 7/26/06 11:24 AM Page 1

Series OP Orifice Plate Flow Meter

• Material 304/304 L- dual certified- Gaskets Buna "N"
• Based on 70°F, 14.7 psia (Base Conditions)
• Beta Value Based on Std Sch pipe I.D.
• 1.25˝ overall thickness
• Orifice plate thickness is 0.125˝
WATER CAPACITY AIR CAPACITY - Flow in SCFM

Flow
Model Weight Line Inches d.p. Flow in Inch d.p. at 14.7 PSIA
Number (lbs) Size Bore Beta W/C GPM W/C (0 PSIG) at 20 psig at 100 psig

OP-A-1 1.00 1/2" 0.200" 0.32 20 0.62 20 2.35 3.63 6.61

OP-A-2 1.00 1/2" 0.310" 0.50 100 3.44 100 12.21 19.58 36.37
OP-A-3 1.00 1/2" 0.430" 0.69 320 13.00 200 32.77 56.15 107.47

OP-B-1 1.00 3/4" 0.250" 0.30 20 0.97 20 3.65 5.66 10.3

OP-B-2 1.00 3/4" 0.400" 0.49 100 5.69 100 20.21 32.44 60.26
OP-B-3 1.00 3/4" 0.580" 0.70 320 23.82 200 59.92 102.91 197.2

OP-C-1 2.00 1" 0.300" 0.29 20 1.38 20 5.24 8.11 14.8

OP-C-2 2.00 1" 0.520" 0.49 100 9.63 100 34.2 54.92 102.09
OP-C-3 2.00 1" 0.720" 0.69 320 36.15 200 91.28 156.51 300

OP-D-1 2.00 1.25" 0.400" 0.29 20 2.46 20 9.31 14.41 26.3

OP-D-2 2.00 1.25" 0.700" 0.51 100 17.48 100 62.09 99.75 185.5
OP-D-3 2.00 1.25" 1.00" 0.72 320 71.77 200 180 309.97 595.2

OP-E-1 2.00 1.5" 0.500" 0.31 20 3.85 20 14.57 22.55 41.16

OP-E-2 2.00 1.5" 0.800" 0.50 100 22.73 100 80.82 129.68 241.5
OP-E-3 2.00 1.5" 1.100" 0.68 320 83.95 200 212.18 363.93 697.39

OP-F-1 3.00 2" 0.600" 0.29 20 5.52 20 20.92 32.38 59.13

OP-F-2 3.00 2" 1.000" 0.48 100 35.34 100 125.74 202.03 375.8
OP-F-3 3.00 2" 1.450" 0.70 320 147.74 200 372.09 639.87 1,227.63

OP-G-1 4.00 2.5" 0.750" 0.30 20 8.63 20 32.71 50.64 92.48

OP-G-2 4.00 2.5" 1.250" 0.50 100 55.54 100 197.54 317.58 590.91
OP-G-3 4.00 2.5" 1.750" 0.70 320 216.30 200 543.99 936.56 1,798.86

OP-H-1 5.00 3" 0.920" 0.30 20 12.97 20 49.17 76.13 139.06

OP-H-2 5.00 3" 1.500" 0.49 100 79.94 100 282.9 454.77 846.21
OP-H-3 5.00 3" 2.150" 0.70 320 324.16 200 816.7 1,404.95 2,696.28

OP-J-1 7.00 4" 1.200" 0.30 20 22.03 20 83.58 129.44 236.48

OP-J-2 7.00 4" 2.000" 0.50 100 141.51 100 503.76 810.06 1,507.64
OP-J-3 7.00 4" 2.800" 0.70 320 547.11 200 1,380.03 2,373.02 4,553.68

OP-K-1 8.00 5" 1.500" 0.30 20 34.39 20 130.48 202.11 369.29

OP-K-2 8.00 5" 2.500" 0.50 100 220.80 100 786.23 1,264.42 2,353.51
OP-K-3 8.00 5" 3.500" 0.69 320 853.09 200 2,152.83 3,701.57 7,103.22

OP-L-1 10.00 6" 1.800" 0.30 20 49.46 20 187.86 291 531.75

OP-L-2 10.00 6" 3.000" 0.49 100 317.74 100 1,331.63 1,820.05 3,387.93
OP-L-3 10.00 6" 4.200" 0.69 320 1,226.98 200 3,097.20 5,325.20 10,219.28

OP-M-1 14.00 8" 2.400" 0.30 20 87.95 20 333.87 517.25 945.28

OP-M-2 14.00 8" 4.000" 0.50 100 565.77 100 2,014.95 3,241.45 6,034.85
OP-M-3 14.00 8" 5.600" 0.70 320 2,195.86 200 5,532.00 9,525.43 18,290.00

OP-N-1 20.00 10" 3.000" 0.30 20 137.35 20 521.58 808 1,476.77

OP-N-2 20.00 10" 5.000" 0.50 100 883.04 100 3,145.50 5,060.38 9,421.74
OP-N-3 20.00 10" 7.000" 0.70 320 3,421.26 200 8,626.42 14,846.80 28,506.17

OP-O-1 30.00 12" 3.600" 0.30 20 197.73 20 750.9 1,163.44 2,126.47

OP-O-2 30.00 12" 6.000" 0.50 100 1,271.62 100 4,530 7,288.16 13,570.33
OP-O-3 30.00 12" 8.400" 0.70 320 4,930.86 200 12,430.00 21,397.00 41,089.02

OP-P-1 40.00 14" 4.000" 0.30 20 244.14 20 927.14 1,436.59 2,625.81

OP-P-2 40.00 14" 6.600" 0.50 100 1,537.49 100 5,477.67 8,812.87 16,409.42
OP-P-3 40.00 14" 9.300" 0.70 320 6,052.57 200 15,251.50 28,262.66 50,437.78

OP-Q-1 48.00 16" 4.500" 0.30 20 308.76 20 1,172.63 1,817.05 3,321.32

OP-Q-2 48.00 16" 7.600" 0.50 100 2,038.95 100 7,264.58 11,688.26 21,764.08
OP-Q-3 48.00 16" 10.700" 0.70 320 8,007.74 200 20,179.85 34,749.32 66,737.64

OP-R-1 56.00 18" 5.200" 0.30 20 412.26 20 1,565.79 2,426.34 4,435.12

OP-R-2 56.00 18" 8.600" 0.50 100 2,610.71 100 9,302.08 14,966.93 27,869.85
OP-R-3 56.00 18" 12.000" 0.70 320 10,027.37 200 25,299.92 43,535.32 83,587.01

OP-S-1 64.00 20" 5.780" 0.30 20 509.55 20 1,935.37 2,999.11 5,482.22

OP-S-2 64.00 20" 9.600" 0.50 100 3,252.22 100 11,588.20 18,645.74 34,720.84
OP-S-3 64.00 20" 13.500" 0.70 320 12,742.82 200 32,115.34 55,303.34 106,215.88

OP-T-1 78.00 24" 7.000" 0.30 20 747.18 20 2,838.14 4,398.25 8,038.99

OP-T-2 78.00 24" 11.700" 0.50 100 4,835.93 100 17,229.62 27,726.33 51,633.81
OP-T-3 78.00 24" 16.300" 0.70 320 18,572.50 200 46,810.53 80,610.19 154,823.78
Note: Differential pressure values should be less than 50% of the inlet absolute pressure.
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055
180
pg181 7/21/06 1:47 PM Page 1

Series ®
RMV Rate-Master Dial-Type Flowmeters
Brass Body; Three Ranges to 20 GPM Water
Flow

Series RMV Rate-Master® Flowmeters measure higher water flow APPLICATIONS

rates with ±2% of full scale accuracy at affordable prices. Rugged forged brass Monitor coolant flow through ingot heaters, high-amp switchgear, resistance
housing is standard on all models for great compatibility and the strength to with- welders, heat exchangers, compressors, scrubbers; monitor water consumption
stand system pressures to 1000 psig (68.9 bar). Unlike glass tube rotameters, these to different processes and operations for more efficient operation; calculate re-
units won’t shatter and they work fine with even dark and/or opaque liquids. quired fill or drain times for tanks, water towers.
Stocked models are fitted with 1" female NPT inlet and outlet; 3⁄4" and 1⁄2" sizes are
also available. Install in line, supported by piping or flush panel mount with com-
plete hardware package included. SPECIFICATIONS
MODELS Service: Compatible liquids.
Wetted Materials: Brass, copper, 302 SS, sintered barium ferrite.
Model Number Range, GPM Water Connection Size
Temperature Limits: 20 to 200°F (-6.7 to 93°C).
RMV-1-3 0-5 1" female NPT Pressure Limit: 1000 psig (68.9 bar).
RMV-2-3 0-10 1" female NPT
RMV-3-3 0-20 1" female NPT Pressure Drop: 0-5 GPM: 3.2 PSID; 0-10 GPM: 5.3 PSID; 0-20
RMV-1-2 0-5 3
⁄4" female NPT GPM: 10.4 PSID.
RMV-2-2 0-10 3
⁄4" female NPT Accuracy: ±2% of full scale.
RMV-3-2 0-20 3
⁄4" female NPT Size: Diameter dial face 4˝ (101.6 mm).
RMV-1-1 0-5 1
⁄2" female NPT Process Connections: See chart.
RMV-2-1 0-10 1
⁄2" female NPT
RMV-3-1 0-20 1
⁄2" female NPT
Maximum Flow: 1.5 x full scale reading.
Weight: 9 Ib (4.08 kg).
Adjustable Signal Flag — Option adds external pointer to indicate flow limit.
Add -ASF suffix. Example: RMV-1-3-ASF

Series ®
RMV II Rate-Master Dial-Type Flowmeter
For Panel Mounting, Three Ranges to 10 GPM Water
1.0
(3) 7/32 DIA. (5.556) .350 [25.4]
HOLES ON 5-3/8 DIA. [8.890]
(136.5) BOLT CIRCLE 120˚
TYP. 1.300
[33.02] 4.645
[118.0]

1.250 3/4˝ NPT

5-7/8 DIA. 4.440
[31.75] [112.8]
[149.2]
*FITS IN ANSI STANDARD 4.940 [125.5] PANEL CUTOUT.

Series RMV II Rate-Master® flowmeters employ a target-type design SPECIFICATIONS

combined with a damage resistant magnetic linkage to drive a pointer over an Service: Compatible gases & liquids & oils.
easy-to-read litho scale. This unique construction fully isolates flowing media Wetted Materials: Brass, 302 SS, sintered barium ferrite,
from gage front for leakproof operation at pressures to 3000 psig (206.7 bar)
with ±5% of full scale accuracy. Solid machined brass meter body is ideally suit- polyacetyl.
ed for water flows. Body design fits standard 41⁄2" mounting hole layouts per Temperature Limit: 200°F (93°C).
ANSI B40.1. Inlet and outlet threads are standard 3⁄4" female NPT. Pressure Limit: 3000 psig (206 bar).
Pressure Drop: 0-5 GPM: 3.2 psid; 0-10 GPM: 5.3 psid;
MODELS 0-20 GPM: 10.4 psid.
Model Range Range Range Model Range Range Range Range Accuracy: ±5% of full scale.
Number GPM Water SCFM LPM Air Number GPM Oil SCFM LPM Air LPM Oil Size: Diameter dial face 4.5˝ (114.3 mm).
RMVII-1 0-3 RMVII-12 -- 0-30 0-850 Process Connections: 3/4˝ female NPT.
RMVII-3 0-5 RMVII-14 -- 0-50 0-1400 Weight: 2 lb, 14 oz (1.3 kg).
RMVII-6 0-10 RMVII-20 0-2.2 -- -- 0-8
RMVII-10 -- 0-10 0-280 RMVII-21 0-4.0 -- -- 0-15
RMVII-22 0-8.5 -- -- 0-32

181 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg182 7/21/06 1:48 PM Page 1

Series
DMF Digital Mass Flow Controllers
Programmable, RS485 Interface, Up To 500 psig, ±1% Accuracy

Flow
DIGITAL MASS
FLOW CONTROLLER
SERIES
DMF DIGITAL MASS
FLOW CONTROLLER
SERIES
DMF
6.58 6.19
[167] [157]

1.88 5.65/*5.87 1.50 5.27

[48] [144/*149] [38] [139]
*FLOWS ≥ 60 L/min
0.69 0.69
[18] [18]
2.69 2.93
[68] [74]
FOR FLOWS ≥ 20 L/min FOR FLOWS ≤ 15 L/min

Program, record, analyze, and control flow rates of vari- SPECIFICATIONS

ous gases with Series DMF Digital Mass Flow Controller. Service: Clean gases compatible with wetted parts.
Controllers are designed with straight tube sensors with Wetted Materials: 316 SS, 416 SS, Fluoroelastomer
restrictor flow elements to ensure laminar gas flow for accu-
O-rings.
rate and repeatable results. Series DMF are unaffected by tem-
perature and pressure variations. Accuracy: ±1% FS including linearity between 59 to 77°F
(15 to 25°C) and 10 to 60 psia (0.7 to 4 bar); ±2% FS from
Controllers can be programmed for various control functions 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C) and 5 to 150 psia (0.3 to 10 bar).
including flow set point, totalizer, stop totalizer, totalize from Repeatability: ±0.15% of full scale.
preset flow, stop and preset total, auto zero, and more. Auto Response Time: 0.6 to 1.0 second to within ±2% of set-
zero feature utilizes an automatic balancing circuit that virtu- point over 20% to 100% FS.
ally eliminates drift of zero and span. In addition, Series DMF Output: Linear 0-5 VDC (2000 Ω min. load impedance); 0-10
controllers have two dry contact closures to operate pumps, VDC (4000 Ω min. load impedance).
valves, or other process equipment. Maximum Particulate Size: 100 microns.
Temperature Limits: 41 to 122°F (5 to 50°C).
The Series DMF features an auto tune function to optimize con-
trol response for a specific gas under actual process conditions. Power Supply: ±15 VDC; 13.5 Watts maximum.
Self diagnostic tests are run at power up to ensure the con- Process Connections: 1/4˝ compression fitting for flow rates
troller is in optimum working condition. Calibration informa- ≤50 L/m; 3/8˝ for flows ≥60 L/m.
tion for up to 10 gases and conversion factors for up to 256 dif- Pressure Limits: 500 psig (34.5 bar).
ferent gases are stored in memory. High and low gas flow Leak Integrity: 1 x 10-9 sccs of Helium.
alarm limits are programmed via RS-485 interface. Software Computer Interface: RS-485.
supports programmable flow modes, allowing execution of cus-
Agency Approvals: CE.
tom programming of up to ten steps.

MODELS
Model Model
Range Range Models with flow rates from 0-10 sccm to 0-15 L/min
Number* Number*
Models with flow rates from 0-30 L/min to 0-50 L/min
DMF-41401 0 to 10 sccm DMF-41408 0 to 2 L/min
Models with flow rates of 0-100 L/min
DMF-41402 0 to 20 sccm DMF-41409 0 to 5 L/min
DMF-41403 0 to 50 sccm DMF-41411 0 to 15 L/min
DMF-41404 0 to 100 sccm DMF-41431 0 to 30 L/min
DMF-41405 0 to 200 sccm DMF-41433 0 to 50 L/min
ACCESSORIES
DMF-41406 0 to 500 sccm DMF-41842 0 to 100 L/min
Model DMF-110P 110V Power Supply with 25-pin connector
DMF-41407 0 to 1 L/min Model DMF-220PE 220V Power Supply with 25-pin connector
*Specified flow ranges are for an equivalent flow of nitrogen at 70°F (21°C) @ 760 mm Hg. Model DMF-CBL1 6 ft cable with branch to separate power supply
Model DMF-CBL2 6 ft cable with branch to computer port

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 182
pg183 7/21/06 1:49 PM Page 1

Series
GFM Gas Mass Flow Meters
Flow Range Up to 1000 L/min, Pressures Up to 500 psi, NIST Traceable
Flow

1-3/4 1-3/4
1-1/8 [44.5] 1-1/8 [44.5]
3 1-3/4
3 [28.6] [28.6]
[76.2] [44.5]
[76.2] 1-7/64
1-7/64 1-1/8
3
[27.9] [27.9] [28.6] 1-1/2
[76.2] 1-7/16
[38.1]
[36.5]

5-33/64 5-63/64
4-1/2 4-7/8 [151.9] 4-9/16
[142.2]
[114.3] [123.7] [115.6]

1 1-1/4
5-1/32 [25.4] 1-9/64 [31.8]
[127.5] [156]
Model GFM-1140 thru GFM-1142
Models GFM-1101 thru GFM-111
& GFM-2101 thru GFM-2111
& GFM-2140 thru GFM-2142 4
6-1/32 [101.6]
[153]
Model GFM-1130 thru GFM-1133
11/16 & GFM-2130 thru GFM-2133
[17.5] 11/16
4 7-5/16 1-13/64
[17.5]
[101.6] [185.4] [30.5]
2-11/16 6-32 2-11/16
6-32 Models GFM-1143 thru GFM-1145
[68.1] [68.1] & Models GFM-2143 thru GFM-2145

Series GFM Gas Mass Flow Meters combine a straight tube sen- SPECIFICATIONS
sor with a restrictor flow element to provide high accuracy and
repeatability. Flow rates are virtually unaffected by temperature and
Service: Clean gases compatible with wetted parts.
pressure variations. Actual gas flow is displayed in engineering units Wetted Materials: GFM-1XXX: Anodized Aluminum,
on a 3-digit, 90° tiltable LCD readout. Units can be used with Series Brass, 316 SS and Fluoroelastomer O-rings; GFM-2XXX:
GFT Flow Totalizer for applications requiring totalization. Series GFM 316 SS and Fluoroelastomer O-rings.
includes a NIST traceable certificate.
Accuracy: ±1.5% FS including linearity over 59 to 77°F
MODELS
(5 to 25°C) and 5 to 60 psia (0.35 to 4 bar).
Meters
Flow Range
Aluminum SS Repeatability: ±0.5% of full scale.
GFM-1101* GFM-2101* Response Time: 2 seconds to within ±2% of actual flow.
0-10 sccm

0-20 sccm
GFM-1102* GFM-2102* Output: Linear 0-5 VDC and 4-20 mA.
0-50 sccm
GFM-1103* GFM-2103* Max. Particulate Size: 5 microns.
GFM-1104* GFM-2104* Temperature Limits: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
0-100 sccm
GFM-1105* GFM-2105*
Power Supply: ±12 VDC.
0-200 sccm
Process Connections: 1/4˝ compression fitting for flow rates
GFM-1106* GFM-2106*
0-500 sccm ≤50 L/m; 3/8˝ for 100 and 200 L/m; 1/2˝ for 500 L/min; 3/4˝ for
0-1 L/min
GFM-1107* GFM-2107* 1000 L/min.
0-2 L/min
GFM-1108* GFM-2108* Pressure Limits: 500 psig (34.5 bar).
GFM-1109* GFM-2109* Leak Integrity: 1 x 10-7 sccs of Helium.
0-5 L/min
GFM-1111* GFM-2111*
Display: 90° tiltable, 3-1/2 digit.
0-15 L/min
Agency Approvals: CE.
GFM-1131* GFM-2131*
0-30 L/min
GFM-1133* GFM-2133* ACCESSORIES
0-50 L/min
GFM-1142* GFM-2142*
For Series GFM Gas Mass Flowmeters
0-100 L/min Model GFM-110P 110V Power Supply
GFM-1143* GFM-2143* Model GFM-220PE 220V Power Supply
0-200 L/min
GFM-1144* GFM-2144* Model GFM-CBL4 3 ft cable for 4-20mA output
0-500 L/min
Model GFM-CBL5 3 ft cable for 0-5 VDC output
0-1000 L/min GFM-1145* GFM-2145* Model IO-1 0-5 VDC to RS232 Input to Output
*Specified flow ranges are for an equivalent flow of nitrogen at 70°F (21°C) @ 760 mm Hg.
Signal Conditioner

183 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg184 7/21/06 1:50 PM Page 1

Series
GFC
Gas Mass Flow Controllers
Flow Range Up to 1000 L/min, Pressures Up to 500 psi, NIST Traceable

Flow
1-3/4 1-3/4
[44.5] [44.5]
3 1-1/8
3 1-3/4
1-1/8 [76.2] [28.6]
[76.2] [44.5]
[28.6]
1-1/8
[28.6] 1-1/2 3 3-11/64
[76.2] 1-7/16
[38.1] [80.6]
[36.5]
5-39/64 5-63/64
[142.2] [151.9]
3-9/16 3-15/16
[100.1] 4-9/16
[90.4] [115.6]

6-16/64 1 7-21/64 1-1/4

[159.8] [25.4] [186.2] [31.8]
Model GFC-1101 thru GFC-1111 Model GFC-1140 thru GFC-1142
& GFC-2101 thru GFC-2111 & GFC-2140 thru GFC-2142
4
7-7/32 [151.6]
[183.2]
11/16 11/64
Model GFC-1130 thru GFC-1133
& GFC-2130 thru GFC-2133
[17.5] [17.5]
4 7-5/16 318
1-13/64 [79.4] 1-13/64
[101.6] [30.5] [185.4] [30.5]
6-32 2-11/16 6-32 2-11/16 Model GFC-1143 thru GFC-1145
[68.1] [68.1] & Model GFC-2143 thru GFC-2145

Series GFC Gas Mass Flow Controllers combine a straight tube sensor SPECIFICATIONS
with a restrictor flow element to provide high accuracy and repeatability. Gas Service: Clean gases compatible with wetted parts.
mass flow controllers utilize an electromagnetic valve and PID electronics to
maintain continuous control by comparing measured sensor signal set to flow Wetted Materials: GFC-1XXX: Anodized Aluminum, Brass, 316
rates. Setpoints can be adjusted with local potentiometers or remotely via 0 to SS and Fluoroelastomer O-rings; GFC-2XXX: 316 SS and
5 VDC or 4 to 20 mA analog signal. Flow rates are virtually unaffected by tem- Fluoroelastomer O-rings.
perature and pressure variations. Actual gas flow is displayed in engineering Accuracy: ±1.5% FS including linearity over 59 to 77°F
units on a 3-digit, 90° tiltable LCD readout.Units can be used with Series GFT
Flow Totalizer for applications requiring totalization. Series GFC includes a (5 to 25°C) and 5 to 60 psia (0.35 to 4 bar).
NIST traceable certificate. Repeatability: ±0.5% of full scale.
MODELS Response Time: 2 seconds to within ±2% of actual flow.
Output: Linear 0-5 VDC and 4-20 mA.
Controllers
Flow Range Max. Particulate Size: 5 microns.
Aluminum SS
GFC-1101* GFC-2101* Temperature Limits: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
0-10 sccm
GFC-1102* GFC-2102* Power Supply: ±12 VDC.
0-20 sccm
Process Connections: 1/4˝ compression fitting for flow rates ≤50
GFC-1103* GFC-2103*
0-50 sccm L/m; 3/8˝ for 100 and 200 L/m; 1/2˝ for 500 L/min; 3/4˝ for 1000
GFC-1104* GFC-2104* L/min.
0-100 sccm
Pressure Limits: 500 psig (34.5 bar).
GFC-1105* GFC-2105*
0-200 sccm Leak Integrity: 1 x 10-7 sccs of Helium.
GFC-1106* GFC-2106* Display: 90° tiltable, 3-1/2 digit.
0-500 sccm
GFC-1107* GFC-2107* Agency Approvals: CE.
0-1 L/min
GFC-1108* GFC-2108*
0-2 L/min
GFC-1109* GFC-2109*
0-5 L/min

0-15 L/min
GFC-1111* GFC-2111* ACCESSORIES
GFC-1131* GFC-2131* For Series GFC Gas Mass Flow Controllers
0-30 L/min
Model GFC-110P 110V Power Supply
GFC-1133* GFC-2133*
0-50 L/min Model GFC-220PE 220V Power Supply
0-100 L/min
GFC-1142* GFC-2142* Model GFC-CBL1 8 ft cable with 15-pin connector
Model GFC-CBL3 3 ft extension cable for LCD readout
GFC-1143* GFC-2143*
0-200 L/min Model IO-1 0-5 VDC to RS232 Input to Output Signal Conditioner
GFC-1144* GFC-2144*
0-500 L/min

0-1000 L/min GFC-1145* GFC-2145*

*Specified flow ranges are for an equivalent flow of nitrogen at 70°F (21°C) @ 760 mm Hg.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 184
pg185 7/21/06 1:51 PM Page 1

MIDWEST Sight Flow Indicators

Inexpensive Protection for Expensive Equipment and Systems
Flow

MODEL 100, 100MP

MODEL 400

MODEL 300, 300MP MODEL 360F MODEL 700

Patent No. 5,103,757

Midwest Sight Flow Indicators are manufactured of quality materials MODELS

and safety tested to assure long, dependable service at economical prices.
Available in window viewing style in the 100 and 300 Series and tube view- Sight Flow Indicator
ing style in the 400 and 700 Series with connection choices of female NPT, Size 100 300 300SS 350 350SS
BSPP, or BSPT threaded and flanged. Series 700 has impeller and internal
1/4˝
wipers for cleaning sight tube, which is perfect for fluids with suspended
solids. Just rotate the glass tube and restore full 360° visibility without dis- 3/8˝
rupting the flow. 1/2˝
3/4˝
1˝
1-1/4˝
Sight Flow Indicator Dimensions and Weight 1-1/2˝
Viewing 2˝
Model Body Flange Area WEIGHT
Number Size Length Depth Height Diameter Diameter Lbs (kg) Options: 316SS impeller for 100, 300, 300SS for 1/4˝, 3/8˝;
1/4, 3/8 3.000 (76) 1.813 (46) 2.125 (54) - 1.1 (0.5) for 1/2˝ to 1-1/4˝; for 1-1/2˝, 2˝
100 1/2, 3/4 4.000 (102) 2.250 (57) 2.563 (65) - - 1.5 (0.7) MP otion on 100 and 300
Series 1, 1-1/4 4.375 (111) 2.563 (65) 2.625 (67) - - 2.7 (1.2)
- -
Size 360 360SS 700 700SS
1-1/2, 2 5.688 (144) 3.250 (830) 3.625 (83) 5.5 (2.5)
1/4, 3/8 3.063 (78) 2.250 (57) 2.125 (54) - - 1.7 (0.8) 1/4˝
300 1/2, 3/4 4.063 (103) 2.750 (70) 2.563 (65) - - 2.6 (1.2)
Series - -
3/8˝
1, 1-1/4 4.375 (111) 3.125 (79) 2.563 (65) 3.0 (1.4)
1-1/2, 2 5.500 (140) 3.688 (93) 4.063 (103) - - 7.0 (3.2) 1/2˝
1/4, 3/8 2.750 (70) - 1.500 (38) - - 0.9 (0.4)
700 3/4˝
1/2, 3/4 3.688 (94) - 2.250 (57) - - 2.4 (1.1)
Series 1, 1-1/4, 4.875 (124) - 2.750 (70) - - 5.1 (2.3) 1˝
1-1/2 (across flats) - - 1-1/4˝
1/2 4.500 (144) - 3.500 (89) 1.500 (38) 3.8 (1.7)
3/4 5.125 (130) - - 3.875 (98) 1.750 (44) 4.8 (2.2) 1-1/2˝
1 5.625 (143) - - 4.250 (108) 2.000 (51 ) 6.2 (2.8) 2˝
400 1-1/4 5.750 (146) - - 4.625 (117) 2.000 (51) 7.6 (3.5)
Series 1-1/2 5.875 (149) - 5.000 (127) 2.500 (64) 8.7 (4.0) Options: 316 SS flapper for 360
2 6.125 (156) - - 6.000 (152) 3.000 (76) 13 (6.0) BSPP or BSPT threads for 700 and 700SS
3 6.250 (159) - - 7.500 (191) 4.000 (102) 17 (7.7)
Size 400CI 400SS 400F 350FCS 350FSS
4 6.250 (159) - - 9.00 (229) 5.000 (127) 25 (11.0)
1 5.000 (127) - - 4.250 (108 2.000 (51) 7 (3.2) 1/2˝
1-1/4 5.125 (130) - - 4.625 (117) 2.000 (51) 8 (3.6) 3/4˝
400F 1-1/2 5.250 (133) - - 5.000 (127) 2.500 (64) 12 (5.4)
Series 2 5.370 (137) - - 6.000 (152) 3.000 (76) 14 (6.4) 1˝
3 5.750 (146) - - 7.500 (191) 4.000 (102) 23 (10.4) 1-1/4˝
4 5.750 (146) - - 9.000 (229) 5.000 (127) 31 (14.1)
5.000 (127) 2.313 (58)
1-1/2˝
1-1/2 6.375 (162) - - 12 95.5)
2 6.500 (165) - - 6.000 (152) 2.313 (58) 16 (7.5) 2˝
300F 7.500 (191) 3.000 (76)
3 8.875 (225) - - 38 (17) 3˝
Series
4 10.250 (260) - - 9.000 (229) 4.000 (102) 56 (25)
6 12.500 (318) - - 11.000 (279) 6.000 (152) 120 (55) 4˝
6˝
Dimensions are in inches (mm)
Contact Factory for options not shown.

185 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg186 7/21/06 1:55 PM Page 1

Models Applications
• 100 - Single window with impeller Ideal to prove flow of coolant, lubricants, fuel lines, etc. on turbines,
• 300 - Double window with impeller engines, compressors, and other large machinery. Great for monitoring fil-
• 350 - Double window with no indicator ter efficiency, pump operation, and flow direction.
• 360 - Double window with flapper
• 400 - Tube type with no indicator
• 700 - Tube type with impeller and internal wipers to clean glass tube
MODEL CHART - 700 SERIES
Tube Style with Threaded Connections

Flow
MODEL CHART - 100 & 300 SERIES
Window Style with Threaded Connections SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
Service: Compatible gases and liquids. Wetted Materials: Tube: Tempered Borosilicate. Body: Brass or 316 SS.
Wetted Materials: Window: Tempered glass. Body: Bronze or 316 SS. Gasket: Fluoroelastomer. Indicator: Acetal.
Gasket: Buna-N, Fluoroelastomer, or PTFE. Indicator: ABS or 316 SS Temperature Limit: 212°F (100°C).
impeller (100 and 300), 304 SS or 316 SS Flapper (360). Pressure Limit: 230 psig (15.86 bar).
Temperature Limit: 200°F (93°C). Connections: Threaded.
Pressure Limit: 125 psig (8.62 bar), 150 psig (10.34 bar) on “MP”
Models.
Connections: Threaded. SFI-700SS-1-1/2 Sight Flow Indicator; tube type with 8
blade Acetal impeller and integral wipers to clean tube
Example SFI 700SS 1-1/2 interior, tempered borosilicate tube, Fluoroelastomer
SFI-300SS-2-G2 Sight Flow Indicator; double window, gaskets, 316SS body, 1-1/2 inch female NPT connections
Example SFI 300 SS 2 G2 Sight flow indicator, tube type with 8 blade Acetal
temper glass, Fluoroelastomer gaskets, 316SS body, Model
ABS impeller, 2 inch female NPT connections. SFI impeller and integral wipers to clean tube interior,
Designator
tempered borosilicate tube, Fluoroelastomer gaskets
Model Sight flow indicator, tempered glass standard, Buna-N 700 Brass body
SFI Body
Designator gaskets standard, female NPT connections standard. 316SS body
Style 700SS
100 Single window, bronze body, ABS Impeller
Body 300 Double window, bronze body, ABS Impeller
1/4 1/4 inch female NPT connection size
Style 350 Double window, bronze body, no moving indicator Body 3/8 3/8 inch female NPT connection size
360 Double window, bronze body, 304SS flapper Size 1/2 inch female NPT connection size
1/2
Body SS 316SS body option for 300, 350, 360 3/4 3/4 inch female NPT connection size
MP 150 psig maximum pressure option,
Options includes Fluoroelastomer gaskets 1 1 inch female NPT connection size
1-1/4 1-1/4 inch female NPT connection size
1/4 1/4 inch connection size
1-1/2 1-1/2 inch female NPT connection size
Body 3/8 3/8 inch connection size
Size 1/2 1/2 inch connection size Options BSPT BSPT threads
3/4 3/4 inch connection size BSPP BSPP threads
1 1 inch connection size
1-1/4 1-1/4 inch connection size
1-1/2 1-1/2 inch connection size
2 2 inch connection size
W2 Plexiglass window
Options G1 PTFE gasket
G2 Fluoroelastomer gasket
S2 316SS Shaft (Not on 350 Model)
S3 Monel Shaft (Not on 350 Model)
I1 ABS impeller with bronze bushing (Not on 350, 360)
I2 316SS impeller (Not on 350, 360)
I3 No impeller (100 only)
F1 316SS Flapper (360 only)
BSPT BSPT threads
BSPP BSPP threads MODEL CHART - 400 SERIES
(Maximum flow on impeller models: 5FPS with liquids, 5000 FPM with gases) Tube Style with Threaded or Flanged Connections
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL CHART - 300F SERIES Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
Window Style with Flanged Connections Wetted Materials: Tube: Borosilicate. Body: Cast Iron or 316 SS.
Gasket: PTFE.
SPECIFICATIONS Temperature Limit: 200°F (93°C).
Service: Compatible gases and liquids. Pressure Limit: 50 psig (3.45 bar).
Wetted Materials: Window: Tempered glass. Body: Carbon Steel or 316 Connections: Threaded or Flanged.
SS. Gasket: Buna-N, Fluoroelastomer, or PTFE. Indicator: 316 SS Flapper
(360).
Temperature Limit: 200°F (93°C).
Pressure Limit: 150 psig (10.34 bar).
Connections: Flanged. Example SFI 400 1-1/2 SFI-400SS-1-1/2 Sight Flow Indicator; tube type,
borosilicate tube, PTFE gaskets, 316SS body, 1-1/2 inch
female NPT connections
SFI-360FSS-1-1/2-G1 Sight Flow Indicator; double
Example SFI 360FSS 1-1/2 G1 window, tempered glass, PTFE gasket, 316SS body,
Model SFI Sight flow indicator, tube type, borosilicate tube, PTFE
304SS flapper, 1-1/2 inch raised face flange
Designator gaskets
connections

Model SFI Sight flow indicator, double window, tempered glass,

400CI Female NPT connections, cast iron body (only for 1
Designator Buna-N gaskets standard, raised face flange
Body through 2 inch sizes)
connections 400SS Female NPT connections, 316SS body
Style
350FCS Carbon steel body, no moving indicator 400F Raised face flange connection, 316SS body (only for 1
Body 350FSS 316SS body, no moving 316SS indicator inch and up sizes)
Style 360FCS Carbon steel body, 316SS flapper 1/2 1/2 inch connection size
Body
360FSS 316SS body, 316SS flapper Size 3/4 3/4 inch connection size
Body 1-1/2 1-1/2 inch raised face flange connection size 1 1 inch connection size
Size 2 2 inch raised face flange connection size 1-1/4 1-1/4 inch connection size
3 3 inch raised face flange connection size 1-1/2 1-1/2 inch connection size
4 4 inch raised face flange connection size 2 2 inch connection size
6 6 inch raised face flange connection size 3 3 inch connection size
G1 PTFE gasket 4 4 inch connection size
Options
G2 Fluoroelastomer gasket (Best for use in vertical pipelines where there are no mechanical strains)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 186
pg187 7/21/06 1:57 PM Page 1

Series
500 Sight Window
Shows Level or Contents of Tanks, Pipelines;
Tempered, Replaceable Glass Window
Flow

Tough, tempered glass window resists chemical at- APPLICATIONS

Dimensions — Inches (mm)
tack and abrasion. Seamless gasket assures perfect seal • Hydraulic Tanks Model No. A B C D E
and is easily field replaceable. In addition to the standard • Pressure Vessels SFI-500-3⁄4 3
⁄4 ⁄ (19)
3
4 13⁄8 (35) 45
⁄64 (18) 13⁄8 (35)
brass body, Model 500 Sight Windows are also available • Coolant Tanks SFI-500-1 1 ⁄ (24)
15
16 1 ⁄8 (35)
3 45
⁄64 (18) 1 ⁄8 (35)
3

in carbon steel or 316 SS to suit a wide range of chemical • Hydraulic Lines SFI-500-11⁄4 11⁄4 1 ⁄ (32)
1
4 21⁄8(54) 27
⁄32 (22) 19⁄16(40)
compatibility. SFI-500-11⁄2 11⁄2 1 ⁄ (37)
27
64 21⁄8(54) 27
⁄32 (22) 19⁄16(40)
• Oil Reservoirs SFI-500-2 2 1 ⁄ (32)
1
4 21⁄2(64) 15
⁄32 (12) 121⁄32(42)
SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION SPECIFICATIONS
Sight windows shall be gasketed glass style with standard Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
Wetted Materials: MODELS
NPT connections. Body shall be (brass)(carbon steel)(316 Window: Tempered glass. Model
SS). Sight windows shall be W.E. Anderson® Model Body: Brass, carbon steel, or 316 SS.
Gasket: Buna-N on Brass and SFI-500-3⁄4
No.SFI-500(B) (CS) (SS) – size sight window. (Example: SFI-500-1
SFI-500B–3⁄4 sight window will have brass body with 3⁄4" carbon steel body, PTFE on 316 SS body. SFI-500-11⁄4
Temperature Limit: 200°F (93°C). SFI-500-11⁄2
NPT connection). Pressure Limit: 125 psig (8.6 bar). SFI-500-2
Connections: 3/4˝ to 2˝ male NPT.

Series
550 Sight Window
Shows Level or Contents of Tanks, Pipelines;
Fused Glass and Steel Construction

Fused glass style sight windows feature glass to APPLICATIONS Dimensions — Inches (mm)
metal bond for utmost reliability. Plated steel bodies have • Hydraulic Tanks Model No. A B C D E
convenient hex wrench surfaces. Connections are stan- • Pressure Vessels SFI-550-1⁄4 1
⁄4 11
⁄32 (9) 5
⁄8 (16) 3
⁄16 (5) 5
⁄8 (16)
dard NPT in sizes from 1⁄4" to 2". Windows are clear, ripple • Coolant Tanks SFI-550-3⁄8 3
⁄8 7
⁄16(11) 3
⁄4 (19) 7
⁄32 (6) 23
⁄32 (18)
SFI-550-1⁄2 1
⁄2 9
⁄16(14) 15
⁄16(24) 7
⁄32 (6) 25
⁄32(19)
free, and flush with the front face, having no recess on • Hydraulic Lines SFI-550-3⁄4 3
⁄4 3
⁄4(19) 11⁄16(27) 5
⁄16 (8) 15
⁄16(24)
which dirt might collect. • Oil Reservoirs SFI-550-1 1 15
⁄16(24) 13⁄8(35) 5
⁄16 (8) 1 ⁄16(27)
1

SFI-550-11⁄4 11⁄4 1 ⁄16(30)

3
13⁄4(45) 13
⁄32 (10) 1 ⁄32(31)
7

SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION SFI-550-11⁄2 11⁄2 1 ⁄16(37)

7
2(51) 13
⁄32 (10) 17⁄32(31)
SFI-550-2 2 17⁄8(48) 21⁄2(64) 13
⁄32 (10) 19⁄32(33)
Sight windows shall be fused glass style with standard SPECIFICATIONS
NPT connection. Body shall be plated steel. Sight win- Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
dows shall be W.E. Anderson® Model No. SFI-550 – size Wetted Materials: MODELS
sight window. (Example: SFI-550-3⁄4" sight window will Window: Glass. SFI-550-1⁄4 .................. SFI-550-1....................
have 3⁄4" NPT connection). Body: Plated steel. SFI-550-3⁄8.................. SFI-550-11⁄4................
Temperature Limit: 200°F (93°C). SFI-550-1⁄2 .................. SFI-550-11⁄2 .................
Pressure Limit: 125 psig (8.6 bar). SFI-550-3⁄4.................... SFI-550-2....................
Connections: 1/4˝ to 2˝ male NPT.

187 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg188 7/21/06 1:57 PM Page 1

Series
SFI-100T Sight Flow Indicator/Transmitter
Output for Flow Rate and Totalization

Flow
4
[101.60]
3 2
[76.20] [50.80]
1-3/8
[34.93] 3/4 NPT
2 PLCS

Pat. 6,789,434

The SFI-100T is a low cost and durable flow transmit- SPECIFICATIONS

ter that combines our popular 100 Series Sight Flow indicator Service: Compatible fluids.
Wetted Materials:
with our A-711T output sensor. The SFI-100T sight flow indica-
Body: Brass.
tor is constructed of a robust, solid brass body and a tempered Window: Tempered glass.
glass window. A bright red impeller is featured for great visual Rotor: Red UV stabilized PBT.
indication of flow through the window. The front window can be Rotor Pin: 316 SS.
easily unscrewed to clean out the sight flow indicator. Ideal for Thrust Washers: 300 series SS.
Gasket: Buna-N.
outdoor applications, the flow transmitter is weatherproof and
Temperature Limits: -20 to 200°F (-28 to 93°C).
unaffected by UV light. Pressure Limits: 125 psi (8.62 bar).
The A-711T output sensor has a VDC output with pulsing for Viscosity Max: 200 SSU.
flow totalization and a proportional frequency change for flow Weight: SFI only: 1.5 lb (0.7 kg); with A-711T: 1.8 lb (0.8 kg).
rate. For added versatility there are two output choices of 5
VDC or a VDC equal to the input power supplied. The output ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (for A-711T Option Only)
Temperature Limits: -20 to 212°F (-28 to 100°C).
is compatible with digital rate meters/totalizers and other elec-
Power Requirements: 8 to 28 VDC.
tronic systems. Output Signal: White lead: 5 VDC. Green lead: 8 to 28 VDC equal to
supply voltage. Pulsed output with frequency rate proportional to flow
rate.
Accuracy: ±5% of F.S.
• Output package is easily field replaceable Frequency Output Range: 0 to 100 Hz.
Electrical Connections: Black lead: Ground; White lead: 5 VDC out
• Weatherproof construction pulse; Green lead: 8 to 28 VDC out pulse; Red lead: 8 to 28 VDC supply.
• UV stabilized for outdoor applications
• There are no magnets in the rotor to attract
ferrous materials

MODELS
Model Number Description Range Connection
GPM (LPM) Female NPT
SFI-100T-1/2-A711T Brass Indicator with A-711T Sensor 2 - 20 (7.6 - 75.5) 1/2˝
SFI-100T-3/4-A711T Brass Indicator with A-711T Sensor 3 - 35 (11.4 - 132.5) 3/4˝
A711T Output Sensor Package

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 188
pg189 7/21/06 2:07 PM Page 1

Series
SF Sight Flow Transmitter
±2% FS Accuracy, 4 to 20 mA Output, Pressure up to 500 psig (34 bar)
Flow

2
[50.80] 2-5/8
[66.68]

3-11/16
1-1/8 [93.66]
1/2˝ FEMALE NPT [28.58]
2-7/16
[61.91]

Series SF Sight Flow Transmitter integrates tangential turbine SPECIFICATIONS Pressure Limits: 500 psig (34
technology with hermetically sealed circuitry to provide accurate flow Service: Compatible liquids. bar) Model SF10, 200 psig (14 bar)
measurement and control in the harshest environments. The 2-wire Wetted Materials: 316 SS shaft Model SF11.
and case, Iglide® bearings, Buna-N Response Time: 2 seconds to
loop-powered design transmits a 4 to 20 mA signal proportional to flow seal and acetal copolymer, (poly- 90% (step change in flow rate).
rate. Models can accurately measure flow in both directions and can be carbonate cover on Model SF11). Supply Voltage: 12 to 35 VDC.
mounted in any orientation. Model SF11 has a clear polycarbonate view- Flow Range: 1.5 to 15 GPM (5.7 Output: 4 to 20 mA.
to 56.8 LPM). Loop Resistance: 1150 ohms
ing cover for visible indication of flow. Units feature LED power indi- Accuracy: ±2% FS. max.
cation, adjustable zero and span, polarity protection and over current Repeatability: 0.5% full scale. Connections: 1/2˝ female NPT.
limiting. Temperature Limits: 20 to 225°F Wire Leads: 22 AWG x 9’
(–7 to 107°C). (2.7 m).
Max. Particle Size: 100µm.
MODELS Agency Approvals: CE.
Model APPLICATIONS
Cover Material
Number Ideal for measuring flow rates in cooling and lubrication circuits,
SF10 316 Stainless Steel HVAC systems, aggressive chemical metering, and batching systems.
SF11 Clear Polycarbonate
Iglide® is a registered trademark of Igus Spritzgussteile fur die Industrie GmbH.

Series
SF2 Sight Flow Meters
SPDT or Pulse Output, Visual Flow Confirmation, Brass Body
G

D
B
E
C F
SF2-1 SF2-2
Series SF2 Sight Flow Meters combine visual confirmation of flow with a DIMENSIONS in [mm]
relay or pulse output. The brass, unibody construction, one piece composite Model A B C D E F G
rotor, and ceramic shaft delivers durability with broader chemical, tempera- SF2-104 2.37 [60] 2.50 [64] 3.01 [76] 0.87 [22] 2.32 [59] — —
ture, and pressure capabilities. For specific flow setpoint switching, select SF2- SF2-101 2.37 [60] 2.50 [64] 3.01 [76] — — 0.80 [20] 4.50 [114]
1 meters with a SPDT relay output. Setpoints are fully adjustable over the spec- SF2-114 2.37 [60] 2.50 [64] 3.01 [76] 0.87 [22] 2.32 [59] — —
ified flow range. The dynamic operation of the rotor guards against jamming SF2-111 2.37 [60] 2.50 [64] 3.01 [76] — — 0.87 [22] 4.50 [114]
and false actuation. For flow rate monitoring or metering applications, select SF2-124 2.57 [65] 2.50 [64] 3.94 [100] 1.06 [27] 2.32 [59] — —
SF2-121 2.57 [65] 2.50 [64] 3.94 [100] — — 1.06 [27] 4.76 [121]
SF2-2 meters with a pulse output proportional to the rate of flow. The 4.5 to 24
SF2-134 2.57 [65] 2.50 [64] 3.94 [100] 1.06 [27] 2.32 [59] — —
VDC pulse output is compatible with most digital logic families. SF2-131 2.57 [65] 2.50 [64] 3.94 [100] — — 1.06 [27] 4.76 [121]
SF2-204 2.37 [60] 2.50 [64] 3.01 [76] .87 [22] 2.32 [59] — —
MODELS SF2-214 2.37 [60] 2.50 [64] 3.01 [76] .87 [22] 2.32 [59] — —
SPDT Relay Output SF2-224 2.57 [65] 2.50 [64] 3.94 [100] 1.06 [27] 2.95 [75] — —
Model Number Range (GPM) Input Connection SF2-234 2.57 [65] 2.50 [64] 3.94 [100] 1.06 [27] 2.95 [75] — —
1
SF2-104 0.5 to 5.0 24 VDC /4˝ female NPT
SF2-101 0.5 to 5.0 110 VAC 1
/4˝ female NPT SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements: See table.
SF2-114 4.0 to 20.0 24 VDC 1
/2˝ female NPT Service: Liquids compatible with Output: SPDT: 1 Amp, 24 VDC resis-
SF2-111 4.0 to 20.0 110 VAC 1
/2˝ female NPT wetted parts. tive; 0.3 Amp, 110 VAC or 4.5 VDC to
SF2-124 5.0 to 30.0 24 VDC 3
/4˝ female NPT Wetted Materials: Brass body, 24 VDC pulse depending on model.
SF2-121 5.0 to 30.0 110 VAC 3
/4˝ female NPT ceramic pin, PPS rotor, Polysulfone Electrical Connections: Relay out-
SF2-134 8.0 to 60.0 24 VDC 1˝ female NPT lens, and Fluoroelastomer O-ring. put models: 20AWG PVC-jacketed,
SF2-131 8.0 to 60.0 110 VAC 1˝ female NPT Accuracy: Relay output: ±5%; 24˝ cable; Pulsed output models:
Pulsed Output Pulsed output:±7% for ranges up to 22AWG PVC-jacketed, 24˝ cable.
Model Number Range (GPM) Input Connection 5.0 GPM, ±15% for ranges up to Process Connections: See table.
SF2-204 0.5 to 5.0 4.5 to 24 VDC 1
/4˝ female NPT 60.0 GPM. Setpoint Differential: 15% max for
SF2-214 4.0 to 20.0 4.5 to 24 VDC 1
/2˝ female NPT Temperature Limits: -20 to 212°F relay output models.
SF2-224 5.0 to 30.0 4.5 to 24 VDC 3
/4˝ female NPT (-29 to 100°C). Maximum Viscosity: 200 SSU.
SF2-234 8.0 to 60.0 4.5 to 24 VDC 1˝ female NPT Pressure Limit: 200 psig (13.8 bar) Agency Approvals: CE.
@ 70°F.

189 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg190 7/21/06 2:03 PM Page 1

Series
TTM Electronic Totalizing Meter
Batch or Cumulative Totals, Easy-to-Read LCD Display, ±5% Accuracy
2-1/2 4-1/8
[104.7]

Flow
[63.50]

2-1/8
[53.97]

1˝ NPT
TYP

Measure batch and cumulative totals in liquid transfer systems with the SPECIFICATIONS
Series TTM Electronic Totalizing Meter. The meter is designed for any pump, Service: Compatible liquids.
pressure, or gravity feed system with a 3 to 30 GPM (10 to 100 LPM) flow Flow Range: 3 to 30 GPM (10 to 100 LPM).
range. View batch and cumulative totals on the large 4-digit LCD display. Batch Wetted Materials: Bearings: Ceramic; Shaft: Tungsten Carbide; Rotor:
totals can be reset to measure flow during a single use. The cumulative total Nylon 6-6; Rings: 316 SS; Body: TTM10, 11: Nylon 6-6, TTM20, 21:
will automatically reset to zero when a maximum reading of 9999 is obtained. Aluminum; Other: TTM20, 21: Ceramic Magnet.
Models designed for use in water applications are constructed of Nylon and Accuracy: ±5%.
rated to 150 psig (10.3 bar). Aluminum models are calibrated for fuels and rated Batch Total Maximum: 9,999.
to 300 psig (20.7 bar). Cumulative Total Maximum: 9,999.
Temperature Limits: 14 to 130°F (-10 to 54°C).
MODELS Pressure Limits: Nylon models: 150 psig (10 bar); Aluminum models:
Model No. Application Body Material Units 300 psig (20 bar).
Pressure Drop: 2 psi (0.14 bar) @ 30 GPM (100 LPM).
TTM10 Water* Nylon Gallons Maximum Particulate Size: 350 microns.
TTM11 Water* Nylon Liters Display: 4-digit LCD, 5/8˝ H.
TTM20 Fuels† Aluminum Gallons Auto Shut-off: After 1 minute.
Connections: 1˝ female NPT.
TTM21 Fuels† Aluminum Liters Power: Two AAA alkaline batteries (included).
Battery Life: Approx. 9,000 hours.
Weight: Nylon models: 0.4 lb
*Calibrated for use with water; †Calibrated for use with gasoline, diesel fuel and kerosene (190 g); Aluminum models: 0.7 lb (340 g).
Agency Approvals: CE.

Series
TF Turbine Flow Sensor
0 to 5 VDC Output, Liquid or Gas Models

Series TF Turbine Flow Sensors are suitable for a wide variety of SPECIFICATIONS Pressure Limits:
industrial, commercial and laboratory flow applications. Sensors use a Service: Clean gases or clean Iow 100 psi (6.89 bar) at 20°C (liquid
turbine wheel and electro-optical detection to convert flow rates into a viscosity liquids (≤10 centistokes) models); 40 psi at 20°C (gas
depending on model. models). Pressure Sensitivity:
linear 0 to 5 VDC signal for recording and datalogging. Models for use ±0.07% per mm Hg (for air at 1 to
with liquids also provide a pulsed output for flow totalizing — see Wetted Materials: 40% glass filled
polyphenylene sulfide PPS sensor, 3 atm).
model TM2 on page 193 for a compatible display. Supply Voltage: 12.5 ±2 VDC, 30
and fittings, sapphire bearing,
Viton® O-ring. mA (connecting cable or
MODELS Accuracy: ±3% full scale cable/adapter sold separately).
Linearity: ±3% full scale. Output: 0 to 5 VDC (gas models),
Model Repeatability: ±0.2% full scale 0 to 5 VDC and 7.5 VDC peak
Range Connection
Number
(liquid models), ±1% full scale (gas pulse output, 0 to 400 pps typical
Flow Sensors for liquids models). (liquid models).
TF1032 0.1 to 2.0 LPM 1
⁄4" OD Temperature Limits: Weight: 1 Ib (0.5 kg).
TF1053 1 to 10 LPM 3
⁄8" OD 122°F (50°C). Temperature Agency Approvals: CE.
TF1062 1 to 10 GPH 3
⁄8" OD Sensitivity: ±0.2% per °C.
TF1072 4 to 100 GPH 3
⁄8" OD
Accessories
Flow Sensors for gases No. TF01,120 VAC, 60 Hz power supply/adapter for liquid flowmeters ................
TF2110 2.0 to 10 LPM 1
⁄4" OD No. TF02, 240 VAC, 50 Hz power supply/adapter for liquid flowmeters................
TF2120 4.0 to 20 LPM 3
⁄8" OD No. TF03,120 VAC, 60 Hz power supply/adapter for gas flowmeters ..................
TF2130 10 to 50 LPM 3
⁄8" OD No. TF04, 240 VAC, 50 Hz power supply/adapter for gas flowmeters ..................
TF2140 20 to 100 LPM 3
⁄8" OD No. TF05, Optional connecting cable for liquid flowmeters ..................................
No. TF06, Optional connecting cable for gas flowmeters .....................................

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 190
pg191 7/26/06 3:19 PM Page 1

Series
SFI-800 Sight Flow Indicator/Transmitter
Low Cost, Optional Output for Flow Rate and Totalization
New UV Stabilized Polycarbonate Model
Flow

2-15/16 (4) 1/4 DIA [6.35]

[74.61] HOLE ON 2-1/2 DIA [63.5]
1-15/32 BOLT CIRCLE
[37.30]
17/32
[13.50]

2-1/32
[51.59]

(4) 13/64 DIA [5.16] PANEL

HOLE ON 2-1/2 DIA [63.5] MOUNT CUTOUT
BOLT CIRCLE REMOVAL
SFI-801 SFI-800
1 3/32 CLEARANCE

HOLE ON 2 1/2 DIA [63.5]

BOLT CIRCLE REMOVAL
1-3/32 CLEARANCE
[27.78] 2-1/4
[57.15]

1/2 or
2-1/2 3/4 NPT
SFI with A-711 Option [63.50] 2
[50.80]
2-13/16
2-5/16
[71.44] [58.74]
SFI with A-711 Option SFI Model Only

The Series SFI-800 Sight Flow Indicator is a low cost, durable The A-713 is a sensor with two programmable open collector switch
rotor style flow indicator with optional Hall effect magnetic output outputs. One output is closed above the set point and the other output
packages for remote flow monitoring. Both SFI-800 and 801 models are is closed below the set point allowing the unit to be used for low flow or
constructed of clear plastic enabling 360° viewing of the spinning rotor high flow indication. The setpoint is easily set by pushing a button at
for easy flow indication. SFI-800 models are constructed of Polysulfone the desired flow rate. Sensor includes red LED indication of switch sta-
with excellent chemical compatibility, high pressure and temperature tus.
ratings, and all wetted materials are FDA/NSF ratable for potable
water applications. SFI-801 models are constructed of UV stabilized FEATURES
Polycarbonate making them ideal for outdoor applications (materials do •Easy viewing of flow indicator with clear plastic housing
not meet FDA/NSF). The SFI-801 models also feature an easy view •Output sensors can be added and replaced in the field without
bright red impeller. removing body from the process line
•No magnets in the rotor to attract ferrous materials
OUTPUT PACKAGES •Materials that can be FDA approved or UV stabilized
Three output sensors are available for the SFI-800 or 801 Sight Flow
Indicators adding remote flow monitoring to local flow indication. All
three packages can be easily installed onto an existing indicator body in
the field without any tools. Sensors can also be replaced in the field
without removing the body from the process line. Units are weather-
tight for outdoor or wash-down area use.

The A-711 is a unique and patent pending sensor that outputs two
pulsed voltage signals proportional to flow rate. Pulsed outputs are a 5
VDC pulse and a pulse of the input supply voltage used, which can be
from 8 to 18 VDC. This sensor is perfect for remote monitoring of flow
rate and flow totalization.

The A-712 is a sensor that outputs a linear 1 to 10 VDC signal propor-

tional to flow rate. The sensor is good for remote flow rate monitoring.

191 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg192 7/21/06 2:10 PM Page 1

SPECIFICATIONS Accuracy: ±5% of F.S.

Service: Compatible fluids. Frequency Output Range: 0 to 100 Hz.
Wetted Materials: Electrical Connections: Black lead - Ground; White lead: 5 VDC
Body: SFI-800: Polysulfone, SFI-801: UV Stabilized out pulse; Green lead: 8 to 28 VDC out pulse; Red lead: 8 to 28
Polycarbonate. VDC supply.
Window: SFI-800: Polysulfone, SFI-801: UV Stabilized

Flow
Polycarbonate. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (for A-712 Option Only)
Rotor: SFI-800: White Polysulfone, SFI-801: Red UV Temperature Limits: -20 to 212°F (-29 to 100°C).
Stabilized PBT. Power Requirements: 15 to 28 VDC.
Rotor Pin: 316 SS. Output Signal: White lead: 1 to 10 VDC.
Thrust Washers: 300 Series SS. Accuracy: ±5% of F.S.
O-Ring: SFI-800: Fluoroelastomer (NSF Grade), SFI-801: Electrical Termination: Black lead: Ground; Red lead: 15 to 28
Buna-N. VDC input; White lead: 1 to 10 VDC output.
Temperature Limits: SFI-800: -20 to 212°F (-28 to 100°C);
SFI-801: -20 to 130°F (-28 to 55°C). ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ( for A-713 Option Only)
Pressure Limits: SFI-800: 150 psi (10.34 bar); Temperature Limits: -20 to 212°F (-29 to 100°C).
SFI-801: 125 psi (8.62 bar). Power Requirements: 8 to 28 VDC.
Viscosity Max: 200 SSU. Output Signal: White lead: Normally open switch; Green lead:
Weight: SFI-800: 3.35 oz (95 g); SFI-800-A711: 5.0 oz (142 g). Normally closed switch. Both open collector, 100 mA max, 28 VDC
max.
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (for A-711 Option Only) Electrical Connections: Black lead: Ground; White lead:
Temperature Limits: -20 to 212°F (-29 to 100°C). Normally open; Green Lead: Normally closed; Red lead: 8 to 28
Power Requirements: 8 to 28 VDC. VDC.
Output Signal: White lead: 5 VDC. Green lead: 8 to 28 VDC
equal to supply voltage. Pulsed output with frequency rate propor-
tional to flow rate.

BODY MODEL CHART

Model Description Range Connection
Number GPM (LPM) Female NPT
Polysulfone Body
SFI-800-1/2 Indicator Only 2 - 20 (7.6 - 75.5) 1/2˝
SFI-800-3/4 Indicator Only 3 - 35 (11.4 - 132.5) 3/4˝
SFI-800-1/2-LF Indicator Only 0.5 - 6.5 (1.9 - 24.6) 1/2˝
Polycarbonate Body
SFI-801-1/2 Indicator Only 2 - 20 (7.6 - 75.5) 1/2˝
SFI-801-3/4 Indicator Only 3 - 35 (11.4 - 132.5) 3/4˝
SFI-801-1/2-LF Indicator Only 0.5 - 6.5 (1.9 - 24.6) 1/2˝

SENSOR MODEL CHART

Model Description
Number
A-711 Pulsed Output
A-712 1 to 10 VDC
A-713 Two Open Collectors

BODY AND SENSORS ATTACHED:

To order A-711 attached to flow indicator body add suffix -A711 to the body part number.
Example: SFI-800-1/2-A711

To order A-712 attached to flow indicator body add suffix -A712 to the body part number.
Example: SFI-800-1/2-A712

To order A-713 attached to flow indicator body add suffix -A713 to the body part number.
Example: SFI-800-1/2-A713

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 192
pg193 7/21/06 2:11 PM Page 1

Model
TM2 Flow Totalizer
Pulse Input, 8-digit LCD Display
Flow

2-61/64 [75.01] 1-1/4 [31.75]

1-9/16 [39.69]

Recommended Panel Cutout: 2-43/64 [67.87] x 1-19/64 [32.94]

Monitor flow rate or total flow with Model TM2 Flow Totalizer. SPECIFICATIONS
Unit features a four digit flow rate display and an eight digit totalizing Input: 7.5 VDC max. pulse.
display with a programmable, five position decimal point. Easily tog- Accuracy: ±0.2%.
gle between rate and total with front-panel push-button. Use scaling Input Impedance: 27 k Ω at 3 VDC.
factor to define flow rate in engineering units such as ml/min, l/min, Totalizer Type: UP count.
Rate Indication Type: Frequency.
or gal/hr.
Count Input Speed: 10 kHz @ 50% duty cycle.
Model TM2 Totalizing Range: 0.0001 to 100.0000 with five position decimal point.
Rate Indication Range: 0.001 to 9999 (five position decimal point).
Update Time: 0.7 seconds.
Accessory
Display: 8-digit LCD, 7⁄16" H.
TM25, Replacement 3V lithium battery Temperature Limits: 32 to 131°F (0 to 55°C).
Housing Material: Cycolac X-17.
Power: One 3V lithium battery (included).
Average Battery Life: Approximately 5 years.
Weight: 1 Ib (0.5 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE.

Series
GFT Flow Totalizer
Seven Digit Display, Easy Installation

1.25
[31.8]

2.82 1.25
[72] [32]

Series GFT Flow Totalizer is designed to be used with mass SPECIFICATIONS

flowmeters and mass flow controllers. The totalizer accepts analog out- Input Analog Range: 0 to 5 or 5 to 10 VDC.
put flow signals of either 0 to 5 VDC or 5 to 10 VDC. Series GFT inte- Power Consumption: 10 mA @ 12 VDC, less than 0.125 Watts.
grates and accumulates up to 7 digits of direct engineering units for a Accuracy: ±0.5% FS.
given gas and flow rate (standard liters, standard cubic centimeters,
Temperature Stability: ±100 ppm/°C in the range of 5 to 50°C.
etc.). Quickly connect the GFT-10 to Series GFC and GFM mass flow
controllers and meters via the modular jack (replacing the LCD dis- Reset: Momentary tact switch.
play) or use the GFT-10C to connect in parallel with the display. Display: 7-digit, 5/16˝ (8mm) H.
Power Supply: Internal lithium battery.
Agency Approvals: CE.
Model GFT-05 accepts 0 to5 VDC input ACCESSORIES
Model GFT-10 accepts 0 to 10 VDC input Model GFT-05C Cable for 0 to 5 VDC models
Model GFT-10C Cable for 0 to 10 VDC models

193 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg194 7/21/06 2:13 PM Page 1

Series
HFT In-Line Flow Transmitters
Local Flow Indication, Unrestricted Mounting, 4-20mA, 0-5 V, and 1-5 V Output
SPECIFICATIONS

Flow
Service: Compatible gases or liquids.
Wetted Materials: Body: Aluminum, brass or 304 SS; Seals: Buna-N or
Fluoroelastomer; Magnet: PTFE coated Alnico; Other internal parts: 304
SS.
Viscosity: 500 SSU.
Accuracy: ±4% FS over entire range; ±2.5% over center third of the mea-
suring range.
Repeatability: ±1% of full scale.
Response Time: <100 msec.
7.125
Output Signal: 4-20 mA; 0-5 V; 1-5 V.
Temperature Limits: 240˚F (116˚C).
Pressure Limits: See Chart.
Power Requirements: 12-35 VDC.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
4.500 Shipping Weight: 1/4 to 1/2˝ female NPT Models: 3 lb (1.4 kg); 3/4 to 1˝
female NPT Models: 4.5 lb (2.0 kg); 1-1/2˝ female NPT Models: 12 lb
(5.4 kg).

The Series HFT combines a direct reading HF flowmeter MODELS

Aluminum body for air or other non-corrosive gases: 600 psig (41 bar)
with electronics to provide a proportional analog output of 4-20, Wetted Parts: Aluminum, PTFE coated Alnico, 304 SS and Buna-N

0-5, and 1-5 VDC. Use the output to drive data acquisition Model Connection Range, Air
Number Size SCFM
devices, meters, or analog input cards. The entire assembly is HFT-1112 1/4˝ female NPT 1.5-12
housed in a rugged cast aluminum NEMA 4X enclosure. The HFT-1123 1/4˝ female NPT 4-23

unit can be installed in outdoor applications or harsh environ-

ments where liquid tight seals are required. The flow transmit- Brass body for water based fluids (non-steam): 3500 psig (240 bar)
Wetted Parts: Brass, PTFE coated Alnico, 304 SS and Buna-N
ter does not require input or output straight plumbing, and can Model Connection Range, Water
be mounted in any orientation. Number Size GPM (LPM)
HFT-2205 1/2˝ female NPT 0.5-5.0 (1-19)
HFT-2315 3/4˝ female NPT 1-15 (3.8-55)
HFT-2320 3/4˝ female NPT 2-20 (7.5-75)
APPLICATIONS HFT-2440 1˝ female NPT 4-40 (15-51)
HFT Flow Transmitters can be used to set flow rates, fluid HFT-2550 1-1/2˝ female NPT 5-50 (19-189)

motor and cylinder speeds. Check pump high pressure perfor-

304 SS body for high-pressure fluids: 6000 psig (413 bar)
mance, pressure relief valve settings, fluid handling systems in Wetted Parts: 304 SS, Fluoroelastomer and PTFE

agricultural, construction or industrial machinery, power tools Model Connection Range, Water
Number Size GPM (LPM)
and equipment. Monitor air with aluminum models; petrochem- HFT-3202 1/2˝ female NPT 0.2-2.0 (0.75-7.5)
HFT-3210 1/2˝ female NPT 1-10 (3.8-38)
ical operations with brass or stainless steel models.

PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL VS. FLOW RATE

1/4˝ FEMALE NPT 1/2˝ FEMALE NPT 3/4˝, 1˝ & 1-1/2˝ FEMALE NPT
HFT-2320
Pressure Differential PSID

2.0 HFT-1123 10
Pressure Differential PSID

12 HFT-2315
Pressure Differential PSID

8 HFT-3210 10 HFT-2440
1.5
6 8
1.0 6
HFT-1112 4
HFT-2205 4 HFT-2550
0.5 2 2
HFT-3202
0 0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 4 0 10 20 30 40 50
0 2 6 8 10
Flow Rate: SCFM @ 100 PSIG Flow Rate: GPM Flow Rate: GPM

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 194
pg195 7/26/06 11:25 AM Page 1

Series
HFO In-Line Flow Alarms
Latching Alarm Capabilities, For Air, Water or Caustic Fluids, Unrestricted Mounting
SPECIFICATIONS
Flow

Service: Compatible gases or liquids.

Wetted Materials: Body: Aluminum, brass or 304 SS; Seals: Buna-N or
Fluoroelastomer; Magnet: PTFE coated Alnico; Other internal parts: 304
SS.
Viscosity: 500 SSU.
Temperature Limits: 240˚F (116˚C).
Pressure Limits: See Chart.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
Accuracy: Measuring ±4% FS over entire range; ±2.5% over center third
7.125
of the measuring range.
Repeatability: ±1% of full scale.
Switch Type: SPDT, 10A @ 250 VAC; 0.5A @ 125 VDC, (resistive).
Shipping Weight: 1/4 to 1/2˝ female NPT Models: 3 lb (1.4 kg); 3/4 to 1˝
female NPT Models: 4.5 lb (2.0 kg); 1-1/2˝ female NPT Models: 12 lb
(5.4 kg).
4.500

MODELS
Aluminum body for air or other non-corrosive gases: 600 psig (41 bar)
Wetted Parts: Aluminum, PTFE coated Alnico, 304 SS and Buna-N

The Series HFO Flow Alarm provides continuous monitor- Model Connection Range, Air
Number Size SCFM
ing and control of flow rate levels. The flow alarm can be con- HFO-21112 1/4˝ female NPT 1.5-12
HFO-21123 1/4˝ female NPT 4-23
figured to open or close a contact for an increasing or decreas-
ing set point. The unit includes two 10A SPDT limit switches
with field adjustable alarm settings. Integral direct reading Brass body for water based fluids (non-steam): 3500 psig (240 bar)
Wetted Parts: Brass, PTFE coated Alnico, 304 SS and Buna-N
scale provides local indication of flow rate. The flow alarm is
Model Connection Range, Water
designed to mount in any orientation and does not require inlet Number Size GPM (LPM)
HFO-22205 1/2˝ female NPT 0.5-5.0 (1-19)
or outlet straight plumbing. The Series HFO is constructed
HFO-22315 3/4˝ female NPT 1-15 (3.8-55)
with a rugged cast aluminum NEMA 4X (IP65) enclosure for HFO-22320 3/4˝ female NPT 2-20 (7.5-75)
installations outdoors or in harsh environments. HFO-22440 1˝ female NPT 4-40 (15-151)
HFO-22550 1-1/2˝ female NPT 5-50 (19-189)

304 SS body for high-pressure fluids: 6000 psig (413 bar)

Wetted Parts: 304 SS, Fluoroelastomer and PTFE
APPLICATIONS
Model Connection Range, Water
Monitoring flow in chemical processing, waste water process- Number Size GPM (LPM)
ing, lubrication systems, process control, solar systems, drain HFO-23202 1/2˝ female NPT 0.2-2.0 (0.75-7.5)
HFO-23210 1/2˝ female NPT 1-10 (3.5-38)
lines and pump testing

PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL VS. FLOW RATE

1/4˝ FEMALE NPT 1/2˝ FEMALE NPT 3/4˝, 1˝ & 1-1/2˝ FEMALE NPT
HFO-22320
Pressure Differential PSID

2.0 HFO-21123 10 HFO-22315

Pressure Differential PSID

12
Pressure Differential PSID

HFO-23210
1.5 8 10 HF0-22440
6 8
1.0 6
HFO-21112 4 HFO-22205
4 HFO-22550
0.5 2
HFO-23202 2
0 0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 0 2 4 6 8 10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Flow Rate: GPM Flow Rate: GPM
Flow Rate: SCFM @ 100 PSIG

195 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg196 7/26/06 3:24 PM Page 1

Series ®
VASP Visi-Float Flowmeter Flowswitch/Power Converter Pak ®
Designed for Use with the Dwyer VFA Visi-Float® Flowmeter
5 49/64
[146.45] 1 3/16 1 1/64

Flow
5 1/4 [20.64] [25.80]
[133.35]

1 19/64 1 1/16
4 23/32 3 1/2 [32.94] [27.00]
[19.85] [89.00]

3/16 DIA. TYP 2 13/32 1/4

4 39/64 [4.75] [6.35]
[119.23] [61.12]
1 13/32 TYP [35.72]
1 3/16
[30.16] 2 11/32
[59.53] .875
[22.23]
5/8 DIA. X THRU
2 PLCS [15.88]

The new VASP Visi-Float® Flowmeter Flowswitch/Power Con- SPECIFICATIONS

verter Pak utilizes infrared technology as an adjustable set point Temperature Limit: 0 to 140°F (-18 to 60°C).
monitor used in conjunction with the Dwyer® VFA Flowmeters. The
Switch Type: SPDT relay.
VASP consists of a sensing unit and a power converter unit allowing
remote mounting over long distances. Designed to mount onto any ex- Electrical Rating: See chart.
isting VFA Flowmeter, the switching setpoint can be easily adjusted by Electrical Connections: Screw type terminal block.
a single adjustment screw. It contains a set of SPDT relay contacts for Power Requirements: User selectable: 24 VDC or 24/120/240
indication of flow above or below a preset level. The units incorporate VAC @ 50/60 Hz.
indicating LED’s for power and status. Also, a latching and power fail-
Current Consumption: 105 mA max. (DC), 230 mA max. (AC).
ure circuit is also included for more versatility.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal.
MODELS Set Point Adjustment: Single adjustment screw.
Model No. Output Range Weight: 20 oz (.57 kg).
VASP-1 .5A @ 120/240 VAC, 1A @ 30 VDC
VASP-5 5 A @ 120/240 VAC, 5 A @ 30 VDC
VASP-10 10 A @ 120/240 VAC, 5 A @ 30 VDC

Series
FS Flowmeter with Flow Limit Switch
Latching Relay, Adjustable, Dual Scale, Mount in any Position

3/4 NPT Brass Inlet

Ø1-5/16 1-3/8 3/4 NPT Brass Outlet
1-1/2 Hex [35.0]
Both Ends [33.65]
1-7/8
DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. MICHIGAN CITY IN.

[47.63]
GPM

10
2

8
FSXXXXX
1.0 SP. GR.

FLOW DIRECTION

PAT NO 4389901
10
15
20
25
30
35
LPM

5-1/4
1-47/64
[133.35] Polysulfone Body [43.94]
8-1/4
[209.55]
Switch Module

Direct-Reading Series FS Flowmeters offer visual flow rate indi- SPECIFICATIONS Process Connections: 1˝ male
cation in GPM or LPM units. Models include an adjustable, latching Service: Compatible liquids. NPT Polysulfone or 3/4˝ male NPT
flow alarm to open or close AC electrical circuits, trigger warning Wetted Materials: Polysulfone brass.
lights, or activate other process control equipment. Spring-retained body, Barium Ferrite, Stainless Flow Scale: Calibrated at 1.0
moveable piston design allows installation in any position. Steel spring and retaining rings. specific gravity @ 70°F (21°C).
Temperature Limits: 158°F (70°C). Weight: 1˝ male NPT Polysulfone;
Pressure Limits: 325 psi (22.4 bar). 0.55 lb (0.25 kg); 3/4˝ male NPT
MODELS Accuracy: ±5% full scale. brass: 0.90 lb (0.41 kg).
Model No. Range, GPM (LPM) Connections Repeatability: 1.0%. Agency Approvals: CE.
FS10410 0.5 to 4.0 (1.9 to 15) 1˝ male NPT (polysulfone) Set Point: Adjustable 0 to 100% FS. APPLICATIONS
FS11610 1.0 to 16 (5 to 60) 1˝ male NPT (polysulfone) Relay Load: 1 A @ 30 VDC; 0.5 A Monitoring flow in chemical process-
FS12810 4.0 to 28 (20 to 100) 1˝ male NPT (polysulfone) @ 125 VAC (resistive).
FS20400 0.5 to 4.0 (1.9 to 15) 3/4˝ male NPT (brass)
ing, waste water processing, process
FS20700 1.0 to 7.0 (4 to 26)
Supply Voltage: 115 VAC, ±10%. control, lubrication systems, solar sys-
3/4˝ male NPT (brass)
Current Consumption: 25 mA max. tems, drain lines. and pump testing.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 196
pg197 7/21/06 2:19 PM Page 1

Introduction to Vane Operated Flow Switches

Flow

What Are They?

A vane operated flow switch is a device which utilizes the force and deactuation flow rates are satisfactory. For very low flows,
exerted on a vane inserted in a flowing fluid to actuate an elec- the V6 Low Flow Switch with a field adjustable actuation point
tric switch at a predetermined rate of flow. The electric switch is recommended. The V6 Low Flow Switch differs slightly in its
may be used to start or stop pumps, open or close valves, actu- operation as increasing flow displaces a piston against a return
ate a warning lamp, sound an alarm, etc. spring and this movement is magnetically coupled to the switch
actuating lever. The operating piston does result in a higher pres-
W.E. Anderson® and Dwyer® flow switches are suitable for ap- sure drop than for the standard V6 or V4.
plication with a variety of process fluids. The flow switches are
available with a wide range of flow actuation points for all stan-
dard pipe sizes. Most W.E. Anderson® switches are explosion-
proof and UL, CSA approved. Actuation/Deactuation Points — The V6 and V6 Low
Flow switch actuation/deactuation points are fixed to those val-
ues given in the specifications. However, the V4 can be supplied
for a wide range of actuation and deactuation points for various
How Do They Work? fluids and pipe diameters. For a given V4 vane area, the deac-
When fluid moving in the indicated direction of flow impinges tuation flow is approximately 55% of the actuation flow and the
upon the flow switch vane, the vane swings on the pivot point actuation flow rate increases with an increase in pipe diameter
until the vane stop hits the switch body. This moves the magnet or a decrease in specific gravity of the fluid. If the actuation/de-
keeper away from the magnet on the inside of the switch body. actuation points offered in the standard V4-2-U multi layer vane
Without the magnetic attraction provided by the keeper, the flow switch do not meet your requirements, include the follow-
switch actuation lever swings by the force of gravity, thus actu- ing information with your order: 1. Desired actuation and/or de-
ating the snap switch. With the cessation or a decrease in flow actuation flow rate. 2. Pipe diameter and schedule. 3. Type of
below the deactuation point, gravity allows the vane to return fluid and 4. Its specific gravity. Preferably, request an Applica-
to a vertical position. The magnet is again attracted to the keep- tion Data Sheet, return it to us, and we will fabricate the prop-
er moving the switch actuation lever and deactuating the snap er V4 vane for your application.
switch. The switch is therefore deactuated in the no flow con-
dition. The actuation/deactuation points are functions of the
area of the vane exposed to liquid flow, the pipe diameter and
characteristics of the fluid. Maximum PSI Rating — W.E. Anderson® flow switches are
rated for maximum operating pressures from 150 psig (Series
V8) to 2000 psig (Series V4 and V6). See Specifications.

What is the Dead Band?

When the flow switch is actuated by movement of the vane,
some of the force required to actuate the switch must be re- Installation — Install both V4 and V6 Flow Switches with the
moved before the switch will deactuate. The dead band is the index arrow on the switch body pointing in the direction of
amount of flow that must be removed before the switch deactu- flow. V4 models only, must be vertical. The V4 is installed in a
ates. For a given vane size and/or liquid, the dead band is es- 11⁄2" threadolet welded to the pipe. The shape of the vane will
sentially a function of the mechanical movement of the vane and vary, the length being limited by the pipe diameter and the
the switch actuation mechanism. width being limited by the opening of the mounting provided in
the pipe. Some V4 vane configurations may require a threado-
let up to 2 1⁄2" in size. The V6 Flow Switches are supplied with in-
stallation tees for plumbing directly in line.
Considerations in Selecting a Flow Switch. Model
Selection — For the higher flows encountered in pipe sizes of
11⁄2" or larger, The V4 Flow Switch provides the least resistance
to flow (pressure drop) with a wide selection of actuation
points. For pipe sizes from 1⁄2" to 11⁄4", the smaller V6 Flow
Switch can be utilized assuming that the specified actuation

197 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg198 7/21/06 2:20 PM Page 1

Typical Flow Switch Applications

Flow
®

Air flow switch protects preheater from overheating. Flotect® flow switch shuts down pump when flow stops.
Dangerous overheating would occur in this gas-fueled air preheater When the liquid in this supply tank is exhausted, the W.E. Anderson®
if the blower fails or the air flow is obstructed. To protect against this V6 Flotect® switch senses the loss of flow and stops the pump
condition, a Dwyer® Model 530 air flow switch wired to the gas sup- motor, preventing pump cavitation and saving energy.
ply solenoid valve will close the valve if the air flow fails. A normally
closed solenoid valve is specified to provide for fail-safe operation
of this protective system. Where hazardous ambient conditions
exist, a W.E. Anderson® Model V4 Flotect® explosion-proof flow
switch can also be used. In addition, a Mercoid® Model M-51 tem-
perature switch can be used to monitor preheater temperature.

Use of this emergency industrial shower actuates Flo- Flotect® flow switch protects aircraft de-icing equip-
tect® flow switch which sounds alarm to bring help. ment.
In this emergency industrial shower, a V4 Flotect® flow switch has This aircraft de-icer saves time and heating fuel by heating only the
been mounted in the water supply pipe. It will activate either an au- fluid dispensed, not the entire tank. With the de-icing fluid heated by
dible or visual alarm (or both) to summon help when the shower is three large heat exchangers operating in parallel, de-icing can begin
used by an employee who has been accidentally contaminated by within 90 seconds regardless of ambient temperature. Three An-
hazardous material. derson Model V6 flow switches are used to sense adequate flow of
de-icing fluid through the heat exchanger, one switch on each ex-
changer. Should fluid flow be interrupted or drop below a safe level,
the burner for the affected heat exchanger will shut down. The V6
flow switch is well suited to this application because of its reliability
and inherently weather-proof design.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 198
pg199 7/21/06 2:20 PM Page 1

Series
V4 Vane Operated
Field Adjustable – Dependable Protection Against Flow
Flow Switch
Variation or Stopping in Pipelines for Fluids, Gases and
®

Certified Product
Flowing Solids
Flow

Australian
Standard

3-11/32
[84.93] U.L. AND C.S.A. TYPE SPECIFICATIONS
2-1/2 INCLUDES 16 GA. Service: Gases or liquids compatible with wetted materials.
[63.5] LEADS, 6 [152.4] LONG.
CENELEC VERSION
Wetted Materials:
INCLUDES TERMINAL Vane: 316 SS.
BLOCK. Body: Brass or 316 SS standard.
8 EXPLOSION-PROOF Magnet Keeper: 430 SS standard, 316 SS optional.
[203.2] HOUSING WITH 3/4 Options: Other materials also available, consult factory (e.g.
[19.05] CONDUIT
6-3/4 CONNECTION PVC, Hastelloy, Nickel, Monel, Titanium).
[171.45] Temperature Limit: -4 to 275°F (-20 to 135°C) standard, MT high
SWITCH BODY OF SAE
4-11/16 72 BRASS OR 316SS temperature option 400°F (205°C) [MT option not UL, CSA, ATEX, or SAA].
[119.06] STAINLESS STEEL Pressure Limit: Brass body 1000 psig (69 bar), 316 SS body 2000 psig
1 [25.4] 1-1/2 NPT (138 bar), optional 5000 psig (345 bar) available with 316 SS body and
MAGNET KEEPER 430 SPDT switch only.
STAINLESS STEEL Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof and Explosion-proof. Listed with UL and
VANE AND VANE BLOCK CSA for Class I, Groups C and D; Class II, Groups E, F, and G.
316 STAINLESS STEEL
ATEX 0344 II 2 G EEx d IIB T6 -20°C≤Tamb≤75°C
FIVE LAYER VANE EC-Type Certificate No.: KEMA 03ATEX 2383
DESIGNED FOR 1-1/2
[38.1] TO 8 [203.2] SAA: Exd II C T6 (T amb=60°C). Zone I. Also FM approved.
PIPES. USABLE IN Switch Type: SPDT snap switch standard, DPDT snap switch optional.
LARGER SIZES. Electrical Rating: UL, FM, ATEX and SAA models 10A @ 125/250 VAC
(V~). CSA models: 5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~); 5A res., 3A ind. @ 30 VDC
(V ). MV option: 1A @125 VAC (V~); 1A res., .5A ind. @ 30 VDC (V ). MT
option: 5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~). [MT and MV option not UL, CSA, FM,
ATEX or SAA].
Electrical Connections: UL and CSA models: 16 AWG, 6˝ (152 mm)
long. ATEX and SAA unit: Terminal block.
Rugged and reliable the Series V4 Flotect® flow switch oper- Conduit Connection: 3/4˝ female NPT.
ates automatically to protect equipment and pipeline systems against Process Connection: 1-1/2˝ male NPT.
damage from reduction or loss of flow. The V4 is time tested being in- Mounting Orientation: Within 5° of vertical for proper operation. Units for
stalled in thousands of pipelines and processing plants around the horizontal installation (vertical pipe with up flow) available.
world. A unique magnetically actuated switching design gives superi- Set Point Adjustment: For universal vane: five vane combinations.
or performance. There are no bellows, springs, or seals to fail. Instead, Weight: 4 lb 8 oz (1.9 kg).
a free-swinging vane attracts a magnet within the solid metal switch Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, CE, FM, SAA, and ATEX.
body, actuating a snap switch by means of a simple lever arm.

MODELS
FEATURES
• Leak proof body machined from bar stock Model Description
• Choice of custom vane calibrated for your application, Model V4, V4-2-U Brass body, universal vane
V4-SS-2-U 316SS* body, universal vane
or field adjustable multilayer vane, Model V4-2-U (see set point V4 Brass body, custom vane
chart) V4-SS 316SS* body, custom vane
• Weatherproof, designed to meet NEMA 4
• Explosion-proof (listing included in specifications) *316SS body with 430SS magnet keeper. For 316SS magnet keeper, specify: add -316
• Installs directly and easily into pipeline with a thredolet, tee, or
flange (see application drawings) Options (add as a suffix to the model number):
• Can be used in pipes 1-1/2˝ and up -D, DPDT contacts
• Electrical assembly can be easily replaced without removing the -MV, Gold Plated Contacts, options for dry circuits
(see electrical rating in specification, no listings or approvals)
unit from installation so that the process does not have to be shut
-MT, High Temperature, option rated 400° F (204° C)
down
(see electrical rating in specifications, no listings or approvals
• High pressure rating of 1000 psig (69 bar) with the brass body -TRI (increasing flow), -TRD (decreasing flow), Time Delay Relay,
and 2000 psig (138 bar) with the 316 SS body option with 2 SPDT contacts, adjustable from 0-1 to 0-31 minutes.
(no listings or approvals)
-316, 316 SS Magnet Keeper, option to replace standard 430 SS
APPLICATIONS -SAA, SAA listed construction
• Protects pumps, motors and other equipment against low or no -V, Vertical Up Flow, option for upward flow in vertical pipe
flow -AT, ATEX listed construction
• Controls sequential operation of pumps
• Automatically starts auxiliary pumps and engines Consult factory for price and availability of fittings for V4 installation. Thredolets, bushings, and
• Stops liquid cooled engines, machines and processing when tees are available in a variety of sizes and materials.
coolant flow is interrupted
• Shuts down burner when air flow through heating coil fails For custom vane models, please supply factory with following infor-
• Controls dampers according to flow mation: pipe size, flow direction (horizontal, up), mounting, pressure,
temperature, specific gravity, flow rates (maximum normal, actua-
tion/deactuation*), etc.
*When both values are supplied, note which is critical.

199 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg200 7/21/06 2:28 PM Page 1

V4 Universal Vane Flow Charts

Values shown in both charts are nominal. If normal flows exceed actuation rates by less than 10%, custom vanes are recommended.
Figures are based on standard vertical installation in a 1-1/2" thredolet in a horizontal run of pipe.

APPROXIMATE ACTUATION/DEACTUATION FLOW RATES FOR COLD WATER.

UPPER FIGURES IN GPM. LOWER FIGURES IN LPM

VANE

Flow
LAYERS 1.5"PIPE 2"PIPE 3"PIPE 4"PIPE 6"PIPE 8"PIPE 10"PIPE 12"PIPE 14"PIPE 16"PIPE 18"PIPE 20"PIPE

7-3 15-8 45-22 95-40 210-120 375-175 600-300 900-450 1200-600 1400-800 2000-1000 2400-1200
1 26.67-11.67 56.7-30 167-83.3 367-150 800-450 1417-667 2267-1133 3400-1700 4550-2267 5300-3033 7567-3783 9083-4550

7-4 23-14 50-35 130-90 230-150 450-250 650-350 900-500 1200-650 1450-800 1800-1000
1&2 26.7-15 86.7-53.3 190-132 500-333 867-567 1700-950 2467-1317 3400-1900 4550-2467 5483-3033 6817-3783

11-7 27-19 80-60 160-115 300-180 450-275 600-350 750-450 1000-600 1200-700
1,2,&3 3783-2267 4550-2650
41.7-26.7 102-71.7 300-233 600-433 1133-683 1700-1033 2267-1317 2750-2083

1,2,3,&4 17-12 60-45 120-90 230-150 310-200 430-280 550-360 700-450 850-550
65-45 233-167 450-333 867-567 1167-750 1633-1067 2083-1367 2650-1700 3217-2083

1,2,3,4,& 40-30 80-65 135-100 200-140 290-200 360-250 460-325 575-400

5 152-113 300-250 517-383 750-533 1100-750 1367-950 1733-1233 2183-1517

Actuation rates are based on cold water at a specific gravity of 1.0. For fluids of different specific gravity, actuation rates may be approximated by dividing the rate shown by the square root of the specific
gravity.

APPROXIMATE ACTUATION/DEACTUATION FLOW RATES FOR AIR.

UPPER FIGURES IN SCFM. LOWER FIGURES IN LPS

VANE
LAYERS 1.5"PIPE 2"PIPE 3"PIPE 4"PIPE 6"PIPE 8"PIPE 10"PIPE 12"PIPE 14"PIPE 16"PIPE 18"PIPE 20"PIPE

32-17 65-32 210-105 400-200 950-475 1550-850 2400-1300 3450-1900 4700-2600 6400-3500 8000-4400 10000-5500
1 15-8 30-20 100-50 190-90 450-220 730-400 1100-600 1600-900 2200-1200 3000-1700 3800-2100 4700-2600

23-13 120-70 195-140 550-375 1100-700 1850-1200 2700-1750 3400-2200 4800-3100 6000-3900 7400-4800
1&2 10-6 60-30 90-70 260-180 520-330 870-570 1300-800 1600-1000 2300-1500 2800-1800 3500-2300

60-48 135-100 375-265 725-500 1200-850 1850-1300 2600-1800 3350-2350 4300-3000 5300-3700
1,2,&3 2500-1700
30-20 60-50 180-130 340-240 570-400 870-610 1200-800 1600-1100 2000-1400

1,2,3,&4 65-50 260-200 500-400 875-700 1250-1000 1900-1500 2500-2000 3100-2500 3900-3100
30-20 120-90 240-190 410-330 590-470 900-710 1200-900 1500-1200 1800-1500

1,2,3,4,& 130-100 310-250 650-525 1000-800 1600-1250 2200-1750 2800-2250 3550-2850

5 60-50 150-120 310-250 470-380 760-590 1040-830 1300-1100 1700-1300

Actuation rates are based on air at standard conditions. For gases at other pressures, temperatures, or specific gravities, consult factory for equivalent flow approximations.

APPLICATION DRAWINGS
FOR FLOTECT®
AUTOMATIC FLOW SWITCHES

THREADED COVER IS
EASILY REMOVED FOR REQUIRED FLOW HOLDS
ACCESS TO SWITCH SWITCH OPEN WHEN FLOW
SLOWS, VANE DROPS,
3/4” NPT FOR CONDUIT ACTUATION SWITCH.
ALUMINUM ENCLOSURE
11⁄2" THREDOLET FOR ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
CUT 115⁄16" MIN.
HOLE IN PIPE SWITCH BODY MACHINED
FROM BAR OF BRASS OR
STAINLESS STEEL

Thredolet Installation. May also be installed using tee,

flange or coupling.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 200
pg201 7/21/06 2:30 PM Page 1

Series
V6 Mini-Size Flow Switches
Monitor Flow in ⁄ to 2” Pipe, Explosion-Proof – Leak Proof Body
1
2
®

®
Flow

LOCKING COLLAR
ASSEMBLY
3/4 NPT
UPPER HOUSING
SWITCH SUPPORTS V6 Low Flow
SPDT (OR DPDT)
SNAP SWITCH
MAGNET LEVER PIN 18 GA. LEADS
18 [457.20] LONG
MAGNET LEVER
ASSEMBLY 3/4 NPT
6-5/16
Model V6 SWITCH HOUSING
FLOTECT® [160.34]
Explosion- 300 SERIES STAINLESS 3-3/8
proof auto- MAGNETS STEEL OR BRASS [85.73]
matic flow 4-3/4
switch with LOWER HOUSING-BRASS
CERAMIC MAGNET [120.65] SWITCH BODY
1
⁄2" tee OR STAINLESS STEEL
VANE SPRING PISTON 300 1-1/8 [28.58] SQ
VANE PIVOT PIN SERIES STAINLESS 300 SERIES STAINLESS
VANE PIVOT STEEL OR BRASS
BRACKET STEEL OR BRASS
SNAP RING
1/2 NPT
INLET 1/2 NPT (F) OUTLET 1/2 NPT (F)
STAINLESS
STEEL VANE
3-5/8
OVERALL LENGTH WITH VALVE BODY MATERIAL [92.08] O-RING HARDWARE (SCREW, SPRINGS & CHECK
1-1/4˝ TEE CONNECTION 300 SERIES STAINLESS VALVE) STAINLESS STEEL
BUNA-N
APPROXIMATELY 8˝
STEEL OR BRASS

Surprisingly compact, the Series V6 Flotect® Flow Switch is SPECIFICATIONS

engineered to specifically monitor liquid, gas, or airflows. Operation is Service: Gases or liquids compatible with wetted materials.
simple and dependable with no mechanical linkage as the flow switch Wetted Materials: Standard V6 Models: Vane: 301 SS; Lower Body: brass
is magnetically actuated. The lower body holds the flow vane and one or 303 SS; Magnet: ceramic; Other: 301, 302 SS; Tee: brass, iron, forged
magnet, which controls the switch actuating magnet in the separate steel, or 304 SS.
upper housing. In most applications the switch is normally off with the V6 Low Flow Models: Lower Body: brass or 303 SS; Tee: brass or 304 SS;
Magnet: ceramic; O-ring: Buna-N standard, Fluoroelastomer optional;
pipeline flow forcing the vane against the vane spring. As the flow de- Other: 301, 302 SS.
creases the vane spring pushes back the vane, actuating the switch to Temperature Limits: -4 to 220°F (-20 to 105°C) Standard, MT high tem-
signal an alarm or shutdown. Tees are available for installation in perature option 400°F (205°C) (MT not UL, CSA or ATEX). ATEX compliant
pipelines from 1/2˝ to 2˝, with bushings added the unit is easily adapt- AT option ambient temperature -4 to 167°F (-20 to 75°C), process temper-
ed to 1/4˝ and 3/8˝ piping. ature: -4 to 220°F (-20 to 105°C).
Pressure Limit: Brass lower body with no tee models 1000 psig (69 bar),
FEATURES 303 SS lower body with no tee models 2000 psig (138 bar). Brass tee mod-
• Leak proof lower body machined from bar stock els 250 psi (17.2 bar), iron tee models 1000 psi (69 bar), forged and stain-
• Choice of models in a tee with calibrated vane or field adjustable less steel tee models 2000 psi (138 bar), low flow models 1450 psi (100 bar).
trimmable vane Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof and Explosion-proof. Listed with UL and
• Weatherproof CSA for Class I, Groups A, B, C and D; Class II, Groups E, F, and G. (Group
• Explosion-proof (listing included in specifications) A on stainless steel body models only).
• Electrical assembly can be easily replaced without removing the ATEX 0344 II 2 G EEx d IIC T6 Process Temp≤75°C.
EC-type Certificate No.: KEMA 04ATEX2128.
unit from the installation so that the process does not have to be Switch Type: SPDT snap switch standard, DPDT snap switch optional.
shut down Electrical Rating: UL models: 5A @125/250 VAC (V~). CSA and ATEX
• High pressure rating of 1000 psig (69 bar) with brass body and models: 5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~); 5A res., 3A ind. @ 30 VDC (V ). MV op-
2000 psig (138 bar) on the 316 SS body (see specifications) tion: .1A @ 125 VAC (V~). MT option: 5A @125/250 VAC (V~). [MT option not
• Low flow model offers field adjustable set point UL, CSA or ATEX].
• Easy installation, simply insert the tee in the pipeline and complete Electrical Connections: UL models: 18 AWG, 18˝ (460 mm) long. ATEX
electrical connections and CSA models: terminal block.
Upper Body: Brass or 303 SS.
APPLICATIONS Conduit Connections: 3/4˝ male NPT standard, 3/4˝ female NPT on junc-
• Protects pumps, motors and other equipment against low or no tion box models.
flow Process Connection: 1/2˝ male NPT on models without a tee.
Mounting Orientation: Switch can be installed in any position but the ac-
• Controls sequential operation of pumps tuation/deactuation flow rates in the charts are based on horizontal pipe
• Automatically starts auxiliary pumps and engines runs and are nominal values.
• Stops liquid cooled engines, machines and processing when coolant Set Point Adjustment: Standard V6 models none. Without tee models
flow is interrupted vane is trimmable. Low flow models are field adjustable in the range shown.
• Shuts down burner when air flow through heating coil fails See set point charts on opposite page.
• Controls dampers according to flow Weight: 2 to 6 lb (.9 to 2.7 kg) depending on construction.
• Signals alarm when emergency shower in use Options not Shown: Custom calibration, bushings, PVC tee, reinforced
vane.
Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, CE, and ATEX.

201 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg202 7/21/06 2:31 PM Page 1

Series
V6 Mini-Size Flow Switches

Flow
Example V6 EP B B S 2 B MT V6EPB-B-S-2-B-MT flow switch; brass upper housing, brass lower housing, brass
tee with 3/4˝ NPT connections, SPDT snap switch, and high temperature option
Series V6 Series V6 flow switch
Construction EP Explosion proof
Upper B Brass
Body S Stainless Steel
Lower B Brass
Body S Stainless Steel
Circuit S SPDT
(Switch) D DPDT
1 1/2˝ NPT
2 3/4˝ NPT
Tee Connection 3 1˝ NPT
Size 4 1-1/4˝ NPT
5 1-1/2˝ NPT
6 2˝ NPT
LF Low Flow Model (1/2˝ NPT connections)
MI Iron
Tee FS Forged Steel
B Brass
Material S Stainless Steel
0 No tee, field trimmable vane
(For LF Model no tee material chosen, tee material matches lower housing choice)
CSA CSA approved construction with junction box*
AT ATEX approved construction with junction box
MV Gold contacts on snap switch for dry circuits (see specifications for ratings)
Options
MT High temperature option rated 400°F (205°C) (see specifications for ratings)*

VIT Fluoroelastomer O-rings in place of Buna-N on low flow models

*Options that do not have ATEX.

V6 Set Point Charts - Factory Installed Tee V6 Models

APPROXIMATE ACTUATION- APPROXIMATE ACTUATION- Model Number Size Lower Body Tee
DEACTUATION FLOW RATES DEACTUATION FLOW RATES V6EPB-B-S-1-B 1/2˝ Brass Brass
FOR AIR FOR COLD WATER V6EPB-B-S-2-B 3/4˝ Brass Brass
Upper figures are SCFM, Upper figures are GPM, V6EPB-B-S-3-B 1˝ Brass Brass
Lower figures in LPM Lower figures in LPM
V6EPB-B-S-4-B 1-1/4˝ Brass Brass
Pipe Pipe V6EPB-B-S-5-B 1-1/2˝ Brass Brass
Actuate Deactuate Actuate Deactuate
Size Size
V6EPB-B-S-6-B 2˝ Brass Brass
6.50 5.00 1.50 1.00
1
⁄2"
180
1
⁄2" V6EPB-B-S-1-MI 1/2˝ Brass Iron
120 5.667 3.83
10.0 8.00 2.00 1.25
V6EPB-B-S-2-MI 3/4˝ Brass Iron
3
⁄4" 300 240
3
⁄4" 7.5 4.67
V6EPB-B-S-3-MI 1˝ Brass Iron
14.0 12.0 3.00 1.75
V6EPB-B-S-4-MI 1-1/4˝ Brass Iron
1 420 360 1 11.33 6.67
V6EPB-B-S-5-MI 1-1/2˝ Brass Iron
21.0 18.0 4.00 3.00 V6EPB-B-S-6-MI 2˝ Brass Iron
11⁄4" 11⁄4" V6EPB-S-S-1-MI 1/2˝ SS Iron
600 540 15.17 11.3
33.0 30.0 6.00 5.00 V6EPB-S-S-2-MI 3/4˝ SS Iron
11⁄2" 11⁄2" V6EPB-S-S-3-MI 1˝ SS Iron
960 840 22.67 18.9
43.0 36.0 10.00 8.50 V6EPB-S-S-4-MI 1-1/4˝ SS Iron
2 2 V6EPB-S-S-5-MI 1-1/2˝ SS Iron
1200 1020 37.83 32.2
V6EPB-S-S-6-MI 2˝ SS Iron
V6EPB-S-S-1-FS 1/2˝ SS FS
V6EPB-S-S-2-FS 3/4˝ SS FS
V6EPB-S-S-3-FS 1˝ SS FS
V6EPB-S-S-4-FS 1-1/4˝ SS FS
V6EPB-S-S-5-FS 1-1/2˝ SS FS
V6EPB-S-S-6-FS 2˝ SS FS
V6 Low Flow Set Point Chart V6EPB-S-S-1-S 1/2˝ SS SS
MIN-MAX FLOW RATES IN 1⁄2" PIPE V6EPB-S-S-2-S 3/4˝ SS SS
V6EPB-S-S-3-S 1˝ SS SS
MEDIA ACTUATE DEACTUATE V6EPB-S-S-4-S 1-1/4˝ SS SS
GPM-Water .04-0.75 .03-0.60 V6EPB-S-S-5-S 1-1/2˝ SS SS
LPM-Water .15-2.84 .11-2.27 V6EPB-S-S-6-S 2˝ SS SS
SCFM-Air .18-2.70 .15-2.0 V6EPB-B-S-6-0 No Tee Brass None
LPS-Air .09-1.3 .07-.95 V6EPB-S-S-6-0 No Tee SS None
Pressure drop (head loss) is a function of both set point and flow rate. Typically, pressure drop at actu- V6EPB-B-S-LF 1/2˝ Brass LF, Brass
ation flow rate listed will be 5-10 psid (.34-.69 bar). Pressure drops at other flow rates will vary in V6EPB-S-S-LF 1/2˝ SS LF, SS
proportion to the (change in flow).

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 202
pg203 7/21/06 2:32 PM Page 1

Model
V10
&
Mini-Size Flow Switch
V11 Proof of Flow or No Flow in ⁄ to 2” Pipe,
1
2
Low Cost, Leak Proof Body, Weatherproof
®
Flow

2-1/4
[57.15]

2-13/16
7/8 HEX [71.44]
3/16 [22.23]
[4.76] Lower Body
2 Con
22 AWG Wire
1/2 NPT

2-7/16
[61.91]

VANE

Model V10 Model V11

Designed to provide an inexpensive, reliable unit to monitor SPECIFICATIONS

the presence or absence of flow in a system. The V10 and V11 flow Service: Compatible gases or liquids.
switches are used to monitor unattended equipment and protect it Wetted Materials:
from costly damage. The V10 flow switch utilizes a rugged, hermeti- Vane: 301 SS.
cally sealed reed switch which is encapsulated in a polypropylene Body: Brass or 303 SS.
switch housing that fits into a standard heavy duty leak proof brass Pin and Spring: 301 SS, 302 SS, and 316 SS.
Magnet: Ceramic 8.
body or optional 303 SS body. The patented switch adjustment* allows Temperature Limit: V10: 200°F (93°C), V11: 250°F (121°C).
the user to change the switch to Normally Open (NO) or Normally Pressure Limit: Brass body: 1000 psig (69 bar), 303 SS body: 2000 psig
Closed (NC) in the field merely by loosening two screws. The switch (138 bar).
housing is located outside the process media, making switch change- Switch Type: SPST hermetically sealed reed switch. V10: Field adjustable
over or maintenance easy without interruption of process flow. for normally open or normally closed.
Electrical Rating: 1.5A @ 24 VDC resistive, 0.001A @ 200 VDC resistive,
The V11 Flotect® flow switch takes our very popular V10 design and 0.5A @ 125 VAC.
adds rugged, integral electrical wiring. The one-piece PBT switch Electrical Connections: V10: 22 AWG, 18˝ (460 mm) long, V11: 22
housing snaps onto the body and the wiring is epoxy sealed making the AWG, 6’ (1.83 m) long. Rated 392°F (200°C). 300V. Flame retardant
extruded FEP insulation and overall shield.
switch weatherproof, meeting NEMA 4 standards. The 22 AWG cable Conduit Connection: V10: 1/8˝ male NPT.
used is UV resistant, flame retardant, and comes standard 6 feet in Process Connection: 1/2˝ male NPT standard. Contact factory for other
length. This unique design eliminates the need for running conduit be- options.
tween the switch and panel, lowering installation costs. Mounting Orientation: Switch can be installed in any position but the
actuation/deactuation flow rates are based on horizontal pipe runs and are
A full size, trimmable stainless steel vane is provided with a removable nominal values.
laminated template. This template is calibrated for brass or ductile Set Point Adjustment: Vane is trimmable.
iron reducing tees and forged steel straight tee/bushing combinations. Weight: V10: 4.5 oz (0.13 kg), V11: 5.8 oz (0.165 kg).
Allows for field installation in pipelines from 1⁄2" to 2" diameter. A table Agency Approvals: V10: CE, UL and CSA; V11: UL.
Switch Enclosure: V10: Polypropylene, V11: Polybutylene terephthalate
with approximate actuation and deactivation values is provided below. (PBT).

Cold Water Flow Rates Air Flow Rates Model V10 (brass lower body)
Approximate actuation/deactuation Approximate actuation/deactuation Model V10SS (303 SS lower body)
GPM upper, LPM lower SCFM upper, LPM lower
Pipe Trim N.O. N.C. Pipe Trim N.O. N.C.
1
⁄2" 2.6/2.3 2.6/2.5 1
⁄2" 10.3/8.8 10.2/9.2
L L
9.8/8.7 9.8/9.5 291.7/250 288/260 Model Number Body Material Switch Configuration
3
⁄4" 3.1/2.7 3.1/2.8 3
⁄4" 13/11.6 12.9/11.6 V11-BNOA-6 Brass Normally Open
J J
11.7/10.2 11.7/10.6 368.3/328 365/328
V11-BNCA-6 Brass Normally Closed
1" 4.8/4.5 4.8/4.4 1" 19.2/17.6 18.9/17.6
H H V11-SNOA-6 303 SS Normally Open
18.2/17 18.2/16.7 543.3/498 535/498
11⁄4" 6.2/5.6 6.1/5.6 11⁄4" 24.8/22.2 24.5/22.5 V11-SNCA-6 303 SS Normally Closed
E 23.5/21.2 23.1/21.2 E 701.7/628 693/637
11⁄2" 8.2/7.7 8.2/7.7 11⁄2" 33.4/31.2 33/30.6
C 31/29.1 31/29.1 C 946.7/883 935/867
2" 9.5/9.1 9.5/9 2" 50.2/48.4 50.2/47.7
Full 36/34.4 36/34.1 Full 1422/1370 1422/1352

203 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg204 7/21/06 2:33 PM Page 1

Series
V8 Vane Operated Flow Switch
Field Adjustable – 1 to 6 Inch Pipe, Leak Proof Body C

Flow
1/2 FEMALE NPT
CONDUIT CONNECTION

1/2 NPTM
3-1/16 1-21/32
(77.79) (41.31)
11.800 1-5/16 OCTAGON
(299.72) 1 NPTM (33.34)

5-1/4 FIELD TRIMMABLE

(133.35) VANE

V8 V8-WP

V8 Flotect® Flow Switch Protects Equipment: Operation is sim- APPLICATIONS

ple and dependable. In most applications, the switch is normally off Applications are chemical processing, air conditioning, refrigeration,
while there is sufficient flow of liquid or air. When flow stops, the vane heating systems, cooling lines, machinery, liquid transfer systems, water
spring moves the vane, actuating a single pole double throw switch treatment, food processing, and machine tools. Also, other applications
rated 5A @ 120/250 VAC to start or stop motor, pump, engine, etc. Op- compatible with the materials of construction.
erate a damper or valve; shut down a burner or actuate an alarm or sig-
nal, protecting unattended equipment from damage or loss of SPECIFICATIONS
production. Service: Compatible gases or liquids.
Wetted Materials:
The V8 Flotect® Flow Switch has a leak proof body and vane con- Vane and Body: Polyphenylene Sulfide (PPS).
structed of tough durable polyphenylene sulfide which has excellent Pin and Spring: 316 SS or Inconel®.
Magnet: Ceramic 8.
chemical resistance. The full size trimmable vane is provided with Temperature Limit: 212°F (100°C).
molded-in graduations allowing for installation in a 1 inch through 6 Pressure Limit: 150 psig (10.34 bar).
inch pipe. Operating pressures are up to 150 psig (10 bar) and tem- Enclosure Rating: General purpose, WP option is weatherproof.
peratures to 212°F (100°C). The V8 flow switch can be used in various Switch Type: SPDT snap switch, MV option: SPDT gold contact snap
switch.
chemical processes, industrial systems and similar applications where Electrical Rating: 5A @ 125/250 VAC, 5A resistive, 3A inductive @ 30
process conditions are compatible with polyphenylene sulfide, ceramic VDC. MV option: 1A @ 125 VAC, 1A resistive, 0.5A inductive @ 30 VDC.
8 and 316SS. The V8 Flotect® flow switch is UL recognized as an in- Electrical Connections: 18 AWG, 18˝ (460 mm) long.
dustrial motor controller per UL standard 508, suitable for mounting Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ male NPT.
Process Connection: 1˝ male NPT.
in a protected environment. Mounting Orientation: Switch can be installed in any position but the ac-
tuation/deactuation flow rates are based on horizontal pipe runs and are
Cold Water Flow Rates Air Flow Rates nominal values.
Approximate actuation/deactuation Approximate actuation/deactuation Set Point Adjustment: Vane is trimmable.
GPM upper, LPM lower SCFM upper, LPM lower Weight: 4.5 oz (0.13 kg).
Pipe Size Pipe Size Agency Approvals: CE, UL 508 for US and Canada.
1" 10.8/9.1 1" 39/32.6
40.9/34.6 1105/923
11⁄4" 9.8/8.3 11⁄4" 37.5/32.2
37.2/31.4 1062/912 V8 Flow Switch
11⁄2" 8.6/6.8 1 ⁄2"
1 33.4/26.7
32.4/25.7 945/757 OPTIONS:
2" 10.9/8.8 2" 43/36.8 Gold Plated Contacts, for dry circuits. Rated 1A @ 125 VAC; 1A
41.2/33.4 1218/1042
resistive, 0.5A inductive @ 30 VDC. To order add suffix
12.9/8.9 52.7/38.9
3"
48.8/33.5
3"
1493/1100
-MV. Example: V8-MV
21.1/13.8 87.6/63.6 Inconel® Alloy Option. Inconel® Alloy replaces standard 316 SS
4" 4"
79.7/52.2 2482/1802 wetted parts. Wetted parts are Inconel® Alloy, ceramic 8, and
6" 45/33 6" 168.6/137.4 Polyphenylene Sulfide. To order add suffix -INC.
170.2/124.7 4775/3890 Example: V8-INC
Suggested Specifications Weatherproof Enclosure. Optional housing is phenylpolioxide
Automatic Polyphenylene Sulfide plastic flow switch shall be vane operated to and provides weatherproof protection for electrical wiring. To
actuate a single pole, double throw snap switch. Motion of the vane shall actuate order add suffix -WP. (Not UL approved)
switch by action of a magnet which controls the switch inside the one piece leak Example: V8-WP
proof switch body. Control shall be suitable for pressure up to 150 psig (10 bar)
and temperature to 212°F (100°C). Switch shall be W.E. Anderson® Flow Switch
Inconel® is a registered trademark of Huntington Alloys Corporation.
Model No. V8.
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 204
pg205 7/21/06 2:33 PM Page 1

Model
FS-2 Vane Flow Switch
Low Cost, Field Adjustable Set Point
Flow

2-13/32 5-1/8
[61.1] [130.2]
4-17/64
[108.3]

3-1/32
[77]
5-49/64
[146.5]

The Model FS-2 Vane Flow Switch offers an economical flow SPECIFICATIONS
proving solution. Custom set points tailored for the application are en- Service: Compatible liquids.
abled by field adjustable vane layers and a set point adjustment screw. Wetted Materials:
The FS-2 features an aluminum weatherproof housing for outdoor in- Bellow: Tin-bronze.
stallation. Paddles are adjustable to fit 1˝ to 8˝ size pipe. FS-2 is ideal Vane: Stainless Steel.
for use in “flow or no flow” applications in cold and hot water systems. Body: Forged brass.
Temperature Limit: 230ºF (110ºC).
Pressure Limit: 145 psig (10 bar).
FEATURES
Enclosure Rating: IP64.
• Field Adjustable Paddle
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch.
• Field Adjustable Set Point Electrical Rating: 10A res, 3A ind @ 250 VAC.
• Weatherproof Construction Electrical Connection: Cable gland with attached wire leads.
Process Connection: 1˝ male NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Switch must be installed vertically on horizontal
pipe runs.
Set Point Adjustment: Four vane combinations and an adjustment
FLOW RATE CHART screw.
Approximate Actuation and Deactuation Enclosure: Die-cast aluminum alloy.
Pipe Vane Flow Rates for Water Weight: 28.22 oz (0.8 kg).
Diameter Length
Minimum Setting Maximum Setting Agency Approvals: CE.
(inch) in (mm)
GPM (LPM) GPM (LPM)
Dim. X
Actuate Deactuate Actuate Deactuate
1 1.34 (34) 4.0 (15.0) 1.8 (6.7) 8.8 (33.3) 6.6 (25.0)
1-1/4 1.34 (34) 5.3 (20.0) 2.6 (10.0) 11.4 (43.3) 8.4 (31.7)
1-1/2 2.24 (57) 7.0 (26.7) 4.0 (15.0) 14.5 (55.0) 11.4 (43.3)
2 2.24 (57) 14.1 (53.3) 9.7 (36.7) 31.3 (118.3) 22.5 (85.0)
2-1/2 3.46 (88) 18.5 (70.0) 15.4 (58.3) 35.2 (133.3) 30.8 (116.7)
3 3.46 (88) 27.7 (105.0) 25.1 (95.0) 52.8 (200.0) 46.2 (175.0)
4 3.46 (88) 59.4 (225.0) 52.8 (200.0) 123.3 (466.7) 114.5 (433.3)
5 6.57 (167) 52.8 (200.0) 39.6 (150.0) 132.1 (500.0) 123.3 (466.7)
6 6.57 (167) 75.7 (286.7) 52.8 (200.0) 154.1 (583.3) 140.9 (533.3)
8 6.57 (167) 184.9 (700.0) 158.5 (600.0) 396.3 (1500.0) 374.2 (1416.7)

205 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg206 7/21/06 2:36 PM Page 1

Model
530 Air Flow Switch
Adjustable from 400-1600 FPM, Stainless Steel Vane ®

Flow
®

Patent No. 4,725,700

The Model 530 air flow switch provides excellent sensitivity SPECIFICATIONS
and reliability at a very reasonable price. Quality features in- Service: Air and non-combustible gas flow.
clude a rugged die cast body, stainless steel vane and SPDT Wetted Materials: Contact factory.
snap switch. Unit is field adjustable from 400-1600 FPM. Mount- Vane: Stainless Steel.
ing is fast and simple, with only two screws needed. Vane fits 6 Temperature Limit: 180°F (82°C).
in. or larger ducts. Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: 125 VAC - 9.8 amp full load 58.8 amp
locked rotor. 250 VAC - 4.9 amp full load 29.4 amp locked
530 Air Flow Switch rotor. Pilot Rating: 470 VA at 125, 250 VAC. Resistive: 15
amp at 125, 250, or 480 VAC.
Range 400-1600 FPM mounted on top of horizontal duct. Electrical Connections: Screw type terminal.
Conduit Connection: 7/8˝ conduit hole.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal duct flow
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type.
Weight: 1 lb, 1 oz (481.94 g)
CAUTION: FOR USE ONLY WITH AIR OR NON-COMBUSTIBLE NON-
CORROSIVE GASES. UNIT IS NOT SEALED AGAINST DUST. Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, CE.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 206
pg207 7/21/06 2:36 PM Page 1

Series
V12 Flow Switch
Low Cost, Wide Range of Chemical Compatibility, Flow Rates 0.5 to 5.0 GPM
Flow

V12 - 3/4 NPT 3/4 NPT TYP.

1-15/32
[37.31] 2 PLACES
V12
13/16
[20.64]

OUTLET
V12 - 3/4 NPT
V12 3-11/32
RED 2-11/16 [84.93]
[65.26]
INLET

WHITE
V12
(2) 22 AWG 2-7/8
LEAD WIRES [73.03]
V12 - 3/4 NPT Ø1-19/32 TYP.
18˝ [457] LONG 3-17/32 [40.48]
[89.69]

• Flow Rate Settings of 0.5 to 5.0 GPM SPECIFICATIONS

Service: Compatible liquids.
• Wide Range of Chemical Compatibility Wetted Materials:
Housing and Shuttle: PPE & PS (Polyphenylene Ether and
• Mountable in Any Orientation Polystyrene). PVC with 3/4 NPT option.
• Low Pressure Drop at Full Flow Spring: 316 SS.
Retaining Clip: PH 15-7 MO stainless steel.
• FDA Approved Wetted Materials Option Magnet: Ceramic 1. FDA option: FEP.
Temperature Limits: 0°F (-18°C) to 194°F (90°C)
Pressure Limit: 100 psig (6.90 bar) @ 70°F (21°C), 50 psig (3.45
Series V12 Flotect® Flow Switch is a low cost, versatile bar) @ 194°F (90°C)
line of switches that can be used in a wide range of applica- Switch Type: SPST normally open hermetically sealed reed
tions and configurations. Mountable in any orientation, the switch.
Electrical Rating: 1.5A @ 24 VDC resistive, 0.001A @ 200 VDC
Series V12 Flow Switch utilizes a free moving shuttle that is resistive, 0.5A @ 125 VAC.
displaced by the liquid flow, activating an isolated, sealed reed Accuracy: ±20%.
switch. Models can be used in media that is compatible with Electrical Connections: 22 AWG, 18˝ (460 mm) long.
Process Connection: 1˝ female NPT. Optional 3/4˝ female NPT.
PPE & PS, stainless steel and ceramic 1. FDA approved mate- Mounting Orientation: Switch can be installed in any position
rials option has wetted materials of PPE & PS, stainless steel but the actuation flow rates are based on vertical up flow pipe
and FEP. runs and are nominal values.
Set Point Adjustment: None.
Weight: 4.2 oz (0.119 kg).
Applications Deadband: 20% maximum.
Monitoring water and other compatible media flow, especially Agency Approvals: UL.
for the pool and spa industry; protect equipment due to loss of
FDA approved materials option. For applications that require
coolant or lubricant flow; process system operation; monitor- FDA approved materials, wetted materials are PPE & PS, 316
ing of chlorinators, water filtration, reverse osmosis and evap- stainless steel, PH 15-7 Mo stainless steel and FEP. To order, add
orators. suffix “-FDA”. Example: V12-4-FDA.

3/4˝ female NPT connections option. PVC hex bushing.

To order add suffix “-3/4NPT”.
Example: V12-4-3/4NPT
MODELS
Switch Activation Set Point on Increasing Flow (Water), Vertical Up Direction
Model
Number Gallons per Minute Liters per Minute
V12-2 0.5 GPM 1.892
V12-3 1.0 GPM 3.785
V12-4 2.5 GPM 9.462
V12-5 5.0 GPM 18.924

Note: Standard units are designed with springs for positive return of the shuttle at no-flow condition. This allows the flow switch to be
mounted in any orientation, but actuation set points vary from stated values. Contact the factory for further information.

207 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg208 7/21/06 2:37 PM Page 1

Series
P5 PVC Shuttle Flow Switch
Low Cost Flow/No Flow Monitoring, Visual Flow Indication, Broad Chemical Compatibility

Flow
1-5/8
[41.28]

(A)
TYP 2 PLACES
3-13/16 [96.84] OR
4-3/8 [111.12] W/NPT
PORT ADAPTER (B)

1-1/2 [38.10] OR
2-1/16 [52.39] W/ 1/2 NPT
PORT ADAPTER

The transparent Series P5 Shuttle Flow Switch features corro- SPECIFICATIONS

sion resistant, durable PVC housing for visual confirmation in flow/no Service: Compatible liquids.
flow applications. The switches have preset actuation points from 0.5 Wetted Materials: Housing, shuttle and bonnet: PVC; O-ring:
to 2.0 GPM for actuation on increasing flow. Switching is SPST nor- Buna-N; Epoxy.
mally open at no flow. Choose from 1/2˝ NPT or 3/4˝ IPS (for 0.5
GPM) or 1˝ IPS (for 2.0 GPM) inlet and outlet ports. The shuttle Temperature Limits: 120°F (49°C).
design has only one moving part for long life and minimum mainte- Pressure Limit: 120 psig (8.2 bar) @70°F (21°C) to 100°F (38°C),
nance. Remove the one-piece bonnet and shuttle assembly to quickly 50 psig (3.45 bar) @ 101°F (38.3°C) to 120°F (49°C).
clean the unit without disturbing the housing or piping. Rugged con- Accuracy: ±20% of set point.
struction and excellent chemical compatibility simplify flow / no flow Repeatability: ±1%.
detection. Switch Type: SPST, N.O.
Electrical Rating: .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120
MODELS VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC.
Model Number Actuation Set Point Process Connection Electrical Connection: 22 AWG, 24˝ (61 cm), PVC lead wire.
GPM (LPM) Process Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT, 3/4˝ IPS or 1˝ IPS.
P5-1 .5 (1.89) 1/2˝ NPT port adapter Required Filtration: 150 microns or better.
P5-2 .5 (1.89) 3/4˝ IPS Mounting Orientation: Vertical, inlet facing down.
P5-3 2.0 (7.57) 1˝ IPS Weight: 6 oz (.17 kg).

Series
P8 High Pressure Brass Flow Switch
Up to 1500 psi, Fixed Setpoint, Up to 2.0 GPM, Rugged Brass Body

3/8 NPT TYP

1-1/8
[28.58] 3/4 HEX
[19.05]
3-29/64
[87.71]
3/8 NPT PORT MODEL

High inline pressures are no problem for the Series P8 brass SPECIFICATIONS
flow switch. The switch integrates a one-piece magnetic PPS Service: Compatible liquids.
composite piston to handle pressure up to 1500 psi. The P8 Wetted Materials: Housing: Brass; Piston: PPS composite, epoxy
switches use 100 micron filtration and are less susceptible to Spring: 316SS; O-ring: Flourocarbon.
clogging than other high inline pressure switches. Setpoints Temperature Limits: -20 to 275°F (-28 to 135°C).
range from 0.25 to 2.0 GPM for liquid flow. Use the Series P8 Pressure Limits: 1500 psi (103.4 bar).
Accuracy: ±20% of set point.
in industrial cleaning equipment or high pressure lubrication
Switch Type: SPST, N.O.
systems. Electrical Rating: .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120
MODELS VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC.
Electrical Connection: No. 22 AWG, 24˝ (61 cm), Polymeric
Model Number Actuation Set Point Leads.
GPM (LPM) Process Connections: 3/8˝ male NPT.
P8-11 0.25 (.95) Mounting Orientation: Any position. Set points shown are based
P8-12 0.50 (1.89) on vertical, inlet down position.
Required Filtration: 100 microns or better.
P8-13 1.0 (3.79)
Weight: 6 oz (.17 kg).
P8-14 1.5 (5.68)
P8-15 2.0 (7.57)
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 208
pg209 7/21/06 2:38 PM Page 1

Series
P1 Brass Flow Switch
Fixed Setpoints, Flow Rates from 0.10 to 1.5 GPM
1/4 .75
[6.35] [19.05]
1˝
Flow

[25.40]
9/32˝ [7.14] DIA.
MTG. HOLES (2) 1.75
[44.45]
4-1/8
[104.78] 2-3/8
[60.32]
1/2
[12.70]

1-1/4
[31.75]
27/32 1/4" NPT
[21.43] BOTH PORTS

The Series P1 Brass Flow Switch utilizes a piston-type design SPECIFICATIONS

for accurate detection of excessive or insufficient flow rates.The Service: Compatible liquids.
piston magnetically actuates a hermetically sealed SPDT reed Wetted Materials: Housing: brass; piston: polysulfone; Spring:
switch. The switches have preset actuation points from 0.10 to 1.5 316SS; O-Ring: Fluoroelastomer, Other: Epoxy.
GPM for liquid flow. The Series P1 is ideal for protecting against Temperature Limits: -20 to 225°F (-29 to 107°C).
loss of fluid flow in hydraulic systems or assuring proper coolant Pressure Limits: 1000 psig (68.9 bar).
Accuracy: ±10% of set point.
flow in semiconductor processing. Repeatability: ±1%.
MODELS Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC,
Model Number Actuation Set Point .06A @ 240 VDC.
GPM (LPM) Electrical Connection: 18 AWG, 24˝ (60.96 cm), Polymeric lead wires.
P1-011 0.10 (.38) Process Connection: 1/4˝ female NPT.
P1-012 0.25 (.95) Mounting Orientation: Any position. Set points shown are based on
P1-013 0.50 (1.89) vertical, inlet down position.
Required Filtration: 50 microns or better.
P1-014 0.75 (2.84) Weight: 0.66 Ib (301 g).
P1-015 1.00 (3.79)
P1-016 1.50 (5.68)

Series
P2 Flow Switch
Ideal for Air and Post-Filtered Water Applications, Fixed Set Point, FDA Compliant

1 25/32
[25.40] [19.84]

4-5/16
[109.54]

The compact Series P2 Flow Switch utilizes a piston-type design SPECIFICATIONS

for both air and pure water applications. The switches have preset Service: Compatible liquids or gases.
actuation points from 0.05 to 1.0 GPM for water and 25 CFH to 5 CFM Wetted Materials: Housing: PPE & PS (polyphenylene
for air. The piston design incorporates a hermetically sealed SPST
magnetic reed switch. The P2 is comprised of NorylTM housing and pis-
ether and polystyrene); Piston: PPE & PS and epoxy;
ton and 316 SS spring and stop pin. All wetted parts are FDA compli- Spring and Stop Pin: 316 SS.
ant. Economical and superior design make this an excellent switch for Temperature Limit: 0 to 212°F (-18 to 100°C).
pure water equipment, filter life monitoring, heat exchanges, and cool- Pressure Limits: 150 psig (10.3 bar) @ 70°F (21°C); 50
ing applications. psig (3.4 bar) @ 212°F (100°C).
Switch Type: SPST, N.O.
MODELS Electrical Rating: .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A
@ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC.
Media Model Number Actuation Set Point Electrical Connection: 22 AWG, 18˝ (45.7 cm), PVC lead
Liquids P2-11 .05 (.19) wires.
GPM (LPM) P2-12 .25 (.95) Process Connection: 1/4˝ male NPT.
P2-13 .5 (1.89)
P2-14 1 (3.79) Mounting Orientation: Any position. Set points shown are
Gases P2-15 .42 (11.9) based on vertical, inlet down position.
CFM (LPM) P2-16 1 (28.3) Required Filtration: 50 microns or better.
@ 5 psi P2-17 2.5 (70.8) Weight: 2 oz (.06 kg).
P2-18 5 (141.6)
209 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au
pg210 7/26/06 11:26 AM Page 1

Series
P3 Polypropylene Flow Switch
Fixed Set Points from 0.25 to 2.0 GPM, 3/8” NPT or “Quick Disconnect” Adapters
3/4 [19.05] ACROSS FLATS
.688 HEX
[17.48]

Flow
1
[25.40]
7/16 4-15/64
[11.11] [107.55]
QUICK DISCONNECT 11/16 HEX
3/4 [19.05] ACROSS FLATS PORTS [17.46]
3/8 NPT PORTS
1
[25.40]
4
[101.60]
3/8 NPT PORTS
Fit almost any piping requirements with the Series P3 Polypropylene SPECIFICATIONS Switch Type: SPST, N.O.
Flow Switch. The basic piston design consists of a hermetically sealed Service: Compatible liquids. Electrical Rating: .08A @ 120 VAC.
Wetted Materials: Housing: Electrical Connection: 24˝ (60.96
SPST normally open reed switch. Choose the inlet and outlet port to be Polypropylene; Piston: PPS compos- cm), polymeric wire leads, 22 AWG.
3/8˝ male NPT or 1/4˝ male “Quick Disconnect”. Select a quick disconnect ite; Spring: 316SS; O-ring: Process Connection: 3/8˝ male NPT
acetal adapter for straight through flow or with a shut off valve. The shut Flourocarbon. or 1/4˝ quick disconnect.
off valve will stop line flow when the adapter is removed from the switch. Temperature Limits: 0 to 212°F (-18 Mounting Orientation: Any position.
to 100°C). Set points shown are based on verti-
The flow will resume when the adapter is reconnected. With many snap-on Pressure Limits: 125 psig (8.6 bar) cal, inlet down position.
fittings to choose from, any flow application can integrate the P3 Flow @ 70°F (21°C), 50 psig (3.4 bar) @ Required Filtration: 100 microns or
Switch into the existing piping. 212°F (100°C). better.
Accuracy: 20% of set point. Weight: 5 oz (0.14 kg).
MODELS Repeatability: ±1%.
Model Number Connection Actuation Set Point
GPM (LPM)
P3-31 3/8˝ NPT 0.25 (.95)
P3-32 3/8˝ NPT 0.50 (1.89) ADAPTERS
P3-33 3/8˝ NPT 1.0 (3.79) Model Number Connection
P3-34 3/8˝ NPT 1.5 (5.68) P3-801 Quick Disconnect Straight through 1/4˝ NPT
P3-35 3/8˝ NPT 2.0 (7.57) P3-802 Quick Disconnect Straight through 1/4˝ BSPT
P3-41 Q Disconnect 0.25 (.95) P3-804 Quick Disconnect Straight through 3/8˝ BSPT
P3-42 Q Disconnect 0.50 (1.89) P3-807 Quick Disconnect Straight through 1/4˝ ID Tubing
P3-43 Q Disconnect 1.0 (3.79) P3-901 Quick Disconnect Straight through 1/4˝ NPT w/ Shut-off Valve
P3-44 Q Disconnect 1.5 (5.68) P3-902 Quick Disconnect Straight through 1/4˝ BSPT w/Shut-off Valve
P3-45 Q Disconnect 2.0 (7.57) P3-907 Quick Disconnect Straight through 1/4˝ ID Tubing w/Shut-off Valve

Series
P4 PPS Piston Flow Switch
Fixed Set Points from 0.1 to 1.5 GPM, SPST and SPDT Switching, Optional Adapters
9/16-18 UNF-28
TYP 2 PLACES 37/64
[14.68]

1
[25.40]

1-1/4 59/64
[31.75] 3-41/64 [23.42]
[92.47]

The Series P4 PPS Flow Switch features a molded plastic con- SPECIFICATIONS Electrical Rating: .17A @ 120
struction for enhanced performance. Monitor liquids with fixed set Service: Compatible liquids. VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120
points from 0.1 to 1.5 GPM. Choose normally open or normally closed Wetted Materials: Housing and VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC.
piston: Polyphenylene Sulfide (PPS) Electrical Connection: 18 AWG,
SPST or SPDT hermetically sealed reed switch technology. The indus- R4; Spring: 316 SS; 24˝ (60.96 cm), PVC lead wires.
trial switch features Ryton® R4 housing and piston, 316SS spring, O-ring: Fluoroelastomer; Other: Process Connection: 9/16-18
Fluoroelastomer O-ring and Epoxy. The inlet and outlet ports are Epoxy. UNF-2B or choice of connection
9/16˝-18 UNF-2B thread with optional 1/8˝ and 1/4˝ NPT or 1/2˝ Temperature Limits: 0 to 225°F adapters (sold separately).
barbed adapters. (17 to 107°C). Mounting Orientation: Any posi-
Pressure Limits: 250 psig (17 bar) tion. Set points shown are based
MODELS @ 54°F (12°C). on vertical, inlet down position.
Model Number Actuation Set Point Switch Type Accuracy: ±15% of set point. Required Filtration: 50 microns
GPM (LPM) Repeatability: ±1%. or better.
P4-11 .1 (.38) SPST, N.O. Switch Type: SPST or SPDT. Weight: 4 oz (0.11 kg).
P4-12 .25 (.95) SPST, N.O.
P4-13 .5 (1.89) SPST, N.O.
P4-14 .75 (2.84) SPST, N.O.
P4-15 1 (3.7) SPST, N.O.
P4-16 1.5 (5.68) SPST, N.O. OPTIONAL ADAPTERS
P4-31 .1 (.38) SPDT Model Number Description
P4-32 0.25 (.95) SPDT
P4-33 0.5 (1.89) SPDT P4-98 1/8˝ NPT
P4-34 0.75 (2.84) SPDT P4-94 1/4˝ NPT
P4-35 1.0 (3.79) SPDT P4-92 1/2˝ Barb
P4-36 1.5 (5.68) SPDT
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 210
pg211 7/21/06 2:42 PM Page 1

Series
G9 Globe Flow Switch
Adjustable Set Point, Water or Oil Service, 90° Flow Path
Flow

1/2 NPT

3-27/32
3/4 NPT [97.63]

1-3/8
[34.92] 1-7/16 HEX
[36.51]
1-3/8
[34.92]

The Series G9 Globe Flow Switch provides accurate flow detection SPECIFICATIONS
in water and oil with ±1% repeatability. A shuttle by-pass vane inside Service: Compatible liquids.
the housing is controlled externally using an ordinary flat blade screw- Wetted Materials: Housing: Bronze; Shuttle: Acetal; Spring: 316 SS; O-
driver, allowing flow settings to be changed without disassembly. Each ring: Fluoroelastomer; Other: Ceramic.
switch is constructed of non-corrosive materials and resists shock and Temperature Limits: -20 to 180°F (-29 to 82°C).
vibration. The Series G9 is suitable for triggering alarms on interlock- Pressure Limits: 400 psi (27 bar) @ 100°F (37.8°C).
ing shutdown circuitry when flow rate is incorrect and for protecting Accuracy: ±10% of set point.
bearings, gears, and cooling systems. Repeatability: ±1% maximum deviation.
Switch Type: SPDT.
MODELS Electrical Rating: .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC,
.06A @ 240 VDC.
Model Number Actuation Set Point Electrical Connections: 18 AWG, 24˝ (61 cm), polymeric lead wires.
Range GPM (LPM) Process Connection: 3/4˝ female NPT.
G9-21 0.75 - 4.0 (2.8 - 15.1) Mounting Orientation: Any position. Set points shown are based on ver-
tical, lead wires up position.
G9-22 2.0 - 8.0 (7.6 - 30.3) Required Filtration: 150 microns or better.
G9-23 7.0 - 14.0 (26.5 - 53.0) Weight: 1 lb 11 oz (0.76 kg).

Series
GVS Globe Valve Switch
Adjustable Set Point, Rugged Bronze Construction, Straight Through Flow

1/2 NPT

3
(7.62)

1-25/32 HEX
(45)
1 NPT

3-1/4
(83)

The Series GVS offers accurate flow detection with 1% re- SPECIFICATIONS
peatability and external adjustability over a broad range of flow Service: Compatible liquids.
settings. The durable construction delivers long-life reliability in Wetted Materials: Housing: Bronze; Shuttle: TFE; Bonnet: Bronze;
either water or oil. Generous flow paths keep pressure drop low. Spring: 316SS.; Other: Fluoroelastomer, Ceramic.
The GVS are ideal for detection of improper flow rates in high Temperature Limits: -20 to 200°F (-29 to 93°C).
volume lubrication, cooling or process systems. Pressure Limits: 400 psig (27 bar) @ 100°F (38°C).
Accuracy: ±10%.
Repeatability: 1% maximum deviation.
Switch Type: SPDT.
MODELS Electrical Rating: .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC,
Model Number Actuation Set Point .06A @ 240 VDC.
Electrical Connections: 18 AWG, 24˝ (61 cm), polymeric lead wires.
Range GPM (LPM) Process Connections: 1˝ female NPT.
GVS-111 1.0 - 6.0 (3.8 - 22.7) Mounting Orientation: Any position. Set points shown are based on
GVS-112 5.0 - 15.0 (18.9 - 56.8) horizontal, lead wires up positional
GVS-113 2.0 - (7.6 - 30.3) Required Filtration: 150 microns or better.
Weight: 2 lb, 8 oz (1.16 kg).

211 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg212 7/21/06 2:43 PM Page 1

Series
AFS Adjustable Flow Switch
For Oils, Water and Gases, Infinite Adjustments

Flow
2
[50.80]
3/4
[19.05] 1/2 NPT
TYP BOTH ENDS
1-1/4 4-1/8
[31.75] [104.78]

The Series AFS Adjustable Flow Switch is externally adjustable SPECIFICATIONS

and is ideal for protecting machine tools from coolant flow failure, pro- Service: Compatible gases or liquids.
tecting bearings from loss of lubricant or assuring proper air flow. The Wetted Materials: See model chart for housing and piston,
Series AFS offers an infinite number of flow settings from 0.5 to 20 Spring: 316SS, O-ring: Fluoroelastomer, Other: Epoxy.
GPM at pressures up to 1000 psig, with low pressure drop and precise Temperature Limits: -20 to 300°F (-29 to 149°C),
repeatability. The AFS is housed in either brass or stainless steel and -20 to 225°F (-29 to 107.2°C) with polysulfone piston.
can be used with water, compatible liquids, oils, and gases. Pressure Limit: 1000 psi (68 bar).
Accuracy: ±10% of setpoint.
MODELS Repeatability: ±1% maximum deviation.
Model Media Electrical Piston Housing Switch Type: SPDT.
Connection Electrical Rating: .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120
AFS-131 Oil Wire leads Brass Brass VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC.
AFS-141 Water Wire leads Polysulfone Brass Electrical Connections: 18 AWG, 24˝ (61 cm), polymeric lead
AFS-151 Liquids Wire leads 316SS 316SS wires, optional 1/2˝ male NPT conduit connection.
AFS-231 Gases Wire leads Brass Brass Process Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT ports.
AFS-251 Gases Wire leads 316SS 316SS Mounting Orientation: Any.
AFS-132 Oil 1/2˝ NPT Conduit Brass Brass
AFS-142 Water 1/2˝ NPT Conduit Polysulfone Brass Setpoint Adjustment: Liquids: 0.5 to 20 GPM (1.9 to 75.7 LPM),
AFS-152 Liquids 1/2˝ NPT Conduit 316SS 316SS Gases: 1.0 to 75 SCFM (28 to 2124 LPM) at 5 psig.
AFS-232 Gases 1/2˝ NPT Conduit Brass Brass Required Filtration: 50 microns or better.
AFS-252 Gases 1/2˝ NPT Conduit 316SS 316SS Weight: 2 lb, 11 oz (1.22 kg).

Series
TFS Thermal Flow Switch
Adjustable Setpoint, LED Flow Indication, NO or NC Output

1-9/16 1-61/64
[39.69] [49.61]

45˚

1/2 NPT
Ø55/64
[21.83]
Ø2-23/64 3/4
[59.93] Ø1-31/32
[19.05] [50.0]

The Series TFS Flow Switch with adjustable setpoint offers precise SPECIFICATIONS setting.
flow monitoring of water-based fluids. Units have five selectable flow Service: Water-based fluids. Response Time: 2 to 10 seconds (rela-
Wetted Material: 303 SS. tive to range setting).
range settings from 0.2 m/s (0.66 ft/s) to 3.0 m/s (9.8 ft/s). Flow is in- Measuring Ranges: 0.2 m/s Supply Voltage: 18 to 30 VDC,
dicated as a percentage of the flow range on a string of LEDs. The set- (0.66 ft/s), 0.4 m/s (1.3 ft/s), 1.0 m/s including residual ripple.
point, adjustable from 15% to 90% of the flow range setting, is displayed (3.3 ft/s), 2.0 m/s (6.6 ft/s), and 3.0 m/s Switching Current: 400 mA
(9.8 ft/s). maximum.
as a flashing LED. Repeatability: Less than 2.0%. Power Consumption: 1 watt
Linearity: Less than 5%. (approximate).
MODELS Hysteresis: 10% (approximate). Electrical Connection: Plug-in
Model Number Switching Output Temperature Limits: -4 to 176°F 78˝ (198 cm) oilflex cable (included).
(-20 to 80°C). Process Connection: 1⁄2˝-14 male
TFS10 PNP, normally open Pressure Limits: 435 psi (30.0 bar). NPT.
Housing Material: Glass fiber reinforced Weight: 0.66 Ib (301 g).
TFS11 PNP, normally closed PBTP (Ultradur), meets IP65. Agency Approvals: CE.
Setpoint Range: 15% to 90% of range

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 212
pg213 7/21/06 2:43 PM Page 1

Series
TSP Liquid Flow Controller
NO or NC Relay Output, Adjustable Time Delay ®
Flow

2-13/16
[71.44]

Model DIM “A” DIM “B” DIM “C”

TSP110 6.5" (16.5 cm) 1.3" (3.3 cm) .7" (1.8 cm)
3-29/32 "C"
TSP210 6.5" (16.5 cm 1.3" (3.3 cm .7" (1.8 cm)
TSP120 7.9" (20 cm) 2.8" (7 cm) 2.1" (5.3 cm) [99.22] "B"
TSP220 7.9" (20 cm) 2.8" (7 cm) 2.1" (5.3 cm) "A"
TSP110S 8.3" (21 cm) 1.3" (3.3 cm .7" (1.8 cm)
TSP210S 8.3" (21 cm) 1.3" (3.3 cm .7" (1.8 cm)
TSP120S 9.8" (25 cm) 2.8" (7 cm) 2.1" (5.3 cm) 2-13/16
TSP220S 9.8" (25 cm) 2.8" (7 cm) 2.1" (5.3 cm) [71.44]

3-29/32 "C"
[99.22] "B"
"A"

Protect pumps and valves from dry running with the Series TSP Liquid SPECIFICATIONS imum.
Flow Controller. The Series TSP combine a liquid flow switch with a failsafe Service: Compatible liquids. Sensor Voltage Supply: 13 VDC, 1
relay controller to detect a flow or no flow situation and provides switching Wetted Materials: Polypropylene/PPS Watt max., nominal.
or Polyvinylidene Fluoride. Sensor Trigger Point: Dry <10 mA,
for direct actuation of pumps and valves. Controller features adjustable time wet >10 mA.
delay, selectable NO or NC operation, and LED indication of sensor, relay, Temperature Limits: -40 to 158°F
(-40 to 70°C). Time Delay: Adjustable, 0.15 to 60
and power status. Four models (TSP1105, TSP2105, TSP1205, TSP2205) Pressure Limits: 150 psi (10 bar) @ seconds.
are designed with an integral flash alarm to provide immediate indication 77°F (25°C), derated 1.67 psi (.113 bar) Flash Type: *Xenon tube.
of local alarm conditions. per °C above 25°C. Flash Frequency: *1 per second.
Relay Output: 1 SPDT Form C, isolated Brightness: *>50,000 CP.
MODELS and sealed. Strobe Life: *10 M cycles.
Model Wetted Relay Load: 250 VAC, 10 A resistive, Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ NPT.
Number Flash Alarm Parts Sensor Length 1/2 hp. Mounting Connection: 3/4˝ NPT.
Switching Mode: Selectable NO or Enclosure: Polypropylene, flame retar-
TSP110 No PP Short
NC. dant, probe NEMA 4X (IP65).
TSP210 No PVDF Short
Supply Voltage: 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Agency Approvals: CSA, CE.
TSP120 No PP Long
TSP220 No PVDF Long Hz, selectable.
TSP110S Yes PP Short Current Consumption: .25 amps max-
TSP210S Yes PVDF Short
TSP120S Yes PP Long
TSP220S Yes PVDF Long *Applies to models with flash alarm only.

Series
TDS Thermal Dispersion Flow Switch
Adjustable Switch Point, LED Indication
3/4 NPT

Ø1-1/16 Ø45/64
[26.99] [17.86]

"B"
Dim. TDS112,TDS212 TDS122, TDS222 "A"
A 3.0˝ (7.6 cm) 4.5˝ (11.4 cm)
B 0.7˝ (1.8 cm) 2.1˝ (5.3 cm)

The Series TDS Thermal Dispersion Flow Switch offers solid SPECIFICATIONS Process Connections: 3/4˝ male
state flow detection of non-coating liquids for pump and process protec- Service: Liquids. NPT.
Wetted Materials: Polypropylene Mounting Orientation: Any orien-
tion. SPDT output allows for interfacing with remote PLC or relay con- tation, for pipe sizes 3/4˝ to 1-1/2˝
trol device. The adjustable switch point is factory calibrated at 0.2 fps /PPS or Polyvinylidene Fluoride.
Range: 0.04 to 10 fps use 3.0˝ (7.6 cm) length switch; for
with LED indication of flow and calibration status. Units feature selec- (1.2X10-2 to 3.05 m/s) 2˝ to 16˝ pipe sizes use 4.5˝ (11.4
table NO or NC operation and are not damaged by overranging flow veloc- Temperature Limits: 32 to 140°F cm) length switch.
(0 to 60°C). Setpoint Adjustment: 0.04 to 3
ities. fps (1.2X10-2 to .91 m/s).
Pressure Limits: 150 psi
MODELS (10 bar) @ 25°C, derated @ 1.667 Setpoint Drift: 0.5% of setpoint.
psi (.113 bar) per °C above 25°C. Response Time: 1-10 seconds.
Model Wetted Repeatability: ±5% of setpoint. Viscosity Range: 1 to 200 cen-
Length tipoise.
Number Parts Switch Type: SPDT.
TDS112 PP/PPS 3.0˝ (7.6 cm) Electrical Rating: 60 VAC/60 Supply Voltage: 12 to 36 VDC.
TDS212 PVDF 3.0˝ (7.6 cm) VDC @ 1 A. Consumption: 50 mA (nominal).
Electrical Connections: 22 AWG Indication: LED for flow status.
TDS122 PP/PPS 4.5˝ (11.4 cm) Weight: 3 oz (94 g).
3-wire, 10 ft (3 m) length.
TDS222 PVDF 4.5˝ (11.4 cm) Agency Approvals: CE.

213 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg214 7/21/06 2:44 PM Page 1

Series
TDC Remote Flow Controller
Single or Dual Relay Output, Adjustable Time Delay ®

Flow
3-29/32 [99.21]

2-13/16 1-13/16
[71.44] [46.04]

3-7/64 [78.98]
3-45/64 [94.06]

Series TDC Remote Flow Controller coupled with a ther- SPECIFICATIONS

mal dispersion flow switch (Series TDS) provides a complete Relay Output: TDC1: 1 SPDT Form C, TDC2: 2 SPDT
system for leak detection, signaling high or low flow conditions, Form C (one latching relay).
low flow cutoff, and pump or valve actuation. Controller fea- Relay Load: 240 VAC, 12 A resistive, 1/2 hp.
tures adjustable time delay for dampening of relay chatter, Switching Mode: Field selectable NO or NC.
selectable NO or NC operation, and LED indication of sensor, Supply Voltage: 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz., selectable.
relay, and power status. Model TDC1 accepts single switch Current Consumption: .25 amps maximum.
input and single relay output. Model TDC2 accepts three switch Time Delay: Adjustable, 0.15 to 60 seconds.
inputs and two relay outputs. Sensor Voltage Supply: 13.5 VDC, 100 mA max., nomi-
nal.
Sensor Trigger Point: Dry <12mA, wet >12 mA.
Sensor Input: Terminal block.
MODELS Mounting: EN 50 022 standard 32 mm DIN or panel
Model
Number Description mount.
TDC1 Single Point Flow Controller Enclosure: Polypropylene, flame retardant.
Temperature Limits: -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C).
TDC2 Dual Point Flow Controller
Agency Approvals: CSA, CE.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 214
pg215 7/21/06 3:47 PM Page 1

Air Velocity
Table of Contents
Meters/Thermo-Anemometers/Pitot Tubes pgs 220-236
Air Velocity Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216-218

Air Velocity Flow Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

Air Velocity

Series 400 Air Velocity Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

Series 100 AV Durablock® Air Velocity Gage Kits . . . . . . . . .221

Mark II Molded Plastic Air Velocity Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

Series 160 Stainless Steel Pitot Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Series 160E Ellipsoidal Tip Pitot Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

Series 160S “S” Type Stainless Steel Pitot Tubes . . . . . . . .224

Model 166T Telescoping Stainless Steel Pitot Tube . . . . . . .224

Series AFG Averaging Flow Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

Series SSS-1000 Lightweight Averaging Flow Sensor . . . . .226 Air Velocity Kits pg 233
Series FLST Duct Mounted Airflow Measurement

Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227-228

Series DS In-Line Flow Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229-230

Series PE Orifice Plate Flow Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231-232

Model 475-1-FM-AV Air Velocity Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

Model 475-1T-FM-AV Air Velocity Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

Model 477-1T-FM-AV Air Velocity Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

Series 471 Digital Thermo-Anemometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

Model VT140 Vane Thermo-Anemometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

Model VT120 Integral Vane Thermo-Anemometer . . . . . . . .235

Series MVT Mini-Vane Thermo-Anemometer . . . . . . . . . . . .236

Model VT-200 Vane Thermo-Anemometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Transmitters pgs 237-242

Series 641 Air Velocity Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

Series 641RM Air Velocity Transmitter with Cable . . . . . . . .238

Series 641B Air Velocity Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239

Series AVU Air Velocity Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

Series PF Precision Flow™ Air Velocity Transmitter . . . . . . .241

Series PFS Smart Air Velocity Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

Model AFH Electronic Balometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

No. 480 VaneometerTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

No. 460 Air Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

Model 660 Air Velocity Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

Wind Speed Indicator/Portable Wind Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

Technical Reference Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245

215 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg216 7/21/06 3:48 PM Page 1

Air Velocity Measurement

Introduction
In air conditioning, heating and ventilating work, it is helpful to un-

Air Velocity
derstand the techniques used to determine air velocity. In this field,
air velocity (distance traveled per unit of time) is usually expressed
in feet per minute (FPM). By multiplying air velocity by the cross sec-
tion area of a duct, you can determine the air volume flowing past a
point in the duct per unit of time. Volume flow is usually measured in ®
cubic feet per minute (CFM) . STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR

Velocity or volume measurements can often be used with engineer-

ing handbook or design information to reveal proper or improper
performance of an airflow system. The same principles used to de-
termine velocity are also valuable in working with pneumatic con-
veying, flue gas flow and process gas systems. However, in these
fields the common units of velocity and volume are sometimes dif- Fig. 1-B shows the Dwyer® No. A-308 Static Pressure Fitting. De-
ferent from those used in air conditioning work. signed for simplified installation, it is easy to install, inexpensive, and
provides accurate static pressure sensing in smooth air at velocities up
To move air, fans or blowers are usually used. They work by imparting to 1500 FPM.
motion and pressure to the air with either a screw propeller or paddle
wheel action. When force or pressure from the fan blades causes the air Fig. 1-C shows a simple tube through the wall. Limitations of this type
to move, the moving air acquires a force or pressure component in its are similar to wall type Fig. 1-A.
direction of motion due to its weight and inertia. Because of this, a flag
or streamer will stand out in the air stream. This force is called veloci- Fig. 1-D shows a static pressure tip which is ideal for applications such
ty pressure. It is measured in inches of water column (w.c.) or water as sensing the static pressure drop across industrial air filters and re-
gage (w.g.). In operating duct systems, a second pressure is always pre- frigerant coils. Here the probability of air turbulence requires that
sent. It is independent of air velocity or movement. Known as static the pressure sensing openings be located away from the duct walls to
pressure, it acts equally in all directions. In air conditioning work, this minimize impingement and aspiration and thus insure accurate read-
pressure is also measured in inches w.c. ings. For a permanent installation of this type, the Dwyer® No. A-301 or
A-302 Static Pressure Tip is used. It senses static pressure through ra-
In pressure or supply systems, static pressure will be positive on the dially-drilled holes near the tip and can be used in air flow velocities up
discharge side of the fan. In exhaust systems, a negative static pres- to 12,000 FPM.
sure will exist on the inlet side of the fan. When a fan is installed
midway between the inlet and discharge of a duct system, it is normal Fig. 1-E shows a Dwyer® No. A-305 low resistance Static Pressure Tip.
to have a negative static pressure at the fan inlet and positive static It is designed for use in dust-laden air and for rapid response applica-
pressure at its discharge. tions. It is recommended where a very low actuation pressure is re-
quired for a pressure switch or indicating gage — or where response
Total pressure is the combination of static and velocity pressures, time is critical.
and is expressed in the same units. It is an important and useful con-
cept to use because it is easy to determine and, although velocity pres- Under field conditions, air turbulence in a duct or plenum often makes
sure is not easy to measure directly, it can be determined easily by it impossible to quickly install and align a rigid static pressure sensor
subtracting static pressure from total pressure. This subtraction need to take accurate readings. Under these circumstances, the Dwyer®
not be done mathematically. It can be done automatically with the in- Trail-Tail® Static Pressure Sensor (Fig. 1-F),can be quickly inserted
strument hook-up. through a small hole in the duct and will trail into automatic alignment
with the air stream. The pressure sensing holes in this device are thus
Sensing Static Pressure presented at a 90° angle to actual air flow assuring quick, consistent, ac-
For most industrial and scientific applications, the only air measure- curate readings.
ments needed are those of static pressure, total pressure and temper-
ature. With these, air velocity and volume can be quickly calculated. Measuring Total Pressure and Velocity Pressure
In sensing static pressure we make every effort to eliminate the effect of
To sense static pressure, six types of devices are commonly used. air movement. To determine velocity pressure, it is necessary to deter-
These are connected with tubing to a pressure indicating instrument. mine these effects fully and accurately. This is usually done with an im-
Fig. 1-A shows a simple thru-wall static pressure tap. This is a sharp, pact tube which faces directly into the air stream. This type of sensor is
burr-free opening through a duct wall provided with a tubing connec- frequently called a “total pressure pick-up” since it receives the effects of
tion of some sort on the outside. The axis of the tap or opening must both static pressure and velocity pressure.
be perpendicular to the direction of flow. This type of tap or sensor is
used where air flow is relatively slow, smooth and without turbulence.
If turbulence exists, impingement, aspiration or unequal distribution
of moving air at the opening can reduce the accuracy of readings sig-
nificantly.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 216
pg217 7/21/06 3:49 PM Page 1

Because accurate readings cannot be taken in a turbulent air

stream, the Pitot tube should be inserted at least 81⁄2 duct diameters
downstream from elbows, bends or other obstructions which cause
turbulence. To ensure the most precise measurements, straighten-
ing vanes should be located 5 duct diameters upstream from the
Pitot tube.

How to Take Traverse Readings

Air Velocity

In practical situations, the velocity of the air stream is not uniform

across the cross section of a duct. Friction slows the air moving
In Figure 2, note that separate static connections (A) and total close to the walls, so the velocity is greater in the center of the duct.
pressure connections (B) can be connected simultaneously across a
manometer (C). Since the static pressure is applied to both sides of To obtain the average total velocity in ducts of 4" diameter or larg-
the manometer, its effect is cancelled out and the manometer indi- er, a series of velocity pressure readings must be taken at points of
cates only the velocity pressure. equal area. A formal pattern of sensing points across the duct cross
section is recommended. These are known as traverse readings.
To translate velocity pressure into actual velocity requires either Figure 4 shows recommended Pitot tube locations for traversing
mathematical calculation, reference to charts or curves, or prior round and rectangular ducts.
calibration of the manometer to directly show velocity. In practice
this type of measurement is usually made with a Pitot tube which
incorporates both static and total pressure sensors in a single unit.

Essentially, a Pitot tube consists of an impact tube (which receives

total pressure input) fastened concentrically inside a second tube of
slightly larger diameter which receives static pressure input from
radial sensing holes around the tip. The air space between the
inner and outer tubes permits transfer of pressure from the sens-
ing holes to the static pressure connection at the opposite end of
the Pitot tube and then, through connecting tubing, to the low or
negative pressure side of a manometer. When the total pressure
tube is connected to the high pressure side of the manometer, ve-
locity pressure is indicated directly. See Figure 3.

In round ducts, velocity pressure readings should be taken at cen-

ters of equal concentric areas. At least 20 readings should be taken
along two diameters. In rectangular ducts, a minimum of 16 and a
maximum of 64 readings are taken at centers of equal rectangular
areas. Actual velocities for each area are calculated from individual
velocity pressure readings. This allows the readings and velocities
to be inspected for errors or inconsistencies. The velocities are
then averaged.

By taking Pitot tube readings with extreme care, air velocity can
be determined within an accuracy of ±2%. For maximum accuracy,
the following precautions should be observed:

Since the Pitot tube is a primary standard device used to calibrate 1. Duct diameter should be at least 30 times dia. of Pitot tube.
all other air velocity measuring devices, it is important that great 2. Locate the Pitot tube in a duct section providing 81⁄2 or more
care be taken in its design and fabrication. In modern Pitot tubes, duct diameters upstream and 5 or more diameters down
proper nose or tip design — along with sufficient distance between stream of Pitot tube free of elbows, size changes or obstruc-
nose, static pressure taps and stem — will minimize turbulence and tions.
interference. This allows use without correction or calibration fac- 3. Provide an egg-crate type of flow straightener 5 duct diameters
tors. All Dwyer® Pitot tubes are built to AMCA and ASHRAE stan- upstream of Pitot tube.
dards and have unity calibration factors to assure accuracy. 4. Make a complete, accurate traverse.
To insure accurate velocity pressure readings, the Pitot tube tip
must be pointed directly into (parallel with) the air stream. As the In small ducts or where traverse operations are otherwise impos-
Pitot tube tip is parallel with the static pressure outlet tube, the lat- sible, an accuracy of ±5% can frequently be achieved by placing
ter can be used as a pointer to align the tip properly. When the Pitot Pitot tube in center of duct. Determine velocity from the reading,
tube is correctly aligned, the pressure indication will be maximum. then multiply by 0.9 for an approximate average.

217 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg218 7/21/06 3:50 PM Page 1

Calculating air velocity from velocity pressure

Manometers for use with a Pitot tube are offered in a choice of two
scale types. Some are made specifically for air velocity measure-
ment and are calibrated directly in feet per minute. They are cor-
rect for standard air conditions: i.e. air density of .075 lbs. per
cubic foot which corresponds to dry air at 70°F, barometric pres-
sure of 29.92 inches Hg. To correct the velocity reading for other
than standard air conditions, the actual air density must be known.
It may be calculated if relative humidity, temperature and baro-
metric pressure are known.

Air Velocity
Most manometer scales are calibrated in inches of water. Using
readings from such an instrument, the air velocity may be calcu-
lated using the basic formula:

V=1096.7 =
{
hv =4004.4 = hv for .075 lb/ft3 dry air
d @ 70°F, 29.92 in. Hg Baro.
} drop of .50 inches w.c. would indicate a flow of 2,000 c.f.m.

Where: V = Velocity in feet per minute. For example, assuming a manufacturer’s specification for a filter,
hv = Velocity pressure in inches of water. coil, etc:
d = Density of air in pounds per cubic foot.
To determine dry air density, use the formula: Given Flow Q (ft3/min.) = at differential “h”
P
B (inches w.c.)
d=1.325 T
To determine flow at other differentials the formula is:
Where: d = Air density in pounds per cubic foot.
P
{
B = Barometric (or absolute) static pressure } Qn (other flows) = Q =
hn
h
in inches of mercury.
T = Absolute temperature (indicated temperature in
°F plus 460°). Where: Q = Quantity of flow in cubic feet per minute
h= differential in inches water column
With dry air at 29.9 inches mercury, air velocity can be read di- hn = differential (other flow conditions)
rectly from curves on the following page. For partially or fully sat-
urated air a further correction is required. To save time when
converting velocity pressure into air velocity, the Dwyer® Air Ve- Other Devices for Measuring Air Velocity
locity Calculator may be used. A simple slide rule, it provides for all
the factors needed to calculate air velocity quickly and accurately. A wide variety of devices are commercially available for measuring
It is included as an accessory with each Dwyer® Pitot tube. air velocities. These include hot wire anemometers for low air ve-
locities, rotating and swinging vane anemometers and variable
To use the Dwyer® Calculator: area flowmeters.
1. Set relative humidity on scale provided. On scale opposite
known dry bulb temperature, read correction factor. The Dwyer® No. 460 Air Meter is one of the most popular and eco-
2. Set temperature under barometric pressure scale. Read density nomical variable area flowmeter type anemometers. Quick and
of air over correction factor established in 1 (above) . easy to use, it is a portable instrument calibrated to provide a di-
3. On the other side of calculator, set air density reading just rect reading of air velocity.
obtained on the scale provided.
4. Under Pitot tube reading (velocity pressure, inches of water) A second scale is provided on the other side of the meter to read
read air velocity, feet per minute. static pressure in inches w.c. The 460 Air Meter is widely used to
determine air velocity and flow in ducts, and from supply and re-
Determining Volume Flow turn grilles and diffusers. Two scale ranges are provided (high and
Once the average air velocity is known, the air flow rate in cubic low) with calibrations in both f.p.m. and inches w.c.
feet per minute is easily computed using the formula:
Q= AV To Check Accuracy
Where: Q= Quantity of flow in cubic feet per minute. Use only devices of certified accuracy. All anemometers and to a
A=Cross sectional area of duct in square feet. lesser extent portable manometers should be checked regularly
V=Average velocity in feet per minute. against a primary standard such as a hook gage or high quality mi-
cromanometer. If in doubt return your Dwyer® instrument to the
Determining Air Volume by Calibrated Resis- factory for a complete calibration check at no charge.
tance
Manufacturers of air filters, cooling and condenser coils and similar
equipment often publish data from which approximate air flow can
be determined. It is characteristic of such equipment to cause a
pressure drop which varies proportionately to the square of the
flow rate. Figure 5 shows a typical filter and a curve for air flow ver-
sus resistance. Since it is plotted on logarithmic paper, it appears as
a straight line. On this curve, a clean filter which causes a pressure

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 218
pg219 7/21/06 3:51 PM Page 1

AIR VELOCITY FLOW CHARTS

Air Velocity

AIR VELOCITY IN FEET PER MINUTE

GAGE READING WITH PITOT TUBE (VELOCITY PRESSURE) IN INCHES OF WATER

AIR VELOCITY IN FEET PER MINUTE

GAGE READING WITH PITOT TUBE (VELOCITY PRESSURE) IN INCHES OF WATER

219 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg220 7/21/06 3:55 PM Page 1

Series
400 Air Velocity Meters
Kit includes No. 400 Air Meter and all accessories:
Combination Inclined/Vertical Manometer — 3 models (see table).
Dwyer® Durablock® precision machined solid acrylic plastic construc-
tion is virtually indestructible. Has both inclined section for high ac-
curacy and vertical section for extended range. Pressure marked in
black, Velocity in red figures. Easy to read — no reference tables need-

Air Velocity
ed. Has screw leveling adjustment and ground glass bubble level.

MODELS
Series 400 Air Velocity Meters with Combination Inclined/Vertical Scales
Rated for total pressures to 100 psig (6.89 bar); temperatures to 150°F (65°C)
Minor Div.; Range, in. w.c.
Model Range Velocity Inclined Vertical Pitot
Number in. w.c. FPM Scale Scale Tube
400-5-S-Kit 0-5 400-9000 .01, 0-1.0 .10, 1-5 8 in.
400-5-L-Kit 0-5 400-9000 .01, 0-1.0 .10, 1-5 18 in.
400-5-gage 0-5 400-9000 .01, 0-1.0 .10, 1-5 none
400-10-Kit 0-10 400-12,600 .01, 0-1.0 .10, 1-10 18 in.
400-10-gage 0-10 400-12,600 .01, 0-1.0 .10, 1-10 none
400-23-Kit 0-23 400-19,200 .02, 0-2.3 .20, 2.3-23 18 in.
400-23-gage 0-23 400-19,200 .02, 0-2.3 .20, 2.3-23 none

Accessories:
Stainless Steel Calibrated Pitot Tube — (18" Model 160-18 standard,
other lengths available — see price list). Graduated both sides in inch-
es to show insertion depth for easy accurate duct traverse. Clean, burr-
free static holes. Suitable for temperatures up to 1500°F.
Rubber Tubing with Connectors — Two coils of 3⁄16" with metal terminal
tubes.
Magneclip side mountings. Attach meter instantly to steel duct or sur-
face.
Red Gage Oil—Spare bottle. For occasional refilling. Supply sufficient
for several years of normal use. (Blue Gage Oil furnished with Model
400-23).
Instruction Card — Easy to read and understand. Plastic laminated,
wipes clean.
Dwyer® Air Velocity Calculator — Slide rule eliminates tedious calcula-
tions — easily compensates for temperature, humidity and barometric
pressure variations.
Steel Carrying Case — Professional quality. Welded seams, enamel fin-
ish. Hinged top locks with hasps. Foam plastic lined and fitted to pro-
tect meter and accessories. Size* 111⁄2"H x 201⁄4"W x 11⁄2"D. Only 131⁄4 lbs.
with equipment .
*No. 400-5-S is 11 x 111⁄2 x 21⁄2". Contact factory
for extra long steel cases for use with longer
Model No. 400-10 Air Velocity Meter Pitot tubes.

Measure both pressure and air velocity

Read the red figures directly in feet per minute of velocity —
from 400 to 10,000 f.p.m. No conversion tables needed for
air at standard conditions. Read the black figures in inches
of water column air pressure — from 0 to 10" w.c.

Our most popular precision air velocity instrument, the No. 400 is
used to balance air conditioning systems, measure pressure drop
across filters, and test fan and blower discharge and inlet pres-
sures, as well as air velocity in ducts. It offers the convenience of a Complete Kit, Model 400-10
dual purpose instrument — plus high accuracy on easy-to-read
scales. A versatile, all around manometer for the air conditioning Left — Model No. 400-5 Air
and balancing contractor or industrial plant. Meter, 0-5" W.C., 400-9000
f.p.m.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 220
pg221 7/21/06 3:57 PM Page 1

®
Series
100 AV Durablock Air Velocity Gage Kits
Suitable for Total Pressures to 100 psig (6.89 bar), Temperatures to 150°F (65.6°C)
Complete Air Velocity Kits include:
Dwyer® Inclined Manometer described below, stainless steel Pitot
tube (12" with Models 102-AV & 115-AV, 24" with Model 125-AV and
telescoping 36" with Model 115T-AV), two 9' lengths of rubber tubing
with connectors, extra red gage oil, instruction card H-7, Bulletin H-
Air Velocity

11, magnetic mounting clips (see bottom of page), air velocity calcula-
tor slide rule and carrying case (plastic with models 102-AV, 115-AV
and 115T-AV, steel with model 125-AV).

MODELS
Range, Velocity, Minor Dimensions,
Model Inches of Feet per Scale Scale In Inches Pitot Tube
No. Water Minute Divisions Length A B Model–Length
102-AV .20-0-2.0 400-5500 .02 81⁄4 in. 111⁄2 45⁄16 166-12 12 in.
115-AV .05-0-.25 400-2000 .005 6 in. 91⁄2 31⁄16 166-12 12 in.
115T-AV .05-0-.25 400-2000 .005 6 in. 91⁄2 31⁄16 166T 36 in.
Complete Kit, Model 115-AV 125-AV 0-1.0 300-4000 .005 20 in. 233⁄4 4 160-24 24 in.

Designed to measure air velocity, static pressure, vacuum or differen- Model Carrying Case
tial pressure, where the additional range of the 400 Series gages is not No. Dimensions
required. Series 100 Gages offer superb accuracy combined with 102-AV 131⁄2 X10 X 21⁄2
portability. In Dwyer’s® Durablock® precision machined solid acrylic 115-AV 131⁄2 X10 X 21⁄2
115T-AV 131⁄2 X10 X 21⁄2
plastic construction, the wells and inclined bore are machined to toler- 125-AV 9 X 26 X 15⁄8
ances of ±.0002".
Model No. 115-AV Model No. 102-AV
Design and service features:
Plastic Body — A 1" thick solid acrylic block, virtually unbreakable.
It is stable and free of the danger of distortion.
Drilled Bore — Permanently free of bends — never requires recali-
bration due to distortion.
Reflective Chrome Finish Scales — Easily eliminate parallax er-
rors in reading. Adjustable, with thumbscrew locking for easy zeroing.
(Model 125 AV uses screw plunger to adjust zero setting).
Red Gage Oil — .826 specific gravity. Forms a well-shaped, easy-to-
read meniscus — the result of high wetability.
Leveling Adjustment — Screw allows quick, accurate leveling. Inte-
Model No. 125-AV
gral ground glass bubble level provides ready reference.

Standard Equipment for Dwyer Solid Plastic Portable Manometers

Magneclips for Instant Mounting on Any Steel Surface — These Dwyer® Air Velocity Calculator — Slide rule easily calculates air velocity and
mounting magnets are supplied as part of each Dwyer® Durablock® solid compensates for temperature and pressure variations. Shows velocity pres-
plastic portable gage. Just touch magnets to any vertical steel surface — sure from .01" to 10" water column, velocities from 400 to 20,000 f.p.m., etc.
gage “stays put” until manually detached. Furnished as a standard accessory with all Dwyer® Durablock® solid plastic air
velocity gages.
Molded Nylon Rapid Shut-Off Tubing Connectors — An exclusive
Dwyer Instruments, Inc. feature. Leakproof, corrosion-proof, virtually un- Foam-Lined Carrying Cases — Most Dwyer® portable air velocity gages
breakable. Requires just one turn to open or close. O-rings prevent leaks are furnished with cases of high density polyethylene. Model No. 125-AV has
and provide positive shut-off. Body is easily removed to add fluid or to clean. a steel case. Cases have a resilient polyurethane plastic foam lining to pro-
tect and cushion gage and accessories.

221 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg222 7/21/06 3:58 PM Page 1

Mark II
Molded Plastic Air Velocity Meters
Low in Cost – Direct Reading Scales Offer 3% Accuracy –
For Portable or Stationary Applications

Air Velocity
MODEL 27 MODEL 40-AV – Shown with standard swing-out stand and
leveling screw installed.

Construction and installation features: MODELS

Construction is simple with virtually indestructible molded white Model Number Range
styrene-acrylonitrile housing, indicating tube and fluid wells, molded 0-7,000 fpm
Mark II 27
ABS knobs and zero adjust plunger, shock mounted glass level vial and 0-10,500 fpm
Mark II 28
leak proof “O”ring seals. Scales are lithograph printed on aluminum
Mark II 40-1-AV 0-4,200 fpm
and epoxy coated.
Mark II 41-2-AV 0-6,300 fpm
For stationary applications, the Mark II air velocity meters can be eas- Mark II 40-250 Pa-AV 0-21 mps
ily mounted on any vertical surface with the two screws provided. A
Pitot tube not included with models above.
built in spirit level simplifies leveling.
Just fill the reservoir, adjust fluid level to zero, connect the pitot tube, Accessories
and it is ready for operation. For portable applications, the Model A-612 A-612 Portable Stand (27,28)
portable stand is available for Models 27 and 28.
A molded plastic swing-out stand and leveling screw for user installa-
tion are provided with Models 40-1-AV and 41-2-AV which also feature
rapid shutoff tubing connectors and built-in over pressure traps.
Additional standard accessories include plastic connection tubing,
mounting screws, 3⁄4 oz. bottle of indicating fluid and instructions. Met-
ric ranges are also available.
OEM Specials — All models of the Dwyer® Mark II molded plastic air
velocity meters can be supplied with your logo or special scale in OEM
quantities. Consult factory for details.
See also our Digital Manometers and Pitot tubes.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 222
pg223 7/21/06 3:59 PM Page 1

Series
160 Stainless Steel Pitot Tubes
ASME Design Meets AMCA and ASHRAE Codes
8, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 OR 60˝ 1/2 [12.70]
TOTAL PRESSURE
CONNECTION
Ø5/16 [7.94] Ø1/4 [6.350]
3-5/8
5
[92.08]
[127.00]
160 Series
Air Velocity

Ø1/4 [6.35]
STATIC PRESSURE
(8) Ø.040 [1.02] STATIC PRESSURE
HOLES EQUALLY SPACED CONNECTION
2-1/2
Standard Model 160 Pitot Tube [63.5]

Ideal for use with our precision manometers and air velocity gages, TOTAL PRESSURE
Ø1/8 [3.18] HOLE
Dwyer® Pitot Tubes are constructed from corrosion resistant stainless
steel for a lifetime of service. ASME design meets AMCA and 1
[25.40]
ASHRAE specifications for maximum accuracy over a wide variety of 96, 120, 168 OR 216˝ 1/2 [12.70]
flow conditions. No correction factors required as ASHRAE tip design TOTAL PRESSURE
CONNECTION
yields a calibration factor of 1. ASHRAE design needs no calibration! Ø1/4 [6.350]
Ø3/4 [Ø19.05] FOR 96 OR 120˝
Permanent, stamped insertion depth graduations on sides of 160 se- Ø1 [Ø25.4] FOR 168 OR 216˝ 3-5/8
5
[92.08] 160 Series
ries facilitate accurate positioning. Static pressure port is parallel to [127.00]
Longer
sensing tube allowing quick, easy alignment of tube with air flow. Low
Ø1/4 [6.35 Models with
sensitivity to misalignment gives accurate reading even when tube is STATIC PRESSURE
STATIC PRESSURE
(8) Ø.040 [1.02] Stiffener
misaligned up to 15 degrees. Various standard sizes are available for 2-1/2 HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
CONNECTION
[63.5]
use in ducts as small as 4" dia. or as large as 36 ft. dia. A universal
TOTAL PRESSURE
model fits user supplied 3⁄4" schedule 40 (standard) pipe in any length. Ø1/8 [3.18] HOLE
Several convenient mounting options are available for permanent in-
stallations. 36-5/8 [930.28] 3 [76.20] STATIC PRESSURE CONNECTION
1/4 COMPRESSION FITTING
• No calibration needed.
TOTAL PRESSURE
• Precisely located, burr-free static pressure holes. 6 [152.4] CONNECTION
• Hemispherical tip design, best for accuracy if imperfectly Ø5/16
1/2 NPT 3/4 SCHEDULE 40 PIPE 1/4 COMPRESSION
5 SUPPLIED BY CUSTOMER FITTING
aligned and nearly impossible to damage. [127.00] [Ø7.94] 3/4-12 REDUCING COUPLING
• Long lasting 304 SS construction. SUPPLIED BY CUSTOMER Model 160-U
NOTE:
• Silver soldered connections for leak-proof operation. STATIC PRESSURE
CUSTOMER MUST SUPPLY 1/4 TUBING IN APPROPRIATE
(8) Ø.040 [Ø1.02]
• Coefficient of “1.” 2-1/2 HOLES EQUALLY SPACED LENGTHS TO THE STATIC AND TOTAL PRESSURE CONNECTIONS.
• 5/16" models rated to 1500°F. [53.5] TUBING AND CONNECTIONS WILL FIT INSIDE STANDARD
SCHEDULE 40 PIPE.
• Extended static connection helps guide tip within recommended 15° TOTAL PRESSURE
Ø 1/8 [Ø3.18] HOLE
of air flow direction.
• Inch graduations on sides of 160 series to quickly determine
1-1/2
exact insertion depth. [38.10]
6-1/2 OR 12-1/2 TOTAL PRESSURE
• Dwyer® Air Velocity Calculator, direct reading 1/2
CONNECTION
[12.70]
flow charts and instructions included.
• Use 1/8" models in ducts as small as 4", 5/16" models in Ø1/8 [3.18] Ø1/4 [Ø6.35]
1/2 Ø1/8 [3.18]
ducts 10" or larger. MODEL 166 – 2 [50.8]
[12.70]
MODEL 167 – 1 [25.4] 2-1/2
• Optional mounting gland or split flange make 166/167 [63.50]
permanent installation fast and simple. STATIC PRESSURE Series 1/2
(8) Ø.020 [Ø.51] [12.70]
MODEL 166 – 1 [25.4] HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
Series 160 is designed to meet: MODEL 167 – 1/2 [12.7] Ø1/8 [Ø3/18]
• ASME “Fluid Meters” 6th Ed. TOTAL PRESSURE Ø1/4 [Ø6.35]
Ø3/64 [Ø1.19] HOLE STATIC PRESSURE
• ANSI/AMCA 210-99 CONNECTION
• ANSI/ASHRAE 51-1999 A-158 Split Flange
Mounting
• British Standard 1042 MODELS
ACCESSORIES A-159 Mounting Gland is used for Standard 5⁄16" Dia. Longer Length w/ Stiffener
No. A-158 Split Flange Mounting can be added to both duct mounting and flange Model Insertion Model Insertion
any Dwyer® No. 160 Standard Pitot Tube. Cadmium mounting. To flange mount, the Number Length Number Length
plated steel. Gasket is pattern for mounting holes. Se- A-159 must be used with the
cure flange loosely to tube, adjust tube depth and tight-
A-156 flange mounting plate. 160-8 8" 160-96 96"
en screws. Gasket of 1⁄16" Neoprene fits tightly around 160-12 12" 160-120 120"
tube and against duct for leak-proof seal. Nuts, wash-
160-18 18" 160-168 168"
ers included.
160-24 24" 160-216 216"
No. A-159 Mounting Gland — No. A-159 Mounting 160-36 36" Pocket Size 1⁄8" Dia.
Gland — Versatile adapter slips on any Series 160, 160-48 48" 166-6 6"
5/16˝ standard Pitot tube made after Dec. 1990. Two- 160-60 60"
part stainless steel fitting slides over tube and provides 166-12 12"
permanent, secure mounting. Where duct interior is ac- A-159 Duct A-156 Flange Universal Model for 3⁄4" Pipe 167-6 6"
cessible, use the washers and jam nut supplied. For Mounting Gland Mounting Plate 167-12 12"
with 1/2˝ male NPT with 1/2˝ female NPT 160-U *
blind applications or in thicker materials, use model A-
156 flange mounting plate. Once tube is adjusted to Accessories & Options
proper depth and angle, tighten smaller hex bushing to A-156 Flange Mounting Compression Fitting mounting option for
lock position. Graphite bushing inside assures leak- Plate 1/2˝ female NPT 166/167 Series. Add -CF suffix (166-6-CF).
proof seal even at higher temperatures. TFE bushing A-158 Split Flange Add to prices above
also available. NOTE: For full insertion with this fitting, A-159 Mounting Gland
order next longer Pitot tube. A-397 Step Drill
A-397 Step Drill *Universal model for permanent installation and connection to metal tubing. Make any length Pitot
No. A-397 Step Drill. For fast, convenient installation
tube with 3⁄4" schedule 40 pipe, 3⁄4" to 1⁄2" reducing bushing and 1⁄4" metal tubing.
of Pitot tubes in sheet metal ducts. No center punch
needed; automatic de-burring. Drills six sizes from 3⁄16"- See also: Ellipsoidals “S” Type Pitot Tubes - page 224
1
⁄2" in 1⁄16" increments.

223 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg224 7/21/06 4:00 PM Page 1

Series
160E Ellipsoidal Tip Pitot Tube
Designed to Meet British Standard 1042
• Ellipsoidal tip design for improved accuracy, 1.0 coefficient
• 304 SS construction adds strength, resists corrosion
• Adjustable depth indicators for fast, consistent traverses
• Alignment indicator helps keep tip parallel to flow
Series 160E Pitot Tubes are widely used in the U.K. and Europe for
applications demanding high accuracy when measuring the flow of air

Air Velocity
or other compatible gases. Precision crafted tip configuration allows air
to pass smoothly with minimum turbulence for consistent, reliable read-
ings. Exterior indicator arm is aligned parallel to the 5 in. (13 cm) sens- MODELS
ing tip so you always know that unit is properly positioned inside duct. Model Insertion
Sliding depth indicators grip firmly to ensure uniform insertion — crit- Number in Meters
ical when making multiple measurements as part of a complete tra- 160E-00 0.2
verse; the best way to determine average velocity. Total and static 160E-01 0.3
160E-02 0.48
pressure taps are 1⁄4" (6 mm), permanently silver soldered to the con- 160E-03 0.8
nection block, leak-proof and durable. Seven fixed length sizes are of- 160E-04 1.0
160E-05 1.22 Handy A-532 Slide Chart speeds air velocity
fered plus a universal model which attaches to any length of 3⁄4" sch. 40 160E-06 1.52 calculations. All plastic, stays clean for years.
pipe. See 160-U drawing. 160E-U Included with each Pitot tube.

Series
160S “S” Type Stainless Steel Pitot Tubes
Large, Open Tip Design Resists Fouling; Optional Permanent Mount Models
• Meets EPA specification 40 CFR (ch. 1)
• Long lasting, welded stainless steel construction
• 1⁄8" female NPT connections, permanently welded 160S-18
• Rated to 1500°F (815°C)
• 0.84 flow coefficient

Series 160S Pitot Tubes are designed specifically for flow mea-
surement of dirty, particulate laden air or gas streams typical in smoke 160S-18PM
stack and other environmental testing. Large 5⁄16" dia. stainless steel
tubing resists plugging under harsh, sooty conditions which quickly MODELS
block conventional flow sensors. Total and static pressure tubes are
Permanent Mounting
precisely aligned and welded together every six inches for maximum Model Perm. Mtg. Insertion
(PM) models include 1 inch
Number Model No. In Inches
accuracy, strength and long term durability. Versatile 1⁄8" female NPT dia. welded stainless steel
160S-18 160S-18PM 18
connections easily adapt to any type of pipe or tubing. A pair of 1⁄8" NPT 160S-24 160S-24PM 24 sleeve and adjustable com-
to 3⁄16" I.D. tubing adapters is included plus a handy molded vinyl cap to 160S-36 160S-36PM 36 pression fitting with 1 inch
protect tip when not in use. Supplied with complete instructions. 160S-48 160S-48PM 48 male NPT mounting treads.
160S-60 160S-60PM 60 Adjust depth, lock in place.
160S-72 160S-72PM 72

Model
166T Telescoping Stainless Steel Pitot Tube
Adjustable Design Extends Insertion Length to 36 Inches
The Model 166T Telescoping Pitot tube is a unique air flow sensor
which can quickly and easily be adjusted for any duct insertion length from
11.5 to 36 inches (29.2 to 91.4 cm). Now, this single compact unit can
replace up to five conventional fixed length Pitot tubes. For even greater
convenience, it is securely protected by a custom fitted polyethylene car-
rying case. Telescoping sections lock in place as they are extended,
enabling use of the handle grip to gauge proper alignment of the tip with-
in the airstream. Stainless steel construction resists corrosion.
Hemispherical tip has 1.0 flow coefficient, is 1/8˝ dia. (3.2 mm). Largest sec-
tion is 3/8˝ (9.5 mm). Weight (with case) 1 lb, 9 oz (709 g). Case: 12.5 3 6.25
3 1.75 in.

Model 166T

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 224
pg225 7/21/06 4:01 PM Page 1

Series
AFG Averaging Flow Grid
Cost Effective Air Flow Station for Ducts up to 60˝

SECTION A-A
1/64 SCALE 2:1
[.396] A
Air Velocity

5/32
1-1/16 2 [2.38]
ØA A [27] [51]

1-3/16
B [30.16]
1-11/16
[42.86]

The Series AFG Flow Grid is an outstandingly simple yet accu- SPECIFICATIONS
rate and cost effective alternative to other duct mounted pres- Service: Monitor air or compatible gas flow.
sure sensors. Once installed and connected to a suitable mea- Wetted Materials: 304 SS, PVC, Polyurethane, acetyl plas-
tics, and neoprene rubber.
suring instrument, the device will provide years of trouble free
Accuracy: ±5%.
monitoring of both air and gas flow. Installing the AFG Flow Grid Maximum Temperature: 176ºF (80ºC).
is quick and easy, the AFG is supplied in kit form to allow both Velocity Range: 295.2 ft/min to 5904 ft/min (1.5 to 30 m/sec).
workshop and on-site installation into a wide range of square and Diameter of Tubes: 5/16˝ (8 mm) or 5/8˝ (16 mm).
circular ducts up to approximately 60˝. Max Duct Diagonal: 60.4˝ (153.4 cm).
Max Duct Diameter: 59.4˝ (150.9 cm).
Process Connections: 5/16˝ barbed.
The AFG Flow Grid is a fundamental pressure-sensing device
Weight: AFG-1: 1 lb (454 g); AFG-2: 3 lb (1361 g).
designed to transmit a continuous differential pressure signal.
When this output is connected to a suitable measuring instru-
APPLICATIONS
ment (i.e. manometer, pressure transducer, etc.) it may be used The AFG Flow Grids will give useful and reliable readings in a wide
to determine air velocity and volume flow rate. variety of ‘in duct’ locations often where other flow rate measuring
devices are found to be unsatisfactory.

HOW THE AFG FLOW GRID WORKS The signal from an AFG Flow Grid can be used in a variety of ways,
for example:
The AFG Flow Gird consists of two tubes mounted diagonally
across a square or rectangular duct, or diametrically across a • To display differential pressure, velocity or volume flow using a micro
manometer, gage or transmitter.
round duct. The tubes are drilled with a series of equi-spaced
holes. • To give a warning of over or under flow rate using a pressure switch.

• To control air supply in a system by connecting the grid to a pres-

The holes in one tube face directly upstream and sense total pres- sure transmitter with an electrical output which can be used to feed
into a control system.
sure, while the pairs of holes in the second tube also face forward
• To display differential pressure on a simple fluid manometer to give
but at an included angle of 79 degrees, sensing static pressure. visual indication of changes in volume flow rate in the duct.

The total and (sub) static pressures are averaged along the length MODELS
of each tube and provide pressure signals at connectors outside Model Diameter Tube “A” Length “B”
the duct wall. The pressure differentials across these connectors AFG-1 5/16˝ (8 mm) 27˝ (688 mm)
AFG-2 5/8˝ (16 mm) 59-4/5˝ (1518 mm)
constitute the output signal.

225 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg226 7/21/06 4:04 PM Page 1

Series
SSS-1000 Lightweight Averaging Flow Sensor
Ideal for Sensing Fan Flow Rates
FOAM GASKET
1/4 THK
PUSH-ON [6.35 THK]
CONNECTIONS
FOR 3/8 OD
POLY TUBING
[9.53 OD]
3-1/2 2-3/4

Air Velocity
[88.90] [69.85]

1-1/4 A
[57.15]

The Series SSS-1000 Lightweight Flow Sensor is ideal for sensing SPECIFICATIONS
differential pressure in the inlet section of variable air volume terminal
units and fan terminal units. Units can also be used to sense differential Service: Air and compatible gases.
pressure at other locations in the main or branch duct systems.
Wetted Materials: ABS/Polycarbonate (UL94-5V).
The “H” port senses total pressure and the “L” port senses static pressure. Temperature Limits: Operating: 40 to 120°F (4 to 49°C);
The difference between these signals is the differential, or velocity pres-
sure. Storage: -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C).
Up to four sensing points and lengths of 3-5/32˝ to 9-29/32˝ (8.02 to 25.26 Connection: 1/4˝ (6 mm) I.D. tubing for 3/8˝ (10 mm) O.D.
cm) to accommodate box size diameters of 4" to 16" (10.16 to 40.64 cm) are
available. tubing.
Mounting Orientation: Integral flange with gasket.
APPLICATION
• Zone Control in HVAC Systems Weight: 1 oz (28 g).
MODELS
Model Length (Dimension A)
SSS-1002 3-5/32˝ (8.02 cm)
SSS-1003 5-13/32˝ (13.73 cm)
SSS-1004 7-21/32˝ (19.55 cm)
SSS-1005 9-29/32˝ (25.26 cm)

NEW! Technical Reference Books

HVAC Fundamentals HVAC Fundamentals HVAC Fundamentals
Volume 1: Volume 2: Volume 3:
Heating Systems, Furnaces, and Boilers Heating Systems Components, Gas and Air Conditioning, Heat Pumps, and
Oil Burners, and Automatic Controls Distribution Systems

Fourth Edition Fourth Edition Fourth Edition

By James E. By James E. By James E.
Brumbaugh, Brumbaugh, Brumbaugh,
2004 2004 2004

• Review the basics of installa- • Install and repair thermostats, • Learn to install and service
tion, wiring, and troubleshoot- humidistats, automatic controls, today’s popular electronic air
ing for different HVAC systems. and oil or gas burner controls. cleaners and filters.

• Compare the economy and • Review pipes, pipe fittings, pip- • Service less common heating
efficiency of various fuel types. ing details, valve installation, systems such as coal-fired fur-
and duct systems. naces.
• ISBN: 0764542060,
Pages: 698, Paperback • ISBN: 0764542079, • ISBN: 0764542087,
Pages: 655, Paperback Pages: 676, Paperback

Order Number: Order Number: Order Number:

BK-0005 BK-0006 BK-0007

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 226
pg227 7/21/06 4:04 PM Page 1

Series
FLST Duct Mounted Airflow Measurement Station
Rectangular, Oval or Circular Configurations
(F)

TOTAL PRESSURE
(T.P.) TAKEOFF

STATIC PRESSURE

AIRFLOW
(S.P.) TAKEOFF (D)
Air Velocity

DIMENSIONS
CIRCULAR FLANGE
TOTAL PRESSURE STATION FLANGE FLANGE CASING
(T.P.) TAKEOFF .25˝ RADIUS
BEADED EDGE (TYP) SIZE “D” THICKNESS SIZE “F” LENGTH “L”
8˝ - 15˝ .064˝ 1˝ 6˝
STATIC PRESSURE
(S.P.) TAKEOFF 16˝ - 44˝ .064˝ 1-1/2˝ 6˝
45˝ - 72˝ .188˝ 1-1/2˝ 10˝
73˝ & OVER .188˝ 2˝ 12˝
OVAL FLANGE
STATION FLANGE FLANGE CASING
(L)
WIDTH “W” THICKNESS SIZE LENGTH “L”
(L + 2.5˝)
UP TO 48˝ .064˝ 1-1/2˝ 6˝
(L=5˝) (W)
OVER 48˝ .188˝ 1-1/2˝ 8˝
(F)
RECTANGULAR FLANGE
STATION SIZE FLANGE
TOTAL PRESSURE
(T.P.) TAKEOFF “H” OR “W” SIZE “F”
AIRFLOW

(H) 8˝ - 72˝ 1-1/2˝

STATIC PRESSURE 73˝ & OVER 2˝
(S.P.) TAKEOFF

The Series FLST Airflow Measurement Station is easy to install SPECIFICATIONS

– simply connect the tubing to the station fittings, then to a differen- Accuracy: Within 2% of actual flow when installed in accordance
tial pressure manometer, gage, transmitter or switch. Single or mul- with published recommendations.
tiple airflow elements are factory mounted and pre-piped in a casing Velocity Range: 100 to 10,000 fpm (0.51-51 m/s).
designed for flanged connection to the ductwork. Standard materials Wetted Material: Elements 6063-T5 anodized aluminum; Casings
consist of a G90 galvanized casing and 6063-T5 anodized aluminum 16 ga G90 galvanized steel.
flow sensors, suitable for most HVAC applications. Coatings: Imron 333 polyurethane enamel.
The Series FLST utilizes an airflow averaging element in a head-type Temperature Limits: Galvanized Casings and Aluminum Elements
device, generating a differential (velocity) pressure signal similar to 350°F (177°C) continuous operation (in air) 400°F (204°C) intermit-
the orifice, venturi, and other head producing primary elements. tent operation (in air).
Strategically located sensing ports continually sample the total and sta- Humidity: All Airflow Stations 0 to 100% non condensing.
tic pressures when inserted normal to flow. Process Connections: 1/4˝ compression fittings.
Total pressures sensed by the upstream ports are continually averaged
within the airflow element in an isolated chamber. The static sensing
ports are averaged in a second isolation chamber. Multiple elements How To Order:
are joined together for connection to a differential measurement device
(gage, transmitter, etc.) for flow measurement and indication purpos- Rectangular or Oval Models
es.
FLST- x - Option
FEATURES
• Low signal-to-noise ratio. R - Rectangular IM - Internal
• Multiple total and static pressure sensing ports along the length of O - Oval Width (in) x Height (in) Pressure
the element. Connections
• Factory mounted and pre-piped in a flanged duct section (casing). F - Flange for Oval
• ±2% accuracy throughout velocity ranges of 100 fpm and Mount Station
over. Circular Models
• Standard construction includes galvanized casing and 6063-T5 FLST-C
anodized aluminum flow sensors.
• Standard airflow stations can be operated (in air) continuously in
temperatures up to 350°F or intermittently in temperatures up to Diameter (in)
400°F.
• All airflow stations can be operated in humidity ranges of 0 to
100%.
• Standard airflow stations have good salt air resistance and are
suitable for most HVAC applications.

227 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg228 7/26/06 11:27 AM Page 1

Series FLST Rectangular or Oval Models*

Size
(in) 8˝ 10˝ 12˝ 14˝ 16˝ 18˝ 20˝ 22˝ 24˝ 26˝ 28˝ 30˝ 32˝ 34˝ 36˝
8˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
10˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
12˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X
14˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X
16˝ X X X X X X X X X X X
18˝ X X X X X X X X X X
20˝ X X X X X X X X X
22˝ X X X X X X X X
24˝ X X X X X X X
26˝ X X X X X X
28˝ X X X X X

Air Velocity
30˝ X X X X
32˝ X X X
34˝ X X
36˝ X

Size
(in) 40˝ 44˝ 48˝ 52˝ 56˝ 60˝ 66˝ 72˝ 78˝ 84˝ 90˝ 96˝ 102˝ 108˝ 114˝ 120˝
8˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
10˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
12˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
14˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
16˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
18˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
20˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
22˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
24˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
26˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
28˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
30˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
32˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
34˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
36˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
40˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
44˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
48˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
52˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X X
56˝ X X X X X X X X X X X X
60˝ X X X X X X X X X X X
66˝ X X X X X X X X X X
72˝ X X X X X X X X X
78˝ X X X X X X X X
84˝ X X X X X X X
90˝ X X X X X X
96˝ X X X X X
102˝ X X X X
108˝ X X X
114˝ X X
120˝ X

Options
IM – Internal Pressure Connections
F – (Oval Stations Only)

Series FLST Circular Models*

Size (in) 8˝ 10˝ 12˝ 14˝ 16˝ 18˝ 20˝ 22˝ 24˝ 26˝ 28˝ 32˝ 36˝ 40˝
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Size (in) 44˝ 48˝ 54˝ 60˝ 66˝ 72˝ 78˝ 84˝ 90˝ 96˝ 102˝ 108˝ 114˝ 120˝
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 228
pg229 7/21/06 4:07 PM Page 1

Series
DS In-Line Flow Sensors
®
Use with the Dwyer Differential Pressure Gages or Transmitters

Valves — Standard, brass with

Teflon® seat and Buna-N O-ring
Air Velocity

1-15/16 [49.21]

Nameplate — Stain- 1-5/8 [41.28]

less steel permanently
attached with split ring.
Includes complete size 1-3/4 [44.45]
and model information.

1-11/16 [42.86] APPROX

1/4 NPT 1-7/16 [36.53]

Head — Machined stainless steel.

5/16 [7.94]
Packing gland — Parker CPI brass
compression fitting.

1/16 [1.59] CLEARANCE

Sensor tube — 304 SS.

Sensing ports — Multiple upstream

and downstream ports sized and posi-
tioned to provide effective accurate
pressure averaging, even at lower
velocities.

In-Line Flow Sensors are averaging Pitot tubes that provide accu-
rate and convenient flow rate sensing for schedule 40 pipe. When pur-
chased with a Dwyer® Capsuhelic® differential pressure gage of Select model with suffix which matches pipe size
DS-300-1"
appropriate range, the result is a flow indicating system delivered off DS-300-11⁄4"
the shelf at an economical price. DS-300-11⁄2"
Pitot tubes have been used in flow measurement for years. Conven- DS-300-2"
tional pitot tubes sense velocity pressure at only one point in the flow- DS-300-21⁄2"
ing stream. Therefore, a series of measurements must be taken across DS-300-3"
the stream to obtain a meaningful average flow rate. The Dwyer® flow DS-300-4"
sensor eliminates the need for “traversing” the flowing stream be- DS-300-6"
DS-300-8"
cause of its multiple sensing points and built-in averaging capability.
DS-300-10"

Dwyer Series DS-300 flow sensors are designed to be inserted in DS-400-6"

the pipeline through a compression fitting. They are furnished with DS-400-8"
instrument shut-off valves on both pressure connections. Valves are DS-400-10"
DS-400-12"
fitted with 8" female NPT connections. Accessories include adapters
DS-400-14"
with 4" SAE 45° flared ends compatible with hoses supplied with the DS-400-16"
Model A-471 Portable Capsuhelic® gage kit. Standard valves are DS-400-18"
rated at 200 psig (13.7 bar) and 200°F (93.3°C). Where valves are not DS-400-20"
required, they can be omitted at reduced cost. Series DS-300 flow DS-400-24"
sensors are available for pipe sizes from 1" to 10".

DS-400 Averaging Flow Sensors are quality constructed from extra Options and Accessories
strong w " dia. stainless steel to resist increased forces encountered at high- A-160 Thredolet,3⁄8" NPT, forged steel, 3000 psi
er flow rates with both air and water. This extra strength also allows them A-161 Brass Bushing, 1⁄4" x 3⁄8"
to be made in longer insertion lengths up to 24 inches (61 cm). All models (DS-300) To order, add suffix -LVdeduct
include convenient and quick-acting quarter-turn ball valves to isolate the b Items subject to Schedule B discounts
sensor for zeroing. Process connections to the valve assembly are 8" female
NPT. A pair of 8" NPT 3 4" SAE 45° flared adapters are included, com-
patible with hoses used in the Model A-471 Portable Capsuhelic® Gage Kit.
Supplied solid brass mounting adapter has a w " dia. compression fitting to
lock in required insertion length and a w " male NPT thread for mounting
in a thred-o-let (not included).

229 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg230 7/21/06 4:07 PM Page 1

How To Order
Merely determine the pipe size into which the flow sensor will be
Large 3/4 Inch Diameter for Extra Strength in Lengths
mounted and designate the size as a suffix to Model DS-300. For ex- to 24 Inches
ample, a flow sensor to be mounted in a 2" pipe would be a Model No.
DS-300-2".

For non-critical water and air flow monitoring applications, the chart 2-1/16
[52.40]
below can be utilized for ordering a stock Capsuhelic® differential pres-
sure gage for use with the DS-300 flow sensor. Simply locate the max- 1-5/8 [41.28] TYP.
imum flow rate for the media being measured under the appropriate
pipe size and read the Capsuhelic® gage range in inches of water col- LP
2-1/8 [53.98]

Air Velocity
umn to the left. The DS-300 sensor is supplied with installation and op-
HP
erating instructions, Bulletin F-50. It also includes complete flow
conversion information for the three media conditions shown in the
chart below. This information enables the user to create a complete dif- DS-400 3-5/8 [92.08] APPROX.
ferential pressure to flow rate conversion table for the sensor and dif-
ferential pressure gage employed. Both the Dwyer® Capsuhelic® gage
and flow sensor feature excellent repeatability so, once the desired
flow rate is determined, deviation from that flow in quantitative mea-
sure can be easily determined. You may wish to order the adjustable
signal flag option for the Capsuhelic® gage to provide an easily identi-
fied reference point for the proper flow.
3/4 [19.05]
Capsuhelic® gages with special ranges and/or direct reading scales in DIA.
appropriate flow units are available on special order for more critical
applications. Customer supplied data for the full scale flow (quantity 1/16 [1.60] 72-700416-00

and units) is required along with the differential pressure reading at GAP UP TO 12˝ PIPE
1/8 [3.175]
that full flow figure. Prior to ordering a special Capsuhelic® differen- GAP 14˝ PIPE AND UP
tial pressure gage for flow read-out, we recommend you request Bul-
letin F-50 to obtain complete data on converting flow rates of various DS-400
media to the sensor differential pressure output. With this bulletin
and after making a few simple calculations, the exact range gage re-
quired can easily be determined.
GAGE FULL RANGE FLOWS BY PIPE SIZE (APPROXIMATE)
RANGE MEDIA @ 70°F
(IN. W.C.) 1" 1 ⁄4"
1
1 ⁄2"
1
2" 21⁄2" 3" 4" 6" 8" 10"
Water (GPM) 4.8 8.3 11.5 20.5 30 49 86 205 350 560
2 Air @ 14.7 PSIA (SCFM)
Air @ 100 PSIG (SCFM)
19.0 33.0 42.0 65.0 113 183 330 760 1340 2130
50.0 90.5 120.0 210.0 325 510 920 2050 3600 6000
Water (GPM) 7.7 14.0 18.0 34.0 47 78 138 320 560 890
5 Air @ 14.7 PSIA (SCFM)
Air @ 100 PSIG (SCFM)
30.0 51.0 66.0 118.0 178 289 510 1200 2150 3400
83.0 142.0 190.0 340.0 610 820 1600 3300 5700 10000
Water (GPM) 11.0 19.0 25.5 45.5 67 110 195 450 800 1260
10 Air @ 14.7 PSIA (SCFM)
Air @ 100 PSIG (SCFM)
41.0 72.0 93.0 163.0 250 410 725 1690 3040 4860
120.0 205.0 275.0 470.0 740 1100 2000 4600 8100 15000
Water (GPM) 18.0 32.0 40.5 72.0 108 173 310 720 1250 2000
25 Air @ 14.7 PSIA (SCFM)
Air @ 100 PSIG (SCFM)
63.0 112.0 155.0 255.0 390 640 1130 2630 4860 7700
185.0 325.0 430.0 760.0 1200 1800 3300 7200 13000 22000
Water (GPM) 25.0 44.0 57.5 100.0 152 247 435 1000 1800
50 Air @ 14.7 PSIA (SCFM)
Air @ 100 PSIG (SCFM)
90.0 161.0 205.0 360.0 560 900 1600 3700 6400
260.0 460.0 620.0 1050.0 1700 2600 4600 10000 18500
Water (GPM) 36.5 62.0 82.0 142.0 220 350 620 1500
100 Air @ 14.7 PSIA (SCFM) 135.0 230.0 300.0 505.0 800 1290 2290 5000
Air @ 100 PSIG (SCFM) 370.0 660.0 870.0 1500.0 2300 3600 6500 15000

Model A-471 Portable Kit For portable operation, the A-471

Capsuhelic® Portable Gage Kit is
The Dwyer® Series 4000 Capsuhelic® differential pressure gage is ideally available complete with tough
polypropylene carrying case,
suited for use as a read-out device with the DS-300 Flow Sensors. The gage mounting bracket, 3-way manifold
may be used on system pressures of up to 500 psig even when the flow sen- valve, two 10' high pressure hoses,
sor differential pressure to be read is less than 0.5" w.c. With accuracy of ±3% and all necessary fittings. See
of full scale, the Capsuhelic® gage can be used in ambient temperatures from pages 7 and 8 for complete
32 to 200°F (0 to 93.3°C). Zero and range adjustments are made from outside information on the
the gage. The standard gage with a die cast aluminum housing can be used Capsuhelic® gage.
with the flow sensor for air or oil applications. For water flow measurements,
the optional forged brass housing should be specified. The Capsuhelic® gage
may be panel or surface mounted and permanently plumbed to the flow
sensor if desired. The optional A-610 pipe mounting bracket allows the gage
to be easily attached to any 14" - 2" horizontal or vertical pipe. CAPSUHELIC® GAGE SHOWN
INSTALLED IN A-471 PORTABLE KIT

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 230
pg231 7/21/06 4:10 PM Page 1

Series
PE Orifice Plate Flow Meter
PVC Orifice Plate for Use with Gases

1/4˝ NPT PRESSURE FITTING

A CL
HI
PRESSURE
ORIFICE PLATE
Air Velocity

1/8 (3.18)
THICK TYPICAL

4-1/2 OD
(114.3) ID
FLOW

A CL LOW
BODY PRESSURE
(CARRIER RING)
INCLUDES RING GASKET 1-1/4
ADHERED TO FACES (31.75)

The Series PE Orifice Plate Flow Meter offers one-piece SPECIFICATIONS

PVC construction incorporating a unique holder or carrier ring Service: Clean air and compatible gases.
containing metering taps and integral gaskets. Unlike a standard Wetted Material: Monolithic (single piece) constructed entire-
orifice plate, the Series PE is a true primary element including ly of gray PVC.
the various components for differential pressure measurement. Accuracy: ±0.6% full scale flow. (Beta = .2-.6) ±0.7% for Beta
It was designed for use wherever there is an application for a con- greater than .6.
ventional flow orifice plate. It can also be used in place of other Temperature: 140°F max (60°C max).
primary differential producers for efficiency and cost effective- Pressure: 150 psi max.
ness. The Series PE is available in line sizes from 1/2˝ to 24˝ and Head Loss: 1-Beta ratio2 eg: 1 - 0.72 = 1 - 0.49 = 51% of the
used for air and most gases. It meets or exceeds ASME, AGA & d.p.
ISO standards. Line Sizes: 1/2˝ to 24˝.
Process Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
FEATURES Installation: Standard flange 125#/150# rating.
• Mounted with Standard Flanges Pipe Requirements: General requirements 10 diameter
• Standard “Corner Tap” Configuration upstream and 5 diameter downstream.
• Corrosion Free Material
Weight: Varies with line size. See chart.
• Simplified Installation
• Built in Metering Taps (1/4˝ female NPT STD)
• Proven Through a Wide Range of Applications for
Accuracy and Energy Efficiency
• Assures Long Term Reliability and Accuracy

231 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg232 7/21/06 4:10 PM Page 1

Series PE Orifice Plate Flow Meter

Air Capacity Structure
• Material PVC- Gaskets Buna "N"
• Based on 70°F, 14.7 psia (Base Conditions)
• Beta Value Based on Std Sch pipe I.D.
• 1.25˝ overall thickness
• Orifice plate thickness is 0.125˝
AIR CAPACITY - Flow in SCFM
Model Weight Line Inch d/p at 14.7 PSIA
# (lbs) Size Bore Beta W/C (0 PSIG) at 20 psig at 100 psig
PE-A-1 1.00 1/2" 0.200" 0.3 20 2.35 3.63 6.61
PE-A-2 1.00 1/2" 0.310" 0.5 100 12.21 19.58 36.37
PE-A-3 1.00 1/2" 0.430" 0.69 200 32.77 56.15 107.47

Air Velocity
PE-B-1 1.00 3/4" 0.250" 0.3 20 3.65 5.66 10.3
PE-B-2 1.00 3/4" 0.400" 0.49 100 20.21 32.44 60.26
PE-B-3 1.00 3/4" 0.580" 0.7 200 59.92 102.91 197.2
PE-C-1 1.00 1" 0.300" 0.29 20 5.24 8.11 14.8
PE-C-2 1.00 1" 0.520" 0.49 100 34.2 54.92 102.09
PE-C-3 1.00 1" 0.720" 0.69 200 91.28 156.51 300
PE-D-1 1.00 1.25" 0.400" 0.29 20 9.31 14.41 26.3
PE-D-2 1.00 1.25" 0.700" 0.51 100 62.09 99.75 185.5
PE-D-3 1.00 1.25" 1.00" 0.72 200 180 309.97 595.2
PE-E-1 2.00 1.5" 0.500" 0.31 20 14.57 22.55 41.16
PE-E-2 2.00 1.5" 0.800" 0.5 100 80.82 129.68 241.5
PE-E-3 2.00 1.5" 1.100" 0.68 200 212.18 363.93 697.39
PE-F-1 2.00 2" 0.600" 0.29 20 20.92 32.38 59.13
PE-F-2 2.00 2" 1.000" 0.48 100 125.74 202.03 375.8
PE-F-3 2.00 2" 1.450" 0.7 200 372.09 639.87 1,227.63
PE-G-1 2.00 2.5" 0.750" 0.3 20 32.71 50.64 92.48
PE-G-2 2.00 2.5" 1.250" 0.5 100 197.54 317.58 590.91
PE-G-3 2.00 2.5" 1.750" 0.7 200 543.99 936.56 1,798.86
PE-H-1 2.00 3" 0.920" 0.3 20 49.17 78.13 139.06
PE-H-2 2.00 3" 1.500" 0.49 100 282.9 454.77 846.21
PE-H-3 2.00 3" 2.150" 0.7 200 816.7 1,404.95 2,696.28
PE-J-1 3.00 4" 1.200" 0.3 20 83.58 129.44 236.48
PE-J-2 3.00 4" 2.000" 0.5 100 503.76 810.06 1,507.64
PE-J-3 3.00 4" 2.800" 0.7 200 1,380.03 2,373.02 4,553.68
PE-K-1 3.00 5" 1.500" 0.3 20 130.48 202.11 369.29
PE-K-2 3.00 5" 2.500" 0.5 100 786.23 1,264.42 2,353.51
PE-K-3 3.00 5" 3.500" 0.69 200 2,152.83 3,701.57 7,103.22
PE-L-1 4.00 6" 1.800" 0.3 20 187.86 291 531.75
PE-L-2 4.00 6" 3.000" 0.49 100 1,331.63 1,820.05 3,387.93
PE-L-3 4.00 6" 4.200" 0.69 200 3,097.20 5,325.20 10,219.28
PE-M-1 5.00 8" 2.400" 0.3 20 333.87 517.25 945.28
PE-M-2 5.00 8" 4.000" 0.5 100 2,014.95 3,241.45 6,034.85
PE-M-3 5.00 8" 5.600" 0.7 200 5,532.00 9,525.43 18,290.00
PE-N-1 6.00 10" 3.000" 0.3 20 521.58 808 1,476.77
PE-N-2 6.00 10" 5.000" 0.5 100 3,145.50 5,060.38 9,421.74
PE-N-3 6.00 10" 7.000" 0.7 200 8,626.42 14,846.80 28,506.17
PE-O-1 7.00 12" 3.600" 0.3 20 750.9 1,163.44 2,126.47
PE-O-2 7.00 12" 6.000" 0.5 100 4,530 7,288.16 13,570.33
PE-O-3 7.00 12" 8.400" 0.7 200 12,430.00 21,397.00 41,089.02
PE-P-1 9.00 14" 4.000" 0.3 20 927.14 1,436.59 2,625.81
PE-P-2 9.00 14" 6.600" 0.5 100 5,477.67 8,812.87 16,409.42
PE-P-3 9.00 14" 9.300" 0.7 200 15,251.50 28,262.66 50,437.78
PE-Q-1 10.00 16" 4.500" 0.3 20 1,172.63 1,817.05 3,321.32
PE-Q-2 10.00 16" 7.600" 0.5 100 7,264.58 11,688.26 21,764.08
PE-Q-3 10.00 16" 10.700" 0.7 200 20,179.85 34,749.32 66,737.64
PE-R-1 12.00 18" 5.200" 0.3 20 1,565.79 2,426.34 4,435.12
PE-R-2 12.00 18" 8.600" 0.5 100 9,302.08 14,966.93 27,869.85
PE-R-3 12.00 18" 12.000" 0.7 200 25,299.92 43,535.32 83,587.01
PE-S-1 14.00 20" 5.780" 0.3 20 1,935.37 2,999.11 5,482.22
PE-S-2 14.00 20" 9.600" 0.5 100 11,588.20 18,645.74 34,720.84
PE-S-3 14.00 20" 13.500" 0.7 200 32,115.34 55,303.34 106,215.88
PE-T-1 16.00 24" 7.000" 0.3 20 2,838.14 4,398.25 8,038.99
PE-T-2 16.00 24" 11.700" 0.5 100 17,229.62 27,726.33 51,633.81
PE-T-3 16.00 24" 16.300" 0.7 200 46,810.53 80,610.19 154,823.78

Note: Differential pressure values should be less than 50% of the inlet absolute pressure.
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 232
pg233 7/21/06 4:11 PM Page 1

Air Velocity Kits

Digital Manometer and Pitot Tube for Balancing System Air Flows

Model 475-1-FM-AV
Complete Kit Includes:
Convenient all-in-one kit is small, light and easy to use. No set-up • Model 475-1 Digital Manometer,
or leveling needed. Digital manometer reads from 0-19.99 in. w.c. with range 0-19.99 in. w.c.
±0.5% F.S. accuracy and minor divisions to 0.01. Large 1⁄2" LCD readout
Air Velocity

• Model 166-6-CF, 6" Pitot Tube

is easy to see in poorly lighted areas and has “low battery” warning. In- with Compression Fitting
cluded is a 6" stainless steel Pitot tube with integral compression fit- • Two No. A-303 Static Pressure
ting to hold it securely when taking readings. Also, two static pressure Tips with Magnetic Mounting
tips with magnetic mounting measure pressure drop across filters, • Two 9 Ft. Lengths 3⁄16" I.D.
condenser coils, etc. Kit comes complete with rubber tubing, 9V bat- Rubber Tubing
• No. A-397 Step Drill for 3⁄16"-
tery, step drill, AV calculator slide rule, and custom fitted carrying 1
⁄2" Holes in 1⁄16" Increments
case. An indispensable test kit for the plant engineer, and HVAC tech- • No. A-532 AV Slide Chart
nician that must balance system air flows at start-up. • 9 Volt Battery
• Fitted Polyethylene Case

475-1-FM-AV Air Velocity Kit

Model 475-1T-FM-AV
Convenient all-in-one kit is small, light and easy to use. No set-up Complete Kit Includes:
or leveling needed. Digital manometer reads from 0-19.99 in. w.c. with • Model 475-1 Digital Manometer,
±0.5% F.S. accuracy and minor divisions to 0.01. Large 1⁄2" LCD readout range 0-19.99 in. w.c.
is easy to see in poorly lighted areas and has “low battery” warning. Kit • Model 166T, 36" Telescoping
includes convenient telescoping Pitot tube, Model 166T, fully adjustable Stainless Steel Pitot Tube
• Two No. A-303 Static Pressure
from 11.5 to 36 inches (29.2 to 91.4 cm). Also, two static pressure tips
Tips with Magnetic Mounting
with magnetic mounting measure pressure drop across filters, con- • Two 41⁄2 Ft. Lengths 3⁄16" I.D.
denser coils, etc. Kit comes complete with rubber tubing, 9V battery, Rubber Tubing
step drill, AV calculator slide rule, and custom fitted carrying case. An • No. A-397 Step Drill for 3⁄16"-
indispensable test kit for the plant engineer, and HVAC technician that 1
⁄2" Holes in 1⁄16" Increments
must balance system air flows at start-up. • No. A-532 AV Slide Chart
• 9 Volt Battery
• Fitted Polyethylene Case
475-1T-FM-AV Air Velocity Kit

Model 477-1T-FM-AV
Convenient all-in-one kit is small, light and easy to use. No set-up Complete Kit Includes:
or leveling needed. Digital manometer reads from 0-20 in. w.c. with • Model 477-1 Digital
±0.5% F.S. accuracy. The Series 477 stores up to 20 readings in mem- Manometer, range 0-20
in. w.c.
ory for later reference, instantly selecting up to nine English/Metric • Model 166T, 36" Telescoping
pressure units that are visible on a large, backlit 0.4" LCD readout. Stainless Steel Pitot Tube
Both audible and visual overpressure alarms and a “low battery” warn- • Two No. A-303 Static
ing are standard features. Pressure Tips with
Magnetic Mounting
Each kit includes convenient telescoping Pitot tube, Model 166T which • Two 41⁄2 Ft. Lengths 3⁄16" I.D.
is fully adjustable from 11.5 to 36 inches (29.2 to 91.4 cm). In addition, Rubber Tubing
two static pressure tips with magnetic mountings measure pressure • No. A-397 Step Drill for 3⁄16"
drop across filters, condenser coils, etc. - 1⁄2" Holes in 1⁄16" Increments
Kit comes complete with rubber tubing, 9V battery, step drill, AV cal- • No. A-532 AV Slide Chart
• 9 Volt Battery
culator slide rule, and custom fitted carrying case. An indispensable • Fitted Polyethylene Case
test kit for the plant engineer, and HVAC technician that must balance
system air flows at start-up..

477-1T-FM-AV Air Velocity Kit

233 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg234 7/21/06 4:12 PM Page 1

Series
471 Digital Thermo-Anemometer
Four Field Selectable Ranges from 500 to 15,000 FPM

Air Velocity
Model 471-1 Model 471-2 w/ Model 471-3 w/
Telescopic Probe Telescoping Bendable Tip

The Series 471 Digital Thermo Anemometers are versatile SPECIFICATIONS

dual function instruments that quickly and easily measure air ve- AIR VELOCITY SPECIFICATIONS:
Service: Air.
locity in four field selectable ranges, in either feet per minute or Range: Field Selectable 0-500, 0-1500, 0-5000, 0-15000 FPM (see
meters per second, plus air temperature in °F or °C. High contrast chart for Metric Conversions).
Accuracy: Depending on range (See chart) @ 59 to 86°F (15 to
LCD display shows both range selected and present velocity. Con- 30°C). Outside this range add 0.11% per °F (0.2% per °C).
venient backlight provides perfect visibility in low light conditions. Temperature Limits: Probe: 0 to 200°F (-18 to 100°C).
Ambient: 32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C).
Light automatically shuts off after 2-1/2 minutes to prolong bat- Display: 4-1/2 Digit 0.4˝ High.
tery life. Low battery warning is included. Resolution: 1 FPM / 0.1 MPS.
Stainless steel probe with comfortable hand grip is etched with in- Response Time: 15 Seconds.
Power Requirements: 9 volt alkaline battery, included.
sertion depth marks from 0-8 inches and 0-20 cm on the Model 471- Probe: 5/16˝ (8.13 mm) diameter probe with integral hand grip and 6
1. When fully extended, the probe length on models 471-2 and ft. (15.2 cm) coiled cord. Length of probe: Model 471- 1=10˝ (25.4
cm); Models 471-2 and 471-3= 33˝ (83 cm) extended.
471-3 reach 33 inches (83 cm). Model 471-3 features a telescoping Weight: 12 oz (340 g).
bendable probe for easy access in hard-to-reach locations.
TEMPERATURE SPECIFICATIONS:
Extruded aluminum housing fully protects electronics, yet is light- Range: 0 to 200°F (-18 to 100°C).
weight and comfortable to hold even when taking multiple read- Accuracy: ±2°F (1°C).
Temperature Limits: Probe: 0 to 200°F (-18 to 100°C).
ings as part of duct traverses. An integral sliding cover protects Ambient: 32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C).
sensors when not in use. Display: 4-1/2 Digit 0.4˝ high.
Standard accessories are 9 volt alkaline battery, wrist strap, cus- Resolution: 0.1°.
Response Time: 30 Seconds.
tom fitted carrying case and step drill for making duct holes from
3/16˝ to 1/2˝.

Model 471-1 Digital Thermo Anemometer

includes battery, wrist strap, 6-step drill,
carrying case and instructions.

Note: Ranges are field selectable. Model 471-2 Digital Thermo Anemometer
Range Velocity, Velocity, Accuracy with telescoping probe includes battery,
Number FPM MPS wrist strap, 6-step drill, carrying case
and instructions.
1 0-500 0-3.0 ±3% F.S.
2 0-1500 0-7.0 ±3% F.S. Model 471-3 Digital Thermo Anemometer
3 0-5000 0-30 ±4% F.S. with telescoping bendable tip includes
4 0-15000 0-75 ±5% F.S. battery, wrist strap, 6-step drill,
carrying case and instructions.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 234
pg235 7/21/06 4:13 PM Page 1

Model
VT140 Vane Thermo-Anemometer
Simultaneously Displays Air Velocity and Temperature, RS232 Output

2.813
[71.45]

5.488
Air Velocity

7.500 POWER HOLD °C/°F [139.39]

[190.50]

ANEMOMETER
RECORD RECALL UNIT

PROBE
VANE
M/SEC
KM/HR
FT/MIN
KNOT
MPH

THERMO-ANEMOMETER

3.120
[79.25]

Measure airflow and temperature simultaneously with Model SPECIFICATIONS Temp. Sensor: Thermistor.
VT140 Vane Thermo-Anemometer. Remote probe is designed with Air Velocity Ranges: 80 to 4925 Temperature Limits: 32 to 122°F
twisted vane arms and low friction ball bearings for accurate airflow ft/m, 1.4 to 90.0 kph, 0.9 to 55.9 (0 to 50°C) max 80% RH.
mph, 0.4 to 25.0 m/s, 1.9 to 38.8 Power Supply: One 9V battery.
readings in low or high velocities. Microprocessor-based unit provides Output: RS232 serial interface via
fast, reliable air velocity measurement in five different scales. Model knots.
3.5 mm terminal.
VT140 features RS232 output, selectable °F or °C, Record/Recall min- Temperature Range: 32 to 140°F Housing: ABS plastic.
(0 to 60°C).
imum, maximum, and average readings, display hold, and automatic Accuracy: Air Velocity: ±2% + 1
Weight: 0.84 lb (381 g).
shut-off to preserve battery. The large 1.4" (3.5 cm), dual function LCD Agency Approval: CE.
digit, Temperature: 1.5°F (0.8°C).
with contrast adjustment allows easy viewing at any angle. Unit Resolution: 10 ft/m, 0.1 kph, 0.1
includes rugged holster with stand, one 9V battery, and instruction mph, 0.1 m/s, 0.1 knots, 0.1°F,
manual. 0.1°C.
APPLICATIONS
VT140 Vane Thermo-Anemometer Airflow measurements in heating, ventilation, and air condi-
VT140-N Vane Thermo-Anemometer with NIST tioning systems, air duct analysis, wind tunnel studies,
or monitoring of process air.

Model
VT120 Integral Vane Thermo-Anemometer
Large 11/4(Dual Display, One Hand Operation

1.700 1.400
[43.18] [35.56]

7.190
[182.63]
RECORD
HOLD

THERMO-ANEMOMETER

3.000 2.600
VT 120

UNITS

[76.20] [66.04]
SET-UP
ON-OFF

Simultaneously measure air velocity and temperature with the SPECIFICATIONS Temperature Sensor: Thermistor.
Model VT120 Integral Vane Thermo-Anemometer. Easily view readings on Air Velocity Ranges: 80 to 5900 Temperature Limits: 14 to 122°F
the large 1.25( (31.75 mm) dual display. User-selectable air velocity ranges ft/min, 0.4 to 30 m/sec, 0.9 to 68 (-10 to 50°C) max 80% RH.
include ft/min, m/sec, mph, knots, and km/hr. Built-in thermistor records mph, 0.8 to 58 knots, 1.4 to 108 Power Supply: One 9V battery.
ambient temperature in °F or °C. Model VT120 features include data hold km/hr. Battery Life: 100 hours continuous
and record/recall minimum, maximum and average readings. Also, units Temperature Range: 14 to 122°F (with 20 min sleep mode enabled).
have the ability to record and average up to 2 hours of data while display- (-10 to 50°C). Display: Large 1.25 x 1.62˝ (37 x 42
ing the continuous running average. If desired, sleep mode automatically Accuracy: Air velocity: ±3%, Temper- mm) LCD, 9999 count.
shuts down the meter after 20 minutes of non-use. Model VT120 includes ature: ±1°F (±0.6°C). Housing: ABS plastic.
hard carry case, one 9V battery, and instruction manual. Resolution: 1 ft/min, 0.01 m/sec, 0.1 Sensor Diameter: 2.87˝ (70 mm).
mph, 0.1 knots, 0.1 km/hr, 0.1°F, Weight: 1.5 lb (680 g).
0.1°C. Agency Approvals: CE.
APPLICATIONS
Model VT120 Integral Vane Thermo-Anemometer Air duct measurement and analysis, fume hood analysis, ionizer flow out-
Model VT120-N includes NIST certification put monitoring, positive pressure reading in clean rooms, or ventilation
system inspection.

235 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg236 7/21/06 4:15 PM Page 1

Series
MVT Mini-Vane Thermo-Anemometer
Display Air Flow, Air Velocity and Temperature, Telescoping Mini-Vane, RS232 Output

Air Velocity
[177.80]
THERMO-ANEMOMETER MVT

3-5/16
[83.82]

Sense air velocity, air flow and temperature with the Series MVT SPECIFICATIONS Ambient Operating Humidity:
Maximum 80% RH.
Mini-Vane Thermo-Anemometer. The meter uses a 1/2˝ (12.7 mm) diame- Air Velocity Ranges: 160 to 2358
ft/min; 1.8 to 26.8 mph; 1.6 to Display: Dual function 0.5˝ (13mm)
ter metal telescoping antenna sensor to detect air flows up to 2358 ft/min 4-digit LCD.
23.3 knots; 0.8 to 12.00 m/s; 2.8
and temperatures to 176°F (80°C). High accuracy is ensured with the low to 43.2 km/h. Sampling Rate: 1 second approx.
friction ball bearing mini-vane. Air flow can be measured in CMM (m3/min) Temperature Ranges: 32 to Output: RS232 PC serial interface
or CFM (ft3/min) and temperature is selectable °F or °C. The MVT fea- 176°F (0 to 80°C). with 16-bit data stream output.
tures a 4-digit LCD display, data hold, record/recall maximum and mini- Accuracy: Air Velocity: ±2%; Power Requirements: 9V battery
mum, RS232 output, averaging up to 20 measurements, 2/3 the measured Temperature: 1.5°F (0.8°C). (included).
value and auto shut-off to prolong life. The unit includes telescoping mini- Resolution: 1 ft/min; 0.1 mph; 0.1 Auto Shut-off: 15 minutes to pre-
vane probe, hard case, 9V battery and protective rubber holster with stand. knots; 0.01 m/s; 0.1 km/h; 0.001 serve battery life.
to 100 CMM/CFM; 0.1 °F/°C. Housing: ABS Housing.
Temperature Sensor: Thermistor. Telescoping Sensor Length:
MVT176 Mini-Vane Thermo-Anemometer Ambient Operating 23.6˝ (600mm) max. with 39˝ (1m)
MVT176-N Mini-Vane Anemometer with NIST Temperature: Meter: 32 to 122°F cable.
(0 to 50°C); Sensor: 32 to 176°F Weight: 1.6 lb (700 g) including
Accessories
MVT07 Mini-Vane Anemometer Soft Case (0 to 80°C). battery and probe.
Agency Approval: CE.

Model
VT-200 Vane Thermo-Anemometer
Measures Air Volume, Air Velocity, and Temperature, Built-in Datalogging

2.375
[121]
6.400
[162.56]
5.00
[127]

3.206
[81.4]

Model VT-200 Vane Thermo-Anemometer is ideal for balanc- SPECIFICATIONS Temperature Limits: 32 to 140°F
ing air conditioning and heating ducts or checking the operation of Air Velocity Ranges: 0.3 to 45 (0 to 60°C).
fans and blowers. Model VT-200 measures air volume in cubic feet m/s; 0.7 to 100 mph; 0.6 to 88.0 Display: Dual line, 4-digit, 1.1˝
per minute and cubic meters per minute. Air velocity measurements knots; 1 to 140.0 km/hr; 60 to (27.9 mm) height.
can be viewed in ft/min, m/s, knots, km/hr, and mph with ±3% accu- 8,800 ft/min. Power: 9V alkaline battery (includ-
Temperature Range: 32 to 122°F ed). Battery Life: Approx. 50 hours.
racy. The multifunction LCD can simultaneously display air veloci-
(0 to 50°C). Output: RS232 serial interface via
ty and temperature in selectable units or air flow and air area. Built-
Air Volume Ranges: CFM (ft3/min) DB9 female connector.
in datalogger can store up to 1000 measurements or transfer the
or CMM (m3/min). Housing: ABS plastic, 1˝ (25 mm)
data to a PC via RS-232 communication. Additional features include diameter.
Accuracy: Air Velocity: ±3% of
data hold and record/recall minimum, maximum and average read- reading ± 0.1, whichever is greater; Weight: 12.3 oz (350 g).
ings. Model VT-200 includes RS-232 interface, PC Windows™ soft- Temperature: ±1.5 °F (±0.8°C). Agency Approval: CE.
ware, cable, 9V battery, carrying case, and instruction manual. Resolution: 0.1 knots, m/s, km/hr,
and mph; 0.1/1 ft/min; 0.1°C.
Temperature Sensor: Type K
Model VT-200 Vane Thermo-Anemometer thermocouple.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 236
pg237 7/21/06 4:16 PM Page 1

Series
641 Air Velocity Transmitter
16 Field Selectable Ranges in FPM or MPS
641 AVT WITH DISPLAY OPTION
B DIMENSION A DIMENSION B DIMENSION
A DIMENSION 7-63/64 9-13/16
3-1/4
[202.80] [249.24]
[82.55] 13/16 13-63/64 15-13/16
[20.64] [355.20] [401.64]

PHONE: 219-879-8000
e-mail: [email protected]
http://www.dwyer-inst.com
19-63/64 21-13/16
Air Velocity

1/2-14 NPT [507.60] [554.04]

4-29/64 26-63/64 28-13/16

DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.

[113.11]

MICHIGAN CITY, IN 46360

102 INDIANA HWY 212
[685.40] [731.84]
32-63/64 34-13/16
[837.80] [884.24]
37-63/64 39-13/16
[964.80] [1011.24]
1/2 NPT
641 AVT WITHOUT
B DIMENSION DISPLAY OPTION
A DIMENSION
A DIMENSION B DIMENSION
2-23/32
7-7/16 9-9/32
[29.06] 25/32 [188.91] [235.74]
[19.84] 13-7/16 15-9/32
[341.31] [388.14]

PHONE: 219-879-8000
e-mail: [email protected]
http://www.dwyer-inst.com
1/2-14 NPT 19-7/16 21-9/32
[493.71] [540.54]

DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.

4-29/64

MICHIGAN CITY, IN 46360

26-7/16 26-9/32

102 INDIANA HWY 212

[113.11] [671.51] [718.34]
29-7/16 34-9/32
[747.71] [870.74]
37-7/16 39-9/32
1/2 NPT [950.91] [997.74]

The new Series 641 Air Velocity Transmitter is the ideal instru- SPECIFICATIONS
ment for monitoring air flow. This transmitter uses a heated mass flow Service: Clean air and compatible, non-combustible gases.
sensor which allows for precise velocity measurements at various flow Accuracy:
rates and temperatures. The 641’s 16 field selectable ranges provides 3% FS Process gas: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
it the versatility to be selected for several air flow applications. The 4% FS Process gas: -40 to 32°F & 122 to 212°F
optional LED produces a complete, low-cost solution for local indication (-40 to 0°C & 50 to 100°C).
of air flow. Response Time: Flow: 1.5 seconds to 95% of final value (Output
filter set to minimum).
Features Temperature Limits: Process: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C).
• Ranges to 15,000 FPM or 75 MPS Ambient: 32 to 140°F (0 to 60°C).
• Optional Bright LED Display Pressure Limit: 100 psi (6.89 bar) maximum.
• Easy Push Button Set-up Humidity Limit: Non-Condensing.
• Compact Housing Power Requirements: 12–35 VDC, 10–16 VAC.
• 4-20 mA Output Output Signal: 4-20 mA, isolated 24V source, 3 or 4-wire con-
• Digital Filter for Signal Damping nection.
Output Filter: Selectable 0.5 –15 (seconds).
Applications Loop Resistance: 600 ohms max.
• Exhaust Stack Flow Monitoring Current Consumption: 300 mA max.
• Air Control in Drying Processes Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
• HVAC Air Velocity Measurements Process Connections: 1/2˝ male NPT.
• Fan Supply and Exhaust Tracking Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet NEMA 4X (IP66) for non
LED models only.
MODELS Mounting Orientation: Unit not position sensitive. Probe must
Model Number Probe Length* be aligned with airflow.
641-6 6˝ (152.4 mm) Weight: 12.6 oz (357.2 g).
Agency Approval: CE.
641-6-LED 6˝ (152.4 mm)
641-12 12˝ (304.8 mm)
641-12-LED 12˝ (304.8 mm) OPTIONAL DISPLAY VERSION:
641-18 18˝ (457.2 mm) Display: 4-1/2 digit 1/2˝ red LED.
641-18-LED 18˝ (457.2 mm) Resolution: 1 FPM, 0.01 MPS
641-24 24˝ (609.6 mm) (10 FPM @ 10,000 and 15,000 FPM ranges).
641-24-LED 24˝ (609.6 mm) Weight: 13.3 oz (377 g).
641-30 30˝ (762 mm)
641-30-LED 30˝ (762 mm)
641-36 36˝ (914 mm) ACCESSORIES
641-36-LED 36˝ (914 mm) A-156 Universal Mounting Plate 1/2˝ female NPT
*Other probe lengths available contact factory. No. A-158 Split Flange Mounting Kit
No. A-159 Duct Mounting Gland
237 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au
pg238 7/21/06 4:17 PM Page 1

Series
641RM Air Velocity Transmitter with Cable
For Remotely Mounting Electronic Enclosure

1-5/8 [41.28] WITH LED

1-3/32 [27.78] WITHOUT LED
1/2 NPT

Air Velocity
43/64
[17.07]
4-31/32
6 FT
[126.21]
[152.40]

Ø5/16
[Ø7.94] 14-21/64
[53.07]
Ø13/64 FOR A STANDARD 12˝ PROBE
[Ø5.16]

1-39/64
[40.88]

1-25/32 31/64
[45.24] [12.30]

The Series 641RM is the ideal instrument for monitoring air SPECIFICATIONS
flow. This transmitter uses a heated mass flow sensor, which Service: Clean air and compatible, non-combustible gases.
allows for precise velocity measurements at various flow rates Accuracy:
3% FS Process gas: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
and temperatures. The 641’s 16 field selectable ranges from 0-
4% FS Process gas: -40 to 32°F & 122 to 212°F
250 to 15,000 FPM (0-1.25 to 75 MPS) provide it the versatility (-40 to 0°C & 50 to 100°C).
to be selected for a multitude of applications. The unit’s 6’ Response Time: Flow: 1.5 seconds to 95% of final value
cable which connects the sensing probe with the electronic (output filter set to minimum).
enclosure allows the enclosure to be mounted where it can be Temperature Limits: Process: -40 to 212°F (-40 to
more easily accessed. Longer cable lengths are available for 100°C). Ambient: 32 to 140°F (0 to 60°C).
Pressure Limit: 100 psi (6.89 bar) maximum.
ducts that are at very high elevations from the plant floor. The
Humidity Limit: Non-Condensing.
optional LED produces a complete, compact solution for local
Power Requirements: 12–35 VDC, 10–16 VAC.
indication of air flow. Output Signal: 4-20 mA, isolated 24V source, 3 or
4-wire connection.
Output Filter: Selectable 0.5–15 (seconds).
Loop Resistance: 600 ohms max.
Current Consumption: 300 mA max.
Model 641RM-12, Air Velocity Transmitter with 6’ cable Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
Mounting Orientation: Unit not position sensitive.
Model 641RM-12-LED, same as above with LED display Probe must be aligned with airflow.
Weight: 13.2 oz (374.26 g).
Cable Length: 6 ft (1.82 m).
ACCESSORIES Probe Length: 12˝ (30.48 cm) standard.
A-156 Universal Mounting Plate, 1/2˝ female NPT Probe Diameter: 5/16˝ (0.79 cm).
No. A-159 Duct Mounting Gland
No. A-158 Split Flange Mounting Kit
OPTIONAL DISPLAY VERSION:
Display: 4-1/2 digit 1/2˝ red LED.
Resolution: 1 FPM, 0.01 MPS
(10 FPM @ 10,000 and 15,000 FPM ranges).
Weight: 13.9 oz (394.16 g).

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 238
pg239 7/21/06 4:18 PM Page 1

Series
641B Air Velocity Transmitter
8 Field Selectable Ranges in FPM or MPS
Air Velocity

9-1/4
[235.0]

4-31/32
1/2 NPT [126.21]

1-23/32
[43.66]

The Series 641B Air Velocity Transmitter uses a heated SPECIFICATIONS

mass flow sensor technology. It has 4 user-selectable ranges Service: Air and compatible, non-combustible gases.
from 250 FPM to 2000 FPM with corresponding metric ranges Accuracy:
of 1.25 MPS to 10 MPS. The 641B provides an isolated 4-20 mA 5% FS Process gas: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
output proportional to the velocity. 6% FS Process gas: -40 to 32°F & 122 to 176°F
(-40 to 0°C & 50 to 80°C).
The Series 641B’s steel sensor allows the unit to be used in Response Time: Flow: 1.5 seconds to 95% of final value
dirty air environments. This rugged sensor is ideally suited for (Output filter set to minimum).
quick field cleaning from a simple cloth to a pulse of air from an Temperature Limits: Process: -40 to 176°F (-40 to 80°C).
air source. Proper sensor performance can be maintained in Ambient: 32 to 140°F (0 to 60°C).
these polluted environments by easily removing dust and debris Humidity Limit: Non-condensing.
from the sensor which is problematic for pitot tubes and other Power Requirements: 12–35 VDC, 10–16 VAC.
flow sensing transmitters. Output Signal: 4-20 mA, isolated 24V source, 3 or
4-wire connection.
Output Filter: Selectable 0.5 –15 (seconds).
Loop Resistance: 600 ohms max.
Current Consumption: 300 mA max*.
641B-4 Air Velocity Transmitter
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
Accessories
Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet NEMA 4X.
A-156, Flange Mounting Plate with 1/2˝ female NPT Mounting Orientation: Unit not position sensitive.
A-155, Mounting Gland with 1/2˝ male NPT fitting Weight: 12.6 oz (357.2 g).

* A brief current transient exceeding 300 mA may be seen

on startup.

239 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg240 7/21/06 4:25 PM Page 1

Series
AVU Air Velocity Transmitter
Ideal for Building Automation Systems

9-29/64
2-1/4
[240.0]
[57.0] 8-55/64
[225.0] 51/64
[2.0]

Air Velocity
3/4
3-11/32
[19.0]
[85.0]

The Series AVU Air Velocity Transmitter is ideal for a wide SPECIFICATIONS
range of HVAC measurement and control applications, particu- Service: Clean air and compatible, non-combustible gases.
larly in complete building control and energy management sys- Accuracy: ±5% of full scale.
tems. The Series AVU offers 5% accuracy at a surprisingly low Response Time (90%): 5 sec (typical).
cost, with six units covering ranges from 0-785 fpm to 0-3150 Temperature Limits: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
fpm, with either 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC output. Humidity Limit: 0-90% RH, non-condensing.
Power Requirements: -A models 24 VDC +10% -15%; -V
The Series AVU Transmitter operates by measuring the heat models 24 VDC or 24 VAC +10% - 15%.
loss from one of the two sensing elements in the air stream, then
Output Signal: -A models 4-20 mA current loop;
calculating the air velocity. Units are virtually immune to drift
-V models 0-10 VDC.
due to the design of the sensing element, which makes the trans-
mitter accurate over the whole air velocity range. Loop Resistance: (-A models) 700 ohms.
Current Consumption: 60 mA + output current.
FEATURES Max. Start Up Current: 85 mA; 10 V.
• 4-20 mA or 0-10 V Output Versions Output Current Limit: (-V models) >10 mA.
• NEMA 6 (IP67) Enclosure Rating Electrical Connections: Screw terminal. Cable gland for
• AC or DC Powered (Loop Version DC Only) 4-8 mm wire (16 gauge wire).
• 5% Accuracy Enclosure Rating: NEMA 6 (IP67) except sensing point.
Probe Dimensions: 9.45 x .75˝ (240 x 19 mm).
APPLICATIONS Mounting Orientation: Unit not position sensitive. Probe
• Supply and Exhaust Fan Tracking must be aligned with airflow.
• Clean Room Systems Weight: 8.8 oz (250 g).
• Air Pollution Studies and Manufacturing Agency Approvals: CE.
• Process Control Systems

MODELS
Model Range Output
AVU-1-A 0-785 fpm (0-4 m/s) 4-20 mA
AVU-2-A 0-1575 fpm (0-8 m/s) 4-20 mA
AVU-3-A 0-3150 fpm (0-16 m/s) 4-20 mA
AVU-1-V 0-785 fpm (0-4 m/s) 0-10 VDC
AVU-2-V 0-1575 fpm (0-8 m/s) 0-10 VDC
AVU-3-V 0-3150 fpm (0-16 m/s) 0-10 VDC

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 240
pg241 7/21/06 4:29 PM Page 1

™
Series
PF Precision Flow Air Velocity Transmitter
High Accuracy, 0.2 Second Response, 4 to 20 mA Output
Air Velocity

Precision Flow™ Air Velocity Transmitters directly monitor gas mass flow SPECIFICATIONS Electrical Connection: Four wire
rates of free air flows or single point flows in pipes, ducts and stacks. The 4 to 20 Service: Air, nitrogen, or non-corrosive, standard connector.
mA output signal is linearly proportional to gas mass velocity without additional non-combustible gases. Probe Dimensions: 1⁄4˝ (6.35 mm) O.D.,
compensation needed for pressure and temperature variations. The 304 SS inser- Wetted Materials: 304 SS probe, glass 13˝ (33 cm) length.
tion probe contains a velocity sensor to monitor mass flow and a temperature sen- coated sensor, epoxy. Operating Temperature: 32 to 122°F
sor to automatically correct for temperature changes. The probe is directly Accuracy: ±1% FS, ±0.5% of reading ( 0 to 50°C).
mounted to a NEMA 2 anodized aluminum enclosure. Stocked models are cali- over 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C) and 5 to 30 Weight: 0.7 lb (0.30 kg).
brated for air. psia (0.35 to 2 kg/cm2).
Repeatability: 0.2% F.S.
Suggested Specifications
MODELS Air velocity transmitter shall be an insertion
Temperature Limits: -40 to 250°F
Model Number Range type mass flow meter with accuracy of ±1%
(-40 to 121°C). FS, +0.5% of reading and a 0.2 second re-
PF1300202 0 to 2000 SFPM Pressure Limits: 150 psig sponse time. Transmitter shall provide a 4-
PF1300204 0 to 4000 SFPM (10 kg/cm2 G) max. 20 mA output signal linearly proportional to
PF1300206 0 to 6000 SFPM Power Requirements: 15 to 18 VDC, gas mass velocity. Insertion probe shall be
300 mA max. constructed of 304 SS with a glass coated
APPLICATIONS Output: 4 to 20 mA, linear. sensor assembly. Electronics shall be housed
Heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC); hood and gas cabinet Response Time: 0.2 seconds to 63% in a NEMA 2 enclosure. Air velocity transmit-
monitoring; cleanroom and cleanbench face velocity monitoring. of final velocity value. ter shall be Dwyer® Model No. PF____ Air Ve-
Loop Resistance: 400 Ω max. locity Transmitter.

Series
PFS Smart Air Velocity Transmitter
Field Rangeable, 0.1 Second Response, ±0.2% Repeatability
1 4
2-3/8 [101.60]
[25.40] [60.33] 3/4
[19.05]
2-1/2
[63.50] 4
[101.60]

1/2˝ NPT
13 9/16
[330.20] 9/32 [14.30]
[7.14]
3/8
[9.53]
Series PFS Smart Air Velocity Transmitter measures mass flow SPECIFICATIONS Response Time: 0.1 seconds to 63% of
rate of air, nitrogen, or other non-combustible gases and delivers a lin- final velocity value.
Service: Air, nitrogen, or non-corrosive, Loop Resistance: 700Ω max.
ear 4 to 20 mA output signal. The smart electronics permit field con- non-combustible gases. Relay Rating: Maximum
figuration of flow range and full validation of calibration. Compensate Wetted Materials: 304 SS probe, glass 42 VAC/VDC, 140 mA.
for flow profile variations or specific application conditions with the K- filled polyester sensor, epoxy, and ceramic. Electrical Connection: 1/2˝ female
Factor correction feature. Series PFS include user-adjustable high and Accuracy: ±1% FS. NPT.
Repeatability: ±0.2% full scale.
low alarm outputs and adjustable time response to track flow fluctua- Temperature Limits: -40 to 250°F
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65)
tions. View flow rate on units with built-in display. All parameters can powder-coated cast aluminum.
(-40 to 120°C). Mounting: 3/8˝ tube compression fitting
be quickly programmed via three push buttons or RS-232 and the Pressure Limits: 150 psig (10 bar) max. (not included).
Windows™ 95 based software (sold separately). Power Requirements: 18 to 30 VDC, Correction Factor Setting: 0.5 to 2.
625 mA max. Computer Requirements: IBM compat-
MODELS Output: 4 to 20 mA linear, optical/galvan- ible 386 or above and Windows™ 95 or
ic isolated; proportional to point mass flow later with minimum 8 mB RAM (16 mB
Model Number Range Display rate or velocity.
PFS1300204 0 to 4000 SFPM No preferred) and one serial port.
Zero and Span Adjustment: 50 to Weight: 0.7 lb (0.30 kg).
PFS1300210 0 to 10,000 SFPM No 100% FS.
PFS1300215 0 to 15,000 SFPM No Agency Approvals: CE.
PFS13002041 0 to 4000 SFPM Yes
PFS13002101 0 to 10,000 SFPM Yes Accessories
PFS13002151 0 to 15,000 SFPM Yes
No. PFS60 Windows® Software and Connecting Cable

Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

241 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg242 7/21/06 4:29 PM Page 1

Model
AFH Electronic Balometer
Measures Volumetric Flow Rate and Temperature
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air.
Volume Flow Rate: 30 to 1180 cfm (50 to 2000 m3/h).
Temperature Limits: 32 to 176˚F (0 to 80˚C).

Air Velocity
Accuracy: ±2% of reading.
Temperature Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading.
Display: 4 digit LCD, 0.45˝ high.
Output: RS-232 serial interface.
Memory Capability: 99 readings.
Volume Flow Resolution: (1 m3/h, l/s, or cfm).
Temperature Resolution: (0.1°C or 1°F).
Velocity Resolution: 1 fpm (0.01 m/s).
Power Requirements: 4 AA batteries (included).
Pressure Drop Across: 0.22˝ H2O max (55 Pa).
Weight: 26.55 lb (12.04 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE.

Rapidly obtain accurate measurements of airflow distribution

in HVAC systems. The versatile design of the AFH electronic balome- Model AFH
ter allows easy data acquisition on ceiling, wall-mounted, and floor-
level diffusers, working in supply or exhaust. View measurements
easily on the large LCD display, and store up to 100 readings in its non- Accessories
volatile memory for later analysis. Download data to your computer A-542: 1’ x 4’ hood expansion kit
A-543: 1’ x 5’ hood expansion kit
via the A-547 RS-232 cable (sold separately). Eliminating time-con- A-544: 2’ x 4’ hood expansion kit
A-545: 3’ x 3’ hood expansion kit
suming calculations, this instrument utilizes a sixteen-point measure- A-547: RS-232 computer cable
ment array to display flow in cfm, m3/h, or 1/s. Light weight and easy
to handle, the AFH requires only one person to operate. Standard 2’
x 2’ hood fits over most standard grills and exhausts. Additional hood
expansion kits are sold separately. Each unit includes: AFH meter, 2’
x 2’ hood, rugged carrying case, four universal hood-support poles,
four AA batteries and calibration data sheet.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 242
pg243 7/21/06 4:30 PM Page 1

No.
480 Vaneometer Swing Vane Anemometer
™

Use This Sensitive New Dwyer Unit to Measure Low Air Velocities –
at Low Cost *
The 480 Vaneometer™ Swing Vane Anemometer is a durable low-priced instrument specifically designed
to simplify the measurement of low air velocities from 25 to 400 feet per minute. OSHA, EPA and other safety
ventilation requirements for spray booths and at fume, smoke and dust exhaust hoods can now be quickly
checked, even by untrained personnel. Its small size and light weight — only four ounces make it ideal to carry
Air Velocity

from one work station to another. A versatile steel mounting bracket for continuous monitoring is also included.
The Vaneometer™ Swing Anemometer is accurate to ±5% of full scale to 100 FPM and ±10% from 100 FPM to
top of scale. It has a spirit level to ensure accurate readings and the large scales are easy to read and visible from
both sides. The housing is molded from tough ABS plastic and easy to clean with soap and water. The polyester
vane can be cleaned with lacquer thinner. A spare vane is provided.

Use a VaneometerTM Swing

Vane Anemometer to measure
velocity of air flow into labora-
tory fume hoods and at paint
spray booths to determine
when to change filters. Or
wherever needed to meet
OSHA standards of ventilation MODELS
for smoke, dust or fume re- Model Description
moval. 480 VaneometerTM, 25-400 fpm
M480 VaneometerTM, 0-2.0 m/s
A-390 Extra vanes, pkg. of 2
A-406 Molded carrying case
A-407 Plastic carrying pouch
*U.S. Patent No. 4,154,101

No.
460 Air Meter
A Low-Cost, Direct Reading Instrument Used
for Both Air Velocity & Static Pressure Tests
Simple and quick, the No. 460 Air Meter is
popular for servicing air conditioning, heat-
ing and ventilating equipment. Direct read-
ing velocity and static pressure scales — both
low and high ranges — show supply and re-
turn grille velocities, furnace draft, pressure
drop across filters, etc. The 460 gives consis-
tent, accurate results with no tedious calibra-
tion. Rugged plastic for rough daily use. Dual A COMPLETE POCKET-SIZE KIT
velocity ranges read 260-1200 and 1000-4000 Includes air meter, return and supply grille probes, angle connec-
fpm; pressure ranges from .005-.09 and .05 - tor, cleaning materials, instruction card, air velocity calculator, car-
1.0 inches w.c. rying case and one extra plastic ball in plastic tube (not shown).

460 Air Meter, complete kit

A-378 Tube of 3 replacement floats
Furnace
A-379 Supply grill probe draft (left)
A-380 Return grill probe
A-381 Cleaning kit including 3 anti-static chem-
ically treated pipe stem cleaners and nylon high
range orifice cleaner

Grille
velocities
(right)

243 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg244 7/21/06 4:31 PM Page 1

Model
660 Air Velocity Monitor
Continuously Measures Fume Hood Airflow

CENTER OF HOLE 4˝ (101)

SASH BELOW BOTTOM OF
01-3/32 OUTLET FULL OPEN SASH
[27.76]
HOLE TUBING
4-1/2
[114.30]
4-10˝
AIR VELOCITY
(101 - 254)

Air Velocity
MONITOR
2-53/64
[71.83] SIDE WALL
SASH TRACK

1-13/64 7/32
5/8 2-3/4
[30.56] [5.56]
[15.88] [69.85]
3-13/64
[81.36]

Model 660 Air Velocity Monitors are a practical, affordable way to con- SPECIFICATIONS
tinuously monitor for safe airflows through laboratory fume hoods. They Service: Air and non-combustible, non-corrosive gases.
are typically installed in the fume hood side fascia and connected to the High Setpoint Range: 0-275 FPM (0-1.397 m/s).
interior sidewall via 11⁄8" flexible tubing. As the exhaust fan draws air Low Setpoint Range: 0-150 FPM (0-.792 m/s).
through the device, a sensitive constant temperature thermistor measures Repeatability: ±7% of full span, 0-50 and 150-275 FPM; ±5% of full
span, 50-150 FPM.
flow and lights a green (normal), yellow (high) or red (low) LED. An audi- Compensated Temperature Range: 50 to 90°F (10 to 32.2°C).
ble alarm also warns of low flow and requires manual resetting. Mounting Operating Temperature Range: 32 to 120°F (0 to 48.9°C).
holes fit standard single gang electrical box. Power Supply: 24 VAC, 3 watts maximum.
Response Time: 6-10 seconds.
Warm-Up Time: 3-5 minutes (no flow).
Audible Alarm: 75 dB between 3-10 feet.
Model 660 Air Velocity Monitor. Includes Weight: 3 oz (85 g).
3’ flexible tubing, pre-fittings and 90° elbow, Mounting Hardware: (2) #6 x 1" sheet metal screws, (2) 6-32 x 7⁄8"
120 VAC to 24 VAC power transformer. machine screws.

(Note: Standard discounts do not apply to the Wind Speed Indicator or Windmeter. Sporting goods dealers and distributors: Contact factory for quantity discounts.)

Mark II Wind Speed Indicator Portable Wind Meter

Hold this
Ideal for yachtsmen, way for
low scale
outdoorsmen, farmers, reading.
etc. A welcome gift.
Use anywhere. Direct
reading, no calcula-
Molded white plastic tions. Hold meter at eye
instrument has gold level, back of unit to
tone scale, 73⁄8"W X wind. White ball in tube
55⁄8"H X 11⁄8"D. Includes indicates wind speed.
ABS plastic vane, 50’ For high
tubing, mounting Meter has two scales scale
hardware and gage for maximum accuracy reading,
oil. and easy reading — low, finger
2-10 and high, 4-66 covers
hole.
m.p.h. range. For high
Perfect for your living room, den, workshop or office. Instru- range, cover hole with
ments are accurate, low-cost and practical. Standard model in- finger. Pocket size, stur-
dicates wind speed directly on liquid filled scale reading in both dy plastic, has case.
Miles per Hour (0-80) and Beaufort scale (1-12). Also available is
metric model, same as above but reading 0-130 kilometers per Dimensions: 5/8˝ W X 6-3/4˝ H X 17/32˝ D.
hour. To order, specify Mk II Wind Speed Indicator, MPH or Mk
II Wind Speed Indicator, KPH. Wind Meter-MPH, mph scale
Wind Meter-KNOT, knots scale
Wind Meter-KPH, kph scale
Wind Meter-MPS, mps scale
Mark II WSI, mph scale A-376 Replacement floats for windmeter, tube of 3
Mark II WSI Metric, kph scale A-377 Tube cleaning kit for windmeter

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 244
pg245 7/21/06 4:32 PM Page 1

Technical Reference Books

HVAC Fundamentals
Volume 1: Heating Systems, Furnaces, and Boilers
Fourth Edition
By James E. Brumbaugh, 2004
• Review the basics of installation, wiring, and troubleshooting for different HVAC
systems
• Compare the economy and efficiency of various fuel types
• Find formula cross references, data tables with conversions, and listings of trade
Air Velocity

organizations and equipment manufacturers

Whether you’re installing, servicing, repairing, or troubleshooting an old or new heating system,
you’ll find what you’re looking for, from wood and coal furnace maintenance to new calculations and
the latest environmental technologies and regulations.
Order Number: BK-0005
ISBN: 0764542060, Pages: 698, Paperback

HVAC Fundamentals
Volume 2: Heating System Components, Gas and Oil Burners, and Automatic Controls
Fourth Edition
By James E. Brumbaugh, 2004
• Install and repair thermostats, humidistats, automatic controls, and oil or gas
burner controls
• Review pipes, pipe fittings, piping details, valve installation, and duct systems
• Learn the best ways to handle hydronics and steam line controls
• Deal with solid fuels and understand coal firing methods

This guidebook covers everything you need to know to install, maintain, and repair the components
that run, regulate, and fuel both old and new systems.
Order Number: BK-0006
ISBN: 0764542079, Pages: 655, Paperback

HVAC Fundamentals
Volume 3: Air Conditioning, Heat Pumps, and Distribution Systems
Fourth Edition
By James E. Brumbaugh, 2004
• Learn to install and service today’s popular electronic air cleaners and filters
• Service less common heating systems such as coal-fired furnaces
• Install, maintain, and repair humidifiers and dehumidifiers
• Handle radiators, convectors, and baseboard heating units

This book provides a comprehensive, hands-on guide to installing, servicing, and repairing all basic
air-conditioning systems. It also includes complete coverage of specialized heating units such as radi-
ant heating systems, fans, exhaust systems, air filters, and more.
Order Number: BK-0007
ISBN: 0764542087, Pages: 676, Paperback

HVAC Pocket Reference

By James Brumbaugh, 2005
Your one-stop reference for:
• Conversion tables, electrical formulas, pipe thread standards, and motor ratings
• Fuel cost comparisons
• Offset calculations and valve details
• Gas and oil burner specifications
• Pipe performance data
• Weather and design factors affecting heating/cooling calculations
• Troubleshooting guidelines

When you need to check specs, confirm measurements, or make a quick metric conversion on the
job, find the answers quickly and easily – right in your pocket.
Order Number: BK-0013
ISBN: 0-7645-8810-9, Pages: 370, Paperback
245 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au
pg246 7/24/06 11:35 AM Page 1

Level
Table of Contents
Introduction to Level Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Float/Level Switches pgs 249-260
Introduction to Level Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Series L4 Flotect® Float Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Series L6 Flotect® Liquid Level Switch . . . . . . . . . . .250
Model L8 Flotect® Liquid Level Switch . . . . . . . . . . .251
Series L10 Flotect® Mini-Size Level Switch . . . . . . . .252
Series F7 Level Switches - Horizontal/Specialty . . . .253
Series F7 Level Switches - Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Series F7-MM Miniature Multi-Station
Level Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Series F7-MQ Quick-Ship Multi-Station

Level
Level Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Series F7-MS Multi-Station Level Switch . . . . . . . . .257
Model F7-MLK Multi-Level Switch Kit . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Model F7-MLK2 Multi-Level Switch Kit . . . . . . . . . . .258
Series CFS Cable Float Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Series FSW Free-Floating Level Switch . . . . . . . . . .259 Sensors/Level Controls pgs 261-264
Model OLS Optical Level Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Series 123 Cast Iron Chamber - Water
Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Series 102 Flanged Chamber Type Level Control . . .261
Series 500 Insertion Type Level Control . . . . . . . . . .262
Series 75 Torque Tube Type Level Control . . . . . . . .262
Series 201 Side Mounted-Chamber Type
Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Series 391 Side Mounted-Chamber Type
Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Series B-190 Liquid Level Switches - Controls . . . . .264
Series GS Gap Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Series LLC Conductivity Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Model DPL110 Dual Point Level Switch . . . . . . . . . .266
Model CLS1 Capacitance Level Switch . . . . . . . . . .266
Model DBLM Mini-Bin Dry Bulk Level Monitor . . . . .267
Series PS Proximity Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Series PLS Paddle Level Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Level Transmitters pgs 272-276
Explosion-Proof Ultra MagTM Level Switches . . .269-270
Series CLS2 Capacitive Level Switch . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Model CRF Continuous Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . .272
Series PLT Piezoresistive Level Transmitter . . . . . . .272
Series CLT Continuous Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . .273
Series UT Ultrasonic Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . .274
Series SPT Submersible Pressure Transmitter . . . . .275
Series SBLT2 Submersible Level Transmitter . . . . . .275
Series PBLT Submersible Level Transmitter . . . . . . .276
Series PBLT2 Submersible Level Transmitter . . . . . .276
Series MPC Pump Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Series MPC Jr. Pump Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Series PCP Relay/Controller/Power Supply . . . . . . .279
Series TLI Tank Level Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Model WD Water Detector and Sensor Tape . . . . . .280
Series VR View-Rite Level Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Series MVR Mini View-Rite Level Indicator . . . . . . . .282

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 246
pg247 7/24/06 11:36 AM Page 1

Introduction to Level Controls

Most of the devices featured in this section use the magnetic attraction or repulsion system of operation. This rugged electro-me-
chanical design has proven itself for more than 50 years and millions of heavy duty applications. The electro-mechanical system con-
sists of an attractor of magnetic material, usually 430 SS, or a magnet inside the control and a movable magnet outside the device.
As the attractor moves in or out of the magnetic field the magnet moves toward or away from the attractor. The magnet is attached
to one or more snap action or mercury switches. As the magnet moves it pivots and operates the switch assembly to either make or
break one or more electrical contacts. This switch action performs the task of operating equipment, alarms, shutdowns, and/or re-
ports such functions to a computer or central location. Controls featuring this magnet operated system can be used at temperatures
up to 800°F (425°C) and pressures up to 1750 psig (121 bar). Liquid level controls are available to handle fluids from water to more
aggressive liquids requiring all 316 SS construction. Dry bulk controls can handle materials from carbon black to soybean flour. Elec-
trical contacts of SPST, SPDT, or DPDT configuration are provided to accommodate applications from 12 amperes AC, 10 amperes
DC, to milliampere requirements of high technology low current, low voltage intrinsically safe or “dry” circuits. General purpose,
weatherproof or explosion-proof enclosures protect the electrical switch assemblies from the environment.
Dwyer® Dry Bulk or Liquid Level controls are designed to perform two functions.
Level

A. To maintain a level. This task is usually completed by using a control with a wide deadband, or two fixed deadband controls and a
holding relay. Thus when the level of a liquid or dry bulk material reaches a pre-determined high (or low) point a pump is shut off or
turned on. This cycle is repeated continuously such as in a sump, tank, lubrication equipment, bin or other pressurized or non-pres-
sured vessel.
B. To monitor a safe level or detect a not-to-exceed level - that is to act as an alarm, or shut down, or both. This can be either high or
low functions or both. This is accomplished by using a control with a fixed deadband. There are a great variety of controls suitable
for this purpose.
There are basically 8 determining factors when selecting a control for a specific function.
1. Pressure 8. Method of attachment
2. Temperature A. External pipe mounted
3. Specific gravity or bulk density 1. threaded
4. Fixed or adjustable deadband 2. socket weld
5. Electrical requirement 3. flanged
6. Enclosure type B. Side mounted
A. General purpose 1. threaded
B. Weatherproof 2. flanged
C. Explosion-proof C. Top mounted
7. Media compatibility with wetted parts 1. flanged
2. threaded

If the control is to be externally mounted, can the chamber be a welded type such as for use with clean non-corrosive liquids or should
it be flanged so that the unit can be inspected and/or easily maintained? Welded chamber benefits are that they are usually less ex-
pensive than flanged controls and can be used with higher pressure and temperature. The disadvantage is that the unit cannot be
disassembled for cleaning or inspection. Flanged units can be disassembled but are more expensive and have lower pressure and tem-
perature capability.
Controls for top mounted service are generally capable of performing a greater variety of functions such as operating 1, 2 or 3 pumps,
providing high and low alarm or combining functions such as operating a pump and providing both high and low alarms in one unit.
Consult the factory or your nearest sales office if you cannot determine the best control for your application based on the informa-
tion in the technical guide.

247 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg248 7/24/06 11:36 AM Page 1

Series MPC
Pump Fill Pipe
Mercoid pump ®
Controller L4 High Limit
controller with Float
Switch
level transmitter
control pumps Indicator Lamps
in wastewater
lift stations. Inlet
Outlet L4
Control Float
Low
Panel Switch
Limit
Series PBLT
Level Transmitter

Submersible Pumps
Drain
Lift stations are used to transmit wastewater to the treatment facility.
Wastewater is transmitted by gravity feed so it has to be continually ele- Reliable float switches monitor and control liquid
vated to provide height to generate the flow. Lift stations are pits located level.
at points in the wastewater system to collect the wastewater that usually
The W.E. Anderson® L4 float switch provides a simple, reliable

Level
have two submersible pumps. Wastewater in the lift station is pumped
out to a higher level from where it can flow on to the next lift station or to means for monitoring and controlling the level of a liquid in a large
the treatment facility. The Mercoid® Series MPC pump controller is used tank. In this holding tank application, the lower L4 indicates to the
with the Series PBLT level transmitter to control the level in the lift station. operator that a tank fill cycle is required; the L4 can also control
The PBLT is a level transmitter that is submersed in the tank and sends a the necessary valve or pump to provide an automatic fill cycle.
linear output of the height of wastewater above it. The MPC takes the When the level of the liquid reaches the upper L4, the switch acti-
height input and controls the pumps according to how it has been pro- vates another indicator lamp or terminates the automatic fill cycle.
grammed. For a lift station, the primary pump comes on when the tank The L4 float switch in optional stainless steel is recommended for
hits a high level and turns off when the level decreases to the set low level. level control of corrosive liquids, while the lower cost standard
The second pump is used if the first pump cannot drain the station and brass L4 serves well in most water and oil applications.
comes on at a set higher level above pump 1. High and low level alarms,
submersible pump seal failure indication, pump over temperature protec-
tion, and pump alteration all are built into the MPC.

Supply

Grain
Series PLS hopper level
Paddle controlled
Level Switch
Silo by Series
PLS Paddle
Level
Switch.
Series PLS
Paddle
Receiving Bin Level Switch Series PLS
Paddle
Transporter Level Switch

Proximity Series PLS is used to indicate level status

in pneumatic conveying systems. Discharge

Pneumatic conveying systems use air to transport powder and dry

bulk solids through conveying lines. The air is pressurized by
positive pressure or vacuum to move the product through the The supply of grain pneumatically conveyed to this dispensing
lines into and out of silos, transporters, and receivers. Typical hopper is controlled by two Proximity Series PLS paddle level
applications have high and low level indication in the storage bins switches. When the grain level falls to the low limit switch, the
to control the flow of product in or out. The PLS is perfect for supply is turned on until the hopper fills to the level of the high
level use in these storage bins. It has a rotating paddle that is limit switch which turns off the supply. Since grain dust is explo-
inserted into the bin. As the product level builds up in the bin it sive, the explosion-proof Series PLS provides the required safety
stops the paddle from rotating and triggers the level output. The protection. The PLS is a paddle level switch and is not affected by
PLS is great for this application as it not affected by pressure the varying pressure in the hopper due to the cycling of the pneu-
changes in the bin. matic conveying system.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 248
pg249 7/24/06 11:40 AM Page 1

Series
L4 Float Switch
Magnetically Operated Switch, Leak Proof Body, Explosion-Proof ®
®

SWITCH BODY OF EXPLOSION PROOF

BRASS OR 316 HOUSING WITH 3/4
FLOAT OF 316 STAINLESS FLOAT ARM CONDUIT CONNECTION
AND BLOCK DEFLECTION STAINLESS STEEL
STEEL (STANDARD) STOP
316 STAINLESS 16 GA. LEADS,
STEELOR BRASS 1-1/2 NPT 6 [152.4] LONG
HINGE
PIN 2-1/2
1-5/8 [63.5] 3-11/32
[41.28] LOCK [84.93]
NUT MAGNET KEEPER
HEX FLOAT 3-15/16
CONNECTION 430 STAINLESS
STEEL [100.01]
5 6 5-31/32
[127] [152.4] [151.61]
8-5/32
19-5/32 [207.17]
[486.57]

Rugged and reliable the Series L4 Flotect® Level switch operates SPECIFICATIONS
automatically to indicate tank level. Perfect for starting or stopping Service: Liquids compatible with wetted materials.
pumps, opening or closing valves, or actuate level alarm signals. A Wetted Materials:
Float and Rod: 316 SS.
Level

unique magnetically actuated switching design gives superior perfor- Body: Brass or 316 SS standard.
mance. There are no bellows, springs, or seals to fail. Instead, the free- Magnet Keeper: 430 SS standard, 316 SS or Nickel optional.
swinging float attracts a magnet within the solid metal switch body, Temperature Limits: 4 to 275°F (-20 to 135°C) standard, MT high temper-
actuating a snap switch by means of a simple lever arm. Float arm ature option 400°F (205°C) [MT option not UL, CSA, ATEX, or SAA].
Pressure Limit: Brass body 1000 psig (69 bar), 316 SS body 2000 psig (138
hinge design limits the arm angle to prevent vertical hangup. bar). Standard float rated 100 psig (6.9 bar). For other floats see options.
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof and Explosion-proof. Listed with UL and
CSA for Class I, Groups C and D; Class II, Groups E, F, and G.
FEATURES ATEX 0344 II 2 G EEx d IIB T6 -20°C≤Tamb≤75°C
• Leak proof body machined from bar stock EC-Type Certificate No.: KEMA 03 ATEX 2383
• Choice of floats dependent on maximum pressure and specific SAA: Exd II C T6 (T amb = 60°C). IP66 C1 I, Zone I. Also FM approved.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch standard, DPDT snap switch optional.
gravity Electrical Rating: UL, FM, ATEX and SAA models: 10A @ 125/250 VAC (V~).
• Weatherproof, designed to meet NEMA 4 CSA models: 5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~); 5A res., 3A ind. @
• Explosion-proof (listings included in specifications) 30 VDC (V ). MV option: 1A @ 125 VAC (V~); 1A res., .5A ind. @
• Installs directly and easily into tank with a thredolet or flange (see 30 VDC (V ). MT option: 5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~). [MT and MV option not UL,
CSA, FM, ATEX or SAA].
application drawings) Electrical Connections: UL and CSA models: 16 AWG, 6˝ (152 mm) long.
• Electrical assembly can be easily replaced without removing the ATEX and SAA unit: terminal block.
unit from the installation so that the process does not have to be Process Connection: 1-1/2˝ male NPT standard, 2-1/2˝ male NPT required
shut down. for optional floats.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal installation standard, optional vertical top
• Horizontal installation or optional top mount vertical installation mount.
Weight: 4 lb 9 oz (2.07 kg).
APPLICATIONS Dead Band: 3⁄4˝ (19 mm) for standard float.
Specific Gravity: 0.7 minimum with standard float. For other floats see
• Direct pump control for maintaining level options.
• Automatic tank dump operations Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, FM, CE and ATEX.
• Control levels or provide alarms in sumps, scrubber systems,
hydro-pneumatic tanks, low pressure boilers, and various waste
water/sewage treatment processes

MODELS
Model No. Description
APPLICATION DRAWINGS FOR FLOTECT® FLOAT SWITCHES
L4 Brass body, side wall mounting
L4SS 316SS* body, sidewall mounting
1-1/2 THREDOLET ANSI RF THREADED
REDUCING FLANGE *316SS body and float with 430SS magnet keeper (wetted part).
CUT HOLE 1-15/16 [49] DIA.

Options for L4 Switches above — Add suffixes to model numbers

DPDT contacts, add suffix -D ...................................................................................
11-3/4 Gold Plated Contacts option for dry circuits, add suffix -MV
3/4 NPT [298.5]
(see electrical rating in specifications, no listings or approvals).....................................
High Temperature option rated 400°F (204°C), add suffix -MT
STANDARD INSTALLATION HORIZONTAL, FLANGE INSTALLATION (see electrical rating in specifications, no listings or approvals).....................................
Time Delay Relay option with 2 SPDT contacts, adjustable from 0-1
to 0-31 minutes. Add suffix -TRI (increasing flow) or
2-1/2 -TRD (decreasing flow) (no listings or approvals) ........................................................
CUT HOLE 3/4 NPT 316 SS Magnet Keeper option to replace standard 430 SS,
THREDOLET ANSI RF
2-7/8 [73] DIA. THREADED add suffix -316............................................................................................................
REDUCING ATEX approved construction, add suffix -AT ..............................................................
FLANGE SAA approved construction, add suffix -SAA .............................................................
Top Mounted option for vertical flange installation
(distance from flange face to centerline of float to be specified,
2-1/2 X 1-1/2 20˝ (508 mm) maximum), add suffix -TOP ...................................................................
FACE BUSHING Optional Floats (all 2-1/2˝ spherical):
304 SS rated 50 psig (3.5 bar) and 0.5 min. s.g., add suffix -50..................................
*FLANGE FACE TO CENTERLINE OF FLOAT 316 SS rated 150 psig (10.3 bar) and 0.7 min. s.g., add suffix -150............................
SPECIFIED BY CUSTOMER. NORMALLY 304 SS rated 300 psig (20.7 bar) and 0.7 min. s.g., add suffix -300............................
HORIZONTAL, 2-1/2 THREDOLET INSTALLATION SHOULD NOT EXCEED 20˝ [508 mm].
WITH OPTIONAL 2-1/2 [64] SPHERICAL FLOAT Consult factory for price and availability of fittings for L4 installation. Thredolets, bush-
VERTICAL, FLANGE INSTALLATION ings, and flanges are available in a variety of sizes and materials.

249 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg250 7/24/06 11:40 AM Page 1

Series
Liquid Level Switch
®
®

L6
Easy In-wall or External Installation, Up to 2000 psig (138 bar)
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL L6 WITH EXTERNAL FLOAT CHAMBER Service: Liquids compatible with wetted materials.
1 FEMALE
NPT TYP 2 PLACES
Wetted Materials:
3/4 MALE NPT
CONDUIT CONNECTION
Float: Solid polypropylene or 304 SS.
Lower Body: Brass or 303 SS.
3-5/64
[78.18]
Magnet: Ceramic.
Ø1-1/16
External Float Chamber (Tee): Matches lower body choice of
[26.99] brass or 303 SS.
1-9/64
[28.97]
Other: Lever Arm, Spring, Pin, etc.: 301 SS.
2 [50.80]
HEX 8-9/16 Temperature Limit: -4 to 220°F (-20 to 105°C) Standard, MT high
[217.49]
temperature option 400°F (205°C)(MT not UL, CSA or ATEX). ATEX compli-
ant AT option ambient temperature: -4 to 167°F (-20 to 75°C) process tem-
MODEL L6 WITH SPHERICAL FLOAT perature: -4 to 220°F (-20 to 105°C).
Pressure Limits: See chart below.
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof and Explosion-proof. Listed with UL and
CSA for Class I, Groups A, B, C and D; Class II, Groups E, F, and G.

Level
(Group A on stainless steel body models only).ATEX 0344 II 2 G EEx
d IIC T6 Process Temp≤75°C. EC-Type Certificate No.: KEMA 04ATEX2128
Ø1 [25.40] 3/4 MALE NPT
1 MALE NPT
CONDUIT CONNECTION Switch Type: SPDT snap switch standard, DPDT snap switch optional.
Electrical Rating: UL models: 5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~). CSA and ATEX
models: 5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~); 5A res., 3A ind. @ 30 VDC (V ). MV
3/4 Ø1-1/16
option: .1A @ 125 VAC (V~). MT option: 5A @125/250 VAC (V~). [MT option
[26.99]
1-3/4
[44.45]
[19.05] 6
[152.40]
not UL, CSA or ATEX].
Electrical Connections: UL models: 18 AWG, 18˝ (460 mm) long. CSA and
MODEL L6 WITH CYLINDRICAL FLOAT ATEX models: terminal block.
Upper Body: Brass or 303 SS.
Conduit Connection: 3/4˝ male NPT standard, 3/4˝ female NPT on
junction box models.
Process Connection: 1˝ male NPT on models without external float
Ø1 [25.40] x 2 [50.80] chamber, 1˝ female NPT on models with external float chamber.
LONG FLOAT
1 MALE NPT 3/4 MALE NPT
CONDUIT CONNECTION
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal with index arrow pointing down.
Weight: Approximately 1 lb (.5 kg) without external float chamber, 1.75 lb
(.8 kg) with external float chamber.
2-7/8
1-1/16
[26.99] 6-1/2
Ø1-1/16
[26.99] Specific Gravity: See chart below.
[73.03] [165.10]
Agency Approvals: UL, CSA, CE and ATEX.

MODELS
Max. Pressure Min.
Model No. Body Installation Float Material psig (bar) Sp. Gr.
L6EPB-B-S-3-O Brass Side Wall Mounting Polypropylene Spherical 1000 (69) 0.9
L6EPB-B-S-3-A Brass Side Wall Mounting 304 SS Cylindrical 200 (13.8) 0.5
L6EPB-B-S-3-C Brass Side Wall Mounting 304 SS Spherical 350 (24.1) 0.7
L6EPB-B-S-3-B Brass Brass External Float Chamber (Tee) Polypropylene Spherical 250 (17.2) 0.9
L6EPB-B-S-3-H Brass Brass External Float Chamber (Tee) 304 SS Spherical 250 (17.2) 0.7
L6EPB-S-S-3-O 303 SS Side Wall Mounting Polypropylene Spherical 2000 (138) 0.9
L6EPB-S-S-3-A 303 SS Side Wall Mounting 304 SS Cylindrical 200 (13.8) 0.5
L6EPB-S-S-3-C 303 SS Side Wall Mounting 304 SS Spherical 350 (24.1) 0.7
L6EPB-S-S-3-S 303 SS 304 SS External Float Chamber (Tee) Polypropylene Spherical 2000 (138) 0.9
L6EPB-S-S-3-L 303 SS 304 SS External Float Chamber (Tee) 304 SS Spherical 350 (24.1) 0.7

Surprisingly compact, the Series L6 Flotect® Level switch is de- Options:

signed and built for years of trouble-free service in a wide variety of Gold Plated Contacts option for dry circuits,add suffix -MV
process liquid level applications. Operation is simple and dependable (see electrical rating in specifications)
with no mechanical linkage as the level switch is magnetically actuated. High Temperature option rated 400°F (204°C), add suffix -MT
(see electrical rating in specifications, no listings or
The float lever pivoted within the body moves when the process liquid approvals, only available on models with stainless
displaces the float. A magnet on the opposite end of the float lever con- steel floats)
trols a second magnet on the switch actuating lever located in the CSA and UL approved construction, includes weatherproof and
switch housing. explosion-proof junction box,
add suffix -CSA
FEATURES ATEX approved construction includes, weatherproof and explosion-proof,
junction box
• Leak proof lower body machined from bar stock
add suffix -AT
• Choice of models for direct side wall mounting or mounted in a tee DPDT contacts, change seventh character in model
to act as an external float chamber number to “D”. Example: L6EPB-B-D-3-O
• Weatherproof 303 Stainless Steel Upper Body, change fifth character in
• Explosion-proof (listings included in specifications) model number to “S”. Example: L6EPS-S-S-3-S
• Electrical assembly can be easily replaced without removing the
unit from the installation so that the process does not have to be Options Not Shown: 1-1/2˝ and 2˝ male NPT process connection, 2˝ female
shut down NPT connection tee, and top mount.
• Sensitive to level changes of less than 1/2˝ (12 mm)
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 250
pg251 7/24/06 11:43 AM Page 1

Model
L8 Liquid Level Switch
Low Cost, Leak Proof Body C
Excellent Chemical Resistance

Model L8
Model L8-WP
8-5/16 10-7/8
(3) 18 AWG
3-1/16 [211.12] 4-5/16 [276.23]
LEAD WIRES 4-5/16
[77.79]1-5/16 [33.32] [109.52] 3-1/16
18 [457.2] LONG [109.52]
OCTAGON [77.79]
Ø1-21/32
[42.07]

Ø1-21/32
[42.07]
1/2˝ NPT(M) SWITCH 1˝ NPT(M)
Level

BODY 1 NPT(M)
FLOAT 1/2 NPT(M) 1-5/16 OCTAGON
4-17/32
4-17/32
[115.09] [33.32]
[115.09]
2-17/32
[64.29] 2-17/32
[64.29]

Ø1-1/8 Ø1-1/8
[28.58] [28.58]

Model L8 Flotect® Liquid Level Switch features a leak SPECIFICATIONS

proof body and float constructed from tough, durable Service: Compatible liquids.
polyphenylene sulfide which has excellent chemical resistance. Wetted Materials:
Because the liquid level snap switch is magnetically actuated, Float and Body: Polyphenylene Sulfide (PPS).
there is no direct mechanical linkage to leak or fail, assuring Pin and Spring: 316 SS or Inconel.
longer life and decreased maintenance costs. This inexpensive Magnet: Ceramic 8.
unit is ideal for liquid level alarm, indication or control. Instal- Temperature Limit: 212°F (100°C).
lation is quick and easy — simply install in a horizontal position Pressure Limit: 150 psig (10.34 bar).
with the index arrow pointing down. Enclosure Rating: General purpose. WP option is weatherproof.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch. MV option is a SPDT gold con-
The L8 Flotect® Liquid Level Control is UL recognized as an in- tact snap switch.
dustrial motor controller per UL standard 508, suitable for Electrical Rating: 5A @ 125/250 VAC, 5A resistive, 3A inductive @
mounting in a protected environment. This lightweight switch 30 VDC. MV option: 1A @ 125 VAC, 1A resistive, 0.5A inductive @
can be used in numerous chemical process, industrial systems 30 VDC.
and similar applications where process conditions are compati- Electrical Connections: 18 AWG, 18˝ (460 mm) long.
ble with polyphenylene sulfide, ceramic 8 and 316 SS. This liq- Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ male NPT.
uid level switch provides accurate setpoint control of liquids Process Connection: 1˝ male NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal with index arrow pointing down.
with specific gravities as low as 0.6. This compact and reliable Weight: 5 oz (0.142 kg).
control is designed to handle temperatures up to 212°F (100°C) Agency Approvals: CE, UL 508 for US and Canada.
and pressures to 150 psig (10 bar). Specific Gravity: 0.6 minimum.

APPLICATIONS
The Model L8 Flotect® Liquid Level Switch is ideal for prede-
termined liquid levels in tanks through pump control or sole-
noid valve control. It provides excellent liquid level alarm or L8 Level Switch
indication when combined with the Series AN14 Indicating An-
nunciator. OPTIONS:
Gold Plated Contacts, for dry circuits. Rated 1A @ 125 VAC; 1A
resistive, 0.5A inductive @ 30 VDC. To order add suffix
• Environmental control • Chemical/Petroleum processing -MV. Example: L8-MV
• Waste water • Plating and washing tanks Inconel® Alloy Option. Inconel® Alloy replaces standard 316 SS
• Scrubber systems • Sewage treatment wetted parts. Wetted parts are Inconel® Alloy, ceramic 8, and
• Holding tanks • Car washes Polyphenylene Sulfide. To order add suffix -INC.
Example: L8-INC
• Cooling towers • Remediation systems
Weatherproof Enclosure. Optional housing is phenylpolioxide
and provides weatherproof protection for electrical wiring. To order
Inconel® is a registered trademark of Huntington Alloys Corporation. add suffix -WP. (Not UL approved)
Example: L8-WP

251 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg252 7/24/06 11:43 AM Page 1

Series
L10 Mini-Size Level Switch
Easy In-wall or External Installation, Specific Gravities as Low as 0.5
®

External Float Chamber

Spherical Float
Cylindrical Float 5-7/16

Level
1-3/4 3-1/4
[44.5] 3/4 [82.6] 2-7/8 3-1/2 2-3/8 [138.1]
[19.1] [73.0] 1-1/16 [88.9] [60.3]
[27.0]
1 [25.4]
1 [25.4]
2-1/4 [57.2] 2-1/4 [57.15] 3 1 [25.4]
1-1/4 [73.0] [76.2] 2-1/4 [57.2]
1 MALE NPT 1 MALE NPT
1 [25.4]
DIA. FLOAT 1/8 NPT – 1/4 [6.4] 1 [25.4] DIA. X 1/8 NPT – 1/4 [6.4]
TRAVEL TO 1/8 NPT 1/4 [6.4]
SWITCH SHOWN TRAVEL TO 2 [50.8] LONG SWITCH 1 1 SWITCH
IN NORMALLY NORMALLY TRAVEL TO
NORMALLY FLOAT SHOWN [25.4] FEMALE SHOWN NORMALLY
OPEN POSITION CLOSED CLOSED
IN NORMALLY POSITION NPT IN NORMALLY CLOSED POSITION
POSITION OPEN POSITION OPEN POSITION

The Mini-Size Series L10 Flotect® Level Switches combine low cost SPECIFICATIONS
with top quality materials and construction for great value and years of re- Service: Compatible liquids.
liable liquid level control. Wide media compatibility is assured with a choice Wetted Materials:
of brass or stainless steel bodies and external tees; polypropylene or stain- Float: Solid Polypropylene or 304 SS.
less steel floats. Two basic configurations are offered; with 1" male NPT Body: Brass or 303 SS.
threads for direct side mounting through a half coupling or with factory in- Magnet: Ceramic.
stalled tee for external mounting.
External Float Chamber (Tee): None, Brass, or 304 SS.
All Series L10 controls feature a hermetically sealed, magnetically actuat- Other: Lever Arm, Pin, Spring, etc.: 301 SS.
ed SPST reed switch which is encapsulated in a polypropylene housing. Temperature Limit: 200°F (93°C).
Units are quickly and easily adjusted for your choice of normally open or Pressure Limit: See chart below.
normally closed operation thanks to a unique patented design. Just loosen Switch Type: SPST hermetically sealed reed switch. Field adjustable
two screws and instantly slide the switch assembly to the action required. for normally open or normally closed.
N.O. and N.C. markings are clearly visible. This feature also speeds switch Electrical Rating: 1.5A @ 24 VDC resistive, 0.001A @ 200 VDC
replacement if damage occurs. resistive, 0.5A @ 125 VAC.
Electrical Connections: 22 AWG, 18˝ (460 mm) long.
Three types of floats are offered to accommodate liquids with specific gravities Conduit Connection: 1/8˝ male NPT.
as low as 0.5; maximum pressures to 2000 psig (137.8 bar). Wire leads are 22 Process Connection: 1˝ male NPT standard on models without
AWG x 18" (460 mm) and exit the switch assembly through 1/8˝ male NPT external float chamber. Change 3 in model number to 4 for 1-1/4˝, to 5
threads. These controls are UL recognized and CSA listed. for 1-1/2˝, or 6 for 2˝. 1˝ female NPT on models with external float
chamber.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal with index arrow pointing down.
Weight: Approximately 9 oz (0.255 kg) without external float chamber,
2.25 lb (1.02 kg) with external float chamber.
Specific Gravity: See chart below.
Agency Approvals: UL and CSA.
NORMALLY OPEN NORMALLY CLOSED
Switch Enclosure: Polypropylene.

MODELS
Model Body Installation/ Float Max. Press. Min.
Number Material Mounting Material psig (bar) S.G.
L10-B-3-O Brass Side Wall Mounting Polypropylene Spherical 1000 (69) 0.9
L10-B-3-A Brass Side Wall Mounting 304 SS Cylindrical 200 (13.8) 0.5
L10-B-3-C Brass Side Wall Mounting 304 SS Spherical 350 (24.1) 0.7
L10-B-3-B Brass Brass External Float Chamber (Tee) Polypropylene Spherical 250 (17.2) 0.9
L10-B-3-H Brass Brass External Float Chamber (Tee) 304 SS Spherical 250 (17.2) 0.7
L10-S-3-O 303 SS Side Wall Mounting Polypropylene Spherical 2000 (137.8) 0.9
L10-S-3-A 303 SS Side Wall Mounting 304 SS Cylindrical 200 (13.8) 0.5
L10-S-3-C 303 SS Side Wall Mounting 304 SS Spherical 350 (24.1) 0.7
L10-S-3-S 303 SS 304 SS External Float Chamber (Tee) Polypropylene Spherical 2000 (137.8) 0.9
L10-S-3-L 303 SS 304 SS External Float Chamber (Tee) 304 SS Spherical 350 (24.1) 0.7

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 252
pg253 8/2/06 2:38 PM Page 1

Series
F7
Level Switches - Horizontal/Specialty
Low Cost, Hermetically Sealed Contacts

F7-HSS
F7-HPS-11

F7-HPS-21 F7-SS5BNC

F7-LL
F7-WBB
F7-EB JUNCTION BOX
F7-MHS
3.750 F7-EBX ONLY
3.8 4.25 [95.3]
[97] [108] 2.875
[73] 1/2 NPT FEMALE
0.7 DIA. 0.63" 1.375 1.00
[18] [16] .69
[18] [34.9] [25.4]
1.00 1-3/4
[25.4]
2-3/4 [44.5]
Level

[70]
.1875 [4.76] 7
2.6 1/2" NPT 2.9" 1/2-13 [178]
THREAD 4-1/4
[65] [73] [108]
0.3
[8]
F7-HPS-21 F7-MHS
F7-HPS-11

Ø2-5/8 2-1/8
1/2-13 BULKHEAD [67] [54]
F7-EB
13/16 MIN
FITTING (20.6)
CENTERLINE 22 AWG 1/8 NPT
LEAD WIRES
3/32 1-7/32 MAX
(2.54) (31.0)
3.250 3.500 2-3/32 1/2
[12.7] HEX 3-1/2
[82.55] [88.9] [53] [89]
APPROXIMATE 1-5/32 MAX
(29.2) 1-15/32
ACTUATION [37]15/16 1/4
LEVEL 4-5/8 MAX
(116.8) [24] [6.4]
1/2-14 NPT
1-5/16
[33]
Ø1.50 Ø 5/16
5.770 [38.1] [8]
F7-HSS Ø 1-7/8
[47]
[146.558] Ø1-7/16
[37]
F7-SS5BNC
F7-LL F7-WBB

Series F7 Horizontal Mount Level Switches are designed to Series F7 Specialty Level Switches are designed for unique ap-
mount through the walls of tanks and other vessels. Internally mount- plications. Model F7-SS5B/BNC can be used with viscous liquids or liq-
ed models F7-HPS-1, F7-MHS and F7-SS5 are secured to the wall of the uids with suspended metal particles. Use model F7-LL for low level
tank or vessel from the inside while model F7-HPS-2 is mounted from detection (>5/8˝). The non-intrusive bottle style F7-EB mounts com-
the outside (externally). Model F7-HSS can be installed internally or ex- pletely outside the tank at the actuation level. Suspend model F7-WBB
ternally. in stand pipes or sumps for leak detection or drop into wells for ground-
water monitoring.
MODELS - Horizontal Mount Switches
Model Applications Material Temp. Press. Min. Electrical Wire Mtg Weight
Number Float/Stem Limits Limits S.G. Rating Leads oz (g)
Water, oils, chemicals Polypropylene/ 225˚F 100 psig 20 VA: 0.08A @ 240VAC 22 AWG 24˝ 5/8˝-11 1.5 (43)
F7-HPS-11 0.55
NSF approved Polypropylene* 107˚C 6.89 bar [61 cm] thread (int)
Water, oils, chemicals Polypropylene/ 225˚F 100 psig 20 VA: 0.08A @ 240VAC 22 AWG, 24˝ 1/2˝ NPT 2 (58)
F7-HPS-21 0.55
NSF approved Polypropylene* 107˚C 6.89 bar [61 cm] (ext)
High temperatures, 316 SS/ 392˚F 100 psig 30 VA: 0.14A @ 220VAC 22 AWG, 24˝ 1/2˝-13 bulk- 2 (58)
F7-MHS 0.70
corrosives 316 SS 200˚C 6.89 bar [61 cm] head (int)
High temp/pressure, 316 SS 392˚F 300 psig 30 VA: 0.14A @ 220VAC 22 AWG, 24˝ 1/2˝ NPT 3 (94)
F7-HSS† 0.60
corrosives, Expl. 316 SS 200˚C 20.7 bar [61 cm] (int/ext)

MODELS - Specialty Switches

Model Style/ Material Temp. Press. Min. Electrical Wire Mtg Weight
Number Applications Float/Stem Limits Limits S.G. Rating Leads oz (g)
Bent stem/liquids 316 SS/ 300˚F 100 psig 20 VA: 0.08A @ 220VAC 22 AWG, 24˝ 1/8˝ NPT 2 (58)
F7-SS6 0.70
with metal particles 316 SS 149˚C 7 bar N.O. operation [61 cm] male
Bent stem/liquids 316 SS/ 300˚F 100 psig 20 VA: 0.08A @ 220VAC 22 AWG, 24˝ 3/8˝-24” 2 (58)
F7-SS6B 0.70
with metal particles 316 SS 149˚C 7 bar N.C. operation [61 cm] male
Non-intrusive bottle type/ Brass/316 SS 300˚F 500 psig 20 VA: 0.08A @ 240VAC 18 AWG, 24˝ 3/4˝ NPT 5 lb 5 oz
F7-EB‡** 0.75
outside tank mounting (Brass housing) 149˚C 34 bar [61 cm] female (2.4 kg)
Vertical/detect levels as Polysulfone/ 180˚F 50 psig 20 VA: 0.08A @ 240VAC 22 AWG, 72˝ 1/8˝ NPT 2 (58)
F7-LL —
low as 5/8” Buna-N 82˚C 3 bar [182 cm] male
25 ft. cable, slosh shield/ Brass/ 180˚F 150 psig 20 VA: 0.08A @ 240VAC 22 AWG, 25 ft. — 10.8 (310)
F7-WBB 0.45
sumps, stand pipes Buna-N 82˚C 10 bar [7.6 m]
* Contains 20% glass. ‡ Explosion proof model available with DPDT switch. Specify F7-EBX.
† F7-HSS is rated explosion-proof for Class I, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, ** Model available with Normally Closed Swith. Specify F7-EBNC.
Groups E, F, G; Class III.

253 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg254 7/24/06 11:46 AM Page 1

Series
F7 Level Switches - Vertical
Low Cost, Reliable and Compact, Hermetically Sealed Contacts

D 1/8" NPT(M)
A
F7-SB F7-ST713 C

Series F7 compact level switches combine low cost and re- DIMENSIONS in Inches [mm]
liability with fast, simple installation. Hermetically sealed reed Model (A) Stem (B) Float (C) Float (D) Actuation

Level
switches are actuated by magnets permanently bonded inside Number Length Diameter Height from Hex
F7-SB 2.75 [70] 1.38 [35] 1.13 [29] 1.2 [31]
the float and can be easily adapted to open or close a circuit on
F7-SS2 2.06 [52] 1.0 [25] 1.0 [25] 0.73 [19]
rising or falling levels. Vertical mount models are shipped with F7-MPP 1.63 [41] 0.63 [16] 0.63 [16] 0.47 [12]
normally open switch contacts which close as the float rises to- F7-PP 2.18 [55] 1.18 [30] 1.0 [25] 0.69 [18]
ward the mounting threads. Reverse switch action by removing F7-BT 2.18 [55] 1.18 [30] 1.0 [25] 0.69 [18]
the float, rotating it end-for-end and replacing it on the stem. Ver- F7-K 2.13 [54] 1.0 [25] 1.0 [25] 0.65 [17]
F7-C11 2.06 [52] 1.0 [25] 1.0 [25] 0.56 [14]
tical models mount internally, oriented within 30° of vertical, or
F7-C21 2.06 [24] 1.0 [25] 1.0 [25] 0.56 [14]]
select optional fittings for external mounting. Switch ratings are F7-BB 3.19 [81] 1.88 [48] 1.81 [46] 1.19 [30]
suitable for many solid state control systems and monitors or F7-PS 3.38 [86] 1.88 [48] 1.88 [48] 1.25 [32]
alarms. Simple relay interfaces can be used for higher current F7-PVC 3.44 [87] 1.5 [38] 1.81 [46] 0.75 [19]
applications. F7-T1 3.47 [88] 2.13 [54] 1.94 [49] 0.92 [22]
F7-ST713 3.38 [86] 2.06 [52] 2.06 [52] 1.09 [28]
MODELS F7-ST714 3.38 [86] 2.06 [52] 2.06 52] 1.09 [28]

Model Applications Material Temp. Press. Min. Electrical Wire Mtg Weight
Number Float/Stem Limits Limits S.G. Rating Leads NPT(M) oz (g)
Buna-N & Epoxy/ 220˚F 150 psig 25 VA: 1A @ 220VAC 22 AWG 18˝ 1/8˝ 2 (58)
F7-SB General purpose 0.60
316 SS 105˚C 10 bar [45 cm]
High temp/pressure, 316SS (CYC)/ 300˚F 450 psig 25 VA: 1A @ 200VAC 22 AWG, 18˝ 1/8˝ 1.2 (34))
F7-SS2 0.75
corrosives 316 SS 149˚C 31 bar [45 cm]
Broad chemical Polypropylene/ 180˚F 100 psig 10 VA: 0.1A @ 100VAC 22 AWG, 24˝ 1/8˝ 0.8 (23)
F7-MPP** 0.90
compatibility Polypropylene 82˚C 6.89 bar [61 cm]
Broad chemical Polypropylene/ 176˚F 100 psig 50 VA: 0.2A @ 240VAC 22 AWG, 24˝ 1/8˝ 0.8 (23)
F7-MPP-NO** 0.90
compatibility Polypropylene 80˚C 6.89 bar [61 cm]
Broad chemical Polypropylene & 220˚F 100 psig 30 VA: 0.14A @ 220VAC 22 AWG, 24˝ 1/8˝ 0.8 (23)
F7-PP 0.60
compatibility Epoxy/Polypropylene 105˚C 6.89 bar [61 cm]
Buna-N & Epoxy/ 220˚F 150 psig 30 VA: 0.14A @ 220VAC 22 AWG, 24˝ 1/8˝ 0.7 (20)
F7-BT Oils & Fuels 0.45
PBT* 105˚C 10 bar [61 cm]
Food/beverage, PVDF/ 180˚F 100 psig 50 VA: 0.25A @ 150VAC 22 AWG, 24˝ 1/8˝ 1.5 (43)
F7-K 1.00
corrosives PVDF 82˚C 6.89 bar [61 cm]
General Buna-N/ 180˚F 150 psig 20 VA: 0.08A @ 240VAC 22 AWG, 24˝ 1/8˝ 1.5 (43)
F7-C11 0.45
purpose Brass 82˚C 10 bar [61 cm]
Oils & water, Buna-N/ 180˚F 150 psig 20 VA: 0.08A @ 240VAC 22 AWG, 24˝ 1/8˝ 1.5 (43)
F7-C21 0.45
general purpose 316 SS 82˚C 10 bar [61 cm]
High viscosity Buna-N/ 180˚F 150 psig 20 VA: 0.08A @ 240VAC 22 AWG, 24˝ 1/4˝ 5 (140)
F7-BB 0.55
liquids Brass 82˚C 10 bar [61 cm]
Water-based liquids, Polysulfone/ 225˚F 50 psig 20 VA: 0.08A @ 240VAC 22 AWG, 24˝ 1/4˝ 4 (110)
F7-PS 0.55
complies with FDA Polysulfone† 107˚C 3 bar [61 cm]
Chemical & CPVC/ 180˚F 15 psig 20 VA: 0.08A @ 240VAC 22 AWG, 24˝ 1/4˝ 5 (140)
F7-PVC 0.85
plating CPVC 82˚C 1 bar [61 cm]
Viscous, sticky or PTFE/ 300˚F 30 psig 20 VA: 0.08A @ 240VAC 22 AWG, 24˝ 1/4˝ 6 (170)
F7-T1 0.80
corrosive liquids TFE 149˚C 2 bar [61 cm]
Oils, water & 316 SS/ 300˚F 750 psig 20 VA: 0.08A @ 240VAC 22 AWG, 24˝ 1/4˝ 6 (170)
F7-ST713‡ 0.80
chemicals 316 SS 149˚C 52 bar [61 cm]
 Distance between hex and liquid (S.G. = 1.0) level at actuation point will vary with spe- Optional Fittings — For external mounting of vertical models
cific gravity changes.
*PBT - Polybutylene Terephthalate.
A-347, 1⁄8" x 11⁄4" NPT carbon steel adapter
† Incudes 316 SS clip.
A-347-SS, 1⁄8" x 11⁄4" NPT 316 SS adapter
‡ Spherical floats.
A-348, 1⁄8" x 11⁄2" NPT carbon steel adapter
Note: F7-SB, F7-SS2 not CSA listed. A-348-SS, 1⁄8" x 11⁄2" NPT 316 SS adapter
**F7-MPP is normally closed
F7-MPP-NO is normally open

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 254
pg255 7/24/06 11:47 AM Page 1

Series
F7-MM Miniature Multi-Station Level Switch
Custom, Lightweight, Low Cost, 316 SS or Buna-N Floats
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS

L5 A 1-1/16 Hex 1-5/16 Hex

1/8 NPT
[.125] [26.97] [33.32]
L4
1/2 HEX 3/4 NPT 1 NPT
[12.7]
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3

L3 B 6 HOLES 0 5/16 [7.95]

0 3-5/8 EQUALLY SPACED
LO ON A 3.000 B.C.
[92.08]
1-1/2 HEX
L2 [76.20]
[38.10] 3/8-24
1-5/16-12 THREAD THREAD
1/8 NPT
L1
3/16
[4.78] Type 4 Type 5 Type 6
D
FLOAT DIMENSIONS
Level

FLOAT A B D 15/16 1-1/4 1

TYPE in. in. in. [23.80] [31.75] [25.40]
F1 7/8 1-3/4 3/4 0 29/32 0 1-1/2
F2 3/4 1-7/8 1-1/16 01.000 [22.86] [38.10]
F3 3/4 1-13/16 15/16 [25.40] F2 F3
F4 13/16 2-7/16 1-7/16
F1
F5 9/16 2-7/16 1-3/4
F6 15/16 1-7/8 7/8, NO
1-3/16, NC 1-3/32 1-7/32 1-1/8
F7 13/16 2 1-1/8 1-19/32
Ø 29/32 [27.79] 1-1/32 [30.99] [28.58]
F8 3/4 1-7/8 1-1/16 Ø 29/32 [40.49] 1-9/64
Actuation Levels [22.86] [26.16]
Each switching point requires one float. [22.61] [29.79]
A = Minimum distance from actuation point to bottom of mounting. F4, F5 F6 F7 F8
B = Minimum distance between actuation levels.
D = Minimum distance from end of unit to lowest actuation point.
Miniature custom level switches with a sturdy, lightweight design SPECIFICATIONS
are ideal for tanks less than four feet (1.2 m) deep. Control up to five dif- Service: Compatible liquids.
ferent level points across a maximum length of 48˝ (121 cm). Stems and Wetted Materials: Stem, connection, and float.
mounting fixtures are available in 316 SS or brass. Temperature Limits: F1 and F2: Water, 180°F (82.2°C); Oil, -40 to
250°F (-40 to 121.1°C). All other floats: -40 to 300°F (-40 to 148.9°C).
Electrical Connection: 24˝ (61 cm) free leads #22 AWG, TFE
Models are built to your specifications jacketed.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical ±30°.

Example F7-MM B 1 5 F1 1 F7-MMB1-5F11-03.00-07.00-11.00-15.00-20.00-25.00

Construction F7-MM Multi-station level, 1 to 5 switch points
Stem & Connection B Brass with Beryllium copper stops
Material S 316SS with SS ARMCO PH-15-7MO stops
1 1/8˝ NPT
Connection 2 3/4˝ NPT (Cannot be used with float F1, F3, F7 and F8)
Type 3 1˝ NPT (Cannot be used with float F3)
4 3-5/8˝ Flange [Maximum pressure is 50 psi (3.45 bar)]
5 1-5/16-12UNF-2A (Cannot be used with float F3)
6 3/8-24
Switch Points # Put 1 to 5 for the number of switch points desired
Material Min. s.g. Max. Pres. psi (bar)
F1 Buna-N .45 300 (20.68)
F2 Buna-N .60 250 (17.24)
F3 316SS .70 100 (6.89)
Float Type
F4 316SS .85 150 (10.34)
F5 316SS 1.1 400 (27.58)
F6 PTFE .65 1000 (68.95)
F7 316SS .85 275 (18.96)
F8 316SS .90 600 (41.37)
1 SPST, .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC
Switch 2 SPST, .8A @ 120 VAC, .4A @ 240 VAC (not UL)
Type
NO switch is standard. For NC place an “*” after the corresponding set point distance in
the model number
L5 00.00 In inches referenced from bottom of connection
L4 00.00
Set Point L3 00.00 Repeat for each switch point with dashes in between.
Distance L2 00.00 No numbers needed beyond the number of switches specified. In inches for example
L1 00.00 12.25 would be 12.25˝ from the bottom of the process connection.
Overall Length L0 00.00 Maximum overall length of 48 inches (121 cm). Minimum length is L1 + D.
Options

255 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg256 7/24/06 11:50 AM Page 1

Series
F7-MQ Quick-Ship Multi-Station Level Switch
Fast Delivery, Customized, Up to Four Actuation Levels

FLOAT DIMENSIONS

L4 A
L3 1-13/16 2-3/32
1-3/4
[46.02] [53.16]
[44.45]
Ø 1-1/4 Ø 1-7/8 Ø 2-1/16
LO [31.75] BUNA-N [47.62] 316 SST [52.37]
B OPTION 2 OPTION 3
L2
F1 F2 F3

L1

Level
D MOUNTING DIMENSIONS

1/2 NPT 1/2 NPT

1/2 NPT 1.000 SQ 1-1/4 SQ
A B D
[25.40] [31.75]
1-1/2˝ 3˝ 2˝ 1-1/4 NPT 2 NPT
(38.10 mm) (76.20 mm) (50.80 mm)
Actuation Levels MOUNTING OPTION 2 MOUNTING OPTION 3
Each switching point requires one float.
A = Minimum distance from actuation point to bottom of mounting. Type 1 Type 2 Type 3
B = Minimum distance between actuation levels.
D = Minimum distance from end of unit to lowest actuation point.

Customize level switches to meet application requirements SPECIFICATIONS

quickly and affordably. Switches can be configured with up to Service: Compatible liquids.
four different control points and stem lengths up to 72˝ (1.82 m). Temperature Limits: F1 and F2 with water: 0 to 180°F (-18 to
Stems and floats are available in 316 SS or brass. 82°C); oil: -40 to 230°F (-40 to 110°C); F3: -40 to 300°F (-40 to
149°C).
Electrical Connections: 24˝ (61 cm) free leads; #22 AWG TFE
and #18 AWG Polymeric.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical ±30°.

Example F7-MQ B 1 4 F3 3 J F7-MQB1-4F33-07.00-11.00-15.00-20.00-24.00-J

Construction F7-MQ Multi-station level, 1 to 4 switch points
Stem & Connection B Brass with Beryllium copper stops
Material S 316SS with SS ARMCO PH-15-7MO stops
1 1/2˝ NPT (Float F2, F3 only)
Connection 2 1-1/4˝ NPT (Float F1 only)
Type 3 2˝ NPT(Float F2, F3 only)

Switch Points # Put 1 to 4 for the number of switch points desired

F1 Buna-N, min. s.g. 0.75, 150 psi (10.3 bar) max. pres.
Float Type F2 Buna-N, min. s.g. 0.55, 150 psi (10.3 bar) max. pres.
F3 316SS, min. s.g. 0.75, 750 psi (51.7 bar) max. pres.
Switch 1 SPST, .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC
Type 3 SPDT, .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC
NO switch is standard. For NC place an “*” after the corresponding set point distance in
the model number.
In inches referenced from bottom of connection
L4 00.00
Set Point
L3 00.00 Repeat for each switch point with dashes in between.
Distance
L2 00.00 No numbers needed beyond the number of switches specified. In inches for example
L1 00.00 12.25 would be 12.25˝ from the bottom of the process connection.

Overall L0 00.00 Minimum length is L1+D. Maximum length with Connection Length is 72˝ (1.82 m)
Length
Options J Junction box for wire leads, NEMA 4 (Not available with Connection Type 1)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 256
pg257 7/24/06 11:51 AM Page 1

Series
F7-MS Multi-Station Level Switch
Customize To Fit Application, Up to Six 316 SS or Buna-N Floats
FLOAT DIMENSIONS

L6 A
1-3/4 1-13/16 2-3/32
L5 [44.45] [46.02] [53.16]
Ø 1-1/4 Ø 1-7/8 Ø 2-1/16
[31.75] [47.62] [52.37]
L4 B F1 F2 F3
LO
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS 6 HOLES Ø 3/4 [19.05]
L3
EQUALLY SPACED
ON A 6.000 B.C.
L2 [152.4]
1/2 NPT

L1
Level

D
Type 1 1/2 NPT
1-1/4 SQ Ø7-1/2
[31.75] [190.5]
2 NPT
A B D
1/2 NPT Type 3 1/2 NPT
1-1/2˝ 3˝ 2˝ 1
1.000 SQ [25.40]
(38.10 mm) (76.20 mm) (50.80 mm) [25.40]
Actuation Levels 1-1/4 NPT
Each switching point requires one float.
A = Minimum distance from actuation point to bottom of mounting.
B = Minimum distance between actuation levels. Type 2
Type 4, 5
D = Minimum distance from end of unit to lowest actuation point.

Customize level switches to meet application requirements SPECIFICATIONS

Switches can be configured with up to six different control Service: Compatible liquids.
points and stem lengths up to 140 inches (3.56 m). Stems and Wetted Materials: Stem, connection, and float.
floats are available in 316 SS or brass. Temperature Limits: Buna-N floats: 180°F (82.2°C) in water, -40
to 230°F (-40 to 110°C) in oil; SS floats: -40 to 300°F (-40 to
148.9°C).
Wire Leads: 24˝ (61 cm) free leads; #22 AWG, TFE jacketed, and
Models are built to your specifications #18 AWG Polymeric.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical ±30°.

Example F7-MS B 1 5 F3 1 J F7-MSB1-5F31-04.00-07.00-11.00-15.00-20.00-24.00-J

Construction F7-MS Multi-station level, 1 to 6 switch points
Stem & Connection B Brass with Beryllium copper stops
Material S 316SS with SS ARMCO PH-15-7MO stops
1 1/2˝ NPT (Float F2, F3 only)
2 1-1/4˝ NPT (Float F1 only)
3 2˝ NPT
Connection
4 3˝ 150# Flange Carbon Steel (Conn. material S only, float F2, F3 only) [Max. pres. 150 psi
Type
(10.3 bar)]
5 3˝ 150# Flange 316SS (Conn. material S only, float F2, F3 only) [Max. pres.
150 psi (10.3 bar)]
Switch Points # Put 1 to 6 for the number of switch points desired
F1 Buna-N, min. s.g. 0.75, 150 psi (10.3 bar) max. pres.
Float Type F2 Buna-N, min. s.g. 0.55, 150 psi (10.3 bar) max. pres.
F3 316SS, min. s.g. 0.75, 750 psi (51.7 bar) max. pres.
1 SPST, .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC
2 SPST, .8A @ 120 VAC, .4A @ 240 VAC (Not UL)
Switch 3 SPDT, .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC
Type No switch is standard. For NC place an “*” after the corresponding set point distance
in the model number.
L6 00.00 In inches referenced from bottom of connection.
L5 00.00
Set Point L4 00.00 Repeat for each switch point with dashes in between.
Distance L3 00.00 No numbers needed beyond the number of switches specified. In inches for example
L2 00.00 12.25 would be 12.25˝ from the bottom of the process connection.
L1 00.00
Overall Minimum length is L1+D. Maximum length with Connection Type 1: 36˝ (91.4 cm),
00.00
Length Type 2: 60˝ (152.4 cm), and Types 3, 4, 5: 140˝ (355.6 cm).
J Junction box for wire leads, NEMA 4 (Not available with Connection Type 1)
Options

257 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg258 7/24/06 11:52 AM Page 1

Model
F7-MLK Multi-Level Switch Kit
One or Two Station Level Switch, Vertically Mount
.500 1/2" NPT
[12.7]
9.220
[234]
Ø1.250 4.000
[31.8] [102] 2 SWITCHES

2˝ NPT PIPE .500

7.991 MOUNTING [12.7]
[201]
12.000
[305] 1 FITTING
10.905 ASSEMBLY .500
[277] 2 BUNA-N [12.7]
1.916 FLOATS
[48.7] .875
[22.2]
.500 .875 4 TUBE
[12.7] [22.2] 1.965 UNIONS
1 TUBE END [49.9]
2.500 FITTING
2 EXTENSION [63.5]
TUBES 1.128
.875 [28.7]
[22.2]

Customize a level systemto suit your application requirements. The SPECIFICATIONS

Service: Compatible liquids.

Level
F7-MLK Multi-Level Switch Kit contains all the components necessary
Wetted Materials (Float/Stem): Buna-N/Brass.
for the design and fabrication of a 1 or 2 station level switch for pipe plug Temperature Limits: 221°F (105°C).
mounting. User can customize stem length (maximum 36˝), actuation Pressure Limits: 150 psig (10 bar).
point, distance between floats, and lead wire lengths. The switch kit is Switch Type: SPST, normally open or normally closed.
Electrical Rating: 60 Watts: 0.4A @ 220 VAC, 0.5A @ 110 VAC,
ideal for general purpose, low specific gravity, and gas and oil applications. 0.2A @ 120 VDC, 0.5A @ 24 VDC.
Model F7-MLK includes two level stations (switch, tube, and Buna-N float), Electrical Connections: 22 AWG x 72˝ (183 cm) leads.
two brass extension tubes 12˝ length, four brass tube unions, one end fit- Process Connection: 2˝ male NPT pipe plug.
ting, and one mounting plug. Mounting Orientation: Up to 30° angle from vertical.
Stem Length: 36˝ (91 cm) maximum.
Tube/Fitting Size: 1/2˝ O.D.
Model F7-MLK Multi-Level Switch Kit Minimum Specific Gravity: 0.45.
Weight: 3.5 lb (1.6 kg).

Model
F7-MLK2 Multi-Level Switch Kit
316 Stainless Steel, One or Two Station Level Switch, Vertically Mount
1.25 SQ
(1-1/4)
1.5 .500
(1-1/2) 2 NPT [12.7] 1/2˝ NPT
3/8 NPT FEMALE
1.75 TUBE CONNECTOR 1.500 4.125
(1-3/4) FLOAT TUBE AND [38.1] [108] 2 SWITCHES
SWITCH STATION .500
Ø2.063 2˝ NPT PIPE
MOUNTING [12.7]
2.125 (2-1/16) 10.000
[254]
(2-1/8) TUBE UNION 1.750
[44.5] Ø2.062
[52.4]
TUBE UNION 1 TUBE
2.125 CONNECTOR/
(2-1/8) 2.125 3 TUBE
FLOAT TUBE AND [54] UNIONS
1 TUBE END
2 SS 1.188
Ø2.063 SWITCH STATION
FITTING
FLOATS [30.1]
(2-1/16) 2 EXTENSION
1.186 TUBES
(1-3/16)
TUBE END
FITTINGS

The F7-MLK2 Multi-Level Switch Kit contains all the com- SPECIFICATIONS
ponents necessary for the design and fabrication of a 1 or 2 sta- Service: Compatible liquids.
tion level switch for pipe plug mounting. The user can customize Wetted Materials (Float/Stem): 316 SS.
Temperature Limits: -40 to 275°F (-40 to 135°C).
stem length (maximum 36˝), actuation point, distance between
Pressure Limits: 750 psi (52 bar).
floats, and lead wire lengths. Model F7-MLK2 is constructed of Switch Type: SPST, selectable N.O. or N.C.
316 SS—ideal for chemicals, corrosive liquids, oils, or high pres- Electrical Rating: 20 VA: 0.8A @ 240 VAC, 0.17A @ 120 VAC, 0.3A @
sure applications. Model F7-MLK2 includes two level stations 30 VDC.
with floats (switch, tube, and float), two extension tubes 10˝ (254 Electrical Connections: 18 AWG x 60˝ (152 cm) wire leads.
mm) length, three tube unions, one tube connector, one end fit- Process Connections: 2˝ male NPT pipe plug.
Mounting Orientation: Up to 30° angle from vertical.
ting, and one mounting plug.
Minimum Specific Gravity: 0.75.
Tube Diameter: 1/2˝ O.D.
Stem Length: 36˝ (91 cm) maximum.
Weight: 3.3 lb (1.6 kg).
Model F7-MLK2 Multi-Level Switch Kit

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 258
pg259 7/24/06 11:53 AM Page 1

Series
CFS Cable Float Switch
No Hazardous Mercury, Adjustable Counterweight, General Purpose

Ø 1 5/8 Ø 5 5/32
[41.40] [131.06]

Ø 3 3/16
[81.03]

Control the level of liquids in filling or draining reservoirs and tanks SPECIFICATIONS
Level

with the Series CFS. The mercury-free switch is designed with an Service: Compatible liquids.
inverter microswitch housed in a polypropylene cover. The unit Wetted Materials: Polypropylene housing, PVC cable.
includes a counterweight to adjust the stop and start levels of pump Temperature Limits: 140°F (60°C).
up/pump down application. Pressure Limits: 60 psi (4 bar).
MODELS Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4 (IP68).
Switch Type: SPDT.
Model
Cable Length Electrical Rating: 10 A @ 250 VAC, resistive.
Number
Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
CFS-2 6.5 ft (2 m) Weight: CFS-2: 1.416 lb (.62 kg).
CFS-10 32.8 ft (10 m) CFS-10: 3.316 lb (1.48 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE.

Series
FSW Free-Floating Level Switch
Designed for Industrial Applications, Mercury-Free

6 13/32
[162.99]
Ø 4 3/64
[102.87]

Series FSW Free-Floating Level Switch is a dual level SPECIFICATIONS

switch designed for filling and draining of tanks, wells, and Service: Compatible liquids, slurries.
reservoirs. The shape and interior balance weight ensure impu- Wetted Materials: Polypropylene housing, EPDM gland, PVC
rities and dirt will not adhere to the surface, making it ideal for cable.
sewage and waste water applications. The mercury-free switch Temperature Limits: 140°F (60°C).
is designed with an inverter microswitch housed in a polypropy- Pressure Limits: 60 psi (4 bar).
lene cover. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4 (IP68).
MODELS Switch Type: SPDT.
Model Electrical Rating: 10 A @ 250 VAC, resistive.
Cable Length Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
Number
Weight: FSW-6: 2.6 lb (1.2 kg); FSW-15: 3.85 lb (1.75 kg);
FSW-6 19.5 ft (6 m)
FSW-30: 6.8 lb (3.1 kg).
FSW-15 49 ft (15 m) Agency Approvals: CE.
FSW-30 98 ft (30 m)

259 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg260 7/24/06 11:53 AM Page 1

Model
OLS Optical Level Switch
Low Cost, Compact, LED Indication

1-3/4
[44.50]
7/8
HEX

OLS-10 OLS-11
HIGH

LOW
RED, +
BLK, GND
WHT, CONTROL

82-700405-00

Level
1/8 1/4
[3.200] [6.400]

OLS-12

Low cost, rugged optical level switch provides rapid response SPECIFICATIONS
while employing no moving parts for stable process control. The Service: Noncoating compatible liquids.
bright red and green LED’s indicate the presence or absence of liq- Wetted Materials: See model chart.
uid for true, local indication. Three optional materials, 316 SS, polysul- Temperature Limit: Process: OLS-10, 11: 200°F (93.3°C), OLS-
fone and PFA provide application flexibility. Compact switch can be
12: 120°F (48.9°C); Ambient: OLS-10, 11: 175°F (79.4°C), OLS-
quickly mounted horizontally or vertically for each installation.
12: 120°F (48.9°C).
Pressure Limit: OLS-11, 12: 200 psig (13.8 bar), OLS-10: 1000
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION psig (69 bar).
The optical level switch employs an LED, which transmits infrared Repeatability: ±0.02˝ (0.5 mm).
light. This light is sent through a prism and reflected back to a photo- Switch Type: NPN open collector.
transistor utilizing two 90° light reflections. With the prism surround-
Power Requirements: 10 to 28 VDC.
ed by a gas, the light source is cast back to the photo transistor. When
Output Signal: Vout (max) = 28 VDC, Isink (max) = 100 mA.
a translucent liquid is introduced to the prism at or above the point
where the light source makes contract with the prism, the light is Current Consumption: 35 mA maximum.
reflected into the liquid, not allowing the photo-transistor to energize. Electrical Connections: 22 AWG, 18˝ (460 mm) long.
Process Connection: 1/2˝ male NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Can be mounted in any position.
Weight: 2.5 oz (0.07 kg).
FEATURES
•Compact Size Specific Gravity: No minimum.
•LED Switch Indication
•No Moving Parts
Suggested Specifications
MODELS Optical level switch shall be PFA, 316 SS and Polysulfone or Polysulfone
Model No. Wetted Materials construction. Unit shall provide an NPN open collector output signal.
Switch shall be capable of mounting in horizontal or vertical position.
Model OLS-10 316 SS/Polysulfone Switch shall incorporate LED switch status.
Model OLS-11 Polysulfone
Model OLS-12 PFA APPLICATIONS
• Food and beverage systems • Liquid holding tanks
• Hydraulic reservoirs • Sumps
• Pharmaceutical systems • Air conditioning systems

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 260
pg261 7/24/06 11:56 AM Page 1

Series
123 Cast Iron Chamber – Water Level Control
Heavy Duty, Snap Action Type ®

1 NPT

1-1/8
[28.58] 3-9/16
[90.50]
Ø5-3/4
[146.05] 7-1/8
[180.98]
2-7/16
[61.91]

1/2 PIPE PLUG

5-1/2 TYP 2 PLACES 3-9/16
[139.70] [90.50]
7 5-3/8 4-3/4
[177.80] [136.53] [120.65]

Designed for boiler applications, the model 123 is primarily used SPECIFICATIONS Electrical Rating: Snap Switch:
for low water cut-off or feed-water control. Other applications include Service: Compatible liquids. Cast 15A @ 120/240/480 VAC, 0.5A @
Level

iron is not for use with lethal or flam- 120 VDC resistive, 0.25A @ 240
condensate tanks and deaerators. A special positive snap action switch mable substances either liquid or VDC resistive. Mercury Switch: 4A
mechanism eliminates frequent operation due to surging water level. gaseous. @ 120 VAC/DC, 2A @ 240 VAC/DC.
A transparent cover provides convenient visible operation of the Wetted Materials: Body: Cast iron. Electrical Connections: Screw
switch. Features a flanged chamber for easy clean out and replace- Float and Trim: 304 SS. Packing terminal.
ment of float or switch mechanism without removing the unit from pip- Gland: Brass.Packing: Carbon. Conduit Connection: 7/8˝ (22.23
ing. Body Gasket: Carbon. mm) hole for 1/2˝ (12.7 mm) conduit.
Temperature Limit: 365°F (185°C). Process Connections: 1˝ female
Pressure Limit: 150 psig NPT.
(10.34 bar). Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
MODELS Enclosure Rating: General Weight: 20 lb (9.1 kg).
Purpose. Optional weatherproof. Agency Approvals: UL and CSA.
Model Number Switch Type Switch Type: SPDT snap switch or (Snap switch is not rated).
mercury switch. Optional DPDT or Deadband: Approximately 1-1/2˝
123-153 SPDT Mercury (38.1 mm).
two stage.
123-7000-153 SPDT Snap Specific Gravity: 0.88 minimum.
Options: Manual Reset.

Series
102 Flanged Chamber Type Level Control ®

Operating Pressures to 300 PSIG

SPECIFICATIONS
6-3/4 Ø5-3/4 Service: Compatible liquids. Cast iron is not for use with
[171.45] [146.05] lethal or flammable substances either liquid or gaseous.
Wetted Materials:
Body: Cast iron. Optional cast steel or 316 SS.
Float and Trim: 303 SS, 304 SS, 316 SS, and 430 SS.
1 NPT 3/4 NPT CONDUIT Option of all 316 SS.
CONNECTION. CAN Body Gasket: Carbon.
17-1/2 BE ROTATED 360˚.
[444.5] Temperature Limit: 425°F (218°C).
Pressure Limit: 300 psig (20.7 bar). Optional rating to
8-1/4 B 400 psig (27.6 bar).
[209.55] Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X. Optional general pur-
SP.
GR. A B pose or explosion-proof.
A Repeatability: ±1/4˝ (6.4 mm).
1.0 51⁄16 3
⁄4
[129 mm] [19 mm] Switch Type: SPDT snap switch, hermetically sealed
0.6 513⁄16 1 snap switch, or mercury switch. Optional DPDT or two
1-5/8 3-1/4 4-7/8 6-1/8 [148 mm] [25.4 mm] stage.
[41.28] [82.55] [123.83] [155.58] Electrical Rating: Snap Switch: 12A @ 120 VAC, 5A @
240 VAC, 0.5A @ 125 VDC resistive, 0.25A @ 250 VDC
resistive. Hermetically Sealed Snap Switch: 5A @ 125
Flanged inspection plate allows periodic inspection and clean-out of Model 102 VAC, 5A @ 240 VAC, 5A @ 30 VDC resistive. Mercury
float chamber, making unit ideal for use in refineries, chemical plants, and other areas Switch: 4A @ 120 VAC/DC, 2A @ 240 VAC/DC. Higher
with potentially dirty liquids. Low cost cast iron chamber is standard. Carbon steel and contact ratings available for the mercury switch.
stainless steel chambers are available on special order. Stainless steel float is standard. Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
Conduit Connection: 3/4˝ female NPT.
Process Connections: 1˝ female NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
MODELS Set Point Adjustment: ±1˝ (25.4 mm).
Model Number Switch Type Weight: 35 lb (15.9 kg).
Agency Approvals: UL.
102-WT-4810-C-60 SPDT Mercury Specific Gravity: 0.6 minimum.
102-WT-7810-C-60 SPDT Snap
102-WT-7810HM-C-60 SPDT Hermetically Sealed Snap

261 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg262 7/26/06 3:30 PM Page 1

Series
500 Insertion Type Level Control
Adjustable Deadband, Weatherproof Enclosure ®

SPECIFICATIONS
3-7/8 INSERTION Service: Compatible liquids. Cast iron is not for use
[98.42]
with lethal or flammable substances either liquid or
3/4 NPT gaseous.
CONDUIT Wetted Materials:
CONNECTION Body: Cast iron, cast steel, or 316 SS.
9-7/8 Float and Trim: 316 SS.
[250.82] Temperature Limit: 425°F (218°C).
5-1/2 Pressure Limit: 400 psig (27.6 bar).
[139.70]
16°
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X. Optional general
purpose or explosion-proof.
1-7/8
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch or mercury switch.
[47.62] Optional DPDT or hermetically sealed snap switch.
32° Electrical Rating: Snap Switch: 12A @ 120 VAC, 5A
2-1/2 NPT @ 240 VAC, 0.5A @ 125 VDC resistive, 0.25A @ 250
3/8 5-1/2 VDC resistive. Mercury Switch: 4A @ 120 VAC/DC,
[9.52] 1/2 NPT [139.70]
DRAIN PLUG
2A @ 240 VAC/DC. Higher contact ratings available
for the Mercury switch.
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.

Level
Adjustable deadband makes Model 500 ideal for control of level in large or Conduit Connection: 3/4˝ female NPT.
Process Connections: 2-1/2˝ male NPT. Optional 2-
small tanks. Mounts directly to threaded fitting on tank. (Flanged mounting avail- 1/2˝ flange.
able on special order.) Stainless steel float operates hermetically sealed mercury Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
switch or SPDT snap action switch. Available in a variety of materials to match Set Point Adjustment: At minimum deadband
setting the set point is adjustable approximately ±1/2˝
most petrochemical and industrial applications. (12.7 mm).
MODELS Weight: 35 lb (15.9 kg).
Agency Approvals: UL.
Model Number Switch Type Body Material Deadband: Adjustable between 0.5˝ (12.7 mm) to 3˝
500T-WT-7810-C.55-12-0 (76.2 mm).
Snap Action Cast Iron Specific Gravity: 0.8 minimum. Optional 0.55
500T-WT-7810-C1.55-12-0 Snap Action Cast Steel minimum.
500T-WT-7810-C216.55-12-0 Snap Action 316 SS Float and Rod Insertion Length: 6.5˝ (165.1 mm).
500T-WT-4810-C.55-12-0 Mercury Cast Iron Optional 12˝ (304.8 mm), 18˝ (457.2 mm), or 24˝ (609.6
500T-WT-4810-C1.55-12-0 mm) rod length. Longer float rods give larger
Mercury Cast Steel adjustable deadband.
500T-WT-4810-C216.55-12-0 Mercury 316 SS

Series
75 Torque Tube Type Level Control
Direct Action, Mercury Contacts ®
®

1 NPT PIPE
PLUG TYP 2 PLACES
1 NPT
TYP 2 PLACES Ø7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT
1-5/8 [41.28] CONNECTION
FIXED
DEADBAND 12-1/4 4-1/4
[311.15] [107.95]
1 [25.40]
8-1/4
5-3/4 [209.55]
[146.05]
STANDARD
1-5/8 [41.28]
2-11/64
ADJUSTABLE 3-1/4 11-3/8 6 [55.17]
FROM 5-1/8 [130.18] [82.55] [288.93] [152.40]
TO 7 [177.80] 6-3/4
[171.45]

Torque Tube design eliminates O-rings and packing in Model 75 level con- SPECIFICATIONS
trols. Float assembly removes easily from chamber for periodic inspection. Service: Compatible liquids. Cast iron is not for use with lethal or flammable
“Flow Through” connections reduce piping requirements and installation time. substances either liquid or gaseous.
Wetted Materials: Body: Cast iron, cast steel, or 304 SS. Float: 304 SS.
Torque Tube: Brass or 304 SS. Body Gasket: Carbon.
MODELS Temperature Limit: Cast iron body: 425°F (218°C), cast steel or 304 SS body:
500°F (260°C).
Model Chamber Torque Tube Pressure Limit: Cast iron body: 300 psig (20.7 bar), cast steel or 304 SS
Number body: 400 psig (27.6 bar).
Enclosure Rating: General purpose.
75KM-A-4815 Cast Iron Brass Switch Type: SPDT mercury switch. Optional SPST or two stage.
Cast Steel Brass Electrical Rating: 10A @ 120 VAC/DC, 5A @ 240 VAC/DC.
75KXM-A1-4815 Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
75KXM-A2-4815 304 SS Brass Conduit Connection: 7/8˝ (22.23 mm) hole for 1/2˝ (12.7 mm) conduit.
75KM-C-4815 Cast Iron 304 SS Process Connections: 1˝ female NPT. Four for side/side or top/bottom
Cast Steel 304 SS mounting.
75KXM-C1-4815 Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
75KXM-C2-4815 304 SS 304 SS Weight: 35 lb (15.9 kg).
Agency Approvals: UL and CSA.
Deadband: Approximately 1˝ (25.4 mm).
Specific Gravity: 0.66 minimum.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 262
pg263 7/24/06 11:57 AM Page 1

Series
201 Side Mounted-Chamber Type Level Control ®
®

Operating Pressures to 500 PSIG, 34 bar, Hermetically Sealed Snap Switch Option
Model 201 liquid level control is designed for long life and reliable operation in chemical
plants, refineries and industrial facilities. Stainless steel switching mechanism uses gravity re-
turn action instead of springs to prolong life. Weatherproof enclosure is standard. Heavy duty,
welded steel float chamber is suitable for 500 psi at 750°F.

4 [101.60]
6-3/4
[171.45]
SPECIFICATIONS Electrical Rating: Snap Switch: 12A @ 120 VAC,
CLEARANCE Service: Compatible liquids. 5A @ 240 VAC, 0.5A @ 125 VDC resistive, 0.25A
FOR COVER Ø5-3/4 Wetted Materials: Body: Carbon Steel. Optional @ 250 VDC resistive. Hermetically Sealed Snap
REMOVAL [146.05] 316 SS. Float and Trim: 303 SS, 304 SS, 316 SS, Switch: 5A @ 125 VAC, 5A @ 240 VAC, 5A @ 30
and 430 SS. Options of 316 SS and 430 SS or all VDC resistive. Mercury Switch: 4A @ 120
316 SS. VAC/DC, 2A @ 240 VAC/DC. Higher contact
3/4 Temperature Limit: Process: 750°F (399°C). ratings available for the Mercury switch.
FEMALE Heat fins should be used for process temperatures Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
NPT above 500°F (260°C) with mercury switches, Conduit Connection: 3/4˝ female NPT.
ELEC. 3-1/4 Process Connections: 1˝ female NPT and 1˝
CONN. [82.55] 400°F (204°C) with snap switches, and 350°F
(176.7°C) with hermetically sealed snap switches. socket weld hub. Optional flange connections.
18-5/8 Pressure Limit: 600 psig (41 bar) at 100°F Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
[473.08]
B (37.7°C), 500 psig (34 bar) at 750°F (399°C). Set Point Adjustment: ±1˝ (25.4 mm).
Higher ratings available. Weight: 33 lb (14.97 kg).
10-15/16
[277.83] Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X. Optional general Agency Approvals: UL and CSA.
Specific Gravity: 0.6 minimum.
Level

A
purpose or explosion-proof.
Repeatability: ±1/4˝ (6.4 mm).
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch, hermetically
3-3/4 1 FEMALE NPT sealed snap switch or mercury switch. Optional
PROCESS
[95.25]
CONNECTION
DPDT or two stage.
TYP 2 PLACES
MODELS
SP.GR *A B Model
1.0 63/4" (171mm) 3
⁄4" (19 mm) Number Switch Type
0.6 71⁄2" (191 mm) 1" (25.4 mm) 201-WT-4810-C1-60 SPDT Mercury
*A is adjustable ±1" (25.4 mm) 201-WT-7810-C1-60 SPDT Snap
201-WT-7810HM-C1-60 SPDT Hermetically Sealed Snap

Series
391 Side Mounted-Chamber Type Level Control ®

Compact, Low Cost, Hermetically Sealed Snap Switch Option

Heavy duty and low cost is the perfect description for the 391 Series level control. Stainless
steel switching mechanism uses gravity return action instead of springs for long life. Weather-
proof enclosure is standard. Welded steel chamber is good for 650 psig (45 bar) at 600°F (315°C).

Applications
Oil refineries, chemical plants, power generating stations, pumping stations, heat transfer sys-
tems, sanitary/waste water facilities, drip legs, hydraulic systems, boilers.
SPECIFICATIONS Electrical Rating: Snap Switch: 12A @ 120
VAC, 5A @ 240 VAC, 0.5A @ 125 VDC resistive,
6-3/4 Service: Compatible liquids. 0.25A @ 250 VDC resistive. Hermetically Sealed
[171.45] Wetted Materials: Body: Carbon Steel. Snap Switch: 5A @ 125 VAC, 5A @ 240 VAC, 5A
4 [101.60] Ø5-3/4 Float and Trim: 303 SS, 304 SS, 316 SS, and @ 30 VDC resistive. Mercury Switch: 4A @ 120
CLEARANCE [146.05] 430 SS. VAC/DC, 2A @ 240 VAC/DC. Higher contact rat-
FOR COVER Temperature Limit: Process: 600°F (315.6°C).
REMOVAL ings available for the Mercury switch.
Heat fins should be used for process Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
temperatures above 500°F (260°C) with mercury Conduit Connection: 3/4˝ female NPT.
3/4 FEMALE switches, 400°F (204°C) with snap switches, and
NPT ELEC. Process Connections: 1˝ female NPT. Optional
CONN. 350°F (176.7°C) with hermetically sealed snap 1˝ socket weld hub or flange connections.
3-3/4
switches. Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
[95.25] Pressure Limit: 800 psig (55 bar) at 100°F Weight: 10 lb (4.5 kg).
14-11/16 B (37.7°C), 650 psig (45 bar) at 600°F (315.6°C). Agency Approvals: UL.
[373.06] Higher ratings available. Specific Gravity: 0.8 minimum. Optional 0.7
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X. Optional general minimum.
6-1/2 purpose or explosion-proof.
[165.10] A Switch Type: SPDT snap switch, hermetically
sealed snap switch or mercury switch. Optional
3-7/16 1 FEMALE NPT DPDT.
[87.31] PROCESS
CONNECTION MODELS
TYP 2 PLACES
Model
SP.GR A B Number Switch Type
1.0 43/8" (111mm) 1" (25.4 mm) 391-WT-4810-C1-80 SPDT Mercury
0.80 411⁄16" (191 mm) 13⁄16" (112.3 mm) 391-WT-7810-C1-80 SPDT Snap
391-WT-7810HM-C1-80 SPDT Hermetically Sealed Snap

263 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg264 7/24/06 11:58 AM Page 1

Series
B-190 Liquid Level Switches-Controls
Top Mounted Displacer Type, Adjustable Setpoints, ®
®

Magnetic Operation, Optional Hermetically Sealed Snap Switch

One of our most versatile level controls, the model B-l90 can be used on all types of tank or sump level con-
trol applications. Three porcelain displacers provide deadband adjustment. Unit can start a sump pump (for
6-3/4 example) when liquid reaches the high set point and turn the pump off when the level drops to the low set
[171.45] point. Unit works equally well in pressurized tanks. Two stage units also available.
3/4 NPT
Ø5-3/4
[146.05]
SPECIFICATIONS Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
Service: Compatible liquids. Conduit Connection: 3/4˝ female NPT.
9-13/16 Process Connections: 4˝ 125 Cast Iron Flange.
[249.24] Wetted Materials: Cable, Spring and Stops: 316
SS. Optional Inconel® spring. Displacers: Porcelain. Other material, size, and rating flanges are available.
Optional 304 SS, 316 SS, or carbon graphite. Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
3 [76.20] Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable by moving
Temperature Limits: 32 to 200°F (0 to 93.3°C).
Higher ratings available. displacers see dimension chart for minimum and
Pressure Limit: 125 psig (8.6 bar). Higher ratings maximum values.
available. Weight: 25 lb (11.34 kg).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X. Optional general Agency Approvals: UL and CSA.
A purpose or explosion-proof. Deadband: Adjustable by moving displacers see di-
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch, hermetically mension chart for minimum and maximum values.

Level
sealed snap switch, or mercury switch. Optional Specific Gravity: Standard is 1.0. Specify when or-
B OPERATES DPDT or two stage. dering by replacing 1.0 in model number with specif-
ON LEVEL Electrical Rating: Snap Switch: 12A @ 120 VAC, ic gravity setting desired. Settable range is 0.5 to
RISE 5A @ 240 VAC, 0.5A @ 125 VDC resistive, 0.25A @ 1.2.
250 VDC resistive. Hermetically Sealed Snap Cable Length: 10 ft (3 m) standard. Optional up to
C Switch: 5A @ 120 VAC, 5A @ 240 VAC, 5A @ 30 100 ft (30.5 m).
OPERATES VDC resistive. Mercury Switch: 4A @ 120 VAC/DC,
ON LEVEL 2A @ 240 VAC/DC. Higher contact ratings available
DROP for the Mercury switch. Inconel® is a registered trademark of Huntington Alloys Corporation.
TB
TO
BOTTOM MODELS
Dimensions for 1.0 s.g. @ 100°F (38°C)
Model
A C TB B Number Switch Type
Max. Min. Max. Min. Min. Max. B190-WT-4810-P-A-1.0-2 SPDT Mercury
1161⁄2 " 61⁄2 " 114" 63⁄4 " 21⁄2 " 1221⁄4 " B190-WT-7810-P-A-1.0-2 SPDT Snap
(2.66m) (165m) (2.9m) (172mm) (64mm) (3.1m)
B190-WT-7810HM-P-A-1.0-2 SPDT Hermetically Sealed Snap

Series
GS Gap Switch
Liquid Level Measurement, 1000:1 Wet/Dry Ratio, 316 SS Wetted Parts
13/16 3-3/4
[20.64] [95.25]

2-3/4 3/4 NPT

[69.45] 4
[101.6]
1
[25.40]
3/4 NPT
THREAD HUB
1-1/2 [38.10]

7/8
[22.23]

Series GS Gap Switch measures liquid levels at a single point and SPECIFICATIONS Electrical Rating: 10A @ 120
provides a 10A relay output for high or low level alarm, overflow pre- Service: Compatible liquids VAC resistive.
(1000:1 wet/dry ratio). Power Requirements: 115 VAC,
vention, and pump protection. The Series GS uses ultrasonic wave prop- 50/60 Hz (230 VAC optional).
Wetted Material: 316 SS.
agation between the transducer gap to sense the presence or absence Temperature Limits: Sensor: Conduit Connection: 3/4˝ female
of a liquid. Integral electronics make installation quick and easy. Units –40 to 200°F (–40 to 93°C), NPT.
can be mounted in either a vertical or horizontal position with no addi- Electronics: –20 to 170°F Process Connection: 3/4˝ male
(–4 to 77°C). NPT.
tional calibration required. Gap switch includes a 0.5 second delay and Mounting Orientation: Vertical or
Pressure Limits: 1000 psig (68.9
high level failsafe. bar). horizontal.
Enclosure Rating: Epoxy-coated Delay [On]: 0.5 seconds.
cast aluminum, NEMA 4 & 7. Immersion Depth: 1˝ (25.4 mm).
Repeatability: 2 mm (0.078˝) Weight: 1 lb (453 g).
MODELS typical. Agency Approval: CE.
Model Number Immersion Depth Supply Voltage Switch Type: DPDT.
GS10001 1˝ (25.4 mm) 115 VAC
APPLICATIONS
GS20001 1˝ (25.4 mm) 230 VAC Monitor and control levels of water, chemicals, lubricants, acids,
creams, lotions, beverages or paints in vessels, storage bins, tanks,
sumps, etc.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 264
pg265 7/24/06 11:59 AM Page 1

Series
LLC Conductivity Controller
Single Point or Differential Level Service, Compact Size, Up to 6 ft. (1.82 m) Probes
Control valves, pumps and alarms with the versatile
Series LLC Conductivity Level Controller. Select the
required number of probes for single or dual point level
detection. Choose probe lengths in 1-foot increments (up
to six feet) to adapt the LLC to your specific applications
requirements. The LLC features rugged 1/4-inch
(6.3 mm) diameter, stainless steel probes, LED monitor-
ing, surge protection, low voltage sensor and different
mounting options.
Level

To build your level switch:

Controller:
1. Determine your supply voltage. Select
between 120 and 240 VAC.
2. Determine the required sensitivity. Select
between 10 K Ω and 26 K Ω.
3. Determine the socket style. Select between
Controllers 8-pin octal and DIN mount.
Model Supply Voltage Sensitivity Socket Style Probes:
LLC-118 120 VAC 10K Ω 8-Pin Octal 4. Determine the required number of probes. Specify
LLC-128 120 VAC 26K Ω 8-PIN Octal
quantity of Threaded Mounting Couplings, model
LLC-115 120 VAC 10K Ω DIN Mount
LLC-125 120 VAC 26K Ω DIN Mount LLC-82. (A coupling is required for each probe.)
LLC-218 240 VAC 10K Ω 8-Pin Octal 5. Select probe lengths. Specify model numbers
LLC-228 240 VAC 26K Ω 8-Pin Octal for probes.
LLC-215 240 VAC 10K Ω DIN Mount
LLC-225 240 VAC 26K Ω DIN Mount

SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Electrically conductive fluids.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, PTFE.
Probes Temperature Limits: Controller: -40 to 150°F (-40 to
Model Length feet(m) 65°C); Probes: 406°F (207°C).
LLC-31 1 (.3) Pressure Limits: Probes: 400 psig (27 bar).
LLC-32 2 (.6) Switch Type: SPDT, N.O. or N.C.
LLC-33 3 (.9) Electrical Rating: 10A resistive, 1/3 hp, 120/240 VAC.
LLC-34 4 (1.2) Power Requirements: 120 VAC or 140 VAC.
LLC-35 5 (1.5) Process Connection: 3/8˝ male NPT.
LLC-36 6 (1.8) Electrodes: 1/4˝ (6.3 mm) diameter, 316 SS.
Maximum Probe Length: 72˝ (1.82 m).
Controller Sensitivity: 10 KΩ or 26KΩ.
Mounting: Controller: 8 pin octal or DIN mount; Probes:
3/8˝ male NPT.
Threaded Mounting Couplings Weight: Controller: 6 oz (170 g).
Model LLC-82

265 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg266 7/24/06 12:01 PM Page 1

Model
DPL110 Dual Point Level Switch
Tank High/Low Control, Conductivity Technology, Up to 72” Probes ®

3.11
[79] Ø2.26
[57]
1.40 2.385
[35] [60.58]

27.1
2.25 1" MALE NPT [687]
[57] 24.00
[610]
1.75 2.81
[71] 3.73
[44] [95] 0.13
[3.2]

Maintain liquid level high and low limits with the Model SPECIFICATIONS
DPL Dual Point Level Switch. Units can be used for single or Electrodes: 1/8 ˝ dia, 24˝ (609.6 mm) length, standard.
dual point level control in semi-solid liquids, industrial slurries Wetted Materials: 316 SS, polypropylene.
or heavy-bodied liquids like wastewater. Standard 24 inch elec- Mounting, Sensor Head: 1˝ male NPT.

Level
trodes can be cut by the end-user to a shorter length or length- Pressure Limits: 30 psig (2.06 bar).
ened by adding up to two 24 inch extensions (sold separately) Temperature Limits: 212°F (100°C).
Probe Enclosure: NEMA 6 (IP67).
to reach the maximum recommended length of 72 inches. Model Maximum Probe Length: 72˝ (1.8 m) with optional extensions.
DPL contains no moving parts to get stuck or wear out. Con- Connecting Cable, Probe to Controller: 10 ft (3.0 m).
troller features adjustable sensitivity and DIN rail-mountable Sensing Voltage: 12 VAC.
socket mount. Power Supply: 120 VAC 50/60 Hz.
Model DPL110 Dual Point Level Switch Output: SPDT, 5 A @ 240 VAC.
Mounting, Controller: Standard octal socket or 35 mm DIN rail.
Weight, Probe Assembly: 1.5 lbs (0.68 kg).
ACCESSORIES Weight, Controller: 1.0 lb (0.45 kg).
Model DPL5 Electrode Extensions includes two 249 (610 mm)
electrode extensions and mounting hardware

Model
CLS1 Capacitance Level Switch
For Solids, Liquids or Slurries, Fail-Safe Protection, <1 pF Sensitivity
1-11/16
[42.88] 6-3/16
[157.15]

7/8
[22.23] 21/32
1/2 FEMALE
[16.67]
NPT CONDUIT
CONNECTION 1 MALE NPS
PROCESS 1-13/16
CONNECTION [46.05] 8-5/8
[219.08]

3-13/16
[96.84]
1-7/64
[28.18]

Model CLS1 Capacitance Level Switch provides reliable point SPECIFICATIONS Conduit Connection: 1/2˝
level measurement of solids, liquids and slurries in metallic or non- Service: Solids, liquids, or slur- female NPT.
metallic tanks and vessels. Model CLS1 detects the presence or ab- ries. Process Connection: 1˝ male
Wetted Material: CPVC. NPS.
sence of material in contact with the probe by sensing a change in the Mounting Orientation: Vertical
Temperature Limits: Probe:
capacitance. Electronics provide highly sensitive measurement detec- or horizontal.
-40 to 240°F (-40 to 116°C),
tion (requires less than a 1 picofarad shift from ambient). State of the Electronics: -40 to 185°F (-40 to Sensitivity: Adjustable to <1 pF.
art technology ignores material build-up on the vessel sidewall or along 85°C). Fail-Safe: Switch Selectable,
the probe assembly. One time calibration is simple with a single multi- Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X high/Low.
turn potentiometer. Red LED on housing indicates sensor status. Unit (IP56), PVC, dust tight, water Time Delay: Adjustable 1 to 30
resistant. seconds.
features an adjustable 1-30 second time delay and a 5 amp, SPDT fail-
Switch Type: SPDT. Weight: 2.0 lb (0.91 kg).
safe relay output. Model CLS1 can be mounted vertically or horizon- Agency Approvals: CE.
Electrical Rating: 5A @ 250
tally. VAC.
Power Requirements: 120
VAC, 1.5VA.
Model CLS1 Capacitance Level Switch APPLICATIONS
High or low level detection in bins, silos, tanks, hoppers, chutes and
other vessels where liquids, solids or slurries are stored.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 266
pg267 7/24/06 12:01 PM Page 1

Model
DBLM Mini-Bin Dry Bulk Level Monitor
Compact, 4-Vane Paddle

SPECIFICATIONS
The Mini-Bin provides reliable level sensing for dry bulk solids Service: Dry bulk solids.
where mounting space is limited. This compact, side mount control reports Wetted Materials: Polycarbonate paddle, SS shaft, PTFE washer.
high, intermediate, and low level conditions, eliminating overflows, chok- Temperature Limits: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C).
ing, clogs or empty vessels. Model DBLM Mini-Bin operates by using a 1 Enclosure Rating: Polycarbonate, NEMA 1.
Level

Switch Type: SPDT snap switch.

rpm synchronous motor to rotate a four vane, plastic paddle. When mater-
Electrical Rating: 3A @ 250 VAC.
ial surrounds paddle and impedes rotation, the motor is de-energized and Power Requirements: 110 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 220 VAC optional, consult factory.
triggers a SPDT snap switch. Mount the Mini-Bin with optional 11⁄4" to 3⁄4" re- Power Consumption: 1.5 Watts.
ducer to replace standard size units. Electrical Connections 18 AWG, 12˝ leads wrapped in conduit.
Process Connection: 3/4˝ male NPT, optional flange and 1-1/4˝ to 3/4˝ reducer.
MODELS Mounting Orientation: Side mount.
Weight: 0.77 Ib (350 g).
Model Number Power Supply Agency Approvals: CE.
DBLM3040 110 VAC
DBLM3140 Suggested Specifications
220 VAC Miniature dry bulk level control shall be vane operated to actuate a SPDT snap action
F1, 8"x 1 ⁄4" NPT flexible carbon steel mounting flange
1
switch. Power consumption shall be 1.5 watts. The motor shall de-energize when rota-
A-335, 11⁄4" to 3⁄4" reducer tion is impeded. The housing shall be plastic, suitable for NEMA 1 service. Switch
shall be Proximity Model No. DBLM 3040.

Series
PS Proximity Sensors
Capacitive or Inductive 3-Wire DC, Threaded Body
Dim. PSC20103 PSC20203 PSI2002203 PSI2005303
A M18 M30 M12 M18
PSC Series B 1.065 (27) 1.614 (41) 0.688 (17) 0.938 (17)
C 0.157 (4) 0.197 (5) 0.125 (3) 0.125 (3)
D 3.156 (80) 3.156 (80) 2.36 (60) 2.87 (73)
E 2.36 (60) 2.36 (60) 1.58 (40) 1.97 (50)

PSI Series

The Series PS Proximity Sensors are noninvasive sensors ideal SPECIFICATIONS

for level detection, position indicating and counting applications. Ca- Wetted Materials: Glass reinforced plastic (PSC), Stainless Steel
pacitive type sensors detect electrically conducting and nonconducting (Model PSI2002203), Nickel-plated Brass (Model PSI2005303).
materials, liquids, solids, or powders and include a sensitivity adjust- Temperature Limits: -22 to 212°F (-30 to 100°C) capacitive, -13 to 158°F
ment to differentiate between various materials. Inductive sensors de- (-25 to 70°C) inductive.
tect ferrous or nonferrous metals only. A bright LED indicates the Enclosure Rating: PSC, IP65; PSI, IP68.
state of the output switch. Sensors feature short circuit, reverse po- Repeatability: ±0.05% (Model PSC20103), ±0.1% (Model PSC20203 ±0.01%
larity, and transient protection. Small size and threaded body make in- (PSI Models).
stallation easy. Inductive sensors are embeddable (can be mounted
Power Requirements: 8 to 30 VDC.
flush). Capacitive sensors are environmentally protected to IP65 and
Switch Type: Normally open NPN transistor, sinking.
Inductive sensors are protected to IP68. Units include two fixing,
screwdriver, and operating manual. Electrical Rating: 250 mA (PSC), 200 mA (PSI).
Minimum Load Current: 8 mA (PSC), <25 mA (PSI).
MODELS Leakage (Off-State) Current: <3 mA (PSC), <0.08 mA (PSI).
Model Body Switching Detecting Voltage Drop: <3.5V @ 250 mA (PSC).<2.5V @ 200 mA (PSI).
Number Type Size Frequency Dist. in (mm) Ripple: 10%.
PSC20103 Cap. M18 x 1 400 Hz .04-3 (1-10) Electrical Connection: 9.8 ft (3 m) cable.
PSC20203 Cap. M30 x 1.5 250 Hz .08-79 (2-20)
PSC30203* Cap. M30 x 1.5
Deadband: 20% of range (PSC), 15% of range (PSI).
250 Hz .08-79 (2-20)
PSI2002203 Ind. M12 x 1 800 Hz .08 (2) Initializing Time Delay: <10 msec.
PSI2005303 Ind. M18 x 1 500 Hz .19 (5) Agency Approvals: CE.
*NPN Transister

267 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg268 7/24/06 12:02 PM Page 1

Series
PLS Paddle Level Switch
Economical Rotary Paddle Level Control, Top or Side Mounting for Dry Bulk Materials

SIDE MOUNT

3/4" CONDUIT
CONNECTION PDL-1. Minimum bulk PDL-2. Minimum bulk
density of 5 lb/ft3 (80 density of 30 lb/ft3 (481
kg/m3). kg/m3).

4-11/32
[110.31]

4-1/2 4-31/32
[113.69] [126.19]
CLEARANCE FOR 6-3/8
COVER REMOVAL [162.05] 8-33/64

Level
[216.26] 10-5/16 PDL-3. Minimum bulk PDL-4. Minimum bulk
density of 30 lb/ft3 (481 density of 70 lb/ft3 (1122
[261.92] kg/m3). Fits through a 1- kg/m3). Fits through 1-
1/4˝ coupling eliminating 1/4˝ coupling eliminating
the need for a mounting the need for a mounting
flange. flange.

Incorporated in the design of the PLS is a magnetic drive that is SPECIFICATIONS

time proven by decades of use in our Mark Series valve position indi- Service: Dry powder or bulk materials compatible with wetted
cator product line. A 1 rpm synchronous motor rotates the paddle uti- materials.
lizing a magnetic drive. As product builds up the paddle is impeded
from moving and the resulting motor torque activates the output Sensitivity: Minimum material density of 5 lb/ft3 (80 kg/m3), maxi-
switches and stops the motor. A spring mechanism reactivates the mum of 200 lb/ft3 (3200 kg/m3).
motor and returns the switches to normal state when the product no Wetted Materials:
longer impedes the paddle rotation. Paddles: 316 SS. Exposed Shaft: 316 SS. Shaft Seal: PTFE.
Mounting Boss: Aluminum. Flexible Coupling: 316 SS.
Standard construction is weatherproof with explosion-proof optional, Mounting Flanges: Carbon Steel or 316 SS.
and the unit can be side or top mounted. The PLS is designed with the
industry standard 1-1/4˝ male NPT connection and mounting flanges. Shaft Extension and Shaft Guards: Galvanized Steel or 316 SS
Temperature Limits:
FEATURES Standard Construction: Process: -40 to 300ºF
• Magnetic drive that isolates and completely seals the control head from (-40 to 148.9ºC), Control Head: -40 to 200ºF
the process and environment preventing material or dust from entering
the control head. (-40 to 93.3ºC).
• Motor shuts-off when paddle stalls increasing motor life, preventing High Temperature Option: Process: -40 to 500ºF
motor burnout, and decreasing power usage. (-40 to 260ºC), Control Head: -40 to 185ºF (-40 to 85ºC).
• Slip clutch design enabled by the magnetic drive that prevents damage Pressure Limit: 30 psig (2.07 bar) maximum for .5 micron or
to motor and drive mechanism from sudden or excessive loading on the
paddle. larger material.
• Status indication light on weatherproof models. Power Requirement: Select by part number: 110-120 VAC, 230
• Screw cover on the enclosure for easy access with no worries about los- VAC, 24 VAC, 48 VAC, 12 VDC, or 24 VDC.
ing bolts or screws. Power Consumption: Weatherproof models: 5 watts, Explosion-
• Modular design to allow field installation of any paddle, flanges, shaft proof models: 3 watts.
extensions, or shaft guards.
Enclosure: Aluminum, powder coated.
MODELS Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof (W, WH construction): NEMA 4X,
CONTROL DESCRIPTION Explosion- proof (E, EH construction): NEMA 4X and rated for
ASSEMBLIES Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C & D, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, & G.
PLS-W-S-1-0-0-0-0 Weather construction, SPDT switch, 120 VAC Switch Type: SPDT or optional DPDT snap switch.
power supply. Order paddles and flanges Electrical Rating: 15A @ 120/230 VAC, 5A @ 24 VDC.
separately. Electric Connections: Screw terminals.
PLS-W-S-1-3-0-0-0 Weatherproof construction, SPDT switch, 120 Conduit Connection: 3/4˝ female NPT.
VAC power supply, includes PDL-3 paddle.
PLS-W-S-1-2-CSH-0-0
Process Connection: 1-1/4˝ male NPT. Optional flange.
Weatherproof construction, SPDT switch, 120
VAC power supply, includes PDL-1 paddle and
Weight: Control head only: 4 lb (1.81 kg).
FLG-CSH flange. Indication Light: Red LED that activates when switch is made or
when switch is not made with RL option (Not available on
PADDLES Explosion-proof models).
(See top of FLANGES DESCRIPTION Options: Time delay relay, high temperature construction, top
page) mount, shaft extensions, shaft shields, flexible couplings, other
PDL-1 FLG-CSH Carbon Steel with Half Coupling. power voltages, reversed light.
PDL-2 FLG-CSF Carbon Steel with Full Coupling. Agency Approvals: UL approved as an auxiliary device or as an
PDL-3 FLG-SSH 316 SS with Half Coupling.
auxiliary device for hazardous locations.
PDL-4 FLG-SSF 316 SS with Full Coupling.
Contact the factory for pricing of shaft extensions, protective shields, and other options. More detailed information available in our “Dust Collection &
Pneumatic Conveying” Catalog.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 268
pg269 7/24/06 12:03 PM Page 1

Explosion-Proof Ultra Mag Level Switches

™

For Powder & Bulk Solids ®

®

SUSPENSION HUB – 19 NPT

Sealed
Junction Box

Driving Epoxy Seal DIAPHRAGM 7-1/2

Magnet DIAMETER 5-7/89
Sealed
Driven Switch Cavity
Magnet

3-1/8

U.S. Patent #3,368,173, 3,349,203 Canadian Patent #801,168; 821,621 Suspension mounting
Level

Flange Adapter Ring CONDUIT ENTRANCE

1/29 NPT

(6) 5/169 DIA. HOLES

ON 8-3/89 B.C.

9-1/89
DIAPHRAGM
DIAMETER 5-7/89 7-1/4

3/8
3-1/8

U.S. Patent #3,368,173, 3,349,203 Canadian Patent #801,168; 821,621

Flange mounting
A unique, patented Magnetic Linkage isolates the electrical com- SPECIFICATIONS
partment from controlled product, reducing maintenance and improv- Service: Compatible powder or bulk solids.
ing sensitivity. The sealed switch compartment and sealed leads yield Wetted Materials:
the utmost in reliable operation. A wide selection of diaphragms and Mounting Flange: See model chart. Aluminum or 304 SS.
switches are available with choices of flange or suspension mounting to Diaphragm: See model chart. Urethane, Buna-N, PTFE, Silicone
fit your specific application. The dry level Ultra-Mag™ Level Switch is ex- Rubber, Polyester, Fluoroelastomers, White Buna-N (food grade),
tremely sensitive and very economical. The magnetic linkage makes this or EPDM.
simple explosion-proof diaphragm switch the most rugged and reliable Temperature Limits: Depends on diaphragm material, see model
level control for a variety of products (see cut-away above). chart. Standard switch: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C), High tempera-
ture switch: -40 to 350°F (-40 to176°C).
Mounting Selection: A choice of either suspension or flange mount- Pressure Limit: 60 psig (4.14 bar).
ing is available to match your application. Flange mounting is the best Enclosure Rating: General purpose or weatherproof and
choice for control of low or intermediate level in vessels containing explosion-proof. See model chart.
granular product that does not “bridge”, “rathole”, or otherwise build Switch Type: See model chart.
up on vessel walls. Choose suspension mounting for high level in ves- Electrical Rating: See model chart.
sels and for better operation with “bridging” product. See next page Electrical Connections: 18 gage solid core, 600 volt TEW
for more information on suspension and flange mounting kits. Note 105°C, style 1015. Epoxy sealed at conduit entrance. 12˝ (304.8
that the mounting configuration is represented by the letter “S” for mm) long.
suspension or “F” for flange which is the second digit in the part num- Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT.
ber on the next page. Process Connection: For flanged models standard is 8-3/8˝
(212.725 mm) diameter bolt hole circle.
Diaphragm Selection: A wide variety of diaphragms are available to
Mounting Orientation: Flange mount or suspend depending on
match product bulk density, flowability, abrasiveness and temperature
model.
requirements while providing maximum sensitivity. The best choice for
Set Point Adjustment: Internal screw.
vessels subject to pressure or vacuum is “breathable” fabric (P Se- Weight: 7 lb (3.18 kg).
ries), requiring no venting. Non-porous elastomer (G Series) type di- Options: Suspension kits and flange adapter rings.
aphragms are the best choice for more abrasive product and broader Agency Approvals: UL and CSA.
temperature range applications. Venting is always required with the G
series and if used in pressurized vessels, venting to the tank atmos-
phere is required to allow pressure equalization. A slide rule “Di-
aphragm Selector” is available from the factory to help you choose the
diaphragm best suited to your application.

269 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg270 7/24/06 12:04 PM Page 1

Proximity Ultra Mag Level Switch

™

Complete Model Chart Consult factory for pricing on UltraMag™ switches

PREFIX - Certification
Diaphragm Selection Guide E X = Explosion-proof (UL & CSA) Class I, Div I & II, Groups C & D; Class II, Div I & II, Groups E, F, & G.
X = Explosion-proof (CSA) Class II, Div I & II, Groups F & G.
Suggested Suggested Suggested
Product Diaphragm* Product Diaphragm* Product Diaphragm* 1ST DIGIT-Basic Magnetic Pressure Sensing Series
Abrasive............................3D Gravel ...............................3D Sand, Foundry Prepared .......5A G = Elastomeric Diaphragm-Venting required*. (Diaphragms 1A - 8A)
Aggregate .........................3D Iron Ore, Crushed .............3D Sand, Shake Out ..................3D P = Breathable Fabric Diaphragm-No venting required. (Diaphragms 16 & 17 only)
Alumina.............................3D Kaolin Clay........................3D Sawdust, Dry ........................6G
Ash, Dry............................3D Lime, Hydrated .................5A Sea Coal ...............................3D 2ND DIGIT-MOUNTING (Top = Suspension/Side=Flanged)
Baking Powder .................7B Lime, Stone ......................3D Sesame Seed ......................3D S = Suspended (G series require suspension vent fittings)* Subtract 10 lbs./cu. ft.-greater sensitivity.
Baking Soda .....................7B Oats..................................4B Shale, Crushed .....................3D F = Flanged, Aluminum standard
Barite ................................3D Peanuts in Shell ................7A Silica, Flour ..........................3D T = Flanged, 304 SS
Bark, Ground ...................6G Peanuts, Shelled...............3D Sludge, Sewage Dried ..........1A
Barley, Ground or Meal ......17 Perlite ...............................7A Sludge, Sewage, Ground ......1A
3RD DIGIT-HOUSING MATERIAL
Barley, Whole ....................4B Phosphate, Rock ..............3D Soda Ash..............................3D D = Aluminum
Beans, Edible,...................4B Polyethylene Powder.........7A Soybeans, Cracked ..............3D A = Aluminum, Anodized
Bentonite ..........................3D Polyethylene Resin ............17 Soybean, Flake .....................7A E = Aluminum, Epoxy Coated
Bond, Foundry ..................17 Polypropylene Fluff............7A Soybean, Flour, .....................7A 4TH & 5TH DIGITS-DIAPHRAGM MATERIAL (TEMPERATURE) (BULK DENSITY)
Carbon Black ....................7A Polypropylene Powder ......7A Soybean Meal .......................3D G 1 A = Fluoroelastomer, black, .025˝ thick, (25 to 300°F), (>30 lbs/cu ft)
Cement, Klinker ................8A Polypropylene Resin..........17 Soybean, Whole....................3D 2 A = Neoprene, black, .025˝ thick, (-30 to 220°F), (>30 lbs/cu ft)
G
Cement, Portland..............4B Polystyrene Beads ............3D Sugar Beets, Whole ..............6H
G 3 D = Urethane, .031" thick (10 to 150°F) (>30 lbs./cu.ft)
Chips, Hogged Fuel ..........6G Pot Ash.............................3D Sugar Refined .......................7B
G 3 E = Urethane, orange, .062˝ thick, (10 to 150°F), (>90 lbs/cu ft)

Level
Coal..................................3D Powdered Metal ...............3D Sunflower Seed.....................7A
Compost...........................5A Powdered Ore ..................3D Taconite Pellets .....................3D P 3 F = Urethane, “3D” elastomer w/bumper for removable overlays, orange,
Core Sand, Foundry..........3D PVC Powder .....................7A Talcum Powder .....................3D P (10 to 150°F), (>90 lbs/cu ft)
Corn, Shelled ....................8A PVC Resin.........................17 Walnut Shells, Crushed .........3D G 4 B = Buna-N, black, .020" thick (-20 to 212°F) (20 to 90 lbs./cu.ft.)
Diatomaceous Earth..........7A Rice ..................................17 Wheat ...................................8A G 5 A = PTFE/Glass on Sil Rubber, .024" thick (-40 to 350°F) (>35 lbs./cu. ft)
Drill Mud ...........................3D Rye...................................3D Wheat, Wet ...........................5A G 6 D = Silicone Rubber, gray, .062˝ thick, (-40 to 350°F), 15 to 30 lbs/cu ft)
Flour .................................7B Salt ...................................3D Wood, Chips.........................6G G 6 E = Silicone Rubber on Glass, red, .032˝ thick, (-40 to 350°F), (>90 lbs/cu ft)
Fly Ash..............................3D Sand, Dry .........................3D Wood, Dust ..........................6G G 6 G = “6C” w/Urethane overlay, (-40 to 350°F) (wood chips diaphragm with “A2”)
Glass Batch ......................3D Sand, Dry Silica ................3D G 6 H = “6C” w/bumper for removable overlays 901-120, -132, -134, gray, (-40 to 350°F),
*Diaphragm codes become 4th and 5th characters in model number. (>90 lbs/cu ft)
G 7 A = Silcone Rubber on Glass (White), .015" thick (-40 to 350°F) (5 to 40 lbs./cu. ft.)
G 7 B = Buna-N (Food Applications-white), .060" thick, (-20 to 212°F) (30 to 90 lbs./cu. ft.)
G 8 A = EPDM, black, .036" thick, (-40 to 275°F) (40 to 90 lbs./cu. ft.)
P 1 6 = Polyester Filter Fabric, white, 150 micron permeability (-30 to 275°F)
(30 to 90 lbs./cu. ft.)
P 1 7 = Polyester Nitex, white, 15 micron permeability (-30 to 275°F)
(30 to 90 lbs./cu. ft.)
GSD3DA 6TH DIGIT-SWITCH TYPE
GFD3DA A = Standard, SPDT, 15A @ 125, 250 VAC
PSD16A T = High Temp, SPDT, 5A @ 125, 250 VAC; 24 VDC(**)
V = High vibration, SPDT, 15A @ 125, 250 VAC
PFD16A G = Gold contacts, SPDT, 1A @ 125 VAC, 1⁄2 A @ 24 VDC
SUFFIX-SPECIAL CONTROLS
-A1 = D/P with Diaphragm cover plate
-A2 = Wood Chip Control (with “6G” diaphragm only)
-A3 = High sensitivity actuator (for very light product)
E X G S D 3 D A = EXAMPLE MODEL NUMBER* A

* GS - G series suspended controls require suspension vent fittings.

Suspension Mounting is normally used for (**)Non-UL/CSA listed
high level monitoring in vessels. For product Note: The “EX” prefix must he added to the 6-digit model number for “explosion-proof standard”. General
purpose units do not require the “EX” or other prefix. See the “Complete Model Chart” on this page.
over 20 pounds/cu. ft., the level switch (di-
aphragm face) should be located about 1⁄3 of the
distance from the vessel wall to the point of
entry of the product. For product less than 20
Suspension Assembly Kits
“P” and “G” Series Suspension Assembly Kits
pounds/cu. ft., the unit should be located clos- Part# Description
er to the point of entry of the product, about 1⁄2
the distance from the vessel wall to the point 901-409 “P” Series Suspension Assembly includes 1⁄2"
pipe (56" Std length), 1" pipe (48" Std length),
of entry. Pressure required to depress the diaphragm and trip the 1" pipe coupling, 11⁄2" NPT strain relief on 1"
switch is in the range of 5–15 oz in the horizontal direction (perpen- pipe. Galvanized mild steel pipe, explosion
dicular to the diaphragm). Suspension mounting provides the easiest proof, standard.
vertical adjustment capability, greatest sensitivity and best mainte-
nance conditions. 901-412 “G” Series Suspension Assembly includes 1⁄2"
pipe (56" Std length), watertight strain relief
and 1" coupling, upper 1" pipe (28" Std length),
Suspension Assembly Kits: Pre-assembled kits are available from lower 1" pipe(20" Std length), strain relief with
the factory, or you can build your own kits using standard pipe fittings 11⁄2" NPT, 1" X 1" X 1" Tee,1" Street
shown in our Proximity Bill of Materials (Form No. 101). Pipes and fit- Ell and 1" pipe-4" long Stilling Pot. Galvanized
tings are normally galvanized steel, but aluminum and stainless steel steel pipe, explosion proof, standard.
pipes and fittings are available. Units pictured on the previous page Specials include aluminum or stainless steel assemblies. Flange
are secured to a steel cover plate that rests on a rectangular steel port and cover assemblies are sold separately. CONSULT FACTORY
for details.
flange welded into the top of the vessel. Aluminum and stainless cov-
erplates and flanges are also available. Standard 48" long x 1" pipe pro-
vides working depth (WD) up to 48". Longer pipe (to provide greater
WD) is available. GS Series switches have upper (L1 = 28" standard) Aluminum Flange Adapter Rings
and lower (L2 = 20" standard) 1" pipes, with a tee (for stilling pot) in be- Part# Tank OD Part# Tank OD
tween. A stilling pot is required to equalize pressure and keep dirt 126-009 15" 126-016 84"
from building up behind the diaphragm. PS series require a 1⁄2" conduit 126-010 30" 126-017 96"
in 1" suspension pipe for explosion-proof applications. The 1⁄2" conduit 126-011 36" 126-018 10'
126-012 42" 126-019 12'
(56" standard length) is a standard part of the GS series assembly. 126-013 48" 126-020 14'
126-014 60" 126-021 24'
126-015 72"
Note: OD = Outside Diameter

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 270
pg271 7/24/06 12:06 PM Page 1

Series
CLS2 Capacitive Level Switch
Powder, Bulk, or Liquids, Auto-Calibration

4-3/16
[106.36]

Ø3/8
[Ø9.53]

4-1/8 22-21/64
[104.78] [567.14]
19
2-19/64 [482.60]
[58.34]

3-19/32
[91.28]
4-5/32
[105.57]

The CLS2 is a capacitive technology level switch that does not SPECIFICATIONS
Level

Service: Liquids, powder, and bulk materials compatible with wetted materi-
have any moving parts - no jams, no wear, nothing to break, and no als.
maintenance. State of the art sensing technology in the CLS2, using Wetted Materials: 316 SS and Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF).
impulse RF admittance measurement combined with an active guard, Temperature Limits: Ambient: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C), -4 to 185°F (-20 to
provides excellent level measurement and stability while being insen- 85°C) with under 24 VAC/DC power supply. Process: -40 to 250°F (-40 to
sitive to material buildup. This technology also provides immunity to 121°C).
Pressure Limit: 365 psi (25 bar).
external RF sources like walkie-talkies and cell phones as well as min- Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof, NEMA 4X (contact factory for explosion-
imal interference with radio communication or other electronic sys- proof).
tems. Switch Type: DPDT (two form C).
Electrical Rating: 8A @ 120/240 VAC res., 30 VDC. 1/2 hp @ 120 VAC and
Capacitive level technology can be used for liquids, powders, and bulk 1/4 hp @ 240 VAC ind.
Power Requirements: 12 to 240 VAC/DC; 24 to 240 VAC/DC.
materials and is great for difficult applications such as slurries, coat- Power Consumption: 2.8 Watts max.
ing products, and liquids with solids. The CLS2 is ideal for level indi- Electrical Connection: 1/2˝ NPT conduit opening, screw termination with
cation in silos, receivers, and transporters in pneumatic conveying sys- removable terminal block.
tems. The CLS2 can also be used for liquid interface applications to Process Connection: 3/4˝ male NPT. Optional 1˝, 1-1/2˝ male NPT; 3/4˝, 1˝, 1-
detect the level of two immiscible liquids that have different dielectric 1/2˝ BSP;(contact factory for sanitary connections).
constants such as oil and water. Wetted materials of PVDF and 316 SS Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal.
Set Point Adjustment: Trips when product touches probe. Cut or extend
assure great chemical compatibility and meet food grade require- probe to length of desired trip point. Can be cut as short as 1˝ and can be
ments. extended by welding on to probe. (Minimum length will be effected by material
being sensed.)
FEATURES Response Time: 0.2 seconds.
• Automatic Calibration: No need to turn calibration pots, just push Time Delay: Adjustable, 0 to 60 seconds.
Spark/Static Protection: 10 MEG Ohm dissipation resistance with spark gap.
the calibration button. The CLS2 even has an external magnet to Surge current to 100A max.
activate the calibration without having to open the enclosure. Sensitivity: 8 Selectable settings, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 14, 20 pF (at 30 pF nominal
• Universal Power Supply: One model works from 12 to 240 VAC/DC free capacitance).
without any jumpers or settings. MODEL CHART
• Coat Guard: Unit is not affected by sticky, dusty, or clingy
Example CLS2 W 1 1 R K 1 019 MC CLS2-W11RK1-019-MC
materials that coat or build up on the probe, preventing false
Series CLS2 Capacitive Level Switch
alarms. Enclosure W Weatherproof
• Failsafe Setting: Output switches can be set for Normally Open or
Normally Closed condition on loss of power. Switch 1 DPDT rated 8A @ 12/240
• Status Indication: Ultra high brightness external red LED switch VAC, 30 VDC res.
status indicator, and internal indicators for power, sensor, and Power Supply 1 12-240 VAC/DC
switch status that can be seen externally with window cap option Probe Type R Standard Rod: 316 SS, .375˝
(external LED on weatherproof model only). diameter
• Time Delay: Prevent false alarms from material splashing, C Cable: 316 SS with weight
agitation, etc. Insulator K PVDF
• Removable Terminals: Removable terminal block snaps in and out Material
enabling easy wiring outside of the enclosure. 1 3/4˝ male NPT
2 1˝ male NPT
EXAMPLE MODELS
3 1-1/2˝ male NPT
Process 4 3/4˝ BSPT
CLS2-W11RK1-019
Connection 5 1˝ BSPT
6 1-1/2˝ BSPT

Probe Length XXX Insertion length in inches.

Example 019 is 19˝ length.
(Minimum length is 6˝, with
3/4˝ sensing tip)
Options MC M20 conduit connection with
cable gland
WC Window Cap
FG Food Grade Wetted Materials

271 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg272 7/24/06 12:07 PM Page 1

Model
CRF Continuous Level Transmitter
Loop-Powered, 4-20 mA Output, RF Admittance Technology
1/2 FEMALE NPT
CONDUIT CONNECTION
TYP 2 PLACES

3/4 MALE NPT

PROCESS CONNECTION
4-1/2
[114.3]

11/16 11/16
[17.46] [17.46]
"L" 4-1/2 2 [50.80] 3-7/16
1-3/8 [114.3]
[34.93] CLEARANCE [87.33]
FOR COVER
REMOVAL

Continuously monitor the level of liquids and slurries, without SPECIFICATIONS Electrical Connections: Screw
worry of false signals as a result of material build-up. Loop powered Service: Compatible liquids. terminal.
Series CRF delivers a 4-20 mA isolated output signal proportional to Wetted Materials: Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ female
NPT.
the height of material in a tank or holding vessel. Continuous level Connection: 316 SS.
Process Connection: 3/4˝ male

Level
transmitter can be field calibrated to fit your specific application. In- Probe: FEP.
Accuracy: ± 0.1% of full range NPT standard. Optional 2, 3, or 4˝
tegral electronics and two-wire design simplify installation. Probes 150# flange in 316 SS or PVC, 1-
should be mounted vertically and are easily trimmed to shorter repeatability, ± 0.3% of full range
linearity. 1/2˝ or 2” sanitary clamp
lengths where required. When mounting in nonmetallic or horizontal Temperature Limits: Probe: -40 to connection.
tanks, a separate grounding rod must be used. Consult factory re- 250°F (-40 to 121°C), Electronics: Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof.
garding mounting flange, grounding rod assemblies, optional pressure -40 to 180°F (-23 to 82°C). Mounting Orientation: Vertically
rating, longer lengths and sanitary connection. Pressure Limit: 100 psig (6.89 mounted.
bar). Weight: 6 ft probe model is 7.25 lb
APPLlCATIONS Power Requirements: 18 to 30 (2.39 kg).
Alcohols, wastewater, oils, polymers, acids, caustics, pulp, slurries, VDC. Probe Length: Rigid Rod: 12˝
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA, 2 wire. (304.8 mm) to 144˝ (3.66 m).
wood chips, water-based products in tanks, bins, or other vessels. Flexible cable with weight: 24˝
Zero and Span Adjustments:
Zero: 0 to 500 pF, Span: 25 to 2200 (609.6 mm) to 240˝ (6.096m).
pF. Options: Flange mount assemblies
MODELS with reference rod, flexible cable
Loop Resistance: 600 Ohms at 24
Model Number Probe Length VDC. probe, optional connections listed
Current Consumption: 0.6 VA. under process connection.
CRF-TR0-34T-072 FEP coated 316 SS 6 ft (1.83 m)
CRF-TR0-34T-096 FEP coated 316 SS 8 ft (2.44 m)

Series
PLT Piezoresistive Level Transmitter
2-wire, Loop-Powered, ±0.25% Accuracy
3-7/16
4-1/2 11/16 [87.33]
[114.30] [17.46] 11/16
2 [50.80] [17.46]
CLEARANCE
1/2 FEMALE FOR COVER
NPT CONDUIT REMOVAL
CONNECTION 4-1/2
TYP 2 PLACES [114.30]
7-1/2
[190.50]

2-1/2
[63.50]

FLANGE
MOUNT

Series PLT Piezoresistive Level Transmitters provide reliable mea- SPECIFICATIONS Electrical Connections: Screw termi-
surement and control of process levels by sensing the hydrostatic pressure Service: Compatible liquids. nal.
in a tank. The loop-powered level transmitter delivers a 4 to 20 mA output sig- Wetted Materials: 316 SS and PTFE. Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT.
nal proportional to hydrostatic pressure and specific gravity of the fluid for Accuracy: ± 0.25% of span. Process Connection: 2 or 3˝ 150#
indicating, recording or control purposes. Easily accessible zero and span Repeatability and hysteresis: ± 0.10% of flange, 3˝ 300# flange. 1/4˝, 1/2˝, or 3/4˝
full range. female NPT.
potentiometers make calibration in the field quick and simple. Units are Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof.
equipped with EMI and reverse polarity protection. Temperature Limits: 0 to 200°F
(-18 to 93°C). Mounting Orientation: Any position.
APPLICATIONS Compensated Temperature Range: Weight: NPT Connection: 7.95 lb (3.61
Monitor and control levels of water, chemicals, lubricants, or paints in vented 0 to 180°F (-18 to 82°C). kg), 2˝ flange connection: 11.85 lb (5.38
tanks. Ideal for fluids with suspended solids such as wastewater and slurries. Pressure Limit: 3 times the full range. kg).
Power Requirements: 18 to 30 VDC. Fill Solution: Silicone oil.
MODELS Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA, 2 wire. Vibration Limits: ±1 g, 10 to 200 Hz.
Zero and Span Adjustments: Zero Options: See process connection for
MODEL NUMBER RANGE MOUNTING other connection options. 10 psi (.69
adjustment for elevation compensation:
PLT1040 1 psig (0.07 bar) 2 ft (.61 m) 1" female NPT 25%. bar) up to 500 psi (34.47 bar) ranges.
PLT1050 1 psig (0.07 bar) 2 ft (.61 m) 2" Flange Loop Resistance: 1000 Ohms at 24
PLT2040 5 psig (0.34 bar) 10 ft (3.05 m) 1" female NPT VDC.
PLT2050 5 psig (0.34 bar) 10 ft (3.05 m) 2" Flange

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 272
pg273 7/24/06 12:07 PM Page 1

Series
CLT Continuous Level Transmitter
Customize To Fit Application, 316 SS or Buna-N Floats
FLOAT DIMENSIONS 2-1/16˝
1-7/8˝
1-1/4˝ [47.6] [52.4]
DIA. TYP. DIA. TYP.
[31.8]
DIA.
TYP.

Junction Box 1-13/16˝

[46.0]
2-3/4˝
[69.8]
(Current Output 1-5/16˝
[33.3]
5/16˝ TYP. TYP.
[7.9]
Only) TYP.
4-9/16˝ 5/16˝ 5/16˝ [8]
[115.9] F1 F2 [8] F3

MOUNTING DIMENSIONS 6 HOLES Ø 3/4 [19.05]

2˝ NPT EQUALLY SPACED
ON A 6.000 B.C.
C [152.4]
1/2 NPT
HIGHEST
LEVEL
Level

INCHES Type 1 1/2 NPT Ø7-1/2

OF B 1-1/4 SQ [190.5]
INDICATION [31.75]
2 NPT

1/2 NPT
LOWEST 1/2 NPT Type 3 1
LEVEL 1.000 SQ [25.40]
[25.40]
1-1/4 NPT

Type 2 Type 4, 5

Continuous Output Level Transmitters provide up to the minute SPECIFICATIONS

tank level monitoring. Customize level transmitters to meet application Service: Compatible liquids.
Resolution: 1/4˝.
requirements. Transmitters can be configured for 4 to 20 mA or pro- Temperature Limits: Buna-N floats: 180°F (82°C) in water,
portional voltage output, stainless steel or Buna-N floats, and lengths -40 to 230°F (-40 to 110°C) in oil; SS floats: -40 to 230°F
(-40 to 110°C).
up to 72˝ (183 cm).
Pressure Limits: Buna-N floats: 150 psig (10 bar); SS floats: 300 psig
(21 bar).
Power Requirements: Proportional voltage output models:
10 to 30 VDC; 4-20 mA output models: 10 to 40 VDC.
Loop Resistance: 1.4 kΩ maximum.
Models are built to your specifications. Electrical Connections: Proportional voltage output: 24˝ (61 cm) free
leads #22 AWG, TFE jacketed; 4-20 mA output: Junction box.
Enclosure Rating: 4-20 mA models, NEMA 4 junction box.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical ±20°.
Example CLT V S 5 F3 20.25 02.00 23.50 CLT-VS5F3-20.25-02.00-23.50
Construction CLT Continuous Level Transmitter
Output V Voltage, proportional signal of 0 to supply voltage
C 4-20 mA
Stem and B Brass with Beryllium copper stops
Connection Material S 316 SS with SS ARMCO PH-15-7MO stops
1 1/2˝ NPT (Output Type V only)
2 1-1/4˝ NPT (Float F1 only)
Connection 3 2˝ NPT
Type 4 3˝ 150# Flange, Carbon Steel (Connection material S only)
{Max. pres. 150 psi (10.3 bar)}
5 3˝ 150# Flange, 316 SS (Connection material S only)
{Max. pres. 150 psi (10.3 bar)}
Material Min s.g. Max. Pres. psi (bar) Float Factor in (mm)
Float F1 Buna N 0.55 150 (10.3) 2.0 (50.8)
Type F2 Buna N 0.55 150 (10.3) 2.5 (63.5)
F3 316 SS 0.75 300 (20.7) 3.5 (52.4)
Indication 00.00 Length that the unit sends an output for level. Maximum is 68˝ (173 cm).
Length
Top Float Distance from bottom of mounting connection to upper float
Stop”C” 00.00 stop. Minimum is 1/4˝ (6.4 mm)
Dimension
Overall To calculate overall length, add Indication Length, Top Float
Length “B” 00.00 Stop Dimension “C”, and Float Factor. Maximum length is 72˝ (1.82 m)

273 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg274 7/24/06 12:08 PM Page 1

Series
UT Ultrasonic Level Transmitter
Noncontact Measurement, ±0.25% Accuracy, 4-wire
3-3/4 MAX
(95.25 MAX)

3/4 NPT
5-15/64
(132.95)

1-13/64
(30.56)

3/4˝ NPT
(2˝ NPT)

Ø7/8 3-1/32
(Ø22.23) (76.99)

Level
UT125
4.826
5.118 [122.58]
[129.99] 1.811
[46.00]

5.118
[129.99]

6.080
[154.43] 3/4" MALE NPT
4.000
[101.6]
(Ø0.875)
[22.23]
UT1264

Series UT Ultrasonic Level Transmitters provide reliable, noncon- SPECIFICATIONS

tact measurement for liquid level control in tanks and other vessels. Range: 10 ft (3 m).
Integral electronics generate an ultrasonic pulse which is transmitted Service: Liquids.
Wetted Material: UT125: CPVC; UT1264: PVDF.
through the air space in the tank. The pulse is reflected back to the sen-
Accuracy: ±0.25% full scale.
sor at the liquid/air interface. From the received echo, the time of flight Repeatability: 1/8” (3.2 mm) typical.
can be calculated which is directly proportional to the distance of the liq- Temperature Limits: Sensor:
uid surface to the sensor. A continuous 4 to 20 mA output signal is gen- –20 to 160°F (–29 to 71°C), Electronics: –10 to 170°F (–23 to 77°C) com-
pensated over full range of sensor.
erated and updated every half second. Units feature a fully adjustable
Pressure Limits: 100 psig (6.9 bar).
zero and span, height and distance mode adjustment, lost echo LED indi- Blind Zone: 6˝ (15 cm).
cation, and reverse polarity protection.
Beam Angle: Conicle 12°.
Power Requirements: 16 to 30 VDC.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC (isolated), 4-wire.
Zero and Span Adjustments: Zero: 6˝ to 114˝ (15 to 290 cm), Span: 1˝ to
120˝ (2.5 to 305 cm).
Process Connection: 3/4˝ male NPT.
Enclosure Rating: UT125: NEMA 7, cast aluminum; UT1264: NEMA 4X
Model UT125 Ultrasonic Level Transmitter, CPVC (IP67), ABS plastic.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
Model UT1264 Ultrasonic Level Transmitter, PVDF
Weight: UT125: 5 lb (2.3 kg); UT1264: 2.0 lb (0.91 kg).

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 274
pg275 7/24/06 12:09 PM Page 1

Series
SPT Submersible Pressure Transmitter
Stainless Steel Housing, Fully Submersible, 4-20 mA or 0-5 VDC Output
INTERGRAL PRESSURE
PORT G 1/8

3-41/64
3/4 HEX (92) MAX ABSOLUTE 2-29/64
(19) 3-3/16 (62)
(81) MAX GAUGE
1-5/64
(27) 4-25/64
(112) MAX ABSOLUTE
3-61/64
(100) MAX GAUGE

The Series SPT Submersible Pressure Transducer features stability and SPECIFICATIONS
accuracy for the most demanding submersible and industrial applications. Units Service: Compatible liquids.
include a plastic nose cone to protect the sensing element. The rugged stainless Wetted Materials: 17-4 PH SS and ABS Plastic.
steel construction and the 81 foot (24.6 m) cable add an element of durability and Accuracy: ±0.25% FS.
Stability: ±0.2 % of F.S. for 1-year (non-cumulative).
Level

versatility to this transducer. Units include circuitry for protection against noise,
Temperature Limits: -5 to 180°F (-20 to 82°C).
voltage spikes, and static discharge. The submersible transmitter is a excellent Pressure Limits: ±2% of FS.
choice for ground water monitoring, reservoirs, waste water, well monitoring, Thermal Effect: 1.5% FS.
flood channels and landfills. Power Requirements: 24 VAC.
MODELS Output: 4-20 mA DC or 0-5 VDC 2-wire.
Loop Resistance: 850 ohms @24 VDC.
Model Range Output Electrical Connection: Moulded immersible cable.
SPT-101381 0-15 psi 0-5V Process Interface: Plastic nose cone.
Enclosure: 316 SS, 17-4 PH SS.
SPT-401381 0-15 psi 4-20 mA Weight: 1lb (100 g).

Series
SBLT2 Submersible Level Transmitter
Perfect for Ground Water and Wells, Lightning Protected
6-45/64
(170.26)
1/2 NPT
SUBMERSIBLE
CABLE

Ø1
(Ø25.40)

BREATHER
TUBE
SBLT2 Submersible Level Transmitter is manufactured for years of trouble SPECIFICATIONS
free service. The transmitter consists of a piezoresistive sensing element, en- Service: Compatible liquids.
cased in a 316 SS housing. Superior lightning and surge protection utilizing dual Wetted Materials: 316 SS, 316L SS, Buna-N; Cable: Polyurethane or
arrestor technology, grounded to case, eliminating both power supply surges ETFE; Bullet Nose: PVC.
and lightning ground strike transients. Bullet nose design protects diaphragm Accuracy: ±0.25% of full scale.
from damage. Comes equipped with a 270-pound tensile strength, shielded, vent- Temperature Limit: 0 to 150°F (-18 to 66°C).
ed cable. Ventilation tube in the cable automatically compensates for changes in Compensated Temperature Range: 0 to 140°F (-18 to 60°C).
atmospheric pressure above the tank. Thermal Effect: Less than ±0.02%/°F.
Pressure Limit: 2X full scale.
Power Requirement: 13 to 30 VDC.
MODELS
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC, 2-wire.
Model Range psi Cable Length Cable
Number (ft wc) [m wc] ft (m) Type Response Time: 50 ms.
SBLT2-5-40-ETFE 5 (11.54) [3.52] 40 (12.2) ETFE Max. Loop Resistance: 850 ohms at 30 VDC.
SBLT2-10-40-ETFE 10 (23.09) [7.04] 40 (12.2) ETFE Electrical Connections: Wire pigtail.
SBLT2-15-60-ETFE 15 (34.63) [10.56] 60 (18.3) ETFE Mounting Orientation: Suspended in tank below level being measured.
SBLT2-20-60-ETFE 20 (46.18) [14.08] 60 (18.3) ETFE Weight: 2.2 lb (1.0 kg).
SBLT2-5-40 5 (11.54) [3.52] 40 (12.2) Polyurethane Electrical Protection: Lightning and surge protection.
SBLT2-10-40 10 (23.09) [7.04] 40 (12.2) Polyurethane
SBLT2-15-60 15 (34.63) [10.56] 60 (18.3) Polyurethane
APPLICATIONS
SBLT2-20-60 20 (46.18) [14.08] 60 (18.3) Polyurethane
• Well monitoring; Ground water monitoring; Environmental remediation; Sur-
For extended cable lengths or custom ranges contact factory. face water monitoring; Down hole; Water Tanks

275 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg276 7/24/06 12:11 PM Page 1

Series
PBLT Submersible Level Transmitter
Perfect for Sludge and Slurries, Lightning Protected
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS and 15-5 SS, Cable: PE-TFE.
BREATHER TUBE Accuracy: ±0.25% of full scale.
Temperature Limits: -20 to 190°F (-28.9 to 87.8°C).
STRAIN
RELIEF
Compensated Temperature Range: 0 to 180°F (-17.8 to 82.2°C).
3-7/16 Pressure Limit: 2X full scale range.
[87.31] Thermal Effect: Less than ±2.0% of full scale per 100°F.
1-1/2 Power Requirement: 9 to 36 VDC.
[38.10] 1/2 NPT SUBMERSIBLE Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC, 2-wire.
2-5/16 CABLE
[58.74] 8-1/2
Response Time: < 5 ms.
[215.90] Loop Resistance: 750 ohms at 24 VDC.
Electrical Connections: Wire pigtail.
Enclosure Rating: Intrinsically safe with proper barrier.
Mounting Orientation: Suspended in tank below level being measured.
PBLT Submersible Level Transmitter is manufactured for years of trouble Can be placed on the bottom of the tank on its side.
free service in the harshest applications. The PBLT measures the height of liq- Weight: 8.8 lb (4.0 kg).
uid above it’s position in the tank referenced to atmospheric pressure. The Standard Features: Calibration certificate.
transmitter consists of a bonded foil, strain gauge, sensing element, encased in Electrical Protection: Dual transient lightning and surge arrestors exceed-

Level
a 316 SS housing. Perfect for wastewater and slurry applications with features ing FM approved I/S and meet EMI/RFI standards Mil-STD 461/462 and
to protect the unit from these demanding applications. Superior lightning and ground to transducer case.
surge protection utilizing dual arrestor technology, grounded to case, eliminat-
ing both power supply surges and lightning ground strike transients. Large di- MODELS
ameter 316 SS diaphragm seal is non-clogging and damage resistant to floating
solids. Model Number Pressure Range Cable Length
PBLT-5-40 5 psi (.35 bar) 40 feet (12.2 m)
Comes equipped with a 220-pound tensile strength, shielded, vented, PE-TFE PBLT-10-40 10 psi (.69 bar) 40 feet (12.2 m)
cable. Ventilation tube in the cable automatically compensates for changes in at-
mospheric pressure above the tank. PBLT-15-60 15 psi (1.03 bar) 60 feet (18.3 m)
PBLT-20-60 20 psi (1.39 bar) 60 feet (18.3 m)
APPLICATIONS
• Wastewater: sludge pits, clarifiers, digesters; Alum tanks; Chemical storage Extended cable length available contact the factory.
tanks; Oil tanks; Lime slurry; Sumps; Reservoirs

Series
PBLT2 Submersible Level Transmitter
Perfect for Sludge and Slurries, Lightning Protected
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, 316L SS, Buna-N, cable: ETFE or
Ø3-7/16
[Ø87.31] Ø1/4 [Ø6.35] x THRU
7-63/64
[202.80]
polyurethane.
6 PLCS
ON A Ø1-39/64 [Ø40.88] B.C. Ø1-1/2 1/2 NPT SUBMERSIBLE
Accuracy: ±.25% full scale.
Ø1/4 x THRU [Ø38.10]
[Ø6.35 x THRU]
CABLE
Temperature Limit: 0 to 200ºF (-18 to 93ºC).
Compensated Temperature Range: 0 to 180ºF (-18 to 82ºC).
60°
TYP Thermal Effect: Less than ±.02%/ºF.
2-3/16
[55.56]
Pressure Limit: 2X full scale.
BREATHER TUBE
Power Requirement: 13 to 30 VDC.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC, two wire.
Response Time: 50 msec.
The PBLT2 Submersible Level Transmitter is manufactured for years of Loop Resistance: 850 ohms at 30 VDC.
trouble free service in the harshest applications. The PBLT2 measures the Electrical Connection: Wire pigtail.
height of liquid above its position in the tank referenced to atmospheric pres- Mounting Orientation: Suspended in tank below level being measured.
sure. The transmitter consists of a piezoresistive, sensing element, encased in Can be placed on the bottom of the tank on its side.
a 316 SS housing. Perfect for wastewater and slurry applications with features Weight: 4.3 lb (2.0 kg).
to protect the unit from these demanding applications. Superior lightning and Electrical Protection: Lightning and surge protection.
surge protection utilizing dual arrestor technology, grounded to case, eliminat-
ing both power supply surges and lightning ground strike transients. Large di- MODELS
ameter 316 SS diaphragm seal is non-clogging and damage resistant to floating
solids. Range psi Cable Length
Model Number (ft wc [m wc] ft (m) Cable Type
Comes equipped with a 270-pound tensile strength, shielded, vented cable. Ven- PBLT2-5-40 5 (11.54) [3.52] 40 (12.2) ETFE
tilation tube in the cable automatically compensates for changes in atmospher- PBLT2-10-40 10 (23.09) [7.04] 40 (12.2) ETFE
ic pressure above the tank. The vent is protected with a filter eliminating PBLT2-15-60 ETFE
15 (34.63) [10.56] 60 (18.3)
moisture collection in the transducer.
PBLT2-20-60 20 (46.18) [14.08] 60 (18.3) ETFE
APPLICATIONS PBLT2-5-40-PU 5 (11.54) [3.52] 40 (12.2) Polyurethane
• Wastewater: sludge pits, clarifiers, digesters; Alum tanks; Chemical storage PBLT2-10-40-PU 10 (23.09) [7.04] 40 (12.2) Polyurethane
tanks; Oil tanks; Lime slurry; Sumps; Reservoirs PBLT2-15-60-PU 15 ( 34.63) [10.56] 60 (18.3) Polyurethane
PBLT2-20-60-PU 20 (46.18) [14.08] 60 (18.3) Ployurethane

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 276
pg277 7/24/06 12:11 PM Page 1

Series
MPC Pump Controller
One or Two Pump Control with Built-In Alternation, Over Temperature
Protection and Seal Failure Monitoring
4.500 3.774
(114.3) (95.9)
0.530
(13.5)

NEW
Features! 3.774
3.596 (95.9)
(91.3 mm)

Panel cut-out: 3.620 x 3.620 in, +0.032/-0.000 Panel Thickness Meets IP66 (UL Type 4X)
(92 x 92 mm, +0.8/-0.0). 0.250 (6.53 mm) Max.
Allow for 0.5 in (13 mm) clearance
Level

at the rear of the instrument.

The Mercoid® MPC Pump Controller provides versatile level SPECIFICATIONS

control in a standard 1/4 DIN package. Designed for use with Inputs: 4 (or 0) to 20 mA DC or 2 (or 0) to 10 VDC selectable.
almost any style level transmitter the unit displays the present Input Impedance: Current = 10 ohms, Voltage = 100 K ohms.
level and main set point value. Incorporated in the MPC is pro- Output Ratings:
Control Relays: SPDT, rated 10A @ 240 VAC res.,
grammable level differential for on/off control of one or two 1/4 hp @ 120 VAC, 1/3 hp @ 240 VAC.
pumps, valves, or other devices through two SPDT relays. Also fea- Alarm Relays: SPST, 3A @ 240 VAC res., 1/10 hp
tured are two additional programmable alarm contacts with front @ 120 VAC.
alarm light indication. Control Type: On/off, reverse (pump out) or direct (pump in) act-
The MPC is flexible and incorporates a user-friendly programming ing.
menu. The front face meets NEMA 4X for outdoor panel mounting. Power Requirements: 100 to 240 VAC nominal, +10%-15%,
50 to 400 Hz, single phase; 132 to 240 VDC nominal, +10%-
So many features are combined into the MPC that it eliminates 15%.
many components in a pump control system. Power Consumption: 7.5 VA maximum.
Accuracy: ±0.25% of span, ±1 least significant digit.
NEW FEATURES Display: Two 4 digit, 7 segment 0.56˝ high LED’s.
• Alarms can be programmed for output indication of pump seal Display Resolution: 1 count.
failure or over temperature. Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory (no batteries required).
• Selectable time delay, for pump two, on power up to prevent Serial Communications: Optional RS-232 or RS-485 with
both pumps from starting at the same time. If power is lost, Modbus® protocol.
Ambient Operating Temperature/RH: 14 to 131°F (-10 to
upon regaining power a time delay of up to 60 seconds can be 55°C)/0 to 90% up to 104°F (40°C) non-condensing, 10 to 50%
selected to prevent too large of a current draw. at 131°F (55°C) non-condensing.
Weight: 16 oz. (454 g).
FEATURES Front Panel Rating: Meets UL Type 4X (IP66).
• Selectable pump alternation when used with two pumps to Loop Power Supply (isolated): 24 VDC @ 50 mA, regulated.
minimize pump wear. With alternation “on” a seal failure or Seal Failure (Moisture Sensor):
over temperature condition will force the non-failed pump to Power: 2.5 VDC.
lead status and stop alternation. Search Current: 3 micro amps.
Resolution: 10K to 500K ohms in 10K ohm steps.
• When used with a submersible pump including a moisture Agency Approvals: UL 508, CE.
sensor the MPC has alarm light indication of seal failure.
• When used with a pump including a thermostat the MPC
ACCESSORIES:
has alarm light indication of pump over temperature and
Weatherproof Enclosures, NEMA 4X.
removes the pump from service. The Pump can be brought
See page 307 for details.
back into service automatically or by manual reset when the
pump has cooled down.
For compatible level transmitters see A-901
• Integral 24 VDC power supply for level transmitter.
Mercoid Series SBLT and PBLT.
• Displays pump run time from a front panel button.
• Test System function that simulates the process input to
insure the pumps are operating or to test programming. Series MPC Pump Controller
• User selectable security lock-out of programming and/or set
points. OPTIONS
• Process input retransmission as a current (4 to 20 mA) RS-232 Modbus®-RTU Serial Communications.
or voltage (2 to 10 VDC) analog signal*. Add suffix – 232
RS-485 Modbus®-RTU Serial Communications.
Add suffix – 485
* Standard model MPC is set for current retransmission.
For voltage retransmission add suffix “-RV”. Modbus® is a registered trademark of Schnieder Automation.

277 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg278 7/24/06 12:14 PM Page 1

Series
MPC Jr. Pump Controller
One or Two Pump Control with Built-In Alternation

4-1/2
[114.3] 17/32 3-25/32
[13.5] [95.9]

3-19/32 3-25/32
[91.3] [95.9]

Level
MAX. PANEL THICKNESS 0.25 [6.35]

The Mercoid MPC Junior Pump Controller provides versatile SPECIFICATIONS

level control in a standard 1/4 DIN package. Designed for use with Inputs: 4 (or 0) to 20 mA DC or 2 (or 0) to 10 VDC selectable.
almost any style level transmitter the unit displays the present Input Impedance: Current = 10 ohms, Voltage = 5 K ohms.
level and main set point value. Incorporated in the MPC Jr. is pro- Output Ratings:
Control Relays: SPDT, rated 10A @ 240 VAC res.,
grammable level differential for on/off control of one or two 1/4 hp @ 120 VAC, 1/3 hp @ 240 VAC.
pumps, valves, or other devices through two SPDT relays. Also fea- Alarm Relays: SPST, 3A @ 240 VAC res., 1/10 hp
tured are two additional programmable alarm contacts with front @ 120 VAC.
alarm light indication. Others: 15 VDC @ 20 mA for output one and output two.
The MPC Jr. is flexible and incorporates a user-friendly program- Control Type: On/off, reverse (pump out) or direct (pump in) act-
ming menu. The front face meets NEMA 4X for outdoor panel ing.
Power Requirements: 100 to 240 VAC nominal, +10%-15%,
mounting. 50 to 400 Hz, single phase; 132 to 240 VDC nominal, +10%-
15%.
FEATURES Power Consumption: 7.5 VA maximum.
• Selectable pump alternation when used with two pumps to Accuracy: ±0.25% of span, ±1 least significant digit.
minimize pump wear. Display: Two 4-digit, 7 segment 0.56˝ high LED’s.
• Integral 24 VDC power supply for transmitter. Display Resolution: 1 count.
• User selectable security lock-out of programming and/or set Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory (no batteries required).
points. Serial Communications: Optional RS-232 or RS-485 with
Modbus® protocol.
• Optional process input retransmission as a current Ambient Operating Temperature/RH: 14 to 131°F (-10 to
(4 to 20 mA) or voltage (2 to 10 VDC) analog signal. 55°C)/0 to 90% up to 104°F (40°C) non-condensing, 10 to 50%
• Analog output of pump “on” condition for activation of at 131°F (55°C) non-condensing.
separate pump run time meters. Weight: 16 oz (454 g).
Front Panel Rating: Meets UL Type 4X (IP66).
Loop Power Supply (isolated): 24 VDC @ 50 mA, regulated.
Agency Approvals: UL 508, CE.

Series MPCJR Pump Controller

OPTIONS ACCESSORIES
Weatherproof Enclosures, NEMA 4X.
Retransmisssion of input, 4 to 20 mA,
See page 307 for details.
Add suffix – RC
Retransmission of input, 0 to 10 VDC, For compatible level transmitters see A-901
Add suffix – RV Mercoid Series SBLT and PBLT.

RS-232 Modbus®-RTU Serial Communications

Add suffix – 232

RS-485 Modbus®-RTU Serial Communications

Add suffix – 485

Modbus® is a registered trademark of Schnieder Automation.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 278
pg279 7/24/06 12:15 PM Page 1

Series
PCP Relay/Controller/Power Supply
10A SPDT Relay, 24 VDC Power Supply, Latching Circuit for Level Control

5-49/64
[146.45]
5-1/4
[133.35]

4-23/32 3-1/2
[19.85] [89.00]

3/16 DIA. TYP

4-39/64 [4.75]
[119.23]
1-13/32 TYP [35.72]
Level

1-3/16
[30.16] 2-11/32
[59.53]
5/8 DIA. X THRU
2 PLCS [15.88]

APPLICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
• Use with two point level switches for an adjustable Inputs: One or two normally open switches.
differential controlling a pump. Output Type: SPDT switch.
• Use as an external higher current relay for reed or Output Rating: See model chart.
NPN switches. Control Type: On/off with manual reset capability.
• Use as a power supply for NPN switches or transmitters. Power Requirements: 24 VDC, 24 VAC, 120 VAC, or 240 VAC.
Power Consumption: DC power: 15 mA maximum, AC power: 55
FEATURES mA maximum.
• Field selectable power requirements of 24 VDC, 24 VAC, Ambient Operating Temperature: 0 to 140°F (-18 to 60°C).
120 VAC, or 240 VAC. Weight: 1.06 lb (0.48 kg).
• Compact size with flange for surface mounting. Enclosure Rating: General purpose.
• Manual reset capability. Loop Power Supply: 5 or 24 VDC regulated. 200 mA maximum.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal or vertical.
The Series PCP level controller is designed to be a power
supply, an external relay, and a latching relay for differential
level control with two level switches. As a power supply the PCP
can step down line voltage to 5 or 24 VDC to power NPN switch-
es such as the OLS and PC level switches or to power a trans- Pump Out Control with F7 Level Switches
mitter. The PCP can function as an external relay to increase and PCP Controller
switching capability by providing up to a 10A SPDT contact for
direct control of moderate loads. As a latching relay the PCP can
be used with any two normally open level switches and provide
level control for pumps. The latching circuit can also be used to
hold the relay in an actuated state until manually reset.
PCP F7

MODELS
Model Electrical Rating of Contact
Number 120 VAC 30 VDC Max. Switching Capacity
PCP-1 0.5A 1A 62.5 VA, 33 W
Pump
PCP-5 5A 5A 600 VA, 150 W F7
PCP-10 10A 5A 1250 VA, 150 W

Drain

279 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg280 7/24/06 12:16 PM Page 1

Series
TLI Tank Level Indicator
Double Wall Construction for Ultra-Pure or Corrosive Liquids
9 TLI-0
[228.60]
15 TLI-1
[381.00]
27 TLI-2
1-1/2 [685.80]
[38.10] 39 TLI-3
[990.60]
51 TLI-4
[1295.40]

The Series TLI Tank Level Indicator provides a visual indication SPECIFICATIONS
of the height of liquid contained in a tank. The 1/2-foot unit can also be Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
used as a sight flow tube when mounting in a pipeline. The TLI series Wetted Materials: Tube: Borosilicate glass. End Connections: PVC,
utilizes a double wall construction to indicate the level of corrosive or Polypropylene, or PTFE. O-ring: Fluoroelastomer.
ultra-pure liquids and is available with PVC, Polypropylene, or PTFE Temperature Limit: PVC end connections: 140°F (60°C), Polypropylene
end connections: 185°F (85°C), PTFE end connections: 210°F (100°C).

Level
fittings and 1/2˝ or 3/4˝ NPT threads. Fluoroelastomer seals are stan- Pressure Limit: 100 psig (6.9 bar) at 180°F (82°C).
dard. All units are hydrostatically tested to 400 psi (27.6 bar). Connections: 1/2˝ female NPT standard. Change 1 in model number to 2
MODELS for 3/4˝.
Enclosure: Exterior acrylic shield tube to protect glass tube.
Model Number Glass Tube Length
TLI-0-1 6 in. (152.4 mm) OPTIONS
-AT Aluminum Tag
TLI-2-1 24 in. (609.6 mm)
-P Polypropylene Fittings
TLI-3-1 36 in. (91.4 cm)
-T PTFE Fittings
TLI-4-1 48 in. (121.9 cm) Note: For 3/4˝ NPT fittings, change the last digit of the model number to 2.

Model
WD Water Detector and Sensor Tape
Detects Low Levels Of Conductive Liquids
Ø1/4
[Ø6.35]
1-1/2
[38.10]

1/4
4-1/4 [6.35]
[107.32] 3
1/2˝ CONDUIT OR FLEX 4-3/4
CONNECTOR [120.02] [76.38]
AMBER
WD WATER DETECTOR LED
Ø7/8 PUSH LIGHT
TEST ALARM 1-3/4
[Ø22.23] BUTTON GREEN
LED LIGHT
[44.17]
POWER

15 PIN CABLE 1/8

CONNECTION [2.10]

The small and discreet Model WD Water Detector is designed for de- SPECIFICATIONS
pendable detection of low levels of conductive liquids. The module features a Service: Conductive liquid.
sturdy and reliable aluminum enclosure and is powered by 24 VAC or 24 to 30 Switch Type: DPDT.
VDC. Water sensing tape attaches to module and if any liquid comes in con- Electrical Rating: 1A @ 24 VAC/VDC.
tact with the tape the resistance is changed and the alarm will be triggered. Power Requirements: 24 VAC, 24 to 30 VDC.
The tape is hydrophobic so it does not absorb any of the liquid it is detecting Power Consumption: 35 mA maximum.
which makes for a faster drying time and faster return to service after a water Electrical Connections: Screw terminals.
leak. Conduit Connections: Hole for 1/2˝ conduit.
The sensing tape is 1˝ wide and can be bought in lengths of 5, 10, 15 and 25 Enclosure: Extruded aluminum.
feet. Multiple tapes can be connected together to extend the coverage area Sensor Tape: 1˝ (25.4 mm) wide and 5, 10, 15 or 25 feet long.
which makes it ideal for domestic as well as commercial applications. Typical Weight: 8 oz (.23 kg).
uses include computer rooms, telecommunication facilities, in drip pans under
HVAC equipment and around water pumps. MODELS
Model Description
FEATURES
• Alarm Output DPDT Relay WD Water Module
• Power and Alarm LED’s TP05 5´ (1.52 m) Tape
• Alarm Test Switch
• Continuous Tape Integrity Self Check TP10 10´ (3.05 m) Tape
• Easy Trouble Shooting TP15 15´ (4.57 m) Tape
• Extendable Tape Sensor
TP25 25´ (7.62 m) Tape

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 280
pg281 7/24/06 1:36 PM Page 1

Series
VR View-Rite Level Indicator
Customized to Fit Any Application, Durable, 316 SS Housing and Float

L1
C to C
L1 & C to C

TOP & BOTTOM SIDE & SIDE

Level

TYPICAL MEASUREMENTS
C to C = L1 + 10.25˝ (260.35 mm) C to C = L1

Customize level indicators to meet application require- SPECIFICATIONS

ments. Visi-rite level indicators are low maintenance, environ- Service: Clean, low-viscosity liquids.
mentally friendly, durable, and require no external power. Pressure Limits: 275 psi (18.9 bar), 225 psi (15.5 bar) @ 100°F (37.8°C),
Specify any indication length up to 96 inches (244 cm). View- 215 psi (14.8 bar) @ 300°F (148.9°C),
Rite level indicators incorporate a pressure tight housing with 195 psi (13.4 bar) @ 400°F (204.4°C).
internal float that magnetically activates external level indica- Tube Diameter: 2-1/2˝ (64 mm).
tion flags, switches, or transmitter.
OPTIONAL SWITCH MODULES
Clamp onto the level indicator. SPST, rated .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240
Models are built to your specifications VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC.
VR-S1, Maximum temperature is 300°F (148.9°C).
Polysulfone with 1/4˝ female NPT conduit connection
VR-S2, Maximum temperature is 750°F (399°C). 316 SS
with 1/2˝ male NPT conduit connection.
VR-S3, Maximum temperature is 750°F (399°C).
Explosion-proof terminal box with 1/2˝ female NPT
conduit connection.

Example VR S SS 1 TP D 0.8 150 090 80 P 1 I VR-SSS1-TPD-0.8-150-090-80P1-I

Construction VR View-Rite Level Indicator
WETTED Materials S 316 L SS, Fluoroelastomer O-ring
Configuration TB Top/Bottom Connections
SS Side/Side Connections
1 1/2˝ NPT (Female on TB, and Male on SS Configuration)
Process 2 1˝ NPT (Female on TB, and Male on SS Configuration)
Connection 4 1˝ 150# RF Flange
5 2˝ 150# RF Flange
TP Top
Float Access BM Bottom
TB Top and Bottom (Only with SS Configuration)
N None
Drain D Drain, 1/2˝ female NPT (Only with SS Configuration)
and Vent V Vent, 1/2˝ female NPT (Only with SS Configuration)
B Drain and Vent (Only with SS Configuration)
Spec. Gravity 0.0 Specific Gravity of fluid, minimum 0.8
Operating Pressure 000 Operating Pressure, in psi. Maximum is 275 psi (18.9 bar)
Operating Temp. 000 Operating Temperature of the fluid, in °F. Maximum is 400°F (20°C)
Indicating Length, L1 00 Length of level indicator, in whole inches. Maximum of 96˝ (2.44 m)
P Plastic, white and orange [300°F (149°C) maximum]
Indicating Flags
A Aluminum, silver and black
Visual N None
Indicating 1 Feet and Inches
Scale 2 Inches Only
I 4 to 20 mA transmitter of level [300°F (149°) maximum]
Output Options
V 0 to 5 VDC transmitter of level

281 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg282 7/24/06 1:37 PM Page 1

Series
MVR Mini View-Rite Level Indicator
Customized, Visual Level Indication, Compact Size

TOP & BOTTOM SIDE & SIDE

L1
L1 & C to
C to C

Level
TYPICAL MEASUREMENTS
C to C = L1 + 7.72˝ (196.09 mm) C to C = L1

Miniature custom level indicators are ideal for high-visibility level SPECIFICATIONS
indication in tight spaces. All stainless steel housing provides rugged Service: Clean, low-viscosity liquids.
durability with a diameter of only 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). Select the Pressure Limits: ≤ 300°F, 400 psi (27.6 bar); ≥ 300°F, 373 psi (25.7
mounting type that will best fit your application and an indication
length of up to 96 inches (244 cm). View-Rite level indicators incorpo- bar).
rate a pressure tight housing with internal float that magnetically acti- Tube Diameter: 1-1/4˝ (32 mm).
vates external level indication flags, switches, or transmitter. SWITCH MODULES
Clamp onto the level indicator. SPST, rated .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @
240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC.
MVR-S1, Maximum temperature is 300°F (148.9°C).
Polysulfone with 1/4˝ female NPT conduit connection.
MVR-S2, Maximum temperature is 750°F (399°C). 316 SS
Models are built to your specifications with 1/2˝ male NPT conduit connection.
MVR-S3, Maximum temperature is 750°F (399°C). Explosion-
proof terminal box with 1/2˝ female NPT conduit connection.

Example MVR S SS 1 TP D 0.8 150 090 80 P 1 I MVR-SSS1-TPD-0.8-150-090-80P1-I

Construction MVR Mini View-Rite Level Indicator
WETTED Materials S 304 L SS Housing, 316 L SS Float, Fluoroelastomer O-ring
TB Top/Bottom Connections
Configuration
SS Side/Side Connections
Process 1 1/2˝ NPT (Female on TB, and Male on SS Configuration)
Connection 3 1/2˝ 150# RF Flange
TP Top
Float
BM Bottom
Access
TB Top and Bottom (Only with SS Configuration)
N None
Drain Drain, 1/2˝ female NPT (Only with SS Configuration)
D
and
V Vent, 1/2˝ female NPT (Only with SS Configuration)
Vent
B Drain and Vent (Only with SS Configuration)
Spec. Gravity 0.0 Specific Gravity of fluid, minimum 0.8
Operating Operating Pressure, in psi. Maximum is 400 psi (27.6 bar)
000
Pressure
Operating Operating Temperature of the fluid, in °F. Maximum is 400°F (20°C)
000
Temperature
Indicating 00 Length of level indicator, in whole inches. Maximum of 96˝ (2.44m)
Length, L1
Indicating P Plastic, white and orange [300°F (149°C) maximum]
Flags A Aluminum, silver and black
Visual N None
Indicating 1 Feet and Inches
Scale 2 Inches Only
Output I 4 to 20 mA transmitter of level [300°F (149°C) maximum]
Options V 0 to 5 VDC transmitter of level

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 282
pg283 7/25/06 9:37 AM Page 1

Temperature
Table of Contents Series 9000 Special Application Thermocouples
Introduction to Temperature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . .284 and RTD’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Series TCS Thermocouple Temperature Switch . . . .285 Series D Sensors for Sanitary Applications . . . . . . . .324
Series TS2 Digital Temperature Switch . . . . . . . . . . .286 Series P Penetration Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Series TS Digital Temperature Switch . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Series T Temperature Sensor Assemblies
Series TSS Dual Stage Temperature Switch . . . . . . .288 with Thermowells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Series TSX Digital Temperature Switch . . . . . . . . . . .289 Series W Thermowells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Series DTS Digital Temperature Switch . . . . . . . . . . .290 Series EC Extension Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Series TI Temperature Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Hand Held Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Series THC Temperature/Humidity Switch . . . . . . . . .291 Sensor Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Series 32B 1/32 DIN Temperature/Process Series AD Air/Duct Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . .331
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Series S Surface Mount Temperature Sensor . . . . . .332
Model 32A Temperature Controller/Process . . . . . . .293 Series I-1 Immersion Temperature Probes . . . . . . . . .332
Series 32DZ Temperature/Process Controller . . . . . .294 Series I-2 Immersion Sensor Assemblies . . . . . . . . . .333
Series 16B 1/16 DIN Temperature/Process Series I-4 Weatherproof Immersion Assemblies . . . .333
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Series S-2 Surface Temperature Assembly . . . . . . . .334
Series 16C 1/16 DIN Temperature/Process Series S-4 Weatherproof Surface Temperature
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Series 16A Temperature Controller/Process . . . . . . .297 Series RTD Resistance Temperature Detector . . . . . .335
Temperature

Series 16L Limit Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Series GT Spirit-Filled Glass Thermometers . . . . . . .335
Series 8B 1/8 DIN Temperature/Process Controller . .299 Series BT Bimetal Thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Series 8C 1/8 DIN Temperature Controller . . . . . . . . .300 Series ST Surface Mount Thermometer . . . . . . . . . . .336
Series 8500 Temperature/Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Series 472 Digital Thermocouple Thermometer . . . . .337
Series 8600 Temperature/Process Controller . . . . . . .302 Series 472 Kits Digital Thermocouple
Series 4B 1/4 DIN Temperature/Process Controller . .303 Thermometer Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Series 4C 1/4 DIN Temperature Controller . . . . . . . . .304 Model TC10 Digital Thermocouple Thermometer . . .338
Series 2500 Temperature/Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Model TC20 Dual Input Thermocouple
Series 2600 Temperature/Process Controller . . . . . . .306 Thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Series A-900 & A-901 1/4 DIN Control Enclosures . .307 Model IRM20 Noncontact Infrared Thermometer . . .339
Series 650 Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Model PIR1 Pocket-Size Infrared Thermometer . . . .339
Series 651 Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Model WT-10 Waterproof Thermometer . . . . . . . . . . .340
Series 659 Push-Button Temperature Transmitter . . .309 Model CC-10K Colotemp Crayon Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Model 652-0 Programmable Transmitter . . . . . . . . . .309 Series KS Irreversible Temperature Labels . . . . . . . . .341
Series 1290 & 1490 Loop AlarmsTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Series KS-04/05 Reversible Temperature Strips . . . .341
Series SC1290 & SC1490 Thermocouple & RTD Series LCT016 Analog Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Limit/Alarm Switch Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Series LCT116 Digital Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Series 4130/4151 Temperature Transmitters . . . . . . .311
Model RRT Remote Reading Thermometer Temperature Controllers pgs 293-305
with Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Series M-51 Bi-Metal Air Temperature Switches . . . .312
Series FM Immersion Temperature Control . . . . . . . .312
Series DA-7035N Temperature Switches . . . . . . . . . .313
Series AVG Averaging Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . .313
Introduction to Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . .314-315
Thermocouples - RTD’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316-317
Term Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Series 5000 General Purpose and Bayonet Type
Thermocouples & RTD’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Thermometers pgs 335-340
Series 6000 Sensors for Extruders and
Plastic Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Series 7000 Protection Tube Assemblies and
Replacement Thermocouple Elements . . . . . . . . .321
Series 8000 Mineral Insulated Thermocouples
and RTD’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322

283 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg284 7/25/06 9:37 AM Page 1

Introduction to Temperature Controls

The temperature of an object is generally described by the relative “Hot” or “Cold” feeling of the item. Several reliable and
reproducible methods exist to establish the relative “Hotness” or “Coldness” of an object and provide a quantitative indica-
tion of temperature. Our sensors provide a quantitative indication of temperature through a variety of methods including bulb
and capillary, infrared, bimetal, thermocouple, thermistor and RTD. These technologies are represented on the following
pages.

ELECTRICALLY
OPERATED
VALVE M
A
PRESSURIZED R
K
TANK E
T
MERCOID 215 Frozen Foods Dairy Produce Meat & Deli

MERCOID LEVEL CONTROL

DA SERIES
TEMP
TO CONTROL
HIGH-LOW BULB
TEMPERATURE
ALARM PRESSURE
WELL

Temperature
Mercoid® temperature and level controls find wide application in high Noncontact temperature measurement using infrared thermometers.
pressure and high temperature processes. Use Infrared Thermometers for noncontact, non-contaminating tempera-
The application above shows a Mercoid® DA series bulb and capillary ture measurement of food items. Quickly verify uniform heating or cool-
temperature control monitoring the temperature of media in a holding ing in food display and food storage areas to eliminate spoilage and prod-
tank. This control can actuate an alarm when the media temperature uct waste. Monitor the temperature of ovens, ranges, deep fryers, and
exceeds the desired temperature limit. A well in the side of the tank pro- heated serving areas while maintaining a safe distance from the heat
tects the bulb from the system pressure and it allows removal of the bulb source. Check refrigeration and heating lines, compressors, motors,
and control without disturbing the process. A Mercoid® Model 215, also
shown, can be used to control the level in the tank by turning on or off HVAC units, electrical connections, and circuit breakers to verify proper
an electrically operated valve. This level control features an adjustable operation and determine trouble spots early.
level setpoint from 1.5 to 24 inches and pressure/temperature ratings of
300 psi/500ºF.

PROCESS

WARNING
LAMP OR
ALARM
WATT
TRANSDUCER

PUMP HEAT
- + EXCHANGER
0-1mA +
IN OVERPRESSURE CONTROL
-
RELIEF VALVE VALVE
DC TRIP ALARM
TEMPERATURE
4-20mA
2343 SENSOR
POWER LINES + + +

IN OUT
I/P TEMPERATURE
- - - CONTROLLER
WATER OR STEAM
CHART RECORDER
DC INPUT CR20 AIR SUPPLY
ISOLATOR
SCC-C/C

Power consumption monitoring with Dwyer SCC signal conditioners, Process temperature control using a Hi-Flow™ control valve, an I/P
limit alarms and chart recorder. transducer and a Dwyer® controller.
Reduce operational costs by monitoring power consumption and alerting Pneumatic Hi-Flow™ control valves provide excellent control with high
operators if power limits are exceeded. A Watt transducer provides a 0 to flow capacity, wide rangeability and tight shut-off capabilities. The appli-
1 mA output proportional to the AC power level. The DC input limit alarm cation shown uses a Lin-E-Aire® pneumatic actuator operating from a
is set to trip at the appropriate power level. The DPDT relay contacts con- standard 3-15 psi control air signal and a Hi-Flow™ linear control valve
trol a visual or audible alarm. The model DC input signal conditioner con- which apportions steam or water to the process. The valve regulates cool-
verts the 0 to 1 mA signal into a 4 to 20 mA output signal for use with ing water or steam flow depending on the process requirement resident
recording equipment and provides up to 1500 VDC isolation. in the temperature controller program. This package can be provided with
a Precisor®positioner, 2343, a current to pressure transducer, Proximity
position indicating transmitter and a Dwyer 1600 temperature controller
with thermocouple.

Important Note: The control hook-ups and sketches and other application information shown in this bulletin are generalized and abbreviated to present the basic application only. We
believe this application information to be reliable but it is intended for use by persons, at their own discretion, having technical skill and knowledge of the business. Neither Dwyer Instruments,
Inc., nor any of its divisions including the Mercoid, W.E. Anderson, Proximity or Love Divisions shall be liable for loss, damage or expense directly or indirectly arising from the use of any
product described herein. In no event shall any of these companies be liable for direct, indirect, special or consequential damages.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 284
pg285 7/25/06 9:38 AM Page 1

Series
TCS Thermocouple Temperature Switch
Heating and Cooling Control, 16 Amp Rating, Two Alarms C

1-11/32 1-7/64
[34] [28]

3 2-3/8
[76] [60]

Panel Cutout 2-51/64˝ x 1-9/64˝ (71 x 29 mm)

Monitor and control temperature in heating and cooling applica- SPECIFICATIONS

tions with the Series TCS Thermocouple Switch. The Series TCS Probe Range: 0 to 700°C (32 to 999°F) for thermocouple J .
offers a wide temperature range, two selectable alarm sets, and an 0 to 999°C (32 to 999°F) for thermocouples K, S.
internal buzzer indicating alarm condition or error. The user can Input: Type J or K thermocouple.
define set point, heating/cooling regulation, cycle time, alarm config- Output: 15 A SPDT relay @ 250 VAC resistive.
uration, load status, and ambient probe adjustment. The thermocou- Horsepower Rating (HP): 3/4 HP.
ple switch features password protection and error/alarm messaging. Control Type: ON/OFF.
Temperature and output status is indicated on the bright red LED dis- Power Requirements: 110 VAC, 230 VAC, 12 VAC/VDC or 24
play. Use the configuration key (sold separately) to quickly program VAC/VDC (depending on model).
Temperature

multiple units. The Series TCS includes a fitting clip for panel mount- Accuracy: ±1% FS.
ing, gasket, rear terminal cover and instruction manual. Display: 3-digit, red, 1/2˝ (12.7 mm) digits, plus sign.
Resolution: 1°.
Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory.
MODELS Ambient Operating Temperature: 14 to 131°F (-10 to 55°C).
Model Number Description Storage Temperature: -4 to 176°F (-20 to 80°C).
Weight: 2.3 oz (65 g).
TCS-4010 Type J/K input, 110V, °F Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
TCS-4011 Type J/K input, 110V, °C Agency Approvals: CE, UR, URc.
TCS-4020 Type J/K input, 230V, °F APPLICATIONS
TCS-4021 Type J/K input, 230V, °C TS Digital Temperature Switches are suitable for industrial chillers, environ-
TCS-4030 Type J/K input, 12 VAC/VDC, °F mental chambers, walk-ins and freezers, heat sealers, sterilizers, beer and wine
chillers, mug frosters, coolers, display cases and cabinets, warmers, meat and
TCS-4031 Type J/K input, 12 VAC/VDC, °C
produce storage, floral preservation, refrigerated transportation, laboratories,
food service equipment, ovens and dryers, tobacco preservation, hot melt glue
stitchers for case erectors, cool rooms, burn-in rooms and chambers, and cold
water citrus packing.

Accessories
122095-84, J T/C
122095-01, K T/C
TS2-K, Configuration Key
PARAMETERS
Description Units Range
SP Set point Degrees r1 to r2
r0 Differential or hysteresis Degrees 1 to 99°
r1 Lower Value Set Point Degrees 0 to 999°
r2 Higher Value Set Point Degrees 0 to 999°
d0 Heating or Cooling Control Option Ht/Co
c0 Min. stop time for Load Minutes 0 to 59 min.
c2 Load Status During Probe Error 0/1 Off/On
P1 Ambient Probe Adjustment Degrees -10 to 10
P5 Ambient Probe Type Option J, K, or S
H5 Parameter Access code Numeric 0 to 255 (Set at 0 from factory)
A0 Alarm 1 Hysteresis Degrees 1 to 999°
A1 Alarm 1 Threshold Degrees 0 to 999°
A2 Alarm 1 Exclusion Time Seconds 0 to 999°
A3 Alarm 1 Configuration Option Off, 1, or 2
A4 Alarm 2 Hysteresis Degrees 1 to 999°
A5 Alarm 2 Threshold Degrees 0 to 999°
A6 Alarm 2 Exclusion Seconds 0 to 999
A7 Alarm 2 Configuration Option Off, 1, or 2

285 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg286 7/25/06 9:38 AM Page 1

Series
TS2 Digital Temperature Switch C
Easy Multi-Unit Programming, 16A SPDT Relay Output

1.338 1.100
[34] [28]

3.000 2.375
[76] [60]

Panel Cutout 2-51/64˝ x 1-9/64˝ (71 x 29 mm)

Monitor and control temperature for heating and cooling SPECIFICATIONS

applications with the Series TS2 Digital Temperature Switch. The Probe Range: -58 to 302°F (-50 to 150°C).

Temperature
Series TS2 offers twelve programmable functions to customize the Input: PTC thermistor 1000Ω @ 25°C.
unit to fit application requirements. Use the 16 (5) Amp SPDT relay Output: 16A SPDT relay @ 250 VAC resistive, 5A inductive.
output to drive a motor, compressor, or fan. Designed with the OEM
Horsepower Rating (HP): 3/4 HP.
in mind, the TS2 offers the ability to configure multiple units with the
touch of a button. Control Type: ON/OFF.
Programming multiple units is quick and easy. Simply program one Power Requirements: 110 VAC, 230 VAC, 12 VAC/VDC or 24
switch with the desired parameter settings and connect the configura- VAC/VDC.
tion key (sold separately) to the back of the unit. Press the button on Accuracy: ±1% F.S.
the configuration key and download the parameter settings. Connect Display: 3-Digit, red, 1/2˝ digits.
the key to the other switches to upload the stored settings with the Resolution: 1°.
push of a button. Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory.
The TS2 features set point adjustments, static defrost timing, com- Ambient Operating Temperature: 14 to 131°F (-10 to 55°C).
pressor mean time, hysteresis, and ambient probe adjustment. Storage Temperature: -4 to 176°F (-20 to 80°C).
Security protection is offered using a password code. The Series TS2
Weight: 2.3 oz (65 g).
Digital Temperature Switches are designed to operate with PTC
(1000Ω @ 25°C) probes sold separately. Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
Agency Approvals: CE, URc, UR.
MODELS
Model Number Voltage Supply Display ACCESSORIES
TS2-010 110 VAC °F
TS-5, Probe PVC, 5 ft (1.5 m) cable
TS2-011 110 VAC °C
TS-51, Probe PVC, 10 ft (3 m) cable
TS2-020 230 VAC °F
TS2-021 230 VAC °C TS-6, Probe metal, 5 ft (1.5 m) cable
TS2-030 12 VAC/VDC °F TS-61, Probe metal, 10 ft (3 m) cable
TS2-031 12 VAC/VDC °C
TS2-K, Configuration Key
TS2-040 24 VAC/VDC °F
TS2-041 24 VAC/VDC °C

PARAMETERS
Description Units Range
SP Set point Degrees r1 to r2
r0 Differential or hysteresis Degrees 1 to 20
r1 Lower Value Set Point Degrees -50 to 150°C (-50 to 302°F)
r2 Higher Value Set Point Degrees -50 to 150°C (-50 to 302°F)
d0 Heating or Cooling Control Option Ht/Co
d2 Time for Defrosting Minutes 0 to 59 min.
d8 Interval Time between Defrosting Hours 1 to 24 hr.
c0 Minimum Stop Time for Compressor Minutes 0 to 59 min.
c1 Continuous Cycle Time Hours 0 to 24 hr.
P1 Ambient Probe Adjustment Degrees -10 to 10°
H5 Parameter Access code Numeric 0 to 99
t0 Maximum Temperature on Display Degrees -50 to 150°C (-50 to 302°F)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 286
pg287 7/25/06 9:39 AM Page 1

Series
TS Digital Temperature Switch
3-Digit Display, Heating/Cooling Control, 8 or 16 Amp Relay C

1.34 1.10
[34] [28]

2.95 2.72
[75] [69]
Panel Cutout 2-51/64 x 1-9/64 (71 x 29)

The TS Digital Temperature Switch is designed to regulate many SPECIFICATIONS

heating and cooling applications. Easy programming via the tactile Probe range: -58 to 302°F (-50 to 150°C).
front keypad enables quick setup of the 12 parameters for simple, reli- Input: 1.5-inch (4 cm) thermistor (1000Ω @ 25°C) with 5 ft
able operation. The user can define set point, heating/cooling regula- (1.5 m) cable.
tion, hysteresis, cycle time, ambient probe adjustment and defrosting Output: 8A SPDT or 16A SPST relay @ 250 VAC
time. The unit features error or alarm messaging and password pro- resistive (Depending on model).
Temperature

tection. View probe temperature on the bright red, 3-digit LED dis- Horsepower Rating (HP): 1/3 HP for 8A and 3/4 HP
play. Select between 8 amp SPDT or 16 amp SPST relay outputs, tem- for 16A.
perature display in °F or °C, and 110 VAC, 230 VAC, or 12 VDC power Control Type: ON/OFF.
supplies. The Series TS includes a thermistor with 5 ft (1.5 m) cable, Power Requirements: 110 VAC, 230 VAC or 12 VAC/VDC
fitting clips for panel mounting, gasket, rear terminal cover, and (Depending on model). 4VA (230V)
instruction manual. Accuracy: ±1°C.
Display: 3-Digit, red, 1/2˝ digits.
Resolution: 1°.
MODELS Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory.
Ambient Operating Temperature: 14 to 158°F (-10 to 70°C).
Model Number Description Storage Temperature: -4 to 176°F (-20 to 80°C).
TS-13010 110V, 16A, °F Weight: 2.3 oz (65 g).
TS-13011 110V, 16A, °C Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
TS-13020 230V, 16A, °F Agency Approvals: CE, URc, UR
TS-13021 230V, 16A, °C
TS-13030 12 VAC/VDC, 16A, °F
APPLICATIONS
TS-13031 12 VAC/VDC, 16A, °C TS Digital Temperature Switches are suitable for industrial chillers,
TS-83010 110V, 8A, °F environmental chambers, walk-ins and freezers, heat sealers, steriliz-
TS-83011 110V, 8A, °C ers, beer and wine chillers, mug frosters, coolers, display cases and
TS-83020 230V, 8A, °F cabinets, warmers, meat and produce storage, floral preservation,
TS-83021 230V, 8A, °C refrigerated transportation, laboratories, food service equipment,
TS-83030 12 VAC/VDC, 8A, °F ovens and dryers, tobacco preservation, hot melt glue stitchers for
TS-83031 12 VAC/VDC, 8A, °C
case erectors, cool rooms, burn-in rooms and chambers, and cold
water citrus packing.
PARAMETERS
Description Units Range
SP Set point Degrees r1 to r2
r0 Differential or hysteresis Degrees 1 to 20
r1 Lower Value Set Point Degrees -50 to 150°
r2 Higher Value Set Point Degrees -50 to 302°F (-50 to 150°C)
d0 Heating or Cooling Control Option Ht/Co
d2 Time for Defrosting Minutes 0 to 59 min.
d8 Interval Time between Defrosting Hours 1 to 24 hr.
c0 Min. stop time for Load Minutes 0 to 59 min.
c1 Continuous Cycle Time Hours 0 to 24 hr.
P1 Ambient Probe Adjustment Degrees -10 to 10
H5 Parameter Access code Numeric 0 to 99 (Set at -00 from factory)
t0 Max. Temp. on Display Degrees -50 to 302°F (-50 to 150°C)

287 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg288 7/25/06 9:39 AM Page 1

Series
TSS Dual Stage Temperature Switch
Two Independent Relay Outputs, Heating or Cooling Control

1.34 1.10
[34] [28]

2.95 2.72
[75] [69]

Panel Cutout 2-51/64 x 1-9/64 (71 x 29)

Temperature
Regulate temperatures for heating or cooling control with SPECIFICATIONS
Series TSS Dual Stage Temperature Switch. The Series TSS is Probe Range: -58 to 302°F (-50 to 150°C).
designed to accept two inputs (thermistor or RTD) with independent Input: PTC thermistor (1000Ω @ 25°C), or RTD
8A relay output for dual stage temperature control. The unit also fea- (PT100Ω @ 0°C).
tures a 30 mA TTL alarm output for activating an external buzzer. Outputs: One 8A SPDT relay @ 250 VAC, resistive; One 8A
The Series TSS offers 34 programmable parameters to customize con- SPST relay @ 250 VAC resistive; Alarm: TTL 30 mA @ 12 VDC.
Horsepower Rating (HP): 1/3 HP.
trol functions. Access to all parameters, except setpoint, can be
Power Requirements: 12 VAC/DC.
secured with a password code. The TSS Series includes a rear termi-
Accuracy: 0.5% of full scale.
nal cover and instruction manual. Input sensors are sold independent- Display: 3-digit and sign, red.
ly. Resolution: 0.1° (<100°); 1° (≥100°).
Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory.
Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 to 131°F (0 to 55°C).
Storage Temperature: -4 to 176°F (-20 to 80°C).
Dimensions: 76 x 34 x 60 mm (3 x 1.3 x 2.4 in).
PARAMETERS Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
Weight: 2.3 oz (65 g).
Description Units Range
Set 1 Temperature Set Point 1 Degrees r4 to r6
Agency Approvals: CE.
Set 2 Temperature Set Point 2 Degrees r5 to r7
r0 Set1 and Set2 dependency Range Ind/dEP
r1 Differential for Set1 Degrees 0.1 to 20.0 MODELS
r2 Differential for Set 2 Degrees 0.1 to 20.0
r3 Band differential Degrees 0.1 to 20.0 Model Number Unit Input
r4 Minimum value for Set1 Degrees -99.9 to r6
r5 Minimum value for Set2 Degrees -99.9 to r7 TSS-40 °F PTC Thermistor
r6 Maximum value for Set1 Degrees r4 to 302
r7 Maximum value for Set2 Degrees r5 to 302 TSS-41 °C PTC Thermistor
r8 Operation mode Range On1/On2/nEU TSS-60 °F RTD PT100Ω
A0 Alarm differentials Degrees 0.1 to 20.0
A1 Maximum probe 1 alarm Degrees 0.1 to 99.9 TSS-61 °C RTD PT100Ω
A2 Maximum probe 2 alarm Degrees 0.1 to 99.9
A3 Minimum probe 1 alarm Degrees 0.1 to 99.9
A4 Minimum probe 2 alarm Degrees 0.1 to 99.9 ACCESSORIES
A5 Alarm check time (*) hh:m 0.0 to 18.0
c0 Minimum relay stop time Minutes 0 to 240 TS-5, Probe PVC, 5 ft (1.5 m) cable
c1 Operation output 1 Range dir/inv
c2 Operation output 2 Range dir/inv TS-51, Probe PVC, 10 ft (3 m) cable
c3 Default operation output 1 %ON 0 to 100
c4 Default operation output 2 %ON 0 to 100
TS-6, Probe metal, 5 ft (1.5 m) cable
P0 Temperature units Range °C/°F TS-61, Probe metal, 10 ft (3 m) cable
P1 Temp. probe 1 adjustment Degrees -20.0 to 20.0
P2 Temp. probe 2 adjustment Degrees -20.0 to 20.0
P3 Decimal point Option no/yES APPLICATIONS
P4 Probe to be displayed Option sd1/sd2 TSS Digital Temperature Switches are suitable for industrial chillers,
P5 Number of temp. probes Range 1/2
H0 Set default settings Command 0
environmental chambers, walk-ins and freezers, heat sealers, steriliz-
H1 Keypad protection Option no/yES ers, beer and wine chillers, mug frosters, coolers, display cases and
H2 Operation led OUT Option dir/inv cabinets, warmers, meat and produce storage, floral preservation,
H3 Operation led def Option dir/inv
H4 Communication setup Numeric 0 to 999 refrigerated transportation, laboratories, food service equipment,
H5 Access code to parameters Numeric 0 to 999 ovens and dryers, tobacco preservation, hot melt glue stitchers for case
H6 Probe type Option ptc/pt1
erectors, cool rooms, burn-in rooms and chambers, and cold water cit-
*Time Format: hh:m, where m are tenths of minutes. rus packing.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 288
pg289 7/25/06 9:40 AM Page 1

Series
TSX Digital Temperature Switch
Dual Input, Cooling Applications, Single or Dual Relay Output

(1.338) (1.100)

(3.000) (2.375)

Panel Cutout 2-51/64˝ x 1-9/64˝ (71 x 29 mm)

The microprocessor based Series TSX offers a low cost solu- SPECIFICATIONS
tion for cooling applications. Units are designed to accept up to two Probe Range:
temperature probes selectable between PTC or NTC thermistor
input. The probe temperature is displayed on the bright 3-digit LED. PTC: -58 to 302°F (-50 to 150°C);
The Series TSX offers 23 programming parameters for specific appli- NTC: -58 to 230°F (-50 to 110°C).
cation requirements (see parameter chart below). To quickly program
multiple units with the same settings, use the configuration key TS2- Input: PTC/NTC thermistor 1000Ω @ 25°C.
K (sold separately). The user can define set point, hysteresis, probe Output: 16A SPST relay @ 250 VAC resistive, 5A inductive; Dual
error performance, and defrosting. The defrosting mode can also be
initiated or interrupted manually by pressing the up arrow button. output units also have one 8A SPDT relay @ 250 VAC resistive,
Temperature

Units include password protection to secure from unwanted setting 3A inductive.

changes except for set point adjustment. If required, the keypad can
be locked out so no adjustments can be made. Horsepower Rating (HP): 16A: 1HP 240 VAC - 10FLA, 60LRA
Select from single output units with one 16A SPST relay or dual out- 250 VAC.
put with one 16A SPST relay and one 8A SPDT relay for defrosting. Control Type: ON/OFF.
The temperature switch includes one NTC probe, gasket, mounting
clips, and instruction manual. Power Requirements: 110 VAC; 230 VAC; 24 VAC/DC; 12
VAC/DC (depending on model).
MODELS
Accuracy: ±1% F.S.
DUAL INPUT, SINGLE OUTPUT
Model Number Supply Voltage Degrees Display: 3-digit, red, 1/2˝ (12.7 mm) digits.
TSX-10140 110 VAC °F Resolution: 0.1° (<100°); 1° (≥100°).
TSX-11140 110 VAC °C Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory.
TSX-20140 230 VAC °F
230 VAC °C
Ambient Operating Temperature: 14 to 131°F (-10 to 55°C).
TSX-21140
TSX-40140 24 VAC/DC °F Storage Temperature: -4 to 176°F (-20 to 80°C).
TSX-41140 24 VAC/DC °C Weight: 2.3 oz (65 g).
DUAL INPUT, DUAL OUTPUT Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
Model Number Supply Voltage Degrees
Agency Approvals: UR pending.
TSX-10240 110 VAC °F
TSX-11240 110 VAC °C Accessories
TSX-20240 230 VAC °F TS2-K, Configuration Key
TSX-21240 230 VAC °C TS-5, PVC Probe (PTC), 5 ft
TSX-40240 24 VAC/DC °F TS-6, Metal Probe (PTC), 5 ft
TSX-41240 24 VAC/DC °C TS-7, Plastic Probe (NTC), 3 ft

PARAMETERS
Description Units Range
SP Set Point Degrees r1 to r2
r0 Differential or Hysteresis Degrees 1 to 20
r1 Lower Value for SP Degrees -58 to r2
r2 Higher Value for SP Degrees r1 to 302
d0 Type of Defrosting Option rE/In
d1 Temperature Defrosting Stop Degrees -58 to 302
d2 Defrosting Duration Minutes 0 to 59
d4 Delay of First Defrosting Minutes 0 to 999
d5 Display on Defrosting Option off/on/-d-
d7 Compressor Drip Time Minutes 0 to 999
d8 Defrosting Interval Time Hours 0 to 24
d14 Defrost Counting Mode Option ct/rt
c0 Minimum Stopping Time Minutes 0 to 59
c2 ON Time of Fault Cycle Minutes 0 to 999
c3 OFF Time of Fault Cycle Minutes 0 to 999
c4 Minimum ON Time Minutes 0 to 999
c5 Minimum Time Between 2 Activations Minutes 0 to 999
P1 Ambient Probe Adjustment Degrees -10 to 10
P2 Defrosting Probe Adjustment Degrees -10 to 10
P4 Number of Probes Option 1/2
H1 Keyboard Protection Option yes/no
H5 Access Code to Parameters Numeric 0 to 255
H6 Probe Type Option Ptc/ntc

289 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg290 7/25/06 9:41 AM Page 1

Series
DTS Digital Temperature Switch
Low Cost, 8 amp SPDT or 16 amp SPST Relay

1.34 1.10
[34] [28]

2.95 2.72
[75] [69]

Panel Cutout 2-51/64 x 1-9/64 (71 x 29)

The DTS Digital Temperature Switch is a low cost unit that per- SPECIFICATIONS
forms the functions of more expensive controllers. The switch is
designed for heating or cooling control. Twelve different parameters Probe Range: -58 to 302°F (-50 to 150°C).
can be programmed via the push button front panel. The heating
Input: PTC (1000Ω @25°C).

Temperature
mode can be used to keep temperature above a user-defined set point
or alert an operator of a low alarm condition. In contrast, the cooling
Output: 8 amp SPDT or 16 amp SPST relay @ 250 VAC
mode can be used to ensure process temperature stays below the crit-
resistive, (Depending on model).
ical level or signal high alarm condition. View temperature, error and
alarm messaging on the bright red, 3-digit LED display. Units accept Horsepower Rating (HP): 1/3 HP for 8 amp and 3/4 HP
PTC probe input (sold separately) and include fitting clips for panel for 16 amp.
mounting and instruction manual.
Power Requirements: 110 VAC.

MODELS Accuracy: ±1°C.

Model Number Description
Display: 3-digit, red.
DTS-13010 Digital Temperature Switch (110V, 16 A, °F)

DTS-13011 Digital Temperature Switch (110 V, 16 A, °C) Resolution: 1°.

DTS-83010 Digital Temperature Switch (110V, 8 A, °F)
Ambient Operating Temperature: 14 to 158°F (-10 to 70°C).
DTS-83011 Digital Temperature Switch (110V, 8 A, °C)
Storage Temperature: -4 to 176°F (-20 to 80°C).
ACCESSORIES Weight: 2.3 oz (65 g).
DTS-5 PVC Probe, 5 ft (1.5 m)
DTS-52 Metal Probe, 5 ft (1.5 m) Agency Approval: CE.

PARAMETERS
Description Units Range
SP Set point Degrees r1 to r2
r0 Differential or hysteresis Degrees 1 to 20
r1 Lower Value Set Point Degrees -50 to 150°
r2 Higher Value Set Point Degrees -50 to 302°F (-50 to 150°C)
d0 Heating or Cooling Control Option Ht/Co
d2 Time for Defrosting Minutes 0 to 59 min.
d8 Interval Time between Defrosting Hours 1 to 24 hr.
c0 Min. stop time for Load Minutes 0 to 59 min.
c1 Continuous Cycle Time Hours 0 to 24 hr.
P1 Ambient Probe Adjustment Degrees -10 to 10
H5 Parameter Access code Numeric 0 to 99 (Set at -00 from factory)
t0 Max. Temp. on Display Degrees -50 to 302°F (-50 to 150°C)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 290
pg291 7/25/06 9:47 AM Page 1

Series
TI Temperature Indicator
Low Cost, Two-Digit Display, ±1% Accuracy
1-5/32 63/64
[29] [25]

2-7/16 2-5/32
[62] [55]
Panel Cutout 2.36˝ x 1˝ (60 x 26 mm)

Monitor temperature with the Series TI Temperature Indicator. Units SPECIFICATIONS

offer a temperature range of -58 to 99°F (-50 to 99°C) with an accuracy of ±1%.
Quickly view temperatures on the bright red, double-digit LED. Models TI-106 Probe Range: -58 to 99°F (-50 to 99°C).
& TI-216 feature an external potentiometer for probe temperature adjustment.
Input: PTC thermistor (1000Ω @ 25°C), not included.
The compact design of the Series TI makes it ideal for any refrigeration appli-
cation. Power Requirements: 110 VAC or 230 VAC (depending on
MODELS
model).
Model Power
Number Supply Display Adjustable Accuracy: ±1% FS.
TI-10 110 VAC °F No Display: 2-digit plus sign, red, 1/2˝ H digits.
TI-21 230 VAC °C No Resolution: 1°.
Temperature

TI-106 110 VAC °F Yes Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).

TI-216 230 VAC °C Yes Weight: 2.3 oz (65 g).
Accessory Agency Approvals: UR, CE
DTS-5 PVC Temperature Probe with 5 ft (1.5 m) cable

Series
THC Temperature/Humidity Switch
Independent Displays, 61 Programmable Parameters, 4 SPST Relays

4-3/32 2-7/16
[104.00] 1-15/16 [61.80]
[49.23]

5 3-7/8
[127.00] [98.43]

5-9/32
[134.32]

Simultaneously measure and control temperature and humidity with the SPECIFICATIONS
Series THC Temperature/Humidity Switch. The unit offers a 3-digit red display
for temperature indication and a 3-digit green display indicating humidity. The Measurement Range: Temperature: -58 to 302°F
Series THC is equipped with four independent relays, two for temperature con- (-50 to 150°C); Humidity: 0 to 100%RH.
trol and two relays for humidity control. Input: Up to 2 thermistors and 1 humidity sensor.
The unit offers 61 programmable parameters for temperature and humidity Output: 4 SPDT, 8A relays @ 250 VAC.
control including set point, differential, direct/reverse acting, cycle time, alarm Horsepower Rating (HP): 1/3 HP.
clock time, and decimal point adjustment. In the event of a probe error, the
default operation of the relays can be set to open or close. The THC features
Control Type: ON/OFF direction, direct or reverse acting,
error or alarm messaging and password protection. neutral.
The THC Temperature/Humidity Switch accepts up to two temperature probe Power Requirements: 110 or 230 VAC (depending on
inputs (sold separately) and a humidity sensor. A humidity sensor with 0–1V, model).
0–3V (sold separately), or 4–20 mA output can be used with the Series THC. Accuracy: Temperature:±0.5% of probe range; Humidity:
MODELS ±3% of range.
Model Number Description
Display: Two 3-digit displays. 1/2˝ digits.
THC-10 °F 110 VAC Resolution: 0.1°.
THC-11 °C 110 VAC Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory.
Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 to 158°F (0 to 70°C).
THC-20 °F 230 VAC
Storage Temperature: -4 to 176°F (-20 to 80°C).
THC-21 °C 230 VAC
Weight: 1.17 lb (530 g).
ACCESSORIES
Panel Cutout: 5.15˝ x 2.37˝ (131 x 111mm).
THC-P Humidity probe with 3V output & 4 ft (1.2 m) cable
TS-5 Temperature probe, PVC with 5 ft (1.5 m) cable Front Panel Protection: NEMA 4X (IP65).
TS-6 Temperature probe, metal with 5 ft (1.5 m) cable Agency Approvals: CE.
S-51 Temperature probe, PVC with 10 ft (3 m) cable
TS-61 Temperature probe, metal with 10 ft (3 m) cable
291 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au
pg292 7/25/06 9:48 AM Page 1

Series
32B 1/32 DIN Temperature/Process Controller
Universal Input, Dual Temperature Output Control, RS-485 Communication

1-49/64
(44.75)

15/16 55/64
(24.00) (21.85)
9/64 3-59/64
1-57/64 (3.40) (99.80)
(48.00)

Temperature
The compact Series 32B Temperature/Process Controller of- SPECIFICATIONS
fers advanced control features for the most demanding temperature or Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC voltages or DC current.
process applications. Enclosed in a 1/32 DIN housing, the Series 32B is Display: Two 4-digit, 7 segment .25˝ H (6.35 mm) LED’s. PV: red;
designed with dual, 4-digit LED displays for local indication of process SV: green.
value and setpoint. Control methods include ON/OFF, PID, self-tune, Accuracy: ±0.25% span, ±1 least significant digit.
and manual tune. PID control is supported with 64 temperature and Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
time (ramp/soak) control actions. The dual loop output control allows si- Power Consumption: 5 VA max.
multaneous heating and cooling control. The second output can be con- Operating Temperature: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
figured as an alarm mode using one of the thirteen built-in alarm Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory.
functions. Control Output Ratings:
RS-485 communication is standard on the Series 32B. Up to 247 com- Relay: SPST, 5A @ 250 VAC resistive.
munication addresses are available with transmission speeds of 2400 to Voltage pulse: 14V, 10% to -20% (max 40 mA).
38,400 bps. The controller also features universal input, selectable tem- Current: 4 to 20 mA.
perature units (°F/°C), selectable resolution, quick sampling rate and Communication: RS-485 Modbus® A-5-11/RTU communication
security protection. protocol.
Weight: 4 oz (114 g).
Agency Approvals: CE, UL.
MODELS
Model Input Types Range
Number Output 1 Output 2 Type K T/C -328 to 2372°F (-200 to 1300°C)
32B-23 Voltage Pulse Relay Type J T/C -148 to 2192°F (-100 to 1200°C)
32B-33 Relay Relay Type T T/C -328 to 752°F (-200 to 400°C)
32B-53 Current Relay Type E T/C 32 to 1112°F (0 to 600°C)
Type W T/C -328 to 2372°F (-200 to 1300°C)
Type R T/C 32 to 3092°F (0 to 1700°C)
Type S T/C 32 to 3092°F (0 to 1700°C)
Type B T/C 212 to 3272°F (100 to 1800°C)
Type L T/C -328 to 1562°F (-200 to 850°C)
ACCESSORY
Type U T/C -328 to 932°F (-200 to 500°C)
A-277, 250 Ohm Precision Resistor
Pt 100 RTD -328 to 1112°F (-200 to 600°C)
0-50 mV -999 to 9999
0-5 V -999 to 9999
0-10 V -999 to 9999
0-20 mA* -999 to 9999
4-20 mA* -999 to 9999
*Requires 250 Ohm Precision Resistor

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 292
pg293 7/25/06 9:48 AM Page 1

Series
32A Temperature Controller/Process
1/32 DIN, Universal Input, Self-Tune, Fuzzy Logic

4.395 0.433 2.080

[111.60] [11.00] [52.80]

RTD OPTIONS OUT A OUT B

T/C
&
AL
V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
0.870 1.184
[22.10] [30.10]

0.25 [6.35]
2 MAX. PANEL THICKNESS
Temperature

STANDARD FEATURES • Peak/Valley Indication

• Large Dual Display • Percent Output Indication
• Self-Tune • Illuminated Keypad
• Fuzzy Logic • 16 Segment Ramp/Soak Function
• Universal Input • Auto/Manual Station Function
• Loop Break Protection • Four Password Protected Security Levels

The 32A Series temperature/process controllers set SPECIFICATIONS

a new standard in 1/32 DIN power, flexibility and value. This Selectable Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC Voltage or DC Current
group of controls offers the highest level of features in the selectable.
most compact industry standard size. Ease of use is assured Display: Two 4-digit, 7 segment, 0.259 high (6.35 mm) LEDs.
with the world’s first dual display 1/32 DIN temperature/ Accuracy: ±0.25% of span, ±1 least significant digit.
process controllers. Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC, nominal, +10 - 15%, 50 to 400 Hz.
single phase; 132 to 240 VDC, nominal, +10 - 20%.
The Series 32A offers universal input (10 thermocouple types, Power Consumption: 5 VA maximum.
4 RTD types, voltage and current), single or dual set point, Operating Temperature: 14 to 131°F (–10 to 55°C).
alarm (optional), Fuzzy Logic, Self-Tune, Peak/Valley indica- Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory. No batteries required.
tion, Percent Output indication and Heater Break protection. Control Output Ratings:
Auto/Manual capability and 16 Segment Ramp and Soak with Relay: SPST, 3A @ 240 VAC resistive; 1.5A @ 240 VAC inductive;
adjustable time base are also offered. Process protection fea- Pilot Duty Rating: 250 VA, 2A @ 120 VAC or 1A @ 240 VAC.
tures include open sensor protection, shorted sensor protec- Switched Voltage (Non-isolated): 5 VDC @ 20 mA.
tion, input rate of change protection and loop break protec- Weight: 4 oz (114 g).
tion. Agency Approvals: CE, UL E83725.
Front Panel Rating: Type 4X (IP66).

MODELS OPTIONS
Model No. Alarm Output A Output B 992, RS 485 Computer Compatible Control
32A020 No 5 VDC None 9502, 12-24 VDC/VAC Power Input
32A123 Yes 5 VDC Relay
32A133 Yes Relay Relay

293 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg294 7/25/06 9:49 AM Page 1

Model
32DZ Temperature/Process Controller
1/32 DIN, Dual Zone Control, Fuzzy Logic, Self-TunePID

4.395 0.433 2.080

[111.60] [11.00] [52.80]

RTD OPTIONS OUT A OUT B

T/C
&
AL
V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
0.870 1.184
[22.10] [30.10]

0.25 [6.35]
2 MAX. PANEL THICKNESS

STANDARD FEATURES • Loop Break Protection

Temperature
• Large Dual Display • Peak/Valley Indication
• Independent Self-Tune for Each Zone • Illuminated Keypad
• Independent Fuzzy Logic for Each Zone • Four Password Protected Security Levels

The Model 32DZ temperature/process controls set a new stan- SPECIFICATIONS

dard in 1/32 DIN power, flexibility, and value. Love Controls is proud Inputs: Thermocouple, Type J, K, E, L, and N.
to be the creator of the world’s first dual zone control in the 1/32 DIN Display: Two 4-digit, 7 segment, 0.259 high (6.35 mm) LEDs.
size. Ease of use is assured from the creators of the world’s first dual
Accuracy: ±0.25% of span, ±1 least significant digit.
display 1/32 DIN temperature /process control. The 32DZ offers 5
Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC, nominal, +10 - 15%, 50 to 400
thermocouple type inputs. Each zone offers a single set point with Hz. single phase; 132 to 240 VDC, nominal, +10 - 20%.
mechanical relay. Standard features include independent Fuzzy Logic, Power Consumption: 5 VA maximum.
Self-Tune, and Peak/Valley indication for each zone. Process protec-
Operating Temperature: 14 to 131°F (–10 to 55°C).
tion is provided by open sensor protection, shorted sensor protection,
Memory Backup: Nonvolative memory. No batteries required.
input rate of change protection, and loop break protection. Options for
Control Output Ratings:
the 32DZ include RS-485 Serial Communication. Designed and built
Relay: SPST, 3A @ 240 VAC resistive; 1.5A @ 240 VAC induc-
in the USA, the 32DZ offers the highest levels of features, function,
tive; Pilot Duty Rating: 250 VA, 2A @ 120 VAC or 1A @ 240
and quality available today. VAC.
Weight: 4 oz (114 g).

Model 32DZ1133* Temperature Control INPUT RANGES

*Use ungrounded thermocouples. INPUT TYPE RANGE °F RANGE °C
Type J or L Thermocouple
1
-100 to +1607 -73 to +871
Options Type K1 Thermocouple -200 to +2500 -129 to +1371
992, RS-485 Serial Communications. Allows remote computer to Type E Thermocouple
1
-100 to 1800 -73 to +932
read and write all control parameters Type N1 Thermocouple -100 to +2372 -73 to +1300
1
These Input Types can be set for 0.1° display. If temperature goes above 999.9° or less than -199.9° the dis-
play will return to whole degree resolution.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 294
pg295 7/25/06 9:49 AM Page 1

Series
16B 1/16 DIN Temperature/Process Controller
Dual Control Output, RS-485 Communication, Universal Inputs

1-57/64 1-49/64
(48.00) (44.75)
AT OUT 1 OUT 2 ALM

1-57/64 3/8 3-5/32

(48.00) (9.50) (80.00)
Temperature

Monitor and control temperature or process applications with SPECIFICATIONS

precision using the Series 16B controllers. The units offer two separate Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC voltages or DC current.
outputs for dual loop control in direct or reverse acting. Select relay, Display: Two 4-digit, 7 segment .25˝ H (6.35 mm) LED’s. PV: red;
voltage, or current output combined with a second relay output. SV: green.
The Series 16B provides dual LED displays for local indication of Accuracy: ±0.25% span, ±1 least significant digit.
process value and setpoint value. Output status, engineering scale, auto Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
tuning and alarm status is also indicated on the front panel. Power Consumption: 5 VA max.
Control methods include ON/OFF, PID, self-tune and manual tune. PID Operating Temperature: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
control is supported with 64 ramp/soak control actions. Two additional Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory.
alarm outputs are standard on the Series 16B. The alarm outputs can Control Output Ratings:
be quickly configured by using the thirteen built-in alarm functions. Relay: SPST, 5A @ 250 VAC resistive.
The controller easily communicates with other external devices such as Voltage pulse: 14V, 10% to -20% (max 40 mA).
PC’s and PLC’s for data search and system integration using the built- Current: 4 to 20 mA.
in RS-485 interface. Up to 247 communication addresses are available Communication: RS-485 Modbus® A-5-11/RTU communication
with transmission speeds of 2400 to 38,400 bps. The Series 16B also protocol.
features universal input, selectable °F/°C, selectable resolution and se- Weight: 4 oz (114 g).
curity functions. Agency Approvals: CE, UL.

MODELS
Model Input Types Range
Number Output 1 Output 2 Type K T/C -328 to 2372°F (-200 to 1300°C)
16B-23 Voltage Pulse Relay Type J T/C -148 to 2192°F (-100 to 1200°C)
16B-33 Relay Relay Type T T/C -328 to 752°F (-200 to 400°C)
16B-53 Current Relay Type E T/C 32 to 1112°F (0 to 600°C)
Type W T/C -328 to 2372°F (-200 to 1300°C)
Type R T/C 32 to 3092°F (0 to 1700°C)
Type S T/C 32 to 3092°F (0 to 1700°C)
ACCESSORY Type B T/C 212 to 3272°F (100 to 1800°C)
A-277, 250 Ohm Precision Resistor Type L T/C -328 to 1562°F (-200 to 850°C)
Type U T/C -328 to 932°F (-200 to 500°C)
Pt 100 RTD -328 to 1112°F (-200 to 600°C)
0-50 mV -999 to 9999
0-5 V -999 to 9999
0-10 V -999 to 9999
0-20 mA* -999 to 9999
4-20 mA* -999 to 9999
*Requires 250 Ohm Precision Resistor

295 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg296 7/25/06 9:51 AM Page 1

Series
16C 1/16 DIN Temperature Controller
PID Control, Auto-Tuning, Dual Display, RS-485 Communication

1-57/64 1-49/64
(48.00) (44.75)
AT OUT1 OUT2 ALM

3/8

Temperature
1-57/64 3-5/32
(48.00) (9.50) (80.00)

The compact Series 16C Temperature Controller offers accu- SPECIFICATIONS

rate temperature measurement and control in a 1/16 DIN package. De- Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, see chart.
signed for direct or reverse acting (cooling or heating) control, the Display: Two 4-digit, 7 segment .25˝ H (6.35 mm) LED’s. PV: red;
Series 16C can be programmed for simple ON/OFF or more complex SV: green.
PID control functions. PID control is supported with manual or auto- Accuracy: ±0.25% span, ±1 least significant digit.
tuning. Select relay, voltage or current output for control methods. Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
The Series 16C accepts a variety of thermocouple and RTD inputs. Power Consumption: 5 VA max.
Process value and setpoint value are displayed simultaneously on the Operating Temperature: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
large dual LED. Auto-tuning, engineering units (°F or °C), and alarm Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory.
status is also indicated on the faceplate. Two alarm outputs are includ- Control Output Ratings:
ed on the unit with 12 preprogrammed alarm functions. Relay: SPST, 5A @ 250 VAC resistive.
Voltage pulse: 14V, 10% to -20% (max 40 mA).
Input Types Range Current: 4 to 20 mA.
Pt100Ω RTD 32 to 212°F (0 to 100°C) Communication: RS 485 Modbus® A-5-11/RTU
-4 to 932°F (-20 to 500°C) Communication Protocal
-328 to 1112°F (-200 to 600°C) Weight: 4 oz (114 g).
T/C type B 212 to 3272°F (100 to 1800°C)
32 to 3092°F (0 to 1700°C) Agency Approvals: CE, UL.
T/C type S
T/C type R 32 to 3092°F (0 to 1700°C)
T/C type N -328 to 2372°F (-200 to 1300°C)
T/C type E 32 to 1112°F (0 to 600°C)
T/C type T -4 to 752°F (-20 to 400°C)
-328 to 752°F (-200 to 400°C) MODELS
T/C type J -4 to 752°F (-20 to 400°C) Model
-148 to 1562°F (-100 to 850°C) Number Output
T/C type K -328 to 2372°F (-200 to 1300°C)
16C-2 Voltage Pulse
-328 to 932°F (-200 to 500°C)
T/C type L -328 to 932°F (-200 to 500°C) 16C-3 Relay
T/C type U -328 to 1472°F (-200 to 800°C) 16C-5 Current

Modbus® is a registered trademark of Schnieder Autoation

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 296
pg297 7/25/06 10:00 AM Page 1

Series
16A Temperature Controller/Process
1/16 DIN, Universal lnput, Fuzzy Logic, Self-TunePID

5.24 [133]
0.45
[11.4]

1.76 1.89
[44.7] [48]

0.25 [6.35]
PANEL CUT-OUT: 1.77 +0.02 [45 +0.6] SQUARE MAX. PANEL THICKNESS
Temperature

Latest microprocessor based technology affords full programma- SPECIFICATIONS

bility with complete array of features in compact ultralow cost unit. Selectable Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC Voltage, or DC
16A Series Temperature/Process Controller features universal input, Current (See Input Ranges).
Display: Two four-digit LED displays, 0.3 in (7.62 mm) high.
Self-Tune PID, Fuzzy Logic, and dual four-digit LED displays for
Display Resolution: 1 degree or 0.1 degree (sensor dependent),
process and set point value. Selectable inputs can be thermocouple, or 1 count.
RTD, current or voltage. Available outputs are solid-state relay, relay, Accuracy: ±0.25% of span ±1 least significant digit.
pulsed voltage, or proportional current. Programmable alarm (option- Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC nominal, +10% -15%, 50 to
al) can be reset automatically or manually. Front panel is waterproof 400 Hz single phase; 132 to 240 VDC +10% -20%.
Operating Temperature: 14 to 131°F (-10 to 55°C).
and corrosion resistant (UL type 4-X), making it ideal for sanitary
Power Consumption: 5 VA maximum.
applications. Replace electronics without wiring changes (via remov- Control Output Ratings:
able front panel). Self diagnostics, nonvolatile memory and selectable SSR: 2.0 A at 240 VAC resistive at 77°F (25°C). De-rates to
control modes are all designed for greater productivity. Four securi- 1.0 A at 130°F (55°C). Minimum load of 100 mA. DC SSR: 1.75 A
ty levels are password protected. On-off, P, PI or PID manual tune at 32 VDC maximum. Relay: SPST, 3A at 240 VAC resistive, 1.5 A
@ 240 VAC inductive. Pilot Duty rating: 250 VA, 2 A @ 120 VAC, 1
control functions can be selected or the controller will Self-Tune auto-
A @ 240 VAC. Alarm Relay: SPST, 3 A @ 240 VAC resistive; 1.5
matically for best PID control. A @ 240 VAC inductive. Pilot Duty Rating: 240 VA, 2 A @ 120 VAC
or 1 A @ 240 VAC. Switched Voltage: 15 VDC at 20 mA.
The 16A2 offers the best value in Standard Features in a Process and Proportional Current: 0 to 20 mADC, scalable, into 600 ohms
Temperature control. In addition to the features listed above, the maximum.
Weight: 8 oz (227g).
16A2 offers Peak/Valley indication, Percent Output indication, Digital
Agency Approvals: UL E83725, CE.
Input Filter, and a host of others. Front Panel Rating: Type 4X (IP66).
Serial Communications (Optional): RS-232 or RS-485 with
either LoveLink™ Software or Modbus® RTU protocol.

OPTIONS
MODELS 934**, Process Signal Output, PV or SV.
MODEL NO. ALARM OUTPUT A OUTPUT B Isolated 0 to 20 mADC
16A2111 Yes SSR SSR 936**, Process Signal Output, PV or SV.
16A2030 No Relay None Isolated 0 to 10 VDC
16A2133 Yes Relay Relay 992**, RS 485 Computer Compatible Control
16A2130 Yes Relay None LovelinkTM Software
16A2020 No 15 VDC None 993**, RS 232 Computer Compatible LovelinkTM Software
16A2110 Yes SSR None 9502, 12-24 VDC/VAC power input
16A2050 No Current None

** These options may not be combined with each other.

Modbus® is a registered trademark of Schnieder Automation.

297 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg298 7/25/06 10:39 AM Page 1

Series
16L Limit Controls
FM Approved, Large, Dual Display, Universal Input

5.24" (133) 0.45"

(11.4)

1.76" 1.89"
(44.7) (48)

All dimensions in inches (millimeters). 0.25" (6.35)

Panel cut out is 1.77 +0.02" (45 +0.6) square. Max. Panel Thickness

STANDARD FEATURES SPECIFICATIONS

Temperature
• FM Approved Limit Selectable Inputs: 10 Thermocouple, 4 RTD, DC Voltage,
• Large Dual Display
or DC Current selectable.
• Universal Input
Display: Two 4 digit, 7 segment 0.3˝ (7.62 mm) high LEDs.
• Dedicated, Illuminated Reset Key
• Remote Reset Capability Standard Accuracy: ±0.25% of span, ±1 least significant digit.
• Four Password Protected Security Levels Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC, nominal, +10 -15%, 50

to 400 Hz. single phase; 132 to 240 VDC, nominal,

The 16L Series Temperature/Process FM Approved Limit
Controls set a new standard in 1/16 DIN Limit controls. The 16L +10 -20%.
offers universal input (10 thermocouple types, 4 RTD types, voltage,
and current), single set point or dual set point. Standard features in- Power Consumption: 5 VA maximum.
clude Remote Reset capability, Peak/Valley indication, open sensor
protection, input rate of change protection, and much more. Operating Temperature: 14 to 131˚F (-10 to 55˚C).
Unit offers 1500 VAC resolution, selectable high or low input, pro- Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory. No batteries
grammable sensor break protection and adjustable differential.
required.
Outputs include normally open (form A) and normally closed (form Control Output Ratings: Relay: SPST, 3A @ 240 VAC
B) relays. Form A and form B relays can be setup one for each set
point output and logically linked to emulate a form C output. resistive; 1.5A @ 240 VAC inductive.
Designed and built in the USA, the 16L family of controls offers the
highest levels of features, function, and quality available today. Weight: 8 oz (227 g).

Agency Approvals: UL, FM.

MODELS
Model No. Output A Output B
16L2030 N.O. Relays None
16L2034 N.O. Relays N.C. Relays
OPTIONS
934, Process Signal Output, PV or SV. Isolated 0 to 20 mADC

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 298
pg299 7/25/06 10:39 AM Page 1

Series
8B 1/8 DIN Temperature/Process Controller
Vertical Mount, Dual Control Output, RS-485 Communication
1-3/4
(44.00)

PV

3-7/8
SV
(98.20)
OUT1 OUT2 °F °C
3-37/64
AT ALM1 ALM2 LM A 3

3-49/64 (91.00)
(95.70)

SERIES 8B
Temperature

1/2 3-1/8
1-7/8 (12.80) (79.20)
(47.80)

The Series 8B 1/8 DIN Temperature/Process Controller offers SPECIFICATIONS

versatility and reliability for temperature and process monitoring ap- Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC voltages or DC current.
plications. Designed as a vertical mount 1/8 DIN controller, the Series Display: Two 4-digit, 7 segment .38˝ H (9.53 mm) LED’s. PV: red;
8B features dual outputs, universal input, and up to three additional SV: green.
alarm outputs. The second output can be configured as a third alarm Accuracy: ±0.25% span, ±1 least significant digit.
output. Select the alarm type from 13 different preprogrammed alarm Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
functions. Control methods include ON/OFF, PID, auto-tune or manual Power Consumption: 5 VA max.
tune. PID control is supported with 64 ramp/soak control actions. RS- Operating Temperature: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
485 communication is standard on the Series 8B with up to 247 avail- Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory.
able addresses. Control Output Ratings:
Relay: SPST, 5A @ 250 VAC resistive.
Voltage pulse: 14V, 10% to -20% (max 40 mA).
Current: 4 to 20 mA.
Input Types Range
Linear Voltage: 0-5V, 0-10V.
Type K T/C -328 to 2372°F (-200 to 1300°C)
Type J T/C -148 to 2192°F (-100 to 1200°C) Communication: RS-485 Modbus® A-5-11/RTU communication
Type T T/C -328 to 752°F (-200 to 400°C) protocol.
Type E T/C 32 to 1112°F (0 to 600°C) Weight: 15 oz (425 g).
Type W T/C -328 to 2372°F (-200 to 1300°C) Agency Approvals: CE, UL.
Type R T/C 32 to 3092°F (0 to 1700°C)
Type S T/C 32 to 3092°F (0 to 1700°C)
Type B T/C 212 to 3272°F (100 to 1800°C)
Type L T/C -328 to 1562°F (-200 to 850°C) MODELS
Type U T/C -328 to 932°F (-200 to 500°C)
Model
Pt 100 RTD -328 to 1112°F (-200 to 600°C)
Number Output 1 Output 2
0-50 mV -999 to 9999
0-5 V -999 to 9999 8B-23 Voltage Pulse Relay
0-10 V -999 to 9999 8B-33 Relay Relay
0-20 mA* -999 to 9999 8B-53 Current Relay
4-20 mA* -999 to 9999 8B-63 Linear Voltage Relay
*Requires 250 Ohm Precision Resistor

ACCESSORY
A-277, 250 Ohm Precision Resistor

299 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg300 8/2/06 2:43 PM Page 1

Series
8C 1/8 DIN Temperature Controller
ON/OFF or PID Control, Auto-Tuning, RS 485 Communication
1-3/4
(44.00)

PV

3-7/8
(98.20)
SV
OUT1 OUT2 °F °C
3-37/64
AT ALM1 ALM2 ALM3 (91.00)
3-49/64
(95.70)

Temperature
LOVE CONTROLS SERIES 8C

1/2 3-1/8
(12.80) (79.20)
1-7/8
(47.80)

The Series 8C Temperature Controller offers easy-to-use pro- SPECIFICATIONS

gramming menus designed for quick installation. The unit is designed Inputs: Thermocouple & RTD (see chart).
for direct or reverse acting (cooling or heating) control. The Series 8C Display: Two 4-digit, 7 segment .38˝ H (9.53 mm) LED’s. PV: red;
can be programmed for simple ON/OFF or more complex PID control SV: green.
functions. PID control is supported with manual or auto-tuning. Select Accuracy: ±0.25% span, ±1 least significant digit.
relay, voltage pulse, or current output control methods. The controller Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
also includes two additional alarm outputs. The alarm outputs can be Power Consumption: 5 VA max.
configured from 12 different preprogrammed settings. Operating Temperature: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
The temperature controller accepts a variety of thermocouple and Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory.
RTD inputs. The process value and setpoint value are displayed si- Control Output Ratings:
multaneously on the large dual LED. Auto-tuning, engineering units Relay: SPDT, 5A @ 250 VAC resistive.
(°F or °C) and alarm status is also indicated on the faceplate. Voltage pulse: 14V, 10% to -20% (max 40 mA).
Current: 4 to 20 mA
Communication: RS 485 Modbus® A-5-11/RTU
Input Types Range Communication Protocal.
Pt100Ω RTD 32 to 212°F (0 to 100°C) Weight: 15 oz (425 g).
-4 to 932°F (-20 to 500°C) Agency Approvals: CE, UL.
-328 to 1112°F (-200 to 600°C)
T/C type B 212 to 3272°F (100 to 1800°C)
T/C type S 32 to 3092°F (0 to 1700°C)
T/C type R 32 to 3092°F (0 to 1700°C)
T/C type N -328 to 2372°F (-200 to 1300°C)
T/C type E 32 to 1112°F (0 to 600°C)
T/C type T -4 to 752°F (-20 to 400°C)
-328 to 752°F (-200 to 400°C) MODELS
T/C type J -4 to 752°F (-20 to 400°C) Model
-148 to 1562°F (-100 to 850°C)
Number Output
T/C type K -328 to 2372°F (-200 to 1300°C)
-328 to 932°F (-200 to 500°C) 8C-2 Voltage Pulse
T/C type L -328 to 932°F (-200 to 500°C) 8C-3 Relay
T/C type U -328 to 1472°F (-200 to 800°C) 8C-5 Current

Modbus® is a registered trademark of Schnieder Automation.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 300
pg301 7/25/06 10:42 AM Page 1

Series
8500 Temperature/Controller
1/8 DIN, Fully Programmable, Self-Tune PID

4-9/16 1-15/16
(115.8) (49.1)
17/32
(13.5)

3-19/32 3-25/32
(91.3) (95.9)

1/4 (6.53) MAXIMUM

85000-0 PANEL THICKNESS
Panel cutout 1.772˝ x 3.622˝ (45 x 92 mm).

The Love Series 8500 Temperature/Process Control provides SPECIFICATIONS

Temperature

an impressive selection of features in a compact, economical 1/8 DIN pack-

Inputs: Thermocouple or RTD.
age. Features include on-off, time proportioning, proportional, PI, PD or
full PID control — fully programmable from the front panel — or use Self- Display: Two 4 digit, 7 segment LED; models; 0.3" (7.62 mm) high.
Tune PID. Inputs are selectable from a variety of thermocouple types in- Resolution: 1 degree or 0.1 degree.
cluding J, K, T, E, N or L; DIN NIST or Ni RTD’s. Output choices include Accuracy: ±0.25% of span, ±1 degree.
solid state relay, mechanical relay, 5 VDC — ideal for driving an external Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC nominal, +10%-15%, 50-400 Hz, single
SSR — or isolated 4-20 mA proportional current. An optional programma- phase; 132-240 VDC nominal, +10%-20%.
ble alarm provides a full array of alarm action configurations including Power Consumption: 5 VA maximum.
high alarm, low alarm and high/low guardband alarm. Manual reset,
Operating Temperature: 14 to 131°F (-10 to 55°C).
power-up inhibit and power interrupt reset provide additional alarm flexi-
bility. Memory Backup: Non-volatile memory. No batteries required.
Control Output Ratings:
A water and corrosion resistant front panel (NEMA 4X, IP65), input SSR: 2.5A @ 240 VAC resistive at 77°F (25°C).
fault timer, digital input filter, Self-Tune ramp to setpoint, four pass- De-rate to 1.25A @ 130°F (55°C).
word protected security levels and °F or °C display selection are all Relay: SPDT,10A @ 240 VAC resistive.
standard. Entire electronics package is easily field replaceable with- Alarm Relay: SPST, 3A @ 240 VAC resistive.
out wiring changes thanks to the removable front panel.
Switched Voltage (non-isolated): 5 VDC @ 20 mA.
MODELS Proportional Isolated Current: 0-20 m A, selectable, into
Model 600 ohms maximum.
Number Input Output Control Action: Selectable for Reverse (usually heating) or Direct (usually
85111-0 SSR cooling).
Thermocouple
Ramp: One ramp time adjustable from 0 to 100 hours.
85112-0 Thermocouple 5 VDC
Isolation: Relay and SSR outputs; 1500 VAC. 0-20 mA output; 500 VAC.
85113-0 Thermocouple Relay 5 VDC output is not isolated.
85115-0 Thermocouple 4-20 mA Weight: 13 oz (369 g).
85121-0 RTD SSR
85122-0 RTD 5 VDC
85123-0 RTD Relay
85125-0 RTD 4-20 mA
*When ordering a control to operate contactor or solenoid loads greater than
100 mA, select the SSR output instead of the Relay. If the relay is selected,
order part number A-600. R/C snubber

301 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg302 7/25/06 10:43 AM Page 1

Series
8600 Temperature/Process Controller
1/8 DIN Self-Tune PID, Fuzzy Logic Software

4-9/16 1-15/16
[115.8] [49.1]
17/32
[13.5]

3-19/32 3-25/32
[91.3] [95.9]

1/4 [6.53] MAXIMUM PANEL THICKNESS

86000-0
Panel cutout 1.772˝ x 3.622˝ (45 x 92 mm).

Series 8600 Temperature/Process Controllers set a new More Standard Features

Temperature
standard for quality, ease-of-use and value. While a high level of • NEMA 4X (IP 65) Front Panel Resists Dust & Moisture
• Four Password Protected Security Levels
standard features are included, many function setup items ap- • Front Panel Programmability
pear in the control menu only when the function is selected, so • 16 Segments of Ramp/Soak with Program End Control
you don’t have to wade through unnecessary items. Units fea- • Operates on 100-240 VAC, 132-240 VDC
ture a universal input for thermocouple types J, K, E, T, L, N,
B, C, S, & R; RTDs — 100Ω Plt. NIST, 100Ω Plt. DIN, 120Ω Ni SPECIFICATIONS
Industrial, 1000Ω Plt. DIN; differential input (-10 to +10 mV
Selectable Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC voltage or DC current.
DC) and process input (0 to 20 mA DC, 0 to 10 VDC). A stan-
dard 24 volt isolated, regulated power supply is included to Input Impedance:
operate most standard 4-20 mA transmitters. Thermocouple — 3 megohms minimum.
Voltage — 5000 ohms.
Standard features include Self-Tune, Fuzzy Logic, fully ad-
Current — 10 ohms.
justable PID, Auto/Manual control with bumpless transfer and RTD Current — 200µA maximum.
front panel activation key, percent output indication, peak and
valley indication, loop break protection and indication. For Display: Two 4 digit, 7 segment LED; 0.4" (10 mm) high — horizontal
process inputs, the display is fully programmable from models; 0.3" (7.62 mm) high — vertical models.
-1999 to +9999 with selectable decimal point location. Most Accuracy: ±0.25% of span, ±1 least significant digit.
thermocouple and RTD inputs can show whole or tenth degree Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC nominal, +10%-15%, 50 to 400 Hz,
displays. The Series 8600 is available with single or dual set- single phase; 132 to 240 VDC +10%-20%.
point outputs and can be programmed for on-off, PID or
Operating Temperature: 14 to 131°F (-10 to 55°C).
heat/cool or latching alarm. All outputs are isolated from the
inputs. Outputs include 10 amp relay, 2.5 amp SSR and 0-20 Control Output Ratings:
mA DC (scalable). 15 VDC SSR drive is standard. SSR: 2.5 A at 240 VAC resistive at 77°F (25°C). De-rate to 1.25 A
at 130°F (55°C).
Relay: SPDT,10 A at 240 VAC resistive,1⁄2 hp at 120 VAC, 1⁄3 hp at
240 VAC.
Alarm Relay: SPST, 3 A at 240 VAC resistive.
MODELS Switched Voltage: 15 VDC at 20 mA.
Model Proportional Current: 0-20 mA DC, scalable into 600 ohms
Number Output A Output B maximum.
Weight: 13 oz (369 g).
86111-0 SSR SSR
86120-0 15 VDC Pulsed None
86133-0 Relay Relay
86153-0 0-20 mA Relay

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 302
pg303 7/25/06 10:43 AM Page 1

Series
4B 1/4 DIN Temperature/Process Controller
Dual Control Output, RS-485 Communication, Auto-Tuning

3-27/32
(97.63)
3-25/32 3-9/16
(96.00) (90.81)
AT OUT1 OUT2 ALM1 ALM2 ALM3 °F °C

LOVE CONTROLS SERIES 4B

5/8 3-1/8
3-25/32 (15.80) (79.2)
(96.00)
Temperature

The Series 4B 1/4 DIN Temperature/Process Controller is de- SPECIFICATIONS

signed to accept thermocouple, RTD, current or voltage input and pro- Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC voltages or DC current.
vide dual outputs for control. Available outputs include relay/relay, Display: Two 4-digit, 7 segment. PV: 3/4˝ H (19 mm) red; SV: 1/2˝
voltage pulse/relay, current/relay, or linear voltage/relay. H (12.7 mm) green.
The units can be programmed for ON/OFF, PID, auto-tuning, or man- Accuracy: ±0.25% span, ±1 least significant digit.
ual tuning control methods. The PID control is supported by 64 Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
ramp/soak actions. The Series 4B also includes two additional alarm Power Consumption: 5 VA max.
outputs. The second relay output can be reconfigured as a third alarm Operating Temperature: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
output. The alarm type can be selected from 13 different prepro- Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory.
grammed alarm functions. The controller features dual LED displays Control Output Ratings:
for local indication of process and setpoint values. Relay: SPDT, 5A @ 250 VAC resistive.
Voltage pulse: 14V, 10% to -20% (max 40 mA).
Current: 4 to 20 mA.
Linear Voltage: 0-5V, 0-10V.
Communication: RS-485 Modbus® A-5-11/RTU communication
Input Types Range
protocol.
Type K T/C -328 to 2372°F (-200 to 1300°C)
Weight: 15 oz (425 g).
Type J T/C -148 to 2192°F (-100 to 1200°C)
Type T T/C -328 to 752°F (-200 to 400°C) Agency Approvals: CE, UL.
Type E T/C 32 to 1112°F (0 to 600°C)
Type W T/C -328 to 2372°F (-200 to 1300°C)
Type R T/C 32 to 3092°F (0 to 1700°C)
Type S T/C 32 to 3092°F (0 to 1700°C)
Type B T/C 212 to 3272°F (100 to 1800°C)
Type L T/C -328 to 1562°F (-200 to 850°C) MODELS
Type U T/C -328 to 932°F (-200 to 500°C)
Pt 100 RTD -328 to 1112°F (-200 to 600°C) Model
0-50 mV -999 to 9999 Number Output 1 Output 2
0-5 V -999 to 9999 4B-23 Voltage Pulse Relay
0-10 V -999 to 9999 4B-33 Relay Relay
0-20 mA* -999 to 9999 4B-53 Current Relay
4-20 mA* -999 to 9999 4B-63 Linear Voltage Relay
*Requires 250 Ohm Precision Resistor

ACCESSORY
A-277, 250 Ohm Precision Resistor

303 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg304 7/25/06 10:44 AM Page 1

Series
4C 1/4 DIN Temperature Controller
PID Control, Auto-Tuning, Large Dual Display, RS 485 Communication

3-27/32
3-25/32 (97.60) 3-9/15
AT OUT1 OUT2 ALM1 ALM2 ALM3 °F °C
(96.00) (90.80)

LOVE CONTROLS SERIES 4C

5/8 3-1/8
3-25/32 (15.80) (79.2)

Temperature
(96.00)

The Series 4C 1/4˝ DIN Temperature Controller offers easy-to-use SPECIFICATIONS

programming menus designed for quick installation. Control functions Inputs: Thermocouple or RTD, see chart.
include ON/OFF, PID, auto-tuning or manual tuning. The Series 4C is Display: Two 4-digit, 7 segment. LED’s. PV: red .75˝ H (19 mm);
available with relay, voltage or current output with two additional SV: green .5˝ (12.7 mm).
alarm outputs. The alarm outputs can be configured from 12 different Accuracy: ±0.25% span, ±1 least significant digit.
preprogrammed settings. The Series 4C accepts a variety of thermo- Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
couple and RTD inputs. Process value and setpoint value are simulta- Power Consumption: 5 VA max.
neously displayed with the process value in red and setpoint in green. Operating Temperature: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory.
Control Output Ratings:
Relay: SPST, 5A @ 250 VAC resistive.
Voltage pulse: 14V, 10% to -20% (max 40 mA).
Input Types Range
Current: 4 to 20 mA.
Pt100Ω RTD 32 to 212°F (0 to 100°C)
-4 to 932°F (-20 to 500°C) Communication: RS 485 Modbus® A-5-11/RTU
-328 to 1112°F (-200 to 600°C) Communication Protocal
T/C type B 212 to 3272°F (100 to 1800°C) Weight: 15 oz (472 g).
T/C type S 32 to 3092°F (0 to 1700°C) Agency Approvals: CE, UL.
T/C type R 32 to 3092°F (0 to 1700°C)
T/C type N -328 to 2372°F (-200 to 1300°C)
T/C type E 32 to 1112°F (0 to 600°C)
T/C type T -4 to 752°F (-20 to 400°C)
-328 to 752°F (-200 to 400°C) MODELS
T/C type J -4 to 752°F (-20 to 400°C)
-148 to 1562°F (-100 to 850°C) Model
T/C type K -328 to 2372°F (-200 to 1300°C) Number Output
-328 to 932°F (-200 to 500°C) 4C-2 Voltage Pulse
T/C type L -328 to 932°F (-200 to 500°C) 4C-3 Relay
T/C type U -328 to 1472°F (-200 to 800°C) 4C-5 Current

Modbus® is a registered trademark of Schnieder Automation.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 304
pg305 7/25/06 10:45 AM Page 1

Series
2500 Temperature/Controller
1/4 DIN Fully Programmable, Self-Tune PID

4-9/16 3-25/32
[115.8] 17/32 [95.9]
[13.5]

3-19/32 3-25/32
[91.3] [95.9]

1/4
[6.53]
MAXIMUM PANEL THICKNESS

Panel cutout 3.622˝ x 3.622˝ (92 x 92 mm).

Depth Behind Mounting Surface: 4˝ (103 mm).
Temperature

The Love Series 2500 Temperature Control provides an im- SPECIFICATIONS

pressive array of features in an economical 1/4 DIN package. Fea- Inputs: Thermocouple or RTD.
tures include on-off, time proportioning, proportional, PI, PD, or full Input Impedance: Thermocouple = 3 megohms minimum, RTD current =
200 µA maximum.
PID control, programmable from the front panel, or use Self-Tune
Display: Two-4 digit, 7 segment, 0.56" high LED. Resolution: 1 degree or
PID. Input types are selectable from a variety of thermocouple types (J, 0.1 degree.
K, T, E, N or L) or DIN, NIST or Ni RTD’s. Outputs include solid state Accuracy: ±0.25% of span, ±1 degree.
relay, mechanical relay, 5 VDC (ideal for driving an external SSR) or Supply Voltage: 100-240 VAC nominal, ±10%, 50-400 Hz, single phase;
isolated 4-20 mA proportional current. Programmable alarm can act as 132-240 VDC nominal, ±10%.
high or low or high/low guardband alarm. Power Consumption: 5 VA maximum.
Operating Temperature: 14 to 131°F (-10 to 55°C).
A water and corrosion resistant front panel (NEMA 4X; IP 65), input Memory Backup: Non-volatile memory. No batteries required.
fault timer, digital input filter, Self-Tune ramp to setpoint, four pass- Control Output Ratings:
word protected security levels and °F or °C display selection are all SSR: 2.5A @ 240 VAC resistive at 77°F (25°C). De-rates to 1.25A
standard. Entire electronics package is field replaceable without wiring @ 130°F (55°C).
Relay: SPDT, 10 A @ 240 VAC resistive.
changes thanks to removable front panel.
Switched Voltage (non-isolated): 5 VDC @ 20 mA.
Proportional Isolated Current: 0-20 mA, selectable, into 600
Ohms maximum.
Control Action: Selectable for reverse (usually heating) or direct (usually
cooling).
Ramp: One ramp time adjustable from 0-100 hours.
MODELS Isolation: Relay and SSR outputs; 1500 VAC. 0-20 mA output; 500 VAC.
MODEL NO. ALARM INPUT OUTPUT* 5 VDC output is not isolated.
25111 Yes Thermocouple SSR Weight: 13 oz (369 g).
25112 Yes Thermocouple 5 VDC Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
25113 Yes Thermocouple Relay
25115 Yes Thermocouple 4-20 mA
25125 Yes RTD 4-20 mA

*When ordering a control to operate contactor or solenoid loads greater than

100 mA, select the SSR output instead of the Relay. If the Relay is selected,
also order P/N A-600 R/C Snubber.

305 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg306 7/25/06 10:45 AM Page 1

Series
2600 Temperature/Process Controller
1/4 DIN Self-Tune PID, Fuzzy Logic Software

4-9/16 3-25/32
[115.8] [95.9]
17/23
[13.5]

3-19/32 3-25/32
[91.3] [95.9]

1/4 [6.53] MAXIMUM PANEL

THICKNESS

Temperature
Series 2600 Temperature/Process Controllers set a new stan- More Standard Features
dard for quality, versatility, ease-of-use and value. While they include • NEMA 4X (IP65) Front Panel Resists Dust & Moisture
a high level of standard features, many function setup items appear • Four Password Protected Security Levels
in the control menu only when the function is selected, so you don’t • Front Panel Programmability
• 16 Segments of Ramp/Soak with Program End Control
have to wade through unnecessary items. Units feature a universal
• Operates on 100-240 VAC, 132-240 VDC
input for thermocouple types J,K,E,T,L,N,B,C,S & R; RTDs 100Ω Plt.
NIST, 100Ω Plt. DIN, 120Ω Ni Industrial, 1000Ω Plt. DIN; differential SPECIFICATIONS
input (-10 to +10 mV DC) and process input (0 to 20 mA DC, 0 to 10 VDC).
Selectable Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC voltage or DC current.
A standard 24 Volt isolated, regulated power supply is included to oper-
Input Impedance:
ate most standard 4-20 mA transmitters. Thermocouple — 3 Megohms minimum.
Voltage — 5000 ohms.
Standard features include Self-Tune, Fuzzy Logic, fully adjustable PID, Current — 10 ohms.
Auto/Manual control with bumpless transfer and front panel activa- RTD Current — 200 µA maximum.
Display: Two 4 digit, 7 segment, 0.56" (14.2 mm) high LED.
tion key, percent output indication, peak and valley indication, loop
Accuracy: ±0.25% of span, ±1 least significant digit.
break protection and indication. For process inputs, the display is Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC nominal, +10%-15%, 50 to 400 Hz,
fully programmable from -1999 to +9999 with selectable decimal point single phase; 132 to 240 VDC +10% -20%.
location. Most thermocouple and RTD inputs can show whole or tenth Operating Temperature: 14 to 131°F (-10 to 55°C).
degree displays. The Series 2600 is available with single or dual set- Control Output Ratings:
Relay: SPDT,10A @ 240 VAC resistive,1⁄2 hp @ 120 VAC,
point outputs and can be programmed for on-off, PID or heat/cool or 1
⁄3 hp @ 240 VAC.
latching alarm. All outputs are isolated from the inputs. Outputs in-
Alarm Relay: SPST, 3A @ 240 VAC resistive.
clude 10 Amp relay, and 0-20 mA DC (scalable). Proportional Current: 0-20 mA DC, scalable into 600 ohms
maximum.
Weight: 13 oz (369 g).
Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
MODELS
Model No. Alarm Output A Output B
26130 Yes Relay None
26150 Yes Current None
26133 Yes Relay Relay

OPTIONS
934, Process Signal Output, PV or SV,
Isolated 0 to 20 mADC

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 306
pg307 7/25/06 10:46 AM Page 1

Series
A-900
&
1/4 DIN Control Enclosures
A-901 Weatherproof, Durable, Pre-Cut Mounting Hole ®

A-900 A-901

4-1/4
[107.95]

3-39/64 10-32 UNF-28

[91.68] TYP 8 PLCS 1-1/2 1-3/4
[38.10] [44.45]

3-39/64 4-1/4 7-11/16 5-1/64 4-11/64

Temperature

[91.68] [107.95] [195.26] [127.40] [105.97]

A-901 UNIT
(4-1/2 [114.30] STANDOFFS)
4 PLCS
5-1/64
7-11/16 TOP VIEW [127.40] BOTTOM VIEW SIDE VIEW
[195.26]

Models A-900 and A-901 are the perfect instrument housing for SPECIFICATIONS
indoor or outdoor applications. Protects controls from dirt, dust, oil Service: Indoor or outdoor.
and water. Unit is rated weatherproof type NEMA 4X and has a fully Rating: NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13.
gasketed cover. Standard features include a lockable latch to prevent Materials:
tampering and flush mounting hardware. Body: UV stabilized fiberglass reinforced polyester.
Snap Latch: 304 SS.
The Model A-900 comes standard with a 1/4 DIN cut out in the front Hinge: Stainless Steel.
cover. Controller will mount with front face exposed for easy access to Mounting Feet and Screws: 304 SS.
the programming buttons. Love and Mercoid controllers feature
weatherproof NEMA 4X rated front panels and gaskets enabling the Window: UV stabilized polycarbonate.
control to be weatherproof protected when installed in the A-900 even Cover Gasket: Neoprene.
though the front face is exposed. Wiring an installed control is easy Agency Approvals: UL 508.
due to the hinged cover and spacious clearance for the control to swing
out with front cover. The lockable latch prevents unauthorized removal
of the control from the enclosure. Control Temperature Limits:
When using the enclosures with controls that have 10A relay out-
The Model A-901 comes standard with a clear plastic front window and puts the extra heat generation decreases the maximum ambient
mounting hardware to install the control inside the box. Controller temperature value that the control can be used at inside the enclo-
mounts just behind the window assuring easy viewing. Mounting the sure. Other outputs on our controls are not a concern.
control inside the enclosure protects the control face from corrosive
atmospheres or from being covered in oil, dirt and dust. The lockable For Models: 25XX3, 26XX3, 26X3X, 26X33, MPC, MPCJR
latch prevents unauthorized removal of the control and removes access Ambient Maximum Current
to the control programming buttons. The Mounting hardware is Temperature A-900 A-901
attached to the rear of the enclosure and includes a bracket with a 1/4
DIN cutout and standoffs long enough for Love and Mercoid controls 77°F (25°C) 10 Amps 10 Amps
to fit. Control programming buttons are easily accessible by just open- 104°F (40°C) 10 Amps 9 Amps
ing the front cover. 131°F (55°C) 7.5 Amps 6 Amps

FEATURES
• UV stabilized for outdoor use.
• Snap latch with lockable hasp. MODELS
• Continuous cover hinge. Model
• Fiberglass material is easily punched or drilled for conduit Description
Number
connections. A-900 Weatherproof enclosure, Type 4X. Control
• Includes feet and screws for flush mounting to a wall. direct panel mounts in the front of the
• Compatible with Love 2500, 2600, 4B, 4C, LCU204, LCU104, enclosure.
and Mercoid MPC. A-901 Weatherproof enclosure, Type 4X. Clear
plastic window with rear panel for mounting
the control inside the enclosure.

307 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg308 7/25/06 10:47 AM Page 1

Series
650 Temperature Transmitter
4-20 mA Signal, Two Wire Operation, Temperatures from -55 to 180°C
Ø1/8 [3.18] 13/64
[5.16]

45/64
[17.86]
1-53/64 1-5/16
[46.43] [33.34]
19/32
[15.08]

5/16 [7.94]

3/16 [4.76] 13/64 [5.16]

7/32 [5.56]
2-5/8 [66.68]

The Series 650 Temperature Transmitter combines low cost SPECIFICATIONS Probe Construction: 6˝ long, 0.25˝
with small size making it ideal for a wide variety of HVAC, industrial Input: Silicone-junction transistor. O.D. Type 304 SS.
Output Signal: 4-20 mA DC. Ambient Operating Temperature:
and commercial multi-point temperature monitoring applications. Non- 0 to 70°C (32 to 158°F).
polarized terminals simplify connection to any 12-35 VDC power sup- Power Requirements: 12-35 volts DC.
Accuracy: ±0.3% F.S. @ 20°C (68°F). Temperature Limits: (Probe): 204°C
ply. Capable of operation with long cable runs, Series 650 Transmitters Linearity: Within 0.25% of span (400°F).
are well suited for monitoring air or water temperatures at remote lo- Thermal Drift: Less than 0.5% of span Probe Cable Length: 7 ft (2.1 m).
cations. Three models are stocked in popular ranges factory calibrated over ambient temperature range of Voltage Stability: Output error less

Temperature
within 0.3% of span. All are linear within 0.25% of span and may be re- 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F). than 0.01% of span over the specified
calibrated within low range and span limits shown in chart. Low Range supply voltage range.
is temperature corresponding to 4 mA output. Span is temperature dif-
ference between Low and High Ranges corresponding to 4-20 mA out- MODELS
put signal. Model Range Low Range Limits Span Limits
Number As Stocked Min. Max. Min. Max.
650-1 -23° to +10°C -32°C -14°C 24°C 48°C
All Series 650 models listed 650-2 -7° to +49°C
A-325 Duct Mounting Kit with flange, fitting and hardware 650-3 0° to +100°C -12°C +6°C 37°C 150°C
Consult factory for special ranges calibrated within the limits of -55°C and +180°C

Series
651 Temperature Transmitter
RTD or Thermocouple Input, Zero and Span Adjust, Linearized 4-20 mA Signal

Linearized output for precise temperature monitoring or control is combined with SPECIFICATIONS
small size and quick, easy mounting. Rugged Series 651 transmitters are designed for Input: 2 or 3 -wire Pt100 RTD (models 651A), or ungrounded Type K thermocouple
use with 2 or 3 wire Pt100 RTDs (to DIN standard 43760 or BS1904) or ungrounded (models 651TC).
Type K thermocouples. Thermocouple models 651TC are cold junction compensated, Output: 4-20 mA DC, linearized. Transmitter Type: 2-wire.
automatic 32 to 160°F (0 to 70°C) with upscale burnout. These economical devices pro- Output Impedance: 700Ω@ 24VDC
vide the accuracy and reliability you need at the lowest possible cost. Power Requirements: 10-32 VDC, reverse connection protected.
Accuracy: ±0.2°C plus 0.2% reading (models 651A), ±0.1% FS plus cold
MODELS junction errors (models 651TC).
Temperature Drift: ZERO drift typical 0.02%/°C (0.09°F), SPAN typical 0.005%/°C
Model No. Input Type Range,°F (°C) (0.0036°F).
Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
651A-10 Pt100 RTD 32-212 (0-100)
Maximum Storage Temperature: 160°F (70°C)
651A-20 Pt100 RTD 32-392 (0-200)
651A-40 32-752 (0-400) Response Time: 10-90% in 200 ms (models 651A), 70% in 2 ms (models 651TC).
Pt100 RTD
651TC-01 Type K Thermocouple 32-212 (0-100) Agency Approvals: CE.
651TC-02 Type K Thermocouple 32-392 (0-200)
651TC-04 Type K Thermocouple 32-752 (0-400) Accessory
651TC-06 Type K Thermocouple 32-1112 (0-600)
A-709, Optional enclosure for Series 651Transmitters. NEMA 1 protective
housing is 3" x 21⁄8" (76 x 54 mm). Supplied with mounting hardware,
strain relief fitting and assembly instructions.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 308
pg309 7/25/06 10:47 AM Page 1

Series
659 Push-Button Temperature Transmitter
Programmable, RTD, Thermistor or Thermocouple Input, In-Head Mounting
Ø3/16 [4.76]
MOUNTING HOLE
TYP 2 PLACES

Ø1-41/64 Ø1-5/16
[41.67] [33.32]

29/32
[23.02]

Series 659 Push-Button Temperature Transmitters accept thermo- SPECIFICATIONS

couple (J, K, T), RTD (Pt100Ω) or thermistor input and provide a linearized Input Range: Type J T/C: -328 to 2192°F (-200 to 1200°C); Type K
4 to 20 mA output. The transmitter is quickly ranged and calibrated by using T/C: -328 to 2498°F (-200 to 1370°C); Type T T/C: -328 to 752°F
a single on-board switch. An LED provides visual indication of sensor fault (-200 to 400°C); Pt100Ω RTD: -328 to 1562°F (-200 to 850°C);
and programming mode. Models feature reverse polarity protection. Thermistor: -13 to 257°F.
Thermocouple models are also galvanically isolated and cold junction com- Accuracy: T/C models: ±0.04% F.S., ±0.04% of reading or ±0.5°C
pensated. whichever is greater; RTD: ±0.2°C ±0.1% of rdg; Thermistor: ±0.25°F
(±0.1°C).
The compact transmitter can be mounted directly within any standard ther- Output: Linearized 4 to 20 mA, 2-wire loop powered.
Temperature

mal head for connection to the sensor. The Series 659 Transmitters are ideal Sample Rate: 500 ms.
for temperature measurement in boilers, burners, ducts, furnaces, refrig- Loop Resistance: T/C: 700Ω @ 24 VDC; RTD: 800Ω @ 24VDC;
eration systems, food processing, tanks, chemical processing, steam gener- Thermistor: 24 VDC.
ators or any other process application. Output Thermal Drift: Zero: 0.2µA/°C; Span: 0.5µA/°C.
Ambient Operating Temperature: -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C), 80%
MODELS RH max.
Model Number Input Ambient Storage Temperature: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C), 95%
659TC-1 Thermocouple (Type J, K, T) RH max.
659RTD-1 (3-wire RTD Pt100Ω) Burnout: Upscale 22 mA.
Weight: 0.92 oz (26 g).
659TH-1 Thermistor (2252Ω)

Model
652-0 Programmable Transmitter
RTD, Thermocouple, Voltage or Potentiometer Input, Galvanically Isolated

2.312
[58.72

3 FOOT (1m)
CONNECTING
3 FOOT 3.00 CABLE
(1m) LEAD [76.2]

01.648
[41.859]

Model 652-0 Programmable Transmitter accepts any commonly SPECIFICATIONS Potentiometer: 0.1% full range
used temperature sensor, slidewire transducer or millivolt signal and Input/Output Isolation: input.
produces a 4 to 20 mA output signal. Input type and range are easily 500 VAC RMS. Thermal Drift: Zero: 0.1µV/°C
Thermocouple Input Range: J: (RTD zero drift is 0.008°F/°F);
programmed using a PC and the simple Windows™ based software Span: 100ppm/°C.
-328 to 2192°F (-200 to 1200°C);
program model 652-C sold separately. The user can completely recon- K: -328 to 2498°F(-200 to Ambient Operating Temp.:
figure units of measure, high/low range, filtering factor, offset, and 1370°C); T: -328 to 752°F (-200 to -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C).
transmitter reference details. The model 652-0 features 500V input to 400°C); R and S: -14 to 3200°F Response Time: <1 second.
output isolation to remove ground loop effects and four filter settings (-10 to 1760°C); E: -328 to 1832°F Update Time: 250 msec max.
(-200 to 1000°C); F: -148 to Filtering: Off, 2 seconds, 10 sec-
to remove incoming signal noise. Outstanding versatility and compact onds, or adaptive.
1112°F (-100 to 600°C); N: -292 to
size make this unit ideal for any temperature application. 2372°F (-180 to 1300°C). Cold Junction Error: ±29°F
RTD Input Range: (Pt100Ω): (±0.5°C).
-328 to 1562°F (-200 to 850°C). Computer Interface: RS232 via
Model 652-0 Programmable Transmitter Output: Linearized 4 to 20 mA. configurator 652-C, IBM compati-
Output Impedance: 700Ω @ 24 ble 386 or above with 4mB Ram
VDC. and serial port.
ACCESSORIES Power Requirements: 10 to 35V. Housing: PPE & PS.
Model 652-C Configuration Kit (includes power adapter, configu- Accuracy: T/C: ±0.04% full range Weight: 0.92 oz (26 g).
input, ±0.04% rdg.; RTD; ±0.01 full Max. Output Load: 700Ω @ 24
ration module, software and carrying case). range input, ±0.05% of rdg.; VDC.
Voltage: 10µV, ±0.07% rdg.; Agency Approvals: CE.
309 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au
pg310 8/2/06 2:45 PM Page 1

Loop Alarms Process/Alarm Switch

™
Series
1290
1490 Accepts Inputs from Thermocouples, RTDs
Loop Alarms™ Process Alarm Model 1290 Input Type and Ranges
Switch accept inputs from thermo- Type J Thermocouple
Type E Thermocouple
couples (1290), RTDs (1490). SPDT -454 to +302°F (-270 to +150°C) -346 to +374°F (-210 to 190°C)
relay outputs can be set for latching -454 to +554°F (-270 to +290°C) -346 to +680°F (-210 to 360°C)
or non-latching, direct or reverse 32 to +302°F (0 to +150°C) 32 to +374°F (0 to190°C)
action and high or low function. 32 to +554°F (0 to +290°C) 32 to +680°F (0 to 360°C)
32 to +1220°F (0 to +660°C) 32 to +1400°F (0 to 760°C)
Output behavior is easily program- Type K Thermocouple
32 to +1832°F (0 to +1000°C)
mable via switches. Mount in stan- Type S Thermocouple -454 to +482°F (-270 to +250°C)
dard 11-pin sockets. 32 to 1922°F (0 to +1050°C) -454 to +896°F (-270 to +480°C)
32 to 3200°F (0 to +1760°C) 32 to 482°F (0 to 250°C)
Dimensions: Including socket Type T Thermocouple 32 to 896°F (0 to 480°C)
-454 to +410°F (-270 to +210°C) 32 to 2501°F (0 to 1372°C)
pins, 23⁄8" W x 37⁄16" H x 13⁄4" D (60.3 Type R Thermocouple
-454 to +734°F (-270 to +390°C)
W x 87.3 H x 44.4 D mm). 32 to 410°F (0 to 210°C) 32 to 1778°F (0 to 970°C)
32 to 734°F (0 to 390°C) 32 to 3200°F (0 to 1760°C)

SPECIFICATIONS Model 1490 Input Type and Ranges

Isolation: 1500 Volts RMS between Search Current (1490): Cu 10Ω = 5 Pt 100, 500,1000 RTDs Ni120 RTDs
input, outputs and power. mA. Plt 100Ω, Ni100Ω, Ni120Ω =500µA. 32 to 212°F (O to 100°C) -58 to +482°F (-50 to +250°C)
Power Supply: 85-265 VDC/VAC, Plt 500Ω, NiFe 1000Ω, NiFe 2000Ω = 32 to 572°F (O to 300°C) Cu10 RTDs
50-400 Hz. 100 µA. Plt 1000Ω = 50µA. 32 to 932°F (O to 500°C) 32 to 482°F (0 to 250°C)
Setpoints: Adjustable from 0-100% Relay Output: SPDT, one set per Ni100 RTDs NiFe 1000, 2000 RTDs
setpoint, 5A @ 250 VAC resistive. -58 to +302°F (-50 to +150°C) -58 to +392°F (-50 to +200°C)
of span.
Deadband: Adjustable from 0.25- Latch Circuit Reset: Automatic at
power up. Manual with reset switch.

Temperature
100% of span.
Drift: ±0.02% /°C typical, ±0.05% Lead Compensation Error (1490):
/°C maximum. 0.02%/Ω.
Indicators: One dual color LED per Model 1490 RTD Loop AlarmTM Switches
Ambient Operating Temperature:
setpoint; red = On, green = Off. Model 1290 T/C Loop AlarmTM Switches
32 to 131°F (0 to 55°C) non-
condensing. Open Thermocouple Protection
Input Impedance: (1290) 3 (1290): Selectable upscale or ACCESSORY
megohms, Current input=10 ohms. downscale. No. 481-016 DIN Rail Socket Adapte

Series
SC1290
SC1490
Thermocouple & RTD Limit/Alarm Switch Module
Two Form C (SPDT) Switches, Small Size, Mounts Easily on 35 mm DIN Rail
0.886" All dimensions in inches (millimeters)
7 8 9
(22.5) DIN EN 50022-35
(not supplied)
10 11 12
290-2887
ALARM A DIR
NON LATCHING
LATCHING

MODE

Adaptor
ZERO +20%
ZERO BASED
BIPOLAR
UNIPOLAR
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
MODE

REV

LO
HI

3.88" Bracket
10V
5V
1V/100mA
0.5V/50mA
200mV/20mA
100mV/10mA
50mV/5mA
10mV/1mA

1 2 3 4
RANGE

1 2 3 4

(98.5) For Surface

ON

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1.40"
OUTPUT

2.95" Mounting
INPUT
ON
1 2 3 4

SW2

A
RESET

DB
(75) (35.3) (Optional)
SW1
SW4

ALARM B DIR

MODE

KIT#: 1007-
SINGLE
APPLICABLE
NOT
BLANK =

DUAL
REV

LO
HI
= OFF
= ON
KEY

35DINADPTR
5 6 7 8

3.88"
(98.5)

The Series SC1290 & SC1490 Thermocouple Limit/Alarm Switch Modules SPECIFICATIONS Lead Compensation Error:
Input: SC1290: Thermcouple Type J, (SC1490) ≈ 0.02%/Ω.
are on-off or limit switches with selectable, thermocouple, or RTD inputs. Input K, R, S, T, E; SC1490: RTD Pt1000, Open Lead Protection:
type, scale range, output action, and output type are all selectable by the user in Ni100, Ni120, Cu10, Ni-Fe1000, Ni- (SC 1490) Upscale only.
the field. All selections are made through easily accessible switches without the Fe2000. Input Impedance: (1290) 3
need to open the product. Power Supply: (SC units) 85 to 265 megohms.
Each unit has two form C (SPDT) relays which can operate independently, or be VDC/VAC 50 to 400 Hz (12-24 VDC, Sensor Burnout Protection:
logically connected to operate as a DPDT output. A two color LED indicator indi- VAC 50-400 Hz for Low Voltage Selectable, upscale or downscale on
cates the status of each output relay. Option, SCL units). 1290.
Isolation: 1500 V rms between out- Relay Output: Form C, SPDT, one
These units mount easily on a standard 35mm DIN rail. Low Voltage (SCL XXXX) puts, input, and power. per set point, 5A @ 250 VAC, resis-
units are also available. Set Points: Adjustable 0 to 100% of tive.
span. Latch Circuit Reset: Automatic at
Deadband: Adjustable 0.25% to power up. Manual with reset switch
MODELS 100% of span. on front of module.
Drift: ±0.02%/˚C typical ±0.05%/˚C Indicators: one dual color LED per
Model Number Description maximum. set point. Red = relay on, green =
SC1290 T/C Input Ambient Temperature Range: relay off.
SC1490 RTD Input (operating) 32 to 131˚F (0 to 55˚C). Wiring Terminals: Screw driven
(storage) -40 to +176˚F (-40 to compression type.
SCL1290* T/C Input +80˚C).
SCL1490* RTD Input Excitation Current: (SC1490)
Cu10Ω = 5mA; Plt 100Ω, Ni 100Ω,
* Low Voltage Supply Ni 120Ω = 500µA; Plt 500Ω, NiFe
1000Ω = 100 µA; Plt 1000Ω =
50 µA.
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 310
pg311 7/25/06 10:50 AM Page 1

Series
4130
4151
Temperature Transmitters
Linearized, Isolated 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC Outputs, Thermocouple or RTD Inputs
SPECIFICATIONS
Isolation: 1500 VAC RMS.
Linearity: 0.1% of full scale.
Drift: ±0.02% per °C typical, ± 0.05% per °C maximum.
Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 to 131°F (0 to 55°C).
Power Supply: 85-265 VDC/VAC, 50-400 Hz.
Output Loads: Current: 600 ohms maximum.
Voltage: 500 ohms minimum, 20 mA maximum.
Input Characteristics:
4130 (Thermocouple): 3 megohms impedance.
4151 (RTD): Search current <500 µA.
Case Size Including Socket Pins: 2-3/8" W x 3-7/16" H x 1-3/4" D
(60.3 mm W x 87.3 mm H x 44.4 mm D). Height is 2-7/8" (73 mm)
Optional Socket above socket.
P/N 481-0159
Model 4130 or 4151 Temperature Transmitter

ACCESSORY
No. 481-0159 DIN Rail Socket Adapter
Iso Verter II Transmitters accept thermocouple (4130) or RTD
®

(4151) inputs, completely isolating them from the output signal and
ground. Output is selectable for your choice of a linearized 4-20 mA or
MODEL CHART 4130 (THERMOCOUPLE TRANSMITTERS)
Temperature

0-10 VDC signal. These compact modules are compatible with industry
standard octal bases for complete interchangeability. Model Type, Range Model T/C Type, Range
4130A J, -100 to 200°C 4130L K, 0 to 250°C
MODEL CHART 4151 (RTD TRANSMITTERS) 4130D J, 0 to 500°F 4130N K, 0 to 500°C
Model Type, Range Model Type, Range 4130E J, 0 to 250°C 4130P K, 0 to 2000°F
4151A DIN,-100 to 200°C 4151F DIN, 0 to 400°F 4130F J, 0 to 750°C 4130R K, 0 to 1000°C
4151B DIN, 0 to 100°C 4151G DIN, 0 to 250°C 4130G J, 0 to 1000°F 4130S T, -300 to 250°F
4151D DIN, 0 to 200°F 4151H DIN, 0 to 500°F 4130K K, 0 to 500°F 4130T T, -200 to 200°C
DIN, 0 to 200°C 4151J DIN, 0 to 500°C 4130U T, 0-500°F
4151E
4130W T, 0-250°C

Series
RRT Remote Reading Thermometer with Switch
31⁄4" Dial, Liquid Actuated Bulb and Capillary Type

Remotely monitor and control temperature with this economical, re- SPECIFICATIONS
liable liquid actuated thermometer with integral 5 amp rated snap switch. Wetted Materials: Brass.
The switch setpoint is fully adjustable across the entire temperature range. Accuracy: ±2% of full scale.
Dual scale reads in both °F and °C. Unit is housed in a corrosion protected, Temperature Limits: -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C).
plated steel case with scratch resistant glass window. A bi-metallic element Thermal Effect (Includes Span and Zero): ±1.5% of span per 100°F
compensates for temperature effects on the capillary for maximum accu- (55.6°C) nominal.
Switch Type, Rating: SPDT, 5A @ 250 VAC, non-inductive.
racy. Thermometer includes U-clamp bracket for fast, easy panel mounting. Electrical Connections: (3) male quick connects.
Mount bulb in any position at any height without affecting temperature Process Connection: 1/2˝ male NPT.
reading. Dial Size: 3-1/4˝ (80 mm).
Capillary Length: 10.5 ft (3.2 meters).
Bulb Length: 3.0 in (76 mm).
MODELS Weight: 1 lb, 4.4 oz.
Model Number Range, °F Range, °C Agency Approvals: CE.
RRT2120U -40 to 120 -40 to 50
RRT2250U 32 to 248 0 to 120 Suggested Specifications
RRT2300U 0 to 300 -18 to 149 Remote reading thermometer shall be liquid actuated bulb and capillary type
with dual scale and ±2% of full scale accuracy. Thermometer control mecha-
nism shall be a 5A, SPDT snap action switch. Capillary shall be copper, 101⁄2
feet in length. Unit shall be Dwyer® Remote Reading Thermometer Model No.
RRT2250U.
311 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au
pg312 7/25/06 10:51 AM Page 1

Series
M-51 Bi-Metal Air Temperature Switches
Double Adjustable, Heavy Duty, Automatic Reset ®
®

FEATURES
• UL Iisted, CSA Certified.
A 9 2-1/8
[228.6] [54] • Automatic or Manual reset.
UNIVERSAL
MTG. FLANGE • SPST mercury switch (SPDT switches available).
1-15/16
• Visible dial shows duct temperature.
MANUAL
[49.2]
SQ. RESET • Two adjustments: one sets high temperature
KNOB 4-3/4
[120.7] set point, the other sets low temperature reset.
DIA.
SPECIFICATIONS
3-7/8 Service: Compatible gases.
1-1/8 [28.6] DIA. [98.4] 5 R.
[127] Temperature Limit: Process: range maximum,
7/32 [5.6] DIA. SLOT Ambient: 180°F (82°C).
4 PLCS.
7/32 [5.6] DIA. SLOT Enclosure Rating: General purpose.
2 PLCS. 7/8 [22.2] DIA. Switch Type: SPST mercury switch. Optional SPDT.
CONDUIT OPENING
Electrical Rating: 10A @ 120 VAC/DC, 5A @ 240
VAC/DC. 3/4 HP @ 120/240 VAC single phase, 1/3 HP
Designed for use as a limit switch, fan control, or alarm switch, Model M-51 is used on all @ 120/240 VDC.
types of air conditioning ducts, furnaces, ovens, dryers, etc. Unit may also be used with Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
damper control system to prevent spread of fire through ducts. Adjustments for both set and Conduit Connection: 7/8˝ (22.23 mm) hole for 1/2˝
reset points. Visible dial shows duct temperature and switch set points. (12.7 mm) conduit hub.
Process Connection: Mounting flange. Reversible for
flat or curved surfaces.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal and level.
MODELS Set Point Adjustment: Internal moveable pointers for

Temperature
set point and reset point.
Model Switch Action Range Minimum Dim. A Switch Weight: 5 lb (2.27 kg).
Number on Temp. Rise °F (°C) Deadband °F(°C) Insertion Length Reset Deadband: Adjustable from minimum in model chart to
M-51-71 Opens 25 to 125 (-4 to 52) 12 (7) 53⁄8 (136) Automatic full range.
M-51R-71 Opens 25 to 125 (-4 to 52) 12 (7) 53⁄8 (136) Manual Set Point Scale: Indication in °F standard. °C optional.
M-51-74 Opens 50 to 500 (10 to 260) 20 (11) 43⁄8 (111) Automatic Options: SPDT and DPST switches. Switch that closes
M-51R-74 Opens 50 to 500 (10 to 260) 20 (11) 43⁄8 (111) Manual on temperature increase.
MX-51-75 Opens 50 to 650 (10 to 343) 20 (11) 43⁄8 (111) Automatic Agency Approvals: UL and CSA. FM only on models
MX-51R-75 Opens 50 to 650 (10 to 343) 20 (11) 43⁄8 (111) Manual M-51R-74 and MX-51R-75.

Series
FM Immersion Temperature Control
Visible Setpoint Adjustment, Adjustable Deadband ®
®

A B 2-1/4
[57.2]
3-3/4
[95.3]
DIA.

3/4 NPT
1-1/16 [27] HEX

7/8 [22.2] DIA.

CONDUIT OPENING

SPECIFICATIONS Conduit Connection: 7/8˝ (22.23

Compact and low cost, Series FM-437 employs a bimetal Service: Compatible liquids or mm) hole for 1/2˝ (12.7 mm)
element inside an immersion well. Instrument is detachable from the gases. conduit hub.
Wetted Materials: Well: Copper Process Connection: 3/4˝ NPT
well, allowing maintenance without draining system. Visible calibrated or 304 SS. male.
dial reduces “start up” time and speeds set point changing. Contacts Temperature Limit: Process: Mounting Orientation: Horizontal
are hermetically sealed and mercury wetted. High current (up to 17A) 375° F (190°C), Ambient: 180°F and level.
capacity switches available on special order. (82°C). Set Point Adjustment: Internal
Pressure Limit: Copper well: 200 moveable pointers for set point and
psi (13.8 bar) @ 300°F (149°C), reset point.
MODELS 304 SS well: 900 psi (62 bar) @ Weight: 2 lb (0.9 kg).
300°F (149°C). Deadband: Adjustable, see model
Operating Deadband Well Dim. Enclosure Rating: General chart.
Copper Well 304SS Well Temp. Range °F(°C) in.(mm)
Model No. Model No. purpose. Options: SPST mercury switches
°F(°C) Min Max A B with higher current ratings.
Switch Type: SPDT mercury
FM-437-153-3515 FM-437SS-153-3515 40-200 (5-93) 15(8.4) 160(89) 27⁄8"(73) 23⁄8"(60) switch. Optional SPST. Set Point Scale: Indication in °F
15(8.4) Electrical Rating: 4A @ 120 standard. °C optional.
FM-437-153-3516 FM-437SS-153-3516 40-200 (5-93) 160(89) 41⁄2"(114) 3
⁄4"(19)
VAC/DC, 2A @ 240 VAC/DC. 1/8 Agency Approvals: UL, FM and
FM-437-153-3510 FM-437SS-153-3510 80-240 (27-115) 15(8.4) 160(89) 27⁄8"(73) 23⁄8"(60) CSA.
15(8.4)
HP @ 120/240 VAC single phase.
FM-437-153-3511 FM-437SS-153-3511 80-240 (27-115) 160(89) 41⁄2"(114) 3
⁄4"(19) Electrical Connections: Screw
FM-437-153-3528 FM-437SS-153-3528 160-300 (71-149) 18(10) 140(78) 27⁄8"(73) 23⁄8"(60) terminal.
FM-437-153-3529 FM-437SS-153-3529 160-300 (71-149) 18(10) 140(78) 41⁄2"(114) 3
⁄4"(19)
FM-437 Models (with copper well) .....................................................
FM-437SS Models (with 304 stainless steel well) ...............................

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 312
pg313 7/26/06 3:59 PM Page 1

Series
DA-7035N Temperature Switches
Bulb and Capillary, Inert Gas Fill SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids or gases.
Wetted Materials: Bulb and connection: 304 SS.
Temperature Limit: Process: see model chart, Ambient: 180°F
3/4 [19.05] 2-1/4 (82°C).
5/8 CLEARANCE [57.15] Pressure Limit: 300 psi (20.6 bar).
[15.88] FOR COVER Enclosure Rating: General purpose. Optional weatherproof and
REMOVAL
explosion-proof.
1-5/8 Repeatability: ± 1% of full scale.
[41.28] Switch Type: SPDT snap switch. Optional DPDT snap and a variety
1/2 CONDUIT
Ø6-1/64 of mercury switches.
[152.80] Electrical Rating: 15A @ 120/240/480 VAC. 1/8 HP @ 120 VAC
CONNECTION MERCOID
CONTROL single phase. 0.5A @ 120 VDC resistive, 0.25A @ 240 VDC resistive.
2 ADJUSTMENT Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
SEE
[50.80] VIEW #1 SCREWS
VIEW #1
Conduit Connection: 7/8˝ (22.23 mm) hole for 1/2˝ (12.7 mm)
1/4 MALE NPT 7/8 conduit hub.
PRESSURE CONNECTION [22.23]
Ø17/64 [6.75] 3/4 MALE NPT
BULB CONNECTION
Process Connection: 3/4˝ male NPT. Other sizes available.
MOUNTING HOLES Mounting Orientation: Vertical and level.
TYP 2 PLACES 3-5/16 Set Point Adjustment: External knobs for set point and reset point.
[84.14] E Weight: 5 lb (2.3 kg).
Deadband: Adjustable from minimum in model chart to full range.
Optional low fixed deadband.
MODELS Capillary: 6 ft (1.8 m) standard. Ranges 1N – 7N, and 10N: copper.
Ranges 8N, 9N, 11N: 304 SS.
Set Point Scale: Indication in °F and °C.
Maximum Min. Min. Insertion Options: See switch type, see enclosures, fixed deadband, longer or
Model Range Temp., Deadband Depth
“E” in. (mm) shorter capillary, armored capillary, wells, two stage, 1/2˝ or 1˝
Number °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) connection sizes, manual reset, and other bulb styles.
DA-7035-153-1N -60 to +30 (-50 to 0) 150 (65) 23 (13) 27⁄8 (73)
Temperature

DA-7035-153-3N 0 to 100 (-18 to 40) 240 (115) 25 (14) 27⁄8 (73) FEATURES
27⁄8 (73) • Adjustable deadband • Snap action switch standard
DA-7035-153-4N 50 to 150 (10 to 65) 250 (120) 25 (14)
27⁄8 (73)
• Inert gas activated Bourdon tube • No cross ambient
DA-7035-153-5N 100 to 200 (40 to 95) 300 (150) 25 (14)
temperature effects • No bulb elevation correction required
DA-7035-153-7N 140 to 300 (60 to 150) 500 (260) 41 (23) 27⁄8 (73)
• Visible dial calibrated in both °F and °C • Visible on/off
DA-7035-153-8N 250 to 415 (120 to 215) 550 (290) 42 (23) 27⁄8 (73) indication
DA-7035-153-9N 350 to 550 (175 to 290) 600 (315) 50 (28) 47⁄8 (124)
DA-7035-153-10N 100 to 300 (40 to 150) 500 (260) 50 (28) 27⁄8 (73) Series DA-7035N temperature switches include the same time-
DA-7035-153-11N 100 to 500 (40 to 260) 600 (315) 100 (56) 27⁄8 (73) proven switching mechanism used in our Series DA pressure switch-
es. Bourdon tube assures high sensitivity and long life. Fully
Insertion depth can be increased through use of bulb supports or wells. Consult factory. adjustable deadband makes units suitable for a wide range of control
applications. Visible, calibrated dial and external adjustments make
changing setpoints simple and fast.

Series
AVG Averaging Temperature Sensor
Bendable Aluminum Casing, RTD or Thermistor
COIL IS 12˝ LENGTH
Ø 3/8˝

Ø1
[25.4]
KNOCKOUT
2
[50]

4
2-1/2
[100]
[62]

The Series AVG Averaging Temperature Sensor provides a cost effective SPECIFICATIONS
solution for HVAC system temperature control. Measure average supply air
temperature in large ducts or plenums with the Series AVG. The sensors are Accuracy: RTD: ±0.1% @ 0°C, alpha 385; thermistor: ±0.2°C
designed with a 3/8˝ (9 mm) diameter bendable aluminum casing terminating interchangeability @ 77°F (0°C).
into a painted steel, NEMA 4 (IP65) enclosure. Four environmentally sealed
sensor modules are evenly spaced throughout the length of the casing. Select Operating Temperature: -40 to 250°F (-40 to 125°C).
platinum RTD or thermistor modules. Probe Diameter: 3/8˝ (9 mm).
MODELS Probe Length: 12 ft (3.6 m).
Model No. Sensor Type Probe Material: Bendable Aluminum
AVG-31121 Pt 100Ω RTD Enclosure: Painted steel NEMA 4 (IP65).
AVG-32121 Pt 1000Ω RTD
AVG-35121 10 kΩ NTC Thermistor
AVG-36121 3 kΩ NTC Thermistor
AVG-37121 5 kΩ NTC Thermistor
AVG-38121 100 kΩ NTC Thermistor
AVG-39121 20 kΩ NTC Thermistor
AVG-3A121 2252Ω NTC Thermistor

313 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg314 7/25/06 10:53 AM Page 1

Temperature Sensors
INTRODUCTION Dwyer thermocouples are used in all types of applications, can
Sensors measure temperature and pass that information to a measure wide temperature ranges, and are offered in a large va-
control or monitor. Dwyer offers three types of sensors: ther- riety of standard configurations.
mocouples, resistance temperature detectors (RTDs), and ther-
mistors.
RTDs
THERMOCOUPLES RTDs are usually platinum wire wound on a glass or ceramic
Thermocouples are made of two dissimilar metal wires joined bobbin and sealed with a coating of ceramic or glass. They can
at their measuring end forming the “measuring junction” also also be made by depositing platinum as a film on a substrate and
known as the “hot junction”. A small voltage, known as the See- then encapsulating it. The electrical resistance of the RTD
back voltage, is created at a junction of dissimiliar metal alloys. changes as a function of temperature. Circuitry similar to a
This voltage changes as a function of temperature. See Figure Wheatstone bridge is built into controls designed for use with
1. The control or monitor measures this small voltage and con- RTDs. Constant current into the bridge produces an output
verts it to a temperature signal. Modern instrumentation also voltage that varies with temperature. Lead wire resistance can
measures the temperature where the thermocouple is connect- significantly affect the RTD measurement. This is typically cor-
ed to the instrument. This is the reference junction. See Figure rected using a third (compensating) lead wire. See Figures 3

Temperature
2. Any temperature effects near the instrument can be can- and 4.
celled out leaving an accurate reading of the process to be mea-
sured. Extension wires used with RTDs may be plain copper wire.
RTDs are generally more accurate and more stable over time
A thermocouple may be directly connected to a control or mon-
than thermocouples. Dwyer RTDs are built to rigorous DIN
itor. Extension wires, if used, must be of the same materials as
(most common) or NIST standards and are offered in a wide va-
the thermocouple wires.
riety of standard configurations.
Thermocouples designed with their measuring junctions in con-
tact with new surfaces are known as grounded junction ther-
mocouples. These are the most common, generally have the
fastest response times, and are the most economical. Un-
grounded junction thermocouples offer the advantage of elec-
trical isolation. Dwyer manufactures both types of The third wire in the 3-wire
RTD compensates for the
thermocouples. Thermocouples are generally more rugged and wire lead resistance and
its’ temperature change.
less expensive than other sensor types. All Dwyer thermocou-
ples are manufactured using industry standard alloys and meet
stringent ANSI standards. This assures interchangeability
with other standard thermocouples without special instrument
recalibration.

Example THERMISTORS
A temperature of 100°F at the
measuring junction of a J Thermistors have a semiconductor material which changes its
Type Thermocouple
produces a voltage electrical resistance as a function of temperature. Extension
difference of 2.0 millivolts.
wires used with thermistors can be plain copper wire.

Thermistors offer accuracy similar to RTDs within narrow tem-

perature ranges near ambient temperature. They also general-
ly offer faster response times. Since thermistor standards vary,
care must be taken to match the instrumentation to the sensor.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 314
pg315 7/25/06 10:54 AM Page 1

Temperature Sensors
ORDERING SENSORS:
Sensors are constructed with various types of
protection/mounting hardware, extensions, and wire termina-
tions. The sensor types and their temperature ranges are
shown in the table below. See “Temperature Limits” below for
maximum service temperatures applicable to the protection
tube, mounting hardware, wire extensions, etc.

This section shows only a limited selection of the available sen-

sors. The sensors are organized by hardware type. Most hard-
ware can house any type thermocouple, RTD, or thermistor.
Terminations are usually either lug type or standard plugs, but
many other types are available. Various ‘head enclosures’ are
also available. Dimensions can be custom designed to meet your
specifications. The selections listed are the most popular con-
Temperature

figurations. Please ask your sales representative about other

possible selections.
TEMPERATURE LIMITS:
Sensor selection depends on two separate temperatures:
process temperature and connector temperature. Make sure
the local temperature at each component does not exceed the
Thermocouple Wire Temperature Temperature maximum rated service temperature for that component. Note
Types Type Range (°F) Range (°C)
J Iron/Constantan 32 to 1400 0 to 760 that extension wire must withstand the process temperature.
K Chromel/Alumel 32 to 2300 0 to 1200
E Chromel/Constantan -300 to 1600 -184 to 871
All Dwyer thermocouple and RTD assemblies (including exten-
T Copper/Constantan -300 to 700 -184 to 371 sion wire) shown in this section are designed for process tem-
R Plat. 13% /Rhod. Plat. 32 to 2700 0 to 1482
S Plat. 10% Rhod./Plat. 32 to 2700 0 to 1482 peratures to at least 900°F. Please consult factory if higher
B Plat. 6% Rhod./Plat. 30% Rhod. 1600 to 3100 871 to 1704
Thermistor Types
service temperatures are needed.
Cal. 100 2K @ 25°C -60 to 150 -51 to 66
Cal. 101 5K @ 25°C 50 to 250 10 to 121
Cal. 109 100K @ 25°C 300 to 600 140 to 315 SERVICE TEMPERATURES
RTD Types
DIN (100Ω @ O°C a = .00385 Ω/Ω/°C) -420 to 1500 -200 to 875
Stainless Steel Tubing / Protection /
NIST (100Ω @ O°C a = .00392 Ω/Ω/°C) -420 to 1500 -200 to 875 Mounting Hardware ..................................................1500°F
Nickel (120Ω @ O°C a = .00672 Ω/Ω/°C) -150 to 600 -101 to 315
Stainless Steel springs ................................................1500°F
Inconel® Springs (Dwyer Standard) .............................2100°F
Fiberglass insulated extension wire (Dwyer Standard) ..900°F
Junction Box (BX) connector ........................................400°F
Plug ...............................................................................300°F
J Type Thermocouple Junction ....................................1600°F
K Type Thermocouple Junction ...................................2500°F
E Type Thermocouple Junction ...................................1800°F
DlN or NlST RTD ..........................................................1607°F

315 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg316 7/25/06 10:58 AM Page 1

Thermocouples & RTD’s

GENERAL PURPOSE
Basic Model
MODEL SENSOR TYPE TERMINAL
122095-84 J Lug
122095-01 K Lug
122095-04 (3-wire) 100Ω RTD Lug

Rigid Extension Model MODEL SENSOR TYPE A LENGTH TERMINAL

122095-96 J 12 Open
122095-07 J 18 Open
122095-08 J 24 Open
122095-14 100ΩRTD 24 Open
122095-00 J 12 Plug
122095-10 J 18 Plug

FEP Insulation Extension

Temperature
#6 SPADE TERMINAL
TYP 3 PLACES

MARK RED LEAD "-"

MODEL SENSOR TYPE A LENGTH TERMINAL
.250 OD STAINLESS STEEL TUBE FEP INSULATED WIRE
WITH SEALED TIP
122087-00 100ΩRTD 6˝ Lug
6.000 36.000
MARK WHITE LEAD "+"
4.000
122087-01 100ΩRTD 12˝ Lug
122087-02 100ΩRTD 18˝ Lug

Flex Hose Extension Model

MODEL SENSOR TYPE BEND TERMINAL
122095-06 J 0° Lug
122095-15 J 0° Plug
122095-17 100Ω RTD 0° Lug
122095-16 J 90° Lug
122095-20 100Ω RTD 90° Lug

Stainless Steel Overbraid Extension Model

MODEL SENSOR TYPE BEND TERMINAL
122095-19 J 0° Lug
122095-21 J 0° Plug
122095-22 J 90° Lug
122095-25 100Ω RTD 0° Lug

SPECIAL PURPOSE
Surface Thermocouple (900°F Max.)
MODEL SENSOR TYPE WASHER SIZE TERMINAL

122095-24 J 13/32˝ ID Lug

122095-31 J 13/32˝ ID Plug
122095-32 J 13/64˝ ID Lug
(#10 Washer)

Bolt Style
MODEL SENSOR TYPE TIP A LENGTH TERMINAL
1/2-20 UNF-2A FIBERGLASS INSULATED WIRE STANDARD PLUG 122095-58 J Flush 0 Plug
WITH STAINLESS STEEL FLEX HOSE
122095-57 J Flush 4˝ Plug
122095-60 J 1/8˝ 0 Plug
3.000 A 122095-59 J 1/8˝ 4˝ Plug

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 316
pg317 7/25/06 11:05 AM Page 1

Thermocouples & RTD’s

SPECIAL PURPOSE
Web Style
MODEL A LENGTH TERMINAL

122095-35 4˝ No
122095-86 2.75˝ No
122095-34 4˝ Yes
122095-85 2.75˝ Yes

BAYONET MOUNT
Adjustable Length Spring Type

MODEL SENSOR TYPE A LENGTH TERMINAL

122095-75 J 36 Lug
A 122095-26 J 48 Lug
122095-77 J 60 Lug
122095-76 J 36 Plug
122095-27 J 48 Plug
122095-78 J 60 Plug
Temperature

Adjustable Length Flex Hose Type

MODEL SENSOR TYPE A LENGTH TERMINAL

122095-79 J 36 Lug
A
122095-81 J 48 Lug
122095-82 J 60 Lug
122095-80 J 36 Plug
122095-29 J 48 Plug
122095-83 J 60 Plug

MINERAL INSULATED
Mineral Insulated

.375 OD 304 STAINLESS STEEL

POTTING ADAPTOR. POTTING ADAPTOR
AND POTTING COMPOUND MUST WITHSTAND
#6 SPADE TERMINAL
TYP 3 PLACES
MODEL SENSOR TYPE A LENGTH DIAMETER TERMINAL
MARK RED LEAD "_"
500°F CONTINUOUS TEMPERATURE.

.250 OD 304 STAINLESS

STEEL SHEATH
FIBERGLASS INSULATED WIRE
WITH SEALED TIP
122088-00 100ΩRTD 6˝ 1/4 Lug
122088-01 100ΩRTD 12˝ 1/4 Lug
MARK WHITE LEAD "+"

6.000 36.000 4.000 122086-00 100ΩRTD 6˝ 1/8 Lug

317 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg318 7/25/06 11:22 AM Page 1

Term Descriptions
HARDWARE TYPE

Plain Sheath
Bayonet Mount, Adjustable (min. A = 0.5˝)
(when made with Flex Hose)

Bayonet Mount, Adjustable

(when made with SS Overbraid Wire) Bayonet Mount, Fixed (min. A = 1.8˝)

Temperature
TERMINALS

Stripped-Ends-Type 0 RTD Standard Plug - Type 3 Fast Tabs w/ BX

Connector - Type A

Lugs - Type 1 RTD Standard Jack - Type 4

Screw Cover Head -

Type E, F
Lugs w/BX Connector - T/C Mini Plug - Type 6
Type 2

RTD Mini Plug - Type 6

T/C Standard Plug - Type 3 T/C Mini Jack - Type 7

T/C Standard Jack - Type 4 Snap Cover Head - RTD Mini Jack - Type 7
Type 8, B

Open Terminals - Type 5 Fast Tabs - Type 9

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 318
pg319 7/25/06 11:25 AM Page 1

General Purpose and Bayonet Type Thermocouples & RTD’s

General Purpose Type Thermocouples and RTD’s have a plain sheath with no permanently attached fittings. They are usually
mounted with the use of a compression fitting which is supplied separately. Tip temperatures can be as high as 480°C (900°F) for
fiberglass insulated wire, 250°C (500°F) for FEP insulated wire. Models specified with a head cover include a 1/2˝ hex nipple. For
higher temperatures see the section on Mineral Insulated Probes.
General Purpose Bayonet

AA AA AA
AA
A
90° 45°
A 90° Bend Bend
Bend A
45° A
Bend

FIXED
A AA B C
A B C
Temperature

ADJUSTABLE
B C

Model Coding For General Purpose & Bayonet Styles

Fill in the appropriate numbers or letters to specify the probe of your choice. Fill in all boxes. If an item or dimension does not apply, fill
those boxes with zeros ‘0’.

A AA B C
in 1/10 inch in 1/10 inch in inches in inches

5 - - - - -

SENSOR TYPE
J (T/C) ELEMENTS JUNCTION TYPE SENSOR O.D. BEND
K (T/C) 1 - Single 1 - Grounded 0 - None 1 - Straight
EXTENSION TYPE SENSOR TERMINALS
E (T/C) 2 - Dual 2 - Ungrounded 2 - 1/8˝ 2 - 45°
0 - No extension 0 - Stripped Ends
T (T/C) 3 - Exposed Tip 3 - 3/16˝ 3 - 90°
6 (RTD DIN) 1 - Fiberglass 1 - Lugs
2 - Lugs with BX 4 - 1/4˝
4 (RTD NIST) Insulation
Z (RTD DIN 1K) 3 - Stainless Steel 3 - Standard Plug
5 (RTD DIN 2-Wire) Overbraid 4 - Standard Jack
7 (RTD DIN 1K 5 - Open Terminals
2-Wire) 4 - FEP Insulation
6 - Mini Plug
5 - Stainless Steel
HARDWARE TYPE 7 - Mini Jack
Flex Hose
0 - None 8 - Snap Cover Head, AI
6 - FEP over SS 9 - Fastabs
1 - Plain Sheath Flex Hose A - Fastabs with BX
4 - Type 1 with FEP
B - Snap Cover Head, Plastic
6 - Bayonet Mount -
E - Screw Cover Head, AI w/ 3/4
Adjustable, SS NPT Conduit
7 - Bayonet Mount - F - Screw Cover Head, Plastic w/
3/4 NPT Conduit
Fixed Length, SS
G - Screw Cover Head, SS Weather
Proof Head w/ 1/2 NPT Conduit

319 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg320 7/25/06 11:25 AM Page 1

Sensors for Extruders and Plastic Machines

INJECTION MOLDING NOZZLE TYPE
In-Melt type thermocouples and RTD’s are designed to bolt into the injector nozzle and sense the temperature of the melt directly, and is rated to
450°C (900°F). The standard 3/8˝ hex head stainless steel body has 3/8-24 NFT threads. The sensor tip extends 1/8˝ beyond the end of the bolt
assembly. Specify your requirements from the Order Chart below.
Not In-Melt type thermocouples and RTD’s are designed to screw into a blind hole in the nozzle, and is rated to 450°C (900°F). The standard 1/4
NFT thread fits most standard nozzles. Specify your requirements from the Order Chart below.

Not In-Melt Type

In-Melt Type

EXTRUDER BOLT TYPE

Designed for direct mounting into extruder barrels, the Bolt Type thermocouples and RTD’s offer easy interchangeability. Standard configuration

Temperature
has a 1/4 inch penetration into the barrel, and industry standard 1/2-20 NF thread. Order options allow barrel penetrations of 0 inches (flush) to
1 inch in 1/100th inch increments (specify as A dimension) and flex extension in 1 inch increments (specify as B dimension). See Special Order
Chart below for more details.

A Bolt Length B

Bolt Type with Flex

Model Coding
Fill in the appropriate numbers or letters to specify the probe of your choice. Fill in all boxes. If an item or
dimension does not apply, fill those boxes with zeros ‘0’. A B C
in 1/100 inch in inches in inches

6 - 0 - - -

SENSOR TYPE JUNCTION TYPE

J (T/C) ELEMENTS 1 - Grounded
K (T/C) 1 - Single 2 - Ungrounded
6 (RTD DIN) EXTENSION TYPE SENSOR TERMINALS
4 (RTD NIST) 2 - Dual
0 - No extension 0 - Stripped Ends
Z (RTD DIN 1K)
1 - Fiberglass 1 - Lugs
5 (RTD DIN 2-Wire)
7 (RTD DIN 1K 2-Wire) Insulation 2 - Lugs with BX
3 - Stainless Steel 3 - Standard Plug
HARDWARE TYPE Overbraid 4 - Standard Jack
1 - Not In-Melt
5 - Stainless Steel 6 - Mini Plug
2 - In-Melt
Flex Hose 7 - Mini Jack
3 - Bolt - 3˝ long
9 - Fastabs
4 - Bolt - 4˝ long
A - Fastabs with BX
6 - Bolt - 6˝ long

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 320
pg321 7/25/06 11:28 AM Page 1

Protection Tube Assemblies and Replacement

Thermocouple Elements
Protection tube assembly type thermocouples are designed for high temperature applications such as ovens, kilns, or other process-
es. Metal protection tubes can be used in applications ranging from 1200°F to 2100°F. Ceramic tubes can be used in applications
from 1210°F to 4100°F.
AA
A
B

90°
Elbow
A
Welded Bushing

REPLACEMENT SENSOR ELEMENTS

Replacement sensor elements are available as separate parts. All rules regarding lengths and fittings apply. Use the standard
Order Code, using a ‘0’ for the tube type, ‘0’ for mounting, ‘0’ for sensor terminals, and ‘0’ for protection tube. See example
Temperature

below.

To order use Order Chart below. Specify “0” for Tube Type.
(e.g. - Type K 8 ga. insulated element 12˝ long is 7K000-110-
121-12-02-00).

To order use Order Chart below. Specify “0” for Tube Type.
(e.g. - Type K 14 ga. bare element 12˝ long is 7K000-110-311-
12-02-00).

Model Coding
Fill in the appropriate numbers or letters to specify the probe of your choice. Fill in all boxes. If an item or
dimension does not apply, fill those boxes with zeros ‘0’. A AA B
in inches in inches in inches
* **
7 - - 1 - - -

PROTECTION TUBE
SENSOR TYPE BEND
Metal/Ceramic
ELEMENTS 1 - Straight
J (T/C) 0 - None/None
1 - Single 2 - 45°
K (T/C) MOUNTING TYPE SENSOR TERMINALS 1 - 1/4˝ pipe/None
2 - Dual 3 - 90°
0 - No mounting 0 - None 2 - None/0.375˝ OD
1 - Sleeve and Flange 1 - Snap Cover, Aluminum Head 3 - None/0.687˝ OD
HARDWARE TYPE 2 - Bushing 3/4 NPT 2 - Weatherproof Screw Cover 4 - 1/2˝ pipe/None
Aluminum Head.
3 - Bushing 1 NPT 5 - 3/4˝ pipe/0.750˝ OD
0 - None
4 - Bushing 1-1/4 NPT *Wire Gauge 6 - None/1.125˝ OD
1 - 304 SS ** Insulators
5 - SS Bushing 3/4 NPT 0 - None 7 - 1˝ pipe/None
2 - 316 SS 1 - None
6 - SS Bushing 1 NPT 1-8
4 - Inconel® 601 2 - Oval (14 ga wire or larger)
7 - SS Bushing 1-1/4 NPT 3 - 14
5 - Mullite+ 3 - Round (18 ga wire or smaller)
5 - 20
6 - Alumina+
6 - 24
B - Carbon Steel + Length in 6˝ increments
7 - 30

Inconel® is a registered trademark of Huntington Alloys Corporation.

321 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg322 7/25/06 11:29 AM Page 1

Mineral Insulated Thermocouples and RTD’s

Mineral Insulated Thermocouples and RTDs are known for their excellent mechanical durability and resistance to electrical breakdown. Available
in outside diameters from 0.020 inch (0.5mm) to 0.500 inch (12.7mm), Mineral Insulated Thermocouples can be bent to most any angle without spe-
cial equipment. Because of its flexibility, the mineral insulated material can be made to extremely long lengths, coiled for inexpensive shipment,
and straightened upon arrival without damage.
Ungrounded and exposed junctions are electronically isolated from the sheath. Minimum resistance is 1.5 megohms at 500 VDC.
Due to the varying sized of connection wire and cable, a transition fitting is used between the cold end of the sheath and the connecting wires. This
fitting measures 1-1/4˝ long by 1/4˝ outside diameter for 1/8˝ or smaller sheaths, and 1-1/2˝ long by 3/8˝ outside diameter for 3/16˝ and 1/4˝
sheaths. Larger sheaths are usually connected to bushings or connector heads, and usually do not require transition fittings. Sheaths terminating
in connectors other than wire or cable do not require transition fittings.

A B C

MINERAL INSULATED TRANSITIONS

Basic Sheath Configuration Sheath and Transition Fitting

Temperature
(when made with Flex Hose)

Sheath and Transition Fitting Sheath and Transition Fitting

(when made with SS Overbraid Wire) (when made with Fiberglass Wire)

Model Coding
Fill in the appropriate numbers or letters to specify the probe of your choice. Fill in all boxes. If an item or
dimension does not apply, fill those boxes with zeros ‘0’.
A AA B C
in 1/10 inch in 1/10 inch in inches in inches

8 - - - - -

SENSOR TYPE
J (T/C) ELEMENTS JUNCTION TYPE SENSOR O.D. BEND
K (T/C) 1 - Single 1 - Grounded 1 - 1/16˝ 1 - None
EXTENSION TYPE SENSOR TERMINALS
E (T/C) 2 - Dual 2 - Ungrounded 2 - 1/8˝ 2 - 45°
0 - No extension 0 - Stripped Ends
T (T/C) 3 - Exposed 3 - 90°
1 - Fiberglass 1 - Lugs 3 - 3/16˝
6 (RTD DIN)
4 (RTD NIST) Insulation 2 - Lugs with BX 4 - 1/4˝
Z (1K RTD DIN) 3 - Stainless Steel 3 - Standard Plug 5 - 3/8˝
5 (RTD DIN 2-Wire) 4 - Standard Jack 6 - 1/2˝
Overbraid
7 (RTD DIN 1K 5 - Open Terminals
4 - FEP Insulation 6 - Mini Plug
2-Wire)
5 - SS Flex Hose 7 - Mini Jack
HARDWARE TYPE
6 - FEP over SS 8 - Snap Cover, AI Head
1 - 304 SS Sheath 9 - Fastabs
Flex Hose
2 - 316 SS Sheath A - Fastabs with BX
3 - Inconel® 600 Sheath B - Snap Cover, Plastic Head
C - 3/4 NPT Hex Threaded End
4 - Inconel® 601 Sheath
D - 3/4 NPT Hex Nipple
E - Screw Cover, AI Head w/ 3/4
NPT Conduit
F - Screw Cover, Plastic Head w/
3/4 NPT Conduit
G - SS Weatherproof Head w/ 1/2
NPT Conduit
H - 1/2 NPT Hex Nipple

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 322
pg323 7/25/06 11:29 AM Page 1

Special Application Thermocouples and RTD’s

Special Application Thermocouples and RTD’s cover a wide variety of types and configurations. This section covers FEP covered
thermocouples and RTD’s in rigid and flexible types, ring type thermocouples and RTD’s for surface measurement, web type therm-
couples for surface measurement of moving objects such as rollers, and penetration thermocouples and RTD’s with sharp tips for
measurement of viscous liquids and semisolids such as tar and heavy oil, and other material such as frozen food and meat.

Flexible FEP Covered Bead Junction Penetration Type Thermocouples and RTD’s

A AA 1-1/4˝ B
B C Standard Style
with Transition
Web Type Surface Thermocouples Fitting
A AA 1-1/4˝
A B

“D” Handle Style

Web Type Surface Thermocouple
Replacement Element
Temperature

Ring Type Surface Thermocouples and RTD’s

B C
Web Type Surface
Thermocouple Assembly
Model Coding
Fill in the appropriate numbers or letters to specify the probe of your choice. Fill in all boxes. If an item or
dimension does not apply, fill those boxes with zeros ‘0’.
A AA B C
in 1/10 inch in 1/10 inch in inches in inches

9 - - - - -

SENSOR TYPE
J (T/C) ELEMENTS JUNCTION TYPE SENSOR O.D.
1 - Single 1 - Grounded 0 - N/A
K (T/C) EXTENSION TYPE SENSOR TERMINALS
2 - Dual 2 - Ungrounded 2 - 1/8˝
E (T/C) 0 - No extension 0 - None
3 - Exposed 3 - 3/16˝
T (T/C) 1 - Fiberglass 1 - Lugs
4 - 1/4˝
6 (RTD DIN) Insulation 2 - Lugs with BX
4 (RTD NIST) 3 - Stainless Steel 3 - Standard Plug
Z (RTD DIN 1K) Overbraid 4 - Standard Jack
4 - FEP Insulation 5 - Open Terminals
5 - Stainless Steel 6 - Mini Plug
HARDWARE TYPE
Flex Hose 7 - Mini Jack
5 - FEP Covered
6 - FEP over SS 9 - Fastabs
Bead Junction
Flex Hose A - Fastabs with BX
6 - Ring #10 (0.187 od)
7 - Ring #8 (0.156 od)
8 - Ring 13/32˝
9 - Web
A - Penetration Probe
B - Penetration Probe
with ˝D˝ Handle

323 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg324 7/25/06 11:30 AM Page 1

Sensors for Sanitary Applications

1.00
STAINLESS STEEL STANDARD WHITE POLYPROPYLENE SNAP-COVER CONNECTION HEAD
CONNECTION HEAD 2.00 A
.840˝ SST SUPPORT TUBE
1/2˝ CONDUIT
CONNECTION

2.25

SANITARY WELD
SANITARY CAP
3˝ NOM. SANITARY CAP .405 SST SUPPORT TUBE
3/4˝ CONDUIT MINIATURE ALUMINUM CONNECTION HEAD
WHITE POLY CONNECTION 3/4˝ CONDUIT CONNECTION
SCREW COVER PG9 CABLE GLAND
CONNECTION HEAD

STANDARD WHITE POLYPROPYLENE SNAP-COVER CONNECTION HEAD CHEMICAL RESISTANT STRAIN RELIEF
.840˝ SST SUPPORT TUBE .50˝ SST SUPPORT TUBE

A FEP JACKETED CABLE A

1˝

SANITARY WELD SANITARY WELD

Temperature
C B 3˝ NOM. SANITARY CAP
3˝ NOM. SANITARY CAP

3/4˝ CONDUIT CONNECTION

16 AMP CLAMP CAP 16A BEVEL SEAT 16APV APC 16 AI-14I I-LINE

Size O.D. Thickness Size O.D. Thickness Size O.D. Thickness Size O.D. Thickness
Tube O.D. Tube O.D. Tube O.D. Tube O.D.
1/2 or 3/4 1.00 .188 1 1.31 .46 1 1.38 .29 1 2 .50
1 1.98 .25 1-1/2 1.84 .56 1-1/2 1.88 .42 1-1/2 2 .50
1-1/2 1.98 .25 2 2.37 .62 2 2.38 .46 2 2.65 .56
2 2.51 .25 2-1/2 2.90 .66 2-1/2 2.88 .47 2-1/2 3.12 .56
2-1/2 3.03 .25 3 3.43 .71 3 3.38 .50 3 3.87 .75
3 3.57 .25

A B C
MODEL CODING: in 1/10 inch in inches in inches

D - - - -

SENSOR TYPE
J (T/C) TERMINATION ELEMENTS JUNCTION TYPE SENSOR O.D.
K (T/C) 0 - No Termination 1 - Single 1 - Grounded NOMINAL/REDUCED
CAP STYLE CAP SIZE
E (T/C) 1 - White Snap Cover PP Head 2 - Dual 2 - Ungrounded 1 - 5/32˝ / NA
T (T/C) 2 - 16A Without Nut 1 - 1/2˝ (3/4˝ Conduit)
3 - 16A With Nut 2 - 3/4˝ 2 - 1/4˝ / 1/8˝
6 (RTD DIN) 2 - White Screw Cover PP 3 - 3/8˝ / 3/16˝
4 (RTD NIST) 4 - 16AI-14I 3 - 1-1/2˝ Head (3/4˝ Conduit)
5 - 16 Amp 4-2˝ 6 - 1/4˝ / NA
3 - Screw Cover 316SS Head 7 - 1/2˝ / NA
6 - 16 APV Without Nut 5 - 2-1/2˝ (1/2˝ Conduit)
7 - 16 APV With Nut 6 - 3˝ 4 - Split Leads
5 - Split Leads With Lugs
6 - Split Leads With BX & Lugs
SHEATH
7 - STD Plug
1 - Straight 8 - STD Jack
3 - Stepped Tip 9 - Miniature Aluminum Snap
Cover Head

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 324
pg325 7/25/06 11:30 AM Page 1

Series P Penetration Probes

Monitor internal temperature of poultry, meat, fish, dough, and other fresh or slightly frozen food products. The Series P probes
can also be used to penetrate soft process materials such as plastic compounds and rubber. The probes are constructed entirely of
FDA compliant materials for use in sanitary applications.
Probe Styles "A" 1 1 "B" "C"

1. Transition Fitting
POINTED CLOSURE STRAIN RELIEF TUBING
TRANSITION FITTING

"A" 2-1/2 1-1/2 "B" "C"

2. Straight Handle
STRAIGHT HANDLE

"A" 1-3/4 2-3/8 1-1/2 "B" "C"

3. Saber Handle
SABER HANDLE
Temperature

"A" 2-1/2 1-1/2 "B" "C"

4. Flanged Handle
FLANGED HANDLE

"A" 2-1/2 "B" "C"

6&7. Euro Style Handle
(Teflon or Stainless Steel)

EURO STYLE

Model Coding - Series P Penetration Probes

Fill in the appropriate numbers or letters to specify the probe of your choice. Fill in all boxes. If an item or
dimension does not apply, fill those boxes with zeros ‘0’.
A dim. * B dim. C dim.
1/10 inch inches inches

P - - - -

SENSOR TYPE
J (T/C) JUNCTION SENSOR O.D.
SENSOR TERMINALS 1 - Grounded 7 - 0.134 OD hypodermic
T (T/C) EXTENSION TYPE 0 - Stripped Ends 2 - Ungrounded 8 - 0.180 OD hypodermic
6 (RTD DIN) 4 - FEP Insulation 1 - Lugs
4 (RTD NIST) 6 - FEP over SS flex 2 - Lugs with BX
Z (RTD DIN 1K) hose
3 - Standard Plug
4 - Standard Jack
6 - Mini Plug
7 - Mini Jack
PROBE STYLE
1 - Standard transition fitting, SS
2 - Straight handle, SS
3 - Saber handle, SS
* “A” dimension maximum length is 12˝ (30 cm).
4 - Flanged handle, SS
6 - Euro Style, FEP
7 - Euro Style, SS

325 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg326 7/25/06 11:31 AM Page 1

Temperature Sensor Assemblies with Thermowells

Series T Sensor Assemblies are available in a variety of head styles and thermowell materials. All elements are spring loaded to
ensure positive contact in the thermowell. Thermowells are non-lagging. The sensor sheath material is constructed of 316 stainless
steel regardless of the well material specified.

"A"
"A"

NIPPLE
HEX EXTENSION THERMOWELL
EXTENSION THERMOWELL

CONNECTION HEAD
CONNECTION HEAD

"A"

Temperature
THERMOWELL
UNION
EXTENSION

CONNECTION HEAD

Model Coding - Sensor Assemblies with Thermowells

Fill in the appropriate numbers or letters to specify the probe of your choice. Fill in all boxes. If an item or
dimension does not apply, fill those boxes with zeros ‘0’.
A
in inches

T - -

SENSOR TYPE
J (T/C) ELEMENTS HEAD SHEATH O.D.
EXTENSION 1 - Single 0 - Aluminum Screw Nominal/Reduced
K (T/C) TAPER AND BORE 1 - Steel 1/2 NPT 1 in hex 2 - Dual Cover 1 - 5/8˝ / 1/2˝
E (T/C) 1 - Step/0.260 4 - Steel 1/2 NPT 4 in nipple 1 - Cast Aluminum Snap 4 - 3/4˝ / 1/2˝
T (T/C) 2 - Straight/0.390 7 - Steel 1/2 NPT 4 in union Cover
6 - 7/8˝ / 1/2˝
6 (RTD DIN) 3 - Taper/0.260 A - 304 SS 1/2 NPT 1 in hex 2 - Polypropylene Snap
Cover 7 - 7/8˝ / 5/8˝
4 (RTD NIST) 4 - Taper/0.390 D - 304 SS 1/2 NPT 4 in nipple
3 - Polypropylene Screw 8 - 1-1/16˝ / 5/8˝
Z (RTD DIN 1K) 5 - Straight/0.260 G - 304 SS 1/2 NPT 4 in union Cover 9 - 7/8˝ / 49/64˝
K - 316 SS 1/2 NPT 1 in hex 4 - Explosion Proof+ A - 1-1/16˝ / 49/64˝
WELL MATERIAL N - 316 SS 1/2 NPT 4 in nipple 5 - 304 SS Weather B - 1/2˝ straight
1 - 304 SS S - 316 SS 1/2 NPT 4 in union Proof C - 49/64˝ straight
2 - 316 SS D - 7/8˝ straight
3 - Brass +Explosion-proof head meets the following: E - 3/4˝ straight
Class I, Groups C & D
Class II, Groups E, F & L
A dimension is available in lengths of 4, 6, 9, Class III, Div 1 & 2
12, 15, 18, and 24 inches only. NEMA 7, Groups C & D
NEMA 9, Groups E, F, & L

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 326
pg327 7/25/06 11:31 AM Page 1

Thermowells
Select bore as 0.260 for 1/4˝ diameter elements and 0.390 for 3/8˝ diameter elements. Specify
heavy duty mounting for tapered sheaths.
STRAIGHT STEM TAPERED FLANGED
1/4
"A" (6.35) 1/4
"A"
(6.35)
PROCESS CONNECTION

.260
(6.60)
BORE WELD .260/.390
1/2 NPT (6.60)/(9.91)
SHEATH BORE
1/2
(12.70)
5/8
1-1/4 (15.88)
(31.75) 49/64
1/2 NPT
(19.45)

STRAIGHT STEM
3/4 1/4 IN ELEMENTS ONLY
(19.05)
TAPERED STEM
1.000
(25.40)

TAPERED STEM
2-1/4
"A" 1/4 (57.15)
(5.35)

0.260/0.390
(6.60)/(9.91)
BORE

5/8
(15.88)
49/64 STRAIGHT FLANGED
(19.45)
1/2 NPT 1/4
"A"
(6.35)
Temperature

TAPERED STEM
3/4
(19.05)
1.000 WELD .260/.390
(25.40) 1/2 NPT (6.60)/(9.91)
BORE
SHEATH
STEPPED STEM
1/4 1-1/4
"A" (31.75)
(6.35)

.260
(6.60)
BORE
STRAIGHT STEM

1/2
(12.70)

1/2 NPT 2-1/4

(57.15)

3/4 STEPPED STEM

(19.05) 1/4 IN ELEMENTS ONLY

1.000
(25.40)

Model Coding - Thermowells

Fill in the appropriate numbers or letters to specify the thermowell of your choice. Fill in all boxes. If an item or
dimension does not apply, fill those boxes with zeros ‘0’.

W - - A Dimension Specify in 4, 6, 9, 12,

15, 18, 0r 24˝

HARDWARE TYPE
1 - 304 SS Sheath INSIDE THREAD MOUNTING LAG SHEATH O.D.
1 - 1/2˝ female NPT PROCESS CONNECTION 1 - Threaded 0 - None Base/Taper
2 - 316 SS Sheath
1 - 1/2 NPT 2 - Heavy Duty 2 - 2˝ 1 - 5/8˝ / 1/2˝
3 - Brass TAPER AND BORE 2 - 3/4 NPT Threaded 3 - 3˝ 4 - 3/4˝ / 1/2˝
4 - Carbon Steel
0 - Straight / 0.260 3 - 1 NPT 3 - Heavy Duty 6 - 7/8˝ / 1/2˝
1 - Step / 0.260 4 - 1˝ 150# Flange Flanged
7 - 7/8˝ / 5/8˝
2 - Straight / 0.390 5 - 1-1/2˝ 150# Flange 4 - Flanged
8 - 1-1/16˝ / 5/8˝
3 - Taper / 0.260 6 - 2˝ 150# Flange 9 - 7/8˝ / 49/64˝
4 - Taper / 0.390 7 - 1˝ 300# Flange A - 1-1/16˝ / 49/64˝
8 - 1-1/2˝ 300# Flange B - 1/2˝ straight
9 - 2˝ 300# Flange C - 49/64˝ straight
A - 1˝ 600# Flange D - 7/8˝ straight
B - 1-1/2˝ 600# Flange E - 3/4˝ straight
C - 2˝ 600# Flange

327 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg328 7/25/06 11:32 AM Page 1

Extension Cables
"B" "C" (4˝ STD)

Flexible extension cables are available with a variety of terminations.

Temperature
Model Coding
Fill in the appropriate numbers or letters to specify the extension cable of your choice. Fill in all boxes. If an item or dimension
does not apply, fill those boxes with zeros ‘0’.

C C
B Terminal #1 Terminal #2
in feet in inches in inches
EC- - - -

SENSOR TYPE
J (T/C) ELEMENTS
K (T/C)
E (T/C) 1 - Single
TERMINAL #1 TERMINAL #2 2 - Dual
T (T/C)
0 - Stripped Ends 0 - Stripped Ends
2 (2-Wire RTD)
3 (3-Wire RTD) 1 - Lugs 1 - Lugs
2 - Lugs with BX 2 - Lugs with BX
EXTENSION TYPE 3 - Standard Plug 3 - Standard Plug
0 - No Extension 4 - Standard Jack 4 - Standard Jack
1 - Fiberglass
6 - Mini Plug 6 - Mini Plug
Insulation
3 - Stainless Steel 7 - Mini Jack 7 - Mini Jack
Overbraid 9 - Fastabs 9 - Fastabs
4 - FEP Insulation
A - Fastabs with BX A - Fastabs with BX
5 - Stainless Steel Flex
Hose
6 - FEP over SS Flex
Hose

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 328
pg329 7/25/06 11:32 AM Page 1

Hand Held Thermocouples

T/C
Description Type Model
Master Probe Handle - Probes plug into the master probe handle. The J 1718-0076
handle has a mini-jack at one end and a coiled cable with mini-plug on the K 1718-0077
other. Individual probes may be connected to allow easy reach to your process.

Immersion Probe - This general purpose probe can be used in liquids and 1/8" J 1818-0073
8" [3.18] K 1818-0074
gases. Includes mini plug.
[203.20]

Penetration Probe - Used for penetrating meat, plastic, rubber, asphalt, or 1/8" [3.18] J 1818-0077
other semi-soft materials. Includes mini plug. 4" K 1818-0078
[101.60]

Surface Probe - For flat or semi-flat surfaces of metal, paper or plastic. Small 1/8" [3.18] 1/2" J 1818-0081
gauge spring contoured tip allows fast response. Includes mini plug. [12.70] K
8" 1818-0082
[203.20]

1/8" [3.18] 7/16" [11.11]

Air Duct Probe - Measures temperature in ducts for air or compatible gases, J 1818-0084
9/16" [14.29]
environmental chambers, ovens, rooms, etc. Perforated shield has good air 8" K 1818-0085
flow and prevents heating by radiation. Includes mini plug. [203.20] 1-5/8" [41.28]

Exposed Junction Probe - Small gauge tip allows high sensitivity and quick 1/16" J 1818-0088
response. The thermocouple junction is exposed for readings in air or 4" [1.59] K 1818-0089
compatible gases. Includes mini plug. [101.60]
Temperature

Needle Probe - Small diameter penetrating probe gives fast response in 1/16" J 1818-0092
soft materials and liquids. Made with mineral insulated sheath for extra 4" [1.59] K 1818-0093
101.60
durability. Includes mini plug.

Bare Tip Probe - This probe consists of 10 feet of 24 gauge wire with fiber- J 1558-0030
glass braided cable and a bare wired junction. Shipped with a spool for easy 10’ K 1558-0013
storage. Includes mini plug. [3048.00]

Integral Handle Probes - Featuring fixed handles and coiled cords, these rugged hand-held probes will plug into any device with a mini-jack.

General Purpose Probe - Featuring a built-in handle with coiled cord and
J 1718-0001
mini-plug, this general purpose probe can be used in liquids and air compat-
K 1718-0002
ible gases. For use to 800°F.

High Temperature General Purpose Probe - Featuring a built-in handle with 1718-0005
J
coiled cord and mini-plug, this general purpose probe can be used in liquids K 1718-0006
and air compatible gases. For use to 1600°F.

Penetration Probe - Featuring a built-in handle with coiled cord and mini- J 1718-0014
plug, this probe is used for penetrating meat, plastic, rubber, asphalt, or other K 1718-0015
semi-soft materials.

Straight Surface Probe - Featuring a built-in handle with coiled cord and mini-
J 1718-0008
plug, this probe is used for flat or semi-flat surfaces of metal, paper or plas- K 1718-0009
tic. Small gauge spring contoured tip allows fast response.

Angled Surface Probe - Featuring a built-in handle with coiled cord and mini- 1718-0011
J
plug, this probe is used for flat or semi-flat surfaces of metal, paper or 1718-0012
K
plastic. Small gauge spring contoured tip allows fast response.

Round Surface Probe - Featuring a built-in handle with coiled cord and mini-
J 1718-0022
plug, this probe measures temperature in ducts for rollers, convex surfaces.
K 1718-0023
Spring stainless steel replaceable band stretched across C-shaped bow.

Air Duct Probe - Featuring a built-in handle with coiled cord and mini-plug, J 1718-0018
this probe measures temperature in ducts for air or compatible gases, K 1718-0019
environmental chambers, ovens, rooms, etc. Perforated shield allows good air
flow and prevents heating by radiation.

329 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg330 7/25/06 11:33 AM Page 1

Plugs and Jacks

Standard Size Single Plugs (male) Standard Size Single Jacks (female)
Type Part Number Type Part Number
J 481-0001 J 481-0006
K 481-0002 K 481-0007
T 481-0003 T 481-0008
Cu11 (2-Wire) 481-0004 Cu11 (2-Wire) 481-0009
E 481-0015 E 481-0016
Cu (2-Wire) 481-0022 Cu (2-Wire) 481-0023
Cu (3-Wire) 481-0134 Cu (3-Wire) 481-0135

Miniature Size Single Plugs (male) Miniature Size Single Jacks (female)
Type Part Number Type Part Number
J 481-0093 J 481-0100
K 481-0095 K 481-0102
T 481-0094 T 481-0101
R 481-0098 R 481-0105
S 481-0097 S 481-0104

Temperature
E 481-0096 E 481-0103
Cu (2-Wire) 481-0099 Cu (2-Wire) 481-0106
Cu (3-Wire) 481-0175 Cu (3-Wire) 481-0174

Pipe Adapters
Part Number Fits Pipe Diameters Part Number Fits Pipe Diameters
1568-0007 1/2˝ to 7/8˝ 1568-0022 9-3/4˝ to 10-1/4˝
1568-0008 7/8˝ to 1-1/2˝ 1568-0023 11-3/4˝ to 12-1/4˝
1568-0009 1-5/16˝ to 2-1/4˝ 1568-0024 15-3/4˝ to 16-1/4
1568-0011 2-1/4˝ to 3-5/16˝ 1568-0025 17-3/4˝ to 18-1/4˝
1568-0012 3-5/8˝ to 4-1/4˝ 1568-0027 19-3/4˝ to 20-1/4˝
1568-0013 4-5/16˝ to 5-1/4˝ 1568-0028 23-3/4˝ to 24-1/4˝
1568-0020 6-1/4˝ to 6-3/4˝ 1568-0029 29-3/4˝ to 30-1/4˝ 1-3/4˝ x 7/16˝ OD
1568-0021 7-3/4˝ to 8-1/4˝

Bayonet Adapters Compression Fittings

Type OD Thread Size Material Part Number
L
1/8˝ 1/8-27 NPT Brass 144-0012
1/8˝ 1/8-27 NPT Stainless Steel 144-0020
7/16˝ 3/16˝ 1/8-27 NPT Brass 144-0009
3/16˝ 1/8-27 NPT Stainless Steel 144-0022
1/4˝ 1/4-18 NPT Brass 144-0014
3/8˝ 1/4˝ 1/8-27 NPT Stainless Steel 144-0024
.260 - .275˝ 1/4-18 NPT FEP 144-0037
L Thread Size Part Number
7/8˝ 1/8-27 NPT 1568-0001
7/8˝
1-3/8˝
3/8-24 NPT
1/8-27 NPT
1568-0002 Transition Adapter
1568-0003 These adapters convert the minature plug on the end
1-3/8˝ 3/8-24 NPT 1568-0004 of the coiled cable on the Master Probe Handle to a 1.5"
2-1/2˝ 1/8-27 NPT 1568-0005 standard lug. Simply plug the cord into the adapter.
2-1/2˝ 3/8-24 NPT 1568-0006
2-1/2˝ 10 x 1.5 mm 1568-0016
Catalog Number
Type K Type J Type T
7/16"
481-127 481-126 481-128

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 330
pg331 7/25/06 11:36 AM Page 1

Series
AD Air/Duct Temperature Sensors
Air/Duct Temperature Sensors are available in precision platinum, nickel, or balco RTDs and interchangeable NTC thermistors. Sensors are
constructed with a hermetically sealed 304 SS sheath and are unaffected by high humidity, contamination, thermal shock or vibration. Flange
mount sensors offer low profile mounting and quick installation directly into duct work. Select bulkhead mounting if an adjustable insertion depth
is required. Rugged air/duct sensors are ideal for air handlers, fan coil units, ducts, furnaces, freezers, ovens and other through wall temperature
sensing applications.

ø1/4
2 1 – 1/2 [ø6.35]
[50.80] [38.10]

FLANGE MOUNT
Temperature

3/8-24 UNF-2A
ø1/4
[ø6.35]

9/16 HEX
BULKHEAD MOUNT

Model Coding
Fill in the appropriate numbers or letters to specify the probe of your choice. Fill in all boxes. If an item or dimension does not
apply, fill those boxes with zeros ‘0’.

AD

INSTALLATION
1 - Flange mount PROBE LENGTH
3˝ (175 mm) wire SENSOR TYPE 4 - 4˝ (100 mm)
leads 1 - Pt 100 Ω RTD 6 - 6˝ (150 mm)
2 - Flange mount 2 - Pt 1000 Ω RTD 8 - 8˝ (200 mm)
6 ft (1.8 m) cable 3 - Ni 1000 Ω RTD 12 - 12˝ (300 mm)
3 - Bulkhead mount 4 - 1000 Ω Balco RTD
3˝ (175 mm) wire 5 - 10 kΩ NTC Thermistor
leads 6 - 3 kΩ NTC Thermistor
4 - Bulkhead mount 7 - 5 kΩ NTC Thermistor
6 ft (1.8 m) cable 8 - 100 kΩ NTC Thermistor
9 - 20 kΩ NTC Thermistor
A - 2252 Ω NTC Thermistor

331 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg332 7/25/06 11:37 AM Page 1

Series
S Surface Mount Temperature Sensor
RTD and Thermistor, 304 SS Probe, Waterproof
2.000˝
[50]
CABLE LENGTH
6FT [1.8]

ø1/4˝
[6.3]

The Series S Surface Mount Temperature Sensors provide a SPECIFICATIONS

cost effective and reliable solution for surface contact temperature Accuracy:
measurement of conditioned water pipes, low pressure steam or Platinum RTD: ±0.1% @ 32°F (0°C),
refrigerant lines. The sensors are ideal for applications where immer- alpha 385 per DIN 43760.
sion wells are not practical to install. Models are constructed with a 2˝
Nickel RTD: ±0.5°F @ 70°F (21.1°C).
(50 mm) 304 SS probe and a 6 ft (1.8 m) plenum rated cable. Nylon ties
are included to secure the sensor to the pipe. Balco: ±0.5°F @ 70°F (21.1°C).
Thermistor: ±0.2°C interchangeable @ 77°F (25°C).
MODELS
Operating Temperature: -40 to 250°F (-40 to 125°C).
Models Sensor Type Probe Diameter: 1/4˝ (6.3 mm).
S-11 Pt 100Ω RTD

Temperature
S-12 Pt 1000Ω RTD Probe Length: 2˝ (50 mm).
S-13 Ni 1000Ω RTD Probe Material: 304 SS.
S-14 1000Ω Balco RTD
S-15 10 kΩ NTC Thermistor
S-16 3 kΩ NTC Thermistor
S-17 5 kΩ NTC Thermistor
S-18 100 kΩ NTC Thermistor
S-19 20 kΩ NTC Thermistor
S-1A 2252Ω NTC Thermistor

Series
I-1 Immersion Temperature Probes
RTD & Thermistor, 304 SS Probe
1/8˝, 1/4˝ OR 1/2˝ NPT
THREADS AVAILABLE

1/4 OD
(6.3)

The Series I-1 Immersion Temperature Probes are designed SPECIFICATIONS

with an adjustable insertion depth for greater application flexibility. Accuracy:
The probe is constructed with a 6˝ (15 cm) 304 SS stem and a brass Platinum RTD: ±0.1% at 32°F (0°C);
adapter with a compression sleeve. The probes include a 6 ft (1.8 m) Nickle RTD: ±0.5°F at 70°F (21.1°C);
plenum-rated cable for remote termination. Probes are available with
Balco: ±0.5°F at 70°F (21.1°C);
RTD or thermistor sensors. The Series I-1 probes are ideal for hot or
chilled water, condensed water or low pressure steam applications that Thermistor: ±0.2°C intercharges at 77°F (25°C).
require an adjustable insertion length. Operating Temperature: -40 to 250°F (-40 to 121°C).
Probe Diameter: 1/4˝ (6.3 mm).
MODELS Probe Length: 6˝ (15 cm).
Model Cable Length: 6 ft (1.8 m).
Number Input
Probe Material: 304 SS.
I-11062 Pt 100Ω RTD
I-12062 Pt 1000Ω RTD Mounting: 1/4˝ NPT brass adapter.
I-13062 Wi 1000Ω RTD
I-14062 1000Ω Balco RTD
I-15062 10KΩ NTC Thermistor
I-16062 3KΩ WTC Thermistor
I-17062 5KΩ WTC Thermistor
I-18062 100KΩ WTC Thermistor
I-19062 20KΩ Thermistor
I-1A062 2252Ω Thermistor
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 332
pg333 7/25/06 11:37 AM Page 1

Series
I-2 Immersion Sensor Assemblies
Plastic Enclosure, RTD Sensor
1/4 OD
(6.3)

1-1/4
(30.0)

2 2-1/2
(50.0) (62.0)

The Series I-2 Immersion Sensor Assemblies are designed for SPECIFICATIONS
immersion temperature applications and installations for building au- Accuracy: ±0.1% @ 32°F (0°C), alpha 385 per DIN 43 760.
tomation systems. The unit is constructed with a waterproof 6˝ (15 cm) Operating Temperature: -40 to 250°F (-40 to 121°C).
length 304 SS probe and a polycarbonate enclosure. The assembly can Probe Diameter: 1/4˝ (6.3 mm).
be threaded directly into a 1/2˝ NPT well (sold separately) or 1/2˝ sad- Probe Length: 6˝ (15 cm).
dle fitting. Series I-2 immersion sensor assemblies are available with a Probe Material: 304 SS.
Temperature

Pt 100Ω or Pt 1000Ω RTD sensor. Mounting: 1/2˝ male NPT.

Enclosure Material: Polycarbonate.
MODELS
Model
Number Input ACCESSORIES
I-21063 Pt 100Ω RTD IW-162 6˝ brass well with 1/2˝ NPT
I-22063 Pt 1000Ω RTD IW-262 6˝ SS well with 1/2˝ NPT
IW-C Thermowell compound

Series
I-4 Weatherproof Immersion Assemblies
NEMA 4 (IP-65), RTD Sensor
1/4 OD
(6.3)

1/2˝ KNOCKOUT

2
(50.0)

2-1/2 4
(62.0) (100.0)

The Series I-4 Weatherproof Immersion Assemblies are de- SPECIFICATIONS

signed for harsh environments where dust, condensation, vapor, oil Accuracy: ±0.1% @ 32°F (0°C).
and other contaminants may be present. The assembly combines a
Operating Temperature: -40 to 250°F (-40 to 121°C).
powder-coated steel enclosure with a fast response RTD sensor for im-
mersion temperature applications. The probe is constructed of 304 SS Probe Diameter: 1/4˝ (6.3 mm).
in a 6˝ (15 cm) length. Use the brass adaptor supplied with each unit Probe Length: 6˝ (15 cm).
to adjust the immersion depth of the probe. The Series I-4 can be Probe Material: 304 SS.
threaded directly into a 1/2˝ NPT well (sold separately) or 1/2˝ saddle Mounting: 1/2˝ NPT male.
fitting.
Enclosure Material: Powder-coated steel, NEMA 4 (IP-65).
MODELS
Model ACCESSORIES
Number Input IW-162 6˝ brass well with 1/2˝ NPT
I-41063 Pt 100Ω RTD IW-262 6˝ SS well with 1/2˝ NPT
I-42063 Pt 1000Ω RTD IW-C Thermowell compound

333 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg334 7/25/06 11:38 AM Page 1

Series
S-2 Surface Temperature Assembly
Polycarbonate Enclosure, Brass Sensor

2-1/2 2
(50.80)
(63.50) 3-1/2
(88.90)
4-5/16
(109.54)

Monitor pipe surface temperatures using the Series S-2 Surface SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Assembly. The Series S-2 combines a low profile brass tem- Accuracy: ±0.1% @ 32°F (0°C).
perature sensor and a 30% glass-filled polycarbonate enclosure designed to Operating Temperature: -40 to 250°F (-40 to 121°C).
withstand temperature extremes, mechanical shock and vibration. The Probe Material: Brass.
unit includes a mounting bracket for pipe clamp installations. The Series S- Enclosure Material: 30% glass-filled polycarbonate.
2 are available with Pt 100Ω or Pt 1000Ω RTD sensors.

Temperature
Model S-21, Pt 100Ω RTD
Model S-22, Pt 1000Ω RTD

Series
S-4 Weatherproof Surface Temperature Assembly
NEMA 4 (IP-65), Steel Enclosure

2-1/2
4 (63.50)
(107.60) 3-1/2
(68.50)
4-5/16
(108.54)

The Series S-4 Weatherproof Surface Temperature Assembly SPECIFICATIONS

is designed for applications in unconditioned environments where the Accuracy: ±0.1% @ 32°F (0°C).
unit may be subjected to dust, condensation, oil, vapor and other cont- Operating Temperature: -40 to 250°F (-40 to 121°C).
aminants. The rugged steel enclosure meets NEMA 4 (IP-65) require- Probe Material: Brass.
ments. The Series S-4 includes a fast response brass, Pt 100Ω or Pt Enclosure Material: Powder-coated steel, NEMA 4 (IP65).
1000Ω contact sensor. The sensor is insulated from the enclosure to
provide accurate pipe surface temperature measurement. The assem-
bly includes a mounting bracket for quick installation.

Model S-41, Pt 100Ω RTD

Model S-42, Pt 1000Ω RTD

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 334
pg335 7/25/06 11:39 AM Page 1

Series
RTD Resistance Temperature Detector
High Temperature, Mineral Insulated, 316 SS Sheath

#8 SPADE TERMINAL
.250 [6.35] OD
TYP 3 PLACES
304 STAINLESS STEEL
POTTING ADAPTOR MARK RED LEAD "-"
FIBERGLASS INSULATED WIRE
.125 [3.175] OD WITH SEALED TIP
304 STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH
MARK WHITE
6.000 36.000 LEAD "+"
[152.4] [914.4] 4.000
[101.6]

Precision RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) offers excellent SPECIFICATIONS

accuracy and stability over a wide temperature range. Industry stan- Sensor Type: Wire wound, 100 ohm.
dard 3-wire 100 ohm (DIN) probes are available in 6˝ (15 cm), 12˝ (30.5 Temperature Range: -328 to 1202°F (-200 to 650°C).
cm), or 18˝ (46 cm) sheath lengths with 30˝ (76 cm) extension cable and
Pressure Limits: 250 psig.
spade lug terminals.
Probe Material: 316 SS.
Extension Length: 30˝ (76 cm).
MODELS Standard: DIN .00385 (Class B, 0.12%).
Temperature

Model Number Length Diameter

APPLICATIONS
RTD-686 6˝ (15 cm) 1/8˝
RTD-6812 12˝ (30.5 cm) Typical applications are: air ducts, bearing temperature, oil tempera-
1/8˝
RTD-6818 18˝ (46 cm) 1/8˝ ture indicator, soldering equipment, ovens, environmental test cham-
RTD-646 6˝ (15 cm) 1/4˝ bers, pharmaceutical mfg., food processing, plastic molding, petroleum
RTD-6412 12˝ (30.5 cm) 1/4˝ & chemical processing, electric generating plants, etc.
RTD-6418 18˝ (46 cm) 1/4˝

Series
GT Spirit-Filled Glass Thermometers
Partial Immersion, ˚F and ˚C Ranges, Individually Serialized
Ø 0.250
[6.35]

(A)

Environmentally safe, Series GT Spirit-Filled Glass Thermometers SPECIFICATIONS

offer accurate and reliable temperature measurement without worry of Accuracy: ±1 scale division below 221°F (105°C), ±1.5 scale
mercury contamination or disposal. Organically filled with blue or red divisions above 221°F (105°C) and ±2 scale divisions above
mineral spirits, these thermometers are designed for applications requir- 392°F (200°C).
ing only partial immersion. Individually serialized thermometers are cal- Fill Solution: Blue fill contains Isoamyl Benzoate; Red fill may
ibrated over the entire scale and accurate to within NIST tolerances. contain Kerosene, Toluene, or Pentane with aniline dye.
Thermometer Length (A): 12˝ (305 mm) all models except for
GT500F and GT260C which are16˝ (405 mm).
Thermometer Diameter: 0.250˝ (6.35 mm).
MODELS
Immersion Length: 3˝ (76 mm).
Model Immersion
Number Range Divisions Length (mm) (mm) Weight: 0.1 lb (0.05 kg).
GT120F -30 to 120˚F 1°F 12˝ (305) 3˝ (76)
GT230F 0 to 230˚F 2°F 12˝ (305) 3˝ (76)
GT300F 0 to 300˚F 2°F 12˝ (305) 3˝ (76)
GT500F 20 to 500˚F 2°F 16˝ (305) 3˝ (76) APPLICATIONS
GT110C -20 to 110˚C 1°C 12˝ (305) 3˝ (76)
GT150C -20 to 150˚C 1°C 12˝ (305) 3˝ (76)
Manufacturing processes of petrochemicals, chemicals, food
GT200C -10 to 200˚C 1°C 12˝ (305) 3˝ (76) and beverage products, waste water treatment, biotechnology,
GT260C -10 to 260˚C 1°C 16˝ (305) 3˝ (76) and pharmaceutical industries. Use in ovens, water baths, incu-
GT5050C* -50 to 50˚C 1°C 12˝ (305) 3˝ (76)
GT10050C* -100 to 50˚C 1°C 12˝ (305) 3˝ (76)
bators, and refrigeration.

335 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg336 8/2/06 2:50 PM Page 1

Series
BT Bimetal Thermometers
2”, 3” or 5” Dial, Dual Scale, ±1% FS Accuracy, External Reset

Series BT Bimetal Thermometers offer accurate, reliable service even in SPECIFICATIONS

the toughest environments. These corrosion resistant units are constructed Wetted Materials: 304 SS.
Accuracy: ±1% full scale.
from stainless steel and are hermetically sealed to prevent crystal fogging. Response Time: ≤ 40 seconds.
The bimetal element directly drives pointer, eliminating gears and linkage. Temperature Limits: Head: 200°F (93°C). Stem: Not to exceed 50% over-
An external reset screw allows field calibration and easy-to-read aluminum range or 1000°F (538°C) or 800°F (427°C) continuously.
dial minimizes parallax error. Choose back connection, lower connection or Process Connection: 1/4˝ NPT on 2˝ dial size; 1/2˝ NPT on 3˝ or 5˝ dial
adjustable angle for easy viewing and installation. Adjustable models can be size.
Materials of Construction: 304 SS stem, glass crystal, anodized alu-
rotated a full 360° and tilted over a 180° arc. NOTE: When using in pressur- minum dial, Series 300 SS head, bezel, and mounting bushing.
ized applications, use a suitable thermowell. Stem Diameter: 1/4˝ O.D.
Immersion Depth: Minimum 2˝ in liquids, 4˝ in gas.

Temperature
MODELS
Dial Size, Temperature Degree Model Dial Size, Temperature Degree
Stem Length Range, °F(°C) Div., °F(°C) Number Stem Length Range, °F(°C) Div., °F(°C)
Back Connection Adjustable Angle Connection
BTB22551* 2", 2-1⁄2" 0/250 2 BTA54010D 5", 4" 0/200 (-20/100) 2 (2)
BTB2405D 2", 4" 0/250 (-20/120) 2 (2) BTA5405D 5", 4" 0/250 (-20/120) 2 (2)
BTB2409D 2", 4" 200/1000 (100/550) 10 (5) BTA5407D 5", 4" 50/550 (10/290) 5 (5)
BTB32510D 3", 21⁄2" 0/200 (-20/100) 2 (2) BTA56010D 5", 6" 0/200 (-20/100) 2 (2)
BTB3255D 3", 21⁄2" 0/250 (20/120) 2 (2) BTA5605D 5", 6" 0/250 (-20/120) 2 (2)
BTB3257D 3", 21⁄2" 50/550 (10/290) 5 (5) BTA5607D 5", 6" 50/550 (10/290) 5 (5)
BTB34010D 3", 4" 0/200 (-20/100) 2 (2) Lower Connection
BTB3405D 3", 4" 0/250 (-20/120) 2 (2)
BTB3407D 3", 4" 50/550 (10/290) 5 (5) BTC3255D 3", 2.5" 0/250 (-20/120) 2 (2)
BTB3605D 3", 6" 0/250 (-20/120) 2 (2)

Series
ST Surface Mount Thermometer
2” Dual Scale Dial, ±2% Full Scale Accuracy
2 1/2
[50.80] [12.70]
BIMETAL SENSING ELEMENT

DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.

MICHIGAN CITY, IN. U.S.A.

MAGNETS

PROTECTIVE COVER &

HEAT COLLECTOR

Measure the temperature of boilers, air ducts, motors, bear- SPECIFICATIONS Materials of Construction:
ings, furnaces or other surfaces with Series ST Surface Mount Accuracy: ±2% full scale. Aluminum with optically clear
Thermometers. Dual magnet design allows easy mounting on any Sensing Element: Bimetal coil. crystal.
Response Time: Approximately Head Size: 2˝ (5.08 cm).
ferrous surface. Bi-metallic thermal sensing coil provides quick Height: 1/2˝ (1.27 cm).
temperature measurement with ±2% full scale accuracy. one minute.
Mounting: Two Alnico magnets on Weight: 2 oz (56.7 g).
back.
MODELS
APPLICATIONS
Model Number Range
Manifolds, platens, boilers, air ducts, furnaces, engines, motors,
ST250 0 to 250°F (-20 to 120°C) bearings, enclosures, cabinets, drums, plumbing, piping, refriger-
ST500 0 to 500°F (-20 to 260°C)
ST750 0 to 750 °F (-20 to 399°C) ators, and other ferrous surfaces.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 336
pg337 7/25/06 11:41 AM Page 1

Series
472 Digital Thermocouple Thermometer
Differential or Relative Temperature Readings, Stores Up to 25 Readings
• High accuracy SPECIFICATIONS
temperature Probe Types: Type J and K Thermocouples.
measurement using Probe Connection: ANSI female mini-connector.
Type J and Type K Input Protection: 50V rms.
thermocouples. Temperature: Range: J: -350 to 2192°F (-210 to1200°C); K: -418 to
2500°F (-250 to 1372°C); Accuracy: 0.1% of reading ±0.7°F/0.4°C
• Measures in degrees (> -150°C); 0.1% of reading ±2°F/1°C (< -150°C); Resolution: 0.1°
Fahrenheit or (below 1999°).
degrees Celsius. Linearization: Conforms to NIST monograph 175 revised to ITS-90.
• Selectable resolution Operating Conditions: Stated accuracy: 64 to 82°F (18 to 28°C).
for readings in degree Operating Ambient Temperature: 14 to 104°F (-10 to 40°C). Storage
or in 0.1 degree Temperature: -40 to 176°F (-40 to 80°C).
increments. Display: Dual 42 digit LCD.
Battery: 9 Volt alkaline.
• Differential or relative
Battery Life: 200 hours (typical).
temperature Memory: 25 Samples (Normal or DT mode).
measurement using Housing Size: 6 ⁄ ˝ H 3 2 ⁄ ˝ W 3 ⁄ ˝ D (166 3 71 3 23 mm).
9
16
13
16
29
32

the Δ mode.
• Stores and recalls up
to 25 temperature
Temperature

measurements in either
normal or Δ mode.

The Series 472 Digital Thermocouple Thermometer is a

precision general purpose thermometer designed for use with
Type J or Type K thermocouples that can be field calibrated. A
standard ANSI thermocouple connector allows the use of a wide
variety of probe styles. The unit records and displays minimum
and maximum temperature readings and has a 20 minute auto L-402-A CARRYING CASE — Tough gray nylon
pouch protects any Series 472 Thermometer.
power off to conserve the battery. The 42 digit LCD is backlit for Double zippered for quick and easy access. With
dark or low light conditions. belt loop that snaps closed.

72"h x 3"w x 24"d

Model 472 Digital Thermocouple Thermometer (191 x 76 x 57 mm)

Series
472 Kits Digital Thermocouple Thermometer Kits
Accepts Type J or K Thermocouples
Complete kits include:
• Master probe handle.
• Surface, Air Duct, Immersion and Bare Tip Probes.
• 9V battery.
• High accuracy Series 472 Digital Thermocouple Thermometer
that measures temperature using Type J or Type K
thermocouples.
Features of the Series 472 unit include:
• Measurement in °F or °C.
• Selectable resolution for readings in degree or in 0.1 degree
increments.
• Differential or relative temperature measurement using the
Δ mode.
• Stores and recalls up to 25 temperature measurements in
either normal or Δ mode.

Model 472-2 Kit with Type K Thermocouple

Model 472-3 Kit with Type J Thermocouple

337 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg338 7/25/06 11:41 AM Page 1

Model
TC10 Digital Thermocouple Thermometer
Type K Thermocouple, Large 3 1/2 Digit Display, ±0.3% Accuracy

7-1/2
[190.50]

3-1/2 2-1/32
[88.90] [51.58]

Quickly and accurately measure temperature with the Model SPECIFICATIONS Temperature Limits:
TC10 Digital Thermocouple Thermometer. The TC10 accepts any type Input: Type K (4’ type K thermo- 32 to 122˚F (0 to 50˚C) max 80%
K thermocouple and connects via a standard mini-connection. View couple bead probe included). RH.
temperature readings in °F or °C (field selectable) on the large 3-1/2 Temperature Range: Storage Temperature: -4 to
digit LCD. The 0.8˝ (20 mm) display is backlit for dark or low light con- -58 to 2000˚F (-50 to 1300˚C). 140˚F (-20 to 60˚C) max 70%
ditions. Choose either 0.1° or 1° resolution each with the basic accura- Accuracy: -58 to 2000˚F: RH.
cy of 0.3%. Thermometers respond quickly to environmental changes ±(0.3% of reading + 2˚F); -50 to Power Requirements:
by updating the readings 2.5 times every second. Rugged, water re- 1000˚C: ±(0.3% of reading + Standard 9V battery (included).

Temperature
sistant design comes with a protective holster and stand—ideal for field 1˚C); 1000 to 1300˚C: ±(0.5% of Battery Life: 200 hours typical.
use. Additional features include low battery indication, MAX and
reading + 1˚C). Input Protection: 24V rms.
HOLD functions. Units include protective holster, Type K thermocou-
ple bead wire temperature probe, 9V battery and instruction manual. Display: 0.8˝ (20 mm) height, 3 Thermocouple Connection:
1/2 digit LCD with switchable Standard (F) mini-connector.
back light. Housing: ABS plastic.
Resolution: Selectable 1˚ or Weight: 12.9 oz (365 g).
Model TC10 Digital Thermocouple Thermometer 0.1˚. Agency Approvals: CE.
Model TC10-N includes NIST certification Response Time: 1 second.

Model
TC20 Dual Input ThermocoupleThermometer
Accepts Type J or K, High/Low Alarm, Selectable Resolution

7.600
[193.04]

3.600 2.100
[91.44] [53.34]

Quickly measure differential temperatures with Model TC20 SPECIFICATIONS Resolution: Selectable 1° or 0.1°.
Dual Input Thermocouple Thermometer. Model TC20 accepts type J Input: Type J or K [Two 4 ft (100 Response Time: 1 second.
or K thermocouples and simultaneously displays T1, T2, or T1-T2 and m) type K thermocouple bead Temperature Limits: 32 to 122°F
elapsed time on a large, multi-function LCD. The unit features pro- probes included]. (0 to 50°C) max 80% RH.
grammable high/low audible alarms, max/min, average readings, dis- Temperature Range: -328 to Storage Temperature: -4 to
play hold and relative mode. The relative mode permits the user to 1922°F (-200 to 1050°C) for type 140°F (-20 to 60°C) max 70% RH.
store the current temperature value and compare it to subsequent J;-328 to 2498°F (-200 to 1370°C) Power Requirements: 9V
temperature readings. Model TC20 thermometer includes two type K for type K. Alkaline (included).
bead wire probes, rubber holster, 9V battery and instruction manual. Accuracy: -58 to 2498°F (-50 to Battery Life: 200 hours typical.
1370°C): ±0.05% of reading + Thermocouple Connection:
0.6°F (0.3°C) -328 to -58°F (-200 Standard female mini-connector.
to -50°C): ±0.05% of reading +
Model TC20 Dual Input Thermocouple Thermometer Housing: ABS Plastic.
1.4°F (0.7°C).
Model TC20-N Includes NIST Certification Weight: 13 oz (365 g).
Display: 0.8˝ (20 mm) height, 5-
Agency Approvals: CE.
digit LCD with switchable back
light.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 338
pg339 7/25/06 11:42 AM Page 1

Model
IRM20 Noncontact Infrared Thermometer
6:1 Distance-to-Target Size Ratio, Selectable °F or °C, Laser Sighting

7-1/4
[184.15]

1-5/8 1-1/2
[41.28] [38.10]

The economical, handheld Model IRM20 Noncontact Infrared Ther- SPECIFICATIONS

mometer is compact, rugged and easy to use—just aim, push the button, Temperature Range: 0 to 500°F (-18 to 260°C).
and read current surface temperatures in less than a second. Hot, haz- Accuracy: ±2% of reading or ±3.5°F (±2°C) whichever is greater for targets at
30 to 500°F (-1 to 260°C); ±5°F (±3°C) for targets at 0 to 30°F (-18 to -1°C).
ardous, or hard-to-reach objects are safely measured without contact. Emissivity: Fixed 0.95.
The unit has a wide temperature range from 0 to 500°F (-18 to 260°C) and Distance-to-Target Size Ratio: 6:1.
a distance-to-spot size ratio of 6:1. The LCD shows temperatures in Laser Classification: Single Point.
switchable °F or °C, holds the reading for 7 seconds after the button is Display: 4-digit.
Resolution: 1°F/°C.
released and indicates when the battery is low. The IRM20 is ideal for in- Response Time: 500 ms, 95% response.
Temperature

dustrial, electrical, heating and air conditioning, automotive and food Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 to 120°F (0 to 50°C).
safety. Power Requirement: One 9V battery (included).
Battery Life: 12 hours.
Repeatability: ±2% of reading or ±3°F (±2°C).
Storage Temperature: -4 to 150°F (-20 to 65°C) without battery.
Relative Humidity: 10-95% RH noncondensing up to 86°F (35°C).
Spectral Response: 7-18 µm.
Weight: 0.5 lb (227 g).
Agency Approvals: CE.

Model
PIR1 Pocket-Size Infrared Thermometer
Adjustable Emissivity, Laser Targeting, Selectable °F or °C

6.086
[154.58]

1.300 2.071
[33.02] [52.60]

The PIR1 Pocket-Size Infrared Thermometer allows for tem- SPECIFICATIONS

perature measurement of processes not suited for conventional Temperature Range: 0 to 600°F (-20 to 315°C).
“contact” measurements. Model PIR1 will display real time, max- Accuracy: ±2% of reading or ±4°F (±2°C) whichever is greater.
imum, minimum, differential or average temperature readings Emissivity: Adjustable 0.3-1.0.
with a push of a button. The large, 3-digit LCD is backlit to allow Distance-to-Target Size Ratio: 6:1, nominal.
for use in low light areas. Additional features include an audible Laser Classification Single Point: Class II (Output <1mW).
high/low alarm, laser targeting, adjustable emissivity and selec- Display: 3-Digit, 1/4˝ height. Automatically shuts off 7 seconds
table °F/°C measurements. Vinyl carrying case, lanyard, 9V bat- after hold button is released.
tery and instructions are included. Resolution: 1°C/°F.
Response Time: 500 ms.
Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C),
80% RH max.
Power Requirements: One 9V alkaline battery (included).
Sample Rate: 0.5 seconds minimum.
Weight: 6.3 oz (180 g).
Agency Approvals: CE.

339 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg340 7/25/06 12:16 PM Page 1

Model
WT-10 Waterproof Thermometer
Stainless Steel Stem, Selectable °F or °C, Max/Min Recall, Auto Off

13/16
WT-10 [20.32]

45/64
[17.78]

5-57/64
[149.86]

Completely submersible, the pocket size Model WT-10 SPECIFICATIONS

Waterproof Thermometer is designed with a waterproof hous- Temperature Range: -40 to 392°F (-40 to 200°C).
ing and a 2.75˝ (70 mm) stainless steel stem. The unit offers Accuracy: ±2°F (±1°C) from –14 to 212°F (–26° to 100°C); all
other temperature ranges ±3°F (±2°C).
dual scale temperature measurements up to 392°F (200°C) on Display: 3-digit LCD.
the 3-digit LCD display. The WT-10 comes complete with pro- Resolution: 0.1°F/°C.
tective cover to store the unit while not in use. The features Response Time: 1 second.

Temperature
include MAX/MIN recall of high and low temperatures, hold, Power Requirements: One 1.5V button style battery (included).
switchable °F or °C and auto shut off. Ideal applications include Battery Life: Approximately 1 year.
Construction: 2.75˝ (70 mm) stainless steel pointed stem and
laboratory, food and beverage, HVAC and scientific markets. ABS waterproof housing.
Weight: 0.7 oz (20 g).
Agency Approvals: CE.
Model WT-10 Waterproof Thermometer

Model
CC-10K Colotemp Crayon Kit
Indicator Crayons, Change Color with Different Temperature
CRAYON
(4.093)

(Ø.375)

HOLDER

The Model CC-10K Colotemp Crayon Kit is the ideal solution to monitor Temperature Range
and verify temperature specific operations for those who must measure many Initial Crayon Color
First Color Change Second Color Change
different temperatures. The kit includes a variety of crayons for various tem-
perature ranges. The crayons are easy-to-use, simply mark a pre-heated surface Light Gray Violet Blue 248°F (120°C)
with a color change crayon. The color will change immediately if the tempera- Pink Blue Violet 383°F (195°C) Gray 563°F (295°C)
ture is higher than the crayon’s rating, or it will change within 1-2 seconds if it Pale Blue Light Green 419°F (215°C) White Buff 581°F (305°C)
is lower than its rating. The color change crayons are accurate to ±5°C of the Light Purple Bright Blue 437°F (225°C) Gray 608°F (320°C)
temperature rating. The color change is irreversible. Orange-Brown Black 473°F (245°C) Light Gray 635°F (335°C)
Yellow-Brown Red Brown 572°F (300°C)
APPLICATIONS Dark Violet Light Violet 608°F (320°C) White Buff 860°F (460°C)
• Paper, rubber, textile, plastics, chemical and electrical industries.
Aqua Green White Buff 680°F (360°C)
• Zinc foundries, aluminum processing and the glass industry.
Red White 878°F (470°C)
• Iron & steel industry, enameling, welding and fabricating.
Apple Green White 1112°F (600°C)
CC-10K Colotemp Crayon Kit

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 340
pg341 7/25/06 12:17 PM Page 1

Series
KS Irreversible Temperature Labels
Indicators and Strips, Displays both °F and °C

5/8
[15.88]
1-1/4
2
[31.75]
[50.80]

1/2
[12.70]
6 Level Horizontal
5 Level Clock Label
Mini Label

8 Level Vertical Label 23/32

[18.44]

The KS Series Irreversible Temperature Labels are the ideal solution to 8 Level Vertical Label
monitor and verify temperature specific operations such as climate conditions
Model Number Temperature Range No. in Package
during storage and transit. The labels are produced in a variety of tempera-
ture points and sizes and permanently darken when exposed at or above the KS-0101 99 to 149°F (37 to 65°C) 10
indicated temperature point. The labels are self-adhesive and resist oil, water, KS-0102 160 to 230°F (71 to 110°C) 10
and steam, which allows them to be placed on any smooth surface quickly and KS-0103 241 to 309°F (116 to 154°C) 10
easily.
KS-0104 320 to 390°F (160 to 199°C) 10
6 Level Horizontal Mini Label KS-0105 399 to 500°F (204 to 260°C) 10

Model Number Temperature Range 5 Level Clock Label

No. in Package
Temperature

KS-0201 84 to 108°F (29 to 42°C) 10 Model Number Temperature Range No. in Package
KS-0202 111 to 144°F (44 to 62°C) 10 KS-0301 104 to 129°F (40 to 54°C) 10
KS-0203 149 to 199°F (65 to 93°C) 10 KS-0302 140 to 180°F (60 to 82°C) 10
KS-0204 210 to 261°F (99 to 127°C) 10 KS-0303 190 to 230°F (88 to 110°C) 10
KS-0205 270 to 320°F (132 to 160°C) 10 KS-0304 241 to 280°F (116 to 138°C) 10
KS-0206 331 to 379°F (166 to 193°C) 10 KS-0305 289 to 331°F (143 to 166°C) 10
KS-0207 390 to 450°F (199 to 232°C) 10 KS-0306 340 to 379°F (171 to 193°C) 10
KS-0208 465 to 554°F (241 to 290°C) 10 KS-0307 390 to 435°F (199 to 224°C) 10
KS-0308 450 to 500°F (232 to 260°C) 10

Series
KS-04/05 Reversible Temperature Strips
Indicators and Strips, Displays both °F and °C
1/2
[12.70]

1-3/4
[44.53]

5 1/2
[127.00] [12.70]
7 Level Horizontal Label

16 Level Vertical Label

The KS-04/05 Series Reversible Temperature Strips provide a constant 7 Level Horizontal Label (5°C Increments)
and reliable indication of current temperature status. The reversible, reusable
strips change color when temperatures increase or decrease, and are con- Model Number Temperature Range
No. in Package
structed with non-toxic encapsulated thermochromic liquid crystals. The tem- KS-0501 -22 to 32°F (-30 to 0°C) 10
perature strips are self-adhesive, and have an accuracy of ±2°F (±1°C). These KS-0502 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C) 10
reversible strips are resistant to oils, water and steam–ideal for monitoring
KS-0503 86 to 140°F (30 to 60°C) 10
pipes, food storage areas, transportation climate control, equipment monitor-
ing, pharmaceutical or medical applications. KS-0504 140 to 194°F (60 to 90°C) 10
KS-0505 194 to 248°F (90 to 120°C) 10
16 Level Vertical Label (2°F Increments)
Model Number Temperature Range No. in Package
KS-0401 26 to 56°F (-3 to 13°C) 10
KS-0402 58 to 88°F (14 to 31°C) 10
KS-0403 90 to 120°F (32 to 49°C) 10

341 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg342 7/26/06 4:04 PM Page 1

Series
LCT016 Analog Timers
Low Cost, 1/16 DIN Panel Mount, Four Timing Functions
48.0 16.0 63.7 13.6
(1.89) (0.630) (2.062) (0.535)

48.0 37.0 44.8

1.890) (1.46) (1.764)

80.4
(3.165) 94.0
Dimensions in mm (inches)
(3.701)

The LCT016 Analog Timers provide simple, yet economical solutions SPECIFICATIONS Reset Time: 0.1 second, maxi-
for a variety of timing applications. Installation is simple with compact Operating Temperature Range: mum.
1/16 DIN package. Scale and timing functions are easily adjusted with 32 to 131°F (0 to 55°C). Status Lights: Green LED indi-
individual front mounted switches. The included tamper resistant cover Humidity Conditions: 35 to 85% cates power on. Red LED indicates
discourages unauthorized changes of the scale, timing functions and RH, non-condensing. output status.
restricts movement of the analog set point knob. Two LEDs on the front Control Output Ratings: Relay, Inputs: Logic inputs for Start,
indicate power and output status. Four different timing functions and SPDT, 5A @ 250 VAC resistive. Reset, and Inhibit. Timing func-
sixteen different time scales give you the greatest flexibility. Weight: 3.17 oz (90 g). tions: a. Signal On - Delay; b.
Socket: LCT016-3x: Standard 8- Flicker OFF Start; d. Signal ON/Off
pin plug-in socket. LCT016-1x: Delay; e. Signal OFF delay.

Temperature
Standard 11-pin plug-in socket. Supply Voltage: 100 to 240
Accuracy: Repeatability: ±0.3% VDC/VAC 50~60 Hz.
of maximum rated time. ±0.3% Power Consumption: 10VA.
MODELS
±10ms for 1.2 sec range. Line
LCT016-10 11-pin timer Stability: ±0.5% of maximum rated
LCT016-30 8-pin timer time, ±0.5% 10ms for 1.2 second
481-0159 (8-pin sockets) range.
481-0164 (11-pin sockets)

Series
LCT116 Digital Timers
Low Cost, 1/16 DIN Panel Mount,Ten Timing Functions
48.0 16.0 63.7 13.6
(1.89) (0.630) (2.062) (0.535)

48.0 37.0 44.8

(1.890) (1.46) (1.764)

80.4
(3.165) 94.0
Dimensions in mm (inches)
(3.701)

The LCT116 Digital Timers provide simple, yet economical solu- SPECIFICATIONS Inputs: Logic inputs for Start,
tions for a variety of timing applications. Installation is simple with Operating Temperature Range: Reset, and Inhibit.
compact 1/16 DIN package. Set point and timing functions are easily 32 to 131°F (0 to 55°C). Timing functions:
Humidity Conditions: 35 to 85% a. Signal On - Delay; b. Flicker on
adjusted with the individual set buttons. A LCD display on the front RH, non-condensing. Start; c. Signal ON/Off Delay; d.
indicates current time status and a bargraph for indicating relative Control Output Ratings: Relay, Signal OFF Delay; e. Interval Mode;
time remaining. Ten different timing functions and ten different time SPDT, 5A @ 250 VAC resistive. f. One Shot and Flicker; g.
scales give you the greatest flexibility. Weight: 5.3 oz (150 g). Integration Time; h. Interval Delay;
Socket: LCT116-1x: Standard i. Flicker - One Shot; j. Power On
8-pin plug-in socket. LCT116-2x: Start.
Standard 11-pin plug-in socket. Supply Voltage: 100 to 240
Accuracy: Repeatability: ±0.3% VDC/VAC 50~60 Hz.
of maximum rated time. Power Consumption: 10 VA.
MODELS Line Stability: ±0.5% of maximum
rated time.
LCT116-10 8-pin timer Status Light: LCD shows time
LCT116-20 11-pin timer and function details.
481-0159 (8-pin sockets)
481-0164 (11-pin sockets)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 342
pg343 7/24/06 4:27 PM Page 1

Data Acquisition and Recorders

Data acquisition is the process of gathering information from vari-
ous sources such as thermocouples, RTDs, or process devices for Data Loggers pgs 344 - 348
documentation or later analysis.

Methods of data acquisition include:

Data Loggers
Data loggers provide a paperless method of acquiring data.
Information is stored within the unit and is downloaded directly to
a computer for further manipulation and analysis.

Recorders
Chart recorders provide a printed representation of the process
being measured.

Signal Conditioners
Signal conditioners scale, amplify, linearize and isolate thermocou-
ple, RTD, current, voltage, frequency or potentiometer input sig-
nals.
Recorders pgs 349 - 350

Table of Contents
Series BDL Button Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Model MTL10 Mini Temperature Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . .344
Acquisition/

Series WL Waterproof Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

Recorders

Series PD Pro-Data Programmable

Data

Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Model DL001 Temperature Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Series DL6 Pressure/Temperature/RH
Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Series DL7 Differential Pressure Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Series DL8 Process Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Series DL-A Logger Alarm Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Series MDL Mini Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Series LCR10 Circular Chart Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Series LCR20 Dual Pen Circular Chart Recorder . . . . . . . . .349
Series 1200 Minigraph Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Series SC448/SCL448 Strain Gauge and Bridge
Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Signal Conditioners/Transmitters pgs 352 - 355
Series 1090 Loop Alarms™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Series SC1090 Process/Alarm
Switch Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Series SC4130/SC4151/SC4380 Iso Verter® II Signal
Conditioning Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Model SCU Process Signal Converter/Isolator . . . . . . . . . .353
Model 4380 Process Signal Converter/Isolator . . . . . . . . . .353
Series MSP Isolating Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Series SCC Signal Conditioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355

343 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p344 7/24/06 4:30 PM Page 1

Series
BDL Button Data Logger
Compact Size, RS-232 Interface, Capable of Storing 2048 Readings

Ø 0.67 0.236
[17] [6.0]

The Series BDL Button Data Logger records temperatures in appli- SPECIFICATIONS memory, color monitor and
cations where size and cost effectiveness are key. The BDL is housed Temperature Range: 14 to mouse.
in a stainless steel case and is water resistant, making it durable in hos- 185°F (-10 to 85°C). Software Requirements:
Memory Size: Capable of Button Data Logger For
tile environments where excessive moisture is present. The BDL is
storing 2048 readings. Windows® versions 95, 98, NT
self-powered and is capable of storing up to 2048 readings in user selec- or 2000.
Accuracy: ±1.5°C.
table increments of 1 to 255 minutes. This series can accurately record Clock Accuracy: ±2 seconds Power Requirements:
temperatures in the 14 to 185°F (-10 to 85°C) temperature range. The per month. Internal battery; 10-year
Model BDL-K Logger kit includes two buttons, 2 plastic holders, inter- Resolution: 8-bits- 0.9°F approximate life.
face cable, and Windows® software. (0.5°C). Housing: Stainless Steel but-
Sampling Methods: ton.
Continuous (First-in, First-out); Alarm Thresholds: User
Model BDL-10 (Single button) Stop when full. selectable, event storage.
Sampling Rates: User selec- Start Delay: Up to 255
Model BDL-K (Kit) minutes.
table rates from 1 to 255 min-
APPLICATIONS utes. Communication: RS-232
Computer Requirements: interface.
Food processing verification, pharmaceutical storage, laboratories,

Acquisition/
IBM or PC or 100% compatible Mounting: User selectable.

Recorders
transportation of temperature sensitive goods, equipment run time, Weight: .14 oz (4 g).
Pentium 75 with at least one
HVAC system testing and balancing.

Data
Windows® is a registered trademark of Mercoid Corporation.
free serial port, 16mB of RAM

Model
MTL10 Mini Temperature Data Logger
High/Low Temperature Alarm with Visual Indication, Software Included

1.438
[36.53]

2.312 .813
[58.72] [20.65]

Measure and record the temperature of the surrounding environment SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements: 3.0V
with the Model MTL10 Mini Temperature Data Logger. Each unit is fac- Temperature Range: -40 to 185˚F Lithium battery.
tory calibrated to an accuracy of ±0.9°F (±0.5°C) over the operating (-40 to 85˚C). Battery Life: 3 years (approx).
range of -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C). Model MTL10 can store up to 2048 Memory Size: 2048 samples. Housing Material: ABS plastic.
temperature measurements and can be set for continuous measurement Alarm Memory: Up to 12 temper- Alarms: Programmable high/low.
or stop recording when the memory becomes full. Sampling rate is selec- ature high and 12 temperature low. Recording Start: Push button,
table from one minute to once every four hours. Recordings can be pro- Accuracy: ±0.9˚F (±0.5˚C). computer controlled or up to 6
grammed to begin immediately, delayed (up to 6 weeks), or initiated by Resolution: ±0.9˚F (±0.5˚C). week delayed start.
a push button. The logger can also be used to monitor long-term high Sampling Mode: Stop on memory Real Time Clock: Displays sec-
full or continuous recording with onds, minutes, hours, month, day
and low alarms. Up to 12 low and 12 high temperature alarm events can
memory rollover. of the week and year.
be recorded. The logger has visual indication of an alarm condition with-
Sampling Rate: Selectable from 1 Real Time Status: Updated every
out the need to connect to the computer.
min. to 4 hrs. in 1 min. increments. second.
Computer Requirements: Intel Interface: RS232 Serial Port.
compatible 486 or above and Weight: 3 oz (85 g).
Model MTL10 Mini Temperature Data Logger Windows® 95 or later with 8 mB Agency Approvals: CE.
RAM and 2mB hard drive disk
Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsolft Corporation.
space, one free RS232 port.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 344
p345 7/24/06 4:32 PM Page 1

Series
WL Waterproof Logger
Single Channel, Temperature, User Configurable
INPUT JACK FOR
INTERFACE CABLE

SHOWN WITHOUT CAP

23/32
(18.3)

5
(127)

CLEARANCE FOR COVER REMOVAL

5-25/32
(149.1)

Monitor and record temperature in hostile or wet environments SPECIFICATIONS

with Series WL Waterproof Logger. The Series WL is housed in a Temperature Range: WL-1X: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C);
rugged stainless steel or aluminum casing and can withstand an oper- WL-2X: 50 to 275°F (10 to 135°C).
ating pressure range up to 2000 psi (138 bar). Memory Size: 244,800 readings.
The logger can store up to 244,800 readings with user configurable Accuracy: WL-1X: ±0.3°F between 52 to 158°F (±0.2°C between 0 to
sampling methods and sampling rates. The logger is designed with an 70°C); WL-2X: ±0.9°F (±0.5°C).
internal NTC thermistor for measuring temperatures from -40 to Clock Accuracy: ±2 seconds per day.
185°F (-40 to 85°C) or 50 to 275°F (10 to 135°C). Use the Series WL Resolution: 8-bit.
for temperature monitoring in wastewater treatment plants, environ- Sampling Method: Continuous (first in – first out); Stop when full.
mental monitoring, process monitoring, agriculture, medical and Sampling Rates: User selectable rates, 8 seconds to 34 minutes.
Computer Requirements: IBM PC or 100% compatible with at least
pharmaceutical industries. Software and connecting cable included. one free serial port, 2MB of RAM memory and 2MB of hard disk space.
Software Requirements: Windows® 3.1, 95, 98, ME, NT, 2000, or XP.
WL-10, Waterproof Logger, Al case Power Requirements: Internal 3.6V lithium. 3-year approximate life
WL-11, Waterproof Logger, SS case (factory replaceable).
Housing: WL-10 & WL-20: Aluminum; WL-11 & WL-21: Stainless steel.
WL-20, High Temperature Waterproof Logger, Al case
Mounting: Locking hole on cap.
WL-21, High Temperature Waterproof Logger, SS case
Acquisition/

Weight: WL-10 & WL-20: 1.8 oz (51 g); WL-11 & WL-21: 4 oz (112 g).
Recorders
Data

Series
PD Pro-Data Programmable Data Logger
Measure Temperature, Humidity, Dew Point, Pressure, or Voltage
3.500 1.313 .250
[89] [33.4] .188 [6.35]
®
[4.76]
PROBE
TERMINAL 4.00
5.125
[130] [102]

RS232 25 PIN
CONNECTION
1.0 [25.4] CABLE LENGTH
8 FT. (1.8 m)

Read, measure, and record temperature, humidity, dew point, pressure, and volt- SPECIFICATIONS Sampling Method: 5 hr, 15 hr, 30 hr,
age with the multifunction Series PD Pro-Data Programmable Data Logger. The Temperature/Humidity/Dew Point 60 hr, 2 weeks, or 40 days (field selec-
handheld measuring instrument has the capability to record 4000 day/time stamped Sensor: 4” plastic temp sensor for air table).
only; Temp. Range: –40 to 170°F (–40 Sampling Rates: Field selectable from
samples and store data up to 40 days. The non-volatile memory will retain recorded 5 seconds to 15 minutes.
to 75°C), accuracy: ±2°F (±1°C);
information in the absence of power to be recalled later. Recorded data can be viewed Humidity Range: 0 to 100% @ 32 to Computer Requirements: IBM com-
on the alphanumeric LCD display, sent directly to a printer, or transferred to an IBM 130°F (0 to 55°C), Accuracy: ±2%; Dew patible 286 or above and MS-DOS 3.0
compatible computer for later analysis. Point Range: 32 to 130°F (0 to 55°C). or later. DB25 Male-Male.
Temperature/Pressure Sensor: 4˝ SS Power Requirements: 115 VAC 50/60
The dual channel logger uses plug-in sensors to measure the desired parameters. Sen- submersible temp sensor; Temp. Range: Hz adapter (220 VAC available) or 9V
–40 to 170°F (–40 to 75°C), accuracy: alkaline battery for 24 hr backup power
sors are available in three different configurations – temperature/humidity/dew source (not included). External power
±2°F (±1°C); Press. Range: 0 to 500 psi
point, temperature/pressure, or temperature/voltage. All sensors are field inter- (0 to 35 bar), accuracy: ±1% FS. may be supplied from any 12 VDC
changeable for application flexibility and do not require recalibration when changed. Temperature/Voltage Sensor: 4˝ SS source.
Unit features programmable sampling rate, selectable °F or °C, backlit display, and submersible temp sensor; Temp. Range: Printer Interface: Parallel centronics
rear panel keyholes for permanent mounting. -40 to 170°F (-40 to 75°C), accuracy: compatible printer port.
±2°F (±1°C); Voltage Range: 24 to 270 Cable Length: All are 6 ft (1.8 m).
VAC, 24 to 180 VDC. Weight: 10 oz (284 g).
Memory Size: 4,000 samples. Agency Approvals: CE.
MODELS Display: Alphanumeric backlit LCD, 16
characters 32 lines.
Model
Number Sensors Included Accessories
No. PD7, Replacement Temperature/Humidity Sensor
PD101 Temperature/Humidity/Dew Point No. PD8, Replacement Pressure/Temperature Sensor
PD301 Temperature/Voltage No. PD9, Replacement Temperature/Event Sensor
No. PD77, 10 ft. Extension Cable for Humidity/Temperature Sensor
No. PD85, 25 ft. Extension for Pressure/Temperature/Event Sensor

345 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p346 7/24/06 4:33 PM Page 1

Model
DL001 Temperature Data Logger
Self-Powered, 2-Channel, Store up to 32,768 Readings, Compact
INPUT JACK FOR
INTERFACE CABLE SECURITY EYELET

MAGNETIC
STRIP
2.856
[75.1]

12403500
.664
.744 3.825 [16.9] 3.375 .450
[18.9] [97] [85.7] [11.4]
TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Record temperature in a wide range of applications including HVAC test- SPECIFICATIONS Ambient Operating
No. of Channels: Two, one internal Temperature/RH: –50 to 160°F (–45
ing and balancing, transportation, and energy management with the Model thermistor and one external tempera-
to 70°C), 0 to 95% RH, non-con-
DL001 Temperature Data Logger. Temperature logger has an on-board ther- densing.
ture sensor.
mistor and an external sensor channel for remote temperature measurements. Internal Thermistor Range: –40 to Connection: Removable screw ter-
158°F (–40 to 70°C). minal.
Microprocessor controlled circuitry includes solid state memory that can store
Memory Size: 32,768 readings. Computer Requirements: IBM
up to 32,768 readings. Model DL001 logger operates totally independently compatible 386 or above and
Accuracy: ±0.5°C (±0.9°F).
from any external power supply with built-in lithium battery. Units feature a Windows® 3.1 or later with 2mB RAM
Clock Accuracy: ±8 seconds per and 2mB hard drive disk space, one
magnetic backing and locking hole for easy and secure mounting. Quickly pro- day plus one sampling interval. serial port.
gram the temperature logger or upload data to a computer using Model DL200 Internal Thermistor Resolution: Power Requirements: 3.6V Lithium
Windows® software (sold separately). 0.7°F (0.4°C), R25 value equal to battery.
10,000Ω.
Power Consumption: 5-10 µA.
Resolution: 8 bits (1 in 256).
DL001 Temperature Data Logger Sampling Methods: Continuous Housing Material: Polyphenylene
(First-in, First-out) or Stop when full Ether and Polystyrene PPE & PS.
(Fill-then-stop). External Sensor: Interchange-
Accessories Sampling Rates: 8 seconds to once
able NTC (negative temperature coef-
ficient) thermistor recommended (not
No. DL200, Windows® Software and Connecting Cable every 5 days, selectable. included).
Weight: 5 oz (110 g).

Acquisition/
Recorders
Agency Approvals: CE.

Data
Series
DL6 Pressure/Temperature/RH Data Logger
Self-Powered, 5-Channel, Store up to 32,768 Readings, Compact
INPUT JACK FOR INTERFACE CABLE
RELATIVE HUMIDITY PLUG IN SECURITY EYELET

XXXXXX MAGNETIC
STRIP
DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.
MICHIGAN CITY, IN. 46361 U.S.A.

2.956
[75.1]
124036-00

3.825 .644 3.375 .450

.744 [97] [16.9] [85.7] [11.4]
[18.9] TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Monitor and troubleshoot HVAC systems, verify energy management systems, SPECIFICATIONS Sampling Rates: Selectable from 8
or track performance of pneumatically controlled valves with Series DL6 No. of Channels: Five; internal ther- seconds to once every 5 days.
Pressure/Temperature/RH Data Logger. Units include an on-board thermistor for mistor, pressure module (included), Ambient Operating
ambient temperature measurement and pressure module. Remote humidity/tem- plug-in humidity sensor, remote Temperature/RH: –50 to 160°F (–45
perature sensor and plug-in humidity sensor are sold separately. Loggers can store humidity/temperature sensor. to 70°C), 0 to 95% RH, non-con-
up to 32,768 readings and operate independently from any external power supply Internal Thermistor Range: –40 to densing.
with built-in lithium battery. Use Model DL200 Windows® software (sold sepa- 158°F (–40 to 70°C). Connection: Removable screw ter-
Compensated Temperature minal.
rately) to quickly program the logger or upload data to a computer.
Range: 32 to 158°F (0 to70°C). Computer Requirements: IBM
compatible 386 or above and
Memory Size: 32,768 readings.
MODELS Windows® 3.1 or later with 2mB RAM
Accuracy: ±1% FS. and 2mB hard drive disk space, one
Model Clock Accuracy: ±8 sec/day plus
Pressure Range serial port.
Number one sampling interval.
DL6005 0 to 5 psig (30 kPa) Power Requirements: Built-in 3.6V
Thermal Accuracy: ±1% FS. Lithium battery.
DL6030 0 to 30 psig (200 kPa) Drift: ±0.2% FS/yr. Power Consumption: 5-10 µA.
DL6100 0 to 100 psig (700 kPa)
Internal Thermistor Resolution: Service: Air and noncorrosive gases.
0.7°F (0.4°C), R25 value equal to Max. Pressure Rating: 4x rated
Accessories 10,000Ω.
No. DL200, Windows® Software and Connecting Cable pressure.
Resolution: 8 bits (1 in 256). Housing Material: Polypenylene
No. DL690, Remote Humidity/Temperature Sensor
Sampling Methods: Continuous Ether and Polystyrene.
No. DL691, Plug-in Humidity Sensor
(First-in, First-out) or Stop when full Weight: 5 oz (110 g).
(Fill-then-stop). Agency Approvals: CE.
Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 346
p347 7/24/06 4:34 PM Page 1

Series
DL7 Differential Pressure Data Logger
Also Measures and Logs Temperature, Self-Powered, 2-Channel, Compact
INPUT JACK FOR INTERFACE CABLE SECURITY
EYELET

MAGNETIC
STRIP
2-7/32
[56.36]

11/32
1/2 2-1/2 [8.730]
[12.70] [62.29]
TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Monitor and Record low differential pressures and temperature with the SPECIFICATIONS Sampling Methods: Continuous (first-
Model DL7 Differential Pressure Data Logger. Unit includes an on-board No. of Channels: Two; internal ther- in, first-out: not available from 40 ms to
thermistor for ambient temperature measurement. Sampling rates are user mistor, and a differential pressure sen- 8 sec.), stop when full (fill-then-stop), or
sor. delayed start.
selectable from 0.04 seconds to 8 hours with First-in first-out or Fill-then- Internal Thermistor Range: -40 to Sampling Rates: Selectable from 0.04
stop sampling options. Loggers can store up to 21,500 readings and operate 158°F (-40 to 70°C). seconds to 8 hours.
totally independently from any external power supply with built-in lithium Compensated Temp Range: 32 to Ambient Operating
battery. Use Model DL200 Windows® software (sold separately) to quickly 158°F (0 to 70°C). Temperature/RH: -40 to 158°F (-40 to
program the logger or upload data to a computer. The Series DL7 logger is Memory Size: 21,500 readings. 70°C), 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
ideal for monitoring air duct velocity, testing and balancing HVAC systems, Accuracy: ±0.05 w.c. Connection: Two 1/8˝ I.D. permanent
or verifying room pressure. Thermal Accuracy: ±0.5% FS. protective tubing.
MODELS Clock Accuracy: ±2 sec/day plus one Computer Requirements: IBM com-
sampling interval. patible 386 or above and Windows® 3.1
Model Resolution: ±0.01˝ w.c. or later with 2mB RAM and 2mB hard
Number Pressure Range
Internal Thermistor Resolution: drive disk space, one serial port.
DL70 ±0.5˝ w.c. (1.2 mbar) 0.7°F (0.4°C), R25 value equal to Service: Dry air and noncorrosive
DL71 ±1˝ w.c. (2.5 mbar) 10,000Ω [10kΩ @ 25°C (77°F)]. gases.
DL72 ±2.5˝ w.c. (6.2 mbar) Resolution: 12 bits (1 in 4096). Max. Pressure Rating: 5X rated pres-
Nonlinearity: ±0.05% FS (BFSL). sure.
DL75 ±5˝ w.c. (12.4 mbar) Hysteresis and Repeatability: Power Requirements: Built-in 3.6V
DL710 ±10˝ w.c.(24.9 mbar) ±0.05% FS. Lithium battery.
Accessories Drift: ±0.5% FS/yr. Power Consumption: 5-10 µA.
Housing Material: Polyphenylene
No. DL200, Windows® Software and Connecting Cable
Acquisition/

Ether and Polystyrene PPE & PS.

Recorders

Weight: 4 oz (110 g).

Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Agency Approvals: CE.
Data

Series
DL8 Process Data Logger
8-Channels, Compact, Self-Powered, Stores up to 32,768 Readings
Input Jack for Interface Cable Security
Eyelet Magnetic
Strip

2.95
[75]

3.375 0.45
Temperature 0.656
[9.5] [12]
Sensor [17]

Eliminate traditional paper chart recorders with the Series DL8 SPECIFICATIONS Ambient Operating Temperature:
Process Data Logger. This versatile, multi-channel data logger moni- No. of Channels: Eight; One for -50 to 160°F (-45 to 70°C), 0 to
internal thermistor and seven for 95% RH, non-condensing.
tors and stores up to 32,768 process readings for later download to an external analog inputs. Connection: Removable screw ter-
IBM compatible computer. Seven external input channels easily inter- Internal Thermistor Range: -40 to minal.
face with common transducer and transmitter outputs. Internal ther- 158°F (-40 to 70°C). Computer Requirements: IBM
mistor measures ambient temperature conditions. Programming is Memory Size: 32,768 readings. compatible 386 or above and
simple and easy with the DL200 Windows® software and connecting Accuracy: ±1% of full scale. Windows® 3.1 or later with 2 mB
cable (sold separately). The Series DL8 Process Data logger is ideal for Clock Accuracy: ±8 seconds per RAM and 2 mB hard drive disk
day plus one sampling interval. space, one serial port.
monitoring temperature, relative humidity, pressure, wind speed, cur- Power Requirements: Built-in
rent, voltage and power. Resolution: 8 bits (1 in 256).
Sampling Methods: Continuous 3.6V Lithium battery.
(first-in, first-out) or stop when full Power Consumption: 5-10 µA.
(fill-then-stop). Housing Materials: Polyphenylene
MODELS Sampling Rates: Selectable from 8 Ether and Polystryrene PPE & PS.
seconds to once every 5 days. Weight: 5 oz (110 g).
Model No. Input Type Agency Approvals: CE.
0 to 2.5 VDC, 0 to 5 VDC (2 ch.), 0 to 10 VDC,
DL8 Accessories
0 to 200 mV DC, and 0 to 25 mA DC (2 ch).
No. DL200, Windows® Software and cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DL81 All channels 0 to 25 mA.
Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

347 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p348 7/24/06 4:36 PM Page 1

Series
DL-A Logger Alarm Module
Visual and Audible Alarm, Manual Reset
INPUT JACK FOR
INTERFACE CABLE SECURITY
EYELET
MAGNETIC
STRIP
2.956

3.825 3.375
.744 .664 .450
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

Series DL-A Logger Alarm Module is designed to work with the SPECIFICATIONS
Series DL Data Loggers, providing visual and audible indication that an Output: Two sets of SPDT relay contacts.
alarm threshold has been triggered. The Alarm Module stays in alarm Supply Requirements: 110 VAC or 240 VAC depending on
state until the reset button has been pressed. The module is also equipped model (included).
with two sets of SPDT relay contacts for general purpose use. Series Case Material: Polyphenylene Ether & Polystyrene PPE & PS
DL-A can be used with a single data logger or a network of data loggers. plastic.
Weight: 3.75 oz (110 g).
DL-AA Logger Alarm Module, 110 VAC
DL-AE Logger Alarm Module, 240 VAC

Series
Mini Data Logger

Acquisition/
Recorders
MDL

Data
Single Channel, Temperature

1-19/64
(32.77) SERIES
MDL
MINI DATA 1-23/32
1-15/32 LOGGER (43.66)
(37.31)
5/64
(19.84)

SERIAL PORT PLUG

Easy-to-use Series MDL Mini Data Logger can record up to 244,800 SPECIFICATIONS
temperature readings and then download the information to a comput- Temperature Range: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C).
er. The Series MDL is designed with a precision calibrated internal tem- Memory Size: 244,800 data points.
perature sensor. Simply place the logger in the desired location and leave Accuracy: ±0.3°F (±0.2°C) between 32 to 158°F (0 to 70°C).
it to record. Sampling rate and sampling method is user configurable. Clock Accuracy: ±2 seconds per day.
Units include software and interface cable. Resolution: 8-bit.
Sampling Method: Continuous (first in, first out); stop when full.
Sampling Rate: User selectable rates from 8 seconds to 34 min-
utes.
MDL-1 Mini Data Logger Computer Requirements: IBM PC or 100% compatible running
MDL-1-IS Mini Data Logger, Intrinsically Safe Windows® 3.1, ‘95, ‘98, 2000, Me, NT or XP with at least 2MB
RAM, 2MB of hard drive disk space and one free serial port.
Power Requirements: Internal battery 5 yr. approximate life.
Housing: Polyurethane.
Mounting: Magnetic backing.
Weight: 1.23 oz (35g).

Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 348
p349 7/24/06 4:37 PM Page 1

Series
LCR10 Circular Chart Recorder
Single Pen, Clockwise or Counter-clockwise Rotation

11-29/32
12-5/8
[302.41]
14 [320.68]
[355.60]
3-35/64
[90.10]
12-5/8
13-3/16 [320.68]
[334.95]
14
[355.60]

The Series LCR10 Circular Chart Recorder offers a wide range SPECIFICATIONS
of features in an easy to use package. The large 10 in (254 mm) Ranges: Thermocouple: Type Ambient Operating
Circular chart allows easy reading of your data. Available in clockwise J, K, T, R, S, B. RTD: 100 Ohm Temperature/RH: 32 to 140°F
and counter clockwise rotation, the LCR10 is compatible with Platinum DIN Curve (0.00385 (0 to 60°C); 0-90% RH
Honeywell and Partlow circular charts. The LCR10 can be easily pro- Ohms per ohm per degree C). (non-condensing).
grammed for any of six different thermocouple types, 100 ohm plat- Process: 0 to 5 VDC, 250 Ohms Power Requirements: 110/220
inum DIN RTD’s, or process inputs (0 to 5 VDC or 4 to 20 mA). Inputs impedance, 4 to 20 mA across VAC ±10%; Battery Backup: 9 V
may be scaled to a minimum of 100 units (or degrees) to a maximum 250 Ohms. alkaline.
of the sensor scale or -1999 to +9999. Chart Size: 10˝ (254 mm). Power Consumption: 15 VA
Accuracy: ±0.5% of span maximum.
(100 division span). Housing Material: Fire retardant
MODELS Output Relay: Form C (DPDT), Polyphenylene Ether and
1A @ 240 VAC resistive. Polystyrene PPE & PS w/ acrylic
Model Number Rotation Output Chart Speed: Programmable 4, window.
LCR10-101 Counter Clockwise No 8, 12, 24, 48, 72, 168 hour rota- Mounting: ±20 degrees of verti-
LCR10-111 Counter Clockwise Yes tion (168 hours=7 days). cal, ±10 degrees of horizontal.
Acquisition/

LCR10-201 Clockwise No Weight: 7 lb (3.2 kg).

Recorders

LCR10-211 Clockwise Yes

Data

Series
LCR20 Dual Pen Circular Chart Recorder
Dual Pen, Adjustable Rotation Speeds, Selectable Recording Times

11-29/32
12-5/8
[302.41]
14 [320.68]
[355.60]
3-35/64
[90.10]
12-5/8
13-3/16 [320.68]
[334.95]
14
[355.60]

The LCR20 Dual Pen Circular Chart Recorder offers a wide SPECIFICATIONS Output Relay: Form C (DPDT), 1A
range of features in an easy to use package. The large 10 in (254 mm) Ranges Input 1: Thermocouple: @ 240 VAC resistive.
Type J, K, T, R, S, B. RTD: 100 Chart Speed: Programmable 4, 8,
circular chart allows easy reading of your data. Available in clockwise Ohm Platinum DIN Curve (0.00385 12, 24, 48, 72, 168 hour rotation
and counter-clockwise rotation, the LCR20 is compatible with ohms per ohm per degree C). (168 hours=7 days).
Honeywell and Partlow circular charts. The LCR20 has one pen input Process: 0 to 5 VDC, 250 Ohms Ambient Operating
that can be easily programmed for any of six different thermocouple impedance, 4 to 20 mA across 250 Temperature/RH: 32 to 140°F (0 to
Ohms. 60°C); 0-90% RH (non-condensing).
types, 100 ohm platinum DIN RTD’s, or process inputs (0 to 5 VDC or Ranges Input 2: Thermocouple: Power Requirements: 110/220
4 to 20 mA). Inputs may be scaled to a minimum of 100 units (or Type J, K, T, R, S, B. RTD: 100 VAC ±10%; Battery Backup: 9 V
degrees) to a maximum of the sensor scale or -1999 to +9999. Ohm Platinum DIN Curve (0.00385 alkaline.
ohms per ohm per degree C). Power Consumption: 15 VA maxi-
Process: 0 to 5 VDC, 250 Ohms mum.
MODELS impedance, 4 to 20 mA across 250 Housing Material: Fire retardant
Ohms. Polyphenylene Ether and
Model Number Rotation Output Chart Size: 10˝ (254 mm). Polystyrene PPE & PS w/ acrylic
LCR20-101 Counter Clockwise No Accuracy: ±0.5% of span window.
LCR20-111 Counter Clockwise Yes (100 division span). Mounting: ±20 degrees of vertical,
LCR20-201 Clockwise No ±10 degrees of horizontal.
Weight: 7 lb (3.2 kg).
LCR20-211 Clockwise Yes

349 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p350 7/24/06 4:38 PM Page 1

Series
1200 Minigraph Recorders
Temperature and Process Inputs
3/16 X 5/16 [4.76 X 7.94]
MOUNTING SLOTS

5-5/8
[142.88]
6-3/8
[161.93]
6-7/8
[174.63]

11/16 2-1/4 13/16

[11.48] [57.15] 5/8 [20.64]
1-5/16
[15.88] [33.35]
3-5/8
[92.08] 4-13/32
[111.92]

Minigraph Recorders combine compact size, durability, accuracy and low cost SPECIFICATIONS
for an exceptional value. Units are widely used in applications ranging from com-
mercial, industrial, and process to laboratory, field, marine, aerospace and more. Pen Response Speed: 1 second full scale. Stylus strikes chart once in two
Series 1200 Minigraph Recorders use a unique stylus which records on special seconds. Dot density depends on chart speed.
pressure sensitive paper. No messy ink pens, reservoirs or ink cartridges are Temperature Limits: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
used, eliminating maintenance problems and data loss caused by dry pens. Accuracy: ±2% of span for DC and temperature inputs; ±3% of span for AC inputs.
Stock temperature recorders come complete with 6" long x 3/16" dia. K type ther- Power Supply: Standard: 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 3W nominal. Optional: 240 VAC, 60 Hz,
mocouple protected by a 304 SS sheath with 8 ft. fiberglass insulated cable. They 3W nominal or 12 VDC, 20 mA nominal.
will record a full 31 days of information on a single 62 ft. x 2-9/16" wide paper roll. Chart Size: 2-9/16 in. wide x 62 ft. Iong, 2-1/8 in. active width (65 mm wide x 19 m
Stock units operate from a 120 VAC power source; special units are available for long, 54 mm active width).
240 VAC or 12 VDC.
Housing Size: 3-5/8 in. W x 5-5/8 in. H x 4-5/8 in. D. (92 mm W x 143 mm H x 111
mm D).
MODELS Weight: 3-1/2 Ib (1.6 kg).
Model Number Range Input Type
CHARTS (Packed 6 per box)
1201-11-09-04 0-100 mV DC Voltage
Parts No. Major/Minor Division
1201-12-09-04 0-1V DC Voltage
1201-20-09-04 4-20 mA DC Current MG651-691630 8/40
1201-21-09-04 4-20 mA 0-14 PH MG651-691760 10/50
1202-05-09-04 0-200°F Type K T/C MG651-691770 15/75
1202-12-09-04 0-1000°F Type K T/C MG651-691950 10/47

Acquisition/
1203-01-09-04 -20 to 130°F Thermistor MG651-691650 12/60

Recorders
1204-05-09-04 0-300 V AC Voltage MG651-220920 14/70

Data
Series
SC448
&
Strain Gage and Bridge Transmitters
SCL448 Selectable Fixed or Variable Excitation Supplies, Selectable Input/Output
ADAPTER BRACKET FOR SURFACE
0.886 MOUNTING CAT #35DINADPTR
[22.5]

3.880 [98.5]

2.950 1.400
[75] [35.5]

The SC448 and SCL448 Strain Gage and Bridge Isolators / Transmitters SPECIFICATIONS
allow low cost retransmission of any Strain Gage or Bridge circuit. Featuring Power Supply:
two fixed and two variable excitation supplies, they can isolate and retransmit SC448: 85 to 265 VDC/VAC 50 to 400 Hz.
to a wide variety of external devices with standard process signals. SCL448: 9.6 to 28 VDC/VAC 50 to 400 Hz.
The SC448 operates on line power (85 to 265 V DC or AC, 50 to 400 Hz) so no Power Consumption: 2VA.
extra power supply is needed. Isolation: 1800 VAC
The SCL448 operates on low power (9.6 to 28 V DC or AC, 50 to 400 Hz) for Ambient Temperature Range:
Operating: 32 to 131°F (0 to 55°C)
systems that work exclusively at low voltages. Storage: -40 to 176°F (-40 to 80°C)
Humidity Conditions (non-condensing): 0 to 90% up to 40°C, 10 to 50% at 55°C.
Linearity: 0.1% of span.
INPUT RANGES OUTPUT RANGES Drift: ±0.02% per °C typical, ±0.05% maximum.
Response Time: 2mS, 90% step change.
Span Span Range Range Range Input: ±10 mV to ±200 mV, direct or reverse acting.
Range (zero based) (bi-polar) (0-based) (0+20%) (bi-polar) Input Impedance: >10 Megohms.
10mV 0 to 10 -5 to +5 0 to 1V 0.2 to 1 -1 to +1 Zero Adjustment: 50% of full scale (-25% to +25%).
20mV 0 to 20 -10 to +10 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 -5 to +5 Span Adjustment: 60% of full scale (-50% to +10%).
Output Ranges: 0 to 1V, 0.2 to 1V, 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 2 to 10V, 0 to 1 mA,
50mV 0 to 50 -25 to +25 0 to 10V 2 to 10 -10 to +10
0.2 to 1 mA, 0 to 5 mA, 1 to 5 mA, 0 to 10 mA, 2 to 10 mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA.
100mV 0 to 100 -50 to +50 0 to 1mA 0.2 to 1 -1 to +1 Current Output Compliance: 12V.
200mV 0 to 200 -100 to +100 0 to 5mA 1 to 5 -5 to +5 Maximum Current Output Load: 600 ohms.
0 to 20mA 4 to 20 -20 to +20 Maximum Voltage Output Current (Minimum Voltage Output Load): 20 mA (500
ohms).
Weight: 4.5 oz (128 g).
SC448 Strain Gage/Bridge Transmitter
SCL448 Strain Gage/Bridge Transmitter, low voltage

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 350
p351 7/24/06 4:39 PM Page 1

Series
Loop Alarms Process/Alarm Switch
™
1090

Accepts Inputs from Voltage and Current

SPECIFICATIONS
Isolation: 1500 Volts RMS. Input Impedance: Voltage
between input, outputs and power. input=1 megohm, Current input=10
Power Supply: 85-265 VDC/VAC, ohms.
50-400 Hz. Relay Output: SPDT, one set per
Setpoints: Adjustable from 0- setpoint, 5A @ 250 VAC resistive.
100% of span. Latch Circuit Reset: Automatic at
Deadband: Adjustable from 0.25- power up. Manual with reset switch.
100% of span. Indicators: One dual color LED
Drift: ±0.02% /°C typical, ±0.05% per setpoint; red = On, green = Off.
/°C maximum.
Ambient Operating Temperature:
32 to 131°F (0 to 55°C) non-
condensing.

Model 1090 Input Type and Ranges

VoItage Inputs Current Inputs
Loop Alarms™ Process/Alarm Switch accept inputs from process devices. O to 10 mV O to 500 mV O to 1 mA O to 20 mA
SPDT relay outputs can be set for latching or non-latching, direct or reverse ac- O to 50 mV O to 1V O to 5 mA O to 50 mA
O to100 mV O to 5V O to10 mA O to 100 mA
tion and high or low function. Output behavior is easily programmable via 0 to 200 mV 0 to 10V
switches. Mount in standard 11-pin sockets.
Model 1090 Current & Voltage Loop AlarmTM Switches
Dimensions: Including socket pins, 23⁄8" W x 37⁄16" H x 13⁄4" D (60.3 W x 87.3
H x 44.4 D mm) ACCESSORY
Model 481-0164 DIN Rail Socket Adapter
Acquisition/
Recorders

Series
SC1090 Process/Alarm Switch Module
Data

&
SCL1090 Two Form C (SPDT) Switches, Small Size, Mounts Easily on 35 mm DIN Rail
0.886" All dimensions in inches (millimeters)
7 8 9
(22.5) DIN EN 50022-35
(not supplied)
10 11 12
290-2887
ALARM A DIR
NON LATCHING
LATCHING

MODE

Adaptor
ZERO +20%
ZERO BASED
BIPOLAR
UNIPOLAR
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
MODE

REV

LO
HI

3.88" Bracket
10V
5V
1V/100mA
0.5V/50mA
200mV/20mA
100mV/10mA
50mV/5mA
10mV/1mA

1 2 3 4
RANGE

1 2 3 4

(98.5) For Surface

ON

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1.40"
OUTPUT

2.95" Mounting
INPUT
ON
1 2 3 4

SW2

A
RESET

DB
(75) (35.3) (Optional)
SW1
SW4

ALARM B DIR

MODE

KIT#:
SINGLE
APPLICABLE
NOT
BLANK =

DUAL
REV

LO
HI
= OFF
= ON
KEY

35DINADPTR
5 6 7 8

3.88"
(98.5)

The Series SC1090 Thermocouple Limit/Alarm Switch Modules SPECIFICATIONS

are on-off or limit switches with selectable process signal. Input type, Input: 4 to 20 mA, 10 to 50 mA, 0 Input Impedance: (1090) Voltage
scale range, output action, and output type are all selectable by the user to 20 mA, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 mV. input = 1 megohms, Current input
Power Supply: (SC units) 85 to = 10 ohms.
in the field. All selections are made through easily accessible switches 265 VDC/VAC 50 to 400 Hz (12-24 Sensor Burnout Protection:
without the need to open the product. Each unit has two form C (SPDT) VDC, VAC 50-400 Hz for Low Selectable.
relays which can operate independently, or be logically connected to Voltage Option, SCL units). Relay Output: Form C, SPDT, one
operate as a DPDT output. A two color LED indicator indicates the sta- Isolation: 1500V rms between per set point, 5A @ 250 VAC,
tus of each output relay. outputs, input, and power. resistive.
These units mount easily on a standard 35 mm DIN rail. Low Voltage Set Points: Adjustable 0 to 100% Latch Circuit Reset: Automatic at
(SCL XXXX) units are also available. of span. power up. Manual with reset
Deadband: Adjustable 0.25% to switch on front of module.
100% of span. Indicators: One dual color LED
Drift: ±0.02%/˚C typical ±0.05%/˚C per set point. Red = relay on,
MODELS maximum. green = relay off.
Model Number Power Supply Ambient Temperature Range: Wiring Terminals: Screw driven
(operating) 32 to 131˚F (0 to 55˚C). compression type.
SC1090 85 to 265 VDC/VAC (storage) -40 to 176˚F (-40 to
SCL1090* 12 to 24 VDC/VAC 80˚C).
* Low Voltage Supply

351 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p352 7/24/06 4:41 PM Page 1

Series
SC4130
SC4151
Iso Verter® II Signal Conditioning Modules
SC4380 Accepts Virtually All Standard Process Signals
ADAPTER BRACKET FOR SURFACE
0.886 MOUNTING CAT #1007-35DINADPTR
[22.5]

2.950 1.400
[75] [35.5]

3.880 [98.5]

Linearized and isolated RTD and Thermocouple transmitters SPECIFICATIONS

are part of the Series SC4000 Iso Verter® II Signal Conditioning Mod- Isolation: 1500 VAC RMS. Linearity: 0.1% of full scale.
ules. These modules completely isolate the input from the output and Drift: ±0.02%/°C typical, ±0.05%/ °C maximum.
Power Supply: SC: 85 to 265 VDC/VAC 50 to 400 Hz;
from ground. Compatible with industry standard 35 mm DIN Rail SCL: 12 to 24 VDC/VAC 50 to 400 Hz.
mount transmitters and isolators, these modules are easily applied in Output Loads: Current: 600 ohms maximum Voltage: 500 ohms
new or existing installations. minimum (20 mA maximum).
The SC4380 Process Signal Converter/Isolator accepts virtually Input Characteristics: SC4380: Voltage: 1 megohms impedance,
all standard process signals as an input, and isolates and retransmits Current: 10 ohms; SC4151: RTD Search current
< 500 µA; SC4130: 3 megohms impedance.
the signal in either the same units or virtually any other standard Case Size: 0.866˝ W (22.5 mm) x 2.950˝ H (75.0 mm)
process signal. The SC4380 can be field programmed for reverse or di- 3 3.880˝ D (98.5 mm).
rect action and can receive and transmit single sided or bipolar* sig- Mounting: Mounts on industry standard 35 mm DIN Rail
nals. Low Voltage units (SCL) are also available. (DIN EN50022-35).
The SC4151 RTD Transmitters each offer a fixed scale range input
MODELS
(selected when ordered) and a linearized, isolated, field selectable 4 to SC4151 & SCL4151
20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output. Output is selected by simple switch set-
Model SC4151 Range Codes Model SCL4151 Range Codes

Data
tings. Low Voltage units (SCL) are also available.
The SC4130 Thermocouple Transmitter offers a fixed scale range A = DIN, -100 to 200°C A = DIN, -100 to 200°C
input (selected when ordered) and a linearized, isolated, field selec- B = DIN, 0 to 100°C B = DIN, 0 to 100°C
table 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output. Output is selected by simple C = DIN, 0 to 150°C C = DIN, 0 to 150°C
switch settings. D = DIN, 0 to 200°F D = DIN, 0 to 200°F
Low Voltage units (SCL) are also available. E = DIN, 0 to 200°C E = DIN, 0 to 200°C
*Note: The term “bipolar” refers to an input or output that crosses zero volts. Certain de- F = DIN, 0 to 400°F F = DIN, 0 to 400°F
vices have ranges that run from minus to plus voltages (eg. -1 to +5 VDC, -10 to +10 VDC, G = DIN, 0 to 250°C G = DIN, 0 to 250°C
etc.). The SC4380 Iso Verter® II can be set up to accept a bipolar signal input or provide a
bipolar output. H = DIN, 0 to 500°F H = DIN, 0 to 500°F
J = DIN, 0 to 500°C J = DIN, 0 to 500°C
To Order Use Range Code as Suffix: K = DIN, 0 to 1000°F K = DIN, 0 to 1000°F

MODELS
SC4130 & SCL4130 MODELS
SC4380 & SCL4380 OPERATING RANGES
Model SC4130 Range Codes Model SCL4130 Range Codes Inputs Outputs
A = J, -100 to 200°C A = J, -100 to 200°C Current Voltage Current Voltage
C = J, 0 to 100°C C = J, 0 to 100°C 0 to 5 mA 0 to 100 mV 0 to 1 mA 0 to 1 V
D = J, 0 to 500°F D = J, 0 to 500°F 0 to 10 mA 0 to 200 mV 0 to 5 mA 0 to 5 V
E = J, 0 to 250°C E = J, 0 to 250°C
0 to 10 mA 0 to 500 mV 0 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V
F = J, 0 to 750°C F = J, 0 to 750°C
0 to 20 mA 0 to 1 V 1 to 5 mA 1 to 5 V
G = J, 0 to 1000°F G = J, 0 to 1000°F
H = K, -150 to 350°F H = K, -150 to 350°F 0 to 50 mA 0 to 5 V 4 to 20 mA 2 to 10 V
J = K, -100 to 200°C J = K, -100 to 200°C 0 to 100 mA 0 to 10 V
K = K, 0 to 500°F K = K, 0 to 500°F 1 to 5 mA 1 to 5 V
L = K, 0 to 250°C L = K, 0 to 250°C 4 to 20 mA 2 to 10 V
M = K, 0 to 1000°F M = K, 0 to 1000°F 10 to 50 mA
N = K, 0 to 500°C N = K, 0 to 500°C
P = K, 0 to 2000°F P = K, 0 to 2000°F
R = K, 0 to 1000°C R = K, 0 to 1000°C All SC4130 & SCL4130* Thermocouple Transmitters
S = T, -300 to 250°F S = T, -300 to 250°F All SC4151 & SCL4151* RTD Transmitters
T = T, -200 to 200°C T = T, -200 to 200°C All SC4380 & SCL4380 Iso Verter® II ProcessSignal Converter/
Isolators
*SCL models are low voltage units.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 352
p353 7/24/06 4:44 PM Page 1

Model
SCU Process Signal Converter/lsolator
Converts Process Signal, Isolates to 1500 V RMS ®

DIN EN 50022-35 (NOT SUPPLIED) 1-49/64

[45]

1-13/32 2-61/64
[35.5] [75]

4-21/64
[110]

The Model SCU is a universal analog input, loop powered transmit- SPECIFICATIONS Drift: ±0.1% (100 ppm) per ˚C typical,
Inputs ±0.2% (200 ppm) per ˚C maximum.
ter for isolation, display and retransmission of all common process Operating Temperature Range: -4 to
Thermocouple: J, K, T, E, R, S, B, N.
sources. The input allows selection of one of eight thermocouple types, RTD: 100 Ω Platinum DIN, 1000 Ω 131˚F (-20 to 55˚C).
three RTD types and process inputs, scalable in engineering units from Platinum DIN, 120 Ω Nickel. Power Supply Requirements: (Load
Voltage: 0 to 10 VDC. resistance x .020): +10 VDC minimum,
-19999 to +19999, with adjustable decimal points. Featuring 1500 V iso- Current: 0 to 20 mADC. 45 VDC maximum (maximum load 2250
lation between input and output, the SCU also offers two independent Input Characteristics Ω).
Thermocouple Input Impedance: Process Output: 4 to 20 mA DC.
alarms for additional application flexibility. 3 MΩ minimum. Input Isolation: 1500 V.
RTD Search Current: 200 mA. Alarm Outputs: Open collector, 24
Voltage Input Impedance: 5000 Ω. VDC @ 24 mA maximum, non-isolated.
Current Input Load: 10 Ω. Mounting: Industry standard 35mm DIN
INPUT RANGES Input Resolution rail, DIN EN50022-35. Surface mount
High gain (Type T, R, S, B, adaptor available.
Input
Type Range ˚F Range ˚C Input Type Range ˚F Range ˚C thermcouples): 1.0 µ V per count. Display: 4-1/2˝ digit LCD, 0.3˝ high (7.62
Low Gain (All other inputs): 2.1 µ V mm) with descriptors for ˚C, ˚F, mV, V,
Type J -100 to +1600 -73 to +871 Type B +75 to +3308 +24 to +1820 per count. mA, %, Alarm 1, Alarm 2.
Type K -200 to +2500 -129 to +1371Type N -100 to +2372 -73 to +1300 Input/Output Accuracy: ±0.1% of full Weight: 8 oz (230 g).
Type T -350 to +750 -212 to +398 100 Ohm Plat. 0.00385 DIN Curve -328 to 1607 -200 to +875 span of selected input.
Type E -100 to +1800 -73 to +982 120 Ohm Nick. 0.00628 US Ind. -112 to +608 -80 to +320
Curve
Acquisition/

Type R 0 to 3200 -17 to +1760 1000 Ohm Plat. 0.00385 Nist -328 to +1607 -200 to +875
Recorders

Curve Model SCU Loop Powered Isolator and Converter

Data

Type S 0 to 3200 -17 to +1760 Current/Voltage Scalable units from -19999 to +19999

Model
4380 Process Signal Converter/lsolator ®

Converts Process Signal, Isolates to 1500 V RMS

RANGES AVAILABLE (Field Selectable)
Inputs Outputs
Current Voltage Current Voltage
0-5 mA 0-100 mA 0-100 mV 0-5 V 0-1 mA 0-1 V
0-10 mA 1-5 mA 0-200 mV 0-10 V 0-5 mA 0-5 V
0-20 mA 4-20 mA 0-500 mV 1-5 V 0-20 mA 0-10 V
0-50 mA 10-50 mA 0-1 V 2-10 V 1-5 mA 1-5 V
4-20 mA 2-10 V

SPECIFICATIONS
Isolation: 1500 VAC.
Linearity: 0.1% of full span.
Drift: ±0.02%/°C typical; ±0.05%/°C maximum.
Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 to 131°F (0 to 55°C).
The Iso Verter® II Isolator/Converter protects electronic circuits
Output Loads: Current: 600 ohms maximum.
by completely isolating the input and output signals from each Voltage: 500 ohms minimum (20 mA maximum).
other and from ground. Both input and output ranges are fully Input Impedance: Current: 10 ohms, Voltage: 1 megohm.
field selectable with easy to adjust switches. With bipolar input se- Power Supply: 85-265 VDC/VAC, 50-400 Hz.
lection and zero suppression, nearly any standard input/output Case Size: (Including socket pins)
range combination is possible. Zero and span adjustments are eas- 23⁄8" W x 37⁄16" H x 13⁄4" D
ily accessible on top of housing. Units plug into universally avail- 60.3 mm W x 87.3 mm H x 44.4 mm D
Height is 27⁄8" (73 mm) above socket.
able octal sockets for quick, easy installation. Industry standard Mounting: Industry standard octal socket.
“pin-out” wiring configuration allows direct replacement of most
competitive models. Order optional 481-0159 socket for new instal- Model 4380 Process Signal Converter/Isolator
lations.
ACCESSORY
Model 481-0159 DIN Rail Socket Adapter

353 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p354 7/24/06 4:45 PM Page 1

Series
MSP Isolating Transmitters ®

Adds Single Channel Analog in or out to a PLC, Field Re-Configure Signal Range
Enclosure
+ OUT PLC Cover

+ In MSP-C-IN -VDC
88
Green
Indicator
68 (3.5)
(2.7) Red
- In +VDC
Indicator
Terminal Set
Screw (6)

12
(0.50)

The MSP family of analog I/O blocks offers the freedom to use any Output Analog Signal
analog sensor with many models of PLC. Each MSP block provides a The numerical value representing a desired analog output signal is
single analog input (or output) interface between the PLC and the placed into a PLC working register of choice. This value is transmitted
analog world. Communications between the MSP unit and the PLC is serially (one bit at a time) at 24VDC signal levels to the MSP through
through a patented protocol that provides truly "open" architecture the PLC’s discrete I/O port. The MSP scales, linearizes and propor-
for analog signals to be processed digitally. tionally converts the digital signal to the voltage or current output sig-
The MSP is factory preconfigured to support specific analog input or nal. The signal is then sent to the isolated output channel for use by a
output signals, depending on the model. Optionally, the MSP signal analog actuator connected at the output channel.
range can be reconfigured in the field using the windows based con-
figuration software model SCC-CC-A1 (sold separately).
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Analog Signal Isolation: 1500 VAC continuous (3-way, 2-way for excita-
The analog input signal is isolated, filtered, amplified, scaled and/or
linearized by the MSP micro-processor and converted to a 16-bt, bina- tion).
ry weighted, digital word which is transmitted serially (one bit at a Inputs: See Range Chart.

Acquisition/
time) at 24VDC signal levels to the PLC’s discrete I/O port. At the

Recorders
PLC, each binary-weighted bit sent to the discrete input is temporar- Input Impedance: 1G ohm (mV/TC), 55K ohm (V),

Data
ily stored until all 16 bits have been received. The digital word is then
reassembled and its value (proportional to the analog signal) is placed 82 ohm (C).
in a working register of choice for decision making by the PLC pro- Output Impedance: >10M ohm (C), -0 ohm (V).
gram.
Power Requirements: 15-32 VDC @ 25 mA - 45 mA.
ACCESSORIES Accuracy: 0.05% F.S.
SCC-4W Power Supply 85 - 265 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
SCC-CC-A1 Windows® Software and Cable CJC Accuracy: 0.2°C over 15 to 55°C (ambient); 1.0°C
over -40 to 14°C; .3°C over 56 to 75°C.
Drift: 0.01% F.S. per °C (offset + gain).
MODELS
Dimensions: 88 mm (H) x 68 mm (D) x 12 mm.
Part Number Parameter Signal Direction
MSP-TC-IN Thermocouple To PLC Ambient Operating Temperature: -40 to 167°F
MSP-RTD-IN RTD To PLC (-40 to 75°C).
MSP-V-IN Voltage To PLC
Storage Temperature: -49 to 185°F (-45 to +85°C).
MSP-V-OUT Voltage From PLC
MSP-C-IN Current To PLC Humidity Conditions: 95% non-condensing.
MSP-C-OUT Current From PLC Mounting: DIN rail (32 mm-G and 35 mm-H).
MSP-POT-IN Potentiometer To PLC
Connections: Screw terminals for 14-22 AWG.
Weight: 1.4 oz (40 g).
INPUT/OUTPUT RANGES
INPUT TYPE RANGE °F RANGE °C
Agency Approvals: UL, cUL, CSA, CE.
Type J Thermocouple -328 to 32° & 32 to 1400° -200 to 0° & 0 to 760°
Type K Thermocouple -328 to 32° & 32 to 2498° -200 to 0° & 0 to 1370°
Type T Thermocouple -328 to 32° & -256 to 752° -200 to 0 & -160 to 400° Windows® is a regisered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Type E Thermocouple -328 to 32° & -148 to 1832 -200 to 0 & -160 to 400°
Type R Thermocouple 32 to 3214° 0 to 1768
Type S Thermocouple 32 to 3214° 0 to 1768
Type B Thermocouple 32 to 3322° 0 to1832
Type N Thermocouple -328 to 32° & 32 to 2373° -200 to 0° & 0 to 1300°
100 Ohm Plt. 0.00385 DIN RTD -328 to 1562° -200 to +850°
120 Ohm Nickel 0.00628 US RTD -112 to +392° -80 to +200
1000 Ohm Plt. O.00385 DIN RTD -328 to +1562 -200 to +850
Potentiometer 0 to 500Ω min.; 0 to 100KΩ max.
Current/Voltage 0-20 mADC/ 0 to 10 VDC

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 354
p355 7/24/06 4:45 PM Page 1

Series
SCC Signal Conditioners ®
®

±0.05% Accuracy, 1500 VAC Isolation, 3-Way

3.500
[88.90]

2.094
[53.18]

.500
[12.70]

The Series SCC Signal Conditioners provide maximum accuracy SPECIFICATIONS Cold Junction
with minimal cost. Built-in microprocessor digitally scales, amplifies, lin- Compensation: ±0.2˚C (-15 to
earizes and isolates thermocouple, RTD, current, voltage, frequency or Isolation: 1500 VAC. 3-way:
C, V, TC; 2-way: RTD, POT, 55 ˚C) for all T/C.
potentiometer analog input signals. Units offer 16-bit input resolution
with 0.05% full scale accuracy. Eliminate ground loops with 1500VAC iso- FRQ, LI. Resolution: 16-bit (input); 13-
lation. Two LEDs, one red and one green, located on the front face of the Input Protection: 220 VAC bit (output).
enclosure provide visual indication of operation. Additional features include continuous. Drift: 0.01% Full Scale per ˚C.
short circuit, reverse power protection, digital calibration and cold junc- Input Impedance: 1GΩ Ambient Operating
tion compensation. Temperature: Operating: -40
(mV/TC); >55KΩ (Voltage); 82Ω
Installation is a snap with the DIN rail mountable enclosure. Units are to 167˚F (-40 to 75˚C).
(Current).
factory set to support a specific analog input and output, however, can be
easily reconfigured to suit your application with the user-friendly Windows® Excitation: 150µA (RTD), Storage Temperature: -49 to
Configuration software and cable (sold separately). 1.25V (POT). 185˚F (-45 to 85˚C); 0-95% RH,
Also available is the SCC-4W DIN Rail Mount power supply and SCC-L1 Output Impedance: >10MΩ non-condensing.
Loop Isolator. Model SCC-4W is designed specifically to provide 24 VDC (Current); ~ 0Ω (Voltage). Mounting: DIN rail (32 mm-G
Acquisition/

power for the SCC modules. Model SCC-L1 accepts a 4 to 20 mA signal and 35 mm-H).
Recorders

Output Load: ≤ 600Ω

and provides an isolated 4 to 20 mA signal output.
(Current); ≥ 4KΩ (±10 Volts); ≥ Connections: Socketed screw
Data

2KΩ (± 5 Volts). terminals for 14-22 AWG.

Power Requirements: 15-32 Response Time: 150 ms @
All Series SCC Single Channel Conditioners VDC @ 25-45 mA. 60 Hz, typical.
Over Voltage: 240 Vrms con- Housing Material: Polyamide.
ACCESSORIES
tinuous. Weight: 1.4 oz (40 g).
SCC-L1 Loop Isolator 4 to 20 mA input and output
Accuracy: 0.05% Full Scale Agency Approvals: CE, CSA,
SCC-4W Power Supply 85 - 265 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
(includes linearity, repeatability FM, cUL, UL.
SCC-CC-A1 Windows® Software and Cable
and calibration errors).
* Units can be reconfigured from their factory (default) settings with the SCC-CC-A1
Windows® Software (sold separately).

MODELS Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Model Input Types and Ranges Default Output Types and Ranges Default Output
Number Input Range Range
0 to 10 mA, 0 to 20 mA,
SCC-C/C 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA, ±10 mA, ±20 mA 4-20 mA
SCC-C/V 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, ±5 V or ±10V 0 to 10V
0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
0 to 5V, 1 to 5V, ±5V, ±1.5V, 0 to 1.5 V, 0 to 1.25V,
SCC-V/C 0-10V
±1.25V, ±300mV, 0 to 300 mV, ±10mV,
SCC-V/V 0 to 10 mV, 0 to 50 mV, and ±50mV 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 2 to 10V 0 to 10V

-148 to 1832˚F, -328 to 32˚F (Type E T/C),

SCC-TC/C 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
32 to 1400˚F, -328 to 32˚F (Type J T/C), Type J
-328 to 32˚, 32 to 2372˚F (Type N T/C), -32 to 1400˚F
32 to 2498˚F, -328 to 32˚F (Type K T/C),
SCC-TC/V 0 to 5V or 0 to 10V 0 to 10V
-256 to 752˚F, 32 to 752˚F (Type T T/C)

SCC-RTD/C -328 to 1562˚F (Pt100Ω), 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA

Pt100
-148 to 500˚F (Ni120Ω), -328 to 1562˚F
SCC-RTD/V -148 to 500˚F (Cu10Ω) 0 to 5V or 0 to 10V 0 to 10V
0 to 500Ω
SCC-POT/C 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
0 to 500Ω (min.) or 0 to 100KΩ (max.) 0 to 10KΩ
SCC-POT/V ±5V, ±10V, 0 to 5V or 0 to 10V 1 to 5V 0 to 10V
SCC-FRQ/C 0 to 100 kHz at a magnitude of 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
0 to 50 mV, 0 to 500 mV, 0 to 5V, 0-10KHz (24 VDC)
SCC-FRQ/V 0 to 50V or 0 to 250V 0 to 5V or 0 to 10V 0 to 10V

355 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg356 7/25/06 9:10 AM Page 1

Process Meters/Indicators
Process Indicators and Meters are used to display pressure, flow, air Indicators pg 357-358
velocity, level or temperature measurements either in control rooms or

in remote panels. These devices are commonly found in applications

where the measuring point is hard to access, where multiple displays of

the process value are required, or when a blind transmitting device is

used. Our line of indicators and meters are offered with various options

such as weatherproof enclosures, relay alarm outputs, retransmission

Panel Meters pg 359-362
signals, and square root extraction

Table of Contents
Model A-705-20 Loop Powered Process Indicator . . . . . . . . .356
Series SI Smart Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Series LCI132 Process Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Series LCI208 4 Digit Panel Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Series LCI108 & LCI108J 4 Digit Panel Meter . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Loop/Battery Powered
Series LCI308 & LCI408 Panel Meter Indicators . . . . . . . . . . .360 Temperature Indicators pg 363-364
Series LCI508 & LCI608 Digital Panel Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Accessories for LCI Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Model PM706 Temperature Panel Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Series LPI Loop Powered Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Series BPI Battery Powered Temperature Indicator . . . . . . . .363
Series PP45 Temperature/Process Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364

Indicators
Process
Meters/
Model
A-705-20 Loop Powered Process Indicator
Economical, short depth (0.5" behind panel) unit is a 4-20 mA loop powered
process indicator with 0.6" LCD display. This bipolar 3-1/2 digit panel meter
fits standard 1/8 DIN cutout and includes adjustable scale (gain), offset and
decimal point selection for quick field calibration. Standard model supplied 0-
100.0% for 4-20 mA input.
SPECIFICATIONS
Display Range: 000 to ±1999.
Inputs: 4-20 mA or 10-50 mA.
Accuracy: ±1% of reading, ±1 digit.
Resolution: Selectable, 1.XXX, 1X.XX,1XX.X, 1XXX.
Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
Power Requirements: None required, powered by current source.
Temperature Coefficient:100 ppm /°C typical.
Polarity: If negative input, minus sign at left.
Panel Cutout: 3.55˝W x 1.72˝H (90.17 x 43.6 mm).
Dimensions: 1.9˝H x 4.130˝W x 1.250˝D (48 x 104.90 x 31.75 mm).
Weight: 2 oz (57 g).

A-705-20 Process Indicator

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 356
p357 7/25/06 9:11 AM Page 1

Series
SI Smart Indicator
Temperature or Process, Interchangeable Output Modules
2.688
[68.28]

1.750
[44.45]

INTERCHANGABLE
MODULE
.750
[19.05]

3.780 .430 5.500

[96.01] [10.922] [139.7]

Series SI Smart Indicator is fully programmable and accepts SPECIFICATIONS MODEL SI-23
all commonly used temperature or process inputs. Programming GENERAL Voltage Input Range: 0 to 1V,
is via the front panel keys following a logical menu structure which Input/Output Isolation: 500VAC 1 to 5V, 0 to10V.
can be set to “short” (default) for common usage features or “full” RMS (galvanically isolated). Current Input Range: 0 to 20
Display Range: -999 to 9999. mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 10 mA.
where the full range of programmable features are available. The Accuracy: ±0.05% full scale.
Output Impedance: 700Ω @
indicator can also be programmed via a PC using the RS485 24 VDC. Thermal Drift: Zero: 0.05µV/°F
Modbus® communication module. Password protection can be Power Supply: 90 to 253VAC ( 0.1µV/°C); Span: 50ppm/°F
enabled to prevent any unauthorized setting changes. 50/60 Hz. (100ppm/°C).
The Series SI features a 4-digit red LED with selectable resolu- Ambient Operating Temp.: Excitation: 24V ±5% @ 50 mA.
tion. The display can be set to indicate a fixed number of decimal -22 to 140°F (-30 to 60°C).
Filtering: Off, 2 seconds, 10 sec- DUAL RELAY MODULE
places or auto scale for maximum resolution. Optional inter- Contacts: Two changeover relays,
onds, or adaptive.
changeable modules for relay, 4 to 20 mA retransmission, or Time Constant (Filter Off): <1 common wiper.
Modbus® RS485 serial communication output are easily installed second (to 63% of final value). Electrical Rating: AC: 253V; DC:
without the need for dismantling or recalibration. Update Time: 250 msec 125V.
Model SI-13 Smart Indicator is designed to accept 2 or 3-wire maximum. Maximum Load: AC: 7A@250V;
Pt100Ω RTD or Types J, K, T, R, S, E, F, N, or custom thermo- Weight: 2 lb (0.9kg) DC: 7A@30V.
Maximum Power: AC: 1750VA;
couple inputs. Temperature measurements can be displayed in DC: 210W.
MODEL SI-13
selectable °F or °C. High/low scale burnout, input filtering or Thermocouple Input Range: Connections: 5-way tension
smoothing, and offset can be defined by the user. J: -328 to 2192°F (-200 to clamp connector.
Select Model SI-23 Smart Indicator for process signal input. The 1200°C); K: -328 to 2498°F
Indicators

indicator has an internal power supply to provide excitation to (-200 to 1370°C); T: -328 to 752°F 4 TO 20mA RETRANSMISSION
Process
Meters/

field transmitters. Parameters such as input type, range, engi- (-200 to 400°C); R and S: -14 to MODULE
3200°F (-10 to 1760°C); E: -328 to Ranges: 0 to 10 mA, 0 to 20 mA,
neering units, resolution, burnout condition, and filter time con- 4 to 20 mA (active or passive).
1832°F (-200 to 1000°C); F: -148
stant can be easily programmed. to 1112°F Isolation: 500VAC.
(-100 to 600°C); N: -292 to Accuracy: 0.07% full scale.
2372°F (-180 to 1300°C); Maximum Output Load: Active:
custom: ±9999. 1 K ohm; Passive: [(Vsupply-2)/20]
RTD Input Range: Pt100Ω 2 or K ohm.
Model SI-13 Smart Indicator for Temperature 3-wire: -328 to 1562°F Max. External Supply: 30V (pas-
Model SI-23 Smart Indicator for Process (-200 to 850°C). sive).
Accuracy: T/C: ±0.04% full range Connections: 5-way tension
input, ±0.04% rdg; RTD; ±0.01 full clamp connector.
range input, ±0.05%
Interchangeable Output Modules can quickly be connected to of rdg. RS485 MODBUS®
the Smart Indicator and are automatically recognized. Dual relay Thermal Drift: Zero: 0.05µV/°F COMMUNICATION MODULE
output module has two changeover relays with a common wiper. (0.1µV/°C), (RTD zero drift is Isolation: 500VAC.
Each relay can be set as high or low alarm independently. An iso- 0.008°F/°F); Span: 50ppm/°F Physical Layer: 4-wire or 2-wire
(100ppm/°C). half duplex RS485.
lated retransmission module provides 0 to 10 mA, 0 to 20 mA, or Baud Rate: 19,200 or 9,600.
Cold Junction Range: -40 to
4 to 20 mA output in active (source) or passive (sink) modes. The 185°F.(-40 to 85°C). Protocol: Modbus® RTU format.
output can be any portion of the display. The Modbus® serial com- Cold Junction Error: ±1°F. Maximum Fan Out: 32 Units.
munication module allows communication with a PC for configur- Cold Junction Tracking: Connections: 5-way tension
ing or monitoring. 0.05°F/°F (0.05°C/°C). clamp connector.
Excitation Current: 300µA to
550µA.
MODELS Maximum Lead Resistance: 50
Model No. Module Type ohms/leg.
Lead Resistance Effect:
SI-02P Dual Relay Output (2 per unit max.) 0.004°F/ohm (0.002°C/ohm).
SI-04P 4 to 20mA Retransmission (1 per unit max.)
SI-05P Modbus® Communication (1 per unit max.)
Modbus® is a registered trademark of Schnieder Automation.

357 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p358 7/25/06 9:13 AM Page 1

Series
LCI132 Process Indicator
1/32 DIN, Fully Programmable

43.5
(1.713)

70.0 11 48.0
(2.756) (0.433) (1.890)

21.0 24.0
(0.827) (0.945)

6.35 (0.25)
Maximum Panel Thickness

The LCI132 Series process indicators offer flexibility, and value SPECIFICATIONS
in a low cost, compact 1/32 DIN package. This family of indicators LCI132-0x
offers input availability for most types of process measurement. INPUT VOLTS (DC) AMPERES
Range: ±200V ±20V ±10V ±100mV ±20 mA
The LCI132 has a 7.62mm (0.3 inch) high display. The shallow depth of Resolution: 0.1V 0.01V 1 mV 0.1mV 0.01 mA
these full size panel meters allows installation in panels only 70mm
(2.76 inches) deep with room to spare. INPUT IMPEDANCE
Volts 1 Mohms.
Inputs are available for Process (0 to 10V, 4 to 20 mA), AC Volts, AC mV: 100 Mohms.
Amps, DC Volts, and DC Amps. mA: 12.1 ohms.

FEATURES LCI132-1x
• Large display INPUT VOLTS AMPERES
• Easy to Program Range AC: 600.0 100.0 5.000 1.000
• Inputs for most processes Range DC: -199.9 +600.0 ±100.0 -1.999 +5.000±1.000
• IP65 (NEMA 4X) Front Resolution 0.1 V 1 mA

Indicators
Process
Meters/
MODELS INPUT IMPEDANCE
Model Supply Volts: 3 Mohms (106).
Number Input Voltage Amp: 12 mohms (10-3).
LCI132-00 ± 100 VDC; ±20 VDC 120/240 VAC ALL ACCURACY at 23ºC ±5ºC
LCI132-01 ±10 VDC; ±200 VDC; ±20 mA DC 24/48 VAC
±100 VAC; 600 VAC; 5A (DC) 1A (AC) 100/600 VDC 1/5 A DC; 600V/5A AC: ±(0.2% reading + 3 digits).
LCI132-10 120/240 VAC 100 V / 1A AC: ±(0.4% reading + 4 digits).
-199.9 to +600 VDC;
±100 VDC -1.999 to 5A (DC) 24/48 VAC Temperature Coefficient: 100 ppm/ºC.
LCI132-11
± 1A (DC) Warm Up: 5 minutes.
POWER SUPPLY AND FUSES (DIN 41661) (Not supplied):
LCI132-x0:
85–265 VAC 50/60 Hz and 100-300 VDC: Fuse: 0.1A/ 250V.
Process Display LCI132-x1:
21-53 VAC 50/60Hz and 10.5-70 VDC: Fuse 0.5A/ 250V.
Power Consumption: 1.8W Max.
DISPLAY
Range: -1999 to 9999 (DC) 0 to 9999 (AC).
Program Keys Type: 4 red digits 10 mm.
Reading Rate: 4/s.
Overflow Indication: OVR.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Operating Temperature: -10 to 60ºC.
Storage Temperature: -25 TO85ºC.
Relative Humidity (non condensed): <95% @ 40ºC.
Panel Sealing: NEMA 4X (IP65).

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 358
p359 7/25/06 9:15 AM Page 1

Series
LCI208 4 Digit Panel Meter
High Accuracy, Peak and Valley Display, Tare Feature

The LCI208 Series 4 digit panel meter offer flexibility, and value in a low cost, SPECIFICATIONS
compact 1/8 DIN package. This family of indicators offers input availability for vir- Inputs: Process, temperature (T/C & RTD).
Input Impedance:
tually all types of process measurement. Process: Voltage, 1 MΩ; Current, 12.1Ω.
Current, 0.012 Ω for 5A, 0.06Ω for 1A.
Inputs are available for Process (0 to 10V, 4 to 20 mA), Electrical Variables) AC Display: 4 Red, 14 mm digits, programmable decimal point, 4 LEDs for control
Volts, AC Amps, DC Volts, DC Amps), Temperature (RTD & Thermocouple), and and 4 for output status.
Accuracy: ±0.1% of reading (except temperature); ±0.4% of reading for thermo-
Frequency. The process load cell, and frequency inputs have appropriate trans- couple; ±0.1% of reading for RTDs.
ducer excitation power supplies. Peak and Valley indication and a Tare function are Supply Voltage: 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz ±10%.
standard. Options include set point outputs (2 SPDT 8A mechanical relays), RS- Power Consumption: 3W max.
232/RS-485 computer communications, and 4 to 20 mA analog retransmission. Operating Temperature: 14 to 140°F (-10 to 60°C) / <95% @ 104°F (40°C) non-
condensing.
Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
MODELS Agency Approvals: CE.
Model No. Input ACCESSORIES
LCIA-01, Dual Relay Card. Two SPDT relays, 8A @ 240 VAC
LCI208-00 Process LCIA-02, Quad Relay Card. Four SPST relays, 0.2A @ 240 VAC
LCI208-10 Thermocouple (J, K, T) LCIA-03, Quad Transistor Output Card. Four NPN optically
coupled transistors, 50 mA @ 50 VDC max.
LCI208-30 RTD LCIA-04, Quad Transistor Output Card. Four PNP optically coupled
transistors, 50 mA @ 50 VDC max.
LCIA-06, Isolated Analog Retransmission Option Card.
LCIA-10, RS-232/RS-485 Serial Communications Option Card.

Series
LCI108
& 4 Digit Panel Meter
LCI108J 3-1/2 Digit Display, Self-Tune/Fuzzy Logic
Indicators
Process
Meters/

The LCI108 & LCI108J Series 3-1/2 digit panel meter offer flexibility, and SPECIFICATIONS
value in a low cost, compact 1/8 DIN package. This family of indicators offers input Inputs: Process, Thermocouple, RTD, VAC, VDC, A AC, A DC,
availability for virtually all types of process measurement. The LCI108 & LCI108J Frequency.
are identical except for the size of the display. The LCI108 has a 0.56 inch (14 mm) Input Impedance:
high display. The LCI108J (jumbo) has a 0.80 inch (20 mm) display for viewing from Process: Voltage, 1 MΩ; Current, 12.1Ω.
longer distances. Inputs are available for Process (0 to 10V, 4 to 20 mA), AC Volts, AC & DC Current: 0.012Ω for 5 A, 0.06Ω for 1 A.
AC Amps, DC Volts, DC Amps, Temperature (RTD), Temperature (Thermocouple), AC & DC Voltage: 3 MΩ for 600 V, 300 kΩ for 200 V, 30 kΩ for 20 V.
and Frequency. The process and frequency inputs have appropriate transducer exci- Display: 4 digit, 14 mm red for LCI108; 4 digit, 20 mm red for LCI108J;
tation power supplies, giving you everything you need in a compact package. Programmable decimal point with 2 LEDs for output status indication on
all units.
Accuracy: ±0.1% of reading (except T/C & RTD); ±0.4% of reading for
T/C; ±0.1% for RTD.
MODELS Supply Voltage: 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz ±10%.
Model No. Input Display
Power Consumption: 3 W max.
Operating Temperature: 14 to 140°F (-10 to 60°C) / <95% @ 104°F
LCI108-00 Process .56˝ (14 mm) H (40°C) non-condensing.
LCI108-10 T/C (J, K, T) .56˝ (14 mm) H
Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
LCI108-20 RTD .56˝ (14 mm) H
Agency Approvals: CE.
LCI108J-10 T/C (J, K, T) .80˝ (20 mm) H
LCI108J-20 RTD .80˝ (20 mm) H
ACCESORY
LCIA-01, Dual Relay Output Option Card

359 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p360 7/25/06 9:16 AM Page 1

Series
LCI308
&
Panel Meter Indicators
LCI408 1/8 DIN, High Accuracy, Peak & Valley Display
96 16 120
( 3.78) ( 0.63) ( 4.72) 7
(0 . 2 8 )
PROG

(1 . 7 3 )
(1 . 8 9 )
A 1
B 2

44
48
RUN TARE HOLD LIMIT MAX MIN DATA 3
PRG INP1 DSP1 INP2 DSP2 FLT STORE 4

TARE RESET LIMIT MAXIMUM DATA

TEACH ESC ENTER

(3 . 5 8 3 )
(3 . 7 8 )

91
96
The Series LCI308 and LCI408 panel meter indicators offer SPECIFICATIONS
flexibility and value in a standard 1/8 DIN package. This family of
indicators offers input availability for virtually all types of process Inputs: Process, temperature (T/C & RTO).
measurement. frequency/counter, load cell (dependent on model number).
The LCI308 offers a 4-3/4 digit display scalable to ±32,000 counts.
This flexible indicator is available for Process Inputs (0-10VDC, 4-20 Input Impedance:
mA, etc. and potentiometer inputs). Process: Voltage, 1 MΩ; current, 12.1Ω.
The LCI408 has a universal input that accepts the Process,
Temperature, and Load Cell inputs of the LCI308, plus a Load Cell: 100 MΩ for 300 mV, 1 MW for 30 mV.
Potentiometer input. The full 5-digit display can be scaled between Display: 5 digit, 7 segment, 14 mm red with a fixed deci-
±99999 counts. The dual display allows simultaneous display of the
measured value plus other values such as peak or valley. mal point. 14 LEDs (programming & control).
Options include relay and transistor set point outputs, BCD Parallel Accuracy: ±0.1% of reading (+2 count).
output, RS-232/RS-485 computer communications, and 4 to 20 mA
analog retransmission. Thermocouples: ±0.4% of reading for types J, K, T, & E;
±.05% of reading for types R & S.
RTD: ±0.2% of reading.
Supply Voltage: 115/230 VAC 50/60 Hz ±10%.

Indicators
Power Consumption: 3W max.

Process
Meters/
MODELS Weight: 8 oz (250 g).
Part Number Description Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
LCI308-00 1/8 DIN Indicator, ±10 VDC, ±20 mADC, Agency Approvals: CE.
Potentiometer
LCI408-00 1/8 DIN Indicator, Universal Input

Consult Factory for add-in option cards.

INPUT RANGES
INPUT TYPE RANGE °F RANGE °C ACCESSORIES
Type J Thermocouple -58.0 to +1472.0 -50.0 to +800.0 LCIA-01, Dual Relay Card. Two SPDT relays, 8A @ 240 VAC
Type K Thermocouple -58.0 to +2282.0 -50.0 to +1250.0
Type T Thermocouple -328.0 to +752.0 -200.0 to +400.0
LCIA-02, Quad Relay Card. Four SPST relays, 0.2A @ 240 VAC
Type R Thermocouple +32.0 to +3182.0 0.0 to 1750.0 LCIA-03, Quad Transistor Output Card. Four NPN optically
-Type S Thermocouple -58.0 to +3182.0 -50.0 to +1750.0 coupled transistors, 50 mA @ 50 VDC max.
Type E Thermocouple -58.0 to +1832.0 -50 to +1000.0 LCIA-04, Quad Transistor Output Card. Four PNP optically coupled
100 Ohm Plt. 0.00385 DIN RTD -328 to 1472.0 -200.0 to +800.0 transistors, 50 mA @ 50 VDC max.
100 Ohm Plt. 0.00392 NIST RTD -328 to 1607 -200 to +875
Process (Includes excitation power supply)
LCIA-05, Analog Retransmission, 4 to 20 mADC
±10V Scalable Units from -32000 to +32000 (LCI308); or 0 to 10 VDC, selectable.
-99999 to +99999 (LCI408) LCIA-07, BCD Output Card.
±20mV Scalable Units from -1999 to +1999 LCIA-08, RS-232 Serial Communication (Modbus® Protocol).
Digital - Frequency/Counter (Includes excitation power supply) LCIA-09, RS-485 Serial Communication (Modbus® Protocol).
0.1 to 25,000 Hz Count up/down 10,000 Hz (LCI308)
Potentiometer Resolution to 0.001% (LCI408)
Modbus® is a registered trademark of Schnieder Automation.
Load Cell (includes excitation power supply) ±30mVDC

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 360
p361 7/25/06 9:18 AM Page 1

Series
LCI508
&
Digital Panel Meters
LCI608 1/8 DIN, Process, Load Cell & Potentiometer Input

96 16 120 7
( 3 .7 8 ) ( 0 .6 3 ) ( 4. 72) ( 0. 28)

88888
PROG

8
A 1
B 2

( 1. 89)

( 1. 73)
48

44
RUN TARE HOLD LIMIT MAX MIN DATA 3
PRG INP1 DSP1 INP2 DSP2 FLT STORE 4

TARE RESET LIMIT MAXIMUM DATA

TEACH ESC ENTER

( 3. 78)

( 3. 583)
96

91
The Series LCI508/608 Digital Panel Meters offer high perfor- SPECIFICATIONS
mance and a multitude of features for displaying and manipulating Input: Voltage Process: ±5 and ±10)V (Input Impedance: 1MΩ);
input variables. The unit accepts analog process input, load cell and Voltage: ± 0-1V (Input Impedance: 100MΩ);
potentiometer inputs. Standard features include data hold, peak and Current Input: ±0-20 mA (Input Impedance: 11.8Ω).
valley display, store function, tare function and reset. Both models Load-Cell:
offer a built-in excitation power supply. The Series LCI508/608 can be Voltage Input: ±30, ±60, ±120, ±300, ±500 mV (Input Impedance:
fitted with optional output modules for control capabilities. 100MΩ); 4-wires, unipolar or bipolar.
Potentiometer Input:
The Model LCI508 is designed with 31 programmable functions and a Minimum Resistance: 120Ω (Input Impedance: >10 MΩ).
high conversion rate of 555 reads per second. Up 30 points can be set Excitation Voltage: 2.2V.
using the multipoint scaling function for non linear applications. Excitation:
2.2 V @ 30 mA not adjustable.
The Model LCI608 is designed for measuring and integrating analog 24 V @ 30 mA not regulated.
signals containing two sets of information simultaneously (for example
Indicators

5 V ±100 mV @ 120 mA with fine adjust (50ppm/ºC).

Process
Meters/

Flow and Totalization). The units can be configured to accept and dis- 10 V ±10 mV @ 120 mA with fine adjust (50ppm/ºC).
play two analog input signals and allowing interaction between them. Display Range:
The model LCI608 offers 26 logical programmable functions Main Display: -9999/9999, 5 red digits, 7 Segments.
Aux. Display: -9999999 / 9999999, 8 green digits 8 mm (LCI608
only). Decimal Point: Programmable (both displays).
LCI508-00, Panel Meter Sampling Rate: LCI508: 555/s; LCI608: 100/s.
LCI608-00, Panel Meter/Totalizer Accuracy:
Error max: ±0.1% reading +2 digits.
Temperature coefficient: 50 ppm/ºC.
Accessories Warm up time: 10 minutes.
LCIA-01, Dual Relay Card. Two SPDT relays, 8A @ 240 VAC Power Requirements: 115/230VAC 50/60Hz.
LCIA-02, Quad Relay Card. Four SPST relays, Consumption (without options): 5W.
0.2A @ 240 VAC Ambient Operating Temperature: 14 to 140°F (-10 to 60°C).
LCIA-03, Quad Transistor Output Card. Four NPN optically Storage Temperature Range: -13 to 185°F (-25 to 85°C).
coupled transistors, 50 mA @ 50 VDC max. Panel Cutout: 3.6 x 1.8˝ (92 x 45 mm).
LCIA-04, Quad Transistor Output Card. Four PNP optically coupled Weight: 21 oz (600 g).
transistors, 50 mA @ 50 VDC max. Case Material: s/UL 94 V-0 Polycarbonate.
LCIA-05, Analog Retransmission, 4 to 20 mADC Front Panel Orientation: NEMA 4X (IP65).
or 0 to 10 VDC, selectable.
LCIA-07, BCD Output Card.
LCIA-08, RS-232 Serial Communication (Modbus® Protocol)
LCIA-09, RS-485 Serial Communication (Modbus® Protocol)

Modbus® is a registered trademark of Schnieder Automation.

361 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p362 7/25/06 9:19 AM Page 1

Accessories for LCI Series

LCIA-01 Dual Relay Output Option Card for LCI108, LCI108J, LCI208, LCIA-07 BCD Output Option Card for LCI308 and LCI408 1/8 DIN panel
LCI308, and LCI408 1/8 DIN panel meters meters.
SPECIFICATIONS
Relay Output: 2 SPDT relays rated at 8 A @ 250 VAC SPECIFICATIONS
resistive. Output: 5-1/2 digits Tri-state logic for 5V TTL or 24VDC
Maximum Power: 2000VA, 192W. signals.
Maximum Voltage: 250 VAC, 150 VDC. Data Transfer Time: 2 ms.
Contact Resistance: 3mΩ maximum.
Output Response Time: 10 ms maximum.

LCIA-08 RS-232 Serial Communications Option Card for LCI308 and

LCIA-02 Quad Relay Output Option Card LCI408 1/8 DIN panel meters.
for LCI208, LCI308, and LCI408 1/8 DIN panel meters SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS Output: RS-232-C, full duplex, 4 wire, via RJ-11 connec-
Relay Output: 4 SPDT relays rated at 0.2 A @ 250 VAC tor.
resistive. Protocol: Selectable ISO1745 (ASCII) or Modbus® RTU
Maximum Power: 25VA, 192W Protocol.
Maximum Voltage: 250 VAC, 10 VDC Baud Rates: 1200 or 19200 baud, selectable.
Contact Resistance: 200mΩ maximum Address Range: 0 to 99.
Output Response Time: 6 ms maximum
LCIA-05 Isolated Analog Retransmission LCIA-09 RS-485 Serial Communications Option Card
for LCI308, and LCI408 1/8 DIN panel meters for LCI308 and LCI408 1/8 DIN panel meters.
SPECIFICATIONS
Output: Selectable 0 to 10 VDC into 500 ohms mini- SPECIFICATIONS
mum, 4 to 20 mADC into 800 ohms maximum. Output: RS-485, half duplex, 3 wire, via RJ-11 connector.
Resolution: 12 bits. Protocol: Selectable ISO1745 (ASCII) or Modbus® RTU
Accuracy: 0.1% of full scale ±1 bit. Protocol.
Response Time: 60 ms maximum. Baud Rates: 1200 or 19200 baud, selectable.
Thermal Drift: 0.2 mV/°C; 0.5µA/°C. Address Range: 0 to 99.

LCIA-06 Isolated Analog Retransmission Option Card for LCI208 1/8

DIN panel meters.(Not available for load cell input). LCIA-10 RS-232/RS-485 Serial Communications Option Card for
SPECIFICATIONS LCI208 1/8 DIN panel meters. SPECIFICATIONS
Output: 4 to 20 mADC into 500 ohms maximum. Output: RS-485, half duplex, 3 wire, via RJ-11 con-
Resolution: 12 bits. nector; and RS-232-C, full duplex, 4 wire, via RJ-11
Accuracy: 0.2% of full scale ±1 bit @ 23°C ±5°C (73°F connector.
±9°F). Protocol: Selectable ISO1745 (ASCII) or Modbus®
Response Time: 120 ms maximum. RTU Protocol.
Thermal Drift: 0.2µA/°C. Baud Rates: 1200 or 19200 baud, selectable.
Isolation: Analog output to input signal, 3750V; Analog Address Range: 0 to 99.
output to power and optional relay(s), 2300V. Modbus® is a registered trademark of Schnieder Automation.

Model
Temperature Panel Meter

Indicators
Process
Meters/
PM706
Dual Alarm, Relay and Analog Output

Model PM706 Digital Temperature Meter monitors and displays tempera- SPECIFICATIONS
ture measurements using a Type K thermocouple input. Meter features dual ad- Temperature Range: -148 to Set Point Adjustment: 0 to 2000
justable set points with lA relays and a selectable 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC output 1999°F (-100 to 1200°C). counts, adj. within 5 counts or bet-
signal . View alarm settings by depressing the tactile alarm button on the front Input: Type K thermocouple. ter. ppm/°C.
Output: Dual alarm rated 1A @ Read Rate: 2.5 readings/sec.
panel. The bright red LED display has a floating decimal point and displays tem- Weight: 1 Ib (500 g).
perature in °F or °C. Meter is equipped with overrange indication to alert oper- 250VAC, 4-20 mA with 8V max
compliance or 0-10 VDC 1 kΩ min. Front Panel Rating: 1/8 DIN,
ator of an open thermocouple or faulty connections. Sealed front panel is rated Power Requirements: 115/230 NEMA 12.
to NEMA 12 to protect against dust and fluids. VAC, ±10%, 50/60 Hz.
Power Consumption: 7 W. Suggested Specifications
Accuracy: ±2% at 23°C ambient. Temperature meter shall have dual
Display: 4-digit, red, 1/2˝ digits. relay alarms and selectable 4-20 mA
Resolution: 1°F/°C. or 0-10 VDC analog output.
Operating Temperature: 32 to Temperature shall be displayed in
122°F (0 to 50°C). °F/°C (selectable). The housing shall
PM706 Digital Temperature Panel Meter Ambient Temperature Effect: be suitable for NEMA12 service.
+0.01% of rdg., -0.05° per degree. Meter shall be Dwyer Model No.
Temperature Coefficient: ±100 PM706.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 362
p363 7/25/06 9:21 AM Page 1

Series
LPI Loop Powered Indicators
Square Root Function and User Defined Curves 4-Digit LED
1/2˝ NPT
SWITCHES 9/16
[14.2]

3-11/32 1-11/64
[84.9] [29.7]

SWITCH TERMINAL 2-15/64

[56.7]
BOTTOM OF COVER

The micropressure based Series LPI Loop Powered Indicator accepts SPECIFICATIONS @ 68°F (20°C)
a 4-20 mA input signal and displays the associated process variable such as Input: 4 to 20 mA.
pressure, level, flow, temperature or relative humitidy. Local or remote indica- Maximum Input Current: 100 mA for 1 minute.
tion of process variable can be viewed on the bright red four-digit LED. The Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale.
user can quickly modify the instrument configuration via three push buttons. Stability: Zero: 0.002%/°C; Span: 100 ppm/°C.
Program input/output scaling, engineering units, offset, decimal point position, Power Requirements: 2-wire 4-20 mA loop powered.
and password protection. The Series LPI contains several linearizations which Display: 4-digit, 7.6 mm (high) red LED.
can be applied to the display including straight linear, square root, x 3/2, x 5/2, Maximum Display Range: -1999 to 9999.
or a user defined 19 segment linearization curve. The indicator is housed in a Ambient Operating Temperature: -4 to 167°F (-20 to 75°C).
NEMA 4X (IP65) polycarbonate enclosure with a 1/2˝ female NPT side port. Storage Temperatures: -58 to 185°F (-50 to 85°C).
Weight: 6.0 oz (170 g).
Front Panel Protection: NEMA 4X (IP65).
Model LPI-111, Loop Powered Indicator with plastic enclosure Agency Approvals: CE.

Series
BPI Battery Powered Temperature Indicator
RTD or T/C Input, 4-Digit Display, Selectable °F or °C
9/16
1/2˝ NPT [14.2]
Indicators
Process
Meters/

1-11/64 3-11/32
[29.7] [84.9]

2-15/64
[56.7]

The Series BPI Battery Powered Indicator accepts RTD or SPECIFICATIONS

Thermocouple input and provides local or remote display of temperature mea- Inputs: Thermocouple or RTD depending on model.
surements. Quickly navigate the menu system to customize for each applica- Accuracy: Thermocouple Input: ±0.1% of FS, ±0.5°C (plus sensor);
tion. Three push buttons allow the user to select input type, engineering units RTD: ±0.2°C ±0.1% of reading (plus sensor error).
(°F or °C), offset temperature, decimal point position, and password protec- Power Requirements: 3.6 V Lithium battery.
tion. The indicator is housed in a polycarbonate NEMA 4X (IP65) enclosure Battery Life: >2 years.
for additional protection from the environment. Display: 4-digit LCD.
Resolution: 0.1°C.
MODELS Ambient Operating Temperature: 14 to 158°F (-10 to 70°C).
Model No. Input Storage Temperature: -4 to 185°F (-20 to 85°C).
BPI - 101 3-wire Pt100 or Ni120 Weight: 6.0 oz (170 g).
BPI - 102 K, J, T, N, R, S, E, or F thermocouples Front Panel Protection: NEMA 4X (IP65).
Measuring Ranges Agency Approvals: CE.
Sensor Range °F (°C) Sensor Range °F (°C)
K -328 to 2498°F (-200 to 1370°C) S 14 to 3200°F (-10 to 1760°C)
J -148 to 2192°F (-100 to 1200°C) E -328 to 1832°F (-200 to 1000°C)
T -346 to 752°F (-210 to 400°C) F -148 to 1112°F (-100 to 600°C)
N -292 to 2372°F (-180 to 1300°C) Pt100Ω -148 to 1472°F (-100 to 800°C)
R 14 to 3200°F (-10 to 1760°C) Ni120 -148 to 1472°F (-100 to 800°C)

363 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p364 7/25/06 9:22 AM Page 1

Series
PP45 Temperature/Process Indicator
Universal lnput, 0.1% Accuracy, 6 Digit Display

The PP45 Series Temperature/Process Indicators offer a high level of standard fea- SPECIFICATIONS
tures in an economical 1/8 DIN package. Featuring universal input for thermocouples,
RTDs, differential input, and process input; the PP45 Series offers easy setup for most Inputs:
temperature and process applications. A standard 24 Volt isolated, regulated power supply • Thermocouple = 3 megohms minimum.
is included to power most standard 4 to 20 mA transmitters. • Voltage = 5000 ohms.
Standard features include peak and valley indication and one button tare setting. For • Current = 10 ohms.
process inputs the display is fully programmable from -32000 to +32000 with user placeable • RTD current = 200 µA maximum.
decimal point. Most thermocouple and RTD inputs can show whole or tenth degree display. Display: 6 digit, 7 segment 0.5˝ (12.7 mm) high. Resolution: 1° or 0.1°, or 1
The PP45 Series is available with dual alarm SPDT outputs rated at a full 10 Amps, and can count.
be programmed for high, low, or guardband (high/low) operation. All outputs are isolated Accuracy: ±0.1% of span ±1 least significant digit.
from the input. Other options include Analog Retransmission of the Process Variable and Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC nominal, +10% -15%, 50 to 400 Hz single
Digital Serial Communication for either RS-232 or RS-485. phase; 132 to 240 VDC +10% -20%.
The PP45 sets a new standard in quality, features, ease of use, and value. While having a Power Consumption: 5 VA maximum.
high level of features and functions, program items only appear in the control menu when Operating Temperature: 14 to 131°F (-10 to 55°C).
the function is selected. Memory Backup: Non-volatile memory. Has no batteries.
For the best value in a high accuracy 1/8 DIN panel meter, the choice is the Love Controls Alarm Output Relay Ratings: SPDT, 10 A at 240 VAC resistive, 1/2 hp @ 120
PP45 Series. VAC, 1/3 hp @ 240 VAC.
Alarm On-Off Differential: 1° F, C, or 1 count.
INPUT RANGES Isolation: Alarm Relay outputs, 1500 VAC from all inputs and outputs.
Loop Power Supply: Isolated 24 VDC @ 50 mA, regulated.
INPUT TYPE RANGE °F RANGE °C
Weight: 13 oz (369 g).
Type J or L Thermocouple -100 to +1607 -73 to +871
Front Panel Rating: IP66 (Type 4X).
Type K Thermocouple -200 to +2500 -129 to +1371 Agency Approvals: CE, UL.
Type T Thermocouple -350 to +750 -212 to +398
Type E Thermocouple -100 to +1800 -73 to +982
Type R Thermocouple 0 to 3200 -17 to +1760
MODELS
Type S Thermocouple 0 to 3200 -17 to +1760

Indicators
Type B Thermocouple +75 to +3308 +24 to +1820 Part Number Features

Process
Meters/
Type C Thermocouple 0 to 4208 -17 to +2320 PP450 Indicator without Alarms
Type N Thermocouple -100 to +2372 -73 to +1300 PP451 Indicator with Alarms
100 Ω Plt. 0.00385 DIN RTD -328 to 1607 -200 to +875 PP451-932 Indicator w/ Alarms and 0 (4) to 20 mA Retransmission
100 Ω Plt. 0.00392 NIST RTD -328 to 1607 -200 to +875 1
The 0 to 20 mADC, 4 to 20 mADC, 0 to 10 VDC, 2 to 10 VDC, and -10 to +10 mVDC inputs are fully
120 Ω Nickel 0.00628 US RTD -112 to +608 -80 to +320
scalable from a minimum of 100 counts span placed anywhere within the range of -32000 to +32000. Decimal
1000 Ω Plt. 0.00385 DIN RTD -328 to +1607 -200 to +875 point position is adjustable from the zero place (32000), tenths (3200.0), hundredths (320.00), thousandths
Current/Voltage/ Δ Voltage 1
Scalable Units from -1999 to +9999 (32.000), or ten thousandths (3.2000).

NEMA 4 (IP-65) Mounting Enclosure for 1/8 DIN controls Accessory mounting bracket for 1/8 DIN controls and
and panel meters. panel meters.
The 1007-ENCL8, IP-65 (NEMA 4) The 1007-BRKT8 Accessory
Mounting Enclosure for 1/8 DIN con- Mounting Bracket Kit for 1/8 DIN
trols and panel meters, allows easy use in controls and panel meters allows easy
a compact semi-portable format. The mounting of an accessory directly to
enclosure has a standard 1/8 DIN cut-out the rear of the PP45, D8500, or D8600
and will accommodate a PP45, LCI108, Series instruments. The kit includes
LCI108J, LCI208, LCI308, LCI408, 8500 the bracket, terminal insulator barrier,
Series, 8600 Series, LCU108, or LCU208 and screws.
indicators and controls. The 1007-BRKT8 is designed to hold a
1007-ENCL8 shown with PP45 Series 668 pressure transmitter, but
Four rubber feet allow for secure position- mounted. 1007-BRKT8 shown mounted on
may also be used for other transmitters PP45 with Dwyer Series 668
ing on most flat surfaces. The top easily or solid state relays. pressure transmitter (wiring omitted).
removes with four screws to allow full
access to the interior for wiring and instal-
lation.
1007-BRKT8, Mounting Bracket Kit

Note: When mounting a solid state relay, make sure that the load is small enough so that additional heat sinking is not
necessary. Do not use a solid state relay on this bracket if the weight is more than 4 oz (125 g) or if the heat generat-
1007-ENCL8, Mounting Enclosure ed by the solid state relay will raise the ambient temperature of the bracket by more than 9°F (5°C).

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 364
pg365 7/25/06 9:36 AM Page 1

Humidity
Humidity is defined as the amount of moisture in the air. The measure- Humidity Indicators pg 388
ment and control of humidity is required in many industries such as heat-
ing and air conditioning, food processing and transportation, agricultural
and industrial processes. The amount of water vapor in air is most com-
monly measured by the relative humidity (RH).

Relative humidity is the ratio of the quantity of water vapor in air to the
quantity of water vapor required for saturation at the same temperature.
The saturation point is the point at which condensation is formed.
Relative humidity is affected by the temperature—as the temperature
increases, the air is able to absorb more water prior to the formation of
condensation.

One of the most common methods of measuring the relative humidity is

the thin film capacitance sensor. Moisture sensitive film is placed
between two electrodes. The humidity causes the dielectric constant of
the film to change, thereby, changing the capacitance of the sensor. Humidity Transmitters pgs 389-390
These sensors are combined with electronic conditioning circuitry to pro-
duce an analog signal output.

Another common indication of humidity is the dew point. The dew point
is measured in ˚F or ˚C and is defined as the temperature to which a gas
begins to form condensation. Dew point can be derived from the relative
humidity and ambient temperature of a gas or measured directly with a
chilled mirror hygrometer.

Table of Contents
Series 485 Digital Hygrometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Series RH Humidity/Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Model 657-1 Relative Humidity/Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . 367
Model 657C-1 Relative Humidity/Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . 367
Series HU Temperature/Humidity Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Series HT RH/Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Series HS Humidity Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Series TH Thermohygrometer Pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Series THC Temperature/Humidity Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Series
485 Digital Hygrometer
Measures % RH and Temperature

SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Humidity & temperature detection in air.
Humidity

Model 485-2
Model 485-1 Range: Relative Humidity: 0 to 100% (non-condensing);
Temperature: –22 to 185°F (–30 to 85°C).
Accuracy: Relative Humidity: ±2%; Temperature: ±1°F
(±0.5°C).
Display: Dual 4.5 digit LCD. Temperature 0.4˝ High, RH: 0.2˝
High.
Temperature Limits: Probe: -22 to 185°F (–30 to 85°C).
Ambient: 32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C).
Resolution: Relative Humidity: 0.1%; Temperature: 0.1°.
Power Requirements: 9V alkaline battery (included).
Probe: 485-2 only 8-5/8˝ (219 mm).
Model 485 Digital Hygrometer is a versatile, compact, hand-held instrument for mea- Weight: 12 oz (340 g).
suring percentage of relative humidity and temperature in °F or °C. Dew point and wet
bulb temperature is derived from relative humidity and temperature measurements and
displayed on the 0.4˝ LCD display. Hold key freezes the current temperature and rela-
tive humidity readings for situations where readings fluctuate. Store up to 25 readings
with the non-volatile memory function – ideal for technicians needing to take multiple
readings for later analysis. Accessory
A-402A Carrying Case – Tough grey nylon pouch
protects Series 485 Digital Hygrometer. Double
Model 485-1 Digital Hygrometer zippered for quick and easy access. With belt loop
that snaps closed.
Model 485-2 Digital Hygrometer w/Remote Probe
7-1/2H˝ x 3˝W x 2-1/4˝D (191x76x57 mm)

365 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p366 7/25/06 9:37 AM Page 1

Series
RH Humidity/Temperature Transmitter
Calibration-Free, 4-20 mA Output, 2% Accuracy, Optional Display

4-9/16
[115.89]

2-3/4 61/64
[69.85] [24.21]

Wall Mount

3-7/16
(87.31)
35/64
3-11/64 (13.89)
(80.57)

2-9/64
(54.37)
2-33/64 9
(63.90) (228.60)
1/2 NPT

2-11/64
(55.17)
Duct Mount

5-1/8
(130.18)
4-17/32 2-15/64 4-17/32
(115.09) (56.75) (115.09)

3-1/8
(79.38)
3-1/8
(79.38)

6-45/64
(170.26) 3/16
(4.76)
3 MOUNTING HOLES
(76.20) TYP 4 PLCS

OSA 1-1/8
(28.58) 55/64
(21.83)

Demanding humidity/temperature applications require the SPECIFICATIONS

Series RH Transmitter which offers high accuracy, long term stability, Relative Humidity Range: 0 to 100% RH.
and reliable operation. The Series RH is designed for monitoring and con-
Temperature Range: -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C).

Humidity
trolling humidity or both humidity and temperature in building energy
management systems, HVAC, commercial, residential, clean rooms, muse- Accuracy: ±2% @ 10 - 90% RH; ±0.9°F @ 72°F (±0.3°C @ 25°C).
ums, climate chambers, and other space monitoring applications. Temperature Limits: -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C).
The Series RH is a two-wire transmitter with a 4-20 mA loop powered out- Storage Temperature: -40 to 176°F (-40 to 80°C).
put. The state of the art sensor recovers from 100% saturation and is cali- Compensated Temperature Range: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C).
bration-free. A variety of mounting configurations are available including
wall mount, duct mount, and OSA (outside air) models. Select humidity Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC.
monitoring or humidity and temperature models. Output Signal: 4-20 mA, 2 channels for humidity/temperature models
The combined humidity/temperature version (RHT) provides dual 4-20 mA (loop powered on RH).
output signals to control both humidity and temperature with one sensor Response Time: 15 seconds.
which reduces installation costs. The duct mount version is also available Electrical Connections: Screw terminal block.
with an optional alpha-numeric LCD to provide local indication of humidi-
Conduit Connection: Duct mount: 1/2˝ NPS; OSA: 1/2˝ (22.3 mm).
ty and temperature simultaneously. The displayed temperature is field
selectable for °F or °C. Drift: <1% RH/year.
RH Sensor: Capacitance polymer.
MODELS Temperature Sensor: Solid state band gap.
Model Housing Material: Wall Mount: ABS; Duct Mount: PBT; OSA:
Number Description Mounting Display Polycarbonate.
RHU-W Humidity Only Wall No Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65) for OSA mount only.
RHU-D Humidity Only Duct No Display: Optional 2-line alpha-numeric, 8 characters/line (Duct mount only).
RHU-O Humidity Only OSA No Display Resolution: RH: 0.1%; 0.1°F (0.1°C).
RHT-W Humidity/Temperature Wall No Weight: Wall Mount: 0.5 lb (0.25 kg); Duct Mount: 0.6 lb (0.3 kg); OSA: 1 lb
RHT-D Humidity/Temperature Duct No (0.45 kg).
RHT-O Humidity/Temperature OSA No Agency Approvals: CE.
RHT-D-LCD Humidity/Temperature Duct Yes

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 366
p367 7/25/06 9:38 AM Page 1

Model
657-1 Relative Humidity/Temperature Transmitter
Dual Channel Design for Simultaneous 4-20 mA Output Signals
5/16
[7.925]

2-23/32
2-13/32 [68.88]
[60.96]

5/32
[3.81]
1-1/2 7/8
[38.10] 1/2 [22.23]
[12.70]
2-1/4
[57.15]

The Model 657-1 Transmitter provides two 4-20 mA channels to pro- SPECIFICATIONS
duce separate output signals for both relative humidity and tempera- Service: Humidity & temperature detection in air.
ture. This inexpensive device delivers ±2% accuracy for humidity and Range: Relative Humidity: 0-100%; Temperature: 32 to 212ºF (0 to
±1°F for temperature measurements. The sensor employed in the 657-1 100ºC).
features a state-of-the-art integrated polymer film humidity sensor and Accuracy: Relative Humidity: ±2% (10-90% RH), ±3% (0-10% and 90-
a thin-film platinum temperature sensor to assure high reliability and 100% RH); Temperature: ±1ºF (0.5ºC).
rock-solid stability over years of continuous service. Stainless steel probe Temperature Limits: 32 to 158ºF (0 to 70ºC).
measures 5/16˝ x 10˝ (0.8 x 24.4 cm) and can be easily mounted to most Pressure Limits: 1 psi max.
Compensated Temperature Range: 32 to 158°F (0 to 70°C).
ductwork using either of the two optional kits below.
Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC.
Output Signal: 2 channels each 4-20 mA. Loop powered on the RH
channel.
Electrical Connections: 4 screw type terminal.
657-1 RH/Temperature Transmitter Mounting Orientation: Mount in any position.
No. A-158 Split Flange Mounting Kit Probe: 5/16˝ x 10˝ (0.8 x 25.4 cm) stainless steel.
No. A-159 Duct Mounting Gland Weight: 5.5 oz (156 g).

Model
657C-1 Relative Humidity/Temperature Transmitter
Dual Channel Design for Simultaneous 4-20 mA Output Signals – Conduit Housing
1-11/32
[34.15] 11-7/8 [302]

3-1/2 4-13/32
[88.90] [112.0] 9-1/10 [231]

3-5/8
[92.4]
Humidity

1-5/32 1/2 NPT

[29.35] 2-15/32
[62.60]

The Model 657C-1 Transmitter features the same circuit design as the SPECIFICATIONS
657-1 providing two 4-20 mA channels to produce separate output signals Service: Humidity & temperature detection in air.
for both relative humidity and temperature. However, this model is Range: Relative Humidity: 0-100%; Temperature: 32 to 212ºF (0 to
housed in a tough die cast aluminum protective conduit enclosure with 100ºC)
gasketed cover. An internal terminal block is provided for electrical con- Accuracy: Relative Humidity: ±2% (10-90% RH), ±3% (0-10% and 90-
nections. The sensor employed in the 657C-1 features a state-of-the-art 100% RH); Temperature: ±1ºF (0.5ºC).
integrated polymer film humidity sensor and a thin-film platinum tem- Temperature Limits: 32 to 158ºF (0 to 70ºC).
perature sensor to assure high reliability and rock-solid stability over years Pressure Limits: 1 psi max.
of continuous service. Stainless steel probe measures 5/16˝ x 9-1/10˝ (0.8 Compensated Temperature Range: 32 to 158°F (0 to 70°C).
x 23.1 cm) and can be easily mounted to most ductwork using either of the Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC.
two optional kits below. Output Signal: 2 channels each 4-20 mA. Loop powered on the RH
channel.
Electrical Connections: 4 screw type terminal.
Mounting Orientation: Mount in any position.
657C-1 RH/Temperature Transmitter Probe: 5/16˝ x 9-1/10˝ (0.8 x 23.1 cm) stainless steel.
No. A-158 Split Flange Mounting Kit Weight: 10 oz (284 g).
No. A-159 Duct Mounting Gland

367 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p368 8/2/06 2:34 PM Page 1

Series
HU Temperature/Humidity Transmitter
0 to 100% RH, ±2% Accuracy, NEMA 4 (IP56) Enclosure
2.50
1.88 [64]
[48]

2.500
[63.50]
4.500
[114.30]

2.500
[63.50]

2.250 6.000 2.686

[57.15] [152.40] [68.22]
3.250 4.000
[82.55] [101.60]
DUCT MOUNTING: Drill 5/8˝(15.9 mm) dia. hole
Duct Mount version shown.

The ultra-fast Series HU Transmitter provides a stable, repeat- SPECIFICATIONS Zero & Span Adjustment: ±15%,
able, and accurate means of measuring humidity or both temperature Relative Humidity Range: 0 to non-interactive.
and humidity in the harshest of environments. The polymer capaci- 100% RH. Response Time: Temp: 60 msec;
tance sensor is not affected by condensation, fog, high humidity or Temperature Range: -30 to 130°F RH: 30 sec.
contaminants. Sophisticated integrated circuits provide a fully condi- (-35 to 55°C). Loop Resistance: 3000Ω max. @
tioned and temperature compensated 4-20 mA output signal. For Accuracy: ±2% RH (includes non- 40 VDC.
humidity or temperature/humidity control, a rugged NEMA 4 (IP56) linearity and non-repeatability); Electrical Connections:
fully gasketed duct mount enclosure is available or for monitoring ±0.12% @ 0°C. Unpluggable screw terminal block.
space humidity, choose the ABS plastic wall mount enclosure. Units Hysteresis: ±1%. Conduit Connection: 1/2˝
also feature non-interacting zero and span adjustments, short circuit Temperature Limits: -30 to 130°F (22.3 mm) knockout.
protection and reverse polarity protected output. (-35 to 55°C). Enclosure Rating: Duct Mount:
Operating Relative Humidity: 10 to Cold-Rolled Steel, NEMA 4 (IP56) or
90% RH, non-condensing. Wall Mount: ABS Plastic.
MODELS Temperature Sensor: Pt 1000Ω
Compensated Temperature
Range: -30 to 130°F (-35 to 55°C). RTD.
Model Number Description
Power Requirements: 12-40 VDC. Drift: ±2 RH over 2 years.
HU0142 Humidity Transmitter, duct mount
Output Signal: Humidity, 4-20 mA, Weight: Duct Mount: 1.0 lb
HU0242 Humidity Transmitter, wall mount 2-wire; Temp (Model HU1142): pt (.45 kg); Wall Mount: 0.5 lb (.25 kg).
HU1142 Humidity/Temp. Transmitter, duct mount 1000Ω RTD. Agency Approvals: CE.

Series
HT RH/Temperature Transmitter
Calibration-Free, 2-Wire Design, Duct or Wall Mount
11-5/8 [295.3]
2-1/8
8-1/2 [215.9]
[53.98]

19/32 DIA. 15/32 DIA.

Humidity
[15.09] [11.91]
3-5/32 1-1/2
[80.17] [38.10]

3-5/32
[80.17]

Monitor and control relative humidity and temperature in building energy SPECIFICATIONS Response Time: 15 seconds.
management systems with the Series HT Humidity/Temperature Transmitter. Relative Humidity Range: 10 to Current Consumption: 4 mA mini-
Designed for demanding HVAC/EMCS applications, the Series HT provides 90% RH. mum.
Temperature Range: Duct mount: Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ NPT.
±3% RH accuracy and ±1% stability per year. Routine calibration is not required Mounting Connection: 3/4˝ NPT.
with the fully interchangeable sensor. Two wire connections allow easy installa- -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C), wall
mount: 23 to 131°F (-5 to 55°C). Drift: ±2% RH over 2 years.
tion directly into air ducts or within a controlled area. Accuracy: ±3% RH @ 25°C; ±0.3°C Temperature Sensor: Pt 1000Ω
@ 25°C. RTD.
MODELS Temperature Limits: Duct mount: RH Temperature Dependance:
Model 14 to 140°F (-10 to 60°C), wall <±1.5% RH from 14 to 140°F
Description (-10 to 60°C).
Number mount: 23 to 131°F (-5 to 55°C).
Storage Temperature: -40 to 140°F Temperature Dependance:
HT00* Humidity Transmitter, wall mount 0.01°C/°C.
(-40 to 60°C).
HT01 Humidity Transmitter, duct mount Operating Humidity Range: Duct Housing Material: ABS plastic.
HT10* Humidity/Temp Transmitter, wall mount mount: 0 to 100% RH, wall mount: 0 Enclosure Rating: Duct mount
HT11 Humidity/Temp Transmitter, duct mount to 90% RH. only/IP65.
Power Requirements: 10 to 28 Weight: 0.6 lb (0.3 kg).
*Wall mount not shown VDC. Agency Approvals: CE.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA.
Accessory
No. HT5, Replacement sensor

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 368
p369 7/25/06 9:39 AM Page 1

Series
HS Humidity Switch
Programmable, 8 Amp Relay, 3-Digit Display C

1-11/32 1-7/64
[34] [28]

3 2-3/8
[76] [60]

Panel Cutout 2-51/64˝ x 1-9/64˝ (71 x 29 mm)

The microprocessor based Series HS Humidity Switch SPECIFICATIONS

Relative Humidity Range: 0 to 100% RH.
provides control for humidifying or dehumidifying. Relative
Input: 0 to 3V, 0 to 1V or 4-20 mA (depending on model) humidi-
humidity, output status, and error messaging can be viewed on
ty probe not included.
the bright green LED. The switch features 9 user defined para- Accuracy: ±1% RH.
meters including setpoint, hysteresis, control type, cycle time, Display: 3-digit, green, 1/2˝ (12.7 mm) digits.
and probe adjustment. Access to programming parameters can Resolution: 1 digit.
be locked for security purposes using the password protection Temperature Limits: 32 to 158°F (0 to 70°C).
feature. The Series HS includes a fitting clip for panel mount- Storage Temperature: -4 to 176°F (-20 to 80°C).
Output: 8 A SPDT relay @ 250 VAC resistive.
ing, gasket, rear terminal cover, and instruction manual.
Horsepower Rating (HP): 1/3 HP.
Control Type: ON/OFF.
Power Requirements: 110 VAC or 230 VAC (Depending on
model).
MODELS Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory.
Model Input Supply
Number Sensor Voltage Weight: 2.3 oz (65 g).
HS-311 0 to 3 V 110 VAC Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
HS-312 0 to 3 V 230 VAC
Agency Approvals: CE, UR pending.
HS-111 0 to 1 V 110 VAC
HS-112 0 to 1 V 230 VAC APPLICATIONS
HS-411 4 to 20 mA 110 VAC HS Digital Humidity Switches are suitable for industrial
HS-412 4 to 20 mA 230 VAC
chillers, environmental chambers, walk-ins and freezers, heat
sealers, beer and wine chillers, mug frosters, coolers, display
Humidity

Accessories cases and cabinets, meat and produce storage, floral preserva-
THC-P Humidity Probe, 0 to 3 V output, 4 ft (1.5 m) cable tion, refrigerated transportation, laboratories, food service
equipment, ovens and dryers, green houses, museums, and
tobacco preservation.
PARAMETERS
Description Units Range
SP Set Point % r1 to r2
r0 Differential or Hysteresis % 1 to 99
r1 Lower Value Set Point % 0 to r2
r2 Higher Value Set Point % r1 to 100
d0 Control Type (humidifying/dehumidifying) Option Hu/dH
c0 Min. Stop Time for Load Minutes 0 to 59 min.
c1 Continuous Cycle Time Hours 0 to 24 hr
Lc RH value for 4 mA input % 0 to 100
Hc RH value for 20 mA input % 50 to 100
P1 Probe Adjustment (shifting) % 0 to 10
P2 Probe Type (0-1 V, 0-3 V, 4-20 mA) Range 01/03/42
H5 Parameter Access code Numeric 0 to 99

369 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p370 7/25/06 9:40 AM Page 1

Series
TH Thermohygrometer Pen
Dual Display, Compact Design

1.20
[30.5]

6.50 0.50
[165] [14]

Simultaneously measure temperature and relative humidity with the Series SPECIFICATIONS
TH Thermohygrometer Pen. This unit features a dual LCD, user selectable Range: RH: 10 to 90%, Temp: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
units of measure, MAX/MIN functions, reset and display hold. A built-in self cal- Accuracy: RH: ±5%, Temp: ±1.5°F or °C.
ibration utility allows for field calibration using the optional relative humidity Display: Dual 3 digit LCD.
calibration reference. The Model TH-10 includes a pocket clip, battery and Resolution: RH: 1%; Temp: 0.1°F or °C.
instruction manual. The optional kit, Model TH-10K, includes thermohygrome- Response Time: Temp: 1 sec; RH: 1 min 80% of change.
ter pen with 33% and 75% RH calibration standards and a hard vinyl carrying Compensated Temperature Range: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
case. Power Requirements: 3V Lithium (CR2032) battery (included).
Weight: 2.3 oz (65 g).
Agency Approvals: CE.
Model TH-10 Thermohygrometer Pen.
Model TH-10K Thermohygrometer Pen Kit

ACCESSORIES APPLICATIONS
Model TH-33 33% RH Calibration Standard Measure temperature and humidity in greenhouses, clean rooms, drying
rooms, HVAC, food, pharmaceutical, and textile industries.
Model TH-75 75% RH Calibration Standard

Series
THC Temperature/Humidity Switch
Independent Displays, 61 Programmable Parameters, 4 SPST Relays

4-3/32
[104.00]

5-9/32
[134.32]

2-7/16
1-15/16 [61.80]
[49.23]

Humidity
5 3-7/8
[127.00] [98.43]

Simultaneously measure and control temperature and humidity with the SPECIFICATIONS Display: Two 3-digit displays. 1/2˝
Series THC Temperature/Humidity Switch. The unit offers a 3-digit red display Measurement Range: digits.
for temperature indication and a 3-digit green display indicating humidity. The Temperature: -58 to 302°F (-50 to Resolution: 0.1°.
Series THC is equipped with four independent relays, two for temperature con- 150°C); Humidity: 0 to 100%RH Memory Backup: Nonvolatile
trol and two relays for humidity control. Input: Up to 2 thermistors and 1 memory.
The unit offers 61 programmable parameters for temperature and humidity humidity sensor. Ambient Operating
control including set point, differential, direct/reverse acting, cycle time, alarm Output: 4 SPST, 8A relays @ 250 Temperature: 32 to 158°F (0 to
clock time, and decimal point adjustment. In the event of a probe error, the VAC. 70°C).
default operation of the relays can be set to open or close. The THC features Horsepower Rating (HP): 1/3 HP. Storage Temperature: -4 to
error or alarm messaging and password protection. Control Type: ON/OFF direction, 176°F (-20 to 80°C).
The THC Temperature/Humidity Switch accepts up to two temperature probe direct or reverse acting, neutral. Weight: 1.17 lb (530 g).
inputs (sold separately) and a humidity sensor. A humidity sensor with 0–1V, Power Requirements: 110 or Panel Cutout: 5.15˝ x 2.37˝ (131 x
0–3V (sold separately), or 4–20 mA output can be used with the Series THC. 230 VAC (depending on model). 111mm).
Accuracy: Temperature:±0.5% of Front Panel Protection: NEMA
probe range; Humidity: ±3% of 4X (IP65).
MODELS range. Agency Approvals: CE.
Model Number Description
ACCESSORIES
THC-10 °F 110 VAC THC-P Humidity probe with 3V output & 4 ft (1.2 m) cable
THC-11 °C 110 VAC TS-5 Temperature probe, PVC with 5 ft (1.5 m) cable
THC-20 °F 230 VAC TS-6 Temperature probe, metal with 5 ft (1.5 m) cable
S-51 Temperature probe, PVC with 10 ft (3 m) cable
THC-21 °C 230 VAC TS-61 Temperature probe, metal with 10 ft (3 m) cable

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 370
pg371 7/25/06 11:28 AM Page 1

Test Equipment
Dwyer Instruments, Inc. offers instrumentation for calibration, test, Cleaning a Conductivity/TDS Tester
or measurement of many process variables such as pressure, temper- Many applications will only require hot water and a mild detergent to
ature, flow, level, pH, conductivity and speed. We’ve expanded our clean the conductivity cell. Use acetone for cleaning if measuring
product line to include pressure, temperature, voltage and current cal- organic materials. Rinse with deionized or distilled water after clean-
ibrators; pH, TDS, and conductivity testers; tachometers, and multi- ing and recalibrate the tester. If inaccurate readings are observed, the
meters. cell may be polarized and require replatinization.
pH Measurement
pH measurement is used for environmental monitoring, waste water Table of Contents
Model HP Hand Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
testing, pools and spas, food and beverage, biological sample testing, Model A-396A Calibration Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
soil testing, pharmaceutical and industrial processes. The degree of Model PHP Pneumatic Hand Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
acidity or alkalinity of a solution can be determined by the pH value. Model HHP Hydraulic Hand Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
pH is defined as the negative logarithm of hydrogen-ion activity. The Model UPT1000 Digital Hand-Held Universal T/C - Process Indicator . . . . .374
Model MC6 Multi-Cal Benchtop Calibrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
concentration of hydrogen ions (H+) in a solution relates to the pH Series MC Multi-Cal Pressure Calibrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
value. pH is measured on a scale of 0 to 14 with 7pH being neutral, Model CA10 Thermocouple Calibrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
<7pH indicating acidity and >7pH indicating alkalinity. Higher concen- Model CA20 Thermocouple Calibrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
trations of H+ indicates a more acidic solution and a lower pH value. Model CAL30 Process Calibrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Model LC21 Smart Loop Calibrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Model ASG Analog Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
ACID NEUTRAL ALKALINE (BASE)
Model MM10 Digital Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Series TAC Pocket Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
0 pH 4 pH 7 pH 10 pH 14 pH Model PHO-1 pH/ORP/Temperature Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Model WPH2 Pocket Sized pH Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
+414 mV +177 mV 0 mV -177 mV -414 mV Model WPH1 Waterproof Pocket Sized pH Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Series TDS Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
A pH measuring system includes a measuring electrode, reference Series EC Conductivity Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
electrode, and meter. The Dwyer® pH testers are designed with a com- Model M Safe-T-Ohm® Shoe Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
bination electrode which contains a measuring and reference electrode Model TR-7 Safe-T-Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Series DT Detector™ Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
in the same body. The measuring electrode is constructed of noncon- Series PS Proximity Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
ductive glass with a pH sensitive glass bulb at the end and a AgCl (sil- Model SSR-15 Intrinsically Safe Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
ver chloride) wire in the center. The wire is surrounded by KCl (potas- Series SSR Solid State Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
sium chloride) electrolyte solution. The reference electrode has a AgCl Series CT40/50 Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
(silver chloride) wire surrounded by an electrolyte solution of KCl sat- Series CT60/70 True RMS Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
urated with AgCl. A porous liquid junction in the reference electrode Series CS Current Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
allows electrolyte to flow through it and make physical and electrical Series LTTJ Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Series LTT SSR Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
contact with the solution being measured. This creates an ionic charge Model FC-1000 Electronic Fan Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
on the measuring electrode. A positive charge indicates the solution is Related Products and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389-390
acidic and results in a pH value of <7pH. A negative charge indicates Series MTL5041/5045 Galvanic Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
the solution is alkaline and results in a value >7pH. Series MTL7706/7787 Zener Barrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
No. 920 Smoke Gage Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
No. 1200 Combustion Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
TDS and Conductivity Measurement Model CLD20 Combustible Leak Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Conductivity is an important measurement in determining water qual- Model RLD1 Refrigerant Leak Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
ity such as hardness or purity of water. Applications include boiler Model 1205A-5 Handheld CO Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
water testing, waste water treatment, environmental monitoring, cool- Model 1207 Handheld Flue Gas Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
ing tower feed waters, and leak detection. Conductivity measures a
solutions ability to conduct an electric current. The common unit of Calibrators/Testers/Sensors pgs 372 - 396
measure for conductivity is the siemens (S), formerly called the mho (1
micromho [μmho] equals 1 microSiemens [μS]). Conductance is equal
to the reciprocal of resistance measured in ohms.
Equipment

To measure conductivity, two conductive plates (collectively referred

to as a conductivity cell) are submersed in a solution with a potential
Test

applied across the plates. The resulting current is measured and con-
verted to a conductivity measurement taking into account the cell
geometry (the area of each plate and the distance between them).

Conductivity can also be used to indicate the amount of total dissolved

solids (TDS) in a solution. Dissolved gases, minerals, and salts con-
tribute to the conductivity of a solution by increasing ion concentra-
tion. TDS measurement does not identify the specific dissolved solid
but gives an indication of total ion concentration. Dissolved solids mea-
surement is not absolute. Calibration for a specific type of dissolved
solids solution is not transferable to another type of dissolved solids
solution. A standard calibration solution containing the same type of
salts or mixture of salts as the sample solution must be used for cali-
bration.

371 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p372 7/25/06 11:29 AM Page 1

Model
HP Hand Pump
Generates Pressures up to 30 psi (2 bar), Single Hand Operation
Ø1-13/16
[46]

3-17/64
[83] MAX

5-29/32
[150]
QUICK CONNECT
FITTINGS

4-1/16
[103] MAX

Ø1-13/16
[46]

Model HP Hand Pump provides a dual source of pneu- SPECIFICATIONS

matic pressure and vacuum for verifying the calibration of Output Ranges: -25˝ Hg to 30 psi (-850 mbar to 2 bar).
pressure instrumentation. Pump can generate pressures
Process Connection: 1/4˝ female NPT (quick fit).
up to 30 psi (2 bar) and vacuum to -25˝ Hg (-850 mbar). The
compact pump is designed for portability and single hand Fine Adjustment: Better than 0.0015 psi (0.1mbar).
operation. Materials: Nickel plated brass and anodized aluminum.
Weight: 20 oz (587 g).
Model HP features a pressure relief valve and fine adjust-
ment for control better than 0.0015 psi (0.1 mbar). Pump
includes two 39˝ (1 m) hoses terminating in 1/4˝ female
NPT connections and instruction manual.

Model HP-1 Hand Pump

ACCESSORIES
Model HP-1K Service Kit
Model HP-1C Hard Case

Equipment
Model
A-396A Calibration Pump Test

Serves as pressure source to calibrate gages and transmitters or

to set pressure switches. Use with manometer or other pressure stan-
dard. Includes volume adjuster enabling fine pressure control and
bleed valve. Generates pressures from a fraction of an inch w.c. to 72
psig (5 bar). Includes barbed fitting, tee connector and three 36˝
lengths of vinyl tubing.

Model No. A-396A Calibration Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 372
pg373 7/25/06 11:31 AM Page 1

Model
PHP Pneumatic Hand Pump
Generates Pressures up to 600 psi (40 bar), Portable
Verify calibration of pressure transmitters, switches, controllers,
indicators, and recorders with Model PHP Pneumatic Hand Pump.
The Model PHP is a hand operated pump for sourcing pressure
and vacuum. Use in conjunction with an analog or digital gage
for a complete calibration system.

The unit provides output pressures up to 600 psi (40 bar) or vac-
uum down to -28.5˝ Hg (-0.960 bar). The reliable pump reaches
100 psi in 4 strokes. Model PHP is fitted with a fine adjustment
valve for precise volume control and an adjustable stroke to pro-
vide over pressure protection.

Model PHP includes a 39˝ (1 m) hose with a 1/4˝ female NPT

quick fit connector. The optional service kit includes seals, O-rings,
retaining screws and an allen key.

SPECIFICATIONS
Model PHP-1 Pneumatic Hand Pump Output Ranges: -28.5˝ Hg to 600 psi (-0.960 to 40 bar).
Process Connection: 1/4˝ female NPT (quick fit).
Accessories Gage Connection: 1/4˝ female NPT.
Model PHP-1K Service Kit Materials: Nickel plated brass, anodized aluminum, and
Model PHP-1C Hard Case nylon.
Weight: 1.4 lb (0.65 kg).

Model
HHP Hydraulic Hand Pump
Pressures up to 10,000 psi (700 bar), Oil or Water
Generate pressures up to 10,000 psi (700 bar) with Model HHP-
1 Hydraulic Hand Pump. Scissor action pump allows quick prim-
ing and pressure generation. Use in conjunction with an analog
or digital pressure gage for a complete calibration system.

The pump is designed with a large, see through reservoir with a

capacity of over 4 oz. A variety of fill liquids can be used includ-
ing mineral oil, distilled water, and alcohol. The sealed stainless
steel and tempered glass construction provide leak free opera-
tion.
Equipment

Model HHP offers adjustable over pressure protection, fine con-

Test

trol, and a unique selector switch to move from priming to high

pressure generation.

Model HHP-1 Hydraulic Hand Pump SPECIFICATIONS

Output Ranges: 0 to 10,000 psi (0 to 700 bar).
Accessories
Model HHP-1K Service Kit Process Connection: 1/4˝ female NPT (quick fit).
Model HHP-1C Hard Case Gage Connection: 1/4˝ female NPT.
Model HHP-6K High Pressure Hose Kit Materials: Stainless Steel and tempered glass.
Weight: 3.5 lb (1.6 kg).

373 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg374 7/25/06 11:33 AM Page 1

Model
UPT1000 Digital Hand-Held Universal T/C -
Process Indicator
Microprocessor Based, Programmable Resolution

FEATURES
• Microprocessor Based
• Standard ANSI Mini-jack Connector
• Detachable Screw Terminals
• °F, °C, or Process Variable Descriptors Selectable
• Programmable Resolution
• Peak and Valley Indication
• 20 Minute Auto-Power Off
• Backlit Display
• High Accuracy
• Sturdy Extruded Aluminum Case
• Made in USA

SPECIFICATIONS
Selectable Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC Voltage, or
DC current.
Input Impedance: Thermocouple = 3 megohms, Current
= 10 ohms, Voltage = 5000 ohms.
RTD Excitation Current: 200µA.
Display: Dual 4-1/2 digit LCD.
Accuracy: ±0.25% of span; ±1 least significant digit.
Maximum Overload: Current = 110 mA, Voltage = 25
The UPT1000 Digital Hand-Held Universal Thermocouple - Process VDC.
Indicator is a microprocessor based precisiongeneral-purpose ther-
Resolution: 1 count, 1 degree or 0.1 degree selectable.
mometer and process indicator designed for use
with a multitude of standard inputs. These inputs include Type J, K, T,
Drift Over Temperature: ±0.02% (200 ppm) per °C
E, R, S, B, and N Thermocouples as well as 100 ohm 2 or 3-wire typical, ±0.05% (500 ppm) maximum.
Platinum RTDs, 120 ohm Nickel RTDs, and 1000 ohm Platinum 2 wire Memory Backup: Non-Volatile EEprom.
RTDs. In addition to these temperature inputs the UPT1000 is capable Response Time: 2 readings per second.
of measuring current inputs (4-20 mAdc) and voltage inputs (0 – 10 Operating Temperature: 32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C).
Vdc) making it an ideal instrument for calibrating and validating a Humidity Conditions: 0 to 40% Non-Condensing.
variety of process instruments. Love Controls UPT1000 is a class lead- Power: 9V battery.
ing handheld indicator offering 0.25% full-scale accuracy over thirteen Battery Life: 200 hours typical.
common input ranges. The unit is packaged in a sturdy extruded alu-
Case Material: Anodized aluminum with plastic end caps.
minum case that will help to ensure years of service and dependabili-
ty. The UPT1000 is designed and manufactured in the USA and carries
Dimensions: 6.8˝L x 2.8˝W x 0.9˝D
a 1-year limited warranty. (172.7 x 71 x 22.9 mm).
Also available are a soft carrying case (L402-A), and a variety of ANSI
connectors and handheld temperature probes, offered in both kits or INPUTS Equipment
individually. INPUT TYPE RANGE °F RANGE °C Test
The UPT1000 is the ideal thermocouple thermometer for use in labo- Type J Thermocouple -100 to +1600 -73 to +871
ratories, factories, shops, and any location where accurate tempera- Type K Thermocouple -200 to +2500 -129 to +1371
ture measurement is required. Type T Thermocouple -350 to +750 -212 to +398
Type E Thermocouple -100 to +1800 -73 to +982
Type R Thermocouple 0 to 3200 -17 to +1760
UPT1000 Digital Hand-Held Universal
Type S Thermocouple 0 to 3200 -17 to +1760
Thermcouple - Process Indicator Type B Thermocouple +75 to +3308 +24 to +1820
Type N Thermocouple -100 to +2372 -73 to +1300
L402-A Soft Case 100 Ω Plt. 0.00385 DIN RTD -328 to 1607 -200 to +875
See Digital Thermocouple, Thermocouple Kits and Hand Held 100 Ω Plt. 0.00392 NIST RTD -328 to 1607 -200 to +875
Thermocouples. 120 Ω Nickel 0.00628 US RTD -112 to +608 -80 to +320
1000 Ω Plt. 0.00385 DIN RTD -328 to +1607 -200 to +875
Current/Voltage Scalable Units from -1999 to +9999.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 374
pg375 7/25/06 11:35 AM Page 1

Model
MC6 Multi-Cal Benchtop Calibrator
Interchangeable Ranges, ±0.05% Accuracy, Datalogging Capability, NIST Traceable
4
[101.6]
3-1/2
2.170 [88.9]
[55.12] 15/16
[23.80]
9/16 9-1/4 1-1/8
[14.27] [234.9] [28.57] 31/32
2.042 [24.60]
[51.87]
2.868
[72.85]
6-11/32
6-3/4 3-5/16 [161.1]
[171.4]
[84.12]

2.268 1-1/4
[57.61] [31.75] 9/64
1-1/2 [3.571]
[38.10]

Model MC6 Multi-Cal Benchtop Calibrator performs a wide SPECIFICATIONS

variety of simple and complex pressure based measurement, test, Service: Clean, dry, nonconductive, noncorrosive gases.
and calibration operations. Modular sensor design allows user to Accuracy: Differential Pressure Modules: ±0.06% FS, Gauge Pressure
select pressure measurement range for application flexibility. Modules: ±0.05% FS, Voltage Input: ±0.025% FS @ 0/10 VDC, ±0.10%
Calibrator can accommodate up to two interchangeable pressure FS @ 0/30 VDC, Current Input: ±0.03% FS @ 0/20 mA, ±0.05% FS @
modules (sold separately below) in any combination of range or accu- 0/50 mA.
Sensitivity: ±0.002% of span with dampening 1 part in 50,000 (max).
racy.
Repeatability: Ranges ≤0/2 psi: ±0.05% of span, Ranges ≥0/5 psi:
Simultaneously display two separate measurements on the two line, ±0.02% of span.
alphanumeric display. Readings can be displayed in a choice of twelve Output: RS232 serial interface, 9-pin.
preprogrammed engineering units or any single user-defined unit. Alarm Output: SPST form C 110 VDC, 120 VDC (max.), 1 A (max), 30 W,
Calibrator features min/max recall, hi/lo alarm, percentage of full 62.5 VA (resistive).
scale pressure readings, mA/voltage measurement, leak rate and Display: Alphanumeric LCD, 0.37˝ (9.5 mm) height per line, 2 lines, 16
pressure decay measurement, switch testing capabilities, including characters/line.
trip point and dead band, and velocity/volume flow rates. Display Update: 100 msec.
Quickly document calibration procedures using the data logging fea- Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C).
ture which stores up to 384 sets of pressure and time/date stamped Storage Temperature: -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C).
Process Connection: 1/8˝ female NPT.
measurements. The automatic % error calculation simplifies trans-
Electrical Connections: Standard banana jacks.
mitter calibration. Easily upload stored data to an IBM compatible Power Supply: 110 VAC/60 Hz adapter, 500 mA.
computer via the RS232 two-way communications port. Calibrators Engineering Units: in H2O, psi, in Hg, kPa, mbar, bar, cm H2O, mm Hg,
and modules include certification to NIST traceability—ideal as a sec- ftSW, MPa, mmH2O, kgcm2 and user-defined.
ondary standard for calibrating pressure equipment. Overpressure: Differential Pressure Modules: 50 psi positive direction, 15
Multi-Cal Pressure Calibrator includes utility software, protection psi negative direction, Gauge Pressure Modules: 2x range (0/5 psi to
module, adjustable handle, AC adapter, and instruction manual. 0/1000 psi).
Temperature Compensation: 20 to 120°F (-7 to 49°C).
Temperature Error: Maximum of ±0.004% of span per °F over compen-
sated range for zero and span.
Temperature Effect Electrical Measurement: ±0.001% of span per °F
Model No. MC6 Benchtop Calibrator over compensated range.
Dampening: (Measurement averaging) programmable from 0 to 16 con-
secutive readings.
Multi-Cal Pressure Modules are interchangeable and available in a Baud Rate: 300, 1200, 2400, or 9600, selectable.
wide selection of pressure ranges and accuracies. Benchtop calibrator Computer Requirements: IBM compatible 386 or above and Windows®
accepts up to two pressure modules. Modules include NIST calibration
Equipment

3.1 or later with 2mB RAM and 2mB hard drive disk space, one serial
certification. port.
Test

Housing Material: ABS plastic.

MODELS Weight: Calibrator: 3.0 lb (1.4 kg), Pressure Module: 0.5 lb (0.3 kg).
Model Agency Approvals: CE.
Range
Number
MC1000 0.25˝ H2O Differential Pressure, ±0.07
MC1001 0.50˝ H2O Differential Pressure, ±0.07 APPLICATIONS
MC1004 5.00˝ H2O Differential Pressure, ±0.06
MC1006 25˝ H2O Differential Pressure, ±0.06
Pressure measurement for clean room control, filter performance
MC2010 5.0 psig Gauge Pressure, ±0.05 monitoring, HVAC testing and setup, draft measurement, airflow
MC2012 15.0 psig Gauge Pressure, ±0.05 measurement control, differential pressure measurement in lami-
MC2016 100.0 psig Gauge Pressure, ±0.05 nar flowhoods, paint booths, industrial ovens and fume hoods. Use
as a secondary standard for calibrating pressure equipment.
Options-Consult factory for other pressure ranges and accuracies.

Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

375 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg376 7/25/06 11:36 AM Page 1

Series
MC Multi-Cal Pressure Calibrator
Interchangeable Ranges, ±0.05% Accuracy, Datalogging Capability, NIST Traceable
MODULES INSERTED HERE

2.170 1/2 4-1/4

[55.12] [12.70] [108.0] 3-1/4
[82.55]

2.042
[51.87]
2.868
[72.85]
7-7/8
[200.0]

2.268
[57.61] 3-1/4 1-3/4
[82.55] [44.45]

Series MC Portable Multi-Cal Pressure Calibrator performs a SPECIFICATIONS

wide variety of simple and complex pressure based measurement, Service: Clean, dry, nonconductive, noncorrosive gases.
test, and calibration operations. Modular sensor design allows user to
Accuracy: Differential Pressure Modules: ±0.06% FS, Gauge Pressure
select pressure measurement range for application flexibility. Modules: ±0.05% FS, Voltage Input: ±0.025% FS @ 0/10 VDC, ±0.10%
Calibrator can accommodate up to two interchangeable pressure FS @ 0/30 VDC, Current Input: ±0.03% FS @ 0/20 mA, ±0.05% FS @
modules (sold separately below) in any combination of range or accu- 0/50 mA.
racy. Sensitivity: ±0.002% of span with dampening 1 part in 50,000 (max).
Simultaneously display two separate measurements on the two line, Repeatability: Ranges ≤0/2 psi: ±0.05% of span, Ranges ≥0/5 psi:
alphanumeric display. Readings can be displayed in a choice of 12 pre- ±0.02% of span.
programmed engineering units or any single user-defined unit. Output: RS232 serial interface, 9-pin.
Calibrator features min/max recall, hi/lo alarm, percentage of full Alarm Output: SPST form C 110 VDC, 120 VDC (max.), 1 A (max), 30 W,
scale pressure readings, mA/voltage measurement, leak rate and 62.5 VA (resistive).
pressure decay measurement, switch testing capabilities, including Display: Alphanumeric LCD, 0.37" (9.5 mm) height per line, 2 lines, 16
trip point and dead band, and velocity/volume flow rates. characters/line.
Quickly document calibration procedures using the data logging fea- Display Update: 100 msec.
ture which stores up to 384 sets of pressure and time/date stamped Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C).
measurements. Easily upload stored data to an IBM compatible com- Storage Temperature: –4 to 158°F (–20 to 70°C).
puter via the RS232 port. Calibrators and modules include certifica- Process Connection: 1/8” female NPT.
tion to NIST traceability—ideal as a secondary standard for calibrat-
Electrical Connections: Miniature recessed banana jacks.
ing pressure equipment.
Power Requirements: Internal: two 9 VDC alkaline batteries, External:
Multi-Cal Pressure Calibrator includes utility software, test leads, AC adapter 9 VDC, 500 mA.
protection module, adjustable hand strap, AC adapter, two 9V bat- Battery Life: 30 hours (approximate).
teries, instruction manual, and hard carrying case.
Engineering Units: inH2O, psi, inHg, kPa, mbar, cmH2O, mmHg, and
user-defined.
Overpressure: Differential Pressure Modules: 50 psi positive direction, 15
psi negative direction, Gage Pressure Modules: 2x range (0/5 psi to
Model Number MC2K Handheld Calibrator 0/1000 psi).
Model Number CP40 Serial Printer
Temperature Compensation: 20 to 120°F (–7 to 49°C).
Multi-Cal Pressure Modules are interchangeable and available Temperature Error: Maximum of ±0.004% of span per °F over compen-
in a wide selection of pressure ranges and accuracies. Handheld sated range for zero and span.
calibrator accepts up to two pressure modules. Modules include Temperature Effect Electrical Measurement: ±0.001% of span per °F Equipment
NIST calibration certification. over compensated range. Test
MODELS Dampening: (Measurement averaging) programmable from 0 to 16 con-
secutive readings.
MODEL RANGE Baud Rate: 300, 1200, 2400, or 9600, selectable.
NUMBER
Housing Material: ABS plastic.
MC1000 0.25" H O Differential Pressure, ±0.07
2

MC1001 0.50" H O Differential Pressure, ±0.07

2 Weight: Calibrator: 2.2 lb (1.3 kg), Pressure Module: 0.5 lb (0.3 kg).
MC1004 5.00" H O Differential Pressure, ±0.06
2 Agency Approvals: CE.
MC1006 25" H O Differential Pressure, ±0.06
2

MC2010 5.0 psig Gauge Pressure, ±0.05

MC2012 15.0 psig Gauge Pressure, ±0.05 APPLICATIONS
MC2016 100.0 psig Gauge Pressure, ±0.05 Pressure measurement for clean room control, filter performance
monitoring, HVAC testing and setup, draft measurement, airflow
Options-Consult factory for other pressure ranges and accuracies. FM measurement control, differential pressure measurement in laminar
approved models are also available. flowhoods, paint booths, industrial ovens and fume hoods. Use as a
secondary standard for calibrating pressure equipment.
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 376
pg377 7/25/06 11:46 AM Page 1

Model
CA10 Thermocouple Calibrator
Accepts Type K Thermocouples, High/Low Alarm, Selectable Resolution

7.60
[193]

3.60 2.10
[91] [53]

Dual function CA10 Thermocouple Calibrator can be SPECIFICATIONS Ambient Operating Temperature:
Measurement Range: -40 to 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C) max 80% RH.
used to source Type K thermocouple output values or measure 1400°F (-40 to 760°C), selectable. Storage Temperature: -4 to 140°F
Type K thermocouples. Quickly select output value using the Thermocouple Input: Type K. (-20 to 60°C) max 70% RH.
Input Protection: 24 VDC or 24 VAC Thermocouple Connection:
rotary switch with coarse and fine adjustments. Model CA10 rms max input voltage on any combi- Standard female mini-connector.
accepts up to two Type K thermocouples and features data hold nation of input pins. Power Requirements: 9V Alkaline
Accuracy: ±0.1% rdg. + 2°F on -40 (included).
and max functions. Measurements are displayed on a 3-1/2 digit to 1400°F; ±0.1% rdg. +1°C on -40 Battery Life: 200 hours typical.
backlit display. Units include a 4˝ (100 m) Type K bead wire to 760°C, over operating temperature Temperature Coefficient: 0.1 times
of 64 to 82°F (18 to 28°C). the applicable accuracy specification
temperature probe, calibration cable, 9V battery and instruc- Output Range: -328 to 2192°F per °F from 32 to 64°F and 82 to
tion manual. (-210 to 1200°C). 122°F (0 to 18°C and 28 to 50°C).
Display: 0.8˝ (20 mm) height, 3-1/2- Housing Material: ABS plastic.
digit LCD with switchable back light. Weight: 15.5 oz (440 g).
Model CA10 Thermocouple Calibrator Resolution: Selectable 1° or 0.1°. Agency Approvals: CE.
Reading Rate: 2.5 times/second.

Model
CA20 Thermocouple Calibrator
Accepts Type J Thermocouples, High/Low Alarm, Selectable Resolution

7.60
[193]
Equipment

3.60 2.10
[91]
Test

[53]

Dual function CA20 Thermocouple Calibrator can be used to SPECIFICATIONS Ambient Operating Temperature:
Measurement Range: -40 to 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C) max 80%
source Type J thermocouple output values or measure Type J 1400°F (-40 to 760°C), selectable. RH.
thermocouples. Quickly select output value using the rotary Thermocouple Input: Type J. Storage Temperature: -4 to 140°F
Input Protection: 24 VDC or 24 (-20 to 60°C) max 70% RH.
switch with coarse and fine adjustments. Model CA20 accepts VAC rms max input voltage on any Thermocouple Connection:
up to two Type J thermocouples and features data hold and combination of input pins. Standard female mini-connector.
Accuracy: ±0.1% rdg. +2°F on -40 Power Requirements: 9V Alkaline
max functions. Measurements are displayed on a 31/2-digit to 1400°F; ±0.1% rdg. +1°C on -40 (Included).
backlit display. Units include a 4˝ (100 m) Type J bead wire tem- to 760°C, over operating temperature Battery Life: 200 hours typical.
of 64 to 82°F (18 to 28°C). Temperature Coefficient: 0.1 times
perature probe, calibration cable, 9V battery and instruction Output Range: -328 to 2192°F the applicable accuracy specification
manual. (-210 to 1200°C). per °F from 32 to 64°F and 82 to
Display: 0.8˝ (20 mm) height, 31/2- 122°F (0 to 18°C and 28 to 50°C).
digit LCD with switchable back light. Housing Material: ABS plastic.
Model CA20 Thermocouple Calibrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolution: Selectable 1° or 0.1°. Weight: 15.5 oz (440 g).
Reading Rate: 2.5 times/second. Agency Approvals: CE.

377 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg378 7/26/06 4:10 PM Page 1

Model
CAL30 Process Calibrator
Measures and Generates DC Voltage, mV and Current, Programmable

3.500
[88.9]

6.000 2.000
[152.4] [50.8]

Calibrate electronic process instruments such as controllers, trans- SPECIFICATIONS Display: 24-character LCD,
mitters, or recorders with model CAL30 Process Calibrator. Model Input Ranges: Voltage: -10 3/16”(5 mm) character
CAL30 is designed to independently measure and simulate DC volts,
mV, and current. These calibrators simulate a two-wire field trans- to 24 mV DC; -10 to 120 mV height.
mitter and generate a controlled output current when connected to DC (autoranging); 0 to 12 Indication: Up to 5 digits
an external power supply. Units source a four-wire transmitter by VDC; Current: 0 to 24 mA depending on range.
generating a controlled 4-20 mA DC from an external 25 V power DC. Warm-up Time: 60 sec-
supply. Input Impedance: 1 MΩ onds, maximum.
Programmable functions, such as square root extraction for flow sig- minimum plus 10 nano- Ambient Operating
nals, ramp/step increment value, selectable engineering units, iso- Amps maximum for V and Temperature: -4 to 113°F
lated signal conversion or automatic changing of the output value mV inputs; 40Ω for mA DC. (-20 to 45°C).
simplify many calibration tasks. Calibration values can be stored and Accuracy: ±0.025% of Electrical Connections:
recalled using the Low, Mid, or High keys. Program the automatic
shut-off to conserve battery life. range. Standard banana jacks on
Output Ranges: 0 to 120.0 3/4”(19 mm) centers.
The Model CAL30 Calibrator features 500 VDC input/output isola- mV DC (2KΩ min. load); 0 to Power Requirements:
tion and reverse polarity protection. The unit includes three 9V bat- 12.0 VDC (2KΩ min. load); 0 Three 9V alkaline (included).
teries, two sets of dual test leads, a dual binding post adapter, car-
rying case, and instruction manual. to 24.0 mA DC (25 volts exci- Battery Life: 100 hours,
tation). approx.
Model CAL30 Process Calibrator Input/Output Isolation: 500 Weight: 1.15 lb (0.52 kg).
VDC. Agency Approvals: CE.

Model
LC21 Smart Loop Calibrator
Sources and Reads Milliamps, Auto-Stepping, Auto-Ramping
.840
[21.3]

4.880
[124]

3.000
[76.2]

Perform field calibration of 2-wire transmitters, receivers, recorders, Ambient Operating Temperature:
and controllers with Model LC21 Smart Loop Calibrator. The portable
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Range: 0 to 21.00 mA. 14 to 122°F (-10 to 50°C), Storage: Equipment
LC21 calibrator sources 24 VDC, reads 0 to 21.00 milliamps and simu- Accuracy: ±0.05% of range. -65 to 260°F (-54 to 126°C). Test
lates 2-wire transmitters. Unit features continuous output or fixed step Output Range: 0 to 21.00 mA. Electrical Connections: 13˝ (33 cm)
current output. Use fixed calibration currents to test and calibrate equip- length.
Fixed Steps: Output in mA
ment or to control valve stroking. Output currents can be changed man- 4-20mA lin:4-8-12-16-20, Power Requirements: Four AA 1.5V
ually or automatically. The LC21 calibrator can source or simulate con- 0-20mA lin: 0-5-10-15-20, alkaline batteries.
tinuous up/down cycling between 4 and 20 mA or 0 and 20 mA—ideal for 4-20mA sq. rt (flow):4-5-8-13-20, Battery Life: Sources 12 mA: 13
0-20mA sq. rt (flow):0-1.25-5-11.25- hours; Measures: 64 hours.
endurance testing. Display readings in mA or in % of 4-20 mA or 0-20mA. Internal Loop Power: 24 VDC stabi-
Unit includes carrying case, batteries, spare fuse, and manual. 20,
4-20mA valve: 3.8-4-4.2-12-19-20- lized.
21. External Loop Power: 56 VDC
Fixed Step Interval: 10 seconds in maximum.
auto-stepping mode. Drive Capability: 900Ω.
Model LC21 Smart Loop Calibrator
Auto-Ramping Interval: 60 Housing Material: High impact ABS
Accessories seconds between limits. Weight: 9 oz (285 g).
No. LC21-110, 110 VAC Adapter Resolution: 10 microamps. Agency Approvals: CE.
No. LC21-230, 230 VAC Adapter Temperature Effect: 0.0015% per
°F, 0.003% per °C.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 378
pg379 7/25/06 11:54 AM Page 1

Model
ASG Analog Signal Generator
Ramp Function, Bar Graph LED, Selectable Auto Shut Off

4-45/64
[119.4]
POCKET CLIP

EXTERNAL POWER
mA SOURCE
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE OUTPUT
mA TWO-WIRE
TRANSMITTER
OUTPUT 55/64 2-13/32
[21.6] [61.0]
PROGRAMMING BUTTONS

The pocket size model ASG Analog Signal Generator is an SPECIFICATIONS

ideal tool for troubleshooting transmitters, transducers, motors and ac- Impedance: Voltage: 1000Ω min. Current: 300Ω max.
tuators. The unit generates a 0 to 10 VDC signal in increments of 1 volt Output: 0 to 20 mA (2 mA increments).
or a 4 to 20 mA signal in increments of 2 mA. An LED bar graph visu- 0-10 VDC (1 VDC increments).
ally indicates analog signal level. The model ASG will also continuous- Resolution: 2 mA (current). 1 VDC (voltage).
ly ramp to user defined maximum and minimum values with user Ramping Time Intervals: 2 to 20 sec (2 sec increments).
defined ramp interval timing. Units are furnished with 6 ft (1.8 m) Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
leads with alligator clips, 120 VAC plug in adapter protective carrying Power Requirements: 9-Volt battery or 120 VAC (provided).
case and instruction manual. Auto Shutoff Times: 2 to 20 min. (2 min. increments)
(6 minute default).
Electrical Connections: 6 ft (1.8 m) with alligator clips.
Weight: 3.2 oz (without battery).
Agency Approvals: CE.
Model ASG Analog Signal Generator

Model
MM10 Digital Multimeter
Measures DC /AC Voltage, DC Current and Resistance, Overload Protection
2.750
DISPLAY [69.85]

Ω 20m OFF 600 ACV

2m 200
DCV
200K 600
20K 200
2K/Æ+ 20 5.000
200/ 2

LED + PNP
-
NPN/LED 2m 20m
200m [127.0]
E B C E 10A DCA
MAX MAX
DC 600V 10A
AC 600V MAX
500V
VΩmA ! COM 10A
!

R MM10
1.000
[25.4]

Our compact, low cost Model MM10 Digital Multimeter is ideal for SPECIFICATIONS CONTINUITY TEST
Equipment

DC VOLTAGE Range: < 30Ω. Resolution: 0.1Ω.

general electrical testing and troubleshooting. This full function multi- Ranges: 2V, 20V, 200V, 600V. DIODE TEST
Test

meter measures DC and AC voltage to 600V, DC current to 10A and re- Resolution: 1 mV, 10 mV, 100 mV, 1V. Resolution: 1 mV.
sistance to 20MΩ. In addition to volts, amps and ohms, this meter Accuracy: 2V: ±(0.5% + 1 digit); 20 to Test Current: 1 mA.
600V: ±(1.5% + 1 digit). TRANSISTOR (hFE) TEST
includes audible continuity, diode, LED and transistor hFE tests. The AC VOLTAGE Type: NPN, PNP.
3-1/2 digit LCD features automatic polarity correction, low battery and Ranges: 200V, 600V. Range: 0-1000.
overload indication. Rugged, high impact case comes equipped with Resolution: 100mV, 1V. LED TEST
Accuracy: 200V: ±(2% + 3 digits); 600V: Test Voltage: < 3V.
built-in tilt-stand for versatile, hands-free operation. Overload protect- Range: 1.5 - 3V.
±(2.5% + 3 digits).
ed to 600VAC/600VDC for voltage ranges and to 500VAC/500VDC for RESISTANCE GENERAL
resistance, diode and continuity test ranges. Current ranges are pro- Ranges: 200Ω, 2kΩ, 20kΩ, 200kΩ, Display: 3-1/2 digit LCD with a
tected by 0.5A/250V, replaceable fuse. Multimeter is furnished with 2MΩ, 20MΩ. maximum reading of 1999.
Accuracy: 200Ω: ±(2% + 2 digits); 2kΩ Sampling Rate: 2.5 times per second.
22˝ test leads, 9V battery and instruction manual. to 2MΩ: ±(1.5% + 2 digits); 20MΩ: Ambient Operating Temperature: 32
±(2.5% + 2 digits). to 104°F (0 to 40°C), 0 to 80% RH;
DC CURRENT Storage Temperature: 14 to 140°F
Ranges: 2 mA, 20 mA, 200 mA, 10A. (-10 to 60°C), 0 to 80% RH.
Resolution: 1µA, 10µA, 100µA, 10 mA. Power Requirements: One 9V battery.
Model MM10 Digital Multimeter Battery Life: 150 hrs. approx.
Accuracy: 2 to 200 mA: ±(1.5% + 1
digit); 10A: ±(2% + 1 digit). Weight: 5.2 oz (150 g).
Agency Approvals: CE.

379 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg380 7/25/06 11:59 AM Page 1

Series
TAC Pocket Tachometer
Non-Contact, Operation up to 30” (76 cm), Autoranging, NIST Certified
2.400 Measurement Ranges
.148
[61]
[4] Model TAC1 Model TAC2K
Speed Ranges
Optical 5-100,000 rpm 5-100,000 rpm
Contact 5-20,000 w/ optional TAC1-1 2.5-20,000 rpm
3.269 Linear Menu
[83]
Inches/Min* 5-20,000 (in/min only) 10-40,000
5.747 Feet/Min* N/A 0.825-3,900
[146] Yards/Min* N/A 0.275-1,200
Centimeters/Min* N/A 25-120,000
Meters/Min* N/A 0.25-1,200
Totalizer/Counter N/A 1-999,999 counts
99 Hrs, 59 Min,
R .830 Timer (Stopwatch) N/A
[21] 59 Sec, 0.01 Sec
*Also reads units per second and per hour.
Take non-contact, contact and linear speed measurements of saw blades, SPECIFICATIONS
grinders, engines, motors and conveyor belts with the versatile Series TAC Accuracy: Non-contact: ±0.01% of reading; Contact: ±0.5% of reading.
Pocket Tachometer. Unique ergonomic design provides direct line-of-sight view- Display: 6-digit alphanumeric LCD, 0.39 H.
ing of display and target. Easy-to-read 6-digit LCD also displays on-target and Resolution: TAC1:1 rpm; TAC2K: User-selectable from 0.0001 to 1 rpm.
low battery indication. Max. Measuring Distance: 30˝ (76 cm) and up to 30˚ from perpendicular.
General purpose, Model TAC1 is designed to make non-contact measurements
of rotational speeds or contact measurements when equipped with the optional Ambient Operating Temperature: 41 to 104˚F (5 to 40˚C).
TAC1-1 Contact Tip Assembly. Model TAC1 comes complete with padded case, Power Requirements: One 9V alkaline battery (included).
battery and 6˝ (15 cm) of reflective tape. Weight: 6 oz (170 g).
Model TAC2K is a 30 function tachometer, totalizer/counter and timer. This Agency Approvals: CE.
tachometer stores min, max and last measurement in memory and is program-
mable to read in English or Metric units. Optional TAC2K-91 Remote Optical Accessories
Sensor allows this unit to measure rpm in hard to reach locations. Model TAC2K Model TAC1-1, Contact Tip Assembly for TAC1 only.
comes with a plastic case, contact tip assembly, linear speed wheel, battery, and Includes adapter, concave tip, and convex tip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 ft (1.5 m) of reflective tape. Model TAC2K-91, Remote Optical Sensor for TAC2K only.
Model TAC1 Pocket Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Includes mounting bracket and 5 ft (1.5 m) cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model TAC2K Pocket Tachometer Plus Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model TAC-5, Reflective Tape, 5 ft (1.5 m) roll, 1/2˝ (13 mm) wide . . . . . . .

Model
PHO-1 pH/ORP/Temperature Meter
0 to 14 pH, Automatic Temperature Compensation, Data Logging
3-5/16
(84.14)

2
(50.8)

2-31/32
(74.9)

7-11/32
(186.20)

2-13/16 1-5/8
(71.4) (41.2)

Equipment
The microprocessor based pH/ORP/Temperature Meter offers quick SPECIFICATIONS Operating Humidity: Max. 80% Test
response and high accuracy. Simultaneously measure and display pH from 0 to Input: pH electrode with BNC RH.
14 pH (0 to 1999 mV) and temperatures up to 200°F (100°C). Model PHO-1 connector, temperature probe. Sampling Rate: About 1.5
meter features manual or automatic temperature compensation, auto buffer Range: pH: 0.00 to 14.00 pH; time/sec.
recognition, and data logging capabilities, and the recording interval can be mV: 0 to 1999 mV. Battery LIfe: Approximately 120
defined by the user. The Model PHO-1 accepts any pH electrode with a BNC Temperature: 32 to 200°F (0 to hours.
connector. 100°C). Power Supply: Six “AA” batteries.
For additional convenience, select model PHO-1K kit, which contains a meter, Operating Temperature: 32 to Power Current: Approximately
RS-232 cable, batteries, software, pH electrode, temperature probe, gender 122°F (0 to 50°C). 20 mA DC.
changer, carrying case and manual. Compensated Temperature Data Output: RS-232 PC serial
Limit: Manual (MTC): 32 to 200°F interface.
SPECIFICATIONS (0 to 100°C); Automatic (ATC): 32 Dimension: 7.4˝ x 2.9˝ x 2˝ (187
Measurement Range Resolution Accuracy to 200°F (0 to 100°C). mm x 73 mm x 53 mm).
pH 0 to 14 pH 0.001 pH ±0.01 pH Weight: 1 lb (.45 kg) meter only.
0 to 600 mV ±(0.05% + 1 digit)
mV
601 mV to 1999 mV 0.1 mV ±0.1% PHO-1, pH/ORP/Temperature Meter
Temp (°C) 0 to 100°C 0.1°C ±0.5°C PHO-1K, pH/ORP/Temperature Kit
Temp (°F) 32 to 200°F 0.1°F ±0.9°F
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 380
pg381 7/25/06 12:04 PM Page 1

Model
WPH2 Pocket Sized pH Tester
±0.1 pH Accuracy, Automatic Temperature Compensation, 3-pt Calibration

Ø.875 Ø1.500
[22.22] [38.10]

6.600
[167.64]

Take fast, stable and repeatable readings with the Model WPH2 SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements: Three 1.5V
Pocket Sized pH Tester. This microprocessor based instrument con- Range: -1.0 to 15.00 pH. alkaline batteries (included).
sistently delivers readings within ±0.1 pH. One-, two- or three-point Accuracy: ±0.1 pH. Battery Life: 24 hrs continuous
push button calibration at pH 4.0, 7.0 and 10.0 let you calibrate the Display: 2-1/2 -digit, 5/16˝ (8 mm) use.
tester to a value near your sample to provide application versatility and high LCD. Calibration: 1, 2 or 3-point @ 4.0,
better accuracy. Temperature compensation automatically corrects Resolution: 0.1 pH. 7.0, or 10.0 pH.
the reading for a more accurate measurement. Hold feature permits Ambient Operating Reference Type: Ag/AgCl.
you to hold a reading until it can be logged. Tester turns off after 8-1/2 Temperature: 32 to 122°F (0 to Housing: Polybutylene
minutes with the Auto-Off feature. Low battery, over range and incor- terephthalate (PBT).
50°C).
rect calibration error message are displayed on the large easy-to-read Weight: 4.5 oz (125 g).
Compensated Temperature
LCD. Agency Approvals: CE.
Range: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
Model WPH2 Pocket Sized pH Tester
APPLICATIONS
ACCESSORIES Quick and easy pH checks in Water Conditioning Plants, Cooling Towers,
WPH25 Replacement Electrode for WPH2 Plating and Finishing Operations, Wastewater Treatment Plants and
Food Processing Plants.

Model
WPH1 Waterproof Pocket Size pH Tester
Push Button Calibration, 0.1 pH Resolution, 0.2 pH Accuracy

Ø.875 Ø1.500
[22.22] [38.10]

6.600
[167.64]

Accurately measure the alkaline or acidity levels of your solution SPECIFICATIONS Battery Life: 24 hrs
with the Model WPH Waterproof pH Tester. With a push of a single continuous use.
Equipment

Range: -1.0 to 15.00 pH.

button, calibrate Model WPH to meet your buffer standard of 4.0, 7.0 Accuracy: ±0.2 pH. Calibration: Single-point @
or 10.0 pH. Waterproof housing provides IP67 protection and will float
Test

Display: 2-1/2 -digit, 5/16˝ 4.0, 7.0 or 10.0 pH.

if accidentally dropped. Built-in loop on battery compartment is ideal
for attaching lanyard. Double O-ring sealed, replaceable sensor helps (8 mm) high LCD. Reference Type: Ag/AgCl.
prevent contamination and extends the life of the tester. Standard fea- Resolution: 0.1 pH. Housing Material:
tures include automatic shut-off after 8-1/2 minutes of inactivity, dis- Ambient Operating Polybutylene terephthalate
play hold, low battery, over range and incorrect calibration indication. Temperature: 32 to 122°F (PBT).
(0 to 50°C). Weight: 4.5 oz (125 g).
Power Requirements: Three Agency Approvals: CE.
Model WPH1 Waterproof pH Tester 1.5V alkaline batteries
(included).
ACCESSORIES
Model WPH15 Replacement Electrode for WPH1 APPLICATIONS
Water quality testing in pools, spas, aquariums, hydroponics, ecology
studies, water and wastewater treatment, boiler/steam generators,
printing and chemical industries, sanitation plants and labs.

381 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg382 7/25/06 12:05 PM Page 1

Series
TDS Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) Tester
±1% FS Accuracy, Automatic Temperature Compensation, Replaceable Sensor

Ø.875 Ø1.500
[22.22] [38.10]

6.600
[167.64]

Take precise measurements of total dissolved solids with Series SPECIFICATIONS Compensated Temperature
TDS. Lightweight and compact, these testers are ideal for field testing Wetted Materials: 316 SS and Range: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
glass reinforced thermoplastic Power Requirements: Four 1.5V
of TDS concentrations. Large easy-to-read LCD displays the full scale polyester. alkaline batteries (included).
readout in ppm (parts per million)—no additional calculations are Range: TDS2: 0 to 1990 ppm; Battery Life: 140 hrs. continuous.
required to obtain actual test values. Durable 316 SS Electrodes pro- TDS3: 0 to 10.00 ppt. Calibration: 1-point push button
vide excellent chemical compatibility. Automatic temperature compen- Accuracy: ±1% FS. calibration.
Display: 3-1/2 -digit LCD, 5/16˝ Calibration Standard Range:
sation from 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C) ensures reliable, repeatable (8 mm) high. TDS2: 300 to 1990 ppm; TDS3: 3
results. Additional features include flip-up battery compartment, stur- Resolution: TDS2: 10 ppm; to 10.00 ppt.
dy pocket clip, and a splash-resistant membrane keypad. TDS3: 0.10 ppt. Weight: 4.5 oz (125 g).
Ambient Operating Agency Approvals: CE.
Temperature: 32 to 122°F (0 to
Series TDS2 TDS Tester, 0-1990 ppm 50°C).
Series TDS3 TDS Tester, 0-10.00 ppm
TDS15 Replacement Sensor APPLICATIONS
Testing pollution controls, water treatment systems, testing for water hard-
ness, hydroponics, and fertilizer/chemical concentrations.

Series
EC Conductivity Tester
Waterproof, ±1% FS Accuracy, Large Easy to Read Display

Ø.875 Ø1.500
[22.22] [38.10]

6.600
[167.64]

Monitor conductivity levels quickly and easily with Series EC SPECIFICATIONS Compensated Temperature
Conductivity Testers. These pocket-sized testers are ideal for conduc- Wetted Materials: 316 SS and Range: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C). Equipment
tivity measurements in the lab, industrial plant or out in the field. glass reinforced thermoplastic Power Requirements: Four 1.5V Test
Series EC measures conductivity from 0 to 1990 micromhos (μS) or 0 polyester. alkaline batteries (included).
to 19.90 milliohms (mS). The reading is displayed on a large 3-1/2-digit Range: EC1: 0 to 1990 µS; EC2: Battery Life: 140 hrs. continuous.
LCD. Splash-proof membrane keypad prevents water damage. Glass 0 to 19.90 mS. Calibration: 1-point push button
reinforced thermoplastic polyester housing and 316 SS electrodes Accuracy: ±1% FS. calibration.
withstand most chemicals. Since conductivity changes with tempera- Display: 3-1/2-digit LCD, 5/16˝ Calibration Standard Range:
ture, units feature automatic temperature compensation from 32 to (8 mm) high. EC1: 300 to 1990 µS, EC2: 3 to
122°F (0 to 50°C) to ensure accurate results. Resolution: EC1:10 µS; 19.90 ms.
EC2: 0.10 mS. Weight: 4.5 oz (125 g).
Ambient Operating Limits: 32 to Agency Approvals: CE.
Series EC1 Conductivity Tester, 0-1990 µS 122°F (0 to 50°C).
Series EC2 Conductivity Tester, 0-19.90 mS
TDS15 Replacement Sensor
APPLICATIONS
Monitor conductivity levels quickly and accurately to determine water hard-
ness, check pollution control, recirculating systems, and waste water.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 382
pg383 7/25/06 12:56 PM Page 1

®
Model
M SAFE-T-OHM Shoe Tester
For Electrostatic Dissipating (ESD) Footwear ®

• Dual foot plates provide increased accu-

racy and dependability
• Quick and Easy to Use for All Personnel
• Direct Reading Analog Scale and Dual
LED Go/No-Go Indicators
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements: 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Protective Circuitry: UL approved Class ll transformer, one megohm
current limiting resistors in series with each shoe plate.
Accuracy: ±1% at both minimum and maximum of range.
Size and Weight: 12 x 17 inches (30.5 x 43.2 cm); 8 Ib (3.5 kg)
Installation: Clean, dry, static-free floor. Carpeting not recommended.

MODELS
Simply stand on the heavy-duty sandblasted aluminum
Model Number Megohm Range*
foot plates and the SAFE-T-OHM® shoe tester automatically mea-
M-1 2-20
sures the resistance of your ESD footwear. It provides an accu- M-2 20-200
rate direct readout on a full-range, color coded scale and M-3 200-2000
"Go/No-Go" status-at-a-glance with dual LED indicators which are *All scales read zero to infinite resistance. Megohm Range indicates the limits of acceptable re-
sistances as shown in green on the color coded scale. Select the appropriate model for the re-
calibrated at common ESD threshold levels. The Model M com- sistance rating of the ESD footwear specified for use in your facility.
bines rugged design with solid-state technology tailored for the
Accessories (order separately)
demands of the electronics industry where accurate, dependable A-133; Rubber Shoe Cleaning Tray
static control monitoring is essential. A-134; Shoe Cleaner Pad

Model
TR-7 SAFE-T-GROUND
Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Ground and Continuity Control ®

plosion, compared to single wire grounding, which cannot measure the

quality of the electrical ground connection during loading. The transis-
torized TR-7 circuit generates little heat – an added safety feature.
The Model TR-7 Safe-T-Ground is simple and easy to install. Removal
of the cover on the explosion-proof aluminum housing reveals the easily
accessible terminal strip for relay and ground control wiring, and a com-
plete schematic wiring diagram appears on a label next to the terminal
strip for easy wiring. Coiled grounding cable/contactor-handle assem-
bly is easily replaced via mil-spec connector on housing.

SPECIFICATIONS
Housing: 356-T6 Cast aluminum alloy (copper-free), explosion-proof –
Class I, Group D.
Size: 6-5/8˝ W x 10-3/8˝ H x 5-5/8˝ D.
Power Requirements: 105-125 VAC, 60 Hz. 7.75 watts – with light,
Equipment

1.75 watts – without lights.

TR-7L pictured Electrical Rating, Relay: DPDT, 10 amps, 125 VAC, 60 Hz. contact rat-
Test

ing. Optional 220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz - call factory.

Model TR-7 Safe-T-Ground provides continuous monitoring of a Wiring Hookup: On terminal strip.
truck’s ground connection throughout loading operations. Static elec- Conduit Connection: 3/4˝ NPT
tricity is often brought in by tank trucks entering the loading area. The Installation: 7/16˝ mounting lugs, integrally cast.
Safe-T-Ground Model TR-7 instantly stops loading operations if a tank Contactor: (Grounding clamp) molded polyethylene with beryllium
truck loses its ground. The simple but rugged Model TR-7 circuit con- copper contact clips. 16-2 type SO coiled cable; retracts to 3’, extends
tinuously measures resistance through the truck by applying a small to 16’.
voltage to one terminal of the truck grounding contactor. The other ter- Grounding Studs: 2 supplied. Order a pair for each truck.
minal is connected to the loading rack ground. If the Safe-T-Ground de- Shipping Weight: 20 lb with contactor and cord.
tects a resistance of more than a few ohms across the contactor Options: Integral pilot lights; 30’ coiled cable; temporary contactor
terminals, the relay opens, breaking the control circuit. The relay will assemblies, clamp connectors, and other supply voltages.
not close until the grounding contactor is properly connected.
To safeguard loading operations, the Safe-T-Ground circuit can be wired
into your pump control – and to an audible alarm or signal light.
The double wire TR-7 system provides an extra safeguard against ex- Model TR-7
Model TR-7-L (Integral Pilot Lights)

383 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg384 7/25/06 1:37 PM Page 1

Series
DT Detector Position Sensor ®

Reliable Magnetic Point Sensor, Stainless Steel Housing, AC or DC

3.750
(9.525 CM)
1.250 1.750
(3.18 CM) (4.45 CM)
1.000 HEX
DETECTOR ACTUATOR

ACTUATOR 1/2 ⬙ – 14 NPT DETECTOR 5/8⬙ – 18 UNF

Proximity Detector Position Sensors are reliable, magnetically actuated, SPECIFICATIONS Initial Contact Resistance: 0.50
stainless steel, completely interchangeable with competitive units. AC or DC for Temperature Limits: -40 to 163°F ohms (Max).
user friendly operation. They have no moving parts, eliminate costly seal fittings (-40 to 73°C). Repeatability: 0.005 in. (.01 cm).
and offer enhanced reliability by eliminating arcing. Unintentional actuation by Switch Type: Tungsten, SPDT, Hysteresis: 0.030 in (.08 cm).
metals is not a problem. The sensor consists of a durable hermetically sealed reed Form C. Electrical Connection: Factory
switch potted in a stainless steel housing and a separate 316 stainless steel mag- Electrical Rating: 3A @ 125 VAC, sealed leads with 18˝ minimum, 4
netic actuator bolt. As the actuator moves within the sensing range of the sensor, 3A @ 30 VDC. conductor, PVC insulated, 18 AWG
the magnet in the actuator changes the state of reed switch contacts inside the Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof; - Green/Red/Black/White
sensor. This either opens or closes a circuit depending on wiring configuration. Hermetically Sealed; Explosion- (Ground/NC/NO/Common).
Sensing distance is 0.1˝ (2.54 mm) for the standard actuator. Greater sensitivity proof UL & CSA Listed for Class I, Housing: 316 SS.
Groups A, B, C, & D; Class II, Potting: Epoxy Resin.
of a larger magnetic actuator increases the sensing distance to 0.5˝ (12.7 mm). Groups E, F & G. Divisions 1 & 2. Conduit: 1/2˝-14˝ female NPT.
Intrinsically Safe: Simple Weight: 0.32 lb (145 g); 0.45 lb
The Detector is excellent for hazardous and corrosive environments, solid state and Apparatus (w/ barrier). (204 g) with actuator.
intrinsically safe applications. A Detector may be mounted in any position. For Operating/Response Time: 3.0
installation in hazardous locations be sure to check local and national electrical m Sec.
codes. The Detector is designed to NEMA 1, 3, 4, 4X, 6, 7, 9, 12 and 13.

MODELS AND ACTUATOR SIZES

Model No. Description Sensing Distance
DT1060 Detector and 0.1˝ (2.54 mm)
standard actuator
DT1160 Detector and 0.5˝ (12.7 mm) Standard Actuator with DT1060 High Strength Actuator with DT1160
(3/8–16 UNC X 3/4˝) (1/2–13 UNC X 3/4˝)
high strength actuator

Series
PS Proximity Sensors
Capacitive or Inductive 3-Wire DC, Threaded Body
Dim. PSC20103 PSC20203 PSI2002203 PSI2005303
A M18 M30 M12 M18
B 1.065 (27) 1.614 (41) 0.688 (17) 0.938 (17)
PSC Series C 0.157 (4) 0.197 (5) 0.125 (3) 0.125 (3)
D 3.156 (80) 3.156 (80) 2.36 (60) 2.87 (73)
E 2.36 (60) 2.36 (60) 1.58 (40) 1.97 (50)

PSI Series

The Series PS Proximity Sensors are noninvasive sensors ideal for SPECIFICATIONS
level detection, position indicating and counting applications. Capacitive
type sensors detect electrically conducting and nonconducting materials,
Wetted Materials: Glass reinforced plastic (PSC), Stainless Steel Equipment
(Model PSI2002203), Nickel-plated Brass (Model PSI2005303).
liquids, solids, or powders and include a sensitivity adjustment to differ- Temperature Limits: -22 to 212°F (-30 to 100°C) capacitive, -13 to 158°F
Test
entiate between various materials. Inductive sensors detect ferrous or (-25 to 70°C) inductive.
nonferrous metals only. A bright LED indicates the state of the output Enclosure Rating: PSC, IP65; PSI, IP68.
switch. Sensors feature short circuit, reverse polarity, and transient pro- Repeatability: ±0.05% (Model PSC20103), ±0.1% (Model PSC20203 ±0.01%
tection. Small size and threaded body make installation easy. Inductive
(PSI Models).
sensors are embeddable (can be mounted flush). Capacitive sensors are en-
vironmentally protected to IP65 and Inductive sensors are protected to Power Requirements: 8 to 30 VDC.
IP68. Units include two fixing, screwdriver, and operating manual. Switch Type: Normally open NPN transistor, sinking.
Electrical Rating: 250 mA (PSC), 200 mA (PSI).
MODELS Minimum Load Current: 8 mA (PSC), <25 mA (PSI).
Model Body Switching Detecting Leakage (Off-State) Current: <3 mA (PSC), <0.08 mA (PSI).
Number Type Size Frequency Dist. in (mm) Voltage Drop: <3.5V @ 250 mA (PSC).<2.5V @ 200 mA (PSI).
PSC20103 Cap. M18 x 1 400 Hz .04-3 (1-10) Ripple: 10%.
PSC20203 Cap. M30 x 1.5 250 Hz .08-79 (2-20) Electrical Connection: 9.8 ft (3 m) cable.
PSC30203* Cap. M30 x 1.5 250 Hz .08-79 (2-20) Deadband: 20% of range (PSC), 15% of range (PSI).
PSI2002203 Ind. M12 x 1 800 Hz .08 (2) Initializing Time Delay: <10 msec.
PSI2005303 Ind. M18 x 1 500 Hz .19 (5) Agency Approvals: CE.
*NPN Transister

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 384
pg385 7/25/06 12:59 PM Page 1

Model
SSR-15 Intrinsically Safe Relay
SPST Switch Operation, 5 Amp
®
®

1-5/16 2-7/8
[8] [73]

7/8 2-1/2
[22] [64]
3
1-3/8 [76]
[35] 3-1/2
[89]

Model SSR-15 Intrinsically Safe Relay offers low power SPECIFICATIONS Voltage Loss: 2 VAC.
switching with solid state reliability and eliminates explosive Operating and Load Max. Output Leakage
conditions. Units are completely encapsulated and impervious Voltage Range: 105 to 125 Current: 6 mA @ 120 VAC.
to dust, moisture, or foreign material. Model SSR-15 can be VAC. Housing: Polysulfone.
mounted in any orientation and is shock and vibration resistant.
Max. Load Current: 5 Amp. Weight: 9 oz (255 g).
Switching Operation: SPST Agency Approvals: Rated
normally open. explosion-proof for Class I, II,
SSR-15 Intrinsically Safe Relay Sensitivity: Turn-on: 500; Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D,
Turn-off: 2000Ω. E, F, G. UL, CSA, FM, and
Temperature Limits: -40 to MSHA.
120°F (-40 to 49°C).

Series
SSR Solid State Relay
5 or 10 Amp, SPST Switch Operation
2-3/4 [69.8]
MTNG. CTRS. Ø 7/32
[5.5] 2-3/4 [69.8]
2 HOLES MTNG. CTRS. 6-32
1-9/16 Ø 7/32 THREAD
[39.6] [5.5]
2 HOLES
2-3/8
2-3/8 [60.3]
[60.3] 6-32 1-3/8
THREAD [34.9]

1 2-3/8
[25.4] [60.3]

Model SSR-25 Models SSR-210,-312,-324

Series SSR Solid State Relays amplify the current han- SPECIFICATIONS
dling capability of a variety of sensors for controlling higher
power loads. The relays are compact, totally encapsulated and Operating and Load Voltage Range: SSR-25 and
impervious to shock or vibration. Units feature SPST, normally SSR-210: 24 to 260 VAC; SSR-310: 100 to 130 VAC;
Equipment

open switch operation and can control loads up to 5A or 10A SSR-324: 200 to 250 VAC.
depending on model.
Test

Models SSR-312 and SSR-324 are specifically designed to pro- Maximum Sensor Current: 20 mA.
vide low current “start-stop” or “on-off” switching for industri- Switching Operation: SPST normally open.
al motor, liquid level, and other control systems. Units hold
operational state up to a 1/2 second during momentary power Temperature Limits: 0 to 120°F (-18 to 49°C).
loss to cut nuisance shutdowns. Voltage Loss: 2 VAC.
MODELS Leakage Current: Thru load terminal: 12 mA @240
Current Amplifying
Model Number Operating Range Max. Load VAC.
SSR-25* 24 to 260 VAC 5 Amp
SSR-210* 24 to 260 VAC 10 Amp Max. Output Leakage Current: 6 mA @ 120 VAC.
On/Off Control Housing: Polysulfone.
Model Number Operating Range Max. Load
SSR-312 100 to 130 VAC 5 Amp Weight: 9 oz (255 g).
SSR-324 200 to 250 VAC 5 Amp
Agency Approvals: CE.

385 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg386 7/25/06 1:00 PM Page 1

Series
CT40/50 Current Transformer
4-20 mA or 0-5 VDC Output, Split Core Case
Split Core-Top Terminals Split Core-Special Terminals
2-5/32 2-5/32
[61] [61] 23/64
7/32 [9.1]
[5.7]
2-1/4 2-1/4
55/64 [57.2] 55/64 [57.2]
[21.7] [21.7]
1/8 33/64
[13]
1/8 33/64
[13]

[3.2] 33/64 55/64 [3.2] 33/64 55/64

[13] [21.7]
[13] [21.7] 1-3/16 1-3/16
3-17/32 [30.2] 3-17/32 [30.2]
[89.7] [89.7]
2-13/62 2-13/62
[61] [61]
3/16 3/16
[4.5] 23/32
I.D. Typical [18.3] [4.5]
x2 I.D. Typical
3-3/64 x2
3-3/64
[77.3] [77.3]

Series CT40/50 combine current transformer and signal conditioner SPECIFICATIONS

into a single package. Transformers feature jumper selectable ranges Output Signal: 0-5 VDC or 4-20 mA, depending on model.
and split core case. Units are designed for applications on linear or Power Requirements: See Table.
sinusoidal AC loads.
Accuracy: CT40/50-102: 1.0% FS; CT40/50-100: 0.5% FS.

MODELS Temperature Limits: -4 to 122°F (-20 to 50°C).

Response Time: CT40/50-102: 100 ms; CT40/50-100: 300 ms.
Model Number Range Output Power Requirements
Isolation Voltage: 1270 VAC.
CT40-100 10/20/50 A 4-20 mA 12-40 VDC, Loop Powered
Frequency: CT40/50-102: 50-60 Hz; CT40/50-100: 20-100 Hz
CT40-102 10/20/50 A 0-5 VDC Self Powered (Sinusoidal waveforms only).
CT50-100 100/150/200 A 4-20 mA 12-40 VDC, Loop Powered Enclosure Rating: UL 94V-0 flammability rated.
Agency Approval: CE.
CT50-102 100/150/200 A 0-5 VDC Self Powered

Series
CT60/70 True RMS Current Transformer
Field Selectable Range, Split Core Case
Split Core-Top Terminals Split Core-Special Terminals
2-5/32 2-5/32
[61] [61] 23/64
7/32 [9.1]
[5.7]
2-1/4 2-1/4
55/64 [57.2] 55/64 [57.2]
[21.7] [21.7]
1/8 33/64
[13]
1/8 33/64
[13]

[3.2] 33/64 55/64 [3.2] 33/64 55/64

[13] [21.7]
[13] [21.7] 1-3/16 1-3/16
3-17/32 [30.2] 3-17/32 [30.2]
[89.7] [89.7]
2-13/62 2-13/62
[61] [61]
3/16 3/16
[4.5] 23/32
I.D. Typical [18.3] [4.5]
x2 I.D. Typical
x2
Equipment
3-3/64 3-3/64
[77.3] [77.3] Test
Series CT60/70 Current Transformers provide true RMS output SPECIFICATIONS
on distorted AC waveforms — ideal for nonlinear loads or noisy envi- Output Signal: 4-20 mA, loop powered, true RMS.
ronments. Each model offers three jumper selectable ranges and 1270 Power Requirements: 24 VDC nominal.
VAC isolation. Split core case allows easy installation.
Accuracy: 0.8% FS.
Temperature Limits: -4 to 122°F (-20 to 50°C).
Response Time: 600 ms to 90%.
MODELS
Isolation Voltage: 1270 VAC.
Model Number Range
Frequency: 10-400 Hz.
CT60-100 10/20/50 A Enclosure Rating: UL 94V-0 flammability rated.
CT70-100 100/150/200 A Agency Approval: CE.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 386
pg387 7/25/06 1:01 PM Page 1

Series
CS Current Switches
Universal Output, Solid or Split Core Case
Solid Core-Front Terminals Split Core-Top Terminals

2-5/32
1-13/64 [61]
[31] 7/32
[5.7]
35/64
[14] 2-1/4
POT LED
I.D. 2-3/16 55/64 [57.2]
1-3/4
1/8
61/64 [55.4] [21.7]
[3.2] [45] 1/8 33/64
[13]
[24.1] [3.2]
Jumper 33/64 55/64 1-3/16
1-1/16 3-19/64 59/64 [13] [21.7] [30.2]
[27] [83.8] 3/16 [23.4] 3-17/32
[4.5] [89.7] 2-13/62
I.D. Typical
[61] 3/16
x2 [4.5]
I.D. Typical
15/32 x2
2-3/4 [12]
[69.9] 3-3/64
[77.3]
The CS Series Current Switches combine a current transformer, sig- SPECIFICATIONS
nal conditioner and limit alarm into a single package. The CS series has an Output: Isolated, normally open.
extended current input range, universal solid-state outputs and a wide fre- Power Requirements: None, self powered.
quency response. Available in a split core or a solid core case. Switches fea- Temperature Limits: -58 to 149°F (-50 to 65°C).
ture LED indication for local display or switch status.
Hysteresis: 5% of output.
MODELS Response Time: CS20: 0.120 sec; CS40/50: 0.04 to .120 sec.
Model Setpoint
Voltage
Isolation Voltage: 1270 VAC.
Number Core
Range Frequency: 6-100 Hz.
CS20-100 Adj. 1.75-150 A Split 240 VAC/DC Enclosure Rating: UL, V-O flammability rated, ABS plastic
CS20-220 Adj. 1-150 A Solid 240 VAC/DC housing.
CS40-220 Selectable 1-6, 6-40, & Solid 240 VAC Agency Approvals: CE.
40-175A
CS50-100 Selectable 1-6, 6-40, & Split
40-175A 240 VDC

Series
LTTJ Current Transformers
0 to 10 VDC Analog Output, Fully Adjustable Output, Over Voltage Protection
MODELS
Model
Number Description
LTTJ-010 Current Transformer Calibrated to 10 VDC at 10 Amps
LTTJ-020 Current Transformer Calibrated to 10 VDC at 20 Amps
LTTJ-030 Current Transformer Calibrated to 10 VDC at 30 Amps
LTTJ-040 Current Transformer Calibrated to 10 VDC at 40 Amps
LTTJ-050 Current Transformer Calibrated to 10 VDC at 50 Amps
LTTJ-060 Current Transformer Calibrated to 10 VDC at 60 Amps
LTTJ-070 Current Transformer Calibrated to 10 VDC at 70 Amps
LTTJ-080 Current Transformer Calibrated to 10 VDC at 80 Amps
LTTJ-090 Current Transformer Calibrated to 10 VDC at 90 Amps
Equipment

LTTJ-100 Current Transformer Calibrated to 10 VDC at 100 Amps

Test

LTTJ-103 Current Transformer Adjustable from 10 to 30

Amps, 5-10 VDC Output
Love Controls LTTJ Series Current Transformers allow easy monitoring of
the current flowing to your load. This easy to use device provides a 0 to 10 VDC LTTJ-305 Current Transformer Adjustable from 30 to 50
signal into both low and high impedance circuits, and is easily scalable to your Amps, 5-10 VDC Output
needs. Current Transformer Adjustable from 10 to 30
Available in a number of different ranges, the LTTJ Series can be easily mounted LTTJ-103I
Amps, LED Output
on most LTP Series Solid State Relays for convenient wiring. Some models fea-
Current Transformer Adjustable from 30 to 50
ture an LED for visual confirmation that current is flowing through the device. LTTJ-305I
Amps, LED Output
FEATURES Current Transformer Adjustable from 10 to 30
• 0 to 10 VDC Analog Output LTTJ-103S Amps, NPN Transistor Output
• Impedance Matching for High or Low Impedance Inputs Current Transformer Adjustable from 30 to 50
• Fully Adjustable Output LTTJ-305S Amps, NPN Transistor Output
• Over Voltage Protection

387 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg388 7/25/06 1:03 PM Page 1

Series
LTT SSR Monitors
Monitors SSRs for Loss of Line, Open Load, Shorted SSR, Loss of DC Power
FEATURES
• Monitors SSRs for loss of line, open load, shorted SSR, loss of DC Power
• Mounts on standard SSRs over the Connection Terminals
• Designed to fit under finger safe cover
• LED Status Indicator
• Normally Closed dry relay contact 200VDC @ 0.5A max.

MODELS
Model
Number Description
LTT12-0 Solid State Relay Monitor, 10-19 VDC Trigger,
100-660 VAC Load
LTT24-0 Solid State Relay Monitor, 20-32 VDC Trigger,
Love Controls LTT Series SSR Monitors allow easy monitoring of the oper- 100-660 VAC Load
ation of your SSR switches. This handy device compares the input status with the LTT12-1 Solid State Relay Monitor, 10-19 VDC Trigger,
output status. An alarm operates a relay contact to tell you if the load circuit has 100-660 VAC Load w/Driver Circuit Test
opened or if the SSR has shorted. The LTT mounts easily on most SSRs with no LTT24-1 Solid State Relay Monitor, 20-32 VDC Trigger,
additional hardware. Protect your system today. 100-660 VAC Load w/Driver Circuit Test

Model
FC-1000 Electronic Fan Speed Control
Low Cost, 0-10 VDC Input, Selectable Hard Start

The Model FC-1000 Electronic Fan Speed Control pro- SPECIFICATIONS

vides precise speed modulation of small AC motors. Popular 0- Line Voltage Range: 120-277 VAC, 60 Hz.
10 VDC input works with most process controllers, eliminating Input Signal Voltage: 0-10 VDC.
Low Voltage Input: 24 VAC, Class 2.
the need for more expensive dampers, damper actuators and Equipment
Input Signal Impedance: 10K ohms.
linkages while improving overall energy efficiency of the sys- Full Load Amp Rating: 9.8 @120 VAC, 9.3 @ 208 VAC, 8.0 @ Test
tem. This inexpensive unit enables variable control of ventila- 240 VAC 6.9 @ 277 VAC.
tion fans, condenser fans and interfacing with VAV box Locked Rotor Amp Rating: 24.0.
controllers. Temperature Limits: -40 to 131°F (-40 to 55°C).
Electrical Connections: Line Voltage: 10-32 screw terminals.
Signal and low voltage input: 1/4˝ quick connects.
Model FC-1000 Electronic Fan Speed Control.............................. Transient Protection: 320 V surge suppression. Exceeds IEEE
C62.41 standards.
Housing Materials: Cold rolled steel.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 1.
Mounting: Vertical only; four holes provided for #10 screws.
Weight: 1 Ib, 11 oz (.77 kg).
Agency Approval: UR.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 388
pg389 7/25/06 1:04 PM Page 1

Related Products and Accessories

Model A-699 Control Transformer
UL and CSA listed Class 2 step down SPECIFICATIONS
transformer is mounted on a 4-1/4" AC Input: 120 VAC, 60 Hz.
square plate stand-off for direct in- AC Output: 24 VAC.
stallation in standard 4" x 4" x 1-1/2" Maximum Current output: 400
junction boxes. The A-699 is suitable mA (typically). 10 VA max.
for powering all Dwyer 4-wire trans- Electrical Connections: Primary,
mitters and Model 660 Air Velocity 6-1/2" leads; Secondary, 6-32
Monitor. screw terminals.
(Manufactured for Dwyer
Instruments, Inc.)
Weight: 1 lb, 4 oz.

A-699 Control Transformer

Series 1000 Process Indicator and Alarm

Low cost 1/16 DIN units provide 3- SPECIFICATIONS
1/2 digit, 0.3" high LED readings Supply Voltage: 100-240 VAC.
from four field selectable input 132-240
ranges. Includes integral power sup- VDC.
ply to operate 2-wire transmitters. Input Ranges: 4-20 mA, 0-100
mV, 0-1 V or 0-10 V.
Optional low/high SPST alarm relays
Optional Relay Ratings: 3A @
can be set for direct or reverse action. 250 VAC resistive, 1.5A @ 250 VAC
1.88" H x 1.88" W x 5.05" D (48 x 48 x inductive. Pilot duty – 250 VA, 2A @
128 mm). 125 VAC or 1A @ 250 VAC.
Temperature Range: 32 to 122°F
(0 to 50°C).
Weight: 6.5 oz (185 g).

1000 Process Indicator

1010 Process Indicator w/Alarm

Series AN14 Indicating Annunciator

Four input, 1/8 DIN annunciator is SPECIFICATIONS
ideal for any application where pres- Inputs: NO or NC switches; Open
Collector Transistor (Open circuit
sure, temperature, level or flow switch- voltage = 5 VDC); Logic Levels: LO
es require visible and audible alarms. = 0 to .8 VDC, Hl 4.7 to 28 VDC
(100 kΩ input impedence).
Two annunciators can be easily wired Outputs: SPDT relay (5A @ 240
together to form an eight input system. VAC, resistive), Audible alarm (75
Equipment

Field selectable logic for ISA Sequence dB), four red indicating LEDs.
Ambient Operating Temperature:
A (momentary or maintained alarms) 14 to 149°F
Test

or ISA Sequence F2A (momentary or (-10 to 65°C).

maintained with first out). LED alarm Power Requirements: 117 or 230
VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz, 3VA.
and power indication on a NEMA 4 Electrical Connections:
front panel. 1.64"H x 3.59"W x 4.13"D Removable screw terminal block,
accepts 24 to 12 AWG.
(42 x 91 x 105 mm). Mounting: 1/8 DIN.
Housing Material: ABS plastic.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4 front
panel.
Weight: 11.4 oz (325 g).
AN14-1 (117 VAC)
AN14-2 (230 VAC)

389 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg390 7/26/06 3:04 PM Page 1

Related Products and Accessories

Model A-700 Power Supply
Economical and reliable power sup- SPECIFICATIONS
ply is suitable for powering all Dwyer AC Input: 100/120/220/230-240 VAC
±10%,
pressure, temperature or air velocity 47-63 Hz.
transmitters. Inexpensive, open- DC Output: 24-28 VDC regulated.
frame design allows convenient ac- Maximum Current Output: 500 mA (de-
cess to input/output solder terminals. rated to 450 mA @ 50 Hz operation)
Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 to
Auxiliary inputs are selectable for op- 122°F
eration from power sources found (0 to 50°C).
worldwide. Compact size eases enclo- External Fuse Required: 0.5 Amp for
sure installations: 4-7/8"H x 4"W x 1- 100-120 VAC, 0.25 Amp for 220-240
VAC.
5/8"D. Weight: 2 lb.

A-700 (0.5 Amp)

A-700-2 (2 Amp)
A-700-4 (4.8 Amp)

Model A-701 Digital Panel Meter/Power Supply

3-1/2 digit, 0.6" high LED display is SPECIFICATIONS
combined with an integral 24 VDC AC Input: 120 VAC ±15%, 50/60 Hz.
power supply to provide a complete Input Impedance: 40 ohms.
digital indicating system when used Accuracy: ±0.05% of reading.
with Dwyer 2-wire transmitters. DC Output: 24 VDC regulated.
Standard unit is supplied to read 0- Maximum Current Output: 50 mA.
100.0% and is field adjustable from Operating Temperature: 32 to 122°F
1.999 to 1999 for readout of actual en- (0 to 50°C).
gineering units. Panel mounting Power Consumption: 6 watts.
hardware included. 1/8 DIN size: Weight: 12 oz (340 g).
1.64"H X 3.59"W X 4.13"D.

A-701 Digital Panel Meter

Model A-705-20 Loop Powered Process Indicator

Economical, short depth (0.5" behind SPECIFICATIONS
Display Range: 000 to ±1999.
panel) unit is a 4-20 mA loop powered Inputs: 4-20 mA or 10-50 mA.
process indicator with 0.6" LCD dis- Accuracy: ±1% of reading, ±1 digit.
play. This bipolar 3-1/2 digit panel Resolution: Selectable, 1.XXX, Equipment
1X.XX,1XX.X, 1XXX.
meter fits standard 1/8 DIN cutout Ambient Operating Temperature: 32
Test
and includes adjustable scale (gain), to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
offset and decimal point selection for Power Requirements: None required,
powered by current source.
quick field calibration. Standard Temperature Coefficient:100 ppm /°C
model supplied 0-100.0% for 4-20 mA typical.
input. Polarity: If negative input, minus sign at
left.
Panel Cutout: 3.55˝W x 1.72˝H (90.17 x
43.6 mm).
Dimensions: 1.9˝H x 4.130˝W x 1.250˝D
(48 x 104.90 x 31.75 mm).
Weight: 2 oz (57 g).

A-705-20 Process Indicator

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 390
p391 7/25/06 1:07 PM Page 1

Series
Galvanic Isolator
®

MTL5041/
5045
Intrinsically Safe Isolators for Hazardous Locations
41/64
(16.27)

INSTALLATION AND
APPROVAL INFORMATION

4-11/32
(110.33)

4-3/32
HAZARDOUS (103.98) SAFE AREA
AREA TERMINAL TERMINAL
MTL5041

The MTL5041/5045 Galvanic Isolators provide total intrinsically SPECIFICATIONS

safe isolation for communication with Dwyer® pressure transmitters Hazardous Area Input:
Signal Range: 0 to 24 mA (including over-range).
approved for location in hazardous areas. Galvanic isolation eliminates Transmitter Voltage: 16.5 V at 20 mA.
the need for a high integrity earth ground required when using shunt Safe Area Output:
diode type safety barriers. DIN rail mounting and plug-in signal and Signal Range: 4 to 20 mA.
power connectors simplify installation and maintenance. Safe-Area Load Resistance: 0 to 1kΩ.
Safe-Area Output Resistance: >2MΩ.
Power Requirement: 20 to 35 VDC.
Response Time: Settles to within 10% of final value within 250 µs.
Compatible Models: 637, 638, 639, 608, 2200, 2900 Current Consumption (20 mA signal):
Galvanic Isolator Approval Dwyer Series 70 mA at 24 VDC
MTL5041 FM for Class I, II, II; Div. 1 Groups 638 85 mA at 20 VDC
C, D, F, G 55 mA at 35 VDC
Maximum Power Dissipation (20 mA signal): 1.2 W at 24 VDC.
MTL5041 UL for Class I, II, III; Div. 1 & 2 639 Isolation: 250 V rms between input, output and power supply ter-
Groups C, D, E, F, G minals.
MTL5041 FM for Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups B, 637 Transfer Accuracy at 68°F (20°C): Better than 20 µA (typically 5
C, D, E, F, G µA).
LED Indicator: Green: Power Indication.
MTL5041 FM for Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups A, 608 Temperature Limits: Operating: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C).
B, C, D, E, F, G Storage: -40 to 176°F (-40 to 80°C).
MTL5045 FM for Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups A, 2200
Temperature Drift: <1 µA/°C.
B, C, D, E, F, G Humidity: 5 to 95% RH.
FM for Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups A, Mounting: 1.4˝ (35 mm) top hat rail to:
MTL5045 B, C, D, E, F, G 2900 EN 50022-35 x 7.5
BS 5584
35 x 27 x 7.3 DIN 46277
Terminals: Accommodate up to 2.5 mm2 stranded or single-core.
Equipment

FM Safety Description: 28 V, 300Ω, 93 mA; Um=250 rms or dc.

Weight: 3.9 oz (110 g).
Test

Group µF mH
MTL5041/5045

Agency Approvals: See table below.

A&B 0.13 4.2
C 0.30 12.6
D 1.04 33.6 Region (Authority) Standard Approved For Certificate/file no.
BASEEFA (ATEX) USA (FM) AIS/I,II,III/1/Entity ABCDEFG-
3600, 3610 entity
Group µF mH µH/Ω SCI-942; NI/I/@/ABCD/T4
3611, 3810 [I/0] AEx[ia]IIC-SCI-942 3010737
IIC 0.083 3.05 55 Entity; NI/1/2/IIC/T4;
Ta=140°F (60°C)
IIB 0.85 9.15 210
IIA 2.15 24.4 444 Canada (CSA) CAN/CSA Class I, Div.2, Gps A, B, C, D;
E60070, UL698, Ex nA [iA] IIC T4 1345550
UL913, UL1604, Class I, Xone 2, Aex nA IIC
MODELS IEC60079, C22.2 T4
UK (BASEEFA) EN 50014, EN 50020 EEx ia IIC BAS01ATEX7217
MTL5041
MTL5045 UK (BASEEFA) EN 50039 EEx ia IIC
Systems Ex01E2219

391 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p392 7/25/06 1:08 PM Page 1

Series
MTL7706/
7787
Zener Barrier ®

Intrinsically Safe Barriers for Hazardous Locations

SAFE AREA
HAZARDOUS TERMINAL
AREA TERMINALS

1/2
(12.70)

3-35/64
(90.09)

INSTALLATION AND
APPROVAL SIDE LABEL

MTL7787
4-5/32
(105.57)

The MTL7706/7787 is an intrinsically safe (IS) shunt-diode barrier SPECIFICATIONS

that can be used to communicate with and provide isolations for cer- Transmitter Voltage: 16.2 V at 20 mA with 250Ω load (negative
tain Dwyer® transmitters approved for use in hazardous areas. These w.r.t. earth); 11.0 V at 20 mA with 500Ω load (negative w.r.t. earth).
barriers limit the amount of energy allowed to pass into the hazardous Safe Area Output: 4 to 20 mA.
area, which inhibit ignition in flammable atmospheres. Load Resistance: 0 to 500Ω.
Power Requirement: 20 to 35 VDC w.r.t. earth.
Accuracy: ±2 µA under all conditions.
Compatible Models: 637, 638, 639, 608, 2200
Approval
LED Indicator: Green: Power Indication.
MTL Zener Barrier Dwyer Series
FM for Class I, II, II; Div. 1 Groups
Temperature Limits:
MTL7706 638
C, D, F, G Operating: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C).
UL for Class I, II, III; Div. 1 & 2 Storage: -40 to 176°F (-40 to 80°C).
MTL7706 639
Groups C, D, E, F, G Humidity: 5 to 95% RH.
FM for Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups B, Terminals: Accommodate up to 2.5 mm2 stranded or single-core.
MTL7706 637
C, D, E, F, G Safety Description: 28 µV, 300Ω, 93 mA.
Weight: 4.9 oz (140 g).
MTL7706 FM for Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups A, 608
B, C, D, E, F, G Agency Approvals: See table below.
MTL7787 FM for Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups A, 2200 Region (Authority) Standard Approved For Certificate/file no.
B, C, D, E, F, G AIS/I,II,III/1/Entity ABCDEFG-
USA (FM) 3600, 3610 entity SCI-942; NI/I/@/ABCD/T4
3611, 3810 [I/0] AEx[ia]IIC-SCI-942 3010737
Entity; NI/1/2/IIC/T4;
Ta=140°F (60°C)
FM
MTL7706

Canada (CSA) CAN/CSA Class I, Div.2, Gps A, B, C, D;

Group µF mH E60070, UL698, Ex nA [iA] IIC T4
1345550
A&B 0.083 4.2 UL913, UL1604,
IEC60079, C22.2
Class I, Xone 2, Aex nA IIC
T4
BASEEFA (ATEX)
UK (BASEEFA) EN 50014, EN 50020 EEx ia IIC
Group µF mH BAS01ATEX7217
IIC 0.083 4.2 UK (BASEEFA) EN 50039 EEx ia IIC
Ex01E2219
Equipment
Systems
Test
FM
MTL7787

Group µF mH
A&B 0.083 3.05
BASEEFA (ATEX)
Group µF mH
IIC 0.083 3.05

MODELS
MTL7706
MTL7787

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 392
pg393 7/25/06 1:08 PM Page 1

No.
920 Smoke Gage Kit
Complete Kit, Includes 10 Components

10

1 7
5 6
3 4
2

Easy-to-Use Smoke Gage Kit enables you to quickly bal- Popular with professional heating engineers, the No. 920
ance maximum CO2 with minimum smoke for clean, efficient Smoke Gage Kit includes these quality components:
(1). Dwyer® Smoke Gage Pump — Fast working; the first known
combustion. Simply take an actual sample of the smoke being unit to conform with ASTM D-2156-XX standards for testing
smoke density in flue gases from burning distillate fuels.
tested and compare it to the standards on the Smoke Chart in- Filter paper clamps instantly into pump inlet.
(2). Hole Plugs — Packet of 20 to fill awl holes.
cluded. Just 10 full strokes of the pump produces an accurate (3). Smoke Chart — For easy comparison with samples taken.
test sample. Complete testing instructions are included. Laminated plastic, wipes clean.
(4). Awl- Pierces smoke pipe for thermometer and sampling tubes.
Large, comfortable plastic handle.
(5). Smoke Gage Filter Paper — An exclusive, time-saving Dwyer
development. Roll of filter paper is contained in dispenser
Equipment

box, kept clean and convenient.

(6). Metal Terminal Tube — 8-1/2" long, heavy gauge brass.
Test

(7). How-to-Use Instructions — Simple with step-by-step

illustrations.
(8). Rubber Tubing — Flexible, long-lived.
(9). Spring Holders — A superior design for holding thermometer
and sampling tubes.
(1O).Kit Case — Tough, durable, one piece high density
polyethylene with living hinge and clasp. Foam liner protects
contents.

No. 920 Smoke Gage Kit

393 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg394 7/25/06 1:24 PM Page 1

No.
1200 Combustion Test Kit
A Complete Kit – With Extra Supplies to Save You Time and Money

CHOOSE FROM TWO MODELS:

No 1200-A with No. 171 Inclined Draft Gage No. 1200-A
Combustion Test Kit
No 1200-B with Dwyer® Magnehelic® Dial Gage
(1). New easy-to-carry, impact resistant polyethylene
Carrying Case with handle.
(2). No. 1101 CO2 Indicator — Clear acrylic plastic, virtually
16 18
unbreakable.
(3). Aspirator Bulb, Filter and Tubing Assembly.
17 (4). Filter Wool — Extra supply in bag for about 1000 tests.
(5). No. 171 Draft Gage — Continuously indicating,
permanently accurate. 0 to .25" W.C. range in .01
divisions.
(6). Dwyer® Smoke Gage Pump — Fast-working, the first
known unit to conform with ASTM D-2156-XX
standards for testing smoke density in flue gases.
(7). Smoke Filter Paper — An exclusive Dwyer
15 development.
14
(8). Magnehelic® Gage — 0-.25" W.C. and 300 to 2000 FPM.
13 Included in Model 1200-B kit below.
(9). Awl — Pierces smoke pipe for thermometer and
12
sampling tubes.
11 (l0). CO2 Absorbent Solution — Extra supply for many tests.
5 (11). No. A-503 Stack Thermometer — Dial type, stainless
10 steel 200 to 1000°F˚.
6 9 (12). Gage Oil — Long-lasting extra supply.
(13). Spring Holders — For thermometer and terminal
7 8 tubes.
(14). Hole Plugs — Packet to fill awl holes.
4
(l5).Smoke Chart — Laminated plastic, for comparison with
2 samples taken.
(16).Dwyer® Combustion Efficiency Slide Rule Computer —
Photo shows Simple to operate.
both Inclined
Draft Gage and
(17).Operating Instructions — Simple, illustrated. Show step
Magnehelic® by-step use.
Gage ; only (18). Combustion Data Cards and Parts List — Plastic,
one is included 1
as standard 3 weighs only 6 lb 8 oz.
equipment.

Quick and Easy-to-Use Dwyer®

Combustion Test Kit. No. 1200-B
Combustion Test Kit
Measure all four factors that govern overall efficiency:
Equipment
CO2 content, draft, stack temperature and smoke. Ac- Includes portable Dwyer® Magnehelic® Draft Gage with Test
curacy to ±1/2% CO2 fully meets the requirements of the large 4" dial instead of No. 171 Inclined Draft Gage, 0 to .25"
professional Heating Engineer. Yet an apprentice can W.C. range in .01" divisions. Also has air velocity scale with
follow the simple, illustrated step-by-step instructions. 300 to 2000 F.P.M, range. No leveling necessary; no gage oil
required. Kit is otherwise identical to No. 1200-A and
Add a small pitot tube, which will fit into the kit case, for
weighs only 7 lb 5 oz.
air velocity measurements.
OPTIONAL: On special order, the portable Dwyer® No.
460 Air Meter may be substituted for the No. 171 Inclined
Draft Gage.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 394
pg395 7/25/06 1:26 PM Page 1

Model
CLD20 Combustible Leak Detector
Adjustable Tick Rate, <1 Second Response
GOOSENECK LENGTH
15.750 [400.05]
1.350
[34.29] Ø.500 MAX
[12.7]

SENSOR

7.250 AUDIBLE
[184.15] ALARM

SENSITIVITY
CONTROL
2.750
[69.85]
3.250
[82.55]
Quickly locate leaks of combustible gases with the Model CLD20 SPECIFICATIONS Pre-programmed fuels: (partial
Sensitivity: 50 ppm. listing) Methane, Natural gas,
Combustible Leak Detector. Unit provides accurate detection of Methane, Response Time: Less than 1 sec- Ammonia, Hydrogen, Butane,
Butane, Ammonia, Ethylene Oxide, Alcohols, Industrial Solvents and ond. Propane, Acetone, Ethylene Oxide,
other combustible or toxic gases. Adjustable tick rate accelerates as the Sensor: Solid state semiconduc- Halon, Hydrogen Sulphide,
tor. Alcohol, Jet Fuel. Lacquer, and
sensor tip approaches a leak and can be re-zeroed to pinpoint the exact Thinners.
Ambient Operating
location of the leak. The Model CLD20 offers visual LED indication of Temperature/RH: 32 to 104°F (0 Alarm Settings: Audio: adjustable
leak level and automatically recalibrates when turned off and on. Flexible to 40°C), 0 to 80% RH (non-con- tick rate 75dB @ 1 ft (30 cm),
densing). Visual: flashing LED.
gooseneck and small sensor head allows use in tight, difficult to reach Probe: 16” (40 cm) length, flexible
Power Requirements: One 9V
areas. alkaline battery. gooseneck.
Battery Life: Approximately 10 Dimensions: 7.3˝H x 3.4˝W x 1.4˝D
hours of continuous usage. (18.5 x 8.5 x 3.4 cm).
Warm-up Time: 10 seconds. Weight: 18 oz (500 g).
Model No. CLD20 Combustible Leak Detector Agency Approvals: CE.

Model
RLD1 Refrigerant Leak Detector
Audio and Visual Indication, Flexible Gooseneck Design
GOOSENECK LENGTH
15.750 [400.05]
1.350
[34.29] Ø.500 MAX
[12.7]

SENSOR

7.250 AUDIBLE
[184.15] ALARM

SENSITIVITY
CONTROL
2.750
[69.85]
Equipment

3.250
[82.55]
Test

Detect and pinpoint even small leaks of refrigerant gases using the SPECIFICATIONS Warm-up Time: 10 seconds.
Model RLD1 Refrigerant Leak Detector. The RLD1 is effective in detecting Sensitivity: 0.4 oz/year (11 Pre-programmed gases: (partial
existing refrigerants including HFC, HCFC, CFC, SF6, R134a, and R123. gm/year) R134a. listing) CFCs: R11, R12, R13,
Response Time: Less than 1 sec- HCFCs: R22, R502, R500, HFCs:
Unit features thumbwheel operation to increase sensitivity and audio and
ond. R134a, R123, R125, R23, and
visual indication. An increasing tick rate sounds as a leak is pinpointed and
Sensor: Advanced ionization other halogen based compounds.
the red indication light flashes more rapidly. The flexible gooseneck probe
detection. Alarm Settings: Audio: adjustable
is ideal for hard to reach areas. Use the model RLD1 in domestic and com- tick rate, Visual: flashing LED.
mercial refrigeration systems, automotive, air conditioning, and quality con- Ambient Operating
Temperature/RH: 32 to 104°F Probe: 15-3/4˝ (40 cm) length, flex-
trol testing environments. ible gooseneck.
(0 to 40°C), 0 to 80% RH (non-
condensing). Dimensions: 7.3˝H x 3.4˝W x 1.4˝D
Power Requirements: One 9V (18.5 x 8.5 x 3.4 cm).
alkaline battery. Weight: 18 oz (500 g).
Model No. RLD1 Refrigerant Leak Detector Agency Approvals: CE.
Battery Life: Approximately 16
hours.

395 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg396 7/25/06 1:27 PM Page 1

Model
1205A-5 Handheld CO Analyzer
Dual-Line Alpha-Numeric Display, Auto Calibration
1-13/16 RED PROTECTIVE SLEEVE
DISPLAY
(46.04)

7-29/32
(200.82)

GREY CASE

3-1/2
(88.90)

Model 1205A-5 Handheld CO Analyzer provides a simple, cost effec- SPECIFICATIONS polyurethane tubing with quick fit
tive answer to detecting and monitoring colorless, odorless, toxic carbon Range: CO: 0 to 2000 ppm; connector. Max. temperature:
monoxide. The portable, battery operated unit measures CO from 0 to Temperature: 32 to 1112°F (0 to 180°F (82°C).
2000 ppm and can record maximum CO values. Use a Type K thermo- 600°C). Flue Probe: 11.8˝ (30 cm)
couple (sold separately) to measure temperatures. Simultaneously dis- Accuracy: CO: ±5% of reading; length, stainless steel with quick
play two different functions on the large two-line alpha-numeric LCD. Temperature: ±5°F (2°C). fit connector to aluminum handle.
Quickly program time, date, engineering units, language and other dis- Display: Alpha-numeric LCD, Max. temperature: 1100°F
play functions. The rotary dial allows easy function selections. The ana- dual digits. (600°C).
lyzer features auto zeroing, battery indication, infrared printer link, and Ambient Operating Temperature Probe: Type K
a backlight display for low light areas. The Model 1205A-5 is ideal for Temperature: 32 to 104°F (0 to thermocouple with mini-connec-
ambient air monitoring in residential and commercial markets, flue test- 40°C). tor (sold separately).
ing in small boilers, and source investigation in areas where CO moni- Operating RH: 10 to 90% non- Power Requirements: Four AA
tors have alarmed. The unit includes a stainless steel flue probe with fil- condensing. size alkaline batteries.
ter and flexible tubing, batteries and instruction manual. Response Time: 20 to 30 sec- Battery Life: 8 hours with alka-
MODEL onds. line batteries (continuous use
Model 1205A-5 Handheld CO Analyzer Sensor Type: Electrochemical without backlight).
cell. Weight: 1.5 lb (0.7 kg).
Accessory Calibration: Auto zero function. Agency Approvals: CE.
1718-0002 Type K Thermocouple with integral handle Flexible Tubing: 9 ft (3 m)

Model
1207 Handheld Flue Gas Analyzer
RS232 Output, Stores 150 Readings, 11 Pre-Programmed Fuels
11-1/4
[285.7]

THERMOCOUPLE 5/16 DIA DEPTH STOP CONE

6-5/16 [7.937]
[168.3] 2-21/32
5-5/16 [67.46] OPTIONAL AC
[134.9] ADAPTER SOCKET

PARTICLE FILTER &

WATER TRAP 9-1/4
[234.9]
PROBE CONNECTING
TUBE 108˝ LG.

Adjust boilers for optimum efficiency and conform to emission levels SPECIFICATIONS Ambient Operating Equipment
with Model 1207 Handheld Flue Gas Analyzer. The unit quickly measures Ranges: O2: 0-21%; CO: 0-4000 Temperature: 32 to 104°F (0 to Test
and calculates all the parameters for accurate flue gas analysis. Simultaneously ppm; CO2: 0-99.9%; NO: 0 to 40°C).
display eight different measurements in user selectable language. Model 5000 ppm; Temp. (Flue and nett): Power Requirements: 110 VAC
1207 Analyzer can store up to 150 time/date stamped combustion tests and 32-1112°F (0-600°C); Efficiency: 0- adapter (220 VAC optional).
can transfer the data to a printer or IBM compatible PC for later analysis. 99.9%; Poison Index: 0-99.9%; Computer Requirements: IBM
Analyzer features 11 preprogrammed fuels, self calibration, and CO alarm Excess Air: 0-2885%. compatible 386 or above and
preset at 1000 ppm. Measure Nitric Oxide with the optional NOx sensor. Accuracy: O2: ±0.2%; CO: ±20 Windows™ 3.1 or later with 2mB
Unit includes probe, protective sleeve, 110 VAC power adapter, carrying case ppm<400ppm, ±5%>400ppm; RAM and 2mB hard drive disk
and manual. CO2: ±0.3% of rdg.; NO: ±5ppm space, one serial port.
<100ppm, ±5%>100ppm;Temp.: Pre-Programmed Fuels: Natural
Model Number 1207 Flue Gas Analyzer ±5°F (±2°C), 0.3% of rdg.; gas, Town gas, Light oil, Heavy Oil,
Model Number 1207-NOx Flue Gas Analyzer with NOx sensor Efficiency: ±1.0% of rdg.; Poison Coke, Coal, Anthracite, Propane,
Index: ±0.01; Excess Air: ±0.2%. Butane, Kinsale gas, and Gascor.
Accessories Resolution: O2: 0.1%; CO: 1 Probe: 11-1/4˝ (28.6 cm) length,
No. 1206-1, Infrared Printer ppm; CO2: 0.1%; NO: 1ppm; stainless steel, Type K thermocou-
No. 1207-6, 220 VAC Adapter Temp.: 1.0°F/C; Efficiency and ple, 9 ft (3 m) neoprene hose.
No. 1206-71, Replacement Filter Excess Air: 0.1%; Poison Index; Weight: 2.2 lb (1 kg).
0.01%. Agency Approvals: CE.
Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 396
pg397 7/25/06 3:50 PM Page 1

Valves
Table of Contents
Introduction to W.E. Anderson Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397-398 The Dwyer Valve product line includes several types of valves to
Series Hi-Flow™ Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399-402 cover a wide range of applications. Control valves are used to
Hi-Flow™ Control Valves – Valve Bodies and Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Series 36R Self-Acting Temperature Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 continuously regulate the flow of a fluid in a system by chang-
Series GV1 Globe Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Series GV2 & GV3 Globe Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 ing the amount of flow through the valve to control a process.
Series EVA Electric Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Series HGV Hand Operated Globe Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 The change in flow rate can be used to control temperature,
Series SAV-BT Angle Seat Valve - Bronze NPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 flow, pressure, level, Ph, etc. Block valves are used to stop or
Series SAV-ST Angle Seat Valve - Stainless Steel NPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Series SAV-SSC Angle Seat Valve - SS Sanitary Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 block a flow in a system and are for on-off service. The stoppage
Series SAV-SF Angle Seat Valve - Stainless Steel Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Series BV2M Two-Piece Stainless Steel Ball Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 of flow from a block valve enables them to be used as a drain, by-
Series BV2MB Two-Piece Hand Lever Brass Ball Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Series BV3HL Three-Piece Sanitary Ball Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 pass, shut-off, etc.
Series BV3HL-3A Three-Piece Sanitary Ball Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Series MV Mini Brass Ball Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Series BV2 Automated Ball Valves - Two-Piece SS Flange . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Globe Valves
Series BV2 Automated Two-Piece Stainless Steel Ball Valve . . . . . . .417-418
Series BV3 Automated Ball Valves - Three-Piece SS NPT . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Globe valves, such as W.E. Anderson’s Hi-Flow™ Control
Series BV3 Automated Ball Valves - Three-Piece SS Sanitary . . . . . . . . .420
Series ABV Automated Two-Piece Brass Ball Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Valves, are a linear type valve with a rising stem and plug that
Series PBV Automated Ball Valves – Two-Way Plastic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Series 3BV3 Automated Ball Valves – 3-Way SS NPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
seals the flow on a seat. Flow through a globe valve permits
Series 3ABV Automated Ball Valves – 3-Way Brass NPT . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 throttling control without excessive wear of the seat or plug.
Series 3PBV Automated Ball Valves – Three-Way Plastic . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Series NV Needle Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Since globe valves are metal seated they have a small leak rate
Series NVII Needle Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Series BFV Butterfly Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 in the closed position. The travel distance is small in globe
Series SAE Butterfly Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Butterfly Valves - Resilient Seated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429-431 valves making response time quick. The pressure drop in a
Series DCV/RDCV Diaphragm Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432-434 globe valve is typically larger than in other styles of control
Series RSV Pilot Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Muffler Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 valves. These valves have high pressure and temperature capa-
Series SVE Solenoid Valve Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Series BHC Bulk Head Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 bilities as well as good chemical compatibility. Globe valves are
Series DCD Repair Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Series SV3 Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 typically operated with a pneumatic actuator that physically
Series PV Solenoid Pilot Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 moves in response to a pneumatic control signal. Globe valves
Series 2V Pneumatic Pilot Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Series SVP Proportioning Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 are good for very precise control of flow in smaller size diame-
Series MPR Miniature Pressure Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Series AFR Air Filter Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 ter pipes, and are the most popular type of control valve in use.
Series 7R Temperature Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Model EP1000 Electro-pneumatic Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Series IP Current to Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Series EPT-1 Electro-pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Butterfly Valves
Series 2700 Current to Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Butterfly valves, such as W.E. Anderson’s, are a rotary type
Series 2800 Current to Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Series 2900 Current to Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 valve that can be used as a control valve or a block valve. There
Series 165 Precisor® II Pneumatic/Electro-Pneumatic Positioners . . . . . .445
Series 265 Precisor® II Pneumatic/Electro-Pneumatic Positioners . . . . . .446 is a disc that rotates on a shaft in butterfly valves so that when
Series QV Quick-View® Valve Position Indicator/Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Mark Series Position Indicators/Switches/Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . .448-450
fully open the disc is parallel to the flow and when fully closed
Series DT Detector Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 the disc is perpendicular to the flow. Elastomer liners between
Series VPS Valve Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Series VIP Valve Position Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 the disc and body achieve a tight fluid seal. Butterfly valves re-
Series 40VF Pneumatic Lever Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Valve Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 quire a minimal amount of space and have very large flow ca-
pacities with minimal pressure drop. The valves have lower
Valves/ Actuators/ Transducers pgs 399-445
temperature capabilities due to the limit of the elastomer lining
and lower pressure ratings due to the design. Butterfly valves
are low maintenance, low cost, and self-cleaning. There is a
large choice of actuators for butterfly valves to fit a variety of
applications. Lever lock handles, gear operated hand wheels,
Valves

two position electric and two position pneumatic actuators are

available for on-off service. Modulating electric and pneumatic
actuators are available for flow control applications.

397 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg398 7/25/06 3:51 PM Page 1

Valves
Ball Valves Control Valve Sizing
The ball valve, such as W.E. Anderson’s ABV, 2BVS and BV2 The Cv method is an accepted way to size control valves. Basic
Series, is a rotary valve that like butterfly valves can be utilized equations are provided as a guide to use in sizing a control valve,
as a control valve or a block valve. Ball valves use a rotating ball and the results of the equations will only be as accurate as the in-
with a hole through it that allows fluid to flow through the ball formation provided of the flowing conditions. The equations are
in the open valve position. When the ball is rotated 90° it seals broken down into the type of media - liquid, gas or steam, and
off the valve blocking the flow. Tight closure is achieved by whether or not the flow is critical. The critical flow equations are
squeezing the ball against the seat rings. Ball valves have low- to be used for vapor flow when the pressure drop across the valve
pressure drop, good flow capabilities, and good temperature is greater than half of the upstream pressure. As a general guide
and pressure ratings. The valve is low cost, compact, and easy to avoid cavitation do not size a valve for liquid service where the
to maintain. The ball valve is best for on-off service and can be pressure drop is greater than 50% of the upstream pressure.
used for throttling service, although it does not give as accurate
of control as a globe valve. W. E. Anderson offers ball valves Nomenclature
with hand-levers and two position electric and pneumatic actu- Cv = Valve flow coefficient
ators for on-off service. Modulating electric and pneumatic ac- g = Specific gravity of liquid at flowing conditions
tuators are available for flow control applications. G = Specific gravity of gas at flowing conditions
P1 = Upstream pressure, psia
Terminology P2 = Downstream pressure, psia
•Pressure Drop – The difference in upstream and downstream ΔP = Actual pressure drop (P1-P2), psi
pressures of the fluid flowing through the valve. q = Liquid volumetric flow rate, U.S. GPM
•Critical Flow – The flow has reached the point of being Q = Gas volumetric flow rate, SCFH
choked. At the choked condition the flow rate has hit a maxi- W= Steam weight (mass) flow rate, LB/HR
mum limit and does not increase with further increase in pres- T= Flowing Temperature, °R (460 + °F)
sure drop across the valve.
•Cv or Valve Flow Coefficient - The number of U. S. gallons per Once the required Cv is determined, selection of the proper size
minute of water at 60°F that will pass through the valve with a control valve can be obtained by comparing the required Cv to the
pressure drop of 1 psi. For example, a Hi-Flow™ valve with a Cv values for the valve. As a general rule the maximum capacity
maximum Cv of 10.75 has an effective port area in the full open of a control valve should be 15 to 50% above the maximum process
position such that it passes 10.75 GPM of water with a pressure flow, and the minimum required Cv must be within the available
drop of 1 psi. rangeability of the valve for proper control. If only the maximum
•Full Port – The port diameter of the valve is the same diame- process flow rate was used to calculate Cv, then the percent trav-
ter as the piping connections. el of the valve should be checked and should fall in the range of 65
•Rangeability – The ratio of maximum controllable flow to min- to 80% of total travel.
imum controllable flow of a valve. For example, a valve with a
50 to 1 rangeability and a total flow capacity of 100 GPM at full
open controls flow accurately to as low as 2 GPM. Sub-Critical Flow Critical Flow
g 1/2 P1
•Valve Flow Characteristic – The relationship between the Liquid CV = q (------)
ΔP
Gas or steam where ΔP> -----
2
Valves

stem travel or rotation of a valve, expressed in percent travel, Q GxT Q (GxT)1/2

and the fluid flow through the valve, expressed in percent of
Gas CV = ----- ( -----------------
963 ΔP(P1+P2)
)1/2 CV = -------------
750xP1

full flow.
W W
Steam CV = ----------------------
2.1 [ΔP(P1+P2)] 1/2 CV = 1.65xP
-----------
1

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 398
pg399 7/25/06 3:52 PM Page 1

™
Hi-Flow Control Valves
Globe Valves, Ideal for Steam and Water Flow Control,
1/2˝ to 4˝ Sizes, 2-Way or 3-Way

2-Way with positioner and current 2-Way Flanged 3-Way

to pressure transducer

Hi-Flow™ control valves are single seated, top or cage guid- SPECIFICATIONS
ed globe valves - probably the simplest, from a construction Valve Body
standpoint, yet most versatile control valve in use. The Hi-Flow™ Service: Compatible liquids, gases, and steam.
Line Size: 1/2˝ to 4˝.
valve can fit applications with a smaller size valve since the valve Body Style: 2-way or 3-way globe.
has a greater flow capacity than most conventional valves of the End Connections: 1/2˝ to 2˝ female NPT, 1-1/2˝ to 4˝ flanged.
same size. Pressure Limit: Iron and Bronze Body: 250 psi (17.2 bar), 316 SS
Coupled with the high flow capacity, the Hi-Flow™ valve main- Body: 300 psi (20.7 bar).
tains a wide rangeability of 50:1 to insure precise control. Heavy Wetted Materials:
Body Material: Iron, bronze, or 316 SS.
duty Hi-Flow™ valves are ruggedly constructed of the highest Trim: 316 SS.
quality materials, precision machined, and performance tested Packing: PTFE.
to assure years of trouble free service. Standard packing con- Temperature Limits: 20 to 400°F (-7 to 204.4°C).
sists of PTFE V-rings and wiper to minimize friction without
leakage at high operating pressures. Available in brass, iron, or Actuator
Type: Pneumatic spring/diaphragm.
316 SS body, trim is 316 SS with all welded plug construction to Control Signal: 3 to 15 psi (0.21 to 1.0 bar) standard. Custom
provide superior durability and corrosion resistance. ranges available.
Maximum Supply Pressure: 220, 222, and 230: 100 psi (6.89
FEATURES bar). 221, 223, 231, and 233: 50 psi (3.45 bar).
• Wide Rangeability of 50:1 Air Connection: 1/4˝ female NPT.
Temperature Limit: 150°F (66°C).
• Exceptional shut-off and leak rate that meets ANSI/FCI 70-2
Class IV (0.01% of Cv in the closed position)
• Selectable fail safe condition with Air-to-Raise or Air-to-
Lower actuators and Push-to-Open or Push-to-Close valve Positioners and current-to-pressure transducers available
bodies factory mounted. See Series 165 for positioners and see
• Linear or equal percentage flow characteristics Series 2800 and 2900 for transducers.
• Low flow options of restricted trim or needle plug
• Removable and replaceable seat ring
How to Order:
Valves

Select model number from model chart or standard product

chart and supply maximum upstream pressure, USP.
APPLICATIONS
• Flow control, mixing, or diverting service.
• Perfect for steam, water or compatible glycol solutions.

399 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg400 7/25/06 3:52 PM Page 1

Hi-Flow™ Control Valves Model Chart

Example 2 00 1 V A 3 2 230 LO 2001VA32-230-LO Hi-Flow™ Control Valve; 2-way, 3/4˝ NPT con-
nection, linear plug, bronze body, 316 SS trim, reduced port 1/2˝ size.

Configuration 2 2-way
3 3-way
Valve Body 00 Push-To-Close
Action 01 Push-To-Open (2-way only)

0 1/2˝ NPT
1 3/4˝ NPT
2 1˝ NPT
3 1-1/4˝ NPT
Connection 4 1-1/2˝ NPT (or Flange with LRF or HRF option)
Size 5 2˝ NPT (or Flange with LRF or HRF option)
6 2-1/2˝ Flange (see options)
7 3˝ Flange (see options)
8 4˝ Flange (see options)

Valve Seat V Single Seat (2-way only)

W Double Seat (3-way only)
A Linear
Valve Plug L Linear Needle (2000 to 2002 only)
Type S Equal Percentage (2000 to 2005 only)
N Equal Percentage Needle (2000 to 2002 only)

1 Ductile Iron
Valve Body 3 Bronze
Material 4 316 SS

Trim 2 316 SS
Material

220 Air-To-Lower, 20 in2

221 Air-To-Lower, 45 in2
Actuator 222 Air-To-Lower, 45 in2
223 Air-To-Lower, 80 in2
230 Air-To-Raise, 20 in2 (2-way only)
231 Air-To-Raise, 45 in2 (2-way only)
233 Air-To-Raise, 80 in2 (2-way only)
2 1/8˝ for Type N valve plug
3 3/16˝ for Type N valve plug
4 1/4˝ for Type N valve plug
Needle Plug 5 5/16˝ for Type N valve plug
Port Size 6 3/8˝ for Type N valve plug
7 1/32˝ for Type L valve plug
8 1/16˝ for Type L valve plug
9 3/32˝ for Type L valve plug

A Positioner factory mounted

(specify positioner model)
L0 Reduced port: 3/4˝ to 1/2˝ port size (2001 only)
Options Reduced port: 1˝ to 1/2˝ port size (2002 only)
L1 Reduced port: 1˝ to 3/4˝ port size (2002 only)
Valves

Z Special operating range (2-10 psi, 10-18 psi)

LRF Low Range Flange: Class 125 in Iron or Class 150 Bronze, 316 SS
body (for 1-1/2˝ and 2˝ sizes only, standard on 2-1/2˝, 3, and 4˝ size)
HRF High Range Flange: Class 250 in Iron or Class 300 in Bronze, 316
SS body (for 1-1/2˝ to 4˝ sizes)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 400
pg401 7/25/06 3:53 PM Page 1

™
Hi-Flow Control Valves
2-Way Simplified Selection Guide with Standard Products
C

Use the chart below to aid in the selection of Hi-Flow™

C
Control Valve. As long as the maximum upstream pressure
(USP) is less than, or equal to, the value listed, the model
A
shown can be manufactured and calibrated to your specific
B requirements. Specify maximum upstream pressure, USP,
when ordering.

Caution: Use of an actuator supply gas other than air can create a hazardous
environment because a small amount of gas continuously vents to atmosphere.

PIPE Cv BODY MODEL NO. MAX. USP A C MODEL NO. MAX. USP B C
psi (bar) IN. IN. psi (bar) IN. IN.
SIZE 100% MATERIAL (AIR-TO-OPEN)
3-15 (.21-1.0) (MM) (MM) (AIR-TO-CLOSE)
3-15 (.21-1.0) (MM) (MM)

BRONZE 250 193⁄4 73⁄4 250 187⁄16 73⁄4

2000VA32-230 (17.2) (501.7) (196.9) 2000VA32-220 (17.2) (468.3) (196.9)
1/2" 6.45
316SS 300 193⁄4 73⁄4 300 187⁄16 73⁄4
2000VA42-230 (20.7) (501.7) (196.9) 2000VA42-220 (20.7) (468.3) (196.9)
2001VA32-230 250 193⁄4 73⁄4 2001VA32-220 250 187⁄16 73⁄4
BRONZE (17.2) (501.7) (196.9) (17.2) (468.3) (196.9)
250 203⁄8 105⁄8 250 191⁄8 105⁄8
2001VA32-231 (17.2) (517.5) (269.9) 2001VA32-221 (17.2) (485.8) (269.9)
3/4" 10.75
2001VA42-230 285 193⁄4 73⁄4 2001VA42-220 300 187⁄16 73⁄4
(19.7) (501.7) (196.9) (20.7) (468.3) (196.9)
316SS 300 203⁄8 105⁄8 300 191⁄8 105⁄8
2001VA42-231 (20.7) (517.5) (269.9) 2001VA42-221 (20.7) (485.8) (269.9)
2002VA32-230 166 203⁄16 73⁄4 2002VA32-220 192 187⁄8 73⁄4
(11.4) (512.8) (196.9) (13.2) (479.4) (196.9)
BRONZE
2002VA32-231 250 2013⁄16 105⁄8 2002VA32-221 250 199⁄16 105⁄8
1" 17.42 (17.2) (528.6) (269.9) (17.2) (496.9) (269.9)
2002VA42-230 166 203⁄16 73⁄4 2002VA42-220 192 187⁄8 73⁄4
316SS (11.4) (512.8) (196.9) (13.2) (479.4) (196.9)
2002VA42-231 300 2013⁄16 105⁄8 2002VA42-221 300 199⁄16 105⁄8
(20.7) (528.6) (269.9) (20.7) (496.9) (269.9)
2003VA32-230 98 205⁄16 73⁄4 2003VA32-220 115 19 73⁄4
(6.8) (515.9) (196.9) (7.9) (482.6) (196.9)
BRONZE 2003VA32-231 245 2015⁄16 105⁄8 2003VA32-221 250 1911⁄16 105⁄8
(16.9) (531.8) (269.9) (17.2) (500.1) (269.9)
2003VA32-233 250 2513⁄32 133⁄8 2003VA32-223 250 231⁄8 133⁄8
(17.2) (645.3) (339.7) (17.2) (587.4) (339.7)
11⁄4" 25.30 98 205⁄16 73⁄4 115 19 73⁄4
2003VA42-230 (515.9) (196.9) 2003VA42-220
(6.8) (7.9) (482.6) (196.9)
316SS 2003VA42-231 245 2015⁄16 105⁄8 2003VA42-221 300 1911⁄16 105⁄8
(17.0) (531.8) (269.9) (20.7) (500.1) (269.9)
2003VA42-233 300 2513⁄32 133⁄8 2003VA42-223 300 231⁄8 133⁄8
(20.7) (645.3) (339.7) (20.7) (587.4) (339.7)
2004VA32-230 65 2011⁄16 73⁄4 2004VA32-220 80 193⁄8 73⁄4
(4.5) (525.5) (196.9) (5.5) (492.1) (196.9)
BRONZE 168 215⁄16 105⁄8 235 201⁄16 105⁄8
2004VA32-231 (541.3) (269.9) 2004VA32-221 (509.6)
(11.6) (16.2) (269.9)
2004VA32-233 250 2525⁄32 133⁄8 2004VA32-223 250 231⁄2 133⁄8
(17.2) (654.8) (339.7) (17.2) (596.9) (339.7)
11⁄2" 32.10 65 2011⁄16 73⁄4 80 193⁄8 73⁄4
2004VA42-230 (4.5) (196.9) 2004VA42-220 (5.5) (492.1) (196.9)
(525.5)
316SS 168 215⁄16 105⁄8 235 201⁄16 105⁄8
2004VA42-231 (11.6) (269.9) 2004VA42-221 (16.2) (509.6) (269.9)
(541.3)
300 2525⁄32 133⁄8 300 231⁄2 133⁄8
2004VA42-233 (20.7) 2004VA42-223 (596.9) (339.7)
(654.8) (339.7) (20.7)
31 2015⁄16 73⁄4 44 195⁄8 73⁄4
2005VA32-230 (2.1) (531.8) (196.9) 2005VA32-220 (3.0) (498.5) (196.9)
BRONZE 2005VA32-231 88 219⁄16 105⁄8 2005VA32-221 140 205⁄16 105⁄8
(6.1) (547.7) (269.9) (9.7) (515.9) (269.9)
175 261⁄32 133⁄8 250 233⁄4 133⁄8
2005VA32-233 (12.1) (339.7) 2005VA32-223 (17.2) (603.3) (339.7)
(661.2)
2" 50.30 31 73⁄4 44 195⁄8 73⁄4
2005VA42-230 2015⁄16 2005VA42-220
(2.1) (531.8) (196.9) (3.0) (498.5) (196.9)
316SS 88 219⁄16 105⁄8 140 205⁄16 105⁄8
2005VA42-231 (6.1) (547.7) 2005VA42-221 (9.7)
(269.9) (515.9) (269.9)
2005VA42-233 175 261⁄32 133⁄8 2005VA42-223 272 233⁄4 133⁄8
(12.1) (661.2) (339.7) (18.8) (606.3) (339.7)
IRON 2006VA12-233 105 261⁄4 133⁄8 2006VA12-223 190 247⁄16 133⁄8
(7.2) (666.8) (339.7) (13.1) (620.7) (339.7)
*21⁄2 78.60 BRONZE 2006VA32-233 105 261⁄4 133⁄8 2006VA32-223 190 247⁄16 133⁄8
(7.2) (666.8) (339.7) (13.1) (620.7) (339.7)
2006VA42-233 105 261⁄4 133⁄8 2006VA42-223 190 247⁄16 133⁄8
316SS (7.2) (666.8) (339.7) (13.1) (620.7) (339.7)
Valves

52 27 133⁄8 132 243⁄4 133⁄8

IRON 2007VA12-233 (3.6) (686) (339.7) 2007VA12-223 (9.1) (629) (339.7)
*3" 113.2 27 132 243⁄4
52 133⁄8 133⁄8
BRONZE 2007VA32-233 (3.6) (686) (339.7) 2007VA32-223 (9.1) (629) (339.7)
52 27 133⁄8 132 243⁄4 133⁄8
316 SS 2007VA42-233 (3.6) (686) (339.7) 2007VA42-223 (9.1) (629) (339.7)
IRON 32 271⁄4 133⁄8 72 25 133⁄8
*4" 201.2 2008VA12-233 (2.2) (692) (339.7) 2008VA12-223 (4.9) (635) (339.7)
32 271⁄4 133⁄8 72 25 133⁄8
BRONZE 2008VA32-233 (2.2) (692) (339.7) 2008VA32-223 (4.9) (635) (339.7)
32 271⁄4 133⁄8 72 25 133⁄8
316SS 2008VA42-233 (2.2) (692) (339.7) 2008VA42-223 (4.9) (635) (339.7)

401 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg402 7/25/06 3:54 PM Page 1

Hi-Flow Control Valves

™

2-Way Stock Models, 3-Way Standard Products for Mixing or Diverting

Control Valves - Hi-Flow™ Series, 2-Way Models
Pipe Cv Body Model Set at USP Adjustable USP
Size 100% Material Number psig (bar) Range psig (bar)
1/2˝ 6.45 Bronze 2000VA32-230-QS 125 (8.6) 96-200 (6.8-13.8)
3/4˝ 10.75 Bronze 2001VA32-230-QS 125 (8.6) 81-155 (5.6-10.7)
1˝ 17.42 Bronze 2002VA32-230-QS 125 (8.6) 123-166 (8.5-11.5)
1˝ 17.42 Bronze 2002VA32-231-QS 125 (8.6) 71-155 (4.9-10.7)
1-1/4˝ 25.30 Bronze 2003VA32-230-QS 98 (6.8) 66-98 (4.6-6.8)
1-1/4˝ 25.30 Bronze 2003VA32-231-QS 125 (8.6) 121-165 (8.3-11.4)
1-1/2˝ 32.10 Bronze 2004VA32-231-QS 125 (8.6) 104-137 (7.2-9.5)
2˝ 50.30 Bronze 2005VA32-231-QS 88 (6.1) 68-88 (4.7-6.1)
2˝ 50.30 Bronze 2005VA32-233-QS 125 (8.6) 116-145 (8.0-10.0)

Hi-Flow™ Control Valves, 3-Way Simplified Selection Guide with Standard Products
MODELS Use the standard models chart to aid in the selection of the most eco-
PIPE Cv BODY USP (S)
E F nomical Hi-Flow™ 3-Way Control Valve for your application. Specify
MODEL NUMBER+ PSI IN. IN.
SIZE 100% MATERIAL (bar) (MM) (MM) maximum upstream pressures (USP’s); Mixing: USPU and USPL; Di-
verting: USPC; based on standard 3-15 psi (.21-1.0 bar) pneumatic control
3000WA32-220 250 181⁄16 73⁄4 signal.
BRONZE (17.2) (458.8) (196.9)
1
⁄2" 6.45
3000WA42-220 300 181⁄16 73⁄4
316SS (20.7) (458.8) (196.9)
3001WA32-220 250 181⁄16 73⁄4
BRONZE (17.2) (458.8) (196.9)
3
⁄4" 10.75
3001WA42-220 300 181⁄16 73⁄4
316SS (20.7) (458.8) (196.9)
3002WA32-220 200 185⁄16 73⁄4
BRONZE (13.8) (465.1) (196.9)
3002WA32-221 250 19 105⁄8
1" 17.42 (17.2) (482.6) (269.9)
3002WA42-220 200 185⁄16 73⁄4
(13.8) (465.1) (196.9)
316SS
3002WA42-221 300 19 105⁄8
(20.7) (482.6) (269.9)
3003WA32-220 120 183⁄8 73⁄4
(8.4) (466.7) (196.9)
BRONZE
3003WA32-221 250 191⁄16 105⁄8
11⁄4" 25.30 (17.2) (484.2) (269.9)
3003WA42-220 120 183⁄8 73⁄4
(8.3) (466.7) (196.9)
316SS
3003WA42-221 300 191⁄16 105⁄8
(20.7) (484.2) (269.9)
3004WA32-220 80 185⁄8 73⁄4
(5.6) (473.1) (196.9)
BRONZE 3004WA32-221 200 195⁄16 105⁄8 Caution: Use of an actuator supply gas other than air can create a hazardous
(13.8) (490.5) (269.9)
environment because a small amount of gas continuously vents to atmosphere
3004WA32-223 250 213⁄8 133⁄8
11⁄2" 32.10 (17.2) (542.9) (339.7)
3004WA42-220 80 185⁄8 73⁄4
(5.5) (473.1) (196.9) DIMENSION DATA
3004WA42-221 200 195⁄16 105⁄8 PIPE B C D
316SS (13.8) (490.5) (269.9) IN. (MM) IN. (MM) IN. (MM)
SIZE
3004WA42-223 300 213⁄8 133⁄8 29⁄16 23⁄16 41⁄8
(20.7) (542.9) (339.7) ⁄2"
1
(65.1) (55.6) (104.8)
3005WA32-220 45 191⁄16 73⁄4 29⁄16 23⁄16 41⁄8
(3.1) (484.2) (196.9) ⁄4"
3
(65.1) (55.6) (104.8)
BRONZE 3005WA32-221 100 193⁄4 105⁄8 3 27⁄16 4
(6.9) (501.7) (269.9) 1" (76.2) (61.9) (101.6)
3005WA32-223 175 2113⁄16 133⁄8 33⁄16 21⁄2 33⁄4
2" 50.30 (12.1) (554.0) (339.7) 11⁄4" (81.0) (63.5) (95.3)
3005WA42-220 45 191⁄16 73⁄4 33⁄4 23⁄4 311⁄16
(3.1) (484.2) (196.9) 11⁄2" (95.3) (69.9) (93.7)
316SS 3005WA42-221 100 193⁄4 105⁄8 315⁄16 33⁄16 311⁄16
(6.9) (501.7) (269.9) 2" (100.0) (81.0) (93.7)
3005WA42-223 175 2113⁄16 133⁄8
(12.1) (554.0) (339.7) MIXING SERVICE:
IRON 3006WA12-223 FLOW IN - ports U&L
97 24.52 133⁄8 FLOW OUT - port C
BRONZE 3006WA32-223 (6.7) (622.8) (339.7) DIVERTING SERVICE:
*2 ⁄2˝
1
78.6
FLOW IN - port C
316SS 3006WA42-223 FLOW OUT - ports U&L
Valves

IRON 3007WA12-223 Standard Models include

58 24.64 133⁄8 LIN-E-AIRE® Air-To-Lower Actuator
*3˝ 113.2 BRONZE 3007WA32-223 (4.0) (625.9) (339.7) - port L opens on loss of Air

316SS 3007WA42-223 For diverting service, add USPU and USPC to determine the shutoff pres-
IRON 3008WA12-223 sure. For mixing service compute: (USPU - USPC) + (USPL - USPC) to de-
*4˝ 201.2 32 24.89 133⁄8 termine the shutoff pressure.
BRONZE 3008WA32-223 (2.2) (632.2) (339.7)

316SS 3008WA42-223
+
See page 380 for sizing, ordering information and suggested specification. * Valve has flanged connections. Max. USP (PSI) is for Linear Valves. Consult factory for optional trim.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 402
pg403 7/25/06 3:55 PM Page 1

™
Hi-Flow Control Valves – Valve Bodies and Actuators
DIMENSION DATA
PIPE STROKE AREA** A (BRONZE) A (316SS) B C D E
SIZE IN. (MM) IN.2 (CM2) IN. (MM) IN. (MM) IN. (MM) IN. (MM) IN. (MM) IN. (MM)
5
⁄16 0.341 33⁄4 43⁄16 1 ⁄8
3
29⁄16 45⁄16 –
1
⁄2"
(7.9) (2.20) (95.3) (106.4) (34.9) (65.1) (109.5)
7
⁄16 0.556 37⁄8 41⁄4 13⁄8 29⁄16 45⁄16 –
3
⁄4"
(11.1) (3.59) (98.4) (108.0) (34.9) (65.1) (109.5)
1
⁄2 0.886 4 ⁄4
3
51⁄4 1 ⁄8
5
3 315⁄16 –
1"
(12.7) (5.72) (120.7) (133.4) (41.3) (76.2) (100.0)
9
⁄16 1.413 5 53⁄4 113⁄16 31⁄8 35⁄8 –
11⁄4" (14.3) (9.12) (127.0) (146.0) (46.0) (79.4) (92.1)
5
⁄8 1.920 5 ⁄2
1
61⁄8 2 31⁄2 315⁄16 –
11⁄2" (15.9) (12.39) (139.7) (155.6) (50.8) (88.9) (100.0)
3
⁄4 3.142 61⁄2 67⁄8 23⁄8 33⁄4 31⁄8 –
2" (19.1) (20.27) (165.1) (174.6) (60.3) (95.2) (79.4)
7
⁄8 4.909 107⁄8 2.58 4.52 7 (4) Ø3/4 (19.05) HOLES
21⁄2"†
(22.23) (12.47) (276.23) (65.53) (114.81) (177.80) ON A 51⁄2 (139.70) B.C.
7
⁄8 4.909 111⁄2 2.58 4.52 71⁄2 (8) Ø7/8 (22.23) HOLES
21⁄2"*
5/8-18 UNF-2A (22.23) (12.47) (292.10) (65.53) (114.81) (190.50) ON A 57⁄8 (149.23) B.C.
2-3/16
[55.58] 3-7/8 1 7.069 113⁄4 2.70 4.64 71⁄2 (4) Ø3/4 (19.05) HOLES
[98/43] 3"†
CLOSED (25.40) (17.96) (298.45) (68.58) (117.86) (190.50) ON A 6 (152.40) B.C.
D TYP 1 7.069 121⁄2 2.70 4.64 81⁄4 (8) Ø7/8 (22.23) HOLES
3"* (25.40)
(17.96) (317.50) (68.58) (117.86) (209.55) ON A 65⁄8 (168.28) B.C.
1 ⁄8
1
12.566 137⁄8 2.95 4.89 9 (8) Ø3/4 (19.05) HOLES
C 4"† (352.43)
(28.58) (31.92) (74.93) (124.21) (228.60) ON A 71⁄2 (190.50) B.C.
11⁄8 12.566 141⁄2 2.95 4.89 10 (8) Ø7/8 (22.23) HOLES
4"* (368.30) (74.93) (124.21)
(28.58) (31.92) (254.00) ON A 77⁄8 (200.03) B.C.
B
†125/250# flange rating.
T4-700445-04 *250/300# flange rating.
**Note: Unbalanced area of plug (Ap).
A

Air-to-Lower Air-to-Raise
**Effective diaphragm area (Ae) decreases linearly with stroke: 20 in.2 (129 cm2) — 2 in.2/in. (.5 cm3/mm);
45 in.2 (290 cm2) — 3 in.2/in. (.76C m2/mm); 80 in.2 (516 cm2) -3.5 in.2/in. (.89 cm2/mm).

TERM* PART T RAVEL MAX

Ae** A B C D E F G P MAX

NO. NO.† ACTION IN. (MM) IN. (CM )

2 2
IN. (MM) IN. (MM) IN. (MM) IN. (MM) IN. (MM) IN. (MM) IN. (MM) PSI(KG/CM2)
1 20 11⁄2 3 11
⁄16 35⁄8 71⁄4 73⁄4 157⁄8 100
–220 15S620 AIR-TO-LOWER (25.4) (129) (38.1) (76.2) (17.5) (92.1) (184.2) (196.9) (403.2) (7.0)
1 45 11⁄2 3 11
⁄16 35⁄8 71⁄4 105⁄8 169⁄16 50
–221 15S621 AIR-TO-LOWER (25.4) (290) (38.1) (76.2) (17.5) (92.1) (184.2) (269.9) (420.7) (3.5)
11⁄2 45 115⁄16 33⁄4 7
⁄8 31⁄2 83⁄8 105⁄8 18 ⁄8
5
100
–222 15S622 AIR-TO-LOWER (38.1) (290) (49.2) (95.3) (22.2) (88.9) (212.7) (269.9) (473.1) (7.0)
11⁄2 80 115⁄16 33⁄4 7
⁄8 31⁄2 83⁄8 133⁄8 20 50
–223 15S623 AIR-TO-LOWER (88.9) (339.7) (508.0) (3.5)
(38.1) (516) (49.2) (95.3) (22.2) (212.7)
1 20 11⁄2 3 11
⁄16 3 73⁄4 17 ⁄16
3
100
–230 15S630 AIR-TO-RAISE (25.4) (129) (38.1) _
(76.2) (17.5) (76.2) (196.9) (436.6) (7.0)
1 45 11⁄2 3 11
⁄16 3 _ 105⁄8 1713⁄16 50
–231 15S631 AIR-TO-RAISE (25.4) (290) (38.1) (76.2) (17.5) (76.2) (269.9) (452.4) (3.5)
11⁄2 80 115⁄16 33⁄4 7
⁄8 3 _ 133⁄8 229⁄32 50
–233 15S633 AIR-TO-RAISE (38.1) (516) (49.2) (95.3) (22.2) (76.2) (3.5)
(339.7) (565.9)
*Add Termination No. suffix to base Valve Model No. for complete valve automation package.
†Specify Part No. for Pneumatic Actuator assembly only.
Valves

W.E. Anderson Hi-Flow Control Valves are also available in stroke other brand valves such as butterfly or sanitary globe
sub-assemblies of just Hi-Flow valve body or Lin-E-Aire actuator. valves where a 3 to 15 psi control signal is desired. Consult our
Valve bodies can be mounted onto electric actuators or other Valves and Controls Catalog for more detailed information.
brand pneumatic actuators. Lin-E-Aire actuators can be used to

403 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg404 7/25/06 3:59 PM Page 1

Series
36R Self-Acting Temperature Control Valves
Direct-Acting – Reverse-Acting
5
[127.0]
Standard Bulb Termination, No. 31

CAPILLARY TO
THERMAL BULB
10 FT. (3M) LENGTH
13-3/8
[339.7]

C DIMENSION DATA
X Y Z
TEMPERATURE IN. (MM) IN. (MM) IN. (MM) HUB
B 17 7
⁄8 203⁄16
RANGES 1-3 (431.8) (22.2) (512.8) 1" NPT
A 61⁄2 3
⁄4 91⁄2
RANGES 4-8 (165.1) (19.1) (241.5) 1" NPT
MODEL 36RJ Direct-Acting Control Valve

W.E. Anderson Series 36R Self-Acting Temperature Control SPECIFICATIONS

Valves feature self-contained valve, actuator and sealed thermal system in Valve Body
one compact unit providing installation economy and long term reliability. Service: Compatible liquids, gases, and steam.
Available either Direct-Acting (valve closes on temperature rise) or Reverse- Line Size: 1/2˝ to 2˝.
Body Style: 2-way globe. Optional 3-way.
Acting (valve opens on temperature rise), quick-opening double seated valve End Connections: Female NPT.
enables fast response for improved process control. Request Bulletin F-42N Pressure Limit: See model chart.
for valve sizing nomographs for liquids and steam. Wetted Materials:
Body Material: Bronze or optional 316 SS.
HOW TO ORDER: Trim: Nickel Alloy or optional 316 SS on 316 SS body.
1. Select Model No. to specify pipe size and control action. Packing: 36RJ: Graphite, 36RD: PTFE.
Bulb and Capillary: 304 SS.
2. Select Range Number from chart below and add as a suffix to end of Temperature Limits: 20 to 400°F (-7 to 204.4°C).
model number.
Consult factory with operating parameters for non-standard Actuator
Temperature Control Valve requirements. Type: Bulb and capillary thermal system.
Bulb Connection: 1˝ male NPT with adjustable union standard. Optional 3/4˝ or 1-
STANDARD OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGES 1/4˝. Optional bare bulb with flange or well connections.
SENSITIVITY* °F(°C) Chassis: Aluminum.
RANGE RANGE °F(°C) BULB-X Spring: Plated Steel.
N0. IN. (MM) LOW MEDIUM HIGH Bellows: Beryllium Copper/Brass.
17 16° 13° 12°
1 10 to 65°F (-12 to 18°C) (431.8) (8.9°) (7.2°) (6.7°)
OPTIONS: Split flange, oversize hub and well thermal system connections, 316 SS
17 14° 13° 11° bodies, single-seated valves with 316 SS trim and Teflon® packing, restricted trim or
2 40 to 100°F (4 to 38°C) (431.8) (7.8°) (7.2°) (6.1°) needle plugs, graphite packing lubricators, and 3-way valve bodies.
17 16° 14° 12°
3 70 to 145°F (21 to 63°C) (431.8) (8.9°) (7.8°) (6.7°)
61⁄2 17° 14° 13°
4 110 to 170°F (43 to 77°C) (165.1) (9.4°) (7.8°) (7.2°)
61⁄2 17° 14° 12°
MODELS
5 130 to 190°F (54 to 88°C) (165.1) (9.4°) (7.8°) (6.7°) PIPE MODEL A B C MAX USP
SIZE NUMBER ACTION IN. (MM) IN.(MM) IN.(MM) psi (bar)
61⁄2 16° 16° 14°
6 170 to 240°F (77 to 116°C) (165.1) (8.9°) (8.9°) (7.8°) 31⁄16 11⁄16 221⁄32 150
36RJ131 DIRECT–ACTING (77.8) (27.0) (67.5) (10.34)
7 61⁄2 14° 13° 12° 1
⁄2"
220 to 275°F (104 to 135°C) (165.1) (7.8°) (7.2°) (6.7°) 4 2 17⁄8 150
36RD131 REVERSE–ACTING (101.6) (50.8) (47.6) (10.34)
8 61⁄2 15° 14° 12°
270 to 340°F (132 to 171°C) (165.1) (8.3°) (7.8°) (6.7°) 31⁄2 17⁄32 221⁄32 150
36RJ231 DIRECT–ACTING (88.9) (31.0) (67.5) (10.34)
3
⁄4" 4 2 17⁄8
*Sensitivity data applies to a 1" size valve. 80
36RD231 REVERSE–ACTING (101.6) (50.8) (47.6) (5.52)
Suggested Specification 36RJ331 DIRECT–ACTING
41⁄4 113⁄32 33⁄16 150
(108.0) (35.7) (81.0) (10.34)
Self-Acting Temperature Control Valve shall be (Direct-Acting) (Re- 1"
43⁄8 21⁄8 2 40
verse-Acting) providing for valve (closure) (opening) on rise in temper- 36RD331 REVERSE–ACTING (111.1) (54.0) (50.8) (2.76)
Valves

ature. Valve body shall be Bronze and Trim shall be precision 36RJ431 DIRECT–ACTING
4 ⁄4
3
1 ⁄32
21
37⁄32 150
(120.7) (42.1) (81.8) (10.34)
machined Nickel Alloy for durability and corrosion resistance. Valve 11⁄4"
41⁄2 21⁄4 21⁄4 20
shall be double seated and quick opening for fast response. Self-con- 36RD431 REVERSE–ACTING (114.3) (57.2) (57.2) (1.38)
tained thermal system shall include: 304SS bulb with 18" flexible ex- 1 ⁄2"
1 51⁄4 129⁄32 321⁄32 150
tension; 10 ft. length of 304SS capillary with spirally wound armor; 36RJ531 DIRECT–ACTING (133.4) (48.4) (92.9) (10.34)
and stainless steel union connection with hub for installation flexibili- 2" 69⁄16 21⁄2 53⁄16 150
36RJ631 DIRECT–ACTING (166.7) (63.5) (131.8) (10.34)
ty. Unit shall be W.E. Anderson® Model No.____, Range____.

36RD Series Valves are Single Seated

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 404
pg405 7/26/06 2:49 PM Page 1

Series
GV1 Globe Control Valves
Low Cost, 1˝ to 2˝ Sizes, 2-Way or 3-Way

DIMENSIONS
C Model A B C
GV121 4-11/32˝ (110 mm) 2-3/8˝ (60 mm) 4-3/8˝ (111 mm)
GV122 4-47/64˝ (120 mm) 2-39/64˝ (66 mm) 4-3/8˝ (111 mm)
GV123 5-1/8˝ (130 mm) 2-11/16˝ (68 mm) 4-1/2˝ (114 mm)
GV124 5-23/32˝ (145 mm) 2-27/32˝ (72 mm) 4-31/32˝ (126 mm)
GV131 4-11/32˝ (110 mm) 3-5/64˝ (78 mm) 4-3/8˝ (111 mm)
B GV132 4-47/64˝ (120 mm) 3-15/64˝ (82 mm) 4-3/8˝ (111 mm)
GV133 5-1/8˝ (130 mm) 3-15/64˝ (82 mm) 4-1/2˝ (114 mm)
GV134 5-23/32˝ (145 mm) 3-19/32˝ (91 mm) 4-31/32˝ (126 mm)
A

GV1

The Series GV1 globe valves can be conveniently paired with the Se- SPECIFICATIONS
ries EVA1 electric actuators, creating a low cost and compact control Service: Compatible liquids and gases.
valve package. The globe design allows for exceptional throttling con- Line Size: 1˝ to 2˝.
trol in a wide range of applications, including central heating and air Body Style: 2-way, push to open globe; 3-way globe.
conditioning, water handling, and industrial manufacturing systems. End Connections: 1˝ to 2˝ female NPT.
Valves are manufactured in a variety of sizes, and are available in either Pressure Limit: 232 psi (16 bar).
two-way or three-way body styles. The forged brass body and equal per- Wetted Materials:
centage flow characteristic are ideal for many flow control systems. Body Material: Brass.
Stem: 302 SS.
Features Disc: Brass with Nitrile Gasket.
• Low leakage rate (less than 0.05% of Cv) Packing: Fluon® filler with Nitrile O-ring.
• Equal percentage flow characteristic for excellent low flow Temperature Limits: 35 to 201°F (2 to 94°C).
control
Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage.
• Forged brass construction
Flow Leakage: Less than 0.05% of Cv factor.
• Direct mounting actuator (Series EVA) for compact control valve
Stem Connection: M8 thread.
package

MODELS
Max. Diff. Pres. Stroke APPLICATIONS
Model Type Pipe Size Cv • Mixing or diverting services with three way models
Fit with EVA1- in. (mm)
87 psi 19/32˝ • Control water flow in heating or cooling processes
GV121 1˝ 9.3 (6 bar) (15) • HVAC zone management
58 psi 3/4˝
GV122 1-1/4˝ 17.4 (4 bar) (19)
2-Way
43 psi 3/4˝
GV123 1-1/2˝ 25.5 (3 bar) (19)
GV124 2˝ 40.6 29 psi 3/4˝
(2 bar) (19)
GV131 1˝ 9.3 87 psi 19/32˝
(6 bar) (15)
GV132 17.4 58 psi 3/4˝
1-1/4˝ (4 bar) (19)
3-Way
43 psi 3/4˝
GV133 1-1/2˝ 25.5 (3 bar) (19)
29 psi 3/4
GV134 2˝ 40.6 (2 bar) (19)

Fluon® is a registered trademark of AGC Chemicals Americas, Inc.

Valves

405 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg406 7/25/06 4:01 PM Page 1

Series
GV2
&
Globe Control Valves
GV3 Low Cost, 1˝ to 2-1/2˝ Sizes, 2-Way or 3-Way

DIMENSIONS
Model A B C
C
GV221/321 4-11/32˝ (110 mm) 2-31/64˝ (63 mm) 4-17/64˝ (108 mm)
GV222/322 4-47/64˝ (120 mm) 2-23/32˝ (69 mm) 4-17/64˝ (108 mm)
GV223/323 5-1/8˝ (130 mm) 2-13/16˝ (71 mm) 4-3/8˝ (111 mm)
GV224/324 5-23/32˝ (145 mm) 3-3/64˝ (77 mm) 4-1/2˝ (114 mm)
GV225/325 4-11/32˝ (110 mm) 3-9/32˝ (83 mm) 4-25/32˝ (121 mm)
B GV231/331 4-47/64˝ (120 mm) 3-13/64˝ (81 mm) 4-17/64˝ (108 mm)
GV232/332 5-1/8˝ (130 mm) 3-23/64˝ (85 mm) 4-17/64˝ (108 mm)
GV233/333 5-23/32˝ (145 mm) 3-23/64˝ (85 mm) 4-3/8˝ (111 mm)
GV234/334 5-1/8˝ (145 mm) 3-51/64˝ (96 mm) 4-1/2˝ (114 mm)
A
GV235/335 6-29/32˝ (175 mm) 4-7/64˝ (104 mm) 4-25/32˝ (121 mm)

GV2 & GV3

The Series GV2 and GV3 globe valves can be conveniently paired SPECIFICATIONS
with the Series EVA2 and EVA3 electric actuators, creating a low cost Service: GV2: Compatible liquids and gases.
and compact control valve package. The globe design allows for excep-
GV3: Compatible liquids, gases, and steam.
tional throttling control in a wide range of applications, including cen-
tral heating and air conditioning, water handling, and industrial Line Size: 1˝ to 2-1/2˝.
manufacturing systems. Valves are manufactured in a variety of sizes, Body Style: 2-way, push to open globe; 3-way globe.
and are available in either two-way or three-way body styles. The forged End Connections: 1˝ to 2-1/2˝ female NPT.
brass body and equal percentage flow characteristic are ideal for many Pressure Limit: 232 psi (16 bar) WOG; GV3: 130 psi SWP.
flow control systems. Series GV3 models incorporate a high intensity Wetted Materials:
body casting for high temperature applications, including steam ser- Body Material: Brass.
vice. Stem: SS (1Cr18Ni9).
Features Disc: GV2: Brass with Nitrile gasket.
• Low leakage rate (less than 0.05% of Cv) GV3: Brass with Fluon® gasket.
• Equal percentage flow characteristic for excellent low flow Packing: GV2: Fluon® filler with Nitrile O-ring.
control GV3: Fluon® filler with Fluorine O-ring.
• Forged brass construction Temperature Limits: GV2: 35 to 201°F (2 to 94°C), GV3: 35 to 356°F
• Direct mounting actuator (Series EVA2 and EVA3) for compact (2 to 180°C).
control valve package Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage.
• GV3: Higher temperature rating, capable of steam service Flow Leakage: Less than 0.05% of Cv factor.
• Control flow in heating or cooling processes Stem Connection: M8 thread.

SERIES GV2 SERIES GV3

Max. Diff. Pres. Max. Diff. Pres.
Stroke Stroke
Model Type Pipe Size Cv Fit with Fit with in. (mm) Model Type Pipe Size Cv Fit with Fit with in. (mm)
EVA2- EVA3- EVA2- EVA3-
GV221 1˝ 145 psi 203 psi 19/32˝ 116 psi 174 psi 19/32˝
9.3 (10 bar) (14 bar) (15) GV321 1˝ 9.3 (8 bar) (12 bar) (15)
109 psi 160 psi 3/4˝ 87 psi 145 psi 3/4˝
GV222 1-1/4˝ 18.6 (7.5 bar) (11 bar) (19) GV322 1-1/4˝ 18.6 (10 bar) (19)
(6 bar)
72 psi 116 psi 3/4˝ 58 psi 102 psi 3/4˝
GV223 2-Way 1-1/2˝ 29.0 (5 bar) (8 bar) GV323 2-Way 1-1/2˝ 29.0 (7 bar)
(19) (4 bar) (19)
46.4 43 psi 72 psi 7/8˝ 46.4 29 psi 58 psi 7/8˝
GV224 2˝ (3 bar) (5 bar) (22) GV324 2˝ (2 bar) (4 bar) (22)
GV225 2-1/2˝ 73.1 29 psi 50 psi 7/8˝ 2-1/2˝ 73.1 29 psi 50 psi 7/8˝
(2 bar) (3.5 bar) GV325
(22) (2 bar) (3.5 bar) (22)
9.3 145 psi 203 psi 19/32˝ 9.3 116 psi 174 psi 19/32˝
GV231 1˝ (10 bar) (14 bar) (15) GV331 1˝ (8 bar) (12 bar) (15)
109 psi 160 psi 3/4˝ 87 psi 145 psi 3/4˝
GV232 1-1/4˝ 18.6 (7.5 bar) (11 bar) (19) GV332 1-1/4˝ 18.6 (6 bar) (19)
(10 bar)
72 psi 116 psi 3/4˝ 58 psi 102 psi 3/4˝
GV233 3-Way 1-1/2˝ 29.0 (5 bar) (8 bar) (19) GV333 3-Way 1-1/2˝ 29.0 (19)
(4 bar) (7 bar)
Valves

43 psi 72 psi 7/8˝ 29 psi 58 psi 7/8˝

GV234 2˝ 46.4 (3 bar) (5 bar) (22) GV334 2˝ 46.4 (4 bar) (22)
(2 bar)
29 psi 50 psi 7/8˝ 29 psi 50 psi 7/8˝
GV235 2-1/2˝ 73.1 (2 bar) (3.5 bar) (22) GV335 2-1/2˝ 73.1 (3.5 bar) (22)
(2 bar)

Fluon® is a registered trademark of AGC Chemicals Americas, Inc.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 406
pg407 7/25/06 4:02 PM Page 1

Series
EVA Electric Actuators
Easily Installs Onto a Series GV Valve
3-3/16 SQ
[97] Ø4-1/32
[102.4]
KNOB

3-25/64 7/16 POWER

[87] [11.1] CONNECT
4-57/64
[124.22]
CONNECTOR

4-3/4 ACTUATOR BRACKET

RED/BLUE
[120] INDICATOR 3-15/16
[100]

NUT U-TYPE CONNECTOR

EVA2 & EVA3 SERIES

EVA1 EVA1 SERIES

EVA2/EVA3
The Series EVA Electric Actuators are designed to mount directly SPECIFICATIONS
onto the Series GV globe valves, creating a complete, low cost, and com- SERIES EVA1
pact control valve package. Floating or modulating control inputs are Output Force: 112 lb (500 N).
available, and the 24 VAC synchronic motor includes a magnetic clutch Power Requirements: 24 VAC.
to protect the motor in stall conditions. Actuators are ruggedly con- Power Consumption: EVA1F: 2.5 VA; EVA1M: 4.5 VA.
structed with a fire-proof ABS housing and robust aluminum bracket. Cycle Time: 262 sec/in. (10.3 sec/mm).
Features include a visual position indicator and manual override to Enclosure Rating: IP54.
make this actuator an excellent choice for any size area, large or small. Housing Material: Fire-proof ABS plastic (UL94V-0).
Bracket Material: Aluminum.
FEATURES Operating Temperature: 36 to 131°F (2 to 55°C).
• Manual Override Storage Temperature: -4 to 149°F (-20 to 65°C).
• Compact Size Humidity Limit: <90%, non-condensing.
• Floating Control or Selectable 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA Electrical Connection: Screw terminal.
Proportional Control Modulating Input: 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA.
• Reversible Direction on Proportional Models Weight: EVA1F: 1.81 lb (0.8 kg); EVA1M: 1.92 lb (0.9 kg).
• Magnetic Clutch Protects Motor in Stall Conditions
SERIES EVA2, EVA3
Output Force: EVA2: 225 lb (1000 N); EVA3: 337 lb (1500 N).
Power Requirements: 24 VAC.
Power Consumption: EVA2F (EVA3F): 5.5 VA; EVA2M (EVA3M):
7.5 VA.
MODELS Cycle Time: EVA2F (EVA2M): 97 sec/in. (3.8 sec/mm); EVA3F
ACTUATOR COMPATIBLE (EVA3M): 164 sec/in. (6.45 sec/mm).
MODEL ACTION OUTPUT FORCE VALVE SIZE VALVE TYPE
EVA1F Floating 112 lb (500 N) 1˝ to 2˝ GV1__
Enclosure Rating: IP40.
EVA1M Modulating 112 lb (500 N) 1˝ to 2˝ GV1__ Housing Material: Fire-proof ABS plastic (UL94V-0).
GV2__ or Bracket Material: Aluminum.
EVA2F Floating 225 lb (1000 N) 1˝ to 2-1/2˝ Operating Temperature: 36 to 131°F (2 to 55°C).
GV3__
GV2__ or Storage Temperature: -4 to 149°F (-20 to 65°C).
EVA2M Modulating 225 lb (1000 N) 1˝ to 2-12˝
GV3__ Humidity Limit: <90%, non-condensing.
GV2__ or Electrical Connection: Screw terminal.
EVA3F Floating 337 lb (1500 N) 1˝ to 2-12˝
GV3__ Modulating Input: 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA.
GV2__ or
EVA3M Modulating 337 lb (1500 N) 1˝ to 2-1/2˝ Weight: EVA2F (EVA3F): 2.43 lb (1.1 kg); EVA2M (EVA3M): 3.31 lb
GV3__
(1.15 kg).
Valves

407 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg408 7/25/06 4:03 PM Page 1

Series
HGV Hand Operated Globe Valve
Low Cost, High Pressure Rating

C Dimensions
PIPE D L H (OPEN) C
SIZE in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm]
13/32 2-3/64 4-1/64 2-3/8
1/4˝
[10] [52] [102] [60]
15/32 2-3/64 4-1/64 2-3/8
3/8˝
[12] [52] [102] [60]
19/32 2-3/64 4-1/64 2-3/8
H 1/2˝
[15] [52] [102] [60]
25/32 2-3/8 4-7/16 2-3/4
3/4˝
[20] [60] [113] [70]
63/64 2-53/64 4-27/32 2-3/4
1˝
[25] [72] [123] [70]
1-1/4 3-5/32 5-53/64 3-5/32
1-1/4˝
[32] [80] [148] [80]
1-37/64 3-35/64 6-19/64 3-17/32
1-1/2˝
[40] [90] [160] [90]
D 1-31/32 4-11/64 7-3/32 3-15/16
2˝
L [50] [106] [180] [100]

The Series HGV Hand Operated Globe Valves are an economical SPECIFICATIONS
and functional alternative to large actuator/control valve packages. Service: Compatible liquids and gases.
Metal-to-metal seating ensures excellent flow control and shut-off ser- End Connections: Female NPT.
vice. The body and bonnet are each constructed of CF8M (316) stainless Wetted Materials:
steel for superb corrosion resistance and chemical compatibility. Body, Bonnet, Packing Nut: CF8M (316) SS.
Disc, Stem, Retainer Ring, Gland: 316 SS.
FEATURES Packing: PTFE.
• Threaded ends conform to ANSI B 2.1, BS 21, DIN 259/2999, Other Materials:
ISO 228 Hand Wheel: Cast Iron.
• Stainless steel inside screw, screwed bonnet, swivel disc integral Plate: Aluminum.
seat, rising stem and hand wheel Wheel Nut: 316 SS.
Pressure Limits: 725 psi (50 bar) from -20 to 100°F (-6.67 to 37.8°C); 500
psi (34.5 bar) at 400°F (204°C), 415 psi (28.6 bar) at 900°F (482°C), 185 psi
(12.8 bar) at 1200°F (649°C).
MODELS
Temperature Limits: -20 to 1200°F (-6.67 to 649°C).
MODEL No. SIZE Cv Value
HGV00 1/4˝ 0.6
HGV01 3/8˝ 1.38
HGV02 1/2˝ 2.46
HGV03 3/4˝ 5.76
HGV04 1˝ 10.69
HGV05 1-1/4˝ 17.1
HGV06 1-1/2˝ 25.2
HGV07 2˝ 47.1

Valves

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 408
pg409 7/25/06 4:03 PM Page 1

Series
SAV-BT Angle Seat Valve - Bronze NPT
Low Cost, Compact Design, For Use with Gases and Liquids

DIMENSIONS
Port Actuator
Connection A B C Diameter Cv

1/2 NPT 2-9/16 5-43/64 4-7/8 1-3/4˝ 4.7

1/2 NPT 2-9/16 7-9/16 6-47/64 2-1/2˝ 4.7
C 3/4 NPT 2-61/64 6-7/64 4-31/32 1-3/4˝ 8.8
3/4 NPT 2-61/64 7-51/64 6-15/16 2-1/2˝ 8.8
1 NPT 3-35/64 6-39/64 6-47/64 1-3/4˝ 19.6
1 NPT 3-35/64 8-23/64 7-19/64 2-1/2˝ 19.6
1 NPT 3-35/64 8-25/32 7-23/32 3-9/16˝ 19.6
45° 1-1/4 NPT 4-11/32 8-55/64 7-39/64 2-1/2˝ 29.4
1-1/4 NPT 4-11/32 9-7/32 4-61/64 3-9/16˝ 29.4
1-1/2 NPT 4-47/64 9-1/16 7-51/64 2-1/2˝ 45.5
1-1/2 NPT 4-47/64 9-27/64 8-5/32 3-9/16˝ 45.5
2 NPT 5-29/32 9-49/64 8-5/32 2-1/2˝ 57.8
2 NPT 5-29/32 10-1/8 8-33/64 3-9/16˝ 57.8

Save space while maintaining flow rates with the compact Series SPECIFICATIONS
SAV-BT Angle Seat Valve. The pneumatic, externally piloted angle seat VALVE BODY
valve is operated by a single acting actuator with a mechanical spring for Service: Gases and liquids compatible with wetted materials.
failsafe operation. Select from either normally closed (NC) or normally Wetted Materials:
Valve Body: Bronze.
open (NO) configurations. Bi-directional valves (normally closed) are Plug and stem: AISI 316L SS.
designed for special applications that require flow in both directions and Stem O-ring: Fluoroelastomers.
incorporate an anti-waterhammer design for liquid applications flowing Seat and seal: PTFE.
under the seat. Normally open valves can also be used to prevent water- Line Sizes: 1/2˝ to 2˝ NPT.
hammer on valve closure in liquid applications. Pressure Limits: See table below.
Constructed of bronze, 316 SS, and PTFE seals, the Series SAV-BT can Flow Leakage: Meets ANSI Class VI.
be used in most gas, liquid, and steam applications. Integral heat sinks Temperature Limits: 14 to 356°F (-10 to 180°C).
dissipate heat protecting the Polyamide actuator, ensuring longer life.
The Series SAV-BT can be mounted in any position. For added flexibili- ACTUATOR
Type: Piston/pneumatic spring.
ty, the actuator housing rotates 360 degrees for positioning of the pres- Pilot Connections: 1-3/4˝ dia. act.: 1/8˝ BSP; 2-1/2˝ dia. act.: 1/4˝ BSP;
sure ports. Standard visual indicator shows open or closed position. 3-9/16˝ dia. act.: 1/4˝ BSP.
Pilot Media: Air, water, inert gas.
Pressure Limits: See table below.
Temperature Limit: 140°F (60°C).
MODELS
Port Actuator Normally Normally Bi-directional Accessories
Connection Diameter Closed Open (NC) A-538 1/8˝ BSP to 1/8˝ NPT adapter, for 1-3/4˝
dia. actuators.
1/2 NPT 1-3/4˝ SAV-BTA1-NC SAV-BTA1-NO SAV-BTA1-BD
1/2 NPT 2-1/2˝ SAV-BTA2-NC SAV-BTA2-NO SAV-BTA2-BD A-539 1/4˝ BSP to 1/4˝ NPT adapter, for 2-1/2˝,
3/4 NPT 1-3/4˝ SAV-BTB1-NC SAV-BTB1-NO SAV-BTB1-BD 3-9/16˝ dia. actuators.
3/4 NPT 2-1/2˝ SAV-BTB2-NC SAV-BTB2-NO SAV-BTB2-BD
1 NPT 1-3/4˝ SAV-BTC1-NC SAV-BTC1-NO SAV-BTC1-BD
1 NPT 2-1/2˝ SAV-BTC2-NC SAV-BTC2-NO SAV-BTC2-BD
1 NPT 3-9/16˝ SAV-BTC3-NC SAV-BTC3-NO SAV-BTC3-BD
1-1/4 NPT 2-1/2˝ SAV-BTD2-NC SAV-BTD2-NO SAV-BTD2-BD
1-1/4 NPT 3-9/16˝ SAV-BTD3-NC SAV-BTD3-NO SAV-BTD3-BD
For Solenoid Valve see Series PV.
1-1/2 NPT 2-1/2˝ SAV-BTE2-NC SAV-BTE2-NO SAV-BTE2-BD
1-1/2 NPT 3-9/16˝ SAV-BTE3-NC SAV-BTE3-NO SAV-BTE3-BD
2 NPT 2-1/2˝ SAV-BTF2-NC SAV-BTF2-NO SAV-BTF2-BD
2 NPT 3-9/16˝ SAV-BTF3-NC SAV-BTF3-NO SAV-BTF3-BD

LINE AND PILOT PRESSURE CHART (psi)

Normally Closed Normally Open Bi-Directional (Normally Closed)
Actuator Max. Max. Min. Max. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max. Max. Min. Max.
Port Line Steam Flow Pilot Pilot Line Steam Flow Pilot Pilot Line Steam Flow Pilot Pilot
Connection Diameter Pres. Pres. Direction Pres. Pres. Pres. Pres. Direction Pres. Pres. Pres. Pres. Direction Pres. Pres.
1/2 NPT 1-3/4˝ 230 130 Overseat 26 150 230 130 Underseat 26 150 230/230 130/130 Ovr/Undr 73 150
Valves

1/2 NPT 2-1/2˝ 290 130 Overseat 22 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 230/230 130/130 Ovr/Undr 55 150
3/4 NPT 1-3/4˝ 230 130 Overseat 26 150 230 130 Underseat 26 150 230/100 130/100 Ovr/Undr 73 150
3/4 NPT 2-1/2˝ 290 130 Overseat 22 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 230/230 130/130 Ovr/Undr 55 150
1 NPT 1-3/4˝ 230 130 Overseat 26 150 230 130 Underseat 26 150 230/75 130/75 Ovr/Undr 73 150
1 NPT 2-1/2˝ 290 130 Overseat 22 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 230/160 130/130 Ovr/Undr 55 150
1 NPT 3-9/16˝ 290 130 Overseat 15 120 230 130 Underseat 15 115 230/200 130/130 Ovr/Undr 48 115
1-1/4 NPT 2-1/2˝ 230 130 Overseat 44 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 230/90 130/90 Ovr/Undr 55 150
1-1/4 NPT 3-9/16˝ 230 130 Overseat 36 120 230 130 Underseat 15 115 230/175 130/130 Ovr/Undr 48 115
1-1/2 NPT 2-1/2˝ 230 130 Overseat 44 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 175/60 130/60 Ovr/Undr 55 150
1-1/2 NPT 3-9/16˝ 230 130 Overseat 36 120 230 130 Underseat 15 115 230/115 130/115 Ovr/Undr 48 115
2 NPT 2-1/2˝ 160 130 Overseat 44 150 175 130 Underseat 22 116 115/36 115/36 Ovr/Undr 55 150
2 NPT 3-9/16˝ 220 130 Overseat 36 120 230 130 Underseat 15 115 200/75 130/75 Ovr/Undr 48 115

409 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg410 7/25/06 4:04 PM Page 1

Series
SAV-ST Angle Seat Valve - Stainless Steel NPT
Low Cost, Compact Design, For Use with Gases & Liquids

DIMENSIONS
Port Actuator
Connection A B C Diameter Cv

1/2 NPT 2-9/16 5-43/64 4-7/8 1-3/4˝ 4.9

C 1/2 NPT 2-9/16 7-9/16 6-47/64 2-1/2˝ 4.9
3/4 NPT 2-61/64 6-7/64 4-31/32 1-3/4˝ 9.1
3/4 NPT 2-61/64 7-51/64 6-15/16 2-1/2˝ 9.1
1 NPT 3-35/64 8-23/64 7-19/64 2-1/2˝ 21.7
1 NPT 3-35/64 8-25/32 7-23/32 3-9/16˝ 21.7
45° 1-1/4 NPT 4-11/32 8-55/64 7-39/64 2-1/2˝ 31.5
1-1/4 NPT 4-11/32 9-7/32 4-61/64 3-9/16˝ 31.5
1-1/2 NPT 4-47/64 9-1/16 7-51/64 2-1/2˝ 49.0
1-1/2 NPT 4-47/64 9-27/64 8-5/32 3-9/16˝ 49.0
2 NPT 5-29/32 9-49/64 8-5/32 2-1/2˝ 60.1
2 NPT 5-29/32 10-1/8 8-33/64 3-9/16˝ 60.1

Save space while maintaining flow rates with the compact Series SPECIFICATIONS
SAV-ST Angle Seat Valve. The pneumatic, externally piloted angle seat VALVE BODY
valve is operated by a single acting actuator with a mechanical spring for Service: Gases and liquids compatible with wetted materials.
failsafe operation. Select from either normally closed (NC) or normally Wetted Materials:
Valve Body: AISI 316L SS.
open (NO) configurations. Bi-directional valves (normally closed) are Plug and stem: AISI 316L SS.
designed for special applications that require flow in both directions and Stem O-ring: Fluoroelastomer.
incorporate an anti-waterhammer design for liquid applications flowing Seat and seal: PTFE.
under the seat. Normally open valves can also be used to prevent water- Line Sizes: 1/2˝ to 2˝ NPT.
hammer on valve closure in liquid applications. Pressure Limits: See table below.
Constructed of investment case stainless steel and PTFE seals, the Series Flow Leakage: Meets ANSI Class VI.
SAV-ST can be used in most gas, liquid, steam and corrosive applications. Temperature Limits: 14 to 356°F (-10 to 180°C).
Integral heat sinks dissipate heat protecting the Polyamide actuator,
ensuring longer life. ACTUATOR
Type: Piston/pneumatic spring.
The Series SAV-ST can be mounted in any position. For added flexibili- Pilot Connections: 1-3/4˝ dia. act.: 1/8˝ BSP; 2-1/2˝ dia. act.: 1/4˝ BSP;
ty, the actuator housing rotates 360 degrees for positioning of the pres- 3-9/16˝ dia. act.: 1/4˝ BSP.
sure ports. Standard visual indicator shows open or closed position. Pilot Media: Air, water, inert gas.
Pressure Limits: See table below.
Temperature Limit: 140°F (60°C).
MODELS
Port Actuator Normally Normally Bi-directional Accessories
Connection Diameter Closed Open (NC) A-538 1/8˝ BSP to 1/8˝ NPT adapter, for 1-3/4˝
dia. actuators.
1/2 NPT 1-3/4˝ SAV-STA1-NC SAV-STA1-NO SAV-STA1-BD A-539 1/4˝ BSP to 1/4˝ NPT adapter, for 2-1/2˝,
1/2 NPT 2-1/2˝ SAV-STA2-NC SAV-STA2-NO SAV-STA2-BD 3-9/16˝ dia. actuators.
3/4 NPT 1-3/4˝ SAV-STB1-NC SAV-STB1-NO SAV-STB1-BD
3/4 NPT 2-1/2˝ SAV-STB2-NC SAV-STB2-NO SAV-STB2-BD
1 NPT 2-1/2˝ SAV-STC2-NC SAV-STC2-NO SAV-STC2-BD
1 NPT 3-9/16˝ SAV-STC3-NC SAV-STC3-NO SAV-STC3-BD
1-1/4 NPT 2-1/2˝ SAV-STD2-NC SAV-STD2-NO SAV-STD2-BD For Solenoid Valve see Series PV.
1-1/4 NPT 3-9/16˝ SAV-STD3-NC SAV-STD3-NO SAV-STD3-BD
1-1/2 NPT 2-1/2˝ SAV-STE2-NC SAV-STE2-NO SAV-STE2-BD
1-1/2 NPT 3-9/16˝ SAV-STE3-NC SAV-STE3-NO SAV-STE3-BD
2 NPT 2-1/2˝ SAV-STF2-NC SAV-STF2-NO SAV-STF2-BD
2 NPT 3-9/16˝ SAV-STF3-NC SAV-STF3-NO SAV-STF3-BD

LINE AND PILOT PRESSURE CHART (psi)

Normally Closed Normally Open Bi-Directional (Normally Closed)
Max. Max. Min. Max. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max. Max. Min. Max.
Port Actuator Line Steam Flow Pilot Pilot Line Steam Flow Pilot Pilot Line Steam Flow Pilot Pilot
Connection Diameter Pres. Pres. Direction Pres. Pres. Pres. Pres. Direction Pres. Pres. Pres. Pres. Direction Pres. Pres.
1/2 NPT 1-3/4˝ 230 130 Overseat 26 150 230 130 Underseat 26 150 230/230 130/130 Ovr/Undr 60 150
Valves

1/2 NPT 2-1/2˝ 290 130 Overseat 22 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 230/230 130/130 Ovr/Undr 55 150
3/4 NPT 1-3/4˝ 230 130 Overseat 26 150 230 130 Underseat 26 150 230/100 130/100 Ovr/Undr 60 150
3/4 NPT 2-1/2˝ 290 130 Overseat 22 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 230/230 130/130 Ovr/Undr 55 150
1 NPT 2-1/2˝ 290 130 Overseat 22 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 230/160 130/130 Ovr/Undr 55 150
1 NPT 3-9/16˝ 290 130 Overseat 15 115 230 130 Underseat 15 115 230/200 130/130 Ovr/Undr 48 115
1-1/4 NPT 2-1/2˝ 230 130 Overseat 41 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 230/90 130/90 Ovr/Undr 55 150
1-1/4 NPT 3-9/16˝ 230 130 Overseat 41 115 230 130 Underseat 15 115 230/175 130/130 Ovr/Undr 48 115
1-1/2 NPT 2-1/2˝ 230 130 Overseat 41 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 175/60 130/60 Ovr/Undr 55 150
1-1/2 NPT 3-9/16˝ 230 130 Overseat 41 115 230 130 Underseat 15 115 230/115 130/115 Ovr/Undr 48 115
2 NPT 2-1/2˝ 160 130 Overseat 41 150 175 130 Underseat 22 116 115/36 115/36 Ovr/Undr 55 150
2 NPT 3-9/16˝ 220 130 Overseat 41 115 230 130 Underseat 15 115 200/75 130/75 Ovr/Undr 48 115

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 410
pg411 7/25/06 4:04 PM Page 1

Series
SAV-SSC Angle Seat Valve - SS Sanitary Clamp
Low Cost, Compact Design, For Use with Gases & Liquids

DIMENSIONS
Port Actuator
Connection A B C Diameter Cv

1/2 4-1/64 6-27/64 4-7/8 1-3/4˝ 4.9

1/2 4-1/64 8-9/32 6-47/64 2-1/2˝ 4.9
C 3/4 4-29/64 6-37/64 4-31/32 1-3/4˝ 9.1
3/4 4-29/64 8-35/64 6-15/16 2-1/2˝ 9.1
1 5-3/32 9-3/32 7-19/64 2-1/2˝ 21.7
1 5-3/32 9-37/64 7-23/32 3-9/16˝ 21.7
1-1/4 5-9/16 9-29/64 7-39/64 2-1/2˝ 31.5
45°
1-1/4 5-9/16 9-57/64 4-61/64 3-9/16˝ 31.5
1-1/2 6-17/64 9-13/16 7-51/64 2-1/2˝ 49.0
1-1/2 6-17/64 10-1/4 8-5/32 3-9/16˝ 49.0
2 7-31/64 10-33/64 8-5/32 2-1/2˝ 60.1
2 7-31/64 10-63/64 8-33/64 3-9/16˝ 60.1

Save space while maintaining flow rates with the compact Series SPECIFICATIONS
SAV-SSC Angle Seat Valve. The pneumatic, externally piloted angle seat VALVE BODY
Service: Gases and liquids compatible with wetted materials.
valve is operated by a single acting actuator with a mechanical spring for Wetted Materials:
failsafe operation. Select from either normally closed (NC) or normally Valve Body: AISI 316L SS.
open (NO) configurations. Bi-directional valves (normally closed) are Plug and stem: AISI 316L SS.
designed for special applications that require flow in both directions and Stem O-ring: Fluoroelastomer.
Seat and seal: PTFE.
incorporate an anti-waterhammer design for liquid applications flowing Line Sizes: 1/2˝ to 2˝.
under the seat. Normally open valves can also be used to prevent water- Pressure Limits: See table below.
hammer on valve closure in liquid applications. Temperature Limits: 14 to 356°F (-10 to 180°C).
Constructed of investment cast stainless steel and PTFE seals, the Series Flow Leakage: Meets ANSI Class VI.
Connections: Sanitary clamp to ISO 2582 (clamp and clamp gasket not
SAV-SSC can be used in most gas, liquid, steam and corrosive applica- included).
tions. Integral heat sinks dissipate heat protecting the Polyamide actu-
ator, ensuring longer life. ACTUATOR
Type: Piston/pneumatic spring.
The Series SAV-SSC can be mounted in any position. For added flexi- Pilot Connections: 1-3/4˝ dia. act.: 1/8˝ BSP; 2-1/2˝ dia. act.: 1/4˝ BSP;
bility, the actuator housing rotates 360 degrees for positioning of the 3-9/16˝ dia. act.: 1/4˝ BSP.
pressure ports. Standard visual indicator shows open or closed position. Pilot Media: Air, water, inert gas.
Pressure Limits: See table below.
Temperature Limit: 140°F (60°C).
MODELS
Port Actuator Normally Normally Bi-directional
Accessories
Connection Diameter Closed Open (NC)
A-538 1/8˝ BSP to 1/8˝ NPT adapter, for 1-3/4˝
1/2 1-3/4˝ SAV-SSCA1-NC SAV-SSCA1-NO SAV-SSCA1-BD dia. actuators.
1/2 2-1/2˝ SAV-SSCA2-NC SAV-SSCA2-NO SAV-SSCA2-BD A-539 1/4˝ BSP to 1/4˝ NPT adapter, for 2-1/2˝,
3/4 1-3/4˝ SAV-SSCB1-NC SAV-SSCB1-NO SAV-SSCB1-BD 3-9/16˝ dia. actuators.
3/4 2-1/2˝ SAV-SSCB2-NC SAV-SSCB2-NO SAV-SSCB2-BD
1 2-1/2˝ SAV-SSCC2-NC SAV-SSCC2-NO SAV-SSCC2-BD
1 3-9/16˝ SAV-SSCC3-NC SAV-SSCC3-NO SAV-SSCC3-BD
1-1/4 2-1/2˝ SAV-SSCD2-NC SAV-SSCD2-NO SAV-SSCD2-BD
1-1/4 3-9/16˝ SAV-SSCD3-NC SAV-SSCD3-NO SAV-SSCD3-BD For Solenoid Valve see Series PV.
1-1/2 2-1/2˝ SAV-SSCE2-NC SAV-SSCE2-NO SAV-SSCE2-BD
1-1/2 3-9/16˝ SAV-SSCE3-NC SAV-SSCE3-NO SAV-SSCE3-BD
2 2-1/2˝ SAV-SSCF2-NC SAV-SSCF2-NO SAV-SSCF2-BD
2 3-9/16˝ SAV-SSCF3-NC SAV-SSCF3-NO SAV-SSCF3-BD

LINE AND PILOT PRESSURE CHART (psi)

Normally Closed Normally Open Bi-Directional (Normally Closed)
Actuator Max. Max. Min. Max. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max. Max. Min. Max.
Port Line Steam Flow Pilot Pilot Line Steam Flow Pilot Pilot Line Steam Flow Pilot Pilot
Connection Diameter Pres. Pres. Direction Pres. Pres. Pres. Pres. Direction Pres. Pres. Pres. Pres. Direction Pres. Pres.
1/2 1-3/4˝ 230 130 Overseat 26 150 230 130 Underseat 26 150 230/230 130/130 Ovr/Undr 60 150
1/2 2-1/2˝ 290 130 Overseat 22 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 230/230 130/130 Ovr/Undr 55 150
Valves

3/4 1-3/4˝ 230 130 Overseat 26 150 230 130 Underseat 26 150 230/100 130/100 Ovr/Undr 60 150
3/4 2-1/2˝ 290 130 Overseat 22 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 230/230 130/130 Ovr/Undr 55 150
1 2-1/2˝ 290 130 Overseat 22 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 230/160 130/130 Ovr/Undr 55 150
1 3-9/16˝ 290 130 Overseat 15 115 230 130 Underseat 15 115 230/200 130/130 Ovr/Undr 48 115
1-1/4 2-1/2˝ 230 130 Overseat 41 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 230/90 130/90 Ovr/Undr 55 150
1-1/4 3-9/16˝ 230 130 Overseat 41 115 230 130 Underseat 15 115 230/175 130/130 Ovr/Undr 48 115
1-1/2 2-1/2˝ 230 130 Overseat 41 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 175/60 130/60 Ovr/Undr 55 150
1-1/2 3-9/16˝ 230 130 Overseat 41 115 230 130 Underseat 15 115 230/115 130/115 Ovr/Undr 48 115
2 2-1/2˝ 160 130 Overseat 41 150 175 130 Underseat 22 116 115/36 115/36 Ovr/Undr 55 150
2 3-9/16˝ 220 130 Overseat 41 115 230 130 Underseat 15 115 200/75 130/75 Ovr/Undr 48 115

411 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg412 7/25/06 4:05 PM Page 1

Series
SAV-SF Angle Seat Valve - Stainless Steel Flange
Low Cost, Compact Design, For Use with Gases & Liquids
B

DIMENSIONS
Port Actuator
Connection A B C Diameter Cv

1/2 5-1/2 8-19/32 6-47/64 2-1/2˝ 4.9

3/4 6 9-19/64 6-15/16 2-1/2˝ 9.1
C 1 6-1/2 9-27/64 7-19/64 2-1/2˝ 21.7
1 6-1/2 9-27/32 7-23/32 3-9/16˝ 21.7
1-1/4 7-1/4 9-59/64 7-39/64 2-1/2˝ 31.5
1-1/4 7-1/4 10-23/64 4-61/64 3-9/16˝ 31.5
45° 1-1/2 8 10-1/8 7-51/64 2-1/2˝ 49.0
1-1/2 8 10-9/16 8-5/32 3-9/16˝ 49.0
2 9 10-53/64 8-5/32 2-1/2˝ 60.1
2 9 11-17/64 8-33/64 3-9/16˝ 60.1

Save space while maintaining flow rates with the compact Series SPECIFICATIONS
SAV-SF Angle Seat Valve. The pneumatic, externally piloted angle seat VALVE BODY
valve is operated by a single acting actuator with a mechanical spring for Service: Gases and liquids compatible with wetted materials.
failsafe operation. Select from either normally closed (NC) or normally Wetted Materials:
Valve Body: AISI 316L SS.
open (NO) configurations. Bi-directional valves (normally closed) are Plug and stem: AISI 316L SS.
designed for special applications that require flow in both directions and Stem O-ring: Fluoroelastomers.
incorporate an anti-waterhammer design for liquid applications flowing Seat and seal: PTFE.
under the seat. Normally open valves can also be used to prevent water- Line Sizes: 1/2˝ to 2˝.
hammer on valve closure in liquid applications. Pressure Limits: See table below.
Constructed of investment case stainless steel and PTFE seals, the Series Temperature Limits: 14 to 356°F (-10 to 180°C).
SAV-SF can be used in most gas, liquid, steam and corrosive applications. Flow Leakage: Meets ANSI Class VI.
Integral heat sinks dissipate heat protecting the Polyamide actuator, Connections: ANSI 150# Flange.
ensuring longer life.
ACTUATOR
The Series SAV-SF can be mounted in any position. For added flexibili- Type: Piston/pneumatic spring.
ty, the actuator housing rotates 360 degrees for positioning of the pres- Pilot Connections: 1-3/4˝ dia. act.: 1/8˝ BSP; 2-1/2˝ dia. act.: 1/4˝ BSP;
sure ports. Standard visual indicator shows open or closed position. 3-9/16˝ dia. act.: 1/4˝ BSP.
Pilot Media: Air, water, inert gas.
Pressure Limits: See table below.
Temperature Limit: 140°F (60°C).
MODELS
Port Actuator Normally Normally Bi-directional Accessories
Connection Diameter Closed Open (NC) A-538 1/8˝ BSP to 1/8˝ NPT adapter, for 1-3/4˝
dia. actuators.
1/2 2-1/2˝ SAV-SFA2-NC SAV-SFA2-NO SAV-SFA2-BD A-539 1/4˝ BSP to 1/4˝ NPT adapter, for 2-1/2˝,
3/4 2-1/2˝ SAV-SFB2-NC SAV-SFB2-NO SAV-SFB2-BD 3-9/16˝ dia. actuators.
1 2-1/2˝ SAV-SFC2-NC SAV-SFC2-NO SAV-SFC2-BD
1 3-9/16˝ SAV-SFC3-NC SAV-SFC3-NO SAV-SFC3-BD
1-1/4 2-1/2˝ SAV-SFD2-NC SAV-SFD2-NO SAV-SFD2-BD
1-1/4 3-9/16˝ SAV-SFD3-NC SAV-SFD3-NO SAV-SFD3-BD For Solenoid Valve see Series PV.
1-1/2 2-1/2˝ SAV-SFE2-NC SAV-SFE2-NO SAV-SFE2-BD
1-1/2 3-9/16˝ SAV-SFE3-NC SAV-SFE3-NO SAV-SFE3-BD
2 2-1/2˝ SAV-SFF2-NC SAV-SFF2-NO SAV-SFF2-BD
2 3-9/16˝ SAV-SFF3-NC SAV-SFF3-NO SAV-SFF3-BD

LINE AND PILOT PRESSURE CHART (psi)

Normally Closed Normally Open Bi-Directional (Normally Closed)
Max. Max. Min. Max. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max. Max. Min. Max.
Port Actuator Line Steam Flow Pilot Pilot Line Steam Flow Pilot Pilot Line Steam Flow Pilot Pilot
Connection Diameter Pres. Pres. Direction Pres. Pres. Pres. Pres. Direction Pres. Pres. Pres. Pres. Direction Pres. Pres.
Valves

1/2 2-1/2˝ 290 130 Overseat 22 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 230/230 130/130 Ovr/Undr 55 150
3/4 2-1/2˝ 290 130 Overseat 22 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 230/230 130/130 Ovr/Undr 55 150
1 2-1/2˝ 290 130 Overseat 22 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 230/160 130/130 Ovr/Undr 55 150
1 3-9/16˝ 290 130 Overseat 15 115 230 130 Underseat 15 115 230/200 130/130 Ovr/Undr 48 115
1-1/4 2-1/2˝ 230 130 Overseat 41 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 230/90 130/90 Ovr/Undr 55 150
1-1/4 3-9/16˝ 230 130 Overseat 41 115 230 130 Underseat 15 115 230/175 130/130 Ovr/Undr 48 115
1-1/2 2-1/2˝ 230 130 Overseat 41 150 230 130 Underseat 22 150 175/60 130/60 Ovr/Undr 55 150
1-1/2 3-9/16˝ 230 130 Overseat 41 115 230 130 Underseat 15 115 230/115 130/115 Ovr/Undr 48 115
2 2-1/2˝ 160 130 Overseat 41 150 175 130 Underseat 22 116 115/36 115/36 Ovr/Undr 55 150
2 3-9/16˝ 220 130 Overseat 41 115 230 130 Underseat 15 115 200/75 130/75 Ovr/Undr 48 115

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 412
pg413 7/25/06 4:06 PM Page 1

Series
BV2M Two-Piece Stainless Steel Ball Valve
Full Port, 1000 psig (69 bar)
DIMENSIONS
Size A B C D E F G (UNC) Cv Torque
D E (in-lbs)
1/4˝ 2.00 0.38 1.97 3.78 1.125 0.500 10-24 6 30
C TAPPING: G 3/8˝ 2.00 0.46 1.97 3.78 1.125 0.500 10-24 7 30
F 1/2˝ 2.40 0.50 1.97 3.78 1.125 0.500 10-24 10 40
B B 3/4˝ 2.95 0.79 2.52 5.12 1.375 0.875 10-24 24 80
F 1˝ 3.42 0.98 2.60 5.91 1.375 0.875 10-24 45 120
TAPPING: G 1-1/4˝ 3.97 1.26 3.11 5.91 1.500 1.000 1/4-20 90 240
A 1-1/2˝ 4.33 1.50 3.26 6.69 1.500 1.000 1/4-20 125 420
2˝ 5.19 1.97 3.70 6.69 1.500 1.000 1/4-20 190 560
BV2M100 2-1/2˝ 6.57 2.56 4.52 9.05 2.750 1.375 1/4-20 240 1100
3˝ 7.60 3.15 4.92 9.05 2.750 1.375 1/4-20 425 1600

The Series BV2 is the economical choice for high quality, stainless SPECIFICATIONS
steel ball valves for use in chemical, petrochemical, pulp and paper and End Connections: Female NPT.
general applications. The Series BV2 body and endcaps are construct- Pressure Limits: 1000 psi (69 bar) WOG, 150 psi (10.3 bar) SWP.
ed of investment cast stainless steel, while stem is 316 SS. Seats and Wetted Materials: Body, Ball, End Cap: CF8M SS; Stem: 316 SS;
body seals are 15% glass reinforced PTFE providing broad media com- Seat, Thrust Washer: RTFE; End Gasket, Stem Packing: PTFE.
patibility and bubble tight shutoff to 1000 psig (69 bar). Internally Temperature Limits: -20 to 450°F (-29 to 232°C).
loaded, blowout-proof stem provides safety in the event of overpressure.
MODELS
Full port design allows for maximum Cv with minimal pressure drop.
Integral actuator mounting pads allows for ease of automation. Size
Model Size Model
1/4˝ BV2M100 1-1/4˝ BV2M105
3/8˝ BV2M101 1-1/2˝ BV2M106
For actuated versions of this valve see pages 417-418 of the catalog. 1/2˝ BV2M102 2˝ BV2M107
3/4˝ BV2M103 2-1/2˝ BV2M108
1˝ BV2M104 3˝ BV2M109

Series
BV2MB Two-Piece Hand Lever Brass Ball Valve
Full Port, Economical, Blowout-Proof Stem
B
DIMENSIONS
Size A (Ref) B (Ref) C (Ref) D (Ref)
1/4˝ 1.800 3.800 .393 1.250
3/8˝ 2.000 3.800 .393 1.250
D 1/2˝ 2.070 3.800 .551 1.830
3/4˝ 2.360 3.800 .748 1.950
1˝ 2.950 4.350 .944 2.170
C 1-1/4˝ 3.370 5.470 1.181 2.800
1-1/2˝ 3.740 5.470 1.496 3.030
2˝ 4.290 6.380 1.850 3.330
2-1/2˝ 5.650 8.720 2.440 4.000
3˝ 6.180 8.720 2.990 4.310
A

The Series BV2MB is an economical hand lever ball valve for com- SPECIFICATIONS
mercial and general industrial use. The Series BV2MB is perfect for
Body: Two-Piece.
water shutoff applications. Valve body, body cap, and ball are made of
quality brass. Seats and stem packing are constructed of TFE for long End Connections: 1/4˝ to 3˝ female NPT.
lasting service. Blowout-proof stem provides safety in the event of over- Pressure Limit: 1/4˝ to 1˝: 600 psi (41.4 bar), 1-1/4˝ to 2˝: 400 psi
pressure. Full port design allows for maximum Cv and minimal pres-
sure drop. (27.6 bar), 2-1/2˝ to 3˝: 200 psi (13.8 bar) WOG.
Valves

Wetted Materials: Body and body cap: forged brass (ASTM B283-
MODELS
C37700); ball and stem: brass; seat and packing: TFE.
Size Model Cv Size Model Cv
1/4˝ BV2MB00 7.5 1-1/4˝ BV2MB05 105 Temperature Limit: 10 to 200°F (-12 to 93°C).
3/8˝ BV2MB01 7.5 1-1/2˝ BV2MB06 160 Other Materials: Body seal: rubber; handle: plated steel; nut and
1/2˝ BV2MB02 16 2˝ BV2MB07 325
3/4˝ BV2MB03 43 2-1/2˝ BV2MB08 475 gasket: brass.
1˝ BV2MB04 58 3˝ BV2MB09 780

413 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg414 7/25/06 4:06 PM Page 1

Series
BV3HL Three-Piece Sanitary Ball Valve
Hand Lever, Stainless Steel Construction, Cavity Filled
(D)

(C)
(E) BOLT CIRCLE
(ØB)

(G SQ.) (A)

Series BV3HL Sanitary Manual Ball Valves SPECIFICATIONS Wetted Materials: Body, Ball, End
• Ideal sanitary ball valve for high purity applications, including food & Service: Compatible liquids and Caps: CF8M stainless steel. Stem: 316
beverage, pharmaceutical and biotech industries. gases. SS. Stem Seal: Fluoroelastomer. Seats,
• Three-piece stainless steel investment cast body. Body: 3-piece. Body Seal, Thrust Washer, Packing:
• 240 Grit internal polish. PTFE.
Line Size: 1/2˝ to 4˝.
• Polished clamp end to sanitary finish. Temperature Limits: -40 to 450° (-40
• PTFE cavity filler to reduce the threat of product entrapment. End Connections: Sanitary clamp to 232°C) CWP. 297°F (147°C) steam
(liner meets BS 4825, part 3). maximum.
Series BV3HL Sanitary Ball Valves feature sanitary clamp ends for easy line Pressure Limits: 1000 psi (69 bar) Other Materials: 304 SS, vinyl.
removal. The sanitary polish is ideal for use in pharmaceutical, food & beverage, WOG.
and chemical processing systems. PTFE filled cavities aid to reduce product
entrapment, while the full bore design provides consistent flow characteristics.
The swing-out design of the valve allows for maintenance of the center section
while leaving the ends clamped in place. Superior leak protection is accomplished
by using a live-loaded packing system. An ISO 5211 mounting pad is provided for
easy automation when combined with an electric or pneumatic actuator. DIMENSIONS
MODELS Size ISO A B C D E G Torque Weight
(in.) 5211 (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) Cv (in-lbs) lbs (kg)
Size (in.) Model 1/2˝ F03-F04 4.33 0.37 2.05 3.94 1.42/1.65 1.46 14 60 1.4 (0.64)
1/2˝ BV3HL02TC 3/4˝ 2.24 5.16 1.42/1.65 1.46 45 80 2.0 (0.91)
F03-F04 4.68 0.63
3/4˝ BV3HL03TC
1˝ F04-F05 4.88 0.87 2.36 5.16 1.65/1.97 1.87 81 100 2.9 (1.3)
1˝ BV3HL04TC
1-1/2˝ 1-1/2˝ F05-F07 5.55 1.37 3.54 7.36 1.97/2.76 2.20 215 380 5.7 (2.6)
BV3HL06TC
2˝ BV3HL07TC 2˝ F05-F07 6.37 1.87 5.51 7.36 1.97/2.76 2.20 410 450 9.0 (4.1)
2-1/2˝ BV3HL08TC 2-1/2˝ F07 7.76 2.07 5.91 10.24 2.76 3.15 618 650 19.3 (8.8)
3˝ BV3HL09TC 3˝ F07 9.02 2.87 6.10 10.24 2.76 3.15 940 900 31.2 (14.2)
4˝ BV3HL10TC 4˝ F10 9.49 3.83 7.09 11.24 4.02 4.26 1840 1632 43.7 (19.8)

Series
BV3HL-3A Three-Piece Sanitary Ball Valve
Hand Lever, Cavity Filled, Meets 3A Sanitary Standards
D

DIMENSIONS
Size ISO A B C D Torque Weight
C (in.) 5211 (in.) (in.) (in.) Cv (in-lbs) lbs (kg)
(in.)
1/2˝ F03-F04 3.50 0.37 2.05 3.94 14 60 1.55 (0.70)
3/4˝ F03-F04 3.98 0.63 2.24 5.16 45 80 1.95 (0.88)
1˝ F04-F05 4.49 0.87 2.36 5.16 81 100 2.80 (1.27)
B 1-1/2˝ F05-F07 5.51 1.38 3.54 7.36 215 380 7.00 (3.18)
2˝ F05-F07 6.14 1.87 4.02 7.36 410 450 9.50 (4.31)
2-1/2˝ F07 7.76 2.37 5.51 10.24 618 650 19.50 (8.85)
3˝ F07 9.02 2.87 6.10 10.24 940 900 29.50 (13.38)
4˝ F10 9.49 3.84 7.09 11.24 1840 1632 43.00 (19.50)
A

Series BV3HL-3A Sanitary Manual Ball Valves SPECIFICATIONS Wetted Materials: Body, Ball, End
• Designed to meet 3A sanitary standards. Service: Compatible liquids and Caps: CF8M SS.Stem: 316 SS. Seats,
• Ideal sanitary ball valve for high purity applications, including food & gases. Body Seal, Thrust Washer, Packing:
beverage, pharmaceutical and biotech industries. Body: 3-piece. TFE.
• Three-piece stainless steel investment cast body. Line Size: 1/2˝ to 4˝. Temperature Limits: -40 to 450°F
• 15RA internal bore polish. End Connections: Sanitary clamp (-40 to 232°C) CWP. 297°F (147°C)
• Polished clamp end to sanitary finish. (liner meets BS 4825, part 3). steam maximum.
• TFE cavity filler to reduce the threat of product entrapment. Pressure Limits: 1000 psi (69 bar) Other Materials: 304 SS, vinyl.
WOG. Agency Approvals: Meets 3A.
Series BV3HL-3A Sanitary Ball Valves are designed to meet 3A standards
Valves

and feature sanitary clamp ends for easy line removal. The sanitary polish is ideal MODELS
for use in pharmaceutical, food & beverage, and chemical processing systems, Size (in.) Model
while the cavity filler aids to reduce product entrapment, and the full bore design 1/2˝ BV3HL02TC-3A
provides consistent flow characteristics. The swing-out design of the valve allows 3/4˝ BV3HL03TC-3A
for maintenance of the center section while leaving the ends clamped in place. 1˝ BV3HL04TC-3A
Superior leak protection is accomplished by using a live-loaded packing system. 1-1/2˝ BV3HL06TC-3A
An ISO 5211 mounting pad is provided for easy automation when combined with 2˝ BV3HL07TC-3A
an electric or pneumatic actuator. 2-1/2˝ BV3HL08TC-3A
3˝ BV3HL09TC-3A
4˝ BV3HL010TC-3A

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 414
pg415 7/25/06 4:07 PM Page 1

Series
MV Mini Brass Ball Valve
Economical, Blowout-Proof Stem

Wedge Handle Screwdriver Slot Lever Handle Tee Handle

Series MV Mini Brass Ball Valves are ideal for use in small, SPECIFICATIONS
confined spaces, where larger valves are inappropriate. Service: Gases and liquids compatible with wetted materials. Not
rated for steam use.
Installation is made easy with a choice of Female x Female or Wetted Materials:
Male x Female process connections. Pure PTFE ball seats pro- Valve Body: Nickel Plated Brass (CW617N).
vide broad media compatibility and bubble tight shutoff. Double Valve Ball: Chrome-Plated Brass.
seal system allows valve to be operated in both directions. All O-ring Stem Seal: Fluoroelastomer.
Ball Seats: PTFE.
handles are nylon, except a screwdriver type with a slotted screw. Pressure Limits:
Wedge handle and screwdriver style have a blowout-proof brass MV4: -29˝ Hg to 200 psi (-736 mm Hg to 13.8 bar) (CWP).
stem for maximum safety and durability. MV5: -29˝ Hg to 450 psi (-736 mm Hg to 31 bar) (CWP).
Temperature Limits:
MV4: -4 to 200°F (-20 to 93.3°C).
MV5: -4 to 250°F (-20 to 121°C).
Connections: NPT, See model chart.

MODELS
Series MV Mini Brass Ball Valves
Handle Style Pipe Size Cv Value Max. Pressure Female x Female Male x Female
Model Model
1/8˝ 5.3 MV4-LF1 MV4-LM1
1/4˝ 6.6 MV4-LF2 MV4-LM2
Lever Handle
3/8˝ 6.6 MV4-LF3 MV4-LM3
1/2˝ 11 MV4-LF4 MV4-LM4
200 psi (CWP)
1/8˝ 5.3 MV4-TF1 MV4-TM1
Tee Handle 1/4˝ 6.6 MV4-TF2 MV4-TM2
3/8˝ 6.6 MV4-TF3 MV4-TM3
1/2˝ 11 MV4-TF4 MV4-TM4
1/8˝ 5.3 MV5-WF1 MV5-WM1
1/4˝ 6.6 MV5-WF2 MV5-WM2
Wedge Handle
3/8˝ 6.6 MV5-WF3 MV5-WM3
1/2˝ 11 MV5-WF4 MV5-WM4
450 psi (CWP)
1/8˝ 5.3 MV5-SF1 MV5-SM1
1/4˝ 6.6 MV5-SF2 MV5-SM2
Screwdriver Slot
3/8˝ 6.6 MV5-SF3 MV5-SM3
1/2˝ 11 MV5-SF4 MV5-SM4
Valves

415 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg416 7/25/06 4:10 PM Page 1

Series
BV2 Automated Ball Valves – Two-Piece SS Flange
Electric and Pneumatic Actuators
CLEARANCE REQUIRED FOR COVER REMOVAL: 3.000˝
E
F C
ELECTRIC
A 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝ 2-1/2˝ 3˝ 4˝
B 8.210 9.010 9.340 13.060* 13.900* 14.970* 15.680* 18..900*
C 4.000 4.250 4.250 7.000 7.000 7.000 7.000 10.000
B D 4.250 4.620 5.000 6.500 7.000 7.500 7.500 9.000
E 5.630 6.880 6.880 7.000 7.000 7.000 7.000 10.000
F 2.310 2.430 2.430 2.380 2.380 2.380 2.380 3.750
ACT. U11, U12, U12, U13, U15, U15, U16, U17,
V12 V12 V12 V13 V15 V15 V16 V17
*INCLUDES DECLUTCHABLE MANUAL OVERRIDE AND HANDWHEEL

D A PNEUMATIC DOUBLE ACTING

A 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝ 2-1/2˝ 3˝ 4˝
B 7.390 7.450 7.780 8.860 9.200 11.760 12.980 13.590
E C C 2.800 2.800 2.800 3.170 3.170 4.170 4.840 4.840
D 4.250 4.620 5.000 6.500 7.000 7.500 8.000 9.000
E 6.810 6.810 6.810 9.550 9.550 9.840 11.690 11.690
ACT. DA2 DA2 DA2 DA3 DA4 DA5 DA5 DA7
B
PNEUMATIC SPRING RETURN
A 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝ 2-1/2˝ 3˝ 4˝
B 7.760 7.880 8.210 10.360 10.700 13.530 15.810 16.420
C 3.170 3.170 3.170 4.840 4.840 5.830 7.360 7.360
D 4.250 4.620 5.000 6.500 7.000 7.500 8.000 9.000
E 7.720 7.720 9.550 11.690 11.690 15.910 20.550 20.550
D A ACT. SR2 SR3 SR4 SR4 SR6 SR7 SR8 SR9

BV2 Series Automated Ball Valves SPECIFICATIONS Housing Material: Aluminum with ther-
• 150# full port flanged ball valve Body: 2 – piece. mal bonding polyester powder finish.
• 2-piece stainless steel investment cast body Line Size: 1/2˝ to 4˝. Temperature Limit: 0 to 150°F (-18 to
65°C).
• PTFE seats and seals End Connections: 150# Flange.
Electrical Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT.
• Ideal for industrial operations Pressure Limit: 150 psi (10.3 bar).
Modulating Input: 4 to 20 mA.
• Electric or Pneumatic actuators Wetted Materials:
Standard Features: Manual override and
Body, End Cap, Stem: position indicator except modulating units.
Stainless Steel.
Our Series BV2 ball valves offer ANSI 150# flanged ends for easy installa- Ball: Stainless Steel. Pneumatic “DA” and “SR” Series
tion. 1/2˝ through 4˝ sizes are standard for great flow rates with minimal Seat, Stem Seal: PTFE. Type: DA Series is double acting and SR
pressure drop. The valve features a blowout-proof stem for added safety, rein- Temperature Limit: -40 to 450°F Series is spring return (rack and pinion).
forced TFE seats and seals for longer life, and a 316SS (ASTM A351 GR (-40 to 232°C). Normal Supply Pressure: 80 psi (5.5
CF8M) ball for better performance. Actuators are direct mounted, creating Other Materials: Body Seal, Body bar).
a compact assembly for tight spaces. Double o-ring stem seals assure leak- O-ring, Stem O-ring: Fluoroelastomer. Maximum Supply Pressure: 130 psig
free operation. (9.0 bar).
ACTUATORS Air Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
The BV2 Series is an economical automated valve package with either an Electric Air Consumption (per stroke): DA2,
electric or pneumatic actuator. Electrically actuated models are weather- Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 50/60 SR2: 9.34 cu. in.; DA3, SR3: 17.21 cu.
proof, NEMA 4, powered by standard 115 VAC supply, and are available in HZ, single phase. Optional 220 VAC, 24 in.; DA4, SR4: 20.5 cu. in.; DA5, SR5:
VAC, 12 VDC, and 24 VDC. 39.54 cu. in.; SR6: 54.37 cu. in.; SR7:
either two-position or proportional control. Two-position actuators use the 85.43 cu. in.; SR8: 122.05 cu. in.; SR9:
Power Consumption (Locked Rotor
115 VAC input to drive the valve open or closed, while the modulating actu- Current): Two position: 1/2˝: 0.55A, 3/4˝
215.11 cu. in.
ator accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for infinite valve positioning. Actuator fea- and 1˝: 0.75A, 1-1/2˝: 0.99A, 2˝ and 2- Cycle Time (per 90°): DA1: .03 sec.;
tures thermal overload protection and a permanently lubricated gear train. 1/2˝: 0.75A, 3˝: 1.1A. Modulating: 1/4˝ to DA2: .05 sec.; DA3: .06 sec.; DA5: .08
3/4˝: 0.55A, 1˝ to 1-1/2˝: 0.75A, 2˝: 0.75A, sec.; DA6: .18sec.; SR2: .07 sec.; SR3:
2-1/2˝: 0.75A; 3˝ and 4˝: 1.1A. .13 sec.; SR4: .17 sec.; SR5: .28 sec.;
The pneumatic double acting actuator uses an air supply to drive the valve SR6: .39 sec.; SR7: .60 sec. ; SR8: .90
open and closed. The actuator has two supply ports with one driving the Cycle Time (per 90°): Two position: 1/2˝: sec.; SR9: 1.75 sec.
2.5 sec., 3/4˝ to 1-1/2˝: 5 sec., 2˝ to 3˝: 15
valve open and the other driving the valve closed. Spring return pneumatic sec., 4˝: 30 sec. Modulating: 1/2˝ to 1- Housing Material: Anodized aluminum
actuators use the air supply to open the valve and internally loaded springs 1/2˝ : 10 sec., 2˝ and 2-1/2˝: 20 sec., 4˝: body and epoxy coated aluminum end
return the valve to the closed position. Also available is the SV3 solenoid 30 sec. caps.
valve to electrically switch the air supply pressure between the air supply Duty Rating: Two position: 1/2”: 75%, Temperature Limit: -4 to 180°F (-20 to
3/4˝ to 4˝: 25%. Modulating: 75%. 82°C).
ports for opening and closing the valve. Actuators are constructed of anodized Accessory Mounting: NAMUR standard.
and epoxy coated aluminum for years of corrosion free service. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4. Optional
NEMA 7. Standard Features: Position indicator.
MODELS
Double Acting Spring Return Two Position Modulating
Size Cv Pneumatic Pneumatic Options:
Electric Electric
Explosion-proof Electric Actuator
Model Model Model Model -Add suffix “EX” to
Valves

1/2˝ 15 BV2DA202F1 BV2SR202F1 BV2U1102F1 BV2V1202F1 the model number

3/4˝ 40 BV2DA203F1 BV2SR303F1 BV2U1203F1 BV2V1203F1
1˝ 70 BV2DA204F1 BV2SR404F1 BV2U1204F1 BV2V1204F1 Optional Electric Actuator Supply Voltages
-Contact factory for
1-1/2˝ 240 BV2DA306F1 BV2SR406F1 BV2U1306F1 BV2V1306F1
model number change
2˝ 400 BV2DA407F1 BV2SR607F1 BV2U1507F1 BV2V1507F1
2-1/2˝ 700 BV2DA508F1 BV2SR708F1 BV2U1508F1 BV2V1508F1 Solenoid Valve - See Model SV3.
3˝ 980 BV2DA509F1 BV2SR809F1 BV2U1609F1 BV2V1609F1
4˝ 1700 BV2DA710F1 BV2SR910F1 BV2U1710F1 BV2V1710F1
NOTE: All spring return actuators are factory standard as spring (fail) close.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 416
pg417 7/25/06 4:11 PM Page 1

Series
BV2 Automated Two-Piece Stainless Steel Ball Valves
Electric and Pneumatic Actuators
BV2 Series Automated Ball Valves:
• BV2B Series is an electric actuator that is rated NEMA 4X and is
available in two position or modulating
• BV2L Series is a low cost electric actuator that is rated NEMA 2
and is available in 120 VAC or 24 VAC/DC power supply with or
without spring return
• BV2F Series is a pneumatic double acting rack and pinion
actuator
• BV2J Series is a pneumatic spring return rack and pinion
actuator
• BV2C Series is a pneumatic spring return rack and pinion
actuator that is specifically for adverse environments and The Series BV2F is pneumatic double acting, rack and pinion actu-
corrosive process materials
ated. The double acting actuator uses a pneumatic supply to drive the
valve open and closed. The actuator has two supply ports with one dri-
ving the valve open and the other driving the valve closed. Available is
a factory installed solenoid valve to electrically switch the air supply
pressure between the air supply ports for opening and closing the
valve. Actuators are constructed of anodized and polyurethane coated
aluminum for years of corrosion free service.

The Series BV2J is the spring return version of the BV2F. The ac-
tuator uses the air supply to open the valve and internally loaded
The Series BV2B incorporates a weatherproof, NEMA 4X, electric springs return the valve to the closed position.
actuator powered by standard 115 VAC supply. Available in either two-
position or proportional control, the BV2B provides an economical
weatherproof automated valve package. Two-position actuators use
the 115 VAC input to drive the valve open or closed, while the modu-
lating actuator accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for infinite valve positioning.
Actuator features a single phase capacitor run motor with overload
protection and a permanently lubricated gear train.

The Series BV2C is designed to withstand the toughest environ-

ments. Incorporated in the BV2C is our two-piece stainless steel ball
valve coupled with a pneumatic spring return rack and pinion actuator.
The actuator body is constructed of glass-filled polyester with 303 SS
shaft, polyarilamide pistons, cylinder guides, and racks to provide op-
timum protection from adverse environments and corrosive process
materials. All mounting hardware and couplings are constructed of
The Series BV2L is a low cost electric actuator combined with our
Valves

316 SS. This series is ideal for pharmaceutical, chemical, food and
durable two-piece stainless steel ball valve to make a compact, low cost,
dairy, or pulp and paper industries where metal actuators would not
automated valve package. Electric actuators are available in either 24
survive.
VAC/DC or 120 VAC supply voltage. Spring return models return the
valve to its failsafe position upon loss of power and are factory supplied to
return to the closed position upon failure. The BV2L is an ideal valve
package for HVAC applications and OEM’s such as boiler manufacturers.

417 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg418 7/25/06 4:11 PM Page 1

SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 2- piece. Weight: LS: 1.2 lb (.55 kg), LT: 2.8 lb (1.3 kg), LR: 3.1 lb (1.4 kg), LQ: 3.4
Line Size: 1/4˝ to 2˝. lb (1.54 kg), L1: 4.0 lb (1.8 kg), L7: 6.0 lb (2.7 kg), L9: 6.9 lb (3.1 kg).
End Connections: Female NPT. Approvals: UL 873, CE (except L1), CSA.
Pressure Limit: 1000 psi (69 bar) WOG, 150 psi (10.3 bar) SWP. Features: Position Indicator.
Wetted Materials: Pneumatic “F” and “J” Series
Body, Ball, End Cap: CF8M SS (316 SS). Type: F Series is double acting and J Series spring return (rack and
Stem: 316 SS. pinion).
Seat, Thrust Washer: RTFE. Normal Supply Pressure: 80 psi (5.5 bar).
End Gasket, Stem Packing: PTFE. Maximum Supply Pressure: 125 psig (8.6 bar).
Temperature Limits: -20 to 450°F (-29 to 232°C). Air Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
ACTUATORS Air Consumption (per stroke): F1, J1: 9.6 cu. in.; F2, J2: 11.4 cu. in.;
Electric “B” Series F3, J3: 27.5 cu. in.; J5: 55.5cu. in.
Power Requirements: 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz, single phase. Cycle Time (per 90°): F: 1 sec., J: 2 sec.
Power Consumption: Locked Rotor Current: Two position: 0.70 A, Mod- Housing Material: Anodized aluminum body and polyurethane coated
ulating: 0.56 A. aluminum end caps.
Cycle Time (per 90°): Two Position: 10 sec, Modulating: 30 sec. Temperature Limit: -31 to 230°F (-35 to 110°C).
Duty Rating: 30% at 75°F (24°C). Accessory Mounting: NAMUR standard.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X. Standard Features: Position indicator.
Housing Material: Anodized Aluminum with epoxy finish. Weight: F1, J1: 2.0 lb (.91 kg); F2, J2: 4.0 lb (1.81 kg); F3, J3: 7.5 lb (3.4
Temperature Limits: -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C). kg), J5: 13.2 lb (6.0 kg).
Electrical Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT.
Modulating Input: 4 to 20 mA. Pneumatic “C” Series
Weight: 5 lb (2.27 kg), BA: 12 lb (5.44 kg). Type: Spring Return (rack and pinion).
Approvals: CSA. Normal Supply Pressure: 80 psi (5.5 bar) [Can use air, water, or any
other non-aggressive fluid].
Electric “L” Series Maximum Supply Pressure: 120 psig (8.3 bar).
Power Requirements: L9, LQ: 120 VAC ±10% 50/60 Hz; L1, L7, LR, Air Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
LS, LT: 24 VAC ± 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC ±10%. Air Consumption (per stroke): C1: 4.58 cu. in., C2: 9.15 cu. in., C3:
Power Consumption: LS: 2 W, LT: 2.5 W, L1: 3 W, L7, LR: 5W, LQ: 5.5 21.4 cu. in.
W, L9: 6 W. Cycle Time (per 90°): Open/Closed: C1: 0.15/0.30 sec., C2: 0.20/0.40
Cycle Time (per 90°): LQ, LR: Motor <40 to 75 sec., Spring Return <25 sec, C3: 0.60/1.10 sec.
sec. (<60 sec. under -4°F (-20°C)); L9, L7: Motor 150 sec., Spring Return Housing Material: Glass filled polyester body and endcaps.
< 20 sec.; LS: 110 sec. Maximum; LT: 150 sec. Maximum; L1: 140 sec. Shaft: 303 SS with double Buna N O-ring seal. Pistons, Guides, and
Maximum. Racks: Molded Polyarilamide resin.
Duty Rating: Continuous. Temperature Limit: -25 to 195°F (-32 to 90°C).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 2. Accessory Mounting: NAMUR standard.
Temperature Limits: -22 to 122° F (-30 to 50° C). Standard Features: Position indicator.
Electrical Connection: 3 ft, 18 GA cable and 1/2˝ Conduit Connector Weight: C1: 1.5 lb (.68 kg), C2: 3.0 lb (1.36 kg), C3: 6.0 lb (2.72 kg).
(Except LS).

MODELS
BV2 Model Chart - F, J, C, and B Actuators
Double Acting Spring Return Spring Return Two Position Modulating Electric
Pneumatic Pneumatic Pneumatic Electric B Series
F Series J Series C Series B Series
Size Cv Model Model Model Model Model
1/4˝ 6 BV2F100 BV2J100 BV2C100 BV2B700 BV2BA00
3/8˝ 7 BV2F101 BV2J101 BV2C101 BV2B701 BV2BA01
1/2˝ 10 BV2F102 BV2J102 BV2C102 BV2B702 BV2BA02
3/4˝ 24 BV2F103 BV2J203 BV2C203 BV2B703 BV2BA03
1˝ 45 BV2F104 BV2J204 BV2C204 BV2B704 BV2BA04
1-1/4˝ 90 BV2F205 BV2J305 BV2C205 BV2B705 BV2BA05
1-1/2˝ 125 BV2F306 BV2J506 BV2C306 BV2B706 BV2BA06
2˝ 190 BV2F307 BV2J507 BV2C307 BV2B707 BV2BA07

Options:
Factory Mounted Solenoid Valve (Pneumatic Actuators) - add suffix “-SV” to model number
BV2 Model Chart - L Actuators
Model Supply Spring
Size Cv Number Voltage Return
1/4˝ 6 BV2LQ00 120 VAC Yes
3/8˝ 7 BV2LQ01 120 VAC Yes
1/2˝ 10 BV2L902 120 VAC Yes
3/4˝ 24 BV2L903 120 VAC Yes
1˝ 45 BV2L904 120 VAC Yes
1/4˝ 6 BV2LR00 24 VAC/DC Yes
3/8˝ 7 BV2LR01 24 VAC/DC Yes
1/2˝ 10 BV2L702 24 VAC/DC Yes
Valves

3/4˝ 24 BV2L703 24 VAC/DC Yes

1˝ 45 BV2L704 24 VAC/DC Yes
1/4˝ 6 BV2LS00 24 VAC/DC No
3/8˝ 7 BV2LS01 24 VAC/DC No
1/2˝ 10 BV2LT02 24 VAC/DC No
3/4˝ 24 BV2LT03 24 VAC/DC No
1˝ 45 BV2LT04 24 VAC/DC No
1-1/4˝ 90 BV2L105 24 VAC/DC No
All spring return actuators are factory standard as spring (fail) close. For spring (fail) open valves add suffix “-FO” to the model number.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 418
pg419 7/26/06 8:23 AM Page 1

Series
BV3 Automated Ball Valves – Three-Piece SS NPT
Electric and Pneumatic Actuators
CLEARANCE REQUIRED FOR COVER REMOVAL: 3.000˝
ELECTRIC
E A 1/4˝ 3/8˝ 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/4˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝ 2-1/2˝ 3˝
F C
B 6.274 6.274 6.274 6.432 7.427 7.663 8.057 8.411 12.570* 12.970*
C 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.250 4.250 4.250 4.250 7.000 7.000
D 2.362 2.362 2.592 3.149 3.543 4.330 4.724 5.511 6.540 7.400
E 5.600 5.600 5.600 5.600 6.880 6.880 6.880 6.880 7.000 7.000
F 2.300 2.300 2.300 2.300 2.430 2.430 2.430 2.430 2.380 2.380
B U11, U11, U11, U11, U12, U12, U12, U13, U15, U16,
ACT. V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V13 V15 V16
*INCLUDES DECLUTCHABLE MANUAL OVERRIDE AND HANDWHEEL

PNEUMATIC DOUBLE ACTING

A 1/4˝ 3/8˝ 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/4˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝ 2-1/2˝ 3˝
B 4.524 4.524 4.524 4.682 5.687 6.103 6.497 7.281 8.860 9.260
D A C 1.770 1.770 1.770 1.770 2.800 2.800 2.800 3.170 4.170 4.170
C E D 2.362 2.362 2.952 3.149 3.543 4.330 4.724 5.511 6.540 7.400
E 4.330 4.330 4.330 4.330 6.810 6.810 6.810 7.720 9.840 9.840
ACT. DA1 DA1 DA1 DA1 DA2 DA2 DA3 DA3 DA5 DA5

PNEUMATIC SPRING RETURN

B
A 1/4˝ 3/8˝ 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/4˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝ 2-1/2˝ 3˝
B 5.394 5.394 5.394 5.552 6.297 6.533 6.927 8.271 10.190 10.590
C 2.800 2.800 2.800 2.800 3.170 3.170 3.170 4.170 5.390 5.390
D 2.362 2.362 2.952 3.149 3.543 4.330 4.724 5.511 6.540 7.400
E 6.810 6.810 6.810 6.810 7.720 7.720 9.550 9.550 13.580 13.580
ACT. SR2 SR2 SR2 SR2 SR3 SR3 SR4 SR5 SR7 SR7
A D

BV3 Series Automated Ball Valves SPECIFICATIONS Housing Material: Aluminum with ther-
Body: 3 – piece. mal bonding polyester powder finish.
• Ideal for food or chemical processing Temperature Limit: 0 to 150°F
• 3-piece stainless steel investment cast body Line Size: 1/4˝ to 3˝.
End Connections: Female NPT. (-18 to 65° C).
• Internal entry blow-out stem Electrical Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT.
Pressure Limit: 1/4˝ to 2˝ 1000 psi
• 100% factory hydro-tested Modulating Input: 4 to 20 mA.
(69 bar) WOG, 2-1/2˝ to 3˝ 800 psi
• Polished stem for high cycling (55 bar) WOG. Standard Features: Manual override and
• 1000 WOG PSI, 125 psi steam Wetted Materials:
position indicator except modulating units.
Body, End Cap, Stem:
Series BV3 incorporates a full port three piece stainless steel ball valve for Stainless Steel. Pneumatic “DA” and “SR” Series
great flow rates with minimal pressure drop. The valve features a blowout Ball: Stainless Steel. Type: DA Series is double acting and SR
proof stem for added safety, reinforced PTFE seats and seals for longer life, Series is spring return (rack and pinion).
Seat, Stem Seal: PTFE.
and a 316SS (ASTM A351 GR CF8M) ball for better performance. Actuators Normal Supply Pressure: 80 psi (5.5
Temperature Limit: -40 to 450°F bar).
are direct mounted creating a compact assembly for tight spaces. Double o- (-40 to 232°C). Maximum Supply Pressure: 130 psig
ring stem seals assure leak free operation. Other Materials: Body Seal, Body (9.0 bar).
O-ring, Stem O-ring: Viton®. Air Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
The BV3 Series is an economical automated valve package with either an Air Consumption (per stroke): DA1: 2.32
electric or pneumatic actuator. Electrically actuated models are weather- ACTUATORS cu. in.; DA2, SR2: 9.34 cu. in.; DA3, SR3:
proof, NEMA 4, powered by standard 115 VAC supply, and are available in Electric 17.21 cu. in.; SR4: 17.15 cu. in.; DA5,
either two-position or proportional control. Two-position actuators use the Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 50/60 SR5: 39.54 cu. in.; SR6: 54.37 cu. in.;
115 VAC input to drive the valve open or closed, while the modulating actu- HZ, single phase. Optional 220 VAC, 24 SR7: 103.74 cu. in.
ator accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for infinite valve positioning. Actuator fea- VAC, 12 VDC, and 24 VDC. Cycle Time (per 90°): DA1: .03 sec.;
Power Consumption (Locked Rotor DA2: .05 sec.; DA3: .06 sec.; DA5: .18
tures thermal overload protection and a permanently lubricated gear train. Current): Two position: 1/4˝ to 3/4˝: 0.55A, sec.; SR2: .09 sec.; SR3: .13 sec.; SR4:
1˝ to 1-1/2˝ : 0.75A, 2˝: 0.75A, 2-1/2˝: .17 sec.; SR5: .28 sec.; SR6: .39 sec.;
The pneumatic double acting actuator uses an air supply to drive the valve 0.75A, 3˝: 1.1A. Modulating: 1/4˝ to 3/4˝: SR7: .60 sec.
open and closed. The actuator has two supply ports with one driving the 0.55A, 1˝ to 1-1/2˝: 0.75A, 2˝ and 2-1/2˝: Housing Material: Anodized aluminum
valve open and the other driving the valve closed. Spring return pneumatic 0.75A; 3˝: 1.1A. body and epoxy coated aluminum end
actuators use the air supply to open the valve and internally loaded springs Cycle Time (per 90°): Two position: 1/4˝ caps.
to 3/4˝: 2.5 sec., 1˝ to 2˝: 5 sec., 2-1/2˝ Temperature Limit: -4 to 180°F
return the valve to the closed position. Also available is the SV3 solenoid and 3˝: 15 sec. Modulating: 1/4˝ to 2˝; 10 (-20 to 82°C).
valve to electrically switch the air supply pressure between the air supply sec., 2-1/2˝: 20 sec., 3˝: 30 sec.
ports for opening and closing the valve. Actuators are constructed of anodized Accessory Mounting: NAMUR standard.
Duty Rating: Two position: 1/4˝ to 3/4˝:
and epoxy coated aluminum for years of corrosion free service. 75%, 1˝ to 3˝: 25%. Modulating: 75%. Standard Features: Position indicator.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4. Optional
MODELS NEMA 7.
Double Acting Spring Return Two Position Modulating
Size Cv Pneumatic Pneumatic Electric Electric
Options:
Model Model Model Model Explosion-proof Electric Actuator
1/4˝ 10 BV3DA100 BV3SR200 BV3U1100 BV3V1200 -Add suffix “EX” to
3/8˝ 10 BV3DA101 BV3SR201 BV3U1101 BV3V1201 the model number
Valves

1/2˝ 18 BV3DA102 BV3SR202 BV3U1102 BV3V1202

3/4˝ 40 BV3DA103 BV3SR203 BV3U1103 BV3V1203 Optional Electric Actuator Supply Voltages
1˝ 70 BV3DA204 BV3SR304 BV3U1204 BV3V1204 -Contact factory for
model number change
1-1/4˝ 120 BV3DA205 BV3SR305 BV3U1205 BV3V1205
1-1/2˝ 210 BV3DA306 BV3SR406 BV3U1206 BV3V1206 Solenoid Valve - See Model SV3.
2˝ 340 BV3DA307 BV3SR507 BV3U1307 BV3V1307
2-1/2˝ 400 BV3DA508 BV3SR708 BV3U1508 BV3V1508
3˝ 675 BV3DA509 BV3SR709 BV3U1609 BV3V1609
NOTE: All spring return actuators are factory standard as spring (fail) close.

419 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg420 7/25/06 4:13 PM Page 1

Series
BV3 Automated Ball Valves – Three-Piece SS Sanitary
Electric and Pneumatic Actuators
CLEARANCE REQUIRED FOR COVER REMOVAL: 3.000˝
B E ELECTRIC
F
A 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝ 2-1/2˝ 3˝ 4˝
B 7.840 8.000 8.758 13.040* 13.390* 14.060* 15.360* 18..390*
C 4.000 4.000 4.250 7.000 7.000 7.000 7.000 10.000
D 3.500 3.980 4.490 5.510 6.140 7.760 9.020 9.490
E 5.600 5.600 6.880 7.000 7.000 7.000 7.000 10.000
C F 2.300 2.300 2.430 2.380 2.380 2.380 2.380 6.750
ACT. U11, U12, U12, U14, U15, U16, U16, U18,
V12 V12 V12 V14 V15 V16 V16 V18
*INCLUDES DECLUTCHABLE MANUAL OVERRIDE AND HANDWHEEL

C
PNEUMATIC DOUBLE ACTING
A 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝ 2-1/2˝ 3˝ 4˝
A D B 6.091 7.109 7.187 8.336 8.680 10.340 11.210 12.900
C 1.770 2.800 2.800 3.170 3.170 4.170 4.840 5.390
C E
D 3.500 3.980 4.490 5.510 6.140 7.760 9.020 9.490
E 4.330 6.810 6.810 9.550 9.550 9.840 11.690 13.580
ACT. DA1 DA2 DA2 DA4 DA4 DA5 DA5 DA7

PNEUMATIC SPRING RETURN

B
A 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝ 2-1/2˝ 3˝ 4˝
B 6.951 7.549 7.627 9.826 10.180 11.680 12.590 15.468
C 2.800 3.170 3.170 4.840 4.840 5.390 5.830 7.360
D 3.500 3.980 4.490 5.510 6.140 7.760 9.020 9.490
E 6.810 7.720 7.720 11.690 11.690 13.580 15.910 20.550
D ACT. SR2 SR3 SR3 SR6 SR6 SR7 SR8 SR9
A

BV3 Series Automated Ball Valves SPECIFICATIONS Housing Material: Aluminum with ther-
Body: 3 – piece. mal bonding polyester powder finish.
• Ideal sanitary ball valve for high purity applications including food &
Line Size: 1/2˝ to 4˝. Temperature Limit: 0 to 150°F
beverage, pharmaceutical and biotech industries
End Connections: Tri-Clamp. (-18 to 65°C).
• 3-piece stainless steel investment cast body
Pressure Limit: 1/2˝ to 2˝ 1000 psi Electrical Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT.
• 240 Grit Internal Polish
(69 bar) WOG. 2-1/2˝ to 4˝ 800 psi (55 Modulating Input: 4 to 20 mA.
• Polished Clamp End to sanitary finish
bar) WOG. Standard Features: Manual override
• Cavity Filler to reduce the threat of product entrapment and position indicator except modulating
Wetted Materials:
units.
Body, End Cap, Stem:
Stainless Steel.
Ball: Stainless Steel.
Pneumatic “DA” and “SR” Series
Series BV3 ball valves feature sanitary clamp ends for easy line removal. Type: DA Series is double acting and SR
The sanitary polish is ideal for use in pharmaceutical, food & beverage, and Seat, Stem Seal: PTFE. Series is spring return (rack and pinion).
chemical processing systems, while the cavity filler aids to reduce product Temperature Limit: -40 to 450°F Normal Supply Pressure: 80 psi (5.5
entrapment, and the full bore design provides consistent flow characteris- (-40 to 232°C). bar).
tics. Best of all, Dwyer Instruments sanitary ball valves are economical and Other Materials: Body Seal, Maximum Supply Pressure: 130 psig
durable. Thrust Washer: PTFE. (8.0 bar).
Air Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
The BV3 Series is an economical automated valve package with either an ACTUATORS Air Consumption (per stroke): DA1:
Electric 2.32 cu. in.; DA2, SR2: 9.34 cu. in.; DA3,
electric or pneumatic actuator. Electrically actuated models are weather- SR3: 17.21 cu. in.; DA4, SR4: 20.5 cu.
proof, NEMA 4, powered by standard 115 VAC supply, and are available in Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 50/60
HZ, single phase. Optional 220 VAC, 24 in.; DA6, SR6: 66.75 cu. in.; DA7, SR7:
either two-position or proportional control. Two-position actuators use the VAC, 12 VDC, and 24 VDC. 103.74 cu. in.; SR8: 122.05 cu. in.; SR9:
115 VAC input to drive the valve open or closed, while the modulating actu- 215.11 cu. in.
Power Consumption (Locked Rotor
ator accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for infinite valve positioning. Actuator fea- Current): Two position: 1/2˝: 0.55A, 3/4˝ Cycle Time (per 90°): DA1: .03 sec.;
tures thermal overload protection and a permanently lubricated gear train. to 2˝: 0.75A, 2-1/2˝ and 3˝: 1.1A, 4˝: 1.5A. DA2: .05 sec.; DA3: .06 sec.; DA5: .08
sec.; DA6: .18 sec.; SR2: .09 sec.; SR3:
Modulating: 1/4˝ to 3/4˝: 0.55A, 1˝ to 1- .13 sec.; SR4: .17 sec.; SR5: .28 sec.;
The pneumatic double acting actuator uses an air supply to drive the valve 1/2˝: 0.75A, 2˝: 0.75A, 2-1/2˝: 0.75A; 3˝: SR6: .39 sec.; SR7: .60 sec.; SR8: .90
open and closed. The actuator has two supply ports with one driving the 1.1A; 4˝: 1.5A. sec.; SR9: 1.75 sec.
valve open and the other driving the valve closed. Spring return pneumatic Cycle Time (per 90°): Two position: 1/2˝: Housing Material: Anodized aluminum
2.5 sec., 3/4˝ and 1˝: 5 sec., 1-1/2˝: 10 body and epoxy coated aluminum end
actuators use the air supply to open the valve and internally loaded springs sec., 2˝ to 3˝: 15 sec., 4˝: 12 sec., caps.
return the valve to the closed position. Also available is the SV3 solenoid Modulating: 1/2˝ to 1-1/2˝: 10 sec., 2˝:
Temperature Limit: -4 to 180°F
valve to electrically switch the air supply pressure between the air supply 20 sec., 2-1/2˝ to 4˝: 30 sec.
(-20 to 82°C).
ports for opening and closing the valve. Actuators are constructed of anodized Duty Cycle: Electric Two Position 1/2˝:
75%, All Others: 25%. Modulating: 75%. Accessory Mounting: NAMUR stan-
and epoxy coated aluminum for years of corrosion free service. dard.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4. Optional
NEMA 7. Standard Features: Position indicator.
MODELS
Double Acting Spring Return Two Position Modulating
Size Cv Pneumatic Pneumatic Electric Electric
Options:
Model Model Model Model
Valves

Explosion-proof Electric Actuator

1/2˝ 12 BV3DA102TC BV3SR202TC BV3U1102TC BV3V1202TC -Add suffix “EX” to
3/4˝ 30 BV3DA203TC BV3SR303TC BV3U1203TC BV3V1203TC the model number
1˝ 65 BV3DA204TC BV3SR304TC BV3U1204TC BV3V1204TC
1-1/2˝ 205 BV3DA406TC BV3SR606TC BV3U1406TC BV3V1406TC Optional Electric Actuator Supply Voltages
2˝ -Contact factory for
380 BV3DA407TC BV3SR607TC BV3U1507TC BV3V1507TC
model number change
2-1/2˝ 430 BV3DA508TC BV3SR708TC BV3U1608TC BV3V1608TC
3˝ 675 BV3DA509TC BV3SR809TC BV3U1609TC BV3V1609TC Solenoid Valve - See Model SV3.
4˝ 1110 BV3DA710TC BV3SR910TC BV3U1810TC BV3V1810TC
NOTE: All spring return actuators are factory standard as spring (fail) close.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 420
pg421 7/25/06 4:14 PM Page 1

Series
ABV Automated Two-Piece Brass Ball Valves
Electric and Pneumatic Actuators
ELECTRIC
C E
F A 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/4˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝ 2-1/2˝ 3˝
B 6.130 6.199 6.574 6.700 8.291 8.623 9.177 9.611
C 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.215 4.215 4.215 4.215
B D 2.638 2.980 3.350 3.657 4.126 4.805 6.496 7.402
E 5.630 5.630 5.630 5.630 5.630 6.880 6.880 6.880
F 2.310 2.310 2.310 2.310 2.430 2.430 2.430 2.430

PNEUMATIC DOUBLE ACTING

A D
Electric Actuator A 1/4˝ 3/8˝ 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/4˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝ 2-1/2˝ 3˝ 4˝
B 4.200 4.200 4.200 4.269 4.644 4.770 6.226 6.558 7.552 7.986 9.801
C 1.780 1.780 1.780 1.780 1.780 1.780 2.880 2.880 3.169 3.169 4.178
C E D 2.638 2.638 2.638 2.980 3.350 3.657 4.126 4.805 6.496 7.402 8.856
E 4.257 4.257 4.257 4.527 4.527 4.527 6.585 6.585 7.717 7.717 9.842
MODEL #

SERIAL #

PNEUMATIC SPRING RETURN

B A 1/4˝ 3/8˝ 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/4˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝ 2-1/2˝ 3˝ 4˝
B 5.060 5.060 5.060 5.129 5.504 5.630 6.666 6.998 8.532 8.996 10.315
A C 2.880 2.880 2.880 2.880 2.880 2.880 3.175 3.175 4.173 4.173 5.249
D 2.638 2.638 2.638 2.980 3.350 3.657 4.126 4.805 6.496 7.402 8.858
E 6.585 6.585 6.585 6.585 6.585 6.585 7.788 7.788 9.843 9.843 11.693
D
Pneumatic Actuator

ABV Series Automated Ball Valves SPECIFICATIONS Temperature Limit: 0 to 150°F

• Full port brass ball valve Body: 2 – piece. (-17 to 65°C).
• Direct mount actuators for compact assembly Line Size: 1/4˝ to 4˝. Electrical Connection: 1/2˝ female
• Electric actuator that is rated NEMA 4 and is available in two position End Connections: Female NPT. NPT.
or modulating Pressure Limit: 600 psi (41 bar) Modulating Input: 4 to 20 mA.
• Pneumatic double acting or spring return rack and pinion actuator WOG, 100 psi (6.9 bar) SWP. Standard Features: Manual over-
Wetted Materials: Body, End Cap, ride and position indicator except
Stem: Brass. Ball: Chrome/Nickel modulating units.
Series ABV incorporates a full port brass ball valve for great flow rates with
plated brass. Seat, Stem Seal:
minimal pressure drop. The valve features a blowout proof stem for added PTFE. Pneumatic “DA” and “SR” Series
safety, reinforced PTFE seats and seals for longer life, and a Chrome/Nickel Temperature Limit: 300°F (148°C). Type: DA Series is double acting
plated ball for better performance. Actuators are direct mounted creating Other Materials: Body Seal, Body and SR Series is spring return (rack
a compact assembly for tight spaces. Double o-ring stem seals assure leak O-ring, Stem O-ring: and pinion).
free operation. Fluoroelastomer. Normal Supply Pressure: 80 psi
(5.5 bar).
The ABV Series is an economical automated valve package with either an ACTUATORS Maximum Supply Pressure: 130
electric or pneumatic actuator. Electric actuated models are weatherproof, Electric psig (9.0 bar).
NEMA 4, powered by standard 115 VAC supply, and are available in either Power Requirements: 115 VAC, Air Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
two-position or proportional control. Two-position actuators use the 115 VAC 50/60 HZ, single phase. Optional Air Consumption (per stroke):
input to drive the valve open or closed, while the modulating actuator accepts 220 VAC, 24 VAC, 12 VDC, and 24 DA1: 2.32 cu. in.; DA2, SR2: 9.34
VDC. cu. in.; DA3, SR3: 17.21 cu. in.;
a 4 to 20 mA input for infinite valve positioning. Actuator features thermal DA5, SR5: 39.54 cu. in.; SR6: 54.37
Power Consumption (Locked
overload protection and a permanently lubricated gear train. Rotor Current): Two position: 1/2˝ cu. in.
to 1-1/4˝: 0.55A, 1-1/2˝ to 2˝: 0.75A, Cycle Time (per 90°): DA1: .03
The pneumatic double acting actuator uses an air supply to drive the valve 2-1/2˝ to 3˝: 0.99A. Modulating: 1/2˝ sec.; DA2: .05 sec.; DA3: .06 sec.;
open and closed. The actuator has two supply ports with one driving the to 2˝: 0.75A, 2-1/2˝ to 3˝: 0.99A. DA5: .18 sec.; SR2: .09 sec.; SR3:
Cycle Time (per 90°): Two posi- .13 sec.; SR5: .28 sec.; SR6: .39
valve open and the other driving the valve closed. Spring return pneumatic
actuator uses the air supply to open the valve and internally loaded springs tion: 1/2˝ to 1- 1/4˝: 2.5 sec., 1-1/2˝ sec.
to 3˝: 5 sec. Modulating: 10 sec. Housing Material: Anodized alu-
return the valve to the closed position. Also available is the SV3 solenoid
Duty Rating: Two position: 1/2˝ to minum body and epoxy coated alu-
minum end caps.
valve to electrically switch the air supply pressure between the air supply 1- 1/4˝: 75%, 1-1/2˝ to 3˝: 25%.
ports for opening and closing the valve. Actuators are constructed of anodized Modulating: 75%. Temperature Limit: -4 to 180°F
and epoxy coated aluminum for years of corrosion free service. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4. (-20 to 85°C).
Optional NEMA 7. Accessory Mounting: NAMUR
Housing Material: Aluminum with standard.
thermal bonding polyester powder Standard Features: Position indica-
finish. tor.
MODELS
Double Acting Spring Return Two Position Modulating
Size Cv Pneumatic Pneumatic Electric Electric
Options:
Model Model Model Model
Explosion-proof Electric Actuator
1/4˝ 6.3 ABV1DA100 ABV1SR200 -Add suffix “EX” to
3/8˝ 7.0 ABV1DA101 ABV1SR201 the model number
1/2˝ 19.0 ABV1DA102 ABV1SR202 ABV100 ABV110
Valves

3/4˝ 19.0 ABV1DA103 ABV1SR203 ABV101 ABV111 Optional Electric Acutator Supply Voltages
1˝ 34.5 ABV1DA104 ABV1SR204 ABV102 ABV112 -Contact factory for
1-1/4˝ 50.2 ABV1DA105 ABV1SR205 ABV103 ABV113 model number change
1-1/2˝ 268.4 ABV1DA206 ABV1SR306 ABV104 ABV114
Solenoid Valve - See Model SV3.
2˝ 309.3 ABV1DA207 ABV1SR307 ABV105 ABV115
2-1/2˝ 629.5 ABV1DA308 ABV1SR508 ABV106 ABV116
3˝ 944.5 ABV1DA309 ABV1SR509 ABV107 ABV117
4˝ 1493.0 ABV1DA510 ABV1SR610
NOTE: All spring return actuators are factory standard as spring (fail) close.

421 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg422 7/25/06 4:15 PM Page 1

Series
PBV Automated Ball Valves – Two-Way Plastic
Electric and Pneumatic Actuators
PVC Body CPVC Body PRESSURE - TEMPERATURE RATINGS
SERIES PBV
250
232
1/2˝ to 2˝
200

WORKING PRESSURE (psi)

2˝ to 4˝

150

100

50
40

0 140
32 62 73 92 122 152 182 212
WORKING TEMPERATURE (°F)
*Please see website for dimensional drawings

The Series PBV is ideal for services in industrial, chemical, turf and irrigation, SPECIFICATIONS Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4. Optional
and pool and spa applications, as well as for use with potable water. The valve fea- Service: Compatible liquids or gases. NEMA 7 (Class 1, Div. II groups A, B, C,
tures a shear-proof stem designed to prevent leakage in the event of damage, rein- Body: 2-way. D).
forced TFE seats and EPDM seals for longer life, and an all-plastic construction Line Size: 1/2˝ to 4˝. Housing Material: Aluminum with ther-
(PVC or CPVC) for heavyweight durability at a lightweight cost. Valves also come mal bonding polyester powder finish.
End Connections: Female NPT or sock-
standard with selectable NPT or socket process connections. et (field selectable). Temperature Limit: 0 to 150°F (-18 to
The PBV is an economical automated valve package with either an electric or 65°C).
Pressure Limit: 1/2˝ to 2˝: 232 psi (16.0
pneumatic actuator. Electrically actuated models are weatherproof, NEMA 4, bar) @ 73°F (23°C); 2-1/2˝ to 4˝: 150 psi Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT.
powered by standard 115 VAC supply, and are available in either two-position or (10.3 bar) @ 73°F (23°C) WOG. Vacuum: Modulating Input: 4 to 20 mA.
proportional control. Two-position actuators use the 115 VAC input to drive each 29˝ Hg. Standard Features: Manual override and
of the valve ports open or closed, while the modulating actuator accepts a 4 to 20 Wetted Materials: visual position indicator except modulating
mA input for infinite valve positioning. Actuator features include thermal over- Body, End Connectors: PVC or CPVC. units.
load protection to withstand stall conditions, visual position indication and a per- Pneumatic “DA” and “SR” Series
Ball, Stem: PVC or CPVC.
manently lubricated gear train. Type: DA series is double acting and SR
The pneumatic double acting actuator uses an air supply to drive each of the actu- Seat: TFE.
series is spring return (rack and pinion).
ator ports. Spring return pneumatic actuators use the air supply to drive the valve Stem Seal: EPDM.
Normal Supply Pressure: 80 psi (5.5 bar).
stem one direction, and internally loaded springs return the valve to its original Temperature Limit: 32 to 140°F (0 to Maximum Supply Pressure: 120 psig (8
position. Also available is the SV3 solenoid valve to electrically switch the supply 60°C). bar).
pressure between the air supply ports. Actuators are constructed of anodized alu- Other Materials: Stem Bearing: Air Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
minum and are epoxy coated for years of corrosion free service. Polypropylene (1-1/4˝ and up). Air Consumption: (per stroke) DA1: 2.32
ACTUATORS cu. in.; DA2: 9.34 cu. in.; DA3: 17.21 cu.
Electric in.; DA4: 20.5 cu. in.; SR2: 9.34 cu. in.;
SR3: 17.21 cu. in.; SR6: 54.34 cu. in.;
Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 50/60
Options: Hz, single phase. Optional 220 VAC, 24
SR7: 85.43 cu. in.
Explosion-proof Electric Actuator VAC, 12 VDC, and 24 VDC.
Cycle Time: (per 90°) DA1: .03 sec.; DA2:
-Add suffix “EX” to the model number .04 sec.; DA3: .08 sec.; DA4: .12 sec.;
Power Consumption: (Locked Rotor SR2: .09 sec.; SR3: .14 sec.; SR6: .46
Optional Electric Actuator Supply Voltages Current): Two Position: 1/2˝ to 1-1/2˝: sec.; SR7: .83 sec.
-Contact factory for model number change .55A, 2˝ to 4˝: 0.75A. Modulating: 1/2˝ to Housing Material: Anodized aluminum
24VAC 2˝: 0.75A, 2-1/2˝: 1.1A, 3˝ and 4˝: 0.75A. body and epoxy coated aluminum end
220VAC, 24VDC, or 12VDC Cycle Time: (per 90°): Two Position: 1/2˝ caps.
to 1-1/2˝: 2.5 sec., 2˝ and 2-1/2˝: 5 sec., 3˝ Temperature Limit: -4 to 180°F (-20 to
Solenoid Valve - See Model SV3. and 4˝: 15 sec. Modulating: 1/2˝ to 2-1/2˝: 82°C).
5 sec., 3˝ and 4˝: 15 sec. Accessory Mounting: NAMUR standard.
Duty Cycle: Two Position: 1/2˝ to 1-1/2˝: Standard Features: Visual position indi-
75%, 2˝ to 4˝: 25%. Modulating: 75%. cator.
SERIES PBV AUTOMATED 2-WAY PLASTIC BALL VALVES - PVC MODELS
Double Acting Pneumatic Spring Return Pneumatic Two Position Electric Modulating Electric
Size CV Model Model Model Model
1/2˝ 25 PBVPDA102 PBVPSR202 PBVPU1102 PBVPV1202
3/4˝ 51 PBVPDA103 PBVPSR203 PBVPU1103 PBVPV1203
1˝ 97 PBVPDA104 PBVPSR204 PBVPU1104 PBVPV1204
1-1/4˝ 204 PBVPDA105 PBVPSR205 PBVPU1105 PBVPV1205
1-1/2˝ 285 PBVPDA206 PBVPSR306 PBVPU1106 PBVPV1206
2˝ 540 PBVPDA207 PBVPSR307 PBVPU1207 PBVPV1207
2-1/2˝ 712 PBVPDA308 PBVPSR608 PBVPU1308 PBVPV1308
3˝ 1294 PBVPDA309 PBVPSR609 PBVPU1509 PBVPV1509
4˝ 2629 PBVPDA410 PBVPSR710 PBVPU1510 PBVPV1510

SERIES PBV AUTOMATED 2-WAY PLASTIC BALL VALVES - CPVC MODELS

Double Acting Pneumatic Spring Return Pneumatic Two Position Electric Modulating Electric
Valves

Size CV Model Model Model Model

1/2˝ 25 PBVCDA102 PBVCSR202 PBVCU1102 PBVCV1202
3/4˝ 51 PBVCDA103 PBVCSR203 PBVCU1103 PBVCV1203
1˝ 97 PBVCDA104 PBVCSR204 PBVCU1104 PBVCV1204
1-1/4˝ 204 PBVCDA105 PBVCSR205 PBVCU1105 PBVCV1205
1-1/2˝ 285 PBVCDA206 PBVCSR306 PBVCU1106 PBVCV1206
2˝ 540 PBVCDA207 PBVCSR307 PBVCU1207 PBVCV1207
2-1/2˝ 712 PBVCDA308 PBVCSR608 PBVCU1308 PBVCV1308
3˝ 1294 PBVCDA309 PBVCSR609 PBVCU1509 PBVCV1509
4˝ 2629 PBVCDA410 PBVCSR710 PBVCU1510 PBVCV1510
NOTE: All spring return actuators are factory standard as spring (fail) close. For spring (fail) open valves, add suffix “-FO” to the model number.
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 422
pg423 7/25/06 4:15 PM Page 1

Series
3BV3 Automated Ball Valves - 3-Way SS NPT
Electric and Pneumatic Actuators
E ELECTRIC [NEMA 4 ENCL.] (inches)
F C A 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/4˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝
B 6.47, 7.35 7.72 7.88 8.51 11.95* 12.62*
C 4.00, 4.25 4.25 4.25 4.25 7.00 7.00
D 3.78 4.21 4.96 5.24 5.94 6.56
E 5.83, 6.88 6.88 6.88 6.88 7.00 7.00
F 2.31, 2.43 2.43 2.43 2.43 2.38 2.38
B M 1.89 2.11 2.48 2.62 2.97 3.27
ACT. U11, V12 U12, V12 U12, V12 U13, V13 U14, V14 U15, V15
*Includes declutchable manual override and handwheel

A PNEUMATIC DOUBLE ACTING (inches)

A 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/4˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝
D M B 5.93 6.30 6.46 7.09 8.07 6.74
C 2.80 2.80 2.80 2.80 3.72 3.72
D 3.78 4.96 4.96 5.24 5.94 6.54
C E 5.49 5.49 5.49 5.49 8.15 8.15
E F F 1.61 1.61 1.61 1.61 2.07 2.07
M 1.89 2.11 2.48 2.62 2.97 3.27
ACT. DA2 DA2 DA2 DA2 DA4 DA4

B PNEUMATIC SPRING RETURN (inches)

A 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/4˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝
B 5.93 6.30 7.11 7.74 9.03 10.88
C 2.80 3.17 3.72 3.72 4.84 5.39
A D 3.78 4.21 4.96 5.24 5.94 6.54
E 5.49 6.38 8.15 8.15 10.69 12.91
F 1.61 1.77 2.07 2.07 2.68 2.87
D M M 1.89 2.11 2.48 2.62 2.97 3.27
ACT. SR2 SR3 SR4 SR4 SR6 SR7

The Series 3BV3 incorporates a full port design for maximum flow rates with SPECIFICATIONS Housing Material: Aluminum with ther-
minimal pressure drop. Features include a blowout proof stem for added safety Service: Compatible liquids, gases or mal bonding polyester powder finish.
and reinforced RTFE seats and seals for longer life and leak free operation. The steam. Temperature Limit: 0 to 150°F
four seat design allows for high cyclic capabilities and tight shut off in any posi- Body: 3-way. (-18 to 65°C).
tion. Perfect for mixing or diverting services in the food and chemical processing Line Size: 1/2˝ to 2˝. Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT.
industries. End Connections: Female NPT. Modulating Input: 4 to 20 mA.
The 3BV3 is an economical automated valve package with either an electric or Pressure Limit: 1000 psi (69 bar) WOG; Standard Features: Manual override and
pneumatic actuator. Electrically actuated models are weatherproof, NEMA 4, 150 psi (10.3 bar) SWP. visual position indicator except modulating
powered by standard 115 VAC supply, and are available in either two-position or Wetted Materials: units.
proportional control. Two-position actuators use the 115 VAC input to drive each Body, End Cap, Stem: 316 SS.
of the valve ports open or closed, while the modulating actuator accepts a 4 to 20 Ball: 316 SS. Pneumatic “DA” and “SR” Series
mA input for infinite valve positioning. Actuator features include thermal over- Type: DA series is double acting and SR
Seat, Stem Seal: RTFE.
load protection to withstand stall conditions, visual position indication and a per- series is spring return (rack and pinion).
manently lubricated gear train. Temperature Limit: -40 to 450°F (-40 to
232°C). Steam max.: 366°F (186°C). Normal Supply Pressure: 80 psi (5.5
The pneumatic double acting actuator uses an air supply to drive each of the actu- bar).
ator ports. Spring return pneumatic actuators use the air supply to drive the valve Other Materials: Body Seal, Body O- Maximum Supply Pressure: 120 psig (8
ring, Stem O-ring: Fluoroelastomer. bar).
stem one direction, and internally loaded springs return the valve to its original
position. Also available is the SV3 solenoid valve to electrically switch the supply Air Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
pressure between the air supply ports. Actuators are constructed of anodized alu- ACTUATORS Air Consumption: (per stroke) DA1: 2.32
minum and are epoxy coated for years of corrosion free service. Electric cu. in.; DA2, SR2: 9.34 cu. in.; DA3, SR3:
Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 50/60 17.21 cu. in.; DA4, SR4: 20.5 cu. in.;
Hz, single phase. Optional 220 VAC, 24 SR5: 39.54 cu. in.; SR6: 54.37 cu. in.;
HOW TO ORDER: VAC, 12 VDC, and 24 VDC. SR7: 85.43 cu. in.
Cycle Time: (per 90°) DA1: .03 sec.;
1. Select Model No. to specify pipe size and actuator. Power Consumption: (Locked Rotor DA2: .04 sec.; DA3: .08 sec.; DA4: .12
Current): Two Position: 1/2˝: .55A, 3/4˝ to
2. Choose a Port Configuration to determine valve flow path. 1-1/2˝: .75A, 2˝: 1.1A. Modulating: 1/2˝ to
sec.; SR2: .09 sec.; SR3: .14 sec.; SR4:
.22 sec.; SR5: .33 sec.; SR6: .46 sec.;
Example: 3BV3SR404-T2 1-1/2˝: .75A, 2˝: 1.1A. SR7: .78 sec.
Cycle Time: (per 90°): Two Position: 1/2˝: Housing Material: Anodized aluminum
2.5 sec., 3/4˝ to 1-1/4˝: 5 sec., 1-1/2˝: 10 body and epoxy coated aluminum end
Flow Path sec., 2˝: 15 sec. Modulating: 1/2˝ to 1- caps.
Port 1/4˝: 5 sec., 1-1/2˝: 10 sec., 2˝: 15 sec. Temperature Limit: -4 to 180°F
Configuration Act. Open Act. Closed Duty Cycle: Two Position: 1/2˝: 75%, 3/4˝ (-20 to 82°C).
-T1 All Open A-B to 2˝: 25%. Modulating: 75%. Accessory Mounting: NAMUR standard.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4. Optional Standard Features: Visual position indi-
“T” Port -T2 A-B A-C cator.
NEMA 7.
-T3 A-C B-C
-T4 B-C All Open Options
-L1 B-C A-B Explosion Proof Electric Actuator
“L” Port -Add suffix “-EX” to the model number
-L2 A-B All Closed Optional Electric Actuator Supply Voltages
-L3 All Closed B-C -Contact factory for model number change (24 VAC)
220 VAC, 24 VDC or 12 VDC
Solenoid Valve - See Model SV3.
MODELS
Valves

Size Cv Double Acting Pneumatic Spring Return Pneumatic Two Position Electric Modulating Electric
(in.) L-Port T-Port Model* Model* Model* Model*
1/2˝ 10.0 16.0 3BV3DA202 3BV3SR202 3BV3U1102 3BV3V1202
3/4˝ 14.0 24.0 3BV3DA203 3BV3SR303 3BV3U1203 3BV3V1203
1˝ 25.0 45.0 3BV3DA204 3BV3SR404 3BV3U1204 3BV3V1204
1-1/4˝ 34.0 77.0 3BV3DA205 3BV3SR405 3BV3U1305 3BV3V1305
1-1/2˝ 56.0 100.0 3BV3DA406 3BV3SR606 3BV3U1406 3BV3V1406
2˝ 110.0 430.0 3BV3DA407 3BV3SR707 3BV3U1507 3BV3V1507
* Complete model includes Port Configuration - see “How to Order” above.
423 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au
pg424 7/25/06 4:16 PM Page 1

Series
3ABV Automated Ball Valves - 3-Way Brass NPT
Electric and Pneumatic Actuators
ELECTRIC [NEMA 4 ENCL.] (inches)
E A 1/4˝ 3/8˝ 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/4˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝
F C
B 5.90 5.90 6.13 6.20 6.57 6.70 8.29 8.62
C 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.75 4.75 4.75 4.75
D 2.64 2.64 2.64 3.03 3.43 4.13 4.82 5.45
E 5.63 5.63 5.63 5.63 6.88 6.88 6.88 6.88
F 1.43 1.43 1.43 1.59 1.87 2.20 2.44 2.87
B G 1.33 1.33 1.33 1.53 1.88 2.36 2.83 3.38
H 0.76 0.76 0.76 0.86 1.00 1.22 1.45 1.75
I 0.86 0.86 1.06 1.25 1.61 1.96 2.16 2.75
I ACT. U11, V11 U11, V11 U11, V11 U11, V11 U12, V12 U12, V12 U12, V12 U13, V13
PNEUMATIC DOUBLE ACTING (inches)
AG A 1/4˝ 3/8˝ 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/4˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝
B 3.96 3.96 3.96 4.30 4.86 5.00 5.94 6.95
D F H C 1.77 1.77 1.77 1.77 2.80 2.80 3.17 3.72
D 2.64 2.64 2.64 3.03 3.43 4.13 4.82 5.45
E 4.33 4.33 4.33 4.33 5.49 5.49 6.38 8.15
C F 1.43 1.43 1.43 1.59 1.87 2.20 2.44 2.87
E F G 1.33 1.33 1.33 1.53 1.88 2.36 2.83 3.38
H 0.76 0.76 0.76 0.86 1.00 1.22 1.45 1.75
I 0.86 0.86 1.06 1.25 1.61 1.96 2.16 2.75
ACT. DA1 DA1 DA1 DA1 DA2 DA2 DA3 DA4
B PNEUMATIC SPRING RETURN (inches)
A 1/4˝ 3/8˝ 1/2˝ 3/4˝ 1˝ 1-1/4˝ 1-1/2˝ 2˝
I B 4.45 4.45 4.45 4.52 5.30 5.44 6.59 7.40
C 2.80 2.80 2.80 2.80 3.17 3.17 3.17 4.17
D 2.64 2.64 2.64 3.03 3.43 4.13 4.82 5.45
AC E 5.49 5.49 5.49 5.49 6.38 6.38 8.15 9.35
F 1.43 1.43 1.43 1.59 1.87 2.20 2.44 2.87
D F H G 1.33 1.33 1.33 1.53 1.88 2.36 2.83 3.38
H 0.76 0.76 0.76 0.86 1.00 1.22 1.45 1.75
I 0.86 0.86 1.06 1.25 1.61 1.96 2.16 2.75
ACT. SR2 SR2 SR2 SR2 SR3 SR3 SR4 SR5

The Series 3ABV incorporates a standard port valve for great flow rates with SPECIFICATIONS Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4. Optional
minimal pressure drop. Features include a blowout proof stem for added safety Service: Compatible liquids, gases or NEMA 7.
and reinforced TFE seats and seals for longer life and leak-free operation. The steam. Housing Material: Aluminum with ther-
four seat design allows for high cyclic capabilities and tight shut-off in any posi- Body: 3-way. mal bonding polyester powder finish.
tion. Perfect for mixing or diverting services in the food and chemical processing Line Size: 1/4˝ to 2˝. Temperature Limit: 0 to 150°F
industries. End Connections: Female NPT. (-18 to 65°C).
The 3ABV is an economical automated valve package with either an electric or Pressure Limits: 1/4˝ to 1-1/4˝: 435 psi Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT.
pneumatic actuator. Electrically actuated models are weatherproof, NEMA 4, (30 bar) WOG, 1-1/2˝: 232 psi (16 bar) Modulating Input: 4 to 20 mA.
powered by standard 115 VAC supply, and are available in either two-position or WOG, 2˝: 145 psi (10 bar) WOG. 100 psi Standard Features: Manual override and
proportional control. Two-position actuators use the 115 VAC input to drive each (6.9 bar) SWP. visual position indicator except modulating
of the valve ports open or closed, while the modulating actuator accepts a 4-20 Wetted Materials: units.
mA input for infinite valve positioning. Actuator features include thermal over- Body, End Cap, Stem: Brass.
load protection to withstand stall conditions, visual position indication, and a per- Ball: Brass, Chrome Plated. Pneumatic “DA” and “SR” Series
manently lubricated gear train. Seat, Stem Seal: TFE. Type: DA series is double acting and SR
The pneumatic double acting actuator uses an air supply to drive each of the actu- Temperature Limits: 320°F (160°C). series is spring return (rack and pinion).
ator ports. Spring return pneumatic actuators use the air supply to drive the Other Materials: Body Seal, Body O- Normal Supply Pressure: 80 psi (5.5
valve stem in one direction, and internally loaded springs return the valve to its ring, Stem O-ring: Fluoroelastomer. bar).
original position. Also available is the SV3 solenoid valve to electrically switch Maximum Supply Pressure: 120 psig (8
the supply pressure between the air supply ports. Actuators are constructed of bar).
ACTUATORS Air Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
anodized aluminum and are epoxy coated for years of corrosion free service.
Electric Air Consumption: (per stroke) DA1: 2.32
HOW TO ORDER: Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 50/60 cu. in.; DA2, SR2: 9.34 cu. in.; DA3, SR3:
Hz, single phase. Optional 220 VAC, 24 17.21 cu. in.; DA4, SR4: 20.5 cu. in.;
1. Select Model No. to specify pipe size and actuator. VAC, 12 VDC, and 24 VDC. SR5: 39.54 cu. in.
2. Choose a Port Configuration to determine valve flow path. Power Consumption: (Locked Rotor Cycle Time: (per 90°) DA1: .03 sec.;
Example: 3ABV1DA204-T2 Current): Two Position: 1/4˝ to 3/4˝: .55A, DA2: .04 sec.; DA3: .08 sec.; DA4: .12
1˝ to 2˝: .75A. Modulating: 1/4˝ to 3/4˝: sec.; SR2: .09 sec.; SR3: .14 sec.; SR4:
.55A, 1˝ to 2˝: .75A. .22 sec.; SR5: .33 sec.
Flow Path Housing Material: Anodized aluminum
Port Cycle Time: (per 90°): Two Position: 1/4˝ body and epoxy coated aluminum end
Configuration to 3/4˝: 2.5 sec., 1˝ to 2˝: 5 sec. caps.
Act. Open Act. Closed Modulating: 1/4˝ to 3/4˝: 2.5 sec., 1˝ to 2˝: Temperature Limit: -4 to 180°F
-T1 All Open A-B 5 sec. (-20 to 82°C).
“T” Port -T2 A-B A-C Duty Cycle: Two Position: 1/4˝ to 3/4˝: Accessory Mounting: NAMUR standard.
-T3 A-C B-C 75%, 1˝ to 2˝: 25%. Modulating: 75%. Standard Features: Visual position indi-
-T4 B-C All Open Options cator.
-L1 B-C A-B Explosion Proof Electric Actuator
“L” Port -Add suffix “-EX” to the model number
-L2 A-B All Closed
Optional Electric Actuator Supply Voltages
-L3 All Closed B-C -Contact factory for model number change (24 VAC)
220 VAC, 24 VDC or 12 VDC
Solenoid Valve - See Model SV3.
MODELS
Size Cv Double Acting Pneumatic Spring Return Pneumatic Two Position Electric Modulating Electric
Valves

(in.) L-Port T-Port Model* Model* Model* Model*

1/4˝ 3.26 3.50 3ABV1DA100 3ABV1SR200 3ABV1U1100 3ABV1V1100
3/8˝ 3.50 4.08 3ABV1DA101 3ABV1SR201 3ABV1U1101 3ABV1V1101
1/2˝ 4.20 5.02 3ABV1DA102 3ABV1SR202 3ABV1U1102 3ABV1V1102
3/4˝ 7.00 7.70 3ABV1DA103 3ABV1SR203 3ABV1U1103 3ABV1V1103
1˝ 12.83 14.24 3ABV1DA204 3ABV1SR304 3ABV1U1204 3ABV1V1204
1-1/4˝ 18.67 19.72 3ABV1DA205 3ABV1SR305 3ABV1U1205 3ABV1V1205
1-1/2˝ 29.75 30.69 3ABV1DA306 3ABV1SR406 3ABV1U1206 3ABV1V1206
2˝ 43.76 44.58 3ABV1DA407 3ABV1SR507 3ABV1U1307 3ABV1V1307
* Complete model includes Port Configuration - see “How to Order” above.
CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 424
pg425 7/26/06 8:24 AM Page 1

Series
3PBV Automated Ball Valves – Three-Way Plastic
Electric and Pneumatic Actuators
PVC Body CPVC Body

PRESSURE - TEMPERATURE RATINGS

SERIES 3PBV
250
232
1/2˝ to 1˝
200

WORKING PRESSURE (psi)

1-1/4˝ to 2˝

150

Cv Values *Please see website for dimensional drawings 100

Position 50
Size 40
A B C D E
1/2˝ 3.85 2.45 4.55 13.7 5.11 0
32 62 73 92 122 140 152 182 212
3/4˝ 9.50 6.65 10.2 26.6 10.5
WORKING TEMPERATURE (°F)
1˝ 14.4 9.80 17.2 53.2 18.6
1-1/4˝ 27.3 18.9 32.2 73.5 33.3
1-1/2˝ 33.3 23.1 42.0 119 43.4
2˝ 63.0 43.4 84.0 224 85.4

The Series 3PBV is ideal for mixing or diverting services in industrial, chemi- SPECIFICATIONS Housing Material: Aluminum with
cal, turf and irrigation, and pool and spa applications, as well as for use with potable Service: Compatible liquids or thermal bonding polyester powder
water. The valve features a 3-seat design for efficient automation, reinforced TFE gases. finish.
seats and EPDM seals for longer life, and an all PVC construction for heavyweight Body: 3-way. Temperature Limit: 0 to 150°F (-18
durability at a lightweight cost. Valves also come standard with field selectable Line Size: 1/2˝ to 2˝. to 65°C).
NPT or socket process connections. End Connections: Female NPT or Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ female
socket (field selectable). NPT.
The 3PBV is an economical automated valve package with either an electric or Pressure Limit: 1/2˝ to 1˝: 232 psi Modulating Input: 4 to 20 mA.
pneumatic actuator. Electrically actuated models are weatherproof, NEMA 4, (16.0 bar) @ 73°F (23°C); 1-1/4˝ to 2˝: Standard Features: Manual over-
powered by standard 115 VAC supply, and are available in either two-position or 150 psi (10.3 bar) @ 73°F (23°C) ride and visual position indicator
proportional control. Two-position actuators use the 115 VAC input to drive each WOG. Vacuum: 29˝ Hg. See chart for except modulating units.
of the valve ports open or closed, while the modulating actuator accepts a 4 to 20 curve.
mA input for infinite valve positioning. Actuator features include thermal over- Wetted Materials: Pneumatic “DA” and “SR” Series
load protection to withstand stall conditions, visual position indication and a per- Body, End Connectors: PVC. Type: DA series is double acting and
manently lubricated gear train. Ball, Stem: PVC. SR series is spring return (rack and
Seat: TFE. pinion).
The pneumatic double acting actuator uses an air supply to drive each of the actu- Normal Supply Pressure: 80 psi
ator ports. Spring return pneumatic actuators use the air supply to drive the valve Stem Seal: EPDM. (5.5 bar).
stem one direction, and internally loaded springs return the valve to its original Temperature Limit: 32 to 140°F (0 Maximum Supply Pressure: 120
position. Also available is the SV3 solenoid valve to electrically switch the supply to 60°C). psig (8 bar).
pressure between the air supply ports. Actuators are constructed of anodized alu- Air Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
minum and are epoxy coated for years of corrosion free service. ACTUATORS Air Consumption (per stroke):
Electric DA1: 2.32 cu. in.; DA2, SR2: 9.34
HOW TO ORDER: Power Requirements: 120 VAC,
cu. in.; SR3: 17.21 cu. in.
1. Select Model No. to specify pipe size and actuator. Cycle Time (per 90°): DA1: .03
50/60 Hz, single phase. Optional 220 sec.; DA2: .04 sec.; SR2: .09 sec.;
2. Choose a Port Configuration to determine valve flow path. VAC, 24 VAC, 12 VDC, and 24 VDC.
Example: 3PBVPSR204-L3 SR3: .14 sec.
Power Consumption: (Locked Housing Material: Anodized alu-
Flow Path Rotor Current): Two Position: 1/2˝ to minum body and epoxy coated alu-
Port 1-1/2˝: .55A, 2˝: 0.75A. Modulating:
Configuration minum end caps.
Act. Open Act. Closed 0.75A. Temperature Limit: -4 to 180°F (-
-T1 All Open A-B Cycle Time: (per 90°): Two Position: 20 to 82°C).
-T2 A-B A-C 1/2˝ to 1-1/2˝: 2.5 sec., 2˝: 5 sec. Accessory Mounting: NAMUR
“T” Port Modulating: 5 sec. standard.
-T3 A-C B-C Standard Features: Visual position
Duty Cycle: Two Position: 1/2˝ to 1-
-T4 B-C All Open 1/2˝: 75%, 2˝: 25%. Modulating: indicator.
-L1 B-C A-B 75%.
“L” Port -L2 A-B All Closed Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4.
Optional NEMA 7 (Class 1, Div. II
-L3 All Closed B-C groups A, B, C, D).

SERIES 3PBV AUTOMATED BALL VALVES - 3-WAY PLASTIC

Double Acting Pneumatic Spring Return Pneumatic Two Position Electric Modulating Electric
CV
Size Model* Model* Model* Model*
1/2˝ 3PBVPDA102 3PBVPSR202 3PBVPU1102 3PBVPV1202
3/4˝ 3PBVPDA103 3PBVPSR203 3PBVPU1103 3PBVPV1203
1˝ 3PBVPDA104 3PBVPSR204 3PBVPU1104 3PBVPV1204
Valves

1-1/4˝ See Chart Above 3PBVPDA105 3PBVPSR205 3PBVPU1105 3PBVPV1205

1-1/2˝ 3PBVPDA206 3PBVPSR306 3PBVPU1106 3PBVPV1206
2˝ 3PBVPDA207 3PBVPSR307 3PBVPU1207 3PBVPV1207
* Complete model includes Port Configuration - see “How to Order” above.
OPTIONS: Optional Electric Actuator Supply Voltages -Contact factory for model number change
Explosion-proof Electric Actuator 24VAC
-Add suffix “EX” to the model number 220VAC, 24VDC, or 12VDC

Solenoid Valve - See Model SV3.

425 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg426 7/26/06 8:26 AM Page 1

Series
NV Needle Valve
Economical, Pressures Up to 500 psig, 90° Flow Pattern
39/64 1/8-27 NPT
[15.48] FEMALE CONNECTION 1/2 4-40 UNF-2B
[12.70] THREAD TAPPED
1/2 23/64 DEEP [9.13]
[12.70] 1/2
1-1/4 [12.70]
[31.80]
1/2
1/8-27 NPT 2-15/16 OPEN [12.70]
FEMALE CONNECTION [58.74]
2 CLOSED 1
[50.82] [25.40]

Series NV Needle Valves are an economical valve for regulating SPECIFICATIONS

pressures up to 500 psig (34.5 bar). The Series NV is suitable for Pressure Limit: 500 psig (34.5 bar).
air, water, oil and other compatible fluids, and can be panel mount-
ed to accommodate a 90° flow pattern. The valves can be used Temperature Limit: 200ºF (93.3ºC).
independently or as a remote valve for Dwyer flowmeters. Orifice Size: 0.120 in (3.05 mm).
Flow Coefficient: 0.36.

MODELS Max Flow: 1.75 gpm water (6.6 LPM), 500 scfh air (14,150 LPH).
Model No. Description Weight: 0.43 lb (195 g).
NV-1B Brass Block Valve
Connection Size: 1/8 – 27 female NPT.
NV-1S 303 SST Block Valve

Model
NVII Needle Valve
Economical, Pressures Up to 2000 psi, Blowout-Proof Stem
Ø63/64 Ø63/64
[Ø25.00] [Ø25.00]

1-3/4 OPEN 1-3/4 OPEN

[44.45 OPEN] 1-41/64 CLOSED [44.45 OPEN]
[41.67 CLOSED]
1-41/64 CLOSED
[41.67 CLOSED] 1/4-18 NPT
1/4 - 18 NPT
Ø23/32 1/4-18 NPT Ø23/32
[Ø18.26] [Ø18.26]
33/64 TYP
[13.10 TYP]
33/64 TYP
1-41/64 [13.10 TYP] 1-23/32
[41.67] [43.66]

NVII-1B NVII-2B NVII-1B NVII-2B

Model NVII Needle Valve provides easy flow regulation in all appli- SPECIFICATIONS
cations, including shut off and throttling for pressure gages and instru- Service: Gases and liquids compatible with wetted materials. Not
ments. With a one piece, hot forged brass body construction, years of rated for steam use.
maintenance-free service can be expected. The Model NVII, with its Pressure Limit: 2000 psi (138 bar) (CWP).
tamper-proof design and blowout-proof stem, provides excellent perfor- Wetted Materials:
mance and reliability.
Valve Body: Brass (CW617N).
Retainer, Handwheel: Brass (CW614N).
Flow Coefficient at Turns Open O-Ring: Fluoroelastomer.
0.35 Temperature Limits: -40 to 350°F (-40 to 176.7°C). (Warning:
0.3 freezing of the fluid in the installation may severely damage the
Cv USGPM @ 1 psi

valve.)
Valves

0.25

0.2 Flow Coefficient: 0.31.

0.15 Weight: 0.22 lb.
0.1 Connection Size: 1/4˝ NPT.
0.05

0
NVII-1B, Needle Valve (Female x Female)
Turns 1/2 1 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 NVII-2B, Needle Valve (Male x Female)
NVII
Turns Open Others

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 426
pg427 7/26/06 8:29 AM Page 1

Series
BFV Butterfly Valves
Low Cost, Lever Operated, Lug or Wafer Pattern, 225 psig

A n = # of holes

B B

n = # of holes

LUG STYLE WAFER STYLE

“LT” C “WF”

WAFER STYLE DIMENSIONS (in)

Size A B C n, WF n, LT Cv Weight Size A B C n, WF n, LT Cv Weight
2˝ 6.34 3.15 1-3/4 4 4 135 5.5 6˝ 8.9 5.47 2-1/4 8 8 1579 17.2
2-1/2˝ 6.89 3.5 1-7/8 4 4 220 7.05 8˝ 10.24 6.89 2-1/2 8 8 3136 29.1
3˝ 7.13 3.74 1-7/8 4 4 302 7.93 10˝ 11.5 7.99 2-3/4 12 12 5340 42.33
4˝ 7.87 4.49 2-1/8 4 8 600 10.8 12˝ 13.27 9.53 3-1/8 12 12 8250 71.65
LUG STYLE 5˝ 8.39 5 2-1/4 8 8 1022 15.43

Series BFV Butterfly Valves SPECIFICATIONS Wetted Materials:

• Phenolic backed cartridge seat design for extended service and ease of VALVE BODY Body Material: Ductile iron.
replacement. Can be used for vacuum service. Service: Compatible liquids, Disc: 316 SS.
• Extended neck for insulation – no fabricated extensions required. gases, and steam. Seat and O-ring: EPDM or PTFE.
• Machined flats attach disc/stem – no pins. Line Size: 2˝ to 12˝. Stem: 410 SS.
Body Style: 2-way, wafer or lug Temperature Limits: Disc:
• Valve features a retainer lip for dead end service. EPDM: -50 to 250°F (-46 to
• Triple seal reduces possibility of external leakage. butterfly. 121°C). PTFE: 0 to 300°F (-18 to
• Silicone free from the factory – no aftermarket cleaning required. End Connections: Flange, to be 149°C).
used with flanges that are ANSI Bearings: Nylatron.
Class 125 (B16.1) and ANSI Class Flow Rate: See Cv chart.
The most critical aspect of the Series BFV Butterfly Valves is the car- 150 (B16.5) dimensions. Operator: 2 to 6˝: 10-position
tridge seat design, which alleviates installation problems associated with com- Pressure Limit: 225 psi (15.5 locking hand lever. 8 to 12˝: manu-
mon “dove tail design” seats. Valve torque is lower and more consistent bar) WOG. al gear.
because the seat dynamics do not rely on being mated between two flanges.
Precision machining of the disc and body allow the cartridge design to main- APPLICATIONS
• Perfect for on-off or throttling service
tain a tighter disc to seat tolerance, providing a perfect low torque seal each • Ideal for shut-off of water in chillers, cooling towers, and
and every time the valve is cycled. Seat to disc seal is independent of flange thermal storage systems
support and capable of full rated dead end service. Select from wafer or lug • Air dampers
patterns with either a 10-position locking handle lever or manual gear oper- • Irrigation systems
ator. Standard valves provide bubble tight sealing to 225 psi (15.5 bar) and • Tank trucks
are designed to comply with MSS-SP-67 and API-609. • Sewage systems, waste water treatment

Cv VALUES OPERATING TORQUE VALUES (INCH LB)

DEGREE OPENING FULL OPEN EPDM Seats Size (inches)
Size 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 80° 90° Service Pressure 2 2-1/2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12
50 psi 86 126 179 295 540 750 1440 2466 3510
2˝ 0.1 5 12 24 45 64 90 125 135
100 psi 108 144 195 310 610 780 1490 2910 4100
2-1/2˝ 0.2 8 20 37 65 98 144 204 220
150 psi 126 150 210 335 699 847 1549 3360 5560
3˝ 0.3 12 22 39 70 116 183 275 302 1800
200 psi 150 198 297 400 725 940 3890 7558
4˝ 0.5 17 36 78 139 230 364 546 600
5˝ 0.8 29 61 133 237 392 620 930 1022 PTFE Seats Size (inches)
6˝ 2 45 95 205 366 605 958 1437 1579 Service Pressure 2 2-1/2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12
8˝ 3 89 188 408 727 1202 1903 2854 3136 50 psi 125 130 195 390 650 890 1690 3699 5265
100 psi 130 145 210 430 690 940 1710 4365 6150
10˝ 4 151 320 694 1237 2047 3240 4859 5340
150 psi 142 160 248 443 720 974 1770 5040 8340
12˝ 5 234 495 1072 1911 3162 5005 7505 8250
200 psi 180 220 340 490 795 1020 1890 5835 11367
Cv is the number of U.S. GPM of 60°F water that will pass through the valve with a 1 PSI pressure drop.

MODELS
Size Liner Model Size Liner Model
EPDM BFV202WFB311HL0 5˝ EPDM BFV205LTB311HL0
2˝ PTFE BFV202WFB341HL0 PTFE BFV205LTB341HL0
EPDM BFV202LTB311HL0 EPDM BFV206WFB311HL0
PTFE BFV202LTB341HL0 PTFE BFV206WFB341HL0
EPDM BFV225WFB311HL0 6˝ EPDM BFV206LTB311HL0
2-1/2˝ PTFE BFV225WFB341HL0 PTFE BFV206LTB341HL0
EPDM BFV225LTB311HL0 EPDM BFV208WFB312MG0
PTFE BFV225LTB341HL0 PTFE BFV208WFB342MG0
EPDM BFV203WFB311HL0 8˝ EPDM BFV208LTB312MG0
Valves

PTFE BFV203WFB341HL0 PTFE BFV208LTB342MG0

3˝ EPDM BFV203LTB311HL0 EPDM BFV210WFB312MG0
PTFE BFV203LTB341HL0 PTFE BFV210WFB342MG0
EPDM BFV204WFB311HL0 10˝ EPDM BFV210LTB312MG0
PTFE BFV204WFB341HL0 PTFE BFV210LTB342MG0
4˝ EPDM BFV204LTB311HL0 EPDM BFV212WFB312MG0
PTFE BFV204LTB341HL0 PTFE BFV212WFB342MG0
EPDM BFV205WFB311HL0 12˝ EPDM BFV212LTB312MG0
5˝ PTFE BFV205WFB341HL0 PTFE BFV212LTB342MG0
BFV202WFB311HL0 WF=Wafer Pattern LT=Lug Pattern

427 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg428 7/26/06 8:29 AM Page 1

Series
SAE Butterfly Valves
Low Cost, S.A.E. Flange, Hydraulic Reservoir Shut Off Valve
K

L-O-RING
A D
I.D. WIDTH
F

E - 4 PLACES
J C

Valve A B C D E F G H J K L I.D. x WD
Size In. (mm) In. (mm) In. (mm) In. (mm) In. (mm) In. (mm) In. (mm) In. (mm) In. (mm) In. (mm) In. (mm)
2 2 3-1/16 1-11/16 1/2 1-3/4 2-13/16 5-1/8 13/16 5 2-1/4 1/8
2˝ (50.80) (50.80) (77.79) (42.86) (12.70) (44.45) (71.44) (130.18) (20.64) (127.00) (57.15) (3.18)
2-1/2 2 3-1/2 2 1/2 2-1/16 3-1/8 5-1/8 13/16 5 2-3/4 1/8
2-1/2˝ (63.50) (50.80) (88.90) (50.80) (12.70) (52.39) (79.38) (130.18) (20.64) (127.00) (69.85) (3.18)
3 2-1/2 4-3/16 2-7/16 5/8 2-5/16 3-3/8 5-1/8 1-1/16 5 3-3/8 1/8
3˝ (76.20) (63.50) (106.36) (61.91) (130.18) (26.99) (127.00) (85.73)
(15.88) (58.74) (85.73) (3.18)
4 3-1/4 5-1/8 3-1/16 5/8 2-3/4 4 5-5/8 1-1/4 5 4-3/8 1/8
4˝
(101.60) (82.55) (130.18) (77.79) (15.88) (69.85) (101.60) (142.88) (31.75) (127.00) (111.13) (3.18)
5 4 6 3-5/8 5/8 3-5/16 4-3/8 6 1-1/2 5 5-3/8 1/8
5˝
(127.00) (101.60) (152.40) (92.08) (15.88) (84.14) (111.13) (152.40) (38.10) (127.00) (136.53) (3.18)

The Series SAE Butterfly Valves are an ideal low cost SPECIFICATIONS
hydraulic reservoir shut off valve. These valves are Service: Compatible liquids and gases.
Line Size: 2˝ to 5˝.
designed to meet the demanding needs of the fluid power Body Style: 2-way, lug butterfly.
industry. Unique features include an O-ring flange face End Connections: O-ring flange face seal (SAE J518).
Pressure Limit: Shut-off: 25 psi (1.72 bar) bubble tight, Body Shell:
seal complying with S.A.E. J518 dimensional require- 500 psi (34.5 bar).
ments. This design provides for bubble tight reservoir Wetted Materials:
Body and Disc/Vane: Cast iron.
shut off up to 25 psi (1.72 bar) and a maximum tempera- O-rings: Buna-N or Fluoroelastomer.
ture of 180°F (82.2°C). The compact envelope dimension Stem: Steel.
Temperature Limits: Buna-N: 180°F (82°C), Fluoroelastomer:
reduces space requirements. Unit allows for adjustment 300°F (149°C).
by incorporating an open/close detent position lock which MODELS
can be infinitely positioned to achieve a desired flow rate. Model No. S.A.E. Flange Size
The unique design resists the vibrations associated with SAE-20 2˝
hydraulic pumps and pumping systems. Optional SAE-25 2-1/2˝
SAE-30 3˝
Fluoroelastomer seals and locking handle are available. SAE-40 4˝
SAE-50 5˝
APPLICATIONS Fluoroelastomer O-ring seals. Add VIT suffix (SAE-30-VIT)
As a standard feature on injection molding machines and Locking handle. Add LHR suffix (SAE-30-LHR)
large earth moving equipment, the low cost SAE Valve
provides excellent shut-off on the reservoir side of Suggested Specification
hydraulic systems. Valve is typically open during normal Valves shall be butterfly type with flange bolt guide holes in
Valves

operation until service would be required on any part of size (2˝, 2-1/2˝, 3˝, 4˝, 5˝) tested to 25 psig (1.72 bar) bubble
tight before shipment. Valves shall include O-ring flange face
the hydraulic system at which time the valve is closed, seal complying with S.A.E. J518 dimensional requirements.
allowing for service without loss of hydraulic fluid. Unit shall employ handle incorporating open/close detent posi-
tion locks which can be infinitely positioned. The stem/vane
shall utilize thrust bearings. Unit shall be W.E. Anderson®
Butterfly Valve Model No. ____________.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 428
pg429 7/26/06 8:30 AM Page 1

Butterfly Valves - Resilient Seated

2-Way and 3-Way, Perfect for Flow Control of Hot and Chilled Water
3-Way Valve
with “D” or “S”
Lug Style Series Rack &
with “E” Pinion
Series Pneumatic
Electric Actuator &
Actuator Position
Indicator

Lug Style
Lug Style with with “P”
“L” Series Series
Electric Piston-Style
Actuator Pneumatic
Actuator

Corrosion and abrasion resistant thermoplastic discs are at the heart SPECIFICATIONS
of these butterfly valves. Select from wafer or lug patterns with cast iron VALVE BODY
or aluminum bodies. Standard valves provide bubble tight sealing to 150 Service: Compatible liquids, gases, and steam.
psi (10.3 bar) and reduced seat valves are rated to 50 psi (3.4 bar). Valves Line Size: 2˝ to 16˝.
are to be used with and meet the dimensional requirements of Cl. 125 Body Style: 2-way or 3-way, wafer or lug butterfly.
End Connections: Flange, to be used with flanges that are ANSI
(ANSI B16.1) and Cl. 150 (ANSI B16.5) flanges. Class 125 (B16.1) and ANSI Class 150 (B16.5) dimensions.
Pressure Limit: 150 psi (10.3 bar) WOG.
Features Wetted Materials:
• Seat provides bubble tight shutoff to 150 psi. Body Material: Cast iron or aluminum.
• Reduced seat option decreases torque requirement Disc/Vane: Polyphenylene Ether and Polystyrene (PPE & PS), 316
allowing smaller, lower cost actuators. SS, aluminum/bronze, or epoxy coated iron.
• Plast-a-Vane® disc available in 2˝ to 10˝ sizes Seat and O-ring: EPDM, Buna-N, or Fluoroelastomer.
- Made from PPE & PS a corrosion and abrasion Stem: 17/4 PH. SS (2 to 10˝ size), 304 SS (12 to 16˝ size).
Disc/Vane Connection Screws: 316 SS.
resistant reinforced thermoplastic resin Temperature Limits: Disc/Vane: PPE & PS and Epoxy coated iron:
- Incorporates a unique ribbed design that creates 225°F (107°C), 316SS: 300°F (149°C). Seat and O-ring: Buna-N:
small vortex trails yielding lower pressure 180°F (82°C), EPDM: 225°F (107°C), Fluoroelastomer: 300°F (149°C).
drop with a lower noise level than conventional Bearings: Bronze (iolite).
butterfly discs. Flow Rate: See Cv chart on page 431.
• One piece thru stem design provides strength and ACTUATORS
ensures reliability and positive disc positioning. ELECTRIC “E” Series (E1 thru E8):
Temperature Limits: -20 to 140°F (-28.9 to 60°C).
Power Requirement: 120 VAC.
Standard Features: Manual override handwheel, heater, position indicator,
Applications NEMA-4 enclosure, (2) Travel limit switches, (2) Position limit switches.
• Perfect for on-off or throttling service. Optional Features: Additional limit switches, 4-20 mA modulating
• Ideal for flow control of water in chillers, cooling input (E5 thru E8), 24 VDC, 220 VAC power voltage, NEMA 7 enclosure.
towers, and thermal storage systems. ELECTRIC “L” SERIES (L1 THRU L4):
• Air Dampers. Temperature Limits: -22°F (-30°C) to 122°F (50°C).
• Irrigation Systems. Power Requirement: 24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz.
• Tank Trucks. Standard Features: Manual override, position indicator, override-
proof sensors, reversing switch.
• Sewage Systems, Waste Water Treatment. Optional Features: 120 VAC power voltage, auxiliary limit switch,
4-20 mA modulating input.

PNEUMATIC (PlSTON-STYLE) “P” SERIES (P1 THRU P8):

BUTTERFLY VALVE DATA Temperature Limits: -20 to 180°F (-28.9 to 82.2°C).
TORQUE CHART (INCH LBS.) FOR LINED VALVES Connection: 3/16˝ nipple for 1/4˝ O.D. tubing.
Spring Range: 8-13 psi (.55-.90 bar).
SERVICE PRESSURE Supply Pressure: 0 to 20 psig (0-1.4 bar) normal operating, 30 psig
Size O psi 25 psi 50 psi 75 psi 100 psi 125 psi 150 psi (2.1 bar) maximum.
2 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 Optional Features: Positive positioner (P5 thru P8), 60° maximum
21⁄2 75 94 125 144 150 157 165 disc rotation.
3 135 150 180 195 210 225 240
4 225 300 345 375 450 495 525 PNEUMATIC RACK AND PINION (D1 THRU D8):
5 495 570 675 725 782 875 975 Temperature Limits: -10 to 195°F (-23.3 to 90.6°C).
Valves

6 525 600 750 900 1050 1125 1275 Air Connection: 1/4˝ female NPT.
8 900 1213 1525 1838 2150 2463 2775 Supply Pressure: 80 psig (5.5 bar) normal operating, 150 psig (10.3
10 1500 2295 2550 3300 3750 4200 4800 bar) maximum.
12 1938 2613 2938 3500 4306 4815 6000 Optional Features: Spring Return (S1 thru S8), Solenoid, positioner,
14 3600 4675 5750 6825 7900 8975 10050 limit switches.
16 4200 4875 6250 8025 10050 12375 15300
For unlined valves torque figures are 25% less and 3-way valves OPTIONS: Consult factory for Barber-Colman, Johnson Controls,
torque figures are 50% higher than figures shown. Honeywell, Landis & Gyr or Robertshaw actuators factory mounted on
Tested at 70°F (21 °C) with water. 2- and 3-way valves; solenoids, positioners, limit switches, hydraulic
actuation and marine applications.

429 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg430 7/26/06 8:31 AM Page 1

BUTTERFLY VALVE MODEL CHART (Built Model Numbers on the next page)
202WFB2516E1A Butterfly Valve; 2-way, cast iron wafer body, 17/4 Ph. SS
Example 2 02 WFB 2 5 1 6 E1 A Stem, PPE & PS disc, EPDM liner, E1 Electric Actuator, Normally Open Position.

Configuration 2 2-Way Valve

3 3-Way Valve
02 2" Pipe Size
25 21⁄2" Pipe Size
03 3" Pipe Size
04 4" Pipe Size
Valve 05 5" Pipe Size
Size 06 6" Pipe Size
08 8" Pipe Size
10 10" Pipe Size
12 12" Pipe Size
14 14" Pipe Size
16 16" Pipe Size
WFB Cast Iron Wafer Body, Lined
WAB Cast Alum. Wafer Body, Lined
LTB Cast Iron Lug Body, Threaded, Lined
Body LAB Cast Alum. Lug Body, Threaded, Lined
Style LDB Cast Iron Lug Body, Drilled, Lined
––R Reduced Torque Body, Max. 50 psi*
––A Unlined Body, 5% leak rate
*-Replace “B” in model number. Ex.: LTR
2 17/4 Ph. SS Stem, Standard (2" to 10" only)
Stem 3 304 SS Stem, Standard (12"-16")
Type 7 17/4 Ph. SS Stem, Long Shaft (2"-10")
8 304 SS Stem, Long Shaft (12"-16")
Long shafts must be used with “P” series actuators.
1 Aluminum/Bronze disc
Disc 3 CF-8M SS Disc
Material 5 PPE & PS Disc (2" to 10" only)
6 Epoxy-Coated Iron Disc
Liner 1 EPDM Liner and O-Rings
Material 2 BUNA-N Liner and O-Rings
3 Fluoroelastomer Liner and O-Rings
0 Bare Stem
Operator 1 Hand Lever Operator
Type 2 Manual Gear Operator
6 Electric Actuator
7 Pneumatic Actuator
00 Bare stem, hand lever, or manual gear operator
E1 Electric, two position, 300 in-lb, NEMA 4 enclosure
E2 Electric, two position, 1300 in-lb, NEMA 4 enclosure
E3 Electric, two position, 5100 in-lb, NEMA 4 enclosure
E4 Electric, two position, 15000 in-lb, NEMA 4 enclosure
E5 Electric, 4 to 20 mA input, 300 in-lb, NEMA 4 enclosure
E6 Electric, 4 to 20 mA input, 1300 in-lb, NEMA 4 enclosure
E7 Electric, 4 to 20 mA input, 5100 in-lb, NEMA 4 enclosure
E8 Electric, 4 to 20 mA input, 15000 in-lb, NEMA 4 enclosure
L1 Electric, two position, 320 in-lb, general purpose enclosure
L2 Electric, two position, 640 in-lb (two L1), general purpose enclosure
L3 Electric, 4 to 20 mA input, 266 in-lb, general purpose enclosure
L4 Electric, 4 to 20 mA input, 532 in-lb (two L3), general purpose enclosure
P1 Pneumatic piston, 154 in-lb
P2 Pneumatic piston, 308 in-lb (two P1)
P3 Pneumatic piston, 504 in-lb
Actuator P4 Pneumatic piston, 1008 in-lb (two P3)
Type P5 Pneumatic piston, 154 in-lb, P1 w/ 8-13 psi positioner
P6 Pneumatic piston, 504 in-lb, P3 w/ 8-13 psi positioner
P7 Pneumatic piston, 308 in-lb, two P1 w/ 8-13 psi positioner
P8 Pneumatic piston, 1008 in-lb, two P3 w/ 8-13 psi positioner
D1 Pneumatic double acting rack & pinion, 203 in-lb
D2 Pneumatic double acting rack & pinion, 302 in-lb
D3 Pneumatic double acting rack & pinion, 526 in-lb
D4 Pneumatic double acting rack & pinion, 1032 in-lb
D5 Pneumatic double acting rack & pinion, 1479 in-lb
D6 Pneumatic double acting rack & pinion, 2958 in-lb
D7 Pneumatic double acting rack & pinion, 5865 in-lb
D8 Pneumatic double acting rack & pinion, 12132 in-lb
S1 Pneumatic spring return D1, 203 air start, 76 spring end in-lb
S2 Pneumatic spring return D2, 302 air start, 112 spring end in-lb
S3 Pneumatic spring return D3, 526 air start, 208 spring end in-lb
S4 Pneumatic spring return D4, 1032 air start, 379 spring end in-lb
S5 Pneumatic spring return D5, 1479 air start, 520 spring end in-lb
S6 Pneumatic spring return D6, 2958 air start, 1033 spring end in-lb
S7 Pneumatic spring return D7, 5865 air start, 2104 spring end in-lb
S8 Pneumatic spring return D8, 12132 air start, 4318 spring end in-lb

0 Not Applicable (Manual Operator)

Valves

A 2-Way, Normally Open (NO) Example:

C 2-Way, Normally Closed (NC) 3-way top view
(Common/NO/NC)
Valve E 3-Way, Common/NO/NC
Arrangement G 3-Way, Common/NC/NO
I 3-Way, NO/Common/NC Common NO
&
Position K 3-Way, NC/Common/NO
R Other (Please Specify)
Normally open (NO) and Normally closed (NC) refer to the fail
position for “P” series and “S” series spring return actuators,
and “as assembled” orientation for all others.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 430
pg431 7/26/06 8:56 AM Page 1

BUTTERFLY VALVES CV VALUES

DEGREE OPENING FULL OPEN
Sample Model Numbers Size 30° 50° 60° 70° 90°
40°
For your convenience, sample model configurations are listed. These 2 14 23 36 63 105 130
2-1/2 25 44 70 110 180 320
models have a cast iron body, Polyphenylene Ether and Polystyrene 3 38 66 110 170 280 500
(PPE & PS) disc, and EPDM seat and O-ring. The 2-way configuration 4 63 110 180 280 460 820
5 100 180 280 450 740 1300
valves are positioned normally closed and the 3-way are positioned 6 140 250 400 640 1100 1900
8 250 440 690 1100 1800 3200
common/normally open/normally closed. All models shown with actua- 10 420 710 1174 1802 3059 5462
tors are sized for the 150 psi maximum pressure. Actuators should be 12 641 1082 1790 2748 4663 8326
14 883 1605 2523 3899 6423 11470
sized for the particular application since a larger actuator than neces- 16 1147 2065 3211 5113 9712 14311
Cv is the number of U.S. GPM OF 60°F water that will pass through the
sary will be more expensive while an actuator that is too small will not valve with a 1 PSI pressure drop.
move the valve properly.

2-Way Manual Operated - Gear with Handwheel 3-Way with P Series Piston Style Pneumatic Actuator
PIPE PIPE
SIZE WAFER STYLE LUG STYLE SIZE WAFER STYLE LUG STYLE
2" 202WFB2512000 202LTB2512000 2˝ 302WFB7517P1E 302LTB7517P1E
2-1/2" 225WFB2512000 225LTB2512000 2-1/2˝ 325WFB7517P1E 325LTB7517P1E
3" 203WFB2512000 203LTB2512000 3˝ 303WFB7517P2E 303LTB7517P2E
4" 204WFB2512000 204LTB2512000 4˝ 304WFB7517P3E 304LTB7517P3E
5" 205WFB2512000 205LTB2512000 5˝ 305WFB7517P4E 305LTB7517P4E
6" 206WFB2512000 206LTB2512000
8" 208WFB2512000 208LTB2512000
10" 210WFB2512000 210LTB2512000 3-Way with D Series Rack and Pinion Pneumatic Actuator
PIPE
2-Way with P Series Piston Style Pneumatic Actuator SIZE WAFER STYLE LUG STYLE
PIPE 2˝ 302WFB2517D2E 302LTB2517D2E
SIZE WAFER STYLE LUG STYLE 2-1/2˝ 325WFB2517D2E 325LTB2517D2E
3˝ 303WFB2517D3E 303LTB2517D3E
2" 202WFB7517P1C 202LTB7517P1C 4˝ 304WFB2517D4E 304LTB2517D4E
2-1/2" 225WFB7517P1C 225LTB7517P1C 5˝ 305WFB2517D4E 305LTB2517D4E
3" 203WFB7517P2C 203LTB7517P2C 6˝ 306WFB2517D5E 306LTB2517D5E
4" 204WFB7517P3C 204LTB7517P3C 8˝ 308WFB2517D6E 308LTB2517D6E
5" 205WFB7517P4C 205LTB7517P4C 10˝ 310WFB2517D7E 310LTB2517D7E
6" 206WFB7517P4C 206LTB7517P4C
3-Way with S Series
2-Way with D Series Rack and Pinion Pneumatic Actuator
Rack and Pinion - Spring Return Pneumatic Actuator
PIPE PIPE
SIZE WAFER STYLE LUG STYLE WAFER STYLE
SIZE LUG STYLE
2" 202WFB2517D1C 202LTB2517D1C 2˝ 302WFB2517S3E 302LTB2517S3E
2-1/2" 225WFB2517D1C 225LTB2517D1C 2-1/2˝ 325WFB2517S3E 325LTB2517S3E
3" 203WFB2517D2C 203LTB2517D2C 3˝ 303WFB2517S4E 303LTB2517S4E
4" 204WFB2517D3C 204LTB2517D3C 4˝ 304WFB2517S5E 304LTB2517S5E
5" 205WFB2517D4C 205LTB2517D4C 5˝ 305WFB2517S6E 305LTB2517S6E
6" 206WFB2517D5C 206LTB2517D5C 6˝ 306WFB2517S7E 306LTB2517S7E
8" 208WFB2517D6C 208LTB2517D6C 8˝ 308WFB2517S8E 308LTB2517S8E
10" 210WFB2517D7C 210LTB2517D7C 10˝ 310WFB2517S8E 310LTB2517S8E
2-Way with S Series
3-Way with L Series Electric Actuator
Rack and Pinion - Spring Return Pneumatic Actuator
PIPE
PIPE WAFER STYLE LUG STYLE
WAFER STYLE LUG STYLE SIZE
SIZE
2˝ 302WFB7516L1E 302LTB7516L1E
2" 202WFB2517S3C 202LTB2517S3C 2-1/2˝ 325WFB7516L1E 325LTB7516L1E
2-1/2" 225WFB2517S3C 225LTB2517S3C 3˝ 303WFB7516L1E 303LTB7516L1E
3" 203WFB2517S4C 203LTB2517S4C
4" 204WFB2517S5C 204LTB2517S5C
5" 205WFB2517S6C 205LTB2517S6C 3-Way with E Series Electric Actuator
6" 206WFB2517S7C 206LTB2517S7C
8" 208WFB2517S8C 208LTB2517S8C PIPE
SIZE WAFER STYLE PRICE LUG STYLE
10" 210WFB2517S8C 210LTB2517S8C
2˝ 302WFB2516E1E 302LTB2516E1E
2-Way with L Series Electric Actuator 2-1/2˝ 325WFB2516E1E 325LTB2516E1E
PIPE 3˝ 303WFB2516E1E 303LTB2516E1E
SIZE WAFER STYLE LUG STYLE 4˝ 304WFB2516E2E 304LTB2516E2E
5˝ 305WFB2516E2E 305LTB2516E2E
2" 202WFB7516L1C 202LTB7516L1C 6˝ 306WFB2516E2E 306LTB2516E2E
2-1/2" 225WFB7516L1C 225LTB7516L1C 8˝ 308WFB2516E3E 308LTB2516E3E
3" 203WFB7516L1C 203LTB7516L1C 10˝ 310WFB2516E3E 310LTB2516E3E
4" 204WFB2516L2C 204LTB2516L2C

2-Way with E Series Electric Actuator Options:

PIPE - Solenoid Valve Mounted on D or S Series actuators - See
Valves

SIZE WAFER STYLE LUG STYLE

2" 202WFB2516E1C 202LTB2516E1C Model SV3
2-1/2" 225WFB2516E1C 225LTB2516E1C
3" 203WFB2516E1C 203LTB2516E1C
4" 204WFB2516E2C 204LTB2516E2C
5" 205WFB2516E2C 205LTB2516E2C
6" 206WFB2516E2C 206LTB2516E2C
8" 208WFB2516E3C 208LTB2516E3C
10" 210WFB2516E3C 210LTB2516E3C

431 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg432 7/26/06 8:57 AM Page 1

Series
DCV/RDCV Diaphragm Valves

DCV62T1D RDCV62T

DCV20C1D RDCV20C

The Series DCV/RDCV Dust Collection Valves are ideal for use SPECIFICATIONS
with the Series DCT1000 and Series DCT500 duct collection timer Service: Compatible gases, filtered and oil free.
boards. Both the Series DCV and RDCV have the option for either cou- Wetted Materials: Body: aluminum; Trim: 304 SS; Diaphragm
pling or NPT connections. The coupling connection allows for a quick and seals: NBR; Diaphragm disc: polyamide.
and simple installation. Only the stub pipe and blowtube need to be Other Materials: Cover: aluminum; Body bolts and spring: 304
cleaned and deburred before the valve is fit into position. The “T” Se- SS.
ries DCV has female threaded connections. Both the “C” and “T” ver- Pressure Limits: Minimum of 4.4 psi (0.3 bar), maximum of
sions have a 90° angle between the inlet and outlet the most suitable 124.7 psi (8.6 bar).
configuration for pulse valve applications. The design offers not only Temperature Limits: Ambient: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C) for
ease of installation, but also minimal airflow restriction for an excep- RDCV models, -4 to 122°F (-20 to 50°C) for DCV models;
tional cleaning pulse. The valves are offered in both integrated and re- Operating: -4 to 185°F (-20 to 85°C).
mote coil configurations. Power Requirements: 110 VAC, 220 VAC, or 24 VDC for DCV
models.
Power Consumption: 12 W, inrush: 17 VA; holding: 14.5 VA for
DCV models.
MODELS Electrical Connection: DIN connection for DCV models.
Model Number of Cv Factor Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65) for DCV models.
Number Size Solenoid Connection Diaphragms (gal/min) Process Connection: See model chart.
RDCV20T Remote NPT Mounting Orientation: Any position.
RDCV20C 3/4˝ Remote Coupling 1 14 Agency Approvals: CE.
DCV20T1D Integral* NPT
DCV20C1D Integral* Coupling
RDCV25T Remote NPT Series DCV/RDCV Model Guide
RDCV25C 1˝ Remote Coupling 1 23
DCV25T1D Integral* NPT Construction DCV Integrated Coil
DCV25C1D Integral* Coupling RDCV Remote Coil
RDCV35T Remote NPT Size 20 3/4˝
25 1˝
RDCV35C 1-1/2˝ Remote Coupling 1 42
DCV35T1D Integral* NPT 35 1-1/2˝
DCV35C1D Integral* Coupling 45 1-1/2˝ (2 Diaphragms)
RDCV45T Remote NPT 50 2˝
62 2-1/2˝
RDCV45C 1-1/2˝ Remote Coupling 2 51
Valves

DCV45T1D Integral* NPT 76 3˝

DCV45C1D Integral* Coupling Connection T NPT
RDCV50T Remote NPT C Coupling (up to 1-1/2˝ only)
2˝ 2 106
DCV50T1D Integral* NPT Voltage 1 110 VAC (for integrated coil only)
RDCV62T Remote NPT 2 220 VAC (for integrated coil only)
2-1/2˝ 2 136 3 24 VDC (for integrated coil only)
DCV62T1D Integral* NPT
RDCV76T Remote NPT Electrical DIN (for integrated coil only)
3˝ 2 167 D
DCV76T1D Integral* NPT Connections
* 110 VAC with DIN Connector

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 432
p433 7/26/06 8:58 AM Page 1

Series
RDCV Remote Coil Valves
RDCV20C
RDCV20T
RDCV25C
RDCV25T
RDCV35C C WIDTH
RDCV35T C WIDTH

RDCV50T
RDCV62T
RDCV45T RDCV45C RDCV76T
C WIDTH

C WIDTH
C WIDTH

DIMENSIONAL CHART
Connection Model
Number A (mm) B (mm) C (mm) D (mm) E (mm) Weight lb (kg)
RDCV20T 3-15/16˝ (100) 2-31/32˝ (75) 3-7/16˝ (87) 2-3/16˝ (56) 25/32˝ (20) 1.12 (.51)
RDCV25T 4-1/8˝ (105) 3˝ (76) 3-1/4˝ (83) 2-1/2˝ (64) 7/8˝ (22) 1.15 (.52)
NPT RDCV35T 5-1/8˝ (130) 4-29/32˝ (125) 4-3/8˝ (111) 4-1/2˝ (114) 1-9/32˝ (33) 2.0 (.91)
RDCV45T 5-25/32˝ (147) 5-5/32˝ (131) 4-3/8˝ (111) 3-5/8˝ (91) 3˝ (76) 2.2 (1.0)
RDCV50T 8-1/16˝ (205) 5-7/8˝ (149) 7-1/4˝ (184) 4-15/32˝ (113) 1-9/16˝ (40) 4.2 (1.9)
RDCV62T 8-9/32˝ (210) 6-11/16˝ (170) 7-1/4˝ (184) 4-21/32˝ (118) 1-29/32˝ (48) 5.5 (2.5)
RDCV76T 8-19/32˝ (218) 7-27/32˝ (199) 7-7/8˝ (200) 4-21/32˝ (118) 2-1/2˝ (63) 6.6 (3.0)
RDCV20C 4-13/32˝ (112) 4˝ (102) 3-7/16˝ (87) 2-5/8˝ (67) 1-25/32˝ (45) 1.37 (.62)
RDCV25C 4-5/8˝ (117) 5˝ (127) 3-1/4˝ (83) 3˝ (76) 2-3/4˝ (70) 2.1 (.96)
Coupling RDCV35C 5-13/16˝ (147) 5-15/32˝ (139) 4-3/8˝ (111) 3-5/8˝ (91) 3˝ (76) 2.4 (1.1)
RDCV45C 5-25/32˝ (147) 6-25/32˝ (172) 4-3/8˝ (111) 3-5/8˝ (91) 3˝ (76) 3.2 (1.45)
Valves

433 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p434 7/26/06 8:59 AM Page 1

Series
DCV Integral Coil Valves

C WIDTH
C WIDTH

C WIDTH
C WIDTH C WIDTH

DIMENSIONAL CHART
Connection Model Number A (mm) B (mm) C (mm) D (mm) E (mm) Weight lb (kg)

DCV20T_D 3-15/16˝ (100) 4-13/16˝ (122) 3-7/16˝ (87) 2-3/16˝ (56) 25/32˝ (20) 1.31 (.59)
DCV25T_D 4-1/8˝ (105) 4-21/32˝ (126) 3-1/4˝ (83) 2-1/2˝ (64) 7/8˝ (22) 1.33 (.60)
NPT DCV35T_D 5-1/8˝ (130) 6-1/16 (154) 4-3/8˝ (111) 4-1/2˝ (114) 1-9/32˝ (33) 2.2 (.99)
DCV45T_D 5-25/32˝ (147) 7-7/32˝ (183) 4-3/8˝ (111) 3-5/8˝ (91) 3˝ (76) 2.4 (1.1)
DCV50T_D 8-1/16˝ (205) 7-29/32˝ (201) 7-1/4˝ (184) 4-15/32˝ (113) 1-9/16˝ (40) 4.4 (2.0)
DCV62T_D 8-9/32˝ (210) 8-3/4˝ (222) 7-1/4˝ (184) 4-21/32˝ (118) 1-29/32˝ (48) 5.7 (2.6)
DCV76T_D 8-19/32˝ (218) 9-7/8˝ (251) 7-7/8˝ (200) 4-21/32˝ (118) 2-1/2˝ (63) 6.8 (3.1)
Valves

DCV20C_D 4-13/32˝ (112) 5-27/32˝ (148) 3-7/16˝ (87) 2-5/8˝ (67) 1-25/32˝ (45) 1.55 (.70)
Coupling DCV25C_D 4-5/8˝ (117) 6-21/32˝ (177) 3-1/4˝ (83) 3˝ (76) 2-3/4˝ (70) 2.3 (1.0)
DCV35C_D 5-13/16˝ (147) 7-21/32˝ (194) 4-3/8˝ (111) 3-5/8˝ (91) 3˝ (76) 2.6 (1.2)
DCV45C_D 5-25/32˝ (147) 8-27/32˝ (224) 4-3/8˝ (111) 3-5/8˝ (91) 3˝ (76) 3.4 (1.5)

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 434
p435 7/26/06 9:02 AM Page 1

Series
RSV
Pilot Solenoid Valve
For Use with Remote Valves
13/16 (WIDTH)
[21] 1-11/32
[34]

1-21/32
[42]

2-9/32
1-1/8
[83.5]
[32]

5/8
[16]
RSV1D RSV1L 25/32
[19.5]
1-1/2
[38.5]

The Series RSV Pilot Solenoid Valve is used to operate the Series SPECIFICATIONS
RDCV remote type diaphragm valve. Series RDCV does not include an Service: Compatible gases, filtered and oil free.
integral solenoid and needs to be activated remotely. The RSV can Wetted Materials: Body: aluminum; Core and spring: 304 SS;
Seals: NBR.
drive all size diaphragm valves. The units can be bought separately for
Pressure Limits: Minimum of 4.4 psi (0.3 bar), maximum of 124.7
mounting in a panel or can be purchased mounted on our SVE enclo- psi (8.6 bar).
sure. Consult factory for mounting of RSV valves with our DCT timer Temperature Limits: Ambient: -4 to 122°F (-20 to 50°C);
boards together in one enclosure all pre-wired. Operating: -4 to 185°F (-20 to 85°C).
Power Requirements: 110 VAC, 220 VAC, or 24 VDC.
MODELS
Power Consumption: 12 W, inrush: 17 VA, holding: 14.5 VA.
Model Electrical Cv
Number Voltage Connections
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
RSV1D 110 VAC DIN .33 Electrical Connection: DIN connection or wire leads, 18 AWG,
RSV2D 220 VAC DIN .33 22˝ (55 cm) long.
RSV3D 24 VDC DIN .33 Process Connection: 1/8˝ female NPT.
RSV1L 110 VAC Wire Leads .33 Mounting Orientation: Any position.
RSV2L 220 VAC Wire Leads .33 Weight: 0.60 lb (0.27 kg).
RSV3L 24 VDC Wire Leads .33 Pneumatic Tube Length: Maximum of 9.8 ft (3 m).
Agency Approvals: CE.

Muffler Accessory
For Pulse Valve Exhaust A-238
15/16
A-237
A-238 A-237 [124]
Ø5/8
[Ø15.9]

1-21/32
[55] 1-9/32
[32.6]

1/4
13/32 [6]
[10]

3/8˝ - 18 NPT 1/8˝-27 NPT

The Muffler Accessory can be easily field installed to any di- SPECIFICATIONS
aphragm valve with an exhaust. Pneumatic exhaust ports are on the Material: Polypropylene.
diaphragm valves that have dual diaphragms and the units with the Pressure Limits: 130.5 psi ( 9 bar).
integral mounted solenoid. The muffler decreases the amount of Temperature Limits: Ambient: -4 to 140°F ( -20 to 60°C);
Valves

noise when the air is exhausted from the valve. Valves with dual di- Operating: -4 to 185°F (-20 to 85°C).
aphragms and an integral solenoid have two exhaust ports and will re-
quire one A-237 and one A-238. MODELS
Model
Number Description Fits Valve Sizes
A-237 1/8˝ NPT 3/4˝, 1˝, 1-1/2˝, RSV
A-238 3/8˝ NPT 1-1/2˝, 2˝, 1-1/2˝, 3˝

435 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p436 7/26/06 9:04 AM Page 1

Series
SVE Solenoid Valve Enclosure
For the Series RSV Remote Solenoid Valves

C WIDTH

D
A

SVE06

C WIDTH

SVE06WP61

D
A

SVE12

Model B (mm) D (mm)

A (mm) C (mm)
Number
SVE06WP61 SVE06WP61 10-5/32˝ (258) 4˝ (101.5) 4-21/32˝ (118) 7-29/32˝ (201)
SVE12WP121 12-7/16˝ (316) 4˝ (101.5) 6-5/8˝ (168) 10-3/16˝ (259)

The Series SVE are multi-valve enclosures for the RSV pilot valve. The SPECIFICATIONS
SVE offers a convenient weatherproof enclosure package with all sole- Service: (For RSV) Compatible gases, filtered and oil free.
noids pre-wired to a terminal block. Enclosures are available in 6 or 12 Wetted Materials: (For RSV) Body: aluminum; Core and spring:
304 SS; Seals: NBR.
valve size with choice of pilot valve voltage.
Pressure Limits: (For RSV) Minimum of 4.4 psi (0.3 bar),
maximum of 124.7 psi (8.6 bar).
Temperature Limits: Ambient: -4 to 122°F (-20 to 50°C);
Operating: -4 to 185°F (-20 to 85°C).
Power Requirement: (For RSV) 110 VAC, 220 VAC, or 24 VDC.
Power Consumption: (For RSV) 12 W, inrush: 17 VA, holding:
Series SVE Enclosure Model Guide 14.5 VA.
Solenoid Enclosure for solenoid valves
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
SVE
Valve Enclosure Enclosure Material: Anodized aluminum with NBR gasket.
Electrical Connection: All RSV are pre-wired to a terminal strip.
Valve 06 6 solenoid channels Process Connection: (For RSV) 1/8˝ female NPT. (Consult factory
Enclosure Size 12 12 solenoid channels for 1/4˝ NPT).
Enclosure Type WP Weatherproof enclosure Conduit Connection: 3/4˝ female NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Any position.
Solenoids 2 2 Solenoids fitted
Fitted 3 Solenoids fitted Pneumatic Tube Length: Maximum of 9.8 ft (3 m).
3
4 4 Solenoids fitted
5 5 Solenoids fitted
6 6 Solenoids fitted
7 7 Solenoids fitted MODELS
8 8 Solenoids fitted Model Quantity of Enclosure
Number Solenoid Type Voltage
9 9 Solenoids fitted
10 10 Solenoids fitted SVE06WP61 6 Weatherproof 110 VAC
Valves

11 11 Solenoids fitted SVE06WP62 6 Weatherproof 220 VAC

12 12 Solenoids fitted SVE06WP63 6 Weatherproof 24 VDC
Voltage 1 110 VAC SVE12WP121 12 Weatherproof 110 VAC
SVE12WP122 12 Weatherproof 220 VAC
2 220 VAC
SVE12WP123 12 Weatherproof 24 VDC
3 24 VDC
Note: Maximum quantity of pre-fitted solenoids can not exceed the underlined number.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 436
p437 7/26/06 9:05 AM Page 1

Series
BHC Bulk Head Connector
Coupling Accessories

BHC35D
BHC35DD

Series BHC Bulk Head Connectors allow for easy installation of Model A B D Min L
blow tube through the dust collector wall and eliminate the need for weld- Number in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)
ing or use of additional flanges. The fittings enable easy removal and re- BHC20D 2-3/8˝ (60.5) 2-5/16˝ (58.5) 1-25/32˝ to 2˝ 3-27/32˝
assembly of blow tubes for cleaning and maintenance. BHC models are BHC20DD 3-19/32˝ (91) 2-5/16˝ (58.5) (45 to 51) (97)
available in single connection for through tube mounting or double con- BHC25D 2-23/32˝ (69) 2-3/4˝ (70) 2-7/32˝ to 2-7/16˝ 4-21/32˝
nection for two piece tube mounting. BHC25DD 3-31/32˝ (101) 2-3/4˝ (70) (56 to 62) (118)
BHC35D 2-15/16˝ (75) 3-15/32˝ (88) 2-27/32˝ to 3-1/16˝ 6-3/16˝
MODELS 4-11/32˝ (110) 3-15/32˝ (88) (72 to 78) (157)
BHC35DD
Model
Number Size Connections SPECIFICATIONS
BHC20D 3/4˝ One Service: Compatible gases.
BHC20DD 3/4˝ Two
Wetted Material: Body, Ring nut, DIN nut: aluminum; Washer:
BHC25D 1˝ One
BHC25DD 1˝ Two SS41; Gasket: NBR.
BHC35D 1-1/2˝ One Pressure Limits: 124.7 psi (8.6 bar).
BHC35DD 1-1/2˝ Two Temperature Limits: -4 to 185°F (-20 to 85°C).

Series
DCD
Repair Kit
Diaphragm Replacements for Series DCV/RDCV

DCD0045 DCD0035 DCD0020

Series DCD are replacement diaphragm kits for the Series SPECIFICATIONS
DCV/RDCV valves. This kit includes the standard wearing parts of the Materials: Diaphragm: NBR; Disc: polyamide; Spring: 304 SS.
valve for field replacement.
Valves

MODELS
Model Diaphragm Valve Size Model
Number Number Diaphragm Valve Size
DCD0020 3/4˝ DCD0050 2˝
DCD0025 1˝ DCD0062 2-1/2˝
DCD0035 1-1/2˝ DCD0076 3˝
DCD0045 1-1/2˝ (Dual)
Note: All model numbers include the necessary quantity of replacement diaphragms along with the spring.

437 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p438 7/26/06 9:06 AM Page 1

Series
SV3 Solenoid Valve
Direct Mounts to NAMUR Pneumatic Actuators
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 240 VAC, 24 VAC, 24 VDC, or 12
5-1/4 VDC.
[132.1]
Supply Pressure: 20 psi (1.4 bar) to 120 psi (8.3 bar).
Air Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
Temperature Limits: -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C).
1-9/16
[39.6] Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
2-3/4
[69.3] Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X.
Mounting: NAMUR VDI/VDE 3845.
Standard Features: Manual override, mechanical spring safety po-
sition.
SV3 on Type D Actuator Optional Features: Other power voltages.
Series SV Solenoid Valve will electrically operate pneumatic actua- MODELS
tors for on-off applications. When the solenoid valve receives the elec- Model Number Power
trical input signal it switches the pneumatic supply pressure to the SV3 120 VDC
actuator, which moves the valve from the closed to open position. The SV3-A 12 VDC
next impulse to the solenoid valve will make the valve move back to the SV3-B 24 VDC
SV3-C 240 VDC
closed position. The low cost solenoid valve directly mounts onto pneu- 24 VAC
matic actuators with standard NAMUR mounting configuration elimi- SV3-D
nating external tubing and fittings. Buna-N O-rings are included to seal Factory mounting and testing to Actuator available. Add Solenoid Valve model no. as suffix to But-
terfly Valve model code (for use with pneumatic rack and pinion actuator as shown only). Exam-
the valve ports to the side of the actuator. Standard features include a ple, 204LTB2517D3C-SV3
manual override, safety position by mechanical spring, and a NEMA 4X
enclosure. Direct mounts onto D, S, J, F, C, DA, or SR actuators.

Series
PV Solenoid Pilot Valve
Low Cost, Compact Design, For Use with SAV Angle Seat Valves
SPECIFICATIONS
Pilot Media: Air, water, or inert gases.
Power Requirements: See Model Chart.
Wetted Materials:
Body: Niploy coated brass.
Seal: FKM.
Maximum Supply Temperature: 150 psig.
Temperature Limits: 14 to 140°F (-10 to 60°C).
Actuator Connection: PV1_: 1/8˝ BSP; PV2_, PV3_: 1/4˝ BSP.
Pilot Media Connection: 1/8˝ NPT.
Coil Consumption:
PV1_, PV2_: AC: 9A (res.), 14A (ind.); DC: 6A.
PV3_: AC: 15A (res.), 30A (ind.); DC: 10A.
Mounting: Banjo connection.
Enclosure Rating: IP65 (with DIN connector).
Standard Features: Manual override, DIN connector.
GROUND MODELS
TERMINAL
SAV DIMENSIONS
Model Voltage Actuator A in. B in. C in.
B Diameter (mm) (mm) (mm)
DIN CONNECTOR
PV11 240VAC
PV12 120VAC 1-1/4 3-1/32 1-1/16
1-3/4" (77.0) (27.0)
PV13 24VAC (31.8)
PV14 24VDC
A C
PV21 240VAC
PV22 120VAC
Valves

The Series PV three-way normally closed electro-pneumatic solenoid pilot 2-1/2" 1-3/8 3-1/16 1-1/16
valve can be direct mounted to operate the Series SAV Angle Seat Valve actua- PV23 24VAC (35.0) (77.8) (27.0)
tors. When the solenoid valve receives the electric input signal, it switches the
pneumatic supply pressure to the actuator, which moves the valve from the closed PV24 24VDC
to open position, or reversely for normally open valves. When the input to the sole- PV31 240VAC
noid valve stops, the pneumatic supply pressure is again blocked, and the valve
returns to the normal position. Suitable for use with air or other inert gases, the PV32 120VAC 1-3/8 3-3/4 1-1/16
valve is supplied with a DIN connector, and is fitted with a manual override. Water 3-9/16" (35.0) (95.3) (27.0)
can also be used as a pilot media provided that a suitable drain line is attached to PV33 24VAC
the exhaust outlet. Select the proper model according to the SAV valve actuator PV34 24VDC
diameter and power requirements.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 438
p439 7/26/06 9:07 AM Page 1

Series
2V Pneumatic Pilot Valves
Two-Way and Three-Way Valves – Air – Water – Gas – Steam Service
3-25/32
[96.04] A C 2-WAY A C 2-WAY
AIR AIR-TO-CLOSE AIR-TO-OPEN

B B

PORT A PLUGGED PORT B PLUGGED

6-3/4 3-WAY 3-WAY

[171.45]
A C
DIVERTING A C
DIVERTING
OUTPUT INPUT
C A
B B

2-3/32 ALL PORTS OPEN ALL PORTS OPEN

[53.18]
B

When used as a 3-Way pilot, ports “A” and “C” are connected when the diaphragm is inflated.
2-1/8 CAUTION: Use of an actuator supply gas other than air can create a hazardous environment because
[53.98] a small amount of gas continuously vents to atmosphere.

W.E. Anderson Series 2V SPECIFICATIONS Temperature Limits: Gases and liq-

MODELS VALVE BODY uids: 170°F (77°C), Steam: 274°F
Pneumatic Pilot Valves are compact, MODEL (134°C).
Service: Compatible liquids, gases,
combination Two-Way/Three-Way globe NUMBER OPERATION and steam. Flow Rate: Cv is 1.5 at 100% open.
valves. Minimal actuator volume and 2VA14000 TWO-WAY, AIR-TO-CLOSE Line Size: 1/4˝. Weight: 2.6 lb (1.2 kg).
short valve stroke combine to deliver 2VB14000 TWO-WAY, AIR-TO-OPEN Body Style: 2-way or 3-way globe. ACTUATOR
quick, positive action. Ideal for use in 2VJ14000 THREE-WAY End Connections: Female NPT. Type: Pneumatic spring/diaphragm.
boosting response time of diaphragm actuators or as lock-in/lock-out devices. Pressure Limit: Gases and liquids: 100 Control Signal: 0 to 30 psi (0 to 2.07
psi (7.00 bar) @ 170°F (77°C), Steam: bar).
Suggested Specification 60 psi (4.14 bar) @ 274°F (134°C). Air Connection: 1/8˝ female NPT.
Pneumatic Pilot Valve shall be 2-Way/ 3-Way design in compact size. Body shall be Wetted Materials: Diaphragm: Natural rubber, cotton
Body Material: Bronze. insert.
precision-machined Cast Bronze suitable for air, water, gas or steam service with Diaphragm Support Plate, Housing,
Trim: Composition.
tight shutoff at maximum fluid operating pressures. Actuator shall be of rugged Stuffing Box: Brass. Yoke: Cast Iron.
Cast Iron construction with readily accessible spring compression nuts permit- Packing: Rope. Spring: Plated Steel.
ting easy pneumatic range adjustment. Pneumatic Pilot Valve shall be W.E. An- Temperature Limit: 150°F (66°C).
derson Model No.____ configured for (2-Way, Air-To-Close) (2-Way, Air-To-Open)
(3-Way) operation.

Series
SVP Proportioning Solenoid Valve
Low Cost, Stainless Steel Construction, 0-24 VDC Input

The Series SVP is a low cost, uniquely designed solenoid valve which controls or SPECIFICATIONS
regulates flow in proportion to a variable voltage input. While most solenoid valves Service: Compatible gases.
simply provide on/off service, this unit adds a totally new dimension to solenoid valve End Connections: 1/4˝ compression fitting.
performance. Reacting to a 0-24 VDC input signal, the valve opens in proportion to
the voltage applied, delivering just the right amount of flow needed. Compatible with Pressure Limits: 500 psig (34.45 bar).
a wide range of gases and liquids, this unit provides the solution to even the most de- Wetted Materials: 316 and 416 SS, Viton® O-rings.
manding applications like process control, chemical mixing, high tech manufacturing Temperature Limits:
and laboratory testing. Another quality feature of this valve is its tight shut-off (NC) Process: -40 to 174°F (-40 to 79°C).
when de-energized. Ambient: -40 to 130°F (-40 to 54°C).
Type of Operation: Normally closed, valve will close when de-
energized.
MODELS Voltage Input: 0-24 VDC.
Valves

MAXIMUM FLOW* Max. Operating Current: 400 mA.

MODEL ORIFICE AIR WATER GPH
NO. IN. (MM) CV SCFH (LPM) (CC/M)
Electrical Connections: (M) spade type.
SVP-1 0.020 (0.51) 0.009 7.4 (3.5) 2.0 (125) Maximum Differential Pressure: 50 psid (3.45 bar).
SVP-2 0.040 (1.02) 0.033 27.5 (13) 6.4 (400) Weight: 12 oz (340 g).
SVP-3 0.055 (1.40) 0.055 45.6 (21.5) 11.1 (700)
SVP-4 0.063 (1.60) 0.068 53 (25) 13.5 (850)
*Based on 10 psig (69 kPa) inlet pressure and atmospheric exhaust

439 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p440 7/26/06 9:16 AM Page 1

Series
MPR Miniature Pressure Regulator
Air or Water Regulator, Compact and Lightweight, Low Cost

1-1/2
[38.10]

1-5/8
[41.40]
(2) 1/8 NPT
GAGE PORTS
3/8 (2) 1/4 NPT
[9.65] INLET & OUTLET
2-27/32 PORTS
[71.88]

The Series MPR Miniature Pressure Regulators are compact units SPECIFICATIONS
that provide low cost, high performance pressure regulation of com- Service: Compressed air or water.
pressed air or air/water. The low torque, non-rising adjustment knob
with locking capability provides easy and precise adjustment. Models for Wetted Materials: Body: Zinc; Bonnet: Acetal; Diaphragm/Seals:
use with air are self relieving. Models for air/water are non-relieving. Nitrile; Internals: Aluminum, brass, acetal, steel, music wire (MPR2
is plated with electroless nickel for water use).
Maximum Supply Pressure: 250 psig (17.2 bar).
MODELS Operating Temperature: 0 to 150°F (-18 to 60°C).
Model Number Flow Capacity: 24 SCFM (48 m3/hr) at 100 psig (6.9 bar) supply,
Range
Air Air/Water 60 psig (4.1 bar) output.
MPR1-0 MPR2-0 0 to 5 psi Process Connection: Inlet and Outlet: Two 1/4˝ female NPT; Two
MPR1-1 MPR2-1 0 to 15 psi
MPR1-2 MPR2-2 0 to 30 psi 1/8˝ female NPT gage ports.
MPR1-3 MPR2-3 0 to 60 psi Weight: 4 oz (113 g).
MPR1-4 MPR2-4 0 to 100 psi

Series
AFR Air Filter Regulator
7-3/4
[196.8]
2-19/32 2-53/64
[65.8] [71.6] 3/8
21/32 INPUT [9.6]
[16.5] 1/4˝ NPT

3.130
[79.5] DRAIN

GAUGE PORT
3.130 1/4˝ NPT
[79.5] OUTPUT
1/4˝ NPT

Series AFR Air Filter Regulator provides clean air pressure to pneu- SPECIFICATIONS
matic controllers, valve positioners, air cylinders and other equipment.
Self-relieving regulator is equipped with a 40 micron filter housed in a Service: Air only.
dripwell with gage port. Wetted Materials: Nitrile.
MODELS Max. Supply Pressure: 250 psig (1700 kPa).
MODEL Sensitivity: 1˝ (2.5 cm) of water.
RANGE
NO.
Valves

AFR1 0 to 10 psi (0 to 65 kPa) Consumption: <6 SCFH (0.17 m3/hr).

AFR2 0 to 30 psi (0 to 200 kPa)

Flow Capacity: 20 SCFM (33 m3/hr) @ 100 psig (700 kPa) sup-
ply.
AFR3 0 to 60 psi (0 to 400 kPa)
Exhaust Capacity: 0.1 SCFM (0.17m3/hr) with downstream pres-
AFR4 0 to 120 psi (0 to 800 kPa)
sure 5 psig (35 kPa) above set point.
AFR-BRKT Mounting Bracket Process Connection: 1/4˝ female NPT.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 440
p441 7/26/06 9:17 AM Page 1

Series
7R Temperature Controller
Low Cost, Choose Direct or Reverse Acting

3-1/4
3/4 NPT UNION HUB
[82.55]
Ø1/2
[12.70]

2
[50.80]
11
6-1/8 2-1/8
[279.40]
[155.58] [53.98]
16-1/2
7
[419.10]
[177.80]

Low Cost Series 7R Temperature Controller provides excellent SPECIFICATIONS

process control when combined with the Hi-Flow™ Pneumatic Control Supply Pressure: 20 psig (1.37 bar).
Valve. This rugged unit utilizes time-proven bi-metal technology and Temperature Range: 32 to 250°F (0 to 121°C).
can be installed in any position for application flexibility. The tamper Output: 3 to 15 psi (0.21 to 1.03 bar)
resistant knob assures reliable, continuous operation. Precision gages Wetted Materials: 304 SS.
provide accurate indication of supply pressure as it passes into the con- Process Connection: 3/4˝ male NPT union hub.
troller and outlet pressure into the pneumatic actuator. Air Connections: 1/8˝ female NPT.
Weight: 4.125 lb (1.87 kg)
Caution: Use of a supply gas other than air can create a hazardous environment because a small
amount of gas is continuously vented to atmosphere. Temperature Setpoint Scale: Arbitrary linear.
Standard Features: Pneumatic input and output gages.

MODELS Suggested Specification

MODEL NO. ACTION Temperature controller shall be installed for (direct)(reverse) acting ser-
7RD314 Direct
vice. Unit shall have adjustable tamper resistant knob. The outer stem shall
7RR314 Reverse be type 304 SS welded construction, 12 inches (30.5 cm) long. The inner
rod shall be constructed of invar nickel steel. Process connection shall be 3⁄4"
NPT. Controller shall be W.E. Anderson Model No. 7R(D)(R)314.

Model
EP1000 Electro-pneumatic Controller
Low Cost, Easy Installation, Weatherproof, Fully Programmable Controller

10.500
[266.7]
6.250
OUTPUT SUPPLY
[158.7]

1.625 [41.3]

8.500 [215.9]

Stop wasting time and money trying to find a suitable location to SPECIFICATIONS Repeatability: ±0.5% of span.
mount your controller and current to pressure transducer – The Model Front Panel Selectable Inputs: Power Requirements: 100 to 240
EP1000 Electro-pneumatic Controller combines the highest quality Thermocouple, RTD, DC voltage or VAC nominal, ±10%, 50 to 400 Hz.,
instrumentation in one compact NEMA 4X enclosure for easy, low cost DC current. single phase; 132 to 240 VDC,
installation. Simply provide a supply pressure and voltage with a stan- Input Impedance: ±10%.
dard thermocouple, RTD, DC voltage or DC current input to this unit Thermocouple – 3 Megohms min. Temperature Limits: 14 to 130°F
and a traditional pneumatic process quickly converts to a state-of-the-art Voltage – 5000 ohms. (–10 to 55°C).
electronic operation. The versatile microprocessor based controller Current – 10 ohms.
incorporates a high level of standard features. Typical function setup RTD Current – 200 µA max. Pressure Connections: 1/4˝ female
items appear in the control menu only when the function is selected, so NPT (supply and output).
you don’t have to wade through unnecessary items. Standard features Supply Pressure: 20 psig (1.4 Air Consumption: 0.1 scfm (.05 l/s)
include Self-Tune, Fuzzy Logic, fully adjustable PID and Auto/Manual kg/cm2) minimum, 100 psig (7.0
Valves

@ 100 psig.
control with bumpless transfer. Combine this versatile controller with kg/cm2) maximum.
Output Capacity: 4.0 scfm (1.9 l/s).
the Hi-Flow® Valve for excellent process operation in industries like food Output: 3-15 psig (.21-1.1 kg/cm2).
and beverage processing, pulp and paper, chemical and pharmaceutical. Enclosure: NEMA 4X.
Accuracy: ±1.0% of span.
Weight: 8 lb 2 oz (3.69 kg).
Model EP1000 Linearity: ±0.75% of span.
Hysteresis: ±0.5% of span.

441 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p442 7/26/06 9:18 AM Page 1

Series
IP Current to Pressure Transducer
Intrinsically Safe, NEMA 4X Enclosure, Field Reversible, Low Cost
2-3/16 SQ
[55.37]

1/2 NPT female

4-1/4
[107.70]

1-1/2
[38.10]

1-1/2
1-7/16 35/64 [38.10]
[36.58] [13.97]
1/4 NPT female

The Series IP Current to Pressure Transducer converts a SPECIFICATIONS

current input signal to a linearly proportional pneumatic output Service: Oil free, clean dry air filtered to 40 microns.
Input Signal: 4-20 mA.
pressure. The features include built-in volume booster, low air Input Impedance: IP-42: 180 ohms; IP-43 and IP-44: 220 ohms.
consumption, field reversible (provides output which is inversely Air Pressure: Minimum: 3 psig (21 kPa) above maximum output;
proportional to input signal) and flexible zero and span adjust- Maximum: 100 psig (700 kPa).
Linearity: <±0.75% of span.
ments. The rugged NEMA 4X enclosure allows splashdown and Hysteresis: <1% of span.
outdoor installation. The IP can be used for applications that re- Repeatability: <0.5% of span.
quire operation of valve actuators, pneumatic valve positioners, Supply Pressure Sensitivity: <±0.1% of span per psig (<±0.15% of span
damper and louver actuators, final control elements, relays, air per 10 kPa).
Power Requirements: Loop-powered.
cylinders, web tensioners, clutches and brakes. Temperature Limits: -20 to 140°F (-30 to 60°C).
Pressure Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
MODELS Electrical Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT.
Model Input Output Range Air Consumption: 0.03 SCFM (0.5 m3/h) typical.
Output Capacity: 4.5 SCFM (7.6 m3/h ANR) at 25 psig (175 kPa) supply;
Number Ranges psi kPa 12 SCFM (20 m3/h) at 100 psig (700 kPa) supply.
IP-42 4-20 mA 3-15 20-100 Relief Capacity: 2 SCFM (3.4 m3/h) at 5 psig (35 kPa) above 20 psig (140
IP-43 4-20 mA 3-27 20-185 kPa) setpoint.
IP-44 4-20 mA 6-30 40-200 Weight: 2.1 lb (0.94 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE, FM.

Series
EPT-1 Electro-pneumatic Transducer
Low Cost, Selectable Input, Manual Override
3-1/4
(82.55) 1/8
1/4 (3.17)
(6.35) 2-1/4
(57.15) TYP 3 PLCS

3-1/4
(82.55)
2-3/4
(68.80)

1/2 3-5/16
1/4 (12.70) (84.14)
(7.40) 1-5/8
(41.28)

The Series EPT-1 incorporates a quiet low-wattage poppet valve and pressure SPECIFICATIONS Current Consumption: 150 mA.
sensor to measure and adjust the branch line pressure proportional to the input. Service: Clean dry air or any inert Temperature Limits: 25 to 150°F
This unit has no air consumption and is immune to mounting orientation and sup- gas. (4 to 65°C).
ply line pressure fluctuations. The EPT-1M1 and EPT-1M2 incorporate a manu- Input Signal: DC Current (4-20 mA) Thermal Effect: ±0.025%/°F
al override switch, and in the manual mode, the pressure can be increased or or DC Voltage (0-5/0-10). (0.03%/°C).
decreased with two pushbutton switches. This feature is most desirable for check
Input Impedance: Pressure Connections: 1/4˝ O.D.
out/commissioning and manual operation in case of controller failure. Universal
Current - 301 ohms. plastic tubing.
24 VAC/24 VDC supply voltage and field selectable 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5 VDC, or 0
to 10 VDC inputs ensure single unit compatibility with most systems. The unique Voltage - 10K ohms. Electrical Connections: Screw ter-
steel chassis design substantially reduces the overall size of the unit and, at the Air Supply: 40 psig (276 kPa) maxi- minals.
same time, provides for ease of installation in a control panel directly or with a mum. Wire Size: 12 Ga max.
snap track. A precision gage is provided for the branch line pressure. A rugged Accuracy: ±1% F.S. (includes lineari- Enclosure: 18 Ga C.R. steel chas-
aluminum manifold, brass barb fittings, floating poppet solenoid valve, silicon ty, hysteresis and repeatability). sis with baked on enamel-
Valves

pressure sensor, and high performance electronics are some of the features which Pressure Drop: (Supply to branch) PMS2GR88B finish.
make the Series EPT-1 the most reliable electro-pneumatic transducer in the 0.1 psig (0.7 kPa). Weight: 1.0 lb (0.45 kg).
industry.
Power Requirement: 18-28
MODELS VAC/VDC.
Model Output Range Manual Model Output Range Manual
Number psig (kPa) Override Number psig (kPa) Override
EPT-11 3-15 (20-100) No EPT-12 0-20 (0-138) No
EPT-1M1 3-15 (20-100) Yes EPT-1M2 0-20 (0-138) Yes

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 442
p443 7/26/06 9:25 AM Page 1

Series
2700 &
2800
Current to Pressure Transducer
NEMA 4X Enclosure, Compact Size, Reliable, Vibration Resistant ®

39/64
(15.5)

1-11/16
(42.7) DIN RAIL MOUNTING
OPTION
1 MOUNTING HOLES 22 GA. WIRE LEADS
(25.4) #10-32 UNF-2B x 3/8 DP APPROX. 18˝ LONG 3-23/64
2 PLCS POS, NEG, GRD (85.3)
1/2 5/16 2-15/16 2-1/4
(12.7) (7.92) (74.7) 1-1/2 (57.2) ø1-1/8
(38.1) (ø28.7)
1/2 NPT
3-11/16
(93.7)
ø1/8
(ø3.17) 3-1/8 IN & OUT PORTS
(79.2) 1/4-18 NPT
1-51/64 4 PLCS
(45.7)
1-1/2 2-3/16 25/64
(38.1) 1-19.64 (55.4) (9.72) 49/64
(33.0) 33/64
(13.1) (19.4)
PIPE CLAMP MOUNTING OPTION
FOR 1-1/2 PIPE

The Series 2700 Current to Pressure Transducer combines economical SPECIFICATIONS Temperature Limits: Series
startup cost, low air consumption, and reliable performance to make the 2700 a Service: Oil free, clean dry air 2700: -20 to 150°F (-29 to
great investment. The unit converts a variable current signal to a proportional filtered to 40 microns. 66°C); Series 2800: Operating:
pneumatic output. It has input and output ports on both the front and back which
allows for versatile plumbing. The NEMA 4X enclosure enables the unit to be in- Input Signal: 4-20 mA. -40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C);
stalled indoors or outdoors, however, the unit is not vibration resistant. It is FM Air Supply: Minimum: 5 psig Storage: -40 to 200°F (-40 to
and CSA approved for intrinsically safe operation. The 2700 is designed for re- (0.3 bar) above maximum 93°C).
mote or panel mounting. An integral volume booster provides high flow capaci- output; Maximum: 100 psig (6.9 Pressure Connections: 1/4˝
ty, increasing control speed in critical applications. Other features include
external zero and span adjustments which are convenient for field calibration. bar). female NPT.
Output: 3 to 15 psig (0.2 to 1.0 Electrical Connection: 1/2˝
The Series 2800 Current to Pressure Transducer utilizes a closed loop bar), 6 to 30 psig (0.4 to 2.1 female NPT.
pressure feedback system that closely controls output and compensates for vi- bar). Air Consumption: Series
bration, mounting angle, temperature, and supply pressure variations. These
characteristics make this unit ideal for field mounting on a valve. The control Accuracy: Series 2800: ±0.1% 2700: 0.03 scfm (0.01 l/s) at
mechanism is a piezoceramic actuator encapsulated in a protective skin, which of span. midrange typical; Series 2800:
provides a constant defense against humidity and contaminants. These features Linearity: Series 2700: 0.025 scfm (0.01 l/s) at
make this unit ideal for use in demanding applications. The 2800 also comes in <±0.5% of span. midrange typical.
a NEMA 4X enclosure and is field reversible. It is FM and CSA approved in-
trinsically safe, as well. For ease of installation, this model has input and output Hysteresis: Series 2700: Output Capacity: 4.5 scfm
ports on both the front and back and can be easily panel mounted. <0.5% of span; Series 2800: (2.1 l/s) at 25 psig (1.7 bar) sup-
±0.1% of span. ply; 12.0 scfm (5.7 l/s) at 100
Repeatability: Series 2700: psig (6.9 bar) supply.
SERIES 2700 MODELS <0.5% of span; Series 2800: Enclosure: Chromate-treated
±0.1% of span. aluminum with epoxy paint.
Model Number Input Output Deadband: Series 2800: Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X
2713-WP 4-20 mA 3-15 psig (0.2-1.0 bar) 0.02% of span. (IP65) and intrinsically safe.
2716-WP 4-20 mA 6-30 psig (0.4-2.1 bar) Supply Pressure Sensitivity: Weight: Series 2700: 1.3 lb
Series 2700: <0.1% of span per (0.59 kg); Series 2800: 0.8 lb
1.0 psig (0.1 bar). (0.37 kg).
SERIES 2800 MODELS Power Requirement: Loop Agency Approvals: CE, CSA,
powered. FM.
Model Number Input Output
2813-WP 4-20 mA 3-15 psig (0.2-1.0 bar)
2816-WP 4-20 mA 6-30 psig (0.4-2.1 bar)
SERIES 2700
FM Intrinsically Safe Ratings:
Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups C, D, E, F and G; Class I, Division 2,
Groups A, B, C and D; Class II and III, Division 2, Groups F and G.
ACCESSORIES
A-180 Valve Mounting Kit, for Hi-FlowTM control valves CSA Intrinsically Safe Ratings: Class I, Division 2, Groups C and D;
(Series 2800 only) Class II, Groups E, F and G; Class III.
Valves

A-181 DIN Rail Mounting Kit, suitable for EN-50035,

EN-50042, and EN-50022 rails
SERIES 2800
A-182 Pipe Mounting Kit, for 1-1/2 and 2˝ pipes FM Intrinsically Safe Ratings:
Class I, II, and III, Division 1, Groups C, D, E, F, and G; Class I, Zone 0, Group
Valve Mount: For factory mounting and calibration to Hi-FlowTM IIB; Class I, II, and III, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D, F, and G.
control valves, add Current-to-Pressure Transducer model
number as suffix (Series 2800 only) CSA Intrinsically Safe Ratings:
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D; Class II, Division 2, Groups F and
G; Class III.

443 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p444 7/26/06 9:19 AM Page 1

Series
2900 Current to Pressure Transducer
Intrinsically Safe, Explosion-Proof, NEMA 4X Enclosure ®

Ø3-1/2
(Ø88.9) 4 #10-32-UNF
TAPPED HOLES FOR 1/2 NPT PORT FOR
1 CONDUIT PIPING
MOUNTING
(25.4)

4-19/32
(116.6)
27/32
(21.3)

2-1/2 IN & OUT 2-5/64

(63.5) PORTS 1/4-18 NPT (52.6)
4 PLACES

57/64 49/64 33/64

(22.4) (19.4) (13.1)
2-3/16 1-1/2
(55.6) (38.1)

The Series 2900 Current to Pressure Transducer delivers reli- SPECIFICATIONS

able high performance for the toughest applications in the most haz- Service: Oil free, clean dry air filtered to 40 microns.
ardous environments. Its NEMA 4X housing is designed and FM and Input Signal: 4-20 mA.
CSA approved for both Intrinsically Safe and Explosion-proof opera-
tion. This unit has advanced circuitry which includes electronic feed- Air Supply: Minimum: 5 psig (0.3 bar) above maximum output;
back control for superior vibration protection and highly accurate Maximum: 100 psig (6.9 bar).
output. The 2900 is not position sensitive and the easily accessible zero Output: 3 to 15 psig (0.2 to 1.0 bar), 6 to 30 psig (0.4 to 2.1 bar).
and span adjustments make field calibration quick and easy. For ease Accuracy: ±0.1% of span.
of installation, this model has input and output ports on both the front Hysteresis: ±0.1% of span.
and back. It is also not vibration sensitive, which makes the 2900 ideal
for field mounting on a valve. These features coupled with the unit’s Repeatability: ±0.1% of span.
compact size help make set-up and installation simple. Deadband: 0.02% of span.
Power Requirement: Loop powered.
FEATURES Temperature Limits: Operating: -40 to 160°F (-40 to 71°C);
• Designed for Hazardous Environments Storage: -40 to 200°F (-40 to 93°C).
• Vibration Resistant Pressure Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
Electrical Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT.
• Explosion-Proof
Air Consumption: 0.05 scfm (0.02 l/s) at midrange typical.
• Weatherproof and Intrinsically Safe
Output Capacity: 4.5 scfm (2.1 l/s) at 25 psig (1.7 bar) supply;
12.0 scfm (5.7 l/s) at 100 psig (6.9 bar) supply.
Enclosure: Chromate-treated aluminum with epoxy paint.
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof NEMA 4X (IP65), Explosion-
MODELS proof and intrinsically safe.
Model Number Input Output Weight: 1.8 lb (0.82 kg).
2913-E 4-20 mA 3-15 psig (0.2-1.0 bar) Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, FM.
2916-E 4-20 mA 6-30 psig (0.4-2.1 bar)
FM Ratings:
ACCESSORIES Explosion-proof for Class I Division 1, Groups B, C, and D. T6,
A-180 Valve Mounting Kit, for Hi-FlowTM control valves Dust Ignitionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G, T6;
Intrinsically safe for Class I, II, and III, Division 1, Groups C, D, E, F,
Valve Mount: For factory mounting and calibration to Hi-FlowTM
control valves, add Current-to-Pressure Transducer model and G, T4 hazardous (classified) locations and intrinsically safe for
number as suffix Class I, Zone 0, Group IIB, T4 hazardous (classified) locations and
suitable for Class I, Groups A, B, C, D, T4, and Class II and III,
Valves

Division 2, Groups F and G, T6 hazardous (classified) locations.

CSA Ratings:
Class I Division 1, Groups B, C, and D; Class I, Division 2, Groups
A, B, C and D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G; Class II
and III, Division 2, Groups F and G.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 444
pg445 7/26/06 9:20 AM Page 1

Series ®
165 PRECISOR II Pneumatic and
Electro-Pneumatic Positioners
Low Cost, Linear Operation, Field Selectable Cam Design
Series 165EL 4-41/64
(117.87)
6-43/64
(169.47) 1-25/32 M8X 1.25P 3-5/8
M8X 1.25P 4 PLCS (92.08)
(45.24)

1-31/32
(50.01) 2-49/64
(70.25)

6-9/16
(166.69)

3-9/32
Series 165NL (83.34)

7-1/4 7/8
(22.23) 2-3/8
(184.15) (60.33)
13/32
(10.32)

2-9/16
1-37/64 2-3/8 (65.09) 2-49/64
(40.08) (60.33) (70.25)

6-33/64
(165.50)
(4) M8X 1.25P
(8) M8X 1.25P

3-39/64
(91.68)

The Series 165 PRECISOR® II Pneumatic and Electro-Pneumatic SPECIFICATIONS

Positioners deliver stable process control at an exceptionally low price. Input Signal: Pneumatic: 3 to 15 psig (0.2 to 1 bar).
Electro-Pneumatic: 4-20 mA DC.
Its rugged, durable design makes it ideal for harsh environments while Input Impedance: (165EL only): 250 ±15 Ohm.
maintaining precise, accurate positioning of the control element. Units Material: Aluminum diecasting.
can be easily changed from direct to reverse action, or vice versa. Low Air Supply: 20 to 100 psig (1.4 to 6.9 bar).
Air Supply Connection: 1/4˝ NPT.
air consumption keeps operating costs at a minimum, while still respond-
Gage Connection: 1/8˝ NPT.
ing quickly and accurately. Excellent for use in chemical processing, food Electrical Connection: Screw terminal.
and beverage, pulp and paper, and pharmaceutical industries, as well as Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ NPT (165EL only).
many others. Linearity: ±0.2% of full scale.
Hysteresis: 1% of full scale.
Sensitivity: ±0.2% of full scale.
Repeatability: ±0.5% of full scale.
MODELS Air Consumption: 0.10 scfm (3 LPM) at 20 psig (1.4 bar) supply.
Model No. Input Flow Capacity: 28 scfm (80 LPM) at 20 psig (1.4 bar) supply.
165NL 3-15 psig Stroke: 0.5 to 6˝ (10 to 150 mm).
165EL 4-20 mA Enclosure Rating: IP66.
Operating Temperature: -4 to 160°F (-20 to 70°C).
Weight: 165NL: 3.1 lb (1.7 kg).
How To Order: 165EL: 6.1 lb (2.7 kg).
1. Select Model No. to specify input control signal
2. For proper mounting hardware, order according to which actuator Agency Approvals: CE (165EL only).
the positioner will be mounted to:
APPLICATIONS
Series 165 PRECISOR® II Pneumatic and Electro-Pneumatic Positioners provide
Mounting Kits excellent modulating control when used between the Dwyer Temperature Con-
Model Number For Actuator Models trollers, Current to Pressure Transducer and the Hi-Flow™ Valve in such industries
A-233 220 and 221 Air-to-Lower as the food and beverage processing, chemical, pharmaceutical, and wood pulp and
paper.
A-234 222 and 223 Air-to-Lower
Valves

A-235 230 and 231 Air-to-Raise

Suggested Specifications
A-236 233 Air-to-Raise
Pneumatic and Electro-Pneumatic Positioners shall be cam characterized,
with 0.5% full scale repeatability. The unit shall accept an input of 3-15 psig
Valve Mount: For factory mounting and calibration to Hi-Flow™ or 4-20 mA with capability of field-selectable modes of direct or reverse op-
control valves, add the position model number as a suffix to the eration. Supply pressure shall be capable of 100 psig maximum. Unit shall
valve part number. Example: 2004VA32-231-165NL be W.E. Anderson® Positioner Series 165.

445 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg446 7/26/06 9:38 AM Page 1

®
Series
265 PRECISOR II Pneumatic and
Electro-Pneumatic Positioners
Low Cost, Rotary Operation, Field Selectable Cam Design
63/64
Series 265NR [25.00]
7-1/4 3-9/32 2-3/8
[184.15] [83.34] 13/32 [60.33]
[10.32]

2-9/16
1-37/64 2-3/8 [65.09]
2-49/64
[40.08] [60.33]
6-33/64 [70.25]
[165.50]

(4) M8X1.25P
(8) M8X1.25P

3-39/97
[91.68]

Series 265ER 4-15/32

(113.51)
M8X 1.25P
6-43/64 3-5/8
(169.47) 1-25/32 M8X 1.25P
(45.24) 4 PLCS (92.08)

1-31/32
(50.01) 2-49/64
6-9/16 (70.25)
(166.69)

W.E. Anderson Series 265 PRECISOR® II Pneumatic and Electro- SPECIFICATIONS

Pneumatic Positioners combine outstanding performance with an Input Signal: Pneumatic: 3 to 15 psig (0.2 to 1 bar).
extremely low price, making it an exceptional value for industrial appli- Electro-Pneumatic: 4-20 mA DC.
cations. Rotary valves with single or double acting pneumatic actuators Input Impedance: (265ER only): 250 ±15 Ohm.
can be precisely controlled, such as our ball and butterfly valves. The Material: Aluminum diecasting.
PRECISOR® II positioner proportionally modulates the valve from either Air Supply: 20 to 100 psig (1.4 to 6.9 bar).
an electric 4-20 mA or pneumatic 3-15 psig input signal, based on the Air Supply Connection: 1/4˝ NPT.
model chosen. Its rugged, durable design makes it ideal for use in harsh Gage Connection: 1/8˝ NPT.
environments, while maintaining precise, accurate positioning of the con- Electrical Connection: Screw terminal.
trol elements. Includes a bracket for mounting onto actuators with Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ NPT (265ER only).
NAMUR standard connections, and features a versatile linear cam for Linearity: ±2% of full scale.
direct action, reverse action, or split ranges. An excellent choice when Hysteresis: 1% of full scale.
used in the chemical processing, food and beverage, pulp and paper, and Sensitivity: ±0.5% of full scale.
pharmaceutical industries. Consult factory for other lever types. Repeatability: ±0.5% of full scale.
Air Consumption: 0.10 scfm (3 LPM) at 20 psig (1.4 bar) supply.
Flow Capacity: 28 scfm (80 LPM) at 20 psig (1.4 bar) supply.
MODELS
Stroke: 0 to 90°.
Model No. Input Lever Type Action
265ER-S5 4-20 mA NAMUR Single Enclosure Rating: IP66.
265ER-D5 4-20 mA NAMUR Double Operating Temperature: -4 to 160°F (-20 to 70°C).
265NR-S5 3-15 psig NAMUR Single Weight: 265NR: 3.1 lb (1.7 kg).
265NR-D5 3-15 psig NAMUR Double 265ER: 6.2 lb (2.8 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE (265ER only).

Pneumatic Hosing and Fittings

Hosing and fittings for connecting positioners, current to pressure
transducers, air filter gauges and other accessories to pneumatic actu-
Valves

ated valves.
MODELS
MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION
A-228 Stainless steel flex hose, 12˝ (30.48 cm) long,
1/8˝ male NPT connections
A-229 Stainless steel flex hose, 18˝ (45.72 cm) long,
1/8˝ male NPT connections
A-332 Brass adapter, 1/8˝ female NPT to 1/4˝ male NPT

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 446
pg447 7/26/06 4:12 PM Page 1

®
Series
QV QUICK-VIEW Valve Position Indicator/Switch
Ultra-Low Cost, Compact, Backlit, Corrosion Resistant ®

3 [76.20] CLEARANCE REQUIRED FOR COVER REMOVAL

4-15/32
[113.5]
1/2
[12.70]

1/4 DIA. [6.350] CONDUIT

ENTRANCE
5/16 SHAFT LEVER
DRIVE ONLY 3/4 NPT
[7.938] 1/8 DIA. PINS (2) 2 MTG HOLES
1/4-20 UNC
7/16 DP [11.11]

A DWYER INSTRUMENTS COMPANY

FERGUS FALLS, MN 56537
®
1-1/2

MADE IN THE U.S.A.

4-3/4
[120.7] [38.10]

1/4
6-32 UNC 1/4 [6.350]
1/4 DP [6.350] [6.350] 2-3/8
[60.33]
3-1/16 85-700436-00

[77.79]

FEATURES AND BENEFITS SPECIFICATIONS

Minimum Rotation Travel – Switches only: 5°.
The QUICK-VIEW® Rotary Valve Position Indicators, now UL Maximum Rotation Travel – Switches only: 360°.
and CSA rated, are produced by Proximity with up to four indi- Temperature Limits: –40 to 180°F (–40 to 82°C).
vidual mechanical or proximity switches. The QUICK-VIEW® Switch Type: SPDT.
indicator is also available with optional backlighting. Benefits Electrical SPDT Switch Ratings:
QV-X1XXXX: 10A @ 125/250 VAC; 0.5A 125 VDC;
include: 10A @ 24 VDC mech. switch.
• The lowest cost position indication. QV-X2XXXX: 1A @ 125 VAC; 1A @ 24 VDC mech. switch.
• Extremely compact design. QV-X3XXXX: 2A @ 125 VAC; 2A @ 30 VDC prox. switch.
• Easily interchangeable with key competition. QV-X4XXXX: 5-25 VDC NAMUR sensor.
• Backlighting option available for maximum visibility. QV-X5XXXX: 10-30 VDC INDUCTIVE sensor.
QV-X6XXXX: 10A 125/250 VAC mech. switch.
• QUICK-VIEW® Indicator and mounting kits, including Lighting Supply Voltage: 24-28 VDC.
NAMUR kits, are stocked for fast delivery. Enclosure Material: Polycarbonate housing and conduit.
• Flame retardant. Conduit Entrance: One 3/4˝ NPT.
• UV protection. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4, 4X. Optional explosion-proof, rated:
Class I, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Groups F & G; Div. 2.
• Hazardous location option. Maximum Altitude: 2000 m (6560 ft).
APPLICATIONS QUICK-VIEW® COMPLETE MODEL CHART
The QV Series Proximity Position Indicators are designed for QV Model Number Prefix
1st Code (1st X) Number of Switches
maximum reliability in general purpose and corrosive environ- 0 None+
ments. Intrinsic safety and general purpose applications 1 One Switch+
2 Two Switches+
include: rotary and linear valves, actuators, manual valves, 3 Three Switches+
gear operators and positioners. 4 Four Switches+
2nd Code (2nd X) Switch Type
0 No Switches+
Consult factory for optional VI colors. 1 10A Mechanical Snap Switch
2 0.1A Mechanical Gold Contacts
3 2A Proximity Reed Switch+
4 5-25 VDC Namur Sensor
MODELS 5 10-30 VDC Inductive Sensor
Model Number Backlighting 6 10A Mechanical Snap Switch
QV-210101 No 3rd Code (3rd X)
0
QV-210111 Yes 4th Code (4th X) Driving Style
1 Direct Drive+
2 Lever Drive+
Note: Stocked position indicators include two 10 amp SPDT mechanical snap switches, 3 Namur Drive+
5th Code (5th X) Lighting Option
are direct drive type and include the standard quarter-turn OPEN/CLOSED visual indica- 0 None+
tor. Standard units are CSA & UL approved but not for hazardous locations. Specify 1 28 VDC Lights
6th Code (6th X) Visual Indication
Valves

“EX” for hazardous location option. 0 None

1 Standard (Open Closed)+
2 Upside Down (Open Closed)+
7th Code (7th X) Additonal Options
EX Class I, Div. II, Groups A, B, C & D.
Class II, Div. II Groups F & G.
QV 2 1 0 1 0 1 - Example Popular Model Number
+ EX, Explosion-proof option available.
Note: The 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 6th codes can not all be zero.

447 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg448 7/26/06 9:39 AM Page 1

Mark
Series Position Indicators/Switches/Transmitters

Certified Product
®
® Australian
Standard

The Proximity Mark Series is a line of position indicators with a selection of various
output options. Four model styles make up the Mark series to cover almost any appli-
Mark 1 – cation. Standard models in the Mark Series have visual position indicators and are
Polyester Coated weatherproof, explosion-proof, and submersible. A large variety of outputs are avail-
Aluminum able to fit specific applications. There is a choice of 1 to 6 switch outputs of 16 vari-
eties including inductive sensors, high temperature switches, gold contact switches,
hermetically sealed switches, and high current switches. Besides the switch outputs
the Series offers potentiometer outputs and 4 to 20 mA transmitters. The units are
purchased for either direct drive applications, such as rotary valves, or lever drive
applications, such as linear valves. Adjustable visual indicator is standard on direct
drive units that displays OPEN / CLOSED status and degrees.

A patented magnetic drive that completely seals the switch compartment from the
Mark 1 – atmosphere for maximum leak protection is utilized in the Mark 1. The Mark 3 uses
Stainless Steel the same magnetic drive of the Mark 1, but it can be used for multi-turn applications
with 1 to 25 revolutions, such as gate valves. A through shaft drive is incorporated in
the Mark 4 making the unit a lower cost alternative to the Mark 1 for applications that
are not as demanding. Also featured in the Mark 6 is a patented magnetic design that
completely seals the switch cavity. The Mark 6 offers hermetically sealed reed switch-
Environmentally sealed for corrosive areas. es that are perfect for high cycle rate applications and low current uses such as com-
puter and PLC control systems.

Mark 1
• Features a patented magnetic coupling that isolates the switch compartment,
completely sealing the unit from the surrounding atmosphere for maximum haz-
ard and leak protection.
• EZset cams on switch models provide simple set point adjustment.
• Flexible design allows multiple switches and transmitter options.
• Ideal for corrosive environments.
Mark 1 – Magnetic Coupling
Cutaway Model 12VDOJ2

Mark 3
• Features a patented magnetic coupling that isolates the switch compartment,
completely sealing the unit from the surrounding atmosphere for maximum haz-
ard and leak protection.
• Multi-Turn models that can provide switch signals between 1 and 25 revolutions,
and transmitter models for up to 10 revolutions without gear reduction.
• Flexible design allows multiple switches and transmitter options.
• Ideal for corrosive environments.
Mark 3 – Multi Turn

Mark 4
Valves

• Thru-Shaft design that features a 1˝ bushing for long life and O-rings to seal the
switch compartment for hazard, corrosion, and leak protection.
• EZset cams on switch models provide simple set point adjustment.
• Flexible design allows multiple switches and transmitter options.
• A lower cost alternative to the Mark 1 Series for less demanding applications.

Mark 4 Thru-Shaft
Cutaway Model 42RDOJ2

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 448
p449 7/26/06 9:40 AM Page 1

Mark
Series Position Indicators/Switches/Transmitters
Available Options “A”
signifies available with
1 Mark 1, Magnetic Coupling corresponding
construction style.
Construction 3 Mark 3, Multi-Turn Mark
4 Mark 4, Thru-Shaft
6 Mark 6, Protected Reed Switch 1 3 4 6
1 1 Switch A - A A
2 2 Switches A A A A
3 Potentiometer, 1K Ohm. Available with Switch Types* B, C, I, O, R, S, V, W. A A A -
32 Potentiometer, 2K Ohm. Available with Switch Types* B, C, I, O, R, S, V, W. A A A -
35 Potentiometer, 5K Ohm. Available with Switch Types* B, C, I, O, R, S, V, W. A A A -
Output 310 Potentiometer, 10K Ohm. Available with Switch Types* B, C, I, O, R, S, V, W. A A -
A
Type 320 Potentiometer, 20K Ohm. Available with Switch Types* B, C, I, O, R, S, V, W. A A A -
4 4 Switches A A A -
5 Transmitter, 4 to 20mA. Available with Switch Types* B, C, I, O, R, S, V, W. A A A -
6 6 Switches. Available with Switch Types B, C, I, R, V, W. A A A -
7 AS-interface and 1 Switch. Available with Switch Types B, I, R, W. A - A -
8 AS-interface and 2 Switches. Available with Switch Types B, I, R, W. A - A -
O No Switches A A A -
A SPDT Snap, Rated: 15A @ 125/250/480 VAC (~); 1/8 hp @ 125 VAC (~), A A A -
1/4 hp @ 250 VAC (~), 1/2A @ 125 VDC ( ), 1/4A @ 250 VDC ( ).
B Inductive Sensor. 10 to 30 VDC ( ). Load: 0.1A. A - A -
C SPDT High Temperature Snap, 350°F (176°C) for 600 hours, Rated: A A A -
15.1A @ 125/250/277 VAC (~).
D DPDT Snap, Rated: 10A @ 125/250 VAC (~), 0.3A @ 125 VDC ( ), 0.15A @ 250 VDC ( ). A - A -
G SPDT Gold Contact Snap, Rated: 1A @ 125 VAC (~). A A A -
H SPDT Hermetically Sealed Snap, Rated: 1A @ 125 VAC (~). A - A -
I NAMUR Inductive Sensor. 15 mA max @ 5-25 VDC ( ). A - A -
L SPST Hermetically Sealed Reed with LED, Rated: 0.02A @ 125 VAC (~). - - - A
Switch A A -
M SPDT Magnetic Blow-Out, Rated: 10A @ 125 VAC (~)/VDC ( ), 1/4 hp @ 125 VAC (~)/VDC ( ). A
Type P SPST Hermetically Sealed Reed, Rated: 0.15A @ 125 VAC (~), 0.15A @ - - - A
& 30 VDC ( ); 125 VAC (~) 10W (Lamp).
Rating Q SPDT Hermetically Sealed Reed, Rated: 0.15A @ 125 VAC (~), 0.15A @ 30 VDC ( ). - - - A
R SPDT Hermetically Sealed Reed, Rated: 2A @ 125 VAC (~), 2A @ 24 VDC ( ). A - A -
S SPDT Snap, Rated: 4A @ 125/250 VAC (~). A - A -
T SPDT High Temperature Snap, 250°F (121°C) Continuous, Rated: 5A @ 125/250/480 VAC (~). A A A -
V SPDT Snap, Rated: 11A @ 125/250 VAC (~), 1/3 hp @ 125/250 VAC (~), A A A -
1/2A @ 125 VDC ( ), 1/4A @ 250 VDC ( ), 4A @ 125 VAC (~) (tungsten).
W SPDT Gold Contact Snap, Rated 0.1A @ 125 VAC (~). A A A -

D A A A A
Driving Direct Drive (Yoke) with Stainless Steel Visual Indicator. A A A
L A
Method Lever Drive (Shaft), No Visual Indicator.
0 Aluminum, Painted Black (other colors available, consult factory) A A A A
1 Aluminum, Painted White Epoxy with SS trim A A A A
6 Cast 316 Stainless Steel A A A -

Enclosure

J1 Junction Package with One 1/2˝ NPT Female Conduit Connection and Terminal Strip. A A A A
J2 Junction Package with Two 1/2˝ NPT Female Conduit Connection and Terminal Strip. A A A A
S SAA Listed Flameproof A A A A
SV1 1 Attached Solenoid Valve (Must be ordered with J1 option). A - A -
SV2 2 Attached Solenoid Valves (Must be ordered with J2 option). A - A -
Enclosure MT Metric Threaded Conduit Connection, M25 (M20 for optional J1 and J2 connections). A A A A
Options B Directive 94/9/EC, KEMA 03 ATEX 2391, II 2 G EEx d IIC T6 (-20°C ≤ Tamb ≤ 70°C) A A A A
(T5 (-20°C ≤ Tamb ≤ 80°C) optional wording).
IS Directive 94/9/EC, KEMA 03 ATEX 1392 x, II 1 G EEx ia IIC T4 (-20°C ≤ Tamb ≤ 40°C). A A A -
Valves

* Mark 1 and 4 potentiometer and transmitter outputs will have no switches when ordered with switch type O; 2 switches if ordered with switch types B,
C, I, R, V, or W; and 4 switches if ordered with switch type S. Mark 3 potentiometer and transmitter outputs will have no switches when ordered with
switch type O, and 2 switches if ordered with switch types A, D, G, or M.

449 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p450 7/26/06 9:42 AM Page 1

Mark
Series Position Indicators/Switches/Transmitters
Mounting kits with drive yoke (see drawing), or slotted lever arm, bracket, fasteners and other zinc plated or stainless
steel hardware fit over 2000 popular valves and actuators. A high strength spring tempered stainless steel drive yoke/cou-
SWITCH pling is tailored to fit securely to a specific valve or actuator stem. There is no slippage or binding. No special alignment fix-
tures are required due to switch offset design and yoke to stem engagement that makes installation a “snap”. Each kit is
VISUAL INDICATOR specially designed for a particular valve or actuator, making field mounting simple with standard tools. Please specify make
and model of valve or actuator on order.
DRIVE YOKE
Mounting kits can be used interchangeably with all models since external mounting features are identical. Rotary valves uti-
MOUNTING KIT lize direct drive couplings and a slotted lever drive is used with linear valves. Lever drives convert linear motion to rotary.
Stainless steel visual indicators are standard for direct drive, automated quarter-turn valve applications.
Mounting Kits Plated Steel Stainless Steel
1/4 Turn Actuator
Manual 1/4 Turn Valves
Linear Control Valves
MODELS
MODEL HOUSING
NUMBER FUNCTION DESIGN MATERIAL LISTINGS
12ADO 2 SPDT Magnetic Painted UL, CSA,
CLEARANCE REQUIRED 12ALO 2 SPDT (lever drive) Coupling Aluminum ATEX,
FOR COVER REMOVAL
LEVER DRIVE
1-1/16 14ADO 4 SPDT SAA
(26.99)
15VDO 2 SPDT & 4-20 mA
Position Transmitter
12AD1 2 SPDT Epoxy
14AD1 4 SPDT Coated
Aluminum
12VDO-J1 2 SPDT Painted UL, CSA,
14VDO-J1 4 SPDT Aluminum ATEX,
with Junction SAA
Package
42ADO 2 SPDT Thru-Shaft Painted
UL, CSA,
44ADO 4 SPDT Drive Aluminum ATEX,
45VDO 2 SPDT & 4-20 mA SAA
Position Transmitter
42VDO-J1 2 SPDT Painted UL, CSA,
44VDO-J1 4 SPDT Aluminum ATEX,
with Junction SAA
Package
Painted
61PDO 1 SPST Magnetically Aluminum
62PDO 2 SPST Actuated UL, CSA,
Epoxy
61PD1 1 SPST Protected Reed ATEX,
Coated
62PD1 2 SPST Switches SAA
Aluminum
Anodized
UL, CSA,
61PDO-J1 1 SPST Aluminum
62PDO-J1 2 SPST with Junction ATEX,
Package SAA

SPECIFICATIONS Switch Type: See model chart on previous page.

General Electrical Rating: See model chart on previous page.
Product Ratings: Set Point Adjustment: Mark 1 and 4: 5 to 360°. Mark 3: 1 to 25 revolutions. Mark
Weatherproof and flameproof. NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 7, 9, 12, 13. 6: 45 to 180°.

UL rated: Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D (Some units available for Group A, con- Mark 1, 3, and 4 with Potentiometer
sult factory); Class II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, and G. Accuracy: ± 0.5% of full span. Optional ± 0.25% of full span.
Temperature Limits: -40 to 180°F (-40 to 82°C).(ATEX flameproof, -B suffix, rated -
CSA rated: Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, 20°C (-4°F) to 80°C (176°F); ATEX intrinsically safe, -IS suffix, rated -20°C (-4°F) to
and G; Submersible to 50 feet. 40°C (104°F)).
SAA rated: -S suffix, Certified Ex d IIC T6 IP68 (15 meters). Power Rating: 1.5 Watt maximum.
Output Signal: 1000 Ohm standard. Optional 2000, 5000, 10000, or 20000 Ohms.
ATEX Compliant: -B suffix, directive 94/9/EC, Zero and Span Adjustments: Span trim pot with 2000 Ohm adjustment. No zero
KEMA 03 ATEX 2391, II 2 G EEx d IIC T6 for -20°C ≤ Tamb ≤ 70°C adjustment.
and T5 for -20°C ≤ Tamb ≤ 80°C optional wording. Rotational Travel: Mark 1 and 4: Minimum: 0°, Maximum: 340°. Mark 3: 0 to 10
–IS suffix directive 94/9/EC revolutions.
KEMA 03 ATEX 1392X, II 1 G EEx ia IIC T4. -20°C ≤ Tamb ≤ 40°C.
(Switch type C is not available with ATEX; Switch type B is not available with ATEX Mark 1, 3, and 4 with Transmitter
intrinsically safe, -IS suffix). Accuracy: ± 0.5% of full span. Optional ± 0.25% of full span.
Temperature Limits: -40 to 180°F (-40 to 82°C). (ATEX flameproof, -B suffix, rated -
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal. Optional factory sealed leads that are 36˝ 20°C (-4°F) to 80°C (176°F); ATEX intrinsically safe, -IS suffix, rated -20°C (-4°F) to
(914.4 mm) of 18 AWG. 40°C (104°F)).
Conduit Connection: 3/4˝ female NPT standard. Optional one or two 1/2” female Power Requirements: 5 to 30 VDC.
NPT. M25 and M20 optional (Standard on SAA certified products). Current Consumption: 50 mA.
Valves

Mounting Orientation: Not position sensitive. Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA.

Weight: 4 to 6 lb (1.5 to 3.0 kg). Zero and Span Adjustments: Trim pots for adjusting both. Mark 1 and 4: Span is
Operational Life: over 10,000,000 cycles. adjustable from 50 to 300°. Mark 3: Span is adjustable from 1.5 to 8.5 revolutions.
Maximum Altitude: 2000 meters. Conduit Connection: 3/4” female NPT standard. Optional one or two 1/2” female
Patents: US 4214133, 4647733, 4831350, 5357067, and other patents pending. NPT. M25 and M20 optional (Standard on SAA models).
Rotational Travel: Mark 1 and 4: Minimum: 50°, Maximum: 300°. Mark 3: Minimum:
Mark 1, 3, 4, and 6 with Switch Outputs 1.5 revolutions, Maximum: 8.5 revolutions.
Temperature Limits: -65 to 180°F (-54 to 82°C). Switch Type C rated to 350°F
(176°C) for 600 hours, Switch Type T rated to 250°F (121°C) continuous. (ATEX flame-
proof, -B suffix, rated -20°C (-4°F) to 80°C (176°F); ATEX intrinsically safe, -IS suffix,
rated -20°C (-4°F) to 40°C (104°F)).

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 450
p451 7/26/06 9:42 AM Page 1

Series
DT Detector Position Sensor ®

Reliable Magnetic Point Sensor, Stainless Steel Housing, AC or DC

3.750
(9.525 CM)
1.250 1.750
DETECTOR ACTUATOR (3.18 CM) (4.45 CM)
1.000 HEX

TM

ACTUATOR 1/2˝ – 14 NPT DETECTOR 5/8˝ – 18 UNF

Standard Actuator with DT1060 High Strength Actuator with DT1160

(3/8–16 UNC X 3/4˝) (1/2–13 UNC X 3/4˝)

The Series DT Detector Position Sensors are reliable, mag- SPECIFICATIONS

netically actuated, stainless steel, completely interchangeable with Temperature Limits: –40 to 163°F (–40 to 73°C).
competitive units. AC or DC for user friendly operation. They have
no moving parts, eliminate costly seal fittings and offer enhanced Switch Type: Tungsten, SPDT, Form C.
reliability by eliminating arcing. Unintentional actuation by metals is Electrical Rating: 3A @ 125 VAC, 3A @ 30 VDC.
not a problem. The sensor consists of a durable hermetically sealed
reed switch potted in a stainless steel housing and a separate 316 SS Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof; Hermetically Sealed; Explosion-
magnetic actuator bolt. As the actuator moves within the sensing proof UL & CSA Listed for Class I, Groups A, B, C, & D; Class II,
range of the sensor, the magnet in the actuator changes the state of Groups E, F & G. Divisions 1 & 2.
reed switch contacts inside the sensor. This either opens or closes a Intrinsically Safe: Simple Apparatus (w/barrier).
circuit depending on wiring configuration. Sensing distance is 0.1˝
(2.54 mm) for the standard actuator. Greater sensitivity of a larger Operating/Response Time: 3.0 m Sec.
magnetic actuator increases the sensing distance to 0.5˝ (12.7 mm). Initial Contact Resistance: 0.50 ohms (Max).
Repeatability: 0.005 in. (.01 cm).
The Detector is excellent for hazardous and corrosive environments,
solid state and intrinsically safe applications. A Detector may be Hysteresis: 0.030 in. (.08 cm).
mounted in any position. For installation in hazardous locations be Electrical Connection: Factory sealed leads with 18˝ minimum, 4
sure to check local and national electrical codes. The Detector is conductor, PVC insulated, 18 AWG – Green/Red/Black/White
designed to NEMA 1, 3, 4, 4X, 6, 7, 9, 12 and 13. (Ground/NC/ NO/Common).
Housing: 316 SS.
APPLICATIONS Potting: Epoxy Resin.
The Detector is used for control element position monitoring and
indication with devices such as Linear Valves – Actuators & Conduit: 1/2˝-14˝ female NPT.
Cylinders – Rotary Valves – Dampers. Weight: 0.32 lb (145 g); 0.45 lb (204 g) with actuator.

Suggested Specification
Position sensor shall be magnetically operated Proximity Detector
model (DT1060) (DT1160). Sensing distance shall be (0.1˝) (0.5˝). The
MODELS AND ACTUATOR SIZES sensor shall be SPDT, Form C, hermetically sealed and rated 3 amps
Model No. Description Sensing Distance 125 VAC, 3 amps 30 VDC, and shall include a stainless steel actuator
DT1060 Detector and 0.1˝ (2.54 mm) with internal magnet. The 316 SS housing shall be designed to NEMA
standard actuator 4, 4X, 7, 9, UL & CSA certified Class I, Groups A,B, C & D; Class II,
DT1160 Detector and 0.5˝ (12.7 mm) Groups E, F, & G, Divs. 1 & 2 requirements and have a 1/2˝ NPT con-
high strength actuator
duit entrance.
Valves

451 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p452 7/26/06 9:43 AM Page 1

Series
VPS Valve Position Sensor
Dual Inductive, 2-Wire AC/DC Sensor, Fully Adjustable Target in 2° Increments
M12 x 1 THD, 0.218 [5.54] (2) PL
4-Pin, Quick 0.812 [20.62]
Disconnect 0.2375
®
[60.33]
1.687 [42.85] 1.125 [28.58]

0.313 [7.95] 1.180 [29.97]

1.032 [26.21] 0.50 [12.7] 1.879

[47.73]
0.250 [6.35] 0.781 [19.84]
1.562 [39.67]
Model P1 Model VPS2411
Model P1 Model VPS2411
The dual inductive, 2-wire AC/DC Series VPS Valve Position SPECIFICATIONS Hysteresis: 3-15% of sensing
Sensor maintains VDI/VDE 3845 dimensions so positioners can be Temperature Limits: -13 to range.
easily mounted on top of the sensor and target. The Model VPS2411 176°F (-25 to 80°C). Switching Frequency: 25 Hz.
Sensor and Model P1 Target mount easily and directly to actuators Power Requirements: 20-140 Housing Material: Polybuty-
with ISO NAMUR topworks (see picture below). Fully adjustable tar- VAC (50/60 Hz), 10-200 VDC. lene Terephthalate.
get in 2° increments, the sensor has two independent LED’s and Switch Type: Dual normally Mounting Holes: NAMUR
bright Flow Line indicator that provide local visual indication. All open. Mounting - 3.15˝ x 1.18˝ (80 x 30
electrical connections are made with the Model Electrical Rating: 200 mA. mm)
VIP82 4-pin quick disconnect cable (6 ft. in Minimum Load Current: 5 mA. or 5.118˝ x 1.18˝ (130 x 30 mm).
length) for ease in installation. Solid state Leakage Current: ≤0.8 mA. Electrical Connection: 4-pin
Voltage Drop: ≤5.0 V. quick disconnect.
components are fully embedded in an epoxy
resin to prevent condensation build-up and to protect Repeatability: ≤0.01 mm.
against vibration and shock. The rugged PBTP
housing provides excellent corrosion resistance and Model VPS2411 Valve Position Sensor
moisture protection. Model P1 Valve Position Target
Model VIP82 Quick Disconnect Cable
Model VPS and P1 mounted on an actuator with a positioner mounted on top.

Series
VIP Valve Position Indicator
Compact, Easy-to-Install, Inductive 3-wire DC
.798 .594
[20.27] [15.09] 1.218
VIP11 .200
[5.08] [30.96]
2.047
1.394 [51.99]
[35.41] 1.181
[29.99]
.833
[21.16] .203
M12X1 [5.16]
.172
[4.37]
1.850 LED 2.402
[46.99] 1.575 00
[61.01]
15 15
30 30
[40.01] 45
45

.938 45° 45° R.819

VIP02 [23.83] [20.80] Ø1.594
[40.46]

Save space with the compact, easy-to-install Series VIP Valve SPECIFICATIONS Voltage Drop: ≤2 VDC.
Position Indicator. Model VIP11 position sensor mounts directly to your Output Operation: Dual normally Current Consumption: ≤25 mA.
actuator while the position target, Model VIP02 is placed around the ac- open PNP transistor, sourcing. Switching Frequency: 500 Hz.
tuator stem. As the actuator stem rotates, inductive proximity sensors Repeatability: ≤0.01 mm. Electrical Connection: 4-pin
located within the VIP11 detect the presence of metal targets on VIP02 Hysteresis: 5%. quick disconnect.
changing their state. The position sensor (VIP11) includes two normal- Temperature Limits: -13 to 158°F Mounting Holes: 3.15˝ x 1.18˝
ly open, inductive proximity sensors. Two built-in yellow LEDs provide (-25 to 70°C). (80 x 30 mm) - NAMUR
local indication of the switch status. Power “on” is designated by a Power Requirements: 10 - 30 Shaft Height: 0.79˝ (20 mm).
Valves

bright green LED. All electrical connections are made with a 4-pin quick VDC. Shaft Diameter: 1.34˝ (34 mm).
disconnect cable for ease of installation. Load Current: ≤200 mA. Housing Material: Polybutylene
Solid state components are fully embedded in an epoxy resin to prevent Terephthalate.
Leakage Current: ≤1 µA.
condensation build-up and protect against vibration or shock. The
rugged PBT housing provides excellent corrosion resistance and mois- Model VIP11 Valve Position Indicator Sensor
ture protection. Units are environmentally protected to IP67. Sensors
feature short circuit, overload and reverse polarity protection. Model VIP02 Valve Position Indicator Target
Model VIP82 Quick Disconnect Cable, 6 ft long

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 452
p.453 7/26/06 9:44 AM Page 1

Series
40VF Pneumatic Lever Motors
Wide Selection of Travels and Forces – On-off – Throttling Control
DIMENSIONAL DATA
MODEL A B C D E F G H I
SIZE IN.(MM) IN.(MM) IN.(MM) IN.(MM) IN.(MM) IN.(MM) IN.(MM) IN.(MM) IN.(MM)
40VF5 63⁄8 33⁄16 11⁄2 51⁄4 41⁄4 171⁄16 73⁄4 4 199⁄32
(161.9) (81.0) (38.1) (133.4) (108.0) (433.4) (196.9) (101.6) (489.7)
40VF6 73⁄16 4 1 ⁄2
1
65⁄16 51⁄4 1915⁄16 105⁄8 4 1827⁄32
(182.6) (101.6) (38.1) (160.3) (133.4) (506.4) (269.9) (101.6) (478.6)
40VF7 923⁄32 61⁄2 11⁄2 79⁄16 611⁄16 2529⁄32 133⁄8 47⁄8 205⁄32
(246.9) (165.1) (38.1) (192.1) (169.9) (658.0) (339.7) (123.8) (512.0)

CAUTION: Use of an actuator supply gas other than air can create a hazardous
environment because a small amount of gas continuously vents to atmosphere.

Pneumatic Lever Motors are extremely versatile energy transmission de- SPECIFICATIONS Housing, Frame & Lever: Steel with
vices providing superior control in the operation of dampers, louvers, rotary baked enamel finish.
Connections: Spring: Plated spring steel.
shafts, butterfly valves, etc. Strokes may be easily adjusted to combine with spe- Air Supply: 1⁄4" NPT. Push Rod: Plated cold-rolled steel.
Lever: 5⁄16" (7.94 mm) dia. hole, 3⁄8" (9.53 Spring Adjustment: Plated cold-rolled
cial pneumatic control signals for demanding applications. mm) width on 40VF5 & 40VF6; 3⁄8" (9.53 steel, ball thrust bearing.
mm) dia. hole, 1⁄2" (12.7 mm) width on Lever Pivots: Phosphor bronze,
MODELS 40VF7. alignment-reamed.
Temperature Limit: 180°F (82°C). Options: Factory-installed and calibrated
MODEL A AT K-LBF/In. Pressure Limit: 50 psi (3.5 bar).
NUMBER In. (cm ) In. (mm) (KGF/mm) PRECISOR® Positioner, custom
2 2
Action: Air-To-Lower. calibrations: Air-To-Raise action.
40VF51003 20 (129) 11⁄8 (28.6) 100 (1.79) Materials of Construction:
Diaphragm: Molded BUNA-N rubber,
40VF52003 20 (129) 11⁄8 (28.6) 180 (3.21) nylon reinforced.
40VF53003 20 (129) 11⁄8 (28.6) 260 (4.64)
40VF61003 45 (290) 11⁄2 (38.1) 100 (1.79) Suggested Specification
40VF62003 45 (290) 11⁄2 (38.1) 180 (3.21) Pneumatic Lever Motor shall be Air-To-Lower type with nylon reinforced BUNA-
40VF63003 45 (290) 11⁄2 (38.1) 260 (4.64) N diaphragm and alignment-reamed, phosphor bronze lever pivots capable of de-
40VF71003 80 (516) 21⁄2 (63.5) 100 (1.79) livering near constant force throughout lengthy stroke. Motor lever shall have (7)
40VF72003 80 (516) 21⁄2 (63.5) 180 (3.21) (8) selectable connections offering wide choice of travels and forces. Unit shall be
40VF73003 80 (516) 21⁄2 (63.5) 260 (4.64) W. E. Anderson® lever motor Model No.____.

Valve Accessories SPECIFICATIONS

Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 240 VAC, 24 VAC, 24 VDC, or 12 VDC.
Supply Pressure: 20 psi (1.4 bar) to 120 psi (8.3 bar).
Air Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
Temperature Limits: -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C).
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
Conduit Connection: 1/2˝ female NPT.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X.
Mounting: NAMUR VDI/VDE 3845.
Standard Features: Manual override, mechanical spring safety position.
Optional Features: Other power voltages.
SV3 on Type D Actuator
MODELS
Model Number Power
Series SV Solenoid Valve will electrically operate pneumatic actuators for on-
off applications. When the solenoid valve receives the electrical input signal it SV3 120 VDC
switches the pneumatic supply pressure to the actuator, which moves the valve SV3-A 12 VDC
SV3-B 24 VDC
from the closed to open position. The next impulse to the solenoid valve will
SV3-C 240 VDC
make the valve move back to the closed position. The low cost solenoid valve di- 24 VAC
rectly mounts onto pneumatic actuators with standard NAMUR mounting con- SV3-D
Factory mounting and testing to Actuator available. Add Solenoid Valve model no. as suffix to But-
figuration eliminating external tubing and fittings. Buna-N O-rings are included terfly Valve model code (for use with pneumatic rack and pinion actuator as shown only). Exam-
to seal the valve ports to the side of the actuator. Standard features include a ple, 204LTB2517D3C-SV3
manual override, safety position by mechanical spring, and a NEMA 4X enclo-
sure. Direct mounts onto D, S, J, F, C, DA, or SR actuators.

Butterfly Valve D Series Actuator Proximity Position Indicators

with QV Series with VPS Series Position indicators are available for the W.E. Anderson® Hi-Flow™ Globe
valve, Plast-A-Vane® Butterfly valves, and BV2 Series Ball valve. The Prox-
imity Mark, QV, and VPS Series can all be used on the ball and butterfly
valves. The Mark, QV, and DT Series can be used on the globe valves. With
Valves

the Proximity product line a wide variety of options are available including
visual position indication, multiple position switches, and position trans-
mitters. The Proximity line is briefly covered in this catalog and a separate
in depth Proximity catalog is available. Please contact the factory for pric-
ing on mounting brackets.

453 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p454 7/26/06 8:18 AM Page 1

Refer to Page 474 for Discount Schedules

Conditions and Statement of Policy. Note that
items followed by the symbol B are subject

ACCESSORIES to discount per Schedule B.

These prices effective September 2006

Gage Fluids
MODELS
Gage fluids in the 3⁄4 ounce size are furnished in unbreakable plastic dispenser
type bottles. Larger sizes are supplied in plastic bottles with screw caps. Mercury
is supplied only in the single size plastic container. CAUTION: Use only Dwyer flu-
ids in Dwyer gages.

Red Gage Oil, .826 sp. gr. The standard fluid for use in inclined manometers, “D”
type vertical manometers and all Dwyer gages using red oil.
A-101 A-101, 3⁄4 oz. dispenser bottle
A-102, 4 oz. bottle
A-103, 1 pt. bottle
A-104, 1 qt. bottle

Note: Also available is Yellow gage oil, .826 Sp. Gr. This is normally used on
A-102 special 422 style manometers. Order by description and size of bottle. Don’t
use part no’s above. Prices same as Red oil.

Blue Gage Oil, 1.910 sp. gr. For special instruments and Mark II Models 26 and
28.

A-110, 3⁄4 oz. dispenser bottle

A-111, pt. bottle

Violet Gage Oil, 1.000 sp. gr. Use in place of water if better meniscus is desired.
A-120, 3⁄4 oz. dispenser bottle
A-121, 4 oz. bottle
A-122,1 pt. bottle
A-103
Fluorescein Green Color Concentrate, water coloring agent. Not to be used full
strength. Add 3⁄4 ozs. to a quart of distilled water. Contains a wetting agent to
improve the meniscus characteristics. Use in vertical manometers only.
A -126, 3⁄4 oz. dispenser bottle

Mercury, triple distilled, 13.6 sp. gr.

A-130, 1⁄2 pound bottle
A-140, 2 oz. bottle CO Absorbent Solution
2

A-130 A-104

Gage Tubing MODELS

Clear plastic tubing is easily inspected and is therefore best for test applications
where a possibility of fluid entering the tubing exists. Rubber tubing has less ten-
dency to kink in storage and occupies less space, thus is best for portable work.
Metal Tubing is recommended for permanent installations. Double column tubing is
used with Mark II manometers and the Wind Speed Indicator.

A-201, Rubber Tubing, 3⁄16" I.D., 9 ft length

A-202, Rubber Tubing, 3⁄16" I.D. length to 50 ft

A-203, PVC Tubing, 1⁄8" I.D. x 1⁄4" O. D.

A-201 A-225, Flexible Double Column Plastic tubing Lt Gray, with

A-210 red color code stripe, 1⁄8" I.D., lengths to 750 ft

A-210, Aluminum Tubing, 1⁄4" O.D., 5 ft length,

500 psi maximum pressure 200°F

A-211. Aluminum Tubing, 1⁄4" O. D., length to 50 ft,

500 psi maximum pressure @ 200°F

A-220, Flexible Vinyl Tubing, Clear 3⁄16" I.D. x 5⁄16" O.D., lengths to 500 ft,
45 psi maximum pressure @ 73°F

A-221, Flexible Vinyl Tubing, Clear 1⁄8" I.D. x 3⁄16" O.D. lengths to 500 ft,
40 psi maximum pressure @ 165°F

A-222, Flexible Vinyl Tubing, Clear .240" I.D. x .375" O.D. lengths to 500 ft,
A-225 35 psi maximum pressure @ 73°F.
A-222
A-223, Black Polyethylene 1/8˝ I.D. 1/4˝ O.D.
10 ft length, 200 psi maximum @ 140°F
Misc.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 454
p455 7/26/06 8:19 AM Page 1

MODELS
Static Pressure
Sensors These sensors are for use with manometers, Magnehelic® gages, pressure
switches and other controllers to pick up or sense static pressure drop
across air filters and cooling coils, blower input and discharge pressures,
etc. The angled tips shown have 4˝ insertion depth. Each has four radially
A-301 drilled .040˝ sensing holes. All except Model A-303 mount in 3⁄8˝ hole in
duct. For portable use, a magnet holds No. A-303 in place. No. A-305
is used where a very low actuation or sensing point is required on a pres-
sure switch or gage or where response time is critical. No. A-307 and A-
308 are suitable for use in low velocity systems or where the need for
A-302 accuracy is less critical.
A-301, Static Pressure Tip, for 1⁄4" metal tubing connection
A-301-A, Static Pressure Tip, same as A-301 with 6˝ insertion depth
A-301-B, Static Pressure Tip, same as A-301 with 8˝ insertion depth
A-303 A-301-C, Static Pressure Tip, same as A-301 with 12˝ insertion depth
A-306
A-301-SS, same as A-301 in Stainless Steel
A-302, Static Pressure Tip, for 3⁄16" and 1⁄8" I.D. plastic or rubber tubing
A-302-A, Static Pressure Tip, same as A-302 with 6˝ insertion depth
A-304 A-303, Portable Static Pressure Tip, for 3⁄16" I.D. rubber or plastic tubing
with 4˝ insertion
A-304, Duct Connector
A-305 A-305, Static Pressure Tip, low resistance application, furnished with
two (2) hex jam nuts and two (2) mounting washers for duct mounting and
with 1⁄8" NPT pipe thread for pressure connection
A-305-SS, same as A-305 in Stainless Steel
A-306, Outdoor static pressure sensor. Provides average outdoor
pressure signal for reference in building pressurization applications.
Includes sensor, 50 ft. vinyl tubing, mounting bracket and hardware
A-307 A-308 A-345 A-307, Static Pressure Fitting, for 1⁄4" metal tubing connection
A-307-SS, as above in Stainless Steel
A-308, Static Pressure Fitting, for 3⁄16" and 1⁄8" I.D. plastic or rubber tubing
A-414 A-345, Flange for mounting A-301, A-302, A-307, A-308 or 1⁄8" dia. Pitot
Tubes with compression fitting when interior of duct is not accessible.
Aluminum, with gasket and sheet metal screws
A-414, SS Clean Room Pressure Sensor

Valves – Connectors MODELS

Instrument valves for permanent installation. They mount in part A-316,

A-317, type C manometer connections or Magnehelic® gage and connect
to metal tubing or 1⁄8" pipe.
A-310A, 3-Way Vent Valve, plastic, 1⁄8" NPT to 1⁄4" metal tubing. Positions are:
(1) Line: Gage connected to pressure source. (2) Off: Both gage and
A-310A A-310B A-311 connection to pressure source closed. (3) Vent: Gage vented to
atmosphere and connection to pressure source closed. 80 PSI rating.
Replaces former model A310 (brass)
A-310B, same as A-310A but with 10 PSI rating
A-311, Shut Off Valve, brass, 1⁄8" NPT to 1⁄8" NPT
A-312, Shut Off Valve, brass, 1⁄8" NPT to 1⁄4" metal tubing
A-355, Porting Valve, acrylic plastic, 1⁄8" NPT inserts. Used for convenient
indication of pressure at two points with a single gage
A-365, Dual Porting Valve, acrylic plastic, 1⁄8" NPT fittings. For monitoring three
pressures, two at a time, with one gage
A-312 A-355 A-365
Gage Connectors for Manometers. Molded nylon construction, threaded
.786 x 27 N.S., with O ring seal.
A-315, Gage connector, Shut off type, for 3⁄16" rubber tubing
A-316, Gage connector, bushing, 1⁄8" pipe thread opening
A-317, Gage connector, 1⁄8" pipe thread opening, less O.D. thd., for slip fit in
3
⁄4" dia. opening in 250 series A.F. gages
A-315 A-316 A-317 A-318 A-318, Gage connector 1⁄4" pipe thread opening
A-319, Flexible Red P.V.C. connector, 3⁄16" I.D. Rubber Tubing to 1⁄4" I.D. Plastic
Tube for 1221,1222 and 1227 Manometers.
A-321, Brass Safety Relief Valve Protects Magnehelic® or Photohelic® Gage against
over pressure due to regulator failure etc. Opens at 10 psi. Mounts in tee fitting
in sensing line or in unused gage port with addition of A-349 reducer.
1
⁄4" male NPT (Use two for D.P. application).
A-322, Gage connector for 1⁄4" tubing. Slip fits in 3⁄4" opening in 250 series A.F.
gages (Compression nut and ferrule not included)

A-319 A-321 A-322

Misc.

455 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p456 7/26/06 8:20 AM Page 1

Fittings – Filters MODELS

A-170, Stainless Steel Pigtail Siphon
A-323, Elbow Compression Fitting, brass 1⁄8" NPT to 1⁄4" metal tubing
A-324, Compression Fitting, brass 1⁄8" NPT to 1⁄4" metal tubing
A-326, Compression Fitting, brass 1⁄8" NPT to 3⁄8" tubing
A-327, 5⁄16" Nylon Tube Union
A-324 A-326 A-327, A-328 A-329 A-328, 1⁄4" Nylon Tube Union
A-329, 1⁄8" N.P.T. Close Coupled Street Ell, Brass
A-330, 1⁄8" Pipe Plug, socket hex, plated steel
A-331, 1⁄8" N.P.T Filter Vent Plug, nylon and sintered metal
A-330 A-331 A-332 A-333 A-332, Bushing, brass, 1⁄8" to 1⁄4" NPT
A-333, Bushing, brass, 1⁄8" to 1⁄2" NPT
A-334, Close Nipple, brass, 1⁄8" NPT
A-336, 90° Street L, brass, 1⁄8" NPT
A-337, Coupling, brass, 1⁄8" NPT
A-334 A-336 A-337 A-338 A-338, Servel Adapter, brass 3⁄8" and 5⁄16" N.F. Threads for gas appliances to
1
⁄8" and 3⁄16" I.D. rubber or plastic tubing
A-339, Adapter, brass, 1⁄8" NPT to 3⁄16" rubber and 1⁄8" I.D. plastic tubing
A-340, Adapter, nylon, 1⁄8" NPT to 3⁄16" I.D. rubber or 1⁄4" plastic tubing
A-342, “T” Assembly, plastic, for 3⁄16" I.D. rubber or 1⁄4" plastic tubing
A-339 A-340 A-342 A-345 A-343, “T” Assembly, plastic, for 3⁄16" plastic tubing
A-343-1, “T” Assembly, plastic, for 1⁄8" I.D. plastic tubing
A-344, Terminal Tube, Brass 1⁄4" diameter tube, 8" length (not shown)
A-345, Flange, aluminum with gasket and sheet metal screws, 1⁄8" NPT
A-346, “T” Compression Fitting, brass, 1⁄4" metal tubing
A-349, Reducer, brass, 1⁄4" female NPT to 1⁄8" male NPT
A-346 A-349 A-391 A-392 A-398 A-391, Line Filter for Capsuhelic® gage,1⁄4" female NPT X 1⁄4" male NPT
A-392, Line Filter for Magnehelic® gage, 1⁄8" female NPT x 1⁄8" male NPT.
A-398, Probe Extension Adapter for series 640 air velocity transmitter.
Brass, 1⁄2" female NPT x 5⁄16" compression
F222, Liquid/Particle Filter for compressed air. Removes dirt, water and oil.
22 scfm maximum flow, 1⁄4" female NPT inlet and outlet
1201-2, Replacement Filter Element for F222 filter, package of 3
F451, Liquid/Particle Filter for compressed air. Removes dirt, water and oil.
45 scfm maximum flow, 1⁄4" female NPT inlet and outlet
F222 F451 1201-3, Replacement Filter Element for F451 filter, package of 3

Miscellaneous MODELS
A-298, Flat Aluminum Bracket for flush mounting Capsuhelic® gage, 603A, 605,
and 3000MR
A-299, Mounting Bracket, flush mount Magnehelic® gage in bracket. Bracket is
then surface mounted. Steel with gray hammertone epoxy finish
A-300, Flat Aluminum Bracket for flush mounting Magnehelic® gage
A-351, Pinch Clamp to seal rubber tubing, as in a leakage test
A-351 A-352 A-353 A-352, Magneclip, slip on magnetic holder for acrylic plastic gages. Per pair
A-354
A-353, Magnetic Mounting. Flat style, secures to flowmeter, etc. with
No. 6-32 machine screw and boots insert.
A-354, Magnetic Mounting, Edge style, secures edge of acrylic mano-
meter with No. 10-32 machine screw and boots insert.
A-356, Gage plug with retainer loop, polyethylene plastic. For 1⁄4" I.D. tubing.
Slip loop over tubing O.D. and insert plug for seal
A-356 A-357 A-363 A-364
A-357, Thermometer and terminal tube holder. Stainless steel wire
A-362, Stand-Hang bracket, aluminum, for Minihelic II gage
A-363, Scale Clamp Bar for No. 1221 Manometer
A-364, Magnet Assembly for No. 1222 Manometers, 2 required (3 required
for 1222-36 and M-1000).
A-366 A-366, Manometer Cleaning Brush 1⁄4" O.D. x 21⁄8" Long. Attach to wire for use
A-367, Table Stand for U-Tube Manometers
A-397 A-464 A-465
A-368, Surface mounting plate, aluminum, for Magnehelic® gage
A-369, Stand-Hang Bracket, aluminum, for Magnehelic® gage
A-370, Mounting Bracket, Flush mount Capsuhelic® gage or Series 600
Transmitter in bracket. Bracket is then surface mounted. Steel with gray
hammertone epoxy finish
A-371, Surface Mounting Bracket. Use with Photohelic® gage on horizontal
or vertical surfaces. Also for Capsu-Photohelic® gage on Vertical only
A-395, Surface Mounting Bracket for Series 602/603 transmitters and
Series 4000 Capsuhelic® gages. Steel with gray hammertone epoxy finish
A-397, Step Drill. Rugged Step Drill quickly provides true round holes in thin
A-362 A-368 A-369 A-370 materials. Ideal for installation of Dwyer Pitot Tubes in sheet metal duct. No
centerpunch needed to start. Automatically de-burrs drilled hole. High speed
steel. Drills 3⁄16" through 1⁄2" holes in 1⁄16" increments. (Net Price, No Discount
Allowed)
A-464, Flush Mount Kit for Magnehelics® gage
A-465, Flush Mount Space Pressure Sensor
A-497, Surface Mounting Bracket for Minihelic®II gage. Steel with satin
black finish

A-371 A-395 A-497 A-300

Misc.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 456
p457 7/26/06 8:21 AM Page 1

Pumps MODELS
A-350, Aspirator Bulb. Used as pressure source in calibration
and leakage tests, to draw gas sample into CO2 Indicator or
smoke gage

A-394, Electric Air Pump. Provides convenient source of

purge air in bubbler type liquid level systems. Dual diaphragm
design allows operation of two systems simultaneously
A-350 A-394
A-396A, Calibration pump. Serves as pressure source to
calibrate gages and transmitters or to set pressure switches.
Use with manometer or other pressure standard. Includes
volume adjuster enabling fine pressure control and bleed valve.
Generates pressures from a fraction of an inch w.c. to 72 psig
A-396A (5 bar). Includes barbed fitting, tee connector and three 36"
lengths of vinyl tubing

Carrying Cases MODELS

Steel cases are substantially constructed and finished in gray hammerloid. Mold-
ed plastic cases are gray, high density polyethylene.

A-401, Plastic Carrying Case for 1212 Gas Pressure Kit, 910 Smoke
Gage and up to 36" Roll up Manometers —
7-9/16" x 5-7/8" x 2-13/16"
A-402A, Nylon Carrying Pouch for Series 475, 477 490 Digital Manometers and
Series 450 CO Monitor — 7-1/2" x 3" x 2-1/4"
A-404, Plastic Carrying Case for Portable Inclined Gages 100, 101, 108,
115 — 12-1/4" x 6-1/4" x 1-3/4"
A-405, Plastic Carrying Case for Portable Inclined Gages 109, 100.5,
104-6, 102, 102.5 — 13-1/2" x 10" x 2-3/8"
A-401 A-404 A-413, Steel Carrying Case for Portable Draft Gages 104-8, 104-10 and 48" and
larger Slack Tube Manometers — 18-1/2" x 4-3/8" x 2-1/4"
A-430-1, Plastic Carrying Case for 1200 series Combustion Test Kit
A-431, Steel Carrying Case for Air Velocity Meter, No. 400-5
A-432, Plastic Carrying Case for Magnehelic® Gage includes mounting
stand, rubber tube, etc. (pgs. 5-6)
A-433, Steel Carrying Case for Air Velocity Meter, No. 400-10
A-460, Plastic Envelope for inclined Gages 170, 171, 172
A-462, Round Steel Box—9-3/4" diameter, 2-1/2" depth for Slack Tube
Manometers to 120"
A-463, Plastic Carrying Case with foam liner for 475-1-AV Air Velocity Kit —
A-430-1 13-1/2" x 10" x 2-3/8"

MODELS
Thermometers, Psychrometer,
Slide Charts A-502, Dial Thermometer, 0 to 250°F and -20 to 120°C
A-503, Dial Thermometer, 200 to 1000° F and 100 to 540°C
A-510, Pocket Thermometer, mercury in glass, 5-1/2" length,1/4" dia.
stem. In metal carrying case. Range -30 to +120°F, 2° divisions
A-511, Refill only for above
A-512, Pocket Thermometer. Same as No. A-510 except range 0 to 220°F,
2° divisions
A-513, Refill only for above
A-527 A-525, Pocket type sling Psychrometer. Furnished complete with
Psychrometric charts. Psychrometric slide chart, and carrying case
A-503 A-510 A-511 A-525 A-530 A-526, Replacement Thermometers for above Psychrometer, range 20°
to 110°F. Each
A-527, Replacement Wick for Psychrometer
A 530, Psychrometric Slide Chart
A-531, Oil Burner Efficiency Slide Chart
A-532, Air Velocity Calculator Slide Chart
A-531 A-533 A-533, Metric English Pressure and Flow Conversion Slide Chart
A-534, International L.H.V. Combustion Efficiency Slide Chart
A-536, Metric Air Velocity Calculator Slide Chart

A-532 A-534

Optional Accessory Kits for Air Filter Switches MODELS

A-602, Air Filter Kit. Accessory package for using switch without a gage includes
two pressure tips with integral compression fittings, two 5 ft. lengths of 1/4˝ alu-
minum tubing and two 1/8˝ NPT to 1/4˝ tubing compression fittings

A-603, “T” Kit. Accessory package for using pressure switch in conjunction with
an air filter kit equipped Magnehelic® or Series 250 AF gages. Includes two 1/8˝ NPT
to 1/4˝ tubing compression fittings and two compression tees.
A-602
A-604
A-604, “T” Kit. Accessory package for using pressure switch in conjunction with
Mark II gages includes two plastic tubing connector tees and two plastic tubing to
Misc.

A-603 1/8˝ NPT adapters.

457 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p458 7/26/06 8:22 AM Page 1

Introduction to Stainless Steel Fitting Line

The Dwyer Series A-1000 quality tube fittings have been designed and scratches and maintain the surface finish as originally intended by
manufactured to provide reliable leak-free connections in a wide vari- the manufacturer. Tubing should never be dragged across rocks,
ety of applications. A reliable leak-free tubing system will be achieved blacktop, pavement, or tubing storage racks as scratches and gouges
by combining the proper selection and handling of tubing with the can occur. Sharp blades should always be used in the tube cutters or
proper tube fitting selection and installation. The following informa- hacksaws used to cut the tubing so as to provide a clean, square cut.
tion is provided to assist in the tube selection process. Dull cutting blades can cause internal and external hanging burrs,
and cause the tubing to become oval and affect proper insertion with-
Material in the fitting. As a good handling practice, tubing should always be
The tubing material chosen must be compatible with the system’s con- deburred prior to tube fitting installation to help assure easy and
tained media, pressure and temperature, as well as with the environ- complete tube insertion. Additionally, for bent tube assemblies, it is
ment in which it will be installed. Also, the tubing and fittings materi- important to bend tubing prior to installing tube fittings, and to pro-
als should be similar for optimum sealing action to occur (stainless fit- vide a sufficient straight length of tubing after the bend to allow the
tings for stainless tube, brass fittings for copper tube, carbon steel fit- tube to be fully inserted into the fitting. Also, to eliminate weight
tings for carbon steel tube, etc.). The mixing and contact of dissimilar stress from the tubing upon the fitting and to provide additional sys-
materials may leave the system susceptible to galvanic corrosion tem support for vibration and thermal shock resistance, the tubing
and/or not allow proper tube fitting makeup to be achieved. should always be supported by tube hangers, clamps or trays.

Pressure and Flow

The size of the tube’s outside diameter (O.D.) and the necessary wall
thickness are determined by the system’s pressure and flow require-
ments. Table A details the suggested tubing sizes and wall thickness
for use with instrumentation tube fittings. If no pressure is shown on
the table for a particular size, the tube is not recommended for use Stress Factors For Determining Tubing Pressure Ratings at
with instrumentation tube fittings. The tubing system should not be Elevated Temperatures - TABLE B
utilized above the tube’s maximum allowable working pressure. Temperature Stainless Steel
°F °C 316
Temperature
100 38 1.00
The system’s operating temperature may affect the initial choice of 200 93 1.00
tubing material and may also affect the maximum allowable working 300 149 1.00
temperature for the given tube size (see Table B for temperature 400 200 .97
stress factors). 500 260 .90
600 316 .85
Light Gas Service 700 371 .82
To provide a successful connection for light gas service, the tubing 800 427 .80*
must have a thick enough wall to provide resistance for the setup action 900 482 .78*
of the ferrules to further compensate for the tube’s potential surface 1000 538 .73*
1200 649 .37*
condition.
Handling and Installation *The precipitation of chromium carbides potentially resulting in intergranular
Surface scratches and gouges on tubing are a source of potential leaks. corrosion may occur when exposed to operating temperatures.
Some precaution when handling the tubing can help reduce surface

STAINLESS STEEL TUBING - TABLE A

Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (PSIG)
Tube O.D. Wall Thickness of Tube (Inches)
[Size (in)] .010 .012 .014 .016 .020 .028 .035 .049 .065 .083 .095 .109 .120 .134 .156 .188
1/16 5600 6850 8150 9500 12100
1/8 8550 11000
3/16 5450 7000 10300
1/4 4000 5100 7500 10300
5/16 4050 5850 8050
3/8 3300 4800 6550
1/2 2450 3500 4750 6250
5/8 2950 4000 5200 6050
3/4 2400 3300 4250 4950 5800
7/8 2050 2800 3600 4200 4850
1 2400 3150 3650 4200 4700
1-1/4 2450 2850 3300 3650 4150 4900
1-1/2 2350 2700 3000 3400 4000 4900
2 2000 2200 2500 2900 3600
Misc.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 458
p459 7/26/06 8:24 AM Page 1

Series
A-1000 Stainless Steel Fitting Line
Series A-1001 Male Elbow Fitting Line
A SPECIFICATIONS
G NUT HEX BX
H WRENCH PAD Service: Liquid, steam and compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
T
Temperature Ranges: See reference Table B.
Pressure Ranges: See reference Table A.
Connections: 1/16˝ to 1-1/2˝.
D
BY Dimensions: Consult website, or contact factory.
C
F

P PIPE THREAD

MODELS
T=Tube P=Pipe T=Tube P=Pipe T=Tube P=Pipe
Model O.D. Thread Male Model O.D. Thread Male Model O.D. Thread Male
A-1001-1 1/16˝ 1/16˝ A-1001-12 5/16˝ 1/8˝ A-1001-24 5/8˝ 3/8˝
A-1001-2 1/16˝ 1/8˝ A-1001-13 5/16˝ 1/4˝ A-1001-25 5/8˝ 1/2˝
A-1001-3 1/8˝ 1/16˝ A-1001-15 3/8˝ 1/8˝ A-1001-26 5/8˝ 3/4˝
A-1001-4 1/8˝ 1/8˝ A-1001-16 3/8˝ 1/4˝ A-1001-27 3/4˝ 1/2˝
A-1001-5 1/8˝ 1/4˝ A-1001-17 3/8˝ 3/8˝ A-1001-28 3/4˝ 3/4˝
A-1001-6 3/16˝ 1/8˝ A-1001-18 3/8˝ 1/2˝ A-1001-29 7/8˝ 3/4˝
A-1001-7 3/16˝ 1/4˝ A-1001-19 3/8˝ 3/4˝ A-1001-30 1˝ 3/4˝
A-1001-8 1/4˝ 1/8˝ A-1001-20 1/2˝ 1/4˝ A-1001-31 1˝ 1˝
A-1001-9 1/4˝ 1/4˝ A-1001-21 1/2˝ 3/8˝ A-1001-32 1-1/4˝ 1-1/4˝
A-1001-10 1/4˝ 3/8˝ A-1001-22 1/2˝ 1/2˝ A-1001-33 1-1/2˝ 1-1/2˝
A-1001-11 1/4˝ 1/2˝ A-1001-23 1/2˝ 3/4˝

Series A-1002 Male Connector Fitting Line

SPECIFICATIONS
G NUT HEX B BODY Service: Liquid, steam and compatible gases.
F Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
Temperature Ranges: See reference Table B.
Pressure Ranges: See reference Table A.
T E
Connections: 1/16˝ to 2˝.
Dimensions: Consult website, or contact factory.
D P PIPE THREAD
C H BODY HEX
A

MODELS
T=Tube P=Pipe T=Tube P=Pipe T=Tube P=Pipe
Model O.D. Thread Male Model O.D. Thread Male Model O.D. Thread Male
A-1002-1 1/16˝ 1/16˝ A-1002-17 5/16˝ 1/8˝ A-1002-32 5/8˝ 1/2˝
A-1002-2 1/16˝ 1/8˝ A-1002-18 5/16˝ 1/4˝ A-1002-33 5/8˝ 3/4˝
A-1002-3 1/16˝ 1/4˝ A-1002-19 5/16˝ 3/8˝ A-1002-34 3/4˝ 1/2˝
A-1002-4 1/8˝ 1/16˝ A-1002-20 3/8˝ 1/8˝ A-1002-35 3/4˝ 3/4˝
A-1002-5 1/8˝ 1/8˝ A-1002-21 3/8˝ 1/4˝ A-1002-36 3/4˝ 1˝
A-1002-6 1/8˝ 1/4˝ A-1002-22 3/8˝ 3/8˝ A-1002-37 7/8˝ 3/4˝
A-1002-7 1/8˝ 3/8˝ A-1002-23 3/8˝ 1/2˝ A-1002-39 1˝ 1/2˝
A-1002-8 1/8˝ 1/2˝ A-1002-24 3/8˝ 3/4˝ A-1002-40 1˝ 3/4˝
A-1002-9 3/16˝ 1/8˝ A-1002-25 1/2˝ 1/8˝ A-1002-41 1˝ 1˝
A-1002-10 3/16˝ 1/4˝ A-1002-26 1/2˝ 1/4˝ A-1002-42 1-1/4˝ 1˝
A-1002-11 1/4˝ 1/16˝ A-1002-27 1/2˝ 3/8˝ A-1002-43 1-1/4˝ 1-1/4˝
A-1002-12 1/4˝ 1/8˝ A-1002-28 1/2˝ 1/2˝ A-1002-44 1-1/2˝ 1-1/2˝
A-1002-13 1/4˝ 1/4˝ A-1002-29 1/2˝ 3/4˝ A-1002-45 2˝ 2˝
A-1002-15 1/4˝ 1/2˝ A-1002-30 5/8˝ 3/8˝
A-1002-16 1/4˝ 3/4˝ A-1002-31 5/8˝ 1/2˝
Misc.

459 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p460 7/26/06 8:25 AM Page 1

Series
A-1000 Stainless Steel Fitting Line
Series A-1003 Union Fitting Line
SPECIFICATIONS
B BODY
G NUT HEX
Service: Liquid, steam and compatible gases.
G NUT HEX H BODY HEX
Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
Temperature Ranges: See reference Table B.
T E T
Pressure Ranges: See reference Table A.
Connections: 1/16˝ to 2˝.
Dimensions: Consult website, or contact factory.
D D
C C
A

MODELS
T=Tube T=Tube T=Tube
Model O.D. Model O.D. Model O.D.
A-1003-1 1/16˝ A-1003-6 3/8˝ A-1003-11 1˝
A-1003-2 1/8˝ A-1003-7 1/2˝ A-1003-12 1-1/4˝
A-1003-3 3/16˝ A-1003-8 5/8˝ A-1003-13 1-1/2˝
A-1003-4 1/4˝ A-1003-9 3/4˝ A-1003-14 2˝
A-1003-5 5/16˝ A-1003-10 7/8˝

Series A-1004 Union Elbow Fitting Line

A
SPECIFICATIONS
C Service: Liquid, steam and compatible gases.
D
H WRENCH PAD
Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
Temperature Ranges: See reference Table B.
T E Pressure Ranges: See reference Table A.
Connections: 1/16˝ to 2˝.
BX Dimensions: Consult website, or contact factory.
A
G NUT HEX

MODELS
T=Tube T=Tube T=Tube
Model O.D. Model O.D. Model O.D.
A-1004-1 1/16˝ A-1004-6 3/8˝ A-1004-11 1˝
A-1004-2 1/8˝ A-1004-7 1/2˝ A-1004-12 1-1/4˝
A-1004-3 3/16 A-1004-8 5/8˝ A-1004-13 1-1/2˝
A-1004-4 1/4˝ A-1004-9 3/4˝ A-1004-14 2˝
A-1004-5 5/16˝ A-1004-10 7/8˝

Series A-1005 Union Tee Fitting Line

B BODY G NUT HEX SPECIFICATIONS
BX BX Service: Liquid, steam and compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
Temperature Ranges: See reference Table B.
E T
Pressure Ranges: See reference Table A.
Connections: 1/16˝ to 2˝.
BX
AX H WRENCH PAD D Dimensions: Consult website, or contact factory.
C

AX AX
A

MODELS
T=Tube T=Tube T=Tube
Model O.D. Model O.D. Model O.D.
A-1005-1 1/16˝ A-1005-6 3/8˝ A-1005-12 1-1/4˝
A-1005-2 1/8˝ A-1005-7 1/2˝ A-1005-13 1-1/2˝
A-1005-3 3/16 A-1005-8 5/8˝ A-1005-14 2˝
A-1005-4 1/4˝ A-1005-9 3/4˝
A-1005-5 5/16˝ A-1005-11 1˝
Misc.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 460
p461 7/26/06 8:26 AM Page 1

Series
A-1000 Stainless Steel Fitting Line
Series A-1006 Front Ferrule Fitting Line SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquid, steam and compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
Temperature Ranges: See reference Table B.
Pressure Ranges: See reference Table A.
Connections: 1/16˝ to 2˝.

T MODELS
T=Tube T=Tube
Model O.D. Model O.D.
A-1006-1 1/16˝ A-1006-8 5/8˝
A-1006-2 1/8˝ A-1006-9 3/4˝
A-1006-3 3/16˝ A-1006-10 7/8˝
A-1006-4 1/4˝ A-1006-11 1˝
A-1006-5 5/16˝ A-1006-12 1-1/4˝
A-1006-6 3/8˝ A-1006-13 1-1/2˝
A-1006-7 1/2˝ A-1006-14 2˝

Series A-1007 Back Ferrule Fitting Line SPECIFICATIONS

Service: Liquid, steam and compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
Temperature Ranges: See reference Table B.
Pressure Ranges: See reference Table A.
Connections: 1/16˝ to 2˝.

T MODELS
T=Tube T=Tube
Model O.D. Model O.D.
A-1007-1 1/16˝ A-1007-8 5/8˝
A-1007-2 1/8˝ A-1007-9 3/4˝
A-1007-3 3/16˝ A-1007-10 7/8˝
A-1007-4 1/4˝ A-1007-11 1˝
A-1007-5 5/16˝ A-1007-12 1-1/4˝
A-1007-6 3/8˝ A-1007-13 1-1/2˝
A-1007-7 1/2˝ A-1007-14 2˝

SPECIFICATIONS
Series A-1008 Nut Fitting Line Service: Liquid, steam and compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
Temperature Ranges: See reference Table B.
G NUT HEX Pressure Ranges: See reference Table A.
Connections: 1/16˝ to 2˝.
Dimensions: Consult website, or contact factory.

MODELS
T T=Tube T=Tube
Model O.D. Model O.D.
A-1008-1 1/16˝ A-1008-8 5/8˝
A-1008-2 1/8˝ A-1008-9 3/4˝
A-1008-3 3/16˝ A-1008-10 7/8˝
A-1008-4 1/4˝ A-1008-11 1˝
L A-1008-5 5/16˝ A-1008-12 1-1/4˝
A-1008-6 3/8˝ A-1008-13 1-1/2˝
A-1008-7 1/2˝ A-1008-14 2˝
Misc.

461 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p462 7/26/06 8:27 AM Page 1

Series
A-1000 Stainless Steel Fitting Line
Series A-1009 Ferrule Set Fitting Line
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquid, steam and compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
Temperature Ranges: See reference Table B.
Pressure Ranges: See reference Table A.
Connections: 1/16˝ to 2˝.
T

MODELS
T=Tube T=Tube T=Tube
Model O.D. Model O.D. Model O.D.
A-1009-1 1/16˝ A-1009-4 1/4˝ A-1009-6 3/8˝
A-1009-2 1/8˝ A-1009-5 5/16˝ A-1009-7 1/2˝
A-1009-3 3/16˝

Series A-1010 Bulkhead Union Fitting Line

SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquid, steam and compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
Temperature Ranges: See reference Table B.
Pressure Ranges: See reference Table A.
Connections: 1/16˝ to 1˝.
Dimensions: Consult website, or contact factory.

B BODY
BX H BODY HEX MODELS
G NUT HEX H JAM NUT HEX
Model T=Tube O.D.
A-1010-1 1/16˝
A-1010-2 1/8˝
E T A-1010-3 3/16˝
A-1010-4 1/4˝
A-1010-5 5/16˝
A-1010-6 3/8˝
D D A-1010-7 1/2˝
AX C
A-1010-8 5/8˝
A
A-1010-9 3/4˝
A-1010-10 1˝

Series A-1011 Female Connector Fitting Line

G NUT HEX SPECIFICATIONS
B BODY
Service: Liquid, steam and compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
Temperature Ranges: See reference Table B.
T Pressure Ranges: See reference Table A.
P PIPE THREAD Connections: 1/16˝ to 1-1/2˝.
Dimensions: Consult website, or contact factory.
D
C H BODY HEX
A

MODELS
T=Tube P=Pipe T=Tube P=Pipe T=Tube P=Pipe
Model O.D. Thread Male Model O.D. Thread Male Model O.D. Thread Male
A-1011-1 1/16˝ 1/16˝ A-1011-11 5/16˝ 1/4˝ A-1011-21 5/8˝ 3/8˝
A-1011-2 1/16˝ 1/8˝ A-1011-12 3/8˝ 1/8˝ A-1011-22 5/8˝ 1/2˝
A-1011-3 1/8˝ 1/8˝ A-1011-13 3/8˝ 1/4˝ A-1011-23 3/4˝ 1/2˝
A-1011-4 1/8˝ 1/4˝ A-1011-14 3/8˝ 3/8˝ A-1011-24 3/4˝ 3/4˝
A-1011-5 3/16˝ 1/8˝ A-1011-15 3/8˝ 1/2˝ A-1011-25 7/8˝ 3/4˝
A-1011-6 1/4˝ 1/8˝ A-1011-16 3/8˝ 3/4˝ A-1011-26 1˝ 3/4˝
A-1011-7 1/4˝ 1/4˝ A-1011-17 1/2˝ 1/4˝ A-1011-27 1˝ 1˝
A-1011-8 1/4˝ 3/8˝ A-1011-18 1/2˝ 3/8˝ A-1011-28 1-1/4˝ 1-1/4˝
A-1011-9 1/4˝ 1/2˝ A-1011-19 1/2˝ 1/2˝ A-1011-29 1-1/2˝ 1-1/2˝
A-1011-10 5/16˝ 1/8˝ A-1011-20 1/2˝ 3/4˝
Misc.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 462
p463 7/26/06 8:27 AM Page 1

Nylon Fittings
Nylon Fittings
Dwyer Instruments offers a wide variety of nylon and stainless steel fittings.
Nylon fittings are generally acceptable for use at working pressures up to 150 PSI at
normal room temperatures, and at very low pressures, temperatures can approach 175°F.

Series A-2001 Male Pipe Thread (MPT) Series A-2002 Female Pipe Thread
by Hose Barb (HB) (FPT) by Hose Barb (HB)
A-2001 A-2002 MODELS MODELS
Model No. Male NPT x HB Model No. Female NPT x HB
A-2001-1 1/8˝ x 3/16˝ A-2002-1 1/4˝ x 1/4˝
A-2001-2 1/8˝ x 1/4˝ A-2002-2 1/4˝ x 3/8˝
A-2001-3 1/8˝ x 5/16˝ A-2002-3 3/8˝ x 1/4˝
A-2001-4 1/8˝ x 3/8˝ A-2002-4 3/8˝ x 3/8˝
A-2001-5 1/4˝ x 3/16˝
A-2001-6 1/4˝ x 1/4˝
A-2003 A-2004
Series A-2003 Elbows: Male Series A-2004 Elbows: Female Pipe
Pipe Thread by Hose Barb Thread by Hose Barb
MODELS MODELS
Model No. Male NPT x HB Model No. Female NPT x HB
A-2003-1 1/8˝ x 1/4˝ A-2004-1 1/8˝ x 1/4˝
A-2003-2 1/8˝ x 3/8˝ A-2004-2 1/4˝ x 1/4˝
A-2003-3 1/4˝ x 3/16˝
A-2003-4 1/4˝ x 1/4˝

Series A-2005 Elbows: Female Pipe Series A-2006 Elbows: Female Pipe
Thread by Male Pipe Thread Thread-90°
MODELS MODELS
Model No. Female NPT x Male NPT Model No. Female NPT x Female NPT
A-2005-1 1/4˝ x 1/4˝ A-2006-1 1/2˝ x 1/2˝
A-2005-2 3/8˝ x 3/8˝ A-2006-2 3/4˝ x 3/4˝
A-2005 A-2006 A-2005-3 1/2˝ x 1/2˝ A-2006-3 1˝ x 1˝

Series A-2007 Tees: Female Pipe Series A-2008 Tees: Female Pipe
Thread Thread with 1/4˝ Gauge Port
MODELS MODELS
Model No. Female NPT Model No. Female NPT
A-2007-1 1/4˝ A-2008-1 1/2˝
A-2007 A-2008 A-2007-2 1/2˝
A-2007-3 3/4˝

Series A-2009 Reducer: Bushings

MODELS
Model No. Male NPT x Female NPT Model No. Male NPT x Female NPT
A-2009-1 3/8˝ x 1/8˝ A-2009-12 1-1/4˝ x 3/4˝
A-2009-2 3/8˝ x 1/4˝ A-2009-13 1-1/4˝ x 1˝
A-2009
A-2009-3 1/2˝ x 1/8˝ A-2009-14 1-1/2˝ x 3/4˝
A-2009-4 1/2˝ x 1/4˝ A-2009-15 1-1/2˝ x 1˝
A-2009-5 1/2˝ x 3/8˝ A-2009-16 1-1/2˝ x 1-1/4˝
A-2009-6 3/4˝ x 1/8˝ A-2009-17 2˝ x 3/4˝
A-2009-7 3/4˝ x 1/4˝ A-2009-18 2˝ x 1˝
A-2009-8 3/4˝ x 3/8˝ A-2009-19 2˝ x 1-1/4˝
A-2009-9 3/4˝ x 1/2˝ A-2009-20 2˝ x 1-1/2˝
A-2009-10 1˝ x 1/2˝ A-2009-21 3˝ x 2˝
A-2009-11 1˝ x 3/4˝
Misc.

463 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p464 7/26/06 8:28 AM Page 1

Nylon Fittings
Series A-2010 Reducing Nipples: Series A-2011 Nipples: Male Pipe
Male Pipe Thread Thread by Male Pipe Thread
MODELS MODELS
Model No. Male NPT x Male NPT Model No. Male NPT x Male NPT
A-2010-1 1/4˝ x 1/8˝ A-2011-1 1/8˝ x 1/8˝
A-2010-2 3/8˝ x 1/8˝ A-2011-2 1/4˝ x 1/4˝
A-2010-3 3/8˝ x 1/4˝ A-2011-3 3/8˝ x 3/8˝
A-2010 A-2011 A-2010-4 1/2˝ x 1/4˝ A-2011-4 1/2˝ x 1/2˝
A-2010-5 1/2˝ x 3/8˝
A-2010-6 3/4˝ x 3/8˝
A-2010-7 3/4˝ x 1/2˝

Series A-2012 Couplings: Female Series A-2013 Elbows: Hose Barb

Pipe Thread MODELS
MODELS Model No. HB x HB
Model No. Female NPT x Female NPT A-2013-1 1/4˝ x 1/4˝
A-2012 A-2013 A-2012-1 1/2˝ x 1/2˝ A-2013-2 3/8˝ x 1/4˝
A-2012-2 3/4˝ x 3/4˝
A-2012-3 1˝ x 1˝

Series A-2014 Hose Menders w/o Series A-2015 Hose Menders with
Center Stop Center Stop
MODELS MODELS
Model No. HB x HB Model No. HB x HB
A-2014-1 1/4˝ x 3/16˝ A-2015-1 1/4˝ x 1//8˝
A-2014-2 5/16˝ x 5/16˝ A-2015-2 1/4˝ x 1/4˝
A-2014 A-2015

Series A-2016 Tees: Hose Barb Series A-2017 Tees: Male Pipe
MODELS Thread by Hose Barb
MODELS
Model No. HB(1) x HB(2&3)
A-2016-1 1/4˝ x 1/4˝ Model No. Male NPT (1) x HB (2&3)
A-2016-2 1/4˝ x 3/8˝ A-2017-1 1/8˝ x 1/4˝
A-2016 A-2017 A-2017-2 1/4˝ x 1/4˝
A-2017-3 1/4˝ x 3/8˝
A-2017-4 1/4˝ x 1/2˝
Misc.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 464
p465 7/26/06 8:29 AM Page 1

Stainless Steel Fittings

Stainless Steel Fittings Series A-2018 316 SS Hose Barb:
Male Pipe Thread
Our stainless steel fittings and pipe nip-
ples are made from 304 or 316 SS and are MODELS
rated at 150 PSI. Model No. Male NPT x HB
A-2018-1 1/4˝ x 1/4˝
A-2018-2 1/4˝ x 3/8˝

A-2018
Series A-2019 Cap: Female Pipe Series A-2020 Cross: Female Pipe
Thread Thread
MODELS MODELS
Model No. Female NPT Model No. Female NPT
A-2019-1 1/8˝ A-2020-1 1/8˝
A-2019-2 1/4˝ A-2020-2 1/4˝
A-2019
A-2020 A-2019-3 3/8˝ A-2020-3 3/8˝
A-2019-4 1/2˝ A-2020-4 1/2˝
A-2019-5 3/4˝ A-2020-5 3/4˝
A-2019-6 1˝ A-2020-6 1˝

Series A-2021 Coupling: Female Series A-2022 Elbow: Female Pipe

Pipe Thread Thread, 90°
MODELS MODELS
Model No. Female NPT Model No. Female NPT
A-2021-1 1/8˝ x 1/8˝ A-2022-1 1/8˝ x 1/8˝
A-2021-2 1/4˝ x 1/4˝ A-2022-2 1/4˝ x 1/4˝
A-2021 A-2022 A-2021-3 3/8˝ x 3/8˝ A-2022-3 3/8˝ x 3/8˝
A-2021-4 1/2˝ x 1/2˝ A-2022-4 1/2˝ x 1/2˝
A-2021-5 3/4˝ x 3/4˝ A-2022-5 3/4˝ x 3/4˝
A-2021-6 1˝ x 1˝ A-2022-6 1˝ x 1˝
A-2021-7 1-1/4˝ x 1-1/4˝ A-2022-7 1-1/4˝ x 1-1/4˝
A-2021-8 1-1/2˝ x 1-1/2˝ A-2022-8 1-1/2˝ x 1-1/2˝
A-2021-9 2˝ x 2˝ A-2022-9 2˝ x 2˝
A-2021-10 3˝ x 3˝ A-2022-10 3˝ x 3˝

A-2023 A-2024
Series A-2023 Elbow: Female Pipe Series A-2024 Reducer Bushings
Thread, 45° MODELS
MODELS Model No. Male NPT x Female NPT
Model No. Female NPT A-2024-1 1/4˝ x 1/8˝
A-2023-1 1/8˝ x 1/8˝ A-2024-2 3/8˝ x 1/4˝
A-2023-2 1/4˝ x 1/4˝ A-2024-3 1/2˝ x 1/4˝
A-2023-3 3/8˝ x 3/8˝ A-2024-4 1/2˝ x 3/8˝
A-2023-4 1/2˝ x 1/2˝ A-2024-5 3/4˝ x 1/4˝
A-2023-5 3/4˝ x 3/4˝ A-2024-6 3/4˝ x 1/2˝
A-2023-6 1˝ x 1˝ A-2024-7 1˝ x 1/2˝
A-2023-7 1-1/4˝ x 1-1/4˝ A-2024-8 1˝ x 3/4˝
A-2023-8 1-1/2˝ x 1-1/2˝ A-2024-9 1-1/4˝ x 3/4˝
A-2023-9 2˝ x 2˝ A-2024-10 1-1/4˝ x 1˝
A-2023-10 3˝ x 3˝ A-2024-11 1-1/2˝ x 3/4˝
A-2024-12 1-1/2˝ x 1˝
A-2024-13 1-1/2˝ x 1-1/4˝
A-2024-14 2˝ x 1˝
A-2024-15 2˝ x 1-1/4˝
A-2024-16 2˝ x 1-1/2˝
A-2024-17 3˝ x 2˝
Misc.

465 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p466 7/26/06 8:30 AM Page 1

Stainless Steel Fittings

Series A-2025 Street Elbow: Female Series A-2026 Tee: Female Pipe
Pipe Thread by Male Pipe Thread Thread
MODELS MODELS
Model No. Female NPT x Male NPT Model No. Female NPT
A-2025-1 1/8˝ x 1/8˝ A-2026-1 1/8˝
A-2025-2 1/4˝ x 1/4˝ A-2026-2 1/4˝
A-2025-3 3/8˝ x 3/8˝ A-2026-3 3/8˝
A-2026
A-2025-4 1/2˝ x 1/2˝ A-2026-4 1/2˝
A-2025
A-2025-5 3/4˝ x 3/4˝ A-2026-5 3/4˝
A-2025-6 1˝ x 1˝ A-2026-6 1˝
A-2025-7 1-1/4˝ x 1-1/4˝ A-2026-7 1-1/4˝
A-2025-8 1-1/2˝ x 1-1/2˝ A-2026-8 1-1/2˝
A-2025-9 2˝ x 2˝ A-2026-9 2˝
A-2025-10 3˝ x 3˝ A-2026-10 3˝

A-2027 A-2028

Series A-2027 Union: Female Pipe Series A-2028 Nipple: Male Pipe
Thread Thread
MODELS MODELS
Model No. Female NPT Model No. Male NPT x Length Model No. Male NPT x Length
A-2027-1 1/8˝ A-2028-1 1/8˝ x 3/4˝ A-2028-15 3/4˝ x 2˝
A-2027-2 1/4˝ A-2028-2 1/8˝ x 1-1/2˝ A-2028-16 1˝ x 1-1/2˝
A-2027-3 3/8˝ A-2028-3 1/8˝ x 2˝ A-2028-17 1˝ x 2˝
A-2027-4 1/2˝ A-2028-4 1/4˝ x 7/8˝ A-2028-18 1-1/4˝ x 1-5/8˝
A-2027-5 3/4˝ A-2028-5 1/4˝ x 1-1/2˝ A-2028-19 1-1/4˝ x 2˝
A-2027-6 1˝ A-2028-6 1/4˝ x 2˝ A-2028-20 1-1/2˝ x 1-3/4˝
A-2027-7 1-1/4˝ A-2028-7 3/8˝ x 1˝ A-2028-21 1-1/2˝ x 2˝
A-2027-8 1-1/2˝ A-2028-8 3/8˝ x 1-1/2˝ A-2028-22 2˝ x 2˝
A-2027-9 2˝ A-2028-9 3/8˝ x 2˝ A-2028-23 2˝ x 2-1/2˝
A-2027-10 3˝ A-2028-10 1/2˝ x 1-1/8˝ A-2028-24 3˝ x 2-5/8˝
A-2028-11 1/2˝ x 1-1/2˝ A-2028-25 3˝ x 3˝
A-2028-12 1/2˝ x 2˝ A-2028-26 4˝ x 2-7/8˝
A-2028-13 3/4˝ x 1-3/8˝ A-2028-27 4˝ x 4˝
A-2028-14 3/4˝ x 1-1/2˝

Misc.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 466
p467 7/26/06 8:31 AM Page 1

Filters, Regulators and Lubricators

For Pneumatic Air Applications
Series F Filters Series R Regulators Series L Lubricators

F1 F2 R1 R2
L1 L2

2-31/64
(63.10)

41/64
(16.27) PORT SIZE
3-1/2
1-21/32 (88.90) PORT SIZ
(42.07)
PORT
SIZE PORT SIZE
25/64 (9.92)
5-9/16 PORT SIZE
27/32 (141.29) 7-9/64
5-15/16 PORT SIZE (181.37)
(150.81) (21.43) PORT SIZE
1-21/32 1-37/64 PORT SIZE
4-3/64 (42.07) (40.08) 5-7/64
(102.79) SERIES 1 1-17/64 (129.78)
(32.15)

2-31/64 2-31/64
(63.10) (63.10)
SERIES 2

SERIES 1 SERIES 2
SERIES 1 SERIES 2

F Series Filters keep air and pneumatic systems operating SPECIFICATIONS

Size 1 Size 2
cleanly and efficiently. Port sizes, filter elements, and drain GENERAL
options available to service broad application requirements. Service Air Air
Temperature Limits 41 to 140°F (5 to 60°C) 41 to 140°F (5 to 60°C)
R Series Pressure Regulators offer economic prices and high Maximum Supply Pressure 165 psig 165 psig
performance pressure regulation. Configurable units offer a vari- FILTERS
Process Connection 1/8˝, 1/4˝ NPT 1/4˝, 3/8˝, 1/2˝ NPT
ety of fitting and port sizes, and supply pressures ranging from 10 Filtration (micron) 5µ, 25µ, 50µ 5µ, 25µ, 50µ
to 120 psig. The non-rising adjustment knob allows for simple and Maximum Supply Pressure 165 psi 165 psi
precise monitoring of pressure and features push-pull lock ring. Drain Manual/Semi-Auto Manual/Semi-Auto
Bowl Capacity 0.75 inch3 2.75 inch3
Flow (based on 100 psi inlet 55, 85 SCFM 120, 120, 120 SCFM
L Series Lubricators maintain safe operation and longevity of
pressure w/ 50 micron filter)
pneumatic systems. Top plug permits filling without removing Construction Body: Aluminum; Filter: Sintered Bronze
bowl or disconnecting air-lines. Adjustable drop rate fits any REGULATORS
application. Process Connection 1/8˝, 1/4˝ NPT 1/4˝, 3/8˝, 1/2˝ NPT
Effect of Supply Pressure <0.2 psig <0.2 psig
Variation (25 psig) on Outlet
Pressure
Exhaust Capacity (5 psig <0.25 SCFM <0.25 SCFM
above 20 psig set point)
MODELS Flow Capacity at 100 psig 40, 60 SCFM 90, 120, 120 SCFM
Model Process Supply and 70 psig Outlet
Number Connection Filtration Drain Output Pressure Ranges 0-10 psig 0-10 psig
F1-150M 1/8˝ NPT 50 microns Manual 0-30 psig 0-30 psig
1/4˝ NPT 0-60 psig 0-60 psig
F2-250M 50 microns Manual 0-120 psig 0-120 psig
Total Air Consumption @ 0.3 SCFH 0.3 SCFH
Model Process Pressure Maximum Output
Number Connection Range Construction Body: Aluminum; Bowl: Polycarbonate
R1-1120 1/8˝ NPT 120 psi LUBRICATORS
R2-2120 1/4˝ NPT 120 psi Process Connection 1/8˝, 1/4˝ NPT 1/4˝, 3/8˝, 1/2˝ NPT
Lubrication Mist Mist
Model Process Bowl Capacity 1.22 inch3 5.18 inch3
Number Connection Flow (based on 100 psi inlet 55, 115 SCFM 125, 125, 125 SCFM
L1-1 1/8˝ NPT pressure)
Construction Body: Aluminum
Misc.

L2-2 1/4˝ NPT

467 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p468 7/26/06 8:32 AM Page 1

FEATURES
Filter psig BAR REGULATED PRESSURE VS. FLOW
80 5.5
• Polycarbonate bowl with metal guard
• Filter options 5µ, 25µ, 50µ 70 4.8
• Manual, semi-automatic or automatic drain options 60 4.1

50 3.4
Regulator
• Rolling diaphragm 40 2.8
• Panel/pipe/bracket mountable 30 2.1
• Aluminum body, polycarbonate bonnet and knob
• Non-rising adjustment knob with push-pull lock ring 20 1.4

10 0.7
Lubricator 0 0
1-1/8˝ NPT 1-1/4˝ NPT 2-1/4˝ NPT 2-3/8˝ NPT 2-1/2˝ NPT
• Field serviceable polycarbonate bowl SCFM 0 20.0 40.0 60.0 80.0 100.0 120.00
• Polycarbonate bowl includes metal guard and top plug LPM 0 575 1150 1700 2265 2875 3450
• Adjustable drip rate

F Series Filters
Function F Filter
1 1 Size
Body Style
2 2 Size
–
1 1/8˝ NPT (1 Size only)
Process
Connection 2 1/4˝ NPT
3 3/8˝ NPT (2 Size only)
4 1/2˝ NPT (2 Size only)
50 50 micron filter
Filtration
25 25 micron filter
05 5 micron filter

Drain M Manual drain

S Semi-Automatic drain
A Automatic drain (2 Size only)

R Series Pressure Regulators

Function R Regulator
Body Style 1 1 Size
2 2 Size
–

Process 1 1/8˝ NPT (1 Size only)

Connection 2 1/4˝ NPT
3 3/8˝ NPT (2 Size only)
4 1/2˝ NPT (2 Size only)
010 0-10 psi outlet pressure
Pressure Range
030 0-30 psi outlet pressure
060 0-60 psi outlet pressure
120 0-120 psi outlet pressure

L Series Lubricators
Function L Lubricator
Body Style 1 1 Size
2 2 Size
–
Process 1 1/8˝ NPT (1 Size only)
Connection 2 1/4˝ NPT
3 3/8˝ NPT (2 Size only)
4 1/2˝ NPT (2 Size only)
Misc.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 468
p469 7/26/06 8:33 AM Page 1

Filters, Regulators and Lubricators

Combination Packages For Pneumatic Air Applications
Series FR Filter-Regulator Series FRL Filter-Regulator-Lubricator

5-49/64
(146.45) 1-13/64 8-25/64
(30.56) (213.12)
FR1 FR2 PORT 1-31/32
SIZE (50.01)
PORT SIZE 1-25/32 PORT
1-15/32 PORT (45.25) SIZE
(37.31) SIZE

61/64 2-9/64
(54.37)
5-7/64 (24.21) 7-9/64
(181.37)
(129.79)
3-7/8 7/32
(98.43) (5.58)

6-3/8 9/32 9/32

(161.93) PORT SIZE (2.82) (2.82)
15/64 15/64 2-17/32
(5.95) (5.95) (64.29)

9-7/16 SERIES 2
(239.71) SERIES 1
PORT SIZE

1-23/32
1-9/32 (43.66)
1-37/64 (32.54)
(40.08)
Ø1-33/64
Ø1 (Ø38.50)
SERIES 1
1-17/64 (Ø25.40) 1-13/64
(30.60)
(32.15) 25/64 TYP
5/64 TYP (9.92 TYP) 17/64
17/64 (6.75)
(1.98 TYP) (6.75)
SERIES 2

The Series FR Filter-Regulators are combination units that SPECIFICATIONS

provide maximum options in minimal space. Constructed of alu- Size 1 Size 2
minum and polycarbonate, these rugged units offer the same air GENERAL
pressure regulation features as our standard R Series units side- Service Air Air
Temperature Limits 41 to 140°F (5 to 60°C) 41 to 140°F (5 to 60°C)
by-side with the convenience of an F Series filter. Unscrewing the Maximum Supply Pressure 165 psig 165 psig
adjustment knob and retaining flange easily adapts panel or FILTERS
bracket mounting. Process Connection 1/8˝, 1/4˝ NPT 1/4˝, 3/8˝, 1/2˝ NPT
Filtration (micron) 5µ, 25µ, 50µ 5µ, 25µ, 50µ
The Series FRL takes the FR Series to the next level by includ- Maximum Supply Pressure 165 psi 165 psi
Drain Manual/Semi-Auto Manual/Semi-Auto
ing an L Series lubricator. The package is completely installed Bowl Capacity 0.75 inch3 2.75 inch3
and ready to go right out of the box. Flow (based on 100 psi inlet 55, 85 SCFM 120, 120, 120 SCFM
pressure w/ 50 micron filter)
Construction Body: Aluminum; Filter: Sintered Bronze
REGULATORS
Process Connection 1/8˝, 1/4˝ NPT 1/4˝, 3/8˝, 1/2˝ NPT
Effect of Supply Pressure <0.2 psig <0.2 psig
Variation (25 psig) on Outlet
Pressure
Exhaust Capacity (5 psig <0.25 SCFM <0.25 SCFM
above 20 psig set point)
Flow Capacity at 100 psig 40, 60 SCFM 90, 120, 120 SCFM
Supply and 70 psig Outlet
MODELS Output Pressure Ranges 0-10 psig 0-10 psig
0-30 psig 0-30 psig
Model Process Pressure 0-60 psig 0-60 psig
Number Connection Range Filtration 0-120 psig 0-120 psig
FR1-11205OM 1/8˝ NPT 120 psi 50 microns Total Air Consumption @ 0.3 SCFH 0.3 SCFH
FR2-21205OM 1/4˝ NPT 120 psi 50 microns Maximum Output
FRL1-11205OM 1/8˝ NPT 120 psi Construction Body: Aluminum; Bowl: Polycarbonate
50 microns
LUBRICATORS
FRL2-21205OM 1/4˝ NPT 120 psi 50 microns Process Connection 1/8˝, 1/4˝ NPT 1/4˝, 3/8˝, 1/2˝ NPT
Lubrication Mist Mist
Bowl Capacity 1.22 inch3 5.18 inch3
Flow (based on 100 psi inlet 55, 115 SCFM 125, 125, 125 SCFM
pressure)
Construction Body: Aluminum
Misc.

469 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p470 7/26/06 8:54 AM Page 1

FEATURES
FR Filter Regulator Combo
psig BAR REGULATED PRESSURE VS. FLOW
80 5.5
• Aluminum and polycarbonate construction 70 4.8
• Manual, semi-auto or autodrain available
60 4.1
• 1 Size has polycarbonate bowl, 2 Size has polycarbonate
50 3.4
bowl with metal guard
• Non-rising adjustment knob with push-pull lock ring feature 40 2.8

• Panel or bracket mounting 30 2.1

20 1.4
FRL Package 10 0.7
• All-in-one package ready for installation 0 0
1-1/8˝ NPT 1-1/4˝ NPT 2-1/4˝ NPT 2-3/8˝ NPT 2-1/2˝ NPT
• Automatic drain SCFM 0 20.0 40.0 60.0 80.0 100.0 120.00
• 50µ filter standard (others available) LPM 0 575 1150 1700 2265 2875 3450

• 120 psi regulator & 1/8˝ NPT on 1 Size

120 psi regulator & 1/4˝ NPT on 2 Size

Filters - Regulators & Filters-Regulators-Lubricators

FR Filter - Regulator
Function
FRL Filter - Regulator - Lubricator
1 1 Size
Body Style
2 2 Size
–
1 1/8˝ NPT (1 Size only)
Process
Connection 2 1/4˝ NPT
3 3/8˝ NPT (2 Size only)
4 1/2˝ NPT (2 Size only)
010 0-10 psi outlet pressure
Pressure Range 030 0-30 psi outlet pressure
060 0-60 psi outlet pressure
120 0-120 psi outlet pressure
50 50 micron filter
Filtration 25 25 micron filter
05 5 micron filter
M Manual drain (standard)
Drain S Semi-Automatic drain
A Automatic drain (2 Series only)

Misc.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 470
p471 7/26/06 8:55 AM Page 1

Technical Reference Books

HVAC Engineer’s Handbook
Eleventh Edition
By Fred Porges, 2001
• Full comparative summary of all air conditioning techniques
• Provides must have information for engineers, technicians, and students
dealing with HVAC

This handbook is widely known as a highly useful and definitive reference for HVAC engineers and
technicians alike, and those who work on domestic hot and cold-water services, gas supply, and steam
services. Newly updated on natural ventilation, ventilation rates, free cooling and nighttime cooling.
Order Number: BK-0001
ISBN: 0750646063, Pages: 320, Hardback

HVAC Fundamentals
Volume 1: Heating Systems, Furnaces, and Boilers
Fourth Edition
By James E. Brumbaugh, 2004
• Review the basics of installation, wiring, and troubleshooting for different HVAC
systems
• Compare the economy and efficiency of various fuel types
• Find formula cross references, data tables with conversions, and listings of trade
organizations and equipment manufacturers

Whether you’re installing, servicing, repairing, or troubleshooting an old or new heating system,
you’ll find what you’re looking for, from wood and coal furnace maintenance to new calculations and
the latest environmental technologies and regulations.
Order Number: BK-0005
ISBN: 0764542060, Pages: 698, Paperback

HVAC Fundamentals
Volume 2: Heating System Components, Gas and Oil Burners, and Automatic Controls
Fourth Edition
By James E. Brumbaugh, 2004
• Install and repair thermostats, humidistats, automatic controls, and oil or gas
burner controls
• Review pipes, pipe fittings, piping details, valve installation, and duct systems
• Learn the best ways to handle hydronics and steam line controls
• Deal with solid fuels and understand coal firing methods

This guidebook covers everything you need to know to install, maintain, and repair the components
that run, regulate, and fuel both old and new systems.
Order Number: BK-0006
ISBN: 0764542079, Pages: 655, Paperback

HVAC Fundamentals
Volume 3: Air Conditioning, Heat Pumps, and Distribution Systems
Fourth Edition
By James E. Brumbaugh, 2004
• Learn to install and service today’s popular electronic air cleaners and filters
• Service less common heating systems such as coal-fired furnaces
• Install, maintain, and repair humidifiers and dehumidifiers
• Handle radiators, convectors, and baseboard heating units

This book provides a comprehensive, hands-on guide to installing, servicing, and repairing all basic
air-conditioning systems. It also includes complete coverage of specialized heating units such as radi-
ant heating systems, fans, exhaust systems, air filters, and more.
Order Number: BK-0007
Misc.

ISBN: 0764542087, Pages: 676, Paperback

471 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p472 7/26/06 8:56 AM Page 1

HVAC Pocket Reference

By James Brumbaugh, 2005
Your one-stop reference for:
• Conversion tables, electrical formulas, pipe thread standards, and motor ratings
• Fuel cost comparisons
• Offset calculations and valve details
• Gas and oil burner specifications
• Pipe performance data
• Weather and design factors affecting heating/cooling calculations
• Troubleshooting guidelines

When you need to check specs, confirm measurements, or make a quick metric conversion on the job, find the
answers quickly and easily – right in your pocket.
Order Number: BK-0013
ISBN: 0-7645-8810-9, Pages: 370, Paperback

Pumps & Hydraulics

Sixth Edition
By Rex Miller & Mark Richard Miller, 2004
•Learn to install and service pumps for nearly any application
•Service and maintain individual pumping devices that use smaller motors
•See how pumps are used in robotics, taking advantage of hydraulics to lift
larger, heavier loads
•Know the appropriate servicing schedule for different types of pumping
equipment

This handbook is widely known as a highly useful and definitive reference for HVAC engineers and technicians
alike, and those who work on domestic hot and cold-water services, gas supply, and steam services. Newly updat-
ed on natural ventilation, ventilation rates, free cooling and nighttime cooling.
Order Number: BK-0009
ISBN: 0764571168, Pages: 556, Paperback

Air Conditioning: Home & Commercial

Fifth Edition
By Rex Miller & Mark Richard Miller, 2004

• Information on installing and maintaining both residential and commercial systems

• Understand the physics of air conditioning and filtration
• Make accurate temperature measurements using various methods and devices
• Work with room air conditioners, water cooling systems, and auto air conditioning
• Learn about refrigerants, compressors, condensers, evaporators, and AC motors

Whether you’re an AC professional, an independent repair technician, or a cost-conscious homeowner, this guide-
book contains everything you need. It includes information on installing, servicing, maintaining, and trou-
bleshooting.
Order Number: BK-0008
ISBN: 0764571109, Pages: 504, Paperback

Refrigeration: Home & Commercial

Fifth Edition
By Rex Miller & Mark Richard Miller, 2004
• Know how different types of refrigerants are used and how to handle them safely
• Perform routine maintenance on various types of compressors
• Test for leakage and resolve common problems such as freeze-ups
• Repair and replace refrigerator cabinet parts
• Troubleshoot common problems with home freezers
• Breakdown of electrically driven and absorption-type refrigeration units
• Learn to troubleshoot and maintain the wide variety of motors used in cooling devices
• Service and repair automatic icemakers, water coolers, and display cases

Whether you’re a student, apprentice, cost-conscious homeowner, or skilled technician, this reference manual will
provide you with valuable information. Beginning with the essential physics and math, it provides a complete
course in maintaining, troubleshooting, and repairing both new and vintage refrigeration systems for home and
light industry.
Order Number: BK-0010
Misc.

ISBN: 0764571176, Pages: 738, Paperback

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 472
p473 7/26/06 8:57 AM Page 1

Technical Reference Books

Plant Engineer’s Handbook
Edited by R. Keith Mobley, 2001
• Produced in association with Plant Engineering Magazine and created by
leading authors and editor
• International perspective with dual units and regulations

Offers comprehensive coverage of an enormous range of subjects, which are of vital interest to the
plant engineer and anyone connected with industrial operations or maintenance. Includes plant site
selection, basic facilities, lubrication, corrosion, energy conservation, maintenance, insurance mat-
ters, materials handling, financial concerns, and environmental considerations.
Order Number: BK-0003
ISBN: 0750673281, Pages: 2400, Hardback

Instrumentation Reference Book

Third Edition
Edited by Walt Boyes, 2002
• Great reference for anyone in the process, control and instrumentation
fields where measurements are essential

This reference book is a comprehensive and authoritative collection of technical information, which
is of direct value to instrumentation and control engineers as well as instrumentation technicians and
users. Covers topics such as measurement of flow, viscosity, length, strain, level, volume, vibration,
force, density, pressure, radiation, particle size, temperature, noise, optical, and chemical composi-
tion. Also includes instrumentation systems and technical references.
Order Number: BK-0002
ISBN: 0750671238, Pages: 1062, Hardback

Guide to the 2005 National Electrical Code

By Paul Rosenberg, 2004
•Understand the terms and rules for installation set forth in the NEC
•Review each section of the NEC that applies to electrical installation
•Learn about the significant changes in bonding and grounding requirements
•Explore the expanded section covering communications equipment

This guide extracts the necessary information for installers and arranges it for easy access, high-
lighting the changes so you can quickly spot what’s new. If you’re a novice or even a veteran, you’ll
want this book with you on every job.
Order Number: BK-0012
ISBN: 0764578022, Pages: 816, Paperback

Electrician’s Pocket Manual

Second Edition
By Paul Rosenberg, 2003
• Explains updated maintenance and construction standards
• Provides details on motors, controllers, and circuits
• Examines electronic components and communications wiring
• Offers guidelines for dealing with hazardous location wiring
• Covers generators, mechanical power transmission, and electrical power distribution

The Electrician’s Pocket Manual is packed with charts, conversions, photographs, diagrams, code
standards, and other information you need on the job. It even includes a chapter on tools and safe-
ty. This on-the-job reference will help you find answers quickly and easily.

Order Number: BK-0011

ISBN: 0764541994, Pages: 358, Paperback
Misc.

473 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

p474 7/26/06 8:58 AM Page 1

Discount Schedule and Conditions of Sale

INDUSTRIAL DISCOUNT SCHEDULE
NOTE:
Each item (model, range, part number, etc.) is discounted QUANTITY DISCOUNTS
independently. In an order for more than one item, differ- OF EACH
ent items cannot be combined to earn a greater discount. ITEM STANDARD SCHEDULE B
Most items are subject to STANDARD schedule at right.
Prices followed by the symbol b are subject to discounts 1-24 Net Net
per schedule B. 25-99 5% Net
Certain items such as repairs, repair parts, EXPL and WP 100-249 10% 5%
housings, special scale and tag charges are priced at net 250-499 15% 10%
and earn no discount.
500-Up 20% 15%

Terms and Conditions of Sale

1. Prices and Specifications are subject to change without notice.
2. Shipping dates are approximate. They are dependent upon credit approval and subject to delays beyond our control.
3. Terms: Net 30 days to companies with established credit rating. In the event Buyer fails to fulfill previous terms of
payment, or in case Seller shall have any doubt at any time as to Buyer’s financial responsibility, Seller may decline to
make further deliveries except upon receipt of cash in advance or other special arrangements.
4. Liability Point and Title: All material is sold F.O.B. Factory (Domestic) / FCA Free Carrier (International). Title to all
material sold shall pass to buyer upon delivery by Seller to carrier at shipping point.
5. State and Local Taxes: Any taxes which the Seller may be required to pay or collect upon or with respect to the
sale, purchase, delivery, use or consumption of any of the material covered hereby shall be for the account of the Buyer
and shall be added to the purchase price.
6. Special tooling, dies, silk screens and molds acquired specially to produce goods for Buyer remain the property
of Dwyer Instruments, Inc., and may not be removed. They will be maintained in good condition for a minimum peri-
od of three years from the date of the original purchase order.
7. Export Orders: Terms, discounts and conditions of sale for purchase orders originating or for shipment to final des-
tinations outside the U.S.A. will be furnished upon request.
8. Limited Warranty: The Seller warrants all Dwyer instruments and equipment to be free from defects in workmanship
or material under normal use and service for a period of one year from date of shipment. Liability under this warranty is
limited to repair or replacement F.O.B. Factory (Domestic) / FCA Free Carrier (International) of any parts which prove to
be defective within that time or repayment of the purchase price at the Seller’s option provided the instruments have been
returned, transportation prepaid, within one year from date of purchase. All technical advice, recommendations and ser-
vices are based on technical data and information which the Seller believes to be reliable and are intended for use by per-
sons having skill and knowledge of the business, at their own discretion. In no case is Seller liable beyond replacement
of equipment F.O.B. Factory (Domestic) / FCA Free Carrier (International) or the full purchase price. This warranty does
not apply if the maximum ratings label is removed or if the instrument or equipment is abused, altered, used at ratings
above the maximum specified, or otherwise misused in any way.
THIS EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF AND EXCLUDES ALL OTHER REPRESENTATIONS MADE BY
ADVERTISEMENTS OR BY AGENTS AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, BOTH EXPRESS AND IMPLIED. THERE ARE
NO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR GOODS
COVERED HEREUNDER.
9. Buyer’s Remedies: THE BUYER’S EXCLUSIVE AND SOLE REMEDY ON ACCOUNT OF OR IN RESPECT TO THE
FURNISHING OF NON-CONFORMING OR DEFECTIVE MATERIAL SHALL BE TO SECURE REPLACEMENT THEREOF
AS AFORESAID. THE SELLER SHALL NOT IN ANY EVENT BE LIABLE FOR THE COST OF ANY LABOR EXPENDED
ON ANY SUCH MATERIAL OR FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
TO ANYONE BY REASON OF THE FACT THAT IT SHALL HAVE BEEN NON-CONFORMING OR DEFECTIVE.
10. Acceptance: All orders shall be subject to the terms and conditions contained or referred to in the Seller’s quo-
tation, acknowledgment, and to those listed here and to no others whatsoever. No waiver, alteration or modification
of these terms and conditions shall be binding unless in writing and signed by an executive officer of the Seller. All or-
Misc.

ders are subject to written acceptance by Dwyer Instruments, Inc., Michigan City, Indiana, U.S.A.

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 474
p475 dom/intl 7/26/06 8:59 AM Page 1

How to Order
Online: For Product Information:
Internet:
www.dwyer-inst.com
www.dwyer-inst.com www.dust-controls.com
View your orders using our new online feature, www.love-controls.com
Check Order Status . Order quantity, model number, www.mercoid.com
schedule/shipment and tracking information is available. View list- www.proximitycontrols.com
ings of open and closed orders for the past 30 working days. International:
United Kingdom: www.dwyer-inst.co.uk
Australia: www.dwyer-inst.com.au
To place orders and for Customer Service and Technical Support
e-mail:
General Info: [email protected]
Literature: [email protected]
Technical: [email protected]
Quotes: [email protected]
Phone:
P r o m p t S h i p m e n t s : Dwyer Instruments, Inc. is located in
(800) 872-9141 the heart of industrial America, with ready access to all forms of
(219) 879-8000 transportation. Most orders are shipped the same day that they are
received. Expedited shipments and overnight deliveries are avail-
able.

I n t e r n a t i o n a l C u s t o m e r s : Please note that prices

Fax: in this publication are quoted in U.S. dollars, FCA (Free Carrier).
Michigan City, Indiana and do not include costs of freight, duty, cus-
(219) 872-9057 toms fees, exchange rate, etc. For further information, please
phone, fax, or e-mail your inquiries to Dwyer, or contact your near-
est Dwyer International Distributor.

Australia United Kingdom

Dwyer Instruments (Australia) Pty. Ltd. Dwyer Instruments (UK) Ltd
Unit 1, 11 Waverley Drive Unit 16, The Wye Estate, London Road
Unanderra NSW 2526 High Wycombe, Bucks HP11 1LH
Phone: 61 2 4272-2055 Phone: (+44) (0)1494-461707
Fax: 61 2 4272-4055 Fax: (+44) (0)1494-465102

Credit Card Shipping & Handling Charges

Credit Cards: Dwyer Instruments, Inc. accepts Visa® and MasterCard®.

DOLLAR AMOUNT CURRENT CHARGE

up to $50.00 $7.00
50.00 - 100.00 8.25
100.01 - 150.00 10.00
150.01 - 200.00 11.00
200.01 - 250.00 11.25 ADDERS:
250.01 - 300.00 12.75 Next Day Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$25.00
300.01 - 350.00 13.00 Saturday Delivery . . . . . . .40.00 (includes next day air)
350.01 - 400.00 13.75 Federal Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50.00
Above 400.00 consult factory WW Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200.00
Misc.

475 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

pg476intl 7/26/06 1:47 PM Page 1

International Distributors
ARGENTINA ONTARIO Kingger Science & Tech Co Ltd
Equitecnica S.A. Davis Controls Ltd. (Head Office) ShiJiJingDian B1202,
Sanchez De Loria 1852/54 2200 Bristol Circle No.161 YanTa West Road,YanTa District,
Capital Federal (1241) Oakville, Ontario, Canada L6H 5R3 Xi'an City, ShanXi Province 710061
Buenos Aires, Argentina Ph: (905) 829-2000 PR China
Ph: (54) 11 4912-4590 Fax: (905) 829-2630 Ph: (86) 298 6695005
Fax: (54) 11 4911-2382 Fax: (86) 298 6695006
Furneco International Inc.
AUSTRALIA 4210 Morris Drive Shanghai Jinshen Industry & Trading Co Ltd
Dwyer Instruments Pty Ltd. Burlington, Ontario, Canada L7L 5L6 Flat D, 2/F 2nd Jinnan Garden
Unit 1, 11 Waverley Drive Ph: (905) 333-6508 No 725 Pujian Road
P.O. Box 359 Fax: (905) 333-6784 Shanghai
Unanderra NSW 2526, Australia ITM-Canada 200127, P R China
Ph: (61) 2 4272-2055 395 Cochrane Drive Ph: (86) 215 8890468
Fax: (61) 2 4272-4055 Markham, Ontario, Canada L3R 9R5 Fax: (86) 215 8890469
AUSTRIA Ph: (905) 947-1771 Shenzhen CATIC Intelligent System Co. Ltd.
AAF- Luftreinigungssysteme Fax: (905) 947-1551 Rm. 1608, Block A, Overseas Decoration Bldg.
Ges.m.b.H Montreal Office: 122 Zhenhua Road
Weyrgrass 8/7 A-1030 Wien Ph: (514) 457-2457 Shenzhen 518031, P R China
Ph: 01 712 59 11 Fax: (514) 457-4329 Ph: (86) 755 8334810
Fax: 01 712 5911-1 Fax: (86) 755 8322230
QUEBEC
Kobold Instruments GmbH Davis Controls COLOMBIA
Gurkgasse 8 6700 Cote de Liesse, Suite 406 Tecnicas Andinas Industriales Ltda.
A-1140 Wien St.-Laurent, Quebec, Canada H4T 1E3 Calle 60 No. 9a-31 Ofc. 305
Ph: (+43) (0) 1 786 53 53 Ph: (514) 737-4817 Apartado 101701
Fax: (+43) (0) 1 786 53 53/10 Fax: (514) 737-9948 Santafe De Bogota D.C.
Columbia, South America
BELGIUM Furneco International, Inc. Ph: (571) 3476494
Industrial Products & Pneumatics 9600 Ignace, Suite J Fax: (571) 3476493
Biesthoevelaan 25 Brossard, Quebec, Canada J4Y 2R4
2610 Wilrijk, Antwerp, Belgium Ph: (450) 444-5885 DENMARK
Ph: (32) 3-830-6111 Fax: (450) 444-9778 Hans Buch
Fax: (32) 3-830-6399 Roskildevej 8-10
ITM 2620 Albertslund
BOLIVIA 20800 Boul Industriel Copenhagen, Denmark
Tritec S.R.L. Ste-Anne-de-Bellevue, Ph: (45) 43685000
AV. Oquendo #N -0452 Piso 4 Quebec, Canada H9X 0A1 Fax: (45) 43685050
Cochabamba, Bolivia Ph: (514) 457-2457
South America Fax: (514) 457-4329 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
Ph: 591 4 4256993 CENTRAL AMERICA, CARIBBEAN ISLANDS Lezcano Hnos., C por A.
Fax: 591 4 4250981 Tomas Cuerda, Inc. Av San Martin #243
PO Box 363307 Santo Domingo, R.D.
BRAZIL Ph: 809 544 1055
Hygro-Therm Comercil E. Tecnica Ltda. San Juan, PR 00936
Ph: (787) 758-7830 Fax: 809 567 5052
Rua Pedro De Rezende, 58
03067-070 Sao Paulo SP, Brazil Fax: (787) 758-5564
ECUADOR
Ph: (55) 11 2930194 CHILE Genesys Control
Fax: (55) 11 2948572 Soltex Chile S.A. Km 16.5 Via a Daule
IEF Instrumentos E Medicao Ltda. Victor Uribe 2260 Calle Cobre y Rosavin
Rua Reims No 386 Casa Verde Providencia, Santiago, Chile P.O. Box 09-01-5175
02517-190-Sao Paulo SP, Brazil Ph: (56) 2 730-4706 Guayaquil, Ecuador
Ph: (55) 11 3966-7055 Fax: (56) 2 730-4800 Ph: 593 4 289 6694
Fax: (55) 11 3966-7489 Fax: 593 4 289 6707
Instaplan S.A.
CANADA Calatayud 361, La Reina FINLAND
ALBERTA Santiago, Chile Stig Wahlstrom OY
ITM Instruments Inc. Ph: (56) 2 7927000 Hannuksentie 1
2301 Premier Way, Suite #144 Fax: (56) 2 7927035 FIN-02270
Sherwood Park, Alberta, Canada T8H 2K8 Espoo, Finland
Ph: (780) 409-9278 CHINA Ph: (358) 9 5024 400
Fax: (780) 409-9279 Beijing Caretid Instrument & Control Fax: (358) 9 4522 735
Solutions Co. Ltd.
Wika Instruments Canada Ltd. 108 East Rd of North 4th Ring FRANCE
3103 Parsons Rd. Chaoyang Dist ADMI
Edmonton, Alberta, Canada T6N 1C8 Beijing, P R China Le Pave Neuf
Ph: (780) 463-7035 Ph: (86) 108 483 2023 51 Rue de L'Universite 93191 Noisy Le
Fax: (780) 462-0017 Fax: (86) 108 483 2025 Grand Cedex
BRITISH COLUMBIA Ph: (33) 1430422214
Beijing Longradar Technology & Trading Co. Fax: (33) 143042375
Furneco International, Inc. Room 512, Shenggu, Bldg/No. 5
#128 12300 Horseshoe Way Shenggubei Road GERMANY
Richmond BC, Canada V7A 4Z1 Dongcheng District Techmark GmbH
Ph: (604) 275-3500 Beijing 100029, P R China Kirschstrasse 20
Fax: (604) 275-9100 Ph: (86) 1064414015 D-80999 Muenchen Germany
Fax: (86) 1064701299 Ph: (49) 898926570
MANITOBA Fax: (49) 8989265733
Flo-Crest Equipment H-D Creation (China) Ltd.
52 Caithness Street Rm 2903, No A Block Times Fortune
Winnipeg, Manitoba, Canada R3H 0V4 No. 6 Shuguang XiLi Chaoyang District
Ph: (204) 633-0682 Beijing 100028, PR China
Fax: (20) 632-5461 Ph: (86) 105 1655558
Misc.

Fax: (86) 105 8677060

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 476
pg477 intl 7/26/06 9:17 AM Page 1

International Distributors
GREECE ITALY Controles Y Valvulas, S.A. de C.V.
Alexandros N. Likoudis & Co. Comhas SRL Av. Paseo de los Leones #1307 Cumbres
36 Epirou Street Via Matteotti 66 Monterrey N.L. 64610, Mexico
10433 Athens, Greece 20092-Cinisello Balsamo (MI), Italy Ph: (52) 81 83464440
Ph: (30) 01 8221352 Ph: (39) 0261298551 Fax: (52) 81 83480594
Fax: (30) 01 8212696 Fax: (39) 0266594921
Distribuidora Industrial Enterprise,
HONG KONG Rometec S.A. de C.V.
The China Engineers, Ltd. Via Alessandro SUR 114 NO. 17-B
No. 8 Fuk Wang St. Minuziano 89 Col. Cove, Delegacion Alvaro Obregon
Yeun Long Industrial Estate 00128 Roma (Loc. Trigoria), Italy CP 01120 Mexico DF, Mexico
New Territories, Hong Kong Ph: (39) 065061635 Ph: (52) 55 30030540
Ph: (852) 2 882 9090 Fax: (39) 065061542 Fax: (52) 55 30030545
Fax: (852) 2 882 9982 Spirax-Sarco s.r.l.
Via per Cinisello, 18 Equipos Refacciones Y Controles
United Controls Ltd. De Occidente SA DE CV
Room 1501, Cornell Centre 20054 Nova Milanese, Italy
Ph: (39) 362 49171 Domicilio Calle Zonzontle 904 Fraac 8 De Julio
50 Wing Tai Road Guadalajara JAL CP 44910, Mexico
Chai Wan, Hong Kong Fax: (39) 362 4917310
Ph: (52) 33 38110202
Ph: (852) 2556 1001 Strumentazione Elett. Industriale SPA Fax: (52) 33 38101080
Fax: (852) 2566 1298 Viale T. Edison 14
20090 Trezzano S/N Ingenieria Y Representciones
ICELAND Integradas S A DE C V
Varmi EHF Milano, Italy
Ph: (39) 2 4842021 Patricio Sanz 1747 102-B
Laugavegi 168 Col Del Valle
P.O. Box 5254 Fax: (39) 2 484202300
CP 03100, Mexico
125 Reykjavik, Iceland Ph: (52) 555 5247474
Ph: (354) 551-7560 JAPAN
Nesstech Inc. Fax: (52) 555 5240338
Fax: (354) 562-4110
2-20-3 Misaki-cho MIDDLE EAST
INDIA Chiyoda-ku Bednayel Electronics LLC
ALM Systems Tokyo 101-0061, Japan P.O. Box 42581
C-5082 Bima Complex Ph: (81) 332637671 Dubai, United Arab Emirates
PLT No 119 Iron & Steel M Kalamboli Fax: (81) 332645564 Ph: (971) 42223105
New Bombay, India Fax: (971) 42223109
Ph: (91) 2225034985 TMEC
Fax: (91) 2225034985 5-402 Hanezawa 69-3 Endo Middle East Trading
Fujisawa City P.O. Box 3577
Savant Instruments Limited Kanagawa 252-0186, Japan Riyadh 11481, Saudi Arabia
418 4th Floor Kuhera Towers Ph: (81) 46 689 0570 Ph: (966) 1 478 2733
Narayanaguda, Fax: (81) 46 689 0571 Fax: (966) 1 476 3458
Hyderabad, 500-029, India
Ph: 91 40 2322 5399 Yamada Kaisha, Ltd. SAMAC Exports Ltd.
Fax: 91 40 2322 4326 50-21, Tobe-Honchou P.O. Box 22
Nishi-Ku Sawtry Huntingdon, Cambridgeshire,
Waaree Instruments Limited Yokohama, 220-0041, Japan PE28 5WR, United Kingdom
36, Damji Shamji Industrial Ph: (81) 45 3234081 Ph: (44) 1487831510
Complex off Mahakali Caves Rd. Fax: (81) 45 3234084 Fax: (44) 1487831510
Andheri East Mumbai 93, India
Ph: 91 22 5696 3030 JORDAN Shree Waaree Middle East LLC
Fax: 91 22 2687 3613 Engineering Dimension Of Technology P.O. Box 46123
P.O. Box 395 Dubai, United Arab Emirates
INDONESIA Amman 11941, Jordan Ph: (971) 4 3552303
PT Swahusada Guna Instrumentas Ph: (962) 65519982 Fax: (971) 4 3552302
Komplek Green Garden Blok A-14 Fax: (962) 65519983 THE NETHERLANDS
No 14 Econosto Nederland B.V.
Jakarta Barat 11520, Indonesia KOREA
Han il Jong Hap Sensor Co. P.O. Box 84164
Ph: 62 215810713 Cypresbaan 63, 2908 LT Capelle a/d Ijssel
Fax: 62 215802767 K.P.O. Box 525
Ma-Dong, 1503, Chung Ang Circulation 3009 CD Rotterdam, The Netherlands
IRELAND Complex, 1259 Ph: (31) 10 2841447
Hanley Controls Kuro-Bon-Dong, Kuro-Gu, Seoul, Korea Fax: (31) 10 2841829
Gortnafleur Ph: (82) 2 26157486 Hitma B.V.
Clonmel Fax: (82) 2 26147486 P.O. Box 175, Anton Philipsweg 1
Co Tipperary, Ireland 1420 AD Uithoorn, The Netherlands
Ph: (353) 5222722 Young Heung Corporation
Suite #139 Ansung Machine Bldg. Ph: (31) 297 514614
Fax: (353) 5222024 Fax: (31) 297-514777
410-13 Shindorim-Dong
Manotherm Limited Kuro-Ku Seoul, Korea NEW ZEALAND
4 Walkinstown Road Ph: (82) 2 26713956 Accurate Measurement (NZ) Ltd.
Dublin 12, Ireland Fax: (82) 2 26716490 P.O. Box 12992
Ph: (353) 1 4522355 16 Botha Road
Fax: (353) 1 4516919 MALAYSIA
P & P Process & Pneumatics Sdn Bhd Penrose, Auckland, New Zealand
ISRAEL 17, Jalan Pantai Jerjak Ph: (64) 9 5790141
Lachman Limited Sungai Nibong Fax: (64) 9 579 1888
P.O. Box 2121 11900 Penang, Malaysia Applied Instruments, Ltd.
21 Atir Yeda St. Ph: (60) 4 659 8286 149 Murua Road
Kfar Saba 44641, Israel Fax: (60) 4 659 8300 P.O. Box 62010
Ph: (972) 9 7668990 Mt. Wellington, Auckland, New Zealand
Fax: (972) 9 7668991 MEXICO
C.D.T. Ph: (64) 9 5792633
Comercializadora De Termometros S.A. de C.V. Fax: (64) 9 5792630
Schumann No: 146 Col Vallejo
C.P. 07870 Mexico D.F., Mexico
Misc.

Ph: (52) 55 517-53-69

Fax: (52) 55 517-7333
477 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au
478 intl 7/26/06 9:18 AM Page 1

Homersham Ltd.
International Distributors
Shipping Address: Tuner Technology Co., Ltd.
P.O. Box 280 REGVA Controls Pte LTD No. 500, Her Ti Road
3 Homersham Place 35 Telok Blangah Rise San Ming Dist.
Burnside, Christchurch, New Zealand Unit #01-285 Kaohsiung, Taiwan ROC
Ph: (64) 3 358 8309 Singapore, 090035 Ph: (886) 7 3488818
Fax: (64) 3 358 2516 Fax: (886) 7 3488819
SOUTH AFRICA
Controltech CC Waterford Corporation
NORWAY 3F, No 186, Sung The Rd
Kaare A. Rustad A/S P.O. Box 70472
Bryanston, 2021, South Africa Taipei, Taiwan ROC
P.O. Box 62-Tveita Ph: (886) 2 27253359
Tvetenveien 152 Ph: (27) 11 7931127
Fax: (27) 11 7933373 Fax: (886) 2 27253020
0671 Oslo, Norway
Ph: (47) 23 126200 Gosair Instruments Pty Ltd THAILAND
Fax: (47) 23 126201 Greenhills Industrial Estate Industrial Electrical Co., Ltd.
Sam Green Road Tunney Ext6 85/2, 85/3 Soi Sot Phin San
PERU Germiston, South Africa Rang Nam Rd
G R Tech S.A. Ph: (27)118226709 Rajthevee, Bangkok 10400, Thailand
Alcanfores 1059 Fax: (27) 118221514 Ph: (66) 2 642 6700
Miraflores Fax: (66) 2 642 4250
Lima 18, Peru Pro-Flow PVN Engineering Company Ltd.
Ph: (511) 4446659 PO Box 856 1532/24-25 Soi Tanuthai
Fax: (511) 2425415 Isando 1600 South Africa Bangkok-Nonthaburi Rd.
NPI Peru S A C Ph: 27 11 923 7145 Bangsue Bangkok 10800, Thailand
Calle Ricardo Aicardi Fax: 27 11923 7146 Ph: (66) 2 9114761
Fax: (66) 2 5873655
361 Surco SPAIN
Lima 33, Peru Equitrol TURKEY
Ph: (511) 2731166 C/ Cristobal Bordiu 35 I T M Muhendislik Van Ve Ticas
Fax: (511) 2731238 Planta 5a-09 Ibrahim Karaoglanoglu Cad.
28003 Madrid, Spain Ethem Zengin Ls Merkezi
PHILIPPINES No: 25 Kat: 3
Lowell Cost Plus Inc. Ph: (34) 91 5351461
Fax: (34) 91 5352195 Seyrantepe-Istanbul, Turkey
2419 Ruhland Ave. #B Ph: (90) 2122787812
Redondo Beach, CA 90278 Tecpesa, S.A. Fax: (90) 2122496989
Ph: (310) 371-8069 C/Pamenides, 8 Edif. 1
Fax: (310) 371-7941 UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
Pol. Emp. La G Bednayel Electronic LLC
USA Office of RCLL Trading Corp. Alcala de Henares P.O. Box 42581
RCLL Trading Corporation 28806 Madrid, Spain Dubai, U A E
No. 29 San Roque Street Ph: (34) 918797975 Ph: (971) 42223105
Mandaluyong Fax: (34) 918832022 Fax: (971) 42223109
Metro Manila, Philippines SWEDEN EuroMechanical & Electrical Contractors
Ph: (63) 2 533-1824 Stig Wahlstrom AB P.O. Box 46153
Fax: (63) 2 531-3684 Box 64 Mohd. Al Hurr.
S-123 22 Al Suwedi Bldg. Tourist Club
Tradepoints Inc. Abu Dhabi, U A E
431 Tabayog Street Farsta, Sweden
Ph: (46) 8 6833300 Ph: (971) 26781133
Mandaluyong City 1550, Philippines Fax: (971) 256781953
Ph: (63) 2 890-9111 Fax: (46) 8 6058174
Fax: (63) 2 899-3306 Shipping Address: Shree Waaree Middle East LLC
Stig Wahlstrom AB P.O. Box 46123
PORTUGAL Marbackagatan 27 Dubai, U A E
MegaControl Ph: (971) 43552303
S-123 43 Farsta, Sweden Fax: (971) 43552302
Ouressa Parque, EDIF 12
AV. Almirante Gago Coutinho SWITZERLAND UNITED KINGDOM
2725-418 Mem Martins CAS Clean-Air-Service AG Dwyer Instruments Limited
Ph: + 351 21 924 5230 Reinluftweg 1 Unit 16 The Wye Estate
Fax: + 351 21 9245239 CH-9630 Wattwil London Road High Wycombe
Ph: 41(0) 71 987 01 01 Buckinghamshire, HP11 1LH United Kingdom
SAUDI ARABIA Fax: 41(0) 71 987 01 11 Ph: (44) 1494 461707
Middle East Trading Fax: (44) 1494 465102
P.O. Box 3577 TAIWAN
Riyadh, Saudi Arabia Pan Instruments Int'l Corporation URUGUAY
Ph: (966) 1 4782733 No. 382, Der-Min Rd. ISAI S.R.L.
Fax: (966) 14763458 Nan-Tzu District Lorenzo Carnelli 1218
Kaohsiung, Taiwan ROC Montevideo 11200
SINGAPORE & S.E. ASIA Ph: (886) 7 3621197 Ph: (598) 2 412-3913
Raco Instruments Pte Ltd. Fax: (886) 7-3621196 Fax: (598) 2 412-2514
P.O. Box 0737 VENEZUELA
Serangoon Central Post Office Sinom Corporation
No. 33, Sec. 4, Chung Hsing Road Comercial AaZ, C.A.
Singapore, 915508 Av. Constitucion Este No. 255
Ph: (65) 6281-0377 Wu Ku Hsiang
San Jose - Maracay
Fax: (65) 6382-4233 Taipei Hsien, Taiwan ROC Edo. Aragua 2103, Venezuela
Ph: (886) 2 22920001 Ph: (58) 23289058876
Shipping Address: Fax: (886) 2 22920199 Fax: (58) 23289058876
Raco Instruments Pte Ltd.
Blk 38 Defu Lane 10 #04-17 TMA Technology Corporation VIETNAM
Singapore, 539215 NO 163 Richang Rd. Minh Hai Viet Co. Ltd.
Gushan Dist. R.414, 92 Nam Ky Khoi Nghia St,
REGVA Controls Pte Ltd. Kaohsiung, Taiwan ROC
P.O. Box #81 Ben Nghe Ward, District 1.
Ph: (886) 7 588 9398 Ho Chi Minh City
Toa Payoh Central Fax: (886) 7 583 2253 Vietnam
Singapore, 913103 Ph: (84) 8-914-4962
Ph: (65) 6272-0633 Fax: (84) 8-914-4963
Misc.

Fax: (65) 6270-2033

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 478
p479 7/26/06 9:03 AM Page 1

Special Models for OEM Requirements - Customized for You

Offered in a wide variety of designs, features and scales.
Special gage designs can be supplied to meet a wide range of OEM re-
quirements and specific application needs from 1⁄10" WC to 12,000 psi.
Custom scales and private brand identification can easily be fur-
nished. These include: additional contacts on Photohelic ®
switch/gage, external replaceable diaphragm on Photohelic®
switch/gage, 80 psi total pressure units, chrome or specially painted
bezels, glass and metal fronts, special ranges and calibrations, dual
scales, reflective scales, special cleaning, OEM identification and
small portable Bourdon tube units. For specific information please
contact our customer service department.

Trademark Acknowledgements
Registered trademarks of Dwyer Instruments, Inc.

Capsuhelic® Flex-Tube® Magnehelic® Mini-Master® Quick-View® Trail-Tail®

Capsu-Photohelic® Flotect® MagneSense® Mini-Photohelic® Rate-Master® Visi-Float®
Digihelic® Iso Verter® Mercoid® Optitrol® Safe-T-Ohm®
Duotect® Lin-E-Aire® Mercoid Control® Photohelic® Slack Tube®
Durablock® Lite Rite® Mercontrol® Plast-A-Vane® Spirahelic®
Dwyer Group® Love® Microtector® Precisor® The Low Pressure
Dwyer® Love Controls® Minihelic® Quick-Scan® People®

Common law marks of Marks registered to companies other ®

Canadian Standards
Association
Dwyer Instruments, Inc. than Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
™ Underwriters Underwriters MasterCard
Laboratories, Inc. Laboratories, Inc. International Inc.
®

Even-Action™ Slide Guide™ FM Global

Underwriters
Hi-Flow™ SLiquid™ Technology Visa International
Laboratories, Inc.
Loop Alarms™ Tell Tale™ Services Association
Lovelink™ Tell Tale Jr.™
Minitactor™ Thermoguide™
Mother Node™ Ultra-Mag™ Alumel® Hoskins Alloys, LLC Open Signal® Easton Controls, Inc.
Pre-Trac™ Ultra-View™ Chromel® Hoskins Alloys, LLC Sensorpak® Easton Controls, Inc.
Proximity™ Vaneometer™ Darina® Shell Oil Compan Sensorpulse® Easton Controls, Inc.
Duracell® The Gillette Company Swagelock® Swagelock Company
S-D™ Eveready® Eveready Battery Company, Inc. Trendreader® ACR Systems, Inc.
Fluorolube® Gabriel Performance Products LLC Tygon® Saint-Gobain Abrasives, Inc.
Commonly used Freon® E.I. DuPont De Nemours and VCR® Swallor Company
marks and graphics Company
Hirschmann® Hirschmann Electronics GMBH
Velcro®
Windows®
Velcro Industries B.V.
Microsoft Corporation
HyperTerminal® Hilgraeve, Inc. Windows NT® Microsoft Corporation
Iglide® Igus Spritzgussteile fur die Industrie Excel® Microsoft Corporation
GmbH Powerpoint® Microsoft Corporation
Inconel® Huntington Alloys Corporation
Lexan® General Electric Company Air FlowTM TSI, Inc.
Loctite® Henkel Corporation No More LeaksTM Permatex
Modbus® Schnieder Automation Precision Flow™ Sierra Instruments, Inc.
Nylatch® Hartwell-Dzus, Inc. ProHoodTM TSI, Inc.
Open I/O® Easton Controls, Inc. Smart InterfaceTM Ientek Co., Ltd.
Misc.

479 VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

Large Instructions 9/12/06 1:42 PM Page 1

This file was created for easy navigation of the Dwyer Instruments 2007 catalog using bookmarks and direct links.

For easiest navigation, use the “Bookmark” option on this pdf file.

• Click the “Bookmark” tab on the left to view all sections and models within those sections.

• For easiest navigation, open each main section using the arrow pointer (Pressure, Flow, etc.), then open
the type of product you are interested in (Gages, Manometers).

• Next, position your mouse over the product you want and click the name. You will go directly to that
page.

Keep the bookmarks open for easiest navigation within the document.

Specific product links have been created on the “Index” pages, “Table of Contents” pages and the “New
Product” pages only. With the hand tool, simply roll over any page number you want and click.

Direct web links have also been applied to websites on the front cover and the “How to Order” page. With your
web browser open, open the “Bookmark” tab, then go to either page. Simply click on the website you wish to
visit.